iiV'iV

*■*

"*^ v . Ufew^

y 4tf+*t£.

v/ ^*<

< r

MH

.» ~v

V* >

., a*

f .*

>«L*

r

^v*

•4 V/S

t/ -- J

*#\*

'' ■•**r;- -V

'•Vr

~*v

iy<j * *. *

1: -J^k

*<:-,»

Journal of toe

Ropal microscopical Society

CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

AND
A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ZOOLOG-^2" J^JSTID BOTANY
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia)

MICROSCOPY, cScc.

EDITED BY
R. G. HEBB, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P.

WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND

J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A. F.R.S.E. A. N. DISNEY, M.A. B.Sc.

Regius Professor of Natural History hi the
University of Aberdeen

FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY

A. B. RENDLE, M.A. D.Sc. P.R.S. F.L.S.

Keeper, Department of Botany, British Museum

HAROLD MOORE, B.Sc. G. H. K. MACALISTER, M.A. M.D. (Cantab.)

Woolwich Arsenal Assistant Bacteriologist Lister Institute

Minimis partibus, per totum Naturae campum, certitude- omnis innititur
quas qui fugit pariter Naturam fugit. — Linnatis.

FO R THE TEAR
1911

TO BE OBTAINED AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS

20 HANOVER SQUARE, LONDON, W.

of Messrs. WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 Henrietta Street, London, W.C.
and ok Messrs. DULAU & CO., 37 Soho Square, London, W.

Extra and informal Meetings are held on the 1st and 4th
Wednesday evenings of the month. These Meetings are devoted
to : — (1) Biology, Bacteriology, and Histology ; (2) Microscopical
Optics and Microsope Construction.

2 ft.

THE

ogat IJtkpscapal

Established in 1839. Incorporated by Eoyal Charter in 1866.

The Society was established for the promotion of Microscopical and
Biological Science by the communication, discussion, and publication of observa-
tions and discoveries relating to (1) improvements in the construction and
mode of application of the Microscope, or (2) Biological or other subjects of
Microscopical Besearcb.

It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-officio Fellows of either sex.

Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Becommendation
signed by three Ordinary Fellows, setting forth the names, residence, and
description of the Candidate, of whom the first proposer must have personal
knowledge. The certificate is read at two General Meetings, and the Candidate
balloted for at the second Meeting.

The Admission Fee is 21. 2s. ; and the Annual Subscription 21. 2s., pay-
able on election, and subsequently in advance on 1st January annually. The
Annual Subscriptions may be compounded for at any time for 31/. 10s. Fellows
elected at a meeting subsequent to that in February are only called upon for
a proportionate part of the first year's subscription. The annual Subscrip-
tion of Fellows permanently residing abroad is 1/. lis. 6<i. or a reduction of
one-fourth.

Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of persons eminent in
Microscopical or Biological Science, are elected on the recommendation of five
Ordinary Fellows and the approval of the Council.

Ex-officio Fellows (limited to 100), consisting of the Bresidents for the
time being of any Societies having objects in whole or in part similar to those of
the Society, are elected on the recommendation of ten Ordinary Fellows and the
approval of the Council.

The Council, in whom the management of the property and affairs of
the Society is vested, is elected annually, and is composed of the Bresident,
four Vice-Bresidents, Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Ordinary
Fellows.

The Meetings are held on the third Wednesday in each month, from
October to June, at 20 Hanover Square, W. (commencing at 8 p.m.). Visitors
are admitted by the introduction of Fellows. (See preceding page.)

The Journal, containing the Transactions and Broceedings of the.
Society, and a Summary of Current Besearches relating to Zoology and Botany
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, &c, is published
bi-monthly, and is forwarded post-free to all Ordinary and Ex-officio Fellows
residing in countries within the Bostal Union.

The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of Objects,
is open for the use of Fellows daily (except Saturdays), from 10 a.m. to 5 p.m.
It is closed for four weeks during August and September.

Forms of proposal far Fellowship, and any further information, may be obtained by
application to the Secretaries, or Assistant-Secretary, at the Library of the Society,
20 Hanover Square, W.

a 2

|)airxm

HIS MAJESTY THE KING.

^.1 a st-'jp residents.

Elected

•Sir Richard Owen, K.C.B. D.C.L. M.D. LL.D. F.R.S. 1840-1

•John Lindley, Ph.D. F.R.S 1842-3

•Thomas Bell, F.R.S 1844-5

* James Scott Bowerbank, LL.D. F.R.S 1S46-7

•George Busk, F.R.S 1848-9

*Arthur Farre, M.D. F.R.S 1850-1

•George Jackson, M.R.C.S 1852-3

•William Benjamin Carpenter, C.B. M.D. LL.D. F.R.S. 1854-5

"George Shadbolt 1856-7

•Edwin Lankester, M.D. LL.D. F.R.S 1858-9

*John Thomas Quekett, F.R.S 1860

•Robert James Farrants, F.R.C.S 1861-2

•Charles Brooke, M.A. F.R.S 1863-4

* J ames Glaisher, F.R.S 1865-6-7-8

•Rev. Joseph Bancroft Reade, M.A. F.R.S 1869-70

*William Kitchen Parker, F.R.S 1871-2

*Charles Brooke, M.A. F.R.S 1873-4

•Henry Clifton Sorby, LL.D. F.R.S 1375-6-7

•Henry James Slack, F.G.S 1878

•Lionel S. Beale, M.B. F.R.C.P. F.R.S 1879-80

•Peter Martin Duncan, M.B. F.R.S 1881-2-3

•Rev. William Hy. Dallinger, M.A. LL.D. F.R.S. 1884-5-6-7
•Charles Thos. Hudson, M.A. LL.D. (Cantab.), F.R.S. 1888-9-90

Robert Braithwaite, M.D. M.R.C.S 1891-2

Albert D. Michael, F.L.S 1893-4-5-6

Edward Milles Nelson 1897-8-9

William Carruthers, F.R.S. F.L.S. F.G.S 1900-1

Henry Woodward, LL.D. F.R.S. F.G.S. F.Z.S 1902-3

Dukinfield Hy. Scott, M.A. Ph.D. LL.D. F.R.S. F.L.S. 1904-5-6
The Right Hon. Lord Avebury, P.C. D.C.L. LL.D.

F.R.S., etc 1907-8

Sir Edwin Ray Lankester, K.C.B. M.A. LL.D. F.R.S.

F.L.S. F.Z.S 1909

J. Arthur Thomson, M.A. F.R.S.E 1910

* Deceased.

COUNCIL.

Elected 19th January, 1911.

^jresiuent.
Henry George Plbdier, F.R.S. F.L.S. F.Z.S.

l)ire-|1rcstucrits.
*A. N. Disney, M.A. B.Sc.
R. G. Hebb, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P.
E. Heron-Allen, F.L.S. F.Z.S. F.R.Met.Soc.

J. Arthur Thomson, M.A. F.R.S.E., Regius Professor of Natural
History in the University of Aberdeen.

Cn a surer.

Wynne E. Baxter, J.P. D.L. F.G.S. F.R.G.S.

&tttttlXXU&.
J. W. H. Eyre, M.D. F.R.S.E.
*F. Shillington Scales, M.A. M.B. B.C.(Oantab.)

(Drumarn 11 embers of Council.

F. W. Watson Baker.
J. E. Barnard.
*Frederic J. Cheshire.
Chas. Lees Curties.

C. F. Hill.

John Hopkinson, F.L.S. F.G.S. F.Z.S.

P. E. Radley.
*Julius Rheinberg.
*Charles F. Rousselet.

D. J. Scourfield, F.Z.S.

E. J. Spitta, L.R.C.P.(Lond.), M.R.C.S.(Eng.).
Sir Almroth E. Wright, M.D. D.Sc. F.R.S.

* Members of the Publication Committee.

LIBRARIAN.

Percy E. Radley.

CURATORS.

Charles F. Rousselet.

F. Shillington Scales, M.A. M.B. B.C.(Cantab.)

assistant secretary.
F. A. Parsons.

CONTENTS.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

PAGE

I. — Some African Rotifers : Bdelloida of Tropical Africa. By J. Murray,

F.R.S.E. F.Z.S. (Plates I., II.) 1

II. — A Simple Method of Obtaining Instantaneous Photomicrographs. By

J. Edwin Barnard. (Fig. 1) 19

III. — On the Use of a Metallic Electric Arc in Photomicrography. By

J. Edwin Barnard 21

IV. — Aerator Suitable for Laboratory Aquaria. By F. J. Gemmill, M.A.

D.Sc. M.D. (Fig. 2) . .. .: .. .. 24

V. — Adaptation of Ordinary Paraffin Baths for Vacuum Embedding. By

F. J. Gemmill, M.A. D.Sc. M.D. (Fig. 3) 26

VI. — The President's Address : The Determination of Sex. By J. Arthur

Thomson, M.A 141

VII. — On the Measurement of Grayson's New Ten-Band Plate. By A. A. C.

Eliot Merlin 160

VIII. — Australian Rotifera : Collected by the Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,

1909. By J. Murray, F.R.S.E. (Plates IV, V.) 164

IX. — Anomalies in Objective Screw Threads. By F. W. Watson Baker.

(Fig. 24) 175

X. — Adams's " Variable " and the Evolution of the Modern Microscope. By

Edward M. Nelson (Figs. 25-30) 178

XI. — Canadian Rotifera : Collected by the Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,

1909. By J. Murray, F.R.S.E. (Plates VI.-VIII.) 285

XII. — On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the Shore-sands of Selsey Bill,
Sussex. — VII. Supplement (Addenda et Corrigenda). By Edward
Heron-Allen, F.L.S. F.R.M.S., and Arthur Earland, F.R.M.S. (Plates
IX.-XIII.) 298

XIII. — Rotifera of some Pacific Islands : Collected by the Shackleton Antarctic

Expedition, 1909. By James Murray, F.R.S.E. (Plates XIV., XV.) 429

XIV. — On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the Shore-sands of Selsey Bill,
Sussex. — VIII. Tabular List of Species and Localities. By Edward
Heron-Allen, F.L.S. F.R.M.S., and Arthur Earland, F.R.M.S 436

XV. — A Report on the Grayson's Rulings presented by Mr. C. Beck to the

Royal Microscopical Society. By E. J. Spitta 449

XVI. — On some New Objectives and Eye-pieces by R. Winkel, of Gottingen.

By Edward M . Nelson 451

XVII. — Rotifera of New Zealand : Collected bv the Shackleton Antarctic Ex-
pedition, 1907-9. By James Murray, F.R.S.E. (Plates XVI., XVII.) 573

XVIII. — South African Rotifera: Collected by the Shackleton Antarctic Ex-
pedition, 1907. By James Murray, F.R.S.E. (Plate XVI.) .. .. 5S4

Vlil CONTENTS.

PAGE

XIX.— Apparatus for Photomicrography with the Microscope standing in any
Position, especially in Inclined Position, Liy Domingo de Orueta,
F.R.M.S. (Figs. 70, 71) 588

XX.— A Method of Disintegrating Bacteria and other Organic Cells. By J.

Edwin Barnard, F.R.M.S. (Plate XVDX and Figs. 72, 73) .. .. 592

XXI. — The Re-appearance of the Nucleolus in Mitosis. By E. J. Sheppard.

( Plate XIX.) 598

XXII. — I. On the Structure of Scales from Thermobia domestica (Packard).
ii. Description of a Model Producing an Optical Effect similar to the
Cuneate Markings on Insect Scales. By James Strachan. (Plate
XXIV.) 717

XXIII. — Instantaneous Exposure in Photomicrography. By "Walter Bagshaw.

F.R.M.S. .. 721

XXIV. — The Structural Detail of Coscinodiscus asteromphalus. By T. W.

Butcher, M.B. CM. F.R.M.S. (Plates XXV.-XXVII.) 722

XXV.— New British Enchyirreids. By The Rev. Hilderic Friend, F.L.S. F.R.M.S.

(Plate XXVIII.) , 730

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

Relating to Zoology and Botany (principally Invertebrata and
Cbyptogamia), Microscopy, &c, including Original Communications
from Fellows and Others.* 29, 185, 344, 453, 603, 737

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.

a. Embryology-

Guyer, M. F. — Accessory Chromosomes in Man 29

Molle, J. van — Mammalian Spermatozoon 30

Davenport, Gertrude C, & Charles B. — Inheritance of Skin-pigmentation in

Man 30

Morse, Max — Sterility 30

Mironescu, T. — Islands of Langerhans in the Human Embryo 31

Kuntz, A. — Development of the Sympathetic Nervous System in Mammals . . .. 31

„ Development of the Sympathetic Nervous System in Birds 32

O'Donoghue, Chas. H. — Duplicity in Chick Embryos 33

Pearl, R., & F. M. Surface — Inheritance in Hybrid Poultry 34

„ „ „ Inheritance of Colour-pattern in Hybrid Poultry .. 34

Schmalhausen, J. J. — Development of Limbs in Salamandrella kayserlingii .. .. 35

Hefford, A. E. — Toleostean Ova and Larvae 35

Thomson, J. Arthur — The President's Address : The Determination of Sex .. .. 141

Hektwig, O. — Influence of Radium Rays on Ova. and Sperms 185

Rlckert, J. — Polyspermy 185

Gregoire, Victor — Unity af Meiotic Process in Plants and Animals 186

< rEDDES, A. ( '. — Abnormal Bone-growth in Absence of Functioning Testes .. .. 186
Tschiuwinsky, N. — Influence of Malnutrition and Castration on Development of

Sheep's Skeleton 186

Staoh, J. — Development of Babbit's Teeth 186

Bruni. A. C — Development of Vertebral Column in Iteptiles and Birds 186

* In order to make the Contents complete, the papers printed in the ' Transactions '
and the Notes printed in the 'Proceedings' are entered here.

CONTENTS. IX

PAGE

Reese, Albert M. — Development of Enteron in American Alligator 187

Wunderer, Hans — Development of Alpine Salamander 187

Lissitsky, Eugen — Production of Supernumerary Limbs in Amphibians 187

Reis, Caroline — Development of Teleosts .. .. 187

Bolk, L. — Development of Pigment-cells in Teleostean Embryos 187

McIlroy, A. Louise — Oogenesis in Mammals 344

Sieglbauee, F. — Development of the Extremities in Birds 345

Rosenberg, F. T. — Development of the Limbs in Grebes 345

Mietens, H. — Origin of White Blood-corpuscles and Spleen in Bufo vulgaris .. 346
Stromsten, Frank A. — Structure and Development of Posterior Lymph-hearts of

Turtles 346

Goodale, H. W. — Blastopore Closure in Amphibia 347

Brownlee, J. — Inheritance of Complex Growth-forms 347

Regaud, Cl., & Th. Nogier — Castration by X-rays 347

Th. Nogier & Cl. Regaud— Sterilization by X-rays 347

Mazzetti, L. — Interstitial Testicular Cells and Secondary Sex Characters .. . . 348

Smith, Geoffrey — Injection of Testis-extract into Hens 348

Warren, Ernest — Mammalian Sports 348

Punnett, R. C. — Mendelism 453

Plate, L. — Heredity and Evolution 453

Bataillon, E. — Experimentally Induced Parthenogenesis in Toad 454

„ Artificial Parthenogenesis of Toad's Egg 454

„ „ Artificial Parthenogenesis in Toad 454

Dehorne, A. — Number of Chromosomes in Parthenogenetically produced Larvse of

the Frog 454

Romieu, M. — Plasmic Reduction in Spermatogenesis 454

Doncaster, L., & F. H. A. Marshall — Effects of One-sided Ovariotomy on Sex of

Offspring 454

Hickson, Sydney J. — Origin of Sex 454

Iwanoff, E. — Fertility of Hybrids of American and European Bison 455

Chappelier, A. — State of Ovary in Hybrids of Goldfinch and Canary 455

Bonhote, J. Lewis — Webfoot Character in Pigeons 455

Gaskell, J. F. — Action of X-rays on Developing Chick 455

Stromsten, F. A. — Lymph-hearts of Turtles 455

Goodrich, E. S. — Occipital Region of Vrodela 456

Jorgensen, Max — Ovarian Ovum of Proteus 456

Kusch akewitsch. Sergius — Development of Gonads in Frog 456

Marcus, Harry — Development of Head in Hypogeophis 456

Makuschok, M. — Development and Evolution of Lungs 457

Arldt, Th. — Evolution-centres 457

Schaffer, J. — Post-natal Remains of the Notochord in Mammals 603

Athias, M. — Maturation of the Mammalian Ovum 603

Sobotta, J. — Early Development of White Mouse 603

Bluntschli, H. — Teeth of Two Dentitions in a Dermoid Cyst 604

Poll, Heinrich — Ovary in Hybrid Birds 604

Smith, Geoffrey — Fluctuations in Growth of Fold's Comb 604

Kunkel, B. VV. — Development of Turtle Skull 605

Kuntz, A. — Sympathetic Nervous System in Turtles 605

„ ,, Sympathetic Nervous System in Fishes 606

Kopsch, Fr.— Early Development of Trout 607

Heronimus, Ch. — Development of Pectoral Fin in Amia 607

Agar, W. E. — Spermatogenesis of Lepidosiren 608

Broesike, G. — Nature of Seminal Fluid in Man 608

Daniel, J. Frank— Gestation in White Mice 737

Bataillon, E. — Factors of Traumatic Parthenogenesis 737

Berger, A. — Alleged Lactation of Male Lepusbairdii 737

Bonhote, J. Lewis, & F. W. Sm alley — Colour Inheritance in Pigeons 738

Peebles, Florence — Interchange of Limbs of Chick by Transplantation 738

Bianco, Salvatore Lo — Influence of Environment on Reproductive Period .. .. 738

Wintrebert, P. — Involution of Tail in Alytes obstetricans 738

Dakin, W. J. — Physiology of Fish-eggs and Larvse 738

Williamson, H. Chas. — Retarding Development of Herring's Eggs 739

X CONTENTS.

PAGE

WAGNER, K. — Colouring of Trout 739

Geoboi, W. — Origin of Notochord Epithelium 740

Sunier, A. L. J. — Development of Myotomes 740

Mazzktti, L. — Hole of Interstitial Testicular Cells 740

6. Histolog-y.

Hirschler, J. — Interstitial Tissue of Striped Muscle 35

Mkncl, E. — Direct Division of Red Blood Corpuscles in Scorpxna 35

Toyofuku, Tomaki — Cartilage in Thymus of Rat 35

Curtis, M. — Ligaments of Oviduct of Domestic Fowl 35

Burrows, Montrose T., & others — Culture of Tissues outside the Organism .. 13S

Dantschakofp. Wera — Blood -formation in Grass Snake 188

Patella, Vincenzo — Endothelial Genesis of Leucocytes 188

( auwenberghe, A. van — Giant-cells of Mole 's Placenta 188

Schaffer, Joseph — Chordoid Tissue 188

Kolmer, Walthek — Eye of Pteropus 189

Loewenthal, N. — Thread-like Structures in Epidermic Cells of Tadpoles .. .. 189

Samssoncw, N., & F. Meves — Threads and Granules in the Cytoplasm 189

Rosenstadt, B. — Protoplasmic Fibres in Epidermic Cells 189

Kulmer, W. — Supporting Elements in Sensory Epithelium 189

Faure-Fremiet, M. E. — Continuity of Mitochondria through many Generations of

Cells 190

Karl, Joseph — Reticular Apparatus in Cells of Corpus Luteum 190

Cilimbaris, P. A. — Pigment-cells in Sheep's Cornea 190

Kohn, A. — Pigment in the Human Neurohypophysis 190

Zarnik, B.— Kidney of Gecko 190

Schultze, Oskar — Direct Connexion between Muscle-fibrih and Tendon-fibrils .. 348

Loginoff, \V.|J. — Tracheal Epithelium in Domestic Mammals 349

Mollier, S. — Structure of Spleen Capillaries 349

Oppel. Albert — New kind of Cell in Br unner's Glands 349

Dubreuil, G. — Mitochondria of Adipose Cells 349

Schultze, Oskar — Origin of Granules in Gland Cells 349

Jolly, J. — Mitotic Figures in Isolated Tissues 349

Pettit, A. — Mitosis in Grafted Tissue 350

Magitat, A. — Survival of Excised Cornea 350

Erhabd, H. — Trophospongia and Chrcmidia .. 457

Schneider, Karl ( amillo — Study of Chromosomes in Salamander 457

Howard, W. T.— Nuclear Budding in Tumor-cells 458

Barbieri, N. A. — Physical Nature of Neuroplasm 458

Retterer, E., & A. Lelievre — Union of Muscle-fibre and Tendinous-fibre .. 458

Jolly, J. — Involution of Bursa Fabricii 458

Firket, Jean — Epidermic Fibrils in Chick 458

Fedele, M. — Innervation of Heart in Reptiles and Batrachians 458

Foot, J. S. — Minute Structure of Femoral Bones 608

Retteker, E., & Aug. Lelievre— Red Blood Corpuscles of Mammals 609

Zimmermann, K. W. — Epithelial Cells of Mammalian Kidney 609

Retterer, E., & Aug. Lelievre — Tendons of Whig and Leg in Bats 609

Schaxel, Julius — Cytoplasm, Chondriosomes, and Chromidia 609

Edin<;er. L. — Path of Hypophysis-secretio 610

Vibchow, Hans — Conjuctival Epithelium in Man 610

Ditlevsen, Christian — Nuclear Budding in Corneus Epithelium 610

Fritsch, Gustav— Retina of Birds 610

Jacobson, L. — Grouping of Nerve-cells in Spinal Cord of Tench 610

^chiefferdecker, P.— Muscles of Lamprey till

Jolly, J. — Survival of Isolated Leucocytes 611

Neumann, E.— Spindle-cells of Amphibian Blood 740

Fritsch, Gustav — Eye of Pteropus 740

Grynfeltt, E. — Eye of Protopterus 741

Sala, Luigi — Distribution of the Muscle-fibres in Heart of Fislies 741

Sanzo, L. — Cutaneous Pa pillx in Gobius 741

CONTENTS. XI

General.

Douville, Henri — Evolution of Man 36

Trouessart, E. L. — European Mammals ., 36

Miller, Gerritt S. — Six New European Mammals 36

TiANKESTER, E. Ray — Atlas of the Okapi .. .. 36

Danois, E. — Spermaceti-organ of Kogia breviceps > .. 37

Perkins, G. H. — Fossil Cetacea 37

Stapeley, Walter — Guttural Pouches of Horse 37

Hofherr, Otto — Relative Immunity of Birds to Anthrax 37

Guerin-Ganivet, J. — Grass Snake in the Sea 37

Leger, Louis — Muddy Taste in Fresh-water Fishes 37

Cockerell, T. D. A. — Scales of Fishes 38

Chaine, J. — Variations in Ureters of Weever 38

Fowler, H. W. — Variation of Species of Notropis 38

Haejipel, O. — Growth of Salmo hucho 38

Juday, Chancey — Biological Stations 38

Thomson. J. Arthur — Outlines of Zoology 39

IIii.zhei.mer, M. — Atavism 191

Clark, Austin Hobart — Interesting Structural Analogy 191

Leduc, Stephane — Osmotic Growths .. 191

Kaudern, W. — Male Genital Organs in Inseclivora and Lemuridx 191

True, Frederick W. — Beaked Whales 192

Sterling, S. — Musculature of Pectoral Girdle and Flipper in Cetacea 192

Gaupp, E. — Homology of Mammalian Lachrymal .. 192

Bardeleben, Karl von— Right- and Left-handedness 192

Versluys, J. — Birds and Deinosaurs 192

Lelievre, A., & E. Retterer — Ileal Csecum of Birds 192

Beebe, C. W. — Account of the Boatzin 193

Billard, G., & E. Maublant — Immunity to Viper Venom 193

Stehli, Georg — Evolution of Reptilian Scales 193

Okajima, K.— Ear of Urodela 193

Fischer, H.— Total 'Closure of Gut in Healthy Frog 193

Popta, C. M. L. — Function of Swim-bladder 19 +

Dammermann, K. W .—Structure and Function of the Saccus vasculosus in Fishes 194

Knauer, K. — Ventral Musculature of Fishes 19-4

Elmhirst, Richard— Yawning in Fishes 194

Derjugin, K. — Pectoral Girdle and Fins of Teleosteans 195

Stead, David G.— Fisheries of New South Wales 195

Colomina, A. de — Large Sun-fish 195

Spillman, L., & L. Bruntz — Elimination by Leucocytes 195

Daday, E. von — Fresh-water Microfauna of German East Africa 195

Mayer, A. G. — Converse Relation between Ciliary and N euro-muscular Movements 350

Pocock, R. I. — Cutaneous Scent-glands of Ruminants 351

Ewart, J. L'ossar — Descent of Cattle .. 351

Danvis, Ed. — Head of Kogia Breviceps 351

West, James A. — Food of Shrew-mole 352

Wood, F. E. — Habits of Shretv-mole 352

Tracey. H. C— Directive Markings of Passerine Birds . •• 352

Magnan & De la Riboisiere — Size of Spleen in Birds 352

Trawinski, A.— Penis of Drake and Gander :!:,3

Grinnell, Joseph — Linnet of Hawaiian Islands 353

Wilson, E. A.— Changes of Plumage in Red Grouse 353

Annandale, N. — New Burmese Frog 353

Schlesinger, G. — Electric Eels 354

Fage, Louis— Study of Specie* of Gadus 354

Regan, C. Tate — Synopsis of Lampreys 354

McDermott, F. Alex. — Photogenic Function in Marine Organisms 355

Hess, C. — Sense of Light in Animals 355

Vialleton, L. — Morphology of the Vertebrates 459

Livon, Ch., & Peyron — Pigmentation of the Nervous Lobe of the Hypophysis .. 459

Lonnberg, Einar — Pelvic Bones of some Cetacea 459

Xll CONTENTS.

TAGE

Km ii.sky, D. — Natural Immunity of White Mice to Trypanosoma lewisi 459

Legendre, R., & H. Pieron — I'hysiology of Sleep 459

Jolly, J. — Hiemapoietic Function of Spleen in Embryo Bird 160

„ Function of Bursa lrabricii 460

Streckek, John K., jun. — Notes on the Robber Frog 460

Dehaut. E. G. — Heart of Lungless Urodela 460

Stromer, Ernst — Fossil Lepidosirenidx 460

Frisch, Karl von — Colour-change in Fishes 460

Tracy, II. C. — Swim-bladder of Teleosts 461

Chambers, Helen, & S. Russ — Action of Radium Radiations on Blood 'ill

Bouchard, Ch. — Sleeping and Waking 611

Truschel — Sense of Direction in Blind 612

Bartels, Paul — Flica semilunaris in Hereros and Hottentots 612

Gaupp, E. — Vertebrate Lower Jaw 612

Allan, Glover M. — Mammals of West Indies 612

Curl, H. C. — Digestive System of Hornbill 612

Spdlski, B. — New Species of Odontopteryx , 613

Juillet, A. — Air-sacs in Birds 613

Delezenne, C, & S. Ledebt — Snake-poison and Yolk of Egg 613

Smallwood, W. M., & C. G. Rogers — Effects of Starvation on Necturus maculatus 613

Kennel, Pierre — Corpora adiposa of Amphibians 613

Wintrebert, P. — Lateral Line System in Tadpoles of Alytes and Rana 614

Wolff, Gustav — Regeneration in Newts 614

Franz, V. — Function of Cerebellum in Fishes 614

Unna, P. G. — Reduction and Oxidation in Animal Tissues 614

Bethe, Albrecht — Equilibration in Aquatic Animals 614

Herdman, W. A. — Summer Plankton of West of Scotland and Irish Sea .. .. 614

Heinis, Fr. — Moss- fauna of Central America 615

Petersen, C. G. Joh., & P. Boysen Jensen — Animal Life of Sea-bottom .. .. 741

Manderh, N. — Validity of some Forms of Mimicry 741

Toldt, K. — Different kinds of Hair 71-

Gaupp, E. — Composition of the Lower Jaw .. .. 742

Trouessart, E. L. — Origin of Domestic Dog 743

Schmaltz, R. — Reproductive Organs of Domestic Animals 743

Virchow, Hans — Mobility of Penguin's Vertebral Column 743

Thomson, A. Landsborough — Migration of Birds 743

Curtis, Maynie R. — Weighing Parts of Eggs 744

Phisalix, Marie — Bite of Heloderma 744

Arthis, M , & B. Stawska — Toxins and Antitoxins 744

Kennel, P. — Corpora Adiposa of Frog 744

Reymond, C. du Bois — Tadpoles with strongly developed Lips 745

Oshima, Hiroshi — Luminous Organs in Fishes 745

"Williamson, H. Chas. — Ichthyological Notes 746

Elmhirst, Richard — Ambi-coloured Flatfish 746

Tunicata.

Daumezon, G. — Tenacity of Life in Ciona intestinalis 461

INVEETEBRATA.

Daday, E. v. — Fresh-water Microfauna from German East Africa 39

Broch, Hjalmar — Plankton of Spitzbergen 39

Herdman, W. A. — Scottish and Irish Plankton 355

Daday, E. von — Micro-fauna of the Nile 355

Mollusca.

Nobre, A. — Molluscs of Portuguese East Africa 355

Stelfox, A. W. — Molluscs of Ireland 356

Colgan, Nathaniel — Marine Molluscs of Clare Island 461

Horwood, A. R. — Layers of the Molluscan Shell 746

CONTENTS. XU1

a- Cephalopoda-

PAGK

Hoyle, W. E.— Genera of Dibranchiate Cephalopoda l^fa

WiJLKEB, G. — Japanese Cephalopods ". ]•■

Berry, S. Stillman — New Cephalopods from Hawaiian Islands /4b

y- Gastropoda.

Odhner, Nils — Genus Cumanotus 39

Vessichelli, N. — Structure of Phylliroe bucephala 39

Bergh, R. — Opisthobranchs of South Africa 39

Trojan, E. — Glands and Luminescence of P kyllirhoe 196

Born, Ernst — Minute Structure of PhyUirhoe bucephala 196

Rolle, H. — Abnormal Shells of Achatina < 196

Dreyer, Thos. F. — Blood-vessels and Nerves of JEolididie and Tritoniadas .. .. 196

Germain, L. — Cavernicolous Gastropods 356

Wood, Elvira — Phytogeny of Cerithiidx 356

Lang, Arnold — Beating of the Heart in Hibernating Snail 462

Lee, A. Bolles — Reduction in the Spermatogenesis of the Snail 462

Quintaret, G. — Abnormality in Snail 462

Reed, F. R. Cowper — New Fossil Chiton from Gir van 615

Perrier, Remy. & Henri Fischer — Mantle-cavity and Pallial Organs of Bulleidse 747

Spiro, J. — Alimentary Canal of Helix pomatia 747

Petersen, C. G. Joh. — Damage to Plaice-fishing by Whelks 747

5. Lamellibranchiata.

Dakin, W. J. — Visceral Ganglion of Pecten 40

Fabre-Domergue — Cleansing Oysters r-> .. 40

„ „ Feeding Habits of Oysters 40

Drew, G. H., & W. De Morgan — Reaction of Tissues of Pecten to Implantation of

Foreign Bodies 356

Tur, Jan — Influence of Radium on the Development of Pholas Candida 462

Israel, W. — Notes on Fresh-water Mussels 462

Southwell, T. — Avicula and Gorgonid Association 463

Poyarkoff, E. — Incubation of Cyclas Embryos .. 463

Kostanecki, K.— Artificial Parthenogenesis in Mactra 615

Ewald, W. F. — Contraction of Adductors in Fresh-water Mussels 616

Arthropoda.

a. Insecta.

Lovell, John H. — Colour-sense of Hive-bee 40

Bugnion, E., & N. Popoff — Scelioiiid Parasite of Spider's Eggs 41

Holste, Georg — Nervous System of Dytiscus marginalis 41

Silvestri, F. — New Termitophilous Staphylinid 41

Kirchhoffer, O. — Eye of Dermestes 41

Deegener — hitestinal Secretion in Dytiscus 41

Lea, Arthur M. — Beetles in Ants' Nests 42

Meijere, J. C. H. de, & Hj. Jensen — Insects in Nepenthes Pitchers 42

Perez, Ch. — Beginning of Muscular Phagocytosis in Larval Muscids 42

„ Metamorphosis of Intestinal Musculature in Muscid Larvse 42

Brindley, H. H. — Habits of Procession Caterpillar 42

Cook, Margaret Harris — Spermatogenesis in Lepidoptera 43

Dampf, Alfons — New Flea from Jerboa 43

Russ, E. L. — Head-glands of Caddis-worms 44

Carpenter, George H. — Injurious Insects in Ireland 44

Marchal, Paul — Notes on Chermes pin i 44

Neeracher, Ferdinand — Insects of the Rhine 197

Zander, Enoch, & F. Stellwaag — Studies on Bees 197

XIV CONTENTS.

PAGE

Metzer, Christian — Junction of Fore-gut and Mid-gut in Hive-bee 1 97

Friese, II., & F. von Wagner— Species and Varieties of Humble-bees 197

Mast, S. O. — Blow-fly Lame and Gratify 198

Perez. C. — Metamorphosis of Blow-fly 198

Roubaud, E. — Oviparity and Viviparity in Dung-fly I 'AS

Torne, Oskar — Suctorial Di*ks of Male Dytiscids 198

Gunthert, Thomas — Oogenesis in Dytiscid as 198

Deibel, Johannes — Respiration in Donacia and Macro-plea 198

Jusbaschjanz, Simeon — Post-embryonic Development of Stratiomydas 199

Bottgee, Otto — Brain of Lepisma , 199

Hagemann, J. — Study of Corixa 199

Pocock, R. I. — Mimicry of Ant by Larval Mantis 356

Wheeler, W. M. — North American Species of Camponatus 357

Poiovici-Baznosanu, A. — Study of Sphegidm 357

Doncaster, L. — Spermatogenesis iii Currant-moth 357

Paiva, C. A. — Carnivorous M.squito Larvae, 358

Crosby, C. K. — Apple Red Bugs .. . . 358

Hooper, David — Secretion of Ghost Bug 358

Andrews, E. A., & A. R. Middleton — Rhythms in Termite Communities .. . . 463

Mercier, Yj— Insects as Disseminators of Enjot 463

Schiberg, A. — Dissemination of Disease by Stomxys calcitrans 463

Leon, N. — Roumanian Mosquitos 463

Kieffer, J. J. — East Indian Chi ronomidai 463

Popoff, M. — Chromidia in Cells of Museidas 464

Purtier, P. — Digestion in Wood-eating Caterpillars 464

Conte, A., & C. Vaney — Acephalous Lepidoptera 464

Schwangart — Grape Sloths _ .. 464

McUermott, F. A., & C. G. Crane — Photogenic Organs of Lampyridas 464

Sasaki, C. — Life-history of Schlechtendalia chinensis 465

Gravely. F. H. — Degenerate Cockroach 465

Neumann, L. G. — Mallophaga from Southern Birds 465

Lewis, R. T. — Larva of Mantispa 465

Krauss, H. A. — Monograph on Embidse 465

Shelford, R. — Blattidse in Amber 465

Handlirsch, Anton — New Palaeozoic hisects 466

Felt, E. P. — Injurious Insects 466

Hollande, A. Ch. — Blood of Insects 616

Sulc, Karel — Symbiosis of Yeasts and, Insects 616

Demoll, R. — Migration of Iris-pigment in Compound Eye 616

Board of Agricultire — Bee Disease 616

- Meek, C F. U. — Spermatogenesis of Stenobothrus viridulus 617

Waterston, J. — New Flea from South Africa 617

Hufnagkl, A. — Fatty Body during Metamorphosis 618

Ritter, Wolfgang — Flying Apparatus of Blow-fly 618

Summers, Sophia L. M. — Oriental Species of Stomoxys 618

Bezzi, M. — Gave Diptera 618

Llhmann, N., & ('.Vaney — Occurrence of Ox-warbles 619

Alcock, A. — Classification of Culicidas 619

Marchal, Paul — Parasites of Olive-fly 619

Bounoure, L. — Digestive Ferments of Beetles 619

Bugnion, E. — Buccal Parts of a Ceylonese Staphylinid 619

Jeannel, R. — Revision of Bathysciinx 620

Lesne, Pierre — Nutritive Habits of Bostrychidie *'.^0

Zacher, Fr. — Position and Classification of Protodermaptera 620

Shoebotham, J. W. — New Collembola in England 620

Bolton, H. — Insect Remains from South Wales Coalfield 620

Strachan, James — 1. On the Structure of Scales from Thermobia domestica
(Packard). 2. Description of a Model Producing an Optical Effect similar

to the Cunate Markings on Insect Scales. (Plate XXIV.) 717

Berlese, Antonio — Studies on Injurious Insects 747

Kapzov, Serge — Minute Structure of Cuticle in Insects 747

Verson, E. — Moulting in Silkworms 748

CONTENTS. XV

l'AGE

Lea, Arthur M. — New Stag-beetles 748

Rungius. H. — Alimentary Canal of Dytiscus .. .. 748

Gravely, F. H. — Large Egg Laid by a Beetle 748

Dubois, R. — Fluorescence in Luminous Insects 748

Doncaster, L. — Gametogenesis of Gall-fly 748

Bruce, David, & others — Tabanids and Trypanosomas 749

Ricardo, Gertrude — Revision of Oriental Species of Tabanus 749

Lehmann, N., & C. Vaney — Influence of Weather Conditions on Frequency of

Warbles 749

Brown, J. M. — Respiration and Circulation in Tipula maxima 749

Gravely, F. H. — Mosquito sucked by Midge - 750

Tileyard, R. J. — Experiments with Dragon-fly Larvx 750

Zanarzin, A. — Histological Study of the Innervation of the Heart of Larval Dragon-
fly 750

Bugnion, E., & N. Popofp — Buccal Apparatus of Hemiptera 750

Buffa, Pietro — Study of a Thrips 750

Wesenberg-Lund, C. — Study of Phryganea qrandis 750

Mjorerg, Eric— Studies on Mallophaga and Anoplura 751

@- Myriopoda.

Brolemann, H. W. — Cavernicolous Myriopoda 44

Reinecke, Georg — Study of Polyxenus 199

Baldwin, W. — British Carboniferous Myriopods 200

Hirst, S. — New Termitophilous Millipede 621

Chalande, Jules — Doubling of Segments in Myriopods 621

Verhoeff, Karl W. — Studies on Millipedes 752

d'Hercclais, J. Kunckel — Habits of Scutigera coleoptrata 752

7- Prototracheata.

Andrews, E. A. — Jamaica Peripatus 466

Brues, Charles T. — New Species of Peripatus from Grenada 752

5. Arachnida.

Comstock, J. H. — Palpi of Male Spiders 44

Neumann, L. G. — Neio Ixodidx 44

Elmassian, M. — Salivary Glands of Ticks 45

Sweet, Georgina — New Species of Argas 45

Cole, Leon J. — Pacific Pycnogonids 45

,, „ Notes on Endeis spinosus 45

Petrunkevitch, A. — Circulatory System of Lycosa carolinensis 200

Reuter, Enzio — Mites and\Tumours 200

Soar, Charles D. — Hydrachnids of East African Lakes 200

Elmhirst, Richard — Pycnogonids of Clyde Area 200

Bugnion, E. — Pentastomum of Python 200

Freund, Ludwig — Ear Mite of Cattle 359

Kew, H. Wallis — False Scorpions of British Isles 359

Johnston, E. A. — New Species of Linguatula 359

Murray, James — Antarctic and other Tardigrada 359

Ludaiila & Wladimir Schimkewitsch — Development of Tetrapneumones .. .. 466

PocoCK, R. I. — Carboniferous Arachnida 467

Schtschelkanowzew, J. P. — Male Reproductive Organs of Chelifer and Chernes .. 467

Carpenter, G. H. — Sudanese Pycnogonids 467

Bocvier, E. L. — New Decapod Pycnogonid 467

Shipley, A. E. — New I'entastomid 468

Murray, J ames— Notes on Tardigrada 468

Ludmilla & VV. Schimkewitsch — Development of Ischnocolus 621

Halbert, J. N. — Fresh-ivater Mites of Clare Island 621

xvi CONTENTS.

PAGE

Kew, H. Wallis — Pseudoscorp ions of Clare Inland 621

Theiller, A. — Transmission of Amahebe by Brown Tick 622

Babtabelli, E., & V. Paranhos — Alleged Importance of Demodex in Spreading

Leprosy 622

Henneke, J. — Structure and Hahits of Macrobiotics macronyx 622

Murray, James — Clare Island Water-bears 622

Walcott, Charles D. — Middle Cambrian Merostomata .. 622

Johnston, T. Harvey, & J. Burton Cleland — Pentastomes in Australian Cattle 623

Bonnet, A. — Caverniculous Gamasids 752

Guercio, Giacomo del — Studies on Injurious Mite* 752

Paoll, Guido — Monograph on Tarsonemidie 752

«• Crustacea.

Kemp, S. — Photophore* of Decapod Crustacea 45

Cole, Leon J. — Abnormal Cheliped of Lobster 46

Calman, W. T. — Heterocuma 46

Dees, Eugene Daday de — Monograph of Phyllopoda Anotfraca 46

„ „ „ Neio Antarctic Phyllopod 47

Quidor, A. — Affinities of Philichthydx 47

Calman, W. T. — Parasitic Copepod, from Cephalodiscus 47

Chapman, Frederick — Ostracods from Funafuti 47

Birge, E. A. — Notes on Cladocera .. .. , .. 47

McIntosh, D. C. — Genital Pores in Norway Lobster 201

Racovitza, E. G., & R. Sevastos — Fossil Idoteid 201

Defner, A. — Maxillary Glands of Cirripedes 201

Tollinger. M. Annunziata — Geographical Distribution of Diaptomidx .. ■■ 201

Marsh, C. Dwight — Revision of North American Species of Cyclops 201

Zulueta, Antonie de — Copepods Parasitic on Alcyonarians 202

Tattersall, W. M. — Schizopods from North-east Atlantic Slope 359

Williamson, H. C. — Larval Stages of Decapods . . 468

Weymouth, F. W. — Calif omian Crabs 468

Calman, W. T. — New and Rare Cumacea 468

Beresford, Denis R. Pack, & Nevin H. Foster — Woodlice of Ireland 469

Calman, W. T. — New Carboniferous Crustacean 469

Annandale, N. — Barnacles from Irish Seas 469

Chatton, E., & E. Brkment — Neiv Ascidicolous Copepod 469

Doflein, F. — Behaviour of Prawns 623

Marcus, Kurt— Olfactory Structures in Galatheids 623

Gruvel, A. — Classification of Rock Lobsters 623

Wege, W. — Anatomical and Experimental Study of Asellus aquaticus 623

Gravier, Ch. — Cirripede and other Commensals of Madrepores 624

Andrews, E. A. — Sperm Transfer in certain Decapods 753

Schlegel, C. — Development of Maia squinado 753

Sollaud & Tilho — Palasmo7i niloticus in Lake Tchad 753

Chiltern, Charles — Crustacea of Kermadec Islands 753

Mercier, L., & R. de Drouin de Bouville — Crayfish Plague 753

Chilton, Charles — Dispersal 'of Marine Crustacea by Sliips 754

„ „ Studies on New Zealand Crustaceans 754

Sollaud, E. — Primitive Fresh-uater Prawn 754

Sexton, E. W. — Genus Leptocheirus 754

Richardson, Harriet — New Parasitic Isopod 755

„ „ Spiny Terrestrial Isopod 755

Stewart, F. H. — Development and Minute Structure of Scalpellum and Ibla.. .. 755

Annandale, Nelson — Rhizocephalous Crustacean from Fresh-water 755

Wilson, C. B. — New Parasitic Copepods 755

„ „ North American Ergasilidx 756

„ „ Development of Achtheres 756

Esterly, C. O. — Diurnal Migrations of Calanus finmarchicu* 757

Brady, G. Stewardson — Ostracods from Madeira 757

Wolteeeck, R. — Sex- determination in Daphnids 757

CONTENTS. XV11

Annulata. page

Perez, Ch. — Guticular Warts of Pilargis verrucosa 47

Elwes. E. V. — Littoral Polyckseta of Torqua y 48

Hurwitz, S. H. — Reaction* of Earthworms to Acids 48

Michaelsen, W. — Caucasian Earthworms 48

Martiis, Luigi Cognetti de — Internal Fertilization in Pareudrihts 202

Honig, Josef — Neurochords of Criodrilus 202

Staff, Franz — Development of Criodrilus lacuum .. 202

Ashworth, J. H. — Studies on Arenicolidse 202

„ „ Arenicola loveni 203

Michel, Aug. — Precision of Regeneration in Polynoids 203

Hacklov, L. — Sensilli and Eyes of Medicinal Leech .. .. '.. 203

Ritter-Zahony, Rudolf von — Chxtognatha from Ireland 203

„ „ West Indian Chxtognatha 204

( oventry, A. F. — Theory of Dwarf Males in Myzostoma 204

Southern, R. — Pelagic Polychxts of Irish Seas 360

McIntosh, W. O. — Notes on Polychxts 360

Dershawin, A. — Polychxt from the Delta of the Volga 360

Shearer. Oreswell — Development of Trochophore of Hydroides 360

Sollas, Igerna B.J. — Parasitic Castration of Earthworms 360

Johannson, L. — Extra-enteric Aperture in a Leech 361

Stephenson, J. — Oligochset Commensals in Spongilla carteri 469

„ Bothrion iris 469

Harding, W. A. — New Leech from Egypt 470

Scriban, J. A. — Adipose Cells of Pont obtlella muricat a, 624

Buchanan, Gwynneth, & others — Studies on Australian Earthworms .. .. 624

Bialkowska, Wanda, & /ofia Kulikowska — Nerve-cells of Leech and Earthworms 624

Heinen, Adolph — Nephthyidm and Lycoridm of the North Sea and the Baltic . . 624

Mesnil, F., & M. Caullery — Papillomatous Neo-formati n in an Annelid .. .. 625

Sokolow, Iwan — New Species of Ctenodrilus Q25

Friend, Hilderic, The Rev. — New British Enchytrseids 730

Nanni, Jakob — Structure of Tomopter is 758

Gravier, Ch. — Incubation in Polychxts 758

Arwidsson, Ivar — Irish Maldanidx 75S

Stephenson, J. — Littoral Oligochxta of the Clyde 75S

Nematohelminthes,

Sweet, Georgina — New Nematode in Eye of Queensland Fowl 48

Gilruth, J. A., & others — -Microfilaria in Magpies 48

Buchanan. Gwynneth — Supposed Nematode in Circular Muscle of an Earthworm 4^

Edwards. C. L. — Idiochromosomes in Ascaris 204

Glaue, H. — Comparison of Ascaris felis and A. cam's 2'>5

Hellemans, J. — Strongylus pinguicola 205

Emile-Weil, E., & (t. BiYE— Anti-coagulant Action of Nematode Extract .. .. 2'».">

Uailliet, A., & A. Henry— .48eane78 of Carnivores :-;<;i

Man, J. G. de — Anguilhdidx of the White Slime of Oaks 361

Mathis, C, & M. I.eger — Microfilariae in Tonkin Birds 361

Manuel H. — Iilood-filaria in Horse 47u

LJaillikt, G. — Oxynris in the Appendix vernei for, u is 17)

Goldschmidt, li. — Nervous System of Ascaris 47:1

Boveki, Th. — Potency of Blastomeres in Ascaris 02.")

Berks — Microfilaria from a Fowl 625

Komieu, Maro — Plasmic Reduction in Spermatogenesis of Ascaris megalocephala .. 625

( 1. eland, J. B., & T. H. Johnston — Worm-nests in Australian Cattle 626

Rla.no, It., & L. Cauchemez — New Species of Echinorhynchus 626

Hegt, Noordhoeck J. — New Nematode 759

Hida. S. — Structure of Filar ia bancrofti .. .. 759

Girgolaff, S. S. — Compression Experiments with the Fertilized Ovum of Ascaris

megalocephala 759

Meves. Fk. — Role of Plastcchondria in Fertilization of Ascai is megalocephala . . 759

Brumpt, E. — Nematodes in Deer 760

Dec. 20th, 1911 b

XV1U CONTENTS.

Platyhelminthes.

PAGE

Riley, W. A. — Dipylidium caninum in a Child 49

Luhe, M. — Tapeworm* of South American Felidx 49

Sweet, Georgina — New Tapeworm in Chicken 49

Johnstone, James — Parasite* from Irish Sea Fishes 49

Nicoll, W. — Entozoa from Clyde Fishes 49

Jacubowa. Lydia — New South African Polyclad 50

Linton, Edwin — Trematodes from Tortugas 205

Dietz, Eugen — Echinost'imidse of Birds 205

Luhe, M. — Cystotsenise of South African Felidze .. 206

Linton, Edwin — I lesh-parasites of Food-fishes 200

„ „ New Commensal Turbellari an 2(10

Di; Plessis, G. — Hermaphroditism in Nemerteans 206

Nusbaum, Jozef, & M. Oxner — Regeneration in Nemerteans 206

Zaenik, B. — Life-cycle of Dicroc&lium lanceatum 361

Gough, L. H. — Stilesia and its Relatives 362

Southwell, T. — Pearl-inducing Parasite 470

„ „ New Cestodes from Ceylonese Fishes 471

Rosseter, T. B. — Neio Tapeworm from a Duck 471

Nicoll, W., & E. A. Minchin — Cysticercoids from Rat-flea 471

Nicoll, W. — Gasterostomum tergestinum 471

Berke — Horse Parasites in Cameroon 471

Halliz, Paul — 'Son-parasitic Bdellourid 471

„ „ Excretory System of Bothriomolus 471

Wahl, Bruno — Dalyellidx and Umagillidse 472

Guerrini, Guido — Alleged Toxicity of Tapeworms .. .. 026

Johnston, T. Harvey — Structure of Monopylidium passerinum 626

Steinmann, P. — Regeneration in Planarians 626

Berninger, J. — Effects of Starvation on Planarians 627

Steinmann, Paul — Revision of Swiss Triclads 627

Gering, G. — Malacobdella grossa 627

Johnston, T. Harvey — Entozoa in Australian Birds 760

Solowiow, Paul — Tapeworms of Birds 760

Hall, C. M.—Gid Parasite 760

Beddard, F. E. — Tapeworm* from Mammals 760

Johnstone, Jas. — Parasites of Fishes 760

Hallez, Paul — Two-fold Function of Ovaries in some Polyclads 761

Keillek, V. H. — Regeneration in Short Head-pieces of Planaria 761

Stephenson, J. — Nemertines of Millport 7fil

Murse, Max AYithrow — Experiments in Ova of Cerebrahdus 762

Incertse Sedis.

Gilchrist, J. D. F. — New Hemicorda from South Africa 50

Eoehrich, O. — New Species of Alcyonidium 51

Maplestone, C. M. — Growth andHnbit* of Biporx 51

Schroder, Ol aw — New Mesozoon 51

Bcddenbrock. Wolfgang von — Development of the Statoblasts of Bryozoa .. .. 207

Nichols, A. P. — Irish Polyzoa Hfi2

Calvert, Louis — New Mediterranean Bryozoa 762

Ritchie, James — Barentsia benedeni in British Waters 762

Kohler, W. — 1 '' ectinateUa magnifica near Berlin 763

Rotifera.

Murray, J. — Some African Rotifers : Bdelloida of Tropical Africa. (Plates I., II.) 1
„ Australian Rotifera : Collected by the Shachleton Antarctic Expedition,

1909. (Plates IV.. V.) 164

Bryce, D. — Bdelloid Rotifera: a New Classification 207

CONTENTS. xix

PAGE

Fulleborne, F. — Rotifera of German East Africa 208

Murray, J. — Canadian Rotifera : Collected by the Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,

1909. (Plates VI.-VIII.) 285

Hirschfelder, Gustav — Histology of Rotifer a 362

Beauchamp, P. de — Dipleuchlanis, a new Sub-genus for Euchlan s (Diplois) pro-

patula Gosse v 363

Murray, J. — Rotifera of Some Pacific Islands : Collected by the Shackleton Antarctic

Expedition, 1909. (Plates XIV., XV.) 429

,, Rotifera of New Zealand: Collected by the Shackleton Antarctic Ex-
pedition, 1907. (Plates XVI., XVII.) 573

„ South African Rotifera : Collected by the Shackleton Antarctic Ex-
pedition, 1907 '. (Plate XVI.) 584

„ Clare Island Rotifers 627

Eousselet, C. P.— New Rotifera 763

„ „ Clare Island Rotifera 763

Echinoderma.

Clark, H. L. — Echinoderms of Peru 51

Perez, Ch. — Seasonal Retrogression of Ovaries in Starfish 52

Edwards, C. L. — Species of Cucumaria 52

IMortensen, Th — West Indian Echinoids .. •■ 209

Hawkins, H. L. — Teeth and Buccal Structures in Conulus 209

Sluiter, C. Ph. — West Indian Holothuroids 209

Pearson, Joseph — Holothuroids from the Indian Ocean 209

Becher, S. — Studies on Holothurians 209

Koehler, K. — New Starfishes 210

Wanner, J. — Remarkable Permian Echinoderm 210

Yatsu, Naohide — Extra-ovate Experiments on Sea-urchin Ova 363

Tennent, D. H. — Echinoderm Hybridization 363

Schaxel, Julius — Early Stages of Development in Echinoderms 363

Tennent, D. H., and V. H. Keiller — Structure of Pentaceros reticulatus .. .. 364

Yatsi, Naohide — Polarity of Primary Oocyte of Asterias forbeni 472

Clark, H. L. — North Pacific Ophiurans 472

., „ Genera of Recent Clypeastroids 472

Clark, A. H. — New Unslalked Crinoid 473

Gemmill, James F. — Structure of Solaster endeca 628

Walcott, C. D. — Middle Cambrian Holothurians 628

Clark, A. H. — Comparative Age of Recent Crinoid Faunas 629

Clark, Austin Howard —Neiv European Crinoid 763

,, „ Recent Crinoids of Australia , .. 763

»

Ccelentera.

Ritchie, James — Deep-sea Hydroids of Indian Museum 52

Broch, Hjalmar — New Genus of Hydroids 52

Carpenter. F. W. — Feeding Reactions of the Rose-coral 53

"Walton, Chas. L. — Kodioides 53

Carruthers, R. G. — Evolution of Zaphrentis delanouei 54

Kukenthal, W. — West Australian Alcyonarians 54

„ Genus Anthomastus 54

Mlller, Robert — Rhizoxenia and Sarcodictyon 55

„ „ Formation of Axis of Cor allium 55

Nutting, C. C. — Plexaurids of ' Siboga' Expedition 55

„ „ Isidx of ' Siboga ' Expedition 55

„ „ Gorgonidst of ' Siboga ' Expedition 55

„ „ ( i orgonellids of ' Siboga' Expedition 55

Hickson, Sydney J. — New Ocioradiaie Coral 210"

£edot, M. — History of the Study of Hydrozoa 210'

b 2

xx CONTENTS.

PAGE

Torbet, H. B. — Regeneration in Gorymorpha 210

Pax, Ferdinand — Studies of Actiniam 21]

Torki y. H. B. — Geotropism in Gorymorpha 211

Tobbet, H. B ,& A. L. Martin — Senescence in Hydro id* 211

„ ., „ h feet of Light on Obeli a 212

Thomson, J. Arthur, & Doris L. Mackinnon — Australian Alcyonarians .. .. 364

KtNOSHlTA, KraiAO — Kerozididx ii'il

Broch, Hjalmar — Australian Pennatulids 365

Torrey. H. B. — Regeneration in Gorymorpha :- 65

Broch, Hjalmar — Hydroidsof Drobak 365

Dershawin, A. — Poly podium hydri forme 365

Billard, A. — New Plumidnrid Genus , 365

Schaxel, Julius — Oogenesis in Pelagia 47:;

Herouard. E. — Fixation of Scyphistoma 473

Gunther, Siegmund — History of Study of Coral-formations 473

Kinoshita, Kumao — New Genus of Antipatharia 473

Steche, O. — Law of Budding in " Portuguese Man-of-war" 473

Issakowitsch, A. — Marginal Glands of Porpita 474

Motz-Kossowska, S. — Mediterranean Species of Haleci 11 <u 474

Goto. Seitaro — Hydractinia and Hermit-crab 474

Wilsmore, Leonora J. — Hexactiniee from New South Wales 629

Walcott, ( '. D. — Middle Cambrian Medusa 629

WJETRzykowskt, W. — Development of Lucernarians 629

Boulenger, C. L. — Notes on Structure and Budding of Limnocnida 629

Kuhn, A. — Structure and Affinities of Thyroxyphus 630

Hanitsch, P. — Development of Cunina parisitica 764

Hickson, S. J. — New Type of Alcyonarian 764

Kukenthal, W., & Hj. Broch — Pennatulacea 765

Calman, AY. T. — Epizoic Hydroid on Crab 765

Billard, A. — ' Siboga ' Plumularids 765

Morse, Max W. — Polarity in Tubularia 765

Porifera.

Maas, O. — Regeneration in Chondrosia reniformis 56

Taylor. T. Griffith — Archxocyathinas 56

Kirkpatrick, R. — Hexatinellid Spicules 212

Kirkpatrick, R. — Remarkable Pharetronid Sponge 365

Maas, 0. — Degenerative Changes in Sponges 630

Kirkpatrick, R. — Merlia 630

„ „ New Lithonine Sponge from Christmas Island 631

Welter, O. A. — Pharetronid Sponges of Essen G reensand »;::i

Wilson, H. V. — Development of Sponges from Dissociated Ctlls 76G

Topsent, E. — Classification of Halichondrina 766

Annandale, N. — Sponges Associated with Vermetidx 766

Protozoa.

Chapman, Frederick — For aminif era from Funafuti 06

Broch, Hjalmar — Peridinum Plankton at Rovigno 57

Chatton, E. — Parasitic Dinoflagellate 57

Gilkuth, J. A., & others — Blood Parasites .. .. 57

Gilruth, J. A. — Protozoan Parasite from Mucous Membrane of Sheep's Abomasum 57

„ „ Hsemogregarine in Blood of Varanus varius 57

Mackinxon, Doris L. — Protut Parasites from Intestine of Trichoptera 57

Herpetomonads from Dung-flies . 57

Gross. J. — Cristispii a and Spiroch ta 58

Strickland, C, & N. H. .Swellengrebel — Development of Trypanosoma lewisi in 58

Rat Flea

Perez, Cn. — New Microsporidian from Termite 58

Sidebottom, Henry — New Species of Cassidulina 212

Staniewicz, Witold — Fat in Ciliated Infusorians 212

CONTENTS. X X 1

PAGR

Chatton, E. — New Flagellate in Pelagic Copepod 212

Cepede, E. — Axtomatou* Infusorians 213

Mathis, ('., & M. Leger — Studies on Trypanosomes 213

Auerbach, M. — Cnidosporidia 213

Leger, L., & O. Ddboscq — Selenococcid ium and the Relationships of the Sporozoa 213

Laveran, A., & A. Pettit — Hsemogregarines 214

Lebceuf, A., & Ringenbach — Hiematozoa from the Congo 'J 14

Heron- Allen, E., & A. Eakland — On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the
Shore-sands of Selsey Bill, Sussex — VII. Supplement (Addenda et Corri-
genda). (Plates IX.-XIII.) 298

Heron-Allen, E., & A. Earland — Studies on British Foraminifera r!6(j

Penard, Eugene — Antarctic Ithizopods 366

Mast, S. O. — Reactions of Amoeba to Light 366

Lewin, K. R. — Experiments on Paramecium 366

Lipska, Irene — Effect of Inanition on Paramecium 366

Woodruff, L. L. — Two Thousand Generations of Parameecium 367

Bouet, G., & E. Roubaud — Leptomonad in Euphorbias 367

Chatton, E., & A. Leger — Trypanosome and Leptomonad in Drosophila .. .. 368

Griffin, L. E. — Structure of Eujilotes 368

„ ,, Division of Euplotes worcesteri 368

Mathis, C, & M. Leger — Species of Leucocytozoon 368

Alexeieff, A. — Intestinal Flagellates of Marine Fishes 369

Mathis, 0., & M. Leger — Spirochset from the Rabbit 369

Nuttall, G. H. F., & C. Strickland — Parasites of Biliary Fever in Horses .. 369

Dobell, C Clifford — Affinities of Spirocheets 369

Gerber, P. — Spirochxts of the Mouth 369

Cleland, J. Burton, & T. Harvey Johnston — Hssmato.oa of Australian Birds .. 369

Hadley. P. B. — Coccidions in Sparrows and other Wild Bird U 369

Heron-Allen, E., & A. Earland — On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the
Shore-sands of Selsey Bill, Sussex. — VIII. Tabular List of Species and

Localities 436

Alexeieff, A. — Studies on Amoebm 474

„ „ Division in Amoeba punctata 474

„ Division and Encystation of Amoeba Umax 474

Erdmann, Rh. — Depression and Apogamy in Amoeba diploidea 475

Brown, James M, — Rhizopods from Lahe District 475

Caullery, Maurice — Notes on Marine Heliozomi 475

Moroff, Th. — Vegetative and Reproductive Processes in Thalassicollu 475

Dobell, C. C — H semocystidium of the Gecho 475

Minchin, E. A. — Neiv Parasite of Rat-flea 476.

Kruce, David, & others — Inquiry into Sleeping Sickness 476

Mackixnon, Doris L. — Protozoan Parasites from Trichoptera 476

Kleine, F. K., & M. Taute — Trypanosome Studies 176

Lebedeff, W. — Trypanosoma rotatorium Gruby 176

Chatton, E., & B. Collin — New Type of Suctoria on a Copepod 477

Hartmann, Max — New Trichonympha 477

Laveran, A., & L. Nattan-Larrier - Leucocytozoon in Fish-eagle 477

Laveran, A., & A. Pettit — New Hamogregarine from the Horned Asp 477

Auerbach, M. — Distribution of My xosporidia .. .. 477

SwARCZEWSKT, B. — Lanlcesteria 477

Stolc, Antonin — Studies on Pelomyxa 631

„ ,, Encystation in Pelomyxa 631

Faure-Fremiet, E. — •' Trichites" in Didinium 632

Alexieff, A. — Notes on Flagellates 632

Laveran, A. — Classification of Trypanosomes in Mammals I ■;!_

Koidzujii, M. — Frog Trypanosomes in Japan 632

Mathis, C., & M. Leger — Trypanosomes in Fresh-water Fishes 632

Martin, C. H., & Muriel Robertson — Csecal Parasites of Fowls 632

Levaditi, C. — C ilium of Treponema pallidum 633

Dunkerly, J. S. — Leptomonad of the House-fly 633

Cleland, J. Burton, & T. Harvey Johnston — Hivmatozoa of Australian Batra-

chians <>:!•'>

XX11 CONTENTS.

PAGE

Franca, C. — Studies on Hiematozoa 633

Franca, C, & M.Pinto — Parasites of Leucocytes in Brown Rat 633

Weissenburg, R. — Glugea lophii 634

Senn, G. — Studies on Flagellate* 634

Flu, P. 0. — Protozoa in the Alimentary Canal of House-fly 634

Chatton, Edouard — Cnidosporidian without Cnidoblasts .. 634

Jennings, H. S. — Conjugation in Paramecium 634

Dehorne, A. — Nuclear Changes in Conjugation of Col iridium 635

Andre, E. — New Species of Mesnilella 635

Beauchamp, P. de — Internal Euglenid Parasite 635

Goodey, T. — Protozoa of the Soil 767'

Metcalf, Maynard N. — Studies on Amoebse 767

Woodruff, Lorande Los — Effect of Excretion-products on Rate of Reproduction

in Paramoscium 767

Dangeard, P. A. — Fertilization in Ciliata 76S

Gineste, Ch. — Polymorphism in Flagellates 768

Mangin, L. — Cuirass of Peridinidse 768

Jorgensen, E. — Genus Ceratium 768

Chatton, Edouard — Pleodorina calif omica at Banyuh 768

Kofoid, Charles A., & Josephine R Michener — New Dinoilagellates .. .. 76!)

Bruce, David, & others — Studies on Trypanosomas 769

Fantham, H. B., & Annie Porter — Bee Disease due to Nosema apis 769

Gonder, Pi. — Parasite of Coast Fever 770

Buchanan, George — Developmental Forms of Trypanosoma brucei 77H

Bruce, David, & others — New Trypanosome 770

., „ Trypanosoma nanum ( Laveran) 770

Fantham, H. B. — Life-history of Trypanosoma gambiense and T. rhodesiense . . 770

Bruce, David, & others — Transmission of Sleeping Sickness 770

Broce, David — Trypanosoma evansi 771

Dakin, W. J. — New Coccidian from a Whelk's Kidney 771

Erdmann, Rh. — Development of Sarcocystis muris .. .. 771

Johnston, T. Harvey, & J. Burton Cleland — Heematozoa of Australian Reptiles 771

Reichenow, E. — Life-history of Heemogregarina stepanowi 771

Gross, J. — Free-living Spironemacese 772

Mercier. L. — Large Gregarine in Atyephyra 772

Cepede, Casimir — Haplosporidian Parasite in Donax 772

CONTENTS. XX111

BOTANY.

GENEKA L,
Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,
Including- Cell-Contents.

PAGE

Gates, K. R. — Chromosome-reduction in Oenothera 370

„ „ Cliromosomes of Oenothera Mutant* and Hybrids 370

Schiller, J. — Life-history and Physiology of Nuclei 478

Lawson, A. A. — Synapsis of the Nucleus .. 478

Beauverie, J. — Mycoplasm Hypothesis and Metachromatic Corpuscles 479

Vouk, V. — Movements of Plasmodia 479

Lewitzky, G. — Chronilriosomes in Plant-cells 479

Granieb, J., & L. Boule — Heterogamic gemini iii Impatiens 480

Schulze, E., & M. Pfenninger — Carbohydrates in Seeds - .. 480

Sheppard, E. J. — The Re-appearance of the Nucleolus in Mitosis. (Plate XIX) .. 598

Lepeschkin, W. W. — Structure of Protoplasm 636

„ „ Chemical Composition of the Plasma-membrane 63ti

Zaleski, W. — Function of Nucleoproteid 637

Meyer, A. — Chondriosomes in Plant-cells 637

Bonicke, L. v. — Heterotypic Division of Pollen-mother-cells i 637

Lakon, G. — Starch-grains and Oil-drops in Conifer-wood 638

Palladine, W., & P. Iraklionoff — Peroxydase and Respiratory Pigments . . .. 638

Szucs, J. — Permeability of Protoplasm .. .. 773

Guilliermond, A. — Formation of Chloroleucites 773

„ „ Mitochondries of Plant-cells 773

Structure and Development.
Vegetative.

Cordeuroy, H. Jacob de — Clusiace of North-west Madagascar : the Influence of the

Soil upon their Secretory Apparatus - 59

DuPut'R, Leon — Observations on Primary Leaves 215

Cheumezon, H. — Anatomical Researches on Sea-side Plants 216

Chauveatjd, G. — Transitory Tissues in Vascular Plants 216

Noelle, W. — Anatomy and Morphology of Roots of Conifers 371

Blodgett, M. — Origin and Development of Bulbs in the Genus Erythonium .. .. 371

Hemenwa?, A. F. — Phloem of Juglandacese 480

r hauveaud, G. — Evolution of Conduct ing-tissues of Vascidar Pla?its 638

Boshart, K. — Leaf-symmetry and Exotrophy 639

Fries, B. E. — Monocotyledon ous Characters in the Polycarpese 640

Kingsley, M. A. — Sjjlittimg of Rhizome and Root of Delphinium 774

Berry, Edward Wilber — Epidermal Characters of Frenelopsis ramosissima . . 774

Reproductive.

Andrews, Frank M. — Embryo-sac Development in Hybanthus concolor 218

Capitaine, Louis — Seeds of European Papaveracese 218

Modilewski, J. — Embryology in Euphorbiacex 372

Lignier, O., & A. Tison — Gnetales as Apetalous Angiosperms :;72

XXIV CONTENTS.

I'AGb

MlYAEE, K. — Gametophytes and Embryogeny in Cunninghamia 481

Hannig. E. — Significance of the Periplasmodium 481

Hague, S. M.— Morphology of Diospyros .. .. 610

Hillmann, A. — " Hypanth" of the Rosacea 640

Dessiatoff, N. — Embryo-sac of Euphorbia 641

Sorensen, W. — Fruit of Geraniaceas 641

Nicoloff, Th. — Ovule and Embryo-sac of the Platanaceee 775

Physiology.

Nutrition and Growth.

Zacu., Franz — Occurrence of Phagocytosis in the Boot-nodules of Cycads 60

Jacobi. Helene — Effect of Injury to the Cotyledons upon Seedling Development . . 60

Colin-, H., & I. de Rufz Lavison — Absorption by Plants of Alkaline Earth Salts.. 218
Atkins, W. R. Gelston — Cryscopic Determination of Osmotic Pressure in certain

Plant-organs 219

Doposcheg-Uhlar, J. — Begeneration and Polarity of Plant-organs 219

Deleano, N. T. — Bemoval of Starch through the Petiole 873

Lavison. J. de Rufz de — Mineral Nutrition of Vascular Plants 482

Overton, J. B. — Living Cells in Belation to Transpiration and Sap-flow .. .. -1 82

Schreiner, 0., & M. X. Sullivan — Reduction by Boots 483

Gerber, M. — Latex Diastases of Broussoneti a 483

Molisch, H. — Liberation of Iron by Green Water-plants 4S4

Schroeder, H. — Permeability of the Sheath in Wheat-grains 642

Fernbach, A., & M. Schoen — Action of Proteolytic Diastases 642

Combes, R. — Opinions upon Physiology of Leaf -fall 776

Dangeard, P. A. — Complementary Chromatic Adaptation in Plants 776

Irritability.

Pennington, L. H. — Effect of Longitudinal Compression upon the Production of

Mechanical Tissue in Stems 373

Woycicki, Z.^— Mechanism of Movement in Graminex 374

Pougnet, J. — Action of Ultra-violet Bays upon Green Vanilla-pods .. 484

Beauverie, J. — (Osmotic Pressure, and the Form and Structure of Plants . . .. 484

Hempel, J. — Effect of Etherization 071 Metabolism ... .. 776

General.

Dixon, H. H. — Edward Perceval Wright 61

Bkown, H. B. — Crataegus: Some Theories concerning the Origin of its Species .. 220

Wester, P. G. — Pollination Experiments with Anonas in South Florida .. . . 874

Bibliography 375

Becquerel, P. — Traumatism in Belation to Netv Plant-forms 485

Dubard, M. — Remarks on Strephonema 485

Fitting, H. — Premature Fall of the Perianth 485

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.

Scott, D. H. — Studies in Fossil Ferns 61

Bertrand, T.— Zygopterideie 61

Bertkand, P.— Stipes of the Fossil Asterochlsona 61

Zalesski, M. — Lepidostrobus Bertrandi 62

Gordon, W. T. — Lepidophloios Scottii 62

Horwood, A. R. — Catamites compared with Equisetum 62

Hollow ay, J. E. — Anatomy of Nero Zealand Lycopodiacese 62

CONTENTS. XXV

PAGE

Berry, E. W. — Fossil Lycopodiiim 62

Druery, C. T. — British Fern-varieties 63

Litardiere, R. de — New Hybrid Asplenium 63

Christ, H. — Mexican Ferns - 63

Rovirosa, J. N. — Ferns of South M ex i:o 63

Winkler, H. — Ferns of Borneo 64

Oliver, R. B. — Ferns of the Kermailec Islands 64

Jeffrey, E. C. — Pteridopliyta! Origin of so-called Algal Coals 221

Clute, AY. N. — Nomenclature of Nephrodium '221

Litardiere, R. de — Fern-flora of Spain and Portugal 222

Rossi. L. — Ferns of South Croatia 222

Hill, E. J., & others — Ferns of North America 222

Christensen, C. — Ferns of Temperate South America 223

Hicken. ('. M.— Ferns of Argentina 223

Brause, G., & G. Hieronymus — Ferns of German Centred Africa 223

Matscmura, J. — New Japanese Ferns 223

Sinnott, E. W. — Evolution of the Filicinean Leaf-trace 376

Charles, G. M. — Anatomy of Marattia 377

Schmidt, W. — Mechanism by which Fern Fronds roll 'up 37S

Jeffrey, E. C. — Pteropsida 378

Kidston, R., & D. T. Gwynne-Vaughan — Fossil Osmundaceoe 379

Shibata, K. — Chemotaxis of Fern-spermatozoids 379

Tavel, F. von — Mutations of Asplenium ruta-muraria 379

Clute, W. N., & others — North American Ferns 379

Schlumberger, O. — Relation of Woodsiese to Cyafheaceie and Polypodiaceie .. .. 486

Benedict, R. C. — Genera of Vittariem 487

Shreve, F. — Hymenophyllaceee in relation to Moisture 487

Hannig, E. — Significance of the Periplasmodiuni 4>-8

Chodat, R. — Lepidodendron Brownii 488

Thomas, H. H. — Leaves of Catamites 488

Renier, A. — Calamodachys Ludwigii 489

Jongmans, W. — Catamites undid atus 489

Berry, E. W. — Schizpeopsis expansa, a Fossil Fern 489

Queva, C. — Anatomical Study of Azoll a filiculoides 490

Ki'ndt, A. — Spore-development in Salvinia natans 490

Fischer, H. — Aqueous Cultures of Fern Prothallia 490

„ Influence of Light and Darkness on Germination of Fern-spores . . 491

Briquet, J. — Cor sican Ferns . 491

Maiden, J. H., & E. Betche — Queens! cmd Ferns 491

van Rosenburgh, C. R. W. K. van A. — Malayan Ferns 491

Christ, H. — Chinese Ferns 491

Bower, F. O. — Morphology of Ophioglossum palmatum 642

Freiberg, W.— Forms of Ophioglosmm 643

Bower, F. O. — Origin of Medulla in Ophioglossaceie 643

„ „ Medullation in the Pteridopliyta 643

Ferguson, M. C. & 0. A. Black — Embedded Antheridia in Pteris 644

Bancroft, 'N. — Xylem Elements of the Pteridopliyta 644

Bruyn, H. de — Development of Stele in Dipteris 644

Gwynne-Vaughan, D. T. — Anatomy of the Osmundacese .. '. 645

Periun, G. — Prothallia of Equisetum 645

Yasui, K. — Life-history of Sal vini a natans 645

Neger, F. W. — Spore-distribution in Selaginella 646

Johnson, T. — Lyginodendron ( Crossoth eca) in Irish Coal Measures 646

Coultar, J. M., & "W. J. G. Land — American Lepidostrobus 647

Pelourde, F. — Some Mesozoic Ferns and their Leaf-scars 647

Kubart, B. — Spores of Spencerites 647

Johnson, T. — Archxopteri* 647

Verhdlst, A. — Distribution of Equiselum maximum 648

Litardiere, R. de —Asplenium Guichardii 648

Pampanini, R., & others — Woodwardia radicans in Italy 649

Junge, P.— Ferns of Scldtswig-Holstein 649

XXVI CONTENTS.

PAGK

Durand, E., & G. Barhatte — Pteridophytes of Libya 649

Hill, E. J., & others — North American Pteridophytes 049

Wkight, C. H. — Ferns of the Falkland Islands 650

Matthew, C. G., & R. Pampanixi — Chinese Ferns " .. .. (150

Christensen, C. — Ferns of Corea and Quelpaert <150

Christ, H. — Ferns of Annam 050

Chrysler. M. A. — Ophiogloswin palmatum 777

Cltjte, W. N. — Hemigramma latifolia 777

Poyser, W. A., & others — Asplenium alternans in America 777

Juxge, P. — Pteridophytes of Srhleswig-Holstein 778

Kimball. L. F., & others — American Ferns 778

Copeland, E. B. — Bornean Fern* 778

Ridley. H. N. — Ferns of Perah 778

Copeland, E. B. — Philippine Fern* 778

Copeland, E. B., & E. Rosenst.'Ck — Papuan Ferns ... .. 779

Hieronymus, G., & A. Gepp — African Ferns 779

Bryophyta.

Cavers, F. — Inter-relationships of the Hepaticse 64

Herzog, T. — Parallelism and Convergence of Moss-pedigrees 65

Schiffner, V. — Bryological Notes 65

Roth, G. — Andreseacex 65

Copeland, E. B. — Protohndsaya and other Bornean Fern* 65

Merrill, E. D., & M. L. Mekritt — Ferns of the Philippine Islands 66

Gyorffy, I. — Distribution of Molendoa Sendtneriana in Hungary 66

Hagen, J. — Dicranoloma 6^3

„ Annulus of Cynodontium Alpestre 66

Dixon, H. N. — Merceyopsis g.n. and other Indian Mosses 66

Nichols. G. E. — Ephemerum and Nanomitrium in North America 66

Burrell, W. H. — Norfolk Bryophytes 67

Roth, G. — Neiv and Bare European Mosses 67

Krahmer, B., & J. Roll — Moss-flora of South Thuringia 67

Janzen, P. — Moss-flora of Eisenach . . " 67

Schmidt, J. — New Records of Hamburg Mosses 67

Evans, A. W. — New England Hepaticse 67

Jennings, 0. E., & others — North American Bryophyta 68

Cardot, J. — Mexican Mosses 6&

Herzog, T.— Moss- flora of Bolivia 68

Merrill, E. D., & M. L. Merritt — Bryophyta of the Philippine Islands .. .. 68

Cockayne, L. — New Zealand Bryophytes 69

Roll, J. — Adalbert Geheeb : Obituary 69

( avers, F. — Inter-relationships of the Bryophyta 224

Schiffxer, V. — Amphigastrial Antheridia in some Ptilidioid Hepaticse 224

Juel. O. — Structure of Biccia Bischoffi .. 225

Schiffxer, V.— Critical Form* of Aplczia 225

Herzog, T. — Grimmia pilosissima 226

Bauer, E., & others — Bare Species of Bryum 226

Lacoctdre, C. — Figures of Hepatic Genera 226

Stephaxi. F. — Species Hepaticarum 227

Paris. E. G. — Bryological Index 227

Roth, G. — Illustrations of Exotic Mosses 227

„ New or Bare European Mosses 227

RrssiLL, T. H. — British Mosses and Liverworts 227

Fry, Sir Edward & Agxes — Introduction to British Liverworts 228

Ingham, W., & others — British Mosses 228

Stirtox, J. — New Scottish Mosses 228

Coppey, A. — Mosses of the Haute-Saone .. . 229

Schiffxer, V., & others — Hungarian Bryophytes 229

Sapehix, A. A. — South Russian Mosses 229

CONTENTS. XXV11

PAGE

Arnell, H. W., & others — Northern Mosses .. .. 229

Cavers, F. — Inter-relationships of the Brophyta 380

Steinbuinck, 0. — Desiccation-phenomena in Mosses 381

Eoth, G. — Illustrations of Exotic Mosses 381

Muller, K. — European Eepaticse 381

Kaalaas, B., & H. N. Dixon — British Bryophyta 381

Lewis, F. J. — Moss-remains in Scottish Peat 381

Coppey, A. — Moss-flora of the Haute- Saone 382

Roll, J. — Sphagnacege of the RhSngebirge 382

Sapehin, A. A. — Mosses of the Crimea 382

Herzog, T. — Mosses of Ceylon 382

Geheer, A. — Moss-flora of the Atlantic Islands 382

Dixon, H. N.— Tewer/Je Mosses 382

Pitard. J., & L. Corbiere — Moss-flora of Tunis 382

Paris, E. G. — Eepaticse. of New Caledonia 383

Frye, T. C. — Polytrichacese of North America 383

Carpot, J. — Mexican Mosses 383

Britton, E. G. — Splachnobryum in Greenhouses 383

Dixon, H. N. — Fissidens tequendamensis Mitten 383

Herzog, T.— Adalbert Geheeb 384

Nils Conrad Kindberg 384

Roll, J. — Variable Leaf '-border in Fissidens 492

Garjeanne, A. J. M. — Eepaticse. Infected by Fungi 492

Speer, J. M. — Inflorescence of Funaria 492

Loeske, L. — Lesquereuxia 492

Monkemeyer, W — Cratoneuron and Eygramblystegium 493

Spindi.er, M. — Eygrohypnum ochraceum 493

Gyorffy, I. — Buxbaumia viridis 493

Muller, K. — European Hepaticx 493

Roth, G. — New and Rare European Mosses 494

Evans, W. — British Bryophyles 494

Richards, E. A. — Philonotis seriata with Fruit 494

Dixon, H. N. — Mosses of Spitzbergen 49i

Monkemeyer, W. — Musciness of Bornholm 494

Hillier, L. — Moss-flora of the Jura 494

Torka, V., & others — German Bryophytes 494

Warnstorf, C. — Bryophytes of Southern Europe 495

Flkischer, M. — Mosses of New Guinea 495

Paris, E. G. — Mosses of Eastern Asia 495

Oeamura, S. — New Japanese Mosses 495

Brotherus. V. F. — Moss-flora in Central Asia 495

Stephani, F., & others — Bryophyta of German Central Africa 496

Paris, E.G. — Bryophyta of Tropical West Africa 49G

Kaiser, G. B., & others — Bryophyta of North America 49G

Williams, R. S. — Panama Mosses 497

Massalongo, C. — Brazilian Hepatics 197

Arnaoudoff, N. — Dryptodon Eartmani 497

Husnot, T. — F. Renauld's Moss-herbarium 497

Cardot, J. — New Antarctic Genera 498

Schoenau, K. von — Branch-formation in Mosses 651

Marchal, Em. — Sexuality among the Mosses 651

Woodbdrn, W. L. — Spermatogenesis in certain Eepaticse 652

Wilson, M. — Spermatogenesis in the Bryophyta 653

Gyorffy, -f ., & E. G. Britton — Mosses attached by Cladosporium 653

Warnstorf, C. — Nomenclature of Sphagnacex , 653

Britton, E. G., & E. B. Chamberlain — Philonotis revised by Dismier 654

Dixon, H. N. — Hyophilopsis, a New Indian Moss-genus 654

Herzog, T. — Woolnya, a Genus of Bryacese 654

Wheldon, J. A. — Sivartzia inclinata in Lancashire 654

Culmann, P. — Notes on Grimmia 654

Loeske, L. — Tomenthypnum. a Neio Genus 655

xxvm CONTENTS.

PAGE

Zodda, J. — Drepanocladus <i55

Stephani, F. — Goebeliella. a New Genus 655

Burrell. W. H. — New Variety of Lophozia Schultzii G5f>

Degen, A. von — Dichitoh calyculatum in Croatia 655

Macvicar, S. M. — Fossombronia- echinata 655

Bauer, E. — Critical European Mosses 656

Burrell, W. H., & others — British Muscinese 656

Coppey, A. — Moss-flora of Haute-Saone 656

Cornet, A. — Belgian Bryophytes 656

Brockhausen, H. — Moss-flora of Rhine-land <J5G

Roll, J. — Mosses of the Erzgebirge 656

PIerzog, T. — Moss-flora of Bernina t557

Trautmann, C. — Mosses of Tirol 657

Gyorffy, I. — Hungarian Mosses (357

Podpera, J. — Moss-flora of Bulgaria 657

Sapehin, A. A., & others — Crimean Mosses 657

Durand, E., & G. Barratte — Mosses of Libya 658

Grout, A. J., & M. E. Jones — Horth American Bryophytes 658

Cardot, J. — Mexican Mosses 658

Paris. E. G. — Nomina nuda 659

Husnot, T.— E. G. Paris : Obituary 659

Douin, I. — Inflorescence of Muscinese 779

Wheldon, J. A. — Social Groups and Adaptive Characters in, the Bryophyta .. .. 779

Brotherus. V. F. — Allionella. a new Genus 780

Williams, R. S. — Austinella., a new Genus 780

Williams, E. M. — Leucobryum glaucum 780

Meylan, C. — Plagiothecium 780

Dunham, E. M. — Polytrichum 781

Dodin, I. — Lophocolea minor not a Species 781

ycHiFFNER, V. — Metzgeria 781

Cheetham, C. A.. & others — British Bryophytes.. 781

Coppey, A. — Mosses of Haute- Sadne 7S2

Gola, G., & E. Armitage — Hepatics of the Atlantic Islands 782

Andrews, A. Le Roy — North American Sphagnum 782

Evans, A. W. — North American Hepatics 782

Cardot, J. — Mexican Moss-flora 783

Evans, A. W. — Hepaticee of the Bahama Islands 783

., „ Hepaticee- of Puerto Rico 783

Gibbs, L. S. — Neiu Zealand Hepaticm 783

Okamura, S — Japanese Bryophytes 783

Brotherus, V. F. — Mosses of New Caledonia 784

Cardot, J. — Antarctic Mosses 784

Thallophyta.
Algae.

Sluiter, C. P. — Chara contraria and C. dissoluta 69

Bennett, A.— Chara stelligera 70

Dangeard, P. A. — Algse from the Laboratory at Roscoff 70

Merton, F. — Pleodorina illinoisensis Kofoid 70

Scherffel, A. — Rapliidonema 70

Dangeard, P. A. — New Genus of Polyblepharidae 71

Henckel, A. — Phijtoplankton of the Caspian Sea 71

Ostenfeld, C. H. — Thorosphsera 71

Lemmermann, E. — Plankton-algae 71

Kofoid, C. A. — Ceratocomys .. ..' 72

Woronichin, N. — Metachromatic Bodies in certain Green Algse and Conjugatie . ■ 72

Wolosznyska, J. — Algx of the Upper Pruth 72

Wille, N. — Algological Notes 73

CONTENTS. XXIX

PAGE

Chodat, K. — Studies on the Conjugate 73

Forti, A. — Diatoms 73

Hustedt, F. — Diatoms from Dahomey .. .-. 74

Viret, L. — Swiss Desmids 74

Bosse, E.Weber van — Caiderpa 74

Peressleginn, B. — Laminaria hyperborea 74

Gard, M. — Hybrid form of Fucus 75

Bosse, A. Weber van — New Genera from the Malay Archipelago 75

Bibliography 76

Okamura, K. — Japanese Marine Algx 229

Gepi\ A. & E. S. — Marine Algx from the Kermadecs 230

8tii.es, M. H.—Algx of the Sheffield District 230

M'Keever, F. L. — Algx and their Study 230

Algx of the Elf Loch 230

Lemmermann, E. — African Fresh-water Algx 230

Hayden, A. — Algal Flora of the Missouri Botanical Garden 230

Barlow, W. H. — Analysis of Seaweeds 231

Hayrex, E. — Saprophytism of Enteromorpha 231

Danforth, C. H. — Periodicity in Spirogyra\ 231

Nelson, E. M. — Navicula rhomloides 232

LutkemI'ller, J. — Desmidiacex of Bohemia 232

West. G. S. — New African Species of Volvox 232

M'Keever, F. L. — Phxothamnion confer vicolum 233

Tilden, J. E. — Myxophycex 233

Horejsi, J. — Symbiotic Alga 233

Bibliography 233

Palmer, T. C. — Lo'omotion in Surirella 384

Dangeard, P. A. — Behaviour of Chlorella in White and Coloured Light< .. .. 385

Lauby, A. — Study of Diatoms in Sedimentary Deposits 385

Comere, J. — Classification <if Algx 385

Tobler, F. — Epiphytes of the Laminarix .. " 386

West, G. S. — Algological Notes 386

Pavillard, J. — Vegetable Protistology 387

Henckel, A. — Black Sea Algx 387

Wislouch, S. M. — Stichococcus bacillaris .. 387

Nadsox, G. A. — Effect of Coloured Light on Stichococcus bacillaris 387

Keissler, K. von — Phytoplanktoti of the Zeller See MS8

., Plankton from the Julischen Alps 388

Bachmax, H. — Oscillatoria rubescens 389

Playfair, G. I. — Polymorphism and Life-history in the Desmidiacex 389

Virieux, J. — Spirogyro, from the neighbourhood of Besancon 389

Gepp, A. & E. S.— Codiacem '389

Bachmaxn. H. — Fresh-water Algx of Greenland 390

Wonisch, F. — Algx of Andritz 390

Petkoff. S. — Fresh-icater Algx from Macedonia 390

Bornet, E.— M. A. Gomont ' 390

Bibliography 391

Brcnnthaler. J. — Phyloijeny of Algx i 9S

Eicuter, O. — Nutriment of Algx 49S

Brunntiialer, J. — Coccolitliophoridx from the Adriatic 499

Wislouch, S. M. — Two Russian Chrysomonads 499

Wageu, H. — Euglena viridis 499

Nadson, G. A. — Mastigocoleus testarum 500

Board of Agriculture — Injury to Water-cress Beds by Algx .V"1

Murray, J. — Bed snow 500

Brown, W. H. — Cell-division in Lyngbya 500

Snow, J. W. — Tico Epiphytic Algx ' 501

Schussnig. B. — Gonium pectorale 501

Price, S. \t. — New Species of Debar y a r>(>'_!

Chattov, E. — Pleodorina californica 502

Bialosuknia, \Y\ — Corroding Alga 502

Campbell, D. H. — Galifornian Green Algx 503

XXX CONTENTS.

PAGK

Merlin, A. A. C. Eliot — Diatomic Structure 503

Kaiser, P. E. — Algological Notes .. 503

Lutz, L. — Deformation of Ascophyllum nodosum 503

Thoday, M. (t. — Medulla cells of Laminariacese 504

Hoffmann, E. J. — Fructification of Macrocystis 501

McFadden, A. S. — Ahnfeldtia gigartinoides 501

Twiss. VV. C. — Erythrophyllum delesserioides 50-1

McFadden, M. E. — Colacodasya 505

Lemoine, Mme. P. — Melobesiie 505

,, ,. Classification of Melobesiese 505

Cotton, A. D. — Lithophyllum fasciculatum , 50tJ

Kylin, H. — Algse of the West Coast of Norway 506

Wright, E. P. — Fdward Perceval Wright (1834-1911) 506

Richter, O. — Nutrition of Algse 659

Muschler, R. — Algse of Tripoli 060

Brown, W. H. — Algse of North Carolina 660

Ostenfeld, C. H. — Diatoms and Flagellatte from East Greenland 660

Keissler, K. y. — Periodicity of Phytoplankton of the Leopoldstein Lake 660

Ostenfeld, C. H. — Halosphasra and Flagellata 660

Pascher, A. — Two Brown Flagellatse 661

„ „ Cryptomonadese 661

Ulehla, V. — Cyathomonas 66 J

Pascher, A. — Chrysomonadese from the Hirschberger Grossteich 661

Reinisch, O., & A. Pascher — Chrysomonads 661

Desroche, P. — Chlamydomonas Steinii 662

Chodat, R. — Coccogenous Cyanophycea 662

Bachmann, H. — Oscillatoria rubescens 662

Hardy, A. D.— Fed Euglena 662

„ „ Myxonema in Salmon Disease 663

Spratt, E. R. — Life-history of Anabsena Cycadefe 663

Gain, L. — New Species of Nostoc 664

Cotton, A. D. — tflva latissima 664

Andrews, F. M — Spirogyra 665

Muhlethaler, F. — Desmids of the Burgdschimoos 605

Lutman, B. F. — Cell and Nuclear Division in Closterium 665

Burton, J. — Botrydium granulatum 666

PaQUE. E. — Vaucheria terrestris 666

Tobler, F. — Codium tomentosum 666

Brand, F. — New Chlorophycess from New Zealand and Tahiti 667

Borgesen, F. — West Indian Chlorophycese 667

Yendm, K. — Development of Costaria, Dndaria, and L,aminaria .- 6<i7

Svedelics, N. — Fhodophycese , .. 668

( halon. J. — Gonimophyllum Buffliami 668

Petersen, H. ~E.—C-ramium 669

Drcce, G. C. — Tolypella iidricata Leoith , 669

Heydrich, F. — Lithothamnia from Foscoff in Brittany 669

Butcher, T. W. — The Structural Detail of Coscinodiscus asteromphalus.

(Plates XNV.-XXVII.) 722

Meinhold, T. — Physiology of Diatoms 784

Ky'LIN, H. — Phycoerythriu and Fhycocyunin 784

Dangeard, P. A. — Effect of Light on Algx .. 785

,, „ Nuclear Autocliromatixm in Algse 785

Mhlliard, M. — Algal Figures on Culture Flasks 785

Denys. G. — Anatomy of Polyides and Fui cellaria 785

Connolly", O. J. — Floridese 786

Syedelius, N. — Eryfhroctadia 787

Bignotti, G. — Batrachospermvm groiving on Molluscs 787

Cotton, A. D. — Colpomenia sinuosa 787

Virieux, J. — Dichtoniosiphon and Mischococcus 788

Gakry, R. — Fresh-water Algse of the Clyde Area . .. 78S

Clerici, E. — Pleurococcus sulphurarius 788

Ton i, G. B. De— Clathrocystis 78S

CONTENTS. XXXI

TAWE

Burton, J. — Breaking of the Meres 788

Clerici, E. — Fossil Diatoms in Italy 788

Joergensen, E. — Ceratium 789

Kolkwitz, R. — Kammer plankton 789

Ostenfeld, C. H. — Arctic Plankton 789

HuNigmann, H. — Plankton of Prester See, near Magdeburg 789

Lauterborn, R. — Vegetation of Upper Rhine 789

Marchi, M. de — Plankton of Lago Ma ggiore 789

Mazza, A. — Marine Algology 790

Pilger, R. — Marine Algx of Kamerun 790

Fungi.

Griffon & Maublano — Cladochytrium aespitis sp. n. 76

Guttenberg, A. — Study of Synchytrium-galls 76

Namyslowski, Boleslaw — Study of Mucorini 76

Dauphin, J — Study of Mortierellm 77

Petersen, H. E. — Danish Phycomycetes 77

Sohikorra, W. — Development of Monascus 77

Magnus, F.—Oak Mildew 78

Foex, M. E. — Oidium of Japanese Euonymus 78

Ihssen, G. — Fusarium nivale and Nectria graminicola 78

Appel, O., & H. W. Wollenwebeu — Study of Hyphomycetes 79

Wachter, W. — Coremium-formation in Penicillium 79

Ravenna, C., & G. Pighini — Metabolism of Moulds 79

Linossiek, G. — Influence of Iron on the Formation of Spores in Aspergillus Niger.. 79

Arthur, J. 0., & others — Uredinese 79

Zach, F. — Busts of Cereals 80

McAlpine, D — Smuts of Australia 81

Kaufmann, F. — German Cor tinarii 81

Bataille, F. — Monograph of Hygrophorus 81

Maire, Rene — Notes on the Larger Fungi 81

Torrend, C. — Punctulari a tuberculosa 81

Buller, A. H. R. — Cystidia of Coprinus atramentarius 82

Ponkoy, M. — Mushroom Culture 82

Hoei, S. — Do the Higher Fungi require Lime1? 82

Hohnel, F.V. — My cological Notes 82

Lloyd, C. G. — Notes on the Larger Fungi 83

Tubeuf, C. V. — Witches' -brooms on Firs 83

„ „ Wintering of Plant Parasites 83

Salter, Charles T. C. — Technical Mycology 83

Whetzel, H. H. — Fungicides 84

Stevens, F. L., & J. G. Hall — Diseases of Economic Plants 84

Voges, Ernest, & others — Plant Diseases 84

Bibliography .. .. 87

Maire, Rene, & Adrien Tison — Research on Cladochytriacex 233

Peglion, Vittorio — Biology of Sclerospora "J34

Lechmere, A. E.— Notes on Saprolegnia 2S4

Hewitt, G. Gordon — Fungus of House-fly .. 234

BR'/wn, William II.— Ascocarp of Leotia 2o4

Sydow, P. & others — Vredinem . 23.">

Honcamp, Fr.. & H. Zimmermann — Study of Smut-infection 235

Matruchot, L. — Culture of an Edible Fungus 236

Mlrrill, W. A., & others — Poisonous Mushrooms 236

Lingelsheim, A. — Notes on the Larger Fungi 236

Magnus, P. — New Species of Bresadolia 236

Schorstein, Josef — Wood-destroying Fungi 237

Rick, J. — Notes on Geaster 237

Atkinson, G. F. — Diet yophora and Ithy phallus 237

Theissen, F. — Myco-geography .. 237

XXX11 CONTENTS.

PAGE

Arzberger, E. G. — Fungus Root-tubercles ' 237

Massee, G. — Origin of Parasitism in Fungi 238

Diakonoff, Helexi: v. — Plant-diseases in Russia 238

Griffon, & others — Diseases of Plants 238

Bibliography 240

Warburton, 0. W. — Ergot on Oats 391

Groh, Herbert — New Host for Claviceps 391

Medisch, Marc — Study of Hypocrea ruja 39]

Sea vi li, F. J. — North American Fungi 392

Kock. Gustav — Mildew of Gooseberry and ('ah 392

Guilliermond, A. — Copulation of Yeast-cells 392

Bernard, Ch. — Presence of Yeast .on Tea .. .. ~. 392

Oberstein-Breslaii, Otto — Cicinnobolus sp. parasitic on Sphxrotheca mors-uvx .. 392

Vcillemin, Paul — Cicinnobolus sp. parasitic on Oak Mildew 393

Bainier, G. — New Hyphomycetes 393

Bancroft, C. K. — Parasitic Fungi 393

Appel, O., & H W. Wollanweber — Monograph of Fusarium 393

Dittschlag, E. — Research on Uredinese 394

Federi.ey, Harry — Conidial Fusion in Ustilago Tragopogi-pratensis 394

Rickex, A. — German Agaricacex 394

Ferdinandsen, C, & J. Link — Fungi from Greenland 395

Ferdinandsen, C, & O. Winge — Fungi from Venezuela and the West Indies .. 395

Thaxter, Roland — Notes on Chilian Fungi 395

Herter. W. — German Fungus-flora 395

Laurent, Jules — Physical Condition of Resistance of the Vine against Mildew . . 395.

Jorgensex, Alfred — Micro-organisms and Fermentation 390

Jaczewski, A. de — Geotropism and Phototropism in Fungi 396

Zellner, Julius — Chemistry of the Higher Fungi 396

Neger, F. W. — Ambrosia Fungus ■ 396

Jumelle & Peurier de la Bathie — Termites and Fungi 397

Spaulding, Pekley — Fungi in Clay Mine* 397

Munch — Research on Diseases of Trees 397

lilBLIOGRAPHY 398

McCormick, Florence A. — Homothallic Conjugation in Rhizopus nigricans ,. .. 507

Hagem, O. — Norwegian Mucorini. II .~>07

Muller-Thurgau, H. — Infection of the Vine by Plasmopara viticola 507

Pethybiudge, G. H. — Experiments with Phytophthora 507

Guilliermond, A. — Nuclear Evolution in Ascomycetes 508

Brzezinski, J. — Mildew of the Vine in Poland 50S

Magnus, Paul — Oak-mildew 50S

Peters, L. — Pythium de Baryanum 50.S

Griggs, R. F. — Monochytrium, a New Genus of the Chytridiales 508

Carruthers. D. — Helvetia crispa 50S

Dearxess, J. — Mushroom Poisoning .. 509

Wager, Harold — Yfast-cells and Fermentation 509

Leininger, H. — Study of Fungi imperfecti 509

Diedicke, H. — Genus Phomopsis 510

Janczewski, Ed., & B. Namyslowski — Gloeosporium Ribis 510

Sujmstine, D. R. — Studies in North American Hyphomycetes 510

Filter, P, — Tilletia horrida in Rice-meal 510

Tubeuf, V., & others — Uredinese 510

Zimmerman, H. — Germination of Ustilago Spores 511

Kawamura, S. — Phosphorescence of Pleurotus japonicus 512

31 aire, Rene — Boletus impolitus 512

Molliard, Marin — Hypochnus Form of Fistulina Hepatica 512

Bambeke, Ch. van — Study of Ithyphallus impudicusjxnd Mutin-is caniuus .. .. 512

Pennington, L. H. — Assimilation of Nitrogen by Fungi 512

Migila, W. — German Fungus -flora 512

Garjeanne, A. J. M. — Fungi in the Rhizoids of Leafy Hepatics 513

Wager, Harold, & others — British Mycology 513

Delacroix, G. — Plant Diseases in the Tropics 514

CONTENTS. XXX 111

PAGE

Bubak, Fr., & others — Disease* of Plants Till

Mercier, L. — Insects a* Fungus-carriers .. ... Til.")

Hohnel, F. van — Notes on Mycology 516

Massee, G., & Harold Wager — Notes on Fungi 516

( 'rossland, C. — Fungus Foray at Sand end 516

Rose, Lidwig — Mycological Flora of Oak-tree Slime-flux ~>I6

Bibliography 517

Kasanowsky, V. — Aphanomyces Ixvis 669

Magnus, P. — Parasitic Root-diseases of the Juncacex 670

Westerdijk, Jon. — Sclerotinia as a Plant-disease 670

Fischer, Ed. — Studies in Ascomycetes 670

Lagarde, J. — Plicaria Planchonis Bond 670

Medisch, M. — Hypocrea rufa 670

Baccarini, P.. & others — Research on Aspergillus 671

Peglion, Vittorio — Notes on Erysiphese 671

Woronighin, N. — Physalosporina, a New Genus of Pyrenomycetes 671

Lewis, M. — Development of the Spores in Pleurage zygospora 671

Harden, A., & W.J.Young — Alcoholic Ferment of Yeast-juice 672

Sydow, H. & P., & H. Diedicke — Sphieropsidex 672

Keiszler, K. von — Parasitic Lichen-fungi 672

Fawcett. H. S., & O. F. Burger — Gum-inducing Diplodia of Peach and Orange 672

Magnus, P. — New Fungi from the Tyrol 673

Buchanan, R. E. — Hyphomycetes 673

Vuillemin, P. — Classification of the Hyphomycetes 673

Rorker, G. B. — Green M u «;trdine of Frog-hoppers 673

Griffon & Maublanc — Thermophilou* Moulds 673

Bethel. Ellsworth, & others — Uredinex 674

Sharp, Lester W. — Nuclear Phenomena in Puccinia Podophylla 675

McAlpine, D., & others— Smut Fungi 675

Munerate, O. — Smut-infection Experiments 676

Petch, T. — Note on the Biology of Septobasidium 676

Patouillard, N., & others — Notes on Larger Fungi 676

Marchand, Leon— Fresco- painting of Fungi 677

Lloyd, 0. G. — Mycological Notes 677

Clarke, E. D., & others — Poisoning by Fungi 677

Ohta, Roustri— Fat -destroying Fungi 677

Nauncii, E. — Research on Diseases of Trees 677

Evans, 1. B. Pole, & Ethel M. Doidge — Plant-diseases in South Africa .. .. 678

Eriksson, Jacob, & others — Plant-diseases 678

Kusano, S. — Mycorldza of Gastrodia 681

Bibliography 681

Moreau, Fernand — Notes on Mucorini 790

Maire, Rene — Notes on Hypocreacex 790

Faull, J. H. — Study of Laboulbeniales 790

Falck, R. — Infection by Ergot Spores 791

Mi th, Fn.—Mildeic of Cherries 791

Winge, O. — Sphserolheca Castagnei L€v 791

Mayor, E..& others— Experimental Researches with TJredineee .. .. .. .. 791

Pritchard, F. J. — Dissemination of Puccinia graminis 792

Kirssanow, L. — Sexuality of Uredinex 792

McAlpine, D. — New Smut in a New Genus of Grass 793

Bredeman, G. — Bunt-spores in Meal, Bran, and Grain 793

Vuillemin, P., & others — Studies of Hyphomycetes 793

Aknaud, G. — Contribution to the Study of Fumagines 794

Harder, R. — Cultures of Mixed Fungi 794

Baccarini, P., & Bresadola — Notes on the Larger Fungi 794

Knief, Hans — Development of Basidi a 794

Fries, Rob. — Spore formation in Nidularia 794

Lloyd, C. G. — Mycological Notes 795

Fawcett, H. S. — Fungus parasitic on Citrus White Fly 795

Voges, Ernst — Leaf-spots of Currant 795

Petch, T. — Physiology and Pathology of Hevea brasiliensis 795

Dec. 20th, 1911 c

XXXIV CONTEXTS.

i A'.r

Edgerton, C. W., & others— Diseases of Plants 796

Sartory, A. — Pathogenic Fungi 798

Plehn, M., & It. Mulson — Fish Disease 799

Barbier. Maurice -Obituary Notice of F. H. Gillot 799

Bibliography '^'*

Lichens.

Riddle, L. W. — American Species of Stereocaulon 89

„ „ Cladonix 8^

Fink, Bruce — Carolyn Wilson Harris : Obituary Notice 90

Bibliography ''[J

Howe, B. Heber — Usnea and its Linnsean Nomenclature 242

Wheldon, J. A. — New Lancashire Lichens 243

Bibliography 24a

Elf vino, F. — Lichen Gonidia 39 J

Hayren, Ernest — Culture of Lichen Gonidia 400

Wahlberg, Arth. — Apothecial Development in Anaptychia and Physcia 401

Bibliography 4° J

Saunders, J. — Distribution of Mycetozoa in the South Midlands 401

Osborn, T. G. B., & A. S. Horxe — Spongospora subterranea 401

Tobler, F. — Nutrition of Lichens 518

Herre, A. W. C. T. — Lichen Flora of Santa Cruz Peninsula, California .. .. 518

„ Desert Lichens .. 519

Riddle, Lincoln, W., & G. K. Merril — American Lichen Notes 519

Hue, Abbe — Crocynia, a Genus of Lichens 519

Kajanus, Birger — Systematic Position of Stereocaulon .. 519

Bibliography 520

Bachmann, E. — Relation of Siliceous Lichens to the Substratum 683

Howe, R. Heber — Northern Species of Alectoria in America 683

Bibliography "S3

Clare Island Survey Committee — West of Ireland Lichens 800

Steiner, J. — Lichens of Italy 801

Kajanus, B. — Morphology of Lichens 801

Fink, Brdce — Nature and Classification of Lichens 801

Bibliography 801

Mycetozoa.

Lisler, G. — Colloderma, a New Genus of Mycetozoa 90

Schwartz, E. J. — Parasites on the Roots of Juncaceae 90

Bibliography 91

Maire, Rene. & Adrien Tison — New Genus of Plasmodiophoracex 243

Bibliography 243

Saunders, J. — Distribution of Mycetozoa in the South Midlands 401

Osborn, T. G. B., & A. S. Horne — Spongospora subterranea 401

Vouk. V. — Streaming of Plasmodia 520

Engelke. C — Notes on Myxomycetes 520

Schwartz, E. J. — Sorosphxra 520

Bibliography .. .. , 521

Jahn, E. — Studies in Myxomycetes 684

Vouk, V. — Alternation of Generations in Myxomycetes 685

Maire, Rene, & Adrian Tison — New Research on Plasmodiophoracex 685

Osborn, T. G. B. — Spongospora subterranea 685

Schwartz, E. J. — Life-history of Sorosphxra gramini* 685

Ledoux-Lebard. R. — Myxomycetes from the Neighbourhood of Paris 801

Lloyd, C. J. — Notes on Myxomycetes 802

CONTENTS. XXXV

Schizophy ta.
Schizomycetes.

TACK

Burui, R.. & P. Andrejew — Comparative Study of Colt-form Organisms .. .. 91

Heile — Bacteriology of Appendicitis 91

Rubinsky, B. — Micro-organisms in Koumiss 92

Conn, H. J. — Bacteria in Frozen Soil 92

Peklo, Y. — Actinomycosis of Plants 92

Houston, A. C, & others — Dieease-carriers 93

KochaIX, A., & A. Dufourt — New Types of Urobacteria 93

Jong, D. A. de — Relation between Avian and Mammalian Tuhrculosis 93

Twort, F. W.—Johne's Bacillus 94

Abderhalden & others — Enzymes in Different Bacteria 9-1

Logie, W. J. — Action of Dysentery Bacilli on Nitrites and Nitrates 94

Metchnikoff, E. — Intestinal Flora 94

Bibliography 94

Schultze, VV. H. — Oxidizing and Reducing Properties of Bacteria 244

Walker, L. C. — Chlorine Method of Water-purification 244

Bevacqua, A. — Bacteriology of Landry's Paralysis 244

Biernacki, W. — Bacillus Nenckii: New Agar liquefying Organism 24.1

Camisa, G. — Bacteriology of Chorea 245

Monaco, E. L. Lo — Virulence of Pneumococcus and Streptococcus 245

Sangiorgi, G. — Mouse Epizootic due to a Coliform Bacillus 24G

McLaughlin, A. J., & E. R. Whitmore — Characters of Cholera and Cholera-lilce

Organisms 246

Petiiybridge, G. H., & P. A. Murphy — Bacterial Disease of Potato-plant .. . . 247

Aumann — Distribution of Paratyphoid Bacilli 402

Beijerinck, M. W. — Acetobacter melanagenum 402

Negre, L. — Agglutination of Micrococcus melitenns by Normal Sera 402

Maurel, E. — Survival of Intestinal Organisms in Cooked Meats 403

Darbois, P. — Resistance of Micrococcus meliteiisis to Lactic Ferments 403

Ambroz, A. — Thermobiosis 403

Penau, H.— Bacterial Cytology 404

Pinoy, M. E. — Sporotrichum beurmanni in Man 404

Hewlett, R. T.— Soured Milk 404

Mercier, L., & R. de Drouin de Bouville — Bacillary Disease among Fish .- 405

Pringsheim, H. — Nitrifying Organisms in Soil 405

Beijerinck, M. W. — Absorption Phenomenon in Microbes 521

Mendel, Y. — Fermentation of Sugars by Bacteria 521

Remy, Th., & G. Rosing — Methods of Agricultural Bacteriology 521

Stromberg, H. — Change of Biological Characters in Bacteria 522

Niosi, F. — Strict Anaerobic Bacillus causing Purulent Pleurisy 522

Galli-Valerio, R. — Verruga peruana 522

Levaditi, C, & C. Twort — Trypanotoxin of Bacillus subtilis 522

Darwacki, L. — Presence of Streptotrichese in Tuberculous sputum 522

Dobell, C. C. — Cytology of the Bacteria 523

Pavarino, G. L. — Bacterium Briosii 523

Greig-Smith, R. — Action of Wax-solvents and the Presence of Thermolabile

Bacteriotoxins on Soil 523

Bulloch, W .—Tuberculosis 523

Ford, W. W. — Bacteriology of Baltimore City Water 524

Penau, H. — Minute Structure of Bacillus anthracis 524

Grunbaum & others — Experimental Typhoid Fever 524

Penfold, W. J.— Variability of Intestinal Bacteria 525

K'jhnemann, G. — Capsule-formation of Typhoid Bacilli 525

Galli-Valerio, B. — Etiology of Rhinosocleroma 525

Pelz, E. — Nitrite-formation by Various Bacteria .. 526

Waipole, G. S. — Action of Bacillus Lactis Aerogenes upon Glucose 526

Muller, Reiner — Variations of Typhoid and Dysentery Bacilli 526

Bertarelli, E. — Cultivation of Leprosy Bacillus 526

Bibliography 527

C

■>

x.xx vi i i;nt>

PAGE

Barnabd, .1. Edwin — A Method of Disintegrating Bacteria and other Organic

Cells (Plate XVIII. and FigB. 72, 73) " 592

DlSTASS, A.— Bacillus Celhilosx Detagregan* sp.n 686

Ellis, D. — Spirophyllum ferrugineum .. .. 686

Omeliansky, W. L., iV- (). P. Ssewerowa — Pigment of Azotolntctir Chroococcum .. 686

Eber, A. — Human and Bovine Tubercle 686

Guegcen, F. — Alopecia areata of Bacterial Origin 687

DlSTASE, A. — Studies of the Intestinal Flora

Vebderame, Ph. — Sarcina Citrea conjunctivae 688

Loris-Melikov, J. — New Anaerobe in Typhoid Stool* 688

Mercies, L., & Ph. Lass el r — Pathogenicity of Bacillus chlororaphis 6S8

Fetrie, G. F., & G. H. Macalistek — h'at Plague in East Anglia 688

Jensen, O. — Bacteriological Studies of Danish Butter 689

Walker, E. \V. A. — Variation and Adaptation in Bacteria 6*'*

Bibliography 689

I'avarino, G. L. — Bacterial Diseases of Orchids 802

Hort, S. — Bacillus Cgpripedii S02

Smith, E. F. — Bacterium tumefaciens

Payarino, G. L. — Bacterium briosianum 803

Meyer, Kurt — Anaerobic Streptothrix 803

Koenigsfeld, H. — Penetration of the Normal Skin by Tubercle Bacilli 803

Reyis, C. — Artificial Production of a permanently atypical Bacillus coli 803

Polacci, G. — Parasite of Babies and Plasmodiophora brassicx 803

Betegh, I. v. — Foot-and-mouth Disease 804

Beckwith, T. D. — Diplococcus gadidarum, the cause of the Reddening of Cod and

other allied Fish 804

Johnston, J. R. — Bacillus coli and Plant-diseases 804

Gaspari, F. de — Bacillus pappulus 804

Bernhardt — Scarlet-fever Virus 804

Ktjfferath, H. — Growth of Bacterium zopfii 805

Bibliography 805

CONTENTS. XXXV11

MICROSCOPY'.

A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.
(1) Stands.

PAGE

Nelson, Edward M. — Adams's "Variable" and the Evolution of the Modern

Microscope. (Pigs. 25-30) 178

Wixkels Stand No. 1 (Fig. 31) 248

Travelling Microscope (Fig. 32) 248

,, Dissecting Microscope (Fig. 33) 251

Beck's London Microscope : Handle Model (Fig. 43) 406

Winkel's Stand No. Id (Fig. 44) 406

„ Demonstration Microscope toith Detachable Foot 407

Bibliography 407

Old Microscope by J. Simons : presented by Members of the Council (Fig. 49) . . 528

Rejtos Metal -Microscope (Figs. 50-52) 53 L

Reichert's New Metal-Microscope (Figs. 53-59) 532

Garjeanne's Simple Excursion Microscope (Figs. 74. 75) 690

Winkel's Demonstration Microscope toith Detachable Foot (Figs. 76, 77) .. .. 692
Sommerfeldt, E. — Recent Progress in the Construction of Mineralogical and Metal-
lurgical Microscopes 693

A mann, J. — The Binocular Microscope 806

Cambridge Scientific Instrument Co. — Comparator or Beading Microscope

(Figs. 87, 88) 807

(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives.

Watson Baker, F. W. — Anomalies in Objective Screw Thread*. (Fig. 24) .. .. 175

Edinger's Pointer- Double Ocular (Fig. 34) 252

Bibliography 253

Nelson, Edward M. — On Some New Objectives and Eye-pieces by 11. Winkel, of

Gottingen 451

Winkel's Eye-piece icith Screw Micrometer and Graduated Glass Diaphragm (Figs.

60-61) 536

Nelson. E. M. — The Society's Standard Thread 537

Allan's Variable Eye-piece (Fig. 78) C93

(3) Illuminating- and other Apparatus.

Banfield, H. C. — Sliding nose-piece for use in Stereo-photomicrography (Fig. 4) .. 95

Gage, H. P. — Arc Lamps for Projection 96

Cepede, C. — Improvement in the Illumination of Objects observed with the Binocular

Microscope 96

Jentsch's Ultra-condenser (Figs. 5-7) 97

Concentric Condenser (Figs. 8, 9) 98

Ponzo. M. — Simple Method of making Drawings for Projection Purposes 100

Jentsch's Electric Heating Apparatus for Microscopical Observations (Figs. 10-14) 100

Sommerfeldt, E. — New Method for Microscopical Metallography (Fig. 35) .. .. 253

Kohler, A. — Application of Mercury Light to Microscopical Works (Fig. 36) .. 253

Heath, C. E. — New Microscope Lamp (Fig. 37) . 255

Hilger, Adam — Microspectroscope (Fig. 38) 256

Hipple, H. — Plug Micrometer (Fig. 39) 256

Bibliography 256

Houstodn, R. A. — Efficiency of Metallic Filament Lamps 408

Reichekt's New Breath Screen (Fig. 45) 408

XXXV ill CONTENTS.

PAGE

Himoff, M— Impiored Micrometer (Figs. 46 & 47) 408

Zeiss, Messrs. Carl — Directions for using Glass Micrometers 538

Beck, C. —Interferometer (Fig. 02) 539

KEELEY, F. J. — Micro-spectroscopic Observation 539

Ignatowsky, W. v. — History of the Cardioid Condenser : Memorandum on the Leitz

Mirror-condenser 693

Schaffnit, E. — Apparatus for Microscopical Observation of Frozen Objects (Fig.

79) .. 693

Leiss' Universal Spectral Apparatus (Figs. 80, 81) 694

ScHl'LZ, H.— Glass Polarizing Prisms (Figs. 82, S3) 697

Beckenkamp. J. — Aids to Crystalloptic Projection 698

Kmrys-Roberts Microscope Lamp (Fig. S4) 698

Tbiepel, H. — Model of the Vibration-planes of Light in the Polarizing Apparatus

(Fig. 85) 698

Leitz Liliput Arc-lamp 699

Kohler, A. — New Nernst Lamp for Microprojection (Figs. 89, 90) 808

Stednicka, F. K. — Sliding-objective Changers and Revolvers 810

Koenigsberger, J. — Methods for the Identification of Sub-microscopic Structures

(Figs. 91, 92) 810

New Zeiss Nernst Lamp (Fig. 93) 810

Nelson, E. M.— Winkel's Drawing Microscope (Figs. 94-96) 811

Reichert's Dark-ground Illuminator with Arrangement for Centring on a Plain Stage

(Figs. 97-99) 814

(4) Photomicrography.

Barnard, J. Edwin — A Simple Method of Obtaining Instantaneous Photomicro-
graphs (Fig. 1.) 19

„ „ On the'JJse of a Metallic Electric Arc in Photomicrography 21

MtJLLEB, R. — Simple Object-holder for Photomicrography : Tables of Magnifications 103

Wratten & Wainwright's Photomicrography 103

Boyer, J. — New Photographic Apparatus of the Paris School of Mines (Fig. 15) .. 103

Bibliography 105

Burling, L. D. — Photographing Fossils by Reflected Light (Fig. 40) 257

Spitta, E. J. — A Report on the Grayson's Ridings presented by Mr. R. C. Beck to

tlie Royal Microscopical Society 449

Leitz' Small Photomicrographic Apparatus (Fig. 63) 540

„ New Large Photomicrographic Apparatus (Fig. 64) 541

Photomicrographic Apparatus for Photographing Insects (Fig. 65) .. .. 543

Barnard, J. E. — Practical Photomicrography 544

Orceta, Domingo de — Apparatus for Photomicrography with the Microscope

standing in any Position, especially in Inclined Position (Figs. 70, 71 ) .. 588

Bibliography 700

Bagshaw, Walter — Instantaneous Exposure in Photomicrography 721

Pigg, J. I. — Stereoscopic Photomicrography 816

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipxilation.

Haeswaldt, Hans — Interference Phenomena in Polarized Light (Plate III.) .. .. 105

Merlin, A. A. C. Elict — On the Measurement of Grayson's New Ten-Band Plate.. 160
Wright, F. E. — Transmission of Light through Transparent Inactive Crystal Plates,

with special Reference to Observations in Convergent Polarized Light .. .. 409
( hauveau, M. A. — Phenomena of Visual Inhibition which may accompany the re-
association of the two Retinal Images dissociated by the Prisms of the Stereo-
scope. Conditions and determination of these Phenomena 410

Bibliography 410

Amann, J. — Ultramicroscopical Study of Solutions of Iodine 545

Bares, C. — Elliptic Interference with Reflecting Grating (Fig. 66) 545

Bibliography 546

Lendekfeld, R. yon — Observations on the Technical Execution and Biological Real-
ization of Microscopical Measurements 700

Bell, L. — Opacity of Certain Glasses for the Ultra-violet 700

Beck, C. — Pupil of an Optical System with regard to Perspective (Figs. 100, 101) 817

CONSENTS. XXXlX

(6) Miscellaneous.

PAGE

Rayleigh— Sensibility of the Eye to Variations of Wave-length in the Yellow Region

of the Spectrum ] 06

Quekett Microscopical Club 106

Bibliography jog

Shattock. S. G. — Microscopic Structure of Uric Acid Calculi 258

Sobotta, Y. — Coloured Plates of Microscopical Preparations 25S

Giacomo, A. de — Microchemical Demonstration of Guanin 258

Jonnesco, V. —Histological Changes in Infantile Paralysis , 253

Quekett Microscopical Club 259

G lye, P. A. — Infinitely Small Chemical Magnitudes 410

Baily, F. G. — Stereoscopic Illusion (Fig. 48) 411

Quekett Microscopioal Club 412

Bibliography ' .. .. " 4.13

Quekett Microscopical Club .. [." 546

Merlin, A. A. C. E. — Some New Diatomic Structure discovered with a Xew Zeiss

Apochromat 700

The Micrologist " " 701

Griffiths, WaldroX— Principal Starches used ax Food '.. 701

Bibliography -# 701

Quekett Microscopical Club 819

B. Technique.

(1) Collecting- Objects, including' Culture Processes.

Park. W. R., & C. Krumwiede— Cidtivation of Human and Bovine Tubercle Bacilli 107

Twort, F. W. — Method of Isolating and Growing the Lepra Bacillus of Man.. .. 107

Burrows, M. T., & others— Artificial Cultivation of Animal Tissues 107

Mayer, O.— Modified Method of Isolating Typlwid and Paratyphoid Bacilli .. .. 108

Dudgeon, L. S., & others — New Method for Differentiation of Bacteria 109

Domergue, F., & R. Legendres— Rapid Method of Identifying Bacillus coli.. .. 109

Glaser, E., & Y. Hachla— Selective Action of Dieudpnne"s Medium 260

Liachowetzky, M. — New Method for Studying Movements of Bacteria 260

Nicolle, C, & L. Manceacx— Methods of Investigating Oriental Sore 261

Wollman, Eng. — Rearing Sterile Flies .' 261

Hartwell, H. F., & E. C. Streeter— Bacillus of Acne 262

Volpixo. G., & E. Cleb — Examination of Water for Typhoid Bacilli by the Com-
plement-fixation Method 547

Duclaux, J., & A. Hamelin— Collodion Filters 548

Grenet & Salimbem— Resistance to Passage of Microbes through Collodion Filters 548

Gueguen, F. — Rapid Method for Isolating Vospora lingualis 548

Eraser, Elizabeth T. — Cultivation Medium for the Influenza Bacillus and Ducrey's

Bacillus 549

Nicolle, C, & L. Manceaux— Culture of Leishmania tropica on Solid Media .. 549

Bibliography ;,49

Arnheim, G— Cultivation of Spirochetes 819

Schouten, S. L., & A. W. Nieuwenhuis— Pure Cultures from a Single Cell .. .. 819

Noguchi, H.— Cultivation of Spirochxta pallida 820

Thalhkimer, W. — New Method for making Blood-agar for Cultivating Bacillus

influenzae 820

(2) Preparing Objects.

Elmassian, M.— Examining the Salivary Glands of Ticks 109

Hirschfeldek, G. — Methods of Studying Rotifera 110

Meek, W. O.— Method of Studying Phaaocytosis by Endothelial Cells 110

Poppe, K.— Simple Shaker (Yig. 16) .'. Ill

Schridde, H. — Fixation and Embedding of Embryological Material Ill

Xl CONTENTS.

TAGE

Bibliography 112

Wager, II. — Demonstrating the Structure of the Yeast-cell ~'i'2

Jeffrey, E. C. — Investigating Nature of Supposed Algal Coal* 262

Bedau, K. — Studying the Compound Eyes of Water-mites 413

S( iiultze, O. — New Methods of Histological Technique 549

Mi'NTAnari, A. — Effects of Pyridiu Fixation upon Nervous Tissues 702

Schaffnit, E. — Simple Washing Apparatus (Fig. 86) 702

Strecker, F. — Simultaneous Fixing and Staining 702

Bawitz, B. — Preparation of Kaiserling Material for Microscopical Purposes.. .. 703

Bodecker, C. F. — Celloidin Decalcification Method 820

Zieglwallner, F. — Fixation and Staining of Glycogen K21

Pcschkarew, B. — Studying Amcebx 821

Komeis, B. — Washing and Dehydrating Apparatus (Fig. 102) 822

(3) Cutting-, including' Embedding and Microtomes.

Gemmill, F. J. — Adaptation of Ordinary Paraffin Baths for Vacuum Embedding

(Fig. 3) *. 26

Berner, 6.— Apparatus for Boll ing Wax Plates (Figs. 17, 18) 112

Wilson, J. T. — Manipulation of Paraffin Sections 113

Mayer, P.— Tetrander Microtome (Figs. 19, 20) 113

Maier, F. — New Method of making Celloidin Serial Sections 116

Wilson, J. T. — Utilizing Organized Structures as Directing Marks for Plastic Becon-

strurtion (Kigs. 21, 22) 116

Mozejko, B. — Injection Preparations of Petromyzon 263

Latter, O. H. — Demonstrating Presence of Starch in a Leaf 263

Shattock, S. G. — Method of obtaining Sections of Urinary Calculi 263

Bibliography 264

Kutherford, N. C. — Modification of the Freiburg Method of putting on a Directing

plane (Bichtungs-Ebene) for Reconstruction 549

Leitz, E. — Microtome-knives 703

Grayson, H. J. — Improvements in Bock-section Cutting Apparatus (Plates XX.

to XXIII.) 703

Grayson, H. J. — Method of Slicing, Grinding, and Mounting Bock-sections .. .. 706

(4) Staining and Injecting.

Achard, C. — Distinguishing Dead from Living Leucocytes , 117

Lenartowicz, J. T., & K. Potrzobowskt — New Method of Demonstrating Spirorhseta

pallida 118

Frohlich, A.- — Use of Picrarnic Acid for Staining 118

Hatano. S. — Combined Staining Methods for Tubercle bacilli 118

Morel, C, & Bassal — Staining in bidk tcith Hematoxylin US

Collin, R., & M. Llcien — Staining the Internal Network in Nerve-cells 119

Balint, S. — Neio Methods of Demonstrating Plasmodes 119

Loyez, Marie, & J. Nageotte — Staining Celloidin Sections of Nervous Tissuebythe

Iron-hiematoxylin Method 119

Potter, E. — Staining the Medullary Sheath in Brain-sections 120

SSabrazes. J. — Staining Blood-films 264

Renaut, J. — Demonstrating the Presence of Mitochondria in Cartilage-cells . . . . 264
Ghokeyeb, A. A. W. — Neiv and Quick Method for Staining Spirochetes in Smear

Preparations 265

Dobell, C C. — Studying the Cytology of Bacteria 413

Giemsa, G. — B ipid Staining with Giemsa's Azur-eosin Solution 414

Krogh, Mentz von — New Method of Chromatin Staining 414

Masson. P. — Saffron in Histological Technique 414

Smith, J. Lorrain. & W. Mair — Staining of Fats 549

Schilling, C. — Apparatus for Bomanowsky Staining (Fig. 67) 550

Rosenblat, S. — Methods of Staming Tubercle Bacilli 550

Tobler, F. — Improved Method of Iodine Staining 551

Retterer, E., & A. Lelievre — Method for Studying Osseous Tissue 551

CONTENTS. xli

PAGE

Kowallik,G. — Staining Bordered Pits 709

Vialleton, L., & A. Juillet — Injection of Fusible Alloys in Microscopical Anatomy 822

Eurich, P. W. — New Method for the Detection of Tubercle bacilli in Sputum . . .. 823

Fischer, H.— Negative Staining of Bacteria 823

(5) Mounting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc.

Broqdet, 0. — Met hod of Preserving Plague Material 120

Bentley-Taylob MetJiod of Mounting Mosquitos 120

Neumayer, L. — Celloidin in Microscopical Technique . . 121

Greenish, H. G. — Microscopical Examination of Foods and Drugs [Tig. 123) .. 121
Hehzog,G. — Drop-bottle for Preventing the Action of Air on Copper-oxide-ammonia

Solution (Fig. 23) 122

Krause. F. — Simple Arrangement for Determining the Sinking -velocity of Plankton

Organisms 122

Balint, S. — New Mounting Medium for Botanical Preparations 265

Coles, A. C. — Fading of Anilin-stained Microscopical Preparations and a New

Medium 415

Langeron, M. — Mounting Artliropoda in Amann's CI dor al phenol 416

Heath, C. E. — Fluid Mounting 551

Amann, Y.— Direct Enumeration of Bacteria in Water 552

Liesegang, R. E. — Method of Preserving Brain Sections 552

(6) Miscellaneous.

Gehmill, F. J. — Aerator Suitable for Laboratory Aquaria (Tig. 2) 24

Delcourt, A. — Immobilizing Flies for Microscopic Investigation (Tig. 41) .. .. 266

Seymour-Jones, A. — Anthrax Sterilization Process applied to Hides in Dry State 266

Tait, W. H.— Self -regulating Siphon (Fig. 42) 267

Sabouraud, R., & A. Vernes — Filtering by Aid of the Centrifuge .■ 267

Mastin, John — Polishing Metallic Preparations for Microscopical Examination .. 267

Morosoff, M. — New Forceps 416

Fox, G. P.— Film Test for Crude Rubber 416

Permix, C. — Improved Form of Graduated Pipette (Fig. 68) 553

Hall. M. 0. — Method of Examining Faeces fur Evidences of Parasitism 554

R. & J. Beck's Grinding and Polishing Machine for making Microscopical Specimens

for Metallurgical Work (Fig. 69) ' 554

Breed, R. S. — Enumeration of Bacteria in Milk 710

Starcke, A. — Preserving Brains 824

Pawson, C. F., & H. P. Bassett — Turbidomeier for Counting Vaccines 824

Laxge — Agglutination of Trypanosomas 824

Bibliography 825

Metallography, etc.

Benedicks, C. — Polymorphism of Zinc 123

Breckeniudge, J. M. — Aluminium-calcium Alloys 123

Masing, G., & G. Tammann — Alloys of Lithium 123

Urasow, G. G., & R. Vogel— Gold-magnesium Alloy" 123

Bruni, G, & E. Quekcigh — Silver-cadmium Alloys 123

Kurnakow, N., & others — Silver-copper Alloys 124

QderciGH, E. — Silver-sodium Alloys 124

Bkuni, G., & others — Ternary Alloys of Magnesium, Zinc, and Cadmium .. .. 124

Parravano, N., & E. Viviani — Alloys of Copper, Antimony, and Bismuth .. .. 124

Heyn, E, & O.Bauer— Heat-treatment of Bronze 124

Bakaduc-Miller, L. — Metallic Silicides 125

Johnson, F. — Impurities in Copper 125

DoNNAN, F. G., & T. W. A. Sh aw— Solubility of Oxygen in Molten Silver .. .. 125

xlii CONTENTS.

I'AGE

Kuoll, A. — Crystallography of the Iron-carbon System 125

Li ike, II. — Iron-earbon Alloys 125

< i"i:REN3, P., & H. Meyer — Trantformation-point Curve y- to /3- or a- Iron .. .. 12<>
Schols, C. — Influence of Silicon on the Maximum Solubility of Carbide of 'Iron in

y-Iron 126

Friedrich. K. — Iron Sulphide iron- System 126

Rueb, R., & E. ScHiJz— Iron-ni hel Sydem 126

Burgess. C. F., & others — Iron-nickel-copper Alloys 127

BlBLIOGIlAPIIY 127

Broniewski, W. — Aluminium-silver Alloys 268

Grenet, L. — Quenching of Brontes 268

Hague, A. — Bearing Metals 268

Sieverts, A., & W. Krumbhaar — Behaviour of Copper towards Gates 268

Janecke, E. — Ternary Systems 269

Portevin, A. — Cementation by Gases 269

Giolitti,F., & others— Cementation of Steel 269

Weyl, F. — Cementation in a Vacuum 269

Wt st, F., & H. L. Felser — Influence of Segregation on the Strength of Mill Steel 270

Goerexs, P. — Gates in Commercial Steel and Iron 270

Joisten, A. — Grain-size in Iron 270

Hilpert. S. — Magnetic Properties of the Modificat'ons of Iron 270

Gcertler, W. — Iron-nickel Meteorite 270

Barrett, W. F. — Historical Note on L'ecalescence 270

Edwards, C. A. — Theory of Hardening Carbon Steels 271

Brayshaw, S. X. — Hardening of Carbon and Low-tungsten Tool-steels 271

Natweieff- -Slag in Steel 271

Bridgman, P. W.— Action of Mercury on Steel at High Pressures 272

Hague, A., & T. Turner — Influence of Silicon on Last Iron 272

Coe, H. I. — Manganese in Cast Iron * 272

Wawrziniok, O. — Fixing Objects to Stage 273

Robin, F. — Photomicrographic Apparatus 273

Hilpert, E., & E. Colver-Glauert — Sulphurous Acid as an Etching Medium .. 273

Smith, J. K.— Fatigue of Metals 274

Baume, G. — Measurement of Hardness 274

Andrade, E. N. da C. — Viscous Flow in Metals ,. 274

Bornemann, K., & P. Muller— Electrical Conductivity of Molten Alloys .. ., 274

Somerville, A. A. — Temperature Co efficients of Electrical Resistance 274

Passow, H. — Microscopical Examination of Blast-furnace Siuq 275

Bibliography ' .. .'. .. .. 275

Bornemann, K. — Nickel-sulphur System 416

Pellini, G., & E. Quercigh — Tellurides of Sodium and of Silver 410

Kobayashi, M. — Tellurium Alloys 416

Coste, M. — Gold-tellurium System 416

Geibel, W.— Alloys of the Noble Metals 417

Cohen, E., & K. Inouye — Physico-chemical Studies of Lead 417

Cohen, E., & P. J. H. van Ginneken— Zinc Amalgams 417

Barlow, W. E. — Alloys of Cadmium, Bismuth, and Lead 417

Bengocgh, G. D., & O. F.Hudson— Heat-treatment of Brass 417

Primrose, H. S. — Metallography as an Aid to the Brassfounder 41S

Ewen, D., & T. Turner— Shrinkage of the Antimony-had Alloys 418

Johnson, F. — Effect of Silver, Bismuth and Aluminium upon Copper 418

Guillemin, G., & B. Delachanal — Occluded Gases in Copper Alloys 418

Liesching, T. — Influence of Sulphur on the Iron-carbon System 418

Chatei.ier,H.le — Spontaneous Disintegration of Aluminium 555

„ „ Mttallographic Notes 556

Mathewson, C. H. — Alloys of Sodium ivith Silver and Gold .. 556

Parravano, N. — Ternary System, Silver-tin-lead 556

Loebe, R. — Ternary Alloys of Lead, Tin and Antimony 556

Pellini, G., & E. Quercigh — Gold Tellurides 557

JoYNEB, R. A. — Amalgams containing Silver and Tin 557

Berry, A. J. — Occlusion of Hydrogen by Palladium-gold Alloys 557

Morris, H. J., & A. McWilliam — Properties of Cast and Eolled Gobi Plate .. 557

CONTENTS. xliii

PAGE

Janecke. K— Flow-pressure of Tin 557

Kirner. J. — Influence of Nitrogen on Cementation of Steel 558

Lang, G. — Influence of Manganese on Mild Steel 558

Baykofp, A,& H. le Ch atelier — Iron-carbon System 558

Portevin, A. — Iron-antimony Alloys 558

Keohnke, O. — " Graphitic" Cast-iron 559

Giolitti, F., & others— Malleable Cast-iron 559

Hatfield, W. H. — Precipitation of Free Carbon in the Iron-carbon System .. .. 559

Benedicks, C. — Synthesis of Meteoric Iron 559

Winter, H. — Effect of Galvanizing on Strength of Steel Wire 559

Camfbell, W. — Annealing of Steel 559

Bernouilli, A. L. — Thermo-electric Forces of Solid Sol dions 560

Desch, C. H.— Defects in Alloys 560

Benedicks, C, & A. Lottermoser — Solid Colloid Systems in Metallography .. 560

Muller, P. — Electrical Conductivity of Molten Alloys 560

Bornemann, K. — Equilibrium Diagrams 560

Janecke, E. — Ternary Systems 561

Portevin, A. — Pseudo-binary Alloys 561

Sauveur, A — Apparatus for Microscopical Examination of Metals 561

Robin, F., & P. Gartner — Colour-etching of Steel 561

Faust, O., & G. Tammann — Limits of Elasticity, and the Hardening of Metals .. 562

Guillet, L. — Reheating of Cold-worked Metals 562

Heyn, E., & O. Bauer — Stresses in Cold-worked Metals 562

Gris, Le — Simplification in Technique of Metallography 562

Losew, K. — Composition of Eutectics 563

Broniewskt, W. — Electrical Conductivity of Alloys 563

Wagner, E. — Electrical Conductivity of Molten Metals 563

Johnston, J., & L. H. Adams — Influence of Pressure on the Melting-points of Metals 563

Bibliography 563

Carpenter, H. O. H., & C. A. Edwards — New Critical Point in Copper-zinc Alloys 710

Rosenhain, W., & S. L. Archbutt — Alloys of Aluminium and Zinc 711

Wilm, A. — Aluminium Alloys containing Magnesium 711

Mazzotto, D. — Lead-tin Alloys 711

Brum, G., & D. Meneghini — Formation of Solid Metallic Solutions by Diffusion in

the Solid State . . ' .. .. 712

Frilley, R. — Alloys of Silicon with Metals 712

Guichard, M. — Extraction of Gases from Copper 712

Benedicks, 0. — Crystallization of White Cast-iron 712

Guillaume, C. E. — Changes occurring in Nickel Steel 713

Benedicks, C. — Ovifak Iron 713

Giolotti, F., & others — Cementation of Alloy Steels 713

Guerther. W. — Structure of Galvanized Iron 713

Stead, J. E. — Welding-up of Bloio-holes and Cavities in Steel Ingots 713

Law, E. F., & others— Some Studies of Welds 714

Robin, F. — Resistance of Steels to Abrasion and to Crushing 714

Gris, Le — " Filiations" of Metallic Alloys 715

Pbauss, S. — Jointed Arm for Workshop Microscope 715

Bengough, G. D., & J. T. Corner— Corrosion of Metals 715

Howe, H. M. — Nucleus Action and Grain-growth 716

National Physical Laboratory 716

Broniewski, W. — Aluminium-magnesium Alloys 825

Vournasos, A. G. — Bismuthides 825

Jolibois, P., & others — Arsenides of Tin 825

Prerenko, G. J., & A. S Fedorow — Alloys of Silver with Cadmium 825

Pelabon. H. — Selenium-antimony System 826

Giebel, W.— Alloys of Noble Metals 826

Ruer, N., & N. Iljin — Iron-carbon System 826

Carpenter. H. C. H. — Growths of Cast-irons after repeated Heatings 826

Gontermann, W. — Iron-silicon-carbon Alloys S26

Levy, D, M. — Malleable Castings 827

Colver-Glauert, E., & S. Hilpert — Magnetic Properties of Nickel Steels .. .. 827

Xliv ("MINTS.

PAGE

Porteyin, A. — Chromium Steeh 827

MoW.lliam, A., & E. J. Barnes— Nickel Steels 827

Mo William, & others — Influence of Vanadium on Iron and Steel 821

MoCanoe, A.— Troostile 827

Oknoff, M. — Internal Structure of Pearlitic Steel 828

Lange, E. F.— Crystallzation of Steel

Cobb, J. W. — Influence of Impurities on the Corrosion of Iron 828

Tamjiann. G. — Changes in Properties of Metals upon Working 828

Lorenz, It., & others — Metallic Fog in Fused 'Salts 828

Desch, C. H.— Ccystallization of Cast Metals 828

Bibliography 828

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Meeting, December 21, 1910 128

January 18, 1911 132

„ February 15, ,, 276

March 15, „ 280

April 19, „ 419

May 17, „ 425

„ June 28, „ 565

October 18, „ 831

„ November 15, „ 835

General Index to Volume 841

J0URN.R.MICR.S0C.1911.P1. 1.

4a P "A 3c

J. Murray del. ad nat.

West, Newman photo-lit,h.

African Rotifers.

JOUENAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

FEBRUARY, 1911.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

I. — Some African Rotifers: Bdelloida of Tropical Africa.
By J. Murray, F.R.S.E. F.Z.S.

(Bead December 21, 1910.)

Plates I. and II.

These notes on African Rotifers are rendered possible by the
kindness of various friends, who have sent me mosses from different
parts of tropical Africa. The material for a previous paper on the
same subject was provided by Mr. N. D. F. Pearce, of Cambridge,
and the results appeared in this Journal in 1908 (19).*

* The figures in brackets refer to the Bibliography at the end of paper.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Fig. la. — Habrotrocha caudata sp. n. Lateral view of animal in its case.

„ lb. — Ditto. Dorsal view of empty case.

,, lc. — Ditto. Dorsal view of head.

,, Id. — Ditto. Animal without its case, more highly magnified.

,, le. — Ditto. Jaw.

,, 2a. — Callidina allani sp. n. Dorsal view, feeding. »

„ 26. — Ditto. .Head, to larger scale, showing horse-shoe mark.

,, 2c. — Ditto. Jaw.

,, 3a. — Philodina. Undescribed species, resembling Mniobia russeola.

,, 3b. — Ditto. Jaw.

„ 3c. — Ditto. Rump and foot.

„ 3d. — Ditto. Spurs and toes.

,, 3c. — Ditto. Rostrum and lamellae.

„ 4a. — Habrotrocha appendiculata sp. n. Dorsal view.

„ 46. — Ditto. Jaw.

,, 5a. — H. brocklehursti sp. n. Dorsal view, feeding.

,, 56. — Ditto. Dorsal view, fully extended.

,, 5c. — Ditto. Jaw.

„ 5d. — Ditto. Spurs.

Feb. 15th, 1911 b

2 Transactions of the Society.

During I'.MO Mr. A. Allan, of Kikuyu, British Easl Africa, was
good enough to send frequently large parcels of moss, properly

collected and dried, in which there were found numerous Bdelloid
Rotifers, including several interesting and some new species.

Sir Philip Brock lehurst, on a hunting tour in the same region,
kindly collected moss on a mountain (iOOO feet high.

Mr. Allan's collections were from different localities and alti-
tudes, of which he sent details in letters, but unfortunately this
useful information cannot be used to discriminate the species from
the different altitudes, as, owing to postal delays and irregularities,
we often could not tell to which of several parcels an explanatory
letter referred.

The species in this list appear under several unfamiliar generic
names, which require a word of explanation. These genera, which
include many old friends among the species, are adopted from Mr.
Bryce's recently published Classification of the Bdelloids (J). The
new genera represented in our list are three in number.

Plev/retra includes 4-toed Bdelloids (formerly Callidin.v) which
have a stiff leathery trunk, deeply plicate, the folds on the ventral
side transverse. (Species alpium, brycei, humerosa.)

Mniobia includes those species (formerly Callidinse) which have
no distinct toes, but a discoid sucker instead. (Species tetraodon,
scarlatina, symbiotica, etc.)

Habrotrocha includes all the pellet-making Callidinse, except
one or two very aberrant forms, which have been made into dis-
tinct genera. (Species constricta, lata, perforata, etc.)

The genera Philodina and Gallidina remain as before, but
restricted by the separation of the groups defined above, and of
some others which are not represented in our list. The genus
Rotifer is scarcely affected, but is more strictly defined, and receives
a few viviparous species, previously regarded as Callidinse.

In all descriptions as many of the principal dimensions as
possible are given. These are not meant as bard and fast data., of
specific importance. The species vary somewhat in size. They
are intended to give the relative proportions with sufficient accu-
racy to enable one who knows the Bdelloids well to construct a
figure which would give some idea of the appearance if the original
drawing were lost.

The species in Sir Philip Brocklehurst's collection are not
numerous — there were only four species of Rotifera and a few
Tardigrada. Nevertheless, two of the Rotifera are new to science.
One of these is known to Mr. Bryce, and will be described by him.
The other I name after the finder. These facts indicate the assist-
ance which can be rendered to science by sportsmen, when they
are thoughtful enough amid the excitements of the chase to pocket
a little moss as occasion offers in those remote regions to which
they penetrate.

Some African Rotifers. By J. Murray.

In this paper I am enabled to add to the results obtained from
Mr. Pearce's material three species which were not so completely
studied as to be published with the others. They are two tube-
dwelling species of Habrotrocha, H. caudata and H. ampulla, and
a Mniobia, M. scabrosa. Only dead specimens were got in Mr.
Pearce's moss. The animals have since been seen alive, both in
Central and South Africa (and M. scabrosa even in Australia), and
fuller studies have thus been rendered possible.

List of Species.

Philodina rugosa Bitch (4).
P. plena Bryce (3).
P. vorax JansoTi {12).
Pleuretra alpium Ehr. {10).
P. brycei Weber {23).
P. humerosa Murray (14).
Gallidina habita, Bryce {3).
G.formosa Murray {15).
C.pliciita Bryce {!).
G. punctata sp. n.
G. allani sp. n.
G. papillosa Thomp. {22).
G. aculeata Milne (18).
G. multispinosa Thomp. (22).
G.pinniger Murray (19).
Mniobia tetraodon Ehr. (9).
M. russeola Zel. (24).

M. scarlatina Ehr. (10).

M. scabrosa sp. n.

Rotifer longirostris Janson (12).

Habrotrocha perforata Murray (15).

H. caudata sp. n.

H. ampulla sp. n.

H. longiceps Murray (17).

H. pus ilia Bryce (2).

H. acornis sp. n.

H. constricta Duj. (7).

H. appendiculata sp. n.

H. brocklehursti sp. n.

H. auriculata sp. n.

Adineta vaga Davis (6).

A. barbata Janson (12).

A. longicornis Murray (15).

Notes on the Species.

Philodina plena Bryce (3).
Synonym : Gallidina plena.

The egg of Philodina plena is of unusual form. It is elliptical,
with both poles produced into processes. It is not circular in trans-
verse section, but a good deal flattened. Looking at its broad side,
the whole outline shows a series of rounded knobs. Looking at
the narrow side, the projections are seen to be rounded ridges,
which are highest at the side and die out on the flat surface of the
egg. They are like interrupted annulse. In examples from
Kikuyu there were about ten of these prominences, including those
at the poles.

Philodina vorax Janson (12).
Synonym: Callidina vorax.

This species appears to be commoner in warm climates than in
temperate, In Kikuyu it appears as a distinct variety, smaller
than the type, and with the spurs narrower and with very small
points.

b 2

4 Transactions <>/' the Society.

PhUodina rugosa Bryce (J/).

This is the most frequent member of the genus in washings of
mosses, and it occurs almost constantly in collections from tropical
and sub-tropical countries. Abundant.

PhUodina sp. Plate I. figs. 3a-3e.

A very remarkable species. I found it in Mr. Allan's moss,
and figured and described it as a new species for inclusion in this
paper, when I learned from Mr. Bryce that it had been previously
found in South Africa by Mr. Milne. I have let the figure remain,
as it was already drawn on the plate, and give a brief descrip-
tion here, while awaiting Mr. Milne's name.

Description. — Large and very stout ; length, when feeding,
400 [x ; diameter of corona, 150/a; neck, 80 ll; trunk, 140 /t; across
spurs, 35 jx. Disks large, and sulcus as wide as disk ; central peg-
like papillae on disks. Eostrum broad, lamella? separate. Antenna
moderate. Jaws large, 40 /x long, with four or five teeth in each.
Segments of trunk deeply constricted and plicate. Foot, 4-jointed ;
spurs, thick cones, separated by wide interspace. No eyes.

The most remarkable feature about this animal is its almost
perfect mimicry of Mniobia russeola. It has the same stout figure,
large corona, wide sulcus, peg-like central papillae, spurs, numerous
teeth, and red colour. Only the toes distinguish it. The differ-
ence between four or five teeth and six or seven teeth is not
striking at a casual glance. Unless the toes happen to be noticed,
it is very likely to be recorded as russeola. Abundant.

Pleuretra alpium Ehr. (10).

Synonym : Gallidina alpium.

There is a form of Pleuretra which is common in warm climates,
and differs conspicuously from the type, and which 1 yet hesitate
to separate, on account of the absence of salient features. It
differs from the type in its small size and lack of the warm brown
colour. In size and colour it is like P. humerosa, yet it differs still
more from that, having fewer transverse ventral folds, and lacking
the peculiar characters of rostrum and face which distinguish that
species. The spurs are slender, straight, parallel, and separated by
a wide interspace."

Pleuretra brycei Weber (%o).
Synonym : Callidina brycei.

Variety : distinctive characters. — Main dorsal row of processes
consisting of eight blunt conical knobs and two low rounded knobs

Some African Rotifers. By J. Murray, 5

(the outer processes at each end of the row) : lateral knobs, two at
each side ; spines on anterior margin of trunk very small ; two
papillae on preanal ; semicircular lobe on first foot joint.

The differences from the commonest form are not great, the
chief being the different form of the end spines of the main row,
and the reduction of the anterior spines. Weber does not mention
the lateral spines, or those on the preanal, but these are present in
the majority of the forms. Another form has the dorsal row normal,
and is strongly papillose.

Callidina formosa Murray (15),

Callidina formosa also seems to prefer warm climates. The
Central African form differs from the type in having the foot and
anal segment smooth, and the papillae on the preanal very small.
In the type the large papillae continue on to the rump, and even
to the first foot joint, scarcely reduced in size.

Callidina punctata sp. n. Plate II. figs, lla-lld.

Specific characters. — Of moderate size, stout ; colour dull
opaque yellow, reddish in central parts ; corona large ; collar
prominent ; upper lip divided into two elevated lobes ; antenna

short ; teeth - in each jaw ; skin of trunk stronsrlv

1 + 2+1

stippled ; foot and spurs papillose ; foot, 4-jointed ; spurs, divergent,

obtuse, or subacute, with small interspace.

General description. — Measurements of a small example : length.
225 ll ; diameter of trunk, 75 ll ; corona, 58 /u, ; neck, 46 /a ; across
jaws, 25 ll. Though the average size is small, it occasionally
attains to considerable dimensions. There are central papillae and
set* on the disks. The rostrum is short and thick, and the
lamellae are separated. The length of the antenna is half the
diameter of the neck. The lobes of the upper lip, which are like
those of Callidina habita, can be separated. The jaw has a broad
border, and the principal teeth are very thick. The whole trunk
and foot are dotted. The dots sometimes appear as papillae between
the folds of the trunk. On the foot, and especially the spurs, they
are distinct papillae. The spurs vary somewhat in form, being
longer or shorter, obtuse or subacute, with the interspace some-
times nearly obliterated. The toes are small and short. The walls
of the stomach contain large reddish globules. The egg is elliptical,
with both poles produced, like that of C. habita and C. plicata, etc.
It measures 120//, by fiO//,.

C. punctata is closely related to C. plicata, though it is not very
like it in general appearance. It differs in many points — the
stouter form, deep colour, different form of upper lip (which has,

6 Transactions of the Society.

however, a trace of the " keystone " of C. plicata), dotted skin, and
total lack of the anal flanges (which become the "tads" of variety
hirundinella Murray). The spurs are not so different, except
in being papillose.

Kikuyu: also known in Australia and Hawaii (Brit. Antarctic
Exped., 1907-9).

Callidina allani sp. n. Plate I. figs. 2a-2c.

Specific characters. — Size moderate ; trunk ovate, plicate ; corona
less than trunk, sulcus about half as wide as disk ; collar small ; a
horseshoe-shaped mark on the upper lip ; rostrum broad, antenna
short and very slender ; jaw triangular, teeth 2/2 ; rump sharply
marked from trunk, preanal subquadrate, anal rounded ; foot short,
of three segments, spurs relatively large, slender, divergent, with-
out interspace.

General description. — Length, when feeding, 300//, diameter of
corona 60//, collar 45//., neck 40//, trunk 85//, preanal 50//, tip to
tip of spurs 25//, length of spur 15//,. The animal is hyaline, and
the longitudinal skinfolds are wide and shallow. The upper lip is
undivided — the skinfold from the collar diminishes in thickness to-
wards the lip and passes over the top of the horseshoe mark. This
is thickest at the top; and tapers to the ends. The jaw is triangular,
and is constricted just below the widest part. The two teeth are
about centrally placed in the length of the jaw. The two segments
of the rump have a characteristic constant form — the preanal has
nearly parallel sides — the anal is rounded posteriorly.

Callidina allani belongs to the group of species resembling C.
habita and C. plicata. The horseshoe mark on the head distinguishes
it from all other species. It may correspond to the keystone mark
on the upper lip of C. plicata, but in that there is no ridge, but
simply fine lines. The form of spurs and the small and very slender
antenna are further points of correspondence with C. plicata. The
affinity is not close. G. punctata is much closer to G. plicata.
C. allani has some affinity with C. ehrenbergi Janson (12), which
also has the upper lip undivided.

Kikuyu ; fairly plentiful.

Callidina sp. ? Plate II. fig. 9.

Description. — Small, hyaline, trunk closely plicate; corona small;
no teeth, but very fine stripe ; foot short, spurs short, obtuse. An-
tenna short.

Length 250//, greatest width of trunk 50//, across spurs 15//,
length of jaw 15//. The rostrum is narrow and the lamella? fairly
large. The corona was not seen expanded, but it can be seen to be
small, the disks being joined to form a reniform body. The gullet

Some African Rotifers. By J. Murray. 7

is long. No teeth, in the ordinary sense, can l>e distinguished, but
the whole jaw is crossed by excessively fine stria?, such as are
found on the jaws of all Bdelloids, in addition to the thicker teeth.
A ciliated tube could be distinguished in the lower part of the
stomach. The foot is 3-jointed. Toes not seen.

Incomplete though the study is, this is obviously an animal of
importance. The characters of the corona and jaws would indicate
a pellet-maker, but the narrow alimentary tube shows that it is
not. According as the fine stria? on the jaws are regarded as teeth
or not, the animal may be supposed to approximate to Ehrenberg's
Callidina elegans (8) or to his C. edentata (11), a suggestion made
on the strength of the name alone, as I have not been able to
find the diagnosis. Mr. Bryce (-7) has shown that C. elegans pos-
sesses, according to Ehrenberg, a long foot and long spurs.

In the genus Callidina, to which this animal seems to belong,
there are no species having numerous fine teeth (when w7e except
C. elegans). Among the pellet-makers the distinction between the
stria? and teeth is frequently not at all clear.

Callidina papillosa Thomp. (##).
Synonym: Macrotrachila papulosa.

The species of the group which include Callidina papillosa
and C multispinosa are so extremely variable that they are very
puzzling to students. As there appear to be peculiar forms in
almost every land, it is always desirable to add as many details as
can be observed, not merely recording the occurrence of the species.

The Central African form is of moderate size, fairly typical in
the arrangement of the warts. The teeth are only two in each jaw.
The mouth has a rosette of ridges surrounding it, as in Rotifer
longirosiris. The form is almost identical with one found by Mr.
Milne in South Africa.

Callidina aculeata Milne (13).
Synonym: Macrotrachrta aculeata.

Like all of the group of species to which it belongs (the multi-
spinosa. group) C. aculeata is extremely variable. The Central-
African form is very spiny. There are five transverse rows of
spines on the dorsal side of the trunk, two on the anterior trunk,
one at the broadest part of the central trunk, and two others behind
it, the last doubtfully on the 4th central or preanal segments. There
are many small spines on the rump and more on the foot. The
first foot- joint has a distinct annular swelling. The dental formula
is 2/2.

A very similar form occurs in Canada.

8 Transactions of the Society.

Callidina multispinosa Thorap. (##).
Synonym: Macrotrachela multispinosa.

Several distinct varieties occurred. They are briefly described
here, but not figured, as there is in preparation a study of all the
forms of this and the related species, in which all the important
varieties will be figured.

Variety brevispinosa Murray (19). — This form was first de-
scribed from Tropical Africa, where it occurred in Old Calabar,
Uganda, and Madagascar.

The short-spined forms, with very few exceptions, have the
dental formula 2/2, an important distinction from the long-spined
forms, which have from three to five teeth in each jaw.

Forma. — Several of the lateral spines on the anterior trunk re-
placed by ligular processes, with bulbose bases ; dorsal transverse
row of spicules on widest part of central trunk lacking ; spurs
slender, widely separated ; dental formula 2/2.

This appears to be a stable variety, possibly a distinct species.
There is an almost identical form in South Africa.

Variety. — One longish lateral spine on the anterior edge of the

3 i 2
trunk — all other spines as in brevispinosa ; dental formula —

or 5/5 ; spurs short cones, separated by wide interspace.

Though looking like brevispinosa this may have been derived
from multispinosa by a reduction of the processes. The spurs are,
however, very different from British examples of multispinosa, and
it may be a distinct species.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE II.

Fig. 6a. — Habrotrocha ampulla sp. n. Animal and egg in case.
,, 66. — Ditto. Head, more highly magnified.
,, 6c. — Ditto. Lateral view of head.
„ 6d. — Jaw.

,, la. — H. acomis sp. n. Feeding.
,, 7/>. — Ditto. Head and neck, extended.
,, 7c. — Ditto. Jaw.
,, Id. — Ditto. Rump and foot.

„ le.— Ditto. Ventral view of head, showing lateral Haps.
,, 8a. — H. auriculata sp. n.
„ 86. — Ditto. Jaw.
,, 9. — Callidina sp.

,, 10a. — Mniobia scabrosa sp n. Creeping.

„ 106.— Ditto. Jaw.

,, 11a. — Callidina punctata sp. n. Feeding.

,, 116. — Ditto. Jaw.

., lie, lid. — Ditto. Two varieties of spurs.

JOURN.R.MICR. SOC. 1911.P1. II.

J.Murray del ad nat.

^ <^^ 11a

West, Newman photo-lith.

African Rotifers.

Some African Rotifers. By J. Murray. 9

Mniobia tetraodon Ehr. (9).
Synonym: Gallidina tetraodon.

Ill African examples the disks have large, truncate, peg-like
papilla?, bearing a few short cilia, such as have already been noted
for Embata laticeps and Callidina magna.

Mniobia russeola Zelinka (~.£).
Synonym : Callidina russeola.

The trunk and foot were distinctly papillose. Usually they are
only stippled.

Mniobia scabrosa sp. n. Plate II. figs. Wa-lOb.

Specific characters. — Large ; trunk and foot papillose ; rostrum
stout, antenna of moderate length ; jaws with thickened border, and
six or seven teeth on each ; corona large ; foot short ; spurs long,
slender, tapering, widely divergent, papillose, without interspace ;
colour red.

General description. — Length when creeping 4o0yu,, diameter of
trunk 130 /a, of rostrum 32 /x, tip to tip of spurs 72 /a, length of jaw
oO/ll. The trunk is deeply longitudinally plicate, and the segments
are separated by deep constrictions. The papilla? cover the whole
of the central and anterior trunk, the rump and the foot, even to
the spurs. On the trunk they are set close together and are of
uniform size. Each shows a small central dot. The neck and
head are smooth.

The rostrum bears inconspicuous lamella?, which meet in the
middle line, and radiating straight seta?. The length of the antenna
is three-fifths of the neck width. The corona is large, and the head
resembles that of Mniobia scarlatina, but on the only occasion when
it was seen feeding 1 failed to get a drawing of it. The neck is very
short, and the segment bearing the antenna is not prominent.

The rump is not sharply marked off from the central trunk, and
it is difficult to discriminate fourth central from preanal. The
anal segment, is very short. The foot is short, of only three seg-
ments. The first is constricted, then bulges again behind. The
spurs measure about 40/* in length. The terminal disc of the foot
is two-lobed. The vibratile tags are somewhat broad and broaden
towards one end.

The jaw has a very broad yellow border. Besides the six or
seven strong teeth there is a thinner ridge or tooth at each end of
the series.

It is only necessary to compare M. scabrosa with M. scarlatina,
the only closely related species, and the only papillose species
hitherto known in the genus. The two species differ in the papilla?,

10 Transactions of the Society.

the teeth and the spurs. The papilla; of M. scarlatina are scattered,
not close together. They are irregular in size, and some are larger
than those of M. scabrosa. It has more numerous teeth, eight,
nine, or more. The spurs are short, conical, acuminate or ohtuse,
and separated by a wide interspace.

Habitat. — Uganda (N". D. F. Pearce), Kikuyu (A. Allan), New
Zealand and Australia (Brit. Antarct. Exped. 1907-9).

In Queensland it attained to a length of liOO/t when creeping.

Habrotrocha caudata sp. n. Plate I. figs, la-le.

Specific characters. — Small ; antenna and rostrum short ; corona
small, disks close : lower lip spout-like ; teeth, about four in each
jaw ; a long curved, tail-like process at posterior part of central
trunk ; a smaller process of anus ; spurs minute, narrow, acute ;
inhabits a brown case open at each end, the neck narrow and
curved, the posterior tube to accommodate the tail.

General description. — Length when feeding about 170/x; case
120/z long, by 70/a diameter at widest part. The head is shaped
like that of Habrotrocha angusticollis, the lower lip forming a pro-
minent spout. The length of the antenna is equal to rather less
than half the diameter of the neck. The rostrum is short and the
lamella? small. The neck is less elongate than that of H angusti-
collis. There are prominences on each side of the antenna. The
trunk segments are so indistinct that it is not easy to tell which of
them bears the dorsal process or " tail." It is probably on the
4th-central segment or the preanal, possibly between the two.
The tail appears to be tubular, but whether there is any opening
at the end could not be ascertained. It is strongly curved, with
the concavity on the anterior side. It can be partly inverted at
the tip by the action of special muscles, and is shown truncate
from this cause in fig. Id. The process behind the anus is a small
rounded flap, which appears ovate and acute in lateral optical section.

The foot is very short, but appears from slight swellings to con-
sist of three segments from the anus to the spurs. The toes
have not been seen. The spurs have not been seen in dorsal view.
Seen from the side they are short, sharp, and curved downwards.
There are usually four teeth, diminishing in thickness, with one
thinner and many fine stria?. The thicker teeth may vary from
three to five. The general form of the case is like that of H. an-
gusticollis {14), but it is smaller, and has the neck strongly curved
towards the dorsal side, with a smaller opening. The posterior tube
is set on nearly at right angles to the axis of the trunk, or inclined
slightly forward at the free end. It is nearly straight and of uniform
thickness ; length about 40 /j..

There are many things in the organization of this extremely
interesting species which await explanation. The peculiar case,

Some African Rotifers. By J. Murray. 11

with its two openings, resembles that of H. 'perforata Murray (15)
in its structure, in form that of H. perforata is quite different,
having a wide neck and short two-lipped posterior tube. The per-
foration is to the dorsal side, as in H. caudata, but, curiously enough,
the variety americana (18) has it on the ventral side, though the
tube is of course always dorsal in its relation to the animal inside.

I can offer no suggestion as to the function of this posterior
tube possessed by these two species, it seems a plausible suggestion
that it serves for the ejection of the voided fcecal pellets which
cause so much labour to H. anyusticollis, since it has to get rid of
them through the neck tube, as there is no other opening. Mr. Bryce
suggested that it served that purpose in H. perforata, but H. caudata
throws doubt on this explanation, as in that species the tube is
occupied by the mysterious " tail." If it does serve for getting rid
of the pellets, even if that is not its chief function, we must suppose
the tail can be drawn in to allow of it.

What is the purpose of the tail itself ? There is another species,
not yet described, which has a process in the same position, but it
is small and wart-like. That might be regarded as protective, in
common with the warts and spines on the trunks and feet of many
species (Pleuretra brycei, Callidina papillosa, etc.), as the animal is
not known to be a tube-dweller. The " tail " of H. caudata being
itself protected by a tube, can hardly be supposed to serve for
protection,

Many tube-dwellers, such as H. lonyiceps and H. anyusticollis,
are often found without tubes, from which it would appear that
they may only secrete them for some special temporary use (as for
the depositing of the eggs), or that they are under the necessity of
leaving their tubes at times and constructing fresh ones. H. caudata
has never been seen alive without a tube, but dead examples are
often without cases.

Habitat. — Uganda ; Old Calabar (N. D. F. Pearce) ; Katoomba,
N.S.W. (Brit. Antarctic Exped. 1907-9); Pretoria, South Africa
(J. Hewitt).

Habrotrocha ampulla sp. n. Plate II. figs. 6a-6d.

Specific Characters. — Small, with slender neck and elongate head;
rostrum short, antenna long and slender ; corona slightly wider than
cheeks, disks close together ; head greatly elongate between rostrum
and corona ; teeth two in each jaw ; inhabiting a trigonous flask -
shaped case with a narrow neck ; foot unknown ; reproduction
oviparous.

General Description. — Length when feeding 210 /x, length of case
150 fi, diameter of widest part 100 p, of neck 15 /x, of corona 20 p,
length of antenna 20 p, egg 60 y, by 45 it. The head is very long
and narrow, scarcely wider than the neck. The disks are so strongly
inclined forward that they are in line with the long axis of the body.

12 Transactions of the Socictu.

The separation of the two is so slight that the apparent motion of
tlic cilia seems to pass uninterrupted round both. The lower lip
is not prominent or spout-like. The mouth is large, occupying
the whole length of the elongated head. The lamellse are small,
and seem distinct. The antenna has a strong sigmoid curvature,
and shows a prominence at the back near the base. The second
neck-segment shows a projecting rim at its anterior edge. The
trunk is somewhat swollen, and diminishes posteriorly to what may
be supposed to be the foot, but no details of anus, spurs or toes have
been seen. The case is pale yellow, broadly triangular, and broadest
near the base. The jaws are triangular and bear two teeth each.

Habrotrocha ampulla is a close relative of H. angusticollis, for
which I mistook it for some years. It has the same general form,
the same number of teeth, and a similar case. The greater breadth
of the case is the first noticeable difference, and as it almost always
contains an egg, it might be supposed if H. angusticollis secreted a
case to protect itself and the egg it would take this form. Careful
attention brings out other differences, of which the chief are the
elongated head, the less prominent lower lip, and the longer antenna.
The head lacks the ridges which are seen in H. angusticollis.

It is not necessary to compare H. ampulla carefully with any
other species. Very few pellet-makers have only two teeth in the
jaw. H. aspera is papillose all over the trunk ; Ceratotrocha corni-
gera has been made the type of a new genus because of the posses-
sion of finger-like feelers at the sides of the head. H. longiceps,
also a flask-maker and with similar elongated head, has more teeth
and is not so slender.

Habitat. — Central Africa (N. D. F. Pearce) ; Pretoria, collected
by J. Hewitt, April 1910. Mr. W. Milne, of Uitenhage, sent me
a drawing which I believe to have been of this species, which I then
considered as a form of H. angusticollis.

Habrotrocha perforata Murray (15).
Synonym: Ccdlidina perforata.

Apparently characteristic of warm countries, though it has been
found in some temperate regions (Switzerland, New Zealand). It
is now known to possess spurs — which are small, blunt, and widely
separated — and a " tail " like that of Habrotrocha caudata. The
" tail " of H. perforata is much shorter and the neck much wider.

Habrotrocha longiceps Murray {17).
Synonym : Callidina longiceps.

Very common in warm countries, though originally discovered
in Scotland. It is often detected by the presence of the peculiar
cases, when the animal itself is not seen. In African examples the
teeth were generally six or seven in each jaw.

Some African Rotifers. By J. Murray, 1

• >

Habrotrucha pusilla Bryce (2).
Synonym: Callidina pusilla.

Cases with thick walls, of many layers. One case contained
two eggs, which measured 90 yu, X 50 /x.

Hdbrotrocha acorids sp. n. Plate II. figs. 7a-7e.

Specific Characters. — Size moderate ; anterior trunk strongly con-
stricted ; corona large, disks widely separated (for the genus) ; collar
prominent, with two large projections at either side of the mouth ;
rostrum very short and broad, antenna of moderate length ; teeth,
four or five in each jaw ; foot of three segments, no spurs.

General Description. — Exact dimensions were unfortunately
omitted, but it is one of the smaller species, though not among the
smallest. The central trunk is expanded when feeding and is
closely plicate. The segment immediately in front of it is very
strongly constricted, forming a waist, and maintains this shape in
all positions. The segment in front of the constricted one is en-
larged and of a definite form, which is also maintained in all posi-
tions ; it has a projecting annulus at the anterior edge, a constriction
below that, and then expands towards the posterior edge. When
feeding, the mastax is in this segment. The jaws have a broad
border, and have usually four strong teeth and a thinner one
on each.

The head has very distinctive characters. The disks are very
large, and their size in relation to the constriction of the anterior
trunk produces a curious result. When placed side by side the
disks could not pass the constriction, and so they are held one in
front of the other, asymmetrically, and this is their usual position
in the creeping animal. The sulcus between the disks is about half
as wide as a disk and bears normally a large ligule. The folds of
skin from the collar end near the middle line in low rounded lobes,
which do not project over the "bridge" joining the pedicels. The
terminal joint of the rostrum is very short ; it is much broader
than long, and is the shortest I know in a Bdelloid. The lamella1
are short and seem quite separate, appearing as two distinct little
sharp hooks. The quadrate flaps of skin projecting from the sides
of the mouth recall those of Habrotrocha angusta Bryce (3). The
length of the antenna is from ^ to § of the diameter of the neck.
The rump is pyriform, and shows the two segments. The foot is
very short, the first joint larger and tapering, the second very short,
cylindrical, without a trace of spurs. The three toes are small but
distinct.

Everything points to H. acornis being a tube-dweller, but it has
never been seen in a tube. The constant shape of the trunk, in
the feeding attitude, and the size of the constricted segment, even
suggest that this is really no other than H. perforata without its

14 Transactions of the Society.

case. Although H. perforata has occasionally been seen feeding
it has always been difficult to get a dorsal or ventral view of it, as
its shape causes it to fall over on its side. Dead examples with
the corona expanded do not shew the disks separated. //. perforata
has small spurs, which were not seen till after the original descrip-
tion was published, and it has a short "tail."

Mr. Bryce informs nie that he believes a large proportion of the
species of Habrotrocha secrete cases. It may be that all do so for
temporary use at certain times. Many tube-makers are quite com-
monly found without tubes. H. pusilla is especially liable to desert
its case.

Habrotrocha appendiculata sp. n. Plate I. figs. Aa-Ab.

Specific Characters. — Small ; trunk broad, coarsely stippled ;
preanal segment bearing two large divergent processes on its poste-
rior angles ; head relatively very small ; corona a little wider than
the neck, disks close together ; collar prominent ; teeth many,
diminishing in size ; foot short, spurs narrow, acute, divergent,
without interspaces.

General Description. — Length when feeding 280 p, diameter of
corona 40 p, collar 35 p, neck 30 p, central trunk 90 p, across the
" tails " of the preanal <>0 p, length of spur 12 p. The central trunk
is very broad and is regularly plicate. The stippling consists of
pellucid dots, not papilla? — it does not extend to the neck or foot.
What appears to be the preanal segment is 2-lobed, and bears two
pairs of dorsal skinfolds separated by a transverse fold. It may
consist of the 4th-central and preanal. The " tail "-processes are
large, about 12 p long, conical, subacute, not stippled. The anal
is short and diminishes very rapidly. The foot is 3-jointed, the
first joint as broad as long. The neck segments diminish rapidly
from the trunk forwards. The widest, next the trunk, usually con-
tains the mastax when feeding. The upper lip forms a pointed
arch. The teeth are like those of H. constricta — eight or more can
be counted — the front one is thickest, and those behind diminish
rapidly in size till they are as fine as the striae which cover the
whole surface of the ramus (except where the teeth are) in most
Bdelloids. It is thus difficult to say what is the exact number of
teeth in species like H. constricta.

H. appendiculata looks very like H. microcephala, as may be
seen by comparing the figures (16). The most obvious differences
are the smaller number of teeth in H. microcephala, and the tail-
processes of H. appendiculata. The corona of H. microcephala is
much smaller, the disks are angled, the collar is not prominent, the
spurs are shorter.

The resemblance of H. appendiculata to H. microcephala is
superficial — its real affinity is with H. crenata (14). That species

Some African Rotifers. By J. Murray. 15

is papillose all over the trunk, but this character is discounted by
Mr. Bryce, who says he knows crenatd with the papilla reduced, or
replaced by stippling. It has rounded bosses on the preanal, cor-
responding to the tails of appendiculata. I am decided in separat-
ing H. appendiculata as a distinct species by its greater relative
breadth, lack of foot-boss on the first segment, and longer spurs.
The teetli of IT. erenata appear to be more definite, not diminishing
to such fine striae

Kikuyu ; several examples.

Habrotrocha brochlehursti sp. n. Plate I. figs. oa-5d.

Specific Characters. — Small, very slender when extended; rostrum
narrow, lamellae small ; disks slightly separated ; upper lip trian-
gular ; collar inconspicuous, a large rounded process at each side
of the mouth ; antennae very short ; teeth 2/2 ; rump pyriform,
preanal much larger than anal ; foot short, of three segments, the
first longest ; spurs short, divergent, acuminate, sub-obtuse, with
no interspace.

General Description. — Length, up to 400 fju in fullest extension,
by no more than 36 /u, in greatest width. When feeding, the body
is shortened and the central trunk enlarged, when it may be 75 fj,
or more in diameter ; corona 36 /x, cheeks 30 jx, neck 25 fi, across
spurs 15 /x.

When extended, the four segments of the central trunk can be
clearly seen, and are of equal length. The 4th central segment
is then the narrowest part of the trunk, and is less than the pre-
anal. The disproportion of the preanal and anal is unusual. The
anal is a very short segment. The first foot-segment is relatively
long, and the second very short.

There are only a few pellet-makers which have the dental
formula 2/2. It is so usual for the species to have more than two
teeth, that those with only two seem out of place in the group.
Species having two teeth are Habrotrocha angusticollis, H. aspera,
H. tripus, H. ampidla, Ceratotrocha cornigera (.3). C. comigera is
placed in another genus, on account of its finger-like feelers ; H.
aspera is papillose ; H. ampulla has an elongate head and long
antenna? ; H. tripus is distinguished by its tripod-like foot and
large toes. H. angusticollis alone is near enough to require com-
parison. It is not so slender, but that is not a sufficiently de-
finite character ; it has a longer antenna ; the lobes at the side of
the head are not (as in this species) on the margin of the mouth ;
the gullet is longer ; the lower lip is very prominent. H. brochle-
hursti is not known to secrete a case.

When fully extended it is so slender that it looks very much
like a Nematode worm.

Several examples seen.

L6 Transactions of the Society.

Habrotrocha auriculata sp. n. Plate II. figs. 8a, 8b.

Specific Characters. — Large ; hyaline or pale yellow ; trunk,
with few wide longitudinal folds ; corona, large ; disks separated,
the upper lip projecting between them like a little column to the
level of the top of the disks ; at the side of eacli disk a sort of ring
projecting beyond the pedicels, and broken in the middle ; central
seta? on disks ; antenna, short ; teeth, many (ten or more)
diminishing; foot, short, of three segments, the first bearing two
bosses, one in front of the other; spurs, short, divergent, obtuse,
without interspace ; toes very short and thick.

General Description. — Length, when feeding, 400 //,; width of
corona, 100 [i ; collar, 75 yu, ; neck, 60 /x ; trunk, 100 fj, ; tip to tip
of spurs, 30 fx. Each disk measures 40 fi, and the interspace 20 fi.
It is quite filled in front by the prominent upper lip. The central
setae spring from very small papilla?. The collar is prominent.

The ring-like auricles, from which the species is named, are of
the most puzzling nature. They appear to have some relation to
the cilia of tbe disks, and were, in fact, at first supposed to be
merely optical appearances produced by the cilia, but there is no
trace of motion in them. The part of the ring rising from the base
of the pedicel, just above the collar, seems to be a solid peg-like
process. The upper part, which is separated from it by a minute
gap, appears to be of a different nature, very tenuous and trans-
parent. It continues a ridge which runs round the dorsal side of
the disk. The appearances it presents in lateral and ventral views
are not readily reconcilable with the dorsal appearance. There are
similar auricles in another species, known in England and not yet
described, which have puzzled Mr. Bryce as much as those of this
species have puzzled me. The length of the antenna is |- of the
neck width.

The jaws are triangular, and constricted below the widest part.
The whole surface is almost covered by the teeth, which begin at
the widest part, and diminish in thickness towards the posterior
end of the jaw, where they become mere lines. Their number is
not easily determined, but ten or more may be counted. The whole
trunk is finely stippled. The pellets are yellow. There are two
strong skin-folds near the middle line, passing from the central
trunk on to the rump. The brain is of moderate size.

Habrotrocha auriculata is a very distinct species, having no near
relatives, except the undescribed British species above referred to,
which has not got the columnar upper lip, and differs in many other
respects.

Habitat. — Kikuyu, Brit. E. Africa (A. Allan) ; Katoomba,
N.S. Wales (Brit. Antarctic Exped., 1907-9).

Some African Rotifers. By J. Murray. 17

Unnamed Species.

In addition to the thirty species named in the list, five others
were observed, undoubtedly distinct species, but as they have been
all previously seen by others, thojugk not yet described, we must
wait for the descriptions.

One [is the Philodina " double " of Mniobia russeola, which is
here figured, though not named.

Another is a species long known to Mr. Bryce and myself.
From certain points of structure recently ascertained, I suspect that
it may prove identical with Callidina perforata.

A third is a well-marked species of Adineta, which appears to
be the commonest African species. It always occurs in the moss
which Mr. Milne sends me.

Yet another is a species of Habrotrocha, with peculiar spurs, like
those of Philodina antarctica Murray (#0). Mr. Bryce has known
it for many years, and there is, I believe, some hope of identifying
it with one of Ehrenberg's species.

Summary.

This list of Bdelloid Botifera from Tropical Africa is another
illustration of the abundance of moss-dwelling species in this order.
The richness of moss-faunas is only beginning to be understood.
The list includes only moss-dwelling species, yet it numbers thirty-
three named species, while some half-dozen other distinct species
were observed though not yet named. Three species were recorded
in the earlier paper on African Botifers (19) which are not in the
present list, making a total of thirty-six species for the region
examined.

The thirty-six species are distributed as follows : — Philodina 3,
Pleuretra 3, Callidina 9, Mniobia 4, Rotifer 1, Habrotrocha 13,
Adineta 3.

The great preponderance of the pellet-making Habrotrocha over
the other genera is noticeable. It is the same everywhere. It is
a vast group, [ believe of higher than generic value, which may
have to be further subdivided before longr

The number of peculiar species in the list is remarkable. No
fewer than ten of the species were first discovered in this district,
and although many or all of them may eventually be found else-
where, the fact is an indication that moss-dwelling Bdelloids are to
some extent local in their distribution.

In South Africa Mr. Milne has found many peculiar Bdelloids,
some of them very aberrant indeed, and similarly I have found in
mosses from South Africa many new species distinct from Mr.

Feb. 15th, 1911 c

1 8 Transactions of the Society.

Milne's, as well as from those of Tropical Africa. When all of
these are published the Bdelloid Rotifera of Africa will make a
very respectable group.

Bibliography.

1. Bryoe, D. — On the Macrotraehelous Callidinse. Journ. Quekett. Micr.

Club, ser. 2, v. (1892) p. 15.

2. „ On Two New Species of Macrotraehelous Callidin<e. Op. cit.,

ser. 2, v. (1893) p. 196.

3. ,, Further Notos on Macrotraclielous Callidinae. Op. cit.,

ser. 2, v. (1894) p. 436.

4. „ On Two New Species of Philodina. Op. cit., ser. 2. viii.

(1903) p. 523.

5. „ On a New Classification of the Bdelloid Rotifera. Op. cit.,

ser. 2, xi. (1910) p. 69.

6. Davis, H. — A New Gallidina, etc. Monthly Micr. Jonrn.. 1873, p. 201

7. Dujardin, F. — Histoire natutelledes Zoophytes: Infusoires. Paris, 1841.

8. Ehrknberg, C. G. — Ueber die Entwicklung unci Lebensdauer der In-

fusionsthiere. Abh. k. Akad. Wiss. Berl. (1831)
1832.

9. „ „ Fortgesetze Beobachtungen iiber atmosphiirische

Organismen. Monatsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Berl.
(1848) p. 379.

10. „ „ Diagnoses novarum formarum. Verh. k. Akad. Wiss.

Berl. (1853) p. 529.

11. „ „ Mikr geologic 1854.

12. Janson, C. — Ueber die Rotatorien-familie der Philodinseen. Marburg,

1893.

13. Milne, W. — On the Defectiveness of the Eye-spot, etc. Proc. Phil. Soc.

Glasgow, xvii. (1886) p. 134.

14. Murray, J. — A New Family and Twelve New Species of Rotifera. Trans.
Roy. Soc Edin., xli. (1905) p. 367.

Some Rotifera of the Sikkim Himalayas. Journ. Roy. Micr.

Soc. (1906), p. 637.
The Bdelloid Rotifers of the Forth Area. Proc. Roy. Phys.

Soc. Edin., xvi. (1906) p. 215.
The Rotifera of the Scottish Lochs. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin.,

xlv. (1906) p. 151.
Some South American Rotifers. Amer. Nat., xli. (1907) p. 97.
Some African Rotifers. Journ Roy. Micr. Soc, 1908, p. 665.
Antarctic Rotifera. Sci. Rep. Brit. Antarc Exped., 1907-9,

i. (1910) p. 41.

21. Plate, L. — Ueber die Rotatorien-Fauna des bottnischen Meerbnsens.

Zeit. f. Wiss Zool., xlix. (1889).

22. Thompson, Percy G. — Moss-haunting Rotifers. Science Gossip, 1892,

p. 56.

23. Weber, E. F. — Faune Rotatorienne du Bassin dn Lr-man. Rev. Suisse

de Zool., v. (1898) pi». 263-785.

24. Zblinka, C. — Studien iiher Kiiderthiere. III. Zeit. f. wiss. Zool., liii.

(1891) p. 323.

15.

ft

16.

t>

17.

Jl

18.
19.

20.

>f

L9

II. — A Simple Method of Obtaining Instantaneous

Photomicrograph s.

By J. Edwin Barnard.

(Read November 16, 1910.)

In view of the considerable development, or what perhaps might
more properly be described as the re-introduction of dark-ground
illumination methods, it is desirable that some simple method
should be available for photograph-
ing living or moving microscopic
objects.

Various arrangements have
already been described for effecting
this, but they are of necessity some-
what elaborate and costly. The
method that I have recently em-
ployed is to use an ordinary reflex
camera in conjunction with a vertical
photomicrographic camera. It may
be that this is a perfectly well-known
arrangement, but, if so, I can only
say I have not hitherto seen any
description of it.

The type of vertical camera most
suitable is that usually known as the
Van Heurck model, as made by
Messrs. Watson, for this camera is
much more stable and stiffly sup-
ported, not relying for its stability
on a single rod as do most other
vertical types. The lens, and if
possible the whole front, is removed
from the reflex camera, and it is
then placed face downwards on the
top of the vertical photomicro -
graphic camera. The focusing screen
is vertical and faces towards the
observer. It is then quite easy to observe the image on the
ground-glass screen of the reflex camera through the focusing
hood, and at the same time to control with ease the necessary
adjustments of the Microscope. Exposure would, of course, be

c 2

Fig. 1.

20 Transactions of the Society.

effected by releasing the focal plane shutter in the reflex camera,
and its duration could be varied to suit the rapidity of movement
of the object, as in ordinary camera manipulation. In practice it
will rarely be found that high speeds are necessary.

The only practical objection that I am able at present to see to
this method is that there is considerable liability of vibration on
the release of the shutter. In a camera such as I am showing this
evening (fig. 1), made by Messrs. Newman and Guardia, this
perhaps does not constitute such an objection, as they claim, and
I think with justice, that the exposure is effected so rapidly after
the release of the mirror that there is no time for the transmission
of a vibration to the apparatus itself. A much less expensive type
of camera would probably answer the purpose.

I put this apparatus forward and make the suggestion in the
hope that it may be of service to some of those who wish for a
readily available means of obtaining a record of the appearance of
living micro-organisms under dark-ground or similar methods of
illumination.

21

III. — On the Use of a Metallic Electric Arc in Photomicrograjihy.

By J. Edwin Barnard.

(Read November 16, 1910.)

Some time ago I described to this Society a method of using a
mercury vapour arc for visual microscopic work. I explained that
it had such advantages that it was probably substantially ahead, as
a source of light, of any other illuminant then available — an opinion
that subsequent experience has more than confirmed. As the light'
is derived from the luminous arc itself, and not from either of the
luminous electrodes, it follows that its spectrum is a bright-line
one, and that it is possible, by a suitable arrangement of prisms, or
by suitable colour screens, to obtain illumination in the Microscope
that is truly monochromatic. While for visual work the amount
of light so obtained is amply sufficient for use with the highest
powers, when it comes to photomicrography the exposures are in
many cases prolonged, and sometimes unduly so. I have there-
fore been experimenting for some time to see whether a metallic
arc with solid metal electrodes might be made available for the
purpose mentioned.

I must at once admit that up till quite recently the results
obtained have not been favourable, as it is extremely difficult
to get an electric arc with metallic electrodes to burn with any
degree of steadiness ; and, further, there is always the difficulty
that with most metals the electrodes themselves either quickly
melt, or the arc changes its position, owing to bending or displace-
ment of the metals. Again, if, for instance, we take an arc formed
between iron electrodes, in which the metal itself has not a low
melting-point, and which may, by suitable arrangements, be made to
run steadily, we are confronted with the difficulty that its spectrum
consists of a great number of lines of moderate intensity which are
distributed pretty evenly throughout the spectrum, so that, owing
to the closeness of the lines one to another, there is no advantage
over a source of light with a continuous spectrum, such as an
ordinary carbon arc.

Of all metals giving a suitable spectrum, other than mercury,
none so thoroughly fulfil the necessary conditions as cadmium ; but
unfortunately cadmium has a particularly low melting-point, rather
lower even than that of lead, so that to use it in a pure state is
simply impossible. A recent paper by Dr. T. Martin Lowry, on
" A New Method of Producing a Cadmium Arc," has suggested that

22 Transactions of the Society.

by combining silver and cadmium in suitable proportions, electrode^
are produced that have a very high melting-point, and that under
ordinary conditions will produce a very good arc. The proportion
of silver to cadmium may conveniently be 00 p.c. cadmium to 40 p.c.
silver, and such an alloy has a melting-point above 700° C.

On examining the spectrum given, it is found that the principal
lines are situated in the blue, green, and red portions of the spectrum,
so that it is possible to obtain a monichromatic source of light at
will in either of these regions, and of almost unlimited intensity—
the intensity, in fact, being only dependent on the size of the
electrodes, and the number of amperes used. If an attempt is made
to run an arc with pure-metal electrodes of almost any sort, it will
be appreciated how very difficult it is to so adjust the arc that any-
thing approaching a constant source of light may be obtained. With
the cadmium-silver arc the conditions are very much better, but to
obtain the best result the electrodes should be rotated in opposite
directions during the time that the arc is burning. This method
is, of course, one perfectly well known, and requires no further
explanation here. It is not one that entails any considerable com-
plication in apparatus, in fact, it is quite practicable for the short
exposures required in photo-micrography, to have a hand-driven
type of mechanism, which is both inexpensive and sufficiently
efficient.

It may be urged that owing to the fact that the electrodes
suggested are an alloy, that the spectrum of silver will be equally
evident with that of cadmium, and this is, of course, the case ; but
fortunately the spectrum of silver is such that it does not interfere
to any extent with the cadmium spectrum, the principal cadmium
lines, in fact, being so brilliant that the others are almost negligible.
The red cadmium line, with a wave-length of 6438-10 m., is a
particularly brilliant one not far from the region of the orange, so
that it has considerable visual luminosity. The green line wave-
length, 508510m., is in the most brilliant portion of the spectrum,
and running the cadmium silver arc with 10 amperes, a fully
•exposed plate may be obtained in a few seconds, even with the
highest powers, using, of course, a suitably sensitized plate. The
blue line wave-length, 4799~10 m., lias very high luminosity for the
blue part of the spectrum, so that it may be used for work with
diatoms, or where the greatest visual resolution is required. It
might be interesting to note that the bright lines in the cadmium
spectrum are extremely narrow ones. It follows that the light
transmitted, whether screened off, or obtained by spectroscopic
methods, is of one wave-length.

In the case where this arrangement is used in conjunction with
a monochromatic light apparatus, in which the light is split up by
the aid of prisms, the slit may be opened very wide indeed so
that the light transmitted becomes a very broad band, quite

Use of a Metallic Electric Arc in Photomicrography. 23

sufficient to fill the field with moderate or high-power microscopic
objectives.

It may be urged that the method, although, perhaps, not with-
out scientific interest, is impracticable owing to the cost of the
cadmium silver electrodes, and it must be admitted that this is
not altogether a negligible factor. Cadmium is now, however, not
a rare metal, and can be bought cheaply, whilst the value of silver
is well known to you all. I may say, moreover, that I have
recently obtained some of this alloy from Messrs. Johnson Matthey,
the Metallurgists, of Hatton Garden, and that the cost of a single
electrode works out at five shillings. This is sufficient for a fairly
long run, so that after all the expense would not, in most cases, be
an insuperable objection where some special result is aimed at.

24

Transactions of the Society.

IV. — Aerator Suitable for Laboratory Aquaria .
By J. F. Gemmill, M.A. D.Sc. M.D.

(Bead November 16, 1910.)
This instrument has some advantages over the one I described in a

former number of the Journal. ;

Fig. 2.

It adapts itself readily to such
variations of pressure as occur
from hour to hour in the water
supply of towns, and accordingly
it is somewhat easier of adjust-
ment and needs less supervision
than the other. At the same
time, its construction is simpler,
and it provides an uninterrupted
supply of air. As in the former
instrument, the air is washed free
of impurities, and is under suf-
ficient pressure to enable it to
be distributed to different aquaria
and to be forced through such
nozzles (e.g. suitable pieces of
partly decayed wood f) as will
give out streams of very fine air-
bubbles ; also, should leakage oc-
cur anywhere there is no danger
that the aquaria may be flooded
with tap-water. The working of
the instrument will be under-
stood from the sketch, etc., ap-
pended (fig. 2).

A. An ordinary small aspi-
rator of glass or metal attached
to a water tap, the water supply
being under considerable pres-
sure.

B. Opening in the aspirator
for the entrance of air.

C. Rubber tubing attached
to outflow of aspirator, and con-
nected with the tube E.

* See this Journal, 1'JIO, pp. 9-13.

t Loc. cit.

Aerator for Laboratory Aquaria. By J. F. Gemmill. 25

D. Bottle, of e.g. IjOO com. capacity, with neck about 2 in.
wide, and a tight cork pierced with the necessary holes.

E. Bent tube, of about § in. internal diameter, one end con-
nected with C, the other passing up within the wider tube F to
8 in. from the top, and opening there.

F. Wider tube, 6 or 7 ft. high, and of about t9q in. internal
diameter, passing through the cork, and connected at the upper end
with M, the air-tube supplying the aquaria.

H. A bent tube of about h in. internal measurement, and about
10 in. shorter than F, with an opening at the top of the bend. One
limb of the tube pierces the cork and reaches nearly to the bottom
of the bottle, while the other is led to a waste sink.

M. Air-tube for supply of aquaria.

When the tap is turned on, water mixed with air emerges at
the top of the bent tube E within the wider tube. The water is
free to fall down the wide tube into the bottle, while the air remains
higher up. Pressure rises inside the bottle and the tubes coming
from it, and the water used escapes by H, and thus runs to waste.
This gives a supply of air along M under as much pressure as the
height of H allows. If more air is supplied than is used for aera-
tion, it gradually displaces the water in D as far down as the lower
end of H, and then the surplus escapes.

The opening at the top of the bend on H ensures against syphon
action taking place, and thus destroying the internal pressure.
Should the water pressure at the tap slacken and give a diminished
supply of air, the water level in the bottle and in the tube F rises
till it adjusts itself to the lessened internal pressure. Should inflow
at tap cease altogether, any water which may be in the tubes above
the level of B escapes by this opening, and accordingly it is as well
to have attached thereto a piece of rubber tubing leading to the
waste sink.

The attachment between tap and aspirator needs to be secure.
The nozzle of the tap should be of suitable shape, and pressure
tubing, firmly tied on and strengthened by having string or a strip
of strong tape wound round it, should be employed.

20 Transac/io/is of the Society.

V . — Adaptation of Ordinary Paraffin Baths for Vacuum

Embedding.

By J. F. Gemmill, M.A. D.Sc. M.J).

(Bead November 10, 1910.)

The advantages of being able to embed certain objects in a vacuum,
or under diminished atmospheric pressure, are well known. Baths
made for the purpose are, however, costly, and many workers who
possess a good ordinary paraffin bath may welcome a means of
adapting it when desired to embedding in vacuo.

The following arrangement works satisfactorily in the case of ;i
large open embedding bath which was made for me eight or nine
years ago by the Cambridge Scientific Instrument Co., according
to a model slightly modified from that given under No. 291 of
their catalogue (fig. 3). A similar arrangement can be adapted to
closed baths.

A. An ordinary small aspirator connected with C, a bell-jar,
by means of strong rubber tubing, in the course of which a gauge
or indicator (B in the sketch) may, if desired, be interposed. The
bell-jar should be small, e.g. 2-3 in. across the mouth.

D. A flat ring of good rubber, about £ in. in thickness, A in.
broad, and of a diameter suited to the size of the bell-jar.

The jar I use was got by cutting off the bottom of a small
bottle of fairly strong glass, grinding the cut end flat, and at the
same time very slightly smoothing the edges.

Bell-jar and rubber ring were made just of the right size to fit
over any one of the small embedding pots on the top of the bath.
The ring serves as an air-tight joint or washer between the bell-jar
and the bath. When the jar is fitted in position and the water
turned on, the air pressure within the jar can readily be reduced to
as low as ^ in. of mercury. But unless when air has to be
extracted from some cavity in the specimen being embedded, I
prefer to work with a much more imperfect vacuum, especially in
the case of delicate tissues.

One must remember that only a strongly made open bath could
stand having a vacuum chamber fitted on any part of it. Practi-
cally all open baths have, however, places for holding embedding
tubes. These tubes can be fitted with a suitable stopper and
exhausted in the same way as the bell-jar, without risk of break-
age of any kind unless they are very thin.

In the case of closed embedding baths, all one has to do is to

Paraffin Baths for Vacuum Embedding. By J. F. Gemmill. 27

supply a suitable base for the bell-jar, and to put the jar so fitted
into the inside of the bath, leading a tube to it from the aspirator
in whatever way is most convenient. For example, a small piece
of suitable piping can be soldered through one side and left as a
permanent fixture, to which tubing may be attached, leading on
the one hand to the aspirator, and on the other with the bell-jar
inside. Or, as most baths have an opening in the roof for letting
down a thermometer, this opening may be utilized for the passage
of the tube. The base may be of strong copper, or, perhaps, better
of plate glass, the thickness being greater the larger the bell-jar
used.

— D

Fig. 3.

The dishes containing melted paraffin and the objects to be
embedded are placed under the bell-jar. The latter is then fitted
on to the base with the help of the rubber ring, and exhaustion is
effected as before. Or again, as in the case of the open bath, the
process may be carried on by using tubes with suitable stoppers.

It is well to have the top of the bell-jar fitted with stopcocks,
as shown in the sketch. The lower of the stopcocks enables one
to shut off the vacuum chamber at once when the required degree
of diminished pressure has been attained. The upper of the stop-
cocks is useful when the process is at an end, as when opened it
allows free entrance of air into the bell-jar without the least risk
that any water may be sucked in from the tubing connected with
the aspirator.

28 Transactions of the Society.

I find it useful for other purposes to have at hand in the
laboratory a means of producing a vacuum, and it is simple to
arrange that the tubing from the aspirator may be fitted whenever
desired to another bell-jar with the requisite rubber washer and
base, apart altogether from the bath. One can get very rapid and
very perfect removal in vacuo of the absolute alcohol by the
clearing agent, e.g. xylol or cedar oil. One can also extract
absolute alcohol from these substances so that they can be used
over again even for the final stages of clearing.

Then on the bath, paraffin already used, and now no longer free
enough from traces of the clearing agent to allow it to be used again
for the final embedding, may be rendered fairly pure if kept melted
for a time under the aspirator. Even though the actual embedding
of objects in paraffin is allowed to proceed in the ordinary way, it
is still of very great advantage at the end of the process to submit
the dish of melted paraffin, containing the object, for a short time
to the action of a vacuum, as in this way the mass, when cooled,
will be of uniform consistence and free from crystallization.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(PRINCIPALLY INVERTEBRATA AND CRYPTOGAMIA),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VEETEBRATA.
a. Embryologry.t

Accessory Chromosomes in Man.}— M. F. Guyer describes the two
accessory chromosomes as found in man, with other features of human
spermatogenesis. Twenty-two chromosomes, differing considerably in
size, were found to occur in all spermatogonia in which the investigator
was able to make a definite count. Iu a few instances, two — apparently
the two accessory chromosomes — were seen considerably to one side of
the main mass of chromosomes, surrounded by a small clear court of
cytoplasm. Twelve chromosomes appear for division in the primary
spermatocyte, of which ten are evidently bivalent and two accessories.
The two accessory chromosomes pass undivided to one pole of the spindle
considerably in advance of the other chromosomes, with the result that
half of the daughter-cells in this division receive twelve, and half only
ten univalent chromosomes. This is evidently the reduction division.
The ten univalent chromosomes which passed to the one secondary
spermatocyte unite again in pairs — at least, in the majority of cases —
to form five bivalent chromosomes, which appear at the equator of the
spindle when the cell is ready for division. The division here is
presumably an equation and not a second reduction division, judging
from the size, shape and general appearance of the resulting daughter-
chromosomes. Thus, while each of the spermatids formed as a result of
this division receives only five chromosomes, the latter are bivalent, and
equivalent to ten of the somatic or spermatogonial chromosomes. There
is some slight evidence that the secondary spermatocytes may occasionally
divide with their chromosomes in their original condition of univalence.
Ten of the twelve chromosomes which passed to the other pole of the
spindle in the primary spermatocyte behave in the way just described.

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they
do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers
noted, nor for any claini to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of
this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub-
lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are
either new or have not been previously described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects. \ Biol. Bull., six. (1910) pp. 219-34 (1 pi.).

30 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The two accessory chromosomes come to the equator of the spindle in
the secondary spermatocyte with the five bivalents. making in all seven.
Each accessory now divides, so that the resulting spermatids each receive
seven chromosomes — that is, five bivalent, plus two accessory, or the
equivalent of twelve univalent chromosomes. In reality, then, of the
total number of spermatids half have in all probability received ten and
half twelve (10 + 2) univalent chromosomes. Inasmuch as the sperma-
tids transform directly into spermatozoa, there must be two classes of the
latter, differing with respect to whether they have or have not the two
accessory chromosomes. It is a significant fact that approximately half
the resting spermatids, when strongly decolorized after iron-hrematoxylin
staining, show two chromatin nuclei and half do not. It seems probable
that these nucleoli may correspond to the accessory chromosomes, and
are to be identified with the two nucleoli of the primary spermatocyte
and the two eccentric chromosomes seen in the spermatogonia. It is
probable that in man and certain other Vertebrates, as also in the Insects,
Myriapods, and Arachnids, the accessory chromosomes are in some way
associated with the determination of sex.

Mammalian Spermatozoon.* — J. van Molle has studied the sperma-
tozoon in squirrel, mole, guinea-pig, and rat. He finds that the sheath,
or " manchette," is of nuclear origin, and that it persists in the fully-
formed spermatozoon. The centriole is of an elbow-like (?) (equerre)
form, and retains this through the transformations of the tail and
middle-piece. The " baton-like body," the transverse branch of the
"centriole equerre," is not an ephemeral element, but persists till the
spermatozoon has its final form.

Inheritance of Skin-pigmentation in Man.f — Gertrude C. Davenport
and Charles B. Davenport have made a careful study of the inheritance
of skin-pigment in typical Caucasians and in crosses between whites and
negroes. They have also made a study of the inheritance of albinism
in man. The conclusion from various data, qualitative as well as
quantitative, is that skin-colour in negro and white crosses is not a
typical " blend," but that, on the contrary, the original grades of heavy
and slight melanogenesis segregate in the germ-cells — often imperfectly,
because of the multiplicity of units (or grades) for skin-pigmentation—
and thus the original colour characters are more or less perfectly restored.
All studies indicate that blondes lack one or more units that brunettes
possess ; that the negro skin possesses still additional units : that
individuals with the heavier skin-pigmentation may have slight pig-
mentation covered over (hypostatic), evidence of this condition appearing
in the light offspring of such hybrids in the second or third generation ;
and that first-generation hybrids frequently show, somatically, a colour
grade less than that which they carry potentially and may segregate in
their germ -cells.

Sterility .| — Max Morse has brought together a number of facts
bearing upon the difficult problem of sterility. " As far as may be

* La Cellule, xxvi. (1910) pp. 425-49 (1 pi.).

t Amer. Nat., xliv. (1910) pp. 641-72. J Tom. cit., pp. 624-33.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICfiOSCOPY, ETC 31

judged from studies upon the germ-cells which have been made thus
far, sterility is a matter of the fundamental constitution of the organism.
It concerns bhe hearers of hereditary traits, the chromosomes. All of
the studies which have been made point to the conclusion that whatever
may be its nature, there is an 'incompatibility' existing between the
chromosomes of individuals of different species or varieties."

Islands of Langerhans in the Human Embryo.* — T. Mironescu has

made a study of the development of the islands of Langerhans in the
human embryo. He rinds that the first rudiments of these are developed
through the vascularization of epithelial buds or shoots arising from the
glandular ducts and glandular acini. The islands are only recognizable
by the arrangement of their cells and by their relation to the capillary
vessels. The author does not agree with Kuster that there is no increase
in the number of islands of Langerhans after early embryonic life ; from
his comparison of the pancreas of new-born infants with that of adults,
he infers that they increase in number even after birth, arising in the
same way as in the early life of the embryo.

Development of the Sympathetic Nervous System in Mammals.f
A. Kuntz publishes an account of an investigation into the development
of the sympathetic nervous system in Mammals, undertaken to further
exact knowledge of the histogenesis of the sympathetic nervous system,
to establish the histogenetic relationships between the sympathetic
neurones and the neurones of the central nervous system, and to correlate
the sympathetic system with the other functional divisions of the nervous
system. His results are as follows : The sympathetic trunks arise as a
pair of cell-columns lying along the sides of the dorsal surface of the
aorta. In the early stages, medullary cells migrate from the neural tube
into the dorsal and the ventral nerve-roots. The cells, which migrate
into the ventral nerve-roots with similar cells which wander down from
the spinal ganglia, migrate peripherally along the spinal nerves. Some
of these cells deviate from the course of the spinal nerves, and, migrating
along the paths of the communicating rami, give rise to the sympathetic
trunks. The pre-vertebral plexuses arise as cell-aggregates lying along
the ventro-lateral aspects of the aorta in the posterior region of the
body. They are derived directly from the sympathetic trunks. The
cardiac plexus and the sympathetic plexuses in the walls of the visceral
organs are not derived from the sympathetic trunks, as has hitherto been
supposed, but have their origin in nervous elements which migrate from
the hind-bra in and the vagus ganglia along the fibres of the vagi. In
view of the relation of these plexuses to the vagi, the author calls them
" vagal sympathetic " plexuses. The cells migrating peripherally from
the cerebro-spinal system along the spinal nerves and the vagi are the
descendants of the " germinal " cells of His — that is, the " indifferent "
cells and the " neuroblasts " of Schaper-— therefore, they are homologous
with the cells giving rise to the neurones and the supporting elements in
the central nervous system. The cells migrating peripherally along the
spinal nerves and the vagi do not all take part in the development of

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxvi. (1910) pp. 322-8.

t Joum. Comp. Neurol., xx. (1910) pp. 212-58 (18 figs.).

32 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the sympathetic system. Some become distributed along the nerve-
tibres and give rise to the neurilemma ; therefore the cells of the
neurilemma are homologous with the neuroglia-cells in the central
nervous system. The cells taking part in the development of the
sympathetic nervous system and the neurilemma do not all actually
migrate as such from their sources in the cerebro-spinal system. Doubt-
less many arise by the mitotic division of "indifferent" cells alone- the
course of migration. The existence of sympathetic sensory neurones in
the sympathetic trunks and the pre-vertebral plexuses has not been
demonstrated. Experimental evidence, however, indicates the presence
of sympathetic sensory neurones in the sympathetic plexuses in the walls
of the digestive tube.

While it is impossible by direct observation to trace either sympathetic
excitatory or sympathetic sensory elements back to their specific source in
the cerebro-spinal nervous system, indirect embryological and anatomical
evidence warrants the conclusion that the sympathetic excitatory neurones
arise from cells which migrate from the neural tube along the fibres of
the motor nerve-roots, while the sympathetic sensory neurones, wherever
such neurones exist, arise from cells which migrate from the cerebro-
spinal ganglia. This interpretation makes the sympathetic neurones
homologous with the afferent and the efferent components of the other
functional divisions of the peripheral nervous system. As the cells
migrating peripherally from the cerebro-spinal nervous system are the
" indifferent " cells and " neuroblasts " of Schaper, Schaper's conception
of the developmental relations of the neurones and the supporting
elements in the central nervous system may be extended to the sym-
pathetic neurones and the cells of the neurilemma. The nervous system
is a unit, of which the sympathetic system is a part homologous with the
other functional divisions. The sympathetic system may be looked upon
as an accession to the nervous system, which has arisen comparatively
late in the evolution of Vertebrates in response to the conditions of the
vegetative life. The fact that the sympathetic system is homologous
with the other functional divisions of the nervous system lends a new
aspect to the problems involved in its functional relations. The fact
that the vagal sympathetic plexuses have their origin in the hind-brain
and the vagus ganglia will doubtless have an important bearing on
certain physiological and psychological problems involving the heart
action and the digestive functions.

Development of Sympathetic Nervous System in Birds.* — Fol-
lowing up his recent work on the development of the sympathetic
nervous system in Mammals, A. Knntz publishes the results of an inves-
tigation into the development of the nervous system in Birds. The
primary sympathetic trunks in the chick arise about the beginning of
the fourth day of incubation, as a pair of cell-columns lying along the
sides of the aorta, and along the dorsal surfaces of the carotid arteries.
The " anlagen " of the secondary sympathetic trunks 'arise about the
beginning of the sixth day, as ganglionic enlargements on the median
side of the spinal nerves. These ganglionic enlargements are at first

* Jouru. Comp. Neurol., xx. (1910) pp. 283-308 (10 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 33

independent of each other, but become united later by longitudinal
commissures. The primary sympathetic trunks reach their maximum
development during the course of the sixth day, after which they
decrease in size until they disappear. These results agree essentially
with those of His, jun., but the author finds that the cells giving rise
to the sympathetic trunk are not derived exclusively from the spinal
ganglia, as His supposes, but that they are derived wholly or in part
from the neural tube. Medullary cells migrate from the neural tube
into the ventral roots of the spinal nerves.

With similar cells which wander out from the spinal ganglia, these
cells migrate peripherally along the spinal nerves. At a point a little
above the level of the aorta, cells deviate from the course of the spinal
nerves, and migrating towards the aorta, give rise to the primary sym-
pathetic trunks. As migration proceeds, the cells which deviate from
the course of the spinal nerves no longer wander into the primary sym-
pathetic trunks, but become aggregated at the point of origin of the
communicating rami, and give rise to the rudiments of the secondary
sympathetic trunks. The pre-vertebral plexuses arise as cell-aggregates
lying along the ventro-lateral aspects of the aorta from the supra-renals
posteriorly. They are derived directly from the primary sympathetic
trunks. The ganglion of Reinak arises as an oval cell-column lying in
the mesentery just dorsal to the rectum. It arises from cells which
migrate ventrally from the hypogastric plexus. The cardiac plexus and
the sympathetic plexuses in the walls of the visceral organs arise from
cells which migrate from the hind-brain and the vagus ganglia along
the fibres of the vagi. In the posterior region of the intestine the
myenteric and the submucous plexuses probably receive some cells from
the ganglion of Reinak. The cells, which migrate from the neural tube
and from the cerebro-spinal ganglia along the spinal nerves and the
vagi, are the descendants of the " germinal " cells of His, the " indif-
ferent" cells or "neuroblasts" of Schaper. They are, therefore,
homologous with the cells which give rise to the neurones and the
neuroglia cells in the central nervous system, and the sympathetic
neurones are homologous with the afferent and the efferent components
of the other functional divisions of the peripheral nervous system.
These observations agree with the author's observations on mammalian
embryos. Certain morphogeuetic differences exist between the develop-
ment of the sympathetic nervous system in Birds and Mammals, and
these the author interprets as indicating that the sympathetic system has
departed more widely from the ancestral type in Birds than in Mammals.

Duplicity in Chick Embryos.* — Chas. H. O'Donoghue describes
three specimens of duplicity, worthy of note, as they are in other respects
practically normal. In the three cases the two halves are practically
equal in development, a condition called by Saint Hilaire autositic,
although the extent to which fusion occurs differs considerably, varying
from complete anterior fusion to complete independence. Two were
syncephalic monsters, the third showed two apparently independent
embryos, which were very closely approximated in their cranial portions,

* Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1910) pp. 530-6 (4 figs.).
Feb. 15th, 1011 d

34 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

but widely divergent at their caudal ends. The author refers to the two
rival theories of duplicity, that there are to start with two germinal
areas, or that one area undergoes partial or complete fission. A case of
ovum in ovo is described, the view taken being that a fragment of a
larger egg is ruptured off and enshelled, and then incorporated with the
next egg coming down.

Inheritance in Hybrid Poultry.* — R. Pearl and F. M. Surface
have carried out a series of experiments in cross-breeding poultry, with
the general purpose of throwing light on the fundamental principles of
heredity. They publish an account of a detailed study of the reciprocal
crosses of the Cornish Indian Game and Barred Plymouth Rock breeds .
The percentage of fertility of eggs is found to be much higher when the
cross is made in one direction (B.P.R. $ x C.I.G. 9 ) than in the
reciprocal. The hatching quality of the fertile eggs is not greatly
different in the cross and its reciprocal. The hybrid matings in both
cases gave a much larger percentage of fertile eggs hatched than did the
pure matings. Study of the sex-ratios indicate that relatively more
males were produced among the hybrid chicks than among those from
pure matings, but the difference cannot be regarded as significant. The
mortality of the hybrid chicks from pure Cornish mothers was about the
same as that of the pure Cornish chicks ; and that of the hybrids from
Barred Rock mothers was about the same as of pure Barred Rock chicks.
The percentage mortality of all chicks from Cornish mothers was higher
than that of all chicks from Barred Rock mothers. Hybrid pullets from
Cornish mothers were relatively good layers, those from Barred Rock
mothers relatively poor. This result is discussed from the Mendelian
point of view. Shank and beak colour are inherited in a sex-limited
fashion. The down colour of the chicks in the female hybrids is
different from what it is in either of the two pure breeds crossed.
Dominance of pea-comb over single is found to be far from perfect. The
hybrids show a perfectly graded series of comb types from perfect pea
to the perfect single condition. In shape of body the hybrid males are
essentially like the pure Cornish Indian Game males. The hybrid
females are intermediate in shape of body between the females of the-
two pure breeds crossed.

Inheritance of Colour-pattern in Hybrid Poultry.! — R, Pearl and
F. M. Surface discuss the barred or " cuckoo " colour pattern in hybrid
poultry. Barring is inherited in a sex-limited fashion ; the sex-limited
inheritance is equivalent to a phenomenon of segregation in the female
generation. The barred pattern is inherited as a unit character inde-
pendent of the pigment which fills the pattern, and " more intense "
pigmentation is dominant over " less intense " ; with the final result
that the actual somatic barring is less well-defined in the barred hybrids
than in their barred parents. The ground colour of the barring is
also different in the hybrids. There is no evidence of a blended in-
heritance of degrees of intensity of pigmentation.

* Report Maine Agric. Exper. Stat (1910) 84 pp. (54 figs.).
t Arch. Entwick. Mech., xxx. (1910) pp. 45-61 (3 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 35

Development of Limbs in Salamandrella kayserlingii.* — J. J.
■Sckmalhausen kas made a careful study of tke development of tke limbs
in tkis Urodele, wkick shows several remarkable peculiarities, e.g. in
the position of the intermedium entirely between the primordia of the
ulna (or fibula) and the radius (or tibia), and in the disposition of the
hasipodials in longitudinal rays. The author thinks that the evidence
goes to show that the Protetrapoda had five centralia, a prre-kallux in
front of the hallux, a postminimus behind the fifth digit, and an arrange-
ment of the elements in regular rows, as if they were the results of the
division of the fin-rays of a fish-like ancestor.

Teleostean Ova and Larvae.f — A. E. Hefford gives an account of a
large number of Teleostean ova, both pelagic and dimersal, observed at
Plymouth. Among the pelagic forms described may be noted gold-sinny,
gaper, scad, boar-fish, dragonet, sole, solenette, top-knot, whiting, rock-
ling, frog-fish, and sprat. Among the dimersal forms dealt with may be
noted the shanny, the cornish sucker, and the john-dory.

b. Histology.

Insterstitial Tissue of Striped Muscle.! — J- Hirschler concludes
that the " trophospongia nets " in the wing-muscles of Insects (that are
rich in plasma), in the heart-muscle of Vertebrates, or in the muscles
of the crayfish, correspond to the basal membranes of these muscle-
fibres (and in the frog to the middle membrane as well). The "tro-
phospongia nets" in the skeletal muscles of Vertebrates are identical
with the sarcosome rows of Krause and Retzius. The " trophospongia
nets " in the skeletal muscles of Insects are identical with similar sarco-
some rows. What Holmgren has described as exogenous and new
structures are endogenous and essential parts of the muscle-fibre.

Direct Division of Red Blood Corpuscles in Scorp8ena.§ — E. Mencl
observed two cases of the direct division of red blood corpuscles in
S'corpsena porcus. An elongated dumbbell-like form was seen, with
rounded contours round the two halves, and with the normal relations
of cytoplasm and nucleoplasm.

Cartilage in Thymus of Rat.|| — Tomaki Toyofuku found hyaline
■cartilage in the apex of the thymus in two cases. It has been shown by
Erdheim that there are in the rat's thymus various epithelial vesicles and
cysts and corpuscles of branchiogenous origin (from the third visceral
cleft), and there can be no doubt that the piece of cartilage, which has
been shown by Toyofuku to occur in a few cases, is derived from the
branchial arch.

Ligaments of Oviduct of Domestic Fowl.f — M. Curtis gives an
account of the anatomical structure of the ligaments of the oviduct in
the domestic fowl, the investigation of which he was led to undertake by

* Anat. Anzeig., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 431-6 (1 pi. and 7 figs.).
t Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc, ix. (1910) pp. 1-58 (2 pis.).

I Bull. Internat. Acad. Cracovie, 1910, pp. 448-76 (1 pi.)
§ Anat. Anzeig., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 539-40 (1 fig.).

II Tom. cit., pp. 573-5 (1 fig.).

i Maine Agric. Stat. Exper., Bull. 176 (1910) pp. 1-19 (9 figs.).

D 2

36 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the apparent disproportion between the amount of musculature in the
walls of the oviduct and the physical activity of the organ. He shows
that the dorsal and ventral ligaments undergo a progressive change in
shape and size relations as the oviduct enlarges in preparation for
functional activity, and the character of these changes is described.
The ligaments of the oviduct possess a well-developed musculature
which is continuous with the outer muscle-layer of the oviduct. The
mutual relations of the abdominal viscera are such as to form a pocket
in which the ovary Ues. This walling off of the ovary tends mechanic-
ally to direct detached ova to the mouth of the oviduct.

c. General.

Evolution of Man.* — Henri Douville suggests that a change of
climate towards cold caused a recession of forests in which Anthropoid
apes lived and throve. The area previously covered with forest became
dry " bush," and it was there that Man emerged — adapted not to arboreal
life, but to walking on the ground.

European Mammals, f — E. L. Trouessart makes a plea for the more
thorough and critical study of the European Mammals. The Mammalian
fauna is much less uniform than is usually supposed. The little grey
squirrel of the north of Scandinavia, which sometimes becomes white in
Siberia, the red squirrel of Central Europe, and the black squirrel of the
mountainous parts of the Mediterranean region, cannot be included in
the same diagnosis. In the same way the " weasel " of Sardinia (Putorius
boccameld) is neither weasel nor stoat ; in Ireland there is the inter-
mediate P. hibemicus ; in Malta and Egypt there is P. subpalmatus ; and
so on. The water-vole (Arvicola amphibius L.) of France is different
from A. terrestris L. of Scandinavia, and from A. scherman (Shaw) of
the Swiss Alps. These local differentiations demand further study.

Six New European Mammals.j — Gen-it S. Miller gives brief de-
scriptions of Sorex araneus granarius subsp. n. from Spain, Dyromys
robustus sp. n. from Bulgaria, Microtus dentatus sp. n. from Spain,
Pity my s atticus sp. n. from Greece, Apodemux sylvaticus creticus subsp. n.
from Crete, Capreohts capreolus canus subsp. n. from Spain.

Atlas of the Okapi.§ — E. Ray Lankester has published a fine atlas
of this interesting type, which is isolated from other living forms, and
nearly related to Palseotrayus and Samotherium of the Lower Pliocene
of Greece. The atlas has been compiled with the assistance of W. G.
Ridewood, and the beautiful plates are for the most drawn by G. M. Wood-
ward and Gronvald. The variability of the skull and of the leg-striping
is very remarkable. An interesting diagram compares the various planes
of the skull in the Okapi with those of other Mammals. There is an
interesting photograph of a young Okapi. There is no text published,,
but with its full descriptions the atlas is complete in itself, and a beautiful
piece of work.

* Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 742-6. + Tom. cit., pp. 648-50.

t Ann. Nat. Hist., vi. (1910) pp. 458-61.

§ Monograph of the Okapi : Atlas. Printed by order of the Trustees of the
British Museum, 1910 (48 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. it

Spermaceti-organ of Kogia breviceps.* — B. Danois finds that the
general character of this organ in Kogia is like that in the Cachalot.
The cavities seem to be homologous in the two types. Danois corro-
borates the view of Pouchet and Beauregard that the spermaceti-organ
is a dependence of the right nostril, and represents the mucous amygda-
loid gland in the right nostril of other toothed Cetaceans, such as the
dolphin.

Fossil Cetacea.f — G. H. Perkins reports on various fossil remains
of Cetacea in North America, and the result of a painstaking inquiry is
to show that the specimens in the museums of Ottawa, Halifax and
Montreal may be referred to the following species : — DeJphinapterus
Uveas Gray, D. vermontanus Thompson, Monodon monoceros Binn., and
Megaptera longimana (Cooks) Gray.

Guttural Pouches of Horse.} - Walter Stapely discusses these
hernial modifications of the auditory tube of the horse. Between the
lateral and median fibro-cartilaginous lamina? of the auditory tube, the
mucous membrane of the tube finds its exit, in sac form, into the retro-
pharynx. The mucous membrane of the tube has probably been dragged
out of the tube by adhesion of the stylo-hyoid bone with the membranous
lamina, and through it adhesion to the mucosa and stylo-hyoid has
occurred. The development of depth of the mandible caused a descent
of the larynx, with which organ the stylo-hyoid bones were also carried
down. The mucous folds, once in the retropharynx, were spread to
their present confines by flexion and extension of the atlo-occipital joint,
etc., through adhesion of the sub-mucosa with the surrounding structures.

The guttural pouches have a protective value, and allow of free move-
ment of the head. They adapt themselves to every movement so beau-
tifully that nerve pressures or pulls do not occur. Perhaps the contained
air lessens friction.

Relative Immunity of Birds to Anthrax.§ — Otto Hofherr finds
that, though there is no absolute immunity, it is very rare for healthy
adult birds to be naturally infected with anthrax. He has brought
about artificial infection in pigeons, ducks, and fowls, by introducing
large numbers of anthrax spores into the alimentary canal. The condi-
tions that favour infection are inanition, disease, and youth.

Grass Snake in the Sea.|| — J. Guerin-Ganivet reports the capture
of a grass snake (Tropidodontus natrix) well out to sea between the
Finistere coast and the Glenan Islands. If it came from the islands, it
must have gone four miles, but it was probably from the mainland — six
miles off.

Muddy Taste in Fresh-water Fishes.f — Louis Leger has made
some interesting experiments showing that the well-known disagreeable

» Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 690-2.

t Proc. Trans. Nova Scotia Inst. Halifax, xii. (1910) pp. 139-63 (8 pis.).
\ Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 33-5.
§ Centralbl. Bakt., lv. (1910) pp. 434-64.
|| Bull. Inst. Oceanogr. Monaco, No. 131 (1909) pp. 1-2.
1 Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 900- 2.

38 SUMMARY OK CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

taste of some fresh- water fishes from certain basins is due to the animals
becoming saturated with " the essence of Oscillarias," on which they
directly or indirectly feed. The bad taste is most marked in the skin-
glands and the kidneys, and is less marked, of course, in proportion as
the fish is less vegetarian in its diet.

Scales of Fishes.* — T. D. A. Cockered describes the structure of
the scales of some African Characinid fishes, which are primitive relatives
of the Cyprinidse. The sculpture of an ordinary fish-scale includes two
important elements, the circuli and the radii. The circuli are circular
lines, sometimes referred to as " lines of growth," while the radii are
lines or grooves radiating outward from the nuclear area, The radii
seem to be of secondary origin. They may lose their radial arrange-
ment and simulate circuli, just as circuli may become transverse. The
African Characinidae have scales of two main types — one Cyprinoid
(including Hydrocyoninas and Citharininae), the other Ctenoid (including
Ichthyoborinae and Distichodontinaa). In another paper, f the author
describes the scales of Morniyrid fishes, which are cycloid, with well-
developed circuli and with strong basal radii, but with this remarkable
feature, that the apical radii are greatly modified and join irregularly,
forming a network.

t3

Variations in Ureters of Weever.J — J. Chaine finds that in this
fish (Trachi)ius draco) the commonest arrangement of the ureters is that
they unite just behind the posterior end of the kidney, forming a
relatively long common canal to the bladder. In many cases they do
not unite till near the bladder. In rare cases (two were observed) they
open separately into the bladder.

Variation of Species of Notropis.§ — H. W. Fowler shows the range
of variation in the important or fundamental characters of a majority of
the species of this genus of Cyprinidaa.

Growth of Salmo hucho.|j — 0. Haempel finds that the methods of
estimating age in various Teleosteans apply well to Salmo hucho, where
the winter and summer zones can be read in the scales, otoliths, oper-
culum, vertebrae, and upper jaw-. The rings on the vertebras are
particularly clear. In the first four years there is great increase in
length, about 15 cm. annually, but it then sinks to 2-5 cm. annually.
On the other hand, the increase in weight is at first slight (250 grm. in
a year), but from the fifth year onwards, 1-2 kilogrm. per annum.

Biological Stations. 1f — Chancey Juday gives an interesting illus-
trated account of some of the European biological stations — at Plymouth,
Port Erin, Cullercoats, Sutton Broad, Millport, St. Andrews, Bergen,
Kristineberg, Furesee, Helder, Overmeire, Heligoland, Plon, Roscoff,

* Smithsonian Misc. Coll., lvi. (1910) No. 1, pp. 1-10 (2 pis. and 2 figs.).
+ Tom. cit., No. 3, pp. 1-4 (3 figs.).
X P.V. Soc. Sci. Bordeaux, 1909, pp. 5-6.

§ Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1910, pp. 273-93 (7 pis.).
|| Internat. Rev. Hydrobiol., iii. (1910) pp. 136-55. See also Zool. Zentralbl.
xvii. (1910) p. 686.

^ Trans. Wisconsin Acad., xvi. (1910) pp. 1257-77 (4 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 39

Banyuls, Cette, Wimereux, Villefranche, Monaco, Trieste, Rovigno,
Lunz, Naples, Cagliari, and Sebastopol.

Outlines of Zoology.*— J. Arthur Thomson has revised his Manual
of Zoology, introducing a large number of new figures and a number of
modifications in his treatment of the subject.

INVERTEBRATA.

Fresh-water Microfauna from German East Africa.! — E. v. Da day
continues his interesting task, and reports a number of new Ostracods
(e.g. species of Stenocypris, Cypridella, and Potamocypris), thirty of which
are known as yet only from German East Africa, a new species of Macro-
biotus, and some Hydrachnids.

Plankton of Spitzbergen.J — Hjalmar Broch deals with the plankton
from the Eisfjord of Spitzbergen. Some Tintinnidae, two Plutei of an
Ophiuroid — Say Ma and Eukrohnia hamata — various Copepods, the
Pteropod Limacina helicina, and the Appendicularian Fritillaria borealis,
are among the forms dealt with. The author describes three new species
of Peridinium, and has some interesting notes on a number of others. Of
particular importance are his observations on the form-changes associated
with growth.

Mollusca.

7- Gastropoda.

Genus Cumanotus.§ — Nils Odhner compares Cumanotus beaumonti
from Plymouth with the Norwegian G. laticeps, and finds they are the
same. Thus he concludes that this genus of Nudibranchs has only one
species, viz. 0. beaumonti (Eliot, 1906), of which C. laticeps Odhner 1907
is a synonym. The species has consequently a wide distribution, being
obtained in England as well as in northern Norway.

Structure of Phylliroe bucephala.|| — N. Vessichelli gives an account
of the nervous system, which bears a close resemblance to that of Aply-
siella and Tritonia and the Gymnosomata. The pedal, labial, cutaneous,
and other glands are described, and the structure of the gonads is dis-
cussed. The association of Phylliroe with Mnestra, with an Antho-
medusoid, and with Halistemma, is also discussed.

Opisthobranchs of South Africa. f — K. Bergh reports on a collection
which adds greatly to the little that was known of South African Opis-
thobranchs. He establishes new species of Aplysia, Philine, Doridium,
Pleurobrancksea, Oscaniella, Archidoris, Doriopsis, Nembrotha, Tritonia,
Pleurophyllidea, and other genera, and contributes a large amount of
anatomical description.

* Outlines of Zoology. Edinburgh, Glasgow, and London: 1910, 5th ed.,
xxi. and 855 pp. (420 figs.).

t Zoologica, xxiii. (1910) Heft 59, pp. 177-240 (3 pis. and 8 figs.).
X K. Svenska Vetensk. Handl., xlv. (1910) pp. 25-64 (27 figs, and map).
4 Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc, ix. (1910) pp. 82-4.
H MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, xx. (1910) pp. 108-28 (1 pi. and 3 figs.).
1 Trans. S. African Phil. Soc, xvii. (1908, received 1910) pp. 1-144 (14 pis.).

40 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

5. Liamellibranchiata-

Visceral Ganglion of Pecten.*- W. J. Dakin describes the large
complicated visceral ganglion, whose great development is correlated
with the extent of the area of innervation, and due to the reduction of
the more anterior parts of the animal, the absence altogether of the
anterior adductor, and the corresponding increase of the posterior muscle
and other parts.

Dakin describes the lobes of the ganglion, the innervation of the
osphradium, the central neuropil (an intricate mass of neurofibrils) and
the cortical layer of motor ganglion-cells, and the minute structure
generally.

The scallop is very sensitive to the presence of starfishes, which are
recognized by the olfactory sense, and not by touch or sight. The
osphradia and abdominal sense-organs do not appear to play any visible
part in the perception of starfish.

The orientation of the animal is apparently controlled by the otocysts.
The movements of the velum and adductor muscle are co-ordinated, and
are concerned in several important functions, as swimming, orientation,
and expulsion of reproductive cells.

Removal of the abdominal sense-organ has no visible effect on the
perception of vibrations in the water. The function of this organ is
probably different from that of the osphradium, and may be the regu-
lation of currents in the pallial cavity.

Cleansing Oysters.f — Fabre-Doniergue has made an interesting and
practically important series of experiments to show that oysters may be
kept for eight days or more in filtered water, frequently renewed, without
losing in weight or in vital resistance or in appearance. In this way the
cleansing of the pallial cavity from deleterious micro-organisms can be
secured without affecting the market value of the ovsters.

Feeding Habits of Oysters.! — Fabre-Domergue refers to the belief
that oysters feed selectively on Diatoms, Infusorians, Copepods, and the
like, rejecting by their labial palps what is unsuitable, while the gills
exhibit no filtration. This view is weakened by experiment. Oysters
placed in water badly contaminated with recognizable faecal matter
ingested large doses of this. A bacteriological inquiry should extend
to the intestinal contents of the oyster.

Arthropoda.
a. Insecta.

Colour-sense of Hive-bee.§— John H. Lovell has made a number of
very interesting experiments bearing on the much-discussed question
whether hive-bees can distinguish colours. His conclusions are the
following : Bees easily distinguish colours, whether these are artificial or
natural. They are more strongly influenced by a coloured slide than
by one without colour. Bees which have been accustomed to visit a

* MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, xx. (1910) pp. 1-40 (2 pis.).

t Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 734-6. + Tom. cit., pp. 829-31.

§ Amer. Nat., xliv. (1910) pp. 673-92.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 41

-certain colour tend to return to it habitually. They exhibit colour
fidelity ; but this habit does not become obsessional, since they quickly
learn to discriminate between colours when this is for their advantage.

Scelionid Parasite of Spider's Eggs.* — E. Bugnion and N. Popoff
describe Baeus apterus sp. n., a small apterous Hymenopteron, allied to
the Proctotrupidae, which lays its egg in the egg of a Ceylonese spider,
Argyope setherea Walckenaer. The parasite develops in about 12 to 13
days, which corresponds to that of the spider (14 to 15 days). The male
insect is winged ; and the authors note the curious point that in Oophthora
semblidis Aur., studied by Silvestri, it is the male that is apterous, while
the female is winged.

Nervous System of Dytiscus marginalis.| — Georg Holste gives a
full and well illustrated account of the macroscopic features of the
nervous system of this beetle. The nerves of the thorax and abdomen
are thoroughly worked out and named for the first time. Attention may
also be directed to the analysis of the sympathetic nervous system — the
ganglia and nerves of the gut, the dorsal blood-vessel, and the tracheae.

New Termitophilous Staphylinid.J^F. Silvestri describes Termi-
toptochus indicus g.etsp.n. from Singapore termitaries {E titer mes singa-
porensis Havil.). It is allied to Termitomimus Trag., but is very distinct.
The female has an elongated body, with a triangular inflated abdomen
turned upwards and forwards, so that sternites 2-6 are posterior and
dorsal.

Eye of Dermestes.§ — 0. Kirchhoffer has studied the development of
the eye in this beetle. The conical ingrowths of the cornea (corneal
processes) cannot be regarded as crystalline cones which have fused with
the cornea. The crystalline cones are intra-cellular structures due to
" Semper's cells," and they are not developed in Dermestes vulpinus. The
corneal processes are extra-cellular products of " Semper's cells," which
lie in the imago between the corneal processes and the retinula.

In the formation of the cornea a part is played to begin with not
only by " Semper's cells," but also by the main and the accessory pigment-
cells. The corneal processes are formed in the same way as the cornea
proper.

The retinula consists primarily of eight cells, of which one is central,
while seven are peripheral. By the coalescence of the peripheral cells
the central cell is compressed down to its nucleus.

The pigment is not a product of the cells in which it occurs in the
imago. It arises from the pigment of the larval eyes, which retreat
during metamorphosis towards the optic ganglion. The pigment-granules
migrate along the post-retinal fibres, first into the retinula cells and then
into the pigment-cells.

Intestinal Secretion in Dytiscus. || -Deegemr describes what goes
on in Macrodytes {Dytiscus) circumcinctus, and compares the process with

* Rev. Suisse Zool., xviii. (l'JIO) pp. 729-38 (1 pi.).

t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1910) pp. 419-7f (12 figs.).

t Boll. Lab. Zool. Scuolo Agric. Portici, v. (1910) pp. 37-9 (3 figs.).

§ Arch. Natur.. lxxvi. (1910) pp. 1-26 (2 pis. and 7 figs.).

|| Tom. cit., pp. 27-43.

42 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

that ill the caterpillar of the spurge moth. The latter eats almost con-
tinuously ; a full crop may serve the beetle for 24 hours. The secretory
activity of the intercrypt-cells and villus-cells seems to be interrupted
for considerable intervals, so that these elements may also be absorptive.
The crypt-cells of the posterior mid-gut and the cells of the smooth crypt-
portion of the anterior mid-gut, which, with the crypts, are absent in the
caterpillar, are purely secretory. In the caterpillar there are two kinds
of secretory cells — kalykocytes and spkasrocytes ; in the beetle there is
only one kind, comparable to spheerocytes. In the beetle there is a con-
tinuous separation and regeneration of cells or small cell-groups. In
both caterpillar and beetle the same cell may form secretion repeatedly.
There are no preformed openings for the escape of the secretion. The
whole cell passes into the lumen of the gut.

Beetles in Ants' Nests.* — Arthur M. Lea records a large number
of Australian and Tasmanian Coleoptera inhabiting or resorting to the
nests of ants. A number were found along with two species of termite
and along with the hive-bee and Trigona carbonaria. The paper is
purely systematic.

Insects in Nepenthes Pitchers. f — J. C. H. de Meijere and Hj.
Jensen have studied the insects which develop in the pitchers of Ne-
penthes. No fewer than seven species of Diptera were reared from larvse
taken from the pitchers — four Culicidee, two Phoridse, and an Antho-
myid, Phaonia nepentliicola. Jensen put a small pill of albumen in a
pepsin solution, and added the juice of the larvae. He found that this
delayed the action of the peptic ferment, and the inference is that the
larvae have an anti-ferment which enables them to resist the digestive
juice in the pitchers.

Beginning of Muscular Phagocytosis in Larval Muscids.J — Ch.
Perez has observed that leucocytes penetrate absolutely healthy sarco-
lemma, and get into absolutely normal sarcoplasm. The disintegration
of the sarcoplasm and the degeneration of the muscle-nuclei do not
begin until the leucocytes have found their way in.

Metamorphosis of Intestinal Musculature in Muscid Larvae.§ —
Ch. Perez finds that the mid-gut musculature is a network of circular
and longitudinal fibres, which contracts into a compact sheath at the
beginning of pupation. When the imaginal epithelium forms a con-
tinuous layer, the larval musculature undergoes phagocytosis. But the
muscle-nuclei persist, and only the myoplasm is engulfed. The nuclei
become the nuclei of new muscle elements, and the regeneration is
accompanied by direct nuclear division.

Habits of Procession Caterpillar.|| — H. H. Brindley adds some
fresh observations on the habits of the procession caterpillar, Cnethocampus
pinivora, to those made by him in 1901, and by T. G. Edwards in 1909.

* Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 11G-230 (3 pis.).

t Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, iii. (1910) pp. 917-46 (4 pis.). See also Zool.
Zentralbl., xvii. (1910) pp. 679-80.

% P.V. Soc. Sci. Bordeaux, 1909, pp. 25-6. § Tom. cit., p. 34.

|| Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc, xv. (1910) pp. 576-87 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 43

Many nests containing- living larvae were found on the young saplings of
a pine forest at Arcachon, and in all cases the branches near the nest were
matted with the threads secreted by the larvae. Below the nest threads
were rare, and only a few (none of which reached the ground) were found
i >n the trunks. The threads gave no evidence that leaving the nest and
returning to it was a frequent habit. Many experiments were made
with the thread formed by a procession on the march. The general
result of these was to show that the thread is of very slight importance
either in the formation of a procession, or in maintaining its integrity.
The thread forms the nest in the tree and the cocoon in the pupa state,
but the reason why it should continue to be secreted while the larvae
tire feeding or away from the nest remains obscure, unless it may be
regarded as an excretion. Experiments in regard to leadership showed
that the same leader took the head of the procession in about 50 p.c. of
cases, when it was re-formed after either natural or artificial massing. It
seems certain that contact between the larvae is of much importance, and
that, though there is no permanent leadership, the leader for the time
being does determine the behaviour of the procession, because all its
members endeavour to maintain a head-to-tail contact. Mass formation
is always, and burrowing frequently, begun by the leader. The observer
experienced no irritation from handling the caterpillars, and believes
with Edwards, that the sensibility to the glandular hairs varies with the
individual.

Spermatogenesis in Lepidoptera.* — Margaret Harris Cook has
studied Callosamia promothea and some other types. A careful examina-
tion of the chromatin elements show's that one acts differently from the
others during a certain period in the development of the germ-cells. It
is distinguished from all other cell -structures by its staining reaction, its
precocious division, and its close association with a plasmosome ; while
later it shows likeness to the other chromosomes in form, valence, and
division ; such behaviour makes it necessary to interpret this, as other
workers have done, as an equal pair of idiochromosomes representing
different characters from those of the other chromosomes, and expressing
by their peculiar behaviour a masked dimorphism.

The following facts are in favour of the theory of the individuality
of the chromosomes : the number remains the same from generation to
generation ; they are seen in maturation-divisions to be formed of pairs
of equal size ; in smear preparations the boundaries can be traced, and
the chromosomes never entirely lose their continuity during the growth
stage, and at least one of the chromatin elements shows marked pecu-
liarity in its behaviour, and can therefore be traced throughout the
growth period. These facts show that Lepidoptera, like the other
Insect orders, may be brought into harmony with recent cytological work.
A summary of the detailed observations is given.

New Flea from Jerboa. f—Alfons Dampf gives a full description of
Mesopsylla eucta g.etsp.n. from Alactagajaculus, and makes comparative
tes on Palseopsylla Wagner, and other fleas.

* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1910, pp. 294-327 (6 pis.),
t Zool. Jahrb., 1910, Suppl. 12, Heft 3, pp. G09-64 (34 figs.).

44 SUMMARY OF UUKKENT UKSEAKCHKS RELATING TO

Head-glands of Caddis-worms.* E. L. Russ has studied the glands
in the head of larval Trichoptera, especially those of the fourth and
fifth head-segments. Two different types occur : the Limnophilid
type, consisting of a group of more or less distinct cells opening into an
efferent duct, and the Rhyacophilid type, consisting of closely com-
pacted glandular cells radially disposed around a central canal. An
extra pair of internal mandibular glands is reported in the larva of
Rh yacophila o b I iterata .

Injurious Insects in Ireland. f — George H. Carpenter reports on
injurious insects and other animals observed in Ireland during the year
J'.»0'.», such as the March moth (Auisopteryx sescularia Schiff), the
female of which is wingless, like that of the allied winter moth ; the
fir-seed Chalcid (Megastigmus strobilobius Ratz.), the ox-louse {Hsemato-
pinus eurysternus Xitzsch). Besides insects, he deals with spotted
Millipedes ( Blaniulus), which enter potato-tubers by minute lesions,
the harvest bug (Trom Iridium), the root-knot eelworm (ffeterodera
radkicola Greef), which has hitherto been unknown in Ireland, and
other animals.

Notes on Chermes pini. J — Paul Marchal suggests that the extra-
ordinary mechanical activity of the migration in the sunshine, followed
by abundant absorption of sap when they settle, may be connected in
these insects with the bringing on of the production of sexual forms.
He also calls attention to interesting intermediate forms between the
"" exules alatae " and the " sexuparous " forms.

@. Myriopoda.

Cavernicolous Myriopoda. § — H. W. Brolemann continues his studies
in " biospeleology," and reports on a number of Myriopods from caves.
He deals with Scutig&rella immacidata Newport among the Symphyla,
Polyxenus Jucidus among the Pselaphognatha, a number of Polydes-
moidea, and Callipus fatidissimus Sav. among the Lysiopetaloidea.
Among the Polydesmids is a new genus, Haploleptodesmus.

8. Arachnida.

Palpi of Male Spiders. j| — J. H. Comstock describes some of the
types of palps, and seeks to establish a satisfactory nomenclature. He
begins with a generalized type of palp, as in Filistata and Eurypelma,
and works on to the highly complex types, as in Linyphia and Aranea.
An account is given of the numerous different parts in a specialized palp,
and emphasis is laid on the importance of describing palpi from expanded
specimens.

New Ixodidse.lf — L. G.Neumann describes the following new species :
Ixodes elegans from Chili, Aponomma pattoni from India, Rhipicephalus
planus from S. Cameroon, and Argas delicatus from Central Asia, and a
number of imperfectly known forms.

* Arch. Zool. Exper., v. (1910) Notes et Revue, No. 3, pp. lxi-lxvii (2 figs.).
t Econ. Proc. R. Dublin Soc, ii.(1910) pp. 8-30 (1 pi. and 10 figs.).
X Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 832-4.
§ Arch. Zool. Exper., v. (1910) pp. 339-78 (4 pis.).
|| Ann. Entomol. Soc. America, iii. (1910) pp. 161-85 (25 figs.).
If Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.) xii. (1910) pp. 160-76 (12 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC. 4">

Salivary Glands of Ticks.* — M. Elmassian describes these in two
Ixodidae, Margaropus annulatus and Eyalomma seyyptium, and in Argas
persicus one of the Argasinae. There are two pairs of glands, one of the
tubular type and the other acinous. The tubular gland of Margaropus
annulatus is taken as a type of a gland with mucous secretion. The
acinous gland of Hgalomma segyptium is taken as a type of a gland with
mixed mucous and serous secretion. The minute details of the process
of secretion are described.

New Species of Argas. | — Georgina Sweet describes Argas victoriensis
sp.n.. from a fowl in North Victoria. All other fowl-ticks, so far,
examined from Victoria, Xew South Wales, and Tasmania, have been
undoubtedly .4. persicus, but this new form seems to be distinct.

Pacific Pycnogonids.J — Leon J. Cole reports on six Pycnogonids
collected by the ' Albatross ' from four stations in the Eastern Pacific :
Ascorhynchus agassizii Schimkewitsch, Colossendeis gig as Hoek, and
<y. rururbita sp.n., which is closely related to G. gigas, but has a pro-
boscis with an upward curve, and the fourth joint of the palp longer
than the second.

Notes on Endeis spinosus.§ — Leon J. Cole reports the abundant
occurrence of this Pycnogonid, new to North America, among the
colonies of Obelia dichotoma growing on the Sargasso weed drifted into
Vineyard Sound. The specimens were inseparable from others from
Naples, Plymouth, Norway, and the Tortugas. It seems to have
become pelagic on the American side of the Atlantic. The heart showed
172 contractions per minute. There appeared to be a real circulation
from the body out into the legs and back, but this was rendered more
or less indefinite by the peristaltic contractions of the intestine, which
imparted a sort of churning motion to the blood and kept it moving
back and forward. In a specimen under a cover-glass these peristalses
recurred at intervals of two or three seconds.

e. Crustacea.

*

Photophores of Decapod Crustacea.|| — S. Kemp describes the struc-
ture of the photophores of Decapod Crustaceans. Photophores only occur,
as far as is known, in three types of Decapod Crustaceans, one of them,
Sergestes, belonging to the Pemeidea, the other two, Acanthepligra and
Holophorus, to the Caridse. The structure is wholly different in the
Penaeid and Carid types, but they possess one very striking feature in
common : a deep-blue pigment is associated with the luminous organ
in both. In Sergestes the photophores are distributed on the lower
sides of the eye-stalks, antennules and antennal scales, on the oral
appendages, on the thoracic and abdominal sterna, on the ventral surface
of the outer uropods, and on many of the leg-joints. In S. challenger i
photophores occur in the roof of the branchial chamber, and illuminate

* Arch. Zool. Exper., v. (1910) pp. 379-419 (2 pis.).

t Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 15-18(1 pi.).

J Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, lii. (1909) pp. 185-91 (3 pis.).

§ Biol. Bull., xviii. (1910) pp. 193-203 (2 figs.).

I Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1910, pp. 639-51 (3 pis.).

46 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the gills from above. In this group the photophores arc all identical
in structure and are quite immovable, though some of them are borm-
on short thick stalks, that they may bear more directly downward-.
They apparently increase in number even after the animal has reached
maturity. In Acanthephyra the organs differ in complexity according
to their position. There are twelve highly-developed organs, each
placed so that the light it produces is thrown directly downwards. One
is situated on the distal and external aspect of the protopodite of each
pleopod, and one behind the protopodite of each uropod. A dark violet-
blue streak on each side of the inner wall of the carapace immediately
behind the last pair of thoracic legs, is evidently from its structure also
a photophore, though it is less highly specialized than those at the base of
the pleopods. In addition, there are very numerous pigmented spots.
which the observer agrees with Coutiere in regarding as simple aggrega-
tions of luminous cells. The brilliant scarlet-red colour characteristic
of deep-sea Decapods is quite undeveloped in the neighbourhood of
the photophores. The more complex photophores appear first, the earliest
known larva already possessing the twelve organs. Fresh spots of blue
pigment appear after every moult ; in the largest individual examined
they reached the number of 147. The great majority of animals which
possess photophores live on the surface or in intermediate depths.

Abnormal Cheliped of Lobster.* — Leon J. Cole describes an inter-
esting abnormality in the cheliped of a lobster (Homarus amerimnus)-
the abnormality consisting of a double extra claw. While the extra part
actually separates from the normal propodite, it is shown that the effects
of the doubling may be traced to the base of the leg. It is further
shown that the conditions in this appendage illustrate almost diagram -
matically the " rules of secondary symmetry " formulated by Bateson,
if allowance be made for the effects of the torsion which occurs in the
normal lobster cheliped, and the mechanical conditions which may
modify such torsion. Other similar abnormalities are discussed.

Heterocuma.t — W. T. Caiman describes an immature female of
Heterocuma sarsi Miers from the Straits of Korea, and makes some
remarks on the genus, which occupies an interesting position among
Cumacea. It agrees in some respects with Gumopsis, among the
Bodotriidae, and in some ways with Vauntompsonia ; it seems to make
clear that the line of separation between Bodotriidfe and Vauntomp-
soniidae can no longer be maintained.

Monograph of Phyllopoda Anostraca.J — Eugene Dadayde Dees has
completed an elaborate monograph on this sub-order of Phyllopods.
Among the extant families the Polyartemiidae, Branchipodidaa, and
Streptocephalidas have well-defined boundaries. The uniformity of the
family Branchinectidae is interrupted only by the genus Artemiopsis,
which has a penis of divergent structure. Much importance cannot be
attached to the presence of eight segments in the abdomen of Artenm
and Artemiella, or to the two branchial lamella? in Branchinectella. The

* Biol. Bull., xviii. (1910) pp. 252-68 (9 figs.),
t Ann. Nat. Hist., vi. (1910) pp. 612-16 (1 pi.).
% Ann. Sci. Nat., xi. (1910) pp. 91-489 (84 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 47

limits of the Chirocephalidae are not very precise, but its sub-families
Chirocephalinas and Eubranchipodinae are uniform. The sub-family
Branchinellithe is divergent in the structure of the penis.

The author gives a genealogical tree, and inclines to the conclusion
that the sub-order has had a polyphyletic origin — a view that is corro-
borated by the facts of geographical distribution.

New Antarctic Phyllopod.* — Eugene Daday de Dees describes
Branehinecta gaini sp. n.,a new Anostracan Phyllopod found by L. Gain
of the ' Pourquoi-pas ? ' Expedition in Petermann Island and adjacent
islands. It was found in crevices among the rocks where water collected
from melted snow. It is like some of the northern species, but seems
distinct, and is the first Antarctic representative of its race.

Affinities of Philichthydae.f — A. Quidor has studied the life-history
and affinities of Leposphilus labrei Hesse parasitic on the scales of Labmis
donovani. In their first parasitic stages the Philichthydse show relation-
ship with the Dichelestidaj ; in their free stages they show relationship
with such Lernaeidse as Lernsea and Penella. It seems likely that the
Philichthydae should be ranked as intermediate between Lernaeidas and
Dichelestidae.

Parasitic Copepod from Cephalodiscus.J — W. T. Caiman describes
Zanclopus cephalodisci g.etsp.n., one of the Ascidocolidas, found in
Cephalodiscus. It is most nearly allied to EnUrognaih,us comatidse of
Giesbrecht ; it also approaches Enteroeola, Aplostoma, and Enteropsis in
the vermiform or maggot-shaped body and non-natatory thoracic feet of
the female, and in the absence of a brood-sac and of maxillipedes ; but
it is a very distinct type.

Ostracods from Funafuti.§ — Frederick Chapman reports on fifty-two
species and varieties of Ostracods from near Funafuti, eight of them from
great depths (2^ to 3 miles). Nine new species of Cythere and other
genera are described, and Brady's Pliocene Loxoconcha latissima is noted
for the first time as recent.

Notes on Cladocera.|| — E. A. Birge discusses Pseudosida bidentata

Herrick and the genus, Latona parviremis sp. n. and the genus, Latonopsis

fascicidata Daday, Wlassicsia hinistinensis sp. n., Odontalonag.n. (erected

for Alona tenuicaudis Sars and 0. longicaudis sp. n.), and the genus

Alonella.

Annulata.

Cuticular Warts of Pilargis verrucosa. IT — Ch. Perez found at
Arcachon an interesting Polychset described by Saint-Joseph under the
name Pilargis verrucosa. Its thick cuticle is more like that of an
Arthropod. There are no mucous glands, and the whole dorsal surface
is studded with peculiar warts, almost wholly cuticular.

* Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 688-90. t Tom. cit.,pp. 834-6 (1 fig.).

X Marine Investigations in S. Africa, v. (1908, received 1910) pp. 177-84 (2 pis.).
§ Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxx. (1910) pp. 388-444 (4 pis.).
|| Trans. Wisconsin Acad., xvi. (1910) pp. 1017-66 (6 pis.),
f P.V. Soc. Sci. Bordeaux, 1909, pp. 24-5.

48 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Littoral Polychaeta of Torquay.* -E. V. Elwes continues his notes
on these worms, giving a list of the representatives of many families.
He gives very useful keys to the genera of Eunicidae, Spionidae, Cirratu-
lidae, Maldanidaa, Terebellidae, Sabellidae, and Serpulidae, found on the
French and English coasts of the Channel.

Reactions of Earthworms to Acids.t S. II. Ilurwitz has investi-
gated the influence of organic and inorganic acids on the common
manure worm AUobophora fmtida Sav. He found that the reactions of
the earthworms may be ascribed to the hydrogen ions the solutions
contain, and that the reaction-time depends upon the number of
hydrogen ions present in the solution of the acid. Using the reaction -
time as a basis, the investigator found that the earthworm discriminated
more certainly than man between a solution of acids at a concentration

of t^x- The response of the earthworms to solutions of acetic acid

was more active than might have been expected from the degree of
dissociation of this acid, and in this respect the earthworm's reactions
are in agreement with human sensations, as worked out by Kahlenberg
and by Richards.

Caucasian Earthworms.^ — W. Michaelsen reports on eight new
species, mostly from the Caucasus and Trans-Caucasus. There are so
many Lumbricida? in this region, and so many basal and annectent types,
that it seems reasonable to regard the region as the headquarters and
centre of dispersion for earthworms. The classification which Rosa and
Michaelsen established — mainly on the position of the male gonads and
of the receptacula, and on the seta? and pigmentation — is being modified
by the discovery of intermediate types. Thus Eiseniella, Eisenia, and
Dendrobsena must be included in the single genus Helodrilus.

Nernatohelminthes.

New Nematode in Eye of Queensland Fowl.§ — Georgina Sweet
describes Oxyspirura parvovum sp. n., which causes "worm in the eye"
in Queensland poultry. It is really extra-ocular, like 0. mansoni, occur-
ring in numbers beneath the nictitating membrane. Four other Nema-
todes are reported, and a list is given of Metazoan parasites recorded
from the fowl in Australia.

Microfilaria in Magpies.|| — J. A. Gilruth, G. Sweet, and'S. Dodd
describe larval forms of Microfilaria gymnorhinse sp. n. from the blood
of Australian magpies {Gymnorhina tibicen). They are distinctly smaller
than those observed by previous workers in crows, and described as larva?
of Filaria tricuspis and F. attenuata, but they may turn out to be refer-
able to one or other of these species.

Supposed Nematode in Circular Muscle of an Earthworm.lf
Gwynneth Buchanan describes in a Queensland earthworm, Diporochsetii

* Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc, ix. (1910) pp. 59-81.
+ Proc. Amer. Acad., xlvi. (1910) pp. 67-81.

\ Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersbourg, xv. (1910) pp. 1-74.
§ Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 242-56 (5 pis.).
|| Tom. cit., pp. 236-41 (1 pi.).
f Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 99-101 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. 49

grandis, a parasite which in many features resembles a Nematode —
perhaps a larval form of some already recognized species. But the
entire absence of reproductive structures made it impossible to attempt
a classification.

Platyhelminthes.

Dipylidium caninum in a Child.* — W. A. Riley reports the occur-
rence of this tapeworm in a boy at Ithaca. It is more generally known as
Taenia canina, or T. cucumerina, or T. elliptica, and sixty-two cases have
been recorded, mostly in children. The intermediate hosts are the dog-
louse, Trichodectes canis, and the flea Ctenocephalus canis. Man may
accidentally ingest one of these insects, and the parasites are able to
complete their development in the unusual host.

Tapeworms of South American Felidse. | — M. Liihe finds that
Taenia oligarthra Dies, from Felis concolor is nearly allied to T. echino-
coccus v. Sieb., and that Cysticercus macrocystis Dies, from Lepus brasi-
liensis is the bladderworm stage of a new tapeworm, T. macrocystis
(Dies.) from species of Felis. He also describes T. omissa sp. n. from
Felis concolor and other species of Felis.

New Tapeworm in Chicken. % — Georgina Sweet describes Davainea
variants sp. n. from chickens in Melbourne. It is superficially very like
D. proglottina, and in some respects it suggests a combination of features
of D. proglottina and of D. echinobothrida. Two other species of Davainea
and Ghoanotaenia infundibulum are reported.

Parasites from Irish Sea Fishes.§ — James Johnstone deals with
Lebouria idonea Nicoll from a common dragonet, Prosthecobothrium
dujardinii (van Beneden) from the skate, and Echeneibothrinm variabile.
He discusses the genus Echeneibothrinm, which is defined by the pre-
sence of four Echeneif orm bothria carried on contractile pedicels ; by the
absence of any armature of the bothria ; and by the presence of a con-
tractile myzorhynchus, at the apex of which there is a terminal " os."

Entozoa from Clyde Fishes. || — W. Nicoll describes Peracreadium
genu (Rud.) from Labrus berggylta, P. commune (Olsson) from the same,
Lebouria varia sp. n. ( = {Lebouria} alacris (Lss.) Nicoll) from the drago-
net, Helicometra pulchella (Rud.) from Labrus berggylta and the conger,
Pharyngora bacillaris (Molin) from Scomber scombrus, Prosorhynchus
aculeatus Odhner from the conger, and a number of other Trematodes.
Adult forms of Bothriocephalus bipunctalus Zeder were found : Cottus
scorpius and Abothrium rugosa (Goeze) in the pollack. The first is
frequent in the turbot, the second is a typical gadoid parasite. The so-
called Scolex polymorphic was common — a composite form that includes
the larvse of several species of Calliobothrium.

* Science, xxxi. (1910) pp. 349-50.

t Zool. Jahrb., 1910, Suppl. 12, Heft 3, pp. 687-710 (2 pis. and 8 figs.).

J Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. U910) pp. 243-56 (5 pis.).

§ Proc. and Trans. Liverpool Biol. Soc.xxiv. (1910) pp. 78-99 (10 figs.).

|| Parasitology, iii. (1910) pp. 322-59 (1 pi.),

Feb. loth, 1911 e

50 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

New South African Polyclad.* — Lydia Jacubowa describes Piano-
cera gilchristi sp. n. from Cape Town, which differs considerably from
other species of the genus. The male copulatory apparatus is character-
ized by the abnormal structure of the penis and the granule gland. In
the female apparatus the bursa copulatrix is provided with papilla?, and
there is no accessory vesicle.

Incertae Sedis.

New Hemichorda from South Africa.t - - J. D. F. Gilchrist de-
scribed (in 11)07) a new genus of the Phoronidea, differing from Phoronis
chiefly in having an involution of epidermis with definitely differenti-
ated (cubical) cells. The involution occurs below the nerve-ring, which
it partly covers ; it passes round the body, encircling the mouth, anus,
and nephridial apertures. In addition to this new type, Phoronopsis
albomaculata g. et sp. n., he described Phoronis capmsis sp.n. and Piijclm-
dera capmsis sp.n.

The following observations were made on Phoronis capmsis
Currents of water, with food and other particles, pass in between the
outer and inner circle of tentacles towards the mouth. They pass out
between the expanded tentacles, downwards between those of the outer
• row, and inwards and upwards between those of the inner. Another
current of water passes in succession over two special patches of nervous
epithelium, the nephridial openings, and the anal opening, and joins the
last-mentioned current. Most of the particles in the first current come
in contact with the tentacles, and are carried on them to the mouth
region ; some of these are then carried back on the same tentacles on
which they came, and dropped off.

Two special patches of nerve-tissue on the nerve-ring are in a
position with regard to currents of water similar to the pallial olfactory
organ of Mollusca, and probably exercise a similar function. The
nervous tissue at the commencement of the digestive tract appears, from
the definite rejection of particles after reaching this region, to be an
organ for the discrimination of food particles, and may be called an
organ of taste.

The lophophoral gap between mouth and anus is, in the living and
expanded animal, no wider than the spaces between the tentacles, and
plays no special part in the passage of currents of water. The projecting
free part of the lophophoral organ is relatively large and leaf-like in life,
and in discharge of ova overlaps the nephridial opening conveying the
ovum to the brood-cavity in the tentacles. The more glandular part
probably supplies the mucus in which ovas and embryos are enveloped.
The whole organ may be called a glandular oviducal furrow.

The blood (corpuscles and plasma) in the normal condition of the
animal passes successively through a median (dorsal ?) vessel, two circum-
cesophageal dilatable vessels, a lateral (ventral ?) vessel, and on again
to the median vessel. That is, in these vessels there is a true circula-
tion which, however, becomes oscillatory, or partly so, under abnormal
conditions. The movement of the blood is oscillatory (to and fro) in

* Marine Investigations S. Africa, v. (1908, received 1910) pp. 145-9 (1 pi.).
+ Tom. cit., pp. 151-76 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 51

the vascular diverticula of the tentacles, the bod y-cavity and the gonads.
It is also oscillatory in the small circular vessel at the base of the
tentacles.

Reproduction may take place throughout the year, but is much more
marked in the summer months. This species does not die off annually.

New Species of Alcyonidium.* — 0. Roehrich describes Alcyonidium
topsmti sp. u., thrown up on the shore at Luc-sur-Mer. It somewhat
resembles A. gelatinosum, but its surface is covered with fine asperities,
and the zocecial orifice is bi-labiate. In A. albidum the orifice is trilobed.
and Roehrich proposes to modify the definition of the genus Alcyonidium
to include these two labiate species. In the other species the orifice is
simple and papilliform.

Growth and Habits of Biporae.f — C. M. Maplestone thinks that the
conical Biporre in their living state have the base uppermost. All of
them have on the apex small avicularia and pores, and the author con-
siders that from these pores there grow out filaments similar to those
recorded by Whitelegge on Bipora philippinensis, and probably attach
themselves to fragments of shells, etc., on the surface of the ocean-bed,
and so anchor themselves. He discusses the somewhat enigmatical
" semi-lunar slits," and indicates his view that they do not indicate the
commencement of new zocecia.

Maplestone also describes} an interesting massive Polyzoon — Gellepora
rerticalis sp.n. — from the South Australian coast, and a noteworthy
species, § Parmularia obliqua McG., which has a flexible stem or filament
6-7 cm. long and 2 mm. thick.

New Mesozoon.|| — Olaw Schroder describes Buddenbrockia pluma-
tellse ^.etsp.n. found by von Buddenbrock in colonies of Plumatella
repent. The stage found in the body- cavity of Plumatella was worm-
like ; the largest were 1*5 mm. in length by 0" 08-0*1 mm. in breadth.
There are two layers of cells and a lumen. In older stages the inner
layer changes greatly and gives rise to an oogonial layer, producing ova.
These seem to develop parthenogenetically into oval embryos. The
author indicates the resemblances between this parasite and Orthonectids
and Dicyemids, but thinks that it must in the meantime remain un-
attached. It is the first " Mesozoon " from a fresh-water animal.

Echinoderma.

Echinoderms of Peru.^f — H. L. Clark reports on a collection from
Peruvian coasts. There are no Crinoids known from the region. There
are only seven Holothurians and ten Ophiuroids. The Echinoids are
represented by a dozen species, and the starfishes by twice that number.

It is interesting to note that the Peruvian marine fauna is made up
of two quite different elements, that from the Panamic region and that

* Arch. Zool. Exper., v. (1910) Notes et Revue, No. 6, pp. clxiv-viii (3 figs.),
t Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 1-7 (1 pi.).

J Tom. cit., pp. 39-41 (3 pis.). § Torn, cit., pp. 42-3 (1 pi.).

|| Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1910) pp. 525-37 (2 pis. and 4 figs.).
i Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, lii. (1910) pp. 321-58 (14 pis.).

E 2

52 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

from the Chilian. The latter furnishes all of the Echinoderms found
south of Aguja Point, 6° S. lat., while the Panamic fauna is practically
confined to the shores north of that point. In spite of its low latitude,
the coast of Peru south of Aguja Point is far from tropical, and the
marine life is distinctly that of temperate seas, owing to the great
Humboldt or Peruvian current, which brings the cold waters of the
Antarctic region down nearly to the Equator.

Seasonal Retrogression of Ovaries in Starfish.* — Ch. Perez has
observed the autumnal retrogression of ovaries in Asteracanthion rubens.
The large ova show degenerative changes in the cytoplasm and in the
nucleus. Small cells accumulate in the cavity, and many of these,
laden with minute granules, appear to be dispersed by the perigenital
lacunas. No very active phagocytosis was observed, but some of the
inclusions of the small cells indicate that this process is going on.

Species of Cucumaria.f — C. L. Edwards corrects the statement that
Cucumariafrondosa (Gunner; occurs off the north Pacific coast of North
America. There are, however, four closely allied species — in the same
"species-cycle" — viz. C . calif ornica Semper, C.japonica Semper, C.fallax
Ludwig, and C. miniata Brandt.

fCcelentera.

Deep-sea Hydroids of Indian Museum. $ — James Ritchie reports on
a collection which indicates for the first time the aspect of the Hydroid
fauna of the deeper Indian Ocean waters. A Sertularian (Idia pristis)
and an epizoic Campanularian (Campanularia corrugata) share the
honour of having been dredged at the greatest depth, 1343 fathoms,
and it is noteworthy that both have been previously recognized in
shallow water. This range recalls that of SertulareUa tricuspidata,
which occurs from almost the shore to 1375 fathoms.

The collection increases the recognized Hydroid fauna of Indian seas
by eleven species, and that of Malaysia by two. Four species are new. The
deep-sea Indian Hydroid fauna seems to agree more markedly with that
of the South Pacific than with that of any other region.

The author proposes to re-introduce the Hincksian names " sarco-
theca " and " 6arcostyle " to differentiate the chitinous protection of the
" nematophore " from its fleshy content. He describes in Aglaophenia
septata Ritchie a peculiar and distinctive gonosome — a modified type of
corbula, in which the protective leaflets, which are arranged in two tiers,
bristle outwards from the body of the gonosome, while the gonangia are
covered in and protected by delicate plates of chitin.

New Genus of Hydroids. § — Hjalmar Broch establishes a new genus
Bonneviella for Lafom gigantea Bonnevie ( = Campanularis grandis
Allman). Indeed, a new family is proposed, because of the remarkable
" veloid," which forms a pre-oral cavity. The hydrotheca is bell-shaped,

* P.V. Soc. Sci. Bordeaux, 1909, p. 19.

t Zool. Jahrb., xxix. (1910) pp. 597-612 (1 pi.).

X Records Indian Museum, v. (1910) pp. 1-30 (1 pi.).

§ Nyt Magazin Naturvid. Kristiania, xlvii. (1909) pp. 195-205 (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 53

with a thin diaphragm. Broch also re-establishes Allman's genus Lic-
torella : Lafoeidas with more or less bell-like kydrothecse, which have a
strongly developed diaphragm : the hydrocaulus is upright, and regularly
branched ; nematophores are absent ; the gonangia are aggregated in a
scape. There is one species, Lictorella pi/mala (G. 0. Sars), from deep
water in the North Sea and the Bay of Biscay.

Feeding Reactions of the Rose-coral.* — F. W. Carpenter has in-
vestigated the reactions which follow the stimulation of the rose-coral
polyp of the genus Tsophyllia by means of nutrient substances. When
concentrated meat extract is applied to the oral disk of the polyp, the
disk is drawn downwards by the contraction of the retractor muscles of
the mesenteries, and the margin of the oral surface is folded inward over
the disk by the action of a well-developed sphincter muscle. Mean-
while the stomodaeum is everted, and the mesenterial filaments are
•-xtruded both through the mouth and through temporary apertures in
the oral disk. The tentacles react quickly to contact stimulation, and
affix the object which touches them to their distal ends, which are
heavily loaded with nematocysts. When the end of a tentacle is chemi-
cally stimulated with meat extract, the retractor muscles of the polyp
contract. Carmine grains dropped on the oral surface of an expanded
polyp are transferred by ciliary action to the periphery. When the
particles of carmine have previously been soaked in meat juice, the cilia
usually continue to beat in an outward direction ; occasionally, how-
ever, they reverse their effective strokes. The chief function of the
cilia seems to be that of keeping the oral surface clean. When a polyp
is fed with plankton, the small organisms are caught by the tentacles,
the oral disk sinks and the marginal zone folds inward until it com-
pletely roofs over the tentacles and the depressed oral disk. Into the
superficial chamber thus formed, the stomodaeum and mesenterial fila-
ments project, and here the mesenterial filaments, which are the
digestive organs of the polyp, probably digest and ingest or absorb
the captured plankton, little of which seems to find its way into the
reduced gastrocoeliac cavity. Extra-ccelenteric digestion apparently
takes place, therefore, in the rose-coral polyps. There is experimental
evidence of the transmission of impulses of at least a nervoid char-
acter from ectodermal receptor cells through the mesogloea to endo-
dermal effectors (muscles). This transmission is not confined to a
single polyp, but may pass from one polyp to another. It is known
that branching cells (so-called " connective-tissue " cells) occur in the
mesogloea of Isophyllia. These extend from the ectoderm to the endo-
derm, and so have the topographical relations of adjustor cells, placing
the receptor in communication with the effector. Notwithstanding
absence of exact information as to the origin, mutual relationships, and
functions of these cells, it is suggested that future studies may show
them to be the primitive synaptic neurones. •

Kodioides.f — ('has. L. Walton describes Kodioides borleyi sp. n. from
20 fathoms close to the Dutch coast. The previously known species of

* Proc. Amer. Acad., xlvi. (1910) pp. 149-62 (1 pi.),
t Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc, ix. (1910) pp. 85-7.

54 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

this remarkable Actinian genus (A', pedunculata Dan.) was obtained from
1050 fathoms between the Faroe Islands and Norway. In the new species
the mesenteries and tentacles are numerous ; in K. pedunculata there
were twelve pairs of mesenteries and twenty-four tentacles. The modi-
fied generic diagnosis of Kodioides reads : — The body encrusted, pyriform.
with a long bare stem, terminating in a pedal disk. Tentacles few or
many, in two or more series, retractile, twelve or more pairs of mesen-
teries, half of their number perfect. Suckers on the encrusted portion
of the body. No siphonoglyph. Mesodermal annular muscles. Acontia.

Evolution of Zaphrentis delanouei.* — R. G. Carruthers has traced
a succession of stages in the evolution of this coral in Lower Carboniferous
times. The series illustrates very gradual change (mutation in Waagen's
sense).

West Australian Alcyonarians.f — W. Kiikenthal reports on a rich
collection mostly from the littoral region of Shark's Bay. He reduces
twenty-eight species of Sarcophytum to five. Seven new species of Neph-
thya, one of Dendronephthya, two of Stereonephthya, are described. A
new Siphon ogorgiid genus, Nephthyigorgia, is established ; it has some
affinities with Stereonephthya, and has probably its centre of origin in
West Australia ; four new species are described. The generic diagnosis
is as follows : — " Very stiff Siphonogiids with abundant branching in one
plane ; stem, branches, and lateral twigs thick and cylindrical ; spicules
on the branches, mostly confined to the cortex and frequently projecting
from the surface ; the crowded polyps, absent only from the lowest part
of the stem, are retractile into distinctly protruding calices and arranged
in transverse rows." Kiikenthal adds two new species to Thomson's
remarkable genus Studeriotes, which he refers to the family Faseicula-
riidae. There is also a description of a new Glathraria and various
species of Plexauroides, Euphxavra, and Mopsella.

Genus Anthomastus.J — W. Kiikenthal proposes some modifications
in the definition of this genus. The colony is like a mushroom or an
inverted cone ; the autozooids are large in comparison with the siphono-
zooids ; only the latter have gonads ; the autozooids are completely
retractile into calices, which usually show distinct longitudinal ribs ; the
spicules are slender rods and spindles, and the lower cortex of the stem
always shows numerous very minute crosses, double-crosses, or the like.
Most of the species are abyssal. Twelve species are discussed, three of
which are new. Several species, such as A. agaricoides Thomson and
Henderson, and A. aberrans Thomson and Henderson, are transferred
(rightly) from the allied genus Sarcophytum.

Rhizoxenia and Sarcodictyon.§ — Robert Midler brings forward argu-
ments which go to show that the genus Sarcodictyon must be included in
Rhizoxenia, which is tRus defined : Colony formed by basal stolons, which
may coalesce into plates ; polyps occur singly or in small groups on the

* Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, lxvi. (1910) pp. 523-8 (2 pis.).
t Fauna Siidwest-Australiens, iii. (1910) lief. 1, pp. 1-108 (4 pis. and 52 figs.).
% Beitr. Natur. Ostasiens, in ^bh. K. B. Akad. Wiss. Miinchen (1910) pp. 1-16
(1 pi. and 10 figs.). 6 MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel. xx. (1910) pp. 94-100.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 55

stolons ; they are quite retractile ; the tentacles are turned inwards in
the retraction ; there is no horny cuticle in the basal part of the polyp.
Miiller recognizes R. rosea and R. catenata.

Formation of Axis of Corallium.* — Robert Miiller finds that Coral-
lium possesses an axial epithelium of ectodermic origin which agrees with
that of the Gorgonids. The axial skeleton is formed by the excretion of
crystalline calcareous bodies, whereby a cementing of the mesodermic
spicules is brought about. The union of the latter with the axial skeleton
is due to divergence of the adjacent cells of the axial epithelium, which
afterwards come together again.

Plexaurids of 'Siboga' Expedition^ — C. 0. Nutting reports on the
Plexaurids collected (1899-1900) by the 'Siboga' in the Dutch East
Indies. Five new species of Plexaura and three of Euphxaura are
described. A Ceylonese form, Plexaura antipatkes vsLT.flexnosa Thom-
son and Henderson, is included (May l'.UO) in a new species, P. aggregate,
but in February 1910 Thomson and Russell raised it to specific rank as
Euplexaura fiexuosa. This will require to be looked into. A new genus,
HicJcsonella, is established and thus defined : — " Plexauridae with a thick
ccenenchyma, calices included and on all sides of the branches, horny
axis cylinder, and two very different types of spicules — very small, short
warty spicules, and long slender bar-like smooth spindles." The name
of Simpson's new genus, HicJcsonella, more recently established for a
Gorgonellid type, will have to be changed.

Isidae of ' Siboga ' Expedition. :£ — C. C. Nutting describes Isis reticu-
lata sp. n. which goes beside /. Jiippiris, hitherto the only representative
of the genus. It differs from I. Jvippuris "in manner of branching,
reticulation, slenderness of twigs, colour, and most of all in the character
of the spicules." The author describes a new species of Ceratoisis, two
of Acanella, two of Mopsea, and two of a new genus, Peltastisis, which
" bridges the narrow gulf between the Isidse and Primnoidse, in that it
combines the jointed axis of the former and the characteristic operculum
of the latter, which it also resembles closely in its spiculation."

Gorgonidse of 'Siboga' Expedition. § — C. C. Nutting describes
LopJiogorgia pinnata sp. n., Leptogorgia formosa sp. n., Stenogorgia miniata
(Val.), S. studeri sp. n., and Platyeaulm sibogee sp. n.

Gorgonellids of ' Siboga ' Expedition.||— C. C. Nutting describes two
new species of Gorgonella, one of Verrucella, one of Juncella, one of
Scirpearella, two of Nicella, and erects two new genera, Plumigorgia and
Isidoides, He has not had the advantage of utilizing J. J. Simpson's recent
revision of the Juucellids, and thns retains a genus like Ctenocella, which
seems bound to be merged with some other. The genus Sdrpearia is
ruled out, since Scirpearea was originally used for a Pennatulid. The
new genus Plumigorgia has symmetrically arranged, delicate, pinnate,

* M.T. Zool. Stat. Neapel, xx. (1910) pp 101-7 (4 figs.)

t Monographie xiiiB. ' Siboga ' Expeditie, 1910, pp. 1-20 (4 pis.).

J Tom. cit., pp. 1-24 (6 pis.). § Op. cit , No. 7, 10 pp. (3 pis.).

|| Op. cit., No. 6, pp. 1-39 (11 pis.).

.~>6 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ultimate branches, minute calices, and minute oval lenticular and disk-
shaped spicules embedded in a translucent horn -like ccenenchyma. The
new genus Isidoides has a solid calcareous axis, club-shaped calices ;
large bar-like spicules, and an operculum of eight pieces.

Porifera.

Regeneration in Chondrosia reniformis.* — 0. Maas cut up this
sponge and put the pieces in an aquarium. When the piece consisted of
cortex and medulla, or of medulla alone, it grew in a week or so into
an almost normal sponge. Pieces of cortex by themselves always died.
Pieces of medulla and cortex, or medulla only, formed a fresh cortex.
The choanocytes and archaeocytes coalesce in syncytia, and are re-
grouped. The canals disappear in part and are re-formed. The
regenerative capacity of Chondrosia is, on the whole, slight, and Maas
connects this with the fact that this sponge is not, in natural conditions,
very liable to injury.

ArchsBOcyathinge.f — T. Griffith Taylor deals with the Archaeocya-
thinae of the Cambrian of South Australia, and gives an account of the
structure and affinities of the whole class. Five families are recognized,
Archasocyathidaa, Coscinocyathidae, Dictyocyathidae, Spirocyathidae, and
Syringocnemidas, and their inter-relations are discussed. The author
rejects the view that the Arehaaocyathinae were algae, and is not inclined
to place them near Anthozoa. He gives his reasons for placing them
in a new class nearer to the calcareous sponges than to any other. The
variation in shape and structure of a series of eighty species — dealt with
in his memoir — affords more trustworthy evidence than the microscopic
character of the skeletal elements which must have been considerably
modified in post-Cambrian periods. Practically all the form-variations
can be paralleled by the sponges and by the sponges alone. It is sug-
gested that in the Archseocyathinae we have evidence of the modifica-
tions of the "generalized type," which gave rise to the Calcarea and
Anthozoa.

Protozoa.

f Foraminifera from Funafuti.}— Frederick Chapman reports on 2M
species and varieties of Foraminifera from around Funafuti. He
describes Lagena juddiana sp. n., and two new varieties of BilocuUna
lucernida and Cassidulina bradii. Two fossil species, Lagena vmtricosa
and Virgulina pertusa are noted as recent for the first time. In relation
to the influence of light on the coloration of organisms in the ocean
depths, it is interesting to note the occurrence of deeply coloured (rose-
pink) tests of Polytrema miniaceum at a depth of 507 fathoms. A special
interest of the collection attaches to the large number of abyssal forms
occurring at depths from 2000 to 2728 fathoms, or from 2£ to over 3
miles.

* Arch. Entwick., xxx. (1910) pp. 356-78 (4 figs.). See also Zool. Zentralbl.,
xvii- (1910) pp. 560-1.

t Mem. Roy. Soc. South Australia, ii. (1910) pt. 2, pp. 55-188 (16 pis.).
J Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxx. (1910) pp. 388-444 (4 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 57

Peridinium Plankton at Rovigno.* — Hjalmar Broch has studied
the species of Peridinium from the Val di Bora at Rovigno. Apart
from P. tristylum Stein and P. adriaticum sp. n. (whose geographical
range is not known), the species are cosmopolitan or sub-tropical.
There are two distinct maxima in the year — a spring maximum, shorter
in duration, but quantitatively richer, and an autumn maximum, more
prolonged, though less rich. Characteristic of the spring maximum are
P. conicum, P. oceanicum f. drupinensis, and P. crassipes f. typica ;
while P. quarnerense and P. rrassipes f. dutumnalis are characteristic
of the autumnal maximum.

Parasitic Dinoflagellate.t- E. Ohatton describes Syndinium turbo
g. etsp. n. in the body-cavity of Paracalanus parvus, a pelagic Copepod.
The organism traverses the epithelium of the gut, and develops in
plasmodial form, like one of the euplasmodial Mycetozoa, in the general
cavity of its host. They fill the host with legions of macrospores and
microspores. The transformations of the macrospores suggest that
Oxyrrhis has close affinities with Dinoflagellates.

Blood Parasites.!— J. A. Gilruth, G. Sweet, and S. Dodd describe
Proteosoma biziurse sp. n. from the musk duck {Biziura lobata), and
Hxmoyretjarina meyaJocystis sp. n. from a python.

Protozoon Parasite from Mucous Membrane of Sheep's Abomasum.§
J. A. Gilruth describes a minute oval cyst, with a delicate wall and
groups of sporozoites. It may be the schizogonic stage in the evolution
of some parasitic sporozoou — perhaps of a Sarcosporidium. It seems that
the same parasite has been found by Mesnil and Chatton in Paris.

Haemogregarine in Blood of Varanus varius.|] — J. A. Gilruth has
some notes on an intra-corpuscular Haemogregarine in this lizard. Some
free ovoid and curved bodies were also found.

Protist Parasites from Intestine of Trichoptera.f — Doris L. Mac-
kinnon has found in the alimentary canal of caddis-fly larvae certain
well-known Gregarines, and several Protist parasites which have not
hitherto been described. Chief among these are (a) Triehomastix tri-
chopterse sp. n. ; (b) a Spirochaete ; and (c) a Flagellate which appears to
be related to Macrostoma caulleryi Alexieff.

Herpetomonads from Dung-flies.**- -I >oris L. Mackinnon notes that
Musca domett tea, and other non-biting Hies frequenting similar feeding
grounds, are probably all liable to infection with a common Flagellate of
variable form. Infection is casual, i.e. by the mouth. In the case of
the dung-flies examined, the larva? ingest faecal matter infested with
Herpetomonad cysts : the cysts develop into Flagellates in the mid-gut,
where they multiply with great rapidity : towards the close of larval
life, when the larva stops feeding, they round up in the hind-gut, and

* Arch. Protistenk., xx. (1910) pp. 176- 2U0 (11 tigs, and 1 chart),
t Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 654-6.
X Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 231-41 (3 pis.).
§ Tom. cit., pp. 19-20 (1 pi.). || Tom. cit., pp. 36 -8 ( L pi.),

f Parasitology, iii. (1910) pp. 245-54 (1 pi.).
** Tom. cit., pp. 255-74 (1 pi. and 4 figs.),

58 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

are, for the most part, passed out as cysts. A few survive the pupal
stage in a half-encysted condition, but it is probable that the infection
of the adult fly is usually freshly acquired. The cycle in the fly is
similar to that in the larvae, and is in agreement with Patten's account
of Herpetomonas muscse domesticce.

The apparent double flagellum is produced in the course of longitu-
dinal division. The new flagellum grows up alongside the old, and is
not merely split off from it.

In encystment the flagellum is not cast off bodily, but is drawn
down into the cell by the kineto-nucleus, which moves to a position
•either alongside of, or posterior to the tropho-nucleus. In this way
apparent Crithidia, or even Trypanosome forms, are produced, but there
is no hint of an undulating membrane.

Cristispira and Spirochseta.* — J. Gross describes a peculiar parasite,
Cristispira pectinis g. et sp. n., from the stomach and intestine of Pecten
jacobseus. Along with Spironema Vuillemin this new genus must be
referred to Bacteria — to a new family Spironernacea. The resemblance
of Spirochseta to Cristispira and Spironema is not more than superficial.
The Spironemacea are described as elongated, spiral, or undulating Bac-
teria, with a cylindrical body consisting of a row of compartments. In
Cristispira there is a quite unique " crista," which has been called an
undulating membrane. Multiplication is by simple constriction, or by
the formation of a partition wall, usually preceded by a process of incur-
vation. Along with C. pectinis there is another — C. interrogationis sp. n.

Development of Trypanosoma lewisi in Rat Flea.f — 0. Strickland
and N. H. Swellengrebel infected fleas {Ceratophyllus fasciatus) from the
rat and studied the development of the Trypanosome. They found '; large
•oval forms," " round forms," " little ovals," intermediate Critliidise, and
small Trypanosomes. The broad fact remains established that T. lewisi
undergoes a morphological cycle of development in the gut of its inver-
tebrate host.

New Microsporidian from Termite.J — Cm. Perez found in the body-
cavity of a Termite a Microsporidian which he names Duboscquia legeri
g. et sp. n. The parasite has a peripheral vegetative zone of budding
nuclei, but the elements which are detached towards the interior, instead
of forming by division a variable number of naked spores, retain their
individuality, increase in size, and are transformed into pansporoblasts,
^each containing sixteen spores.

* MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, xx. (1910) pp. 41-93 (1 pi.),
t Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc., xv. (1910) pp. 531-3.
j P.V. Soc. Sci. Bordeaux, 1909, pp. 17-19.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 59

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Structure and Development.
Veg-etative.

Clusiacese of North-west Madagascar ; the Influence of the Soil
upon their Secretory Apparatus.* — H. Jacob de Cordeuroy publishes a
detailed account of his investigation of this subject, and arrives at some
very definite and interesting results. The number and dimensions of
the secretory organs, he finds, are variable, and the variations are the
direct result of the character of the soil. These organs are, generally
speaking, extensively developed in plants growing on primitive rock
soils (gneiss, basalt, crystalline schists), and relatively poorly developed,
for the same species, where the soil is the product of sedimentary rocks,
especially sandy and calcareous soils. This distinction is strikingly
illustrated in the case of Ochrocarpus angustifolius.

The secretory apparatus consists of canals, in the following regions :
cortex, pith, primary bast, and secondary bast. Two main types emerge,
according as the apparatus is the more conspicuous in the primary tissue-
systems (Garcima verrucosa, Tsimatimia Pervillei), or in the secondary
tissue, the secretory system in the primary tissues being relatively re-
duced {Tsimatimia pedicellata, Symphonia sp.). In Ochrocarpus the
secretory organs are evenly distributed among primary and secondary
tissues. The canals in the cortex seem to be present invariably,
whether the soil be of igneous or sedimentary origin ; the pith canals,
on the other hand, often disappear in the latter case (Rheedia, Sym-
phonia, 'Tsimatimia) ; while secretory canals tend to be suppressed
from the primary phloem of Ochrocarpus when grown on sedimentary
soils — a significant fact when it is remembered that their presence in
this tissue is a recognized anatomical character of this genus. Dry-
ness of the soil, moreover, has its effect upon the secretory system.
The medullary system is reduced, or disappears as a consequence ; and
when the soil is sedimentary, secretory organs do not tend to appear in
the bast, by way of compensation, as they do in the case of igneous
soils {Tsimatimia pedicellata, Symphonia). Altitude, again, seems to
induce diminution in the activity of resinous secretion (Symphonia
clusioides, Ochrocarpus eugenioides).

The author draws the obvious and important conclusion that, in
view of this variability, extreme caution must be used in the employ-
ment of the extent and disposition of the secretory system for the
purposes of classification in this group.

* Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. xi. (1910), pp. 287-359.

60 SUMMARY OF CUREENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Physiology.
Nutrition and Growth-

Occurrence of Phagocytosis in the Root-nodules of Cycads.'
Franz Zack publishes his investigation of the nodules which occur on
the so-called " breathing-roots " of Cycads (compare the same author's
previous study of Elaeagnus), in their association with peculiar brown
excretion bodies. It is well known that special layers of the cortex in
Cycas are organized for the accommodation of the blue-green alga
Anabsena. These layers form a completely closed cylinder, interrupted
only at the growing-point. Within this zone an endophytic fungus
may be observed in the cells of the nodules, with its hyphae (5//. in
thickness) regularly distributed in the protoplasm. The hyphae in some
cells branch profusely, and these become coiled together. The fungus-
coils so formed are absorbed by an excretion-product ; the details of
this digestion-process are described. As the coils are organized, the
cell-protoplasm becomes divided, in a manner analogous to phagocytosis
in animals. During the digestion-process the nucleus shows signs of
degeneration, assuming at the same time a long spindle shape ; in a few
cases it was observed to divide by simple fragmentation. After some
time, often as soon as the coil is formed, protoplasm and nucleus are
disorganized. The author is of opinion that nodule-formation is not
due to the fungus ; nor is this a case of symbiosis, but of parasitism.
The fungus, it seems, infects tissues which are abnormally developed at
the expense of metabolism products ; and the cell reacts upon the fungus
by a process of phagocytosis.

Effect of Injury to the Cotyledons upon Seedling development.!
Helene Jacobi concludes from experiments with seedlings of Phaseolus
multiflorus, Cucurbita Pepo, and certain Conifers, that this effect
is produced by the consequent disturbance of the food-reserves.
Diminution in the cotyledonary food-stores during the earliest periods
of vegetative development evokes acceleration in growth ; but the effect
upon the individual organs varies according to the species on the one
hand and the environment on the other. The experiments were con-
ducted in light as well as in darkness, and both water- and pot-cultures
were employed. In Phaseolus multijiorus, the bulk of the food-reserve
is stored in the cotyledons ; in this case their injury resulted in relative
lengthening of the stem, both in light and in darkness. In Cucurbita
Pepo and Conifers the seed-leaves are not so rich in food-reserves ; and
in this case the cotyledons displayed activity in growth when cultivated
in daylight, the increase in the stem being relatively feeble. The
Conifer seedlings grown in the dark, however, had abnormally developed
stems. The author concludes that while the seedling is dependent upon
its food reserves, it devotes its energies to stem development ; growth-
increase in the cotyledons occurs only in light of a particular intensity.
Emphasis is laid on the fact that the accelerated growth of the cotyledons
is due to the decrease in food-reserve, and not to the stimulus of
wounding ; and this is borne out by the case of an abnormal pine-

* Oesteir. Bot. Zeitschr. lx. (1910) No. 2, pp. 49-55. See also Bot. Zeit.. lxviii.
(1910) p. 148. f Flora, n.s. i. (1910) pp. 279-289.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 61

seedling, possessing very few cotyledons ; these were much larger than
those of normal seedlings.

General.

Edward Perceval Wright.* — H. H. Dixon writes a note on the late
E. Perceval Wright, Professor of Botany at Trinity College, Dublin, for
thirty-five years, and Keeper of the Herbarium. He was born in 1834
in Dublin, was educated at home, and began life as a clerk in<a com-
mercial company at the age of sixteen. This post, however, he resigned
in 1853, and devoted himself to Natural Science, entering Trinity
College. In 1857 he took his degree, and was appointed Director of the
Museum in Trinity College. In 1858 he was appointed Lecturer in
Zoology in Trinity College, and Lecturer in Botany in Steeven's Hospital
Medical School. In 1862 he took his M.D. degree, and in a few years
he had made himself a position as oculist in Dublin. In 1865 he was,
however, appointed locum tenens for Harvey at Trinity College, and the
following year he gavei up his ophthalmic work. His various voyages
and travels gave him material for the publication of numerous reports
and papers, which were a valuable addition to botanical literature.

Crypto gams.

Pteridophyta.

(By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.)

Studies in Fossil Ferns.f— D. H. Scott, in the second edition of
his Fossil Botany, adds much new matter, especially in connexion with
the Pteridospermae and Bennettiteaa. Two chapters are devoted to giving
a connected account of the Pteridospermae and the so-called Cycadofilices.
Another chapter treats of the Sphenopsida (including Equisetales, Pseudo-
borniales, Sphenophyllales, Psilotales), the Lycopsida (Lycopodiales),
and the Pteropsida (including Filicales, Pteridospermas, GymnospermaB,
Angiospennas).

Zygopterideaa.J — T. Bertrand publishes a detailed account of the
Zygopterideas, treating of their anatomy as compared with that of the
Anachoropterideae and Botryopterideae, which contain one genus each.
He gives a systematic account of all the genera and species known in
the group.

Stipes of the Fossil Asterochlaena.§ — P. Bertrand gives an account
of the general anatomical characters of the stipes of Aster ocMsena laxa
Stenzel, and lays special stress on the median bands of protoxylem. The
affinities of the plant are Clepzydropsis and Ankyropteris. Bertrand
briefly indicates the principal forms of fibro- vascular bundle in the stipes
of the Zygopterideae.

* Irish Nat., xix. (1910) pp. 61-3 (1 pi.).

t Studies in Fossil Botany, ed. 2, ii. (1909) 321 pp. (85 figs.).

X Etude sur la Fronde des Zygopteridees : Lille, 1909, 289 pp. (37 figs.), and
Atlas (16 pis.). § Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 1088-90.

62 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Lepidostrobus Bertrandi.* — M. Zalesski, writing od the fossil plants
of the Carboniferous of the Donetz basin, gives a description of the
anatomical structure of Lepidostrobus Bertrandi, & new species resembling
L. Oldhamius, but differing in its larger size, longer-stalked sporangial
bracts, etc. It occurred in a limestone block with Stigmaria Spheno-
phyllum, etc., at a locality not precisely known.

Lepidophloios Scottii.f — W. T. Gordon gives an account of the
structure of Lepidophloios Scottii,a new species from the calciferous sand-
stone series at Pettycur (Fife). It has halonial tubercles, and has the
characteristic leaf-bases of Lepidophloios, but its central strand has not
the structure of L. Harcourti, which is usually regarded as typical of
Lepidophloios. It agrees much more with Lepidodendron vasculare and
L. Hiclcii, which are typical species of Lepidodendron. The vascular
bundles which run out to the halonial tubercles have the customary
solid central wood. The leaf-trace is collateral, the xylein mesarch.
Below it lies a parichnos-bundle which only forks close up to the leaf-
scar. The ligular pit has certain peculiarities.

Calamites compared with Equisetum.J— A. R. Horwood gives an
account of the fossil Calamites Schutzei Stur., found near Leicester. It
has a hollow stem and a regular succession of uniformly increasing
internodes, with a marked recurrence of a short internode — a feature
which is common also, with some modifications, in modern Equisetum.
These points • he discusses in detail, and illustrates with five tables and
two plates.

Anatomy of New Zealand Lycopodiaceae.§ - J. E. Holloway has
made a comparative study of the anatomy of six New Zealand species
of Lycopodium, viz. L. volubile, L. scariosum, Z. densum, L. laterale,
L. cernuum, L. Billardieri. A description is given of the early stages
in the development of the young plants, and of the development of the
stelar anatomy of the mature plant ; and also of the development of
dimorphism in the leaf-arrangement of L. volubile and L. scariosum.
The protballus, protocorm, foot, first root, protophylls, young stem and
leaves, etc., are discussed. As regards their stelar structure, the six
species may be classified as follows. 1. Mixed {L. cernuum, L. laterale).
2. Banded — (a) radial (L. Billardieri) ; {b) parallel (L. volubile, L.
scariosum, L. densum). The relation between the " radial " and the
" parallel " types is discussed, as also is the difference between the
" mixed " and " banded " types.

Fossil Lycopodium.|! — E. W. Berry gives an account of Lt/copodium
cretaceum, a previously undescribed species from the Upper Cretaceous
sands near Middendorf, in South Carolina, corresponding with the
Turonian of Europe. The fragments found consist of some seventeen
fruiting spikes, of various sizes, the largest being 5 cm. long by 5 mm.

* Mein. Com. geol. n. b. livr. 46, St. Petersbourg, 1908, 33 pp. (9 pis.).

t Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xlvi. (1908) pp. 443-453 (3 pis.).

X Journ. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) xxxix. (1910) pp. 277-289 (2 pis.).

§ Trans. Proc. New Zealand Inst., xlii. (1910) pp. 356-370 (4 pis. and 2 figs.).

|| Amer. Journ. Sci., xxx. (1910) pp. 275 -G (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 63

wide. The bracts are truncate at base and ovate-acuminate above, and
entire. The sporangia apparently spring from the surface of the bract
and appear to be spheroidal, but are probably reniform. The vegetative
organs are absent.

British Fern-varieties.* — C. T. Druery publishes a book on British
ferns and their varieties, illustrated with 40 coloured plates, 96 nature
prints, and 819 woodcuts. Few as are the species of indigenous British
ferns, their forms are infinite even in the wild state. They have indeed
been estimated at nearly 2000 by some authors. The present work is
intended to be a complete compendium of all recorded forms for the use
of the practical amateur rather than for the systematic botanist. The
successive chapters treat of British ferns as a hobby ; life-history of
ferns : fern propagation and culture ; fern selection ; hybridizing ;
multiple parentage : rockeries, etc. : wild " sports " and how found ;
types of variation ; fern foes and remedies ; and then the species,
varieties, etc., are treated in alphabetical order, with brief descriptions.
The long series of nature prints is selected from a collection of some
300 prepared by the late A. M. Jones of Clifton.

New Hybrid Asplenium.f — R. de Litardiere describes a new hybrid
fern, x Asplenium Patjesii = A. foresiacwn x Trickomanes, gathered at
St. Laurent-des-Nieres, in the department of Herault by E. Pages. It
approaches A. Trickomanes in its brown stipes and its oval-obtuse leaf-
segments ; and A.foresiacum in its hairy thick rachisand in the division
and form of the teeth of its leaf-segments. It also approaches the
hybrid x A.doloswn Milde {A. Adiantum-nigrum x Trickomanes). The
writer gives new French localities for two other hybrids, x A. Murbeckii
Dorfler (A Ruta-muraria x septentrionale) and x A. Gautieri Christ
(A.fontanum x viride).

Mexican Ferns. J — H. Christ publishes descriptions of five new
ferns collected by Gr. Arsene near Morelia, in the province of Michoacan,
in the middle of the high plateau of Mexico, and also nearPuebla. The
new species are Polypodium (GoniqpMebium) pachyrMzon, Notholaena
Arsenii, Pell am Arsenii, Dryopteris tremula and D.patula var. Moreliae.

Ferns of South Mexico.§ — J. N. Rovirosa has prepared an account
of the fern-flora of the south of Mexico, which is published after his
death at the expense of J. D. Casasiis. It consists of a classification
and description (in Spanish) of the ferns of that region, and — what is
the most striking feature of the work — a series of seventy beautifully
drawn quarto plates, in which the plant-habit, the venation, the sorus,
sporangia, scales, etc., are shown. Six new species and one variety are
described .

* British Ferns and their Varieties. Loudon : Routledge (1910) 8vo. 459 pp.
(40 coloured plates, 96 nature prints, 319 woodcuts).

t Bull. Acad. Intern. Geogr. Bot., xix. (1910) pp. 204-5.

X Notulae Systeniaticae Mus. Paris, i. (1910) pp. 231-5.

§ Pteridographia del sur de Mexico. Mexico : Escalaute (1910) 298 pp.
(70 pis.).

fit SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Ferns of Borneo.* — H. Winkler gives an account of the flora and
plant-geography of south-east Borneo, and includes a list of ninety-
eight ferns determined by Lauterbach, and seven species of Selaginella
determined by Hieronymus, four of which are new and described at
great length.

Ferns of the Kermadec Islands.! — R. B. Oliver includes in his
account of the vegetation of the Kermadec Islands a list of the ferns.
These are thirty-three in number, together with five Lycopodiaceae.
Among the most interesting are Cyathea Mihiei Hook, and C. kerma-
decmsis, a new species which has hitherto been confounded with C. Miinet,
but has a much taller (60-70 ft.) and more slender stem, from which
the dead fronds fall off completely, leaving a clean scar. With very few
exceptions the species occur in New Zealand and elsewhere. The ferns
are mostly found in the wet forests. The author gives some ecologic
notes about them. Owing to the introduction of goats the indigenous
plants are now very rare.

Bryophyta.
(By A. Gepp.)

Inter-relationships of the Hepaticae.J — F. Cavers, continuing his
account of the inter-relationships of the Bryophyta, discusses the group
of the acrogynous Jungermanniales. He first passes under review the
chief morphological characters of the group, with special reference to
the wealth of parallel developments, which is one of its most striking
features. Thus he discusses the various types of leaves and perianths,
the development of the marsupial sac and of the sporogonium, as found
in different genera. He offers a scheme of classification in which he
raises Schiffner's eight sub-families to the status of families and briefly
defines them. From a study of the inter-relationships of the Acrogynae,
he finds evidence that they form a monophyletic group ; and he thinks
that the following are relatively primitive gametophytic characters : —
Leaves symmetrically bilobed, and either flat or slightly folded ; the
presence of underleaves ; archegonia borne on the main axis ; perianth
free from involucre, and either cylindrical or trigonous from the fusion
of three flat bracts : protonema filamentous. Also he finds on the other
hand that the following may be regarded as advanced or specialized
characters — the complete absence of lobing from the leaf, or, on the
contrary, its division into several deep lobes, or its division into two
lobes of very unequal size ; the absence of underleaves ; the restriction
of the archegonia to special short branches ; the fusion of perianth with
involucre ; lateral or dorsiventral flattening of the perianth, and the
development of wings on its exterior ; discoid protonema ; and, finally,
various elaborations such as the formation of pitchers, paraphylls, mar-
supia, etc. Many of these specialized characters have arisen independ-
ently in different lines of affinity, and are to be classed as parallel
developments. In the phylogenetic scheme figured on page 299, the

* Engler's Bot. Jahrb xliv. (1910) pp. 497-571.

t Trans. Proc. New Zealand Inst., xlii. (1910) pp. 118-175.

X New Phytologist, ix. (1910) pp. 269-301 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 65

Acrogynae are shown as allied to Fossombromia through Lophozia, from
which can be traced three main lines : — (1) Direct through Sphenolobus
to the Scapaniaceas and on to Kadulaceas, Porellaceae and Lejeuneacese,
the Pleuroziaceaa being a lateral offshoot. (2) A second line leads
through Plagiochila, Lophocolea, etc., to Cephaloziaceas, and through
Lepidozia to Ptilidiaceae. (3) A third line leads through Marsupella to
Southbya and other marsupial genera. A bibliography of eighty-five
items is, appended to the paper.

Parallelism and Convergence of Moss-pedigrees.* — T. Herzog
discusses parallelism and convergence in the pedigrees of the mosses.
There are three main groups — Sphagnales, Andreasales, Bryales — which
have nothing whatever to do with one another. The Bryales include
the vast majority of the mosses, and they contain a number of parallel
and distinct lines of development, the apical members of which show an
apparent systematic unity. Some of these lines or families, for example,
the Orthotrichaceag, Bryaceae, Bartramiaceae, Polytrichacea?, etc., are
evidently distinct from one another. But two of the larger groups are
so alike in their systematic characters as to appear almost of the same
descent : the first group includes the families Dicranacere and Leuco-
bryaceaa, and the second includes the Hypnacese, now divided up intc
several families. He then proceeds to describe the lines of development
of these two groups and their points of convergence and similarity.

Bryological Notes. f — V. Schiffner continues his notes on bryological
subjects. (62) Frullania explicate Mont, is identical with F. apiculala
Dum, according to Stephani ; but in that case Montagne's description is
at fault. Schiffner does not, however, consider that two species are
mixed in the type material. The species is probably a variable one ; and
he describes a form from Samoa as F. apiculata var. explicate, to which
he refers as a synonym F. oceanica Mitt, in Seemann's Flora Vitiensis.
(63) F. saxicola and F. cleisto stoma, the latter a European species, and
the former from North America — these are very nearly allied to one
another, but probably are distinct, and the more so because of their
widely separated habitats. (64) Riccia glaucescens, its synonyms and
allies, are discussed at some length ; and the views of various authors are
criticized. It is identical with R. Lescuriana, but not with R. Michelii.
The presence or absence of marginal cilia is not a character of specific
value. (65) Leskea laxiramea is recorded from North Persia.

Andreseacese.J — G. Both begins a series of descriptions of extra-
European mosses, announcing that Vol. I. will contain the Andreaeaceaj,
Archidiaceae, Cleistocarpae, and Trematodonteae. The first part, now
issued, is piven up almost entirely to Andresea, 102 species of which
are described. Every species is figured ; and a key to the species is
provided.

Protolindsaya and other Bornean Ferns.§ — E. B. Copeland pub-
lishes some additions to the Bornean fern flora, namely, twelve species

* Hedwigia, 1. (1910) pp. 86-99.
t Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. Is., (1910) pp. 431-6.

X Die aussereuropaischen Laubmoose, Dresden : Heinrich, 1910, Band I. pp.
1-96 (8 pis.). § Philippine Journ. of Sci., Bot., v. (1910) pp. 283-5.

Feb. loth, 1911 F

66 "summary of current researches relating to

collected by C. J. Brooks and others. Among them are four new
species, three new varieties, and a new genus — Protolindsaya, a little
fern allied to Saccoloma moluccanum and Lindsay a cultrata.

Ferns of the Philippine Islands. *— E. D. Merrill and M. L.
Merritt in their account of the flora of Mount Pulog, in the Philippine
island of Luzon, include a list of eighty-one ferns and six fern-allies
determined by E. B. Copeland. A description is given of the ascent,
of the flora of the several zones, and of the relationships with the floras
of other regions.

Distribution of Molendoa Sendtneriana in Hungary.! — I- GyortTy
treats of the distribution of the moss, Molendoa Sendtneriana, in Hungary.
Hitherto it was recorded from the Hohe Tatra only. But Gyorffy now
announces its occurrence in the lower Tatra mountains down to 1660 ft.
above sea-level. Previously it had not been found lower than 3000 ft.

Dicranoloma.J — J. Hagen refers again to the faulty construction of
the name Dicranoloma, and cites a general rule that the second part of
such a name constitutes the principal member, while the first part serves
only to qualify it. Thus to coin the name in such a way as to give it
the meaning " Dicranum with bordered leaves," it would be necessary
to make it Lomato-dicran urn .

Annulus of Cynodontium Alpestre.§— J. Hagen describes the
annulus cf the sporogonium of Cynodontium alpestre, a structure which
lias hitherto escaped notice iu that species, and which is of a nature
unknown elsewhere in the moss kingdom. The annulus lies round the
base of the peristome, and consists of a single series of nucleated, hyaline
cells, with the outer wall not thickened. Further it is abnormal in that,
without reaching the surface, it lies in a hollow furrow along the interior
margin of the operculum, and is completely covered by its exterior
margin.

Merceyopsis g. n. and other Indian Mosses. || — H. X. Dixon
gives an account of Merceyopsis, a new genus of mosses with seven
Indo-Malayan species ranging from the north-west Himalaya to Java
and the Philippines. It is closely allied to Merceya, but differs in
having a hyophiloid areolation, and in the median (not ventral) deuter-
cells of its leaf-nerve section. From Hyophila it is distinguished by
the absence of a central strand in the stem, and by the elliptic (not
cylindric) capsule with lax thin-celled exotheciUm. A key to the species
is given. In the same paper is a list of some twenty-four Indian
mosses collected in the Western Ghats and in the Almora district.
Among these are six new species with descriptions and figures. Ptero-
bryum Jcanarense, previously described, proves to be identical with
P. Walkeri Broth.

Ephemerum and Nanomitrium in North America. IT — G. E. Nichols
publishes some field notes on Ephemerum and Nanomitrium, which.

. # Philippine Journ. of Sci., Bot., v. (1910) pp. 315-24.
t Magyar Bot. Lapok, ix. (1910) pp. 194-8.

J Rev. Bryolog., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 132-3. § Tom. cit., pp. 133-4.

- || Journ. of Bot., xlviii. (1910) pp. 297-310 (2 pis.).
i Bryologist, xiii. (1910) pp. 121-3.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. 61

though rare in herbaria, are not so in distribution. The plants of
both genera are very minute, but in some species are rendered con-
spicuous by their persistent green protonema. They are annual plants,
producing fruit during the winter months. Their habitats are as
follows : cultivated soil, paths, roadsides, river banks, dried-up ponds,
sides of ditches, etc. They do not occur in woods, but in more or
less sunny situations, and are often associated with species of Riccia.
Their geographical distribution needs investigation.

Norfolk Bryophytes.* — W. H. Burrell publishes a supplementary
list of Norfolk mosses and hepatics with a view to establishing even-
tually a complete record of the distribution of the species throughout
the county. In the meantime it is shown clearly what species occur
in East and West Norfolk respectively. Ninety-nine mosses and
>ixteen hepatics are enumerated.

New and Rare European Mosses.j — 0. Roth gives an account of
some new or little known European mosses, with figures of their struc-
ture, namely, Distich ophyl I um carinatum Dixon and Nicholson, and six
species of Drepanocladus and two of Calli&rgon. The Distichophyllum is
remarkable as being a genus new to Europe, and a species with
antarctic affinities. It was discovered near Salzburg ; and the family
Hookeriaceae to which it belongs is represented by very few genera in
Europe.

Moss-flora of South Thuringia.J— B. Krahmer gives an account
of the moss-fiora of the environs of Arnstadt and southern Thuringia,
with introductory notes on the work of previous collectors, on the
physical geography of the region, and on ecology. The enumeration
includes 26:; mosses and fifty-two hepatics.

.1. Roll § criticises the above paper, and indicates the points in which
he differs from Krahmer, mostly points of minor importance.

Moss-flora of Eisenach || — P. Janzen gives an account of the hepatics
of the environs of Eisenach, with an enumeration of sixty-eight species.
One of the most active collectors was Rudert, who found ninety-three
mosses and forty-one hepatics in one gorge.

New Records of Hamburg Mosses.1l — J. Schmidt gives some new
results arising from an invest igation of the flora of Hamburg, compris-
ing notes on thirty-one mosses, their <listribution and peculiarities.

New England Hepaticse.** — A. W. Evans publishes an eighth series
of notes on the hepaticee of New England. He gives a description of
Jlircia sorocarpa Bisch, and discusses its history and synonymy, and the
question whether R. minima of Linnams can be retained for R. nigrella
or for R. sorocarpa. He also redescribes Ricciella membranacea, moving

* Trans. Norfolk and Norwich Nat. Soc, ix. (1910) pp. 99-106.
t Hedwigia, 1. (1910) pp. 105-114 (1 pi. and fig.).
J Mitteil. Thuring. Bot. Ver., xxv. (1910) pp. 2-28.
§ Op. cit., xxvii. (1910) pp. 17-21.
Op. cit., xxv. (1910) pp. 35-40.
«j[ Allgem. Bot. Zeitschr., xvi. (1910) pp. 172-5.
*• Rhodora, xii. (1910) pp. 193-204.

F 2

68 SUM.MARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the species out of Riccia ; it is allied to Ricciella crystalline/,. He gives
critical remarks on four rare species of Lophozia, on Pedinophyllum
interr upturn. Pedinophyllum, being more closely related to Mylia and
to Chiloscyphus than to Plagiochila, should be kept separate from the
latter genus. Finally Evans treats of Frullania inflata and of F. saxicola
Austin. The latter is a good species ; but how far it may beconspecific
with the European F. cleistostoma of Scbiffner and Wollny, he is not
prepared to say until he has examined specimens of the latter.

North American Bryophyta.* — 0. E. Jennings gives a brief descrip-
tion of the great Pymatuning Swamp in north-west Pennsylvania, and
of its main plant-associations. He was surprised to find one small urea
covered with Polytrichum strictum Banks, a northern alpine never before
recorded from so far south nor from so low an elevation.

A. Lorenz f publishes some brief notes of her collecting experiences
during a European trip, principally in Germany and Switzerland, and
compares the moss-floras of the localities visited with those of similar
spots in the United States.

E. J. Hill $ gives an account of the collection of mosses made by
J. Roll in the United States and Canada in 1888-9, and of the late
C. R. Barnes's contribution to the determination of the species.

W. W. Calkins § gives a list of fifty-one mosses collected in Cook
County, Illinois, and all found growing within a radius of ten to twenty-
two miles from Chicago.

■&'

Mexican Mosses. || — J. Cardot publishes his seventh article on
Mexican mosses, and gives descriptions of seventeen new species, a few
varieties and two new genera Barmsia and Morinia, both members of
the tribe Trichostomese. The former is named after the late C. R. Barnes
of Chicago ; and Morinia is named after Morin, author of a paper
on the histology of leaf -nerve of the mosses. The specimens upon which
the paper is based were collected by Pringle, by Barnes and Land, by
Purpus, and others.

Moss-flora of Bolivia. 1" — T. Herzog publishes some further contri-
butions to the moss-flora of Bolivia, founded on two collections ; one
made by himself, and the other sent by 0. Buchtien to J. Kaulfuss.
Herzog's gathering contains twenty-one species, seven of which are new.
Buchtien's contains twenty-five species, four of which are new. In all,
some 700 species have been recorded for Bolivia.

Bryophyta of the Philippine Islands.** — E. D. Merrill and M. L.
Merritt in their account of the flora of Mount Pulog, in the Philippine
island of Luzon, include a list of twenty-three hepaticas and thirty-four
mosses determined by F. Stephani and V. F. Brotherus respectively. A
description of the ascent is given, and the flora of the various zones is
discussed and compared with that of other regions.

* Bryologist, xiii. (1910) p. 100. t Torn, cit., pp. 100-3.

$ Tom. cit., pp. 105-7. § Tom. cit., pp. 107-11.

|| Rev. Bryolog., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 117-28.
H Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxvii., Abt. ii. (1910) pp. 348-58.
** Philippine Journ. of Sci., Bot., v. (1910) pp. 311-15.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 69

New Zealand Bryophytes.* — L. Cockayne gives a list of the mosses
and hepatics collected by him and by J. W. Murdoch in Stewart Island,
New Zealand, during October r.)()8. Stewart Island is extremely rich
in Bryophytes and Lichens, and the list represents but a tithe of the flora.
It contains thirty-five hepatics determined by F. Stephani. and thirty-
four mosses determined by Y. F. Brotherus.

Adalbert Geheeb. f— J. Roll writes some sympathetic reminiscences
of Adalbert Geheeb (b. 1842 ; d. 1909), an apothecary at (ieisa. in the
department (Kreis) of Eisenach, and a bryologist of the highest rank.
He is well known by his prolonged bryological investigations in the
Rhongebirge, and by his illustrations of the mosses of New Guinea, etc.
J. Roll enjoyed a close personal friendship with Geheeb for forty years,
travelled and collected with him, and exchanged specimens and ideas
with him. He has much to say of Geheeb's happy and simple domestic
life, and tells of his devotion to music, of his beautiful genial nature,
his generosity and unselfishness, and his eagerness to help all around
him and especially apothecaries and bryologists. He had friends and
correspondents in all lands, and he never made an enemy. In 1897 he
moved from Geisa to Freiburg in Breisgau. His herbarium was pur-
chased by a friend and presented to the Berlin Botanical Museum.

Thallophyta.

Algae.

(By Mrs. E. S. Gepp.)

Chara contraria and C. dissoluta4 — C.P. Sluiter writes an exhaus-
tive account of these two species, which have been sometimes united and
have always been somewhat puzzling. The author first gives a history
of all the views held by former authors on the systematic position of
these plants, and then sets herself to answer the following questions :
1 . What are the relations between Chara dissoluta A. Br. and C. con-
traria A.Br.? 2. Is an uncorticated Chara from Busskirch (submitted
to the author for examination) a member of the contraria group, is it
identical with C. dissoltda, or is it more nearly related to other uncorti-
cated species ? In order to answer these questions the author made a
careful and minute study of the external and internal morphology of
the two species in question from excellent material, and she gives details
of her results, illustrated by text-figures. The same study was made of
the Busskirch plant, and the results finally discussed. The similarity
between C. contraria and C. dissoluta f. helvetica is so great that the
author apparently regards the latter as being a degenerate form of the
former, and the Busskirch plant as belonging to the same series of forms.
She finds that the uncorticated form of C. dissoluta f. helvetica is quite
independent of the form with one row of corticating cells ; but what
causes this form she is unable to say, and declines to enter into any

* Trans. Proc.New Zealand Inst., xlii. (1910) pp. 320-4.

t Mitteil. Thiiring. Bot. Ver., xxvii. (1910), pp. 1-13.

J Bot. Zeit. lxviii. (1910) pp. 125-68 (5 tables and figs, in toxt).

70 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

discussion regarding the position of the various forms, varieties, and
species. Critical remarks are made with regard toother allied species

of Char a.

Chara stelligera.* — A. Bennett records the finding of Chora stel-
ligera in good fruit near the bridge between Flegg Burgh and Filby.
He also records seven other localities in Norfolk, and others in Hants,
Surrey, and South Devon.

Algae from the Laboratory at Roscoff.f— 1\ A. Dangeard records
the finding of Prasinocladus lubricus Kuckuck and Euglenopsis subsalsa
Davis in the tubs of the aquarium at the laboratory at Boscoff. The
former has only been recorded from Heligoland and the latter from
Cambridge, Mass. Both species have been incompletely known, and
the present paper completes our knowledge of them as well as rectifying
certain errors with regard to them. Both genera have been placed in
the Tetrasporese, together with Ecballocystis and Gollinsiella. Their
affinities, in the opinion of the author, are, however, with Chlamydo-
monas and Carteria, the differences in the reproductive cells being due
to a localization in the secretion of the gelatine. If this view be
adopted, the family Chlorodendraceae proposed by Oltmanns in l'.»04
would take its place, like the Chlamydomonadinese, at the bottom of
the Algse, near the Flagellates. At Roscoif, the two species form a
moss-like growth on the glass walls of the vessels, and are much
appreciated as food by some of the animals living therein.

Pleodorina illinoisensis Kofoid.J — F. Merton gives an account of
the structure and reproduction of Pleodorina illinoisensis Kofoid, a
North American species which has been found in the neighbourhood of
Heidelberg and in the Pfalz. It is an instance of the oft-repeated
assertion that most Protista, being cosmopolitan, are not of value in
distribution-studies. The material was properly fixed and various
histological details were made out : for instance, the movement of the
nucleus to the periphery of the cell and its karyokinesis. Centrosomes
were not observed. Conjugation of microgametes and macrogametes
occurs ; the resulting zygotes secrete a firm wall and become zygospores.

Raphidonema.§ — A. Scherffel describes a new species of Raphidonema,
R. brevirostre, found in dirty snow in the Hohe Tatra, at a height of
1700 metres. The snow contained also Chwnaster nivalis and the
aplanospores of Pteromonas nivalis Chod. The characters of the new
species are : length of Hlaments 52-5(5/*, breadth 4/x, not so long drawn
out as in R. nivale Lag. ; in every cell a yellow-green chromatophore ;
reproduction normally by division of the filament in the middle into
two halves. Young germinating swarm-spores were observed. In the
interior of the cell are fat-drops but no pyrenoid. Raphidium nivale
Chod. is a typically one-celled organism ; Raphidonema nivale Lag. is
typically many-celled. The latter plant has cliromatophores, and is
consequently no fungus. " Bed snow"' lias never been observed in the
Hohe Tatra.

* Trans. Norfolk and Norwich Nat. Soc, ix. (1910) pp. 49, 50.

t Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 765-7.

j Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xc. (1908) pp. 445-77.

§ Botan. kozleme'nyek, ix. (1910) pp. 116-23. See also Hedwigia, 1. (1910) p. (101).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 71

New Genus of Polyblepharidse.* — P. A. Dangeard describes a
new genus of Algae, represented by one species, Stephanoptera Fabreee,
found in a culture in the laboratory at Concarneau. It belongs to
Polyblepharide.e. which hitherto has contained only two genera. A
description is given of the alga, and of its method of division. As a
rule the two individuals resulting from a division are of equal size, but
sometimes the inequality is so great as to give the impression of budding ;
this is an extremely rare phenomenon in Flagellates or Algae. At the
time of division each half retains one of the old flagella, and the second
is pushed out like a protoplasmic prolongation by the side of the first.
Development is terminated by an encystment ; the cell rounds itself
into a sphere and becomes surrounded by a very resistant membrane.
The cysts enclose a single nucleus as a rule, though some have two.
The new genus is distinguished from the two others of the family by
the reduction of the number of flagella to two. It shows a remarkable
adaptation to a medium saturated with sea-salt, while the other species
are fresh-water. Bipartition begins at the anterior part of the cell,
while in Polyblepharis and Pyramimonas it begins at the posterior part.
As regards the binucleate cysts, the author suggests that they may
present phenomena of sexual autophagy similar to those that he has
recently described in the Moms forms of Anthophysa vegetans.

Phytoplankton of the Caspian Sea.j — A. Henckel gives a pre-
liminary list of phytoplankton from the Caspian Sea, in which he
enumerates 20 species. He collected 120 samples from different parts
of the Sea, and proposes to publish a full account of the collection later,
with plates. The present note is in Russian.

Thorospha3ra4 — 0. H. Ostenfeld describes a new genus of Coecolitho-
phoridae which he names Thorosphsera, discovered by him between 600
metres and the surface of the sea, south of Cape Spartivento. He de-
scribes and figures the organism, which he places near Sycosphsera.
It is characterized by a remarkable formation of coccoliths, which act as
a floating apparatus.

Plankton-alga?. § — E. Lemmermann continues his contributions to
the study of plankton algas. No. 26 is an account of the phytoplankton
-of Paraguay, founded on material collected by Herzog at Medanos.
It contained almost pure phytoplankton : Peridinere were absent and
Flagellates were very scarce. The author treats the subject from all
points of view. No. 27 describes plankton-algas from the Schliersee,
collected by Zacharias. No. 28 on Dinobryon sociale Ehrenb. No. 29
contains a description of a new species, Dinobryon inflatum, from a
small lake south of Bysjon in Sweden, and a new variety of Cosmarium
Novse-Semliae Wille var, sueckum. No. 80 contains a description of
Peridininm trochoideum formerly placed in Glenodinium.

* Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 991-3.

t Script. Bot. Hort. Univ. Imp. St. Petersburg, xxvi. (1910) pp. 53-6.
% Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell.-, xxviii. (1910) pp. 397-400 (figs.).
§ Archiv f. Hydrobiol. u. Planktonkunde, v. (1910) pp. 291-338. See also
Hedwigia, 1. (1910) pp. (100-1).

72 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Ceratocornys.* — C. A. Kofoid publishes a revision of the genus
Ceratocornys based on skeletal morphology. He places in the genus
three other species which had previously been placed in other genera of
the Din* (flagellates, describes a new species, gives a new description of
the genus, as well as an analytical key and detailed diagnoses of the
five species of the genus.

Metachromatic Bodies in certain Green Alga? and Conjugatse.t —
N. Woronichin describes his experiments on the behaviour of meta-
chromatic bodies towards certain reagents, employing the methods used
by Guilliermond for fungi. The Algae which he experimented upon were
Stigeoclonium, Draparnaldia, Tetraspora, Vaucheria, Spirogyra, Zygnema,
Closterium, etc. The methods of work are described, and the results
of the use of different reagents. It is seen that the metachromatic
bodies in both Algae and Fungi behave in a similar manner towards a
number of reagents. On the other hand there is an inconstancy towards
the few important reagents in the behaviour of both Alga? and Fungi.
This fact confirms the views of Meyer, Nadson and Briillowa as to the
nature of the metachromatic bodies. These bodies are to be regarded
as a group of substances, which are different from one another, though
very nearly related. In this they are analogous to sugar, fats, and other
chemical formations which form combinations peculiar to themselves.

Algae of the Upper Pruth. J— J. Woloszynska gives a short account
of the alga? living in the upper waters of the river Pruth. She divides
the algae of all running water into three groups : 1. Those which by
some means manage to find a hold, be it by haptera or by growing on
the lower side of stones. 2. Free-living species which flourish under the
protection of the first group. 3. The species which inhabit the mud.
Of this last group the most frequent algae of the Pruth are diatoms and
desmids. The author mentions four principal algae-associations. The
first occurs in the wrater-falls, where Lemanea and Gladophora glomerata
flourish, as well as Chantransia amethystea and C. violacea, growing
epiphytically on Lemanea. CEdogonium and Phormidmm also occur.
The second association is represented by the felt-like growth on stones,
found most richly developed in mid-stream. The third is formed by
the algae which creep about in the mud. These three associations are
found in the main stream. The fourth is found in the shallow back-
waters which are cut off from the main stream, and forms a connecting
link between the algae of the river and those of the neighbouring swamps.
Other lesser associations were found which are dependent on climatic
conditions. The factors which govern a formation are to be sought in
the constant change of the level and temperature of the water ; on these
depends the life of all species living in the river, and it is just this
variability which is the unchanging law governing the flora of a moun-
tain stream.

* Univ. of California Publications, Zool., vi. (1910) pp. 177-87. See also
Hedwigia, 1. (1910) pp. (99-100).

t Script. Bot. Hort. Univ. Imp. St. Petersburg, xxvi. (1908-9) pp. 71-83.
% Bull. Internat. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 5b (1910) pp. 346-50.

ZOOLOOY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 73

Algological Notes.* — N. Wille publishes a continuation of his
notes, founded on the results of his studies at Tatihou and Cherbourg in
,1 uly and August 19U9. He records the finding of PseuiUndoclonium
submarinum Wide on the wood of the quay at St. Vaast-la-Hougue, and
describes certain points in its growth and anatomy. He found it sub-
sequently at Tatihou : it has hitherto only been recorded from northern
seas. Ulothri.r pseudoflacca, described by the author from Drobak in
Norway, was found by him on Fucus spiralis at Cherbourg. It has
hitherto been considered an arctic species. A doubling of the filament
is described here, occurring as a freak. A new species of Slereococcus,
S. Malardii, was found on the quay wall at St. Vaast-la-Hougue, and
is described and figured. The author next deals with a very interesting
endozootic Chlorophycea which grows in the sponge HaHckondriapanicea
Johnst. It was found not only among the exterior parts of the sponge,
but also in the interior, and consists of long unbranched filaments which
are sometimes straight, sometimes intertwined. After a full description
of the alga, the author states his views on its systematic position. He is
inclined to think that it is not a new genus as might be supposed, but
merelv a Yerv much changed form of Rhizoclonium Kemeri Stockm.
He discusses the points for and against such an assumption, a point
which can only be settled by further study of fresh material. The next
note describes a sample of plankton from St. "Vaast-la-Hougue, taken
with a view to testing whether marine plankton is always poor in the
summer months, as has been supposed. The sea was found to contain
large quantities of sand-grains, and the plankton was purely a coast-
plankton. The small number of species is, in the author's opinion,
probably accounted for by the large quantity of sand-grains which, in
sinking to the bottom of the sea, carry with them the light floating
plankton. In the final note, a new species, Goccomyxa Gorbierei, is de-
scribed. It was found growing in a glass-house in Emmanuel Liais
Park, Cherbourg, forming a green covering to some woodwork. The
points of distinction between this species and the others of the genus
are given.

Studies on the Conjugatse.t — R. Chodat writes on the copulation of
Spirogyra quadrata var. mirabiUs, which takes place in two ways, called
respectively " xenogamic " (conjugation of distinct filaments), and
" pedogamic " (conjugation of contiguous cells of the same filament).
In the former mode (described as " copulation scalarif orme ") the fila-
ments are differentiated into male and female ; and Chodat gives a
detailed account with figures. In " pedogamic " two contiguous cells of
one filament unite after perforation of the septum that divides them.

Diatoms.J — A. Forti continues his studies on Diatoms, publishing
three contributions to the series. The first (No 9) deals with Gera-
taulus polymorph us and C. orbicularis sp. n., with their systematic
revision ; and discusses the true nature of C. thermalis Ralfs. The
varieties and forms of each species are carefully described, together with

* Nyt. Mag. Naturvidensk., xlviii. (1910) pp. 281-306 (2 pis.).

t Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve, ser. 2, ii. (1910) pp. 158-67 (figs.).

% Atti R. 1st. Veneto Sci. Lett. Art. lxix. (1910) pp. 1249-1317 (9 pis.).

74 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

;i list of synonymy, references bo literature, and critical remarks. The
nexl contribution (No. LO) treats of quaternary and subfossL1 Diatoma-
cea: collected in fresh-water in Ftliiopia l>y Ne«;ri. The more ancient
material was found in the liills of Smith), and the more recent came from
the terrace of Lake Zuay. Both collections are discussed critically, and
a list of 106 species is given.

The third contribution contains lists of 9 1 and 167 species respect-
ively, contained in the Tertiary deposits of Bergonzano, Reggio d'Emilia,
and of Marmorito, Alessandria. Many of the species are common to
both lists, and indeed two species, Tsthntiit Squinaboli and Oocconeis
Lanzii, have never been recorded from any other deposits. Tic pale-
ontological affinity between the collections is clearly established.

Diatoms from Dahomey.* — F. Hustedt records loo species of
diatoms in samples of mud from Porto-Novo (French Dahomey),
divided among 28 genera. The Navicular are the most numerous both
in number of species and of individuals. A remarkable phenomenon is
the occurrence of marine and of mountain forms. The author suggests
that the marine species are brought by birds.

Swiss Desmids.f— L. Viret gives a list of Desmids from the valley
of Salanfe in canton Valais, Switzerland. They were collected on the
edge of a lake and in some neighbouring peat-moss, at a height of
2000 metres. Forty-seven species wrere observed, of which eleven are
new. They represent eight genera. Descriptions are appended to
many of the records.

Caulerpa4 — A. Weber van Bosse writes on some species of GauUrpa
from the island of Tahiti, and also describes a new species of the genus
collected by Medley on Kangaroo Island, South Australia. Among
the Tahiti specimens is a new species, G. Smratii, which is closely allied
to C. Brownii var. selaginoides. The author explains her reasons for
not following the grouping of Reinke in associating the Bryoideae,
Lycopodioideae, and Araucaroidese under one group. She separates the
two former, but considers it possible that the two latter may belong to
the same section.

Laminaria hyperborea.§— B. Peressleginn gives an account (unfor-
tunately in Russian, but with a short German abstract), of the anatomy
of the stipes of Laminaria hyperborea. The material was collected by
Foslie in Finmark and given to the author for examination. The
stipes possesses a many-celled assimilative tissue, consisting of cells
which are rich in phaeoplasts. Further the author records tufts of hairs
arising from the external assimilative tissue, as well as the ordinary
" fasergriibchen." As regards the various theories put forward by
authors as to the function of these fasergriibchen, Peressleginn holds to
that of Wille and Reinke, namely, that the hairs serve as imbibition-
tissue, thus fulfilling the role of the root-hairs of higher plants. The

* Archiv Hvdrobiol. u. Plauktonkunde, v. (1910) pp. 365-82 (1 pi.). See also
Hedwigia, 1. (1910) p. (99).

t Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve, ser. 2, ii. (1910) pp. 184-93 (1 pi.).

X Ann. Instit. Oc6anograph., ii. (1910) 8 pp. (2 pis.).

§ Script. Bot. Hort. Univ. Imp. St. Petersburg, xxvi. (1903-9) pp. 99-112 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 75

author finds that the air-chambers, which occur frequently in the
assimilative tissue, are clothed with an • epithelial sheath and arise
Bcbizogonously. He believes that they form respiratory chambers for
the plant, sucli as has been proved by Henckel for Chordaria. The
storing tissue consists of large parenchymatous cells, and has sometimes
intercellular spaces. Here may be seen the macropores of Wide. The
author cannot attribute to this tissue any mechanical role, which is
confined to the mechanical and assimilative tissues. Finally he dis-
cusses the genesis of the inner tissue, the " connective and sieve hyphae,"
which together represent the conductive tissue. These cells are of
similar origin, and in the author's opinion represent all stages of mutual
transition. Sometimes their membranes are thickened, and then they
are able to form a mechanical tissue, which considerably strengthens
the stipes against stress. The membrane was found to consist of two
layers, which when stained with ClZnl showed an outer pectin layer,
and an inner cellulose layer.

Hybrid form of Fucus.* M. Gard describes an interesting hybrid
between Fucks platycarpus and F. ceranoides, which occurs at Mimizan
in the Landes. The two species were found growing along the bank of
a stream which issues from the Anreilhan water. F. platycarpus is
found up to about SO metres above high watermark, and F. ceranoides to
about 120 metres. The two species are, however, abundantly mixed,
and in that region the hybrid is found. It resembles in dimensions
and colour the frond of F. ceranoides, but the receptacles are very
variable, not only in different plants but even in the same individual.
Some are branched, pointed and flattened like those of F. ceranoides,
some are thick and rounded like those of F. platycarpus. At first the
author found only male conceptacles, but later in certain leceptacles at
the extreme basal limit, he found some conceptacles with abundant
antheridia and a few rare oogonia. These latter were young or abnormal,
and of small dimensions. None were seen which had reached maturity.
On the other hand, the antheridia seemed quite normal. The herma-
phroditism of the hybrid was a character transmitted from F. platycarpus,
since all the specimens of F. ceranoides examined in the neighbourhood
were unisexual. The same hybrid was also found by the author in one
of the " courants,, at Cap-Breton, Landes. It is not possible to deter-
mine at present the sexual. role of the parents.

New Genera from the Malay Archipelago.!— A. Weber van Bosse
publishes preliminary diagnoses of new genera collected by herself in
the Malay Archipelago, on the ' Siboga ' Expedition. Full accounts and
figures will be given in her complete paper on the marine algas of the
region, which will appear later. The genera described in the present
note are : Bryobesia belonging to Derbesiaceae, Mesospora belonging to
Ralfsiaeeae, Exophyllum, of which the cystocarps are still unknown, but
which appears to belong to Rhodymeniaceae, Acanthockondria, Aneuria,
and Oligocladus all belonging to the Rhodomelaceae, ( 'halicostroma to
•Ceramiacere, and finally, a genus of uncertain position, Perinema.

* Cornptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 888-90.

t Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, s6r. 2, viii. (1910) pp. 25-33.

76 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Lemoine, Mme. Paul — Repartition du Lithothamnion calcareum (Maerl) et
de ses varietes dans la region de Concarneau. (Distribution of L. calcareum
and its varieties in the region of Concarneau).

[A concise and interesting BUmmarj of the paper by the same author,
published in the Ann. de l'lnstitul Oceanographique, i. 1910.]

Bull. Mm. d'Hist. Nat. Paris (1909) No. 8, pp. 552-4.
Wir.iiE, N. — Mikal Heggelund Foslie.

[A short biographical notice of the late M. H. Foslie, written in Norwegian.]

Naturen, Dec. 1909, pp. 353-6.
Edwards, A. M. — Desmidieae came by Energenesis.

[An extraordinary composition, asserting that the author has seen spontane-
ous generation of desmids, the phenomenon occurring on April 1.]

Nuov. Notar. xxi. (1910 pp. 200-3.

Mazza, A. — Saggio di Algologia Oceanica. (Marine algology.)

[A continuation.] Nuov. Notar, xxi. (1910) pp. 169-99.

Hardy, A. D. — Association of Alga and Fungus in Salmon- disease.

[An account of a species of Myxonema and a fungus growing associated on
fish in fish-ponds at Kew, Melbourne. A list of alga? is appended, which
are either new for Victoria or are interesting in connexion with the fish
question.] Proc. Boy. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 27-32.

Boyer, C. S. — Jelly-pores in the Diatomaceae.

[A short note on a discussion held by the author on the observations of
other authors concerning these pores.]

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, lxii. (1910) p. 271.

Fungi.

(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

Cladochytrium caespitis sp. n.* — Griffon and Maublanc noticed that
some young seedlings of rye grass became yellow and died off. They
found, in the decaying tissues, fine branching filaments which swelled at
intervals to form round or irregular vesicles, so that the cells became
filled with necklace-like structures. In time the vesicles became rounded
off and isolated, the fine filaments disappearing ; they then became
encysted with a colourless or yellowish membrane of varying dimensions,
on an average about 25/x in diameter ; germination was not observed.
In one instance zoosporangia were found, that had developed similarly
to the cysts. They were filled with minute zoospores possessing one
cilium.

Study of Synchytrium-galls.t — A. (iuttenberg examined these
galls on Mermrialis, Anemone, and Adoxa, and found that the host-cells
had swollen enormously under the influence of the parasite. In these
cells the nucleus had left its normal position on the cell-wall and was
suspended on plasma threads in the centre of the cell. Near by lay the
cell of the parasite, and from it a fine canal-system penetrated the cell-
nucleus and abstracted nourishment for the parasite.

Study of Mucorini.J — Boleslaw Namyslowski has isolated from soil
and from dung a number of species of Mucorini, which he has cultivated

* Bull. Soc. Mycol., xxvi. (1910) pp. 317-21 (1 pi.)

t Jahrb. Wiss. Bot., xlvi. (1909) pp. 453-77 (2 pis.). See also Zeitschr. Bot., i.
(1909) pp. 609-10.

% Bull. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, Math. Nat. Kl. No. 6b (1910) pp. 477-520(1 pi.
and 2 figs.)

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 77

and studied from the zygospore standpoint. He describes in detail the
culture media, the temperature at which the experiments were made, and
the development of the moulds. In several of them zygospores were
formed, homothallic or heterothallic. In others he failed to secure any
zygospore formation.

Study of Mortierellae.* — J. Dauphin has written a monograph of
the group, and reduces the species to twenty-seven. M. p)olycephala
received special attention, and the formation of zygospores was followed
in that species. The more air supplied the better for the growth of the
fungus. Under zero and above 35° C. there is no growth ; at 45° C. the
spores are killed. Darkness retards growth, and there is no germination
in a dry atmosphere. Experiments were also made with light and with
x-rays, etc. Almost all of the species are figured.

Danish Phycomycetes. j-— H. E. Petersen publishes a translation of
a paper by him which originally appeared in the Botaniska Tidsskrift.
It is divided into three parts. The first treats of the systematic position
of the Phycomycetes ; the second discusses the biology and ecology of
the group ; the third and last part contains a list with diagnoses of the
species found by the writer, a number of genera and species being new
to science.

The first part deals mainly with the Chytridinese. Petersen looks
on them not as Archimycetes but as reducUl forms ; he divides them
into two groups : that of the Synchytrium where the zoospore on
germination forms a sorus, and a second group where no sorus is formed,
as in Olpidium, Lagenidium, and Rhizidium. These groups and genera
with their inter-relationships are thoroughly discussed.

Submerged Phycomycetes occur as saprophytes on dead animals
(fishes, frogs, etc.), or on dead parts of plants (branches, leaves and
fruits of land plants), or they grow parasitically on fishes, frog's-eggs,
etc. ; a certain number grow on plankton-Crustaceans. The Chytri-
dinege are parasites on algse, in the hyphse of other Phycomycetes, in
the eggs of Rotatoria, etc., and in eel -worms ; there are also a few
saprophytes, some of them growing in the pollen-grains of spruce and
fir, which are blown into water in great quantities.

Full descriptions are given of the families, genera and species of the
different groups, with many illustrations in the text ; a complete biblio-
graphy is appended.

Development of Monascus.J — W. Schikorra has examined two
species of Monascus : M. purpureus, and a second form received from
Lindner which he calls Mcrnascus x. He describes the methods of
examination employed by him, and reviews the work and results of
previous students. Finally he sums up his conclusions as follows : — In
both species of Monascus examined by him there is little morphological
difference. The development of the perithecium proceeds from a multi-
nucleate ascogonium, which by means of the trichogyne is in open rela-
tionship with the multinucleate antheridium. The male nuclei pass over,

* Ann. Sci. Nat. se'r. 9 (1908), pp. 1-112 (45 figs.). See also Zeitschr. Bot., i.
(1909) p. 545. t Ann. Mycol., viii. (1910) pp. 489-560 (27 figs.).

X Zeitschr. Bot. i. (1909) pp. 379-410 (1 pi.).

78 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and each mule nucleus finds place by a female nucleus; the fertilized
tiscogonium becomes surrounded by byphse produced from the stalk-cell ;
two layers of hyphaa are ultimately formed round the developing fruit.
The ascogonium swells after fertilization, and produces ascogenous
hyphse, which arc binucleate ; these increase by conjugate division. In
the penultimate cell of the crooked ascogenous hypha the conjugate
pair — a male and a female — fuse ; the stalk and terminal cell of the
"crook" are uninucleate. The fused nucleus is the primary ascus
nucleus. By threefold division, eight spore-nuclei arc formed ; details
of spore-formation could not be followed on account of the smallness
of the nuclei. The mature asci are almost globose and contain eight
uninucleate spores ; the ascus membrane breaks down and all the spores
become free within the perithelium. The whole nuclear history corre-
sponds closely with that of Pyronema conflums. The genus Monascus
belongs to the Ascomycetes and to the family Aspergillacea\

Oak Mildew.* — P. Magnus publishes his views on this obscure
epidemic. He does not consider that the fungus has been introduced
from America, as American oaks in Europe are particularly free from
the disease. He thinks it is probably a form of Microsphsera Alui
which has passed to a new host and taken on great activity, but so far
forming onlv Oidia on the oak.

Paul Vuillemin f finds' that the oak mildew which threatened the
existence of oak forests all over Europe has received a check. It has
itself been invaded by a fungal parasite, Gicinnobolus Cesatii, well known
as a parasite of Erysiphege. The form and dimensions of the parasite
correspond with the var. Euonymi, which was found on the Outturn of the
Japanese Euonymus. Vuillemin is confident that the Oidium scourge
will be largely if not completely checked by the Cicinnobolus.

Oidium of Japanese Euonymus. J — M. E. Foex has followed the
development of this fungus which persists on the leaves of the host-
plant during the winter. During early winter there were only hypha?
present ; about the middle of January conidiophores were produced, but
a spell of cold weather prevented further formation of conidia, and
finally destroyed those already developed ; with warmer weather, growth
again began, and the fungus increased very rapidly. Foex noted
certain thickenings in the mycelium which he examined biologically and
chemically ; he thinks they are probably connected with the winter-
growth of the (>i<l i a hi.

Fusarium nivale and Nectria graminicola.§ — G. Ihssen has fol-
lowed the development of these two forms of the same fungus. The
cereal can be infected by Fusarium from the soil, but usually the seed
itself contains the fungus, which can be easily detected in rye as
hypha1 with chlamydospores under the outer seed-coat. Sometimes it

* Vereinsschr. Ges. Luxemb. Naturfr., 1910, pp. 108-11. See also Bot.
Centralbl., oxiv. (1910) p. 385.

t Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 6G7-8.

J Bull. Soc. Mycol., xxvi. (1910) pp. 322-6 (1 pi.).

§ Centralbl. Bakt., xxvii. (1910) p. 48. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxiv. (1910)
pp. 517-18.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 7(.»

kills the seed, or attacks the young seedling and kills the roots. In
eases where the plant survives with the fungus still in the tissues, the
hyphaj emerge through the stomata and form flat pustules, from which
the perithecia are developed, identical with Nectria graminicola. Fusarium
nivale is thus synonymous with /•'. minimum and F. hibernans. Seed-
infection probably takes place at the time of flowering.

Study of Hyphomycetes.*— 0. Appel and 11. W. Wollenweber have
had recourse to artificial cultures to aid them in understanding and deter-
mining species of Fusarium. They can thus find out the limitations of
size and form of the spores, and the fruiting conditions of the species.
They find that Fusarium Solani includes a number of forms. Other
species in cultures developed perithecia of various genera. With special
interest they record that Fusarium Willkommii, which causes canker on
deciduous trees, developed in the cultures perithecia of Nectria ditissima.
They recommend the same method for the further study of such genera
as Verticil 7 Hum, Spicaria, Volutella, Periola, Ascoclnjta, and others.

Coremium-formation in Penicillium.t. - W. Wachter has taken
Penicillium f/laucum from various sources and cultivated it on a series
of culture solutions varying in nutritive strength. He found that only
some of the forms could be induced to make Coremium-gTOvrths (out of
eleven, only nine were Coremium forms). He concludes that P.glaucum
is a composite species, and that the tendency to Co rem i am -iovvnntww
should he counted a diagnostic character. Tables are given to illustrate
the experiments.

Metabolism of Moulds.}— C. Ravenna and GT. Pighini have been
examining the toxic properties of Aspergillus fumigatus in connexion
with the research as to the cause of Pellagra. Research workers in this
field have had their attention specially directed to Pen k ill Hum glaucum,
the most frequent parasite of maize, and it has been held that a toxic
principle had been isolated from that mould. The authors were able to
do the same for Aspergillus fumigatus, though the quantity secured was
too small to determine its nature.

Influence of Iron on the Formation of Spores in Aspergillus
Niger.§ — GT. Linossier publishes a note explanatory of the fact stated
by Santon that Aspergillus niger would not form spores in a culture in
which iron was absent. Linossier Gas examined the spore-pigment and
finds that it contains iron ; hence the reason of their non-formation is
that iron is essential to them.

Uredineae.||— J. C. Arthur has published a general survey of
American Rose-rusts, species of Phrugmidium. The geographical dis-
tribution is somewhat remarkable, most of the species occupying isolated
areas. P. speciosum, however, occurs all over the United States.

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxviii. (1910) pp. 435-48 (1 pi.).

t Jahrb. Wiss. Bot., xlviii. (1910) pp. 521-48.

X Atti Reale Accad. Lincei, cccvii. (1910) pp. 312-16.

§ Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 1075-6.

II Torreya, ix. (1910) pp. 21-8. See also Ann. Mycol., viii. (1910) p. 571.

80 SUMMARY OF CURRENT KESEARCTIES RELATING TO

The same author * has been stating his views on the classification
and consequent nomenclature of rusts. The pycnidia and spermatid
he looks on as con i dial forms ; the other spore forms are sexual and
arise after cell-fusion.

Ed. Fischer f has conducted a series of experiments with the teleuto-
spores of a Gymnosporangium, which he collected on Juniper trees in
the Jura. The Roestelia form grew on Amelanchier and not on Sorbus.
so he found that he was really dealing with a different species, G. Ame-
lanchieris, the JScidia of which had been discovered by De Candolle on
Amelanchier. Other interesting observations were made in the course
of the culture experiment, and are fully described ; a good bibliography
is appended to the paper.

The same author % has also published a review of Uredine experi-
ments undertaken during 1908. Arthur in America, Mtiller, Boch and
others in Europe, have helped to advance our knowledge of this branch
of mycology. In the experiments, details of which are published by
their authors, too much emphasis is placed, Fischer considers, on
negative results, and he quotes with approval Magnin's statement in a
preface to Hariot's " Uredineas " that it may be purely ignorance of
conditions that has caused the particular failure. Many of the experi-
ments tend to split up species : others, such as Boch's on Puccinia
Gentianse, unite a great many forms under one. A full bibliography of
papers cited is added.

In a paper § on the parasitic fungi of Liguria, P. Magnus publishes
notes on a Uredine of Euphorbia spinosa. A form was found in Syria
by Haussknecht, on E. thamnoides, and Magnus considered the Ligurian
species to be the same. He now determines it as Uromyces excavatus,
the typical form of which grows on E. verrucosa. The teleutospores
appear within the ^Ecidium-cn\).

C. V. Tubeuf || remarks on the rarity of finding Uredineas on pine-
needles. He explains this by the fact that infection as a rule takes
place in leaves through the stomata, and as these are closed by wax in
Coniferae, the germinating tube of ascidiospores fails to gain entrance.

Rusts of Cereals.^" — F. Zach publishes the results of careful research
on rusted plants, undertaken to examine the ultimate effects of the
parasite on the host's cells, and incidentally to throw light on Eriksson's
mycoplasma theory. He describes in detail the changes that occur in.
the plasma and nucleus after penetration of the cell by the haustoria of
the fungus. He declares against the mycoplasma theory, and decides
that the spread of the fungus is always due to new infection. The
seeds of badly rusted cereals may produce a perfectly healthy and
vigorous progeny.

* Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci., xxv. (1910) 8 pp. See also Ann. Mycol., viii. (1910)
p. 572. t Zeitschr. Bot., i. (1909) pp. 683-714 (8 figs). '

X Tom. cit., pp. 284-7.

§ Mitteil. Thiiring. Bot. Ver., xxvii. Heft. (1910) pp. 50-1. See also Bot. Cen-
tralbl., cxiv. (1910) p. 591.

j| Naturw. Forst. Landw., viii. (1910) pp. 346-9. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxiv.
(1910) p 593.

f SB. Akad. Wiss. Math.-Nat. Kl., cxix. (1910) pp. 307-30 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 81

Smuts of Australia.* — These have been described by D. Mc Alpine
in a companion volume to his " Uredineae," published some years ago.
He includes ten genera already established, but he finds thirteen new
species. Entyloma Mel Hot i sp.n. is the first of that genus detected on
a leguminous plant. The author describes the conditions that favour
the growth of the fungi, the life-histories of the organisms, their vege-
tative and reproductive organs, etc. He also touches on the questions
of parasitism and immunity, and gives special attention to the smuts of
cereals.

German Cortinarii.f — F. Kaufmann has published a systematic
account of the two subgenera Phlegmacium and Znoloma. He gives
keys to the species, which take into account all the points that help in
determination, especially the colours of the pileus and the gills. The
author inclines to refer nomenclature back to Linnaeus rather than to
Fries. The selection of Fries's Systema as the starting point shuts out
mvcolosnsts who have an undoubted risjht to be considered, and confuses
the often interesting history of many species.

Monograph of Hygrophorus.J — F. Bataille's account of this genus
includes descriptions of eighty-two species. He retains Fries's sub-
divisions of the genus, and does not consider the number of spores on
the basidium as a generic character. He provides a key to the species,
using all characters easy to be recognized.

Notes on the Larger Fungi.§ — Rene Maire published some time ago
the result of his employment of reagents as aids to the determination of
species in Russula. Potron has worked on the same lines, and publishes
a short paper explaining his methods of using the reagents, and the
success that attended their application. Usually he found that boiling
a small portion of the pileus in water was sufficient to obtain a coloured
fluid, which varied for the different species. He gives the colour-
reactions for eight species of Russula.

C. Torrend || records finding a variety of Trametes ochroleuca in
Portugal, a fungus previously found only in the tropics. Torrend calls
attention to the remarkable fact that several fungi supposed to be con-
fined to the tropics have been found in Portugal.

Punctularia tuberculosa. % — C. Torrend found this tropical member
of the Thelephorere on an oak-tree in Portugal. It is of a beautiful
violet-red colour, and spreads widely, though in Portugal it has not been
observed to form spores. There was also found beside it a form of
Ceriomyces, with many filaments and red-violet spores. Torrend finds
the Thelephora to be identical with Retirularia venulosa B. & C. The

* Melbourne, 1910, 285 pp. (56 pis.). See also Ann. Mycol., viii. (1910)
pp. 574-5.

t Ber. Westpreuss. Bot.-Zool. Ver., xxxii. (1910). See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxiv. (1910) pp. 565-6.

% Extrait Mem. Soc. d'Emul. du Doubs, ser. 8, iv. (1909) 85 pp. See also
Bot. Centralbl., cxiv. (1910) p. 459.

§ Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi. (1910) pp. 327-9.
|| Bull. Soc. Port. Sci. Nat., iv. (1910) pp. 35-7. \ Torn, cit., pp. 9-10.

Feb. 15th, 1911 G

82 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

formation of the Ceriomyces-f orm is due to humidity. He points out
that Ceriomyces can no longer be considered as exclusively a form of
Polyporeae.

Cystidia of Coprinus atramentarius.* — A. H. R. Buller gives ;i
resume" of what has been known as to the presence and function of
cystidia in Hymenomycetes, and then takes up the Coprini with a special
study of Coprinus atramentarius. The gills of that species are wide,
thin and flexible, with massive cystidia that extend across the space
from gill to gill. At maturity these disappear by auto-digestion, just
before the ripening of the spores, though their prop-function is retained
till the last moment necessary. The author has examined many specie-
of the genus. In only three has he found cystidia absent (in C. comatus,
G. sterquilinus, and G. plicatiloides), and in these he found that the
swollen edges sufficed to keep the gills apart during spore-formation.

Mushroom Culture.! — M. Ponroy draws attention to the necessity
of studying conditions of humidity in order to secure successful beds
of mushrooms. If these were properly understood, he thinks the mush-
room might be grown at any season, and that the quality and quantity
would be greatly enhanced. Different degrees of humidity he finds art
necessary according to the stage of growth, and if the state of the
atmosphere in the caves where mushrooms are grown were properly
considered and regulated, the result in increased crops would repay all
the trouble taken.

Do the Higher Fungi require Lime ? % — S. Hori was led to investi-
gate this subject as he contrasted the development of higher and lower
fungal forms with those of the higher and lower Algae. It had been
proved that oxalate of potash was poisonous for organisms that require
lime ; for those that do not require lime it was harmless. Hori grew an
Agaric, a species of Hypochnus and various moulds in his research
cultures, and he found that, in certain fungi, oxalate had a distinct
influence on the growth, which seemed to prove the indispensability of
lime. Further communications are promised.

Mycological Notes.§ — F. v. Hohnel re-states the necessity of revising
the old genera and species and of re-writing the diagnoses. For this
purpose he has overhauled a great deal of material in the larger herbaria
at Berlin, Kew, Paris, and Upsala. The present paper deals with about
sixty diagnoses of these old plants. Hohnel has found it necessary
to establish the following new genera :— Glypeolella (Microthyriaceas) ;
Coccochorella (Dothideaceaa) ; Apiosporina (near to Capuodiaceae) ; Siro-
thryiella (Pyknothyrieaj) ; Trichopellella similar to Trichopeltis but with
2-celled brown spores ; Pareny ferula to include Meliola Macoivan-
iana, which differs from a true Meliola in the character of the peri-
thecial membrane.

* Ann. Bot., xxiv. (1910) pp. 613-29 (1 pi.).

f Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi. (1910) pp. 298-306.

t Flora, n. a., i. (1910) pp. 447-8.

§ SB. Akad. Wiss. Math-Nat. KL, cxix. (1910) pp. 393-473.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 83

Notes on the Larger Fungi.* — In Polyporoid Issue, No. 2, C. G.
Lloyd discusses the genus Favolus, Hexayona, and some noteworthy
Polyporoids, with an account of the genus Ptychog aster (Ceriomyces) ;
he states the generally received opinion that it is a modification or
conidial form of a Polypore, but he has seen nothing to justify the
statement. In Issue No. 3, Lloyd describes other forms of Polyporus
that have more recently come under his notice, such as the large species
P. Berkeleyi and the minute P. pocida.

He has also sent out recently Notes No. 33,f with a portrait of
Paul Hennings and a sketch of his life. There are also comments on a
great number of plants. No. 34 with a photograph and a short account
of G. Massee and notes on various Phalloids with criticisms of various
published diagnoses of fungi. No. 35 presents a photograph and an
account in French of G. Bresadola, and gives a description of the Poly-
pores in Persoon's herbarium. No. 36 has a photograph of the late
W. A. Kellerman, with a short note of his work. The botanical congress
at Brussels is discussed, and several important and rare fungus genera
are described, such as Lycoyalopsis, Jansia and C'yclomyces. The latter
contains two species only, one from the East and one from America.
Lloyd publishes also a plate and description of Polyporus clryadeus, the
weeping Polypore. In Europe it grows on oak, but was found in
America growing on elm.

Witches'-brooms on Firs4— These have generally been attributed
to the damage caused by a Uredine fungus. C. V. Tubeuf has, however,
demonstrated that they are not originated by a parasite. He has sown
seeds collected from trees bearing the witches'-brooms, and the resulting
trees again formed brooms.

Wintering of Plant-parasites. § — Among other parasitic plants
C. S. Tubeuf studied the wintering of the fungus causing mildew of
apples and the mallow fungus Puccinia malvacearum. The mildew
was found to shelter in the buds ; soon after opening the young leaves
were covered with the spores already formed, which must have developed
within the bud. As to Puccinia malvacearum, which grew on Althea
rosea, the teleutospores were found to be capable of germination after
the melting of the snow. Other observations proved that the mycelium
of the fungus persisted in the root-stock of Althea rosea.

Technical Mycology. — This important work of Franz Lafar has
been before the public for some time, and Charles T. C. Salter has just
completed the translation into English from the German original
of the second volume. It deals generally with fermentation, and the
fungoid organisms that take part in that process. The work therefore
embraces a discussion of yeasts, their life-history and development, and

* Cincinnati, 1909-10. pp. 17-48 (many figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 425-92 (pis. and figs.).

J Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst.-Landw., viii. (1910) pp. 349-51. See also Ann.
Mycol., viii. (1910) p. 579.

§ Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst.-Landw., viii. (1910) pp. 56-8. See also Ann.
Mycol., viii. (1910) pp. 578-9.

|| London : Charles Griffin and Co. (1910) pp. ix. and 748 (text-figs.).

G 2

84 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the various conditions of environment that help or hinder their growth
and fermentative activity. Other fungi that have been found to take
part in fermentation arc also described, certain Ascomycetes and
Hyphomycetes. The final section is devoted to an account of enzymes,
enzyme activities of yeast and the chemistry of alcoholic fermentation.
A full bibliography adds immensely to the value of the book.

Fungicides.* — A paper has been issued under the auspices of
Cornell University describing the various methods of applying sprays,
etc., to diseases in plants, many of these being due to insects. The
section dealing with fungoid diseases is written by H. H. Whetzel. In
the introduction the grower is recommended to spray for fungous diseases
before rains, not after ; as the spores germinate during rain, the plants
must be protected before the wet season begins. Further, we are told
that, " timeliness and thoroughness are more important factors in the
control of diseases than are the particular mixtures of poisons used."
In the course of the work these mixtures and the methods of applying
them are described.

Diseases of Economic Plants.f — A text-book on this subject has
been prepared by F. L. Stevens and J. G. Hall. They aim at meeting
the needs of those who desire to recognize and treat diseases without
the burden of long study as to their causes, and they also endeavour to
help the student to recognize and name the parasites that are the cause
of so many plant diseases. The authors give an historical account of the
subject, talk of the importance of plant diseases economically, and de-
scribe methods and means of cure. They then go on to the diseases
that affect particular crops, and describe these in general terms ; purely
microscopic characters being relegated to the Appendix. The book is
well illustrated.

Plant Diseases.:}: — Ernest Voges writes on the possibility of over-
coming the Fusicladium disease of apples and pears. He names the
varieties of apple-trees that are more or less immune to the disease, and
points out that young and very vigorous trees suffer less than old trees
or than those in poor soil. He traces the life-history of the fungus,
and holds that young shoots are not only attacked, but harbour the
fungus during the winter. The most abundant source of infection is to
be found in the fallen leaves that are scattered through garden or orchard,
and Voges recommends above all things the burning of such leaves.
He does not think spraying of the leafless trees of great value, but he
advises spraying the growing leaves with Bordeaux mixture.

F. Gueguen § describes a hyphomycetous fungus which does con-
siderable damage to the fruits of the cocoa. He found that it gained
entrance to the young seed by the bite of an insect that pierced the
capsule to get at the radicle of the embryo. The mycelium of the fungus
was colourless, then brown : the spores were simpleand colourless. The

* Cornell Univ. Agric. Exp. Stat. Bull. 283 (1910) (17 figs.).

t New York : Macmillan Co. (1910) x. and 513 pp. (3 pis. and 214 figs.).

% Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xx. (1910) pp. 385-93.

§ Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi. (1910) pp. 287-97 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. 85

fungus belongs to the genus Acrostalagmus, and was named by Gueguen
A. Vilmorini f. Thomensis. Though the insect was generally present,
some fruits were attacked where no insect was to be found. The author
advises spraying and washing by arsenide of copper, a poison that would
destroy both the insect and the spores of the fungus.

Griffon and Maublanc* have examined a microscopic fungus on the
branches of pear-trees-, causing spots and dried areas which become
somewhat large and deep wounds, resulting in the death of the smaller
twigs. The authors found on the twigs several different fungi already
described, species of Spheeropsis and Diplodia, usually saprophytic, but
able in certain conditions to become harmful parasites. Two of these
fungi, Spkseropsis malorum and S. pseudo-diplodia have been pre-
viously recognized as saprophytes or parasites both in Europe and
America. The third fungus, Diplodia sp., which was found on the
branches of pear-trees at Grignon, has been left undetermined.

A series of notes f on plant pathology have been made by T. Petch.
He calls attention to " pink disease " of Hevea, which is due to Corticium
java ii ic urn, and recommends coal-tar for healing up wounds caused by
pruning.

A disease of tomatoes % is ascribed to the Bacillus solanacearum,
causing the leaves to wilt. The bacteria live in the root, and plants
should be dug up and burned. A root disease of tea caused by Poria
hypolateritia was supposed to be confined to high altitudes, but cases
occurred recently in the lower districts. The Poria is thin and pink in
colour, and attacks the tree at the soil surface. In the same paper it is
stated that old stumps form a starting point for diseases that spread to
living trees. Thus Ustulina zonata passes from Grevillea stumps to tea-
trees near by.

Preventive measures § are being taken in Ceylon, Petch informs his
readers, against the importation of diseased tea seed from districts in
India infested with " blister blight," due to the leaf -fungus Exobasidium
vexans.

The wilt disease || of pepper has been ascribed to an eel-worm, but
Nectria fruits and mycelium have been found on the dying trees, and are
probably the cause of the mischief.

Tea seedlings If were found to have been killed by a species of
Fusarium, which attacks at the soil level and kills the young tree about
an inch above the ground ; when the fungus penetrates the wood the
supply of water is stopped and the plant dies. Sterilizing of seed-beds
is recommended.

A number of diseases** on the roots of trees have also been described
by Petch. Hevea is attacked among other fungi by Sphserostilbe repent.
In the first case recorded, three large trees twenty-five years old were
killed. The fungus burrows below the bark of the root, where it forms

* Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi. (1910) pp. 307-16 (2 pis. and 2 figs.),
t Tropical Agric, xxxiii. (1909) No. 5. J Tom. cit., No. 6.

§ Tropical Agric, xxxiv. (1910) No. 2. Tom. cit., No. 6.

U Op. cit., xxxv. (1910) No. 3.

** Circ. and Agric. Journ. Roy. Bot. Gard. Cevlon, v. No. 8 (1910) pp. 65-71
(2 pis.).

86 SUMMARY OF CUERBNT RESBAECHES RELATING TO

strands or sheets of black or red mycelium. The conidial form is a red
stalk with a head of spores ; the peritkecia are small dark red bodies.

A second paper* deals with root diseases of Acacia decurrms, a tree
that is "planted in up-country districts as a wind-break in tea." One
of these diseases is caused by Armillaria fuscipes, which forms sheets of
red or white mycelium under the bark ; the fructification does not
appear till the tree has been dead for some time. The habit of the
fungus is very like that of A. mellea.

Another disease also described is caused by Fomes australis, one of
the bracket fungi. Infection probably takes place through wounds, but
the fungus can also spread from tree to tree by the roots. The fungus
is of slow growth, and can be rooted out if taken in time.

Brown root disease f due to Hymenochsete noxia, is characterized by
a thin dark brown crust adhering to the base of the stem. It attacks a
considerable number of different trees, and Petch records its appearance
on several new hosts — camphor, cacao, cinnamon, etc. — he recommends
burning the diseased trees and roots. A somewhat similar disease
(H. rigidula) is found in the jungle also on a number of trees. \

Information is given J by the Board of Agriculture as to the appear-
ance of powdery mildew of peach and cherry. It begins as small white
patches on both surfaces of the leaves, and on the young twigs. In the
case of peaches it does great damage, as it attacks the young fruit. It
is recommended to spray the trees with half-strength Bordeaux mixture
when the disease appears.

A leaflet § has been issued dealing with Spongospora scabies, corky
scab of potatoes. Experiments in Western Ireland have proved that lime
in the soil rather aids the disease. Care should be taken to plant seed
free from the parasitic organism, and also to see that the clean tubers have
not been in contact with any that are diseased. Soaking in formalin
will kill the parasite if it is only in the superficial cells of the potato.

L. Pavarino || found that in the leaves of plants attacked by Fxoascus
the temperature rose higher than in healthy leaves, and he considers
this phenomenon as a local fever induced by the action of the fungus
poison.

F. B. Bubakfhas detected on fir-needles a Pyrenoinycete with
niany-spored asci, which he names Rehmidlopsis bohemica g. et sp. n.,
and the pycnidial form, also a new discovery, Phoma bohemica.

A disease of pine-needles** has been observed by E. Munch and
C. v. Tubeuf. The trees looked as if they were suffering from smoke,
an impossibility in the circumstances. A fungus, Hendersonia acicola
sp. n., was found on the decaying leaves, and was probably the cause of
the trouble.

* Oirc. and Agric. Journ. Roy. Bot. Gard. Ceylon, v. No. 10 (1910) pp. 89-94
(3 pis.). t Tom. cit. No. 6, pp. 47-56 (2 pis).

% Journ. Board Agric. xvii. (1910) pp. G52-3 (1 pi.).
§ Board of Agric. and Fish. Leaflet N. 232 (1910) 4 pp. (1 fig.).
jl Riv. Pat. Veg. iv. (1909) pp. 3-4. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxviii. (1910)
p. 274.

f Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst.-Landw., viii. (1910) pp. 313-20 (5 figs.). See also
Ann. Mycol., viii. (1910) p. 572.

** Tom cit., pp. 39-44. See also Ann. Mycol., viii. (1910) pp. 577-8.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 87

G. v. Tubeuf * has also followed the life-history of Lophodermium
Pinastri, a parasite on pine-needles. It is connected with small Hack
pycnidia that produce innumerable colourless spores. Inoculation
experiments were unsuccessful.

Frombling | has also written on diseases of Conifers which have
become so prevalent in recent years. As to larch disease, he considers
that the tree has been taken from its native surroundings and planted
often in rich soil, which induces quick and luxuriant growth, but also
renders it more open to attack. He also accuses the constant re-
planting of pines in one locality of having a weakening effect on the
tree. Much depends on the source from which seed is procured. He
recommends procuring seed where possible in the country itself, as the
trees grown from native seed will be better fitted to meet native condi-
tions.

K. Stormer $ seeks to prove that cherry disease, said to be due to
Valsa leucostoma, apple disease to Gytospora piricola, and potato-leaf
rolling to VerticilUum alboatrum or Fusarium, are all really caused by
the same organism, some endogenous bacterium. Incidentally the
author has proved the existence of bacteria in healthy plants.

E. Vinet § traces a disease of vines in Anjou to the presence of
fungus mycelium in the tissues, which had destroyed the wood and the
bark. Stereum hirsutum and Polyporiis versicolor both grew on the
diseased trees. P. igniarius has also been regarded as the cause of
the malady.

A. Moller j| gives advice as to fighting the disease of Conifers due
to Trametes Pint. In general, care should be taken to root out all
stumps of felled trees, and to destroy the fruiting bodies of the fungus
that have developed on any trees that must be left standing. Infection
takes place through the ends of cut branches and through wounds in
the bark. The most fatal time for the tree is between fifty and seventy
years of age.

P. Magnus % records a disease of rhubarb caused by a Peronospora.
It forms spots on the leaves, the diseased portions ultimately falling
out, and the mycelium in them, owing to abundant glycogen contents,
is able to persist as resting mycelium, and reinfect new leaves.

Bataille, P. — Champignons rares ou nouveaux de la Franche-Comte II. (New
or rare fungi from Franche-Comte.)

[Complete descriptions are given of all the species.]

Bull. Soc. Mycol., xxvi. (1910) pp. 330-48.

* Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst.-Landw., viii. (1910) pp. 408-11. See also Ann.
Mycol., viii. (1910) p. 578.

t Forst. wiss. Centralbl., xxxii. (1910) pp. 193-200. See also Centralbl. Bakt.,
xxviii. (1910) pp. 275-6.

t Jahresb. Ver. Angew. Bot., vii. (1910) p. 119. See also Centralbl. Bakt.,
xxviii. (1910) pp. 278-9.

§ Rev. Vitic. xxxii. (1909) pp. 676-81. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxviii. (1910)
p. 282.

|| Zeitschr. Forst. Jagdw., xlii. 3 (1910) pp. 129-46. See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxiv. (1910) p. 547.

1 Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxviii. (1910) pp. 250-3 (1 pi.). See also Bot.
Centralbl., cxiv. (1910) pp. 595-6.

88 SUMMARY 01 CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Broili, J. — Versuche mit Brand-Infection zur Erziehung brandfreier Gersten-
stamme.

[Experiments in the cultivation of races of barley immune to smut-infection.]

Nat. Wiss. Forst.-Landw., viii. (1910) pp. 335-44.
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxiv. (1910) pp. 594-5.

Coke it, W. C. — Another New Achlya.

[The new fungus A. caroliniana has branched oogonial stalks.1

Bot. Oaz., 1. (1910) pp. 381-3 (8 figs.).

DibdiiN, W. J. — The Biological Disposal of Waste Yeast.
[Accounts of sewage bed processes.]

Journ. Inst. Brewing, xvi. (1910) pp. 535-43.

Faes, Henry — Les maladies des plantes cultivees et leur traitement. (The
diseases of cultivated plants and their treatment.)

[A book of plant diseases, with directions how to recognize the causes of
disease, and with advice as to the remedies.]

Lausanne (1909) 256 pp.
See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxviii. (1910) pp. 274-5.

Hardy, A. D. — Alga and Fungus in Salmon-disease.

[Saprolegnia sp. was found on dying fish, and its connection therewith ia
discussed.] Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 27-32.

HoHN'EL, P. von — Atichia Treubii v. Hohnel. (Saccharomycetes.)

[The spores of the yeast are two-celled : it was found on leaves of Ficut
elastica. \

Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitcnzorg, Suppl. 3 (Treub. Festschrift) i. (1910)
pp. 19-28. See also Bot. Centralbl. xiv. (1910) p. 428.

Herzfeld, S. — TJeber eine neue Taphrina auf Polystichum Lonchitis. (A new
Taphrina on Polystichum.)

[Differs in various respects from other fern Taphrinss.']

Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., lx. 7 (1910) pp. 249-54 (8 figs.)
See also Bot. Centralbl, cxiv. (1910) p. 544.
Heinricher, E. & E. Elsler — Pachyma Cocos. Ein interessanter Pilxfund
fur Tirol. (Pachyma Cocos : an interesting fungus find in the Tyrol.)
[Found hitherto in China.]

Zeitschr. Ferd. Innsbruck, iii. Folge liv. (1910), pp. 339-48 (1 pi.)
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxiv. (1910) p. 428.

Iltis, Hugo — TJeber eine durch Maisbrand verursachte intracarpellare Pro-
lifikation bei Zea Mays. (An intracarpellary prolification in Zea Mays caused
by maize smut, Ustilago Zea Maydis.)

SB. Akad. Wiss. Math.-Nat. Kl., cxix. (1910) pp. 331-45 (2 pis.)

Love joy, Ruth Harrison — Some New Saprophytic Fungi of the Middle
Rocky Mountain Region.

[Several new species of the larger fungi and one new genus of Agarics,
Calathelasma.] Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 883-5.

Massee, G. — Fungi exotici. X.

[New fungi chiefly from the West Indies, but a few from Tropical Africa
and elsewhere. There is one new genus, Hartiella near to Arthro-
sporium.~] Kew Bull., 1910, pp. 1-6 (1 pi.).

Penau, Henry — Cytologic d'Endomyees albicans. (Cytology of Endomyces
albicans.)

[Notes on nuclear division (amitotic) in filamentous yeasts.]

Comptes Bendus, cli. (1910) pp. 774-6.

Rick en, Adalbert — Die Blatterpilze. (Agaricacese.)
[First part of a work on German and Swiss Agarics.]

Weigel, Leipzig, 1910, 32 pp. (8 col. pis.).

Rick, J.— Fungi Austro-Americani. Nos. 201-300.

[The fascicle contains many fine tropical species. Several specimens are
accompanied by drawings.] Feldkirch in Vorarlberg, 1910.

See also Bot. Centralbl., cxiv. pp. 382-3.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 89

Stkaszer, Pius -Fiinfter Nachtrag zur Pilzflora des Sonntagberges. (Fifth
contribution to the fungus flora of the Sonntagberg.)

[The present list includes about 300 species, several of them new.]

Verh. ~k.lt. Zool. Bot. Gcs. Wien, lx. (1910) pp. 305-35.

Selibeb, G. — Sur le virage du pigment de deux champignons. (On the changes
of colour in the pigment of two fungi.)

[The fungi experimented with were Fusarium heidelbergianum (red) and
Cephalosporium subsessilc (violet). They changed their colours according
to the acid-alkaline culture medium.]

Comptes Rendus, cl. (1910) pp. 1707-9.
Saktoey, A. — Etude biologique du Sterigmatocystis queroina. (Biological study
of Sterigmatocystis querdna.)

[Results of culture experiments.]

Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxiv. (1910) pp. 349-57 (4 figs.).

S ydo w— Mycotheca Germanica. Fasc. xviii. xix. (Nos. 851-950).

[List of the species, with diagnoses of a number new to science.]

Arm. Mycol, viii. (1910) pp. 489-93.

Torrend, C. — Premiere Contribution a l'etude des Champignons de Tile de Timor
(Oceanie). (First contribution to the study of the fungi of the Island of
Timor.)

[The list includes several new species.]

Brot. Ser. Bot., ix. (1910) pp. 83-91 (2 pis.).
See also Arm. Mycol., viii. (1910) p. 576.

We st ling, R. — En ny Askusbildende Penicillium-art. (An ascus-forming
species of Penicittium.)

[Penicillium baculatum, sp.n. formed on leaves, nearly allied to P. glaucum.]

Svensk. Bot. Tidsskr., iv. (1910) pp. 139-45 (1 fig.).
See also Ann. Mycol., viii. (1910) pp. 576-7.)

Lichens.
(By A. Lorrain Smith.)

American Species of Stereocaulon.* — L. W. Riddle finds the
American species of Stereocaulon fall into two groups : one, with
&'. pasehale as the central species, is typical of northern regions : the
other group is tropical, and is represented by S ramulosum and its
allies. As a result of careful examination of a great mass of material,
Riddle has been able to draw up a key based on salient and persistent
species characters. Between 8. pasehale and S. tomentoswn he finds the
most constant feature of distinction in the cephalodia ; in the former
they contain Stigonema algse, in the latter Nostoc. These two species
are apt to be confused : the same character is used to distinguish between
S. denudation (with Stigonema) and 8. atpinum (with Nostoc). These
species are European as well as American.

Cladonise.f-- Ij. W. Riddle has published a key to the species of
Cladonia in New England. The species in this genus are extremely
variable, and no key can be constructed, he tells us, that will serve for
the determination of all specimens. He adds a list of the species and
varieties with synonyms used in Tuckerman's Synopsis of Xorth
American Lichens.

* Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 285-304 (9 figs.),
t Bryologist, xiii. (1910) pp. 92-7.

90 -SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Obituary Notice.* — Bruce Fink writes a abort sketch of the lift:
and work of Carolyn Wilson Harris, who died at Lakewood, New
Jersey, in May of last year. She collected and studied Lichens for
many years, and contributed many papers on the subject to the Bryolo-
gist, a journal that, owing to her interest in the matter, has been
largely concerned with the study of Lichens as well as of Mosses. She
laid emphasis on macroscopic characters or such as could be seen with a
hand-lens. Her papers deal with the larger foliose or fruticose species.

Hasse, H. E. — Additions to the Lichen Flora of Southern California

[Two species new to California, and one Lecanora margmalis new to
science.] Bryologist, xiii. 1910, pp. 111-12.

Heber Howe. R. (jr.) — Lichens of the Mount Monadnock Region, N.H., No. 5.

[Species of Stereocaulon and Cladonia, the latter determined by L. Scriba,

Frankfort.] Bryologist, xiii. (1910) pp. 119-21.

Merrill, G. R. — Lichen Note3, No. 15.

[Discussion as to the similarity of Cladonia mitrula and Helopodium
cajoitatum.'] Bnjologist, xiii. (1910) pp. 103-5.

Servit, Mir.— Zur Flechtenflora Norddalmatiens. (The Lichen Flora of N.
Dalmatia.)

[A list of species collected by the author.]

Magyar Bot. Lapok, ix. (1910) pp. 164-93.

Mycetozoa.
(By A. Lorrain Smith.)

Colloderma a New Genus of Mycetozoa. |— G. Lister has received
from W. Crau two gatherings of a mycetozoon collected by him in
Aberdeenshire. She has identified them with specimens previously
collected and named by G. Lippert as Didymium oculatum. As the
species has no lime crystals it is removed from Didymiaceae and placed
in the new genus as above. It is characterized by having two sporangial
walls, an outer one gelatinous, and an inner membranaceous. Spores
and capillitium are dark purplish-brown.

Parasites on the Roots of Juncacese.} — E. J. Schwartz finds two
distinct parasites on the roots of Jnncacese. One of these, which he
has named Sorosphsera Junci, occurred in spherical balls on the roots of
Juncus articulatus. He worked out the life-history, which follows that
of the previously described *S'. Veronicee. The first stage observed was
a small plurinucleate amoeba in one of the root-hairs, in this infection
differing from S. Veronicee where the parasite enters at the root apex.
The amoebae increase in size, and the nuclei divide. They then break
up into a number of small amoeboid organisms ; the nucleus of these
divide twice, forming four small bodies ; these become spores which are
collected into sorospheres, or are loosely aggregated. The writer places
Sorosphsera next to Plasmodiophora. He also describes a fungus, Ento-

* Bryologist, xiii. (1910) pp. 89-91.

+ Journ. Bot., xlviii. (1910) pp. 310-12.

X Ann. Bot., xxiv. (1910) pp. 511-22 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 91

rhiztt cypericola (Uustilagineae), which forms tubercles on the roots,
brown or black when mature. Infection in the latter case probably
takes place by a root-hair.

Bilgram, Hugo — Unusual forms of Myxomycetes.

[Sessile sporangia of Physarum pulcherrimum and stalked forms of Peri-
chiena chrysospora, both very rare.]

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., lxii. (1910) pp. 271-2.

Borrell, W. H. — Norfolk Mycetozoa.

[Supplemental list (one, Orcadella operculata, new to this country).]

Trans. Norfolk and Norwich Nat. Soc, ix. (1909-10) pp. 106-7.

Ktjsano, S. — Studies on the Chemotactic and other Reactions of the Swarm-
spores of Myxomycetes.

[Experiments were made with various chemical solutions.]

Coll. Agric. Imp. Univ. Tokyo II., i. (1909) pp. 1-83 (1 fig.)
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxiv. pp. 383-5.

Schizophyta.
Schizomycetes.

Comparative Study of Coli-form Organisms.* — R. Burri and P.
Andrejew have investigated a number of organisms allied to Bacillus
coli, which do not ferment lactose or saccharose naturally, but will after
some training attack the latter sugar. Five bacteria from fermenting
grass, and five from fresh cow dung, were studied. Five paratyphoid
strains were used for purposes of comparison. In most points, all these
organisms resembled the paratyphoid bacillus closely, but were distin-
guished by agglutination tests. Further investigation showed that
these strains could be separated into three well-marked groups, distin-
guished by their cultural reactions and biochemical affinities. The
organisms obtained from cattle gave the indol reaction, but did not
yield tryptophan, whereas the grass bacilli gave a positive tryptophan
reaction, but failed to produce indol. The authors conclude that a
more precise identification of Bacillus coli should be made, before
adducing its presence in water or milk as evidence of faecal contamina-
tion.

Bacteriology of Appendicitis. f — Heile gives an account of his
investigations of the micro-organisms associated with appendicitis. In
nine early cases, where the disease was circumscribed, he found a
streptococcus six times, Bacillus coli twice, and a mixed growth of
streptococci and B. coli in the remaining case. This streptococcus
showed some peculiarities on cultivation. It was strongly hemolytic
when grown on blood-agar. Colonies on nutrient agar produced a
characteristic brownish-red pigment. This organism was found to be
highly pathogenic to mice and rabbits, less markedly so to guinea-pigs.
Smear preparations from the contents of the appendix showed that the
leucocytes were rapidly ingesting these cocci, and active phagocytosis
could also be demonstrated experimentally. This streptococcus was

* Centralbl. Bakt., l^ Abt. Orig., hi. (1910) pp. 217-33.
t Tom. oit., pp. 233-41.

92 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES ItlflLATING TO

also found pure in two cases of appendicitis associated with septicaemia
and peritonitis. In the more common type, where appendicitis was
accompanied by peritonitis unassociated with septicaemia, B. coli was
present in nearly every case. Other organisms found in such cases
were pyogenic streptococci, Diplococcus lanceolatus, Bacillus pyocyaneus,
B.proteus, B. mesmtericus vulgatus, and pseudo-diphtheria bacilli.

' i Micro-organisms in Koumiss.* — B. Rubinskv finds that four species
are usually present. Two characteristic forms, koumiss-bacterium and
koumiss-yeast, are the agents essentially concerned with the preparation
of this material. Streptococcus lactis and Baal/us aerogems ( B. acidi
lactici Hiippe) are very constant accessories, and play probably an
important part in producing in the milk a degree of acidity destructive
to hostile organisms, as well as in keeping a set balance between the
specific yeast and bacterium.

The most peculiar features of the yeast, its physiological reactions,
are dealt with in detail. The bacterium is a non-motile, non-sporing
organism, which exhibits a high degree of polymorphism. It is most
closely related to the B. acidophilus of Moro.

Koumiss is usually prepared from mare's milk. The author found
that with cultures of yeast and bacterium in symbiosis, koumiss was
readily made from the milk of mares or camels, but not from that of
goats.

Bacteria in Frozen Soil.f — H. J. Conn gives an account of a year's
work upon the quantitative and qualitative investigation of soil bacteria
under winter conditions. He finds that when the soil is completely
frozen, there is an unexpectedly rapid multiplication of organisms ; the
number obtained being greater than that obtained in summer or autumn
enumerations. The general rule is that the number of bacteria varies
directly with the moisture curve, but these winter observations show
that there are exceptions to this rule. The results of qualitative inves-
tigations, so far, indicate that there may be two groups of bacteria in
the soil, one group flourishing in summer, the other in winter.

Actinomycosis of Plants.:}: — From the root-nodules of Alnus Glu-
tinosa and Myrica dale, Y. Peklo has cultivated organisms which he
assigns to the Actinomyces. In the first place, he considers in detail the
histological appearances of the tissues invaded by or in juxtaposition
with this organism, and shows how its relation to the host is at times
parasitic, at times symbiotic. The most suitable culture medium con-
tained beer-wort and some calcium salts. Inoculation with pure cultures
into fresh plants proved that infection could be transmitted in this way.
Microscopically, the organism was found to be a typical Streptothrix,
consisting of a network of threads, chains of coccal or bacillary cells,
enmeshing clumps of endospores.

The author then considers certain analogies between the' changes
produced by this species and the histopathological changes associated with
actinomycosis in animals. He also states that in certain media con-

* Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xxviii. (1910) pp. 161-219.

t Tom. cit., pp. 422-34. \ Tom. cit., pp. 451-579.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 93-

taining salts, tubercle bacilli assume Streptothrix forms, and expresses
the view that the study of these endophyta associated with plants may
throw light upon the pathology of infections in man and animals.

Disease-carriers.* — In opening a discussion upon this subject,
A. C. Houston pointed out that, hitherto, attention had been paid to
the passive transmitters rather than to the living storehouses of disease.
It is now known that, after an attack of enteric fever, a person may
continue to harbour and excrete typhoid bacilli for many years. Recent
work has shown also that pathogenic bacteria may increase and multiply
within the stomachs of flies and other insects. On the other hand, the
conditions existing in soil, water or air are unfavourable to the multipli-
cation, even to the survival, of disease germs.

0. Lentz described the organization of the typhoid campaign in
south-west Germany. Bacteriological stations were organized for the
purpose o'f assisting practitioners in the diagnosis of typhoid, investi-
gating sources of infection and finding when convalescents cease to
eliminate the bacteria. Convicted carriers received instructions as to
care and cleanliness, but were subject to no legislative control. The
results of this campaign were satisfactory, as statistics showed a material
reduction in the number of typhoid cases.

Papers upon diphtheria and dysentery carriers were read. In both
these diseases the convalescent carrier is an important agent in the
spread of infection, but this condition is not so persistent as in the case
of typhoid. Lastly, in a summary of recent researches upon the trans-
mission of the plague bacillus, G. F. Petrie stated that human carriers
played no important part in the transmission of disease. The rat
appears to be the ultimate reservoir of this organism.

New Types of Urobacteria.f — From various samples of urine,
A. Roehaix and A. Dufourt have isolated eight new microbes of ammo-
niacal fermentation. These organisms also produce ferments capable
of liquefying gelatin or serum, and of coagulating milk. They act
upon neutral red media, producing canary-yellow with green fluorescence.
All but one form indol. Their power of transforming urea into ammo-
nium carbonate diminishes as the cultures become old and accustomed
to artificial media. These organisms are pathogenic to laboratory
animals, and may cause fatal septicemia.

Relation between Avian and Mammalian Tuberculosis.! — D. A. de
Jon^, who formerlv held the doctrine of the duality of the bacilli of
Birds and Mammals, now gives reasons for altering his opinion, and
declares in favour of unity. He has made observations which have led
him to the conclusion that the difference between Avian and Mammalian
tubercle is not absolute, and that the passage from one form to the
other is possible. Health authorities should therefore take measures
against Avian tuberculosis, as man, monkey, ox, pig, rabbit, rat, and
mouse may be infected.

* Brit. Med. Journ., 1910, ii. pp. 1499-1510.
t C. R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 312-14.
X Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxiv. (1910) pp. 895-906.

94 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Jdhne's Bacillus.*— F. W. Twort has succeeded in isolating and
cultivating the acid-fast bacillus found in the intestine of cows in
Jdhne's disease. The first generation of this bacillus grows long, with
branching and club formation. In subcultures it is smaller ; being, in
the second or third generations, about the size of B. tuberculosis. The
growth is only just visible to the naked eye. The cultures were incu-
bated at 40° C.

Enzymes in Different Bacteria. t — E. Abderbalden, L. Pincussohn,
and A. Walther find the culture fluids of a paratyphoid -like bacillus and
of Streptococcus pleuro-pneumoniee have no peptolytic action on various
kinds of peptone. Bacillus paratyphus slightly decomposes casein peptone.
Various bacilli were grown in different media with and without peptone,
and the change in the rotary power noted. It is hoped that this method,
of which a few preliminary examples are given, may be utilized in the
differentiation of micro-organisms.

Action of Dysentery Bacilli on Nitrites and Nitrates.}— W. J.
Logie remarks that all the dysentery strains examined, with one excep-
tion {Bacillus Neisser, etc.), reduced nitrates to nitrites ; none which fail
to ferment mannitol destroyed nitrites. B. dysenteries Jiirgens, although
closely related to B. dysenteries Flexner, differs from it in its action on
litmus whey, and in failing to destroy nitrite. B. dysenteries Jiirgens
is the only strain found to form indol, and therefore to give the cholera-
red reaction. The addition of dextrose enables Shiga strains to destroy
nitrites. With an abundant supply of oxygen, all the strains fail to
destroy nitrites and nitrates, but in media which contain dextrose the
inhibitory effect of oxygen is less marked. Under anaerobic conditions,
Shiga strains and B. dysenteries Jiirgens still fail to destroy nitrites.

Intestinal Flora.§ — E. Metchnikoff, in a second memoir on intestinal
bacteria || discusses the effect of the toxins on the organism, and comes
to the conclusion that sclerosis of tissues, e.g. of arteries, is often the
result of the absorption of these poisons.

Fowlbb, G. J., E. Abderk, & W. T. L ockbtt.— Oxidation of Phenol by
certain Baoteria in pure oulture.

Proc. Boy. Soc, lxxxiii. (1910) pp. 149-56.

* Proc. Roy. Soc, lxxxiii. (1910) p. 158.

t Zeitschr. Physiol. Chem., lxviii. (1910) pp. 471-6, through Journ. Chem.
Soc, xcvii. and xcviii. (1910) ii., 989.

X J. Hygiene (1910) pp. 143-54, through Journ. Chem. Soc, xcvii. and xcvin.
(1910) ii., 988.

§ Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxiv. (1910) pp. 755-70 (3 pis.).

|| See this Journal, 1909, p. 236.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

95

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments. Accesscn-ies, etc.*
(3) Illuminating' and other Apparatus.

Sliding Nose-piece for use in Stereo-photomicrography. f — H. C.
Kanfield describes a useful piece of apparatus for moving the objective

Fig. 4.

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands ; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives ; (3)
Illuminating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

t Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, xi. (1910) pp. 121-2 (1 fig.).

9(i SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

for low-power photomicrography. The device consists of ;i sliding plate
screwed to carry the objective, and laterally displaceable by means of a
small rack-and-pinion (rig. 4). For several reasons this method is more
convenient than moving the object, as the illumination is unaltered
and the shadows fall on their right place. The apparatus can lie used
only on Microscopes with a large body-tube, but a half-plate camera and
a Microscope fitted with the Zeiss sliding objective changers are all that
is necessary for high-power work, as the lateral screw of these changers
moves the objective adequately and efficiently.

Arc Lamps for Projection.* — H. P. Gage has, with the help of the
General Electric Company at Schenectady, made an exhaustive series of
investigations on the above subject. These investigations were suggested
by, and supplementary to, certain preliminary investigations at Cornell
University. They dealt with direct and alternating currents as applied
to the three ordinary types of projection lamps, viz. with inclined carbons,
with electrodes at right angles, with converging electrodes. Full descrip-
tions, with diagrams, are given of the experiments and results. The
author concludes that a direct current obtained from a mercury-arc
rectifier gives almost as much light as a direct current from a generator.
In every case direct current gives much more light for equal current
values than does alternating current. He is of opinion that evidently
the power drawn from the line depends upon the power consumed at
the arc and the efficiency of the " ballast " or transforming device. Of
the devices tested the rectifier was the most efficient, and the least
efficient was a resister used with alternating current.

Improvement in the Illumination of Objects observed with the
Binocular Microscope.t — C. Cepede, in the course of his botanical and
zoological researches with the binocular Microscope, has found rather
serious inconvenience arise from the formation of a shadow zone in the
part of the object turned towards the observer. This shadow is a
hindrance, by its depth, to the minute morphological and anatomical
study of all this part of the object. The author has overcome the
difficulty by illuminating the part in question by the help of a concave
mirror, which may be applied in three ways.

First Arrangement. — In this case, midway between the holes ad-
mitting the spring-clips, the stage is pierced by a similar hole for the
admission of a cylindrical screw-piece, resembling those bearing the
clips. To this screw-piece is attached a brass or nickel rod, bent at
right angles, and carrying a mirror-holder at its further extremity. The
mirror is fixed by help of screws, so that it has movement in two direc-
tions. The whole arrangement thus has a triple articulation, and can
be directed as desired.

Second and Third Arrangements. — In these the screw which fixes the
arm of the Microscope to the stage is used for screwing the mirror-
holder, which may be fastened either to the upper part of the arm
(second arrangement) or to its lower part (third arrangement). The
mirror-carrier itself is substantially the same as in the first arrangement.

* Electrical World, Oct. 13, 1910 ; and as a separate pamphlet, 5 pp. (9 figs.).
t Comptes Eendus, cli. (1910) pp. 948-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, EH .

!>7

Jentsch's Ultra-condenser.* — This apparatus has been designed by
F. Jentsch for investigations concerned with molecular movement in
gases. It permits the passage of rays from all azimuths of the plane
perpendicular to the Microscope-axis, and, in addition to these, many

Pigs. 5, 6.

other rays above and below this plane find their way to one and
the same point. This peculiarity distinguishes the apparatus from
Zsigmondy's ultramicroscope, which only admits a beam of rays from

* Verh. Deutsch. Phya. Gesell., xii. pp. 992-4 (3 figs.).
Feb. 15th, 1911

H

98

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

oue side. The author attains his purpose by the arrangements shown
in tigs. 5, 6, 7. Thus, in fig. .r>, by means of the two reflecting
spherical surfaces, each ray undergoes four reflexions, two before, and
two after, reaching the particles contained in the upper spherical cavity.
It will be noticed that the rays quit the condenser on the same side of
the apparatus as they enter it. The pattern in fig. 5 is built up of
two constituent pieces of glass ; that in fig. G is composed of three
constituents. The substance under examination in the upper cavity
may be a gas, a vapour, or a fluid. For many fluid examinations,
especially when only a small quantity of a strongly absorbing substance
is available, the form shown in fig. 7 is better adapted. In this form

Fig. 7.

the hollow space is so arranged that boundary surface breaks the rays
and takes part in forming the ray-combination. In addition to great
brilliance, these designs, at any rate Nos. 5 and 6 , offer the great
advantage of freedom from colour-error, as their action depends exclu-
sively on reflexion. Even with No. 7 colour-error need not arise if the
aqueous solution be so chosen as to preserve the principle of " homo-
geneous dispersion."

If tobacco smoke be blown into this condenser, a very great number
of bright particles is seen in active molecular movement. If an
electric spark be introduced, the tiny particles of metal torn off from
the electrodes can be seen whizzing about.

Jentsch's Concentric Condenser.* — F. Jentsch, after some general
remarks about mirror-condensers in general, discusses in detail the
principles of one based on the properties of two concentric circles.
These will be understood from fig. 8, where AP1 P2B is a ray originating
at A and arriving at B after a convex reflexion at Pt , and a concave

• Verh. Deutsch. Phys. Gesell., xii. pp. 975-91 (8 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC.

99

reflexion at P2. 0 is the common centre of the circles, a = o A, and
b - o B ; the inner and outer radii being rx R2 respectively. By pro-
perties of a triangle, it follows that

whence

a sin a = ;• sin 0 = R sin y = b sin /3 ;

sin a

«

sin (B'

If the origin be removed to infinity, then for a ray of incidence-height h,

J " sin /?'

where / is the focal distance of the zone in question. The condition

for aplanatism is

sin a
. — = a constant :

Sill yS

or, if A be at infinity,

. ' = a constant,
sin p

Moreover, it can be shown that a system of two concentric reflecting
circles is free from coma. Owing to the fact that one mirror reflects
convexly and the other concavely, the catacaustics will have opposite

Pig. 8.

sense, and will tend to neutralize one another. With medium aperture
the zone-aberration-values will change but slightly, and the system will
have its greatest advantage under such a condition. There will, again,
be many pairs of rays whose aplanatism will be perfect, and by suitable
choice of radii this property can be made to apply to any desired range
of aperture. The author also discusses the conditions under which the
brightness will be a maximum, and shows that theoretical values can
almost be attained in practice.

Fig. 9 shows how the principle of the concentric condenser can be
actually realized for an aperture range of 0*97 to 1*35.

It will be noticed that in Jentsch's design the two curved surfaces
are worked out of one and the same piece of glass, while in Ignatowsky's
and in Siedentopf's patterns two pieces are required, thus introducing
centring errors which are here absent. Jentsch's upper glass is a square

H 2

100 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

plane-parallel piece; it has only the significance of au intermediate
piece, and serves tn approximate the upper Burface of the condenser to
the object-carrier. This peculiarity also makes it less sensitive to
injury in the use of high temperatures which might affect the cement.
Both mirrors are silvered so that only those rays emerge which are
required for dark-ground illumination; thus the concave mirror func-
tions also somewhat as a diaphragm stop.

Fig. 9.

Simple Method of Making Drawings for Projection Purposes.*
M. Ponzo pours filtered gelatin over glass plates ; old cleaned-up photo-
graphic plates do very well. When dry, these plates may be drawn on
with ink, Indian ink, anilin colours, with brush or pencil. Mistakes
may be remedied by scratching off the gelatin and refilling the erased
spaces with fresh gelatin.

Electric Heating Apparatus for Microscopical Observations.f —
Figs. 10, 11, 12 show that the main idea in F. Jentsch's heating appa-
ratus is a rectangular or circular brass box. This contains the heating
apparatus, well isolated externally by means of asbestos : the box is
fastened by two screws on to a slate slab 6 or 7 mm. thick, and is
placed directly on the object-stage. The heating chamber is, in
figs. 10 and 11, a small hollow metal box of good heat-conductivity in
order to warm up the preparation uniformly, and is especially capable
of resisting loss of heat by the observation-hole. In pattern No. 1
(fig. 10) the stove has a certain slowness, so that heating up, and
cooling down, require some minutes (perhaps one minute for 250° C).
If the observation-hole is covered with a cover-glass a preparation may
be kept for a whole day at a constant temperature. This effect is
essentially due to a special spirally shaped coiling of the heating re-
sistance wire, which gives within wide limits a temperature gradient
proportional to the time. The highest temperature attainable depends

* Zeitschr. Biol. Technik u. Methodik, ii. (1910) p. 46.

f Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 259-64 (5 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

101

only on the melting-point of the materia! used. With the above-
mentioned stoves 1)00° C. could he reached ; with platinum stoves,

Fig. 10.

Pig. 11.

Fig. 12.

1500° C. With pattern No. 1 (fig. 8) the objective can be lowered
to a working distance of 5 mm., which with Leitz' objectives would
furnish a magnification of 25<s diameters.

Pattern No. 2 (fig. 9) is for higher magnifi-
cations, the object-slide being brought up closer
to the objective. A dry system will give 2000 ■
diameters.

Pattern No. 3 (fig. 10) is arranged for the con-
venience of the illuminating system, the object-
slide being placed on a laterally projecting slab. With this pattern,
however, the constancy of the temperature is evidently liable to be
affected by air-currents. On the other hand, changes in the object can
be more readily noted.

Fig. 13.

102

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Nos. 1 and 2 are suitable for mineralogica I and petrographical sections,
and No. 3 for microchemical reactions and interference figures in con-
vergent polarized light. Another pattern is made intended for biological
studies.

o

t-H

For small magnifications, and therefore for considerable objective
distances, the objective does not require special protection. But for all
cases of high temperature the objective needs a small protecting cap

ZOOLOGY A.ND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 103

(fig. 13). This cap easily fits on to the objective, and surrounds it with
an isolating mantle of air.

For the determination of temperatures at which fluid crystallization
and allotropic changes occur, the author considers his apparatus would
be eminently suitable.

Fig. 14 shows the general arrangement with resistance coil.

(4) Photomicrography.

Simple Object-holder for Photomicrography : Tables of Magnifi-
cations.*— R.Muller describes this apparatus, which he has designed and
found very useful. He uses it with the Zeiss horizontal-vertical camera,
but slight alterations would adapt it to other Microscopes. The apparatus
consists of a board 50 x 50 cm., secured by two lateral boards to the
object-stage ; it may be arranged for horizontal or vertical adjustment.
In the horizontal position, the surface of the object-bolder lies accurately
at the height of the Microscope stage, the Microscope itself being per-
pendicular and firmly clamped on the foot-plate. In the vertical position,
a hole is cut out of the board for the object-stage of the horizontally-
inclined Microscope. Two adjustable laths with clamps serve for holding
the objects to be photographed, e.g. culture-dishes, negatives, water-
chambers, etc. A special shelf is used for photographing paper pictures.
The whole arrangement is ingenious, and the author gives numerous
pictorial illustrations of its application, as well as a very complete tabular
list of the necessary numerical adjustments.

Wratten and Wainwright's Photomicrography, f — This handy
little book is written in a clear and lucid style, and is intended to be a
trustworthy guide to the beginner. Its style is expository, not scientific.
Its object is not to discuss possible methods, but to explain the easiest,
and, while some of the statements made need qualification, it lias been
thought best to do so rather than to perplex the beginner by diffuseness.
The work is not intended to replace the regular text-books of the subject,
but to supplement them. Some beautiful examples of photomicrography
are given in the plates.

New Photographic Apparatus of the Paris School of Mines.J
J. Boyer describes this apparatus, which was devised by H. Ragot, of the
G-eological Laboratory of the Sorbonne, for the reproduction of opaque
and of transparent objects. It is also intended for photographing micro-
scopic objects (fig. 15), but instead of moving the Microscope by means
of a rack-and-pinion, focusing is effected by moving the object. The
entire apparatus is attached to a rigid beam, and may be used in a hori-
zontal or a vertical position. The object-holder rests on a carriage which
is movable upon a second and larger carriage. The large carriage is
moved rapidly by turning one of the wheels and long rods shown in the
photograph, and the smaller carriage is moved slowly, with respect to the

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 265-71 (11 figs.).

t Wratten and Wainwright, Ltd., Croydon, 16 pp. (6 pis. and several figs.).

% Scientific American, ciii. (1910) p. 104 (2 figs.).

104

SUMMARY OF CTKliENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

large one. by turning the other wheel and rod. A Zeiss planar lens of
short focus is used for moderate enlargements, and a Microscope objective
for enlargements on a greater scale. As the pitch of the screw threads
which are cat on the long rods is only one-fifth inch, the focusing can be
accomplished as easily and accurately as with a rack-and-pinion. The
object is illuminated by a Nernst lamp of 120 candle-power, provided
with condensing lenses. The part of the object which it is desired to
photograph is brought into the field by means of a total reflection prism
and a Microscope eye-piece attached to the camera, as the great length
of the apparatus makes it impossible to move the object by hand while
observing its image on the ground-glass screen. In addition to these

Fig. 15.

two forms of apparatus, the photographic laboratory of the School of
Mines contains an excellent equipment, including two dark-rooms pro-
vided with all necessary apparatus, and a third and larger dark-room
containing an enlarging camera and a paper-holder for the production of
enlarged positives, 80 by 40 cm. (12 by 16 in.) in size. The camera and
the paper-holder are mounted on a single frame, which is supported by
springs on four light masonry columns. In consequence of this arrange-
ment the tremors produced by the passage of railway trains and trolley-
cars affect the negative, the lens, and the paper simultaneously and to the
same degree, and therefore do not diminish the sharpness of the repro-
duction. Another enlarging camera, sliding on rails, and provided with
a lens of 12 in. focus, is used for the reproduction of drawings, measuring
12 by 16 in. The same apparatus, with the addition of two arc-lamps
and a series of screens, is employed for instructing the future engineer
in the methods of photo-engraving.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. 111.

Fig. 1;

Fig. •>

Fig. 3.

Fig. 4.

io face p. 105.]'

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 10.~>

Edee, J. M. — Jabrbuch fur Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik.

[The " Separat-abdruk " from the above summarizes with its usual com-
pleteness the most important progress made during the year.]

Halle : Wilhelm Kuapp.

Linder, P. — Mikro-photographische Aufnahmen von lebenden Objekten in der
Rune und in der Bewegung. Muschau, 1910, p. 787.

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Interference Phenomena in Polarized Light.* -- These three
volumes, l>y the late Hans Hauswaldt. together form the most com-
plete black-and-white photographic record of polarization phenomena
that has ever been produced, and which it is very unlikely will ever be
surpassed. The work has been done with characteristic German
thoroughness. Neither brains, time, nor money have been spared.
This statement will be understood when it is remembered that the
various crystal sections used were prepared by Steeg and Reuter, the
apparatus employed was made by Carl Zeiss, and the description of the
same was written by Siedentopf, of ultra-microscope fame.

The first volume consists of some thirty-three full-sized autotypes
showing the stanroscopie figures produced by plates of various thick-
nesses, and cut at different obliquities to the axis, in white ami sodium
light, of such typical uniaxial crystals as calcspar, nitrate of soda,
apatite, zircon, quartz (including amethyst), and such biaxial crystals as
arragonite, mica, gypsum, topaz, and sugar.

The illustration given shows one of these plates. Fig. 1, pi. III., is
the figure giveu by a plate of apatite, cut normal to the axis of the crystal,
in sodium light and between crossed nicols ; whilst tig. 2, pi. III., shows
the same plate combined with a quarter-wave mica, to show the test for
negative crystals. Figs. 3 and 4, pi. III., show similarly the figures giveu
by a plate of zircon — a positive crystal.

The second volume, containing eighty plates, is a very interesting
one. It gives, in the first place, the different figures obtained in con-
vergent sodium light — the X.A.'s employed being O'GSG, 1"168, and
1'70 — in such crystals as calcspar, topaz, gypsum, etc. These figures
are followed by others showing the effect of using practically mono-
chromatic lights of different wave-lengths in calcspar and brookite.
The mica combinations of Rensch and Xorrenberg, the spectrum
analysis of the colours produced by double refraction, and the figures
produced by various shapes of glass, stressed in different ways, are finally
dealt with.

The third volume, of seventy-two plates, deals largely with the
phenomena produced by circularly polarized light, twin crystals, etc.

Enough has been said to indicate the complete nature of the work
done by Hauswaldt. This, as will be seen, is not so remarkable for the
originality of the problem, attacked as it is for the thoroughness with
which work so often attempted by others has been done. Indeed, until
colour-photography becomes practical for this class of work, it would be
labour in vain for anyone to attempt to rival the work of Hauswaldt.

* Interferenz-Erscheinungen an doppeltbrechenden Krystallplatten im kon-
vergenten polarisirten Licht. By Dr. Hans Hauswaldt. Magdeburg, 1902 (33 pis.) ;
Op. cit., 1904 (66 pis.) ; Op. cit., 1907 (80 pis.).

L06 SUMMAEY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

No first class text-book dealing with the subject is, in our opinion,
likely to be published during the next half-century which does not draw
up' hi these rich store-houses of illustrations.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Sensibility of the Eye to Variations of Wave-length in the
Yellow Region of the Spectrum.* — From observations on his own
vision, Rayleigh concludes that the distinction in colour of the two
D lines can be perceived if favourably presented to the eye.

Quekett Microscopical Club. — The -470th Ordinary Meeting was
held on January 24, the President, Professor E. A. Minchin, M.A. F.Z.S.,
in the Chair. From particulars supplied by Mr. F. J. Keeley, of
Philadelphia, "who possesses a mount labelled " Navicula amicii, Florence,
Italy — from Professor Amici to C. A. Spencer," Mr. Nelson considers
the much-disputed Amician test to be certainly identical writh what he
terms the "English rhomboides" | Mr. C. F. Rousselet, F.R.M.S., de-
scribed and exhibited three new species of Rotifer. These are Anurse-
opsis navicula sp.n., from central Ceylon, a very small species, lorica 92 /a ;
Brachionus satanicus sp. n., from Devil's Lake, North Dakota, U.S.A. ;
and B. havaniensis sp. n., from Illinois River, near Havana. Mr. R. T.
Lewis, F.R.M.S., read a note " On the Larva of Mantispa." The dif-
ferences between mature specimens of the Mantidse family and those of
sub-family Mantispides are not very obvious to the casual observer.
Perhaps the most noticeable difference is in the life-history of the larvae
of the two groups. In Mantis, on emerging the young insects closely
resemble the adult form, except as to size, colour, and absence of wings.
In Mantispa the emerging larva? bear not the slightest resemblance to the
perfect insect. They are only about 1 mm. in length ; have two simple
eyes ; are armed with apparent mandibles ; have 3-jointed antenna? and
7-jointed palpi ; the six legs are of equal size, and are terminated by a
hollow trumpet-shaped appendage instead of the usual claws. On leav-
ing the egg the larva bores its way into the ovisac of a spider and feeds
upon the eggs or young until the second ecdysis. In the subsequent
stage it becomes a helpless, fleshy grub, and spins a cocoon. Emerging
from this it begins to resemble the perfect insect, but has only rudi-
mentary wings, and not until two more moults does it become a mature
Neuropterous Mantispa. Mr. H. Gunnery, of Acomb, York, exhibited
a number of preparations for the Microscope, mostly botanical sections,
and a series of lantern slides, mostly photomicrographs of various stages
of nuclear division in Lilium. The Microscopes used were kindly lent
by Messrs. C. Baker.

Abney, Sir W. df. W. — Colour-blindness and the Trichromatic Theory of Colour
Vision. Parts i. and ii.

[Part i. treats of the relation of complete, and Part ii. of incomplete, colour-
blindness to the trichromatic theory of colour vision.]

Proc. Roy. Soc, Series A, lxxxiii.-lxxxiv. (1910) pp. 462-74 and 449-64.

Blake sley, T. H. — A Means of Measuring the Apparent Diameter of the Pupil
of the Eye in very feeble Light. Phil. Mag., Dec. 1910.

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series A (1910) pp. 464-8.

t See Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, xi. (1910) p. 95.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 107

B. Technique.*
(1) Collecting- Objects, including: Culture Processes.

Cultivation of Human and Bovine Tubercle Bacilli, f-- W. K.
Park and 0. Krumwiede, who have been investigating the relative
importance of the bovine and human types of tubercle bacilli in the
different forms of human tuberculosis, state that all cultures were iso
lated by means of the guinea-pig, and finding that egg-media were
eminently successful, used them in the following two combinations : (1)
Dorset's medium, the whole egg mixed with 10 p.c. water ; (2) Lubenau's
medium. 10 eggs mixed with 20o c.cm. of glycerin-bouillon. It was
found that the human virus grew better from the start on the glycerin-
egg medium, while the bovine variety was inhibited. They arrive at
the following general conclusions : (1) All cultures growing luxuriantly
on glycerin-egg from the start are of the human type. (2) All cultures
growing sparsely (or even not at all) on glycerin-egg in the first few
generations are of the bovine type.

Method of Isolating and Growing the Lepra Bacillus of Man.i
F. W- Twort started from the idea that, as there may be a close relation-
ship between tubercle and leprosy, the leprosy bacillus might be culti-
vated on media to which tubercle bacilli had been added. Accordingly*,
pure cultivations of tubercle were obtained, and the bacilli were ground
up with glycerin and saline, and having been steamed for half an hour
were added to the yolk and white of new laid eggs in the following
proportions : Eggs 75 parts, 8 p.c. sodium chloride 25 parts, tubercle
bacilli 1 p.c, glycerin 5 p.c. or less. The medium was placed in test
tubes, heated to 60° C. for 1 hour : on the following morning incubated
at 38° C. for 0 hours, and again heated in a water bath at 60° C. for
1 hour, and set in slopes at 85° C.

The ericolinized nasal discharge of a leper § was inoculated into this
medium, the tubes being capped with rubber, and incubated at 38° C.
After 2-1 hours the medium absorbed a quantity of the ericolin, so that
the material was lifted off with a platinum loop and rubbed over fresh
tubes. The bacilli grew and were subcultured in pure growth. The
bacilli were fairly long-headed rods, and quite acid-fast. The growth at
first was extremely slow, and only evident to the naked eye after about
six weeks as a colourless film along the needle track.

Artificial Cultivation of Animal Tissues. |j — M. T. Burrows and
A. Carrel give, in a series of communications, an account of their experi-
ments, which show that portions of various animal tissues can be removed
from their natural environment and cultivated in an artificial medium

* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses ; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes ;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservation fluids, etc. ;
(6) Miscellaneous.

t Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Ref., xlvii. (1910) pp. 673-80.

X Proc. Roy. Soc, lxXxiii. (1910) pp. 156-8.

§ For the Ericolin method see this Journal, 1909, p. 526.

|i C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 291-4, 298-301, 328-34, 365-8.

108 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

at 39° C. This medium is composed of plasma derived from the animal
or the parent of the animal, from which the culture material is to be
obtained, but no particulars of its preparation arc given.

In the first communication, Burrows describes Ins experiments with
chick embryos. The myosornes, neural tube, heart and epithelium were
dissected upon the warm stage of a binocular Microscope at a tempera-
ture of 39° C. The tissues were then kept in plasma in a sealed
chamber at this temperature. Mesenchymatous cells began to grow and
multiply after an interval of 2 to 12 hours. Long nerve-fibres developed
in 3 or 4 hours. The heart continued to beat for 8 hours, and from
portions of exposed surface of heart-muscle grew mesenchymatous cells
and muscular cells which contracted ;it the same rhythm as that of the
adjoining heart. From the central nervous system cultivations were
also made, which grew more slowly.

Further communications deal with the cultivation of adult tissues.
The authors have been successful in obtaining growth with artificial
cultures of conjunctiva, cartilage, bone-marrow, peritoneum, vascular
endothelium, kidney, thyroid, suprarenal, ovary, and lymphatic glands.
The abundance and rapidity of growth vary according to the nature of
the tissue, the age of the animal, and a number of other factors. The
material was obtained from dogs and cats. In cultivations of thyroid
from a kitten a few hours old, growth was observed within 12 hours.
Cartilage, conjunctiva, and peritoneum grew more slowly. The begin-
nings of growth were marked by the appearance of fine granulations at
the periphery and upon the upper surface. Each organ produced two
types of cell — the connective-tissue cell and the differentiated cell.
Detailed accounts are given of the cultivation of renal tissue, spleen,
and bone-marrow. With the thyroid gland, the authors have succeeded
in producing secondary and tertiary subcultures.

Further, from sarcoma in the chick and in man, cultures have been
obtained. These grew even more rapidly than normal tissues in arti-
ficial culture. By means of continuous observations, the process of
multiplication of sarcoma cells in vitro has been observed.

J. Jolly,* criticising the above research, considers that the authors
have only demonstrated the survival of animal tissues, a phenomenon
already established by previous researches. He is doubtful as to
whether any true cultures have been obtained, and even regards some of
the phenomena described as in reality necrobiotic changes.

Modified Method of Isolating Typhoid and Paratyphoid Bacilli. |
0. Mayer has made extensive use of a modification of the Lentz-Tietz
method. Six loopfuls of the fasces to be investigated were spread on a
malachite green agar plate, and then the same glass spreader was rubbed
over three large plates of lactose-litmus-agar or fuchsin-agar. The
malachite green plate was incubated for 24 hours at 37°, the other plates
for 48 hours at 30° C. After this incubation, the growth upon the mala-
chite green plate was washed off with a small quantity of saline. This
emulsion was allowed to stand for five minutes, and then one loopful was

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910), pp. 470-3.

t Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lvi. (1910) pp, 552-75.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 109

plated upon lactose-litmus-agar or upon fuchsin-agar. The author found
that these organisms were ofteu recovered from the malachite green plate
by this means, when a negative result was obtained from the plates
directly inoculated. He emphasized two points : firstly, that the emul-
sion on the malachite green plate should not be shaken, as this permits
less motile and less easily detached organisms to be taken up ; and,
secondly, that the malachite green (Hochst 120) should be fresh or
kept in an ice chest.

The author concludes that this method is a necessary adjunct to the
method of simple plating, and gives a better chance of finding the
organisms when they are scarce. The greater the bulk of fajces plated,
the more valuable the results obtained.

New Method for Differentiation of Bacteria.* — L. S. Dudgeon,
I>. X. Panton, and H. A. F. Wilson have made a series of observations
upon the influence of bacterial extracts upon phagocytosis. These
extracts were prepared by freezing and thawing alternately thick bacterial
pastes, so that the organisms became disintegrated. By dividing phago-
cytosis experiments into stages and, in the first place, incubating extract
and leucocytes, extract and bacteria, or extract and serum, and then
adding the third component and again incubating, it was shown that the
specific action of the extract was upon the serum ; but it was also found
that this action was not directly related to absorption of complement.
The diagnostic value rests upon the observation that an extract will
remove from a serum with which it has been incubated almost all the
homologous opsonin. Thus if serum after incubation with typhoid
extract lie added to leucocytes and typhoid bacilli and incubated, no
phagocytosis will occur ; while, on the other hand, phagocytosis of
another organism, such as Bacillus achard, i not much diminished.

Rapid Method of Identifying Bacillus coli.f— F. Domergue and
R. Legendres give an account of their method for determining the
presence of this organism in samples of water or shellfish. Tubes of
nutrient broth are prepared, and, after sterilization, there are added to
each tube fifteen drops of a solution containing 0*5 p.c. of neutral red
and 5 p.c. of phenol. The tube is then inoculated with material, and
placed within a large thick glass tube containing a few cubic centimetres
of water and tablets of caustic soda and pyrogallic acid. The outer tube
is now hermetically sealed, and in a few moments oxygen and carbon-
dioxide arc completely absorbed. After incubation at 12° C. for 21 or
48 hours the culture is examined, and the presence of Barillas coli is
indicated by the canary-yellow colour of the medium, green fluorescence,
and the production on the surface of gas-bubbles. The high incubation
temperature and the anaerobiosis are important agencies for the selection

Of B. roll.

(2) Preparing Objects-
Examining the Salivary Glands of Ticks. i — M. Elmassian dissected
out the salivary glands in saline water by Christophers' method and then

* Proc. Roy. Soc, lxxxiii. B (1910) pp. 33-7.
t Comptes'Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 1401-3.
, X Arch. Zool. Exper. et Gen., xlv. (1910) pp. 379-419 (2 pis).

110 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARI HES RELATING TO

fixed them. The most satisfactory fixative was Orth'a liquid, to which a
little acetic acid was added. Paraffin sections were stained with Heiden-
hairi's Lron-haematoxylin, Delafield's hematoxylin (3 p.c. in E«0) for
24 hours and then differentiated with absolute alcohol. The methods of
Benda and of Mann were also used, as well as the well-known tolnidin-
Itlue and orange G ; the action of the latter is uncertain.

Methods of Studying Rotifera.* — G. Hirschfelder gives an account
of the technique employed in a study of this class. The examination
of living specimens was facilitated by the use of a 1 : 50,000 neutral
red solution. The animal, in a drop of this fluid, was placed on a slide,
and a coverslip with wax feet laid over it. Sufficient pressure was
applied to the slip to immobilise the animal without destroying it.

In order to obtain satisfactory dead specimens, it is necessary, in
the first place, so to narcotise the animal that it dies fully expanded.
The object is put in a vessel containing 1*5 c cm. of water, and to this
are added two or three drops of a cocaine solution. Rousselet's mixture —
cocaine hydrochloride, 2 p.c, 3 parts ; alcohol, 90 p.c, 1 part ; water.
6 parts — is a very suitable solution. Care should be taken not to shake
the specimen. After about a quarter of an hour, the creature comes to
rest, and a drop of 1 p.c. osmic acid is added. Ten minutes later the
specimen is transferred to distilled water ; it is left in distilled water
about five hours, and then transferred to 2 p.c. formalin. The whole
specimen may be mounted without further treatment between two slips
separated by wax feet, the margins being sealed with paraffin.

For sections, the narcotised animal may be treated with a mixture of
picric and chromic acids, followed by warm water and rising alcohols.
Ehrlich's liEematoxylin followed by orange G form the best staining
system. Picric and acetic acids may also be used as fixing fluid.

Method of Studying Phagocytosis of Erythrocytes by Endothelial
Cells. f — W. O. Meek obtained endothelial cells from ascitic fluid from
cases of hepatic cirrhosis. The fluid was passed straight from the
siphoning tube in the sterile normal saline containing 0 " 85 p.c. of sodium
citrate. The cells obtained by centrifugalizing were washed in normal
saline, the mass of cells being gently broken up between each washing
with a platinum wire. A suitable emulsion in saline was then prepared.
The cells were used as soon as possible after removal from the body.

The erythrocytes employed consisted of l'O p.c. suspensions in
normal saline of washed red cells from a normal man and various
patients. The sera were obtained from normal persons and from a
number of hospital patients.

Serum, erythrocytes, and endothelial cells were mixed in small
lengths of glass tubing sealed at one end. The open end was plugged
with sealing-wax, and the tubes incubated in a vertical position at 37° C.
for 30 minutes. The erythrocytes and cells then fall to the bottom of
the column, and a film is made containing a minimum of fluid. The
Microscope was used to ascertain whether agglutination of red cells had
occurred.

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1910) pp. 211-17.
t Lancet, 1910, ii. p. 1267.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. Ill

Simple Shaker.* — K. Poppe describes a new type of shaker, worked
by a water turbine (fig. lfi). The rockers a b, ab, which work round
the axes a, a', support a carriage, the base of which is hinged to a con-
necting rod attached excentrically to the revolving wheel. On the
platform c can be placed a tray (not illustrated) for carrying test-tubes
horizontally. The upper stage, for carrying flasks, is attached by means

Fig. 16.

of wing screws. The flasks are kept in position by means of a movable
plate d. The whole apparatus is small enough to go into a medium-sized
incubator.

Fixation and Embedding of Embryological Material, f —
H. Schridde, from a long experience, finds that Orth's mixture of
Miiller's fluid and formalin (I) : 1) is the best fixative for the purpose.
The fluid should be warm. Small objects should remain at a tempera-
ture of 36° in the mixture for 1 to (5 hours. Large specimens require
from 12 to 24 hours. On removal the preparations are placed in
running water for from 3 to 12 hours, and then transferred to 50 p.c.
alcohol. When required for embedding they are passed through up-
graded alcohols to absolute alcohol, after which they are transferred to
cedar-wood oil, wherein they remain until they are quite clear. After
this the preparations are immersed in xylol or toluol for 20 to 30
minutes, according to size. This procedure is followed by paraffin
m.p. 42°-44°: small objects 15 to 30 minutes, the larger one, 30 to 60
minutes. After this they are transferred to paraffin m.p. 51°-56°,- in
which they remain for f to 1 hour. For large objects an intermediate

* Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt., Orig., lv. (1910) pp. 527-8.
t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 360-5.

1 L2

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

stage with paraffiu m.p. 48°-50 is advisable. The objects are em-
bedded in a metal frame placed on a warm glass plate, and when the
surface of the paraffin is set the plate is at once placed in cold water.

Poso, P. — Tiber Fixierung- und Einbettung von Placenta und Uterus des Menschen.

Zeitschr. wiss Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 353-9.

(3) Cutting, including- Embedding- and Microtomes.

Apparatus for Rolling Wax Plates.* — 0. Berner describes an
apparatus (fig. 17) by means of which wax plates of any required
thickness can be rolled for reconstruction work. It consists of an iron
plate, a heater, a steel roller, and a special heater for the roller. The
iron plate, of which the dimensions are 60 x 40 cm., is supported upon

Fig. 17.

four metal feet, provided with screws for adjusting the level. This
plate carries the wax. Along the long sides of the plate are guide-
ridges, along which the rolling-pin travels. Screws, M, adjust the height
of these guide-ridges, and so determine the thickness of the plate.
Underneath the plate is a copper water-vessel, provided with a thermo-
meter, T. This vessel is heated by a Bunsen burner ; it is filled through
the tube a, emptied through the tube b. The rolling-pin is a solid steel

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 44-7.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

113

bar, grooved to fit the guide-flanges. It is raised to the required tem-
perature by means of the heater shown in fig. 18. Before -use, the
plate is moistened with turpentine. The most convenient temperatures
are about 52° C. for the plate, and 100° C. for the roller.

Fig. 18.

Manipulation of Paraffin Sections.* — J. T.Wilson hastens the setting
of paraffin blocks by using a metal plate on the floor of the embedding
chamber, and placing this on a freezing microtome.

For floating out paraffin sections placed on top of the water-bath he
employs a mercury surface as an artificial horizon. On the top of the
bath is placed a shallow glass tray filled to a depth of 6 or 7 mm. with
mercury. On this surface the slides may be placed until the sections
are completely flattened.

For celloidin-paraffin sections a much deeper tray or box is required ;
this is covered with an accurately fitting lid. When the slides are placed
on the mercury surface a small pledget of cotton-wool soaked in ether is
placed in one corner, and then the lid is put on.

For passing blocks of tissue through various fluids he uses short seg-
ments of wide glass tubing 18 to 30 mm. in diameter ; one end is closed
with mosquito netting, or some fine material, while the other is plugged
with a perforated cork ; the cork must be bulky enough to float the
whole in the fluid.

Tetrander Microtome.! — P. Mayer describes this instrument, which
owes its name to the number of persons who co-operated in the design.

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 232-4.
t Tom. cit., pp. 52-62.

Feb. 15th, 1011

114 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

In principle it is a sliding microtome, in which the object moves and the
razor remains stationary. The razor is held firmly in a massive metal

OS

6

bar, upon which, as can be seen in the diagram, there are a number of
screws for controlling the inclination and adjustments of the cutting

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

115

edge. Figs. 19 and 20 illustrate two models, which differ principally
in the design of this mechanism for holding the razor. The movement
to and fro of the microtome-stage is controlled by the lever g. The

o

o

l-t

thickness of sections is determined by the adjustment of the lever h,
which can be moved along the index shown in the lower part of fig. 19.
The substage mechanism also allows of free movement of the stage up
and down, so as to bring the block into the proper position for cutting.

I 2

116 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

New Method of making Celloidin Serial Sections.* — F. Maier cuts
celloidin sections under 75 p.c. alcohol and transfers them to slides ;
there should be a margin of celloidin outside the tissue of from 0*25 to
0 • 5 cm. The sections are pressed firmly down on the slide with blotting
paper. Over the series is poured a mixture of oil of cloves 1 part, and
absolute alcohol 9 parts ; this is allowed to remain until the celloidin is
soft, i.e. from 15 to 30 seconds ; the superfluous fluid is poured off, and
then the slide is laid flat for a while in order to let the sections get fixed.
Then a mixture of ether and alcohol is poured over the series in order to
remove all traces of oil of cloves ; this is removed by evaporation merely.
After 15 to 30 seconds sulphide of carbon is poured over the series and
allowed to act for 10 to 15 minutes. All traces of the carbon sulphide
are removed by means of 96 p.c. alcohol changed more than once. After
this, down-graded alcohols to water, in order that staining, etc., may be
carried out in the usual way.

The object of this technique is to make sections of any thickness
stick to the slide.

Utilizing Organized Structures as Directing Marks for Plastic
Reconstruction. | — J. T. Wilson described over ten years ago J a system
for obtaining directing marks in microscopical sections for the purposes
of plastic reconstruction. In his new system he still builds up an em-
bedding chamber on a base-plate, but has discarded the Naples bars, and
has adopted an apparatus the dimensions of the component parts of which
may be varied as desired.

The base of the embedding chamber is formed by a brass plate a
(figs. 21 and 22), through which are bored two pairs of cylindrical holes b,
each about 3 mm. in diameter. The ends of the embedding chamber
are formed by rectangular brass plates c, set up upon the base-plate ;
they are held in position by projecting dowel pins d, which fit into the
holes in the base-plate. The lower end of each end-plate is provided
with two socket holes e. These fit over two pins /, which project 2 to
3 mm. up from the base-plate. The calibre of the pins is 1 mm. or less,
and the distance between them must be exactly the same at either end,
2 to 3 mm.

In order to carry out the nerve-strand method of embedding, a fila-
ment is gently stretched around the two pairs of pins, and the filament
must be taut but not strained. The loose ends should be crossed on the
plate at one end and held there in position, while the corresponding end-
plate is placed in position and its dowel pins firmly pressed home ; the
nerve -filament is thus securely clamped. The second end-plate is simi-
larly treated. This done it will be found that the two parallel nerve-
filaments are in contact with the surface of the base-plate. Two pieces
of wire (common pins decapitated) are inserted between the surface of
the base-plate and the nerve-strands, close to the end-plates. The em-
bedding chamber is then completed by the addition of the special side-

* Miinchen. med. Wochenschr., lvii. (1910) pp. 637-8, through Zeitschr. wiss.
Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 385-7.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 227-32 (2 figs.).
j See this Journal, 1900, p. 735.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

117

walls g ; the sloping sides tend to minimize the pitting of the paraffin
block.

An alternate method of utilizing organized structures so as to provide
directing marks in paraffin blocks is as follows : — A glass plate is smeared
evenly with a minimum of glycerin. A slab of bulk-stained tissue some
50 microns thick is deposited on the plate, some water is run under it,

Fig. 21.

and the plate is gently heated ; the water is drained off and the section
allowed to dry on. When required for reconstructive purposes, embed-
ding bars are set up on the plate, the paraffin section forming the floor.
The object is then embedded in the usual way, so that eventually a block

. Fig. 22.

with one covered surface is obtained. This face is then grooved with a
" Ritzer." No further treatment is required, and the block is cut in the
usual way, taking precautions to ensure that the grooves made by the
" Ritzer " shall be perpendicular to jfche cutting plane.

(4) Staining- and Injecting-.

Distinguishing Dead from Living Leucocytes.* — C. Achard finds
that when leucocytes are treated with neutral red, the living are un-
coloured or contain red-stained and intra-protoplasmic vacuoles or
granulations ; the nuclei of dead leucocytes stain red-brown, and there
is no intra-protoplasmic coloration. Two solutions are used, one is
normal saline with 6 per 1000 citrate of sodium, another is normal

* Brit. Med. Journ. (1910) ii. p. 1416.

118 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

saline with 1 per 1000 neutral red. Ten drops of each solution are
mixed in a tube, and then 1 drop of Mood, or 1-4 drops of the sediment
of a centrifuged exudate. The tube is incubated at 37° for 2<> minutes,
and then the liquid is examined in a glass cell and the living and dead
leucocytes separately enumerated.

New Method of Demonstrating Spirochteta pallida.* — J. T.
Lenartowicz and K. Potrzobowski give the following procedure : Per-
fectly clean slides are exposed to the vapour of 1,-2 p.c. osmic acid for
5 seconds ; the vaporized side is then covered with a smear of the
material to be examined ; the smear is at once fixed for 10 to 20 seconds
with osmic acid vapour, and when quite dry.is stained for \ to 1 minute
with the Ziehl-Neelsen carbol-fuchsin tubercle stain. This done, the
preparation is washed with water, dried and examined under an oil-
immersion. It is important to notice that the exposure to the osmic
acid vapour should not exceed the time given above. In successful
preparations the ground is stained red, and upon this Spirochseta pallida
stands out as an unstained appearance ; other bodies, such as S. refringens,
red corpuscles and bacteria, stain well ; hence, according to the authors,
this procedure not only facilitates the search for 8. pallida, but also
serves for a differential diagnosis. The method is also useful for
detecting flagella.

Use of Picramic Acid for Staining.f — A. Frohlich, after alluding
to the ill qualities of picric acid, recommends as substitute picramic acid,
and gives the following procedure : (1) Stain in hsemalum, wash in tap
water, or in faintly ammoniacal distilled water until blue. Transfer to
saturated alcoholic solution of picramic acid for 3 to 5 minutes or longer.
Wash quickly in absolute alcohol. Next immerse in saturated alcoholic
solution of chromotrop 2 R or 6 B (Hochst) for | to 2 minutes until the
sections begin to turn red. Lastly, a short wash in absolute alcohol,
xylol -alcohol, xylol-balsam.

Combined Staining Methods for Tubercle bacilli.^ — S. Hatano
gives two methods for the better staining of tubercle bacilli : (1) Stain
with warm carbol-fuchsin for 5 minutes ; wash ; 25 p.c. sulphuric acid
for 10 to 30 seconds : 75 p.c. alcohol until all the colour has disappeared.
Stain with methylen-blue solution for 2 minutes and wash. Then
Gram's stain. In the second method the procedure is reversed.

Staining in bulk with Hematoxylin^ — ('. Morel and Bassal fix
in a mixture the following solutions: A. Bichromate of potassium 2,
water 100. B. Formol 10, acetic acid 10, water .So. for 8 to 20 hours.
The pieces are thoroughly washed in running water for 24 hours, and
then immersed for 1 day in 95 p.c. alcohol. The pieces are then placed in
a freshly made mixture of the two following solutions : I. Hematoxylin
1 grm., 1)5 p.c. alcohol lOOc.cm. II. Perchloride of iron 2 c.cm. ; hydro-

* Centralbl. Bakt., lvi. (1910) pp. 18G-91 (1 fig.),
t Zeitscbr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 549-52.

% Berlin Klin. Wocbenscbr., xlvi. (1909) pp. 1694-5, through Zeitscbr. wiss.
Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) p. 313.

§ Journ. Anat. et Physiol., xlv. (1909) pp. 632-3.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 119

chloric acid 1 c.cm. ; 4 p.c. aqueous solution of copper acetate 1 can. ;
water 95 c.cm. After an immersion of from 24 to 48 hours the pieces
are removed to a mixture of equal parts of alcohol and distilled, and, if
necessary, afterwards to running water. Dehydration in absolute alcohol
(24 hours) ; aceton 24 hours ; paraffin 6 to 8 hours. Sections are stuck
on with 0*1 p.c. gelatin with a few drops of formalin added.

Staining- the Internal Network in Nerve-cells.* — R. Collin and
M. Lucien fixed the material in the following mixture : 20 p.c. formalin
30 ; 1 p.c. solution of arsenious acid 30 ; % p.c. alcohol 30. After 6 to 8
hours the pieces are transferred to ^ p.c. silver nitrate solution for 13
hours to a few days. After a wash in distilled water they are immersed
in the following mixture : hydroquinone 20, anhydrous sulphate of
sodium 5, formalin 50, distilled water 1000. The pieces are next washed,
hardened, and embedded preferably in celloidin. The sections are then
gold-stained by means of the following solutions, mixed immediately
before use. A. Hyposulphite of sodium 30, ammonium sulphocyanate
30, distilled water 1000. B. Gold chloride 1, distilled water 100. In
this the sections remain until they assume a grey hue. Though the
following steps are not indispensable, they bring out the network better.
After washing in distilled water the sections are treated with the
following mixture : potassium permanganate 0*5, sulphuric acid 1, dis-
tilled water 1000. Then wash thoroughly in 1 p.c. oxalic acid and
afterwards in distilled water. Stain in carmalum, wash, dehydrate, and
clear up.

New Methods of Demonstrating Plasmodes.f — S. Balint fixed the
material in 2 p.c. formalin and then cut sections, which were preserved,
while awaiting further treatment, in 4 p.c. formalin. The sections are
stained with an iodine solution made by dissolving the iodine in 2 p.c.
formalin and then adding 25 p.c. sulphuric acid. While the sections
are staining, a few drops of 4 p.c. formalin, saturated with iodine, are
added : staining is completed in from 2 to 3 hours. The preparation may
be mounted in glycerin or balsam, but unfortunately the finer details do
not last longer than six months. Another method which gives good
results consists in staining sections, which have been fixed in formalin
and preserved in alcohol, or subsequently further fixed with aqueous or
alcoholic sublimate, with the following solution : anilin oil 3 c.cm., acid-
fuchsin 20 grm., H20 200 c.cm. After treatment with the staining
solution for 10 to 20 minutes, they are washed out with a saturated
alcoholic solution of picric acid, which has been diluted with 100 c.cm.
distilled water to every 50 c.cm. Then follow 96 p.c. alcohol, benzol-
alcohol, benzol (in each of which a little picric acid is dissolved), benzol-
balsam.

Staining Celloidin Sections of Nervous Tissue by the Iron-
hsematoxylin Method. $ — Marie Loyez fixes the material in 10 p.c.
formalin for eight days or longer ; the pieces are carried through in the

* C.R. Assoc. Anatomistes, 1909, pp. 238-44 (7 figs.), through Zeitschr. wiss*
Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 294-5.

t Zeitschr. wiBs. Mikrosk, xxxii. (1910) pp. 243-5.
X C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 311-13.

120 SUMMARY 01 CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

usual way, and the celloidiu sections are treated as follows. They are
first mordanted with 4 p.c. iron-alum for 24 hours, and then rapidly
washed. Next they are stained with Weigert's hematoxylin (hfemato-
xylin 1 grm., alcohol 10 c.cm., water 90 c.cm., saturated solution of
lithium carbonate 2 c.cm.), for 24 hours : the staining at 37° in an
incubator is advisable, but not indispensable. After a wash in water
the sections are differentiated in two stages ; first with 4 p.c. iron-alum
until the grey substance begins to clear up, and then, after a careful
washing, in Weigert's solution (borax 2 p.c, ferricyanide of potassium
2*5 p.c). They are next washed in ammonia water, and after this
washed again in water for a long time : finally they are passed through
ascending alcohols to xylol and balsam.

J. Nageotte * remarks that staining the celloidiu sections with
hfematein, and decolorizing with the ferricyanide solution, gives results
equally good.

Staining the Medullary Sheath in Brain-sections.| — E. Potter
cuts sections of brain which have been fixed in 10 p.c. formalin, with the
Reichert large microtome. The sections, about 15 mm. thick, are then
placed in Weigert's fluorchrom-copper mordanting fluid for 14 days at
room temperature. They are then dehydrated in upgraded alcohols
(70°, 80°, 96°, 100°, 2 days each). Next ether-alcohol (aa) for 2 days,
as a preparatory for thin celloidin (2 days) ; this is followed by celloidin
of syrupy consistence. To render the thick celloidin more suitable for
sectioning it is advised to add 4 drops of cedar-wood oil to every 20 c.cm.
The celloidin is then allowed to inspissate, and when sufficiently thick-
ened the material is cut into blocks and preserved in 70 p.c. alcohol.
The sections are made with an immersion-microtome, and preserved, if
necessary, in 70 p.c. alcohol ; when required for staining they are placed
between two sheets of acid-free tissue paper. They are then immersed
in Weigert's iron stain without the hydrochloric acid for 2h to 3 hours.
On removal they are treated with Lustgarten's fluid, which makes the
cortex assume a dark-brown hue, the medullary sheaths being black.
After this the sections are further differentiated with borax 2, ferri-
cyanide of potash 2, H20 100, until they assume a yellowish tinge. This
is followed by washing for several days in frequently changed water.
Then dehydration in upgraded alcohols, earbol-xylol, balsam.

(5) Mounting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc

Method of Preserving Plague Material.^ — 0. Broquet finds that if
the viscera of animals affected with or dead of plague be preserved in
20 p.c. glycerin the virus will retain its activity for 8 or 9 days, while
the addition of 2 p.c. carbonate of lime gives still more satisfactory results.

Bentley-Taylor Method of Mounting Mosquitos.§ — This method
is extremely simple and rapid. Twelve specimens can be mounted in

* C.R Soc. Biol. Paris, pp. 517-19.

t Zeitsckr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 238-42 (1 fig.).

t Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxiv. (1910) pp. 888-94.

§ Proc. Roy. Soc. Med., iv. (1910) med. sect., pp. 41-2.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 121

about 24 minutes, and few or none are ever spoiled in the process, which
is as follows :— 1. Prepare a solution of 1 p.c. celloidin in absolute alcohol.

2. A solution of celloidin (5 p.c.) in absolute alcohol of the consistence
known as "thick" in ordinary histological work. It is essential that
no ether be employed in the solution, as it makes the scales transparent.

3. Catch the mosquito. 4. Chloroform it. 5. When dead or narcotized,
place a drop of solution No. 1 — thin celloidin — on a cover-glass. 6.
Place the insect back downwards on the cover-glass. In the majority of
cases wings and legs spread themselves out in the orthodox exhibition
position. If they do not do so the solution remains fluid sufficiently
long in Bombay at a temperature of 85° F. to 1)0° F. for from 3 to 5
minutes to permit them to be adjusted with a needle. 7. When the
thin solution has become " tacky," to use the language of the motorist —
i.e., in about 8 or 10 minutes from the commencement of operations —
place a drop of the thick solution, No. 2, over the insect. 8. Invert
the cover-glass over a hollowed slide, to which it may be fixed by a ring
of balsam. The specimen is now complete, and in this condition both
ventral and dorsal surfaces can be examined under the Microscope.

If it be thought desirable to employ a white background, instead
of manoeuvre 8 proceed thus : — 8a. Suspend some oxide of zinc in
ordinary mounting Canada balsam. Shake or stir well immediately
before using ; fill the cell or hollow of the slide with this emulsion ;
invert the cover-glass with the mosquito, and press rather firmly into the
emulsion. 9. Clean off any of the emulsion that spreads beyond the
edge of the cover. Specimens prepared by this latter method will, of
course, display only one surface.

Celloidin in Microscopical Technique.* — L. Neumayer has found
that celluloid in plate form may be found useful as slides or coverslips.
The best material is practically as transparent as glass, and can be
obtained in any size and thickness. In this connexion it may be recalled
that mica and gelatin have also been used instead of glass. The inflam-
mability of celluloid must be taken into consideration ; in other respects
it seems that celluloid is a convenient substitute for vitreous plates.

Microscopical Examination of Foods and Drugs. — This work, by
H. G. Greenish,! is a practical introduction to the method adopted in
the microscopical examination of foods and drugs in the entire, crushed
and powdered states. It has deservedly reached a second edition.! Its
principal features remain unaltered, though certain revisions and addi-
tions have been made. Among these may be mentioned the chapter on
fibres, saffron, liquorice, calumba, etc. A chapter has been added on
the more commonly occurring adulterants of powdered foods and drugs.
A new section consists of a general scheme of examination which will
be found specially useful in the investigation of an unknown powder.

Drop-bottle for Preventing the Action of Air on Copper-oxide-
ammonia Solution. § — G. Herzog describes a drop-bottle which he has

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 234-8.

t London : J. and A. Churchill, 1910, xvii. and 386 pp. (209 illus.).

i See this Journal, 1903, p. 561.

§ Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 272-4 (1 fig.).

1 -M>

I .

SUMMARY OF ci'Klil'.NT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

devised for keeping copper-oxide-ammonia solution from the action of
air. This reagent, so important in testing the fibres of hemp and flax,
rapidly deteriorates, and under ordinary conditions is not permanent for
long. The bottle is made of brown glass, and, as will be seen in the
illustration (fig. 23), the neck is closed by a caoutchouc plug, in which
are two holes for the passage of glass tubes ; one of these dips into the
ammoniated copper solution, the other just ends below the stopper, its
outer extremity being fitted with a teat having a small perforation. The

copper solution is covered with a layer of paraffin oil. The same device
is used for several purposes in laboratories, but has not been exploited
for this special purpose before.

Simple Arrangement for Determining the Sinking-velocity of
Plankton Organisms.*— F. Krause was led to contrive his apparatus
by desire of pursuing the following investigations : " What influence
has body-form and body-magnitude of plankton-organisms on their
sinking-velocity ? How is the velocity of the same individual affected
by the viscosity of the medium ? How are such results affected by
various temperatures in the same water ? " His apparatus consists of
two parts — a receptacle for the organism, and an observation instru-
ment. The receptacle is formed out of a rectangular metal plate
65 mm. long, 85 mm. broad, and 2 5 mm. thick, whose middle part is
cut away so as to leave a rectangular notch 45 mm. long and 6 mm.

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 347-9 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, KTC. 123

broad. There is an arrangement for closing the front of the notch by
a large cover-glass, and the back is closed by a milk-glass scale, e.g. a
fragment of an old thermometer-scale. The notch thus forms a trough
of suitable shape, and its metal surroundings, being pivoted by two
screws on a suitable frame, materially assist in procuring a perpendicular
position, to which a circular level contributes. This frame is prolonged
into a tripod foot, and can be raised or lowered. The observation part
of the apparatus is one of Zeiss' Braus-Driihner preparation Microscopes,
and this is directed on to one of the divisions of the glass scale. When
the organism has reached this division a stop-watch is released, and the
time of reaching the next division recorded. The author hopes at some
future time to publish an account of his researches.

Metallography, etc.

Polymorphism of Zinc* — C. Benedicks has determined the electrical
resistance of samples of pure and commercial zinc, at small temperature
intervals, between 16° 0. and the melting-point. The existence of a
transformation-point at about 8-40° C, discovered by Le Chatelier, was
confirmed, and a similar point was found at about 170° C. The author
concludes that zinc is trimorphous, the a form being stable up to 170° C,
/? in the range 170° to 830° C, y from 330° to 41!) -4 C°. Abnormal
results were given by the impure samples.

Aluminium-calcium Alloys. f — From the results of determinations
of electro-chemical potential and electrical conductivity of a series of
aluminium-calcium alloys, J. M. Breckenridge deduces the existence of
the compound Al3Ca.

Alloys of Lithium.:}: — G. Masing and G. Tammann have studied the
binary systems of which the components are lithium and one of the
metals sodium, potassium, tin, cadmium, and magnesium. By using
very thin thermocouple wires and protecting tubes, it is possible to apply
the methods of thermal analysis to a few grams of material, and thus
to work out equilibrium diagrams of systems of metals which can be
obtained in a pure state only in small amounts. The original should be
consulted for the detailed results of the investigation.

Gold-magnesium Alloys. § — G. G. Urasow and R. Vogel explain
differences in the equilibrium diagrams obtained by them when working
independently. The existence of Au2Mgs is confirmed, but it is stable
only in the range 79(i°-71(i° C, breaking up into AuMg2 and AuMg3 at
the lower temperature.

Silver-cadmium Alloys. || — G. Bruni and E. Quercigh have deter-
mined the equilibrium diagram by means of cooling curves of 30 alloys.
The compounds AgCd and AgCd4 occur ; these form solid solutions with
silver, or cadmium, or each other, according to the composition of the
alloy.

* Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 531-7 (5 figs.).

+ Met. and Chem. Eng., viii. (1910) p. 349.

% Zeitschr. Anorg. Chem., lxvii. (1910) pp. 183-99 (5 figs.).

§ Tom. cit., pp. 442-7 (4 figs.). || Tom. cit., pp. 198-206 (3 figs.).

124 SUMMARY OF CUEEENT UESEAECHES RELATING TO

Silver-copper Alloys.* X. Kurnakow, X. Puschin, and X. Senkow-
sky have determined the electrical conductivity at 2'> , 50 . and 100° 0.
of 10 silver-cupper alloys before and after annealing. Hardness measure-
ments, by the Brinell method, confirm the results of the electrical
determinations, which indicate that the limits of solid solubility are
4 atomic p.c. silver in copper, and 9 atomic p.c. copper in silver.

Silver-sodium Alloys. t — E. Quercigh, by means of a thermal study
of twenty alloys melted in an atmosphere of nitrogen, has found that
silver and sodium are miscible in all proportions in the liquid state, that
no compound is formed, and that the single eutectic lies close to the
sodium end of the equilibrium diagram. The solid solution of sodium
in silver has the concentration limits 0 to 13 atomic p.c. sodium.

Ternary Alloys of Magnesium, Zinc, and Cadmium.J — G. Bruni,
C. Sandonnini, and E. Quercigh have investigated by thermal methods
the binary systems zinc-cadmium. zinc-MgZn2, and cadmium-MgZn2.
The compound MgZn2 is the only one occurring in the magnesium-zinc
system, and behaves like a simple metal in ternary alloys. Having
cleared up the doubtful points in the binary systems, the authors pro-
ceeded to study the ternary system, cadmium-zinc-MgZn2, as a portion
of the complete ternary system. Cooling curves were taken of 109 alloys
lying in fifteen vertical sections of the usual triangular diagram ; these
sections were parallel to the zinc-magnesium side of the triangle. The
ternary system examined has three binary eutectic lines meeting in a
ternary eutectic point at 250° C. and 73 atomic p.c. cadmium, 25 zinc,
2 magnesium.

Alloys of Copper, Antimony, and Bismuth. §— X. Parravano and
E. Yiviani, first investigating the binary systems, find that antimony
and bismuth appear to form a continuous series of solid solutions.
Antimony does not retain copper in solid solution, and copper does not
retain more than a minute quantity of antimony in solid solution. The
compound Cu3Sb melts without decomposition ; the ternary system is
therefore regarded as two systems, Cu-Cu3Sb-Bi and Cu3Sb-Sb-Bi. The
compound Cu3Sb and bismuth are only partly miscible in the liquid
state, and they do not form compounds or solid solutions. The general
form of the equilibrium diagram of the ternary system Cu3Sb-Sb-Bi is
discussed.

Heat-treatment of Bronze. || — E. Heyn and O. Bauer have inves-
tigated the unsatisfactory behaviour of some bronze bushes containing
98 p.c. copper and 7 p.c. tin, which were shown by hardness measurements
to be softer than good specimens having the same composition. Micro-
scopical examination revealed that the hard samples contained two con-
stituents, the soft samples only one. Heat-treatment experiments showed
that the soft condition and its corresponding structure were produced by

* Zeitschr. Anorg. Chem., lxviii. (1910) pp. 123-40 (4 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 301-6 (2 figs.). J Tom. cit., pp. 73-90 (8 figs.).

§ Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xix. 1 (1910) pp. 835-40 ; xix. 2 (1910) pp. 69-75,
through Journ. Chem. Soc, xcviii. (1910) pp. 779, 852.

|| Mitt. Kgl. Materialpriifungsamt, xxviii. (1910) pp. 344-8, through Journ. Soc.
Chem. Ind., xxix. (1910) p. 1110.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 125

slow cooling between 1030° and 855° C, while the hard condition and
duplex structure resulted from rapid cooling through this interval.

Metallic Silicides.* — L. Baraduc-Muller, in the course of an ex-
tended investigation of the action of silicon carbide on metallic oxides
at high temperatures, and of the properties of the metallic silicides pro-
duced, has studied the metallography of these bodies. Two etching
reagents were used : (1) commercial hydrofluoric acid, to which was added
twice its volume of alcohol, and an amount of water depending on the
rapidity of action required ; addition of water increases the activity of
the reagent ; (2) a preparation of aqua regia and ferric chloride. The
method of taking cooling curves is described, and some account of the
microstructure of alloys of silicon with numerous metals is given.

Impurities in Copper. f — F. Johnson summarizes the available in-
formation as to the effect of arsenic, lead, nickel, bismuth, cobalt, antimony,
tellurium, iron, tin, silver, sulphur, and oxygen occurring as impurities
in copper.

Solubility of Oxygen in Molten Silver.}— F.Gr. Donnan and T.W.A.
Shaw find that the concentration of oxygen in molten silver is propor-
tional to the square root of the oxygen-pressure over a wide range of
pressures. From this it is inferred that the oxygen is either physically
dissolved as atomic oxygen, or more probably exists in the form of dis-
solved silver monoxide.

Crystallography of the Iron-carbon System. § — A. Kroll has sought
to establish the relation existing between the crystallography and the
equilibrium diagram of the iron-carbon system. The main experimental
method employed consisted in heating polished sections in an atmosphere
of hydrogen or nitrogen ; the different structures resulting are identified
as the effects of the more or less sudden crystalline rearrangements taking
place at the thermal critical points. A crystallographical explanation of
the formation of troostite and of the precipitation of graphite is attempted.
Ordinary cementite appears to be hexagonal, but the carbide entering
into solution in y-iron is regular ; troostite is this solution-carbide
saturated with y-iron.

Iron-carbon Alloys. || — H. Liitke has investigated the effect of man-
ganese on the concentration at the eutectic temperature (1130° C. in the
iron-carbon system) of the saturated solid solution of cementite in y-iron.
Two series of alloys, containing respectively about 5 p.c. and 10 p.c. of
manganese, the carbon ranging from 1*5 to 4 p.c. in each series, were
examined thermally and microscopically. While in both series the cooling
curves indicated the first appearance of eutectic at 2 * 0 to 2 • 3 p.c. carbon,
the microscopical examination showed that 1 • 8 p.c. was the concentration
of the saturated mixed crystals. Manganese, therefore, appears to have
little influence on the carbon-concentration of the saturated solid solution.

* Rev. Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 657-834 (44 figs.).

t Met. and Chem. Eng., viii. (1910) pp. 570-5 (9. figs.).

j Journ. Soc. Chem. Ind., xxix. (1910) pp. 987-9 (1 fig.).

§ Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxi. (1910) pp. 304-402 (33 figs.).

|| Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 268-73 (7 figs.).

12G SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Transformation-point Curve y- to ft- or u-Iron.* — P. Gocrens and
H. Meyer give a summary of previous investigations dealing wifch the
positions of the critical points A3 and A2 in iron-carbon alloys, and
describe their own work on six alloys containing 0*16 to 0*78 p.c.
carbon, with about 0*23 p.c. manganese and 0*15 p.c. phosphorus.
Thin disks were heated to {)50°-li>00° C, cooled to a given temperature,
at which they were held for 15 minutes, then quenched in water and
microscopically examined. With each series a number of quenchings at
temperatures ascending by steps of 10° C. were performed. For each
alloy the mean of the two quenching temperatures which gave,
respectively, martensite + a little ferrite, and pure martensite, was
taken as the transformation point. The transformation temperature
falls from '.105° C. in the 0*16 p.c. carbon-steel to 855° C. in that
containing 0'54 p.c. In the alloys with higher carbon, the point was
not so definitely ascertained.

Influence of Silicon on the Maximum Solubility of Carbide of
Iron in y-Iron.f — C. Schols has taken cooling curves of thirty-one melts
classified in four series, containing respectively about 1 • 2, 1 •'">, 1 ■ 9, and
2*5 p.c. carbon, the silicon-content varying between 0 and 10 p.c. With
all carbon-concentrations the addition of silicon lowers the temperature
of commencing solidification, leaves the temperature of final solidifica-
tion constant at about 1120° C, and raises the temperature of pearlite
formation. Pearlite is no longer formed when silicon-content exceeds a
certain percentage, this limit being 5 ■ 6 p.c. for alloys containing 1 ■ 2 p.c.
carbon, and \ ' 5 p.c. for alloys containing 1 ■ 5 p.c. carbon. The eutectic
halt (1120° C.) appears at lowTer carbon concentrations as silicon-content
rises, indicating the diminished solubility of carbon in y-iron with in-
crease of silicon-content. Pieces of selected alloys were heated to 1140°C,
slowly cooled to 1120° C, and quenched after 10 minutes at 1120° C. The
microscopical examination of these specimens, together with the cooling
curves, enabled the author to ascertain the silicon-content necessary for
the formation of eutectic in alloys containing less than 2-2 p.c. carbon,
the saturation point of the solid solution of carbide of iron in y-iron
when no silicon is present. Eutectic occurred in the 1*2 p.c. carbon
alloy when more than 5" 6 p.c. silicon was present. Sodium picrate,
which coloured the eutectic brown in the quenched samples, was used
for etching, also nitric acid in amyl-alcohol.

Iron Sulphide-iron System.} — K. Friedrich has re-determined the
freezing-point diagram, using more pure materials than those employed
by Treitschke and Tammann, and finds some differences. The critical
points of iron are somewhat lowered by additiou of sulphide of iron, but
are not caused to coincide.

Iron-nickel System. § — Discrepancies in the results obtained in
previous investigations of this system have led R. Ruer and E. Schuz to
determine the temperatures of solidification of a number of alloys pre-
pared from pure materials. The temperatures of magnetic transformation

* Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 307-12 (18 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 644-6 (15 figs.). + Tom. cit., pp. 257-61 (9 figs.).

§ Tom. cit. pp. 415-20 (7 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. L27

on heating and cooling were determined by measuring the permeability
at different temperatures. The smooth and continuous freezing-point
curve shows a minimum at 70 p.c. nickel, at which concentration the
magnetic transformation temperature curve shows a maximum. These
facts point to the existence of FeNi2, but measurements of electrical con-
ductivity have afforded no indication of the existence of this compound.
Alloys containing less than 29 p.c. nickel are irreversible, those with
more nickel are reversible.

Iron-nickel-copper Alloys.*— C. F. Burgess and J. Aston summarize
the results of their previous investigations on the mechanical properties
of the binary alloys of electrolytic iron with nickel and with copper, and
describe a similar investigation of a series of ternary alloys. Monel
metal is an alloy of nickel and copper obtained directly from the ore ;
the nickel content is about three times the copper content. The ternary
alloys were prepared by melting electrolytic iron with Monel metal, the
successive members of the series containing proportions of Monel metal
increasing by steps of 2 p.c. to 20 p.c. The curves showing the relation
of mechanical properties to proportion of alloy added are very similar
to the corresponding curves for the iron-nickel alloys. Copper does not
in general appear to have a deleterious effect, and when nickel + copper
does not exceed 10 p.c, the copper appears to be beneficial.

G. A. Roush t gives the results of determinations of hardness by
means of the scleroscope, of binary and ternary alloys of iron with
nickel and copper, other properties of which have been determined by
Burgess and Aston.

G. H. Clamer J and J. A. Matthews § give particulars of the pro-
perties of some copper-nickel steels.

Arnold, J. 0. — A Fourth Eecalescence in Steel.

[Attempts to explain an evolution of heat occurring between Ar3 and Ar, in
a steel containing about 0-2 p.c. carbon.]

British Association, Sheffield, September 1910.

Chappkll, C, & F. Hodson — Influence of Heat-treatment on the Corrosion.

Solubility, and Solution Pressures of 8teel. Loc. cit.

Ducelliez, F. — Alloys of Cobalt and Silver.

Bull. Soc. Chim., vii. (1910) pp. 506-7.

Mazzotto, D. — Heat of Solidification of Alloys of Lead and Tin.

Nuovo Cim., xix. (1910) pp. 215-32.

Yigotjroux, E.— Alloys of Nickel and Silver.

Bull. Soc. Chim., vii. (1910) pp. 621-2.

Pansais, E. — Variations in the Physical Properties of Metallic Alloys subjected
to Mechanical and Thermal Action. I. Specific Gravity.

Gaz. Chim. Ital., xl. 1 (1910) pp. 431-3.

* Met. and Chem. Eng., viii. (1910) pp. 452-6 (6 figs.).

f Tom. cit., pp. 468-70, 522-3 (7 figs.).

X Tom. cit., p. 527. § Tom. cit., pp. 527-8.

128

PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

MEETING

Held on the 21st of Decembee, 1910, at 20 Hanover Square, W.,
Dr. E. J. Spitta, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.

The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) re-
ceived since the last meeting was read as follows, and the thanks of the
Society were voted to the donors.

From
Jean Massart, Esquisse de la Geographie Botanique de la Bel- j

gique, 2 vols., Text and Annexe containing 466 photographs, ! y^g Author
9 charts and 2 diagrams. (8vo, Bruxelles, Henri Lamertin, f

1910) )

Leo Errera, Recueil d'CEuvres de Le'o Errera Physiologies Madame Leo

Gene'rale Philosophie. (8vo, Bruxelles, H. Lamertin, 1910) j Errera.

Jas. Murray, British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9, Vol. 1.1 Sir Ernest

Biology, Part V. Tardigrada. (4to, London, 1910) . . . . J Shackleton.

Mr. W. Traviss exhibited a small Microscope Lamp, of which he
gave a short description. He considered it very efficient for opaque
objects and dark-ground illumination with high powers, also with
polarized light, especially where the prisms are small ; it was simply
made, beautiful in appearance, and was easily moved up and down by
means of a square pillar-tube made of f-in. square brass tube about
6 in. high, fixed at one corner of a small iron tripod of about 5 in.
span. Sliding over this is another square tube, which is " sprung " so
as to give an even tension. On the upper end of the larger tube is
fixed a solid square elbow, into which a hole is drilled and tapped to
take a small gas tap and another ordinary brass elbow pointing down-
wards, on to which an incandescent burner with inverted mantle is fixed.
A small nipple is fixed on the solid end of the larger square tube to
take a small rubber tube, which is to be connected with an ordinary
gas-burner. The nipple can be on either side, up or down, or on end
so as to form a T with the solid elbow.

The Chairman asked whether there was any objection to the rubber
tube being placed so near the heat of the lamp ?

Mr. C. E. Heath said that he had had practical experience of the
lamp and had had no difficulty in this way, and considered the danger
to which the Chairman referred could be overcome by using a flexible

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 129

metallic tube, and the insertion of an asbestos washer between the stand
and tube fastener.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to Mr. Traviss for his
exhibit.

Dr. Hebb read the following communication from Mr. A. J. Allan
on " An Easy Method of Treating Printing-out Paper for all Kinds of
Photography." The two prints of hydra and specimen of group
mounting will show the result of this method. They were treated in
the following manner, which may be of interest to some of your
members who do this class of work. First wash the prints in a very
strong solution of salt and water for ten minutes, then lift the prints
and place them without washing into a saturated solution of hypo ; in
about fifteen minutes the prints will be done. They should then be
washed in running water for two hours. The advantages of this method
are first, simplicity ; second, uniformity of tone, every print will finish
the same ; third, the whites are pure.

A communication from Mr. A. A. C. E. Merlin on " The Measure-
ment of Grayson's Xew Ten-Band Plate," was taken as read.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to Mr. A. J. Allan and to
Mr. Merlin for their communications.

Mr. F. Shillington Scales gave a synopsis of a communication from
Mr. Higgins on " A New System of Filing Slides," suggesting an
adaptation of the ordinary card-index system by means of guide cards
for every ten slides, the slides being placed on edge with an index
number on the upper edge.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to Mr. Higgins for his
communication.

A paper by Mr. James Murray on " Some African Rotifers,
Bdelloida of Tropical Africa," was taken as read. Mr. Murray gave a
short description of drawings of a number of species. The following
is an abstract of the paper.

Thirty-three species of Bdelloids were obtained from dried moss sent
by Mr. A. Allan and Sir Philip Brocklehurst from British East Africa.
Nine of the species are new to science. Several of them have very
distinct characters, not previously noted for any Bdelloids. Habrotrocha
caudata has a tail-like process, the function of which is unknown. The
animal secretes a protective shell, and the " tail " is enclosed in a slender
tube, open at the end, so that the shell has two openings.

H. acurnis has no trace of spurs, otherwise universal in the order.
Several other species approach it in this respect, having the spurs
reduced to minute papillas.

H. auriculata, when feeding, has at each side of the head a peculiar
ring-like " auricle," giving it the appearance of a two-handled vase.
The nature and function of the "auricles" remain unknown. Their
form, even, is difficult to interpret, as they present apparently contra-
dictory appearances from different points of view.

The Bdelloids take a very important place in moss-faunas. In
every country they are abundant, and in most regions there is a fair

Feb. loth, 1911 k

130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

proportion of peculiar species. When more fully known the Bdelloids
seem likely to prove a group of hitherto unsuspected importance, 1 >ot h
in point of numbers and diversity of forms.

All of these moss-dwellers can revive after desiccation. The adult
animals become dormant when deprived of moisture, and revive when
remoistened. It is not, as Zacharias concluded from his experiments in
1886, that the survival of the species is effected by means of eggs.

Mr. Ronsselet remarked that this would be a most interesting paper
when published, for the specimens described had been collected from all
parts of the world, and would be most interesting records to read.

The thanks of the Society were voted to Mr. Murray for his exhibit.

Mr. A. Earland gave a lantern lecture dealing with the apparatus
and methods employed in the cruisers of the International Xorth Sea
Commission, with special reference to the work of the " Goldseeker,"
the cruiser of the Scottish branch of the Commission. The hydro-
graphical cruises were explained and their utility demonstrated. Various
kinds of apparatus, including the Petterson-Buchanan water-bottle,
Ekman's current-meter, Bidder's bottom-drift bottle, were shown on the
screen, and their uses explained. Passing to the zoological work of the
Commission, the lecturer showed many different forms of surface, mid-
water and bottom nets, and described the methods of working them ;
dealing at some length with the otter-trawl. The life-history of several
typical fishes was briefly dealt with, and the lecture concluded with a
description of the Faroese methods of capturing schools of the Pilot
Whale (Globic&phalus melas), and some account of modern methods of
whaling as now carried out in the Shetland Islands.

The Chairman said that he was sure that all would wish to return a
most hearty vote of thanks to Mr. Earland for his exceedingly interesting
lecture, and for all the trouble he had taken in preparing the pictures
and explaining them.

The unanimous thanks of the Society were heartily accorded to
Mr Earland for his lecture.

The following list of Fellows of the Society, nominated by the
Council for election as Honorary Officers for the coming session, was
read by the Secretary : —

President— U. G. Plimmer, F.R.S. F.L.S. F.Z.S.

Vice-Presidents — A. N. Disney, R. G. Hebb. E. Heron-Allen, J.
Arthur Thomson.

Treasurer — Wynne E. Baxter.

Secretaries — John W. H. Eyre and F. Shillington Scales.

Ordinary Members of the Council — F. W. Watson Baker, J. E.
Barnard, F. J. Cheshire, C. L. Curties, C. F. Hill, J. Hopkinson, P. E.
Radley, J. Rheinberg, C. F. Ronsselet, D. J. Scourfield. E. J. Spitta,
A. E. "Wright.

Librarian — Percy E. Radley.

Curator of Instruments, etc. — Charles F. Rousselet.

Curator of Slides — F. Shillington Scales.

Auditor on behalf of the Council — C. F. Hill.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 131

In connexion with the election of officers, the Chairman said that
it would have been noticed in the list just read that there was to be ;i
change of one of the Secretaries. In other words, their old and valued
Secretary, Dr. Hebb, was retiring-. He (Dr. Spitta) had not known that
he would be asked* to fill the chair that evening, or lie would have
certainly endeavoured to have been prepared with some more fitting
words on such an occasion. He was sure, however, that all present
would wish to accord a very warm vote of thanks to Dr. Hebb, who had
been their Secretary for certainly over thirteen years. His work as
Secretary was not merely that in connexion with the Meetings, which
in themselves involved a great deal of preparation, but he had all along-
worked most assiduously on behalf of the Society. He was sure that
all would agree with him that it was a fitting occasion to return to
Dr. Hebb a very hearty vote of thanks for all the hard work during the
past years he had devoted for the benefit and advantage of the Society.

The vote of thanks was unanimously and enthusiasticallv carried.

Dr. Hebb returned his thanks for the cordial way in which the vote
had been carried.

In connexion with the election of new Officers, the Chairman further
said that Mr. Hill had been elected as Honorary Auditor on behalf of the
Council, and he wished to ask the meeting whom they desired to propose
to fill the place of Honorary Auditor on behalf of the Fellows of the
Society.

Mr. Soar said he would like to propose Mr. Charles Cm-ties ; tin's
was seconded by Mr Gardner.

The Chairman said that it had been proposed and seconded that
Mr. Curties should be once again appointed Honorary Auditor, and,
having put it to the meeting, the motion was carried unanimously.

He further said that at the Meeting of the Council that evening the
point had been brought forward that it would be very beneficial for the
Society if they could manage to show in their rooms some, if not all, of
their valuable collection of microscopical instruments and microscopes.
These hitherto had been all lying in cases, where they could indeed be
shown to those who wished to see them, but it seemed a great pity that
this magnificent series 'of exhibits should not be set out for general
inspection, both for the benefit of those members who came from abroad,
and for others who were interested. Carrying out the idea would
involve a good deal of expense — something like 50Z. for the show-cases
necessary, and unfortunately the finances of the Society were such that
the Council did not feel that they could draw upon their funds for the
purpose. He had, therefore, been desired by the Council to lay the
matter before the Fellows that evening and invite subscriptions, so that
if possible something like the sum of 50/. might be raised to provide a
set of glass cases wherein to show the instruments of historic interest
possessed by the Society. It seemed, he thought, an excellent suggestion,
and he hoped that those present would try and circulate the proposal
among other members, so as to enable the Council to collect the money
required for the purpose.

k 2

132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

The Annual Meeting of the Society was announced for January L8th
next, when the President would give the annua] address, the subject of
which would be announced later on.

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited : —

Mr. W. R. Traviss — A New Microscope Lamp.

Mr. Jas. Murray — A series of drawings in illustration of his paper.

New Fellows — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of the
Society : — William John Caird, John Arthur Carter, R. T. Hewlett.

MEETING

Held on the 18th of January, 1911, at 20 Hanover Square, W.,
Professor J. Arthur Thomson, M.A. F.R.S.E., President, in
the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of December 21 last were read and
confirmed, and were signed by the President.

The President said that before passing on to formal business, he
thought a few words should be said in deploring the great loss the world
had sustained in the death of Sir Francis Galton, which took place on
the evening of January 17. He was not a Fellow of the Microscopical
Society, but he certainly was one of the princes of science in Great
Britain, and his loss would be much felt by all those who were in any
way connected with scientific work.

Messrs. J. I. Pigg and A. W. Sheppard were appointed by the Presi-
dent as Scrutineers of the Ballot for the election of Officers and Council
of the Society for the ensuing year.

The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received
since the last Meeting was read as follows, and the thanks of the Society
were voted to the donors : —

From

D. G. Stead, A Brief Review of the Fisheries of New South] ,-,• , • \r , Qn, ti
Wales, Present and Potential. (8vo, Sydney, 1910) . . J ^ales

Richard T. Baker and Henry G. Smith, A Research on the I „? a *hnr
Pines of Australia. (8vo, Sydney, 1910) / J-ne munois.

Mr. T. Chalkley Palmer, in explanation of the slide of Surirella
elegans exhibited by him, stated that there had been three or four theories

PROCEEDINGS OK THE SOCIETY. 133

advanced as to the method of locomotion in diatoms — all of them with
a good deal of pertinacity — and especially to be noted was the theory
put forward by Mr. Jackson, which was commented upon recently in the
Journal. All these theories, however, failed to agree with the actual
phenomenon. Still another theory had been propounded by R. Lauter-
born, namely, that the diatom moved by the protrusion of what he called
gallerte, a sort of jelly.

Lauterborn referred to Surirella as moving because of the streaming
(if gallerte in the keels. There were four keels occupied by tubes run-
ning fore and aft the diatom. Lauterborn said the streaming substance
was not protoplasm, since he was unable to find any of the Butschli struc-
ture in the contents of the keel. He had also stained it, and had been
unable to find any keel protoplasm. This was astonishing, since when
properly stained after fixing the protoplasm showed itself very clearly.
The slide under the Microscope contained Surirella which had been
killed and fixed with corrosive sublimate, and stained with iron-alum and
hematoxylin. It showed the protoplasm extending in unbroken con-
tinuity through the ribs and the tube of the keel. That which circulated
in this keel was most certainly protoplasm, and it moved the diatom by
action upon the environment through the minute cleft that ran the
length of the keel.

Mr. Scourfield said that he would like to ask how the protoplasm was
supposed to produce the movement of the Diatom, as it did not seem to
be very clear. If there were a tube along each ridge he did not see how
the protoplasm inside could affect external objects. It was, however,
quite certain that something moved along the tubes. Only a few evenings
lief ore he had been looking at a living Surirella and saw quite distinctly
that small particles of dirt were passed along the ridges, but he could
not make out exactly how this movement was brought about.

Mr. Palmer said that certainly the protoplasm streaming in the cleft
of the keel was competent to do this, since it visibly moved particles of
debris along this cleft.

Mr. Scourfield assumed that the protoplasm came out of the cleft in
a series of waves, or it might be in a continuous band running along, but
certainly projecting somewhat from the surface.

Mr. Palmer replied that that might be so, but that the protoplasm
did not necessarily extend much beyond the surface of the silica, and it
was probably clothed with a thin layer of sticky gallerte or jelly at that
point, since small particles of external substances adhered to it quite
strongly.

Mr. Shillington Scales said that in regard to Mr. Nelson's sugges-
tions on the subject of examination questions upon Microscopy on p. 771
of the last issue of the Journal. Mr. Merlin had written a note to Mr.
Nelson saying that " he had succeeded in accomplishing th e resolution."

The Annual Report of the Society for the year 1910 was then read

by Mr. Shillington Scales.

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL FOR 1!U0.
FELLOWS.

Ordinary. — Daring the year 1910, 82 new Fellows have been elected,
whilst 7 have died, 10 have resigned, and 7 have been removed, and
3 elections have been declared void.

Among the names of deceased Fellows the Council regrets to record
those of Sir William Huggins, F.R.S., etc., and of Walter Wesche,
sympathetic notices of whom were made from the Chair at the April
and October meetings.

Honorary. — The Council regrets to announce the deaths of two
Honorary Fellows : — Prof. A. Agassiz and Prof. E. van Beneden.

The number of Honorary Fellows is now 38.

The List of Fellows now contains the names of 393 Ordinary,
1 Corresponding, 38 Honorary, and 79 Ex-officio Fellows, being a total
of 511.

FINANCE.

The amount received from Members' subscriptions is £70 less than
last year, but this does not affect the stability of the Society's permanent
income, arising as it does from fewer arrears being collectable and less
having been paid in advance. The amount received from admission
fees is larger than it has been for many years. There is a considerable
falling off in the sales of the Journal. The receipts from this source
having been £7X less than last year. This may be partly caused by
changes in the publishing trade. If such be the case it will no doubt
correct itself in the future.

JOURNAL.

Seventeen valuable papers on important subjects are recorded in the
Transactions of the Society ; the front part of the Journal also includes
three Notes, making a total of twenty communications.

The Proceedings of the Society deserve attention, notably those con-
taining an interesting communication by the President.

The summary of current researches has been continued on lines
similar to those of previous years, and the thanks of the Council are due
to the members of the editorial staff for their continued efforts in main-
taining the high standard of the abstracts of Zoology, Botany, Microscopy,
and Metallography.

LIBRARY.

The Library has been maintained in good order, but the number of
new books received during the year 1910 has been fewer than usual.
More use has been made of the Library since the publication of the new
( 1atalogue.

INSTRUMENTS AND APPARATUS.

The Instruments and Apparatus in the Society's Collection continue
to be in good condition.

PROCEEDINGS OK THE SOCIETY. 135

During the past twelve months the following additions have been
made :—

Jan. 19. — A Projection Lantern with Self-regulating Arc Light. Pre-
sented by Mr. J. W. Ogilvy.

Feb. 16. — An Old Microscope, by Browning.

„ An Old Microscope, by Trecourt and George Oberhaeuser.

„ Eight Lieberkulm Microscopes, in cases. Presented by

Members of the Council.
,, A Withering^ Botanical Microscope. Presented by Mr.

A. N. Disney.

Mar. 16. — A Live-box, with micrometer scale engraved on the glass
tablet, by Andrew Pritchard. Presented by Mr. John
Cooper Webb.

May 25. — An Old Wooden Niirnberg Microscope. Presented by Mr.
C. F. Rousselet.

„ An Old Microscope, of Culpeper and Scarlet model. Pre-

sented by Mr. A. Asche.
Oct. 19. — A Lucernal Microscope, by Adams. Presented by Mr.
Frank Slade.

,. A Microscope, by Hugh Powell, dated 1840. Presented by

Mr. P. T. B. Beale.

Nov. 16. — Old Ivory Sliders with Objects, and a Slider containing
magnifiers in brass holder. Presented by Mr. H. C.
Gooding.

„ Old Pocket Magnifiers, in brass box. Presented by Mr.

Charles Lees Curties.

„ An Old Microscope, by Oberhaeuser and Hartnack. Pre-

sented by Mrs. Wesche.

CABINET.

The following additions have been made to the Slide Cabinet during
the past year : —

Feb. 16. — Twenty-four slides from the collection of the late Mr.
Frederick Fitch (mostly insect preparations in fluid).
Presented by Miss Fitch.
„ Two Grayson's Rulings — a complete inch divided into
hundredths, and 25 mm. divided into 0*25 mm. Pre-
sented by Mr. Conrad Beck.

May 25. — Two slides of Insects mounted by the late B. F. Grimby, of
Chicago, one of which was a Bee and the other a Croton
Bug. Presented by Miss V. A. Latham. M.D.

June 15. — Two slides of the rare Synaptid, Trochodota dunedinensis
(Parker). Presented by Mr. M. J. Allan, of Geelong.
Victoria.

Nov. 16. — Two slides of Pleurosigma. Presented by Hon. T. Kirkman.

„ Eight slides, including one of Trochodota eggs, mounted in

fluid. Also presented by Mr. M. J. Allan.

l:;ti

I'|{<K.:EEI>INGS of the society.

CC y-. © CO

, , °5 &> — -

w ■ ■ ec ©

ITS CO O M Ift r-c CO CO C CM 35

r— t-H f—

— o — O K m r. O O M cc
i~ i~ p-< CO O "*

~ CM

o
oo

35"

o
F*

s

6>Pm

—

CO

-SPH

-§

m

ft

c

cc : . — i

®oa

t- 10 t-

co •* eo

S3

3

O

fin tpv- a

6ta

^fS

«S .9

oo >fi
fM^

o o
o o

— u
PScoP

+- oo

oo 'r* a

co 'C —

00 r,l — ■

CO
&

05

bt.

o

P-,

S
to
a

c

<D

O

f-
co

a

01

.3
H

03

s- -
_ <V 00

5— a c

0
go f-

O hh

— oo

£ r^ -"-= 0J

P-tMOQfe

as

O

-

M

u

c

c

—

cSCC

CO

' —

60 O

03

ia

o CO

Ph«

as

a 2

5 1

^*
a a b

r; I,—

oo £ .& g>

Sh »ff I- H

o3 9 an «
u « 3 t,

PhRoqPh

^85

MiflHOiOailOCNHOC-

iMMINOtBOWiOH-CMS
— i© ^ zo <-h O CD

CO CM CM

OS

C ® » CC ^ -N H

O rt M C- 00 O! c

O i—i co t- **< co —

CM lO CM

<35 OO ."?

>— I CO >H

1^1

a

-

CO
— CO
03 O

3 os

b r"

I - CO OJ

O O ©
OS OS OS

a
o

B

43
> ^3

"as

c

SO '

a =

S3 i-i

00

n 5 c^.3

1-1 £ 2 <=«&.

c s « S «

i-j oo aj Oh •

0)

0
09

00

e

c

83

B
O

P

O

o

S3 .
O

CO

s

CO

60§
B B

05 C5 OS

dj — F-t

2 = 1>

0) JJ >
B*3 *

p-h co <! cfc

4>

?• r^ >-> -2 v! ^

® « _fe a ag-:
c^-,2^ o^

h 0

B C

^

o> +±

Tj o o o _ - -

^ o o o o o <=>

- , o o — ■ O o °

■*' © © O CO o H

■^ -^ "^ ^ ~ s

CO

d a>
co a,

£3-5:

• ? CO

• -d S
■H oj

00

M
o

x

PQ

13

03

2-§

t; *-i

c oj

: 2 £

sl£

1* >S ^ oj 5

^ £ M ° «

Ph 5 co S _S

.2 B _. oj 5

• rH S3 -*J J-" • —

®=^ B-2

1^

0 s

tig

2 8

<

-»^ as

P5

- a

•« 33

w

3

S 5

>=

T ~

z

S -3

t-

O c

-=

r>«e

0J T3

^: B

*= sS

a r

•** -1

■F. oj

ti B

„ O

55 as

a -_■

C3 S

^ a

CO

JO J)

■w >

-s-2

£ *

03 »

i. 53

a 2

c ®

CJ "^

T3 'E

B g

e3 u
ra OJ

♦J-tfl

B x

3 —

O "-

5^"=

» CO

«-.-=

bfl'S

1 ?

6X §

OJ —

S. 33

=2 oj

*J —

-3 jo

co S

B

'a >,

« .i

<9 CJ

$«

33

-*■

0)

fS

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. L31

The Treasurer presented his Cash Statement, which commenced with
a balance from the year 1 '. > 1 0 of .r):'»/. 4s. lid., against a balance last year
of only 21. 6s. Most of that, however, consisted of subscriptions given
for the Library Catalogue, and had been mostly spent on the printing,
etc., of the said catalogue, so that the Society's general finances had not
greatly benefited. The admission fees, amounting to 67/. 4*., were the
largest they had had for many years. In the sum total of annual sub-
scriptions there seemed to be a great falling off, which, however, might
be accounted for by the fact that last year many subscriptions not paid
with promptness had been collected, and which of course could not now
again be collected. In analysing the actual amount of subscriptions for
the current year, it would be seen that it exceeded last year's amount
by some 61.

The amount received for the sale of the Journals was certainly most
deplorable, being only 272?. Is. as against 340/. 10s. 5d. As the Council
Report had mentioned, this might possibly be accounted for by some
publishing firms in the science world having changed hands during the
past year, and thus upset the receipts of the Society. He trusted that this
was really the explanation, and that next year it would be remedied.

He had to announce under the " Receipts " column the new item of
li Donations to the Show Case," and after the appeal made at the last
Meeting it might be expected that a large amount had been received, but
he was sorry to say that up to then it had only been 1/. Is. ; he hoped,
however, that this might shortly be increased.

He had to announce with satisfaction the amount received in Com-
position Fees, viz. 63/. As an outcome of the Report, he had to bring
out a debit balance of 6/. lis. 9d., which, looked at generally, and in
view of the fact that the investments had been increased by the purchase
of 60/. India Three per cents., was better than it had been for many years

Mr. Offord said that they bad heard the Report of Council and the
Treasurer's Statement, and he thought that on the whole they might be
considered satisfactory. The sale of the Journal had certainly fallen off
very much, but perhaps that was only temporary, and might right itself
next year. He proposed that the Report and Statement should be
passed.

Mr. James Smith having seconded the motion, it was put to the
Meeting and carried unanimously.

The President announced that the Scrutineers having handed in
their report as to the result of the ballot, the following Fellows proposed
by the Council had been duly elected as the Officers and Council of the
Society for the ensuing year : —

President— Henry George Plimmer, F.R.S. F.L.S. F.Z.S.

Vice-Presidents — A. N. Disney ; R. G. Hebb ; Edward Heron- Allen ;
J. Arthur Thomson.

Treasurer — Wynne E. Baxter.

Secretaries — J. W. H. Eyre ; F. Shillington Scales.

138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Ordinary Members oj the Council- V. W. Watson Baker; J. E.
Barnard ; V. J. Cheshire ; Charles Lees Curties ; ('. V. Hill ; J. Hopkin-
soii ; I*. E. I lad ley : J. Rheinberg ; C. V. Rousselet ; D. J. Sconrfield ;
E. J. Spitta : Kir'Almroth E. Wright.

Librarian — P. E. Radley.

Curator of Instruments, etc. — C. F. Rousselet.

Curator of Slides- V. Shillington Scales.

The President then gave his Annual Address on " The Determination

of Sex."

After the Address the President said that he wished to congratulate
the Society on their increasing Membership, and on the activity and
interest maintained during the past session. He also wished to thank
them, and especially the Council and Officers of the Society, for the
kindness and consideration which they had shown to him during his
term of office. It had been a great pleasure to him to serve the Society,
with which he had been so long connected, and he was not a little grati-
fied at the happy coincidence of his presidentship with a year of prosperity.
He hoped that the prosperity would continue and increase. He thought,
however, if he might say so, that two practical improvements were emi-
nently desirable and urgent. 1. That they should display in a fitting
and dignified manner a considerable proportion of the Microscopes and
other instruments in the possession of the Society, which should, he
thought, be described in an illustrated catalogue. 2. That they should
develop on an ambitious scale the Society's collection of microscopical
slides, partly by the industry of the Fellows themselves, and partly by
soliciting typical slides from other workers. In that way might gradually
be built up what did not exist, namely a typical collection — a Reference
Museum — of microscopical preparations which would be a valuable asset
not only to the Society but to scientific workers in general.

He hoped that as Vice-President, or otherwise, he might still continue
to express actively his interest in the Society's welfare.

Mr. Michael said that after the great applause following on the Presi-
dent's Address it seemed to him hardly necessary to propose the usual
vote, namely, that the thanks of the Society be returned to the President
for his Address, and that he be asked to give his consent for its publica-
tion in the Society's Transactions. The opinion of the Meeting had been
pretty definitely expressed. The Address to which they had listened
that evening had been an extremely able contribution to one of the most
interesting of existing subjects, and had been treated in a manner (as
might indeed be expected) entirely characteristic of the care, ability and
open-mindedness for which the President was characterized in whatever
research he took up. The Address would commend itself as a clear sum-
mary of the present state of our knowledge on a fascinating subject, and
it came with especial appropriateness from Professor Thomson, who had
spent much time and thought on its consideration. The subject could
not altogether be said to have been lifted out of the realm of conjecture,
but so far as our present knowledge went the conjectures to which Pro-
fessor Thomson had drawn special attention in his Address seemed to

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 139

him (Mr. Michael) the most likely to prove themselves the correct ones,
or, at all events, to include the correct one.

Mr. Disney said he had pleasure in rising to second the vote of
thanks which Mr. Michael had proposed.

He said lie would also like to draw especial attention to the useful
and valuable suggestions which the President had urged, namely, the
provision of adequate show cases for the Society's collection of Micro-
scopes and other instruments, as well as the arrangement of a thoroughly
representative exhibition of slides.

The motion was put to the Meeting and carried with acclamation.

The President thanked the meeting for the hearty way in which they
had received the motion, and said that it would give him great pleasure
to have his Address published in the Transactions.

Mr. Earland said that it fell to his lot to propose the next vote of
thanks, namely, to the Honorary Officers of the Society. He supposed
that he had been asked to undertake this pleasant task as a Fellow of
the Society who had had some experience elsewhere of the difficulties
which came in the way of Honorary Officers. He thought that all would
allow that the success of a Society depended almost entirely on the
energy and efficiency of its officers. Fellows of the Society came to the
meetings expecting entertainment and instruction, and were very rarely
disappointed, and it might not occur to them that the success of .such
meetings had been secured, perhaps, at the cost of sleepless nights spent
by the Secretary in the attempt to obtain an emergency paper, or that
the Treasurer had been occupied in trying to bring out his balance
on the right side of the sheet — not always with the success which he
desired ! He had always admired the Treasurer's office more than that
of any other Officer, since it had always been quite beyond his capacity
to understand a balance sheet.

He also wished to move a vote of thanks to those who might perhaps
be called the " lesser lights " among the Officers of the Society, namely,
to its Librarian and Curator, who had no less arduous duties to perform,
but who came less under the public notice.

The Society had just dropped one of its pilots in the person of their
genial and popular friend, Dr. Hebb, who for many years past had been
their Secretary, and whose never-failing kindness and good humour had
been one of the most attractive features of the Society. He thought that
it might truly be said that the success of the Society during the years of
Dr. Hebb's activity as Secretary had been very largely due to his exer-
tions. His successor was well known to microscopists, and he had no
doubt that in him they would have an equally energetic man.

He begged to move the vote of thanks to all Officers.

Mr. Pledge rose to second the proposal, which, having been put to
the Meeting, was carried unanimously.

Mr. Wilson said that he rose to propose a vote of thanks to two
gentlemen who were not included in Mr. Earland's vote, and in whom
the Society placed great confidence, namely, the Honorary Auditors.
Unless reliance could be placed on the statements made by the Auditors,
he thought the Society would be placed in rather a queer box. He had

140 PROCEEDINGS OF Till". SOCIKTV.

great pleasure in moving the vote of thanks both to the Auditors and bo
the Scrutineers of the ballot.

Mr. Davies said he had pleasure in seconding that proposal, which,
having been put to the .Meeting, was carried unanimously.

Mr. Shilliugton Scales said that he regretted Dr. Hebb's absence that
evening, as it would have been the last time he would have been present
as Honorary Secretary, but those examination duties which had com-
pelled him to give up his Secretaryship had prevented him from being
present. He was glad to know, however, that, as Vice-President, the
Society would still have the opportunity of taking advantage of his great
experience as Secretary. Dr. Hebb had been with them for many years,
and had worked very hard, and had fully earned a rest.

The increased prosperity of the Society had been alluded to, but of
course he must impress upon the Meeting that a good deal of anxiety
lay before them in the future owing to the growing expenditure. It was
a great satisfaction to know that the Fellowship had been increased, but
a still greater number of new Fellows would be welcomed by all, and the
present Fellows of the Society could help in this direction greatly by
bringing forward suitable candidates for the Fellowship. The two new
Secretaries following Dr. Hebb would have many difficulties to contend
with, and they were very wishful to increase still further the usefulness
of the Society, and would therefore welcome gladly any suggestions
which could be made. It was satisfactory to know that the Library had
been more used in the past year, but the Slide Cabinet might be more
often referred to, and efforts would be put forward to make the Meetings
of even more interest than they were now, especially in a social direction.
He would be very glad indeed to receive any suggestions or help which
could be given, for the Fellows themselves could be of as much assistance
in this direction as the Honorary Officers.

The next Meeting was announced for February 15, when a paper
by Mr. E. M. Nelson, " On Some New Objectives and Eye-pieces by
R. Winkel, of Gottingen," would be read.

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited : —

Mr. T. Chalkley Palmer : — Slide of Surirella elegans, stained to show
protoplasm.

New Fellows : — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of the
Society : — Frank Armstrong, William Ayrton, John Ross, Charles James
Tabor.

JOUKNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

APRIL, 1911.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

VI. — The President's Address : The Determination of Sex.
By J. Arthur Thomson, M.A.

(Delivered January 18, 1911.)

I have taken as the subject of my Address, not without much
hesitation, one of the great unsolved problems of Biology — The
Determination of Sex. Though the subject cannot be discussed
with thoroughness within the compass of an Address, I hope to be
able to make clear what the general trend of investigation has been,
and what the present position of the question is. The particular
appropriateness of the subject on this occasion is to be found in
the fact that several of the most marked steps of progress in the
investigation have been due to microscopic work of the finest kind.
There is also a personal appropriateness, for I have taken a great
interest in the subject since I shared in the responsibility of
writing " The Evolution of Sex " more than twenty years ago. It
seemed to me natural and useful that I should state something of
what I know of the crop of investigations in regard to this
extremely important problem, and indicate what, in my opinion,
are the most promising recent developments.

The Determination of Sex.

1. From ancient times a keen interest has been taken in the
question of the determination of sex — the settling of the sex of
the offspring ; and the numerous suggestions offered in answer
might almost serve as an index of the progress of natural know-
ledge. For there were theological and metaphysical answers to
the question, before it began to be approached scientifically ; and
even after the problem was recognized as one that must be tackled

April 19th, 1911 l

142. Transactions of the Society.

scientifically or not at all, the solutions suggested have not always
adhered strictly to scientific method. Scores of books and pamph-
lets redolent of good intentions must be set aside because ofobrious
scientific unsoundness. Some lay stress on what even the most
tolerant must call unverifiable factors, such as the desire of the
parent to have a male child ; others allege the operation of factors
which are physiologically absurd ; others base a generalization on
an outrageously small number of cases. The number of theories
on the subject is legion, and one can hardly wonder, since the
practical importance of the problem is as great as its theoretical
interest.

The Problem Stated.

2. The general problem is : What determines whether an
embryo will develop into a male or into a female organism ? But
let us look at some of the particular forms of the problem.
What are called " true twins " in the human race, which appear to
result from the division of a single ovum into two independently
developing ova, are always of the same sex ; but ordinary twins,
which result from two distinct ova developing simultaneously, are
often of different sexes. Why is there this difference ?

In one household the family consists of both boys and girls ;
in the house next door to the right the children are all girls ; in
the house next door to the left the children are all boys ! What
determines this ? A guillemot usiially lays but one egg in a
season : what determines the sex of the offspring ? A setting of
hen's eggs gives rise to cocks and hens in varying proportions — is
the proportion practically modifiable ? The unfertilized eggs of a
queen-bee develop into drones ; the unfertilized eggs of aphides
develop into females all through the summer, but at the end of the
season males are produced. What does this mean ? In great part
the question comes to be, When is the sex of the offspring deter-
mined finally ? Is there sex-determination in ova before fertiliza-
tion, or during fertilization, or in the course of development after
fertilization ? How long may a germ-cell or an embryo remain
with the potentiality of either sex ?

Three Chief Methods of Investigation.

3. The problem has been attacked scientifically along three
distinct lines, and it is particularly interesting to notice that some
of the clearest steps of progress have been made by the co-opera-
tion of two methods.

Statistical. — Some generalizations as to the determination of
the sex of the offspring have been based on statistics of the relative
numbers of male and female offspring in different localities, at
different times (e.g. in times of war and famine), with different ages

The President's Address. By J. Arthur Thomson. 143

of parents, and so on. These statistics are valuable when the basis
is broad enough, but great care is necessary in giving a physio-
logical interpretation of statistical results.

Gytological. — Some generalizations as to the determination of
the sex of the offspring have been based on observations of the
germ-cells in particular cases. Thus it has been shown that there
are two kinds of spermatozoa in some animals, that in some cases
one half of the spermatozoa have " an accessory chromosome "
absent in the other half, that in some insects ova fertilized by
spermatozoa with an accessory chromosome develop into females,
and so on. It has also been shown that some animals have two
kinds of ova, the larger developing into females.

Experimental. — Some generalizations as to the determination of
the sex of the offspring have been based on experiment, e.g. sub-
jecting the eggs, or embryos, or parents, to particular conditions
of temperature, nutrition and the like, and observing whether the
relative numbers of the sexes in the offspring are in any way
different from those obtaining in ordinary conditions ; or by trving
particular breeding experiments in reference to what are called
sex-limited characters.

The Chief Theories of Sex-Determination.

4. Theories on sex-determination may be divided into (a) those
which are based on the supposed occurrence of two kinds of germ-
cells (male-producing and female-producing), predestined from the
beginning and immune to environmental influences ; and (b) those
which credit the environment with determining influence, supplying
stimuli which give the germ-cell or the developing organism a
bias to maleness or to femaleness.

But I would propose a more detailed classification as clearer,
distinguishing five theses : —

(a) That environmental conditions, operating on the sexually
undetermined developing offspring-organism (after fertilization),
may at least share in determining the sex ;

(b) That the sex is quite unpredestined in the germ-cells before
fertilization, and that then it is settled by the relative condition of
the gametes, or by a balancing of the tendencies they bear, neither
gamete being necessarily decisive ;

(c) That the sex is predestined at a very early stage by the
constitution of the germ-cells as such, there being female-producing
and male-producing germ-cells, predetermined from the beginning,
and arising independently of environmental influence ;

(d) That maleness and femaleness are Mendelian characters ;

(e) That environmental and functional influences, operating
through the parent (or, in short, the parent's acquired peculiarities),
may alter the proportion of effective female-producing and male-
producing germ-cells.

l 2

144 Transactions of the Society,

Two Preliminary Cautions.

5. Two preliminary cautions may be noted. In the first place,
these main theories are not in any very strict way mutually exclu-
sive. Even if we conclude that there are two kinds of ova in the
ovary, one set pre-determined to develop into males and the other
set pre-determined to develop into females, it does not follow that
the relative numbers of these may not be changed as life goes on,
e.g. in relation to the diet of the parent. Even if we conclude that
there are two kinds of eggs, it does not follow that the determina-
tion of these is absolute ; it may be strengthened or weakened in
the process of fertilization, or by environmental influences during
early development.

In the second place, we must be careful in arguing from one
set of organisms to another. What determines sex in frogs may
not hold true for cattle ; what determines sex in rotifers may not
apply to birds. Nature is very manifold, and it may quite well be
that sex is determined by a variety of factors operative in different
cases and at different stages in development.

a. — do environmental conditions, operating on the sexually
undetermined developing offspring-organism (after
fertilization), share in Determining its Sex?

6. The first possibility which we shall discuss is that environ-
mental influences acting on the developing organism (embryo or
larva), may determine or help to determine whether it is to become
a male or a female. This possibility assumes that in certain cases
the developing organism is for some time indeterminate as regards
sex. That this is not a wild assumption, is evident when we
remember that in the case of many animals it is for a long time
impossible to distinguish the sexes.

In support of the theory that environmental influences may
determine sex in developing organisms, assumed to be indetermi-
nate, reference has been made for many years past to a series of
experiments on tadpoles, carried on by Professor Emile Yung, of
Geneva, to whom recognition is due for beginning experimental
investigation of the subject at a time when that mode of approach
was much neglected.

Let us recall some of Yung's evidence. Tadpoles are said to
linger for some time in a state of sex-indifference or potential herm-
aphroditism. In normal conditions there are about 57 females to
43 males in the hundred. But tadpoles fed with beef, fish and
frog-flesh, yielded respectively 78, 81 and 92 females in a hundred.
This was, of course, a very interesting result, but it has been pointed
out that Yung did not pay sufficient attention to differential mor-
tality, that he had not sufficiently large numbers, and that although
some tadpoles are potentially hermaphrodite (with testes around
the ovaries), there are others which are quite distinctly male or

The President's Address. By J. Arthur Thomson. 145

female even in young stages. But the most important criticism is
the first, which leads Beard, for instance, to say that Yung's experi-
ments are only of importance in regard to the relative viability of
the two sexes.

It is necessary to have renewed experiments on a large scale,
and to have more precise data as to the time when the sex of the
tadpole is unmistakably distinguishable. One of the objections
raised against Yung's conclusions is that even in natural conditions
the percentage of females is sometimes very high, but we would
note that finding, say, 86 ' 8 p.c. of females in a collection of frogs
from a pond does not in itself prove that Yung's results were falla-
cious. There may have been, for instance, peculiar nutritive con-
ditions in the locality where the collection was made.

7. Various observers — Landois, Treat, and Gentry — have noted
that when insufficient food is given to a crowd of caterpillars there
is an unusually large number of males. But as the sex of the cater-
pillar is said to be fixed when it leaves the egg, the experiments
were probably irrelevant, and the most that they showed was that
there are sometimes great differences in the rate of juvenile mor-
tality of the two sexes. Professor Poulton observes in regard to
the poplar hawk-moth (Smeririthus pojndi), for instance, that the
female larvae being larger require more food, and will therefore
starve first when supplies are scarce. Kellogg and Bell found that
the sex of the silkworm is not appreciably affected by the nutrition
of parents or even grandparents, and Cuenot found that the sex of
blow-fly larvae was not affected by what they ate or by what their
parents ate.

8. It must be admitted, then, that there is no cogent evidence
to show that environmental influences operating on a developing
organism may decide what its sex is to be. On the other hand,
when we recall how a little nutritive attention makes a worker-
grub a queen-bee, or how Aphides produce females parthenogenetic-
ally through months (or even years) of high feeding and pleasant
temperature, and how the advent of autumn, with its cold and its
scarcity of food, is followed by a birth of males, and so on, we may
not be able to share the dogmatism of some who assert that the
theory of the environmental determination of sex is preposterous.
We shall consider in a subsequent section the question of the
influence of the environment on the parents.

B. — Is the Sex quite Uxpredestined in the germ-cells

BEFORE FERTILIZATION, AND IS IT THEN SETTLED BY THE
RELATIVE CONDITION OF THE GAMETES, OR BY A BALANCING
OF THE TENDENCIES THEY BEAR, NEITHER GAMETE BEING
NECESSARILY DECISIVE ?

9. Hofacker (1823) and Sadler (1830) independently published
statistics in support of the theory that when the male parent is the

146 Transactions of the Society.

older the offspring are preponderatingly male, and vice versa. In
short, the sex of the offspring tends to be that of the older parent.
This has not been confirmed, and Schultze's experiments tell strongly
against it.

Yet it seems fair to notice, that if the germ-cells remain for
some time undetermined in regard to the sex which they will ex-
press— in other words, if they retain for some time the potentiality
of either — there is no a priori reason against the theory that the
absolute and relative ages of the parents may have influence.

Or, again, even if the ova and spermatozoa are, from their first
appearance as such, determined towards female-production or to-
wards male-production, the age of the parent may favour the
production of one kind rather than of the other, or may favour the
survival of one kind rather than of the other.

10. It is hazardous for the inexpert to draw conclusions from
statistics, but there seems evidence in mankind of a correlation
between the age of the mother and the sex of the child. The
younger mothers have more female children ; the older mothers
have more male children. On this the self-regulating balance of
sex in a nation depends. When females are scarce — for instance,
in a colony — they mate early, and supply the demand for girls.
When men are scarce — for instance, after war — there are more
late marriages, and therefore more boys.*

11. By many authors, e.g. Girou, and at various dates, the
theory has been propounded that the sex of the offspring tends to
be that of the more vigorous parent. This is a favourite opinion
among breeders and among the fathers of many boys, but it lacks
substantiation, and the concept of comparative vigour is too vague
to be useful.

So far as parental vigour may depend on what may be called
strained reproduction, or on deterioration supposed to result from
close in-breeding, Schultze's experiments on mice do not in the
least confirm the view that it has any effect on the proportions of
the sexes.

Starkweather was responsible for the theory that the sex of the
offspring tends to be the opposite of that of the superior parent ;
but there do not seem to be any secure facts warranting the idea
that a prepotent sire has any influence on the sex of the offspring,
giving them a bias either towards his own sex or towards the
opposite.

11a. Van Lint maintains that the offspring has the sex of the
sexually weaker parent, i.e. the parent whose sex-cells are relatively
the weaker at the time of fertilization. If a relatively feeble ovum
is fertilized by a relatively vigorous spermatozoon, the embryo will
be a female, but its body will follow the father. The author

* See R. J. Ewart, Nature, Jan. 5, 1911.

The President's Address. By J. Arthur Thomson. 147

explains under six heads what is meant by being sexually weaker
or stronger, but he naively points out that the sure and certain
sign of a man's being more sexually vigorous than his wife is his
having a daughter. The sex of the child settles the question.
" Le sexe de l'enfant tranchera la question." The theory lacks
scientific backing.

12. It has been repeatedly suggested that a determining factor
may be found in the relative maturity or freshness of the sex-cells
which unite in fertilization. Thury and other breeders have main-
tained that an ovum fertilized soon after ovulation is likely to
produce a female. That is to say, the fresher ovum, not exhausted
in any way, e.g. by continuiug to live without feeding, will tend to
produce a female. The bias of the ovum may be corroborated or
contradicted by the condition of the fertilizing spermatozoon.

As the outcome of a very large series of experiments, Professor
Richard Hertwig found that either over-ripeness or under-ripeness
of the eggs (due to artificially delaying or hastening fertilization)
led to a large excess of males. Unfortunately, as in the case of
Yung's experiments, the cogency of Hertwig's results is lessened
by the high mortality of the tadpoles and the possibility that this
is differential.

A side-light is here available from Vernou's experiments on
hybridizing sea-urchins, for he found that the offspring of a cross
usually exhibited the characters of the parent whose germ-cells
were the fresher, the less stale, at the time of fertilization.

13. From a survey of 200,000 births in Buenos Ayres, Pearl
found that the proportion of males is distinctly greater (1 ■ 5 per
cent.) when the parents are of different races.

14. In connexion with fertilization we may notice a theory
that has been suggested by Prof. H. E. Ziegler. Let us start with
a fertilized ovum whose chromosomes have become fixed towards
female development : at a certain stage in the development the
reproductive cells are segregated ; let us suppose that they, like
the fertilized ovum, have a predisposition to develop into females ;
let us suppose that this predisposition is not affected by nutritive
oscillations in the body ; let us suppose a similar state of affairs in
a male ; and that fertilization occurs. A number of chromosomes,
say twelve, in a spermatozoon from the male parent, which tend by
hypothesis to be the material basis of male offspring, unite in
fertilization with an equal number of chromosomes in an ovum
from the female parent, which tend by hypothesis to be the
material basis of female offspring, then the fertilized ovum will
not be biased towards the production of either sex, as far as its
complement of chromosomes is concerned. On this view the
proportions of the sexes should be equal, which is often far from
being the case.

Prof. Ziegler's suggestion is that since the parental chromo-

L 48 Transactions of the Society.

somes include contributions from grandfather and grandmother,
and since the relative numbers of these depend on the chances of
the reduction division in maturation, it will be a "toss-up"
whether grandfatherly or grandmotherly chromosomes predominate.
If the former, the child will be a boy ; if the latter, a girl.

Suppose the potential offspring has 12 chromosomes from the
father and 12 from the mother, as in the human species : " If
amongst the former there are 8 grandmother chromosomes and
amongst the latter 7 grandmother chromosomes, the child will be
a ghd, for there are at least 15 of the 24 derived from the grand-
mother's side." *

15. Probably, howrever, this speculation is inadmissible. We
must rid our minds of the view (held by many in the past) that
there is in ordinary cases any necessary intrinsic bias in the egg to
produce a female, any necessary intrinsic bias in the spermatozoon
to incite the development of a male, and that there is thus a
combination of maleness and femaleness in the fertilized egg. It
is enough to recall the fact that the drone-bee has a mother but
no father, and the same is true of many Hymenoptera. This is
but a striking instance of the numerous facts which lead us to
conclude that every germ-cell — whether ovum or spermatozoon —
has in it the potentiality of the distinctive characters of both sexes.
At some stage or other, as we are discussing, something occurs,
perhaps a fixing of the metabolism-rhythm, perhaps some altera-
tion of the ratio between nucleoplasm and cytoplasm, perhaps the
introduction of a specific qualitative sex-determinant in fertilization,
which decides whether the masculine or feminine hereditary char-
acters will find expression.

16. Finally, in reference to the question of the relative condi-
tions of the parents at the time of fertilization, we must refer to
0. Schultze's prolonged experiments with enormous numbers of
mice, which are good subjects, being ready to breed when seven
weeks old, and littering it may be every three weeks, if not allowed
to suckle. He found that the proportions of the sexes were un-
affected by age of parent, by apparent vigour, by consanguineous
unions, by frequency of births, or by any kind of nutritive change.
And one doubts whether there is much warrant for supposing that
the germ-cells come together free from any sex-predestination, or
that much importance can be attached to their relative condition
at the time of amphimixis. On the other hand, the experiments
of such a careful worker as Eichard Hertwig incline one to keep
the question open a little longer. The possibility that determin-
ation occurs in fertilization when already predestinated germ-cells
meet, will be discussed later on.

* T. H. Morgan, " Experimental Zoology," 1907, p. 419.

The President's Address. By ,/. Arthur Thomson. 149
C. — Is the Sex Predestined at a very early stage by the

CONSTITUTION OF THE OVUM, OR OF THE SPERMATOZOON,
OR OF BOTH, THERE BEING FEMALE-PRODUCING AND MALE-
PRODUCING GERM-CELLS, PREDETERMINED FROM THE BE-
GINNING, AND ARISING INDEPENDENTLY OF ENVIRONMENTAL
INFLUENCE ?

On a third view, the bias towards one sex is established at a
very early date — in the germ-cells themselves.

(a) Two kinds of Ova.

17. It may be that there are two kinds of ova — some pre-
disposed to developing into males, others predisposed to developing
into females — a view not inconsistent with the assumption that all
ova carry the material basis that can produce a complete equip-
ment of both masculine and feminine characters. What evidence
is there of two kinds of ova ?

There is no doubt that some animals normally produce two
sizes of ova. In certain cases, e.g. Phylloxera among Insects, and
Hydatina senta among Eotifers, there are large eggs which develop
into females, and small ones which develop into males. Both
develop parthenogenetically, so that the problem is not compli-
cated by the influence of the sperm.

In Dinophilus apatris, according to Von Mai sen, and in a mite,
Pcdiculopsis, according to Eeuter, where fertilization occurs as
usual, there are large and small ova, respectively female-producers
and male-producers.

One must not too hastily conclude that the size determines the
sex, since it may equally well be that the predisposition to a
particular sex determines the size. The ovum of relatively greater
anabolic bias will gather into itself more reserve material.
Perhaps the occurrence of two kinds of ova will turn out to be
commoner than is supposed. Thus Baltzer has recently described
it in sea-urchins.

18. In some of the higher Pteridophytes there are two kinds of
spores, micro- and macro-spores, which produce respectively male
and female prothallia. Professor E. B. Wilson notes that a similar
predestination, not marked by visible differences, has been proved
by Blakeslee in both zygotes and spores of various species of fungi,
and that it has also been demonstrated in liverworts and mosses.
He refers in particular to the recent studies of the Marchals on
dioecious mosses. " Isolation cultures prove that the asexual
spores, though similar in appearance, are individually predestined
as male-producing and female-producing ; and all efforts to alter
this predestination by changes in the conditions of nutrition, such

150 Transactions of the Society.

as are known to be effective in the case of fern prothallia, failed to
produce the least effect."

19. The view that there are two kinds of ova, determined
ab initio as male-producers and female-producers, has found a
vigorous supporter in Beard, who finds visible evidence of this in
the skate. He maintains that the sex is determined when the
primitive germ-cells divide into oocytes. In liis 1902 paper on
" The Determination of Sex in Animal Development," Beard
scouted the idea of environmental interference with the deter-
mination of sex. " Any interference with, or alteration of, the
determination of sex is absolutely beyond human power. To hope
ever to influence or modify its manifestations would be not less
futile and vain than to imagine it possible for man to breathe the
breath of life into inanimate matter." To this, an experimenter
like Russo would answer that he has succeeded in effectively
interfering with the determination of sex. Although it may not
be possible to alter the bias of an egg which has become fixed as a
male-producer or a female-producer, it may be possible by altered
nutrition to change the proportions of these two kinds of eggs in
the maternal ovary, and it may be possible in other ways to change
the normal proportions of survival.

20. We give one instance of the numerous facts that might be
cited as suggestive in connexion with the theory of two kinds of
ova determined in the ovary as male-producers and female-producers.
In the case of five eggs laid by a sparrow-hawk (according to
Shufeldtj, the first became a male, the second a female, the third a
male, the fourth a female, and the fifth a male — in regular alter-
nation. Yet these were produced in a short time from one ovary,
and probably fertilized by the same set of spermatozoa.

21. Of much interest are the facts of Poly-embryony — the pro-
duction of multiple embryos from one ovum. In the armadillo
Praopus (Tatnsia) hybrida von Jhering found on two occasions
eight embryos within one chorion — presumably, therefore, from
one ovum — and all were males. In some parasitic Hymenopterous
insects, e.g. Encyrtus, investigated by Marchal and Bugnion, Lito-
mastix and Ayeniaspis, investigated by Silvestri, one segmented
ovum forms a group of embryo, all of the same sex — female if the
egg be fertilized, male if it be not fertilized. These facts suggest
that the sex of the offspring is quite determined in the egg.

(b) Two kinds of Spermatozoa.

22. In about thirty different kinds of animals, such as the
freshwater snail Pahidina, and the freshwater beetle, there are
dimorphic spermatozoa, and it has been suggested that each kind
is predisposed towards the development of one sex. There is
however, no definite evidence of this.

The President's Address. By J. Arthur Thomson. 151

(c) The Accessory Chromosome.

23. Of great interest are the facts that have recently come to
light regarding what is called the accessory chromosome. In a
number of Insects, Myriopods, and Arachnids, the females have
more chromosomes in their cells than the males have. In the
simplest cases (Anasa, Protenor) the female has one more chromo-
some than the male, and the egg has one more likewise. Now
half of the spermatozoa differ from their neighbours in having the
same number of chromosomes as the egg, while the others have
one fewer. This extra chromosome which half have and half have
not is called the X-element or accessory chromosome. There are
facts which go to show that fertilization of the eggs by one class of
spermatozoa results in males, by the other in females. When two
equal numbers come together the result is a female.

The chromosomic dimorphism has been proved in about a
hundred species, but all are not equally convincing, and there are
many variations in detail. As the subject is difficult, especially
without diagrams, and as the facts have been repeatedly summed
up in the last few years (e.g. by Wilson, who has contributed more
than any other to the investigation), we do not propose to do more
than refer to two or three important points.

(a) In many cases, instead of there being an accessory chromo-
some in one half of the spermatozoa and no corresponding body in
the other half, there is a " large idiochromosome " or X-element in one
half and a " small idiochromosome " or Y-element in the other half.

(b) The evidence that the one set of spermatozoa induce male-
development and the other set female-development is indirect ; it
is obtained by an examination of the state of the chromosomes in
the body-cells of the offspring. The Y-element, for instance, is
found only in the males, while the X-element is found in both
sexes, but doubled in the female, single in the male.

(c) Wilson gives the following formulae : —

(a) In the absence of a Y-element

Egg X -f spermatozoon X = zygote XX (female).
Egg X -f- spermatozoon no X = zygote X (male).

(b) In the presence of a Y-element

Egg X + spermatozoon X = zygote XX (female).
Egg X + spermatozoon Y = zygote XY (male).

24. A fine corroboration of the importance of the chromosomes
has been recently afforded by the work of T. H. Morgan on Phyl-
loxera and of von Baehr on Aphis saliceti. In these forms half of
the spermatocytes degenerate (as Meves pointed out in the bee),
namely those without the accessory chromosome ; therefore all the
spermatozoa are female-producers, and every one knows that all

152 Transactions of the Society.

the fertilized ova produce females. An interesting accessory dis-
covery is that in Phylloxera and Aphides; the males have in their
bodies one chromosome fewer than the, females have. " The male-
producing egg," Wilson notes, " must therefore eliminate one
chromosome, and this, we cannot doubt, is the X-element."

25. These cytological studies are so very striking that one
inquires anxiously as to the distribution of the phenomena in the
animal kingdom. There have been some noteworthy recent exten-
sions.

An accessory chromosome is reported by Boveri and Gulick in
Hcterakis, a Nematode of the pheasant. The ovum has live
chromosomes ; the sperms are of two types, one with four, the
other with five — a condition similar to that described by Wilson
for Protenor, one of the Hemiptera. In the common Ascaris
mcgaloccphala there is also evidence of an accessory chromosome,
but it seems at present somewhat discrepant and difficult. As
one would expect from the difficulty of the inquiry, there is still
considerable discrepancy of description in regard to many cases in
which an accessory chromosome has been affirmed. It is very
interesting to inquire whether there is any hint of an accessory
chromosome in Vertebrates. In a recent paper, Professor M. F.
Guyer brings forward evidence to show that in man half of the
spermatids (or immature spermatozoa) have ten, and half twelve
chromosomes, which would correspond to one of Wilson's cases,
Syromastcs, where half of the spermatids were found to possess
two more chromosomes than the others. Guyer has found evidence,
still unpublished, which leads him to think that, as regards acces-
sory chromosomes, conditions obtain among Vertebrates (fowl,
guinea-pig, rat, and man) similar to those found in numerous
Tracheates, and he ventures to express the expectation that the
somatic cells of man will be found to contain twenty-two chromo-
somes, and those of woman twenty-four chromosomes.

26. The theory that the presence of one X-element in a fer-
tilized ovum means male offspring, and that the presence of two
means female offspring is morphological, and our physiological
sense is left unsatisfied. Is the difference significant in itself, or
as an index of metabolic differences ? If the eggs with more
chromatin than their neighbours develop into females, and if
chromatin be an index of a relatively preponderant anabolism or
anabolic capacity, can the theory be brought into line with the
thesis of " The Evolution of Sex," that the female is the outcome
and expression of relatively preponderant anabolism, and the male
of relatively preponderant katabolism ? On the other hand, it
may be that the additional chromatin material is of qualitative
importance. To give point to his theory, Professor E. B. Wilson
suggests quite provisionally that the X-element contains factors
(enzymes or hormones ? ) that are necessary for the production of

The President's Address. By J. Arthur Thomson. 15

o

both the male and the female characters ; that these are so
adjusted that in the presence of a single X-element the male
character dominates, or is set free ; and that the association of
two such elements leads to a reaction which sets free the female
character.

27. Here we may refer to Professor E. B. Wilson's proposal to
draw a distinction between sexual predetermination and sexual
predestination. " The definitive determination of maleness or
femaleness only occurs when all the factors necessary to their
production have been brought together. This may be effected
before fertilization (' progamic determination ' of Haecker), but may
also first ensue upon union of the gametes (' syngamic determina-
tion '). Thus one rmiy suppose that all the sexual eggs of a queen-
bee and of Maupas' Hydatina are predestined towards maleness, but
this is reversed by fertilization when determination occurs."

D. — Are maleness and femaleness Mendelian characters ?

28. We have seen that many facts point to the conclusion that
the sex-cells have definite sexual tendencies or predispositions.
The question has naturally arisen whether these tendencies to
male-production or female-production correspond to two contrasted
Mendelian characters, to the dominant and recessive members of a
pair of allelomorphs. This Mendelian interpretation of sex, first
suggested by Strasburger, has been developed by Castle, Correns,
Bateson, and others. As Professor Wilson points out, the inter-
pretation has taken " three forms, which exhaust the a priori
possibilities. These are, first, that both sexes are sex-hybrids, or
heterozygotes (Castle) ; second, that the male alone is a hetero-
zygote, the female being a homozygote recessive (Correns) ; third,
that the female is the heterozygote, the male being a homozygote
recessive (Bateson)."

As Professor Wilson has shown, each of these forms of the theory
has its special difficulties, which seem to be most serious in the
case of the first.

Professor Correns's theory was based on beautiful experiments
in crossing dioecious and monoecious forms of Bryony, which
showed that the monoecious condition behaves as a unit character,
which is recessive to the dioecious.

The experiments made by Correns go to show that the pollen-
grains of the dioecious Bryony, though apparently all alike, must
be regarded as of two kinds in equal numbers — male-producing
and female-producing. What immediately arise, as a matter of
fact, are the rudimentary male prothallia, which produce the
reproductive gametes or pollen-nuclei, and the egg-cells fertilized
by half of these produce male-plants, while the egg-cells fertilized
by the other half produce female-plants.

154 Transactions of the Society.

The third form of the Mendelian interpretation is supported by
a number of very striking facts, especially in regard to the common
magpie-moth (Abraxas grossulariata) and the canary. Let us re-state
it very briefly. Assuming that there are sex-determinants of male-
ness and femaleness, the experimenters suggest (1) that these behave
as Mendelian units, femaleness being always dominant over male-
ness ; (2) that female individuals are heterozygous as regards sex
(having maleness recessive) and that they give rise to equal con-
tingents of male-producing and female-producing ova ; (3) that male
individuals are homozygous as regards sex, and give rise only to
male-producing spermatozoa ; (4) when a male-producing sper-
matozoon fertilizes a male-producing ovum the result is of course a
male ; when a male-producing spermatozoon fertilizes a female-pro-
ducing ovum the result is a female, femaleness being by hypothesis
dominant over maleness.

29. Doncaster refers to the confirmation which the Mendelian
theory of sex receives from the results of castration. In Vertebrates
the castration of the male may prevent the expression of masculine
features, but it does not induce the expression of feminine characters.
This may mean that the male is homozygous. I would, however,
point out that in many cases there is a lack of positiveness in the
feminine characters ; the masculine characters are usually positive
and distinctive. In other words, a good deal of latent femininity
might express itself in the castrated male without there being much
to show for it. It would be extremely interesting, if feasible, to
experiment with some case like the Red-necked Phalarope, where
the female bird is the more masculine of the two.

When a Vertebrate female is castrated, or when the ovary
atrophies, there is often a development of masculine characters.
Let me quote a striking case from Guthrie. A spae'd pullet may
acquire not only the outward structural features of the opposite
sex — cock's comb, wattles, long hackle and tail feathers, rapidly
developing spurs, carriage, etc. — but the behaviour as well and the
pugnacious character.

It may be pointed out that these facts, while fitting in well with
the Mendelian interpretation that the female is heterozygous, also
bear out the general idea that every germ-cell carries with it a
complete inheritance of masculine and feminine characters, and
that it is the particular kind of metabolic rhythm set up that de-
termines maleness and femaleness, and, through this, or more
directly, affords the liberating stimuli for the masculine or feminine
characters.

In Crustaceans the course of events is curiously the reverse of
what is true of Vertebrates. A female whose ovary has been
destroyed by a Rhizocephalous parasite has its secondary sex
characters reduced, but a castrated male assumes more or less com-
pletely the characters of the female. Perhaps the female characters

The President's Address. By J. Arthur Thomson. 155

are more positive here, e.g., the broad abdomen. " If the parasite
dies and the host recovers, the ovary of the female may again become
functional ; but in the male under such circumstances eggs may be
produced in the testis. Geoffrey Smith concludes from these obser-
vations and from others on the Cirripedes, that the female is homo-
zygous in sex and the male heterozygous. There seems no a priori
reason," Mr. Doncaster continues, " why this should not be true in
the case of Crustacea and flowering plants, while the converse is the
case in moths and Vertebrates."

30. The fact that the proportions of the sexes are sometimes
very variable (as Heape points out in regard to canaries) does not
of itself tell against the. view that the ova are determined at an
early stage to be male- producers or female-producers. There may
be a process of discriminate selection during the maturing of the
ova, and we know that in higher Vertebrates the possible ova do
not all come to maturity.

That the proportions of the sexes in different types are very
diverse seems at first si"ht to tell against the idea of an internal
automatic production of two kinds of gametes — " against the exist-
ence of an intrinsic and uniform mechanism of sex -production and
against the specific assumption that sex is transmitted as a Mende-
lian character." But Professor E. B. Wilson suggests that this
difficulty may be overcome by supposing that there is a dispropor-
tion in the number of one kind of spermatozoa (like that which
reaches a climax in Aphids, Daphnids, etc., where only the female-
producing spermatozoa are left), or that there is a certain proportion
of impotent spermatozoa, as is well known to be true of the pollen-
grains of some flowering plants, like Mirabilis.

E. — Can environmental and functional influences, opera-
ting THROUGH THE PARENT, OR, IN SHORT, THE PARENT'S
ACQUIRED PECULIARITIES, ALTER THE PROPORTION OF EFFEC-
TIVE FEMALE-PRODUCING AND MALE-PRODUCING GERM-CELLS ?

31. Supposing that an immature ovum is as likely to develop
into a male as into a female, we can conceive it possible that a
change in the nutrition of the parent may decide its destiny. Or,
going further back, supposing the original germ-cells are already, as
Mendelian theory would lead us to expect, divided into two camps,
male-producing and female-producing, it may be that environmental
conditions can influence the relative rate of increase and percentage
of survival in these two camps.

32. From human statistics some have tried to prove that abun-
dant food favours the production of female offspring, and vice versa ;
but others have concluded, also from statistics, that the parental
nutrition is of no moment, unless in bringing about a differential
death-rate. The fact that 30 p.c. of human twins are of different

156 Transactions of the Society.

sexes seems enough to show that the dieting of the parent is not of
great importance. Schenk's notorious theory (1898) that the sex
of children could be adjusted by dieting the mothers, rested on
entirely insufficient evidence — a very small number of cases.

In a statistical enquiry in London, Prof. Punnett found that
the proportion of males is lowest (99 ■ 5) in the poorest quarter
and highest (100*7) in the wealthiest, but he concluded that the
differences are due to differential infantile mortality, birth-rate,
and probably marriage-rate.

33. Careful experiments have been made, e.g. by Cuenot and
Schultze, on the possible influence of the nutrition of the mam-
malian parent (e.g. mouse) on the sex of the offspring ; but the
results are all against the reality of this supposed influence, in
which, however, some breeders strongly believe. Schultze extended
his experiments over three generations, but the high feeding of
grandparents as well as parents did not seem to have any influence
on the proportion of the sexes among the offspring.

Against these results, however, we have to balance the very
important work of Heape, who has brought forward evidence for
mammals and birds that peculiarities in nutrition and in other
environmental influences may exert a selective influence on the
germ-cells, affecting the proportion of male-producing and female-
producing gametes. "Through the medium of nutrition supplied
to the ovary, either by the quantity or the quality of that nutrition,
either by its direct effect upon the ovarian ova or by its indirect
effect, a variation in the proportion of the sexes of the ova pro-
duced, and therefore of the young born, is effected in all animals
in which the ripening of the ovarian ova is subject to selective
action." " When no selective action occurs in the ovary, the pro-
portion of the sexes of ovarian ova produced is governed by the
laws of heredity."

34. As it seems to us, Eusso's recent experiments in feeding
rabbits with lecithin lend considerable support to the view that
the germ-cells may be pre-disposed to one sex or the other by the
nutritive condition of the parent, and to the view that the differ-
ence between the sexes is primarily a question of the rhythm of
metabolism. Eusso attaches much less importance to the chromo-
somes and much more importance to the nature of the metabolism
than do most biologists of to-day. He says, in so many words,
that he believes the sex of the offspring to depend on the special
metabolism of the germ-cells ; and he thinks he has succeeded in
artificially altering the metabolism of the ovarian ova, and thus
altering the normal proportions of the sexes. In the normal ovary
there are well-nourished and ill-nourished ova, and the proportion
of the former can be increased by lecithin treatment.

Female rabbits fed (in various ways) with lecithin developed
large ovaries, large Graafian follicles, ova rich in nutritive material,

The President's Address. By J. Arthur Thomson. 157

and an unusual number of female offspring. The sperm may, as
it were, corroborate the bias of the ovum, for the percentage of
female offspring is higher when both parents are fed with lecithin.
It is not possible to follow the ova and prove that a relatively
anabolic one always becomes a female, and never a male, and so
on, but the argument from altered proportions seems sound. It is
interesting to notice Russo's statement that in nature male
offspring are always in the majority, from 52 to 58 per cent. A
curious result of Russo's experiments must also be mentioned,
though we cannot follow it up — that the more highly nourished ova
produce not only females, but females with the maternal colour.

It has been objected to Russo's work that one of the two kinds
of ova he distinguished was due to degenerative changes, and that
he worked with selected families of rabbits.

An acute friend, Dr. Ronald Macfie, has suggested to me that
it would be extremely interesting to try on both parents the
converse of Russo's experiment, by seeking to promote relatively
greater katabolism — for instance, by increased oxygenation.

35. We should be slow, I think, to reject the view that changes
in nutrition and other environmental conditions may affect the
mother so as to alter the ordinary proportions of the sexes.
Issakowitsch, working with the parthenogenetic females of the
Daphnid Simocephalus, von Malsen, working with Dinophilus
apatris, in which the ova are fertilized, found that differences of
temperature affected the proportion of the sexes, apparently by
affecting the nutrition of the mothers. Both sets of experiments
are the more satisfactory in that they seem to be free from any
fallacy due to differential death-rate in the young of the two sexes.

36. Many experiments have been made with the Rotifer
Hydatina senta, but the results are conflicting. There is great sex
dimorphism, the males being small and gutless. The females are
from birth either male-producers or female-producers ; and, accord-
ing to Maupas and ISTussbaum, this is determined before birth,
while the female embryo is still within its mother's uterus, by
conditions of temperature and nutrition. "Well-fed mothers produce
females which produce females only ; starved mothers produce
females which produce males only. According to I'unnett's
researches, however, changes of temperature and nutrition have no
effect ; but some stocks give rise to many male-producing females,
others to few or none.

37. Another piece of evidence in support of the conclusion that
environmental influences may count is furnished by Nussbaum's
elaborate experiments on Hydra grisea, which he subjected to vary-
ing nutritive conditions. In this species hermaphrodite and dioecious
forms occur and periods of asexual budding. Nussbaum found that
he could bring on sexual reproduction by altering the nutrition,
that the optimum nutritive conditions were marked by a pre-

April 19th, 1911 m

158 Transactions of the Society.

dominant production of female polyps, and that groups wholly male
could be produced by relative starving. It seems from these experi-
ments that in Hydra at any rate the nutrition of the body determines
the production of ovary or testis. This corroborates the physio-
logical view of sex. It would be interesting, though obviously
difficult, to go a step further and inquire whether the fertilized ova
of highly nourished females showed any tendency, in normal en-
vironment, to develop into female rather than mule or hermaphro-
dite polyps.

38. The case of Hydra suggests a reference to analogous facts
in regard to plants. Klebs lias showm that the mode of reproduc-
tion in Vaucheria repens is very plastic under environmental in-
fluence. By altering the temperature and illumination, for instance,
he was able to suppress the oogonia. Prantl found that spores of
the Royal Fern and of Cevatoptcris thalictroides sown in soil without
nitrogenous supplies developed into male prothallia, that female
organs were formed when ammonium nitrate was supplied, and that
wholly male prothallia might become wholly female prothallia.
Similar results have been obtained for horsetails by Buchtien.

It is plain, of course, that in cases like fern-prothallia and
Hydra, what actually occurred was the inhibition or suppression
of one set of sexual organs in favour of another in normally herm-
aphrodite forms. Therefore such cases, though suggestive and analo-
gous, are not quite to the point.

39. Against the possibility of environmental influence are Stras-
burger's numerous experiments on dioecious Phanerogams, such as
Mercurialis perennis, spinach and hemp. He found that changes in
illumination, soil, crowding, and so on, had no effect in altering the
proportions of male and female offspring. He is of opinion that in
such cases the sex is fixed by the time the seed is formed.

Conclusion.

40. The general trend of research is certainly towards the con-
clusion that in most cases the sex of the future offspring is pre-
destined at a very early stage in the germ-cells, though the actual
determination may not come about until fertilization occurs or
does not occur. The belief which used to be widespread that en-
vironmental c mditions sometimes determine the sex of the offspring
during development has in greater part yielded to a criticism of the
evidence, and to the demonstration given by the cytologists that
predestination of the gametes sometimes occurs early in their history.
It remains possible that the nutrition of the parents may influence
the proportions in which the two kinds of gametes are produced
and survive.

41. I find myself unable to get away from the view that there
may be no sex-determinant at all in the usual sense, but that what

The President's Address. By J. Arthur Thomson. 159

determines sex is a metabolism-rhythm, or a relation of nucleo-
plasm and cytoplasm, or a relation between Anabolism and
Katabolism.

Many sets of facts lead one to suppose that each sex-cell has a
complete equipment of masculine and feminine characters, and it
may be that the liberating stimulus which calls the one set or the
other into expression or development, is afforded by the metabolism
conditions that have been set up in the field of operations, which
lead also to the establishment of ovary or spermary, as the case
may be.*

That the fundamental thing is a physiological alternative is
suggested in various ways. For instance, there is the sometimes
striking evidence that sex is " a quality that pervades all the cells
of the organism." Professor Wilson notes that, " In the Mosses the
Marchals demonstrate that all the products of a single spore are
likewise immutably determined, since new plants formed by regene-
ration from fragments of the protonema, or from any part of the
gametophyte, are always of the same sex."

It must be remembered that many at least of those who are
keenest on the scent of morphological criteria are also alive to the
importance of trying to get at the physiological realities behind
these. Thus we find Professor Wilson saying, " Since the two
classes of spermatozoa differ in nuclear constitution it is highly
probable that they differ in respect to their metabolic processes."
Or, again, " Upon what conditions within the fertilized egg does the
sexual differentiation depend ? In some way, we may now be
reasonably sure, upon the physiological reactions of nucleus and
protoplasm."

And I may be pardoned, perhaps, for quoting from a recent able
article by Professor H. E. Jordan, the last paragraph : " The results
of the newer investigations on sex -determination seem, at least tem-
porarily, to have brought us back to the position of Geddes and
Thomson, namely, that femaleness is causally related to a dominat-
ing cell-anabolism, and maleness to a relatively preponderant cell-
katabolism. This conclusion would seem to be the base from which
future investigations will start in the attempt to further elucidate
the fundamental mechanism of sex-differentiation."

* When this was written I had not enjoyed the pleasure of reading Dr. C. E.
Walker's Hereditary Characters (1910). In the chapter on " Sex and Natural Selec-
tion " he says (p. 207), "The evidence then seems to suggest that the secondary
sexual characters are dependent for their development upon the presence of the
sexual glands in the individual, and that the potentiality of producing them is
present in all individuals of both sexes."

M 2

1(30 Transactions of the Society.

VII. — On the Measurement of Grayson's New Ten-Band Plate.
By A. A. C. Eliot Merlin.

(Bead December 21, 1910.)

Mr. Grayson has recently improved his ruling machine, and has
kindly sent me a new ten-band plate which I have measured, with
the most perfect appliances, and found to be much better than his
earlier productions, good as these are. The new plate exactly
resembles the older form, the ten groups running from yoVo to
Toooo °f an incn. and such is its accuracy that I greatly doubt
whether the old-fashioned methods of micrometry, still almost
invariably employed, could reveal the very slight inequalities
which exist in the spacing. No human work is, or can ever be,
perfect, but it is doubtful if any production of the kind has hitherto
approached so nearly to perfection.

The plate has been most carefully standardized with a picked
semi-apochromatic objective of I.M.P. 143 on 10-inch tube and
1*32 N.A., used with a W.A. of 0"95 and a screen. The micro-
meter is the Nelson-Powell screw-traversing form, which facilitates
accurate setting and reduces such errors to a minimum. This was,
of course, supported on a separate pillar-stand, and arranged so as
not to actually touch the tube of the Powell No. 1. When a plate
consisting of varying bands has to be measured, the most suitable
optical combination is such as will yield the best average results
over the entire range of rulings. With the magnification selected,
the interval between the lines of a y^oo m- sPacmg was found to
equal about field/3, while probably field/4, or field/5, would have
been chosen as likely to yield the best results had such spacings
been alone in question. Such a power, however, would have
proved a serious and unnecessary disadvantage on all the other
nine bands, and therefore, could not be reasonably selected for the
purpose of standardizing the whole plate.

The annexed table * (first set of columns) gives the results
obtained. Each spacing throughout the plate was spanned twice,
the " fixed " wire being first set by screw to the lower edge of a
line, and the interval measured to the lower edge of the next ; the
setting was then repeated from upper to upper edges of the lines,
and the mean of the two readings registered as the interval

* The table herewith gives the results of Mr. Merlin's measurements in sum-
marized form. The complete tables of measurements are kept in the Society's
library, and are available for reference.

i In Aohromat.

l.M.P. 44 4; N.A. 079;
W.A. 0-54 and Screen.

•s3u!pw3>i
}() inMpj

iH

CO
CO
CM

rH CM

CO CO
co co
<n cm

eo e*

r* »- :

oo oo
CM CM

•(TO "! 3"!

-piO}l 133UBU1S

o
m

CO
CM

CO -*n

CM O
Tji CO
i-l CM

rH

CM

•(I\l ut3ui
-pvay isaiBjjf)

CO
t~

CO
CM

t- CO

CO to
-# 00
rH CM

CM

• • • •

• • • • •

CM

•sSuicbj}!
j> j.iqran^j

o
1—1

o m

rH

O rH •
rH

i in. Apochromat.

l.M.P. 20-2; N.A. 0-70 ;
W.A. 0-54 and Screen.

•sqinoni/l
ui s9ui

-pvsy JO UVBtfl

lfi>

CO
CM

i-H

cs o

CO t-
rH r-<

OS t-

co os :

CM CM

rH i-H

XIX] ui3ui
-pBa;| qsjnvuig

CO

in

CM
rH

t- m

CO CO
CO CM

T-l

•(J-Q uiSni

-pK9y J3J1B3JQ

CM

rH

t~ co
m t-

CD CN

rH

m

OS

•r-i

■sSajpnaji

10 JdqUinjJ

o

rH

o m

rH

O rH .
rH

"# '

. .

*

1 in. Apochromat.

l.M.P. 11; N.A., 0-32 W.A.
0-27 and Screen.

'3qtOOORl/l

ui sSui
-p«ay jo usaj^

»- CO

rH t-<

•era "I 3u!
pnojj ^dn«uis

o

6

cs co

-# o

CO t-

. . • ■

• ■ • • • •

(1(1 aiSai
-pioy ^sajBaiQ

CM

fc-

i-l CO

t- rH
CO fc-

•

• • . . ■ ■

' '

•sSnipiwg
jo aaqran^i

o

rH

o m

rH

Powell Objective.

l.M.P. 122; N.A. 1-27; used

with negative Amplifier at

W.A. U-95.

■sqi000l/l"is3ui

-PB3JJ JO U\9\q

:

• •

: •

2087-0
2090 3
2087-0

© •
oo
O
CM

oo
© •

OS

o

CM

2085-3
2084 2

-pBrfy isanvuis

:

: ;

: : : :

415-4
346*5
294-4

OS

cb :

m

<M

CM

os :

CM
CM

CM ■<#

tb : co

O rH
CM -*

-a 'a «• 8ut

-psay isajBajf)

:

; :

: : : :

421-0
352-1
301-8

co :

CO
CM

rH

*# :

CO
CM

210-1
418-8

■s8uipray a2pa
uw[^ joiaqtmif;

:

: •

: : : :

o • o • o •

r-i • i-< ■ r-i '

O •
rH •

o •

i-H •

o >m

rH •

Semi-Apochromatic Objective.

l.M.P. on 10 in. tube 140;

N.A. 1-32 W.A. 0-95

and Screen.

sqiOOOl/l tnsSui
-pB9;i jo UBajv

CO
CS

I-H

«

I-H

O OS

<M rH

OS OS

^ CM rH CO

OON CO CO * CO

OS rH

CO t-

co co

CO O 00 CO
(M CM rH rH

OS OS CS OS

O 00 CO OS CO OS
CM rH CM i-H rH rH
OS OS OS OS OS OS

CO OS
rH rH
OS OS

eo co

CM rH

OS OS

est co '.

CM rH

OS OS

-pua}[ jsaiiBtus

CO

t-

rH

CO o

00 -tf CS o

m co o t- o cs

CO OS

O CO

y-t t~

t- CO

m rH

-* as

o co c- t-

O rH CM rH
CO OS CM OS

CM CO CM b- OS 00
00 i-l in rH CM rH
rH OS rH OS i— 1 OS

CM CO

rH r-t
i-H OS

r-i 00
O rH
rH OS

rH m t

OS rH
OS

•8U01S)AI(J

uuuq ui 3a|
-pBag isajBaio

co

CD

CM

CS

CM CM

CO oo t" •*

HO -* O CO rH

m -^

O -rH

00 CO

CM O
CD CM

-* OS

O CM •* OS
rH CM CO rH

CO OS CM OS

t~ O CO CM CM rH

CO rH m CM CO CM

rH OS rH OS rH OS

CO OS

r-t rH
1-H OS

t* OS
O rH

T-t OS

co cs :

OS rH
OS

•sSmprajj a3pa
-tiraj^jo jaqinn^;

o

rH

o m

rH

low o o

rH CM

m in o in mm

(M CO CO

o m

m m
•4

o m •
m

-

rH 3

w8

■at?

U rH

Second Band :
1/2000 in. ..
1/1000 in. . .

■ • " TJ • •

•• . . ^ ..••..••.. (3 . .

a — — rt — -~ a — — a -a •- PQ "T ,a

jgOOrPoo rtOO cSOO -OO

■TiCOi-l-g^HrH^qin-H^COrH gt-H
"m rH rH grHrH«2rHrH XHH £" i-H rH
H rH £ CO CO

Eiglith Band :
1/8000 in. ..
1/1000 in. ..

Ninth Band :
1/9000 in. . .
1/1000 in. ..

Tenth Band :
1/10000 in...
1/1000 in. ..
l/5000.hs. ..

162 Transactions of the Society.

between the rulings. By this plan setting errors are minimized,
and the distance from centre to centre of the rulings is shown. As
a matter of fact, there are occasional slight variations in the breadth
of the lines themselves, and thus measures merely from edge to
edge of a ruling may not indicate the exact distance from centre
to centre. In the older stage micrometers * the errors of spacing
were so gross that refinements of the kind were not usually
employed, or necessary, in their measurement, and indeed, we find
that the screw micrometer still almost universally used, with no
means of accurately adjusting its " fixed " wire, is a survival of
the rough methods now utterly inadequate when dealing with such
a masterpiece as Grayson's new plate. The Nelson-Powell screw-
setting micrometer is alone suitable for the purpose of all accurate
woidv, for the bi-filar kind, where each wire is independently
moved, introduces complicated vscrew errors.

A glance at the table will make it evident that the means
exhibit little variation, for, taking 920 '0 as the standard, the
greatest divergence on each side does not amount to quite four
drum divisions, or 3j3o1ooo" m-» ana- most °f the means are much
closer. In the measurements of the individual spacings, there is
an apparently somewhat marked inequality in the first yo\jo in-
space amounting to 6 • 3 divisions above the 920 ■ 0 mean, but this
only represents a difference of about yyoWo m-

In addition to standardizing the new plate, meaned measure-
ments were taken of the first ten spaces of the last six bands
using a Powell objective of I.M.P. 122 and 1*27 KA. This was
employed with a negative amplifier, it being furnished with a
correction collar, which enabled critical definition to be thus
obtained with a W.A. of 0 95. It was judged inadvisable to
measure the four coarser bands with this combination, as a y^-j in.
space would extend over more than three-fourths of the entire
field, making parallax any other errors possible, even when all
precautions are taken. The results are shown in the second set
of columns of the annexed table, the intervals representing the
distances from the centres of the lines. It will be seen that the
extremely minute inequalities of these bands are rendered very
manifest through the enormous magnification, which causes one
drum division to only equal about 2087O00 m-t

The next step consisted in the measurement of the diameters
of the first two lines of each band, which proved quite feasible
with the optical arrangements above specified. The highest of the
20 readings thus obtained was 49 '6 drum divisions, the lowest
41*0, and the mean was found to be 43*7 drum divisions.

With the magnification employed, 43 • 7 drum divisions represent

* See ' Carpenter,' 8th ed. p. 275.

t This is more particularly applicable to the complete table of measure-
ments preserved in the Society's Library.

Grayson s New Ten-Band Plate. By A. A. C. Eliot Merlin. 163

¥7 7T8> or 0*00002090 in., the true mean diameter of the lines with
the proper antipoint correction applied thus being 0- 00002488 in.

In order to ascertain the results obtainable on certain of the
rulings with much lower apertures and magnifications, the following
measurements of the first, second, and tenth bands which are shown
in the last three sets of columns of the table were effected. With
these lower powers the images of the lines themselves did not prove
nearly so satisfactory as with the preceding optical arrangements,
although all the lenses utilized are picked specimens of their class.
The difficulty of accurately setting the wires on the lines was much
augmented, and it proved impracticable to secure double readings.
To make matters worse, a small setting error now represents a far
greater real distance than is the case with the high magnifications.
It is true that the means are often close, but this is mainly due to
the plus and minus errors compensating each other.

The outcome of my experience with the foregoing fairly ex-
haustive measurements is to convince me, beyond the shadow of a
doubt, that the lower magnifications are wholly inadequate to reveal
the minute real variations in lines and spacings of the new plate,
while I feel equally certain that the higher magnifications employed
are quite capable of doing so when used with proper appliances and
strictly critical conditions, for it is especially necessary that the
lines themselves be resolved so that their individual irregularities,
trifling as they are, may be rendered clearly recognizable. If any-
one who has not performed the arduous work under the specified
conditions should cavil at the excessively small real differences
indicated, and contend that such quantities are altogether beyond
the grasp of the Microscope, the only alternative is that the latest
production of Mr. Grayson possesses no real inequalities capable of
demonstration under the highest powers and most perfect instru-
mental means at our disposal.

Addendum. — The essential measurements on which this paper
is based not being printed fully in their original form, although
they have been ably abridged and handled by a member of the
Society's Council, the author nevertheless finds it necessary to
request the indulgence of those familiar with refined practical
micrometry for any shortcomings or failure of the abridged
figures, given herewith, to properly sustain all the claims made in
the text, which, under the unavoidable circumstances, may, in
some instances, appear to be unsupported by adequate evidence,
or even resemble mere assumptions. This is practically inevitable
with any curtailment of the full figures and measurements of the
individual spacings, which are, in themselves, means of double-
edge readings.

164 Transactions of the Society.

VI I L — Australian Hot if era : Collected by the Shoxkleton Antarctic

Expedition, 1909.

By James Murray, F.E.S.E.

Plates IV. and V.

(This preliminary Report is published with the consent of Sir Ernest Shackleton.)

{Read March 15, 1911.)

On the return of the ' Nimrod ' from the Antarctic, a stay of
nearly a month in New South Wales, and a few days in Queens-
land, afforded opportunities for extensive collecting of Australian
Rotifera, etc.

In New South Wales we collected in and around Sydney, and
in the Blue Mountains and Australian Alps. In the cool climate
of the Alps the Rotifer fauna closely resembled that of Britain,
only two species occurring which are unknown there. The Blue
Mountain region was very much more productive, and all the new
species were obtained there.

I have to thank Mr. C. F. Rousselet for much assistance in
preparing the Bibliography of this and subsequent papers, and
for giving me the benefit of his advice in regard to the few

© © ©

non-Bdelloid Kotifera collected. I have to thank Mr. D. Bryce
for similar assistance with the Bdelloida.

The necessity for subdividing this paper, which was originally
written to be published as a whole, has given rise to some asyn-
chronisms — references in earlier parts to species which are not

EXPLANATION OP PLATE IV.

Fig. 1. — Philodina australis sp. n.
„ 2a. — Callidina armillata sp. n.
„ 26. — Ditto. Ditto. Ventral side of head.
„ 2 c. — Ditto. Ditto. Rostrum and lamellae.
,, 2d. — Ditto. Ditto. Jaw.
,, 3a. — Callidina lepida sp. n.
„ 36. — Ditto. Ditto. Spurs.
„ 4a. — Callidina longistyla sp. n.
,, 46. — Ditto. Ditto. Jaw.

Antenna, to same scale as 4«.
Head and rostrum.
Side view of rump and foot .
Spurs.
-H'abrotrocha angusticollis ; var. with curved neck.
6a. — Habrotrocha strangulata sp. n.
66. — Ditto. Ditto. Head and neck.
6 c. — Ditto. Ditto Jaw.
6d. — Ditto. Ditto. Spurs.
6e. — Ditto. Ditto. Side view of foot.

,, 4c. — Ditto.

Ditto.

„ 4d.— Ditto.

Ditto.

„ 4 c, — Ditto.

Ditto.

„ 4/.— Ditto.

5 — ffnbmf

Ditto.

J0URN.R.MICR.S0C.1911.PJ ,

urray del.adnat.

West, Newman photo-lith.

AUSTRALIAN ROTIFERA.

Australian Rotifera. By James Murray. 165

described till later parts. As far as possible, these have been
explained by notes in parentheses.

Historical Sketch. — This notice of works on Australian Eotifera
makes no claim to be complete. I have not yet had time to seek
carefully through the Australian Societies' publications for recent
years. It is a note of such works as I have seen or heard of, and
is chiefly concerned with the Bdelloids. These have received scant
attention in Australia, as usual everywhere and always.

Schmarda, 1859 (5)* found Pterodina patina in New South
Wales. Thirty years later, Thorpe (11) in his first list of Queens-
land Rotifers, makes the first mention of a Bdelloid (Actinurus).
Whitelegge's list, 1889 (16), contains 110 species (6 Bdelloids).
Thorpe's second list of Queensland Eotifers, .1889 (1£), includes

4 Bdelloids, and in another paper in the same year (13) he notes

5 Ehizota, a Brachionus and Pcdalion. Also in 1889 (2) Hudson
and Gosse describe 3 new Ehizota, and mention a fourth. Anderson
and Shephard, 1892 (1), in their list of Victorian Eotifers, note
4 Bdelloids. Strickland, 1894 (10). also notes 4 Bdelloids.

Papers by Thorpe, 1891 (U); Shephard, 1896 (6'), 1897(7),
1899 (8); Shephard and Strickland, 1899 (9); Eousselet, 1899 (3)
and 1900 (4), deal with Ehizota only. Thorpe, 1893 (15) notes an
Asplanchna and Asplanchnopus.

The Bdelloids in all these works number only 9 species —
Philodina roseola, citrina, mcgalotrocha, aculeata ; Rotifer vulgaris,
macroceros, citrinus, tardus, neptunius.

The Rotifer citrinus in the above list is not recorded by anybody,
but Strickland's notes on a Rotifer sp. ? (10), which he thinks may
be R. macrurus, seem to me to indicate R. citrinus.

List of Species.

Ploima.

In the water supply of Sydney, and in ponds in the public
parks, a few species other than Bdelloids were noted. As most of
them are already in Whitelegge's list for the same district, they
are omitted from this list. I only note a few which are not in
Whitelegge's paper.

Triarthra brachiata Eouss.

Notops minor Eouss.

Binocharis inornata Hilzendorf.

Metopidia acuminata Ehr.

M. rhomboides Gosse.

Biaschiza gibba (Ehr.).

Brachionus ureeolaris Ehr.

Pedalion sp.

* The figures in braokets refer to the Bibliography at the end of the paper.

L66

Transactions of the Society.

Bdelloida.

1

CO

p.

eS

<

c

a

a

c

o

o

3

s

>>

*0

cS

a

W

(A

<

©■

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+
+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+
+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+
+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+
+

+

+
+

+

+
+

+

+

Philodina australis sp. n

P. brevipes Murray

P. plena (Bryce)

P. vorax ( Janson)

P. rugosa Bryce

Plcuretra alpium (Ehr.)
Dissotrocha macrostyla (Ehr.) ..

Callidina habita Bryce

G. formosa Murray

C. quadricornifera (Milue)

C. plicata Bryce

C. punctata Murray

C. ehrenbergii Janson

C. armillata sp. n

C. lepida sp. n

Clongistylasip.il

C. papillosa (Thomp.)

C. multispinosa (Thomp.) ..

C. scrrulata sp. n.

C. mirabilis sp. u.

C. microcornis Murray
Mniobia tetraodon (Ehr.) . .

M. russeola (Zel.)

M. scabrosa Murray

Rotifer vulgaris Schrank ..

B. hajjticus Gosse

B. longirostris (Janson)

B. montanus Murray

Habrotrocha angusticollis (Murray)
H. longiceps (Murray)

H. perforata (Murray)

H. caudata Murray

H. pusilla (Bryce)

H. constricta (Duj.)

H. tridens (Milne)

H. strangulata sp. n

H. leitgebii (Zel.)

H. auriculata Murray

H. aspera (Bryce)

Scephanotrocha rubra Bryce
Ceratotrocha cornigera (Bryce) . .

Adineta vaga (Davis)

A. gracilis Janson

A. bar ba ta Janson

A. tuberculosa Janson

A. longicornis Murray

Australian Botifera. By James Murray. 107

Notes on the Species.

Philodina australis sp. n., pi. IV. fig. 1.

Specific Characters. — Small, hyaline, free-swimming ; corona as
wide as trunk ; sulcus as wide as disk ; lobes of upper lip widely
separated, not reaching level of convex bridge ; rostrum and antenna
short ; eyes small, oblong ; teeth 2 ; foot 4-jointed ; spurs short,
conical, acute, divergent, without interspace.

Length 280 //,, width of corona 85 /a, neck 48 /*, trunk 85 fi.
Central trunk barrel-shaped ; collar inconspicuous ; jaw triangular.

Apparently an eastern representative of P. mcgalotrocha, which
it closely resembles. It differs in the smaller corona, short rostrum,
and short antenna. P. megalotrocha has larger eyes and tup-shaped
trunk, and it usually keeps the rostrum extended when swimming,
which P. australis does not do. P. mcgalotrocha is also recorded
for Australia, but we did not find it.

Habitat. — Common in the water-supply of Sydney. Afterwards
found in Vancouver.

Philodina plena (Bryce).

In Australia P. plena tends to have more than the normal
number of teeth, though otherwise typical. Teeth 3 to 5 in each
jaw. The same tendency was seen in Hawaii, and the variety is
figured in the paper on the Eotifera of the Pacific Islands (in a
later number of this Journal).

Pleuretra alpium (Ehr.).

The type is a large animal of a warm brown colour. It is rare,
and I doubt if it has been previously found outside of Europe and
the Arctic. It never occurs in dry moss. In warm countries a
small dull-coloured form (probably distinct) is common. It often
appears among dry mosses.

The type was only obtained in the Australian Alps at 6000 ft.
The small form occurred in all the localities. Ehrenbercr described
a variety from the Himalaya.

Callidina for mosa Murray, pi. V. fig. 13.

Only known in warm countries (India, Africa, Australia). The
egg found in India has the poles produced. The egg found with
the species near Sydney was similar, but there was an additional
lateral knob at the widest part.

Callidina punctata Murray.

Though only recently discovered, it is already known in Hawaii,
Africa, and Australia.

1'is Transactions of the Society.

Callidina armillata sp. n., pi. IV. figs. 2a-2d.

Specific Characters. — Small, hyaline ; corona large ; sulcus wide ;
collar produced laterally as broad hyaline band, joining the margin
Of the mouth ; antenna short; teeth 2 -f- 1 ; jaw with broad wing;
foot 4-jointed ; spurs very small cones, interspace wide ; lumen of
stomach wide; toes small.

Length, feeding, 300 /x; width of corona 80 fx, collar 70 yu., neck
50 fi, trunk 70 fx, across spurs 22 /x. The broad hyaline collar pro-
jects beyond the cheeks, but it is somewhat mobile, and varies in
amount of expansion. Antenna equal to half the neck-width. The
lumen is of unusnal width for a Callidina. but there is no resem-
blance to the pellet-makers (Habrotrocha), which have the lumen
wide.

The expanded collar distinguishes C. armillata from all known
Bdelloids. It has its only close relatives in C. lepida (described in
this paper) and C. microcornis, a New Zealand species. These have
similar minute, widely separated spurs, and wide lumen.

Habitat. — Katoomba, New South Wales, frequent.

Callidina lepida sp. n., pi. IV. figs. 3a, 3b.

Specific Characters. — Small, hyaline ; corona wide, sulcus shallow ;
collar prominent ; antenna short ; teeth 2 ; anal segment short, with
lateral prominences ; foot short, 3-jointed ; spurs short cones, with
wide interspace; stomach lumen wide.

Length, feeding, 230 yx; width of corona 60 fx, neck 32 /j,, trunk
70 /x, spurs l-I ll. Upper lip not lobed, not as high as bridge, bearing
a median "ligule." Central setre on disks. Margins of mouth ex-
panded, showing beyond cheeks. Trunk closely plicate. Antenna
equal half neck-width. Pre-anal and anal segments distinct.

Most resembling C. armillata, it differs in not having the collar
connected with the expanded mouth margin, in the unlobed upper
lip, and the cuneate anal segment. The jaw has not a broad wing.

Habitat. — Katoomba, Blue Mountains.

Fig

7a.-

>J

76.-

))

8a.-

»»

86.-

>)

8c-

))

8a.-

9a.-

tt

96.-

J)

10.-

)>

11.-

» t

12.-

13.-

EXPLANATION OF PLATE V.

-Callidina sernilata sp. n.

-Ditto. Ditto. Jaw.

-Callidina mirabilis sp. n.

-Ditto. Ditto. Head and neck.

-Ditto. Ditto. Antenna.

-Ditto. Ditto. Jaw.

-Callidina ? species ?

-Ditto. Ditto. Jaw.

-Callidina multispinosa (Thomp.). Form from Queensland.

-Ditto. Ditto. Form from Katoomba.

-Rotifer montanus Murray. Spurs of Australian variety.

-Callidina formosa Murray. Egg.

JOURN.R.MICR.S0C.1911.P1 V.

J.Murray dei.adnat.

West,Newrr;ar; photo

AUSTRALIAN ROTIFERA

Australian Rotifer a. By James Murray. 169

Callidina microcomis Murray.

(Described in "Botifera of New Zealand" in a later number of
this Journal). This species, first discovered in New Zealand, was
afterwards obtained at Katoomba. With C. armillata and C. lepida
it makes a group of species, having very wide lumen and minute
spurs, at present only known in Australasia.

Callidina longutyla sp. n., plate IV. figs. 4a-4/.

Specific Characters. — Small, slender, hyaline ; rostrum slender,
antenna minute ; teeth 2 ; rump nodose ; foot 3-jointed ; spurs
large, gradually tapering, slightly curved, not shouldered, no inter-
space ; toes minute, slender ; stomach with large globules, not
pellets.

Length 300 /x ; width of trunk 50 /j,, length of spur 32 //,. Not
seen feeding, but corona small.

The narrow form, slender rostrum, long spurs, and nodose rump,
give a superficial resemblance to Dissotrocha macrostyla, but the
antenna is minute, reproduction is not viviparous, and the spurs
are thicker, and not shouldered at base. The toes are 3.

Altogether an animal standing by itself, with no near relatives.
It has most in common with C. crucicornis Murray.

Habitat. — Katoomba.

Callidina papillosa (Thompson).

Like the smaller of the two Canadian forms, which is near the
type, but has more numerous warts (see " Canadian Rotifera," in a
later number of this Journal).

Callidina multispinosa (Thompson).

Several diverse varieties of this protean species occurred.

First Variety. — (Figured in " Rotifera of New Zealand," in a
later number of this Journal.) Long-spined ; teeth 4+1 or 5.
On each side of the anterior trunk 5 strong curved spines, with
large bases ; all other processes small spicules ; on the foot some
truncate or furcate pegs. At junction of first and second segments
of anterior trunk a short thick spine at each side, pointing forward.

Habitat. — Katoomba ; confined to Australasia.

Second Variety (plate V. fig. 10).— Long-spined ; 3 very long
setre, with bulbose bases, at each side — one on each of the segments
of the anterior trunk, aud one on the foot ; most of the other
processes thick conical knobs. Number of teeth not noted. The
development of the seta* on the foot is unusual, and this may prove
to be a distinct species.

Habitat. — Queensland.

170 Transactions of the Society.

Third Variety (plate V. fig. 11). — One pair of long, strong
spines on the anterior trunk. Very few small spicules on body.
Imperfectly studied.

Habitat. — Katoomba.

Fourth Variety, var. brevispinosa. — Differing from the African
form in having 4 transverse dorsal rows of spicules on central
trunk. There are some additional spines on the anterior trunk.
The ventral surface is distinctly transversely plicate.

Callidina serrulata sp. n., plate V. figs. 7a, lb.

Specific Characters. — Of moderate size, papillose ; teeth 2 ; trunk
bearing many lanceolate serrate processes, in pairs, and some stout
spines, spicules, and ligular processes.

Length, creeping 350/x, width of trunk 125 p,, neck 48/x, processes
up to 50 p or more in length.

Eelated to C. pinniycra, the processes are more numerous,
longer, and taper to acute points, instead of being fan-shaped and
truncate. Most of them are serrate. The second anterior trunk
segment has a pair of stout spines, with broad conical bases ; a
smaller pair of stout spines at widest part of central trunk. The
head and foot are as in C. multispinosa and pinniycra.

Habitat. — Katoomba, Blue Mountains.

Callidina mirabilis sp. n., plate V. figs. 8a-8d.

Specific Characters. — Size moderate ; trunk broad, bearing many
paired excrescences, apparently produced by a secretion ; anterior
margin of trunk with three large fleshy processes, one median, two
lateral. Head small, disks narrow ; sulcus deep, narrow ; collar
prominent; antenna moderate ; teeth, about six ; rump with several
conical spiny processes, and two posterior, broad flanges. Foot
short ; spurs narrow, straight, tapering, divergent, with wide inter-
space.

Length 350 p,, width of trunk 150 p,, corona 80 p., neck 60 p,,
tip to tip of spurs 28 p,.

Tubercles on trunk like those of M. incrassata and D. macrostyla
form tuberculata, irregular, some capped by flat plates. Antenna
stout ; rostrum short, broad, constricted below ; teeth very strong,
jaw with broad border.

The fleshy processes of the anterior trunk are the strangest
feature of the animal, and require further study. The lateral ones
are strongly curved outwards, and along the convex border there is
a prominent band, which is transversely striate. The central
process has a large median pore. It could not be seen whether it
had a striate border.

One of the most specialized of the Philodinadte, this species

Australian Rotifera. By James Murray. 171

stands apart, and has no near relatives. The jaw, with its broad
border and strong teeth, suggests affinity with Mniobia, in which
genus M. incrassata has been placed. The shape of the head, and
the spiny processes on the rump, show, I believe, a true relation-
ship to 0. multispinosa, and for this reason the animal is placed in
the genus Callidina, although the toes were not seen. It may
eventually have to be made a distinct genus.
Habitat. — Katoomba, Blue Mountains.

Callidina ? species ? plate V. figs. 9a, 9b.

Specific Characters. — Size moderate; trunk papillose; teeth
2 + 1. Central trunk bearing a number of peg-like, truncate
processes, up to 8 or 10 fi in length.

This undoubtedly distinct species is not named, because neither
head nor foot was seen, and so it cannot be placed in any genus.
It is probably a Callidina.

Habitat. — Queensland.

Mniobia scabrosa Murray.

Eecently discovered in Africa, since found in New Zealand and
Australia.

Habitat. — Queensland.

Rotifer montanus Murray, plate V. fig. 12.

This dusky little species, first obtained by Dr. Mackay on the
Nun's Veil Mountain in New Zealand, was found, also at a high
elevation, in the Australian Alp3. The spurs were slightly different,
being subacute, separated by a straight interspace, and held parallel.

Habrotrocha angusticollis (Murray), plate IV. fig. 5.

In Queensland the common form differed from the type in
having the neck of the case elongate, as in var. attenuata (India),
bnt strongly curved.

Habrotrocha pusilla (Bryce).

At Katoomba there was a form with a very pretty case, com-
posed entirely of hyaline pellets, regularly arranged in several
concentric layers.

Habrotrocha caudata Murray.

Recently discovered in Africa, a single example occurred at
Katoomba, its only known occurrence outside Africa.

Habrotrocha longiceps (Murray).

In Australian examples several points of structure were observed
which were not known when the species was described.

172 Transactions of the Society.

Foot very short, 3-jointed ; spurs small, conical or ovate acumi-
nate, sometimes without interspace, sometimes with wide convex
interspace. .Relatively large lamella} were seen in examples from
Katoomba. The original Scottish examples showed no trace of
lamella}. It may be that there are distinct species having similar
cases.

Habrotrocha strangulata sp. n.. pi. IV. figs. 6a-6e.

Specific Characters. — Small, narrow ; antenna very short, neck
constricted in third segment ; gullet very long ; jaw long, with very
numerous teeth ; foot short, 3-jointed ; spurs very broad, acuminate,
no interspace ; rostrum constricted below.

Length 300 p,, width of trunk 50 p,, across spurs 15 /z. Second
neck segment very long, bulging. The permanent constriction of
the third neck segment recalls H. acornis, and is probably due to
its dwelling in a narrow-necked case, but in neither species has a
case ever been seen.

The antenna is less than half the neck-width. The corona has
not been seen unfolded, but in contraction it is small. Though
incompletely studied, the constricted neck, numerous teeth, and
broad acuminate spurs, distinguish this from all other species.

Habitat. — Katoomba, numerous

Habrotrocha auriculata Murray.

Eecently discovered in tropical Africa, and afterwards in
Australia.

Scephanotrocha rubra Bryce.

Though described only a few months ago, the animal has long
been known. The generic characters can only be seen when the
animal is feeding, but it can be distinguished by the specific
characters even when creeping.

Found in Britain, North America, New Zealand, and Australia.

Ccratotrocha cornigera (Bryce).

This remakable Bdelloid appears to be rare or local. It is
usually found among moist mosses {Sphagnum, etc.) or on mountain
tops. It appeared in dry moss from the Australian Alps, the first
time I have found it in dry moss.

It is recorded for Spitsbergen, Britain, Switzerland, and Aus-
tralia.

Adineta longicomis Murray.

Supposed to be limited to tropical and sub-tropical countries,
till its recent discovery in the coldest region where any Butifera

Australian Botifcra. By James Murray. 17:>

exist (the Antarctic) showed this impression to be erroneous. After
all it is found chiefly in the mountain ranges — Himalaya, Austra-
lian Alps, Blue Mountains — and elevated plateaus — Transvaal,
Uganda. Egg elliptical, smooth, not knobbed.

Adineta barbata Janson.

The Australian form has the spurs somewhat longer and more
gradually tapering than in the type. The egg is typical.
Habitat. — Katoomba and Australian Alps.

Summary.

Bdelloids. — "We recognized 46 species, besides some half-dozen
others previously known to other naturalists, but not described, or
still insufficiently studied. Forty-five are new to the Australian
fauna, as we only found B. vulgaris which had been previously noted.

The four districts visited gave the following numbers : Sydney
10 species, Katoomba 35, Alps 22, Queensland 17.

Compared with the rest of the world the Australian Bdelloids
show a good deal of peculiarity. There are 7 new species described,
six confined to Australia (one afterwards found in Canada), and
eight others occur as more or less distinct varieties. Two species,
C. microcornis and B. montanus, are only known in New Zealand
and Australia. 0. punctata, M. scabrosa, H. caudata, and If. auri-
culata are in Australia and Africa (M. scabrosa in New Zealand also).

Of the 22 species from the Australian Alps, 20 are known in
Europe and nearly all are common British species. Only 4 species
occurred in all four districts in Australia, 3 in three districts, 15
in two districts (7 in mountain districts only), 21 in one district
only.

It is evident how much more productive the mountainous dis-
tricts are. So far as our work goes it indicates that the arid low-
lying districts are poor in Bdelloids — the highest Alpine district
has a temperate fauna quite like that of Europe — the intermediate
elevation, just high enough to temper the heat somewhat, is much
the most productive, and yields most of what is peculiar in Austra-
lian Bdelloids.

With the 8 species noted in the introductory paragraph, which
did not occur in our collections, there are 54 Bdelloids recorded
for Australia.

Considering the facility with which new species and peculiar
varieties were obtained during an all too hurried journey over a
limited area, it is permissible to suggest that the Australian Bdel-
loid fauna is far from being thoroughly known, and that any

April 19th, 1911 x

174 Transactions of the Society.

naturalist sufficiently equipped for the study may look for inte-
resting discoveries.

Ploima. — There is nothing in our short list calling for any
remark except the extension of the range of Dinocharis inornata
Hilgendorf to Australia.

Bibliography.

1. Anderson and Shephard. — Notes on Victorian Eotifers. Proc. Bov. Soc.

Victoria, n.s. 4 (1892) p. 69.
2 Hudson and Gosse. — The Eotifera, 1886. Supplement, London (1889).

3. Eousselet, C. F. — On a Mounted Slide of Trochosphsera solstitialis. Journ.

Quekett Micr. Club. April (1889).

4. „ „ Notes on the Genus Lacinularia. Journ. Quekett

Micr. Club, p. 313. April (1900).

5. Schmarda, L.— Neue wirbellose Thiere. Leipzig (1859).

6. Shephard, J. — A New Eotifer, Lacinularia elongate. Vict. Naturalist,

p. 22. May (1896).

7. „ ,, A New Eotifer, Lacinularia elliptica. Vict. Naturalist.

October (1897).

8. „ „ A New E tifer, Lacinularia striolata. Proc. Eoy. Soc. Vict.

12, p. 20. August (1899).

9. Shephard and Strickland. — A New Eotifer, Melicerta fimbriata. Vict.

Naturalist, 16, p. 38. July (1899).

10. Strickland, W.— The Eotifer in Melbourne. Vict. Naturalist, p. 111.

November (1894).

11. Thorpe, V. G. — On certain Eotifera found in Ponds, Brisbane. Proc.

Eoy. Soc. Queensland (1888) p. 28.

12. „ „ A List of Queensland Eotifers. Proc. Eoy. Soc. Queens-

land (1889) p 70.

13. „ „ A New Species of Megalotrocha. Journ. E. Micr. Soc.

October (18b9) p. 613.

14. „ „ New and Foreign Eotifers. Journ. E. Micr. Soc. (1891)

p. 301.

15. „ „ Note on the Eecorded Localities for Eotifers. Journ.

Quekett Micr. Club (1893) p. 312.

16. Whitelegge, T. — Marine and Fresh-water Invertebrata of Port Jackson,

etc. Journ. and Proc. Eoy. Soc. N.S. Wales (1889)
p. 308.

175

IX. — Anomalies in Objective Screw Threads.
By F. W. Watson Baker.

(Read March 15, 1911.)

The purpose of this short paper is : —

1. To call attention to the great diversity which exists in the
objective screw threads made by the various makers and described
as of the Royal Microscopical Society's standard size.

2. To indicate disadvantages connected with the present system
of sizing gauges and measurements as set out by the Royal Micro-
scopical Society.

3. To consider how more uniform results can be attained.

1. The Diversity of Objective Threads. That the objective of
one maker will frequently not screw into the nose-piece of the

Max. -7982''
No I Min. -7952"

IIHHHMVffl

■799N0.2. ■ -aAAfc BL^^J*_No3.-794

•788 -794-

•796 -799

N06 •<!#» jAAJLuo.7.

•785 788

•797 *«

NolO^AAAA. *mmm* No. 11.

Fig. 24.

Microscope of another maker is a matter of common knowledge,
but will not be cause for wonder when it is known how distant is
the approach to accuracy of the majority of the screw threads of
objective makers.

For the purpose of this paper I have photographed the standard
sizing gauge supplied by the Royal Microscopical Society (fig. 24,
No. 1), in order to show the shape and size of the screw threads and
the objectives of ten different makers in comparison with it (fig. 24,
Nos. 2-11).

n 2

176 Transactions of the Society.

From these it will be seen that some of the screws exceed in
diameter the maximum allowed in the specification ; others are
smaller than the minimum, the difference between the largest and
the smallest being 0*018 in., and that the shape of the thread has
greater differences than would seem possible. Exactly similar
differences occur in the nose-piece thread.

In addition, the plain fitting above the thread of the object-
glass which should be -fa in. long is rarely considered ; the number
of threads or the length of screw is variable, yet both of these are
of vital importance in order that revolving nose-pieces may be made
with as short a fitting as possible.

All the photographs have been taken with exactly the same
magnification and under the same conditions.

The defects to which attention is called can be quite easily
controlled in any well ordered workshop, provided the tools are
accurate and definite correct standards are established.

The present state of things is a reflection on the exactness of
the work of those who being connected with the production of
scientific instruments should make accuracy, in so important a
feature as interchangeability, a primary consideration.

2. We will now consider the second point. Although it cannot
be denied that gross carelessness on the part of manufacturers is
accountable for such wide variations and departures from the stan-
dard sizes as have been shown in the photographs, I would submit
for consideration that the permissible latitude given by the Society
in their specification for the sizes of screw threads is far too great.
If you go to a workman and tell him that you want something made
accurately within 0*001 in. of a specified size he will probably ex-
press some doubt of his ability to do it, but if that same thing were
ordered to be of a definite size and no latitude were mentioned,
proper tools, gauges, etc., being provided, it would invariably be
found that the work had less than 0*001 in. of error. With skilful
workmen this has been found to be the case many times. Uncon-
sciously they are in the habit of working with very great accuracy.
Contracts are now regularly placed for large quantities of instru-
ments having interchangeable parts with a minus allowance of only
0-0011 in.

The latitude given by the Eoyal Microscopical Society for the
top of the thread of the object-glass is 0 * 003 in. — that is the differ-
ence between the maximum size 0*7982 in. and the minimum
0*7952 in.

Similar latitude is given in the nose-piece size, namely 0 * 803 in.
to 0*8 in. at the bottom of the thread. It is therefore possible,
taking the extreme limits of the object-glass thread and the corre-
sponding nose-piece thread, for a difference of 0 * 0078 in. to exist.

Various makers have apparently interpreted these limits in
different ways. Some have used less than the minimum size,

Anomalies in Objective Screw Threads. 177

others a mean, and the remainder the maximum size or too large
altogether.

Next, a few remarks mav be made with regard to the standard
sizing gauges which are supplied by the Society. The purpose for
which these are intended is not as gauges as ordinarily understood
in a workshop, but are so set that if an objective is arranged to
screw into the die, and the nose-piece of the Microscope is sized to
receive the tap, the objective will undoubtedly enter the nose-piece,
but it will have a considerable shake.

The specification gives exactly the same limits and sizes for
these gauges as for the objectives and nose-pieces respectively
themselves, and this in itself is an element of weakness. There is
no reason why the tap and the die should not be made within far
closer limits, in fact of a specified size with a very small limit of
possible error.

As a matter of fact, the set which I have tested is just the
mean between the maximum and the minimum.

3. We have now to consider how uniform results could be
attained. In the first place I should suggest that the specification
were revised, and that the diameters of threads of object-glasses
and nose-pieces at the top and bottom of the threads were given
in absolute figures, these figures to be the maximum size of objective
thread and the minimum size of nose-piece thread permissible. Any
latitude that is to be taken advantage of should be a minus quan-
tity for the objective and a plus quantity for the nose-piece.

Next, if it were thought well to adhere to the present sizing tap
and die, seeing that the die has adjustable jaws, a master male-
gauge should be supplied smaller by a small amount than the
specified size, and that difference should be indicated upon it. This
master gauge would be kept in the office in the works, and from
time to time the adjustable jaws on the die would be set to it, and
thus a standard would be maintained.

Alternatively, or in addition, a pair of limit gauges could be
supplied by the Society to which all objectives and all nose-pieces
would be referable. Any maker having such limit gauges, exer-
cising care and wishing conscientiously to adhere to the standard
thread, the correct shape of screw thread being assumed, would not
then be able to send out an objective or a nose-piece that would not
receive other makers' fittings.

These proposals are submitted by way of suggestion only, and
it is hoped that they may lead to consideration of ways and means
that may have a practical outcome.

178

Transactions of the Society.

X. — Adams's " Variable " and the Evolution of the
Modern Microscope.

By Edwaed M. Nelson.

(Read March 15, 1911.)

This Microscope * (fig. 27), designed in 1770 by an anonymous " noble
person," and made by George Adams, is by far the most important

Fig. 25.— Watkins, 1755.

* Micrograph ia Illust. Adams, 4th ed., 1771, pi. ii., 60 Fleet Street.

Adams's " Variable " Microscope. By Id yard M. Nelson. 179

of all the ancient Microscopes, because in it we find embodied the
main principles of the Microscope as constructed at the present
time. It may briefly be described as a stand with a hinged joint at
the top, to which is attached a bar carrying the body, the stage,
and the illuminating apparatus, i.e. the mirror. If, therefore, the
Microscope body is inclined, the stage and the mirror are inclined
with it, precisely as in the Microscopes of to-day.

The first Microscope to have a limb carrying the body, stage,
and mirror attached by a joint to a stand in this manner, is that of
F. Watkins * (1755), fig. 25, but there the idea was carried out
in such an impossible manner that even when it was merely

Fig. 26.— Cufi, 1765.

touched it could not help shaking like an aspen, for the pivot was
at the tail end of the limb ; but, be that as it may, it probably gave
the idea to the noble inventor of the " Variable," who in a thoroughly
practical manner corrected the faults of the Watkins Microscope.
Previous to Watkins's Microscope, there were tube or drum Micro-
scopes, and those on the telescope plan, where the object at which
the Microscope was pointed was disconnected from the body.
Hertel's Microscope, the first to possess a mirror (1715), was built
on this telescope plan. Bonami's Microscope (1691), the first to
have the object and illuminating apparatus connected to the body,
was a type by itself ; for the whole apparatus was fixed to a base-

* Journ. R.M.S. 1908, p. 137.

ISO

Transactions of the Society.

board, similar to a pliotomicrographic or projection Microscope of
the present day.

The second is a portable Microscope by John Cuff,* fig. 26,
which differs both from the Watkins and the Variable, because the
limb is hinged to the foot and not to the top of a pillar. The
mirror, stage, and body arm all fold up on joints, so it is a very
shaky affair, nevertheless, it is an important model, as it is the
second known example of a Microscope which has the body, stage,
and mirror attached to a hinged limb.f Its date can be fixed
approximately because it is signed Cuff, and Adams, who took

Fig. 27.— The Variable, 1770.

over Cuff's business in 1770, made this same model under his
own name ; also it was said to be an improved form of Ellis's
Aquatic Microscope, which was made in 1755, so it may be dated
" circa 1765 " without much error. It was one of Cuff's latest
Microscopes, probably inspired by the Watkins model of 1755.
With all these loose joints it was a type that, like the Watkins,
could never last. After Adams had appropriated this Cuff model,
Benjamin Martin was not long in following suit, for the large
instrument, which formerly belonged to His Majesty George III.,

* Joum. R.M.S. 1898, p. 675, fig. 117.

t Microscopes of this form, without the folding joints, are still made in
France, and are sold here as youths' microscopes, for 14s. 6d.

Adams's " Variable" Microscope. By Edward M.Nelson. 181

which is now in our collection, is made precisely upon that plan,
and is the earliest Microscope of this typo in our collection, as its
date is 1775.

We are therefore justified in calling the Variable, fig. 27,
although the third in seniority, the most important of the three.

It has always been an interesting problem to discover the

Fig. 28.— Adams, 1785.

identity of this anonymous " noble person," and now I think I am
able to give you his name ; not, of course, with the evidence of an
affidavit, but with a very high degree of probability.

First, the fact that he was a noble person narrows down the
list from which we have to select a name. At that date there was
one man who, if he was not the anonymous author of this
important instrument, fits the circumstances of the case in all
particulars. He was not a peer, but the son of the brother of a

182

Transactions of the Society.

duke, and on that account may very well have been given by
Adams the courtesy title of a " noble person."

Fig. 29.— Jones's Most Improved, 1797.

His name was Henry Cavendish (1731-1810), son of Lord
Charles Cavendish, brother of the third Duke of Devonshire,
His mother was Lady Anne Grey, a daughter of the Duke of Kent.

Adams's " Variable " Microscope. By Edward M. Nelson. 183

After Newton he was the greatest English scientist of that
time. He was exceedingly clever, exceedingly shy, very wealthy.
and had a house full of scientific apparatus.

Now obviously there was just a shade of plagiarism about the
design ; it therefore suited Henry Cavendish to remain anonymous,
and it suited George Adams to throw the responsibility of its pro-
duction upon the broad shoulders of a " noble person." The whole
story fits the historical facts of the case.

So we see that we owe the present form of our Microscope first

IIIIIIiIHIHIIIiIiipIiI iilllllllllllllllll: IiMI i mini Illlllllllllllll|iiii|

[fill 11 1 'Iff I if lif if fill II 1 111

I WV $W9m

Fig. 30.— Powell, 1840.

to Francois Watkins * (mother probably French), and secondly to
Henry Cavendish, who, by attaching the joint to the centre of
gravity of the limb, made it a practical type, which has lasted to
the present time.

The figures 25 to 30 show the several steps in the evolution of
the modern Microscope in their chronological order.

Fig. 30 shows the highest type of this class of Microscope, for in
design it is far in advance of its many imitations. The author,
who has constantly used this instrument for rough work during a

* Author of L'Exercice du Microscope. Lcndoa : Charing Cross,' 1754.

1 8 1 Transactions of the Society.

period of thirty-five years, has described it in this Journal, 1899,
p. 209, where the measurements of its various parts will be found ;
but the Varley foot and the conical joint are described in the
Journal, 1900, p. 291.

Since the reading of this paper, Mr. Parsons has found a notice
(d.ite 1854) of the firm of opticians, Watkina and Hill, at Charing
Cross.

Erratum. — A correction is needed in my note on Watkins
Microscope (this Journal, 1908, p. 141, line 26). For "... an
objective which was a combination," read " .... a dividing ob-
jective." A dividing objective must obviously be a " combina-
tion," but the reverse is not necessarily true. The word "combina-
tion " in technical optics has a special meaning, and is only used
to denote an objective whose lenses, or groups of achromatic lenses,
are separated from one another. For example, an object-glass con-
sisting of two or more achromatic doublets is a " combination," but
a single achromatic doublet would be called a " doublet." Similarly
the historically famous triple inch by Tulley would be called a
" triple," and not a " combination."

The first Microscope to possess a " combination " was that of
Grindl, described in Zahn's Oculus Artificialis, 1G85.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANiY

(principally invertebrata and cryptogamia),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.
a, Embryolog-y.t

Influence of Radium Rays on Ova and Sperms. J — 0. Hertwig has
subjected fertilized ova of frog and axolotl to radium rays. During the
exposure, and for some time after, no effect is seen, but after a consider-
able interval the influence of the radium becomes apparent, always in
a very detrimental way, but varying with the duration and intensity of
the rays and with the stage of development reached. The differentia-
tion of nerve and muscle is much more affected than that of the more
vegetative tissues. Hertwig also exposed mature spermatozoa of sea-
urchin and frog to radium rays, and then tested their effect on the egg.
The spermatozoon induces serious disorders and finally disintegration in
the egg, acting like a virulent bacterium, and the disturbing effect
spreads from cell to cell with the chromatin at each mitosis.

Polyspermy.§— J. Riickert discusses cases of frogs' eggs fertilized
by two or three spermatozoa, in which abnormal results may be avoided by
elimination of the supernumerary spheres. Polyspermy seems often to
occur in meroblastic ova, e.g., of Selachians and Birds, and pathological
results are averted by the exclusion of the supernumerary nuclei from
the segmentation area. In sea-urchin ova, with little yolk, the entrance
of more than one spermatozoon disturbs the fertilization process. In
the small space the expulsion of the centrosomes and their spheres can-
not prevent a pathological union of the pro-nuclei. In Urodela poly-
spermy may occur without disadvantage ; the supernumerary sperniatozt a
are not eliminated, but in some way destroyed or annulled.

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they
do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers
noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of
this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub-
lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are
either new or have not been previously described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects. J SB. k. Preuss. Akad. (1910) pp. 221-33.

§ Anat. Anzeig., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 1G1-S1.

L86 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Unity of Meiotic Process in Plants and Animals.* — Victor flregoire
has made a critical comparative study of the results which have been
reached by observers of the maturation or meiotic process in plants and
animals. The general result is that lie is able to apply one scheme of
interpretation to a large number of cases in both kingdoms. Just as
there is a unity in the behaviour of the chromosomes in somatic karvo-
kinesis, so there is in the reduction division. The scheme followed is
described in somewhat forbidding terms as " une prereduction hetero-
homeotypique preparee par une pseudo-reduction prophasique par
parasyndese ou zygotenie." A large bibliography is appended.

Abnormal Bone-growth in Absence of Functioning Testes.! —
A. C. Geddes believes that the immediate effects of removing functioning
gonads are (1) that the demands upon the internal food-supply of the
body are lessened ; and (2) that the body is deprived of some internal
secretion or nervous stimulus. The immediate effects are certainly
twofold : (1) the cells of the epiphysial cartilages are stimulated more
rapidly to proliferate ; and (2) there is an arrest in the development of
the penis, the scrotum, the prostate, the antrum of Highmore, and
possibly the brain. There is no evidence to show why the arrest in the
growth of these parts takes place. It may be supposed to be due to the
absence of a stimulus to growth conveyed by an internal secretion or
through the nervous system. However it be effected, it appears to
differ in origin altogether from the stimulus to growth experienced by
the epiphysial cartilages. The departures from the normal inter-relations
of the amount and rate of growth of the cartilages when the gonads are
removed or destroyed are not fortuitous, but follow the same regular
plan in men and animals. This plan is discussed at length.

Influence of Malnutrition and Castration on Development of
Sheep's Skeleton.:}: — N. Tschirwinsky shows how malnutrition in youth
affects the development of the bones, sometimes retarding the rate of
growth without final effect ; sometimes lessening weight and size in
different parts proportionally, sometimes causing disproportionate growth ;
and so on.

Castration of rams at the age of a month affects the form of the
skull, lengthens the neck, shortens and broadens the os innominatum,
lengthens long bones, inhibits the horns, greatly affects weight but in
different directions in different parts.

Development of Rabbit's Teeth. § — J. Stach finds that the rudimen-
tary teeth discovered by Huxley in front of the incisors are really the
milk predecessors of the large incisors.

Development of Vertebral Column in Reptiles and Birds. || — A. C.
Bruni has studied Gongylus ocellatus and the chick. It is shown in
detail that a vertebral body is formed from three components, (a) the

* La Cellule, xxvi. (1910) pp. 223-422 (145 figs.).

t Proc. R. Soc. Edinb., xxxi. (1910) pp. 100-150 (3 pis.).

t Arch. Mikr. Anat. lxxv. (1910) pp. 522-61.

§ Bull. Acad. Sci. Cracovie (1910) pp. 215-59 (2 pis.).

|| Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino, xlv. (1910) pp. 750-7 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 187

cellular notockordal sheath ; (b) a tract of sclerotome which is trans-
formed directly into cartilage ; and (c) the intra-arcual membrane.

Development of Enteron in American Alligator.* — Albert M. Reese
describes the development of the alimentary canal, with a brief descrip-
tion of the minute structure for each stage discussed. An account of
the development of the derivatives of the digestive tract is postponed.
No summary is given of the more important results.

Development of Alpine Salamander.f — Hans Wunderer describes in
particular the development of the external form in Salamandra atra. He
describes the total unequal segmentation of the telolecithal ovum, the
gastrulation, the formation of the medullary groove and its closure, the
development of gill-arches and gills, and so on. An interesting general
result is that S. atra is in many respects nearer to Tritonidse and
Amblystomatidae than to S. maculosa. Its origin from the latter is out
of the question, and perhaps it is not a Salamandra at all.

Production of Supernumerary Limbs in Amphibians. J — Eugen
Lissitzky has followed Tornier's method of cutting the primordia of the
limbs in young tadpoles, and thus inducing duplicity. Sometimes two
pelvic girdles were produced. His particular aim has been to enquire
into the minute structure of the supernumerary growths, but the main
results of this enquiry are held over.

Development of Teleosts.§— Caroline Reis has studied the early
development of Amiurus nebulosus and a number of other types.
Among the conclusions reached we note the following. The embryo
develops mainly from the material at the posterior margin of the blasto-
derm, where the endoderm, the notochord, and the mesoderm are
established. There is a concentration of this embryo-forming material
towards the middle line. With the appearance of Kupffer's vesicle,
which forms the most posterior end of the endoderm, the most important
embryo-forming material reaches the longitudinal axis of the embryo.
What is left peripherally is used in forming the tail.

Kupffer's vesicle does not remain where it appears, but is shunted
forwards during the formation of the end of the embryo from the
posteriorly coalescent marginal ring. A similar coalescence of the
halves of the marginal ring takes place at the opposite end.

Development of Pigment-cells in Teleostean Embryos. || — L. Bolk
has studied this in Atherina, Alburnus, Box, Belone, and Lophius. Some
of the noteworthy points are the following : that the pigment-cells
appear very early ; that they are very regular in their arrangement ; that
they sometimes show a metameric character. Those that are metameri-
cally disposed arise in situ from unpigmented cells. Migration, however,
in the cutis was well seen in the tail end of the angler.

* Smithsonian Misc. Coll., lvi. No. 11 (1910) pp. 1-25 (15 pis.).

t Zool. Jahrb., xxix. (1910) pp. 367-414 (9 pis.).

j Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxv. (1910) pp. 587-633 (3 pis. and 3 figs.).

§ Bull. Acad. Sci. Cracovie (1910) pp. 521-42 (3 pis.).

|| Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxv. (1910) pp. 414-34 (1 pi. and 6 figs.).

188 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

b. Histolog-y.

Culture of Tissues outside the Organism. — Montrose T. Burrows*
has cultivated dissected tissues of a GO-hour chick in a plasma derived
from the adult. In this he followed Ross Harrison's lead. Skin, nerves,
and mesenchyme-cells flourished well. Nerve-fibres grew for three or
four days. A heart continued to beat for eight days. The growth of
nerve-fibres was especially studied.

Alexis Carrel t and Montrose T. Burrows have succeeded in cultivat-
ing in plasma all sorts of adult tissues from cat and dog. Their
experiments included connective-tissue, cartilage, marrow, skin, peri-
toneum, spleen, kidney, thyroid, supra-renal, ovary, lymphatic ganglion.
Abundant karyokinesis occurred.

J. Jolly | has succeeded in keeping Batrachian leucocytes alive for
ten months.

Blood-formation in Grass Snake.§ — Wera Dantschakoff finds that
the erythropoesis in Tropidonotus natrix occurs during the greater part
of embryonic life in the blood vessels associated with the yolk-sac. At
the end of embryonic life a new blood-forming organ develops, namely
the medulla of the bones, which in the grass-snake is localized in the
vertebras. Here, as in the chick and other forms, the first free cell, the
lymphoid hasniocytoblast, develops in loco from mesenchyme-cells ; and
from its many-sided differentiation arise all the different cells of the
blood.

Endothelial Genesis of Leucocytes. || — Vincenzo Patella has made
a prolonged study of the genesis of the mononuclear leucocytes, and has
come to the conclusion, which, if correct, is very important both
theoretically and practically, that they arise from detached endothelial
cells of the blood-vessels. This conclusion, he notes, was also reached
by Tigri so long ago as 1857.

Giant-cells of Mole's Placental — A. van Cauwenberghe finds in
the placenta of the mole a set of cells comparable to the megacaryocytes
of haematopoietic organs, in their genesis, in their repeated pluripolar
nuclear divisions, and in their fate or cytolysis. But the megacaryocytes
arise from white blood corpuscles, these placental giant-cells from
decidual connective-cells. The megacaryocytes disintegrate to nourish
the erythroblasts ; the placental or decidual giant-cells elaborate certain
substances characteristic of the blood-plasma during gestation.

Chordoid Tissue.** — Joseph Schaffer distinguishes diffuse and com-
pact chordoid supporting tissue. Under diffuse chordoid supporting
tissue he discusses the vesicular connective substance in Molluscs and in
Decapod Crustaceans, the vesicular tissue of the Tunicate test, the
perimeningeal filling tissue in Ammoccete and lamprey, the vesicular
tissue near the eye of the hag, the chordoideal tissue of Petromyzon

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 291-2.
t Tom. cit., pp. 293-4. J Tom. cit., p. 295.

§ Verh.-Anat. Ges. (1910) ; Anat. Anzeig. Erganz., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 70-75.
|| La Genese Endothi-liale des Leucocytes Mononucleaires du Sang. Sieni e,
1910, 242 pp. (113 figs.). 1 Arch. Biol., xxv. (1910) pp. 99-168 (4 pis.).

** Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1910) pp. 1-90 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 189

marinus, the endoneural cell- vesicles, the tissue in the sinus of vibrissas
and in the rhomboidal sinus of birds, and the fatty tissue. Under com-
pact chordoid supporting tissue he discusses the notochord-tissue in
embryos and the remains of it in adults, the supporting tissue in
the tentacles of Hydroids and around the margin of Medusae, and the
so-called cartilage of Amphioxus.

Eye of Pteropus.*— Walther Kolmer finds that the eye of Pteropus
stands quite by itself. It shows peculiarities of choroid and retina which
have no parallel among Vertebrates, at least beyond the limits of the
Megachiroptera. In Cynonycteris, another large bat, the choroid showed
the same peculiarities as in Pteropus, but the eyes of Microchiroptera
show no hint of them. One of the most striking peculiarities is the
development of a layer of cone-shaped elevations in the choroid. In
consequence of this the outer surface of the retina is not smooth as in
all other animals, but shows even on macroscopic investigation numerous
depressions or indentations.

Thread-like Structures in Epidermic Cells of Tadpoles.f — N".
Loewenthal discusses peculiar coiled threads of considerable thickness
which occur in the cytoplasm of the cells of the epidermis in tadpoles.
They are quite smooth and homogeneous, and not composed of granules.
Therefore they cannot be mitochondria. It is possible that they repre-
sent chondriokonts.

Threads and Granules in the Cytoplasm. — N. Samssonow $ has
found evidence in cartilage, connective-tissue, and epidermic cells, that
Flemming's threads and Altmann's granules are really the same. His
figures of similar cells treated with Flemming's mixture or by Altmann's
method are very convincing.

F. Meves § has studied, in reference to the same question, the white
blood corpuscles of rabbit and rat, and brings forward evidence in
support of the conclusion, that Flemming's " Fila," Altmann's
" Bioplasts," and the chondriosomes or plastosomes of to-day are all the
same.

Protoplasmic Fibres in Epidermic Cells. || — B. Kosenstadt has
studied the adult and embryonic epidermis of man and various other
types, with special reference to the fibres in the cytoplasm. They run
longitudinally, transversely, and vertically. Some of each direction go
from cell to cell through the intercellular spaces, forming the so-called
" bridges." The minute " knots," sometimes described as forming part
of the bridges, are really fibres in section.

Supporting Elements in Sensory Epithelium. f — "W. Kolmer bar?
studied the sensory papillae of the asolotl, the taste papillae of mammal0,

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1910) pp. 91-104 (1 pi.).
f Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 55-67 (1 fig.).
J Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxv. (1910) pp. 635-41 (1 pi.).
§ Tom. cit., pp. 642-58 (1 pi.).
|| Tom. cit., pp. 659-88 (1 pi.).
^f Anat. Anzeig., xxxvi. (1910) pp. 281-99 (1 pi and 3 figs.).

April 19th, 1911 0

190 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the olfactory epithelium of various types, and a number of other
examples of sensory epithelium. He calls attention to the presence of
supporting fibrils as distinct from neurofibrils in all the kinds of sensory
cells in Vertebrates, and discusses the topographical and physiological
relations of the two.

Continuity of Mitochondria through many Generations of Cells.*
M. E. Faure-Fremiet finds evidence in Infusorians and in germ-cells
that specific mitochondria are divided at each generation of cells, and a con-
tinuity thus sustained. Meves has shown for the fowl, and Duesberg for
the bee and the rabbit, that the mitochondria of the ovum are seen in the
embryo. The author inquires in a critical spirit into the significance of
this, whether the mitochondria are vehicles of inheritance, or whether
they have a trophic value ; and many other theories are discussed.

Reticular Apparatus in Cells of Corpus Luteum.f — Joseph Karl
Riquier has studied this in the cow. He finds that Golgi's reticular
apparatus, though varied in appearance, is usually evident in a peri-
nuclear position. The continuity of the clumps and threads of the
network is often far from evident. Three stages in the involution of
the network are described, ending in practically complete disappearance.

Pigment-cells in Sheep's Cornea.^ — P- A. Cilimbaris has found in
the substantia propria of the cornea, under the anterior epithelium,
beside the ramifications of the plexus subepithelial and basalis, numerous
pigment-cells. They occurred not merely near the corneal margin, but
over the whole surface.

Pigment in the Human Neurohypophysis^ — A. Kohn discusses the
posterior lobe or nervous portion of the hypophysis (the neurohypophysis),
as contrasted with the anterior lobe (the epithelial or glandular portion).
What particularly interests him is the pigmentation, which has its seat in
the glia-cells and their processes, especially in the latter. The pigment
is not fat nor a lipochrome, but its precise nature has not been ascertained.
It is probably a disintegration-product. It increases with age. The
author gives many reasons why he cannot agree with those who call the
neurohypophysis a gland.

Kidney of Gecko. || — B. Zarnik has studied the structure of the
multilobate kidney in Ascalobota, and compares it with that of other
Eeptiles and of Mammals. That of other Reptiles may be derived from
the Gecko type, which also shows most resemblance to that of Mammals.
It is pointed out that in Geckos the differentiation into cortex and
medulla has begun. The author suggests that a lobe of the Gecko
kidney is homologous with those parts of the cortex in Mammals that
are enclosed by the medullary rays.

* Anat. Anzeig., xxxvi. (1910) pp. 186-91 (3 figs.).

t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxv. (1910) pp. 772-80 (1 pi.).

X Tom. cit., pp. 689-91. § Tom. cit., pp. 337-74 (2 pis.).

|| SB. Phys. Med. Ges. Wiirzburg (1910) pp. 2-4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 191

c General.

Atavism.* — M. Hilzheimer thinks that biologists have been too
easy-going in the use of the word and concept " atavism." He maintains
that although atavisms occur, we cannot give this interpretation to
supernumerary fingers and toes, nor to zebroid stripes in horses, and so
forth. It is interesting to notice that atavisms in domestic animals are
clearest in those which have had a monophyletic origin, but have been
separated by isolation into numerous races. In intercrossing of these
races the isolated primordia come together again. In polyphyletic races
it is extremely improbable that there could be an atavism harking back
for a considerable number of generations.

&*

Interesting Structural Analogy.f — Austin Hobart Clark points out
the resemblance between the " snow-shoes " of the ruffed grouse (Bonasa
umbellata) and the supplementary plates in Crinoid arms. The " snow-
shoes " which develop in winter are formed from two rows of " scutes "
on either side of each toe, which increase the area of the foot by as
much again. "Thus a bird walking about in the winter brings to bear
only half as much weight in any given spot as the same bird in summer,
and is thereby enabled to tread securely upon slightly compacted snow."

In Crinoids the food consists of small organisms which fall on the
upturned and outstretched arms and pinnules, and are thence conducted
by a ciliated " ambulacral groove " to the mouth. The increase of area
by two rows of supplementary plates on each side of the median row is
very advantageous. The development of accessory side-plates occurs in
the Crinoids of deeper waters, where the food consists mainly of dead
organisms. They are suppressed or absent in littoral and pelagic forms,
whose food consists of minute living animals.

■■->

Osmotic Growths.^ — Stephane Leduc regards Biology as a depart-
ment of the physico-chemistry of fluids. With gelatin and drops of
potassium ferrocyanide one can make nucleated artificial cells which
" die " after a time, and by dropping fragments of salt into appropriate
solutions one can get osmotic growths like polyps and periwinkles,
mushrooms and moulds, corals and leaves. Of course, osmotic phe-
nomena are important in organisms, and require much more study than
they have as yet received, but Leduc's osmotic growths do not afford
what the title of his book suggests.

Male Genital Organs in Insectivora and Lemuridae.§ — "W. Kaudern
has made a comparative study of the male genitalia in these two orders,
and some of his results throw light on systematic relationships. It
appears, for instance, that the Chrysochloridae are more primitive than
other Insectivora, and the Tupajidse more specia'ized. It is shown that
as regards the penial structure the Lemuridse exhibit two divergent
types, derivable however from a common stock — that of the Madagascar
Lemurs, and that of the Lemurs on the African continent and in Asia.

* Zeitschr. iudukt. Abstammungslohre, iii. (1910) pp. 201-14.
t Ann. Nat. Hist., v. (1910) pp. 358-61 (2 figs.).

X Theorie physico-chimique do la Vie et Generations spontanees, Paris, 1910,
202 pp. (57 figs.). § Zool. Jahrb., xxxi. (1910) pp. 1-106 (46 figs.).

0 2

192 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Beaked Whales.* — Frederick W. True gives an account of the
beaked whales of the family Ziphiidae in the collection of the United
States National Museum, with remarks on some specimens in other
American museums. With the exception of the bottle-nosed whales of
the genus Hyp&roodon, the Ziphiidae are among the rarest of Cetaceans.
There are three genera, Mesoplodon, Ziphius, and Berardius. Of the
last-named, only about fourteen specimens have been collected thus far.
Attention is called to Stejneger's important discovery that the three
genera are represented at Bering Island in the North Pacific.

Musculature of Pectoral Girdle and Flipper in Cetacea.f — S.
Sterling finds that the resemblance of Odontoceti and Mvstacoceti as
regards fore-limb is rather that of convergence than of close relation-
ship. That of Odontoceti is further from the typical Mammalian fore-
limb than that of Mystacoceti, and the Odontoceti must have sprung
from a Mammalian stock more ancient than the ancestors of the
Mystacoceti. The order Cetacea must]have had a diphyletic origin, as
Kukenthal has suggested.

Homology of Mammalian Lachrymal.:}: — E. Gaupp brings forward
much evidence in support of the view that the lachrymal bone in the
Mammalian skull is homologous with the pre-frontal of Sauropsida, and
not with the somewhat inconstant lachrymal of Sauropsida.

Right- and Left-handedness.§ — Karl von Bardeleben calls attention
to the need of more data in regard to this much-discussed subject. We
cannot even state percentages of left-handedness for different peoples.
A study in the German army in 1910 showed 10,322 left-handed men,
about 3 • 88 p.c. The author points out that there, should be enquiry
into the degree of the left-handedness, as tested by power of writing,
throwing, knitting, and the like, by finer tests as to sensitiveness, and
by precise measurement. The gibbon and orang are right-handed, chim-
panzee and gorilla are left-handed, but we do not yet know how the
predominant right-handedness of mankind has arisen.

Birds and Deinosaurs. — J. Versluys shows that the free movement
of the skull which is so characteristic of Birds, was also possessed by
Deinosaurs. It seems to him likely that Birds and Deinosaurs were
both derived from Diaptosaurians, which were able to run about on
their hind legs. The author argues in favour of this view with great
learning and ingenuity.

Ileal Caecum of Birds.lf — A. Lelievre and E. Retterer have studied
in the duck the structure and development of the third caecum or ileal
appendix, whieh is present in many birds. It is, like the appendix
vermiformis in man, a portion of the alimentary tract, and has to begin
with the same structure. But as development goes on, the epithelium

* U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull, lxxiii. (1910) pp. 1-89 (42 pis.),
t Jen. Zeitschr. Naturw., xlvi. (1910) pp. 667-80 (1 pi. and 4 figs.).
X Anat. Anzeig., xxxvi. (1910) pp. 529-55 (14 figs.).

§ Verh. Anat. Ges., 1910 ; Anat. Anzeig. Erganz., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 10-13.
|| Zool. Jahrb., xxx. (1910) pp. 175-200 (1 pi. and 25 figs.).
i C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 334-7.

ZOOLOGY A.VD BOTANY, MIOJROSCOPY, ETC. 193

of the glands or crypts diverges from that of open glands ; it gives rise
to a mass of reticular tissue producing fluid and corpuscles, which pass
into the blood.

Account of the Hoatzin.* — C. W. Beebe gives an account of the
feeding and breeding habits and other cecological relations of this
extremely interesting bird, Opisthocomus hoatzin, which he had the
fortunate opportunity of studying in Venezuela and British Guiana.

Immunity to Viper Venom. — G. Billardt and E. Maublaut find
that the common duck shows a remarkable indifference to the venom
of the viper. The same is true of the owl (cheveche commune). Two
were bitten badly on the feet, but did not seem much the worse.

G. Billard \ also finds that the domestic cat has almost complete
immunity as regards the neurotoxin of the viper. Perhaps this is true
of many Felidas.

Evolution of Reptilian Scales. § — Georg Stehli has studied the
development of the bony scales in Anguis fragilis and in Gongylus
ocellatus, the segmental arrangement of the scales in lizards and snakes,
the cutis-ossifications in the crocodile and in Chelonians, and the seg-
mental arrangement of the integumentary bones in Aetosaurus ferratus
(Triassic). With Hasse and Otto he concludes that in Reptiles a seg-
mental arrangement of scales is primitive, and that each horny scale
originally belonged to a subjacent bony scale. The phyletic stages are : —
(1) segmental horny scales, with subjacent bony scales ; on each segment
one row of scales, or sometimes, by doubling, two rows ; (2) breaking
up of the bony scale into mosaic-like plates (as in Scincoids) ; (3) dis-
appearance of the bony scale ; (4) multiplication of the horny scales,
and loss of the segmental arrangement.

Ear of Urodela.|| — K. Okajima has studied the structure of the ear
in Megalobatrachus, Siredon, Onyckodactylus, Hynobius, Triton, and
Salamandra, and finds that there are at least three apertures for the
auditory nerve in the internal vestibular wall. The nerve divides on its
entrance into three or more branches. Those that traverse the median
apertures always go to the sacculus.

Total Closure of Gut in Healthy Frog.T — H. Fischer describes a
curious case of a specimen of Rana escidenta which seemed in good
condition, but showed on dissection an enormously dilated rectum which
ended blindly. The sac was full of blackish green material, and the
abnormality must have persisted for a long time. It seems necessary
to suppose that remains of the food must have been passed out by the
mouth.

* Zoologica, New York Zool. Soc, I., No. 2, Dec. 1909, pp. 45-66 (9 figs.).
See also Zool. Zentralbl., xvii. (1910) p. 637.

t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 316-17.
I Tom. cit. pp. 318-19.

§ Jen. Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1910) pp. 737-800 (1 pi. and 19 figs.).
|| Arch. Biol., xxv. (1910) pp. 77-98 (1 pi.).
1 Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 79-86 (1 fig.).

194 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Function of Swim-bladder.*— C. M. L. Popta gives an account of
a large number of experiments on this subject, and a full account of
previously recorded data, inferences, and opinions. She finds that the
swim-bladder favours the circulation of oxygen, and of gas in general,
in the body of fishes. This function is related to the needs of the
animal, and may be voluntarily controlled. The gases enter the cavity
by the blood-vessels, and pass out by the lymphatics. The organ in
question is not hydrostatic nor directly respiratory — it may have some
accessory uses, but its real function is to favour the circulation of gases.

Structure and Function of the Saccus vasculosus in Fishes. f —
K. W. Dammermann has made a careful study of this structure, which
arises as a diverticulum from the posterior infundibular wall, and lies
with the hypophysis in the sella turcica. As has been repeatedly sug-
gested, the saccus vasculosus is not a gland, it is a sense-organ, and a
full account is given of its minute structure, its afferent and efferent
nerves, and its blood-supply. The organ is confined to Fishes, though
in higher Vertebrates there may be a representation of the recessus
posterior iufundibuli. The saccus vasculosus is probably homologous
with the infundibular organ of lancelets and the ciliated groove of
Tunicates. Dammermann argues ingeniously in support of the theory
that the saccus vasculosus enables the fish to become aware of the degree
ct oxygenation in the water, and thus to choose the most comfortable
depth. He proposes to call it a Benthic organ.

Ventral Musculature of Fishes. J — K. Knauer has studied this in
various types. The simplest relations are in dog-fishes. There the
lateral trunk musculature is divided by four interstitial partitions, of
which the interstitium laterale is most conspicuous. But it cannot be
taken as the boundary between dorsal and ventral musculature, since
part of the muscle ventral to it is continued forwards to the skull, and
is undoubtedly dorsal. What is below the interstitium sublaterale is
ventral musculature. But this is only an indication of the general
nature of Knauer's investigation.

Yawning in Fishes. § — Richard Elmhirst describes in cod, saithe,
cobbler, plaice, eel, and other fishes, an action like yawning, consisting
of a wide opening of the mouth, slow expansion of the buccal cavity,
erection of the gill-arches, followed by a rapid expulsion of the indrawn
water, most of which is emitted from the mouth, although some cer-
tainly goes through the gill-slits. This is often accompanied by a
distinct heaving of the pectoral region and erection of the pectoral fins,
and is quite different from the rapid movement of the operculum and
jaws, which is used to remove a foreign object, such as a bit of seaweed,
from the gills. From numerous observations, Elmhirst has been led to
think that this action of fishes is a real yawn, and serves the true phy-
siological purpose of a yawn, i.e. flushing the brain with blood during

* Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.), xii. (1910) pp. 1-160.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1910) pp. 654-726 (4 pis. and 1 fig.).

I Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, xviii. (1910) pp. 207-26 (3 pis. and 6 figs.).

§ Zoologist, 1910, pp. 321-4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 195

periods of sluggishness. The conditions conducive to yawning are a
slight increase in the temperature of the water, and, probably, the
accompanying diminution of oxygen.

Pectoral Girdle and Fins of Teleosteans.* — K. Derjugin has studied
the structure and development of the pectoral girdle and tins in Lophius
piscatorius and other Teleosteans, and goes carefully into the difficult
questions involved, which are complicated by the fact that the secondary
ossified parts, which have no essential phylogenetic importance, tend to
disguise the mutual relations of the primary cartilaginous elements.
Two general summaries of results are given in the paper.

Fisheries of New South Wales.f — David G. Stead gives an inter-
esting account of the fisheries of New South Wales, present and potential.
He deals with Fishes, Crustaceans, Molluscs, Cetaceans, Sponges, and
even seaweeds. He notes that there is reasonable prospect of a sponge
fishery being started. Some of the species of Euspongia and Hippo-
spongia make very good bath sponges. The uses of the " sea-grass,"
Zostera, for packing, etc., and of " vegetable isinglass " (a species of
Gelidium) are commented on.

Large Sun-fish. :{: — A. de Colomina gives a description of a large
specimen of Orthagoriscus oblong us Schneider, from the coast of Spain.
It was 2 m. long, and the height of the trunk was 1*15 m.

Elimination by Leucocytes.§ — L. Spillman and L. Bruntz have
made numerous experiments with crayfish, snails, frogs, rabbits, and many
other animals, injecting coloured fluids such as amnion iacal carmine,
and tracing the process of elimination. They distinguish three phases
in the elimination : — (1) the fluids are fixed mechanically by some forms
of leucocytes (phase of fixation) ; (2) the leucocytes carry the fixed sub-
stances to open or closed excretory organs (phase of transport) ; and (3)
these organs, by a glandular process, get rid of the products fixed by the
leucocytes (phase of excretion).

Fresh-water Microfauna of German East Africa. || — E. von Daday
continues and completes his report. He deals with some Hydrachnids,
and then gives lists of the microfauna in general from different localities.
It is shown that the fauna of small basins, temporary pools, marshes and
the like, is richer and more varied than that of large lakes. He makes
some interesting comparisons of the great lakes. Altogether the author
has dealt with 327 species, of which many are new.

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1910) pp. 572-653 (3 pis. and 8 figs.),
t A Brief Review of the Fisheries of N.S. Wales, present and potential. 8vo.
Sydney (1910) pp. 1-31 (17 pis.).

J. Bol. Soc. Espail. Hist. Nat., x. (1910) pp. 453-6 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).
§ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 154-6.
Zoologica, xxiii. (1910) pp. 241-314 (3 pis.).

19(3 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

INVERTEBRATA.

Mollusca.
o. Cephalopoda.

Genera of Dibranchiate Cephalopoda.* — W. E. Hoyle has prepared
a list of the generic names with their type species, which will be of much
service to future enquirers. In each case the ground upon which the
type has been selected is stated, ami whenever the author is certain that
the type specimen of the type species exists in a particular collection, the
fact is stated.

£. Gastropoda.

Glands and Luminescence of Phyllirhbe.t — E. Trojan describes two
kinds of gland-cells in the body-wall : mucus-cells and albumin-cells,
the former inclining to be multicellular, the latter always single. There
are chromatophores with numerous pigment-granules, functioning like
those of Cephalopods. On the lips there are particularly large mucus-
glands, which take the place of salivary glands. There are unicellular
and multicellular integumentary sense-organs. The luminescence
requires stimulus. It is of two kinds, diffuse and restricted, the former
due to mucus-cells, the latter to combinations of these cells in clusters.
The luminescence is extracellular. The animal is probably poisonous,
and the luminescence a warning.

Minute Structure of Phyllirhbe bucephala.J— Ernst Born has
made a detailed study of the minute structure of this pelagic Gastropod.
He gives an histological account of the skin, the pigment-cells, the
nervous-system, the sense-organs, the musculature, the glands, the
vascular system, and the excretory structures.

Abnormal Shells of Achatina.§ — H. Rolle describes and figures
some remarkable abnormal shells of Achatina, such as a sinistral spiral
and an extraordinary scalariform shell.

Blood-vessels and Nerves of Jlolididse and Tritoniadae.||— Thos. F.
Dreyer has studied a number of different genera in these two families of
Gastropods. In no artery, vein, or lacuna was a proper epithelium
discernible. All these were lined by a membrane composed of much-
branched cells. In both families the heart contains mixed blood. The
cerata are specialized respiratory organs. In the Tritomadas there are
blood-glands at the base of the afferent branchial veins. The nerves
(except the acoustic and optic) are mixed nerves, united at the periphery
by a nerve-plexus of small much-ramified cells. The neuropile breaks
up into a number of bundles. Every ganglion-cell has a large thick
neurite, and probably numerous dendrites. There is a perinuclear net-
work of neurofibrils from which fibrils extend to the periphery and then

* Abh. Senckenberg Nat. Ges., xxxii. (1910) Festschr. Kobelt, pp. 407-13.

t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxv. (1910) pp. 473-518 (2 pis. and 4 figs.).

X Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1910) pp. 105-97 (5 pis. and 2 figs.).

§ Abh. Senckenberg Nat. Ges., xxxii. (1910) Festschr. Kobelt, pp. 191-3 (1 pi.).

|| Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1910) pp. 373-418 (4 pis. and 4 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 197

to the neurites. The muscle-fibres are innervated in two ways. Either
the plasma of the muscle-cell is in direct connexion with the cells of
the plexus, or the whole muscle-fibre is surrounded by a network of
nerve-fibres. These are but a few of the many points in this paper.

Arthropoda.
«• Insecta.

Insects of the Rhine.* — Ferdinand Neeracher has made an interest-
ing study of the larval and adult insects found in the Rhine and its
tributaries, with especial reference to the seasonal changes and the life-
histories. He discusses the mouth-parts of Perlidas, some new or
unknown species of Perlidas and Eohemeridae, and the male dimorphism
in Perla cephalotes Curt., and Dictyopteryx microcephala Pict.

Studies on Bees. — Enoch Zander f gives an analysis of the thoracic
skeleton in the hive-bee and in wasps, and sketches the development
from the larva onwards. The much-discussed waist is an extremely
developed intersegmental groove, between the fourth and fifth segment.
The fourth ring is displaced on to the dorsal wall of the thorax, while
the fifth segment becomes the stalk and the front wall of the abdomen.

F. StellwaagJ describes the movements of the wings in flight, the
mechanism involved, and the musculature. All the parts are so wonder-
fully connected that a single muscular pull suffices to set all the move-
ments going. It has only a single point of insertion at the root of the
wing.

Junction of Fore-gut and Mid-gut in Hive-bee.§— Christian Metzer
finds that all the parts of the abdominal connecting portion between
fore-gut and mid-gut are differentiations of the fore-gut, which ends
blindly. These differentiations are established, in the earliest pupal
stages, far forward in the thorax, as a row of successive chambers. They
are secondarily displaced into the abdomen. The funnel, which regulates
the passage of food into the mid-gut and prevents regurgitation into the
honey-sac, is homologous with the gizzard in other insects.

Species and Varieties of Humble-bees. || — H. Friese and F. von
Wagner have made a very careful and interesting study of the German
species of Bombus, discussing the extraordinary variability (with
parallelism, convergence, and other phenomena), and their phyletic
relations to one another. Tables are given contrasting Bombus with
other bees, contrasting queen and drone Bombus with the queen and
drone of its Doppelgdnger Psithyrus, contrasting the queens of the
fifteen German species, showing the times of appearance, and the size.
Finally the main varieties of the fifteen species are dealt with in an
elaborate table.

* Rev. Suisse Zool., xviii. (1910) pp. 497-590 (19 figs.).

t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcv. (1910) pp. 507-17 (1 pi. and 8 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 518-50 (2 pis. and 6 figs.).

§ Op. cit., xciv. (1909) pp. 539-71 (2 pis. and 2 figs.).

|| Zool. Jahrb., xxix. (1910) pp. 1-104 (7 pis. and 20 figs.).

198 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Blow-fly Larvae and Gravity.*— S. 0. Mast has investigated the
statement of Loeb that blow-fly larvae "swim downward " in water, but
has found that they do not react to gravity, either in water or out of it.
" In air they may be found to orient and crawl nearly straight upward
on objects, but this is not due to a response to gravity on the part of the
organisms. In water they sink to the bottom or float at the top, depend-
ing upon the amount of gas they contain, but there is no evidence
whatever indicating that they can swim."

Metamorphosis of Blow-fly. f — C. Perez has done a very fine piece
of work in his histological account of the metamorphosis of Calliphora
erythrocephala. He refuses to subdivide the nymphal period into two
successive phases of histolysis and histogenesis, for what occurs is a pro-
gressive substitution, and the beginning of histogenesis actually precedes
that of histolysis. The parts that disappear entirely are the parts most
specialized for larval life ; the parts that are built wholly de novo from
embryonic histoblasts are the parts most specialized for adult life. The
less specialized parts, which are more plastic, are re-organized in situ.
The importance of phagocytosis, recently doubted by some critics, is
made doubly clear by the author's careful work.

Oviparity and Viviparity in Dung-fly. J — E. Roubaud finds that
Musca corvina Fab. in tropical Africa is viviparous all the year round,
and may produce a larva every four days. This viviparity requires for
its manifestation an average temperature of at least 30° C. The con-
stant viviparity is interesting, for Portchinsky has shown that in the
north of Russia 31. corvina is constantly oviparous, laying regularly
2i eggs, while in the Crimea it gives birth to a large larva at the end of
spring and in summer.

Suctorial Disks of Male Dytiscids.§ — Oskar Torne gives a careful
account of the structure and mode of action of these familiar organs.
The unicellular glands, which Graber interpreted as producing an adhesive
secretion, open not on the sucker itself, but in a circle at the base of the
stalk. They have nothing to do with adhesion, but may produce a sort
of varnish for the setae, so that the air between the setae is less readily
displaced by the water. The adhesion is mechanical ; the suckers of
preserved specimens work effectively.

Oogenesis in Dytiscidae.|| — Thomas Giinthert has studied the ovary
of Dytiscus and Colymbetes, and describes the origin of the ova and
nutritive-cells, the relations between them, and the secretory function of
the nutritive-cells.

Respiration in Donacia and Macroplea.lf — Johannes Deibel has
studied the habits of these water-beetles, with especial reference to their
respiration. The larvae live on the roots and rhizomes and between the

* Biol. Bulletin, xviii. (1910) pp. 191-2.
t Arch. Zool. Exper., iv. (1910) pp. 1-274 (16 pis.).
% Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 156-8.
§ Zool. Jahrb., xxix. (1910) pp. 415-48 (2 pis.).
|| Op. cit., xxx. (1910) pp. 301-72 (7 pis. and 2 figs.).
1 Op. cit., xxxi. (1910) pp. 107-60 (2 pis. and 3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 199

leaf-sheaths of various aquatic plants, and feed on the sap which flows
out from bitten parts. The larval period lasts for three months, and
there are six moults. The ordinary stigmata are closed till the penulti-
mate moult, and the final form is not assumed until the last moult.
Respiration is discharged by the special terminal " Hakchen-stigma "
which has a closing apparatus. The imago of Macroplea remains per-
manently in the water. It does not use atmospheric gas, but what it gets
from plants. This is collected by a multitude of hairs on the antennae.

Post-embryonic Development of Stratiomydse.* — Simeon Jusbasch-
janz has studied larvae and pupae of Odontomyia and Stratiomys,
with special reference to the thoracic imaginal disks, the mesoderm of
the appendages, the head-disks, the metamorphosis of the thoracic
muscles (in which the new formation is wholly due to the activity of the
imaginal myoblast-mass), and the gullet (with its masticatory specializa-
tions). Two peculiarities are the thoracic hypodermis-primordia and
the secondary formation of a peripodial space.

Brain of Lepisma. f — Otto Bottger has done a very useful piece of
work in making a thorough study of the brain of Lepisma saccharina,
a welcome contribution to the comparative anatomy of the insect's
brain. Lepisma (the silverfish not uncommon in houses) has a quite
peculiar brain, and shows some parts which have not been observed as
yet in other insects. The characteristic peculiarities are : (1) the
spherical shape of the mushroom-like bodies ; (2) the large cell-mass
which lies behind these — the quite peculiar grape-like body ; (3) the large
size of the olfactory lobe and the small size of the optic lobe ; and (4)
the strength of the labro-frontal nerve and its origin from a particular
lobe on the oesophageal commissure.

Study of Corixa.J — J. Hagemann has made some very interesting
observations on Corixa, both in its larval and its adult stages. He
describes the respiration at successive stages and the structure of the
stigmata. A new tympanal organ is described, which occurs in close
association with the second stigma. It probably serves for the percep-
tion of the notes (of two kinds) which the males produce by rubbing
their tarsi against the striated rostrum. The abdominal glands of the
larvae are described, and the asymmetry of the male abdomen is discussed.

&■ Tffyriopoda.

Study of Polyxenus.§ — Georg Reinecke has made an interesting
study of Polyxenvs lagurus, a beautiful little Millipede, with particular
reference to its mode of life, and its respiratory, alimentary, and repro-
ductive systems. There is relatively little known of the minute structure
of the Pselaphognatha to which Polyxenus belongs.

The creature lives under bark and the like in moist places. It feeds
on wood and vegetable matter. Its alleged destruction of Phylloxera

* Jen. Zeitschr. Naturw., xlvi. (1910) pp. 681-736 (3 pis. and 7 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 801-44 (2 pis. and 6 figs.).

% Zool. Jahrb., xxx. (1910) pp. 373-426 (2 pis. and 2 figs.).

§ Jen. Zeitschr. Naturw., xlvi. (1910) pp. 845-96 (6 pis. and 21 figs.).

200 SUMMARY OF OUREENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

requires confirmation. It has no repulsive glands, sueh as the majority
of the Millipedes possess. The spines may take their place, but it
should also be noticed that the animal is very small ami shy, and that
its coloration is protective. The mid-gut was Bometimes almost choked
with Gregarines. Pairing has not been seen. Males arc very scarce :
the author found none among 2000 specimens. Perhaps parthenogenesis
occurs. Attention must be directed to the beautiful drawings of the
adults.

British Carboniferous Myriopods.* — W. Baldwin describes some
fossil Myriopods from the middle coal-measures of Rochdale, namely
Acantherpestes giganteus sp. n., an enormous specimen of about 195 mm.,
Euphoberia armigera Meek and Worthen, E. robusta sp. n., another
larger form of about 68 mm. in length, E. ivoodwardi sp. n., and
Xylobius platti (H. Woodward).

5- Arachnida.

Circulatory System of Lycosa carolinensis.f — A. Petrunkevitch
points out that most of the text-book descriptions of the heart of spiders
are erroneous. He corroborates the results of Causard, and gives a fine
figure from an injected specimen. The heart has three pairs of ostia,
not four (except in Theraphosidae). The arterial system is described.
As the blood that enters by the second pair of ostia comes directly from
the body-cavity, it is probably venous. It is likely therefore that the
heart contains mixed blood.

Mites and Tumours 4 — Enzio Renter criticises the evidence brought
forward in support of the theory that mites (Tarsonemus in particular)
may have causally to do with tumours in man and mammals. As an
expert acarologist he shows how readily accidental association might
come about, and he does not regard the evidence as at all convincing.

Hydrachnids of East African Lakes.§ — Charles D. Soar describes
three new species, Neumania papillosa, Mideopsis minuta, Hygrobates
edentipalpis from Lake Tanganyika, and Unionicula cunningtoni sp. n.
from Lake Nyassa. He also gives a list of the 18 Hydrachnids as yet
recorded from East African Lakes.

Pycnogonids of Clyde Area.|| — Richard Elmhirst records Pycno-
gonum littorale, Endeis (JPhoxichilus) spinosus, Phozichilidiiimfemoratiim,
Anaphia {Anoplodactylus) petiolata, A. pyr/msea, Pallene brevirostris, P.
producta, Nymphon rubrum, N. gracile, Ammothea laevis, and A. echinata
from the Clyde area.

Pentastomum of Python. if — E. Bugnion describes three female
specimens of Porocephalus moniliforme Dies, from the lungs of a python
in Ceylon. The largest was 6 J cm. in length ; the head end was very

* Geol. Mag., viii. (1911) pp. 74-80 (2 pis.).

t Zool. Jahrb., xxxi. (1910)[pp. 161-8 (1 pi.).

% Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lvi. (1910) pp. 339-44 (2 figs.).

§ Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1910, pp. 109-14 (1 pi.).

|| Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc, Glasgow, viii., pt. 2 (published 1910) pp. 146-9.

^T Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., xlvi. (1910) pp. 467-72 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 201

slightly club-shaped ; the number of rings was about twenty-seven ; no
stigmata could be seen ; the posterior end showed the anus and a genital
aperture. The author adds a few more details in regard to a type which
still remains inadecmately known.

f. Crustacea.

Genital Pores in Norway Lobster.* — D. C. Mcintosh has examined
over 3000 specimens of JSFephrops norvegicus, and has combined his
results with those previously noted by F. H. A. Marshall. Out of 4237
males 9*8 p.c. had other than the normal two spermatic openings.
Sixteen different arrangements have been noticed, and the total observed
range in number of genital openings is from one to six. Marshall
observed one case of seven. Of the forms showing variation, 0#5 p.c.
had one, 72*3 had three, 21 "1 had four, 4-7 had five, and 1*4 p.c. had
six. Out of 2061 individuals only 76 were females ; out of 4491 less
than 5*7 were females, all with two oviducal openings. The author
adheres to a view previously expressed that the females being smaller
than the males escape from the trawl net more readily.

Fossil Idoteid.f — E. G-. Racovitza and R. Sevastos describe Proidotea
haugi g. et sp. n., a fine fossil from Oligocene strata in Roumania. It is
to be referred to the vicinity of Chiridotea Harger and Mesidotea
Richardson, and the author establishes for the three genera a new sub-
family Mesidoteini. They form " a natural group, of very ancient
origin, completely isolated from the rest of the Idoteids."

Maxillary Glands of Cirripedes.J — A. Defner has studied the
structure of these glands in Lepas, Gonchoderma, and Balanus. The
relations of the terminal saccule and the urinary canal are carefully
worked out. Of importance is the demonstration of a rod-cuticle and
plasmic striations in the epithelium of the urinary canal, for this
establishes the homology of this part with the urinary canal of the
nephridium in other Crustacea.

Geographical Distribution of DiaptomidaeJ — M. Annunziata
Tollinger has done a laborious piece of work in summarizing the distribu-
tion of Diaptornidae and some other fresh-water and brackish-water genera
in the family Centropagidae. He uses his results in reference to general
problems, such as the derivation of fresh-water forms from a marine
stock, the systematic relationships of the genera, and the modes of
dispersal.

Revision of North American Species of Cyclops. || — C. Dwight
Marsh notes that most of the American species are identical with those
in Europe, and that many have a wide range of variation which has led
to the premature erection of new species. Following Schmeil's treatise,
he has revised the North American species and provided a useful key.

* Proc. R. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, xviii. (1911) pp. 145-53 (1 fig.).

t Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1910) pp. 175-200 (2 pis. and 18 figs.).

X Arb. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, xviii. (1910) pp. 183-206 (1 pi. and 2 figs.).

§ Zool. Jahrb., xxx. (1911) pp. 1-302 (4 pis. and 178 figs.).

|| Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci., xvi. (1910) pp. 1067-1134 (10 pis.).

202 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Copepods parasitic on Alcyonarians.* — Antonio de Zulueta de-
scribes some new species of Lamippe, and discusses the constitution of
the characteristic buccal apparatus and of the furca. On the latter
there are interesting aciculi, which alter in length and often bear a
refringent globule. The author compares this peculiar kind of aciculus
to the axis in the pseudopod of a Heliozoon. One of the interesting
facts about the species of Lamippe is that each of the eleven Alcyonarians
examined had its own particular parasite.

Annulata.

Internal Fertilization in Pareudrilus.t — Luijji Cognetti de Martiis
finds evidence that the receptaculum seminis in Pareudrilus pallidas is
not merely a storage-house for spermatophores, but is adapted to
facilitate internal fertilization by migration of the spermatozoa.

Neurochords of Criodrilus.J — Josef Honig finds three neurocbords
in the dorsal part of the ventral nerve-cord of this Oligochset, ex-
tending from the hindmost ganglion to the sub-oesophageal. They
appear to arise from nerve-cells in the last ganglion. In all parts of
the body they are connected with ganglion-cells, in a perfectly definite
way, which is described. Each lateral twig of the neurochord contains
a twig of the neurofibril bundle of the giant fibres. The envelope of the
neurochord and of its lateral twig contains a variety of glia-cells.

Development of Criodrilus lacuum.§— Franz Staff finds that the
cell lineage in this type is like that described by Wilson, Bergh, and
Yejdovsky in LumbricidEe. Between the mesoderm band and the
ectoderm, embedded in the latter, there are on each side four pairs of
cell-rows, which spring from posterior pole-cells.

The nephridia develop from the retro-peritoneal cell-row which lies
laterally to the "primitive muscle-fibres." The row falls into seg-
mentary arranged groups of cells which protrude into the ccelom and
are enveloped in peritoneum.

The upper lip of the funnel arises from a large pras-septal cell
(" funnel-cell " of various authors), which divides repeatedly. The
lumen of the funnel arises by a folding of the septal wall between the
upper lip and the first cells of the loop.

Studies on Arenicolidae. — J. H. Ash worth || reports on the Areni-
colidas in the Berlin Museum, which include Arenicola marina (Linnaeus)
= A. piscatorum Lamarck, A. claparedii Levinsen, A. assimilis Ehlers,
A. assimilis var. affinis Ashworth, A. grubii Claparede, and A. ecaudata
Johnston.

The author reports also If on the North and South American species,
which include the first three mentioned above, along with the gigantic
A. cristata Stimpson and A. glacialis Murdoch. Of the last-named a

* Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1910) pp. 137-48 (17 figs.).
t Atti Accad. Sci. Torino, xlv. (1910) pp. 737-50 (1 pi.).
X Arb. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, xviii. (1910) pp. 257-82 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).
§ Torn, cit., pp. 227-56 (2 pis.).
!| MT. Zool. Mus. Berlin, iv. (1910) pp. 317-54.
\ Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxx. (1910) pp. 1-32.

ZOOLOOY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 203

full description is given. There is a useful diagnostic key of American
species.

In another paper Ash worth* reports on the collection in the Paris
Museum, which includes A. marina, A.grubii, A.ecaudata, and A.pusilla
Quatrefages. Of the last a description is given.

Arenicola loveni.t — J. H. Ashworth gives an account of A. loveni
Kinberg from Durban and Saldanha Bay. Its systematic position may
be stated thus — there is no affinity beyond a generic one between it and
A. claparedii, A. assimilis, and A. glacialis. In general appearance it
most nearly resembles the large Laminarian examples of A. marina,
but in its prostomium and setas, and in some of its internal organs,
especially its septal pouches and statocysts, it departs markedly from
A. marina and much more nearly approaches A. cristata, from which it
differs chiefly in the number of its segments and gills. These facts
indicate that the affinities of A. loveni lie between A. marina and
A. cristata, but more closely to the latter than to the former. The median
lobe of the prostomium is large ; neuropodia are clearly visible on each
segment ; each notopodial seta bears numerous finely toothed crests at
regular intervals along the distal third of the shaft ; there are two
enormous muscular pouches projecting backwards from the first septum,
passing through the second, and ending immediately in front of the
third ; the two statocysts are closed oval sacs, each containing a large
oval secreted statolith.

Precision of Regeneration in Polynoids.J — Aug. Michel has experi-
mented with Halosydna gelatinosa and Lagisca extenuata, which are
very readily provoked to autotcmy of segments and elytra. The striking
fact which he brings out is the absolute precision with which the normal
number of elytra, which alternate in twos or in threes, is preserved in
the regeneration.

"»v

Sansilli and Eyes of Medicinal Leech. § — L. Hacklov gives an
account of the sensilli or unspecialized sensory cells of the leech, which
respond to all sorts of stimuli, and shows how by their specialization in
one direction they have given rise to eyes, and in another direction to
olfactory organs. There can be no doubt that the eyes of Hirudo are
highly organized results of the evolution of touch-organs.

Chaetognatha from Ireland. [| — Rudolf von Ritter-Zahony finds that
in the upper layers off the Irish coast this group is almost solely repre-
sented by Sagitta bipunctata and Spadella cephaloptera. There is a com-
paratively rare occurrence of Sagitta serratodentata, and of younger stages
of EuTcrohnia hamata. A very different state of things prevails as regards
the Chaetognaths of the mesoplankton ; Sagitta bipunctata and Spadella
cephaloptera are entirely absent ; Eukrohnia hamata predominates, and
with it we have nine additional species, of which some are permanently

* Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.), 1910, pp. 111-24 (4 figs.).

t Arkiv Zool., vii. (1909) No. 5, pp. 1-17 (1 pi.).

\ Coniptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 152-3.

§ Zool. Jahrb., sxx. (1910) pp. 261-300 (4 pis. and 3 figs.).

|| Fisheries Ireland Sci. Invest., iv. (1910) pp. 1-7.

204 SUMMAEY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

confined to the mesoplankton, and some are only met with there in an
adult state after having passed I he earlier stages of their development in
jthe epiplankton of warmer regions. This great difference in the number
of species between epiplankton and mesoplankton is characteristic of the
temperate zone. In tropical and subtropical regions the Chastognatha
of the surface are much more multifarious owing to the presence of
numerous epiplanktonic warm-water species, while those of the lower
layers, in consequence of the cosmopolitanism of most (perhaps all) of
the mesoplanktonic species, scarcely change.

West Indian Chsetognatha.* — Rudolf v. Ritter-Zahony reports on
a collection from the Tortugas, including Sagitta helcnse sp. n., and
numerous previously known species. The collection supports the con-
clusion that the distribution of the epiplanktonic warm-water species is
not localized, but extends round the earth in zones bounded to north
and south by isotherms.

Theory of Dwarf Males in Myzostoma. t — A. F. Coventry applies
<i. W. Smith's theory of the dwarf males in barnacles to Myzostoma.
The theory is that secondary hermaphroditism has been imposed on a
primitive dicecism, on the males. Ordinary monoecious Cirripedes are
really males, all the females having been suppressed. The complemental
males are* in an arrested state of development due to the condition of
protandric hermaphroditism through which they at one time passed. In
Rhizocephala, the dwarf males never become sexually mature, being
represented by the Cypris larvse found on the young SaccuUna externa.
Smith believes that these Cypris larvae and the complemental males of
the Pedunculata are potential hermaphrodites, arrested by the position
taken up by them on fully developed individuals. In Epicarida, all
individuals are at first larval males, which, after crawling upon the adult
(functionally female) individuals and fertilizing them, migrate to and
become parasitic on various Crustaceans, and there assume the female
condition. Coventry points out that the facts known about Myzostoma
seem to be susceptible of a similar interpretation to that suggested by
Smith for Cirripedes.

Nematoh.elminth.es.

[ Idiochromosomes in Ascaris.J — C. L. Edwards finds evidence of a
distinct idiochromosome in Ascaris megalocephala. One half of the
spermatozoa contain the two well-known rod-shaped elements, while the
remaining spermatozoa possess, in addition to the two large chromo-
somes, the small heterotropic idiochromosome. In a univalens worm he
found a number of equatorial plates of the first cleavage division which
showed an unpaired idiochromosome.

In Ascaris lumbricoides the sex-determinant is in the form of five
univalent idiochromosomes. Some of the spermatozoa have simply
li) chromosomes, and these fertilizing ova with 24 (including 5 idio-

* Zool. Jahrb. (1910), Supplement xi., Heft 2, pp. 133-14 (1 pi.).

t Ann. Nat. Hist., v. (1910) pp. 378-80.

% Archiv f. Zellforsch., v. (1910) pp. 422-9 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 205

chromosomes) are supposed to yield males. The other spermatozoa
have 24 chromosomes (including 5 idiochromosomes), and are supposed
to yield females.

Comparison of Ascaris felis and A. canis.* — H. Glaue has made
a careful comparison of these two species, which are so near one another
in general appearance. By a thorough survey he shows that they differ
in numerous anatomical and histological features.

Strongylus pinguicola.f — J. Hellemans describes this Nematode,
which is the same as Diesing's Stephanurus dentatus and Verrill's
JSclerostoma pinguicola. He studied it in Java and Sumatra, where it
occurs in the domestic pig. The larva occurs in the portal system, the
adult in the abdominal fat, in the wall of the pelvis of the kidney, and
in the ureter. The parasites produce a very serious inflammation of
the portal vein, liver, and kidneys.

Anti -coagulant Action of Nematode Extract.} — E. Emile-Weil
and Gr. Boye have found that extract of Ascaris equorum has a
retardative influence on the coagulation of rabbit's blood, and suggest
that this property may in part explain the haemorrhages caused by these
parasites. Anti-coagulants have been demonstrated in AnJcylostomam,
Ixodes, ffirudo, etc., by various investigators.

Platyhelminthes.

Trematodes from Tortugas.§— Edwin Linton describes a large
number of new Trematodes from Tortugas fishes and one from the
Loggerhead Turtle. A new sub-order (Deontacotylea) is established
for Deontacylix ovalis g. et sp. n., and a new family (Siphoderidae) for
certain forms with an anterior oral and a ventral genital sucker. The
Allocreadiinae are well represented, and some very interesting morpho-
logical problems are raised. Especially suggestive is the singular
Trematode fauna of the black angel-fish (Pomacanthus arcuaius), some
of the genera of which bear a strong resemblance to genera which are
characteristic of turtles. Attention is called to certain cells about the
neck and elsewhere in a number of Bistomes, e.g., Deradena ovalis g. et
sp. n., which are interpreted as yolk-forming.

Echinostomidse of Birds. || — Eugen Diets: gives an elaborate
account of this family of Trematodes, the members of which are
characterized by a spinose head-collar round about the oral sucker, but
open ventrally. In most cases the shape is reniform. The author
recognizes no fewer than twenty-two genera, of which a large number
are new. The monograph includes diagnostic tables, arrangement
according to hosts, and the like.

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcv. (1910) pp. 551-93 (26 figs.).
t Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lvii. (1911) pp. 212-39 (8 figs.).
X C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 284-5.

§ Publication No. 133, Carnegie Inst. Washington (1910) pp. 11-98 (28 pis.).
|| Zool. Jahrb., Supp. xii. (1910) Heft 3, Festschr. Prof. Max Braun, pp. 265-
512 (6 pis. and 78 figs.).

April 19th, 1911 p

206 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Cystotaenise of South American Felidae.* — M. Liihe reports on three
tapeworms, Tsenia oligarthra Dies., which is nearly allied to T. echinococcus
von Siebold; T. macrocystis Dies., whose bladder-worm has been known
for long from Lepus brasiliensis ; and Tsenia omissa sp. n., which seems
to have been previously confused with T.crassicollis.

Flesh-parasites of Food-fishes. f Edwin Linton has found Sporozoa
along the backbone of young alewives and herring ; Ichthyonema globiceps
in the flesh of a gar (Tylosaurus acus) ; Trematodes in the skin and
tins of tautog, cunner, flounders, and tomcod; Cestodes in the flesh of
gars, sand launce, and stickleback. The flesh of marine food-fishes is to
a very high degree free from parasites, but Cestode cysts sometimes
occur in great numbers in the common butterfish (Poronotus triacanthus)
and occasionally in its rarer relative the harvest-fish (Peprilus alepidotus).

New Commensal Turhellarian.J — Edwin Linton describes Graffilla
gemillipara sp. n., a Rhabdocoel found abundantly in the ribbed mussel
{Modiolus plkatulus) at "Woods Hole. It rarely reaches 2 mm. in length
and has a white colour, often tinged with yellow or greenish-yellow along
the middle line. The mode of progression is peculiar, in a series of
irregular zig-zags, perhaps in adaptation to life within a host. If it
went straight on, it would be lost. Another noteworthy feature is that
all the larger specimens contained numerous ciliated embryos, which, as
a rule, lie together in twos inside a thin capsular envelope. AVhen the
reproductive powers of the parent are exhausted, the young escape
through the ruptured body-wall.

Hermaphroditism in Nemerteans.§— G. du Plessis finds that Proso-
rochmus claparedi Keferstein ( = Monopora vivipara Salensky), a large,
brilliantly coloured viviparous Nemertean, with direct development, is
also interesting in being viviparous. The testes are very minute sacs
irregularly disposed between the intestinal sacs. It seems that Proso-
roehmus should be included in the genus Tetrastemma, beside T. marioni
and T. kefersteini, which are also hermaphrodite. All the Geonemerteans
are hermaphrodite. In the fresh-water Stichostemma eilhardi Mont., the
ovary includes a testicular element which divides into a small group of
sperms.

Regeneration in Nemerteans.|| — Jozef Nusbaum and M. Oxner have
made some interesting observations on Linens ruber, which show that
the regenerative " rhythm " (or even the regenerative capacity) differs in
different parts of the body. Other things equal, it is a function of the
position. Another point clearly illustrated is that an excised piece is
distinctly different at its two ends. They have different regenerative
potencies, which may lie called polarities.

* Zool. Jahrb., Supp. xii. (1910) Heft 3, Festschr. Prof. Max Braun, pp. G87-
710 (2 pis. and 8 figs.).

t Bull. Bureau Fisheries, xxviii. (1908) pp. 1195-1209; Bureau of Fisheries
Document No. 714 (1910).

% Journ. Exp. Zool., ix. (1910) pp. 371-84 (4 pis.).

§ Rev. Suisse Zool., xviii. (1910) pp. 491-5.
Bull. Acad. Cracovie, 1910, pp. 439-47 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 207

Incertae Sedis.

Development of the Statoblasts of Bryozoa.* — Wolfgang von
Buddenbrock has made a careful study of the development of the stato-
blasts in Cristatella mucedo and Plumatella repens, in regard to which
Braem and Kraepelin have given discrepant account. The author's
results corroborate those of Braem in almost every particular. A useful
summary is given at the end of the paper, sketching the development of
the funiculus and the statoblasts, but it is too long to quote.

Rotifera.

Bdelloid Rotifera : a New Classification.! — D. Bryce puts for-
ward a new classification intended to substitute for that hitherto current
an arrangement based on the fuller knowledge of to-day. Without
discussing the relationship of the Bdelloida to other Rotifera, -he accepts
the position given them by Plate and by Wesenberg-Lund as con-
stituting an order of the sub-class Digononta (or two-ovaried Rotifera),
distinguishing them from the Seisouaceae by their ramate jaws, their
more or less effective rostrum, and their contractile cloaca.

He divides the Bdelloida into three families : — 1. Philodinidse,
including all species with well-developed rostrum and corona, the latter
always capable of retraction within the mouth. 2. Adinetidse, including
all forms with imperfect rostrum, and a corona which cannot be retracted
within the mouth. 3. Microdinidae, including species possessing a
rostrum but without a corona.

It is pointed out that in being able to creep about without the use
of the corona the Philodinidae differ not onlv from the Adinetidas, but
also from all other members of the class Rotifera.

The family Philodinidae comprises nearly 100 recognized species
which, with few exceptions, conform closely in most respects to one
structural plan. The primary and most important distinction is based
on the proportion of the lumen, or cavity of the lining membrane of the
stomach, to the cavity of the outer or enclosing membrane. It is found
that in about one-fourth of the species the lumen is nearly as great as
the cavity of the outer membrane, whilst in the remaining three-fourths
it is relatively small. The Philodinidae divide thus into two sections,
having respectively a wide and a narrow lumen of the stomach. From
consideration of the greater average size, the great proportional develop-
ment of the corona (and especially of the trochal disks), and of the
greater activity, mobility and boldness of the species which have a
narrow lumen, the author believes that these represent a later stage in
evolution of the family type than that indicated by the species with a
wide lumen.

The latter group is represented by three genera : — 1. Habrotrocha
Lr. n., corona of normal type. 2. Ceratotrocha g. n., corona having two

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1910) pp. 477-524 (3 pis. and 8 figs.).

t Jouni. Quekett Micr. Club, Ser. 2, xi., No. 67, Nov. 1910, pp. 61-92 (1 pi.).

1* 2

208 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

horn-like processes. 3. Scepanotrocha g. n., corona screened by a dorsal
membranous plate arising from the upper lip.

The species with relatively narrow lumen are divided into three
sub-sections : — 1. With four toes. 2. With three toes. 3. With toes
bearing a number of cup-like suckers or united to form a broad disk or
twin disks.

The four-toed species are arranged in five genera: — 1. Philodinn
Ehr., skin smooth, spurs short, non -parasitic. 2. Embata g. n., skin
smooth, spurs long, parasitic. 3. Dissotrocha g. n., skin coarse, abdo-
minal transverse skinfolds few, viviparous. 4. Pleuretra g. n., skin
coarse, abdominal transverse skinfolds numerous, oviparous. In these
four genera there is always a distinct throat or gullet. 5. Abrochtha g. n.,
gullet absent, rami protrusible into mouth-cavity.

The three-toed species are assigned to already existing genera accord-
ing to their customary mode of reproduction, thus : — (a) Gallidina Ehr.,
oviparous ; (b) Rotifer Schrank, viviparous.

The small group in which the foot ends in a sucker-like disk or twin
disks consists mostly of moss-dwelling species, which do not otherwise
greatly differ from the family type. A similar foot structure dis-
tinguishes, however, two curious parasitic forms, which again differ in
the arrangement of the foot-glands. This group therefore is divided
into three genera: — 1. Mniobia g. n., foot short, foot-glands in longi-
tudinal series. 2. Anomopus Piovanelli, foot long, foot-glands in
longitudinal series. 3. Discopus Zelinka, foot-glands in transverse
series.

The family of the Adinetidse comprises two genera, differing notably
in the type of foot : — 1. Adineta Hudson and Gosse, foot slender, spurs
two. 2. Bradyscela g. n., foot stout, spurs modified or absent.

The family Microdinidse is represented only by the genus Microdina
Murray, having four toes.

The new classification deals with 105 species considered to be
capable of recognition, and a list is further given of 49 species thought
to be insufficiently described or otherwise invalid. Descriptions are
given of two new species, for which it has seemed desirable to create the
new genus Scepanotrocha, as above. In S'. rubra sp. n., found in
sphagnum from several localities in Great Britain, Germany, and U.S.A.,
the dorsal membranous corona-screen has its lateral edges rounded. In
S. corniculata sp. n., obtained from ground moss from Bournemouth,
the lateral edges of the screen are produced each into a short point
somewhat ventrally deflected.

Rotifera of German East Africa.* — In the 8th Memoir on the
Microfauna of German East Africa, collected by F. Fulleborn during the
years 1898-1900, E. von Daday enumerates 98 species of Rotifera from
that region, of which the following are described as new : Notommata
brarhiata (which evidently is Kirkman's Copeus triangulatus, described
in this Journal in 1906), Hydatina oblonga, Brachionus bakeri var.
inermis, B. bakeri var. fuUeborni, and B. bakeri var. michaeheni. The
author also gives a tabulated list of all species found in other parts of
Africa.

* Zoologica, xxiii. (1910) Heft 59, pp. 59-106 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 209

Echinoderma.

West Indian Echinoids.* — Th. Mortensen describes the exceedingly
beautiful long-spined Galocidaris micans (Mortensen), Tretocidaris
bartlefti (A. Agassiz), Arseosoma belli Mortensen, and a number of
other forms. A careful description is given of the beautiful blue lines
on Diadema antillarum Philippi. The difference between the European
and the North American Echinoid fauna seems to be very pronounced.

Teeth and Buccal Structures in Conulus.f — H. L. Hawkins has
gone into the question of the presence or absence of teeth and jaws in
this Cretaceous sea-urchin. They were described by Edward Forbes in
1850, and denied by Duncan in 1884. Most subsequent workers have
regarded Conulus as toothless. The author examined numerous specimens-
of G. albogalerus aud found no trace of teeth, but in a series of G. sub-
rotundus in the British Museum he found a specimen with the peristome
enlarged by cutting and four glistening, enamel-like teeth projecting
towards the aperture. The facts then are that G. subrotundus had teeth,
of a type differing but little from those of Discoidea cylindrica, but the
remaining parts of the jaw apparatus were either uncalcified or too
delicate for preservation. But in Conulus albogalerus, developing along
a somewhat different line, the teeth have been lost, and only the pyramids
of the jaws retained, modified to form buccal teeth.

West Indian Holothuroids.J — C. Ph. Sluiter reports on a collection
of twenty-six species from the West Indies. It includes a new species
of Stichopus, two of Gucumaria, and three of Thijone. The other
twenty are well-known forms, and there is little that is of interest as
regards distribution. It is noted, however, that Stichopus maculatus
Greeff, hitherto known only from the West African island of Rolas, has
been found at the Tortugas.

Holothuroids from the Indian Ocean. § — Joseph Pearson reports on
a collection made by Jas. J. Simpson in the Kerimba Archipelago,
Portuguese East Africa. There are twenty-one species. One of these,
Gucumaria turbi/iata Hutton, is recorded for the third time. For
Golochirus violaceus Theel, Pearson establishes a new genus Pseudo-
colochirus, for the form in question does not possess any of the out-
standing features of Golochirus. The author also reports || on a collection
made in the Mergui Archipelago by Jas. J. Simpson and R. N. Rudmose-
Brown. It comprises fourteen species, of which the most interesting is
Thyone fastis, var. papuensis, for the species is distinctly northern in its
distribution, and occurs in the cold waters of N.W. Europe.

Studies on Holothurians.1T — S. Becher deals with Leptosynapta
bergensis (Ostergren) and L. inhserens (0. F. Muller), especially as
regards their calcareous bodies, the sensory buds on the tentacles, the

* Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., lxxiv. (1910) pp. 1-31 (16 pis.).
t Geol. Mag., viii. (1911) pp. 70-4 (1 pi.).
\ Zool Jahrb. (1910) Supp. xi., Heft 2, pp. 331-42 (6 figs.).
«} Proc. Zool. Soc, 1910, pp. 167-82 (5 figs.).
|| Tom. cit., pp. 183-94 (4 figs.).
1 Zool. Jahrb., xxix. (1910) pp. 315-66 (5 pis. aud 2 figs.).

'210 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

position of the genital aperture near the tip of a tentacle, the calcareous
ring, the pulsating peritoneal saccules or contractile rosettes, the stato-
cysts, the touch-papillae, the genital sinus. He also discusses, with
reference to L. minnta, the derivation of the anchor from the primary
cross, and the alleged homology between Synaptidand Molpadid anchors.
Some other interesting points are discussed, such as the viviparity of
this species.

New Starfishes.* — R. Koehler describes Pentaceros bedoti sp. n.,
characterized by the complete absence of spines on the marginal dorsal
plates, by the presence of a few small spines on the last marginal ventral
plates, and by the weak development of pedicellarias ; Goniodon angustus
sp. n., from New Zealand, which is nearly related to G.dilatatus ; Luidia
marginata sp. n. ; and Asterias spinigera sp. n., from Singapore, which
has a characteristic appearance due to a number of large and prominent
regularly arranged dorsal plates, bearing tufts of strong spines.

Remarkable Permian Echinoderm.f — J. Wanner describes Timor-
echinus g. n. from Permian deposits in the island of Timor, a remarkable
type with some affinities with Cystoids, Blastoids, and Echinoids. In
the position of the Blastoid stalk there is the mouth, and if this be taken
as the under surface then the position of the mouth and anus is identical
with that of many irregular Echinoids. Perhaps it may be regarded as
a Blastoid form, making an attempt, as it were, towards an irregular
Echinoid type.

Coelentera.

New Octoradiate Coral. % — Sydney J. Hickson describes PyrophyUin
inflata g. et sp. n. from a depth of 150 fathoms in the Gulf of Oman
(Persian Gulf). It is a solitary unattached form, with some characters
reminiscent of the extinct Rugosa, but with a closer approach to Guynia
annulata Duncan. The author considers that Guynia and Pyrophyll ia
should be placed in a distinct family of Zoantharia, the Guyniidee, and
that this family should be placed next to the family Turbinolida3.

History of the Study of HydrozoaJ — M. Bedot has brought up
his laborious history, which will save future workers much time, to the
date 1871.

Regeneration in Corymorpha.|| — H. B. Torrey describes the re-
generation of the hydranth and holdfast in this hydroid. The plasticity
which is so conspicuous a characteristic of the normal development of
Corymorpha is also a striking feature of the regenerative development.
The latter approximates to the former, in fact, at every possible point,
varying from it in detail only with the advancing differentiation of the
regenerating piece. Tissues in larval stages of differentiation will
produce larval structures in the larval way, whether in regeneration or
normal development. Adult structures arising on an adult stem vary
from this early normal type in the details of their development. The
rootlets of the holdfast show the least difference in this respect, de-

* Rev. Suisse Zool., xis. (1911) No. 1, pp. 1-22 (1 pi.).

t Zeitschr. Induk. Abstain., iv. (1910) pp. 123-42 (2 pis. and 3 figs.).

J Mem. Proc. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc, liv. (1910), No. 12, pp. 1-7 (4 figs.).

§ Rev. Suisse Zool., xviii. (1910) pp. 189-490.

|| Publications Univ. California (Zoologv), vi. (1910) pp. 205-21 (16 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

I'll

veloping essentially as in the embryo throughout the life of the polyp.
Yet they arise from larger primordia involving larger numbers of cells.
This is true of the tentacles also. " It would appear that the phenomena
of regeneration are controlled primarily neither by considerations of
future significance nor geometrical relations, but by the differentiation
of the physiological mechanism in the region of development."

Studies of Actinians.* — Ferdinand Pax gives an account of the
Actinian fauna of the "West indies, describing a large number of forms,
including the following new species: Gyrostomamncti-tliomse, Buhodosoma
kukenthali, Zoanthus poriticola, Palythoa hartmey&ri, Aiptasia lerodactyla,
Cystiactis koellikeri.

He discusses the geographical distribution and the question of bi-
polarity. It has not been proved for littoral forms, it may hold for a
small minority of deep-sea forms, but on the whole it is very improbable.
The facts as regards Actinians do not support the Pendulation theory.

The author's views as to the phylogeny of Actinians may be summed
up in a schema.

Cerianthacea Actiniinse Zoanthacea

Antipatharia

Stichodacty

Cerinula

Tetracoralla

campula

The fine memoir is illustrated by a series of exceedingly beautiful
photographs.

Geotropism in Corymorpha.t — H. B. Torrey has made observations
on the development of frustules that show gravity to be a factor con-
trolling the direction of their locomotion. Glass plates carrying several
hundred freshly laid eggs were fixed at angles of about 85° to the
horizontal. Gravity appeared to play no definite part in determining
the emergence of the embryos above or below the horizontal. The
frustules arose on the embryo always opposite the point of emergence.
But with elongation the clavate end of each frustule showed a distinct
tendency to migrate downwards, a positive geotropism of definite
mechanical value in the establishment of a holdfast firmly anchored
over a considerable area.

Senescence in Hydroids.J — H. B. Torrey and A. L. Martin call
attention to progressive serial differentiation or senescence in some
hydroid skeletons. Successive hydrothecaa differ gradually in shape,
size, and sculpturing ; or the pedicels, when present, differ in the

* Zool. Jahrb., xi. (1910) pp. 157-330 (10 pis., 46 figs, and 1 map).
t Publications Univ. California, (Zoology) vi. (1910) pp. 223-1 (1 fig.).
X Advance print, Proc. 7th Internat. Zool. Congress, Boston 1907 (published
1910), 2 pp.

212 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

i] umber and size of their annuli. The type of differentiation represents
essentially a type of colonial senescence.

In aquaria in which intact colonies of Clytia baJceri developed as in
nature, it was found that stems cut at given levels regenerated in
certain respects not according to the original type for that level, but
according to the type characteristic of the distal or youngest member of
the stem. This result indicated a general physiological change through-
out the stem correlated with advancing age.

Effect of Light on Obelia.*— H. B. Torrey and A. L.Martin
find that a given stem of Obelia regenerates from a distal cut two
or three hydranths in the time required for the production of one
hydranth by a similar stem under similar conditions, except that it
develops in daylight. The annuli on the pedicels supporting the
hydrothecte are more numerous in the darkness specimen. The effect
of light on Obelia is to retard growth and differentiation — the opposite
to what Loeb found in Eudendrium.

Porifera.

Hexactinellid Spicules.! — R. Kirkpatrick, in a continuation of his
classification of these spicules, points out that clavulae and scopula? are
holactine micromonactins, and suggests that their spines and disks
should be termed centrospines and centrodisks, to distinguish them from
the true end-spines and end-disks at the distal end of the actines of
astral spicules. He also notes that microhexactins, which he spoke of as
absent in Hexasterophora, occur in certain dictyonine species, but appear
to be entirely absent from most of the Hexasterophora.

Protozoa.

New Species of Cassidulina.J — Henry Sidebottom describes and
figures Cassidulina eJegans sp. n., and C. decorata sp. n., both from the
S.W. Pacific.

Fat in Ciliated Infusorians.§ — Witold Staniewicz has made experi-
ments on Paramecium, Stentor, and other Infusorians in regard to the
use they make of fat. He shows that the Infusorians are able to ingest
fat, but they do not break it up or emulsify it. The fat found in the
cells of Infusorians is due to substances which they can digest, especially
proteids and carbohydrates. It seems that no Protozoa can digest fat,
whereas all Metazoa can.

New Flagellate in Pelagic Copepod.|| — E. Chatton describes
Paradinium poucheti g. et sp. n., found in the general cavity of Acartia
rlausi Giesbrecht. There is a massive plasmodium, fragments of which
pass out by the gut of the host, forming cysts which sporulate. Before
the spores acquire their flagellate form they are amoeboid, and these

* Advance print, Proc. 7th Internat. Zool. Congress, Boston 1907, published
(1910) 1 p. f Ann. Nat. Hist., v. (1910) pp. 347-50 (5 figs.).

J Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1910, pp. 103-8 (1 pi.).
§ Bull. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1910, pp. 199-214 (1 pi.).
|| C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 341-3.|

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 213

occur united in chains by elongated filiform pseudopodia, recalling
Labyrinthulids. The new geuus seems to be allied to Syndinium, a
plasmodial Dinoflagellate also found in pelagic Copepods.

Astomatous Infusorians.* — C. Cepede gives a beautiful illustrated
account of the mouthless parasitic Infusorians which occur in most types
of animals in the alimentary canal, the gastrovascular cavity, the coelome,
the liver, the mantle-cavity, the uterus, and the gonads. Numerous new
genera are established : Kofoidella, Intoshellina, Maupasella, Anoplopkrya,
Schultzellina, Perezella, Isselina ; and ten families are recognized. The
action of these Infusorians on their hosts is carefully discussed, including
parasitic castration and teratogeny.

The group is heterogeneous and due to convergence, in adaptation
to parasitism, from several distinct stocks of Ciliata. The author ha*
especially studied the process of division and the developmental cycle in
Orchitophrya stellar am.

Studies on Trypanosomes. — C. Mathisf and M. Leger discuss
Trypanosoma clarise Montel found in the blood of Clarias macrocephalus,
a common Silurid fish in Cochin-China. It does not seem to be patho-
genic. In the same fish they found J a common form of Trypanoplasmaf
which they provisionally rank as Trypanosoma clarise. It is apparently
the first record of a species of Trypanoplasma from a Silurid.

Cnidosporidia.§ — M. Auerbach has done a useful piece of work in
presenting a monographic account of Myxosporidia, Actinomyxidia, and
Microsporidia, which he unites, following Doflein, in the order Cnido-
sporidia. The spores are enclosed in multivalve shells, which arise in
the sporoblast from special cells. Inside the spores there is a variable
number of pole-capsules with a rolled-up thread. The monograph
includes a general introduction, a morphological account of the
vegetative forms and spores, an cecological chapter dealing with the
parasitism, a discussion of the life-histories, a systematic chapter, and an
account of the literature.

Selenococcidium and the Relationships of the Sporozoa.|| —
L. Leger and 0. Duboscq discuss, Selenococcidium intermedium, which
they found in the lobster in 1908, and which has the particular interest
of uniting characters of Coccidians and Schizogregarines. They give
an account of the life-history, and discuss its relations. They also
describe from the lobster Toxocystis homari g. et sp. n., which seems
always present in the posterior intestinal ca3cum, sometimes as an intra-
cellular, sometimes as an extra-cellular parasite. Its position is doubtful.
The authors divide Sporozoa into four classes : — (1) Sporozoa sensu
stricto (Gregarines, Coccidians, etc.) ; (2) Cnidosporidia ; (3) Flagellates
(Cercomonads, Plasmodids, Bodonids, etc.) ; and (4) Haplosporidia.
They also give an interesting tentative genealogical tree.

* Arch. Zool. Exp^r., iii. (1910) pp. 341-609 (9 pis.),
t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 349-51.
J Tom. cit., pp. 351-3.

§ Die Cnidosporidien. Eine Monographische Studie : Leipzig, 1910, 261 pp.
(83 figs.). || Arch. Zool. Exper., v. (1910) pp. 187-233 (2 pis. arid 7 figs.).

214 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Haemogregarines.* — A. Laveran and A. Pettit have studied the
Haemogregarines of the wall-lizard, distinguishing //. bicapsulutu
Franca and H. nobrei Franca, but the latter seems almost identical with
H. lacertie Danilewsky.

Hsematozoa from the Congo. t — A. Leboeuf and Ringenbach
describe Trypanosoma simondi sp. n. and T. synodontis sp. n. from Silurid
rishes from Stanley Pool. They also report Heemoyregarina canis from
a dog, and three species of minute Nematodes (Microfilaria) from the
blood of toad, Lizard, and chimpanzee. One of these, M. martini, is new.

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 303-5.

f Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxiv. (1910) pp. 945-54 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 215

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Structure and Development.
Vegetative.

Observations on Primary Leaves.* — Leon Dufour arrives at the
following conclusions. Certain species produce primary leaves of a
simpler form than the adult leaves, and as a rule the leaves pass by pro-
gressive stages from the simpler to the more complex form. Comparison
shows that the primary leaves of one species resemble the adult leaves of
an allied species. In other cases the primary leaves also are somewhat
complex, the degree of complexity varying in different species. Many
authorities hold that these simple forms have a genealogical signification,
and that a species with complex leaves will reproduce in its primary
leaves the form of the adult leaf of an ancestor. This is a striking illus-
tration of the law that the evolution of the individual (ontogeny) repro-
duces the evolution of the race (phylogeny). The author's investigations
confirm this opinion. It is reasonable to suppose that a species whose
leaves stop at a certain degree of complexity, is more nearly allied to an
ancestor with simple leaves than another which bears complex primary
leaves and still more complex adult ones.

In the case of the Anemones studied, while it would be too much to
assume that A. palmata is descended directly from A. hortensis and the
latter from A. Pulsatilla, it is admissible that these species arise from a
common ancestor with simple leaves, and that they exhibit different
stages of evolution, culminating in A. Pulsatilla.

Primary leaves possess, therefore, two striking peculiarities : (1) they
reproduce ancient forms ; (2) this reproduction is very faithful. The con-
ditions under which they are produced ensure them against modification
by external influences. The instances of Anemones and of Umbelliferte
bearing complex primary leaves do not disprove this theory. Individual
development can only reproduce that of the race by a contraction of time
and by the omission of certain stages — a phenomenon known as " meta-
genetic acceleration."

Plants which from the outset bear complex leaves are then higher in
the evolutionary scale than those which bear simple primary leaves, and
in their more rapid development, certain stages known to their ancestors
are omitted. It is evident, therefore, that the study of primary leaves will
be of use in the discovery of the affinity of species. It suggests connect-
ing links that would not be suspected from observation limited to adult
plants.

* Rev. Gen. Bot., xxii. (1910) pp. 369-84 (pis.).

21C> SUMMAEY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Anatomical Researches on Sea-side Plants.* — H. Chermezon finds
that the littoral flora is composed chiefly of a xerophilous and a halo-
philous flora. The xerophilous characteristics consist mainly of epidermic
protection. The leaves and even the stalks of halophilous plants are more
or less fleshy, and epidermic protection is rare. Both floras exhibit a
radial habit and a somewhat dense mesophyll. Certain dune plants
present a slight fleshiness and certain salt-marsh plants epidermic pro-
tection. Xerophilous plants occur frequently on the rocky shores of the
Mediterranean ; the fleshiness of the halophiles varies with the degree
of saltness and is greatest in the salt marshes. The resemblance between
the two floras has caused Schimper to confuse them, but as a rule halo-
philes do not present xerophilous characteristics, which could hardly be
accounted for, especially in salt marshes ; on the other hand several salt-
marsh species possess hygrophilous peculiarities. The sole characteristic
of halophiles is, in fact, the fleshy form, caused either by the number of
layers or by the size of the cells ; the fact that fleshy plants are found
other than on sea-beaches simply proves that fleshiness may result from
other causes than the presence of salt. The fleshy habit appears to aid
the plant in resisting the action of sea-salt, but some plants found in
very salt districts (Frankema, Statice, etc.) are not fleshy ; therefore
ability to withstand saltness must be something entirely specific. As to
the action of salt in the distribution of species, it is clear that a certain
degree of saltness eliminates many plants ; several authors have thought
that the localization of various species on the sea-shore is due to the fact
that they found less competition there ; but a flora such as that of the
salt marshes can hardly be considered as refugees, seeking a field for
expansion ; some of its species are not dependent on salt, but so far the
majority of them may be included among the true halophiles.

Transitory Tissues in Vascular Plants. | — Gr. Chauveaud gives an
account of these tissues, which fall under the two heads of Secretory and
Conducting ; the former confined to a few, the latter found in plants
generally.

Transitory Secretory Tissue. — The Gymnosperms are especially con-
cerned, and of them the yew, in which typical secretory canals are absent.
The secretory tubes with which the present paper deals keep their secre-
tion products, instead of passing them into neighbouring canals.

The distribution and development of these tissues in the seedling of
Taxus baccata is described at length. The case of young organs on adult
parts is then dealt with. The arrangement in the case of a rootlet is the
same as in the radicle. At the growing-point of a stem the hypodermal
secretory system found in the hypocotyl is absent, and the same dis-
tinction obtains between cotyledon and young leaf. For the rest, the
disposition of the transitory secretory tissue is substantially the same for
hypocotyl and young stem, and for cotyledon and developing leaf, re-
spectively— namely, in arcs abutting on the phloem. The secretory tubes
ultimately become septate, and in adult parts are, save in rare cases,
indistinguishable from ordinary parenchyma. They are thus essentially
transitory in structure and function.

• Ann. Sci. Nat. ser. 9, xii. (1911) pp. 117-313 (figs.),
t Tom. cit., pp. 1-70.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 217

Transitory Conducting Tissue. — The account opens with a general
discussion of sieve-tube tissue, which hints at the deep phyletic interest
attaching to this line of research. In the Ferns, a relatively primitive
group, we find an advanced type of sieve-tube ; and the author is inclined
to regard the simpler type of phloem found in certain Lycopods as the
result of reduction in descent. The sharp distinction often made between
the phloem of Angiosperms and that of other groups is not altogether
justified — e.g., the case of companion-cells in Equisetum, etc. The pro-
blem before us is the search in the ontogeny of plants for simple organs
which function as sieve-tubes temporarily in meristematic regions ; this
may afford a guide in the wider phylogenetic problem.

It is in the Gymnosperms that the author finds such organs, and from
this standpoint the group is to be regarded as primitive. In Gymno-
sperms the first true sieve-tube elements appear further from the growing-
point than the first xylem elements, in contrast with other groups in
which the reverse obtains. This results from the presence of the transi-
tory tissue (phlohne precurseur), the tubes (tubes precurseurs) comprising
which show all stages of differentiation from very simple types (radicle
of Thuja orientalis) to complex (Abies Pinsapo). In all cases, however,
the tissue is essentially transitory, and, excepting in the root, it exists
only in the earliest stages of the ontogeny ; the degradation of the tissue
is initiated by loss of turgidity in the cells, which finally become completely
absorbed. The details of the nature and arrangements of the phloeme
precurseur are given for radicle, hypocotyl, and cotyledons, for Thuja
orientalis and Abies Pinsapo. It is unrepresented elsewhere in the life-
history, excepting in the meristem of the developing rootlets, in which
the arrangement is the same as in the radicle. The primary phloem proper
may also be transitory in the seedling, as is well seen in Cryptomeria
japonica. Transitory xylem is described in the seedling of Lycopersicum
esculent urn ; in this plant the primary sieve-tubes persist. The occur-
rence of transitory xylem and phloem in the adult plant is investigated
in very young leaves of Abies bracteata, in which first the earliest phloem
elements, then the xylem vessels, disappear. Their place is taken by
conjunctive parenchyma, so that the vascular bundle, originally single,
becomes divided into two by this parenchymatous invasion. The author
urges that in all Firs which have a double bundle in the adult leaf the
double condition is produced in this same way ; and this is demonstrated
in detail also for Pinus Pinea and P. sylvestris, in which the two bundles
are widely separated.

The author then discusses the frequency of transitory conducting
tissue in Angiosperms, referring to his previous work on the subject,
and citing the cases of Raphanus sativus, Phaseolus vulgaris, Labiate,
€henopodiacea3, Triglochin palustris, Liliaceas, Zingiberaceas — in fact, in
the most diverse groups of Phanerogams. Finally, he examines in detail
the arrangements of the vascular system in the seedling of Mercurialis
annua, tracing its course from root-meristem to the tip of the cotyledon.
He connects the manifold transitions in disposition of the bundles in
th:s course by the existence and disappearance of transitory xylem and
phloem, which thus play an important part in the distinction, hitherto
regarded as essential, between the vascular structures of root and stem ;
and he points out that the same investigation holds good in the case of
numberless other plants, whether Angiosperms or Gymnosperms.

218

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Reproductive.

Embryo-sac Development in Hybanthus concolor.* — Frank M.
Andrews publishes a brief account of t bis, with eight figures. The em-
bryo-sac originates from a hypoderinal cell. This divides into an upper
bapetaJ cell and a lower, the embryo-sac mother-cell. The active division
of the former results in the more or less deep embedding of the latter in
tissue. The mother-cell divides normally into four, often irregularly
arranged, and the embryo-sac is formed, it is stated, by the destruction
of the tetrad as well as some of the surrounding cells ; it is very large
in size, and the egg-aperture and antipodal cells are unusually so, often
extending nearly across the embryo-sac lengthwise. The polar nucleus,
however, is generally rather small.

Seeds of European Papaveracese.f — Louis Capitaine publishes an
interesting study showing the value of the seeds of this order in deter-
mining not only the genera but the species also. The account is accom-
panied by excellent reproductions of photographs, from which the
distinctive characters of nearly all the seeds dealt with may be readily
appreciated. Glaves of the species are given for every genus : the six
genera themselves fall into the following scheme : —

Seeds with well-marked concave hilum.

Seeds very small (about ^ mm.), crescent- or
comma-shaped or globular ; or as much as
1 mm., but then globular and with secondary
reticulum {P. setigerum) ....

Seeds crescent-shaped, about 1 mm., no obvious
secondary reticulum .....

Seeds with hilum feebly developed.

Seeds oval, with pergamaceous aril .
Seeds without papyraceous aril.
Seeds not D-shaped.

Seeds gently curved at the hilum, shaped
like a bent club, very convex on the
back ......

Seeds large as a millet, shaped like a
' quarter ' of an orange
Seeds almost square, D-shaped, lint feebly
marked ......

Papaver.

Raemeriu.

Chelidonium.

Meconopsis.

Glaucium.

Hypeeonm.

Physiology.
Nutrition and Growth.

Absorption by Plants of Alkaline Earth Salts.} — H. Colin and
I. de Rufz Lavison publish a continuation of previous work upon this
subject, extending their experiments with the nitrate of barium to salts
of strontium and calcium. Using pea plants, they find that salts of cal-
cium penetrate to a considerable extent into the stem ; salts of strontium

* Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxvii. (1910) pp. 477-S (figs.).
t Rev. G6n. Bot., xxii. (1910) pp. 432-45 (pis.).
% Tom. cit., pp. 337-44.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 219

to a far less, but appreciable extent ; while absorbed salts of barium do
not reach the stem at all. It follows that the less the molecular weight
of the base the further the salts mount into the stem. The barium salts,
on the other hand, accumulate in the root much more considerably than
the others.

Cryoscopic Determination of Osmotic Pressure in certain Plant-
organs.* — W. R. Gelston Atkins draws attention to the importance of
osmotic pressure in relation to the vital functions of the living cell,
emphasizing the evolutionary aspect, the earliest organisms being water-
dwellers. The present paper forms one of a series of records aimed at
discovering the relation between the osmotic pressure and the general
metabolism in selected plants, and deals with fleshy organs — fruits, rhubarb
stalks, artichoke tuber, etc. The osmotic pressure P is calculated from
observation of depression A in the freezing-point of the sap, from the
equation P = 12*03 A, the temperature being 0° C. The predomina-
ting substances in the sap, further, may be ascertained roughly from the
mean molecular weight (M) ; and this has been ascertained in many
cases by evaporating a weighed quantity (not more than 3 grm.) of
filtered sap in a steam-oven until a constant weight is obtained. The
weight of the solvent being I — viz. weight of sap less weight of solids, s,
and k being the constant for the molecular lowering of the freezing-point

of the solvent, we have M =- x —

The pressures recorded range from 5 ' 94 atm. (fruit of Lycopersieum
esculentum) to 29*53 atm. (fruit of Pyrus communis). Rubus Idaeus,
with pressure of 9-26 atm., represents a mean of pressure for many ripe
berries.

Interesting details and a table of results are given. As the result of
over fifty measurements, the author concludes that similar plant-organs
of the same species have approximately equal osmotic pressures ; but this
does not apply to leaves. The mean molecular weights in the case of
fruit ranged from 110 {Lycopersieum esculentum) to 231 {Citrus Auran-
tium). In the case of underground organs the pressure ranged from
6* 5 atm. {Solarium tuberosum) to 18'7 atm. {Helianthus tuberosus), and
the mean molecular weight from 101 {Brassica Rapa root) to 391 {Heli-
anthus tuberosus), the highest figure determined. The red stem of
rhubarb gave the lowest recorded mean molecular weight 76, with
osmotic pressure of 6*52 atm.

Regeneration and Polarity of Plant-organs. f— J. Doposcheg-
Uhlar's account is well illustrated by reproductions from photographs.
Dealing first with Ferns, it is established that the shoots regenerated
from a seedling, from which the growing-point has been removed,
develop in the same way as youug plants arising from a fertilized arche-
gonium. The shoots usually arise exogenously, but exceptionally endo-
genously. " Regenerates " from internodes in the Ferns display a similar
development. They may arise exogenously below the epidermis, or near
the surface of the callus formed on the cut surface. If bud-shoots be

* Sci. Proc. Rov. Dublin Soc, xii. (1910) pp. 4G3-9.
t Flora, cii. (1911) pp. 24-86 (figs.).

220 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

induced upon the stem of Lycium halimifolium in a moist place, and
the roots removed therefrom, a shoot may arise from the root-stump so
formed. If hud-shoots be initiated on the " primary " leaves of Begonia
■carolinieefoHa, which are undivided, several undivided leaves are first
produced by these shcots before a divided one appears ; but in the case
of one of the shoots induced upon the ordinary digitately divided
leaves, a divided leaf is developed at an early stage. It is suggested
that the principle of this difference depends upon available food-
material. Shoots induced upon an internode without growing-point
appear usually arbitrarily, in no fixed order, and only exceptionally are
they produced in regular (polar) succession. With root-shoots the
reverse is usually the case. Internodes were partially isolated from axes
of B. discolor by two cuts made in opposite directions. As a result,
roots appeared on the side of the internode left connected with the
apical part of the axis and shoots on the opposite side — i.e., the side
left connected with the basal or root portion. At the same time roots
appeared on that part of the axis above the internode, and shoots on the
lower part. Shoots so induced upon the root portion bear, in the
autumn, an internodal tuber. This is abnormal, for such are borne
normally only upon underground parts, although shoot-tubers may
appear in the leaf-axils. Shoots produced similarly by wounding upon
Gesnera graciosa revealed no polarity in the order of their appearance.
A notable fact was the development of tracheids in the wound-callus,
which replaced the severed normal water channels. The number of
leaf " regenerates " in Gesneracere was found to depend on the degree
of nutrition in the parent plant. Shoots of plants which have already
begun to form subterranean tubers may be caused to bear subaerial
tubers at the stem-apex and in the leaf-axils. The continued removal
of leaf -bulbils acts as a stimulus both to the production of fresh bulbils
and to the duration of the life of the leaf.

General.

Crataegus : Some Theories concerning the Origin of its Species.*
H. B. Brown points out that former systematists conceived of species
as being much more composite than they are at present regarded ; the
Linnean conception prevailed. Recent workers who have been studying
species closely, especially students using the culture method, find that
many systematic species are made up of a number of distinct forms, or
elementary species that breed true when propagated by seed. The
author is inclined to think that a great many of the Cratsegns. forms
are hybrids. European species are known to hybridize, and species in
several other genera of the rose family hybridize freely.

Within the past few decades, since the primitive forests have been
cleared away, there has been an immense increase in the number of
Crataegus plants growing. Being low trees or shrubs, they cannot thrive
in dense forests, but spread freely over open pastures and along fence
rows. The increase in number of plants makes cross-pollination easier
and more probable. Irregularity in the number of stamens and pistils,

* Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxvii. (1910) pp. 251-50.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC. 221

variation in the shape of the leaves on the plant, variation in the
colour of the anthers, and the occurrence of plants possessing characters
found in two distinct species growing near by, may all be taken as
evidence of hybridity, or progressive species.

The fact that Crataegus plants seem to come true to type when grown
from seed is a stumbling block in the way of a hybridity theory. How-
ever, it is possible that Crataegus hybrids are stable, and come true to
type when grown from seed. It cannot be said that they have been
tested thoroughly until many mature plants have been grown.

Some of the points just made may be taken as evidence of muta-
tions, but the best known mutants are not as irregular in characters as
many of the species of Crataegus.

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.
(By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.)

Pteridophytal Origin of so-called Algal Coals.* — E. C. Jeffrey
has investigated the nature of some supposed algal coals. By means
of the slow action of concentrated acids, alkalis, etc., applied for weeks
at a time, he has succeeded in softening the coal sufficiently to admit
of microtome-sections, and even of serial sections, being cut. He gives
the following summary of his conclusions. 1. The organisms found in
abundance in boghead coals are not of the nature of colonial gelatinous
algaj, as has been asserted by Renault, Bertrand and Potonie, on the
basis of the examination of a small number of insufficiently thin sections
of such coals. 2. The bodies in question, as revealed in thin serial
sections, made by improved technique on the microtome, are spores of
vascular cryptogams. 3. The proof that the constituent micro-organisms
of boghead coals are not algae but spores, overthrows the algal hypothesis
of the origin of petroleum and similar substances. 4. It appears clear
that petroleum products have been derived, mainly at any rate, from
the waxy and resinous spores of vascular cryptogams laid down on the
bottoms of the shallow lakes of the Coal Period. These lacustrine
layers, either as cannels, bogheads or bituminous shales, according to the
sporal composition and the admixture of earthy matter, are the mother-
substance of petroleum. Pressure and temperature either separately or
combined, in the presence of permeable strata, have brought about the
distillation of petroleum from such deposits.

Nomenclature of Nephrodium.f — W. N. Clute calls attention to
another revolutionary change which threatens the nomenclature of the
large group of ferns ranged till a few years ago under the well-known
generic names Nephrodium or Lastreea, but latterly transferred to the
revived and prior name Dryopteris. It now appears that all the species
will have to be renamed once more, since J. A. Niewland has shown in
the June number of the American Midland Naturalist that before

* Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sciences, xlvi. (1910) pp. 273-90 (5 pis.).
t Fern Bull., xviii. (1910) pp. 82-92.

April 19th, 1911 Q

222 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Adanson published the name Dryopteris, Schuiidel had already put
forward the name Thelypteris for the same group of ferns, and in
connexion therewith published an illustration of the marsh-fern
Nephrodiwm Thelypteris which is unmistakable. W. N. Clute protests
strongly against these wholesale changes of nomenclature, and questions
whether according to American rules a still earlier use may not be found
for Thelypteris in replacing Pteris rather than Dryopteris.

Fern-flora of Spain and Portugal.* — R. de Litardiere publishes a
contribution to the study of the fern-flora of the Iberian Peninsula. A
total of 70 native species and sub-species is known in Spain and Portugal,
G5 occurring in Spain and 42 in Portugal ; thus five of them are not
found in Spain and 28 not found in Portugal ; and they are indicated in
lists. The fern-flora is very varied, ranging from the Arctic-alpine
species of the high mountains to the Canarian species scattered along the
shores ; there is a good representation of the ferns of Central Europe,
and all the Mediterranean species are found ; also three endemic species
and several endemic forms occur. The author gives analytical lists
under the following headings : — (1) Element of the forest region of the
northern hemisphere ; (2) Atlantic element ; (3) Mediterranean element ;
(4) Arctic-alpine element; (5) Alpine element; (6) Cosmopolitan
element; (7) Sub-tropical element ; (8) Endemic element. The author
then adds a series of notes on the more interesting species and forms,
especially the new Asplenium majoricum from the Balearic Islands, and
Dryopteris africana which with D. semula, Gystopteris diapliana,
Asplenium hemionitis, Davallia canariensis, and Woodtcardia radicans,
forms a vestige of the rich Canarian vegetation which prevailed in
Pliocene times.

Ferns of South Croatia. f — L. Rossi gives an account of the
Tteridophytes of South Croatia, the results of many years of collecting.
In all there are 43 species and many varieties and forms. Some of the
forms are new. The local distribution of the plants is recorded.

Ferns of North America. — E. J. Hill $ publishes some notes on
American ferns : (1) Woodtcardia virginica, a rare plant, always grows
associated with Sphagnacea3, especially with S. recurvum in the wettest
part of a swamp ; (2) Nephrodium spinulosum ; (3) Dicksonia punctilo-
bula and its distribution in the United States ; (4) Botrychium obliquum
and B. ternatum var. intermedium, their distribution and their difference
in time of spore-ripening.

TV. N. Clute § writes of the genus Hemionitis and gives a figure of
H. arifolia, a Philippine species. He also shows || how Pellsea atropur-
purea may be recognized even in quite a juvenile stage. Under the
heading % Pteridographia he has put together some notes on Nephrolepis ;
Azolla and mosquitos ; Apospory in ferns ; an evergreen L 'ystopteris ;
Botrychium ; a fragrant marsh-fern.

* Bull. Geogr. Bot., xxi. (1911) pp. 12-30.

t Magyar Bot. Lapok., x. (1911) pp. 22-38.

\ Fern Bull., xviii. (1910) pp. 65-76. § Torn, cit., pp. 76-3.

I| Tom. cit., pp. 79-80. f Tom. cit., pp. S3-7.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 223

A. Prescott * gives a short account of the boulder-fern, Dicksonia
pilosiuscula.

Ferns of Temperate South America.f — 0. Christensen gives an
account of a collection of ferns made by C. Skottsberg in temperate
South America, namely, in the Falkland Islands, Tierra del Fuego, West
and East Patagonia, Chiloe, Juan Fernandez. In all he enumerates 67
species. Additions to the flora of Juan Fernandez and of the Falklands
are recorded ; and three new species are described, namely, Polypodium
(Grammitis) patagonicum, HymenophyUum Skottsbergii, and the curious
Bhchnum longirauda, which previously had been confused with the
Malayan Asplenium longissimum 131. ; the proliferous fronds may be two
metres long, and hitherto have been found in the sterile state only. Van
den Bosch's genus Serpyllopsis is revised for the species Trichomanes
csesptiosum, which is intermediate between HymenophyUum and Tricho-
manes in some respects, but is distinguished from both by the indeter-
minate growth of its fronds and the red pubescence of the rachis and
midribs.

Ferns of Argentina. $ — C. M. Hicken publishes a new scheme of
classification of the Polypodiaceae, dependent on the position of thesorus,
whether covering the whole under-surface, or on the nerves only, the
whole nerves or particular portions of the nerves, with or without an
involucre. The Gymnogrammea3 are kept separate from the Pterideae ;
the Woodsia? and Oleandreae are united with the Aspidieae. He also
publishes § some artificial keys of the Argentine species of Acrosticheae.
He describes || Elaphoglossum Porteri, a new species from the frontier of
Argentina and Chile ; and records six species which are additions to the
Argentine flora. He publishes f an artificial key to the Argentine
species of Vittariae, and adds two new records to the Argentine flora.
He publishes** artificial keys of the genera and species of the Gymno-
gramnieae, and ft of the Pteridese found in Argentina.

Ferns of German Central Africa.JJ— G. Brause and G. Hieronymus
give an account of the ferns gathered by J. Mildbraed during the ex-
pedition of Herzog Adolph Friedrich von Mecklenburg in tropical Africa.
In all there are 121 Pteridophyta, fourteen of which are new species or
varieties. The specimens were collected in the following localities : —
Bukoba-Bezirk, Ruanda, Rugege-Wald, Vulcan-Gebiet, Ruwenzori,
Beni, Gr. Kamerunberg.

New Japanese Ferns. §§ — J. Matsumura publishes Latin descriptions
of seven new species and three new varieties of Japanese ferns, collected
in Liukiu, Formosa, Nippon, etc., and determined by H. Christ.

* Fern Bulletin, xviii. (1910) pp. 81-2.
t Arkiv Botanik, x. No. 2 (1910) 32 pp. (1 pi. and figs.).
X Apuntes de Historia Natural. Buenos Aires, i. (1909) pp. 5-8.
§ Tom. cit., pp. 17-20. || Tom. cit., pp. 31-7.

<t Tom. cit., pp. 49-51. ** Tom. cit., pp. 81-3.

ft Tom. cit., pp. 113-22.

XX Wiss. Ergebn. Deutsch. Zeutral-Africa Exped., ii. (1910) pp. 1-10 (2 pis.).
§§ Tokyo Bot. Mag., xxiv. (1910) pp. 239-12.

Q 2

224 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Bryophyta.

(By A. Gepp.)

Inter-relationships of the Bryophyta.* — F. Cavers discusses the
Anthocerotales. He gives an account of the morphology and anatomy
of Anthoceros, and describes the development of the reproductive organs
and of the sporogonium, and the characters of the mature sporogonium.
He then shows in what respect the allied genera, De/idroceros, Notothylas,
and Megaceros, differ from Anthoceros and from one another. As to the
systematic position which the Anthocerotales should occupy, he cites
M. A. Howe's summary of the characters wdiich are held to mark off the
Anthocerotales from the remaining hepaticae ; but he considers that the
significance of these characters has been much exaggerated, leading to a
deal of doubtful speculation regarding the relationships of the Arche-
goniatas and the origin of thePteridophyta. He discusses the said cha-
racters one by one, and shows them to be less distinctive than they at
first appear to be. The Anthocerotales probably have arisen from forms
like the Sphaerocarpales ; they have retained a meristematic zone at the
base of the sporogonium, and tbeir antheridia, originally exogenous,
have become endogenous ; the formation of antheridial groups is of
secondary importance. The characters which distinguish the Antho-
cerotean sporogonium are more or less definitely correlated with the per-
sistence of the basal meristematic tissue, and are connected with the
nutrition of the spores. The maturing spore-tissue situated above the
meristem is cut off from the mother-plant : hence supplies have to be
manufactured by the sporogonium itself, and this latter is therefore
elaborately equipped for a sub-independent life.

Amphigastrial Antheridia in some Ptilidioid Hepaticae.f — V.
Schiffner publishes the results of his investigations of amphigastrial
antheridia and of the structure of the androecia of the Ptilidioideae.
He takes exception to Leitgeb's dictum that in the fobose Junger-
mannieaB the formation of antheridia is exclusively confined to the
lateral segments ; that it is always the dorsal half of the segment which
forms the antheridia. Schiffner finds that : — 1. In the Ptilidioideae
nearly all the species are dioecious (the exception being Anthelia Juratz-
Jcana). 2. The androecia of the group show great morphological varia-
bility, but in a given genus there is a certain uniformity which affords a
good systematic character, a very important point in this group of rather
ill-defined genera. 8. The androecia mostly occupy an intercalary
position on the shoot, that is, typically the male branch bears at its base
sterile leaf -organs and continues its apical growth vegetatively. 4.
The perigonial leaves and auiphigastria resemble the sterile leaves,
but differ in the larger undivided limbus and in the hollowed pocket
in which the antheridia are sheltered. 5. In many species with fila-
mentous leaf-segments protection against desiccation is provided by the
hair-like felt which gathers moisture by capillary attraction ; but even
in such cases as Trichocolea and Blepharostoma the limbus of the
perigonial bracts is more strongly developed than in the sterile leaves.

* New Phytologist, ix. (1910) pp. 341-53.
t Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 146-62 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 225

6. With the protection of the antheridia is associated also the presence
of paraphyllia in the axils of the antheridial bracts ; the presence of
paraphyllia is constant for a given species, and seems to be connected
with a sub-xerophilous adaptation (Gharidonanthus, Mastigophora did ados).

7. The perigonial amphigastria are always well developed, and are very
similar to the sterile ; they are strongly developed throughout some
genera, somewhat reduced throughout others. 8. The number of an-
theridia in each perigonial bract is within certain limits constant in
each genus. In some genera the antheridia are always solitary, viz.
in Anthelia, Lepicolea, Chsetocolea, Lepidolsena ; in others they are either
one or two, viz. in Blepharostoma, Ptilidium ; and they are more than
two in Isotachis, Trichocolea, Chandonanthus, Mastigophora, Herberta.

9. Amphigastrial antheridia are known to Schiffner in two genera
only, Herberta and Mastigophora, and though rare occur probably in
every species of those genera, thus affording a sound generic character.

10. The amphigastrial antheridia are in every way similar to ordinary
antheridia. 11. The presence of amphigastrial antheridia is only
possible in such genera as have very large unreduced perigonial bracts ;
and besides that, also in the axil of each perigonial bract a larger number
of antheridia develop. They are therefore out of the question in all
plants with solitary antheridia. 12. The plants with amphigastrial
antheridia break through Leitgeb's rule, hitherto regarded as universal,
that only the dorsal segments form antheridia. 13. Herberta and other
genera show also clearly that not only the dorsally situated half of the
dorsal segment, but also, in certain circumstances, the ventrally situated
part has the power of forming antheridia — whereby also the second part
of Leitgeb's dictum loses its universal validity. 1-4. Sendtner -a filiform is
Schiff. is cleared up : it is Blepharostoma quadripartitum (Hook.) Stepb.
var. filiforme Schiff. ; B. quadripartitum of the Dusen collection is B.
pilosum Evans ; Lepicolea quadrilaciniota Sail, belongs to the genus
Blepharostoma.

Structure of Riccia Bischoffii.* — 0. Juel gives an account of the
anatomical structure of Riccia Bischoffii Huben., collected near Upsala.
In the middle of its thallus it has the normal structure of a Eu-riccia,
that is, it has the usual vertical single rows or columns of assimilatory
cells, each four surrounding a narrow vertical air-canal ; the chloroplasts
of the assimilatory cells are arranged in those portions of the cells which
abut on the canals. In the wings of the thallus, however, the assimila-
tory tissue is peculiar in being modified ; the air-canals are stretched out
obliquely, and are each surrounded, not by four columns of cells, but by
a cylindrical group of six to fifteen cells (as seen in horizontal section),
and the surface appears reticulate. This wing-structure resembles that
of the Australian R. vesiculosa, and is of importance as forming a transi-
tion from the structure of Eu-riccia to that of Ricciella with its wide
air-chambers.

Critical Forms of Aplozia.j — V. Schiffner publishes notes on some
critical forms of Aplozia of the very intricate group of the paroicous

* Svensk. Botanisk Tidskrift., iv. (1910) pp. 160-6 (1 pi. and figs.).
-f Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., lx. (1910) pp. 451-5.

226 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

round-leaved species. He does not approve of K. Mailer's recent treat-
ment of the group in Rabenhorst's Kryptogamenflora, because it is
incomplete and misleading as to some of the rarer and forgotten species.
Schiffner has examined the type-specimens of these species, and now
publishes his results. 1. Jungermannia scalariformis Nees was so badly
described by Nees as to give the impression that the plant was dioicous
and allied to Aplozia csespiticia. Limpricht found it to be paroicous and
regarded it as identical with Jungermannia nana Nees. Later Breidler
separated Aplozia lurida from A. nana, and K. Midler gave to A. Inrida
the new binomial H aplozia Breidleri — and it is to this latter that Junger-
mannia scalariformis Nees is to be referred. But Schiffner shows that
according to the rule of priority the name must be Aplozia scalariformis.
The plant has nothing to do with A. sphserocarpa. 2. Jungermannia
tersa Nees was endowed with three varieties by Nees. Schiffner has
carefully examined all the material of the species in Nees' herbarium,
and gives the corrected determination of each plant. As a result he con-
demns Nees1 varieties as untenable. 8. Jungermannia Goulardi Husnot
is in Schiffner's opinion to be regarded as Aplozia nana var. Goulardi.
4. Jungermannia confertissima Nees is shown by an examination of the
original specimens to be Aplozia nana var. confertissima, and to differ
from A. nana in having a very compact, closely felted, upright habit,
with profuse long rhizoids and small close adpressed leaves. It is very
near to the above-mentioned var. Goulardi.

G-rimmia pilosissima.* — T. Herzog publishes a description and
figures of Grimmia pilosissima, a new species gathered on rocks on the
crest of Monte Gennargentu in Sardinia, at an altitude of nearly G000 ft.
It is distinguished at sight by its bright yellowish colour and its arach-
noid system of long white hair-points.

Rare Species of Bryum. — E. Bauer t publishes notes on some of
the more critical species recently issued in his Exsiccati, for instance
Bryum ammophilum Buthe, B. arvernense Douin, B. csespiticium var.
transiens Podp., B. oratum Jur., B. sagittsefolium Culm.

T. Suse % gives a description of Scorpiurium leskeoides, a new species
collected at Riva on the Garda See. It is a plant of the Mediterranean
type, and was found in a protected situation.

J. Baurngartner § states his views about the position of Hgpnum
Schimperianum Lorentz from its original locality, Windisch Matrei in
Tyrol. He regards it as conspecific with the true Hgpnum molle Dicks,
and as distinct from H. molle var. Schimperianum of Juratzka's
herbarium and of Schimper's Synopsis.

Figures of Hepatic Genera. || — C. Lacouture, before his death,
prepared for publication an illustrated synoptic key to all known genera
of the Hepaticaa. These are now published. The Lejeuneaj were
previously treated in the same way and were published in the Revue
Bryologique in 11)08.

* Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 12-13 (figs.).

t Deutsche Botan. Monatsschr., xxii. (1910), pp. 7-8.

\ Tom. cit., pp. 2-3. § Tom. cit. (1911) pp. 46-47.

|| Dijon : Libr. Venot, 1910, 46 pp. (pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 227

Species Hepaticarum.* — F. Stephani has published further instal-
ments of his Species Hepaticarum, that is to say, he has provided new
descriptions of the following genera and their species : — Schistochila
(83), Balantiopsis (15), Diplophyllum (24), Delavayella (1), Scapania
(78), Radula (220), Phurozia (10), Madotheca (153), Frullania. The
last named genus is unfinished, but its subgenus CkonantheUa contains
82 species, GaJeiloba 230 species, and Thiopsiella 190 species. The sheets
are issued as a supplement to the Bulletin de l'Herbier Boissier which
became defunct at the end of 1909. Many of the species are described
for the first time.

Bryological Index, j — E. G. Paris has published a supplement to his
Index Bryologicus, in which he cites the moss-names employed by
V. F. Brotherus in Engler's Pflanzenfamilien and gives cross-references
to the synonyms in the Index Bryologicus — a convenience much needed
by moss-students.

Illustrations of Exotic Mosses. J— G. Roth has published two
more parts of his Die Aussereuropaischen Laubinoose, in which he gives
figures and new descriptions of exotic mosses. The first volume is to
contain the Andreaeaceae, Archidiaceae, Cleistocarpae, and Trematodonteae.
Part I. contained Andresea with 102 species. Parts II. and III. contain
descriptions of 25 species of Archidium, 147 species of Cleistocarpeas,
and a portion (17 species) of the Trematodonteae. The Cleisto-
carpeas are an artificial group, being the indehiscent members of several
families brought together for convenience of treatment. The families
concerned are as follows : — Trematodonteas, Ditrichieaa, Trichostomeas,
Pottieas, Voitiese, Gigaspermeaa, Ephemereaa, Fumarieas. Keys to the
species are provided, and in many genera keys to the European species
are also provided — a feature omitted by the author in his previous work,
Die Europaischen Laubmoose.

New or Rare European Mosses. § — G. Roth publishes descriptions
and figures of 22 new or rare European mosses which are additional to
the species included in his Europaischen Laubmoose (1904-5). The
plants treated belong to the following genera : Tetraplodon, Splachnum,
Pohlia, and especially Bryum (sections Ptyckostomum, Hemisynapsium,
Areodictyon, Eucladodium, Eubryum) ; also PhUonotis and Timmia.
Bryum splachnoides, described and figured as a Br achy men ium by
Harvey in 1840 from a Himalayan specimen, has been recorded from
Nepal and Yunnan ; but its distribution was remarkably extended in
1906 by its discovery at Knossos in Crete by W. E. Nicholson.

British Mosses and Liverworts.|| — T. H. Russell publishes a
second edition of his Introduction to the study of mosses and liver-
worts. The first edition appeared in 1908. Some alterations are now

• Geneva, iv. (1909-10) pp. 65-528.

t Collatio norninurn Brotkerianorum et Indicis Bryologici, Paris : Bailli£re,
1911, 37 pp.

% Dresden : Heidrich, 1910-11, Band i. lief. 2-3, pp. 97-272 (pis. 9-24).

§ Hedwigia, 1. (1910) pp. 163-80 (2 pis.)

|| London : Sampson Low, Marston & Co., 1910, new edit., xvi. and 211 pp.
(11 pis.).

228 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

introduced, four new plates being added, and the terminology being
somewhat improved. The book provides, in popular language, an
account of the main facts of the life-history of the Bryophytes and of
their various modes of reproduction. It treats of the collection,
examination, and preservation of specimens, of the best sort of apparatus
to use, and of the home-manufacture of apparatus. Explicit instructions
for the preparation of Microscope slides are given, and also hints for the
avoidance of the many pitfalls which beset the beginner.

Introduction to British Liverworts.* — Sir Edward and Agnes Fry
have published a simplified account of the Hepaticse. Beginning with
a description of two typical forms, the thalloid Pellia epiphylla and the
foliose Diplophyllum albicans, they pass on to consider the four groups,
Kiccieae, Monocleaj, Anthoceroteae, Jungermanniae, indicating the main
points of their morphology and anatomy. They discuss the various
modes of reproduction which prevail among the hepatica?, giving two
tables in which are displayed a number of British Jungermannieae that
are characterized by the possession of unicellular and of multicellular
gemmaa respectively. The form of these gemmas and their place of
production on the plants are indicated. The concluding chapters are con-
cerned with odour, water supply, alternation of generations, classification,
distribution.

British Mosses. — W. Ingham f reports on the work done by the
bryological section of the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union during 1910 and
records the discovery of some score of interesting species or varieties of
mosses and hepatics in divers localities by sundry collectors.

E. A. Richards J records the finding of Campylopus flexuosus var.
paradoxus at Helsby Hill in Cheshire. Strictly speaking, the plant is
intermediate between C. flexuosus and the var. paradoxus, showing that
the latter has rightly been reduced from specific rank.

E. Armitage § publishes a note on some mosses which are new
records for the counties of Westmorland and Ayr. They were gathered
in Mardale and Riggindale in the former county, and at Craig Lure and
Balbeg in Ayrshire.

New Scottish Mosses. j| — J. Stirton publishes descriptions of the
following six new species : two of them collected on Ben Lawers in
1855, Timmia scotica, Climacium epigseum ; two found near Fort
William in 1908, Orthotrichum prasinellum and 0. prsenubilum ; and
two from Arisaig, Plagiothecium ru/ovirescens and Hypnum deflectens.
The Climacium has close affinities to G. americanum, and leads to the
question why should plants, which are found on the higher altitudes of
Ben Lawers and scarcely anywhere else in Great Britain, show such
close relationships to those occurring near the eastern shores of the more
northern parts of North America — as, for instance, Mollia fragilis
(Drum.), Hypnum hispidulum (Brid.), Climacium epigseum, and several
lichens.

* The Liverworts, British and Foreign. London : Witherby & Co. 1911, viii-
and 74 pp. (49 figs.). t Naturalist, No. G48 (1911) pp. 60-1.

J Lancashire Naturalist, iii. (1910) p. 177.
§ Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) p. 36.
|| Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., No. 76 (1910) pp. 238-44.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 229

Mosses of the Haute-Saone.* — A. Coppey publishes another instal-
ment of his paper on a phytogeographic study of the mosses of the
Haute-Saone, giving the distribution of the species of Dicranaceae, of
Fissidem, Hymenostomum, etc., with remarks interspersed here and there.

Hungarian Bryophytes. — V. Schiffner f publishes a list of thirty-
three hepaticaj collected by I. Gyorffy in Hungary, and especially in the
Hohen-Tatra. A previous list appeared in 1909 in the same periodical.

M. Peterfi % publishes some critical notes on Hungarian mosses col-
lected in the south-eastern part of the kingdom. He writes at considerable
length about Philonotis alpkola.

I. Gyorffy § gives an account of the morphology, anatomy, and
ecology of Molendoa tenuinervis Limpr., a rare Alpine moss recently
found on the Hohen-Tatra.

I. Gyorffy || records the discovery of Orthotrichum perforatum
Limpr., and of Dicranum groenlaniikuin Brid. in the Hohen-Tatra.
They are both additions to the Hungarian flora, and are very rare in
Europe. He also calls attention to the occurrence of polycarpophory
(two sporogonia in one pericha3tium) in Dialytrichia Brebissoni Limpr.

South Russian Mosses.! — A. A. Sapehin publishes a list of forty-
six species of mosses collected in the Governments of Cherson, Taurida,
and Bessarabia by J. K. Paczosky. An interesting record is the presence
of Sphagnum squamosum in a forest lake near Snamenka on the South
Russian Railway.

Northern Mosses.— H. W. Arnell and 0. Jensen** have prepared a
catalogue of the mosses gathered on the Sarek Mountains in Swedish
Lapland by A. Hamberg's Expedition. They describe and figure as
new two species and three varieties, and also figure other interesting
species, and add a chapter on the vegetation of mosses, their frequency,
habits, etc.

V. F. Brotherus tt gives an account of the mosses of the Arctic coast-
lands of Siberia, gathered by the Russian North Pole Expedition
(1900-3). He enumerates 45 mosses, 3 sphagna and 9 hepatics, and
describes and figures a new species of Brijum.

Thallophyta.

Algse.

(By Mrs. E. S. Gepp.)

Japanese Marine Algae.JJ — K. Okamura issues two further parts of
his Icones of Japanese Algaj, in one of which he figures Champia
parvula, Gonstantinea rosa-marina, Dasyopsis plumosa, Gamplsephora

* Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 13-19.

t Magyar Bot. Lapok., ix. (1909) pp. 313-20. J Tom. cit., pp. 320-33.

§ Tom. cit., pp. 360-374 (2 pis.). See also Rev. Brvolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp.
20-21. || Op. cit., x. (1910) pp. 83-5.

t Bull. Jard. Impair. Bot. St. Petersbourg, x. (1910) pp. 186-91.

** Naturw. Unters. Sarekgeb. in Schwed. Lappland, iii. lief. 3 (1910) pp. 133-
268 (figs.). ft Acad. Imper. Sci. St. Petersbourg (1910) 15 pp. (fig.).

XX Icones of Japanese Algae. II. Nos. 6, 7 (1910) pis. 76-85.

230 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

hypnseoides, Gladophora rugulosa, and Microdictyon pseudoha/pteron.

The second of the two parts includes figures of a new species, Botryocarpa
japonica Okam., as well as of Delesseria fimbriata De la Pyl., I). Midden-
dorfii Rup., and Ohordaria abietina Rup. The figures are as usual of
the very best.

Marine Algae from the Kermadecs.* — A. and E. S. Gepp publish
a short list of marine algae from the Kermadec Islands, collected by
R. B. Oliver in 190H. The list includes thirty-seven species and repre-
sents the first published record of algae from the islands. None of the
species are described as new, though possibly one may prove to be so,
when more is known of the genus to which it belongs, Oalaxaura. A
new combination is made, Gystophora etongata Dickie being placed in
Carpophyllum, with a short explanatory note. G. elongatum was not
among the collection from Oliver, but it had been previously recorded
from the ocean thirty miles off the Kermadecs by the ' Challenger '
Expedition. In some short introductory remarks, rmotations are made
from Oliver's own report on the Vegetation of the Kermadecs. t

Algae of the Sheffield District.} — M. H. Stiles gives a list of the
Algae and Diatornaceae of that portion of the West Riding of York-
shire which extends from Sheffield to Thorne, with Doncaster as the
natural centre. The list comprises about 100 species, and is followed by
short notes on various localities in the district.

Algae and their Study. § — This is the title of a popular lecture
given by F. L. M'Keever in Edinburgh, in which a short sketch is given
of the general outlines of classification of algae, followed by a list of
forty-one fresh-water species found by the author in Midlothian. The
most interesting of these is Desmonema Wrangelli B. & F., which is
described by West as being one of the rarest blue-green algae in the
European flora.

Algae of the Elf Loch.|]— F. L. M'Keever enumerates seven new
records of algae from the Elf Loch, the flora of which had been already
published.

African Fresh-water Algae. If — E. Lemmermann gives a list of the
fresh-water algae collected during the German Expedition to Central
Africa in 1907-8. The collection includes eighty-one species, of which
two are new, Phormidium africanum, and Peridinium bidens, as well as
two new varieties of known species. The localities were Mohasi Lake,
Ruanda, Kiwu Lake, and Rugege forest.

Algal Flora of the Missouri Botanical Garden.** — A. Hayden writes
a report on the algae found in the pools, ponds, and streams of the

* Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1910) pp. 17-23.
t Trans. New Zealand Inst., xlii. (1909) pp. 118-75.

X Handbook and Guide of the British Association, Sheffield, 1910, pp. 443-7.
§ Trans. Edinburgh Field Nat. and Micr. Soc, 1909-10, pp. 232-41.
|| Tom. cit., pp. 242.

f Wiss. Ergebnis. Deutsch. Zentral-Africa Exped., 1907-8. II. Bot. (1911)
pp. 89-94.

** Missouri Botanical Garden. Annual Report, xxi. (1910) pp. 25-48 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. -3L

Missouri Botanical Garden. After a discussion of the habitats, stability
of habitat characters, and analysis of habitats, she gives a systematic
enumeration of the 116 species recorded, together with some critical
notes. One species, Pitkophora Mooreana Collins, is new. The paper is
illustrated by good photographs of the various habitats in the garden.

Analysis of Seaweeds.* — W. H. Barlow has drawn up some analy-
tical results made by him on dry plants of Fucus serratus, F. vesicidosus,
and Ascophyllum nodosum, collected at Padstow. In the case of
F. serratus the phosphoric acid was considerably higher than that found
in a Thanet specimen previously reported on by other investigators.
The total alkalis in the three species examined were found to be nearly
uniform.

Saprophytism of Enteromorpha. j — E. Hayren writes on the sapro-
phytism of certain species of Enteromorpha. He has examined species in
the harbour of Helsingfors, and finds that E. clathrata and certain forms
of E. intestinalis may be regarded as " oligosaprob," while E.jlexuosa,
E. crinita, and certain other forms of E. intestinalis, are weakly " meso-
saprob." The presence of Enteromorpha in brackish or salt water leads
to the inference that the water is foul, an inference which is strengthened
by the fact that A. Steuer finds Enteromorpha growing near the entrance
of sewers. The author further discusses other " saprob " species in the
harbour of Helsingfors, which have been found there by Bergmann and
Klingstedt.

Periodicity in Spirogyra.J — C. H. Danforth writes on the periodicity
of Spirogyra, with special reference to the work of Benecke. After a
short introduction dealing with previous work on periodicity in algse, he
gives an account of his own experiments, comparing them with those of
Benecke. That author worked with Spirogyra communis, and the
experiments of Danforth were made with S. setiformis, 8. longata,
S. Grevilleana, S. dubia, and S. porticalis. The result has been almost a
complete lack of conformity in so far as the question of zygospore
formation is concerned. After describing in detail the experiments
carried out, the author summarizes his results as follows : It appears
that there are specific differences as regards the reactions of filaments
and zygospores in the species studied, and that Benecke's conclusions,
based on the reactions of S. communis, are probably not of general
application, or are applicable only under very special conditions. Of the
five species investigated three failed entirely to give the expected results,
and a fourth failed in every case but one. The remaining species,
S. Grevilleana, seems to agree more closely with S. communis, but even
here the agreement is not complete. The existence of sexual strains,
such as occur in some of the moulds, seems to be suggested, but evidence
on this point is lacking. It is still possible that Spirogyra, like Dictyota,
is inherently periodic in its functions, although its periodicity may be
extensively influenced by the environment.

* Journ. Board of Agric, xvii. (1911) p. 832.

t Meddel. Soc. Fauna et Flora Fennica, xxvi. (1909-10) pp. 157-61; and
Hedwigia, Beibl. 1. (1910) p. (150).

X Missouri Botanical Garden. Annual Report, xxi. (1910) pp. 49-59.

232 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Navicula rhomboides.* — E. M. Nelson discusses the old question of
Navicula rhomboides and the Amician test, and points out the differences
between the diatoms regarded as N. rhomboides in England and America
respectively. Two other varieties of the species are discussed. The
author suggests that the minute variations of the various forms might
be expressed in numbers, and the numerical index of each would be a
great aid to identification and comparison. The economic value of
Diatoms is alluded to, and the fact that they form the food of Copepods
which in turn are devoured by fish.

Desmidiaceae of Bohemia. f — J. Lutkemiiller gives a list of about
280 species of Desmids found in Bohemia, including new species and
varieties. Remarks are made on Penium and Roya. Some of the
species of Penium are here placed under Cosmarium as being more
closely allied with that genus. Roya has hitherto been considered as
belonging to Closterieae, on the strength of the shape of its cells,
since details as to the cell-membrane and cell-division were wanting.
Lutkemiiller has, however, been able to procure material, and to make
the following observations : 1. The cell-membrane is hyaline, slightly
refractive and entirely without structure ; under the highest magnifica-
tion, neither in stained nor unstained preparations is any segmentation
to be observed, and it is also free of pores. 2. Cupric ammonium
bydrate causes an immediate fading of the cell-membrane, which
becomes flaccid and in a few minutes dissolves away. 3. During cell-
division a transverse wall is formed which takes its origin solely from
the membrane of the mother-cell ; there is no previous separation of
the halves of the cell-membrane, nor any intercalation of a newly formed
membranous ring. After the splitting of the dividing wall into two
sheets, there follows speedily the separation of the daughter-cells, when
the young halves of the cell have hardly taken on a hemispherical form.
Even at this stage it is impossible to demonstrate a dividing line between
the young and the old halves. It is thus to be seen that the genus Roya
must be transferred from the Closterieae, and placed with the Saccoderm
Desmidiaceae in the tribe Spirotaenieae. The nearest ally to Roya is
Mesotseniwn Naeg. As regards the pores in the cell-membrane of
Glosterium, the author has re-examined species which he had previously
declared to be without pores, and also a series of the smallest species in
the tribe Cosmariea?, and he finds that every one of them possesses
pores. He believes now that there are no species of Cosmariea? without
pores.

New African Species of Volvox.j — G. S. West describes two new
species of Volvox collected respectively in Rhodesia and from the Albert
Nyanza. Two species are also recorded from Australia, one of which,
though probably new, cannot be described for want of adequate material.
The author gives some interesting notes on the two European species,
V.globator and V. aureus, and contrasts the respective characters of each
species in tabular form.

*

Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, xi. (1910), pp. 93-8.
t Verb., k. Zool.-Bot. Ges. Wien, lx. (1910) pp. 478-503 (2 pis., figs, in text).
J Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, xi. (1910) pp. 99-104 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 233

Phseothamnion confervicolum.* — F. L. M'Keever records this alga
for the first time in the British Isles. He found it among algaa collected
from the Elf Loch on the Braid Hills, Edinburgh, growing on Lemna
minor and other aquatic Phanerogams.

Myxophyceae.f — J. E. Tilden publishes a book in which she brings
together the specific descriptions of all the blue-green algse so far known
to exist in North America and the adjacent regions (including the Arctic
regions, Alaska, Greenland, Canada, Newfoundland, Labrador, the
United States, Lower California, Mexico, Central America, the Bermudas,
the Bahamas, the "West Indies, and the Hawaiian Islands). Simple keys
are furnished for the families, genera and species, and many of the
species are figured. Specimens from exsiccatas are quoted and localities
given. Finally there is a glossary and a list of hosts and associates.

Symbiotic Alga. — J. Horejsi has investigated the alga which
grows in the dichotomous branches of the roots of Cycas revoluta,
Anabsena cycadearam Reinke. According to the author, the alga is the
cause of the abnormal dichotomous growths of certain roots. It shows
a regular annual periodicity, the symbiosis lasting from the beginning
of autumn to the end of spring. The alga enters through the lenticels
of the roots and penetrates into the meristeinatic apical tissue, stops
further growth and causes dichotomy to take place. Only the vegetative
apices are free from the alga, which is strongly heliotropic and belongs
probably to Anabsena. A detailed description is given of the alga and
its life-history. The author considers that the alga probably takes up a
certain amount of the products of assimilation from the host and that
the roots in return take from the alga their products of nitrification.
The alga is able to maintain, and even to form, its chlorophyll in very
feeble light. The author has succeeded in cultivating the alga in soil
extract, in alkaline fluid, and in agar.

Loew, 0. Uber die Wirkung von Strontinmsalzen auf Algen. (On the effect of
Btrontium salts on algae.) Flora, neue Folg., cii. (1911) pp. 96-112.

Fungi.
(By A. Lobrain Smith, F.L.S.)

Research on Cladochytriacese.§ — Rene Maire and Adrien Tison
followed the development of Urophlyctis hnnisphserica on Carum incras-
satum, and describe it fully. The point where the cell of the host has
been infected by a zoospore remains in contact with the exterior ; a
small vesicle is formed in the cell which buds and forms other vesicles ;
the final terminal vesicle becomes the chronisporocyst. The authors
noted no case of nuclear fusion ; the reproduction is entirely asexual.
They found the same course of development in Physoderma Oerhartii on
Glyceriajfuitans. The three genera Urophlyctis, Physoderma, and Clado-
ckytrium, form, they find, a homogeneous group with asexual reproduc-
tion by the formation of chronisporocysts.

* Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., No. 77 (1911) pp. 57-8.

t Minnesota Alg?e, vol. i. Report of the Survey Bot., ser. 8 (1910) iv. and 328 pp.
(20 pis.) \ Bull. Int. Acad. Sci. Boheme (1910) 10 pp. (24 figs.).

§ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 106-7.

234 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Biology of Sclerospora.* — Two species of this genus, Sclerospora
graminicola on Setaria viridis and Sclerospora macrospora on a number
of grasses and cereals, are very prevalent in the valley of the Po, where
they have been collected by Yittorio Peglion, the author of the paper. He
notes that the spores of the first species are not congregate, but lie in
loose masses between the fibro- vascular bundles and the outer cortex ;
they are thus easily scattered by the wind. 8. macrospora has also a wide
distribution, but it occurs somewhat rarely. The oospores are congregate
and less liable to be dispersed. No conidia have been observed in the
genus. The primary effect of the fungus on the host-plant is to increase
the vegetative development, and the plants attacked have a brighter green
colour than the normal plants. The relation between host and parasite
is thus of a somewhat mutualistic nature at the beginning. When seed-
time arrives the damage done by the parasite becomes more apparent ;
the seeds are deformed and incapable of germination. Cattle eat the
grasses infected with Sclerospora very readily and without any bad results.
Figures are given of deformed ears of cereals and of the abnormally
developed leaves of Glycerki festucseformis, a witches'-broom being formed
by the parasite.

Notes on Saprolegnia.f — A. E. Lechmere claims to have produced
on one and the same pure culture of Saprolegnia the non-sexual types of
fructification of a series of closely related genera. Lechmere describes
his cultures and the different growths.

Fungus of House-fly.:}: — Gr. Gordon Hewitt discusses this fungus,
Empusa Muscse, along with the parasites that attack Musca domestica in
his paper on the structure, development and bionomics of the House-fly.
A large proportion of the flies that have survived till the autumn are
killed off by this fungus, of which the sporophores bud off and ejaculate
terminal conidia ; these conidia alight on another insect, penetrate the
body and produce mycelium with further conidia. Resting spores that
would carry the fungus over the winter have been described, but some
doubt still exists as to their occurrence.

Ascocarp of Leotia.§ — William H. Brown has made a microscopical
study of the ascocarp of L. lubrica and L. chlorocephala, more especially
of the ascus-formation. In the youngest specimen of L. lubrica that the
writer found, the supposed ascogonium — a large cell of which the
contents were vacuolated and degenerated — gave rise to a number of
large hyphse which extended upwards towards the tip of the ascocarp.
At the tips of these ascogenons hyphae, asci are formed in several different
ways . In some cases a typical hook is formed in which the two nuclei
of the penultimate cell may fuse to form the nucleus of an ascus, or they
may divide and give rise to the nuclei of another hook. The terminal
cell grows down and fuses with the antepenultimate cell, and the fused
cell may form an ascus or give rise to still another hook. Other hook
formations are also described.

* Centrabl. Bakt., xxviii. (1910) pp. 580-9 (G figs.).

t New Phytologist, ix. (1910) pp. 305-19 (2 pis.).

% Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., liv. (1910) pp. 371-4 (pi. 22 and figs. 15-17;.

§ Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 443-59 (47 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 235

Brown considers that there is no evidence of any fusion of nuclei in
the ascogonium. The nuclei of the ascogenous hyphae probably arise
from a single nucleus with the haploid number of chromosomes, and their
relationship to each other is therefore of no significance. The vegetative
hyphas form large storage cells in the hymenium ; the nuclei in these
cells frequently fuse to form a single large nucleus.

The development of the ascocarp indicates that all of its structures
are homologous with those of the Pezizinete, and that Leotia is closely
related to that group.

Uredinese. — P. and H. Sydow* have issued the section of their
monograph dealing with the genus Uromyces. They give a short
historical sketch of Uromyces, and a general description of its occurrence
and development. It is like Puccinia except in the teleutospore stage,
the spores being only one-celled and possessing one apical germinating
pore. Many of the species live on one host, others alternate on different
hosts. The authors include in Uromyces the genera Trachyspora and
Piholaria, and they reject the numerous genera established by Arthur,
based as they often are on our as yet imperfect knowledge of the
different life stages of the species.

Laszlo Hollos f publishes a list of 171 species of Uredineas from
Hungary, some of them very rare forms, and most of them new for that

region.

F. Zach | describes researches he has made on the relation between
host and parasite in the Uredineae. He demonstrated phagocytose
bodies in the cells invaded by the parasite both in root and leaf. These
bodies are larger or smaller, the latter are Eriksson's Plasmanukleolen.
In many cases there seems to be a symbiotic relationship between host
and parasite, the host being uninjured by the presence of the fungus.
Finally, he concludes that new outbreaks of rust are due to spore-
infection.

F. C. Arthur § describes a number of new species of Uredineas from
various regions of the United States. They belong to the genera
Puccinia, Uromyces, Uropyxis, Uredo, Peridermium, and JEcidium.
Many of them were collected in the preparation of the North American
flora.

Y. Orishimo || has established a genetic connexion between Col&o-
sporium on Aster scaler and Peridermium Pini-densiflorse by means of
infection experiments ; both forms are now included under Goleosporium
Pini-Asteris. The author gives a list of Coleosporium species in Japan.

Study of Smut-infection. ^[ — Fr. Honcamp and H. Zimmermann
have tested smut spores that had passed through the bodies of various
animals. It has been generally held that feeding animals with smutted

* Monographia Uredinarurn, II. 2 (Leipzig, 1910) xix. and 396 pp. (9 pis.).

t Magyar Bot. Kozlem., ix. 2 (Budapest, 1910) pp. 161-9. See also Hedwigia,
1. (1910) Beibl., p. 164.

t SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-Nat. Kl., cxix. (1910) pp. 307-30. See also
Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp. 17-18.

§ Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxvii. (1910) pp. 569-80.

|| Bot. Mag. Tokyo, xxiv. (1910) pp. 1-5. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911),
pp. 94-5. Tf Centralbl. Bakt., xxviii. (1910) pp. 590-607.

230 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

corn and then using their dung for manure is responsible for spreading
the smut fungus. The authors find that the spores are mostly killed,
only a negligible number remain capable of germination. The most
serious danger arises from infected seed, and that can be met by soaking
the seeds in some fungicide. Smut spores survive two years ; they only
germinate in suitable conditions of moisture.

Culture of an Edible Fungus. *— L. Matruchot succeeded in
developing Pleurotus cornucopioides, a lignicolous agaric, on artificial
cultures in the laboratory. He also took sections of an elm tree invaded
by the same fungus and buried them in soil which he kept moist. Each
piece of wood furnished two or more harvests of Pleurotus. The author
emphasizes the economic importance of these methods of obtaining relays
of fresh fungi.

Poisonous Mushrooms. — W. A. Murrill f has written a paper on the
noxious forms of fungi in America. The two deadly Agarics there, as in
Europe, are Amanita muscarius and A. phalloides. The poisons in both
these fungi are alkaloids. Murrill reckons that the deaths due to
mistaking poisonous species for edible ones are probably fifty or more
each year in the United States ; many of the cases are not reported. A
list of species is given with notes as to poisons.

Gillot % records several cases, due presumably to eating Amanita
phalloides, as the fungi had been gathered in a wood where this species
was very abundant. Gillot insists on the importance of botanical
characters in determining fungi, and warns people against trusting to
the " silver test " or to the presence of slugs. He also insists on the
necessity of eating fungi in a fresh condition.

Gallois § also records a fatal case of poisoning due to eating fungi,
though it was impossible to find out which species had been taken. The
symptoms and course of the attack are described.

Notes on the Larger Fungi. || — A. Lingelsheim calls attention to
a specimen of the Bhizomorpha of Ar miliaria mellea on maple roots
which had pushed back the woody tissues and forced its way for about a
metre between the wood and the cork ; the cells of the periderm were
entirely uninjured. In another case the wood had been penetrated and
the Bhizomorpha showed on cross-section an irregular black ring.

New Species of Bresadolia.lf— P. Magnus has had submitted to
him a fungus collected by Mikita Schaposchikoff on roots of beech in
North Caucasus and named by N. Schestunoff of Riga, Bresadolia
caucasica. Magnus does not dispute its affinity to other species of the
genus, but he holds that it is none the less only a monstrous form of
Polyporus squamosus. It differs from the latter only in the form of the
pores, which are intricately lamelliform.

* Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 1776-7.

t Mycologia, ii. (1910) pp. 255-64 (2 figs.).

X Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi. (1910) pp. 408-14.

§ Tom. cit., pp. 415-18.

|| Jabresb. Schles. Ges. Zool.-bot. Sekt., lxxxvii. (1909) pp. 34-5.

\ Hedwigia, 1. (1910) pp. 100-4 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 237

Wood-destroying Fungi.*— Josef Schorstein publishes notes on the
fungi that are found on roofs. He states that the occurrence of white
strings or cushions of white colour on infected wood indicates the presence
of Porta Vaillantii or Polyporus vaporarius. If soft, like kid leather,
the mycelial strands belong to the first-named ; if brittle, they belong to
the latter. Schorstein has found that Couiophora cerebella and Paxillus
jianuoides only occur in cellars. Polyporus destructor quickly forms
fruiting bodies, and never entirely destroys the wood. Membranaceous
coatings point to Mer alius lacrymans or M. pulverulentus. The former
makes its appearance soon after the wood is built into position. If
cultures prove that the mycelium is living, the wood should be entirely
destroyed. Mouldy wood is quite safe, as moulds never penetrate into
the wood tissues.

Notes on Geaster.f — J. Eick accepts the work of C. G. Lloyd on
this genus. He is inclined to replace species by types, the latter more
truly representing the grouping of forms. Rick enumerates the cha-
racters that are of systematic value : the form of the " mouth " and
columella, and the consistency of the peridium ; and he compares the
different species, marking the points of difference or resemblance.

Dictyophora and Ithyphallus4— G. F. Atkinson has made a com-
parative study of these genera, with special reference to the develop-
ment and importance of the veil, and a comparison is made with Phallus
Ravenelii, in which a true indusium, so conspicuous in Dictyophora, is
wanting. In Ithyphallus there is a rudimentary indusium only, but
Atkinson considers that I. impudicus and Phallus Ravenelii belong to one
genus.

Myco-geography.§— F. Theissen comments on Schroter's statement
that, for fungi, there is a geographical distribution, as there is for
Phanerogams. So far, the experience of mycologists does not support
this view, though, as Theissen remarks, much more detailed work is still
necessary, and the work of earlier mycologists needs thorough revision.
A list is made of Xylarise from Brazil, which shows how wide the distri-
bution is for these fungi ; but, he concludes, much examination of
existing material must be undertaken before we can attempt accurate
geographical distribution lists.

Fungus Root-tubercles. ||— E. G. Arzberger has studied the fungus
that causes root-tubercles in Ceanothus, Eleaynus, and Myrica. In the
two former the fungus is placed in the genus Frankia ; infection takes
place by root-hairs near the tip, and as the fungus develops the host-
cells become hypertrophied, the fungus secretes an enzyme that destroys
the cell-walls, andjthe nucleus increases in volume. The fungus forms
sporangia from which probably the spores escape, but the fungus itself
is finally absorbed by the host. Symbiosis exists, which is quite apparent

* Oesterr. Forst. Jagdzeit., xxviii. No. 31 (1910) pp. 281-2. See also Hedwigia
1. (1910) BeibL, p. 119. & '

t Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxvii. (1910) pp. 375-83.
X Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 1-20 (7 pis. and 1 fig.).
§ Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxvii. (1910) pp. 359-74.
Kept. Missouri Bot. Garden, xxi. (1910) pp. 60-102 (9 pis.).

April 19th, 1911 R

238 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARl HES RELATING TO

in the early stages. In Eleaynus there are several differences in the
developments noted. In Myrica it has been determined as a species of
Actinomyces ; it is confined to one or two layers of cells, and is to be
regarded as a parasite.

Origin of Parasitism in Fungi.* — G. Massee discusses this question
at some length, giving results of experiments with various forms. Ib-
holds that fungi normally saprophytic may be educated to prey on living
tissues. He took spores of the saprophytic mould Trichothecium roseum
along with some of the culture medium and injected them into an orchid
leaf, wounding the leaf to allow the egress of the fungus. It grew, and
the spores produced were sown in a similar way. Finally, after several
generations, they were sown with distilled water only on the orchid leaf,
when they germinated and pierced the leaf, living as true parasites on
the living tissue. The author holds that the earliest fungi were aquatic,
and that " the great wave of parasitism set in when the fungi commenced
to adapt themselves to dry land conditions."

Plant-diseases in Russia. f — Helene v. Diakonoff communicates the
substance of a Russian paper on this subject in A. v. Jaczewski's Year-
book of Fungal Diseases in Cultivated Plants. On cereals the most im-
portant is Tilletia Tritici, causing smut in wheat. Cladosporium herbarum
is also reckoned a very serious disease of the grains. Among Uredineas
Puccinia triticina is the most widespread. Urocystis occulta and Clavi-
ceps purpurea attacked the rye plants ; other less important moulds are
also listed. Maize was attacked by Ustilago Maydis, and potato plants
by Phytophthora infest am ; finger-and-toe was recorded as destroying
cabbages in several districts. Tobacco suffered from Pythium de Barya-
num and hops from Sphserotheca. The diseases of orchard and garden
are also passed in review, and a careful account of fungicides is supplied.

Diseases of Plants. — Griffon and Maublanc J publish some notes
and observations on the black stain disease of chestnuts which attacks
the trunks and branches. Briosi and Farnetti had diagnosed the disease
as due to a parasitic fungus, Melanconis jierniciosa and its conidial form
Goryneum. Griffon and Maublanc have also found these fungi, and
recognize the former as a synonym of Melanconis modonia. They are
not convinced that the disease is caused by them, and they suggest that
it may be due to some disturbance of the Mycorliiza of the roots.

T. G. B. Osborn § gives a somewhat popular account of potato scab.
He describes the harmless superficial scabbing caused by abrasion of the
surface, often found in potatoes, grown on ashy or rough soil ; he then
describes more particularly corky scab, which is caused by Spongospora
subterranea.^ It does great damage to the crops, and has been especially
prevalent in Ireland. Black scab, due to Chrysophtyctis endobiotica, is
also described by the author.

* Naturalist (1910) pp. 289-92.
t Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xx. (1910) pp. 460-73.

X Coniptes Itendus, cli. (1910) pp. 1149-51. See also Bull. Soc. Mveol. France,
\xvi. (1910) pp. 371-81 (3 pis.).

§ Manchester Micr. Soc. (1910) pp. Gl-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 239

Ernesto Marchand * communicates a note on new attacks of Plasmo-
diophora Brassicse, the destructive parasite of plants belonging to the
Cruciferaj. Marchand has found it deforming and destroying the roots
of melons, parsley, etc. He remarks that the plants grown in forced
conditions suffer most from the parasite, the excessive humidity and
high temperature being favourable to its growth.

A leaflet f has been issued by the Board of Agriculture and Fisheries
•dealing with a disease of strawberry leaves due to Sphserella Frag arise.
It causes brown spots on the leaves, the centre of each becoming greyish
white, and is seen to be studded first with the tufts of Ramularia, and
later with the perithecia of Sphserella. The leaves should be mown
after the fruit is gathered, and then burnt. This does not injure the
strawberry plants.

Stoykowitch and Brocq-Rousseu % have studied the effect of fungi
on plums : they find a white deformation caused by Torula moulds ; a
red caused by Monilia, and others due to various moulds, such as
Aspergillus, Penicillium, and Rhizopus. In the presence of these moulds
the sugars diminish, while nitrogen increases.

G. Arnaud§ describes a fungus Trabutia quercina parasitic on oaks. It
was previously confined to Quercus Ilex, but is now found on Q. coccifera.
The perithecia grow on stromata on the under surface of the leaves ;
the pycnidial form was also found and described ; the mycelium develops
a crust under the cuticle from which suckers grow out between the cells
of the palisade tissue.

J. Vanha || has studied the " leaf-rolling " disease of potatoes, one of
the chief causes of winch he finds is an Ascomycete Solanella rosea
g. et sp. n. The details given are somewhat incomplete.

The scientific committee of the Royal Horticultural Society ^1 report
on bitter-rot of pears caused by the fungus Glwosporium fructigenum.
The disease begins as small rounded brown patches on the outside.
These may develop and give a bitter taste to the whole fruit. Diseased
fruits should be destroyed.

T. Brooks ** has contributed a paper dealing generally with the
subject of plant-diseases. He points out how necessary it is to under-
stand the life-history of the fungus causing the disease in order to
control or to exterminate it, and he strongly advises the cultivation of
immune plants. He also touches on the question of diseases due to
bacteria — the first authenticated case was discovered by Burrill in 1878,
who found blight of pear trees was due to a species of Bacterium. Notes
are added on the different text-books of plant-diseases recently published.

G. Lindau |f writes on the spread of parasitic fungi causing disease

* La Viticultura Argentina, i. (1910) pp. 289-90.

t Leaflet No. 243, 2 pp. (1 fig.).

X Rev. Gen. Bot., xxii. (1910) pp. 70-9. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911)
p. 17.

§ Ann. Nat. Agric. Montpellier, ser. 2, ix. (1910) pp. 278-87 (1 pi.). See also
Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp. 14-15.

|| Monatsh. Landwirtschaft, iii. (1910) p. 268. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi.
<1911) pp. 18-19. f Journ. Rov. Hort. Soc, xxxv. (1910) p. ccxxxi.

** New Phytologist, ix. (1910) pp. 374-9.

+t Nat.-wiss. YYocbenscnr., xl. (1910) pp. 625-9. See also Hedwigia, 1. (1910)
Beibl., pp. 161-2. ' V '

R 2

240 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of plants. He ascribes the widespread epidemics to the action of the
wind which scatters the light spores. Following that, the fungus requires
for growth a period of moisture and a still atmosphere. In Hungary it
was found that an Oidium year on the vine was preceded by south-
west and south winds with low temperature. Peronospora was more
prevalent in the absence of these conditions.

E. J. Butler has studied * the wilt disease of pigeon-pea. He found
on the roots perithecia of Neo-cosmospora vasinfecta, but they were
purely saprophytic on wilted plants. The disease is due to a Fusarium
of which the perfect fruits have not yet been found.

F. C. von Faber f records a disease of coffee plants which is caused
by a fungus Ascospora Coffese sp. n. It causes the leaves to wither and
fall off. By cultures he found the pycnidial and perithecial stages of
the fungus.

Perley Spaulding $ describes a number of cases in a greenhouse
where plants were damaged by Botrytis vulgaris. On Chrysanthemum
plants it attacked the petals at the tips, which soon died down to the base.
The disease spread very rapidly on any and all of the flowers. Other
attacks in the following years occurred. Two years after the first
appearance, Poinsettia leaves were destroyed, and finally a number of
plants of Primula. The lower leaves, which lay flat on the ground,
were infected and finally killed by the fungus. There has been little or
no previous mention of disease caused by Botrytis in the United States.

Ahnaud, G. — Contribution a l'Etude des Fumagines. (Contribution to the study
of Fumagines.)

[By " Fumagines " the author understands fungi belonging to the life-cycle
of Sphaeriaceee.]

Ann. Ec. Nat. Agric. Montp., ser. 2, ix. (1910) pp. 239-77 (3 pis.).
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) p. 14.

Bertrand, Gabriel, & M. Javillier — Influence du Manganese sur le
Developpement de l'Aspergillus niger. (Influence of manganese on the develop-
ment of Aspergillus niger.)

[Description of cultural experiments.]

Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 225-8.

Buchanan, R. E. — A New Species of Thyrococcum.

[The species T. humicola was isolated from humus and cultivated on agar
plates.] Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 1-4 (2 pis.).

Garrett, A. 0. — Smuts and Rusts of Utah.

[Ustilaginese and Uredinese collected by the author, the results of eight
years of field-work. 142 specimens.] Mycologia, ii. (1910) pp. 265-304.

Gueguen, Fern and — Sur la Non-Specificite botanique des Champignons des

Teignes. (On the non-specific character of scurf
fungi.)

[The author considers them as sterile niyceha
of Gymnoasceae.]
C.E. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 495-7.

* Mem. Dept. Agric. India, Bot. Ser. ii. 9 (1910) pp. 1-60. See also Bot.
Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp. 45-6.

+ Teysmannia, xxi. p. 548. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) p. 46.
X Kept. Missouri Bot. Garden, xxi. (1910) pp. 185-8 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 241

Gueguen, Fernand — Conseils pratiques relatifs a l'Etude des Champignons.

(Practical advice on the study of fungi.)

[Advice as to collection, preservation, and deter-
mination of species, with a list of useful
books.] Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi.

(1910) pp. 419-33.
Heald, F. D., & F. A. Wolf— New Species of Texas Fungi.

[Mostly minute parasitic species.] Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 5-22.

Herzfeld, Stephanie— Ueber eine neue Taphrina auf Polystichum Lonchitis.
(A new Taphrina on Ferns.)

[The parasite causes brownish blisters on the leaves.]

Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., lx. (1910) pp. 249-54.
See also Hedwigia, 1. (1910) Beibl., p. 104.

Hohnel, Franz v. — Fragmente zur Mykologie. (Notes on Mycology.)

[Criticisms and notes on a large number of genera and species. The author
establishes as new genera Encoeliella (Cenangiaceae), Helotiopsis
(Helotiaceae), and Siroscyphella (Nectrioideae-Patellinese).]

SB. k. Akad. wiss. Math.-Nat. Kl., cxix. (1910) pp. 617-79.

Hollos, L.— MagyarorszagbbT ismeretten gombak Kecskemet videkerb'l. (New
fungi for Hungary from the region round Kecskemet.)

[A list of 959 species is given belonging to the Fungi
Imperfecti.]

Magyar Bot. Kbzlemfnyek., ix. (1910) pp. 198-221.
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp. 15-16.

,, ,, A. szaruasgombardl. A. szarvasgomba tortenete. (On truffles. A
history of truffles.) Magyar.

Tcrm&szettadomangi Potf'uzelek, (1910) pp. 1-14 (21 figs.).
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp. 40-1.

Jaap, O. — Fungi selecti exsiccati. Saries xvii. and xviii., Nos. 401-50.

[The series consists of microfungi, some of them new, many of them rare
species. Hamburg, 25 Burggarten, 1910.

See also Bot. Centralbl., cxiv. (1910) pp. 617-18.

XiEndner, A. — Nouvelles Contributions a la Flore cryptogamique Suisse. (New
Contributions to the cryptogamic flora of Switzerland.)

[New records and descriptions of Mucor botryoides sp. n.]

Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve, ser. 2, ii. (1910) pp. 78-81 (2 figs.).

See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911), p. 41.

,, ,, Observations sur les Zygospores des Mucorinees. (Observations

on the Zygospores of Mucorini.)

[Notes on Sporodinia graniiis and Absidia spinosa.]

Tom. cit., pp. 56-9 (4 figs.).

Lindau, G. — Hyphomycetes. (The fascicle completes Lindau's great work on
Hyphomycetes.) Babcnhorst's Krypt.-Fl., Abt. ix., Lief. 120 (Leipzig, 1910)

pp. 945-83 and i-viii.

Lindfors, Thore — Einige Uredineen aus Lule Lappmark. (Some Uredinese
from Lule Lappmark [Swedish Lappland].)

[Species of Uredines on Erigeron alpinus, Veronica alpina, Viola epispila
and Saxifraga cernua.~]

I Sv. Bot. Tidskr., For. iv. (1910) pp. 197-202 (4 figs.).

Mas see, G. — Fungi exotici. X.

[A list of new species from various tropical regions ; one new genus
Hartiella (Stilbacece) is described, from Trinidad.]

Kew Bull., i. (1910) pp. 1-6 (1 pi.).

Migula, W.— Krypt. Flora, v. Lief. 100-6, pp. 33-144 (34 pis. col.)
[The fascicle deals with genera of Hymenomycetes. |

Flora von Deutschland. Reuss : F. v. Gezschwitz (1910).

Murrill, W. A. — The Agaricaceae of Tropical North America. I.

[A large number of re-named species are given. A new
name Chloroneuron is substituted for Chlorophyllum
Murrill, and Lactaria for Lactarius.~]

Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 23-36.

242 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Muerill, W. A.— A New Boletus from Jamaica.

[The new species is called by the author Gyroporus
jamaicensis.] Mycologia, ii. (1910) p. 305.

Popovici, A. P. — Contribution a l'Etude de la Flore mycologique de la Eoumanie

(Contribution to the mycological flora of Roumania.)

[A list of species for that country, many of them new records.]

Ann. Sci. TJniv. Jassy, vi. 3 (1910) pp. 105-16.
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) p. 95.

Raciborski — Parasitische und epiphytische Pilze Javas. (Parasitic and
epiphytic fungi from Java).

[A number of new species are included and several new genera: Farysia,
Goplana, Ordonia, Mohortia, Alina, and Psidania.~]

Am. Akad. wiss. Krakau (1909) p. 346.
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp. 16-17.

Rayner, J. F. — Eecent Additions to the Fungus Flora of the New Forest.

Hampshire Field Club, Reprint (1910) 3 pp.
Sartory, A.— Contribution a l'Etude de quelques Oospora pathogenes. (Con-
tribution to the study of some pathogenic Oospores.)
[Cases of Oospora growths in the lungs, etc.]

Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi. (1910) pp. 394-403 (13 figs.).

Schaffnit, E., J. Swensitzky, & H. Schlemm — Der Hauschwamm und

die wichtigsten Trockenfauleschwamme vom botanischen, bautechnischen und

juristischen Standpunkte. (Dry rot and the more important wood-destroying

fungi, from the botanical, architectural and legal standpoints.]

Berlin : P. Parey (1910) 106 pp. (1 pi. and 21 figs.).
See also Hedwigia, 1. (1910) Beibl., p. 162.

Stevens, F. L., & J. G. Hall— Three Interesting Species of Claviceps.
[Two species on Paspalum and one on Tripsacum.]

N.C. Agric. Exp. Stat., West Raleigh, N.C.

See also Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 460-3.

Straszer, P. Pius — Fiinfter Nachtrag zur Pilzflora des Sonntagberges (N.O.).

(Fifth contribution to the Fungus Flora of the Sonntagberg in North Austria.)

[The list includes Hysteriaceae and Pezizaceae.]

Verh. k.k. Zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, lx. (1910) pp. 464-77.

Theissen, F. — Fungi riograndenses.

[One new genus Creosph/eria (Sphseriales) and several new species are in-
cluded in a list of Dothidiales, Sphseriales, and Discomvcetes.]

Beih. Bot. Centralbl, xxvii. (1910) pp. 384-411.
Trotter, Alex.— Flora Italica Cryptogama. Pars. I. — Fungi. Fasc. vii.
Uredinales.

[The genera Puccinia and Gymnosporangium are dealt with.

Rocca : P. Casciano (1910) pp. 145-338.

Lichens.

(By A. Lorrain Smith.)

Usnea and its Linnaean Nomenclature.* — At the International
Botanical Congress, held at Brussels in 1910, it was decided to accept
Linnaeus's Species Plantarum as the starting-point for lichenologica-1
nomenclature. R. Heber Howe has taken the genus Usnea and ex-
amines the specific names in the light of Linnasus's determinations. He
finds that Linnams referred constantly to the figures and descriptions of
Dillenius. He gives the citations under each species, and finds that the
specially Linnaaan species are : Usnea plicata (L.) Web. ( U.ceratina Ach.) ;
U. barbata (L.) Web. (U.dasypoga) ; U. articulata (L.) Hoffm., and U.
florida (L.) Web., with the synonym Lichen hirtus L., the latter being
the sterile condition of the plant.

* Bull. Torrey Bot. Club xxxvii. (1910) pp. C05-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 243

New Lancashire Lichens.* — J. A. Wheldon made an excursion to
Ease Gill, a valley in Lancashire with a great variety of geological strata
and an altitude varying from almost sea-level to 2000 feet high. He
found Lecanora Prevostii on perpendicular limestone rocks in good con-
dition, and associated with Lecidea cupularis. A photograph of the
locality has been published showing the character of the rocks where
these lichens grow. L. excentrka was also collected during the day on
limestone boulders. Wheldon notes the abundance of lichens that occur
in Silverdale, perhaps owing to its proximity to the sea.

Hasse, H. E.— Additions to the Lichen Flora of Southern California, No. 5.

[A list with diagnoses of three species previously known, and three new to
science.] Bryologist, xiv. (1911) p. 2-4.

Jatta, A. — Flora Italica Cryptogama. Pars. III. Lichens. Fasc. iv. Enterolicheni.
[Cladoniacese and Lecideaceae are described.]

Rocca : S. Casciano (1910) pp. 461-694 (5 figs.).
Lesdain, Bouly de — Notes Lichenologiques, Nos. xi., xii., xiii.

[Notes on species from various localities, some of them new to science.]

Bull. Soc. Bot. Franci, lvii. (1910) pp. 31-5, 236-40, 460-3.

Servit, M. — Zur Flechtenflora Norddalmatiens. (The Lichen Flora of North

Dalmatia.) rng. Bot. Blatter, ix. (1910) pp. 164-93.

See also Bot. Centralbl, cxvi. (1910) p. 19.
Smith, A. Lorrain — New Lichens.

[A list of British species new to science, with diagnoses and notes.]

Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 41-4 (1 pi.).
Zahlbruckner, A. — Lichens rariores exsiccati, Dec. xiii.-xiv.
[Fortv specimens of Lichens are issued.]

Wien, 1910. See also Bot. Centralbl, cxiv. (1910) p. 650.

Mycetozoa.
(By A. Lorrain Smith.)

New Genus of Plasmodiophoraceae.f — Rene Maire and Adrien
Tison found the organism on the roots of Veronica arvensis in the
cortical tissues. The parasite is unlike all other allied forms in the
absence of any action causing hypertrophy. A uninucleate rnyxanioeba
is found in the host-cell near the tip of the root ; it becomes plurinucle-
ate, and finally breaks up into spores. It has evidently no hurtful
effect on the host-cell. The authors consider that they are dealing with
a new genus Ligniera allied to Rhizomyxa ; they found a second species
of the genus on the roots of Gallitriche stagnali.

Lister, G. — Two New Species of Mycetozoa.

[A species of Licea from Aberdeenshire, and of Hemitrichia from Japan.]

Journ. Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 61-2.
Mac bride, T. H. — A New Genus of Myxomycetes.

[Schenella simplex g. et sp. n., probably referable to Dianemeae. Collected
on a pine log in the Yosemite valley ]

Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 39-40 (1 pi.).
Rayner, J. F. — Recent Additions to the Mycetozoa of the New Forest.

Hampshire Field Club, Reprint (1910) 1 p.

* Lancashire Naturalist, iii. (1910) pp. 192-4 (1 pi.)
t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 206-8.

244 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Schizophy ta.
Schizomycetes.

Oxidizing and Reducing Properties of Bacteria.* — W. II . Schultze
has devised tests for investigating these properties. To show reduction, he
uses a mixture of 1 p.c. solution of a-tiaphthol and paranitroso-dimethyl-
amine. This is mixed with nutrient agar, and the mixture is plated.
The medium is of a yellow colour. Now by means of a platinum loop
inoculated with a suitable organism strokes are made over the surface of
this plate, and in a few minutes blue or bluish-green lines appear.
Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus gives the reaction in one minute.

Similarly, to demonstrate oxidation, agar plates are used to which
have been added a mixture of a-naphthol and dimethyl-paraphenylen-
diamine, one part of the mixture to three of agar. If strokes from cultures
of a suitable bacterium be made on this plate, a deep-blue colour will
appear very rapidly. With Bacillus pyocyaneus a reaction is obtained
in ten seconds. B. fluoresce?) s capsulatus gives a reaction in fifteen
seconds. If the organisms which give this reaction are examined micro-
scopically, it is found that vital staining of bacterial granules has taken
place.

Chlorine Method of Water-purification. f—L. C. Walker, in a paper
read before the Association of Water Engineers, advocates the use of a
new system of purifying water by means of chlorine. This process in-
volves the automatic addition of chlorine to the water, a contact period
between water and chlorine, and lastly the total elimination of the chlorine
after it has fulfilled its functions of destroying the bacteria. After some
preliminary treatment, the water is pumped into a De-Clor filter. The
upper part of this filter serves as contact chamber for water and chlorine.
The chlorine, in the form of a weak suspension of chloride of lime, is
pumped in from a tank. After thirty minutes contact, the water passes
to the filter proper, the lower part of the structure. This is composed
of three layers, a layer of granulated carbon 20 in. thick between two
layers of specially graded silica. The carbon acts upon the free chlorine,
converting it into fixed and innocuous compounds. Bacteriological tests
show that Bacillus coli communis may be present in 1 c.cm. or even
0*1 c.cm. of river water, in 10 c.cm. or less of water after preliminary
treatment, and not present in 100 c.cm. of the water after treatment.
Chemical tests show the absence of free chlorine from the treated water.

Bacteriology of Landry's Paralysis.}: — A. Bevacqua gives an account
of the pathology and bacteriology of acute ascending paralysis. In sec-
tions of the spinal cord he found an organism, which he was subsequently
able to demonstrate also in the pons and the medulla oblongata, as well
as in the kidneys, liver, and spleen. He is of opinion that this is the
causal agent of the disease, and not a chance post-mortem infection. The
organism is a bacillus assuming at times a filamentous form, which grows
only under anaerobic conditions. On the ground of its cultural and
morphological appearance, and also of the gelatinous form of inflamma-

* Centralbl. Bakt.,lte Abt. Orig., lvi. (1910) pp. 544-51.

t English Mechanic, xcii. (1910) pp. 449-50.

j Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lvi. (1910) pp. 470-87.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 245

tory oedema found in the spinal cord, the author considers that it is
closely allied to the Bacillus tcdematis maligni and the B. phlegmonis
emphysematosa Frankel.

Bacillus Nenckii : New Agar-liquefying Organism.* — The pro-
perty of liquefying agar media has hitherto only been met with in two
types of micro-organism, viz. Bacterium betse viscosum, isolated by
K. Panek from beets, and Bacillus gelaticus Grau. W. Biernacki now
describes a small bacillus, isolated from Malaga raisins, which also
possesses this peculiarity. The organism is usually 1*25-2 /a in length,
and has a breadth of 0 • 8 /i. The shape and size vary upon different
media, coccal forms being found on acid media, whereas on potato
longer forms are met with. The bacilli lie naturally in pairs, occasion-
ally in short chains. A facultative anaerobe, non-motile, non-sporing, it
takes up the ordinary stains, but does not retain the colour with Gram's
method. On gelatin, which is not liquefied, small yellowish white
granular colonies appear. The addition of glucose renders growth more
luxuriant. Agar is liquefied. Inoculation of a deep agar stab in an her-
metically sealed test-tube results in much gas-formation, tearing up the
medium, and in rapid liquefaction. Further investigations upon the various
fermentation reactions are now being carried out. This organism has
received the name Bacterium Nenckii.

Bacteriology of Chorea.t — G. Camisa gives an account of a diplo-
streptococcus isolated from the blood of chorea patients. The number
of cases investigated was nine, of which six were found to have this
organism in their blood. Simultaneous blood examinations of healthy
persons and patients suffering from other diseases were performed as
control experiments ; in none of these cases were any organisms obtained
from the blood. The chorea patients were then treated with intravenous
injections of sublimate in small doses. This caused complete cure, and
it was found that as the cases improved the blood became free from
micro-organisms.

The organism isolated from all these cases is a small, Gram-positive
non-motile coccus, which occurs paired and in short chains. It grows
upon ordinary media, not liquefying gelatin, forming small punctate
colonies upon agar. A few animal inoculations gave negative results.
A series of agglutination experiments were made with serum obtained
from healthy persons, chorea patients, and patients suffering from infec-
tious diseases. Control experiments with Streptococcus pyogenes were
performed. It was found that with sernm from chorea patients agglu-
tination was obtained in somewhat higher dilutions than with serum
from others, although two typhoid sera give positive results in higher
dilutions than any of the chorea patients. As the cases improved, this
reaction became less marked.

Virulence of Pneumococcus and Streptococcus."}: — E. L. Lo Monaco
has made a study of the action of various immune sera upon these
organisms by inoculation of cultures grown in media containing serum

* Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xxix. (1911) pp. 166-9.

t Tom. cit.,pp. 99-107. J Tom. cit., pp. 103-48.

246 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

into animals, and observation of the lethal dose. He finds that the
pneumococcus grows as well in the presence of immune sera, active or
inactivated, as in normal serum, the organisms are agglutinated, so that
the broth remains almost clear. Grown in broth containing immune
serum, the pneumococcus rapidly loses its virulence. This loss does not
appear to be proportional to the immunising power of the serum.
Subcultures from a pneumococcus, thus deprived of virulence, act also
avirulent. The immune bodies have no catalytic action, but appear to
cause paralysis of those vital processes of the organism which render it
virulent. Immune bodies from sera of such different animals as the
rabbit and the ass, appear in relation to the pneumococcus to be indis-
tinguishable. The streptococcus does not lose its virulence in the
presence of immune sera, but otherwise its behaviour is similar to that
of the pneumococcus.

The active principles of anti-pneumococcic and anti-streptococcic sera
lose their individuality after contact with these organisms. The
bacteriotropic function of these sera consists probably in a lesser degree
of an antitoxic action and in a greater degree in an action upon the
bacteria, which inhibits the formation of those toxic substances upon
which the pathogenicity depends. The organism, thus reduced to the
state of an ordinary saprophyte, is taken up by a phagocyte and
destroyed.

Mouse Epizootic due to a Coliform Bacillus.* — G. Sangiorgi
describes a spontaneous epizootic among the white mice at the Hygienic
Institute of Turin, which killed 20 p.c. of these animals. The principal
symptoms were subnormal temperature, distressed breathing, great weak-
ness of the hind legs, profuse diarrhoea, and emaciation. The autopsy
revealed patches of necrosis on the surface of the liver, enlargement of
the spleen, and marked pallor of the kidneys. From spleen and heart-
blood an organism was obtained, which corresponded culturally and
morphologically with Bacillus coli communis in every point but one, viz.
that it did not clot milk before 7 or 8 days at 37°, and no clotting
occurred at room-temperature. Rats and mice fed with cultures died,
the latter in 5 to 6 days, the former in 8 to 11 days. Cats suffered
from profuse diarrhoea as long as the administration continued, but did
not usually succumb. Intraperitoneal inoculations killed mice, rats,
rabbits, and guinea-pigs very quickly.

Characters of Cholera and Cholera-like Organisms.f — This study
has been carried out by A. J. McLaughlin and E. R. Whitmore with a
view to settling some points concerning certain vibrios encountered in the
Philippine Islands. The first point was whether any cholera-like vibrios
might agglutinate in a low dilution of a specific anti-cholera serum and
thus lead to error. The second point was whether cholera vibrios lose
their morphological character or agglutinability under any circumstances,
but especially in mixed cultures sent on a long journey for diagnosis.
Every vibrio examined by the authors which agglutinated in a 1 : 200

* Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lvii. (1910) pp. 57-9.
t Philippine Journ. Sc:.,v. B., pp. 403-32.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 247

dilution of a specific anti-cholera serum was found to be a true cholera
vibrio, whereas no other vibrios agglutinated in a weaker dilution than
1 : 10. Four cholera vibrios did not agglutinate in certain sera in
higher dilution than 1 : 200, and three of these, as it happened, had
been travelling for seven days in mixed cultures.

The third point was whether El Tor vibrios were to be found in the
Philippines. For this purpose Buffer's haernolytic test was used. Ruffer
found that El Tor vibrios had the power of lysing suspensions of red
corpuscles, and that cholera vibrios had not this property. The authors
found that none of their agglutinating strains were haernolytic, and so
report that they have not discovered El Tor vibrios in these islands.

In settlement of the fourth point, they found that none of the
cholera-like strains which did not agglutinate with a specific serum
could be made to acquire such agglutinability.

Fifthly, they found Dieudonne's medium satisfactory as a means of
isolating cholera vibrios from the stools, but it could not be used for
differentiating cholera-like vibrios from true vibrios.

Lastly, they performed a few experiments in order to find whether
the hog might be a cholera carrier. The results were negative.

Bacterial Disease of Potato-plant.* — G. H. Pethybridge and P. A.
Murphy give an account of a disease occurring among potatoes in Ireland,
from which a specific organism has been isolated. The most obvious
features of the disease consist in discoloration and drying of the foliage,
browning of the principal vascular bundles of the stem, decay of the
underground part of the stalk, and rotting of the tubers. An organism
was isolated, which was inoculated into healthy plants, and thus shown
capable of reproducing the disease. It is a multiflagellate, peritrichous-
bacillus, liquefying gelatin, practically non-chromogenic, and evidently
allied to, but not identical with, certain other organisms which have
been described in other countries as causing a similar disease in potatoes.
The name Bacillus melanogenes has been suggested. Preventive measures-
should aim at the destruction of diseased plants, the exclusion of affected
tubers from the pits, and the procuring of tubers for seed purposes from
crops in which the disease has not appeared.

* Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., xxix. (1911) pp. 1-37.

^■+-<^-«-

243 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.*
(1) Stands.

Winkel's Stand No. If — This stand (fig. 81) has been specially
designed for photomicrographic work and visual observations demanding
the greatest precision.

It has rack-and-pinion, coarse- and new form of fine-adjustment,
one division of the drum of which represents a vertical movement of
0"002 mm., centring rotating mechanical stage, the lateral mechanism
of which can be removed ; the rotation can also be clamped by means
of a milled head on the left-hand side of the instrument ; iris-
diaphragm mounted beneath the stage ; substage illuminator No. 1,
body-tube 6 cm. in diameter, thus permitting the use of the low-
power micro-luminars without cutting down the field, after removing
the draw-tube, which is of the usual standard gauge graduated to
millimetres.

The whole is mounted on a heavy horseshoe foot with hinged up-
right-hand clamp ; the instrument can thus be set at any convenient
inclination from vertical to horizontal ; the fitting carrying the plane
and concave mirror can be removed when the instrument is required for
use in the latter position.

Winkel's Travelling Microscope.:}: — This instrument (fig. 32) which
is of medium size, can, by hinging stage and foot, be fitted into a case
11| x 8 X 3J in., thus rendering it much more portable than our
laboratory models of similar size.

It has rack-and-pinion, coarse- and micrometer screw fine-adjust-
ment, square stage fitted with iris-diaphragm, substage illuminating
apparatus, with screw focusing adjustment, graduated draw-tube, double
nose-piece, and joint for inclination.

The method of packing will be obvious from the illustration. Before
rotating the stage to pack the instrument, the mirror, which slides in a
groove, must be lowered, and on again setting up the instrument care
must be taken to see that the stage is brought right over to the stop

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands ; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives : (3)
Illuminating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation; (6) Miscellaneous.

t R. Winkel, Gottingen Catalogue, 1911, pp. 22-3 (1 fig.).

* Tom. cit., p. 45 (1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

249

Fig. 31.

250

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

provided, thus assuming a truly horizontal position before clamping,
otherwise the optic axis will not be perpendicular to it.

Fig. 32.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

251

Winkel's Dissecting Microscope.* — This instrument (fig. 33) gives
greater working surface than most dissecting Microscopes. As will be
seen from the illustration, it has rack-and-pinion focusing adjustment
and also a rack-and-pinion movement for adjusting the optical system
in a horizontal plane, which, together with a rotary movement in the

Fig. 33.

same plane, permits of its use over any desired portion of the stage.
The arm carrying the optical system is slotted to receive either the
Porro erector, which can be used with ordinary objectives and eye-
pieces, or a ring to carry single lenses, both of which are provided,
together with silvered and opal reflectors for illuminating transparent
objects, and a plate with black and white surfaces — shown in the illustra-
tion swung aside — as a contrast background for opaque objects.

* B. Winkel, Gottingen Catalogue, 1911, p. 50.

252

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives.

Edinger's Pointer-Double-Ocular.* — In spite of the advantages (if
the pointer-ocular, L. Edinger has long felt that an eye-piece which
would allow of simultaneous observation by two persons, and which would
at the same time preserve the principle of the pointer, was a great deside-
ratum. The applicability of such an auxiliary to teaching purposes
needs no demonstration. The apparatus shown in fig. 84 has been made
by the Leitz firm to the designs of C. Metz, and is found to answer its
purpose completely. The name Pointer-double-ocular (Zeigerdoppel-
ocular) has been given to it. Between the collective-lens and the eye-
lens of an ordinary ocular and exactly over the ocular diaphragm a
double prism, i. ii., is inserted. Prism i. is an isosceles prism of angles
35°, 35°, 110°. Prism ii. is right-angled, with angles 35°, 55° and 90°.
The prisms are placed so that their larger sides (i.e. those opposite 110°
and 90°) are in juxtaposition, and in such a manner that they are
separated by an exceedingly thin layer of air. At this air-space, inclined
at 35° to the optic axis, a partial reflexion of the light-beam takes place.

Fig. 34.

About two-thirds of the beam passes on and about one-third is reflected.
The image formed in the main optic axis is therefore somewhat brighter
than that formed by reflexion. The images formed are of equal value,
because in both the full aperture of the objective is utilized. The axis
of the reflected image forms with the axis of the Microscope an angle
of 70°. Lateral observation would be quite possible if an eye-lens, the
same as for the vertical observation, were applied at a suitable distance.
But this would bring the lateral observer too near to the tube and to
the first observer. Therefore a lens combination is applied somewhat
similar to a terrestrial ocular. The tube of this telescope has a down-
wards inclination which imparts some difficulty to its use until the
observer's head has found the right position. But the Leitz firm also
deliver the apparatus with an upwards-inclined tube, and for this purpose
prism iii. is introduced. This, however, has the effect of weakening the
light, and the author prefers the first method. Adjustment is made at
the vertical eye-lens, and this is simultaneously effected through the bent
tube at the second eye -lens. If the second observer's eyes are not normal

* Zeitschr. wise. Mikrosk., xxvii.(1910);pp. 336-8 (1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

253

he must correct them by spectacles. The two images are then identical
and the pointer appears in each. The slight difference in brightness is
not found to be a detriment. The author has, after a year's experience,
found the instrument a very valuable help in his demonstrations.

Boegehold, H. — Eine neue Konstruktion von Korrektionslinsen.
[Chiefly relates to telescopes ]

Zeit.f. Instrumcntenkunde, xxx. (1910) pp. 302-7 (1 fig.).

(3! Illuminating- and other Apparatus.

New Method for Microscopical Metallography.* — E. Sommerfeldt
describes J. Konigsberger's apparatus and method. If natural light be
allowed to fall by means of a vertical illuminator on an isotropic surface
the reflected light does not exhibit polarization.
But if the reflexion occurs at an anisotropic surface
a separation of the light takes place into two com-
ponents vibrating perpendicularly to each other, and
these components are of unequal intensity, so that
a partial polarization follows. Two arrangements
serve f or realizing this polarizing effect on well-polished
surfaces. The simpler arrangement — not serviceable,
however, for quantitative measurements — consists of
a Klein quartz plate, in combination with a nicol
prism (polarizer), placed in front of the vertical illu-
minator ; the analyser (inner nicol) remaining in the
usual place. The Klein plate gives violet effects with
isotropic substances ; but with anisotropic substances
it furnishes a coloured field which changes during
rotation (red and blue; with strong anisotropy, bright
yellow or green). The second arrangement involves
the use of a Savart's double plate, which, observed
with a telescope adjusted for infinity, must reveal
between crossed nicols two deep black quite sharp
bands, surrounded by coloured bands. If unpolarized
light is reflected (i.e. if the preparation is isotropic)
no bauds appear. The more complete the polariza-
tion of the reflected light the clearer appear the bands, and therefore
the deeper the anisotropy of the preparation. By means of a contrast
plate, prepared out of two smoke-quartz "plates cut perpendicularly to
the axis, the bands become intensified. The preparation must be very
accurately set perpendicular to the incident light rays, and this is effected
by the adjusting apparatus J seen in fig. 35.

Application of Mercury Light to Microscopical Works.f — A. Kohler
describes a Hageh Microscope lamp which the Zeiss firm have made for
him and which he has found very useful in his microscopical work. The
light source is furnished by one of Messrs. Schott's Hageh lamps, in
which the mercury column has a special length of 20 cm. A special

* MetaUurgie, vi. (1909) pp. 605-7 (1 pi. and 1 fig.) . See also Zentralbl. f.Min.,
Geol. u. Palaont., 1908, p. 565 ; 1909, p. 245; and Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii.
(1910) p. 445(1 fig.).

t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 329-35 (1 fig.).

April 19th, 1911 s

Fig. 35.

254

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

resistance coil is supplied for use with currents of 65 to 220 volfcs-
A current strength of about 3*5 amperes is necessary. As seen in

fig. 36, the tube is placed in an inclined position in a 1 l-shaped

holder and secured with springs. The lower end of the lamp where the
mercury accumulates is connected with the negative pole of the circuit.
The lamp is shielded from the observer by an iron shade, so as to shut
off the superfluous light ; the shade has an opening opposite the middle
of the lamp for transmitting the light, which then impinges upon the
flask filled with a solution and acting as an engraver's globe. The holder
of this flask (see figure) also acts as a handle for lifting the whole appa-
ratus. The effect of the entire arrangement is to throw an image of the
illuminating mercury column on the iris diaphragm of the Microscope,
and hence on to the plane of the object. The fluid in the flask not only

Fig. 36.

provides light for the lenses but also acts as a light filter. For clear
green light of wave-length 546 /a/a (this is the brightest line of the mer-
cury vapour lamp) the filter should have the following composition :—
distilled water, 300 c.cm. ; picric acid, 0'4 grin. ; copper sulphate,
3-5 grm. ; didymium nitrate, 15*0 grm. If this didymium nitrate
be omitted no light is transmitted beyond the line A = 546 /a/a ; the
yellow lines A = 576 /a/a and 579 /a/a also disappear. These two yellow
lines are, however, obtained with great brightness with the following
solution : — distilled water, 300 c.cm. ; potassium bichromate, 15 grm. ;
copper sulphate, 3*5 grm. ; sulphuric acid, 1 c.cm. The blue and violet
lines A = 436 /a/a, 407 /a/a and 405 /a/a are obtained with : — distilled water,
225 c.cm. ; copper sulphate, 1 grm. ; ammonium hydrate, 75 c.cm. With
subjective observation only the line 436 /a/a is effective, as it is much
more intensive than the two violet lines ; the light in this case is, there-
fore, practically monochromatic. Flasks can be filled with the respective
solutions and secured with well paraffined corks ; they are then always
available for obtaining light of their corresponding colours. For the

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

255

finest subjective observation the green light is usually the most useful.
Its wave-length almost exactly corresponds with that for which the eye
has the greatest adaptability, so that the finest details are seen in the
clearest way. So great is the brightness that it suffices for the strongest
magnifications. The yellow and the blue light filters will be more useful
for studying changes in resolving power.

The lamp is very simple in management, and can be used for photo-
micrography.

New Microscope Lamp. — This lamp (fig. 37) was exhibited and
described at the December Meeting.* By the kindness of the designer,

Fig. 37.

C. E. Heath, we are able to add some important particulars and give an
illustration. Although not designed for critical work, he suggests that
the lamp might be used for that purpose if a ground glass slip were
inserted in the lamp, the surface of the ground glass being utilized as
the source of light and focused upon the object by the sub-stage
condenser. As it is difficult to focus the ground glass, a slip having
lines ruled on the ground surface is used for focusing, and when the
lines are sharply focused, a slip of ground glass without lines is sub-
stituted for it, care being taken that it faces the same way round as the
ruled slip, so that the ground surfaces will be in the same plane, and
therefore exactly in focus. The ground glass is kept from shifting by
the pressure of the curved metal sheet seen in both figures.

See this Journal, 1911, pp. 128-9.

S 2

256

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Microspectroscope.* — This raicrospectroscope (fig. 38), made by
Adam Hilger, can be substituted for the eye-piece in any form of
Microscope. It has an adjustable slit, comparison prism, and clip for

test-tube to hold comparison liquid, condensing
lens, collimating lens, and compound prism. A
photographic scale and screen adjustment for
setting the same to the fiducial reading, and
mirror for illuminating the scale from any source
of light, are also supplied.

Plug Micrometer.f — H. Hippie describes a
plug micrometer (fig. 39), having a hardened
bushing, H, with three holes to receive the balls
K. The bushing H is inserted in the barrel B.
The holes in the barrel are bored rather small,
so that at most only one-third of the diameter
of the ball can project. The barrel B is gradu-
ated longitudinally, and threaded inside to re-
ceive the pin S. This pin is provided at one
end with the cone C, and is fixed in the sleeve
M, which is graduated. By turning the sleeve M,
the pin will screw forward or backward, its cone
C forcing the balls K outward or letting them
come inward. In measuring a hole the pin S is
screwed out so far that the balls do not project,
through the barrel B, therefore resting on the smallest diameter of the cone
C. Then the instrument is inserted in the hole that is to be measured, and
the pin S is screwed in so far that the ballstouch the side of the holes.

Fig. 38.

„ Pill s T^^3-(7

G H

Fig. 39.

The diameter is then quickly read on the scale. The accuracy of the
instrument is dependent on (1) the thread, (2) the cone, and (3) the
balls. The smallest instrument is made for a hole from 6-7 mm.
(0*25 in.) in diameter. It is therefore necessary to have a number of
instruments in order to measure holes of greatly varying diameters.

Gaidukov, N. — Ilunkelfeld-beleuchtung und Ultra-mikroskopie in der Biologie
and in der Medizin.

Jena: Gustav Fischer (]910) 83 pp. (5 pis. and 13 figs.).

Lowe, F. — Ein tragbares Interferometer fur Flussigkeiten und Gase.

Zeit. f. Instrumentenkunde, xxx. (1910) pp. 321-9 (7 figs.).

* Adam Hilger, Ltd., Catalogue, 1911, Section J, p. 3, fig. 4.

t American Machinist, through Eng. Mechanic, xcii. (1911) p. 581.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

257

(4) Photomicrography.

Photographing1 Fossils by Reflected Light.* — L. D. Burling
describes a method of photographing fossils by reflected light. The
scheme seems to yield excellent results, and may be generally valuable in
photographic reproduction. The back of an ordinary enlarging and
reducing camera was pivoted so that it would revolve about a vertical
line passing through the centre of the ground glass plate, and the rack
upon which the specimens are mounted was made to revolve about a
vertical line passing through the centre of the specimen. Suitable
scales were so attached to both the specimen rack and the back of the
camera, that each might be clamped at any desired angle. In practice
the specimen is placed in position, the lens is removed, and the relative
position of the light and the angular position of the specimen are
manipulated to secure the most favourable illumination. (Experience
has shown that variations in the intensity of light are necessary to bring

Fig. 40.

out the particular features of different specimens, and that tbi> degree of
illumination required can best be determined by direct observation
through the camera rather than upon the ground glass.)

In order to eliminate distortion, the back of the camera is then
revolved through an angle corresponding to that indicated by the scale
on the specimen rack, the lens is replaced, and the specimen is focused
and photographed. The best results have been obtained with lenses
having a focal length of at least 6 or 7 inches, or long enough to eliminate
any errors arising in the adjustment of the camera.

Fig. 40 is a plan of the camera showing its arrangement. The light
used is a screened arc lamp, suspended by a pulley from the ceiling ; the
camera stand is movable, and the specimen rack and the back of the
camera are each free to move through an arc of 60°. The box-like
projection into which the bellows may be compressed has been cut away,
to increase the angle through which the back of the camera may be
revolved.

* Amer. Journ. Sci., xxxi. (1911) pp. 99-100 (1 fig.).

258 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(6) Miscellaneous.

Microscopic Structure of Uric Acid Calculi.* — 8. G. Shattock
divides uric acid calculi into two classes, the cancellous and the compart,
according as there are or are not lacunae to be found in the sections.
Tn the course of his remarks, the author compares the crystals forming
calculi with uric acid sediments in urine, and discusses the nature of
the nucleus of uric acid calculi. He finds that the nucleus is almost
invariably of the same chemical composition as the rest of the stone,
but that its structure varies, consisting of loosely arranged crystals
resembling " crystalline rubble " in the cancellous variety, while in the
compact one it is a dense mass of crystals arranged in radiating columns,
and often starting from a small collection of cuboidal crystals. He
points out that the essential condition for the formation of crystals
must be supersaturation of the urine with uric acid. The paper is
copiously illustrated.

Coloured Plates of Microscopical Preparations. f— Y. Sobotta
describes a two-colour autotype process, by means of which the majority
of histological preparations may be faithfully reproduced at a compara-
tively small cost. In preparing a plate of a section stained with
kasmatoxylin and eosin, the stains may be represented by violet and red.
A drawing is made first of all of the hematoxylin stained portion alone.
This is executed in black with Chinese ink. By means of the autotype
process, prints of this are prepared in black, in violet, and in a pale
shadowy ground colour. Upon this last print, a drawing is made of the
eosin-staining portion alone. This is also done in black. From this
are prepared a plate in black and a plate in red. Then a combined print
of the violet and the red plate will give a tint two-colour reproduction
of the preparation.

Microchemical Demonstration of Guanin.} — A. de Giacomo de-
scribes a method, by which the presence of guanin may be demonstrated
in microscopical sections of birds' kidneys. This process depends upon
Burian's reaction. The reagents employed must be carefully prepared
at the time of use. The section, fixed in alcohol and adherent to a cover-
slip, is washed in distilled water and dried. Two drops of a solution of
diazobenzolsulphonic acid are added. After half a minute, a further
quantity of the reagent is added, and then a small quantity of a sodium
hydrate solution. The reagents may also be used in the reverse order.
Yellowish-red points appear. The section may be mounted on a slide in
the excess of sodium hydrate, or in glycerin. In a section so treated, an
orange-red colour shows the presence of guanin in many of the cells of
the tubular epithelium and in the connective tissue. The guanin-free
portions have a pale yellow colour. Particulars of the stock solutions
required and the methods of preparation are given.

Histological Changes in Infantile Paralysis. §— In the spinal cord
of an old standing case of infantile paralysis, V. Jonnesco has found a

* Proc. Roy. Soc. Med., Pathol. Section iv. (1911) pp. 110-46 (26 figs.).

+ Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 209-13.

% Tom. cit.,pp. 257-9.

§ C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 109-10.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 259

remarkable formation. The case was of the monoplegic type. In the
cells of the cervical ganglia, on the side corresponding to the affected
limb, there appeared rosette bodies staining deeply with iron-hsema-
toxylin. They are stained blue by the methods of Giemsa and Mallory.
A low magnification shows six or eight axially-disposed filaments sur-
rounded by a hyaline zone. High magnification shows that these fila-
ments consist of a large number of small spherical granules linked
together. The formation is placed in the ganglion cell, usually at
some distance from the nucleus. The author considers various possible
explanations, and regards as most probable the hypothesis that this is a
crystalloid formation in the ganglion cell, which only becomes visible on
account of the chromatolysis of the chromatophil substance of Nissl.

Quekett Microscopical Club. — At the 471st Ordinary Meeting, held
■on February 28, 1910, which was also the 45th Annual General Meeting,
the President, Professor E. A. Minchin, M.A., F.Z.S., delivered an address
on " Some Problems of Evolution in the Simplest Forms of Life." The
principal points dealt with were popular classifications of living things,
scientific methods to the same end, and the need in the latter case to
draw distinctions and institute comparisons undreamt of by the ordinary
person. The Microscope, relatively a thing of yesterday, is not yet
adequate for our needs, but is growing and daily becoming more effi-
cient. Different types of metabolism were observed in the Protista. In
some cases a Protist organism can be at one time a plant, at another an
animal. In Protista there are two well-marked types. One, more
primitive and in which chromatin occurs only in scattered granules,
"chrornidia." The second, higher and leading on to the ordinary plants
and animals, and in which the greater part of the chromatin is aggre-
gated into a nucleus, and which, further, has a distinct protoplasmic
zone— the cytoplasm. The first is the bacterial type, the second the
cellular type. The existence in all forms of higher life of sex and sex-
phenomena was then briefly dealt with. Sex-phenomena are also
observed in the cellular type of Protista. In the visible world of living
things it is found universally that organisms are divisible more or less
easily into groups which are termed " species." Some species are sharply
marked off from others, some are less so, but no one now considers a
species as a fixed and immutable entity. The fact, however, remains
that the tendency of living things to separate themselves into species
more or less distinct, is one of the most constant and universal peculiari-
ties of the organic world. In so far as the Protista are concerned it was
thought that syngamy was the bond which unites the individuals com-
prising a species and separates them from those of another, though closely
allied, species. Without syngamy a species would tend to break up into
distinct races or strains, either under the influence of environment or by
innate variations. Syngamy tends to reduce the individual differences
to a common level, by mixing together the characters of divergent strains.
It therefore follows that there are no true species amongst organisms of
the bacterial grade, if it be true that syngamy does not occur amongst
them, and the so-called species of bacteria are to be regarded as mere
strains capable of modification in any direction by environmental in-
fluences. From these considerations it was thought to be evident that

2<)0 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the passage from the bacterial to the cellular grade was perhaps the
most important advance in the evolution of living beings, as the cellular
type was the starting point for the evolution, not only of the Protozoa,
but through them of the whole visible everyday world of animals and
plants, in all of which the cell is the unit of structure. Further, with
the cellular type were initiated, in the President's opinion, two of the
most universal and characteristic peculiarities of living beings, namely,
the phenomena of sex and the tendency to form species.

B. Technique.*
(1) Collectinj Objects, including Culture Processes.

Selective Action of Dieudonne's Medium.f — E. Glaser and Y. Hachla
have carried out an investigation upon Dieudonne's alkaline blood-agar
medium, devised for the isolation of cholera vibrios, with a view to
ascertaining whether the growth of certain organisms other than cholera
was permitted. They found that Bacillus faecal is alkaligenes, an organism
often present in normal faeces, grew on this medium as luxuriantly as
Vibrio cholerse, and suggested that a ready means is thus afforded for
the separation of B. typhosus and B.fsecalis alkaligenes. B.fluorescens
and B. fluoresceins non liquefaciens both grow well upon this medium at
22° C, but show little growth at 37° C. Proteus vulgaris grows well at
both room temperature and blood heat, but Proteus piscicidas versicolor,
while showing good growth at room temperature, is restrained at a
temperature of 37° C.

New Method for Studying Movements of Bacteria.:}: — M. Liacho-
wetzky gives the following account of his method : Melted agar is poured
into a small Petri dish, which must be perfectly horizontal. Upon the
surface of the solidified agar is laid a sterile Swedish filter-paper, marked
with three intersecting millimetre scales. The paper is moistened by
the condensation-water of the medium. Should this prove insufficient,
a small quantity of saline may be added. By means of a special
platinum needle, the paper and agar are inoculated, from a culture of the
organism to be investigated, at the point of intersection of the milli-
metre scales. Small pieces of sterile silk, from 2-5 mm. in length, are
placed in various positions upon the scales. The plate is then placed in
the incubator, the horizontal position being exactly maintained. After
a suitable time, according to the nature of the investigation, and of the
organism that is being studied, these silk threads are transferred to
broth tubes, which are then incubated for one to three days. If the
organisms, starting from the point of intersection, travel far enough to
reach one of these threads, they will infect it, so that subsequent cultiva-
tion from this thread will yield a growth of the organism. Thus, if the
broth tubes, inoculated with the nearer threads, give a growth, while

* This division contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses; (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes ;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including Slides, preservative fluids, etc. ;
(6) Miscellaneous.

t Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt., Orig., lvii. (1911) pp. 371-84.

$ Tcm. cit., pp. 180-91.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 261

cultivations from those more remote remain sterile, an accurate expression
for the powers of locomotion of the organism may be obtained.

The author gives tables showing marked differences between the
figures obtained in observations of non-motile and motile organisms.
lie shows that, by his method, the influence of abnormal chemical and
physical conditions upon the motility of organisms may be demonstrated.
As contrasted with procedures which depend upon continuous observa-
tions and eye-pieces bearing scales, he claims that his plan is suited for
observations extending over several hours, and further, that by it, error
consequent upon variations in the energy of individual organisms are
obviated. Iu conclusion, it is stated that, by this means, pure cultures
of organisms, differing in their powers of movement, may readily be
obtained.

Methods of Investigating Oriental Sore.* — C. Nicolle and
L. Manceaux give an account of their researches upon some cases of this
condition occurring at Gafsa. The experiments were carried out at the
Pasteur Institute at Tunis. Leishmania tropica, the causal organism,
was isolated by puncture of some of these sores in the non-ulcerated stage,
by means of a syringe needle or a capillary glass pipette. The material
was inoculated into Novy-MacNeal tubes of the classical formula. At
other times a simplified formula was used. These cultures were put into
an incubator at 19°-23°, improvised from two biscuit boxes. After seven
days, they were transported across the desert to the laboratory.

In order to obtain a pure culture it was necessary to paint the
surface of the lesion with several applications of tincture of iodine.
The organism grows at 20°-22°, rather more rapidly than the parasite of
Kala-Azar. On the fourth day, flagellate forms appear, which begin at
once to divide. There is luxuriant growth on the eighth to the tenth
day. Soon the rosettes appear, and form masses just visible to the
naked eye. Then the infusoria tend more and more to agglutination
and immobilization, and the culture is dead at the end of two months. It
was found possible, however, to keep the organisms alive by repeated
subculturing. Cultivations were made on other media, but no important
results were obtained. The microscopical appearances of this parasite
differ in no way from that of Kala-Azar.

Rearing Sterile Flies.t — Eng. Wollman, in a contribution to the
knowledge of the part played by microbes in the alimentary canal, gives
the technique he adopted in rearing flies under sterile conditions. The
eggs of Calliphora vomitoria sterilized in from 1-4 per 1000 sublimate,
were placed on damped tufts of glass-wool, and then spread out by means
of brushes. The glass-wool was then rolled up cylinder-wise, and the ends
turned in. The whole was then tied up and placed in a tube, wherein it
was exposed to alternate currents of sublimate and sterile water. The
glass-wool was next placed in a Petri's capsule, the ligature was removed,
and the mass unrolled. This done, the eggs were transferred one by
one to tubes containing sterilized meat. Three kinds of controls were
used. The cultivation tubes were tested from time to time, and those
that were contaminated at once rejected.

* Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxiv. (1910) pp. 673-80.
t Op. cit. xxv. (1911) pp. 79-88 (2 figs.).

202 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Bacillus of Acne.*— II. F. Hartwell and B. C. Sfcreeter find that
Bacillus acnes is essentially an anaerobe. Under anaerobic conditions it
grows well in all common media, but best on glycerin, agar. Slants
inoculated by smearing pus on the surface show fair-sized colonies in
from three to five days ; the colonies are raised, greyish white, opaque.
The bacillus is Gram-positive, and often has an irregular or beaded
appearance ; it is moderately wide ; its length is variable, especially in
cultures, where it frequently shows branching forms. It does not form
spores.

(2) [Preparing- Objects.

Demonstrating the Structure of the Yeast-celLf — H. Wager
states that the best fixatives are Gram's iodine solution, Flemming's
weak chromic acid solution, and Perenyi's fluid. The best stain is
Heidenhain's iron-hsrnatoxylin. The structure of the yeast-cell is best
determined by means of sections, and the method is perfectly simple.
A quantity of yeast is put into a tube about half an inch in diameter ;
it is then fixed and stained, and allowed to settle at the bottom of the
tube ; the supernatant liquid is decanted, and is replaced by up-graded
alcohols and finally by turpentine or xylol. After a short time the
xylol or turpentine is poured off ; soft paraffin wax is added, keeping it
melted at as low a temperature as possible until the yeast is impregnated
with it. Then wax of a higher temperature is added, and finally the tube
is cooled as quickly as possible. It is then broken gently, and the
paraffin block with the contained yeast-cells removed. The block is then
cut up, and the sections mounted in balsam for microscopical examina-
tion. In this way three sections of a single cell may be obtained.

Investigating Nature of Supposed Algal Coals.J— E. C. Jeffrey
worked with material softened by various treatments. In the case of
cannel, or cannelard coal, the material was immersed in 70 p.c. alcohol
saturated with caustic alkali, and incubated at 60°-70° C. The alkali
was then removed by frequent treatment with hot alcohol, after which
it was generally found expedient to treat for two or three weeks with
strongest hydrofluoric acid. After washing out the acid, the material
was embedded in the usual way in celloidin. Sections of about 5 micra
thick were made. In the more resistant cannels, especially bogheads
and oilshales, it was necessary to treat with aqua regia, and in some cases
to replace the hydrochloric by hydrofluoric acid. It was sometimes
advantageous to return the material to alkaline alcohol after treatment
with acids ; in such cases all the acid must be removed before the pieces
are placed in alkaline alcohol, as otherwise they suffer disastrous swelling.
After the sections are cut they are dehydrated in a mixture of alcohol
and chloroform, in order to avoid softening the celloidin matrix ; after
■clearing in benzol or xylol they are mounted in balsam. In a few
instances it was found advantageous to mount in glycerin jelly. In
dealing with serial sections, the best procedure is to lay the sections on a
slide as they come off the knife, and then dehydrate and clear them in
their order.

* Publications Massachusetts Gen. Hosp., iii. (1910) pp. 200-4(4 figs.).

t Journ. Inst. Brewing, xvii. (1911) pp. 2-22 (3 figs.).

X Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts, and Sci., xlvi. (1910) pp. 273-90 (5 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 263

C3) Cutting:, including- Embedding- and Microtomes.

Injection Preparations of Petromyzon.* — B. Mozejko gives an
account of his methods. The living fish is divided in two by a cut
through the region of the abdomen. Most of the blood escapes through
the cut ends of the large vessels, and gentle pressure is used to expel as
much blood as possible. Cannula; with slightly enlarged extremities
are introduced into the aorta, and into one of the great veins. A broad
ligature is then placed near the cut surface, in order to keep the cannulas
in position. The ligature must not be employed in such a way as to
damage the tissues. By an injection into the aorta, so that the
material is forced through to the veins, a single-coloured injection of
the vascular system is effected. A two-colour preparation may be
obtained by first injecting the veins. When the material so injected
has solidified, the arteries may be injected. By means of another
modification, a three-colour injection, distinguishing arteries, veins, and
sinuses, may be obtained. After injection is complete, the preparations
are placed, without removing the ligatures, into a fixing fluid which
contains formalin. After fixation the ligatures are removed, and the
preparations preserved. Portions may be embedded in celloidin, and
serial sections cut. In previous communications, | particulars as to the
materials suitable for injection have been given.

The author has combined these injections with the clearing methods
recommended by Lundvall, by means of which semi-transparent pre-
parations are obtained. In the application of this latter process to
Petromyzon Jtuviatilis, it is necessary to bleach the highly-resistant pig-
ment by means of prolonged application of free chlorine. This precludes
the use of carmine or ultramarine in the injection material. Faint
colours such as chrome- veil ow are the most suitable.

Demonstrating Presence of Starch in a Leaf.! — 0. H. Latter
exposes the leaf to sunlight for some hours, then boils in water for a few
moments, and afterwards dissolves out the chlorophyll with methylated
spirit. The alcohol is removed by means of water, and then the leaf is
treated with iodine solution. The leaf is next immersed in benzol,
which dissolves out the iodine from all parts except the blue starch-
iodine compound. Hence the blue colour shows up plainly, being no
longer masked by the yellow-browns of the cellulose and protoplasm.

Method of obtaining Sections of Urinary Calculi. § — S. G. Shattock,
in his communication on the microscopic structure of uric acid calculi,
gives the following account of the technique adopted.

The method consists in rubbing away half of the calculus on a file
or on glass-paper, the final part of the grinding being carried out on a
wet hone. In some calculi the nucleus is so differentiated as to readily
allow of identification. This is, however, not always the case ; one has
to guard against the fallacy of mistaking the section of a zone around
the proper nucleus for the nucleus itself, since both will present an

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 248-56.

t See this Journal, 1910, p. 257 ; Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvi. (1909) pp.
353-77, and 382 ; 1910, pp. 542-7. t Knowledge, xxxiv. (1911) p. 59.

§ Proc. Roy. Soc. Med., Pathol. Section, iv. (1911. pp. 111-12. t

2G4 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

equally circular figure. This difficulty is usually surmountable by
examining the wet surface of the grinding at intervals with a hand lens.
When doubt still exists the only sure method is to grind the calculus in
t wo planes, at right angles to each other, so as to obtain a sector con-
sisting of a fourth of the whole ; the centre can then be determined by
its exposure in both planes.

After the process is completed, the ground surface is carefully washed
and cleared of debris by allowing water to drop from a height through a
cone of filter paper ; the half of the calculus so prepared is excluded
from dust and allowed to dry. It is, in the next place, cemented to a
slide with solid Canada balsam, a fragment of which is heated on the
slide over a spirit lamp until it melts; and in order to diminish the
brittleness of the balsam, a small quantity of the ordinary mounting
solution in xylol is first placed on the slide, the materials being mixed
after heating by rocking the latter to and fro. The half of the calculus
is now placed on the slide, the central portion of which is already covered
with the melted balsam. A copious effervescence takes place from the
under side of the calculus, owing to the expansion of the air in its
interstices. The slide must now be turned over, so that the ground
surface can be viewed, the calculus being moved about and gently pressed
until no trace of air remains between the specimen and the glass. As
soon as the balsam has set, the material is ground away from the convex
side until the chief bulk has been removed. The last and most delicate
part of the process is the grinding of the section to such a degree of
thinness as to allow the light to pass through it. This is done, first on
fine glass-paper, but completed on the hone with water. When the
requisite thinness is reached, the surface is washed by allowing water to
drop on to it through a cone of filter paper ; lastly, when the section is
dry, a xylol solution of balsam is placed on it and the cover-glass applied.

Caffyn, C. H. — A Rock-grinding Machine for Amateurs.

[Describes how to adapt a sewing-machine for making petrological sections
and the method of preparation of a rock section.]

Knowledge, xxxiv. (1911) pp. 10-11 (3 figs.) ; pp. 74-5.

(4) Staining and Injecting:.

Staining Blood-films.* — J. Sabrazes uses an aqueous solution
of medicinal methylen-blue in dilutions of from 1 : ;J>00 to 1 : 1000,
customarily 1 : 500. Only the supernatant fluid is employed, and this
is removed by means of a capillary pipette. The film must be well dried
and fixed with osmic acid paper. The films may be counterstained with
eosin. The eosin solution is made by mixing 5 c.cm. of a saturated
solution of eosin (francaise pure) in 95 p.c. alcohol with 10 c.cm. of 95 p.c.
alcohol.

Demonstrating the Presence of Mitochondria in Cartilage-cells.f
J. Renaut removes cartilage from the long bones of foetal sheep as soon

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 247-8.
t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 536-8 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 265

as possible after the ewe's death. The slice is placed in saline (0*8 p.c.)
on a slide ; at a short distance therefrom is made a mixture of artificial
serum and of saturated aqueous solution of methyl-violet 5 B. The
mixture is then run on to the cartilage. As soon as the slice of cartilage
becomes violet, a cover-glass is imposed and ringed round with paraffin.
In this way a preparation is obtained wherein the mitochondria are
stained deep violet. When a cell is non-vacuolated the mitochondria are
massed around the nucleus ; if vacuolated they are scattered and isolated.

New and Quick Method for Staining Spirochetes in Smear
Preparations.* — A. A. W. Ghoreyeb uses the following solutions :
(1) 1 p.c. osmic acid ; (2) Liq. plumbi subacetatis diluted one hundred
times with distilled water ; must be fresbly prepared ; (3) 10 p.c.
aqueous solution of sodium sulphide. The smear is stained as follows :
(1) cover with osmic acid solution for 30 seconds ; (2) wash in water ;
(3) cover with lead subacetate for 10 seconds ; (4) wash in water ; (5)
cover with sodium sulphide solution for 10 seconds ; (6) wash in water.
This process is gone through three times. Following this, the osmic
acid solution is applied for thirty seconds, and then the specimen is
washed in water, dried, and mounted in balsam. After the application
of each solution the washing with water must be thorough. The
illustrations are both £ood and instructive.

&v

(5) Mounting:, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc.

New Mounting Medium for Botanical Preparations. f — S. Balint
has devised a medium for mounting botanical specimens which has a
refractivity equal to that of glycerin, or with glycerin-gelatin. It does
not crumple up sections of soft vegetable tissue, and finally becomes
so hard that ringing is unnecessary. It is composed of gum arabic
40 grm., loaf-sugar 60 grm., distilled water ad lib., glycerin 10 c.cm.,
acetate of potash 10 grm., lacto-phenol 10 c.cm., glacial acetic acid
10 c.cm. The gum arabic must be finely powdered, and a solution made
which will filter easily ; the loaf-sugar must be melted to prevent its
tendency to crystallization ; a thin solution is then made which is mixed
with the filtered gum-solution, the acetate of potash is then added, and
the mixture is then thickened in a water-bath. When the required
inspissation is attained, the glycerin, lacto-phenol and glacial acetic acid
are added. After the ingredients are thoroughly mixed, the medium is
distributed into flasks, and these are immersed up to the neck in warm
water and kept warm in a water-bath for some hours and then allowed
to cool gradually. This procedure is necessary in order to get rid of air-
bubbles, and it should be repeated on the following day. Finally, to
every 200 c cm. of the medium 6 drops of lacto-phenol and 10 drops of
acetic acid must be added. The medium must be preserved in stoppered
bottles. One of the recommendations of this new mounting medium is

* Publications Massachusetts Gen. Hosp., iii. (1910) pp. 367-9 (3 figs.),
t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., ixvii. (1910) pp. 245-7.

LY.ii

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

that it facilitates microscopical examination of unstained preparations
even when quite thick, and in this respect is superior to glycerin or
glycerin-gelatin.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Immobilizing Flies for Microscopic Investigation.*— In his investi-
gation of Diptera, particularly of the genus Drosophila, A. Delcourt has
made use of some simple devices (fig. 41), by which the activities of the
animals may be arrested. For rapid identification he uses a glass tube
flattened towards the middle (1, 2). The alteration in the lumen is
shown by the diagrams of cross-sections. A small fly, sucked into this,
tube, becomes immobilized in the narrow part, and may then be examined
under the binocular microscope. When identified, it may be blown out
into the appropriate receptacle. The second piece of apparatus, which

oj .0 o

Fig. 41.

permits of a more detailed examination, consists of four glass plates (3).
exactly alike, the apposition of which (4) forms a long, narrow, hollow
pyramid. The fly is placed within this pyramid, at a level determined
by its size, and while thus fixed may be examined from each side under
a fairly high power. The plates are simply placed in juxtaposition, and
secured by an elastic band. This is readily effected by the use of a metal
matrix, which is withdrawn when the band is placed in position.

Anthrax Sterilization Process applied to Hides in Dry State.f —
This process, devised by A. Seymour-Jones, is reported to be both very
effective and innocuous to the hides. It consists in immersing the hides
for 24 hours in a mixture of formic acid (1 p.c of 90 p.c. strength), and

* C.E. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp.;97-8.

t Pamphlet printed for the author by Bradbury, Agnew and Co., Ltd. (Dec.
1910) 31 pp.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

2G7

1 part mercuric chloride to every 5000 parts of water. On removal the
hides are drained, and then transferred to a pit containing a saturated
solution of common salt for about one hour, after which they are
drained. For goat- and sheep-skins the quantity of formic- acid is less.

Self-regulating Siphon.* — W. H. Tait describes a self-regulating
siphon which is simple in construction and very efficient in use. The
U-tube bent out of ordinary ^-in. quill tubing, as shown in the
illustration (fig. 42), is narrowed at the point A, and the small piece of
glass rod C is drawn out so as to fit this constriction. The bulb B,
sealed on to the top of this rod,
floats on the surface of the water. The
U-tube must be so fixed, that when
the water is at the desired level the rod
just fits into A, and so closes the exit.
If the level of the water in the vessel
D rises at all, the bulb is raised and
the excess of water flows out through
the siphon. A useful apparatus for
laboratories when it is required to keep
a continuous flow of water through a
vessel in which the level must remain
constant.

Filtering by Aid of the Centri-
fuge.f — R. Sabouraud and A. Vernes
state that the difficulties of filtration
are easily overcome by means of a cen-
trifuge. They place porcelain bougie
filters in the cups or buckets of a cen-
trifuge ; presumably within some glass
vessel, as the authors remark that the
apparatus is easily sterilizable. The
bougies will stand 0000 revolutions a
minute without breaking, and filtra-
tion is effected in a few minutes. For
filtering organic fluids, a collodion sac
is easily made by coating the internal
surface of the bougie with collodion.

Polishing Metallic Preparations for Microscopical Examination.^
In the final polishing of delicate metallic specimens for microscopic
examination, it has been found impossible entirely to obliterate the
scratches without destroying crystalline structure. If, however, the
following methods are adopted, there will be few, if any, objectionable
marks visible under a power of less than 800 to 1000 diameters, and all
the perfection of structure will be preserved. After polishing with

• Nature, lxxxvi. (1911) p. 45 (1 fig.).

t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 620-1.

j Communicated by John Mastin, F.R.M.S.

Fig. 42.

268 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

various grades of emery, etc., with selvyt or other method, friction
should be given with the ball of the thumb, following which rice-starch,
previously ground to a very fine powder, should be rubbed on with
medical (but not medicated) wool — such as the pure wool sold by the
chemist. Where this is not practicable, a piece of soft razor-strop
leather, or a strip of selvyt glued on a piece of smooth hard wood, may
be employed, using the starch plentifully. The starch must be used so
plentifully that it does not get heated. The writer has used both pro-
cesses for a long time past in metallography with the greatest success.

Metallography, etc.

Aluminium-silver Alloys.* — W. Broniewski has determined the elec-
trical conductivity, the temperature-coefficient of electrical resistance,
the thermo-electric properties, and the E.M.F. of solution, of a series of
aluminium-silver alloys. The curves expressing the results indicate the
existence of the compounds Al.2Ag3 and A!Ag3. Confirmation was
obtained by microscopical examination of the alloys.

Quenching of Bronzes.f — The softening effect of quenching cast-
bronze from a suitable temperature appears to be due to the suppression
of the decomposition of a solid solution. L. Grenet points out that if
this explanation holds, subsequent re-heating of such softened material
should cause an increase in hardness by bringing about the decomposition
of the solid solution. Two tin-copper alloys, containing respectively
15 and 20 p.c. tin, were softened by quenching from 750° C, and, as
anticipated, the hardness was restored by subsequent re-heating at tem-
peratures 100° to 400° C.

Bearing Metals. + — A. Hague discusses the qualities desirable in
bearing metals, and classifies the alloys used for this purpose as : (1) rigid
bronzes ; (2) plastic white metals ; (3) plastic bronzes. The plastic white
metals consist of hard grains embedded in a plastic matrix. In the third
class, plasticity is imparted to the bronzes by the addition of 15 to 30 p.c.
of lead.*^ The lead does not appear to alloy with the bronze, but to be
held mechanically ; it exists in the bearing metal as veins of lead. The
composition and properties of numerous anti-friction alloys are given,
with much information on the best methods of employing them.

Behaviour of Copper towards Gases.§ — A. Sieverts and "W. Krumb-
haar have investigated the solubility, in solid and in molten copper, of
oxygen, nitrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, hydrogen, and
sulphur dioxide. The behaviour of hydrogen points to the existence
of a solid solution of hydrogen in copper.

* Comptcs Rendus, cl. (1910) pp. 1754-7 (4 figs.).

t Op. cit., cli. (1910) pp. 870-1.

X Engineering, lxxxix. (1910) pp. 826-9.

§ Zeitschr. Phys. Chem., lxxiv. (1910) pp. 277-307 (4 fige.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 269

Ternary Systems.* — E. Janecke deals with the theory of ternary
systems, in which the equilibrium diagram shows a ternary transition-
point. The lead-cadmium-mereury system is considered as an example,
and photomicrographs are given to illustrate the author's conclusions.

Cementation by Gases.j — A. Portevin opens a general review of
this subject, by pointing out that in industrial cementation the part
played by solid carbon is probably quite insignificant, the cementation
being effected almost wholly by gaseous carbon compounds. The study
of the laws governing cementation by gases should therefore precede
the investigation of the much more complex mechanism of cementation
by solid materials. Gaseous cementation agents may all be regarded as
following one of the three types : (1) carbon monoxide ; (2) cyanogen ;
(3) the hydrocarbons. Each one of these, in presence of iron at a high
temperature, is capable of decomposing into carbon and another gas.
The laws governing the phenomena are the same in each case, and the
author proceeds to work out in some detail the theory of the system
CO - C02 - C, as a representative case.

A full account is then given of the extensive experimental work on
cementation by gases carried out by Giolitti and his pupils.J

Cementation of Steel. § — F. Giolitti and F. Carnevali record the
results of experiments on the cementation of two steels, containing
respectively 0'18 p.c. and 0*94 p.c. carbon, at different temperatures,
the cementation media being ethylene, methane, carbon-monoxide, and
other gases.

F. Giolitti and G. Tavanti || describe a method of cementation by
means of a mixture of carbon-monoxide and dioxide in equilibrium with
carbon at the cementation temperature. By this method the sharp
transition from a region of high-carbon content to a region of low-carbon
content is avoided.

Cementation in a Vacuum. % — F. Weyl summarizes previous work
on cementation, and describes the experiments by which he has demon-
strated the possibility of the cementation of iron by pure carbon. Small
cubes of iron, prepared in an electric furnace, and containing 0 ' 09 p.c.
carbon, 0 ■ 3 p.c. manganese, were heated in a high vacuum at tempera-
tures between 750° C. and 1050° C, in contact with one of the following
varieties of carbon : sugar charcoal, Ceylon graphite, kish, and diamond
powder. These materials had been previously carefully purified and
heated for some time in a vacuum. Microscopical examination of the
specimens showed that cementation had occurred when a sufficiently
high temperature had been attained, but the smallness of the amount of

* Zeitschr. Phys. Chem., lxxiii. (1910) pp. 328-42 (24 figs.).
t Rev. Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 859-85 (23 figs.).
% See this Journal, 1909, 1910, 1911.

§ Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino, xlv. (1910) pp. 376-87, through Joura. Chem. Soc,
xcviii. (1910) p. 616.

ij Tom. cit., pp. 539-63, through Journ. Chem. Soc, xcviii. (1910) pp. 780-1.
1 Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 440-56 (39 figs.).

April 19th, 1911 T

270 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

carbon absorbed by the iron indicates that industrial cementation proceeds
chiefly through the agency of gases.

Influence of Segregation on the Strength of Mild Steel.* — F. Wiist
and H. L. Felser have studied, in a very thorough manner, the segrega-
tion in basic Bessemer and open hearth steel containing about 0*07 p.c.
carbon. Large and small ingots of each description of steel, weighing
respectively 1000 kg. and 250 kg., were sectioned longitudinally,
polished, and etched with copper-ammonium chloride ; drillings for
analysis were taken from sixty positions in each. Sulphur and phos-
phorus were found to segregate most ; carbon, manganese, and copper to
a lesser degree. While in the segregated regions the static tensile tests
were little worse than those from the lower unsegregated parts, the
impact bending tests gave much inferior results.

Gases in Commercial Steel and Iron.j— P. Goerens describes the
method he has used for the extraction of occluded gas from steel. Fine
drillings are heated in a vacuum at 900°-950° C. The results of numerous
analyses of the gases extracted from basic Bessemer, open-heartb, and
other steels, at different stages in their manufacture, are given.

Grain-size in Iron. J — By heating pieces of steel wire containing
0 • 07 p.c. carbon at different temperatures for various lengths of time,
A Joisten has confirmed Stead's statement that the greatest increase
of grain-size in low-carbon steel takes place in the neighbourhood of
700° C. Curves are given showing the relation of dimensions of grain to
length of time of heating at 400°, 500°, 600°, 700°, and 850° C.

Magnetic Properties of the Modifications of Iron.§ — S. Hilpert
questions the separate existence of /?-iron, and also suggests that y-iron
may be magnetic at ordinary temperatures. The change in magnetic
properties with temperature is continuous, and the thermal phenomena
which are regarded as evidence of the existence of allotropic modifica-
tions of iron may be due to changes in specific heat accompanying loss of
magnetic properties.

Iron-nickel Meteorite. || — W. Guertler combats the view taken by
Fraenkel and Tammann,1f that the iron-nickel alloy of which meteorites
are composed is metastable. The peculiar structure of meteorites is
held to be due to the extremely slow cooling they have undergone.

Historical Note on Recalescence.** — W. F. Barrett gives an account
of the discovery of the recalescence points in iron and steel. The
observation by G. Gore, in 1868, of the momentary elongation of an
iron wire during cooling from bright incandescence, led the author to
investigate the subject, and in 1873 the afterglow or recalescence was
discovered.

• Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 363-84 (59 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 384-95 (2 figs.). t Tom. cit., pp. 456-8 (14 figs.)

§ Zeitschr. Electrochem., xvi. (1910) pp. 390-4, through Journ. Soc. Chem.
Jnd., xxix. (1910) p. 760.

|l Zeitschr. Phys. Chem., lxxiv. (1910) pp. 428-42 (3 figs.),
t See this Journal, 1909, p. 785.
** Nature, lxxxv. (1910) pp. 235-6.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY", ETC. 271

Theory of Hardening Carbon Steels.* — C. A. Edwards examines the
available data relating to the hardening of carbon steels by quenching,
in the light of the phase rule and the theory of alloys, and concludes
that the hardening is due to the retention of the solid solution of carbide
of iron in y-iron. The theory that the hardening is the result of the
retention of /3-iron is held to be untenable. The suggestion is made
that there is no constitutional difference between the so-called austenite
and martensite. and that the apparent difference is due to the twinning
of the y solid solution crystals, caused by the mechanical pressure
absorbed in suppressing the decomposition of this solution into a-iron
and carbide of iron. The author's views met with both support and
criticism in the discussion.

Hardening of Carbon and Low-tungsten Tool-steels. f — S. N.
Brayshaw has submitted two varieties of steel to a lengthy series of
experiments, the results of which are chiefly of workshop interest. Both
steels contained about 1*15 p.c. carbon; one contained 0-5 p.c.
tungsten, the other no tungsten. Heating and cooling curves, with
different rates of change of temperature and different maximum tempera-
tures, were taken ; the effect of each variable is considered. The range
of temperature within which the best results could be obtained in
hardening, was determined. The effect upon physical properties of
variations in temperature of the steel before quenching and of the quench-
ing medium was investigated, as well as the effect of length of time of
heating.

Slag in Steel.} — Matweieff, continuing on the lines of his previous
work,§ has investigated the rnetallographical characteristics of the
phosphates of calcium, magnesium, manganese, and iron, and calcium
ferrite. All these bodies may occur in basic Bessemer steel as inter-
mixed slag. The compounds, either singly, or mixed with each other
or with oxides, were enclosed in small hollow cylinders of steel closed
with s'eel plugs ; the cylinders were then heated to 1300° C. After
cooling, transverse sections were cut and polished, so that both the
envelope and the juxtaposed contained matter could be examined.
Calcium phosphate did not melt, and had no action on the steel enve-
lope. The other three phosphates were reduced by the iron, and some
phosphide of iron was formed. As a result of this work, three new
etching reagents are recommended : 1. A 2 p.c. solution of ammonium
oxalate, which slowly attacks cementite in the cold, giving a red colora-
tion after 30 minutes. 2. A boiling solution of neutral sodium picrate,
which colours phosphide of iron after 30 minutes, leaving cementite,
ferrite, the solid solution of phosphide of iron in iron, and pearlite,
unaffected. 3. A 2 p.c. solution of ammonium carbonate ; in specimens
heated in this reagent for 20 minutes on a water-bath, the slags formed
in dephosphorizing are disintegrated, while the metallic surface is

* Joum. Iron and Steel Inst , lxxxii. (1910) pp. 147-96 (17 figs.),
t Proc. Inst. Mech. Eng. (1910) 2, pp. 517-710 (62 figs.).
t Rev. Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 848-58 (27 figs.).
§ See this Journal, 1910, p. 794.

272 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

unaffected. A scheme for the metallographies! identification of the
coin pounds occurring in slags found in iron and steel, is outlined, the
appropriate reagents being given in tabular form.

Action of Mercury on Steel at High Pressures.* — In the course
of an investigation of the thermal properties of mercury and water
under high pressure, P. W. Bridgman found that hollow cylinders of
hardened steel burst at very much lower than the natural bursting
pressure when the fluid exerting the pressure was mercury. That this
rupture was due to the amalgamation of the steel was evident from the
appearance of the fracture. It was found that the fractured surface of
steel broken under mercury was amalgamated. Any exposure to air
before contact with mercury completely prevents amalgamation. The
explanation advanced to explain the bursting of the pressure cylinders,
involves the initial amalgamation of the steel permitted by its state of
elastic strain. The rapidity with which the amalgamation spreads is
greatly increased by the action of hydrostatic pressure.

Influence of Silicon on Cast Iron.f — A. Hague and T. Turner have
studied seventeen alloys containing 2*3 to 2*9 p.c. total carbon, the
silicon content increasing from 0* 03 to 4 ■ 83 p.c. The molten alloy was
cast in a mould giving a bar of circular section, and simultaneous
observations were made of time, temperature, and change in length.
Sections of the bars were examined microscopically, and mechanical tests
were made. The pearlite arrest-point was gradually raised from
700° to 800° C. by the silicon additions, which also raised to a smaller
extent the temperature of final solidification, from 1130° to 1160° C. The
temperature of commencing solidification appears to be lowered by
increasing silicon.

Manganese in Cast Iron.} — H. I. Coe has measured the changes in
length which occur in cast bars of iron-manganese-carbon alloys during
cooling from the molten state. Simultaneously with these measure-
ments, time-temperature cooling curves were taken. Hardness measure-
ments were made on the cast bars, which were also microscopically
examined. The forty-eight alloys studied are divided into two series,
the first being prepared from pure white cast iron, the second from grey
cast iron containing 2*45 p.c. silicon. Manganese increased from 0 to
nearly 40 p.c. In the white iron series the temperature of commencing
solidification was lowered by manganese, but the eutectic freezing point
was not affected up to 20 p.c. manganese. An alloy containing 4 p.c.
carbon, 26 to 28 p.c. manganese, 68 p.c. iron, appeared to be a pure
eutectic, with its freezing point 15° C. below that of the eutectic of the
pure iron-carbon system. The Arl temperature was lowered by about
20° C. for each 1 p.c. of manganese ; this arrest gradually diminished
in intensity, disappearing at about 10 p.c. manganese. In the grey iron

* Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sciences, xlvi. (1911) pp. 325-41 (9 figs.).
t Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxii. (1910) pp. 72-104 (25 figs.).
X Tom. cit., pp. 105-46 (25 figs.).

ZOOLOGV AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 273

series the results obtained were somewhat different. The manganese
had no appreciable effect on the relative proportions of graphitic and
combined carbon until 3 per cent, was present. With higher percentages
the combined carbon increased at the expense of the graphitic ; some
graphitic carbon remained, however, with 17 '5 p.c. manganese.

Fixing Objects to Stage.* — 0. "Wawrziniok describes a clamp for
holding specimens. The clamp is screwed to the microscope stage, has
a levelling arrangement for adjusting the level of the polished surface,
and has been found useful for holding large objects such as ancient gun-
barrels.

Photomicrographic Apparatus.! — F. Robin describes a number of
modifications which he has introduced into the Le Chatelier apparatus.
The objective is pointed downwards, and below it on the stage is
placed the section with its polished face uppermost. The stage has
movements vertically, and in two directions horizontally ; its level may
also be adjusted through large angles, and it is capable of carrying
large and heavy pieces of metal. The apparatus rests on felt, which is
more effective than rubber in deadening vibrations. The source of
light is an arc, with carbons set at right angles ; the positive carbon
remains in the optical axis, and the crater does not alter its position.
All examination is carried out upon the image projected on the ground
glass screen of the camera. The focusing movements, as well as the
other stage movements, are controlled by means of four horizontal rods,
the free ends of which are below the focusing screen. Oblique illu-
mination may be secured by moving the condenser and using a small
mirror ; transparent objects may be viewed by transmitted light. The
author points out that examination by oblique light supplements most
usefully the usual examination with vertical illumination ; examples
illustrated with photomicrographs are given. The application of micro-
chemical analysis in metallography is discussed ; methods and examples
are given. A minute quantity of a solution, obtained by placing a drop
of an acid or other reagent on a clean surface of the substance to be
examined, is treated with reagents on a glass slip ; the products of the
reactions are observed microscopically.

Sulphurous Acid as an Etching Medium. J — S. Hilpert and E.
Colver-Glauert, in searching for an etching reagent having a purely
chemical action on iron and steel, have found that sulphurous acid may
be used with highly satisfactory results instead of the numerous diverse
etching media proposed for developing the structure of hardened steel.
The action of these reagents, many of which are complex mixtures of
organic bodies, is little understood. A useful strength is a 3 to 4 p.c.
solution in water of a saturated solution of sulphur dioxide in water, free
from sulphuric acid. Etching is complete in from 7 seconds to 1 minute.

* Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 312-13 (4 figs.),
t Rev. Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 903-20 (23 figs.).

$ Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxii. (1910) pp. 54-64 (9 figs.) See also Zeitschr.
Anorg. Chem., lxviii. (1910) pp. 63-8.

274 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

An alcoholic solution may be used, but is slower in action. The action
of the reagent appears to be essentially the formation of films of sulphide
of iron, and as different constituents are acted upon with varying rapidity,
they become coated with sulphide films of different thickness. Photo-
micrographs of steel, in which the authors claim to have developed the
structure better with their new reagent than with any other, are given.
Sulphurous acid is not suitable for steels composed of ferrite and pearlite,
but is an excellent reagent for all other steels and pig irons.

Fatigue of Metals.* — J. H. Smith describes a method for deter-
mining a series of yield ranges by experiment on a single specimen.
Numerous results obtained on different classes of steels, lead him to con-
clude that if a material be subjected to stress alternations of high period-
icity and of fixed range, and compressive or tensile mean stress be gradually
applied, a yielding condition will be found at a definite value of the applied
mean stress.

Measurement of Hardness.f— G. Baume describes a dynamic method
of applying the Brinell test. The apparatus consists of a weighted rod,
suitably guided, holding at its lower end a hardened steel ball. The
impression made by a known weight of rod and height of fall on a
polished specimen is measured.

Viscous Flow in Metals. J — E. N. da C. Andrade has devised a
method of loading a wire in tension in such a manner that the stress
remains constant however the wire may contract laterally on stretching.
By loading wires of lead, a lead-tin alloy, and copper in this way, the
author has demonstrated that, beyond the elastic limit, the extension
after some time becomes proportional to the time, or the flow becomes
viscous in character. The flow is purely viscous right up to breaking.

Electrical Conductivity of Molten Alloys.§ — K. Bornemann and
P. Miiller have determined the electrical conductivity, at different tem-
peratures, of numerous alloys belonging to the binary systems sodium-
potassium, tin-lead, mercury-sodium, mercury-potassium, and others. It
is shown that indications of the presence of compounds in molten alloys,
and of the degree of dissociation of such compounds, may be obtained
from concentration-conductivity curves. The temperature at which the
separation of a homogeneous liquid alloy into two phases takes place is
characterized by a change in direction of the conductivity-temperature
curve, and may accordingly be determined by measurements of con-
ductivity at different temperatures.

Temperature Co-efficients of Electrical Resistance. || — A. A. Somer-
ville gives curves showing the variation of resistance of nickel, tungsten,
molybdenum, and an alloy named nichrome, in the range of temperature
0°-1060° C.

* Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxii. (1910) pp. 246-318 (37 figs.).

t Archives des Sciences Physiques et ISaturelles (Geneva) xxx. (1910) pp.
418-20.

X Proc. Roy. Soc, Series A, lxxxiv. (1910) pp. 1-12 (7 figs.). ]

§ Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 396-402 (5 figs.).

|| Physical Review, xxx. (1910) pp. 532^i, through Science Abstracts, Sect. A,
xiii. (1910) pp. 448-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 275

Microscopical Examination of Blast-furnace Slag.* — H. Passow
indicates the great value of microscopical examination of blast-furnace
slag for determining its suitability for making Portland cement. Vitreous
slag is required for this purpose, and while chemical analysis fails to dis-
tinguish between vitreous and non-vitreous slags, microscopical examina-
tion of crushed particles gives the required information.

Ducelliez, F.— Cobalt-silver Alloys.

Procis-verbaux des stances de la SociMe des Sciences
physiques et naturelles de Bordeaux, 1909-10,

pp. 46-8.

,, ,, Cobalt-zinc Alloys. Tom. cit., pp. 102-11 (1 fig.).

Peirce, B.O. — The Resistivity of Hardened Cast-iron as a measure of its Temper
and of its Fitness for use in Permanent Magnets.

Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sciences, xlvi. (1910)

pp. 185-204 (10 figs.).

,, ,, The Magnetic Permeabilities at low Excitations of two kinds of
very pure soft Iron. Tom. cit., pp. 207-12.

Vigourocx, E. — Nickel-silver System.

Proce's-verbaux des stances de la Socicti des Sciences physiques
et naturelles de Bordeaux, 1909-10, pp. 44-5.

Vigouroux, E., & A. Bourbon — Mutual Action of Nickel and Zinc.

Tom. cit., pp. 95-102 (1 fig.).

Stahl und Eisen, xxx. (1910) pp. 989-93 (3 figs.).

27G

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

MEETING

Held on the 15th of February, 1911, at 20 Hanover Square, "W.,
H. G. Plimmer, Esq., F.R.S., Etc., President, in the Chair.

Before calling upon the Secretary to read the Minutes, the President
expressed his desire to thank the Council and Fellows of the Micro-
scopical Society for doing him the honour of electing him as their
President. The dynasty of the Presidency had been changed from
Zoology to that of Pathology, and he Avould use his best endeavours to
see that the high position of the Society should suffer no loss from the
change. It would be his very great privilege to do all that lay in his
power to advance the welfare of the Society.

The Minutes of the Meeting of January 18 were read and con-
firmed, and were signed by the President.

The List of Donations received since the last Meeting was read as
follows, and the thanks of the Societv voted to the donors : —

S. O. Mast, Light and the Behaviour of Organisms . . The Publishers.
Old Microscope by J. Simons The late Council.

In presenting the Microscope, Mr. Rousselet, Curator of instruments,
stated that it was made by J. Simons. The date of the Microscope was
about 1790 to 1800, and it bore a very close resemblance to instruments
made by George Adams about the year 1780. The body was large, and
the limb was a triangular bar hinged to a pillar with folding tripod foot.
The whole Microscope was made of brass, and was very massive. The
stage was rectangular and carried a lens below, mounted in a tube. The
Microscope would be a very useful addition to the Society's collection of
old instruments.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to Mr. Rousselet for his
description.

Mr. Lees Curties then exhibited a new dark-ground illuminator
which he had recently made for Mr. Nelson, and said that Mr. Nelson,
who in 1884 * strongly recommended the Fellows of this Society to use
a dark ground for viewing bacilli, had frequently told him that he had

* See this Journal, 1884, p. 497.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 277

always found a dark ground produced by a condenser and stop preferable
to that obtained by any paraboloid or similar apparatus. He attributed
this to the more perfect concentration of rays, that is the aplanatism of
the condenser.

A short time ago he also pointed out that there was considerable
difficulty in the employment of any of the condensers he had owing to
the different thicknesses of the glass slips now in use ; building them up
by means of slip equalizers being an intolerable nuisance ; and he asked
Mr. Curties if he would undertake to construct a new illuminator if he
worked out the formula. This Mr. Curties consented to do, and the one
exhibited that evening had just been made in strict accordance with the
formula Mr. Nelson had sent him. He supplied Mr. Nelson with the
measurements of a large number of slips as now used by mounters, and
the condenser was constructed so that it would work with those ranging
from 0*8 to 1 • 2 mm. He had tested it upon diatoms and bacteria, and
found that it gave a perfectly dark field with a Zeiss Apo. 4 mm. of
0*95 N. A. Bacilli were brightly shown with great sharpness on a
velvety dark ground, and they were sufficiently well illuminated for
deep eye-pieces to be used. It was fitted with a fixed central stop, but
if wished a slot could also be used, and this turned the apparatus into a
very oblique illuminator suitable for resolving the finest ruled bands or
diatomic striae : Amphipleura pellucida was quite easily resolved with a
TVth of N.A. 1*30. A small dot had been placed upon the front lens
for the purpose of centring the condenser to the optical axis of the
objective ; without some such plan there would be trouble in getting it
centred. It was fitted with the Society's screw, so that it would readily
fit the usual substage adapters.

The President said that the lenses did not seem to him to be
achromatic.

Mr. Curties replied that they were not, but merely two single lenses.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to Mr. Curties for his com-
mu nication .

The President then called upon Messrs. Heron-Allen and Earland
for their paper, and also referred to the microscopical preparations of
Foraminifera exhibited in the room.

Mr. Heron-Allen in his preliminary remarks said that some pott had
said that " the best of friends must part." He was now in the hard
position of one about to take a formal leave of the Fellows of the
Society prior to his embarking with Mr. Earland upon some years of
research work upon the 'Goldseeker' dredgings from the North Sea, and
it was his desire to express their joint thanks for all the favours they
had received in the past. There were several, he felt, to whom their
most heartfelt thanks were due : first of all he wished to thank the
Council for always having allowed them practically unlimited space in
the Journal for the publication of their papers ; then the Treasurer
for his liberality in the matter of printing their plates. He considered
that more than an ordinarily wide latitude had been allowed them in the
matter of illustrations ; he had often after handing in the MS. and

278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

plates of their papers, avoided the eye of the Treasurer for some time.
He had, however, always been met with a smile, and so had taken heart
of grace.

He wished to thank Mr. Herbert R. Lilley for the enormous amount
of care he had taken in making the drawings which had appeared in the
Journal, and to Mr. A. E. Smith who had made the photographs for the
lantern slides prepared by Mr. J. A. Lovegrove. Also to Mr. H. F.
Angus, who had taken charge of the exhibitions, and supplied Microscopes
and superintended the exhibitions of lantern slides. This last expression
of gratitude was really very heartfelt, for he fully realized that nothing
could be more disconcerting to a lecturer, after announcing a slide of a
particular species of Foraminifer, than to be confronted with a slide, say
of the Crystal Palace upside-down ; this, in principle, did not uncom-
monly happen to lecturers, but it had never happened at the meetings of
the Royal Microscopical Society.

He might say that the study of this branch of Rhizopod life was never
ending. He remembered many years ago he had been in the studio of the
late Lord Leighton, and he had asked him when a certain picture, then in
process of being painted, would be finished. The answer had been " No
picture worth painting was ever finished." He had over and over again
been reminded of this remark in the course of his present enquiry — it
could never be finished. Only last Saturday he and Mr. Earland had
said (without any desire to be slangy), " We will now put the lid on
this study," and there were already two shells upon a query slide to
which they could assign no place at present, and which were awaiting
determination.

He might observe that two years ago they had received from
Mr. E. Heath a couple of tubes of dredgings from the Somali coast,
containing recent Frondicularia, which they had not yet looked at ; it
would be realized from this with what heart-whole ecstasy they had
devoted themselves to the shore-sands of Selsey Bill, in which they had
now discovered no less than 399 different species. In quoting this
number he was reminded of the story of the man who said he had
killed 399 wild duck at one shot, and when he was asked why he did not
make it 400, had answered, '; Shall I imperil my immortal soul for the
sake of one miserable duck?" He might make the same answer in
regard to their 400th species — they had not found it.

They were that evening exhibiting the most striking species to be in-
cluded in a supplement of the rarer types that had been found in the sands
since they had first commenced their researches. As would be readily
understood, a great many had been found out of their proper order,
and they were now included in this supplement. There were also,
besides the Selsey Foraminifera, one or two other slides of exceptional
interest to which he would draw attention in due course. When too, the
specimens found at Selsey were etiolated or had been damaged, or were in
other respects inferior, a point had been made of showing specimens on
the screen from other localities which gave a typical representation of
the perfect species, so that the necessity of explaining what parts were
missing and what parts were imperfectly demonstrated might be avoided.

The authors called attention to the identity of the fossil Foraminifera

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 279

of the Bracklesham beds with the living species found in Australian
shore-sands. Recent specimens of Bolivina Durrandii (Millett) and Pid-
vinulina vermiculata (Brady) were shown, the only other known records
being, as regards the former, from the Malay Archipelago, and as regards
the latter, from tropical and sub-tropical seas. In addition to these,
M Molina suborbicularis and rotunda ; Textularia inconspicua x&v.jugosa ;
I'viijerina aspenda • and Sagrina dimorpha were recorded as new to
Britain. Schlumberger's hitherto unique genus and species, Linderina
brugesii, was recorded from the Eocene 'days of Selsey. Also the first
fossil records of Bulimina subteres and Discorbina polystomelloides. The
new species recorded were Pulvinulina haliotidea (H.-A. and E.) and
Nonionina quadrilocidata (H.-A. and E.). Specimens of these were
exhibited under Microscopes on the table.

On the conclusion of the lecture and demonstration the President
said that it was hardly a subject that lent itself to discussion, and as no
remarks were forthcoming on this most interesting paper, it only remained
for him to congratulate Mr. Heron- Allen and Mr. Earland on the extent
and importance and beauty of their work.

He gathered that they were giving up Selsey Bill for the North Sea,
and he hoped that they would there be equally successful in the result
of their researches. He was sure that all would wish to return a very
hearty vote of thanks for the interesting paper and for the beautiful
specimens exhibited and lantern slides shown, which had helped to render
the lecture so clear to those who, like himself, knew but little of its par-
ticular subject.

The vote of thanks was carried with acclamation.

Mr. Heron-Allen thanked the Fellows of the Society for the way in
which they had listened to him, and hoped that in years to come, when
they had to some extent completed the North Sea investigations, the
same kindly attention would be accorded them.

Owing to the late hour the paper by Mr. E. M. Nelson on " Some
New Objectives and Eye-pieces, by R. Winkel, of Gottingen," was post-
poned till the next Meeting.

The next Meeting was announced for March 15, when Dr. Ralph
Vincent would give a demonstration on the " Morphology of the
Organisms concerned in the Production of Acute Intestinal Toxasniia in
Infants," and Mr. F. W. Watson-Baker would read a paper, entitled
" Anomalies in Objective Screw Threads."

The following- Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited :—

Messrs. Heron-Allen and Earland exhibited a number of rare and in-
teresting species of Foraminifera from the Shore-sands of Selsey Bill,
Sussex.

Mr. Lees Curties : — A New Dark-ground Illuminator, made for Mr.
Nelson.

280

MEETING

Held on the 15th of March, 1911, at 20 Hanover Square, W.,
H. G. Plimmer, Esq., F.R.S., etc., President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of February 15th were read and con-
firmed, and signed by the President.

The following Donation received since the last Meeting was an-
nounced, and the thanks of the Society voted to the donor : —

From

T. H. Blakesley, Geometrical Optics. (8vo, London, 1903) .. Mr. E. M. Nelson.

Dr. Ralph Vincent, in his preliminary remarks to his demonstration
on " The Morphology of the Organisms concerned in the Production
of Acute Intestinal Toxaemia in Infants," said that he felt considerable
diffidence in giving this demonstration before the Society. But a member
of the Council had urged him to do so, and he had accordingly yielded.
Before dealing with the main subject of his demonstration, he wished to
acknowledge his great indebtedness to his friend and colleague, Mr
Robert Mond, Treasurer of the Infants Hospital. The Research
Laboratories at this Hospital had been established and maintained
entirely at Mr. Monet's expense, and when he said that practically all his
work in connexion with this particular research had been carried on in
these laboratories, his reference to Mr. Mond would be readily under-
stood.

Before showing the series of lantern-slides illustrating the various
organisms concerned in the production of acute intestinal toxaemia in
infants, he wished briefly to explain the nature of the disease so pro-
duced, referring those who desired a fuller and more detailed account
to his address given on the subject before the Glasgow Obstetrical
and Gynaecological Society in November of last year.* Those who had
had experience in dealing with the diseases of infants were only
too familiar with the high rate of mortality occurring in hot summer
weather among babies. In the year 1904 (the extreme example in re-
cent years of a hot and dry summer) there were many towns where in
the three mouths, July, August, and September, nearly one half of the
babies died. Of 1000 infants living on June 1, nearly 500 had died by
October 1. If the breast-fed infants were eliminated, and the enquiry
was confined to bottle-fed babies, the mortality was found to be appalling.
The difficulties in grappling with the problems of this disease arose
largely from the fact that it was officially described as "epidemic

* On Acute Intestinal Toxaemia in Infants : an Experimental Investigation of
the Etiology and Pathology of Epidemic or Summer Diarrhoea. London, 1911.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 281

diarrhoea," and erroneously regarded as an infectious disease. It was
not an infectious disease, and it could not be spread by contagion. It
had been ascertained that no breast-fed infant, even amid the most
insanitary surroundings, ever contracted the disease. At the Infants
Hospital no attempt at isolation was made in the case of an infant
suffering from the disease, nor had any infant contracted the disease
there, the simple reason for this being that all the babies were fed on
raw milk. The organisms producing the disease could not live in raw
milk — nor in any acid medium. They were the ordinary organisms of
putrefaction, capable of living on any protein matter, and by their
metabolic processes speedily produced powerful poisons — the alkaloids.
The history of the disease in infancy would be found to be that the
baby had been fed on cooked milk, so that the lactic organisms had been
destroyed. The typical raw milk organism — the Streptococcus lacticus —
was extremely delicate. Growing in pure culture in its most favourable
medium, it will die in the course of about a fortnight. The Bacilli/*
acidi lactici behaves in the same manner. The B. bulgaricus would live
for a little longer — about a month.

Dr. Vincent then showed photographs of the various organisms
stained, unstained, and taken during life. The organisms included the
B. subtilis, the B. mesentericus, " No. 7," the B. mesenteric us vulgatus,
and the B. proteus vulgaris. Photographs were also shown of the
Streptococcus lacticus, the Bacillus acidi lactici, and the B. bulgaricus.

Dr. Vincent then proceeded with the main subject of his lecture.

Dr. E. J. Spitta said he would like to congratulate the lecturer on
his beautiful photomicrographs, let alone his extremely interesting lec-
ture. The essence of success in taking this type of photograph was in
correctly suiting your screen to the dye employed as a stain for the
bacteria. If too contrasting a screen were employed, then too hard
results were obtained, whilst with too little contrast in your filter flat
and dirty negatives resulted. He did not know if the lecturer happened
to employ the screens made by Dr. Mees — they were sold by Wratten
and Wainwright, of Croydon — for with these any class of monochromatic
light could be obtained from one end of the spectrum to the other, and
any depth of contrast also. If he did not happen to know of these
filters he felt sure he would be pleased with their use.

The only point at which he found himself at variance with Dr. Vincent
was in the advantage gained by the employment of the extremely high
magnifications he both showed and recommended. Directly magnifica-
tion, when using an objective of N.A. 1*40, exceeded 1000 diameters
there was necessarily a gradual falling off of defining power, owing to the
presence of diffraction phenomena, the circle of confusion slowly becoming
greater than r^ in., and the more the magnification was increased the
greater the fuzziness obtained. The reason of this was not far to seek,
but as he had dwelt upon that subject at some length elsewhere he would
not say more about it. If, however, the primary magnification did not
render the image sufficiently large for seeing with comfort — that is to
say, without the use of a magnifying glass — then it was very profitable
to enlarge the negative, for by so doing the details, although not in-
creased in number or refinement, would be rendered more easily seen

282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

and hence the better appreciated, as indeed obtained in every-day prac-
tice when using the projecting lantern (see footnote).

He could not conclude, however, without once more expressing his
congratulation to the lecturer, not only upon his photographs, but quite
as much if not more upon his neat and explicit way of rendering a some-
what recondite subject both interesting and intelligible, he felt sure, to
those present, many of whom were not doctors as they were themselves.

Mr. Shillington Scales said he had found Dr. Vincent's paper of
exceeding interest, especially as it had been somewhat off the beaten
track of microscopic work such as they had at their usual meetings.
There were many points of clinical interest which had struck him, a
discussion on which, however, did not come within the scope of the
Microscopical Society.

Without reflecting in any way on the beautiful photographs which
they had seen, he wished to endorse in every way Dr. Spitta's remarks
on high magnification. In his experience high power magnification
most emphatically proved to be a loss and not a gain to all photographs.
He did not consider that there was any use for a magnification of 8000
diameters in skilled microscopy, and it was with some surprise he had
heard a murmur of applause follow the exhibition of a photograph taken
with this enlargement. Every objective possessed a certain resolving
power, and needed a certain magnification to make this resolution visible,
but beyond this no advantage was to be gained from mere empty
magnification, but rather loss. He thought in this statement he would
be supported by every photomicrograph er present.

Dr. Vincent thanked the members of the Microscopical Society for
the kind manner in which they had received his demonstration. He
quite agreed that magnifications at more than 2000 diameters were seldom
required. In some exceptional cases a magnification of 4000 diameters

Footnote by Dr. Spitta added after the Lecture.

The diameter of the disk of confusion is quite easily obtained ; only
two things are necessary : (1) to find the resolution, and (2) to multiply
such by the magnification. Take the first. This is obtained by Abbe's
law, " Multiply twice the number of waves to the inch of the light
employed by the numerical aperture of the objective." As, for example,
say the light used has 47,500 w'aves to the inch ; twice that is 95,000 ;
and so if the N.A. be 1'40, the resolution is 133,000, which means that
any two lines xWirao in- apart can theoretically be separated if oblique
illumination be employed. Presuming our 1000 diameter magnification,
the circle of confusion is obviously T^ggg0, equal to T^ in. less than
the conventional limit. Make the magnification 2000, and immediately
the circle of confusion rises to double the size, and so on. Raise the
magnification (of course, this presumes the N.A. is not added to), and the
fuzziness becomes intolerable. Careful enlargement of the primary
negative, however, with equally careful development, will be of service
because, although the image is enlarged, the diffraction effects remain the
same ; but no further details are added, although perhaps one may be
able to see more on account of their increase of size.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 283

was indicated. His photographs of the Bacillus proteus vulgaris showed
clearly that the tangle of flagella at a certain point was not resolved till
this magnification had been reached. He had expressly stated, before
showing the photographs at 1S000 and 24,000 diameters, that they were
of no use as photographs. He quite agreed that they showed nothing
that the lower magnification did not show. He would go further and
say that they certainly did not show so much. But these photographs
had been taken from an entirely different point of view. In his opinion,
the most practical test that could be applied to an objective was photo-
micrography at extremely high magnifications. The indifferent objective
would break down under this test altogether. According to the degree
of success obtained the objectives could be appraised in regard to their
accuracy. From this point of view, the testing of the objective, he
considered photography at high magnifications of great value. He
could not accept Dr. Spitta's suggestion in regard to enlargement. That,
in his opinion, was not photomicrography.

The President said he desired to add his congratulations to those of
Dr. Spitta and Mr. Scales to Dr. Vincent for his valuable paper. Knowing,
as he did, the other side of the .work for which the specimens were made,
he could say that the beautiful preparations shown to them formed the
least important part of Dr. Vincent's work. He returned him a most
hearty vote of thanks for his excellent paper, which was carried with
acclamation.

Mr. F. W. Watson Baker read a paper on " Anomalies in Objective
Screw Threads."

Mr. Shillington Scales said they were greatly indebted to Mr. Watson
Baker for his paper. The Microscopical Society not infrequently had
been blamed in connexion with its gauges, he thought in the main
undeservedly, and at the present time certain points dealt with by
Mr. Watson Baker were under discussion. But Mr. Baker had shown
how exceedingly erratic various makes of objective screw-threads were,
and his paper would prove a most valuable object-lesson to those workers
who, in using various makes of objectives, found themselves held up by
a screw thread which would not fit the Microscope. Mr. Baker's
suggestions deserved most careful consideration.

The President thanked Mr. Baker, in the name of the Society, for
his paper, and hoped that some practical use would be made of his
valuable suggestions.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to Mr. Baker for his paper.

Mr. Shillington Scales read a paper by Mr. E. M. Nelson on " An
Objective Mount with an Iris."

Mr. Shillington Scales said that it was difficult to take in all the
subject matter of a paper read rapidly, but he would like to call atten-
tion to two points which had struck him. Mr. Nelson had apparently
suggested the measuring of objects by shutting down the numerical
aperture until the object became invisible. To him this seemed a
startling proposition. Though an objective of a given aperture was
theoretically capable of dividing a certain number of lines, this was not
the same thing as seeing more widely separated objects of minute size.

284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

and even if we had a means of telling how far the aperture of the objec-
tive had been reduced by stopping down, there would be a considerable
margin of error in endeavouring to determine the size of objects by such
means.

The other point which had struck him was in connexion with
Mr. Nelson's remarks on the dark-ground illuminator : " Owing to
defects in some dark-ground illuminators it is not possible to obtain a
dark field when the objective has a wide angle."

He considered that this statement might be criticized. The whole
principle of the dark-ground illuminator was that the total aperture of
the illuminator should exceed that of the objective, a central cone being
blocked out, so that with annular illumination of wide angle from the
illuminator refracted rays from the object would alone enter the objective.

A second paper by Mr. E. M. Nelson on " Some New Objectives and
Eye-pieces by R. Winkel of Gottingen," as well as another by the same
author on " The Variable Microscope," were read by Mr. Shillington
Scales.

No remarks being offered on these communications, the President
returned the thanks of the Society to Mr. Nelson for his papers.

Owing to the lateness of the hour the paper by Senor Dominga
de Orueta on "Apparatus for Photomicrography with the Microscope
standing in any Position, especially in Inclined Position," was postponed
till the next Meeting, and Mr. James Murray's paper on " Australian
Rotifers, collected by the British Antarctic Expedition, 1909," was taken
as read.

A letter from Mr. F. W. Gordon was read by Mr. Shillington Scales,
enclosing a cheque for £5 as an expression of his sympathy with the
proposal which had been made by their Ex-President to supply the
Microscopical Society with a fitting number of show cases for their
exhibits, and promising a further subscription if the late President's
other suggestion, to acquire a really typical collection of slides that can
be used by those desiring information, be carried into effect.

Mr. Shillington Scales hoped that Mr. Gordon's donation would have
the effect of stimulating other Members of the Society to follow his
excellent example.

The next Meeting was announced for April 19, when a paper would
be read by Mr. E. J. Sheppard, on " The Reappearance of the Nucleolus
in Mitosis," and Mr. E. J. Spitta would give a demonstration of " Low-
power Photomicrography with Special Relation to Colouring Methods."

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited : —

Mr. W. R. Traviss : — Two Objectives, h in. and J in. with iris, described
in Mr. Nelson's paper.

New Fellows : — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of
the Society : — Sidney Howard Browning, Francis Martin Duncan,
Robert Ludwig Mond, H. E. Ranken, Alfred J. Sewell, Mrs. Rose Haig
Thomas, Dr. Ralph Vincent, Professor German Sims Woodhead.

JOURN.R.MICR. SOC. 1 9U.P1.VI.

3a 5b 5c 5a

J Murray del. adnat West,Newman photo-lift

CANADIAN ROTIFERA.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY

JUNE, 1911.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

XI. — Canadian Rotifera : Collected by the Shuckleton Antarctic

Expedition, 1909.

By J. Murray, F.K.S.E.

(Read April 19, 1911.)
Plates VI.-VIII.

The opportunities for collecting in Canada occurred on a journey
across the continent in June 1909. At Victoria there was a stay
of a few hours, and in Vancouver of a whole day. Afterwards the
only time available was when the train stopped at stations for
half an hour or so to allow time for meals. Twice we were delayed

EXPLANATION OP PLATE VI.

Fig. la. — Philodiiui plena (Bryce), variety.

„ 16. Ditto. Egg.

,, lc. Ditto. Jaw.

„ Id. Ditto. Spurs and toes.

,, lc. Ditto. Another variety of spurs

,, 2a. — Philodina sp. (?)

„ 26. Ditto. Jaw.

„ 3a. — Plewretira brycei (Weber) variety.

„ 36. Ditto. Jaw.

,, 4a. — Callidina canadensis sp. n.

„ 46. Ditto. Head, showing rosette.

,, 4c. Ditto. Jaw.

„ id. Ditto. Spurs.

,, 5a. — Callidina papillusa (Thomp.), variety.

,, 56. Ditto. Egg, side view.

„ 5c. Ditto. Egg, front view.

June -21st, Jul/ u

28t*> Transactions of the Society.

by accidents to the railway, once for about two days, and again for
a few hours. Both delays happened beside lakes ; and there would
have been opportunity to collect plankton Eotifera, but my last
plankton-net had been torn at Honolulu. The moss-dwelling
Eotifera were studied to some extent, but the train did not offer
great facilities for microscoping, the Microscope having to stand on
a yielding cushioned seat. At Ottawa and Montreal I had a few
hours in the public parks, and found plenty of moss at Ottawa, but
none at Montreal.

Historical Sketch. — Canadian Eotifera have no history. I
know but two works where they are even mentioned : Eichters,
1908 (35)* notes Callidinm in Vancouver, but no species were
identified; Bousselet, 1909 (37), says that the Eotifera of the
Dominion are quite unknown. I have made no search through
the publications of Canadian scientific societies, relying on the
statement of Eousselet, who knows the Rotifer literature so
well.

Over the border, a great deal has been written about the
Eotifera of the U.S.A. As none but Bdelloida were collected in
Canada, only those works are noted which deal with that order.

I have notes of about fifty works in which Bdelloida are
mentioned. Less than a dozen of these are of any importance as
faunistic studies ; the others are either studies of development or
notes of pond-life and exhibits of species (generally R. vulgaris) at
the meetings of microscopical societies. The most important
works are those of Kellicott and Jennings. All the works are
included in the Bibliography, but only those are referred to in this
sketch which add something to the knowledge of the American
Eotifer fauna.

The first record of a Eotifer in America is by Bosc, 1802 (3).
As Ehrenberg identified Bosc's animal, first as R. vulgaris, then as
C. rediviva, we may reasonably entertain doubt as to what it was.

Bailey, 1850 (2), noted six species, two of them new species,
badly described.

Kellicott, in 1888 (22), recorded seven species (one new,
C. socialis) ; in 1892 (23) he added R. elongatus, and in 1896 (24)
gave a list of nine species.

Jennings, in 1894 (18), gave a list of eleven species; in 1896
(19), fourteen species ; in 1900 (20), twenty-two species ; and in 1901
(21), twenty-one species.

( !raig, 1896 (6), is stated in the key by H. S. M., 1902 (29), to
have found a Philodina socialis, which may be meant as a synonym
for C. socialis Kell.

The latest addition to the American Bdelloid fauna is Bryce's
Scephanotrocha rubra, 1910 (,£), collected by Dr. Latham of Chicago.

* The figures in brackets refer to the .Bibliography at the end of paper.

Canadian Rotifer a. By J. Murray.

287

List of Species Collected.

British Columbia.

Philodina citrina Ehr.

P. australis Murray

P. acuticornis Murray

P. nemoralis Bryce

P. rugosa Bryce

P. vorax (Janson)

P. plena (Bryce)

Pleuretra alpium (Ehr.)
P. humerosa (Murray)
P. brycei (Weber)
Gallidina habita Bryce

G. plicata Bryce

G. quadricornifera (Milne)
C. ehrenbergii Janson

G. musculosa (Milne)

G. speciosa Murray
G. asperula sp. n.
G. papillosa (Thomp.)

C. canadensis sp. n

C. aculeata (Milne)

C. multispinosa (Thomp.) . .

C. zickcndraMi (Richters) . .

Mhiobia tetraodon (Ehr.) . .

M. magna (Plate)

M. russeola (Zel.)

H. symbiotica (Zel.) . .

M. obtusicornis sp. n

M. montium sp. n

Rotifer longirostris (Janson)
Babrotrocha pusilla (Bryce)
H. angusii'collis (Murray) . .
H. crenata (Murray)
H. pulchra (Murray) . .
H. aspera (Bryce)
H. comtricta (Duj.)
H. tmcrocephala (Murray) . .

H. maculata sp. n

Ceratotiocha cornigera (Bryce)
Adineta vaga (Davis)
A. gracilis Janson
A. barbata Janson
A. longicomis Murray

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

>
o

X
X
X
X

X

X
X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X

o
o

X
X
X

X
X

Ontario.

X
X

X
X

X

Sri

°§

X

X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

es

aS

o

X
X
X

X

X
X
X

X

X

X

X
X

u 2

2ss Transactions of the Society.

Notes ox the Species.

Fibilodina citrina Ehr.

Examples from the Rocky Mountains, 3000-5000 ft, were
quite colourless.

PMlodina australis Murray.

Discovered earlier on the same voyage, in Australia.

PMlodina plena (Bryce). Plate VI. figs, la-le.

A small variety from Ottawa is figured. With it were associated
eggs (fig. lb) of a very unusual form. They resemble those at-
tributed to the species by Mr. Bryce in having a series of rounded
knobs round the circumference. They are much flattened, and the
apparent knobs are really rounded ridges, which are highest on the
edge, and die out on to each of the flattened surfaces.

Philodina sp. ? Plate VI. figs. 2a, 2b.

A small animal, 250 /x in length, most like P. nemoralis, but
smaller and without eyes. The spurs are small and slender, and
are usually held nearly parallel.

Habitat. — Victoria, B.C. ; several.

Pleuretra brycei (Weber). Plate VI. figs, da, 3b.

Variety. — Spines on anterior margin of trunk very small ;
lateral spines two at each side ; chief dorsal series, ten spines ;
second dorsal series, eight ; series on pre-anal segment, four ; no
ridge on first foot-segment.

The chief peculiarities are : the reduction of all the anterior
spines ; the second series of eight spicules on the trunk ; the series
of four spicules on the rump. The last character is only shared by
a New Zealand variety, and a South African species (P. africana).

Callidina liabita Bryce.

Besides the type, there was a variety having the lobes of the
upper lip more or less widely separated. This variety is now
known in many countries.

Callidina speciosa Murray (32).

Previously known only in South America — still confined to
the Western hemisphere.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII.

Pig. 6. — Callidina multispinosa (Thornp.) variety.

7. Ditto. Variety.

8. Ditto. Ditto.

9. Ditto. Ditto.

„ 10a. — Callidina zickcndrahti Richters.
,. 106. Ditto. Jaw.

J0URN.R.MICR.S0C.1911.P1.VII

10b

10a

J. Murray del. ad:uat.

West, Newman photo -lith.

CANADIAN ROTIFERA

Canadian Eotifera. By J. Murray. 289

Oallidina asperula sp. n. Plate VIII. figs 11&-11/.

Speei/lc character*. — Small ; trunk papillose. Corona less than
trunk, collar not prominent, upper lip showing two fine points in
the sulcus between the discs. Antenna short, rostrum very short.
Teeth 3 or -1+1. Foot 4-jointed ; spurs short, divergent,
acuminate, interspace small ; last foot-joint very short, widely
expanded into a sort of collar surrounding the toes. Egg oval,
with large rounded knobs.

Length 250 fi when feeding, width of corona 60 /a, neck 36 /x,
trunk 80 /i, across spurs 18 /x, egg 110//, by 90 fi over the knobs.
Sulcus less than width of disc ; the sharp points are the ends of
the collar folds.' Rostrum broader than long, lamellae never seen.
Antenna £ to § of neck width. First trunk segment not papillose,
of a constant and peculiar shape (see fig. 11a). Second trunk
segment, central trunk, and rump regularly papillose ; foot smooth.
Jaws constricted below the broadest part.

Habitat. — British Columbia; abundant.

Readily distinguished from all other Bdelloids by the papillose
trunk, number of teeth, points on the upper lip, and peculiar foot.
Mniobia obtusicornis, also described in this paper, has the last joint
of the foot similarly expanded. No doubt the expansion is a
support to the toes, and probably acts as a sucker.

Callidina aculeata (Milne).

The Canadian form is almost identical with a South African
variety, which is figured in a paper in the Annals of the Transvaal
Museum (now in press). There are five dorsal tranverse rows of
spicules on the trunk, many spicules on the rump, and an annular
thickening on the first foot-joint.

Callidina papillosa (Thomp.). Plate VI. figs, oa-oc.

Variety. — Small, lateral warts, more numerous than in the
type. Teeth 4 or 5. The egg is oval, with prominent knobs.
The example figured (figs, ob, be) shows external characters both
of the egg and of the contracted animal, but whether the parent
had died and its skin shrivelled on to the egg, or the young had
partly burst the egg and then died, could not be made out.

Variety (not figured). — The warts are almost obsolete. Rocky
Mountains.

Variety. — Small, like that figured, but teeth 2.

Callidina canadensis sp. n. Plate VI. figs. 4«— Id.

Specific Characters. — Large, stout, papillose ; sulcus deep, collar
prominent : second anterior trunk segment with very large latera
protuberances ; central trunk with warts at posterior angles ;

290 Transactions 0/ the Society.

several warts ou pre-anal and anal segments ; foot 4-jointed ; spurs
divergent, acuminate, obtuse. Teeth 4. Rosette at mouth.

Length 350 ll, creeping; contracted 225 /x by 130 fi. The
prominent collar is as wide as the corona, its lobes on the upper
lip not as high as the bridge; neck also prominent, antenna as
long as neck width. First trunk segment of characteristic and con-
stant shape ; whole integument of trunk leathery, prettily wrinkled,
and scarcely altering in shape as the animal moves. Warts on the
f( >ot as in C. papillosa.

Related to C. papillosa, the chief difference lies in the great lateral
projections of the second trunk segment, which make this part
often wider than the central trunk. These projections are hollow,
but the skin is thickened at the summit, forming a wart. There
are no other warts on the anterior or central trunk, except two at
the posterior angles of the central. Very abundant in British
Columbia, it appeared constant in these characters.

Callidina multispinosa (Thomp.). Plate VII. figs. 6-9.

Several forms occurred, some of which would be considered as
distinct species, were they not linked by intermediate forms.

Variety (Plate VII., fig. 6). — Bearing very long setae with
bulbose bases, and large stout curved spines. On each side five
long setse on the anterior trunk, one pair near the median line of
the second segment. At widest part of central trunk a transverse
dorsal series of stout curved horn-like spines, in three pairs.
Thick knobs at posterior angles of central trunk and pre-anal
segment. On the foot two short lateral setae with bulbose bases,
and a number of dorsal conical processes.

Variety (Plate VII., fig. 7). — Bearing very long setse and short
spicules. Five pairs of setae on the anterior trunk, as in the last
variety. Two lateral setae, with thick bases, on each side of central
trunk, and a thick sublateral spine. Dorsal row of spicules (four
pairs) at widest part of central trunk, and row of three pairs at
posterior border. No lateral setae on foot.

The long lateral setae on the central trunk are the most unusual
feature of this variety.

Variety (Plate VII., fig. 8). — Bearing long setae and ligular
processes. On the first trunk segment one small ligular process
and one long seta at each side. On the second segment, at each side
one long seta with thick base, one large curved ligular process, and
one conical process (almost in the angle between first and second
segments). On central trunk, at each side one long seta, one large
ligular process, and one knob at posterior angle. No dorsal trans-
verse series, no lateral setae on foot. Conical processes on foot.

The peculiarity of the variety is the intermixture of ligular and
setiform processes.

Variety. — Processes mostly ligular (Plate VII. fig. 9). On first

Canadian Rotifer a. By J. Murray. 291

and second segments of trunk at each side, two ligular rounded pro-
cesses ; on central trunk at each side, one similar sublateral
process at broadest part ; conical processes at posterior angles of
central trunk and on rump ; on the foot, a curved lateral seta with
bulbose base. No transverse dorsal series.

This variety is peculiar in having only ligular processes in
front of the widest part of the body.

All these varieties figured occurred together near the Lake of
the Woods, and the intermediate forms are too numerous to figure.

Callidina zickendrahti Eichters. Plate VII. figs. 10a, 10&. i

Sufficiently near Eichters' type, yet with some differences.
There is the same number (five pairs) of ligular processes, mostly
forked at the ends. In the figure several appear broken off. They
are not all in the same positions. The pair on the central trunk
form part of the dorsal transverse series. There is a long seta on
the second trunk segment. Teeth 2.

Examples from Russia, which I have been enabled by the kind-
ness of Dr. Penard to see, differ more from Eichters' type, having
the dorsal transverse series of large thick knobs (as in fig. 6,
Plate VII).

Found at the Lake of the Woods, with the series of forms .of,
G. multispinosa figured on the same plate.

Mniobia obtusicornis sp.n. Plate VIII. figs. loa-13d.

Specific characters. — Large, stout; corona less than trunk; an-
tenna short; jaw with thick coloured border, teeth 3/3 or 3+1.
Foot 4-jointed ; spurs small, rounded, separated by broad convex
interspace ; last joint expanded into a broad collar surrounding the
reniform disc which represents the toes.

Length, when feeding, 500//-, width of corona 120 fi, neck 75 p,
trunk 150 /m, across spurs 30 /a. Sulcus as wide as disc. Collar
not very prominent ; lobes on upper lip not reaching as high as
bridge. Antenna half of neck width. Trunk broadly plicate ;
pale yellow. Stomach wall with yellow globules of moderate size.
Spurs stippled. In certain positions the interspace is obliterated,
and they have the appearance shown in fig. 13d.

The form of spurs and the expanded last segment of the foot
distinguish this from all other species of Mniobia. The foot is
similarly expanded in a Canadian Callidina, C. asperula, described
in this paper. Doubtless it is used as a sucker, to ^ive support to
the foot-disc.

Habitat. — Victoria, B.C. ; very abundant.

Mniobia montium sp.n. Plate VIII. figs. 14a, 14Z>.

Specific characters. — Large, slender, hyaline. Corona narrow
with small deep sulcus. Collar very prominent ; lobes on upper

292 Transactions of the Society.

lip high, meeting in middle. Antenna short. Jaw with very tin b
bolder, teeth 3 3. Rump usually wider than central trunk, rounded
posteriorly. Foot short, spurs small, acuminate, divergent, no inter-
space.

Length, when feeding, 450 yu, width of corona and collar about
70/jl, neck DOfi, trunk 90//, rump 70/t, across spurs 25//. The
characteristic form of the head is that shown, but the discs are
sometimes held further apart, and the lobes of the upper lip
slightly separated. The bulging anterior trunk and contracted
central trunk are habitual, though 1 am unwilling to make such
things specific characters. Central trunk and pre-aual closely
plicate ; pre-anal and anal not distinguishable in the outline, but
perhaps separated by dorsal fold.

Nearest M. symbiotica, it differs more in general form than in
detail. It lacks the red colour of symbiotica. The rump and
upper lip are of different form. It is not stout. It often swims
free.

Habitat. — lioeky Mountains ; abundant.

Habrotrocha microcephala (Murray).

Habitat. — Lake of the Woods. The first time the species lias
been found outside of Britain.

Habrotrocha maculata sp. n. Plate VIII. figs. 12a-12d.

Specific characters. — Small, whitish ; trunk stippled with large
pellucid dots ; corona small, less than collar and neck ; prominent
flaps at side of mouth ; lamella? large ; antenna very short ; teeth
three or four in each jaw ; foot short, 3-jointed ; spurs small,
acuminate, divergent, no interspace.

Length, when feeding, 250 //, width of corona 28 //, mouth flaps
40/*, neck 30//, trunk 90//,, across spurs 24//. Discs close together;

KXPLANATTON OF PLATE VIII.

Fig. 11a. — Callidina asx>crula sp. n. Feeding.

,, 116. Ditto. Creeping.

,, lie. Ditto. Jaw.

„ lid. Ditto. Egg.

,, He. I >itto. Side view of foot.

„ 11/. 1 >itto. End view of foot.

,, Via. — Habrotrocha maculata sp. n. Feeding.

,, 126. Ditto. Creeping.

,, 12c. I >itto. Side view of head.

,, 12d. Ditto. Jaw.

,, 13a. — Mniobia obtusicomis sp. n.

., 136. Ditto. Jaw.
13c. Ditto. Foot.

,, V3d. Ditto. Spurs and disk.

,, 14a. — Mniobia montium sp. n.

,, 146. Ditto. Jaw.

JOURN.R.MICR. S0C.1911.PL VIII

J.Murray del. ad nat.

West, Newman phoio-lith.

CANADIAN ROTIFERA.

Ganctdian Rotifera. By J. Murray. 293

cilia long, usually projecting from mouth as two pencils when the
animal is creeping ; antenna one-quarter to one-third of neck width.

When feeding, the trunk has the flask shape common to tube-
dwellers, the foot being quite hidden. No doubt it is a tube-
dweller, though it has never been seen in a tube. The pellucid
dots on the trunk are exceptionally large and regular ; they do
not extend on to the neck. Egg of 75//, by hh p.

It is not necessary to compare it in detail with other species.
The elongate head, prominent mouth-margin and dotted skin are
sufficient to distinguish it from those species which come nearest
to it.

Habitat.— Ottawa, ; very abundant.

Cercbtotrocha cornigera ( Bryce).

The known range of this remarkable species is rapidly extend-
ing. It is now known in Spitsbergen, Scotland, Ireland, Australia,
and Canada. It appears to have a preference for mountains : in
Scotland it is commonest on mountain-tops, and in Australia and
Canada it occurred at high levels.

Adineta longicornis Murray.

The range of this species is proving extensive, chiefly in warm
countries, but now recorded for New Zealand, the Antarctic, and
Canada.

Doubtful Species.

Marked with an asterisk (*) in the list.

Philodina socialis H. S. M. — diagnosis extracted from key :
" not colourless, white ; antenna, 2-jointed ; foot, 6-jointed ; toes, 4 ;
spurs, large, stout ; eyes 2, cervical. In flocculent colonies."f

Judging from the name it might be supposed that this was an
attempt to put Kellicott's Callidina socialis in its proper genus
with a fuller description ; but it is not said to be parasitic, and it
has cervical eyes. Unfortunately, this description, fairly good as
far as it goes, is not accompanied by a figure. There is nothing to
suggest that it might not be Philodina commensalis !

P. (Dissotroclui) imnnosa Bailey. The figure leaves little doubt
that this is D. macrostgla, the " tubercled " form.

Callidina rediviva Ehr. Ehrenberg's diagnosis was sutficientlv
vague, and he appears to have been willing to identify the species
from contracted examples showing nothing distinctive.

C. socialis Kell. Unfortunately Keilicott snves no fkfure and
Ins description is not full enough to enable us to assign it to a
genus, now that the genus Embata has been separated, and the
Callidime distinguished from the Philodina' primarily by the
number of toes. The parasitic habit and the characters given

t Craig, Proc. Nat. Sci. Assoc, Stateu Inland, xviii. (1896).

294

Transactions of the Society.

make it highly probable that it is anMmbata, and that Janson was
wrong in uniting with it Rotifer (Callidina) magnicalcarata
Parsons.

ftotifer mento Anderson. Anderson's description and figures

in to me to indicate no points of distinction from R. macroceros.
The tube-making habit appears to have caused the resemblance to
be overlooked. In Scotland I find R. macroceros usually inhabiting
lax tubes of flocculent material.

/,'. vestitus Bailey. The figures and description indicate a
sufficiently strange animal, but they are not good enough to
inspire confidence or leave much hope of identifying it.

Habrotrocha eremita (Bryce). Jenning's figure {21) shows that
the animal he observed is not eremita, which is remarkable for the
length of the pedicels bearing the disks.

List of all Bdelloids recorded for North America.

•a
5
5

Philbdma citrina Ehr.

P. crythroplithalma Ehr. . .

P. roseola Ehr

P. megalotrocha Ehr

P. austnralis Murray
P. acuticornis Murray
P. nemoralis Bryce

P. rugosa Bryce

P. ubrax (Janson)

P. ]>.■ nc | Bryce)

*P. socialis M

Pleuretnt alpium (Ehr.)
P. foumerosa (Murray)

P. brycei (Weber)

Dissotrocha aculeate. ( Khr.). .
D. macrostyla (Ehr.) . .
JD. pannosa (Bailey)
Callidina elegans Ehr.

:• -rirn Ehr

1 ■■ i '•' \, e

C. plicata Bryce

— "/V/i/ (Milne).

Janson . .
ttosa (M ilne) . .

i ialis Ki-11

i !".v/ Murray

p. n. . . .

C. papillosa (Thomp.) . .

I I ■ " W\ Sp. II.

('. a» U • <•''" I Milne)

C. ynnlns/niiDsii (Thomp.) .

1 . ndrakti Richters .

x

X
X
X
X
X
X

X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

CO

X
X
X

X

X
X

X

X

Mniobia tetraodon (Ehr.)
M. magna (Plate) . .

M. russeola (Zel.)

a
a

O

X ; M. symbiotica (Zel.)

| M. obtusicomis sp. n

M. montium sp. n

Rotifer vulgaris Schrank . .
j R. macrourus (Muller)

R. macroceros Gosse . .
*R. mento Anderson

R. elongatus Weber . .

R. trisecahis Weber

/,'. neptunius (Ehr.)
*R. vestitus Bailey . . . .

II. tardigradus Ehr

it. longirostris (Janson)

Habrotrocha pusilla (Bryce)
*H. eremita (Bryce)

H. auijustirolUs (Murray) . .

H. crenata (Murray)

H. pulchra (Murray) . .

H. aspera (Bryce)

H. const ricta (Duj.) . . . .

If. microcephala (Murray) . .

H. maculata sp. n

Scephanotrocha rubra Bryce

Ceratotrocha comigera (Bryce

Adineta vaga (Davis) . .

.(. gracilis Janson

.1. barbata Janson

A. longicornis Murray

x
x

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

-3

a

X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

Canadian Rotifera. By J. Murray. 295

Summary.

Forty-two species were collected, all moss-dwellers except
Philodina australis, which may have come in the water with
which the mosses were washed (while in British Columbia). Five
new species are described. I know of no previous records for
Canada, so that they are all additions to the Canadian Kotifer
fauna.

I find 27 species of Bdelloida recorded for the United States.
Half-a-dozen, at least, of these species are considered doubtful, for
reasons given above. Including the doubtful species there are 63
Bdelloida known in North America.

Only six of our species were previously recorded for North
America. No doubt the reason for the number being so small is
that our species are all moss-dwellers, while most earlier naturalists
examined only ponds, lakes, and streams.

The great majority of the species are common or widely-
distributed — only about a dozen species are so limited in range as
to call for remark. The five new species are as yet only known in
Canada* — P. australis is known on both sides of the Pacific
(Australia and Vancouver), and not elsewhere. C. spidosa is limited
to North and South America ; C. zickendrahti to Russia and
Canada: H. microcephala to Scotland and Canada, S. rubra,
C. corniyera, and A. lonyicomis are species hitherto supposed to be
rare, which are proving to be widely distributed. P. socialis, if it
is not meant as a synonym for C. socialis KelL, is only known in
the United States.

There are only 12 species in the list for North America which
are not known in Europe ; 14 which are not known in Britain.

Besides the 42 species in our list, several others were seen,
distinct from any yet noted for North America, but some of them
were already known to Mr. Bryce, though not yet described, and
others were not studied sufficiently.

Bibliography.

1. Atswood, H. F. — Volvox globator (supposed /•'. vulgareia Volvox). Amer.

Journ. Micr. and Pop. Sci., iii. (1878) p. 116.

•J. Bailey, J. W. — Microscopical Observations made in South Carolina,

Georgia, and Florida. Smithson. Contrib. to Know-
ledge, ii. (1850) Art. 8

3. Bosc— Le Rotifere de Carolina. Hist. nat. devers. suite de Buffon (1802)

pp. 176, 181 i not seen, reference from Mandl, 1839).

4. Bktoe, D. — A New Classification of the Bdelloid Rotifera. Journ.

Quekett Micr. Club (Dec. 1910, for Nov. 1910) p. 61.

5. Cox, C. F— Reproduction of Eotift vulgaris. Amer. Journ. Micr. and

Pop. Sci. (1877) p. 44.

* Callidina asperula has since been found in Inland by the Clare Island Survey.

296 Transactions of the Society.

6. Craig — Philodina social is. Proc. Nat. Sci. Assoc. Staten Island, wiii.

1896 (reference in H.S.M., 1902).

7. Dana— Systematic Position of the Rotifera. Amer. Journ. Arts and Sci.,

xxii. (1857) p. 25 (reference in Zelinka, 1886;.

8. Ehrenbkrg. C. G. — Die Infusionsthierehen (Leipzig, 1838).

9. „ „ Verbreit.u. Einfluss. d. Mikr. Lebens. inSiid-tuNord-

Amerika. Ber. Ver. k. Akad. Berl. ( 1843, tor
1811) p 39.

10. „ „ Mikro. Leben als Flusstriibung u. Huinusiand in

Florida. Verb. k. Akad. Berl. (1853) p. 252.

11. „ „ Mikrogeologie. II. North America (Leipzig, 1856).

12. Gissler, C. F.- -Fauna of the New York Croton Water (New York, 1872).

13. Helm, S. — (/.'. vulgaris exhibited.) Journ. New York Micr. Soc, v.

(1889) pp. 40 et seq.

14. Hempel, A. — Rotifera found in the Illinois River, etc. Bull. Illinois

State Lab. Nat. Hist., v. (1898) p. 301.

15. Hitchcock, R. — Rotifer and Philodina. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ. (1883)

p. 35.

16. Jacobs, H.— Effects of Desiccation on Philodina roseola. Journ. Exper.

Zool. vi. (Philadelphia, 1909) p. 207.

17. Jellifpk, S. E.— Chicago Water Supply in the World's Fair Grounds.

Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., xiv. (1893).

18. Jennings, H. S. — Rotatoria of the Great Lakes, etc. Bull. Mich. Fish.

Comm., No. 3 (May, 1894).

19. „ „ Report on the Rotatoria (of Lake Michigan). Op.cit.,

No. 6 (1896) p. 85.

20. „ „ Rotatoria of the United States. U.S. Fish. Comm.

Bull, for 1899(1900t p. 67.

21. „ „ Synopsis of North American In vertebrata. XVII. The

Rotatoria. Amer. Nat., xxxv. (1901) p. 725.

22. Kellicott, D. S. — Rotifera of Shiawassee River, Michigan. Proc. Amer.

Soc. Micr., x. (1888) p. 84.

23. „ „ Rotifer Notes. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., xiii. (1892)

p. 12.

24. „ ,, The Rotifera of Sandusky Bay. Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr.,

1896, p. 155.

25. Kofoid, C. A. — The Plankton of Echo River, Mammoth Cave. Op. cit,

1900, p. 113.

26. Leidy, J. — Revivification of Rotifer vulgaris. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Philad., 1874, p. 88.

27. „ Rhizopods in the Mosses of the summit of Roan Mountain.

Op. cit,, 1881 (for 1880) p. 334.

28. Logan — Microscopical Life in the Philippine Conservatory Tanks,

Allegheny. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ. (Jan. 1895) p. 1.

29. M. (H.S.M.) — A Key to the Rotifera. (American species not distinguished,

except P. socialis Craig.) Op. cit. xiii. (1902) p. 89.

30. Mellor, C. C. — Actinwus neptunius. The Microscope, viii. (1838) p. 53.

31. Mitchell, W. R. — (R. vulgaris exhibited.) Journ. New York Micr. Soc,

ii. (1886) p. 55.

32. Murray, J.— Some South American Rotifers. Amer. Nat., xli. (1907)

p. 97.

33. Rafter, S. W. — Micro-organisms of Hemlock Water. Rochester Acad.

Sci., 1888.

34. Ricthers, F. Neue Moosbewohner. Ber. Senckbg. nat. Ges. Frankfurt-

a-M., 1902.
25. „ „ Moosfauna Australiens, etc. Zool. Jahrb. Aht. fur Syst.,

xxvi. (1908) p. 196.

Canal i<t ii Rotifera. Bij J. Mun%ay. 297

86. K.0CS8ELET, C. F. — Rotatorian Fauna of Boston. Journ. Quekett Micr.

Club (Nov. 1908) p. 335.

37. „ „ Geographical Distribution of the Rotifera. Op. cit.

(Nov. 1909) p. 465.

38. S. (J.C.S.)— Pond Life in Winter. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., iv. (1883)

p. 62.

39. Stevens. T. S. — -A Key to the Rotifera. (American species not indicated.)

Journ. Trenton Nat. Hist. Soc, 1887, p. 26.

40. Stokes, A. C. — Leaves from a Summer Note-book. Amer. Journ. Micr.

and Pop. Sci., vi. (1881) p. 189.

41. „ „ Structural Features in American Rotifers. Sci. Gossip,

Nos. 29, 30 (1896) pp. 121 and 148.

42. Turner, C. H. — Rotifera, etc., of Cincinnati. Bull. Lab. Denison Univ.,

vi.(1892)p. 58.

43. Vorce, C. M. — Microscopical Forms observed in the waters of Lake Erie.

Proc. Amer. Soc. Micr.. 5th Ann. Meeting (1882) p. 187.

44. Whitney, D I).— Desiccation of Rotifers. Amer. Nat., xlii. (Oct 1908)

p. 665.

45. Wolle, F.- Rotifer Nests. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., iii. (1882) p. 101.

•_". is

XII —On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the Shore-sands of
Selsey Bill, Sussex. — VII. Supplement (Addenda et Corrigenda).

By Edward Heron-Allen, F.L.S., F.E.M.S.,
and Arthur Earland, F.B.M.S.

(Bead February 15, 1911.)

Plates IX.-XIII.

i

The series of papers, of which this forms, for the present, the con-
clusion, has now been in process of publication for three years.
During the whole of this time the work of making gatherings, and
the examination of the material collected, has been in progress, and
this has naturally resulted in the discovery of a great number of
additional species, of which some are new. Such additional species
are described in the pages which follow, and after allowing for
corrections and the withdrawal of one or two species from the list,
bring the total of forms described up to 390, or, including varietal
forms, 399.

We have been obliged, by engagements entered into by us with
regard to other material, to relegate to some future occasion the
publication of the results of examination and study of the living
Foraminifera which have occupied us concurrently with the ex-
amination of the shore-gatherings, and also the geological study of
the forms found in the material derived from the artesian borings
at " Large Acres."

We take this opportunity of recording our sense of obligation
to the Council of the Society for the liberal manner in which they
have afforded us scope for the publication of our report. We also

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX.

Fig. 1. — Gromia Dujardini Schulze (?). Side view. X 100.

„ 2. Ditto. Oral view, x 100.

,, 3. — Nubecularia tibia Joues and Parker, x 100.

„ 4. — Articulina foveolata H-A. and E. Early or Milioline stage, x 100.

,, 5. — Comuspira foliacea Philippi sp. Abnormal, x 100.

,, 6. Ditto.

,, 7. — Reophax ampullacea Brady. Side view, x 100.
„ , 8. Ditto. Oral view, x 100.

,, 9. — Haplophragmium nanum Brady. Superior view, x 100.

,, 10. Ditto. Inferior view, x 100.

,, 11. Ditto. Lateral view, x 100.

,, 12. — Textularia vncqnspicua (Brady) var. jugosa Brady, x 100.

,, 13. — Bulimina Tcrqiiemiana sp. n. x 100.

„ 14. Ditto.

JOURN.R.MICR.SOC. 1911. PI. IX.

10

West, Newman lith.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 299

desire to express our indebtedness to Mr. Herbert R. Lilley, of
Belfast, who has made the drawings which have illustrated our work,
and to Mr. F. W. Millett and Mr. Joseph Wright for assistance and
advice ungrudgingly given us on all occasions when it was sought.
The following must be added to the list of chalk-fossil forms

(Art. V.) :—

52. (h-a) Antiinid incus incertus d'Orbigny.
123. (h-a) Polymorphina gibba d'Orbigny.
127. (h-A) „ compressa d'Orbigny.

360. Uviyerina asperula Brady.
210. Nonionina pompilioides Fichtel and Moll sp.
325. Textularia rugo&a Eeuss.
160. Discorbina orbicularis Terquem.
352. Nodosaria calomorpha Reuss.

Gromia Dujardin.

299. Gromia oviformis Dujardin.
299a. Gromia Dujardini Schulze.

For a year now past we have been keeping under observation
in the tanks which we have described at some length in ' Know-
ledge ' * and in this Journal.f a large number of living specimens
of these two species of Gromia, both of which occur in abundance
in washings of algse from the Mixon Reef. We do not propose to
enter into any description of the observations which we have made,
reserving these for a future paper.

Among the Mixon Reef gatherings we have met with many
specimens of the organism figured on Plate IX. figs. 1, 2. Of its
rhizopodal nature there can be no doubt, as sarcode is often found
adherent round its orifice. Beyond this we do not at present feel
disposed to form any conjecture. Its external form and size agree
very well with G. Dujardini, and that species in the living state
frequently covers its natural chitinous envelope with a loose crust
of sandy mud, but the sandy envelope of Gromia is not apparently
cemented together with any durable medium ; it can be removed
with a camel-hair brush without injuring the living animal, which
will proceed at once to form a second covering, which appears to us
to consist of mud separated by the pseudopodia from the surrounding
water during the assimilation of nutriment. Moreover, such in-
crusted Gromice, when dried in the same manner as the shore-
gatherings are dried, shrivel up into amorphous crinkled sacs, the
nature of which could not be ascertained from a mere casual inspec-
tion of the dried specimens.

The specimens which we figure, however, are firm though some-
what flexible. They consist of a spherical chitinous envelope
covered with a uniform layer of very fine sand-grains, which are
so closely adherent to the envelope that they resist any attempt at

* Knowledge, xxxiii. No. 504 (1910) pp. 285-6.

t See this Journal, 1910, p. 695. Paper No. VI. of this series.

300 Transactions of the Sonet.;/.

disintegration. At one pole of the sac a large roughly circular
aperture is situated ; in the immediate neighbourhood of the aper-
ture the sandy covering thins out, so that the chitinous sac becomes
visible. A few somewhat similar specimens have been obtained
from muddy dredgings by the ' Goldseeker ' in the Moray Firth and
in the Norwegian fiords.

Pending the discovery of additional specimens, we are figuring
the Selsey individuals under the genus Ghromia, but it appears to us
not improbable that further investigations may result in its trans-
ference to Hippocrejjuia, with the general characteristics of which
genus it appears to conform, though differing entirely in shape.

Diameter 0'3-0*4 mm.

300. Nubecularia Uradyi Millett.

Nubecularia inflata Brady, 1884, Foraia. ' Challenger,' p. 135, pi. i. figs. 5-8.
Nubecularia Brady/' Millett, 1898, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. R. Micr. Soc.

p. 261, pi. v. fig. 6 a,b.
Nubecularia Bradyi (Millett) Sidel»ottom, 1904, Mem. Manchester Lit. and

Phil. Soc. vol. xlviii. No. 5, p. 3.

Brady's specific name " inflata" having been previously used by
Terquem (1876) for another Nubecularia, had to be abandoned.

A single specimen, consisting of one, or perhaps two, chambers.
As the specimen is somewhat worn it is difficult to decide whether
it is fossil or recent. Brady's specimens, which were recent, were
principally from tropical shallow waters, but he also reports its
occurrence at Balfour Bay, Kerguelen Island (which is far from
the tropics) in 20 to 50 fathoms. Brady also refers to the fact that
on the British coasts wild growing specimens of Miliolina subrotunda
were to be found possessing some Nubecularine characteristics, but
that the Milioline affinities of such specimens could always be
identified by the nature of the aperture. The aperture of our
specimen has no Milioline character, being distinctly, but irre-
gularly, circular, and without sign of tooth.

301. Nubecularia tibia Jones and Parker.
Plate IX. fig. 3.)

Nubecularia tibia Jones and Parker, 1860, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. xvi.

p. 455, pi. xx. figs. 48-51.
Ditto. (Jones and Parker), Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix.,

N.S., p. 52, pi. viii. figs. 1, 2.
Ditto. (Jones and Parker) Brady, 1884, Forani. ' Challenger,' p. 135, pi. i.

figs. 1-4.
Ditto. (Jones and Parker) Millett, 1898, Foram. Malav Archipelago, Journ.

Micr. Soc, p. 261, pi. v. fig. 3.

One or two specimens have been found which we think should
be attributed to this species, although perhaps they are more

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 301

flattened iii appearance than any of the published figures. They
are, as is almost invariably the case with this species, fragments
of the original organism. Nubecularia tibia has hitherto been
known in the recent condition only from tropical and sub-tropical
shallow seas ; it occurs, however, among Karland's list of specimens
from one of the ' Goldseeker ' Stations in the Moray Firth, Scotland
(Noss Head, X. by W. |W., 3 miles, 43 fms.), and probably is a
widely diffused species, although owing to its fragility and small
size, it is liable to be overlooked. It occurs in the fossil state as
far back as the Trias and Upper Lias, but, according to Brady,
there are no records of its occurrence in beds between these strata
and recent times.

302. Biloculiwi </on</a/a d'Orbigny,

Biloculina dongata d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nut., vol. vii. p. 298, No. i.
Biloculina ringens var. patagonica Williamson, 1858, Recent Forain. Great

Britain, p. 80, pi. vii. figs. 175, 176.
Miliola {Biloculina) dongata (d'Orbiuny) Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans.,

vol. civ., p. 409. pi. xvii. figs. 88, 90, 91.
Biloculina dongata (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1^84, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 144,

pi. ii. fig. 9.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foram., p. 119,

pi. xxiv. figs. 906-13.

Fossil specimens only have been found, and this is the more
noteworthy as the species is not uncommon as a recent shell, in
many shallow water gatherings round the British Islands.

303. Spiroioculina antiliarum d'Orbigny.

Spiroloculina antiliarum d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 149, pi. xi. figs. 3, 4.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 155, pi. x. fig. 21 a, b.
Ditto. rd'Orbiuny) Earland, 1905, Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol. ix.,
No. 57, p. 193.

Fossil only; doubtless derived from some of the Eocene
deposits characterized by the presence of warm water fauna.
This is one of the species recorded by Earland from Bognor. " One
specimen found, weak, but identifiable. Not previously recorded
from Great Britain. The species is at home in the shallow water
of warm seas." In view of the occurrence of fossils at Selsey, in
the immediate neighbourhood of Bognor, the recent condition of
the Bognor specimen must be regarded as doubtful, and the species
should, therefore, be removed from the list of recent British
•Foraminifera until specimens are found to occur in localities far
removed from Tertiary deposits.

June 21st, 1911 I

302 Transactions of the Society.

Mil. Spiroloculina nitida d'Orbigny.

•olocuh'na nitida d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. via. p. 298, No. 4.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Parker and Jones, 1871, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. I.

vol. viii . p. 2 IS. pi. viii. fig. 24.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 149, pi. ix. figs. 9,

10.
Ditto. d'Orbigny T. Rupert Jones, 1895, Crag Foram. Palaont. Soc.,

1 1. 112, pi. v. tig. '■',, and woodcut fig. 5.
Ditto (d'Orbigny) Millett, 1898, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. E. Micr. Soc,

p. 265, pi. v. figs. 9-13 a, b.

Frequent in the recent condition. Xo fossil specimens found.
There is a considerable range of variation in the specimens of this
simplest of the Spiroloculine types, and they serve to link it up
with other Milioline species. Many of the specimens are some-
what rugose, and show a tendency to adopt a subarenacous type of
shell. This type .of shell closely approaches Miliolina sclerotica in
texture and general appearance.

Millett (suprd) gives many interesting notes as to the
morphology of this species, which, under various names, appears
to have a very extensive geological record, ranging back to the
Lias at least.

30o. Spirillum! ina pUoinhita Lamarck sp.

Miliolites planuhtn Lanarck, 1805, Ann. du Museum, vol. v. p. 352, No. 4;

1822, Anim. sans Verteb., vol. vii. p. 613, No. 4.
Spiroloculina depressa d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 298, No. 1 ;

Modele No. 92.
Spirolocidina badenensis d'Orbigny, 184t>, Foram. Foss. Yienne, p. 270, pi. xvi.

figs. 13-15.
Spiroloculina depressa var. rotundata Williamson, 1858, Recent Foram. Great

Britain, p 82, pi. vii. fig. 178.
Spirolocidina planulatn (Lamarck) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 148,

pi. ix. fig. 11 a, h.
Ditto. (Lamarck) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (Lamarck) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foram., p. 107,

pi. xviii. figs. 836 n-c.

Fossil, with one exception. The fossil specimens display a
considerable variety of form. The recent one is typical. It is a
common species on British coasts, and in temperate seas all over
the world, and its geological range extends back at least as far as
the Lia<

306. Spiroloculina Terquemiana sp. n.

Spiroloculina ornata Terquem, 1882, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, vol. ii.
pt. iii. p. 159, pi. xvi. (xxiv.) fig. 23 «, />.

As the specific name " ornata " has been previously used by
d'Orbigny for a different organism,* it becomes necessary to re-

* Spiroloculina ornata (d'Orbigny), 1839, Forain. Cuba, p. 167, pi. xii. figa. 7-7a
— Miliolina ornata (d'Orbigny) Mdbius, 18R0, Beitrag. Meeresfauna Insel Mauritius,
etc., p. 76, pi. ii. figs. 4-7.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 303

name Terquem's very distinctive little form, and we therefore
propose to associate it with Terquem's name.

A considerable number of specimens, all more or less eroded
or water worn, which we have no hesitation in ascribing to
Terquem's species, which was described from specimens obtained
from the Eocene of Septeuil. Terquem describes it as follows :
" Shell oval, obtuse at each end, bounded by a leaf-like carination,
formed of curved and depressed chambers, the inner ones smooth,
the two outer chambers ornamented with fine and short stride
running parallel to each other, but obliquely to the axis, regularly
spaced. Aperture oval, and rimmed, without any tooth."

307. Miliolina boueana d'Orbigny sp.

Quinqueloculina boueana d'Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Yienne, p. "293, pi. xix.

figs 7-9.
Quinqueloculina nussdorfensi's d'Orbigny, 1846, Poram. Foss. Yienne, p. 295,

pi. xix. figs. 13-15.
Quinqueloculina costatq Terquem, 1878, M<''m. Soc. Gi'-ol France, ser. 3, vol. iii.

p. 63, pi. vi. fi^s. 3-5.
Miliolina boueana (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Cballenger,' p. 173, pi. vii.

fig. 13a,b,c
Ditto. (d'Orl>ign.\) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Becent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foram., p. 114,

pi. xxi. fig. 865.

A single fossil specimen. Miliolina boueana, according to Brady,
is nothing more than a compact and regular variety of M. bicomis,
with distinct and neatly rounded segments. He further remarks
that its distribution is probably co-extensive with that of M. bicomis,
but in our Selsey gatherings M. bicomis is of frequent occurrence
in the recent condition, whilst M. boueana is represented by this
unique fossil.

308. Miliolina insignis Brady.

Miliolina insignis Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. N.S. p. 45.

Ditto. Brady, 1884, Foram. * Challenger/ p. 165, pi. iv. figs. 8-10.

Ditto. (Brady), 1886, J. Wright, Proc. Belfast Nat, Field Club (1885-1886),

Appendix, p. 319, pl.xxvi. fig. 4.
Ditto. (Brady), 1887, Brady, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto trigonula (Lamarck sp.), striate variety, Millett, 1898, Malay Foram.,

Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 503. •

This is merely a striate form of the ubiquitous species Miliolina
trigonula (Lamarck sp.), but it is of rare occurrence compared with
the type, although it is not infrequent in some Australian shore-
sands. A few small specimens distinctly fossil.

309. Miliolina rotunda d'Orbigny gp.

Trilaculina rotunda d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. No. 4, p 299.
Ditto (d'Orbigny) Schlumberger, 1893, Mem. Soc. Zool. de France, vol. vi.

p. 206, pi. i. figs. 48-50.
Miliolina ■rotundi (d'Orbigny) Millett, 1898, Malay Foram., Journ. R. Micr. Soc.,

p. 267, pi. v. figs. 15, 16.

x 2

:;n4 Transactions of the Society.

A lew small specimens, recent and fossil, of this little type.
The inflated chambers and circular aperture are well marked. This
species is very variable in appearance, and links up the genera
Biloculina and Miliolina. It is very common in many tropical
ami Mediterranean gatherings, but does not appear to have been
previously recorded as a British species in the recent condition,
although Millett mentions that it occurs of large size in the clay of
St. Erth, Cornwall (? Pliocene).

310. Miliolina sclerotica Karrer sp.

Quinqueloculina sclerotica Karrer, 1868, Sitz. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, vol. lviii.

Abth. i. p 152, pi. iii. fig. 5.
Miliolina sclerotica (Karrer) Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Jour. Micr. and Nat.

Sci. vol. iii. p 24, pi. i. fig. 2.
Ditto. (Karrer) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Beccnt Foraminifera.

There are a number of fossil specimens which appear to be
referable to Karrer's species, but the identification is made with
some reserve, as the specimens are somewhat longer in contour than
the type, and a few of them show a tendency to bear sulci on the
external edges.

This form is, as pointed out by Brady {supra), closely allied to,
if not identical with, M. contorta d'Orb. sp.

311. Miliolina suborbicularis d'Orbigny sp.

Triloculina suborbicularis d'Orbigny, 1839, Forani. Cuba, p. 156, pi. x. figs. 9-11.
Triloculina fichteliana d'Orbigny, 1839, Forani. Cuba, p. 152, pi. ix. figs. 8-10.
Miliolina fichteliana (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 169,

pi. iv. fig. 9 a.b.c.
Quinqueloculina suborbicularis (d'Orbigny) Scblumberger, 1893, Mem. Soc.

Zool. Fiance, vol. vi. p. 73, pi. ii. figs. 63, 64; pi. iii. fig. 67 and

"woodcuts figs. 26-28.
Miliolina suborbicularis (d'Orbigny) Millett, 1898, Malay Forani., Journ. K.

Micr. Soc. p. 502, pi. xi. fig. 13.

One specimen, which has every appearance of recent origin,
although the published records of the species do not, so far as we
are aware, extend north of the, Mediterranean. It is not uncommon
in tropical and sub-tropical sands."

312. Miliolina undosa Karrer sp,

Quinqueloculina undosa Karrer, 1867, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wieu,

vol. Iv. p. 361, pi. iii. fig. 3.
Miliolina undosa (Karrer) Brady, 1884, Forani. ' Challenger/ p. 176, pi. vi.

figs. 6-8.
Ditto. (Karrer) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. bayer. Akad. Wiss. ch. ii. vol. xviii.

p. 237, pi. ii. figs. 41, 42.
Ditto. (Karrer) Millett, 1898, Malay Foram., Journ. E. Micr. Soc. p. 506,

pi. xii. fig. 5 a-c.

litre nt a ml Fossil Foraminifera. 305

Several specimens, all apparently recent, varying considerably
in appearance, and forming a series connecting M. contorta and
M. ferrusacii with the extreme development of the type as figured
by Brady.

313. Vertebralina striata d'Orbigny*

Vertebralina striata d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat. vol. vii. p. 283, No. 1

Mbdele No. 81.
Ditto, (d'Orbigny) Parker, Jones and Brady, 1865, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.

ser. 3, vol. xvi. p. 32, pi. i. fig. 1.
Ditto. (d'Orl rigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. < Challenger,' p. 187, pi. xii. figs. 14-16.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Millett, 1898, Malay Foram., Journ. K. Mier. Soc. p. 607,

pi. xiii. fig. 1.

One small fossil specimen, representing an early stage of the
shell, and doubtless derived from an Eocene clay.

33. Articulina foveolata Heron-Allen and Earland.

(Plate IX. fig. 4.)

Articulina foveolata Heron- Allen and Earland, 1909, Journ. E. Micr. Soc. p. 317,
pi. xv. fig. 8.

The pretty little fossil specimen which we figure is apparently
the early Milioline stage of Articulina foveolata. It possesses a
characteristic circular Articuline aperture without sign of tooth.

The markings are much more regular and pronounced than in
the type specimen of the species, which was in a poor state of
preservation.

314. Art kid ina sagra d'Orbigny.

Articulina sagra d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 160, pi. ix. figs. 23-26.
Vertebralina cassis d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 72, pi. vii. figs. 14, 15.
Vertebralina mucronata d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 72, pi. vii. figs. 16-19.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) d'Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Vienne, p. 120, pi. xxi.

figs. 18, 19.
J .. ulina sagra (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 184, pi. xii.

figs. 22-24.

A single fossil specimen, broken, but showing sufficient post-
Milioline development for the identification of the species.

This is a somewhat infrequent constituent of coral sands all
over the world, but not uncommon in the West Indian seas.

As a fossil d'Orbigny records it from the Miocene of Vienna.

:55. Cornuspira foliacea Philippi sp.
(Plate IX. figs. 5, 6.)

Since our original note Mas written we have found the elegant
little specimen which we figure. The shell is semi-transparent, and
instead of the normal flatness it presents a curious curvature which
is well brought out in the drawing.

3(w; Transactions of the Society.

.".16. Orbitolites compla/nata Lamarck.

Orbitolites complanata Lamarck, 1801, Syst. Anim. sans Verfceb., }>. 376.
Ditto. Lamarck, 1816, Nat. Hist. Anim. sans Verteb , vol. ii., p. l-»6. No. 2.
Ditto. Lamarck) Carpenter, 1850, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc ., vol. vi, p. 30,

pi. vii. figs. 24-30.
Ditto. Lamarck) Carpenter, 1856, Phil. Trans., p. 224, pis. iv. w., etc.
Ditto. (Lamarck) Carpenter, 1883, .Report on Genus Orbitolites, Zool.

• Challenger' Expedition, part xxi., p. 29, pi. v. figs. 14 -18. pis vi.,

vii., viii.
Ditto. (Lamarck) Brady, 1881, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 218, pi. xvi. figs. 1-6,

pi. xvii. figs. 1-6.

Fragments of this species are not uncommonly met with among

the coarser sittings, and we have one or two almost perfect speci-
mens representing early stages of the shell. They are doubtless
all derived from Eocene strata. According to Brady, the species
has been recorded by Fisher from the Bracklesham Beds of Hamp-
shire, but we have been unable to trace the record to which he
refers. It occurs in many continental Tertiary deposits.

316. Pelosina variabilis Brady.

Pelosina variabilis Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix., N.S. p. 30,

pi. iii. figs. 1-3.
Ditto. (Brady) Robertson, 1881 , Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc, Glasgow, vol. v., p. 163.
Ditto. (Brady) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger/ p. 235, pi. xxvi. figs. 7-9.
Ditto. (Brady) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (Brady) Flint, 1899, Report U.S. Nat. Museum (1897) p. 266, pi. iv.
fig. 1.
Among the washings of mud from the Mixon Beef we have
found many specimens, more or less fragmentary, referable to this
species. Individual fragments also occur in some of the shore
gatherings. This is one of the lowest types of the Foraminifera,
the organism consisting merely of a single chamber of irregular
shape, bounded by thick walls of fine mud upon a chitinous tube
or layer. The chitinous envelope frequently extends without an
external covering of mud at the oral end of the shell. It often
attains to a considerable size. In some of the ' Goldseeker '
dredgings from the North Sea, specimens half to three-quarters
of an inch in length are found.

44. Psammosphxra fusca Sehulze.

45. Saccammina sphmrica M. Sars.

Since, our original note upon these species was published we
have found a considerable number of specimens of both at various
points of the shore.

317. Hyperammina vagans Brady.

Hyperammina vagans Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix., N.S.,

p. 33, pi. v. fig. 3.
Ditto. Brady Eaensler, 1883, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. xxxix., p. 26,

pi. ii. figs. 2-6.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 307

Hyperammina migans (Brady) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. '260, pi.

xxiv. figs. 1-9.
Ditto. Brady) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foraminifera. p. 17.

pi. iv. fig. GO.
Ditto. (Brady) Earland, 1905, Jonrn. Qnekett Micr. Olnb, ser. 2, vol. ix.,

No. 57, p. 199.

This organism, which represents one of the simplest conceiv-
able types of Rhizopod life, occurs quite frequently in washings of
algse from the Mixon Reef, usually in a more or less fragmentary
condition. Fragments are also found in the shore-sands. There is
considerable variety in the texture of individual specimens, some
only utilizing the finest sand-grains mixed with a considerable
amount of cement, while in others the sand utilized is much coarser
and the cement is inconspicuous. Under favourable conditions
the species, which grows attached to other organisms, probably
attains to a considerable size, as many of the fragments appear
to have been broken from quite large patches of labyrinthic tubes.

Until Earland (supra) recorded this species from the neigh-
bouring locality of Eognor, where it is equally abundant, the only
British record was Canon Norman's from a dredging off Oban,
quoted by Brady (supra). The species is of world wide distribution,
but normally a deep water type, often occurring in enormous
abundance in deep dredgings.

318. Reophax ampullacea Brady.
(Plate IX. figs. 7, 8.)

Reophax ampullacea Brady, 1881, Quart. Jouru. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi., N.S.,

p. 49.
Ditto. Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 290, pi. xxx. fig. 6.
Ditto. (Brady) Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 320, pi. v. fig. 2.
Ditto. (Brady) Millett, 1899, Journ. K. Micr. Soc, p. 253, pi. iv. fig. 9.

One recent specimen, which presents the same curious selective
habits as we have remarked upon in dealing with Verneuilina
polystropha and Haplophragmium agglutinans, grains of garnet
and magnetite entering largely into the construction of the test.
The species may be considered as an arenaceous isomorph of
Lagena marginata. Reophax difflugiformis being an equivalent
isomorph of the rotund species Lagena globus/'.

319. Reophax in si ton,, is Williamson sp.

Proteoninafusiformis Williamson, 1858, Kecent Foram. Gt. Britain, pi. 1, fig. 1
Reophax fusiform is (Williamson) Siddall, 1879, Cat. Recent British Foram.,

p. 4.
Ditto. (Williamson) Brady, 1881, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 290, pi. xxx.

figs. 7-11.
Ditto. (Williamson) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.

We have a record of this species, but the slide having been
mislaid or lost we cannot give any further information respecting
it. It was, however, of recent origin, the species being widely
distributed round our coasts.

308 Transactions of the Society.

320. Haplophragmium latidorsatum Borneniann sp.

\ ina lutidorsata Bornemann, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesell.,

vol. vii. p. 339, pi. xvi. fig. 4 a, b.
Haplophragmium crassum Beuss, 1867, Sitzungsh. d. k. Ak;id. Wiss. Wien,

vol lv. p. 46, pi. i. figs. 1, 2.
Lituola subglobosa M. Sure, 1868, Yidensk.-Selsk. Forliandlinger, p. 250.
Ditto. (M.' Sars) G. 0. Sars, 1871, Vi.lensk.-Selsk. Forliandlinger, p. 253.
Haplophragmium rotundidorsatum JIautken, 1875, Mittheil. Jahrb. d. k. ung.

geol. Anstalt., vol. iv. p. 12, pi. i. fig. 2.
Haplophragmium lati.tlomat.um (Bornemann; Brady, 1881, Forani. 'Challenger/

p. 307, pi. xxxiv. figs. 7-10, 14.
Ditto. (Bornemann) Goi:s, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Forani. , p. 21,

pi. v. figs. 102-120.

We have one minute specimen derived from the rarely- visible
band of clays, named by Mr. Clement Eeid "the Selsey Beds,"
which appears to be referable to this species. If so, its presence in
our gatherings is certainly noteworthy, as H. latidorsatum is one of
the most typical of deep-water and cold-area forms. In the cold
area of the Shetland-Faeroe channel and in the Norwegian Deep
to the north of this channel the species occurs in such enormous
numbers as to form a true deposit or ooze, in which the presence
of other organisms is completely masked by the preponderance of
this species, which also attains to a considerable size. Apart from
this area, the records of H. latidorsatum are almost confined to very
deep water, except in the Arctic and Antarctic seas. As a fossil
it lias been recorded from several Eocene clays in Germany and
Hungary.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.

Fig. 1. — Bulimina selseyensis sp. n. x 100.
„ % Ditto. Ditto.
,. 3. — Bolivina tortuosa Brady, x 100.
,, 4. Ditto. Ditto.

,, 5. — Bolivina Durrandii Millett. x 100.
,, tj. — Bolivina eocsenica Terquem. x 100.
„ 7. Ditto. Ditto.

,, S. — Bolivina laevigata 'Williamson sp. x 100.
„ 9. Ditto Ditto.

,, 10. — Bolivina textilarioides Beuss. x 100.

„ 11. Ditto. Ditto.

,, 12. Ditto. Ditto.

,. 13. — Lagena perlucida Williamson, x 100.

,, 14 — Lagena squamosa var. Montagui Alcock sp. Base view, x 100.

„ 15. Ditto. Oral view, x 100.

,, 16- Lagena kicida Williamson sp. Double shell, x 100.

,, 17. — Polymorphina acuminata d'Orbigny sp. x 100.

,, 18. Ditto. Ditto.

., L9. — Dimorphina longicollis Brady sp. x 100.

,, 20. — Discorbina rosacea var. selseyensis var. nov. Superior side, x 100.

„ 21. Ditto. Inferior side, x 100.

,. 22. D. patelliformis var. corrugata var. nov. Inferior side, x 100.

„ 23. Ditto. Superior side, x 100.

,. 24. Ditto. Edge view, x 100.

JOUKN.R.MLCR.SOC. 1911. PI. X.

Wes t, Newman , li th .

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 309

321. Haplophragmium nanum Brady.
(Plate IX. figs. 9-11.)

Haplophragmium nanum Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol.xxi., N.S.

p. 50.
Ditto. Brady, 1881, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xliii. p. 99, pi. ii.

fig. 1.
Ditto. Brady, 1884, Forain. ' Challenger,' p. 311, pi. xxxv. figs. 6-8.
Ditto. Brady, 1894, Goes, Arctic and Scandinavian Foram., p. 22, pi. v.

figs. 124-127.

One very typical specimen, to all appearances recent, which
presents the usual rotalifonn character of the species. It presents
a somewhat curious feature, inasmuch as the sutures are marked
by a sort of thickening of the sandy deposit, giving them a limbate
appearance. Most of the records of this form are from Arctic
seas; otherwise it appears to be purely a deep-water form.

£0. Thurammina papillata Brady.

A few further fragments have been found of the organism we
described as referable tu this species, but not in such a condition
as to enable us to modify or amplify the views that we originally
expressed.

322. Trochummina rotaliformis J. Wright MS.

Trochammina infiata (Montagu) var. Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. K.
Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 331, pi. xiii. figs 11, 12.

Ditto. (Montagu) var. Balkwill and Wright, 1892, chaster, First Bep. South-
port Soc. Nat. Sci. (1890-1), p. 58.

A single well-developed recent specimen, which has been sub-
mitted to Mr. J. Wright and identified by him. As Mr. Wright
will, we understand, describe and figure the variety shortly under
the name rotaliformis, we refrain from further particulars of the
variety, which has not hitherto been accorded a distinctive name,
although presenting well-marked characteristics.

Chaster describes it as " rather rare " in most of his South port
gatherings. The same remarks apply to its distribution in Earland's
iNorth Sea dredgings, in many of which an occasional specimen may
be found. It is of more frequent occurrence in the dredgings taken
near the Xorwegian coast.

jt>*

323. Textularia concava Karrer sp.

Plecanium concavum Karrer, 1868, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien.,

vol. lviii. pt. i. p. 129, pi. i. fig. 3.
Textularia concava (Karrer) Brady, 1884. Forain. ' Challenger,' p. 360, pi. xlii.

figs. 13, 14; pi. xliii. tig. 11.
Textularia (?) concava (Reuss) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss.,

CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 271, pi. vi. tigs. 3, 4.
Ditto. (Karrer) Millett, 1899, Journ. B. Micr. Soc, p. 559, pi. vii. fig. 5.

Two specimens which we think should lie attributed to this
species have been found. They are fossils, somewhat pyritized,

;;|n Transactions of the Society.

and probably derived from a Tertiary day. They differ somewhat
from Karrer's specimens in respect of the rapidly increasing breadth
df the shell, which is also of practically uniform thickness from the
initial to the final chambers, i.e. the opposite faces of the shell are
practically parallel. Karrer's specimens were from the Miocene of
Kostej in the Banat. As a recent species it occurs in all the great
oceans, most of the records heing from dee]) water.

324. Textularia inconspicua (Brady) var. fuyosa Brady.

(Plate IX. fig. 12.)

Testularia jugosa Brady, 1884, Forani. 'Challenger,' p. 358, pi. xlii. fig. 7.
Ditto. (Bradv) Egger* 1893, Abhandl. k. Layer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii.

p. 273, pi. vi. figs. 19-21.
Textularia inconspicua var. jugosa (Brady) Millett, 1899, Malay Foram., Journ.

E. Micr. Soc, p.' 558, pi. vii. fig. 2.

A single, well preserved, and typical fossil specimen which
agrees perfectly with Brady's type figure (suprd). The shell is
hyaline and the sutures very strikingly limhate.

Millett (suprd) goes at some length into the relationship of this
variety with other species.

The variety is at the present day confined to tropical and sub-
tropical seas. Our knowledge of its geological range is somewhat
doubtful, for reasons explained by Millett.

325. Text u /aria rugosa ReuSS sp.

Fhcaniuin rugosum Eeuss, 1869, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien., vol. lix-

p. 453. pi. i. fig. 3 a, b.
Textularia rugosa (Reuss) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 363, pi. xlii.

figs. 23, 24.

A few small fossil specimens which present the characteristic
plications of the chambers which mark this species. At the present
day this is a tropical shallow-water species and under favourable
circumstances reaches a very large size. We have specimens from
the Philippine Islands £ inch in length. The original record by
Eeuss was from the Oligocene of the south of France.

826. SpiropJecta biformis Parker and Jones sp.

Textularia agglutinans var. hi for mis Parker and Jones, 1865. Phil. Trans.,

vol. civ. p. 370, pi. xv. figs. 23, 24.
Textularia biformis (Parker and Jones) Brady, 1878, Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist., ser 5, vol. i. p. 436, pi. xx. fig. 8.
Spiroplecta biformis (Parker and Jones) Bradv, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,'

p.' 376, pi. xlv. fips. 25-27.
Ditto. (Parker and Jones) Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. E. Irish Acad.,

vol. xxviii. Sci. |>. 333, pi. xiii. fig. 21 and woodcut tig. 2.
Ditto. (Parker and Jones) Bradv, 1887,' Synopsis British Eecent Foramini-

fera.
Ditto. (Parker and Jones) Millett, 1900, Malay Foram., Journ. E. Micr. Soc,

p. 8, pi. i. fig. 8.

One small fossil specimen of cretaceous origin. The species has
been recorded as far back as the Gault, and as a recent species it

Recent and Fossil Foravdnifera. 311

seems to be principally confined in cold areas in high latitudes,
although the ' Challenger' report records it from the South Atlantic
and South Pacific in depths from 1000 to 2375 fathoms.

69. Spiroplecta fusca Earland.

Many typical specimens of this species have been found in the
shore-sand opposite Medmerry Farm.

327. Oraudryina filiformis Bertlielin.

Q-ttudryina filiformis Berthelin, 1880, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, vol. i.

No. 5, p. 25, pi. i. fig. 8.
Ditto. (Berthelin) Wright, 1882, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Clul> (1880-1), App.

p. 180, pi. viii. fig. 3.
Ditto. (Berthelin) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 380, pi. xlvi. fig. 12.
Ditto. (Berthelin) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (Bertlielin) Brady, Parker and Jones, 1888, Trans. Zool. Soc, vol. xii.

p. 219, pi. xlii. fig. 6.
Ditto. (Berthelin) Millett, 1900, Malay Foram., Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 9.

A few very fine and perfect specimens, probably Cretaceous. The
triserial portion is very indistinct, the initial chamber is markedly
megalospheric, the apex of the shells in fact terminating in a little
spherical bulb. The largest specimen has no less than sixteen series
of chambers. G. filiformis was originally described from Gault
fossils from the north of France. It is fairly widely distributed in
the recent condition, and small specimens are not uncommon in
dredgings from the Shetland-Faeroe area.

328. (Jin ml i mi obscura Chaster.

Verneuilina poli/sfropha Eeuss sp., dimorphous form, Wright, 1886, Proc.

Belfast Nat. Field Club (18^5-6), App. p. 320, pi. xxvi. fig. 2.
Clavulina obscura Chaster, 1892, First Eep. Southport Soc Nat. Sci. (1890-1),

p. 58, pi. i. fig. 4.
Ditto. (Chaster) Earland, 1905, Journ. Quekett. Micr. Clul>, ser. 2, vol. ix.

No. 57, p. 206.

Recent specimens. This little species, originally described by
< naster from shore-mud and shallow dredgings at Southport (Lanes.),
may be nothing more than a starved form of Clavulina parisiensis
(d'Orb.), with which it agrees in the general formation of the test
and the triangulation of the earlier chambers. It is probably widely
distributed, although owing to its small size the records are few.
Wright has recorded it from shallow water off Ireland, and Earland
has records from anchor-mud, Valetta (Malta), and several of the
' Goldseeker ' dredqin^s in the North Sea.

329. Bulimina elegantissima (d'Orbigny) var. seminuda Terquem.

Bulimina seminuda Terquem, 1882, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, vol. ii.
Mem. 3, p. 117, pi. xii. fig. 21.

Bidimina elegantissim i var. seminuda (Terquem) Bradv, 1884, Foram. 'Chal-
lenger,' p. 403, pi. 1. figs. 23, 24.

Many specimens, fossils from an Eocene sand. Ter<|uem's
specimens were from the Eocene beds of Paris. Ours show a eon-

312 Transactions of the Society.

siderable variation in the relative length and breadth of tlie shell,
which may indicate two differenl sources of origin, especially as the
texture of the shell differs in the two forms.

;i30. Bulimina fusiformis Williamson.

Bulimina pupoides (d'Ovbignj)vax. fusiformis Williamson, 1858, Recent British

Foraminit'era, p. 63, figs. 129, RJ>0.
Bulimina presh var. ovata (d'Orbigny) Parker and Jones, 1862, Carpenter's

Introduction to the Foraminifera, p. 311.
Bulimina. fusiformis (Williamson) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent

Foraminit'era.
Ditto. (Williamson) Wright, 1900, Geol. Mag., ser. 4, vol. vii. p. 100, pi. v.

fig. 5.
Ditto. (Williamson) Millett, 1!»00, Malay Foram., Journ. R. Micr. Soc,

p. 275, pi. ii. fig. 2.

With one or two exceptions the specimens are pyritized fossils.
Parker and Jones (suprd) in their identification of Williamson's
figures, ascribed this species to B. ovata d'Orbigny, but, as pointed
out by Brady (swjjn?), Williamson's type is very distinct, and we do
not see any grounds for suppressing it. It is not very frequently
met with in shore gatherings, but it is very abundant in most muddy
dredgings made round the British Islands, and we have observed it
in many similar gatherings from nearly all parts of the world.
Millett's record is from the Malay Seas, where he states that the
specimens, " although neither numerous nor widely distributed, are
sufficiently characteristic."

Joseph Wright (supra) states that it is common in the Post-
C41acial beds of Cheshire.

331. Bulimina marginata d'Orbigny.

Bulimina m<rginuta d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 269, No. 4,

pL'xii. figs. 10-12.
Bulimina />i'j>oi<lfs var. marginata (d'Orbigny) Williamson, 1858, Recent

Foram. Great Britain, p. 62, pi. v. figs. 126, 127.
Bulimina presli var. marginata (d'Orbigny) Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil.

Trans., vol. civ. p. 372, pi. xv. fig. 10; pi. xvii. fig. 70.
Bulimina marginata (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1881, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 405,

pi. Ii. figs. 3-5.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminit'era.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foram., p. 46, pi. ix.

figs. 439-414.

Numerous specimens, the majority recent, the others fossil. As
usual, the specimens show a tendency to vary in the direction of
B. aouleata. B. marginata is very abundant in the recent condition
in the Atlantic, as far north as the Norwegian Fiords, although
Brady states that there is no certain record farther north than the
Faeroe Channel. It has been recorded in the fossil state from the
Tertiaries of Italy and from post-Tertiary deposits in Norway, Scot-
land, and Ireland.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 31">

332. Huh' mi mi /m /in Terquem.

Unlimimi j, iijii Terquem, 1882, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, vol. ii. Mem. 3,
p. 116, pi. xii. fig. 18.

One specimen only. Fossil. Terquem's species, although
obviously closely allied to B. elegantissima d'Orbigny, is yet suffi-
ciently distinctive to merit separation. His figure differs from
B. elegantissima in its more regular contour and neatness. The
shell is almost cylindrical in shape with rounded extremities, and
only one series of chambers is visible, externally wound in an
elongate spiral round the central axis. The sutures are flush with
the surface of the shell and the "comma" shaped aperture is set
on the flat face of the final segment.

Terquem's specimens were fossils from the Eocene of Vaudan-
court, " very rare."

333. lhilimimi selseyensis sp. n.

(Plate X. figs. 1, 2.)

The specimen figured is a fossil, and was at hrst regarded as an
abnormal specimen of Uvigerina selseyensis (Heron- Allen and Ear-
land), but closer examination having determined the entire absence
of Uvigerine aperture and the presence of a distinctly Bulimine
opening on the side of the shell, we can only regard it as a Buli-
mine isomorph of that species, from which it differs externally in
its broader and stouter build. It consists of four or five convolu-
tions of heart-shaped chambers arranged round a spiral axis, the
narrow ends being disposed towards the oral end of the shell. The
sutural lines were deeply undercut as in IT. selseyensis. The species
is possibly of much more frequent occurrence than is apparent, as
specimens would be readily confused with IT. selseyensis, which is
very common.

Length, 0'25 mm. Greatest breadth, nearly 0-2 mm.

Bulimina striato-punctata Terquem.

' Bulimint striato-jmnctata Terquem, 1882, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3,
vol. ii. Mem. 3, p. 116, pi. xii. fig. 19.

This form is also obviously near to B. elegantissima (d'Orbigny),
but is characterized by the foramina being placed in regular lines,
so that there is a superficial appearance of external striation. The
sutures are flush and the sides of the shell are almost parallel, the
aboral end being a blunt cone and the aperture set on the flattened
face of the terminal chamber.

Terquem's specimens were Eocene fossils from Septeuil, near
Paris ; " very rare."

We have several specimens, obviously fossil, which may be
referred to this species, as they possess the linear punctation charac-
teristic of Terquem's form.

::| i Transactions of the Society.

335. Hull mi mi siih/rrrs Brady.

BuUmina prtHli var. elegantisniind (d'Orbigny) Parker and Jours, 1865, Phil.

Trans., vol. civ. p. 374, pi. \\. figs. 1J -17.
BuUmina elegant issima (d'Orbigny) var. Brady, 1878, Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist., ser. 5, vol. i. p. 136, pi. \\i. fig. 12.
BuUmina snh/>ns Brady, 1881, Quart. Jourii. Micr. Sci., vol. \.\i. N.S. p. 55.
Ditto. (Brady) Wright, 1882, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club (1880-1), Appx.

p. 180, pi. viii. fig. 2.
Ditto. (Brady) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p 403, pi. 1. figs. 17-18.
Ditto. (Brady) Goi:s, 1891, Arctic aud Scandinavian Foraminiiera, p. 46,

pi: i\. figs. 445-153.

One specimen from the general shore sand, a pyritized fossil.
In the recent condition B. suhtcrrs is widely distributed, especially
in high latitudes, but so far as we are aware it has not previously
been recorded as a fossil. If its distribution at the present day may
be regarded as any clue to the origin of our specimen, it points to
its derivation from a Glacial, or post-Glacial deposit.

336. BuUmina Terquemiana, sp. n.

(Plate IX. figs. 13, 14.)

BuUmina <>t>Ii</ii<t Terquein, 1882, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, vol. ii.

Mem. 3, p. 118, pi. xii. fig. 23.

We have two specimens of the pretty little form figured
and described by Terquem under the name of B. obliqua. As,
however, the specific name obliqua has already been used by
d'Orbigny for a distinct form, we have associated Terquem's
specimens with the name of the author. His description is as
follows : " Shell irregular, more developed on one side than the
other; sub -rotund, enlarged anteriorly, domed posteriorly, and
furnished with a small spur. Domed on one side and incurved on
the other ; ornamented with very fine and curved sulci. Formed
of three whorls of prominent spiral layers, oblique, elongated,
chambers indistinct, the last whorl highly developed, aperture
round, situated in a. very large lateral depression of a pointed oval
shape furnished with a thickened rim. Terquem's specimens were
from the Eocene of Septeuil, near Paris — very rare — and ours are
doubtless fossils derived from a similar formation.

Length, 0*27 mm. Breadth, 0*18 mm.

82. VirgvMna aubsquumoba Egger.
Many further specimens have been found, both recent and fossil.

337. Bolivvna Dnr><ni<Ui Millett.

(Plate X. fig. 5.)

Bolivina Hurrandii Millett, 1900, Malay Foram., Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 544,

pi. iv. fig. 7.

One Large and very tine specimen of unquestionably recent
origin.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 315

The finding in an English shore gathering of this unique and
well developed specimen of a species known hitherto only from the
Malay Archipelago, represents possibly the greatest surprise of the
whole collection, and illustrates the glorious uncertainty of work
among the Foraminifera. The specimen has been submitted to
Mr. Millett, who agrees with our identification. Similar abnormal
occurrences are well known to all rhizopodists, and have sometimes
been regarded as due to the use of sieves which had not been
effectually cleaned after use with other material, but such an objec-
tion is discounted in this instance by the fact that the sieves used
for the Selsey material were new when first taken into use and
have been religiously preserved for Selsey gatherings only.

Millett's specimens were from various localities in the Malay
Archipelago, where it is one of the most typical and abundant
species. We have met with it in anchor mud from Singapore, but
the specimens were much smaller than our Selsey find.

338. Bolivina eoc&nia Terquem.
(Plate X. figs. 6, 7.).

Bolivina eocaenica Terquem, 1882, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, vol. ii.

Mem. 3, p. 148, pi. xv. fig. 18 a, b.
Bolivina gibbera Millett, 1894, Trans. E. Geol. 8oe. of Cornwall, p. 2, figs. 1, 2.

We have one perfect fossil specimen, which agrees very closely
with Millett's figure and description except in one or two minor
points. The sutures in our specimen are not so deeply sunk as in
Millett's figures, with the result that the chambers appear less
inflated than in the St. Erth specimens. The aperture in ours is
circular, as in Millett's fig. 2.

Millett's record was from the Pliocene beds of St. Erth in Corn-
wall— " frequent." His description of the test is as follows : "Test
ovoid, compressed, margin obtuse, lobulated, segments few and in-
flated, sutures deeply sunk, surface minutely punctate, aperture
panduriform, sometimes circular, surrounded by a thickened lip.
and situated in a more or less produced neck. This species is
nearly allied to B. textilarioides."

Terquem in ' Les Foraminiferes de l'Eocene de Paris ' has figured
under the name of Bolivina eocaenica a form which we take to be
identical with Millett's species. His description is as follows :
"Shell oval, compressed, smooth, not perforate, anteriorly broad-
ened, posteriorly narrowed and obtuse, rounded as to the periphery
and furnished with a blunt keel, composed of few chambers, rounded,
increasing regularly, the last two being triangular ; aperture at the
side of the last chamber, occupying its entire breadth, funnel shaped
(" panduriform " — Millett) with a thick lip, at the bottom of which
is an oval opening."

it will thus be seen that the principal difference between the

316 Transactions of the Society,

two descriptions lies in the fad that Terquem's specie- had a more
or Less carinated edge : this, however, is a feature of practically no
more than varietal importance. The constriction of the last chambei
in front of the oral aperture is much more pronounced in Milieu's
figures than in Terquem's, and this gives an air of greater refine-
ment and symmetry to the contour of the St. Erth specimen as
compared with Terquem's somewhat clumsy figure. Terquem does
not note it as being rare; according to Millett the species is frequent
in the Pliocene of St. Erth in Cornwall.
Length, 0-27 mm. Breadth, 0-19 mm.

339. Bolivina rvbusta Brady.

Bolivina robus/a Brady, 1881, Quart . Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. N.S. p. 57.

Ditto. (Brady) 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 421, pi. liii. figs. 7-9.

Ditto. (Brady) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., Gl. II. vol. xviii.

p. 291, pi. viii. figs. 31, 32.
Ditto. (Brady) Millett, 1900, Malay Foramini fera, Journ. K. Micr. Soc, p. 543.

A few specimens, apparently fossil, from a Tertiary shell-sand.

340. Bolivina t&ctilarioides Beuss.
(Plate X. figs 10-12.)

Bolivina textilarioides Eeuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d.k. Akad. Wiss. Wien., vol. xlvi.

p. 81, pi. x. fig. 1.
Ditto. (Beuss) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 419, pi. lii. figs. 23-25.
Ditto. (Brady) Millett, 1900, Malay Foraminitera, p. 542, pi. iv. fig. 5.
Bolivina Ixviqata (Williamson) Heron-Allen and Earland, 1909, Journ. R.

Micr. Soc, p. 335.

In the second number of our series- of papers we described our
specimens with reservations under the name Boliv'na laevigata
Williamson sp. After fuller consideration, and after examining a
considerable series of specimens of Williamson's type dredged in

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL

Fig.

i.-

-Discorbina pileolus d'Orbigny sp. Superior view, x 100.

IT

2.

Ditto. Inferior view, x 100.

>•

3.-

-Discorbina vnmquilateralis sp. n. Superior view, x 100.

))

4.

Ditto. Inferior view, x 100.

>)

5.

Ditto. Edge view, x 100.

))

6.-

-Pulvinulina haliotidea sp. n. Inferior view, x 100. Selsey specimen.

II

7.

Ditto. Ditto.

>>

8.

Ditto. Ditto.

JJ

9.

Ditto. Edge view, x 100.

J J

10.

Ditto. Superior view, x 100.

>)

11.

Ditto. Ditto.

JJ

12.-

Nonionina quadriloctilata sp.n. Oral view, x 100.

))

13.

Ditto. Side view. x 100.

>»

14.

Ditto. Ditto.

tj

15.

Ditto. Ditto.

i)

16.-

- Nonionina pauperdta Balkwill and Wright. Side view, x 100.

j>

17.

Ditto. Oral view, x 100.

'(Figs. 7 1 1 arc drawn from North Sea specimens.)

JOURN.R. MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. XI

4

11

13

16

WesxJIewmaii litli.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 31?

the North Sea, we are no longer able to agree with Balkwill, Millett
and Brady in the identification of B. laevigata with B. textilarioides.
Williamson's species, which has a peculiarly characteristic initial
portion and an entire absence of that roughened granular deposit in
the neighbourhood of the sutures which is so characteristic of the
type commonly referred to B. textilarioides Reuss, exists side by side
with Ueuss' type in many of Earlaud's North Sea dredgings, but we
have failed to trace any specimens showing characters intermediate
between the two species.

Our Selsey gatherings afford abundant instances of Eeuss' type
as figured by Brady, but none resembling Williamson's species, and
we therefore withdraw B. laevigata from the list and substitute
B. textilarioides. We have figured both forms in order to show the
differences to which we refer. The Selsey specimens are mostly
fossils, but there are several which to all appearance are of recent
origin.

341. Bolivina tortuosu Brady.

(Plate X. figs. 3, 4.)

Bolivina tortuosa Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. N.S. p. 57.
Ditto. (Brady) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 420, pi. lii. figs. 31-34.
Ditto. (Brady) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k.bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii.

p. 298, pi. viii. figs. 43, 44.
Ditto. (Brady) Millett, 1900, Malay Foraminifera, p. 543.
Ditto. (Brady) Earland, 1905, Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol. ix.

No. 57, p. 20^.

A few good and typical recent specimens.

The species, which is of fairly frequent occurrence in warm seas,
was first recorded in Britain by Earland (supra) from the neigh-
bouring locality of Bognor. It does not appear to have been met
with otherwise in Great Britain.

248. Ellipsoidella pleurostomdloides (H.-A. and E.).

Since the publication of our description and figures of Ellip-
soidella, Mr. F. W. Millett has drawn our attention to two papers
by Sig. Alfredo Silvestri,* in which that eminent and industrious
rhizopodist has already adumbrated the presence of the peculiar
internal tube or siphon (which characterizes our genus), in con-
nexion with other allied forms ; cf. Pleurostomella, Bulimina, Glan-
dulina, Polymorphina, etc. Dr. Silvestri's papers, to which we have
devoted considerable and careful attention, are extremely interest-
ins and suggestive, but a good deal of the matter seems to be of
a theoretical nature. It appears to us somewhat doubtful whether
his conclusions were arrived at as the result of a sufficiently ex-

» 1. A. Silvestri, Atti R. Accad. Sci. di Torino, vol. xxxviii. 1902-3, p. 206
"Alcune osservazioni sui Protozoi fossili piemontesi." 2. Mem, Pontif. Accad.
Rom. dei Nuovi Lincei, vol. xxii. p. 235. " Richerche strutturali su alcune forme
dei Trubi di Bonfornello (Palermo)." Rome, 1904.

June 21st, 1911 y

318 Transactions of the Society.

tended examination of the material in which these phenomena are
to be observed, and whether the creation of* new genera (Mlipso-
glandulina, Ellipsobulimina, Ellvpxopoliiniorphina) would be valid
in the absence of specific forms for which such generic names w^ould
appear to be required. All these " Ellipsoidiniform " types are so
rare, and so highly Localized, that it occurs to us that the whole
problem of their structure, and still more of their affinities, is still
a matter of conjecture, and one requiring more extended and par-
ticular research; and it appears to us that the creation of such
genera, pending such research, is likely to tend to confusion, and to
increase the difficulties which already beset the enquiry.

Since reading Dr. Silvestri's papers we have made a further
study of considerable minuteness of such material as is available to
us, including transparent preparations of particularly well preserved
specimens, with the result that we find that the internal siphon is
not by any means a constant feature in Pleurostomella alternans
Schwager. It is sometimes entirely absent, although a superficial
observer might be misled by the refraction of the inner walls of
the chambers so far as to conclude that the inward siphon, as
figured by Beissel and Silvestri, is uniformly present.

As to whether there are two distinct but isomorphic types, viz.
Pleurostomella devoid of siphon, and Ellipsopleurostomella, Silvestri,
(= Ellipsoidella Heron- Allen and Earland), in which the siphon is
normally present, or whether these two apparently distinct forms
are identical, i.e., that the siphon is a growth accessory to the
full development of the shell, we are not at present in a posi-
tion to express an opinion. We can only hope that the further
researches promised by Dr. Silvestri wall clear up this uncertainty,
and throw additional light on this interesting group of Ehizopods.
Pending such further investigations, it appears that our generic
name must be withdrawn in favour of Dr. Silvestri's earlier but, in
our opinion, less felicitous, title, Ellipsopleurostomella.

104. Lagena lucida Williamson sp.

(Plate X. fig. 16.)

We figure a particularly fine double specimen which we have
found. Twin Lagenm are very uncommon, and, so far as our ex-
perience goes, double specimens are always joined mouth to base, as
in the figure, and not mouth to mouth as usual in plastogamic
specimens in other genera. The abnormality is therefore probably
due to budding, and not to true plastogamy.

342. Lagena bicarinata Terqueni sp.

Fissnrina bicarinata Terqueni, 1882, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, vol. ii.

Mem. 3, p. 31, pi. i. fig. 24.
Lagena bicarinata (Terqueni) Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Micr. vol. iii.

p. 82, pi. ii. tig. 4, and trifacial pi. iii. fig. 9.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 319

Lagena bicarinata (Terquem) Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish
Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 342, pi. xii. fig. 80.

Ditto. (Terquem) Wright, 1886, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, Appx. ix.
p. 320, pi. xxvi. fig. 8.

Ditto. (Terquem) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.

Ditto. (Terqnem) Millett, 1901, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. E. Micr. Soc,
p. 624, pi. xiv. fig. 13.

Two specimens, both clearly fossil, but from different deposits.
One apparently Cretaceous, the other probably from a Tertiary sand.
Both the specimens are quite plain ou the surface, and devoid of
the peculiar thickened and concentric ring of shell-substance which
Terqnem figures in his fossil specimens from the Eocene of Paris.
We have not observed this concentric thickening in any of the
numerous recent specimens from various Localities which have
come under our observation. The species, though never very
abundant, has a practically world-wide distribution.

343. Lagena gracillima Seguenza sp.

An, /•hori na gracilis Costa, 1856, Atti dell' Accad. Pont., p. 121, pi. xi. fig. 11.
Amphorina gracillima Seguenza, 1862, Foram. Monotal. Mess., p. 51, pi. i.

tig. 37.
Lagena gracillima (Seguenza) Jones, Parker and Brady, 1866, Monogr. Foram.

Crag, p. 45, pi. i. figs. 36, 37.
Ditto. (Seguenza) Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 4.
Ditto. (Seguenza) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 456, pi. lvi. figs.

19-28.
Ditto. (Seguenza) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (Seguenza) Millett, 1901, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. R. Micr. Soc,

p. 491.

One or two specimens, recent, rather weak, representing passage
forms between L. clavata and L. gracillima.

311. Lagena hispida Reuss.

Lagena hispida Reuss, 1858, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch., vol. x.

p. 434.
Ditto. Reuss, 1863, Sitzungsl >. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien., vol. xlvi. p. 335, pi. vi.

figs. 77-79.
Lagena Jeffreysii Brady, 1866, Report Brit Assoc., Trans. Sections, p. 70.
Lagena hispida (Reuss) Jones, Parker and Brady, D66, Monou'. Foram. Crag,

p. 30, No. 15.
Ditto. (Reuss) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 459, pi. lvii. figs. 1-4;

pi. lix. figs. 2, 5.
Ditto. (Reuss) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (Reuss) Millett, 1901, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 6.

The specimens are perfect and characteristic, and probably fossil.
The fine spines with which the specimens were originally covered
have been worn down, leaving nothing but a shagreen-like texture
of the shell. The specimens nre probably derived from Tertiary
sands, as they have the appearance characteristic of such fossils.

Y 2

320 Transactions of the Society.

One of them has a Long neck devoid of external ornament, another
is entosoleniau with a small produced external aperture. The afnni-
tiea between tin- rugose L«u<-i\;i: have been recently made the subject
of an ingenious study by Signor Fornasini.*

345. Lagena lineatu Williamson sp.

Entosolenia Uneata Williamson, 1848, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2 vol i.

p. 18, pi. ii. fig. 18.
Entosolt in', i ghbosa, var. Uneata Williamson, 1858, Eecent Foraminifera of Great

Britain, p. 9, pi. i. fig. 17.
Lagena caudata (d'Orbij-ny) Parker and Jones, 1862, Carpenter's Introduction

to the Foraminifera, Appx. p. 309.
Lagena Uneata (Williamson) Reuss, 1863, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

vol. xlvi. p. 328, pi. iv. fig. 48.
Ditto. (Williamson) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 461, pi. Mi. fig. 13.
Ditto. (Williamson) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Eecent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (Williamson) Millett, 1901, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. E. Micr. Soc,

p. 7.

Numerous specimens, the majority recent, a few pyritized fossils.
The species is common in recent British shore-gatherings and has
been recorded from Post-Tertiary deposits in Scotland and Ireland.

346. La;jena orbignyana var. walleriana J. Wright.

Lagena orbignyana var. walleriana Wright, 1886, Proc. E. Irish Acad., ser. 2,
vol. iv. p. 611; and ibid. 1891, ser. 3, vol. i. p. 481, pi. xx. fig. 8.

Ditto. (Wright) Millett, 1901, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. E. Micr. Soc,
p. 627, pi. xiv. fig. 19.

One specimen, fossil, probably from an Eocene shell sand. This
variety, which has the centre of the convex faces ornamented with
a solid boss of shell-substance, was recorded by Wright from dredg-
ings at various depths off the south coast of Ireland, but does not
appear to have been noticed previously in the fossil condition,
although its fossil distribution probably coincides more or less
with that of the type, i.e. from the commencement of Tertiary
time-.

317. Lagena perlucida Williamson.

(Plate X. fig. 13.)

Lagena vulgaris var. perhccida Williamson, 1858, British Eecent Foramini-
fera, p. 5, figs. 7, 8.

Many typical examples, all recent.

Williamson's figures represent transition types between L. Isevis
Montagu sp. and L. semidriata Will sp. and L. sulcata W. & J.
sp., hut hardly referable to any of these three species.

As such they are perhaps worth recording under their original
name, although having no specific value.

* 0. Fornasini, Eevisione delle Lagena scabre fossili in Italia. R. Accad. ScL
dell' 1st. di Bologna, 27 Feb. 1910.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 321

318. Lagena quadruta Williamson sp.

Entosolenia marginata var. quadrata Williamson, 1858, Rec. Foram. of Gt.

Britain, p. 11, pi. i. figs. 27, 28.
Lagena lucida var. quadrata (Williamson) Reuss, 1862, Sitz. k. Akad. Wise.

Wien, vol. xlvi. p. 324, pi. ii. fig. 26.
Lagena quadrata (Williamson) Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Jour. Micr., vol. iii.

p. 81, pi. ii. fig. 8.
Ditto. (Williamson) Brady, 1881, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 475, pi. lix. figs.

3, 16 ; pi. lx. fig. 5.
Ditto. (Williamson) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (Williamson) Millett, 1901, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. R. Micr. Soc,

p. 496, pi. viii. fig. 18.

One specimen, probably fossil, belonging to the carinate divi-
sion. There are two distinct forms commonly referred to L. quad-
rata ; one, with rounded edges, the other with a carinate margin.
The two forms serve to bridge the interval separating L. laevigata
from L. marginata.

349. Lagena squamosa var. Montagui Aleock sp.
(Plate X. figs. 14, 15.)

Entosolenia Montagui Aleoek, 1865, Proc. Lit. and Phil. Soe. Manchester,

vol. iv. No. 15.
Lagena squamosa var. Montagui (Aleock) J. Wright, 1900, Irish Naturalist,

vol. ix. No. 3, p. 54, pi. ii. fig. 2.
Ditto. (Aleock) Earland, 1905, Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol. ix.

No. 57, p. 212.

The large wild-growing variety of L. squamosa originally de-
scribed by Aleock under the name Entosolenia Montagui occurs at
Selsey occasionally, as elsewhere whenever the type is abundant.
We figure a specimen, however, which is rather noticeable owing
to the fact that it combines the typical reticulate areolations with
irregular costse.

The specific name Montagui* has recently been employed by
Silvestri for spherical ento-ecto-solenian varieties of L. hexagona
(Williamson sp.). The emplo}rment of a specific name which has
already been allocated to a distinctive variety of a closely allied
species seems to us likely to tend to confusion, and is greatly to be
deplored.

350. Lagena costata Williamson sp.

Entosolenia costata Williamson, 1858, Recent Foram. of Great Britain, p. 9,

pi. i. fig. 18.
Lagena costata (Williamson) Wright, 1877, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club

(1876-77), Appendix, p. 103, pi. iv. figs. 11-13.
Lagena i vulcata (Walker and Jacob) pars Bradv, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,'

p. 462, pi. lvii. fig. 34.

* Lagena Montagui, Silvestri, 1902, " Lageniuse del Mare Tirreno," Mern. Pont.
Ace. dei Nuovi Liucei, vol. xix. p. 153, figs. 40-13.

322 Transactions of the Society.

Layena costata (Williamson) Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish A.cad.,

vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 338, pi. xiv. figs. 3-5.
Ditto. (Williamson) Brady, 1887, -Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.

Ditto. (Williamson) Millett, 1901, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. R Micr. Soc,
p. 7, pi. i. fig. 8.

One fossil specimen. Although frequently regarded and figured
as an entosolenian variety of L. sulcata (Walker and Jacob) this
type has sufficiently well marked characters to deserve separation.
The grooves between the prominent sulci are usually neatly rounded
off and the edges of the sulci are also smooth and finished.

351. Nodosaria arundineu Schwager.

Nodosaria wrundinea Schwager, 1866, Novara Exped. Geol., vol. ii. p. 211

p] v. figs. 43-45.
Ditto. (Schwager) Sherborn andiChapman, 1886, Journ. R. Micr. Soc, vol. vi.

p. 747, pi. xiv. figs 28, 29.

A few typical fragments of this fragile species, fossils, appa-
rently derived from a shell-sand. The species has been recorded
from the London Clay by Sherborn and Chapman (suprd).

352. Nodosaria calomorpha Reuss.

Nodosaria calomorpha Reuss, 1865, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xxv.

p. 129, pi. i. figs. 15-19.
Nodosaria (Denfalina) consobrina (d'Orbigny) l'arker and Jones, 1865, Phil.

Trans., vol. civ. p. 342, pi. xvi. fig. 3.
Nodosaria calomorpha (Eeuss) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 497, pi. lxi.

figs. 23-27.
Ditto. (Reuss) Chaster, 1892, First Eeport Southport Soc. Nat. Sci. (1890-

1891), p. 63, pi. i. fig. 12.
Ditto. (Eeuss) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foraminifera, p. 72,

pi. xiii. figs. 712-713.
Ditto. (Eeuss) Millett, 1902, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. E. Micr. Soc, p. 513.

One Cretaceous fossil. The fossil records are apparently con-
fined to the Tertiary, but owing to its small size this species might
be easily overlooked, and its very simple structure would lead one
to expect a far greater geological age for the form.

353. Nodosaria scalaris Batsch sp.

Nautilus (Orthoceras) sea/aria Batsch, 1791, Conchyl. des Seesandes, No. 4,

pi. ii. fig. 4.
Nodosaria radicula (Montagu) Williamson, 1858, Eecent Foram. of Great

Britain, p. 15, pi. ii. figs. 36-38.
Nodosaria scalaris (Batsch) Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ.

p. 310, pi. xvi. fig. 2.
Ditto. (Batsch) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 510, pi. lxiii. figs. 28-31.
Ditto. (Batsch) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Eecent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (Batsch) Gol;s, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foraminifera, p. 73,

pi. xiii. figs. 716-718.
Ditto. (Bat scli) Millett, 1902, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. E. Micr. Soc,

]). 520, pi. xi. fig. 10.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 323

One typical recent specimen of the type usually found in British
dredgings, in which all the chambers are of practically the same
diameter. This appears to be due to the large size of the primor-
dial chamber, and may possibly represent the megalospheric form
(if the shell. So far as our experience goes, the species is very rarely
fouDd in shore-sands, though frequent in shallow water dredgings
in temperate and tropical seas all over the world. With increasing
depth the shell displays a tendency to a rapid increase in the
diameter of the successive chambers, which thus become more or
less spherical in shape. This again is probably due to the initial
chamber being of the microsphere type, but it would require a
long series of careful measurements to verify this observation,
which we record without further comment.

354. Marginulina glabra d'Orbigny.

Marginulina glabra d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 259, No. 6;
Modele, No. 55

Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1870, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. vi.
p. 296, pi. xii. fig. 3.

Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 527, pi. lxv. figs. 5, 6.

Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Burrows, Siierborn and Baily, 1890, Journ. R. Micr. Soc,
p. 10, pi. x. fig. 1.

Vaginulina glabra (d'Orbigny) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Fora-
minifera, pi. xi. figs. 659-661.

Marginulina glabra (d'Orbigny) Flint, 1899, Keport U.S. Nat. Museum for
1897, p. 313, pi. ix. fig. 1.

Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Millett, 1902, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. B. Micr. Soc,
p. 526.

Several specimens, all fossil, and apparently from Tertiary
shell-sands. They represent the two most widely divergent types
of this extremely variable species, namely, those in which the
initial spirol portion is reduced to a minimum, and is followed by
a series of nodosarian chambers (compare 31. attenuata Neugeboren,
1851, Berh. Mitth. Siebenbiirgen Ver. Nat. Jahrg. ii., p. 121, pi. iv.
figs. 3-6) and those in which there is a distinct spiral portion,
followed by a few swollen and embracing Glanduline chambers.
This variable type has been recorded as far back as the Lias, and
is of frequent occurrence in the present day in dredgings at all
moderate depths.

355. PoTymorphina acuminata d'Orbigny sp.
(Plate X. figs. 17, 18.)

Pyrulina acuminata d'Orbigny, 1840, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, vol. iv. p. 43,
pi. iv. figs. 18, 19. Facsimile in Science Gossip, 1870, p. 157,
fig. 150.

Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Eeuss, 1845-6, in Geinitz, Grand. Verstein, p. 670,
pi. xxiv. fig. 64.

324 Transactions of the Society.

Atractolina sp. Von Schlicht, 1869, Forain. Septar. Pietzpuhl, p. 70, No. 397.

pi. xxv. figs. 9, 10.
Pyrvlina sp. Von Schlicht, 1869. Foram. Septar. Pietzpuhl, No. 442, pi. xxv.

fig. 53.
Polymorphina acuminata (d'Orbigny) Brady, Parker and Jones, 1870, Trans.

Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxvii. p. 219, pi. xxxix. fig. 4, a b.

Frequent, all fossil, and from various sources.

This pretty little fusiform variety of the lactea type might
easily be passed for a Glandulina, but for the oblique direction of
the Hush sutural lines.

It occurs iu the Chalk and subsequent Eocene deposits, but is
apparently an extinct variety.

356. Polymorphma lactea var. amygdaloides Eeuss.

GldbuUna amygd'iloides (?) Reuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch.,

vol. iii. p. 82, pi. vi. fig. 47.
Polymorphina amygdaloides Eeuss, 1855, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

vol. xviii. p. 250, pi. viii. fig. 84.
Polymorphina Itctea var. amygdaloides (Reuss) Brady, Parker and Jones, 1870,

Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. xxvii. p. 214, woodcuts.
Polymorphina amygdaloides (Reuss) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 560,

pi. lxxi. fig. 13.
Ditto. (Reuss) Millett, 1903, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 261.

One specimen, infiltrated with pyrites, probably derived from
a Tertiary clay. The variety, like the type, has a very wide range
in time, and probably extends back to the Jurassic epoch. It is
merely a compressed variety of P. lactea W. and J. sp.

132. Polymorphina myristiformis Williamson.
This is a frequent species in the shore-sands.

357. Polymorphina prdblema d'Orbigny.

Polymorphina (Guttulina) prdblema d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii.

p. 266, No. 14; Modele, No. 61.
Guttulina problema (d'Orbigny) d'Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Vienne, p. 224,

pi. xii. figs. 26-28.
Guttulina austriaca (d'Orbigny) d'Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Vienne, p. 223,

pi. xii. figs. 23-25.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII.

Linderina bntgesii Schlumberger.

Fig. 1. — Early stage. Side view.

„ 2. Ditto. Ditto.

,, 3. Ditto. Edge view.

,, 4. — Adult stage.

,, 5. Ditto.

,, 6. — Horizontal section of a large specimen.

,, 7. — Vertical section of a large specimen.

(All figures drawn to a magnification of 100 diameters.)

JOURN.R.MICR.SOC. 1911. Pl.XII

West, Newman Tith.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 325

Polymorphina proNema (d'Orbigny) Brady, Parker and Jonos, 1870, Trans.

Linn. Soc. Lond , vol. xxvii. p. -225, pi. xxxix. fig. 11.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1870, Edinburgh Catalogue, p. 5.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 568, pi. Ixxii. fig. 20,

pi. lxxiii. fig. 1.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Millett, 1903, Malay Foraminifera, Journ. R. Micr. Soc,

p. 264.

Must of our specimens are fossils, and judging from appearances,
have been derived from various sources. The species extends back
as far as the Lias, and is of world-wide distribution in shallow
waters at the present day. The difference between P. problema
and P. communis is so slight as scarcely to merit separation.

358. Polymorphina thouini d'Orbigny.

Polymorphina thouini d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 265, No. 8;

Modele, No. 23.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, Parker and Jones, 1870, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond.,

vol. xxvii. p. 232, pi. xl. fig. 17.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 567, pi. Ixxii. fig. 18.

A single pyritized fossil, extremely attenuated. According to
Brady this is an extremely rare form in the recent condition. As
a fossil it occurs in the Eocene of the Paris Basin and subsequently.

359. Dimorphina longicollis Brady sp.

(Plate X. fig. 19.)

Polymorphina lanceolata (pars) Reuss, 1870, Sitz. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

vol. lxii. p. 487, No. 12. Von Schlicht, 1870, Foram. Pietzpuhl,

pi. xxxi. figs. 25-28.
Polymorphina longicollis Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. (n.s.)

p. 64.
Ditto. (Brady) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 572, pi. lxxiii. figs.

18-19.

We have a single perfectly preserved fossil specimen which, if
Brady's identification of Von Schlicht's figures is correct, is refer-
able to Brady's species. Our specimen, as will be seen from the
drawing, agrees exactly with Von Schlicht's figure. The surface
is quite smooth, whereas tine recent specimens of P. longicollis are
always, or nearly always, hispid.

The question of the necessity of allocating dimorphous types
of Polymorphina to the sub-genus Dimorphina is one which is
open to very great doubt, but if the sub-genus Dimorphina is to be
retained at all it cannot be used to greater advantage than for the
recording of such abnormal species as Brady's P. longicollis, which
in the dimorphous arrangement of the chambers and produced Uvi-
gerine neck differs widely fn »m the accepted definition of Polymor-
phina. In the recent state D. longicollis is extremely rare, and

326 Transactions of the Society.

according to Brady essentially a deep-water species, ranging from
L100 to 2435 fathoms. Von Schlicht's specimens were from the
Tertiaries of Pietzpuhl.

360. Uvigerina asperula Czjzek.

/ rvigerina asperula Czjzek, 1847, Ilaidinger's Naturw. Ahhandl., vol. ii. p. 146,

pi. xiii. figs. 14, 15.
Uvigerina Hspida Schwager, 1866, Novara Exped. geol. Theil, vol. ii. p. 249,

pi. vii. fig. 95.
/ *vigi rina aspi rula (Czjzek) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 578, pi. Ixxv.

figs. 6-8.
Ditto. (Czjzek) Flint, 1899, Eeport U.S. Nat. Museum for 1897, p. 320,

pi. lxviii. fig. 4.

Many excellent specimens, some of which are apparently recent.
The species is common round our coasts in comparatively deep
water, i.e., at depths from 100 fathoms downward, but so far as we
are aware it has not been recorded in shore-sands, except from the
neighbouring locality of Bognor, where Earland found a single very
weak specimen. As a fossil it is common in many Miocene and
later Tertiary beds.

361. Sagrina asperula Chapman.

Sagrina asperula Chapman, 1896, Foram. of Gault of Folkestone, Journ. R.
Micr. Soc, p. 581, pi. xii. fig. 1.

We have a few specimens of this little species, which was
described from the Gault of Folkestone. Ours are apparently
Cretaceous fossils.

362. Sagrina dimorpha Parker and Jones.

Uvigerina {Sagrina) dimorpha Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ.

p. 420, pi. xviii. fig. 18.
Sagrina dimorpha (Parker and Jones) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,'

p. 582, pi. lxxvi. figs. 1-3.
Ditto. (Parker and Jones) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foramini-

fera.
Ditto. (Parker and Jones) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foram.,

p. 52, pi. ix. figs. 510-11.

A few small specimens, one apparently fossil, the others recent.

Sagrina dimorpha has a world-wide range, occurring at mode-
rate depths in all the oceans. It is the only species of the genus
which has a northern as well as a tropical distribution, for it occurs
in many of the Norwegian fiords at least as far north as the Sogne
Fiord, in which it has been dredged by Earland at a depth of
260 metres. It has been recorded by Kobertson from low water
at Girvan, Scotland, but otherwise we know of no British record, nor
of any fossil record.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 327

14G. Globigerina pachyderma Ehrenberg.

We have found very typical specimens of this boreal form, but
the figures we gave in Plate XVIII. figs. 4 and 5 (1909) were of
a new species of Nonionina, which we describe and figure again
post No. 390 and Plate XI. figs. 12-15.

363. Spirillina lucida Sidebottom.

Spirilllna hid, hi Sidebottom, 1908, Foraminifera from Delos, Mem. Man-
chester Lit. and Phil. Soc, vol. lii. No. 13, p. 9, pi. ii. fig. 9.

We have several specimens, apparently derived fossils, which
answer to Sidebottom's description and figures. The structure, how-
ever, is very obscure, and in the absence of any visible aperture we
do not feel satisfied that the specimens may not represent the
superior external shell of some species of Discorbina in which the
septal divisions and base have been dissolved during a process of
plastogamy.

364. Discorbina araucana d'Orbigny sp.

Rosalina araucana d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 44, pi. vi.

figs. 16-18.
Discorbina araucana (d'Orbigny) Parker and Jones, 1872, Quart. Journ. Geol.

Soc, vol. xxviii. p. 115.
Ditto. (d'Orbignv) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 645, pi. lxxxvi.

figs. 10-11.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Sidebottom (1908), Foram. from Delos, Mem. Manchester

Lit. and Phil. Soc, vol. lii. No. 13, p. 12.

< )ne small well preserved specimen; a pyritized fossil. The
geological distribution of D. araucana is probably identical with
the more typical form D. rosacea, but the records are few.

365. Discorbina bertheloti d Orbigny.

Discorbina bertheloti d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 135, pi. i. figs. 28-30.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1864, Trans. Linn. Soc Lond., vol. xxiv. p. 469,

pi. xlviii. fig. 10.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Bradv, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 650, pi. lxxxix.

figs. 10-12.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Bradv, 1887, Synopsis British l'ecent Foraminifera.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Flint, 1891), Pep. U.S. Nat. Museum for 1897, p. 327,

pi. lxxii. fi.u. 4.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) E-irland, 1905, Journ. Quefcett Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol.ix.

No. 57, p. 223.

A few examples, typical and apparently all fossil, some of them
highly pyritized, In the recent condition I). bertheloti has practi-
cally a world-wide distribution and ranges down to considerable
depths. It is more typically an arctic or, at any rate, a northern
form. Brady gives no information as to its occurrence in the fossil
condition.

328 Transactions of tfie Society.

366. Discorbina eximia Hantken.

Discorbina eximia Hantken, 1875, Mittheil. Jahrb. d. k. ung. geol. Anstalt.,

vol. iv. p. 76, pi. xv. fig. 8.
Discorbina elegans Hantken, 1875. Id., p. 76, pi. ix. fig. 3.
Discorbina eximia (Hantken) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 616,

pi. Ixxxviii. fig. 9.

One small specimen, fossil, which appears to be referable to this
species, i uiginally described from the Tertiaries of Hungary. In the
recent condition it appears to be confined to shallow water in the

tropics.

367. Discorbina imequilateralis sp. n.

(Plate XI. figs. 3-5.)

The curious little specimen which we figure is so very distinctive
in its appearance that it seems to merit a specific name, although
its occurrence is so far limited to a single well preserved fossil
specimen. The marked distinctive feature of the shell is the dis-
similarity between its upper and under surfaces. The superior
surface is in one plane and consists of about two convolutions,
six or seven chambers in the outer whorl. The inferior surface
is smaller, so that the shell when viewed on edge presents the
appearance of a horizontal conic section. The superior surface is
rough, owing to the fact that the perforations are abnormally large
for such a small species, the sutural lines somewhat depressed,
giving a " puckered " appearance to the surface of the shell. Viewed
side wise, the chambers are observed to be coarsely corrugated from
edge to edge. The inferior surface is depressed, sinking away from
the corrugated edge to a median line, running across the axis of
the shell ; this causes the central depression to be oval or elliptic,
and not circular, as is usually the case. The perforations on the
sides and base are very minute when compared with those on the
apex of the shell ; the septal divisions are not visible on the sides
or inferior surface, and the general appearance of the inferior surface
resembles Spirillina rather than Discoroiim.

Length, 0-23 mm. Breadth, 0-2 mm.

368. Discorbina nitida Williamson sp.

Rotalina nitida Williamson, 1858, Eecent Foram. of Gt. Britain, p. 51, pi. iv.

figs. 106-108.
Ditto. (Williamson) Terquem, 1875, Ess. Aniin. Plage Dunkerque, pt. i.

p. 26, pi. ii. fig. 9.
Rotalia nitida (Williamson) Brady, 1884, Foram 'Challenger,' pp.627, 705.
Ditto. (Williamson) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foraminifera.
Discorbina nitida (Williamson) Wright, 1891, Proc. E. Irish Acad., ser. 3,

vol. i. No. 4, p. 490.
Ditto. (Williamson) Sidebottom, 1908, Foram. from Delos, Mem. Manchester

Lit. and Phil. Soc, vol. lii. No. 13, p. 13, pi. iv. fig. 6.

Recent and Fossil Fovaminifera. 329"

Fossil and recenl specimens. The fossils are not in a good state
of preservation, having been apparently obtained from some dis-
integrated crystalline deposit, probably a limestone of Tertiary a;
Some of the recent specimens are exceptionally large and fine.

This is a very well marked type, and possesses certain charac-
teristic features in the shape of a flat depressed shell with broad
straplike sutures, which render it easy of identification. There is
also a characteristic glassiness about the texture due to the ex-
tremely minute size of the perforations which separates it from
other species of Discorbina, most of which are rather coarsely
perforate.

Brady {supra), for some reason not very apparent, placed the
species in the genus Rotalia, and considered it to be an isomorph
of Discorbina turbo (d'Orbigny). He regarded it as a starved
modification of Rotalia beccarii (Linne sp.), but it appears to us to
have nothing in common with that species. On the other hand, it
is evidently very closely allied to Discorbina rosacea d'Orb. sp., of
which it may perhaps be regarded as a simple and original variety.

369. Discorbina patelliformis Brady var. corruga-ta var. n.

(Plate X. figs. 22-24.)

Discorbina patelliformis Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 647, pi. lxxxviii.
fig. 3; lxxxix. fig. 1.

The curious little shell which we figure should, we think, be
referred to this species, although it differs from the type in its
sutures. These, instead of being broad but flush bands of clear
shell-substance as in the type, are strongly limbate, some of them
projecting almost as carimr. The under surface of the shell is
broken, and has somewhat the appearance of having once been
joined in plastogamy with another shell.

The specimen is apparently a fossil. Brady's specimens were
from the Pacific. It is generally distributed in warm seas.

Breadth, 0'2 mm. Height, 0-14 mm.

370. Discorbina pileolus d'Orbigny sp.
(Plate XL figs. 1, 2.)

Valvulina pileolus d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Arner. Merid., p. 47, pi. i. figs.

15-17.
Discorbina pileolus (d'Orbigny) Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ.

p. 385.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1881, Forain. 'Challenger,' p. 649, pi. lxxxix.

figs. 2-4.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Chapman, 1900, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond. Zool., vol. xxviii.

p. 191.

A few minute and very weakly developed specimens have been
found, which we refer to this species. The shells, which are in

330 Transactions of tin Society.

ellenl preservation bul are doubtless fossils, are extremely com-
pressed, the relation of their heighl to the breadth being Less than
one quarter of the usual dimensions. The typical curve of the
chambers is, however, present, as is also the customary radial line
of beaded markings on the base, although these arc remarkably

delicate.

Ai the present day this species appears to lie confined to the
Pacific and Australian seas, where it is often fairly abundant. It
i- one of the few species of Foraminifera in which "plastogamy"
appears to occur with any frequency, twin specimens being nearly
always present in any gathering which contains many specim
of the form. It has been recorded from the Eocene of Paris and
some later deposits.

Breadth, 0 ■ 37 mm. Height, 0 • 05 mm.

371. Discorbina polystomelloides Parker and Jones.

Discorbina polystomelloides Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans, vol. civ.

p. 421, pi. xix. fig. 8.
Ditto. (Parker and Jones) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 652, pi. xci.

fig.l-
A few well preserved specimens, all fossil, and, judging from
their condition, derived from at least two and perhaps three different
deposits. At the present day the species is of fairly common occur-
rence in the coral sands of the Australian and Pacific seas. We
have no knowledge of any previous occurrence as a fossil, but our
specimens are doubtless derived from some of the Tertiary deposits,
characterized by tropical and sub-tropical fauna.

372. Discorbina rosacea d'Orbigny sp. var. Selseyensis var. n.
(Plate X. figs. 20,21.)

We figure a curious little Discorbina which we think should be
attributed to this species, or which perhaps may form a link con-
necting D. rosacea, D. nitida, and D. orbicularis. Two or three
specimens only have been observed, all recent, and all characterized
by the same constant features.

The shell, which seen from above is almost exactly circular in
outline, consists of about two or three convolutions of chambers.
The shell is dome-shaped on the superior surface, concave below :
sutures flush, clear bands of shell-substance as in D. nitida ; the
outer margin of the shell presents a similar band of shell-substance.
On the inferior side the surface of the chambers is covered with
weak corrugations diverging from the central axis of the shell ;
texture glassy (hyaline); perforations extremely minute. Apart
from the under surface of the shell this variety might readily be
mistaken for a dome-shaped specimen of D. nitida, but the mark-
ings on the inferior surface are peculiarly distinctive. The tangential

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 331

curve of the chambers as seen on the superior face, and the arrange-
ment of the chambers on the inferior face (apart from the superficial
markings), approach more nearly to D. orbicularis than to either
D. rosacea or D. nitida.
Diameter, O'-l mm.

373. Discorbina tabernacularis Brady.

Discorbina tah rnacidaris Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. (n.s.)

p. 65.
Ditto. (Brady) 1881, Foraui. ' Challenger,' p. 618, pi. Ixxxix. figs. 5-7.
Ditto. (Brady; Egeer, 1893, Abhaudl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii.

p. 390. pi. xv. figs. 58-60, 79.
Ditto. (Brady) Millett, 1903, Malay Foram., Journ. K. Micr. Soc, p. 700.
Ditto. (Brady) Sidebottorn, 1908, Foram. from Delos, Mem. Manchester Lit.

aud Phil. Soc, vol. lii. No. 13, p. 15.

A few specimens, apparently recent. This has usually been
regarded as a warm-water species, the 'Challenger' localities
being tropical, the northernmost being Cape Verde. We have,
however, met with it in many localities in the Mediterranean, so
that its occurrence on our southern coasts is rendered not im-
probable. We are not aware of records of .its occurrence in the
fossil condition.

374. Discorbina ventricosa Brady.

Discorbina ventricosa Brady, 1881, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 654, pi. xci. fig. 7.

Many specimens, fossil, in good preservation. The umbilical
depression on the inferior surface typical of the species is particu-
larly marked, more so even than in Brady's figure. The superior
surface is smooth, not hispid, and in this respect our specimens
may perhaps be regarded as connecting Brady's D. ventricosa with
D. saulcii of d'Orbigny. Brady's specimens were obtained from
several localities in different parts of the world at depths from
155 to 620 fathoms. We do not know of any other record of the
species as a fossil.

172. Qycloloculina annulata H.-A. and E.

173. Cycloloculiim polygyra H.-A. and E.

During the three years which have intervened since we com-
menced this series of papers nothing has transpired to modify the
views which we expressed as to the affinities of this interesting
type. Although an enormous number of specimens in all stages
of growth has now been picked out from every part of the shore
between the point of Selsey Bill and Chichester Harbour, we are
still in complete ignorance as to the exact deposit from which these
fossils have been derived. An examination of all the various zones
and beds exposed in the same area has not yielded any definite
evidence of origin. Found principally in elutriated material from
the shore-sand, occasional specimens are found in many samples of

332 Transactions of tht Society,

the Eocene Clays exposed on the shore, but whether as derived
fossils or qoI it lias been impossible to determine. As, however,
with three exceptions all the specimens present the same super-
ficial appearance, we are still inclined to think that the original
home of the species is in some early Tertiary deposit which has
been denuded to such an extent that it now exists only below the
gea level. This theory would account for the presence of the
isolated specimens which we have obtained from later Tertiary
beds still in situ on the shore, and also for the; very large number
of specimens continually washed up upon the sands.

The exceptional specimens to which we have referred above are
of a very much whiter appearance and calcareous texture. Apart
t'n mi their surroundings they might easily be mistaken for Cretaceous
fossils. This is. however, no doubt due to some accidental condi-
tions of preservation or weathering. We do not suppose that
Cycloloculina ranges back to the Cretaceous period. In spite of
the considerable amount of work which is now being done on the
Continent with the fossil Foraminifera, especially those of the Ter-
tiary period, no further records of the genus have been published.

We may take this opportunity of acknowledging a suggestion
which we have received from Mr. J. J. Lister, F.K.S., to the effect
that C. polygyra may probably be the microspheric form of the
genus, C. annulata being the megalospheric form. There seems
every reason to believe that this may be the case, as the relative
proportions to one another of the specimens appear to carry out
this theory. In the absence of definite micrometric observations,
we are not at present prepared to go into this, but the great profu-
sion of the shells found in our sands supplies us with material of
which we hope shortly to avail ourselves, with a view to going into
this matter, to some extent at any rate, on the lines on which Lister,
Carpenter and others have dealt with the Nummulites.

Lin derina Sch lum berger.

375. Linderina brugesii (Schlumberger).

(Plate XII. figs. 1-7.)

Linderina brugesii Schlumberger, 1893, Bull. Soc. Geol. France, s. iii. vol. 21,
p. 118, and figs. 3-5.

Among the fossil specimens commonly found in the shore-sands
of Selsey Bill were many of a shell which very early attracted our

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII.

Piilvinulina vermiculata d'Orbiguy sp.

Fig. 1. — Superior surface.
„ 2. — Inferior surface of same specimen.
,, 3. — Superior view of a small specimen.
„ 4. — Inferior view of same specimen.

(All figures on this plate are magnified 50 diameters only.)

JOURN.R,MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. XIII .

/''

W. Thornton Shiells del.

West, Newman lith.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 333

attention, but which, in the earlier stages of our examination, were set
aside and regarded as probably referable to the genus Planorbulina.
After a considerable number of specimens in all stages of growth had
been collected, we found that they presented features which could
not be correlated with that genus, and as a result of careful ex-
amination, including the cutting of sections of the test in various
planes, we are enabled definitely to identify our specimens with an
interesting type, of which the first, and we believe only, record
appears as above from the pen of the late Charles Schlnmberger.
As his paper has received little or no notice, we cannot do better than
quote its essential parts, which are as follows : —

" The species was discovered by " mon ami M. Linder, Inspecteur
General des Mines," in the rubbish from borings in the Dept. of the
Gironde.

" Test discoidal, thickened in the centre, composed of a single
layer of numerous chamberlets disposed circularly around a central
chamber and on the same plane. The partition-walls of each circle
of chambers extend towards the centre above the already formed
chambers. This calcareous envelope is traversed by coarse per-
forations which communicate directly with the inner chambers.
He describes two forms, A and B.

Linderina Brugesii Scklumb, sp. n.

" Form A. — A transverse section made perpendicularly to the
circumference, shows in the centre a large primordial chamber,
spherical, and accompanied on the right and left, and on a more or
less curved line, by a series of chambers which grow gradually
taller. They are invested above and below by a calcareous deposit
which is thicker at the centre than at the periphery ; this massive
formation is produced as is seen by the sutural lines, by the pro-
longation, towards the centre, of the walls of the chambers.

" These walls are coarsely perforated, and these perforations are
continued in a straight line, increasing slightly in diameter, across
the whole thickness of the calcareous envelope to reach the surface
of the test, and thus establish a communication between all the
chambers and the exterior. The section being rather thick, one
sees in the outermost chambers unevenly distributed openings by
which the adjoining chambers of the same ring communicate with
one another.

" In a section at right angles to the last (horizontal) it is impos-
sible to see all the chambers from the megalosphere outwards,
because they are generally situated on a concave surface. One
sees by a higher magnification that the wall of all the chambers is
continuous right round the test without any sutures, and forms
the chambers by its waviness.

" Form B only differs from Form A in that it is microspheric.

June 21st, 1911 z

334 Transactions of the Society.

"Test discoidal, thicker in the centre than at the edges, where
one sees only two annular rows of chamberlets. Test rough by
reason of little prominences which stand up between the per-
forations.

" Habitat.— Upper Eocene of Bruges (Gironde). Rather rare.

" Observations. — In its exterior aspect this fossil closely resem-
bles an Orbitoides or a Cycloclypeus. It differs from the former in the
absence of chambers in the thickness of the central boss, and from
the latter in the absence of the system of partitional canals and
the compact pillars which traverse the test."

There are several points in M. Schlumberger's description with
which we cannot agree. As seen in horizontal section, our speci-
mens commence with a regular llotaline spiral of about 2 to 3 whorls.
There are 8 to 10 chambers in the last convolution, and up to
this point the chambers are fairly regular in size. Subsequent
chambers are added in more or less regular annuli and vary con-
siderably in size and shape. The earlier annuli have apparently
simple walls, i.e., each chamber consists of a semicircular wall
secreted over the outer surface of a bead of protoplasm, which had
been protruded through the tubuli of an earlier chamber. Later
on the chamberlets appear to have compound walls, i.e., the pro-
truded bead of protoplasm secreted a basal wall of its own, sepa-
rating it from the wall of the preceding annulus. This double cell-
wall gives the appearance of a wavy line of chambers, referred
to by Schlumberger and illustrated by him diagrammatically.

We have been unable to trace any direct communication between
adjacent chamberlets of the same or adjacent convolutions. The
horizontal sections show no trace of any tubuli in the partition
walls or any definite oral aperture. If any tubuli are present in
the side walls of the chambers they must be extremely minute, as
they are not visible under J-in. objective. Vertical sections, how-
ever, show that the top and bottom walls of every chamber were
perforated with coarse tubuli, extending right through the thick
deposit of shell-substance to the external surface. It would, there-
fore appear that each chamberlet was a separate and self-contained
unit so far as nutrition was concerned, and that the growth of the
shell depended on extrusions of protoplasm through these aper-
tures, which formed at first isolated chambers round the rim and
subsequently a tube with constrictions at intervals. The whole
question is, however, so difficult to follow owing to the friability
of the test and the trouble of preparing sections, that we put for-
ward our conjectures with some diffidence.

We are unable to confirm Schlumberger's statement that " the
partition walls of each circle of chambers extend towards the centre
above the already formed chambers." If this were the case a vertical
section would show strong bands of clear shell-substance cutting

Recoil and Fossil Foraminifera. '■'<'■''■>

the coarse vertical tubuli at an angle. Nothing of the kind is
visible in our sections, and it is possible that Schlumberger was
confused by the pillar-like appearance of the shell-substance of
the boss caused by the coarse perforations of the tubuli. The cen-
tral boss appears to be a simple deposit of shell-substance, such as
occurs in Cycloloculina, and is in no way connected with "the pro-
longation towards the centre of the walls of the chambers."

Schlumberger gives no clue to the position to which he intended
to relegate his genus Linderina, beyond pointing out certain points
of external resemblance to Orbitoides and Cycloclypeus. In the
doubling of the shell wall of the later chambers it certainly shows
a tendency towards the Cycloclypeime, but on the whole we are dis-
posed to regard it of much simpler type, closely allied to Cyclolocu-
lina and Planorbidina, and perhaps as a transition type between
these and the more highly developed (Jycloclypeinse.

The specimens are of very frecpuent occurrence in the elutriated
material from the shore-sands all round the Selse}^ peninsula, and
vary from young specimens in which only the central boss is
apparent, surrounded by a ring of deeply sutured and bead-like
chamberlets (which led Mr. Millett, to whom we submitted some
of the earliest found tests, to suggest that they were Planorlulina
larvata), to large specimens in which many rings of chamberlets
surround the central boss, thus producing a shell suggestive of
Cycloclypeus, as noted by Schlumberger. This was before we had
made the sections, which we found to conform to the descriptions
given by Schlumberger, as set forth above.

From the external appearance of the shells and the micro-struc-
ture of their material, there seems every reason to suppose that
they reach the Selsey shore-sands from the same geological deposit
as Cycloloculina. M. Schlumberger, as is seen above, gives no very
definite clue to the precise formation from which his specimens
were derived, and in the absence of further and better evidence we
are constrained to suppose that our specimens are, like Cyclolocu-
lina, derived from an exposure of Eocene clay, which, so far, we
have failed to discover between or above tide-marks at Selsey Bill.

It would be interesting if more definite information as to the
locality of the original specimens could be obtained, and if it could
be ascertained whether any deposit of similar age is known among
the Tertiary deposits of Great Britain.

376. Truncatulina refulgent Montfort sp.

Cibicides refuhjevs Montfort, 1808, Conchyl. System, vol. i. p. 122, 31e Genre.
Truncatulina refuJgens (Montfort) d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii.

p. 279, pi. xiii. figs. 8-11 ; Module, No. 77.
Ditto. (Montfort) Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ. p. 382,

pi. xvi. fig. 19.
Ditto. (Montfort) Brady, 1865, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northd. and Durham

vol. i. p. 105, pi. xii. fig. 9.

z 2

336 Transactions of the Society.

Truncatulina refulgent (Montfort) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 659

pi. xcii. figs. 7-9.
Ditto. (Montfort) Br.-ul v, LS87, Synopsis liritisli Keenit Foraininifera.
Ditto (Montfort) Millett, 1904, Malay Poraminifera, Jonrn. R. Micr. Soc,

p. 491.

A few small specimens, recent, from the shore-sands, and,
perhaps, fossil from the Chalk Hints. According to Brady, this is
in <t uncommon in coarse rough sands from 20 fathoms downwards
mi the Atlantic coasts of Scotland and Ireland, rare on the eaal
coast, but the species occurs in very great profusion and also
attains a maximum size in shallow-water dredgings on the easl
coast of Scotland.

377. Truncatulina reticulata Czjzek sp.

Rotalina reticulata Czjzek, 1848, Haidinger's Naturw. Abhandl., vol. ii. p. 145,

pi. xiii. figs. 7-9.
Siphonina Jimbriata Beuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, p. 372,

pi. xlvii. fig. 6.
Planorbulina reticulata (Czjzek) Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ.

p. 379.
Truncatulina reticulata (Czjzek) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 669,

pl.-xevi. figs. 5-8.
Ditto. (Czjzek) Chaster, 1892, First Eep. Southport Soc. Nat. Sci. (1890-91),

p. 66, pi. i. fig. 16.
Ditto. (Czjzek) Flint, 1899, Eep. U.S. Nat. Museum for 1897, p. 334,

pi. lxxviii. fig. 3.
Ditto. (Czjzek) Millett, 1904, Malay Foram., Journ. E. Micr. Soc, p. 490.
Ditto. (Czjzek) Earlaud, 1905, Journ. Q.uekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol. ix.

No. 57, p. 226.

A few fossil specimens referable to this species, which is widely
distributed throughout the Tertiary period. Our specimens, judging
from their appearance, are derived from a clay ; some of them show
the tribulation of the peripheral edge with great distinctness. The
species has been recorded from the London Clay of the Isle of
Wight by Brady.

378. AnomaUna ariminensis d'Orbigny sp.

Planulina ariminensis d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii. p. 280, pi. v.

figs. 1-3; Modele, No 49.
Planorbulina ariminensis (d'Orbigny) Parker, Jones and Bradv, Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, vol. xvi. p. 26, pi. hi. fig. 78.
AnomaUna ariminensis (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 674,

pi. xciii. figs. 10, 11.
Planorbulina ariminensis (d'Orbigny) Goc:s, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian

Foraminifera, p. 91, pi. xv. figs. 784, 785.
AnomaUna ariminensis (d'Orbigny) Flint, 189'J, Eep. U.S. Nat. Museum for

1897, p. 335. pi. lxxix. fig. 1.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Millett, 1904, Malay Foram., Journ. E. Micr. Soc, p. 495.

t'ni union; pyritized fossils, probably derived from the London
Clay to the east of Selsey Bill. This species, which is commonly

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 337

distributed in moderately deep water at the present time, occurs
in the fossil state as far back as the Cretaceous period, where it is
not uncommon, and is subsequently found in many late Tertiary
deposits all over the world.

180. Anomalina coronata Parker and Jones.
(Additional Note.)

Anomalina coronata (Parker and Jones) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent

Foraminifera.
Planorbulina coronata (Parker and Jones) Flint, 1899, Pep. U.S. Nat. Museum

for 1897, p. 335, pi. Ixxix. fig. 2.

A few more fairly typical though small examples of this in-
teresting species. The specimens are fossils, from two different
sources, a clay and apparently a shell-sand. They are of small
size compared with recent specimens from North British seas, but
in other respects are quite characteristic. At the present day
A. coronata has a very wide distribution, but it only occurs in any
abundance in certain localities, favouring high latitudes and low
temperatures. In many of the ' Goldseeker ' dredgings in the
Shetland-Faeroe area the species occurs in enormous profusion, so
as to form an almost typical deposit, and the specimens attain a
comparatively large size and robust character.

379. Pulvinulina auricula Fichtel and Moll sp.

Nautilus auricula var. k Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Micr., p. 108, pi. xx.
figs, a, b, c.

Valvulina excavata d'Orbitrny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 137, pi. i. figs. 43-45.

Pulvinulina auricula (Fichtel and Moll) Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans.,
vol civ. p. 393.

Ditto. (Fichtel and Moll) Bradv, 1884, Foram. 'Challenger,' p. 688, pi. cvi.
fit;-. 5.

Ditto. (Fichtel and Moll) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Recent Foramini-
fera.

Ditto. (Fichtel and Moll) Flint, 1899, Rep. U.S. Nat. Museum for 1897,
p. 329, pi. lxxiii. fig. 2.

A few fossil specimens have been observed, but, curiously
enough, no recent ones. They are well preserved, probably from
a Tertiary shell-sand. It has already been recorded from the
Eocene of the Paris basin and later Tertiary deposits.

380. Pulvinuliva brongni irtii d'< Irbigny sp.

Rotalia brongniartii d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat,, vol. vii. p. 273, No. 27.
Rotalina brovgm'arti (d'Orbigny) d'Orbigny, 184(5, Foram. Foss. Yienne,

p. 158, pi. viii. figs. 22 24.
Pulvinulina auricula (Fichtel and Moll) Parker, Jones and Brady, 1871, Ann.

and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 1, vol. viii. p. 17:J». pi. xii. fig. 143.

338 Transactions of the Socle/ y.

Pulvinulina auricula (Fichtel and Moll) Brady, 1881, Forani. 'Challenger,

p. 688.
Pulvinulina brongniartii (d'Orbigny) Millett, 1904, Malay Forani., Journ. E.

Mior. Soc, p. 498, pi. x. fig. 4.

Abundant and well preserved specimens, all fossil. D'Orbigny's
original specimens were from the Miocene of Vienna: "common."
He also records it as living in the Adriatic. Millett figures a
variety from the Malay seas which differs from d'Orbigny's type
considerably, in that the shell is more compressed and has a ten-
dency to form a carina on the outer edge. The sutures also are
limbate, whereas in d'< )rbigny's type they are flush or simple. Our
specimens agree with d'Orhigny's, though there is some tenden<\
towards a thickening of the sutures on the inferior surface.

Brady {supra) regards this type as an intermediate between
Pulvinulina auricula (F. and M. sp.) and Pulvinulina hauerii
(d'Orb. sp.).

381. Pulvinulina crassa d'Orbigny sp.

Rotalina crassa d'Orbigny, 1840, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, vol. iv. p. 32, pi. iii.

figs. 7, 8.
Pulvinulina crassa (d'Orhigny) Owen, 1867, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. ix.

Zool. p. 148, pi. v. figs. 8 (?), 9.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 694, pi. ciii. figs.

11, 12.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II.

vol. xviii. p. 416, pi. xviii. figs. 7-12.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Flint, 1899, Rep. U.S. Nat. Museum for 1897, p. 329,

pi. lxxiv. fig. 1.
Ditto. (d'Orbigny) Ehumbler. 1900, Nordisches Plankton, Heft xiv. p. 17,

figs. 12, 14, 15.

Many specimens, well preserved fossils, from clays and shell-
sands. At the present time P. crassa is recorded only from deep
water in the great oceans, the records ranging from 150 to 2740
fathoms. Brady states that it is not uncommon from Chalk in the
neighbourhood of Paris and from Kent, but adds that there is no
mention of its occurrence in other formations.

382. Pulvinulina haliotidea sp. n.
Plate XL figs. 6-11.

We have a single imperfect specimen, which we figure, of a
little Foraminifer which Earland has found in some quantity at
practically all the shallow-water stations worked by the ' Gold-
seeker ' round the north and east of Scotland. It may be regarded
as an extreme variation of the type P. auricula (F. and M.) in the
direction of compression of the test and evolution of the spiral.
Our description is based upon the general characteristics of the
North Sea specimens.

Recent and Fossil Foramhiifera, 339

Test compressed, ear-shaped, consisting of about two convolu-
tions and six to ten chambers, rapidly increasing in size, the whole
usually visible on both sides of the shell. Superior surface, rounded ;
periphery more or less acute ; the earliest chambers usually project
above the curved surface of the superior face, in a low mammillate
spire. The appearance of the inferior surface varies greatly, ac-
cording to the degree of evolution of the spiral. In some specimens
the central portion presents a sunken umbilicus, the later chambers
being turgid and attached to the previous convolution ; in others
the whole series of chambers of the final convolution and some of
those of the previous convolution are seen to form an evolute spire,
which is only held together by an extension of the superior wall
connecting it with the previous convolution. This is fairly well
shown in the drawing, fig. 6, representing the inferior side of the
Selsey specimen. Some of the North Sea examples present this
depauperate stage in an even more striking degree ; the whole shell
viewed both from above and below presents a somewhat significant
resemblance to the human ear ; hence the specific name which we
have given to this shell.

In the North Sea the species is most frequent in the muddy
sands of the Moray Firth and analogous areas, but it also extends
to the Faeroe Channel and the west coast of Scotland. We have
seen specimens probably referable to this species in its less extreme
type in some of Mr. Joseph Wright's dredgings from the west of
Ireland.

It may be remarked that all the specimens appear to have a
somewhat large primordial chamber. It is not improbable, that
our species may represent the mega iosph eric type of some other
form, perhaps of P. auricula or P. oblonga.

Length, 0*15-0 -25 mm. Breadth, 0*1 to 0*2 mm.

383. Pulvinulina lateralis Terquem sp.

Rosalina lateralis Terquem, 1878, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, vol. i. Mem.

3, p. 25, pi. ii. fig. 11.
Pulvinulina lateralis (Terqnem) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 689, pi.

cvi. figs. 2, 3.
Ditto. (Terquem) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss. CI. II. vol.

xviii. p. 413, pi. xviii. figs. 48-50.
Ditto. (Terquem) Millett, 1904, Malay Foramimfera, Journ. K. Micr. Soc.,

p. 497.
Ditto. (Terquem) Sidebottoru, 1909, Foram. from Delos, Mem. Manchester

Lit. and Phil. Soc, No. 21, p. 5, pi. ii. fig. G, pi. iii. figs. 1, 2(?)

A few specimens, probably fossil. The recent records of this
species appear to be confined to tropical warm seas in shallow
water. Terquem's original specimens were from the Pliocene of
Rhodes.

'.!u , Transactions of tin Society.

384. Pulvinulina repanda Fichtel and Moll sp.

Nautilus repandus Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Micr., p. 35, pi. iii. fi.gB.a-d.
Rotalifia concamerata (mature) (Montagu) Williamson, 1858, Kecent Foram.

Great Britain, p. 52, pi. iv. figs. 101-3.
Uiii, ilia repanda (Montagu) (Williamson) Parker and Jones, 1860, Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, vol. v. p. 175, No. 25.
Pulvinulinu repanda (Montagu) (Williamson) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Chal-
lenger,' p. 684, pi. civ. fig. 18.
Ditto. (.Montagu) (Williamson) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Becent

Foraniinifera.
Ditto. (Montagu) (Williamson) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss.

CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 405, pi. xviii. figs. 28, 30, 34, 35.
Ditto. (Montagu) (Williamson) Goes, 1894, Arctic and Scandinavian Foram-

inifera, p. 95, pi. xvi. fig. 801.
Ditto. (Montagu) (Williamson) Flint, 1899, Bep. U.S. Nat. Museum for 1897,

p. 328, pi. lxxii. fig. 8.

Recent and fossil. This is a fairly common shallow-water type,
in most parts of the world, and occuws as a fossil as far back as the
Middle Tertiaries.

385. Pulvinulina repanda var. concamerata Montagu var.

Serpula concamerata Montagu, 1808, Test. Brit., Suppl., p. 160 {fide William-
son).

Rotalina concamerata " mature " (Montagu) Williamson, 1858, Becent. Foram.
Great Britain, p. 52, pi. iv. figs. 102, 103.

Pulvinulina repanda var. concamerutu (Montagu) Brady, 1884, Foram. 'Chal-
lenger,' p. 685, pi. civ. fig. 19.

Kecent and fossil. The specimens are small compared with
those found on many parts of our coast.

199. Pulvinulina semi-margiriata d'Orbigny sp.
In our description of this form we regret that we should have
overlooked the description and figures published by our friend
Mr. F. W. Millett in the Journal of this Society.* Mr. Millett has
also drawn our attention to the fact that Signor Fornasini has in
his series of papers reproducing the " Planches inedites " of d'Orbigny,
figured d'Orbigny's original drawing. f According to Mr. Millett,
the species occurs in great profusion at some stations in the Malay
Archipelago. He describes it under the name Discorbina semi-
marginata, and his figure, and the Malay specimens with which he
has been kind enough to supply us, are of markedly Diseorbine
growth. Our specimens, on the other hand — and we have found a
very largo number — are distinctly Pulvinuline, and we can only
conclude that this is one of those species which bridges the gap
between the allied genera Discorbina and Pulvinulina. The cha-
racteristic feature of the species, the subsidiary asterigerine cham-
bers, are equally well marked in both types.

* See this Journal, 1903, p. 703, pi. vii. fig. 8.

t C. Fornasini, 1906, Mem. R. Ace. Scienze dell' Istituto di Bologna, ser. vi.
torn. iii. p. 36, pi. iv. fig. 5.

Reant and Fossil Foraminifera. 341

386. Pulvinulina reticulata Keuss sp.

Rotalia reticulata Eeuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlvi.

Abth. i. p. 83, pi. x. figs. 4 a-c.
Epistomina reticulata (Eeuss) Uhlig. 1883, Jahrb. k.k. geol. Beichsanst., vol.

xxxiii., p. 768, p. vii. figs. 8, 9.
Pulvinulina reticulata (Ecuss) Chapman, 1898, Journ. E. Micr. Hoc, p. 8, pi. i.

figs. 10 a-c.

A single specimen, fossil. This may be derived from Gault or
lower Cretaceous formations, to which zones the species appears to
be confined.

387. Pulvinulina, tumida Brady.

Pulvinulino. menardii var. /'nui</<i Brady, 1877, Geol. Mag., Dec. II. vol. iv.

p. 294.
Ditto. Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol xix. ( .s ) p. 80.
Pulvim&ina tumida (Brady) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 692, pi. ciii.

figs. 4-6.
Ditto. (Bradv) Esger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol.

win. p. 414, pi. xvii. fic;s. 4-6, 35-37, 44.
Ditto. (Brady) Flint, 1899, Eep. U.S. Nat. Museum for 1897, p. 329, pi. lxxiii.

fig. 5.

Many fossil specimens, well preserved, and apparently from a '
shell-sand. The specimens are small compared with those
commonly found in recent deposits. It is widely distributed at
the present day within the tropics and at all depths down to
2750 fathoms. Of its fossil distribution, Brady only records its
occurrence in the limestone from New Britain, in the Pacific, as of
unknown geological age, but its records may very possibly be
confused with those of its older and better known ally, Pulvinulina
menardii, of which it is merely a turgid and solid form, and which
has been recorded as far back as the Cretaceous period.

388. Pulvinulina uttiboriata Reuss.

Botalina umbovata Eeuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutscli. geol. Gesellsch., vol. iii.

p. 75, pi. v. fig. 35.
Pulvinulina wmboriata (Eeuss) Eeuss, 1886, Denschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien.,

vol. xxv. p. 206.
Ditto. (Eeuss) Brady, 1884, Foram. ' Challenger,' p. 695, pi. cv. fig. 2.
Ditto. (Reuss) Flint, 1899, Eep U.S. Nat. Museum for 1897, p . 330. pi. lxxiv.

fig. 4.

One fossil specimen from above the Selsey beds, opposite Wesc
Street. This species, now known only from deep water in the
great oceans, occurs in many Teritary deposits on the continent of
Europe.

190. Pulvinulina n rmiculata d'Orbigny sp.
Plate XIII. figs. 1-4.

Since we described the single small specimen of Pulvinulina
vermiculata, which we had found when this species was dealt with

342 Transactions of the Society.

in Paper No. 4 of our series,* we have had the good fortune to
discover the specimen now figured, which in itself is ample con-
firmation of those affinities referred to by Brady, which we had

previously seen reason to doubt. The specimen was found on the
shore to the \.\V. of New Road, and to all external appearances is a
recent one, although the occurrence of such a remarkably tine and
well developed southern form on British shores must, in a neighbour-
hood like Selsey Bill, where fossil forms predominate, certainly
remain open to question. The test, however, shows no sign of
fossilization or staining. The earlier chambers are remarkably
well developed, and taken apart from the ensuing growth would be
assigned without hesitation to P. lateralis Terquem sp. Subse-
quently to our finding of this specimen, an extended series of this
species, showing all gradations from P. lateralis, was gathered by
Heron- Allen on the shore of the Lido, at Venice: there is no doubt
that upon such a series as this the late H. P. Brady based his
observations on the affinities of the species.

We take this opportunity of figuring the small specimen on
which our original record was based.

389. Nonionina pauperata Balkwill and Wright.
Plate XI. figs. 16, 17.

Nonionina quadriloculata Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. B. Irish Acad.,
vol. xxviii. (Science) p. 353, pi. xiii. figs. 25, 26.

Ditto. (Balkwill and Wright) Brady, 1887, Synopsis British Becent Fora-
minifera.

Several recent and typical specimens of this interesting form.

390. Nonionina quadriloculata sp. n.

Plate XL figs. 12-15.

Globigerina pachydermn (Ehrenberg) Heron-Allen and Earland, 1909, Journ.
B. Micr. Soc, p. 438, pi. xviii. figs. 4, 5. (Figures only.)

By an oversight in illustrating the species Globigerina bidloides
Ehrenberg sp. in a previous number of this paper, the artist
selected specimens which had been inadvertently associated with
our examples of G. pachyderma without sufficient care in deter-
mining their affinities. 67. pachydermia remains on our list as we
have good typical specimens, and the printed remarks which we
published (vide supra) remain unqualified. On a more protracted
examination of our material we have found a very large number of
the specimens such as were figured as G. pacityderma, and a
minute examination of these, both by reflected and transmitted
light, has proved them to be a Nonionine isomorph of the species
Globigerina pachydermia, to which they were at first referred.

* See this Journal, 1909, p. 684.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera. 343

The test is almost spherical, slightly flattened at right angles
to the axis, consisting of eight or nine chambers coiled in an
involute spiral, the last four chambers only being visible externally.
There is a slight umbilical depression on either side, and the
neighbourhood of the aperture of the final chamber is surrounded
with stout but short tubercles which almost entirely conceal the
actual aperture. This apparently consists of the usual Nonionine
series of fine pores at the extreme line of junction of the last and
previous whorls.

The specimens, which are all fossil, are generally well pre-
served ; a few are pyritized, the remainder, as a rule, deeply stained.
The perforations of the shell are extremely minute.

We publish two further figures of the species in which the
position and nature of the tubercles are better shown than in the
previous drawings.

Breadth, 0 • 2-0 • 27 mm. Thickness, 0 • 1-0 • 15 mm.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally inveetbbrata and cryptogamia),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.
«• Embryology. +

Oogenesis in Mammals.} — A. Louise Mcllroy has studied the de-
velopment of the germ-cells in the mammalian ovary, with special
reference to the early phases of maturation. Her material was based on
human embryos, puppies, kittens, aud rabbits. The same plan of de-
velopment is followed in the varied types, but differences arise in the
rate of development ante- and post-natal, the cells maturing from the
periphery inwards.

The capsular epithelium is derived from the oogonia, and is differenti-
ated at a very early stage. It has only a protective function.

Mitosis occurs among the oogonia, and also among the primary
oocytes of the reticular stage. It ceases at a given stage in the develop-
ment of the ovary.

Large cells — giant or resting cells — occur in the reticular stage of
the primary oocyte. " Pfliiger's tubules " are columns or clusters of cells
derived from the oogonia, separated off by means of the stroma cells.
The growth of the stroma and germ-cells is mutually correlated through-
out the development of the ovary. The follicle cells, which form the
cells of the stratum granulosum, are derived from the oogonia. and not
from the stroma cells. The latter are only supporting and vascular.

The reserve cells (oogonia and regressive oocytes scattered through-
out the ovarian tissue) may function as follicle or as interstitial cells:
tin -y may become absorbed as pabulum for the developing oocyte. The
primary oocytes undergo transformations in their early maturation stages,

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they
do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers
noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of
this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub-
lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are
either new or have not been previously described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects.

% Proc. K. Soc. Edinburgh, xxxi. (1910) pp. 151-78 (6 pis.).

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. 345

which correspond bo the prophase of the heterotypical divisions occurring

in plants and animals.

The stage of synapsis is the mosl prolonged and of most importance.
The chromatin filaments undergo a pseudo-reduction during this stage,
and they undergo apparent Longitudinal division in the stage following

the formation of the thick spireme. The nucleolus persists during all
the stages of transition of the nucleus, although its staining capacity
may vary.

No evidence was found in the medullary curds of the presence of
cells that might lead to the formation of primary oocytes. The glandular
structures in the hilum are the remains of the Wolffian and rete tubules.

Development of the Extremities in Birds.*— F. Sieglbauer pub-
lishes an account of his researches on the development of the skeleton
of the extremities in birds, showing especially the parallelism in the
early stages of the development of the widely different wing and foot,
and the relation of this to phylogenetic evolution. The development of
the wing and foot of the penguin, Pygoscelys papua, and of the duck,
Anas boschas, is described in detail, special emphasis being laid on the
phenomenon of heterochrony, which the author regards as of great
importance in the developmental history. The general results of the
paper may be stated as follows : — The skeleton of the foot of Pygoscelys
arises in the same way as that of the duck's foot. In the fifth toe of
the duck the lizard-character persists: while in the penguin, as in the
domestic fowl, onlv a blunt knob can be recognized in the later stages.
The first tibial toe, on the other hand, is much more highly developed in
the penguin than in the duck. The development of the skeleton of the
bird's wing and foot shows, in addition to the heterochronous characteristic
of the development of extremities in general, many points of agreement
with that of reptilian extremities. Since in the bird "'hand" the first
finger, as in Seps tridactyla, no longer attains to development, and the
second, fourth, and especially the fifth, remain rudimentary, the third
becomes the wing-bearing digit, and may be regarded as analogous to
the axis of the steering fin. The whole function of the wing-skeleton is
to form an articulated yet firm basis for the quills, and therefore the
bird hand is rudimentary and very unlike that of its ancestors. The
skeleton of the foot has changed much less in the course of phylogeny,
although the reptilian character has become blurred by the degeneration
of the first toe, by the complete disappearance of the fifth toe in the
ontogeny, and, above all, by the lengthening of the bones of the lower
leg and the metatarsals, and the fusion of the latter with the distal
tarsals. It is, above all, this lengthening of the leg-bones, and the
consequent raising of the body from the ground, that distinguishes the
birds from the creeping reptiles. This character is of advantage not
only in running but in taking flight from a flat surface.

Development of the Limbs in Grebes.f— The late F. T. Rosenberg
made a study of the development of the limbs and bill in grebes. The
material used was chiefly the eggs of the black-necked grebe, the only

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (l'Jll) pp. 262-311 (2 pis. and 16 figs.).
t Tom. cit.. pp. 119-217 (1 pi. and 13 figs.).

346 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Bpecies which nests in colonies in Germany. The eggs were artificially
incubated to secure a continuous scries. It was found that the inter-
medium and centrale arc not present in the grebe embryo. The tran-
sitory metacarpal iv. regularly occurs, and attains its greatest development
on the L5th day. The transitory metacarpal v. appears only on the
ll-12th day, and then atrophies. The grebes now living are descended
from ancestors which had hills of a pronounced Lotus type.

Origin of White Blood-corpuscles and Spleen in Bufo vulgaris.*
II. Mietens has investigated embryos of the common toad, Bufo vulgaris,
with a view to determining the origin of the white blood-corpuscles and
the spleen. The white blood-corpuscles arise in three different ways :
(1) through differentiation from the primitive indifferent blood-cells.
which also give rise to erythrocytes, and perhaps to connective-tissue
elements ; (2) through a rounding off of mesenchyme-cells ; (8) through
the liberation of endocardial cells. In the larvae white and red blood-
corpuscles do not pass into one another. Myelocytes and lymphocytes
are modifications of the same lymphocyte-like original cells. The
developed liver does not play an important part in blood-making during
larval life. Leucocytes arise only from the mesenchyme around the
bile-duct. After metamorphosis, blood-production increases greatly.
The blood-cells, both red and white, arise from foci lying mainly between
the large veins and the bile-duct. There is no intra-vascular blood-
production. The sinus-like blood-spaces of the liver offer favourable
conditions for the increase and development of the leucocytes. The red
blood-corpuscles of the larva? correspond phylogenetically to the pigment-
elements which function in the earlier developmental stages in the higher
classes. The thymus arises through the migration of lymphocytes into
an originally epithelial rudiment, and a multiplication of these within it.
There is no production of white blood-corpuscles. The mesenterial
leucocyte-focus is an important seat of development of the leucocytes.
The white blood-corpuscles are differentiated from originally indifferent
mesenchyme elements. The leucocyte focus is localized round the
branchings of the intestinal vessels. It attains its greatest development
at the time of the metamorphosis. Multiplication of the white blood-
corpuscles takes place in the mesenchyme of the pronephros. The spleen
arises from a congregation of primitive migratory cells in the sheath of
the mesenteric artery near the place of its origin. The ccelom epithelium
plays a limited part in its origin. In the glomerulus of the pronephros
it was possible to detect elements which showed great similarity to
nerve-cells.

Structure and Development of Posterior Lymph-hearts of Turtles.!
Frank A. Stromsten has studied the lymph-hearts of loggerhead turtles.
The development is initiated by the vacuolation of the post-iliac rnesen-
chyme-tissue in the second week. The spongy tissue thus formed is
invaded by capillaries from the caudal portion of the post-cardinal veins.
Near the close of the third week, parallel veno-lymphatic channels are
formed by the confluence of the mesenchymal spaces with each other
and with the invading capillaries. These channels anastomose freely and

* Jena. Zeitschr. f. Naturw., lxiv. (1910) pp. 301-56 (2 pis.).

t Publications Carnegie Inst. Washington, No. 132 (1910) pp. 77-87 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 347

communicate, by means of two or three openings, with the vein running
along their mesial borders.

At the beginning of the fourth week, the mesenchymal tissue con-
denses about the veno-lymphatic channels to form definite walls. These
cardiac walls are then invaded by muscle-cells from the adjacent muscle
plates.

The final stage in the development of the posterior lymph-hearts is
reached by the dilatation and confluence of these veno-lymphatic sinuses,
from before backward, forming a pair of sac-like organs, each with a
single central cavity.

It appears from the investigation that the mesenchymal spaces play
a much greater part in the development of the lymphatics in general
than is usually supposed.

Blastopore Closure in Amphibia.*— H. W. Goodale finds that it is
possible to make a definite relatively permanent mark with Nile blue
sulphate on the eggs of Spelerpes bilineatus. The dye stains the yolk-
granules. Among other experiments a series of spots was made about
the equator shortly before gastrulation. During gastrulation the spots
elongated into bands, which, when the blastopore is nearly closed, extend
from the equator to the edge of the blastopore. The extension into
bands is due to the division and subsequent migration of part of the
daughter-cells of the equatorial cells. The stained yolk-granules record
their path. In Spelerpes the niodle of blastopore closure is very unusual.
The lateral lips extend so as to cover half of a circumference, and then
further progress ceases. The blastopore gradually contracts into a
straight line, which shortens until at last only a minute median portion
remains as the anus. The blastopore never becomes circular, nor is
there a definitive ventral lip.

Inheritance of Complex Growth-forms. f; — J. Brownlee discusses
the interesting question of the inheritance of complex growth-forms,
such as stature, on Mendel's theory. He submits two conclusions : (1)
If the inheritance of stature depends upon a Mendelian mechanism, then
the distribution of the population as regards height will be that which is
actually found, namely, a distribution closely represented by the normal
curve ; (2) there is nothing in the values of coefficients of inheritance
found by Galton and Pearson which cannot be explained on the basis
of Mendelian inheritance.

Castration by X-Rays.J — 01. Regaud and Th. Nogier find that it
is possible to sterilize, totally and finally, the testis of an adult cat by
use of X-rays, and without lesion of the skin. There are oviform cells
which survive the irradiation, but they do not continue the spermatic
lineage. They diminish in number gradually, and the seminal epithelium
remains sterile.

Sterilization by X-Rays.§— Th. Nogier and CI. Regaud describe the
complete and definitive sterilization of the dog by means of X-rays. As

* Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 275-9 (2 figs.),
t Proc. R. Sqc. Edinburgh, xxxi. (1911) p. 251-6.
j C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 5-7.
§ Tom. cit., pp. 30-32.

348 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

in Borne other mammals, the seminal cells disappear from the testes. A-
in the cat, there are some refractory oviform cells, but they are notable
in repopulate the seminal epithelium. The sterilization can be effected
withoui radio-dermitis by taking certain precautions.

Interstitial Testicular Cells and Secondary Sex Characters. *—
L. Mazzetti nasstudied these cells in various Vertebrate types, lie finds
thai they arise from a transformation of connective cells between the
testicular tubules and in lymphatic lacunas. They do not seem to have
any importance, or not more than a minimal importance, in connexion
with the development of the secondary sex characters. Tin's is affected,
however, by the re-absorption of seminal fluid, seminal cells, and their
secreted products.

Injection of Testis-extract into Hens. f— Geoffrey Smith has found
that the injection had an entirely negative effect on the increase of the
comb in adult and young hens when compared with the fluctuations of
growth observed in control birds. The injections had no observable
effect on the health, body-weight, fertility, blood-properties, or any other
features, although very large quantities were administered over periods
varying from 15 to 75 days. C. E. Walker observed increase of the
comb in hens similarly treated, but Smith believes this was not due to
the injection. There is " no evidence," he concludes, " that the testis
contains an internal secretion which, when injected into the female, can
call forth the production of any of the'male secondary sexual characters."

Mammalian Sports.} — Ernest Warren describes three interesting
a 1 (normalities, "striking examples of those curious sports or large varia-
tions which occur in a spontaneous manner, and to which we are at
present quite unable to assign any definite cause. In all three cases the
same abnormality occurred more than once, and the fact of this recur-
rence adds considerably to the interest of the observations." The first
is a duiker (Cephaloplius grimmi), with a black skin almost devoid of
hair. Normally the skin is white with speckled yellow and brown hair,
but there is considerable variation in the general colour of the coat.
The next offspring by the same parents had also a black skin and had
considerably more hair than in the first case.

Warren describes in the second place a hairless black fox terrier,
one of a litter of six or seven, otherwise normal. The hairless dog was
paired with a pure white terrier, and two of the litter were hairless.
The third sport was a bulldog-headed calf.

b. Histology.

Direct Connexion between Muscle-fibrils and Tendon-fibrils.§-
Oskar Schnltze refers to the general view that the connexion between
muscle and tendon is only by the perimysium, and brings forward
evidence to show that it is incorrect. A study of embryo mammals and
amphibian larvae has convinced him that each muscle-fibre in a bundle

* Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 361-87 (14 figs.).

t Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci, lvi. (1911) pp. 591-612.

% Ann. Natal Museum, ii. (1910) pp. 235-52 (4 pis.).

§ Verb. Phys.-Med. Ges. Wurzburg, xli. (1911) No. 2, pp. 33-8 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 349

comes into direct connexion with a bundle of tendon-fibrils, and each
myofibril is connected witli a tendon-fibril.

Tracheal Epithelium in Domestic Mammals.* — W. J. Loginoff
points out that the structural peculiarities of the ciliated cells in the
trachea of various mammals, e.g. horse, ox, sheep, are so characteristic
that it is not particularly difficult to tell from a preparation what animal
it came from. He gives an account of those peculiarities. Attention
is also directed to the occurrence (in horse, ox, and dog) of mucus cells
branched at the proximal end.

Structure of Spleen Capillaries. f — S. Mollier gives a detailed
account of the venous capillaries in the spleen, and adds a general dis-
cussion of the problems involved. The spleen is a differentiation of
primary mesenchyme. The capillaries arise from an arrangement and
differentiation of these primary mesenchyme-cells, and this seems to be
a general fact for other vessels. The reticular character of the capillary
wall is probably adaptive in connexion with the circulation. If from the
mesenchyme cellular reticulum there be derived endothelium, blood-cells,
and supporting tissue, it should be recognized that the endothelium
retains, by its power of again forming indifferent reticulum, the old
developmental value of its parent-tissue which gave rise to mesenchyme.
The same may be said for the supporting tissue and blood-cells.

New kind of Cell in Brunner's Glands.:}: — Albert Oppel has found
a second kind of glandular cell in Brunner's glands in man. They con-
tain large regularly arranged granules, and are something like Paneth's
cells in Lieberkuhn's glands. They are quite specific glandular cells,
probably secreting a digestive ferment.

Mitochondria of Adipose Cells. §— G. Dubreuil calls attention to
the remarkable chondriome in adipose cells, and describes the changes
in the chrondriome in the course of the transformation from fixed con-
nective-tissue cells to fat cells.

Origin of Granules in Gland Cells. || — Oskar Schultze maintains
that a filar structure in gland cells is of very widespread occurrence, and
that as a general rule the glandular granules arise from plasmosomes
which appear from within the filar mass (chondriokonts).

Mitotic Figures in Isolated Tissues.1T — J. Jolly discusses the mitotic
figures in isolated marrow and the like. Some represent -cells killed in
the act of dividing, at variable intervals after the death of the body.
Others represent cells which had begun to divide, and are slowly con-
tinuing to do so, or are aborting. Others, again — a less important
category — represent true divisions in the isolated tissue. Careful criticism
is imperative in every case before it can be inferred that the presence of
mitotic figures is a proof of genuine growth.

* Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 353-61 (1 pi.),
t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxvii. (1911) pp. 608-57 (1 pi. and 42 figs.).
% Op. cit., lxxvi. (1911) pp. 525-42 (1 pi.).
§ C.R Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 48-50.
|| Anat. Anzeig, xxxviii. (1911) pp. 257-65 (2 pis.).
i C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 608-10 (2 figa.).j j

June 21st, 1911 2 a

350 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Mitosis in Grafted Tissue.* — A. Pettit observed, in a thyroid and
parathyroid engrafted in a dog, that among the obviously degenerated
cells there were many instances of normal mitosis.

Survival of Excised Cornea.f — A. Magitat calls attention to recent
work on the survival of leucocytes m vitro, on the recovery of motion
in spermatozoa after eight days, and so on. These investigations led
him to experiment with the cornea of the rabbit. The eye was excised,
sterilized, and put in blood serum at a low temperature. After 10 to
12 days the cornea was still almost quite translucent, and grafting
experiments seemed to show that it was alive.

c. General.

Converse Relation between Ciliary and Neuro-muscular Move-
ments.}—A. G. Mayer finds that the effects of the ions sodium, mag-
nesium, calcium, ammonium, and potassium upon neuro-muscular move-
ments are in each case the exact opposite of their effects upon the ciliary
movements of animals. (Various species of motile fungi and algas
react diversely to these ions, and the above statement applies only to
animals.)

Ordinary ciliated epithelium, such as that covering the external
surface of " Trematodes " (does not the author mean Turbellariaus ?),
is not wholly under the control of the nervous or muscular system of
the animal, and the cilia continue to beat even when the muscles under-
lying them contract.

The more highly specialized cilia, however, such as those of the
meridional combs of Ctenophores, the lobes of Veliger larvae, the peri-
stomial ring of trochophores, or the longitudinal band of Semper's
Actinian larva, cease to beat when the muscles underlying them contract,
and resume their rhythmic movement only when the muscles relax.
Thus an electrical stimulus which causes the muscles to contract stops
the cilia ; but if the muscles be anaesthetized with magnesium so that
they cannot contract, an electrical stimulus does not stop the cilia. The
stopping of the cilia is therefore dependent upon the contraction of the
muscles. It appears, then, that the stimulus which produces ciliary
movement tends to cause muscular relaxation, but is too weak to prevent
muscular movement ; but the stimulus which produces muscular con-
traction is of an opposite nature, and is more energetic than that required
to maintain ciliary movement, and completely overpowers it, stopping
the cilia when the muscles contract.

Considering all things which normally affect the animal, whatever
stimulates the neuro-muscular system inhibits ciliary movement, and
whatever stimulates cilia depresses neuro-muscular activity.

Among the cations of sea-water, sodium is the most potent inhibitor

of ciliary activity and the most powerful neuro-muscular stimulant. On

the other hand, magnesium is the most potent in maintaining ciliary

movement and the most powerful inhibitor of neuro-muscular movement.

Ammonium at first stops, and finally permits the recovery of ciliary

* G.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) p. 2. t Tom. cit., pp. 46-8.

t Publications Carnegie Inst. Washington, No. 132 (1910) pp. 1-25 (8 figs.)

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 351

movement, but it at first stimulates and afterwards inhibits neuro-
muscular movements. Weak acids (H ion) at first depress and afterwards
permit recovery of ciliary movement, but they at first stimulate and
afterwards depress neuromuscular movement. The discovery of this
converse relation makes apparent the incompleteness of existing theories
of animal locomotion.

Cutaneous Scent-glands of Ruminants.* — R. I. Pocock gives a
careful description of the various types of cutaneous scent-glands — pedal,
carpal, tarsal, metatarsal, pre-orbital, inguinal, and some others of less
common occurrence. He discusses the structure of the glands and the
systematic results to be derived from them. The interpretation of the
use of the glands in keeping the individuals of a species together is
corroborated. There is a good deal of evidence that the pre-orbital
gland has a sexual significance, at all events in part. That each scent
tells its own tale to other members of the species seems almost beyond
doubt.

It is probable that all the pre-orbital glands arose from simple in-
tegumental thickenings, with enlarged sebaceous and sweat glands, and
the same may be said of many others. The inguinal glands are closely
connected with the mammary glands, and the secretion appears to be
actually derived from the mammary glands.

Evidence is brought forward in support of the view that the glandular
pedal pockets are the remnants, specialized for the secretion of scented
material, of a primitive anterior interdigital cleft. The reduction or
disappearance of the interdigital clefts is interpreted in relation to
strengthening the feet, and the retention or loss of the pedal glands is
interpreted in an interesting way in relation to varieties of habit.

Descent of Cattle.f — J. Cossar Ewart has investigated skulls of oxen
from the Roman Station at Newstead, Melrose. The examination lent
support neither to the descent of all European cattle from the Urus
(Bos primigenius) nor to the descent of all European, Indian, and African
breeds from the Asiatic Urus (B. nomadicus).

The Celtic shorthorn (B. longifrons) is probably more intimately
related to the zebu of India (B. indicus) than to the European Urus.

Long premaxillae are usually correlated with an occiput of the
B. primigenius type, while short premaxilla? are usually correlated with
an occiput of the B. acutifrons type.

Polled black Galloway cattle and polled white " wild " Cadzow cattle
are intimately related to the Urus. Flat-polled Aberdeen-Angus cattle
probably include amongst their ancestors an ancient Oriental race now
represented by, amongst others, a Syrian breed with rudimentary horns.
Round-polled" cattle may belong to a still more ancient Oriental race
descended from B. acutifrons of the Punjab Sivaliks.

Head of Kogia Breviceps4 — Ed. Danvis gives an account of the
structure of the head in this curious Odontocete, a specimen of which
was stranded near Roscoff in 1905. He calls attention to such features

* Proc. Zool. Soc, 1910, pp. 840-986 (G2 figs.).

t Zoological Soc. Rep. (Feb. 7, 1911). See Geol. Mag., viii. (1911) pp. 141-2.

% Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1910) pp. 149-74 (4 pis. and 5 figs.).

2 A 2

352 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

as bhe much reduced right olfactory canal, the spermaceti reservoirs, and
the structure of the bongue.

Food of Shrew-mole.* — James A. West has examined bhe stomachs
of many shrew-moles (Scahpus aqmlicus) in Illinois. The contents
showed perhaps a greater amount of insect food and somewhat smaller
ratios of earthworms than those examined by others, but there is sub-
Btanl ial agreement to the effect that half or more of the food consists of
insects and their larvae, most of them noxious. To this extent, there-
fore, it is certain that shrew-moles are beneficial. There is no direct
evidence that they attack potatoes or other tubers, but they eat large
quantities of corn, and sometimes do considerable damage in fields of
newly-planted corn.

Habits of Shrew-mole.f— F. E. Wood has made a study of Scalopus
aquaticus, the common mole of Illinois. The burrows are usually made
without bringing earth to the surface. There seems to be one litter in
the year, probably with three to six young ones. There is certain
evidence of their eating corn. Little is known of their natural enemies.
Numbers are often found lying dead, but unmutilated. Many are badly
infested with intestinal parasites, e.g. species of Filar ia and Spiroptera.

Directive Markings of Passerine Birds.J— H. C. Tracy has made a
study of the significance of the white markings in birds of the order
Pass'eriformes. His investigations were directed mainly towards testing
the validity of the older interpretation of white markings in birds— as
serving rather as a clue to the direction of the disappearing bird than as
an aid" to recognition of the species— by analyzing their mode of occur-
rence in a single Order. He finds that there is good ground for believing
that markings exposed in flight, whatever their mode of evolution, are of
actual utility to birds as sight clues. This is true both of the compara-
tively uniform rear markings of open ground species, and of the varied
top pattern of arboreal forms. There is a decided correlation of the
markings with the habit of flocking, as well as with that of open ranging.
He shows that sexual selection can only have operated in producing a
more sharply defined pattern in the male, but cannot account for the
pattern itself. The newer view (Thayer, 1909) as to the concealing
effect of white markings, the author finds to be in perfect accord with
the older theory of directive markings, though it limits the application
of the latter to patterns that can be shown to be conspicuous.

The author considers that the interpretation of diverse coloration as
having developed under conditions of comparative immunity from attack
needs much greater emphasis than has yet been given to it.

Size of Spleen in Birds.§— Magnan and De la Riboisiere have
measured the spleen in a large number of birds. They distinguish two
main shapes— ovoid and elongated, and they find that large birds have
relatively smaller spleens, and small birds relatively larger spleens. La
Riboisiere previously came to the same conclusion as regards weight.

* Bull. Illinois State Lab. Nat. Hist, ix. (1910) pp. 14-22,
t Tom. cit., ix. (1910) pp. 1-13.

\ Univ. California Publications (Zool.) vi. (1910) pp. 285-312. \
§ Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.) xiii. (1911) pp. 269-85 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 35

• >

Penis of Drake and Gander.* — A. Trawinski gives an account of
the macroscopic and microscopic structure of the penis in these birds,
and calls attention to a vestigial representation of a penis in the cock.

Linnet of Hawaiian Islands.f — Joseph Grhmell discusses "a
problem in speciation " in connexion with the Hawaiian representatives
of Carpodacm frontalis. This bird was introduced into the Hawaiian
islands from California less than forty years ago.

In all available specimens of the linnet from the United States range
the usual colour (in the parts of the plumage which are coloured) of
males after the post-juvenal moult, is red. There occur rather in-
frequently, irrespective of locality, individuals of three other colours —
yellow (most rarely), orange, and red with yellow or orange feathers
intermixed. In California the common red type has prevailed for at
least sixty years.

A series of male linnets collected in the Hawaiian islands are all of
the yellow or orange type of coloration. The author argues that the
peculiarities are not to be considered manifestations of ordinary individual
variation, nor as seasonal changes, nor as the result of individual sene-
scence. They must be due in some way to change of habitat.

Evidence is brought forward to eliminate the more obvious environ-
mental factors (temperature, humidity, change of food, reduction of
enemies). The off-colour character is somehow associated with insularity
of habitat, but the prime stimulus is unknown. " A deficiency in
capacity, of the germ, for the formation of the appropriate enzyme may
have been intensified through close breeding until the condition was
reached where the amount of enzyme produced in the feather-anlage is
insufficient to carry on oxidation of tyrosin beyond the yellow, or at
farthest the orange stage."

Changes of Plumage in Red Grouse.J — E. A. Wilson has gone
carefully into this question, describing and figuring the plumage changes
in cock and hen, and the local variations in both. In the cock the two
periods, November to June, and June to November, mark the two
seasonal changes of plumage. The first is a plumage worn throughout
the winter, as well as during the courting and breeding season of the
spring. The second is a plumage worn throughout the summer and
autumn. In the hen the two changes of the plumage are completed, in
the one case by the end of April or the beginning of May, and in the
other case by July and August. The actual feather-changes in the cock
and the hen are very comparable in character, notwithstanding the
discrepancy as to season, the moults being asynchronous by about two
months. Very beautiful plates illustrate the paper.

New Burmese Frog.§ — N. Annan dale describes a new species of
frog used as food in Burmah, and hitherto confused with Rana tigrina.
The new species R. burkilli, frequents the same localities as R. tigrina,
but buries itself in the embankments of rice-fields in dry weather, while

* Bull. Internat. Acad. Sci. Cracovie (1910) pp. 720-7 (2 pis.),
t Univ. California Publications (Zool.) vii. (1911) pp. 175-95.
X Proc. Zool. Soc. (1910) pp. 1000-33 (24 pis. and 1 fig.).
§ Records, Indian Museum, v. (1910) p. 79.

;;.-, | SUMMAR? OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

R. tigrina remains active throughout the year. It is distinguished by
the following characters : The snout is less pointed than in II. tigrina
and does no! projecl so far beyond the mouth, the tibio-tarsaJ joint falls
short of the car. the internal metatarsal tubercle is feebly developed,
and the skin of the back is more warty than in the allied species. The
dorsal surface is of a dull brownish colour spotted with black, the ventral
surface also marked with black sometimes in a reticulate pattern.

Electric Eels.* — CI. Schlesinger points out that the Gymnonoti

include two entirely distinct families, the eel-shaped Electrophoridae and
the laterally compressed Gymnonotidae. The latter are derived from a
common primitive stock which has diverged upon three lines, the primi-
tive Giton, the Sternarchinae (with dorsal filament and caudal fin), and
the Gymnotinas (without dorsal filament and caudal fin). There is a
very striking parallelism and convergence between Gymnonoti and
Mormyridae, showing how similar conditions evoke similar results. The
author shows that the characteristic mode of locomotion in Electrophorus
—solely by undulations of the anal fin while the body is kept stiff —
occurs in the Gyninotidas. In another interesting paper t he concludes
that the same is true of the Xotopteridae.

Study of Species of Gadus.J — Louis Fage has made a rather in-
teresting study of Gadus luscus Linne, G. capelanus (Risso), and
G. minutus 0. Fr. Miiller. He first shows that the three species are
distinct. He then considers the phylogenetic value of the differentiating
characters, and finds that the three species may be ranked in a phyletic
series illustrating progressive adaptation to nektic life, G. capelanus being
intermediate between the less evolved G. luscus and the more evolved
G. minutus.

Synopsis of Lampreys. § — C. Tate Regan has prepared a synopsis of
the order Hyperoartii. He gives the following definition : Marsipo-
branchs with the nasal aperture on the upper surface of the head and
the naso-palatine canal ending blindly posteriorly. Eyes well developed
(in the adult). Two semicircular canals. Mouth with expanded toothed
lips ; tongue with a single anterior, and a pair of posterior cuspidate
lamina (compound teeth). Branchial sacs seven on each side, not far
behind the head, communicating internally with a subcesophageal canal
which opens anteriorly into the pharynx ; an extra-branchial skeleton
forming a basket-work. Eggs small, numerous; segmentation holo-
blastic ; a metamorphosis. A caudal and two dorsal fins, sometimes
united.

The larvae (Ammoccetes) appear to be extremely similar in all the
northern genera. They are toothless, with a small transverse lower lip
and a hood-like upper lip ; a circle of fringed barbels surrounds the
month. The eyes are rudimentary and subcutaneous, the small gill-
openings lie in a groove and the vertical fins are confluent. The
branchial pouches communicate directly with the oesophagus.

Eight genera are recognized — Mordacia, Geotria, Petromyzon, Ichthyo-
myzon, Gaspiomyzon, Eudontomyzon g. n., Entospheims, and Lampetra.

* Zool. Jahrb., xxix. (1910) pp. 613-40 ( 3 pis. and 4 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 681-8 (1 pi).

X Arch. Zool. Expeu., vi. (1911) pp. 257-82 (2 pis.).

§ Ann. Nat. Hist., vii. (1911) pp. 193-204.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 355

Photogenic Function in Marine Organisms.* — F. Ales. McDermott
uses the argument from analogy (colour and luminescence in beetles) to
support the view that the coloration and luminescence of marine
organisms must be of use. The absence of definite organs for the re-
ception of radiations of light (as in Salpa, the author says !) may not
necessarily indicate that the forms from which they are absent are in-
sensible to these radiations. " The photogenic functions in certain
simple marine forms may replace the olfactory function " (or rather the
odoriferous function ?) " of terrestrial forms, to some extent," indicating
location.

Sense of Light in Animals. f — C. Hess finds that fishes react like
totally colour-blind men, while Amphibians are like normal men. For
birds and reptiles the short-wave end of the spectrum is much shortened ;
fowls see up to blue-green, tortoises only to about the green. He finds
that caterpillars, midges, flies, seek out the yellow-green part of the
spectrum. So do two Crustaceans, Podopsis and Atylus. Cuttlefishes
react like totally colour-blind men — indeed, the same may be said of all
Invertebrates. Experiments on the siphons of eyeless bivalves showed
that red and orange had almost no effect ; the contraction of the siphons
was greatest in yellow-green and green, somewhat less in blue and violet.
After a period of darkness the adaptive sensitiveness of the siphon is
markedly increased.

INVERTEBRATA.

Scottish and Irish Plankton.:}: - - W. A. Herdman makes a com-
parison of the summer plankton on the west coast of Scotland with that
in the Irish Sea, and shows the curious differences between them. For
instance, while the abundant vernal phyto-plankton dies away in the
Irish Sea in early .summer, a similar micro-flora is present in quantity
in some part of the sea on the west of Scotland (e.g. the Sound of Mull,
and the sea round Canna, Eigg, etc.) until July, and possibly later.

Micro-fauna of the Nile.§ — E. von Daday continues his report on
the micro-fauna of the Nile. He deals with Protozoa (8), Rotifers (8),
Copepods (7), Phyllopods (5), Ostracods (0). Among the last is Aglai-
ella stagnalis g. et sp. n., which may be regarded as transitional between
Aglaia Brady, on the one hand, and Pontoparta Vavra and Paracypris
Sars, on the other hand.

Mollusca.

Molluscs of Portuguese East Africa. || — A. Nobre gives a list of
the Molluscs collected by Welwitsch, Anchieta, Newton, and others,
in Portuguese East Africa, and now deposited in the Bocage Museum,
in Lisbon, and elsewhere.

* Amer. Nat., xlv. (1911) pp. 118-22.

t SB. Phys. Med. Ges. Wiirzburg (1910) pp. 41-3.

t Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxii. (1911) pp. 23-38(8 figs.).

§ SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, cxix. (1910) pp. 537-89 (3 pis.).

| Bull. Soc. Portugaise Sci. Nat. iii. (1909, received 1911) supp. 2, pp. 1-108.

356 BtJMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Molluscs of Ireland.* — A. W. Stelfox gives a list of the land and
fresh-water molluscs of Ireland, with an account of the distribution of
each species, about 130 in all. Introduced species are also dealt with,
and there is a careful bibliography. Fourteen land and fifteen fresh-
water species which are known to live in Britain are still unrecorded for
Ireland.

7« Gastropoda.

Cavernicolous Gastropods.! — L. Germain discusses numerous species
of Hyalinia, Pyramidula, Helix, Pupa, Ferussacia, Csecilioides, Physa,
Ancylus, Bythinella, and Lartertia. While the genera Zospeum and
Speleeoconcha are the only terrestrial Molluscs which are exclusively
cavernicolous, there are many species of other genera, such as those
named above, which are found oftener in caves than elsewhere.

Phylogeny of Cerithiidse. J— Elvira Wood traces the probable evo-
lution of some of the Cerithiidas— Cerithium, Vulyocerithium, Tympano-
notus, Potamides, and Potamidopsis. It appears that the Jurassic species,
Cerithium corallense, may represent the earliest known species of the
genus. It has a primitive type of shell of small size, with rounded
whorls, and having on its adult volutions three spirals crossed by ribs.
The ancestor of this probably possessed a bicarinate ornamentation
crossed by ribs and a very slightly developed canal. The genus Cerithium
includes a great variety of forms ; but notwithstanding the wide differ-
ences in adults, relationship may be traced by similarity in the young
stages, pointing out the path of evolution which all have travelled.

5. Lamellibranchiata.

Reaction of Tissues of Pecten to Implantation of Foreign Bodies.§
G. H. Brew and W. De Morgan found that the implantation of a piece
of gill or gland, or of sterile agar jelly, into the muscle of Pecten maxi-
mus was followed by multiplication and migration of fibroblasts in the
vicinity. In the case of the piece of gill, a layer of typical "scar"
fibrous tissue is formed, enclosing the chitinous skeletons of the gill-
bars (all that remains after a thorough cleaning up by phagocytes). No
permanent layer was formed round the piece of gland, as the migrated
fibroblasts are dissolved in the course of the extension of the sphere of
action of the digestive ferments. In the case of the agar jelly there is a
slow and often mitotic division of the neighbouring fibroblasts ; they
migrate and rearrange themselves to form a thin layer of fibrous tissue
around the agar. The whole process of fibrous tissue formation is
essentially like that which takes place in Vertebrates, though the tissues
and the blood and its manner of forming a " clot " are so different.

Arthropoda.
a. Insecta.

Mimicry of Ant by Larval Mantis.]]— R. I. Pocock describes the
larvae of a species of mantis from the Gold Coast. They were 4 mm. or

* Proc. Irish Acad., xxix. (1911) pp. 65-164 (1 pi.).

t Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1911) pp. 229-56 (2 pis.).

X Ann. New York Acad. Sci., xx. (1910) pp. 1-92 (9 pis.).

§ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lv. (1910) pp. 595-610 (1 pi.).

|| Proc. Zool. Soc. (1910) pp. 837-40 (2 rigs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 357

less in length, and when crawling about the ease looked exactly like a
case of black ants, their rapid darts and pauses recalling irresistibly the
way ants go about. When at rest they assumed the attitude of watching
mantises, and appeared to be procryptically coloured. Two factors were
in the main concerned in effecting the likeness to an ant, namely, the
blackness of the underside of the abdomen, and the habit of the mantis
when in motion of curling the posterior half of the abdomen up like a
scorpion's tail. On attaining a length of 7 mm., the larvae lost their
ant-like look. An apparently similar case has been described by de
Niceville. Attention is drawn also to larvae of a Ceylonese species of
Phyllium which resemble a distasteful beetle, also mimicked by two bugs
and a moth.

North American Species of Camponotus.* — W. M. Wheeler has
revised the North American species of this genus of ants, and deals with
21 species, 17 sub-species, and 27 varieties. The genus includes the
largest and most conspicuous North American ants, and also some of the
most abundant. It may be divided into two sections, one of which,
the maculatus group, contains species that nest in the ground under
stones or logs, or, more rarely, in obscure crater nests, whereas the other
section embraces all the other groups, and contains species that usually
nest in dead wood or oak-galls. These wood-inhabiting species, how-
ever, exhibit considerable diversity of habit. Apart from the circurn-
polar G. hercuhanus and C. fallax, all the species are decidedly local.

Study of Sphegidse.f — A. Popovici-Baznosanu has studied Trypo-
xylonfigulus and Psenulus atrafus, both common insects in the Roumanian
rose-gardens. They have specialized predatory habits and insinuate
themselves into narrow tubes. The abdomen has a very narrow waist
and is very mobile, well adapted for stinging the victims.

The nests of Trypoxylon in the rose-stems have partitions of earth,
just as in those of Osmia, which they closely resemble. There is always
a cocoon, and the provisions consist of spiders.

The nests of Psenulus have parchment partitions ; there is rarely a
true cocoon. The provisions consist of aphides. The carnivorous larva
has four sharp teeth on the mandibles ; the adult has two blunt teeth,
suited for building. Similarly, the larva of Trypoxylon has five sharp
teeth and the adult only two.

Spermatogenesis in Currant-moth.:};— L. Doncaster has investigated
the spermatogenesis in the two forms Abraxas gross ulariata and A. lacti-
color and in the heterozygote. He has already shown that in this moth
the glossulariata character is a Mendelian dominant, and, further, is not
borne by eggs which contain the female determiner.

There are two kinds of primary spermatocytes, one set leading to
smaller spermatids. As these become converted into spermatozoa there
is evidence of nuclear degeneration.

" From the fact that the same process occurs in both varieties, and
that usually the expected sexual and Mendelian ratios are found in

* Arm. New York Acad. Sci., xx. (1910) pp. 295-354.

f Arch. Zool. Bxper., vi. (1911) Notes et Revue, No. 3, pp. xciii-ciii.

% Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc, xvi. (1911) pp. 44-5.

358 StJMMAB"X OF CURBENT bbsbahches relating to

breeding experiments, it is to be concluded that two types of spermatozoa
are not correlated with different heritable characters, and probably those
of the second type are not functional in fertilization."

Carnivorous Mosquito Larvae.*— C. A. Paiva gives some notes on
the larvae of Toxorhyneites immisericors Wlk., which are abundant abont
Calcutta, and were found frequently in earthen pots. These larvae are
carnivorous and, as the experiments here reported have shown, exceed-
ingly voracious. In a vessel with Stegomyia larvae, T. immisericors was
observed to lie quietly in a vertical positon until one of the actively
swimming Stegomyia larvae came within reach, when, with a sharp side-
ward jerky movement of the head, it seized its prey. Sometimes it only
sucks its victim and rejects the skin, which is then greedily devoured
by other Stegomyia larva?, but more frequently the whole larva is
eaten. In the course of one night over one hundred Stegomyia larvae
were eaten up by three larvae of T. immisericors. These carnivorous
larvae will eat any mosquito larvae without discrimination, except that
apparently they do not begin to eat one another until other supplies are
running short.

S.fasciata, the yellowT fever mosquito, is common in earthen vessels
about Calcutta ; and the observer considers that the part played by
T. immisericors in its destruction might be of great moment in the
event of yellow fever being introduced into the country.

Apple Red Bugs.j — C. R. Crosby gives an account of two species of
Heiniptera, Heterocordylus malinus and Lygida mendax, which have done
much injury since 1908 among the apple-trees of New York State. Their
presence is indicated by minute red spots on the leaf, caused by their
feeding punctures. The two species are very similar in habit. The eggs
of H. malinus are inserted in a slit at the base of the fruit spurs, and
they hatch soon after the fruit buds begin to unfold. The larvae pass
through five stages, and attain wings at the fifth moult. A technical
description of all the stages of both species is given. The larvae feed at
first on the foliage, but attack the young fruit as soon as it is set. The
plant-tissue round each puncture hardens and becomes discoloured, and
many of the apples fall to the ground or wither on the tree, while many
more are so deformed as to be unmarketable. Experiments to control
the pest are still being tried.

Both bugs appear to be native to America, and probably fed origin-
ally on wild thorn. A closely related species, H. flavipes Matsuma, is
related from Japan.

Secretion of Ghost Bug.| — Uavid Hooper discusses the white sugary
secretion of Phromnia marginella. It is said to be secreted in a liquid
state by the larvae ; it drops on to the leaves and hardens ; it probably
comes from large gland-like organs on each side at the end of the
abdomen. The manna-like or wax-like material, found as an encrusta-
tion on the leaves, consists in part of dulcitol (dulcite), an isomeride of

* Records Indian Museum, v. (1910) pp. 187-90.
t Bull. Cornell Univ. No. 291 (1911) pp. 213-25.
X Journ. and Proc. Asiatic Society Bengal, v. (1910) pp. 363-6.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 359

mannitol (mannite), C6HuOti. This also occurs in the sap of the plants
on which the insects feed. It is taken up by the insects and re-deposited
on the leaves and the bark in an almost pure condition.

°- Arachnida.

Ear Mite of Cattle.* — Lndwig Freund gives some account of
Raillietia auris Trouessart (= Gamasus sp. Leidy = G. auris of others)
which occurs as a parasite in the external auditory meatus of cattle and
sometimes causes disease.

False Scorpions of British Isles.f — H. Wallis Kew has made a
useful synopsis of Pseudoscorpiones. The following genera are repre-
sented : Ghernes (!) species, one new), Chelifer (2 Bp.), Withius sub-g. n.
(1 sp.), Cheiridium (1 sp.), Ideoroncus (Obisium) (1 sp.), Roncus (Obisium)
(1 sp.), Obisium s. str. (3 sp.), Chthonius (4 sp.).

New Species of Linguatula.J— E. A. Johnston describes L. dingo-
phihi sp. n. from a dingo, which differs in many respects from L. rhinaria
of the dosr.

Jb'

Antarctic and other Tardigrada.S — James Murray gives an account
of Tardigrada from the Antarctic (Sir E. H. Shackleion's Expedition),
from New Zealand, Australia, some Pacific Islands, and Canada. The
memoir also includes a useful discussion of the structure of Tardigrada,
of the nomenclature, and of the value of species of Tardigrada. Many
of the specific characters are not of any obvious value to their possessors.

The author deals with fifty species, distributed in five genera —
Macrobiotics, Ec/tiniscas, Diphascon, Milnesium, and Orcella g. n. These
fifty species are about half of the known Tardigrada. About twenty-
three other forms were obtained, which are not sufficiently known to be
identified or named as new. Seventeen species are newT, and one new
generic type {Orcella) is included in the Australian list.

It is noted that the continental areas are much richer than the
islands, both in the number of species and in the proportion of peculiar
species. The Australian Tardigrade fauna has most peculiarity about
it. Specimens of Macrobiotus arcticus endured repeated freezing and
thawing at weekly intervals, for months, and the eggs retained their
vitality after the adults had been kept dry for a year, and conveyed on
a voyage through the tropics to England.

e. Crustacea.

Schizopods from North-east Atlantic Slope. || — W. M. Tattersall
describes eight new species, two of which required new genera — Metam-
blyops and Bathymysis. Four bottom-living species are added to the
British and Irish list, two of them previously known only from the West
Coast of Greenland. Attention is directed to the striking form and

* Zool. Jahrb., xxix. (1910) pp. 313-32 (11 figs.),
t Proc. R. Irish Acad., xxiv. (1911) pp. 38-64 (3 pis.).
J Trans. Proc. R. Soc. S. Australia, xxxiv. (1910) pp. 248-50 (1 pi.).
§ Rep. Sci. Invest. British Antarc Kxped., 1907-9 (Biology) i. pt. 5 (1910) pp.
83-185 (8 pis.).

i Sci. Invest. Fisheries Ireland, ii. (1910, published 1911) pp. 1-77 (8 pis.).

360 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

remarkable diversity of structure in the eves of the deep-water Mysida-.
Materia] for interesting speculation may be found in the possible func-
tions of the processes of the eyes in the genera Dactylerythrops and
Peramblyops, or the carious equatorial membranous ridge of the eye in
Dactylamilyops lhawnatops.

Annulata.

Pelagic Polychsets of Irish Seas.* — R. Southern reports on live
Alciopinae, four Toniopteridae, and four Typhloscolecidae found as part
of the pelagic fauna off the coasts of Ireland — in the warm and com-
paratively highly saline waters of the European branch of the Gulf
Stream. They rarely cross the 200-fathom line. With the exception
of two species of Tomopteris, the recorded species are all new to British
marine area.

Notes on Polychsets.j — W. C. Mcintosh discusses Syllides verrilli

Moore which presents interesting features of relationship with Stauro-
cephalidse as well as wdth Syllids ; Nevaya ivhiteavesi g. et sp. n., from
the Gulf of St. Lawrence, a form with certain relationships to Sclerockeilus
Grube ; and a number of Cirratulids, e.g. species of Cltaetozone, from
Canada, Norway, and Britain.

Polychsst from the Delta of the Volga. $ — A. Dershawin reports
the interesting occurrence of a species of Hypatina (probably invalida)
in the Delta of the Volga. It has hitherto been known only from the
Caspian Sea, where it has an extraordinarily varied distribution, from
5*5-264: m. in depth, hi diverse conditions of salinity, pressure, and
temperature.

Development of Trochophore of Hydroides.§ — Creswell Shearer
describes the segmentation and gastrulation, the origin of the ectomeso-
blast and coelomesoblast, and the early trochophoral stages in Hydroides
uncinatus (Eupomatus). There is a round blastula with a much re-
duced blastocoel. Invagination produces at first an almost spherical
gastrula, which soon begins to assume the conical shape of the early
trochophore. The blastopore closes from behind forwards, the anterior
portion remaining as the mouth. The anus breaks through at the point
where the posterior end of the blastopore closes.

At a time when gastrulation is about half completed, some cells appear
on either side of the endoderm ; they probably represent ectomesoblast ;
they form the head-kidneys, which open into the proctodaeum. At the
same time two conspicuous cells are usually distinguishable in the
ventral lip of the blastopore — the coelomesoblast. At a considerably
later stage they give rise to the mesoderm bands.

Parasitic Castration of Earthworms. ||— Igerna B. J. Sollas found
a marked bacterial infection in a number of full-sized earthworms

* Sci. Invest. Fisheries Ireland, iii. (1910, published 1911) pp. 1-37 (3 pis.).

t Ann. Nat. Hist., vii. (1911) pp. 145-73 (3 pis.).

J Zool. Anzeig., xxxvi. (1910) pp. 408-10.

§ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lvi. (1911) pp. 543-90 (3 pis. and 29 figs.).

1 Ann. Nat. Hist., vii. (1911) pp. 335-7.

+

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 361

(Lumbricus herculeus), which showed either no clitellum or a, poorly-
developed one, small seminal vesicles without sperms or more or less
normal seminal vesicles with chiefly immature sperm-cells, empty sper-
mathecae, and normal ovaries. The cytophores and the spermatocytes
themselves were crowded with minute spherical bacteria in active move-
ment. Amoebocytes were conspicuous in the seminal vesicles, and were
crowded with ingested and now motionless individuals of the bacterium
in question. That these bacteria are a serious and constant enemy of
the earthworm seems to be shown by the comparative frequency with
which worms devoid of clitellum and normal sperm occur, and also by
observations upon earthworms found travelling over the surface of paths
after rain.

Extra-enteric Aperture in a Leech.* — L. Johannson describes in
an African leech, Salifa perspicax Blanch., a dorsal opening between the
fourth and fifth ring of the thirteenth segment. It occurred in all the
specimens examined, and was as large as the male aperture. In 1892
Horst noted a similar aperture in a species of Nephelis from Sumatra,
but did not regard it as normal.

Nematohelminth.es.

Ascarids of Carnivores.t — A. Railliet and A. Henry recognize two
genera — Belascaris Leiper, including B. mystax, B. marginata, B. vulpis
and B. maseulior sp. n. ; and Toxascaris Leiper, including T. Uonina,
T. limbata sp. n., and T. mkroptera. They have gone into the question
of synonymy and revised the characters of the previously described
species.

Anguillulidse of the White Slime of 0aks4 — J. G. de Man has
inquired into the Anguillulidas which are found in the white flow that
comes from diseased oaks in summer (June-August). The flow is
associated with fungi which cause alcoholic fermentation and subsequent
acetic fermentation. In this there is found what must be regarded as a
free-living variety (var. dryopMla) of Anguillula aceti (Mtiller). This is
the first recognition of a free-living form of this well-known species.
Besides this, however, the author recognizes an equally abundant new
species which he calls A. ludwigii. There is some discussion of the dis-
tinctive features of the genus Anguillula.

Microfilariae in Tonkin Birds. §— C. Matins and M. Leger report on
the Microfilarias in the blood of a quail, a marabout stork, and two
Chinese Passerine birds (Garrulax persp&illatus and Gopsychus saularis).

All were young forms, but apparently new species.

Platyhelminthes.

Life-cycle of Dicrocoelium lanceatum.|| — B. Zarnik describes the
cercarise of the Trematode which is otherwise known as Distomum

* Zool. Anzeig., xxxvi. (1910) pp. 405-8 (3 figs.),

t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 12-15.

j Zool. Jahrb., xxix. (1910) pp. 359-94 (3 pis.).

§ C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 60-62 (1 fig.).

| SB. Phys. Med. Ges. Wurzburg (1910) pp. 27-31 (I fig.).

362 .iM\i;V OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

lanceolatum. Ee round cercarise in the liver of a badly infected sheep.
They are very minute, only 570 ft in length, of which the tail forms
'2bQ fx. They showed no oral differentiations and no skin-glands. From
the absence of glands, as well as from the persisteni tail, the author
infers that the cyst stage, on grass or the like, has been wholly suppressed,
and that the cercariae are taken into the sheep with the wafer. The
intermediate host is probably a snail. Zarnik also refers to the develop-
ment of the gonads, and notes that the ovary is always ripe before the
testes.

Stilesia and its Relatives.* — L. II. Gough gives an account of the
tapeworms of the sub-family Avitellina;, which includes Stilesia and a
new genus Avitellina. He also describes the minute structure of
Avitellina centripunctata (Riv.). The name Avitellina denotes the
absence of a vitelline gland, and it may be noted that in Avitellina the
uterus is single, there is a single paruterine organ, the testicles are in
four groups, the genital canals pass dorsally of the dorsal canal, whereas
in Stilesia the uterus is double, there are two paruterine organs, the
testicles are in two groups, and the genital canals pass ventrally of the
dorsal canal.

Incertae Sedis.

Irish Polyzoa.f — A. R. Nichols reports on a collection of Polyzoa.
mostly Cheilostomata, made off the Irish coasts. It consists of 101
species, 80 of which were obtained off the west coast at a greater depth
than 50 fathoms. Twenty-three species are recorded for the first time
from the Irish coast, and six of these, Filisparsa irregularis, Menipea
smittii, Scrupocellaria intermedia, Kinetoskias smittii, Hemicyclopora
maltispinata, Pasythea ebumea, do not appear to have been previously
obtained on any part of the British coasts. On some fragments of a
species of Brettia, probably a new variety of B. pellucida Dyster, ooecia
were found for the first time for this genus.

Rotifera.

Histology of Rotifera. ! — Gustav Hirschfelder contributes a detailed
account of the histology of various organs of Eosphora, Hydatina, Euch-
lanis, and Notommata. The organs of which the finer structure is more
particularly described are the following : — the rotatory organ and cilia ;
central nervous system and peripheral nerves ; sense-organs ; retro-
cerebral apparatus and subcerebral gland ; eye ; digestive tract ; mastax
and jaws ; and the muscles. The clear account of the retrocerebral sac
and subcerebral gland, overlying the brain, with their respective forked
frontal ducts, is a substantial advance in the understanding of these two
organs, which formerly were confounded with the brain. The use of the
secretion of these two glands still remains a mystery. The description
of the jaws of Eosphora digitata and their mode of action is most instruc-
tive, and reveals a wonderfully ingenious and delicate apparatus confined
within the very small space of the mastax.

* Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lvi. (1911) pp. 317-85 (3 pis. and 6 figs.).

t Scient. Invest. Fisheries Ireland, i. (1910, published 1911) pp. 1-37 (1 pi.).

\ Zcitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1910) pp. 209-35 (5 pis.).

ZOOLOGY A.N1) BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 363

Dipleuchlanis, a new Sub-genus for Euchlanis (Diplois) propa-
tula Gosse.* — P. de Beauchamp having found in material collected in
Syria, by H. G. de Kerville, a specimen of this aberrant Rotifer, pro-
poses to place it in this new sub-genus.

Echinoderma.

Extra-ovate Experiments on Sea-urchin Ova.f— Naohide Vatsu
obtained extra-ovates in Arbacia and Strongylocentrotus, by treating the
fertilized ova with diluted sea-water and then replacing them. An
extra-ovate was extruded at the height of turgor, the cleavage of the
egg was more or less abnormal. The abnormality is not due to the
diluted sea-water, as is shown by the fact that under the same treatment
all other eggs (without an extra-ovate) in the same vessel cleaved
normally, and by the fact that the disturbance in cleavage is found at
the spot where the extraovate is situated. The disturbance is due to the
deprivation of a portion of the cytoplasm as an extra-ovate. Thus we
may say that the cleavage pattern is already established in the fertilized
egg of Arbacia and Strongylocentrotus, as Driesch has shown in Echinus.
It may be noted that an egg with an extra-ovate gives rise to a perfect
pluteus.

Echinoderm Hybridization.! — D. H. Tennent has made numerous
experiments in Echinoderm hybridization, and gives a careful discussion
of the problems involved. The Toxopneustes 9 x Hipponoe S cross,
and the reciprocal were easily made after allowing the eggs to stand in
sea-water for some hours after fertilization. In the embryos of both
crosses made in ordinary sea- water, which was alkaline, the Hipponoe
influence showed a tendency to predominate. In the embryos of both
crosses made in sea-water of increased alkalinity, there was evidence of
an increase in Hipponoe influence. In the embryos of both crosses
made in sea-water of decreased alkanity, a tendency toward Toxopneustes
dominance was evident. The results thus show Hipponoe dominance
in sea-water of a higher OH ion concentration, and Toxopneustes
dominance in sea-water of a lower OH ion concentration.

It is suggested that these variations in the alkalinity of sea-water,
brought about artificially in the laboratory, may correspond to normal
seasonal changes. If this be true, the winter (paternal) embryos and the
summer (maternal) plutei of the combination Spheerechinus x Strongylo-
centrotus of other investigators had their origin in such normal seasonal
changes of OH ion concentration.

The results of this and other investigations show species tendencies
towards different grades of temperature and alkalinity. The explanation
of the preponderance of one character over another in Echinoderm
hybrids seems to be in the reaction of the species towards a complex of
factors.

Early Stages of Development in Echinoderms.§— Julius Schaxel
describes the structure of the ovary, the maturation, the cleavage, the

* Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xxxv. (1910) pp. 122.

t Anuot. Zool. Japon, vii. (1910) pp. 213-18 (8 figs.).

% Publications Carnegie Inst. Washington, No. 132 (1910) pp. 117-51 (6 pis.).

§ Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxvi. (1911) pp. 543-607 (5 pis. and 8 figs.).

364 ,IMAI;V OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

formation of bhe larval skeleton, in examples of all the divisions of
Echinoderma, and discusses bhe general import of his results, with par-
ticular reference to the co-operation of the various components of the
cell. The author enters into an analytical discussion of the relations of
nucleus and protoplasm, and of the role of the chromatin. His general
view is that t lie chromatin functions as a regulative substance, by which
the formative processes going on in the cytoplasm are determined.

Structure of Pentaceros reticulatus.* — D. II. Tennent and V. H.
Keiller describe this common West Indian starfish. Of the organs de-
scribed and figured, those which seem of most interest are the intestinal
caeca. They were sometimes found greatly distended, and stimulation
caused contraction. When individuals from which the aboral wall was
removed were allowed to remain undisturbed in sea- water, the organs
again became distended. Later on they contracted of their own acccord.
This supports the view, based in the main upon the similarity of position,
that these caeca of the starfish are analogous with the respiratory trees of
the Holothurian.

Coelentera.

Australian Alcyonarians.f — J. Arthur Thomson and Doris L.
Mackinnon report on a collection of thirty-five species made by H.M.C.S.
' Thetis ' off the coast of New South "Wales. The collection has a very
definite character, due to the proportionately large number of Isidae
(e.g. six species of Mopsea, four new) and of Prirnnoidse (e.g. five new
species of Plumarella). These Isid and Primnoid colonies are extra-
ordinarily beautiful, and their superficial resemblance to large fronds of
Sertularians is very striking. Another feature of the collection is the
frequent occurrence of encrusting colonies of Alcyoniiim (Erythropodivm)
membranaceum and A. reptans, which grow over Gorgonid axis in a very
misleading fashion.

Keroeididae. £ — Kumao Kinoshita proposes to erect a new family,
Keroeididae, within the order G-orgonacea. He has convinced himself
that Keroeides is no true Scleraxonian, and must be removed from the
Suberogorgiidas. Perhaps the same must be said of Simpson's new
genus, Dendrogorgia. The new family, Keroeididae, is defined as follows :
Colony erect ; axis rigid, consisting of a central cord and of a cortical
layer composed of smooth spicules conglomerated together by a horny
matrix ; the axis epithelium remains only at the tips of the branches ;
polyps retractile into more or less well-developed calyces : spicules not
seal v.

Excluding Keroeides (and Dendrogorgia provisionally) the family
Suberogorgiidae may be characterized as follows: Scleraxonians with
distinct axis, which is not jointed, formed of fused spicules and horny
matrix, with a rudimentary central cord composed of cortex spicules';

* Publications Carnegie Inst. Washington, No. 132 (1910) pp. 111-16 (3 pis.
and 2 figs.).

t Scientific Results of the Trawling Expedition of H.M.C.S. ' Thetis.' Part 13,
Alcyonana (Sydney, 1911) pp. 661-95 (22 pis.).

t Annot. Zool. Japon., vii. (1910) pp. 223-30 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. : *» « » T>

cortex with some main longitudinal solenia and smaller reticulated ones ;
polyps retractile within more or less developed calyces ; spicules spindle-
shaped.

Australian Pennatulids.* — Hjalmar Broch describes Sarcophyllum
roseum sp. n. from Middleton Beach, Albany, and distinguishes it from
S. g ramie (Gray) Kolliker. He also describes Pteroeides hymmocaulon
Bleeker from Shark's Bay. Emphasis is laid on the fact that the spicules
of Pennatulids, which have been generally regarded as on the whole
uniform, show minute distinctive features.

Regeneration in Corymorpha.f — H. B. Torrey shows that this
hydroid is extremely plastic in its regeneration, as also in its develop-
ment. The amount of plasticity exhibited depends upon the dif-
ferentiation of the regenerating piece, particularly upon its degree of
organization into a whole, or the degree to which the original inter-
relations of its parts have been disturbed by experimental conditions. He
discusses experiments bearing on the effect of old parts upon regenera-
tion ; the effect of the position of the wound on the development of
pre-existing root-like processes ; retrograde changes in small pieces ; re-
generation at oblique wounds ; and so on.

Hydroids of Drobak.f — Hjalmar Broch gives an account of the
Hydroids of Drobak Fjord, with a clearly written introduction which
will be useful to collectors and students, and a well worked out diagnostic
key to the genera.

Polypodium hydriforme.§ — A. Dershawin reports the discovery in
the Delta of the Volga of a free-living phase of the Hydroid Polypodium
hydriforme, which has hitherto been known as a parasite on the eggs of
the sturgeon.

L6V

New Plumularid Genus. ||— A. Billard describes Sibogella erecta g.et
sp. n., a new Plumularid collected by the ' Siboga.' The stems are
canaliculate and bear numerous branches, rarely in verticils, more fre-
quently arising irregularly all round. They are sometimes so thickly
crowded that an appearance of verticils is produced. The hydroclads
are borne by the branches and lie in different planes. The genus is
adjacent to Nemertesia (Antenmdaria), but the hydroclads in the latter
are borne by the stem directly.

Porifera.

Remarkable Pharetronid Sponge. f — R. Kirkpatrick describes
Murrayona phanoJepis g. etsp. n. from Christmas Island. It differs
greatly from any previously described Pharetronid sponge. There is a
firm main skeletal network entirely devoid of spicules. The surface of
the sponge is covered with a dermal armour of large calcareous scales.
The poral and sub-dermal spicules are triradiate. The poral area is

* Fauna Siid-west Australiens, iii. lief. 2 (1910) pp. 111-21 (1 pi. and 9 figs.).
t Advance Print from Proc. 7th Internal Zool. Congress, 1907 (1910) pp 1-2
X Nyt. Mag. Naturvidensk., xlix. (1911) pp. 1-31 (2 pis.).
§ Zool. Anzeig., xxxvi. (1910) pp. 408-10.

| Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1911) Notes et Revue, No. 3, pp. cviii-cix. (1 fi°- )
U Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 124-33 (2 pis.).

June ^lst, 1911 2 b

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING I"

limited bo a semicircular equatorial groove. It is obvious that the new
type is of unusual interest.

Protozoa.

Studies on British Foraminifera.* - E. Heron-Allen and Arthur
Earland contribute interesting and beautifully illustrated studies of
\fassilina secans d'Orbigny and Polystomella crispa L.. the two com-
monesl Foraminifera in English shore-gatherings.

Antarctic Rhizopods.f — Eugene Penard reports on tin- Sarcodina
• Mllected by James Murray in the ' Nimrod ' expedition. They were
obtained from among moss. There are no fewer than seventy-nine species.
mostly cosmopolitan, but some of considerable interest.

Reactions of Amceba to Light.J — S. 0. Mast has made a study of
the reactions of Amoeba to light. He found that a sudden and sharp
increase of light causes retardation or cessation of movement in Amoeba
proteus. This effect may be local if the increase is local. If the intensity
is very gradually increased it produces no response, showing that the re-
action of Amoeba is dependent primarily on the change of intensity.
A. proteus is negative in strong light, and orients fairly accurately.
Orientation is brought about bv the inhibition of the formation of

...

pseudopods on the more highly illuminated side. This is probably due
to local changes of intensity, owing to the movement of the protoplasm
and the resulting shadows of one part passing over others. There is no
evidence that the direction of the rays, or the absolute intensify of light
ou the whole organism, has any effect apart from producing changes of
intensity. The blue (430-490 /u,/*) in the solar prismatic spectrum is
nearly as effective in causing reactions in A. proteus as white light.
Violet, green, yellow, and red are only very slightly active. The author
considers it highly probable that different photochemical changes are
associated with the reactions to light in different organisms.

Experiments on Paramcecium.§— K. R. Lewin has been able to
divide living specimens of Paramoecium en mint inn. so that each fragment
has a piece of meganucleus, but only one has the micronucleus. The
" amicronucleate " forms were able to propagate by normal fission.
The animals seem quite normal, though the culture was not very vigorous.
A race was produced without visible micronuclei. It is possible that the
micronucleus exerts some influence on the rate of division.

The experiments show, as regards P. caudatum, that Le Dantec's
statement as to the regeneration of the micronucleus from the mega-
nucleus after merotomy, is incorrect. They also demonstrate that the
interaction of cytoplasm and meganucleus is sufficient to maintain the
discontinuous growth of the cell during a considerable period.

Effect of Inanition on Paramc3cium.|| — Irene Lipska has studied
the effects of inanition on Paramoeeium caudatum. The duration of

* Knowledge, xxxiii. (1910) pp. 285-6 ; 304-6 (3 figs.) ; 376-9 (7 figs.).

t Rep. Sci. Invest. Brit. Antarc. Exped.. 1907-9, i. (1911) pp. 203-62 (2 pis.).

X -Journ. Exper. Zool. ix. (1910) pp. 265-77 (2 figs.).

§ Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc, xvi. (1911) pp. 31-41 (1 fig.).

11 Rev. Suisse Zool., xviii. (1910) pp. 591-643.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 367

life varies with the individual and according to the rigour of the starva-
tion. It is on an average 5 to 7 days, but, in rare cases, it may he pro-
longed for 20 days. On the fourth day of starvation the Parammium
begins to become deformed, first Bhowing a dorso-ventral flattening, and
finally taking the form of a crescent, with the convexity dorsal. There
is a progressive diminution in size, especially as regards breadth, so that
the animal becomes relatively longer than in the normal state. It dies
when it has lost about half its original volume. The ectoplasm under-
goes no change, and the cilia and trichocysts remain intact, but the
endoplasm gradually loses all its digestive vacuoles and some of its
crystals, thus becoming extremely transparent. The macronucleus in-
creases in size, elongates, and divides into two halves, which move away
from each other. This breaking up has no relation to amitotic division,
and its products persist till death without undergoing digestion. The
micronucleus moves away from the macronucleus, but, as a rule, it
undergoes no alteration in form or structure, whatever may be the
duration of life. Individuals in which starvation is not pushed to an
extreme are able to recuperate all their normal characters if they are
placed in a medium of weak but gradually improving nutritive capacity.
Death is preceded by a progressive slowing of all the functions, including
the play of the cilia and the contractions of the vacuoles. The degenera-
tive process in a starved Paramecium is thus, in a general way, similar
to that which takes place in individuals that have been poisoned by the
excretions of butyric or other putrefactive bacteria. The vacuolization
of the endoplasm, which has been attributed by some authors to inanition,
is apparently a result of the chemical action of the ammoniacal products
always present in infusions in which putrefaction is going on.

Two Thousand Generations of Paramoecium.* — Following up his
earlier papers on the life-cycle of Paramo&cium, L. L. Woodruff describes
an attempt to eliminate the cyclical character of the rate of production
by constantlv subjecting the Infusoria to a varied environment. The
pedigree culture was started with a " wild " Paramecium aurelia, and
when it had divided twice the four individuals were isolated on other
slides. A specimen of each of these four lines was isolated daily, so as
to preclude the possibility of conjugation between sister-cells. The
culture medium was made from materials collected practically at random,
the infusion being thoroughly boiled to prevent contamination by wild
individuals. In the 41 months during which the culture has been under
observation it has not completed a " cycle," though there has been a
rhythmic rise and fall in the division-rate. The rate of fission is graphi-
cally plotted in a series of charts. The author believes that this culture
shows clearly that P. aurelia., under suitable culture conditions, has the
power of unlimited reproduction by division, without conjugation or
artificial stimulation.

Leptomonad in Euphorbias.!— G. Bouet and E. Roubaud confirm
Lafont*s discovery of Leptomanas davidi in Euphorbia. The infection is
local ; it does not seem to last ; it does not seem to have any bad effects.
They were led to regard a small Hemipteron, Dieuches humilis, as the

* Arch. f. Protistenkunde,xxi. (1911) pp. 264-6.
+ C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 55-7 (1 fig.).

2 b 2

368 si'MMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

infecting agent. In the case of Euphorbia pilulifera, fresh experiments

by Lafont* lead him to regard the Hemipteron Nysius eaphorbise as the
transmitting agent.

Trypanosome and Leptomonad in Drosophila.f — E. Chatton and
A. Leger give reasons for regarding as specifically distinct two related
parasites known to occur in the Muscid Drosophila confusa, viz. a
Trypanosome (of the T. dimorphon type), in the Malpighian tubes, and
an aciculate Leptomonas (L. drosophilse) in the intestine.

Structure of Euplotes.J — L. E. Griffin has given a well worked out
and beautifully illustrated account of the structure of Euplotes worcesteri
sp. n., which was found in some water taken from Manila Bay. The
broad, considerably excavated peristome, extending two-thirds the length
of the body, contains 45 to 70 wide membranelhc ; the mouth is irregu-
larly oval and large ; the pharynx is long, recurved, containing 20 to 30
mernbranellae, several oblique rows of endoral cilia, and a group of
suboral rnembranellse ; there are 7 frontal cirri, 3 abdominal cirri, 5
anal cirri, 2 left marginal cirri, 0 to 3 right marginal or caudal cirri ; the
sensory bristles on the dorsal surface are usually in eight longitudinal
rows ; on the ventral surface there are paroral, exoral, and lateral rows of
sensory bristles, and two to four bristles at the base of each cirrus ; the
meganucleus is long and horseshoe-shaped, with a fluke-like enlargement
at the posterior end, and a considerable thickening where it bends across
the anterior part of the cell ; the single micronucleus lies in a slight
depression of the meganucleus, on the left side near the anterior end of
the body.

Division of Euplotes worcesteri. § — L. E. Griffin describes the pro-
cess of division in this Infusorian, and emphasizes the fact that " many
of the Protozoa are not simple but extremely complex animals." The
process includes two stages, one of preparation, the other of actual
division of the body and meganucleus. During each stage a definite
series of changes occurs in nearly every organ.

The stage of preparation for division includes the reconstruction and
concentration of the meganucleus, the invagination of the rudiment of
the new peristome, the division of the micronucleus, and the appearance
of the new cirri.

That of division includes the constriction of the body and separation
of its halves, the drawing of the new peristome to the surface of the
body and into its final shape and position, completion of the new pharynx,
division of the meganucleus, absorption of the old cirri, and the shifting
of the new cirri from the places of their origins to their ultimate positions.

Species of Leucocytozoon.|| — C. Mathis and M. Leger describe what
appear to be three new species of this genus from the blood of the wild
peacock, of Ardetta sinensis and of Munia topela.

* C.R Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 58-9.

t Tom. oit., pp. 34-6 (1 fig ).

t Philippine Journ. Sci., v. (1909) pp. 291-312 (3 pis. and 13 figs.).

§ Tom. oit., pp. 315-36 (4 pis.).

|| C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 211-12.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 369

Intestinal Flagellates of Marine Fishes.* — A. Alexeieff describes
Urophagus intestinalis Moroff in Motella, and notes that it may require
a new genus (Trichomitus). He reports Trichomonas prow azeki Alexeieff
from Box salpa, Trichomastix motella sp. n. from Motella tricirrata, Tetra-
mitus mesnili (Wenyon) from Box salpa, Trgpanoplasma intestinalis Leger
in Boa (it also occurs in lumpsucker, conger, etc.).

Spirochset from the Rabbit.f — C. Matins and M. Leger describe
from rabbits at Tonkin a species of Spirochait which seems to be new,
which they name S. raillieti.

Parasites of Biliary Fever in Horses. $ — G. H. F. Nuttall and
C. Strickland find that there are two parasites in the blood of horses
suffering from " piroplasmosis," viz. Nuttallia equi (Laveran) and a true
Piroplasma (P. caballi Nuttall).

Affinities of Spirochgets.§ — C. Clifford Dobell gives an account of
Cristispira veneris sp. n., and summarizes his view of the position of
Spirochaets. They may be conveniently collected as a distinct group
of Protists — Spirochsetoidea — which seems to stand alone. They have
no definite relations with Protozoa, Bacteria, or Cyanophyceae. The
group comprises three different sets of forms, which may be conveniently
classified in three different genera, Spirochseta, Treponema, and Cristispira.

Spirochaets of the Mouth. |] — P. Gerber calls attention to the abun-
dant occurrence of various kinds of Spirochaets in the upper parts of the
respiratory and alimentary tracts, such as the mouth itself. He deals
with &. buccalis, S. dentium, S. vincenti, and other forms. The teeth,
the tonsils, and the tongue are the chief localities for Spirochgets in
tha buccal region ; they do not occur in other parts of the buccal mucus
membrane unless these are in a pathological state.

Haematozoa of Australian Birds. IT — J. Burton Cleland and T. Harvey
Johnston report five apparently new species of Halteridium, a new Try-
panosoma, and various larval forms of Microfilaria.

Coccidiosis in Sparrows and other Wild Birds.** — P. B. Hadley
calls attention to the common occurrence of the coccidium of " black-
head " (entero-hepatitis in the intestine of sparrows (Passer domesticus)
in America. The parasites were also found in the field-sparrow (Spizella
pusilla), white-throated sparrow (Zonotrichia albicollis), junco (Junco
hyemalis), hermit thrush, and robin (Merida migratoria). Severe cocci-
diosis was observed in the quail (Colinus virginianus) and in the grouse
(Bonaso umbellus). The appearance was like that seen in the cocci-
diosis of turkeys, fowls, pheasants, guinea-hens, ducks, geese, and pigeons.
The sparrow seems partly to blame for the diffusion of the coccidiosis,
which is now a severe menace to the poultry-raising industry in all parts
of the United States.

* Arch. Zool. Exper., xlvi. (1910) Notes et Revue, No. 1 pp. i-xx (12 figs.).
t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 212-14.
X Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lvi. (1910) pp. 524-5.
§ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lvi. (1911) pp. 507-41 (1 plate and 2 figs.).
II Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lvi. (1910) pp. 508-21 (3 pis.).
f Trans. Proc. R. Soc. S. Australia, xxxiv. (1910) pp. 100-14 (2 pis.).
** Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lvi. (1910) pp. 522-3.

:;70 si mmakv ot 01 kkknt reseakches delating to

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,
Including- Cell-Contents.

Chromosome-reduction in Oenothera.* — R. R. Gates publishes
brief review of the work of B. M. Davis on CEnoth&ra grand/flora. After
reference to tbe importance of the latter work in confirming two funda-
mental points, viz. the absence of pairing of separate threads during
synapsis, and the subsequent end-to-end pairing (telosynapsis), the
reviewer points out the differences in the account of reduction in
0. grandiflora and in 0. LamarcMana. The first difference, viz. the
existence of prochromosomes, is regarded as insufficiently proved, but
the description of the heterotypic chromosomes is regarded as showing a
greater attraction of the individual chromosomes to pair than is found
in 0. Lamarckiana. This may possibly be connected with the mutation
of the latter.

Chromosomes of (Enothera Mutants and Hybrids. t — R. R. Gates
publishes a brief summary of his work dealing with the cytology of
(Enothera. The experiments were begun in 1905, and up to tbe present
time have yielded the following results : In 0. Lamarckiana the number
of chromosomes is fourteen, the reduced number being seven. "When
tli is species is crossed with 0. lata the number of chromosomes found
is twenty, with ten as the reduced number, but a subsequent cross
gave the same number as in 0. Lamarckiana. In telophase the chromo-
somes of the heterotypic mitosis look like tetrads but appear to be really
bivalent. In 0. rubrinervis the chromosomes number fourteen and are
of the usual size, although the pollen-mother-cells are large and have
protoplasmic connexions. In 0. nanella the chromosomes are also
fourteen in number. In 0. biennis crueiata (a mutant of 0. Lamarckiana)
in the synapsis of the pollen-mother-cells there is an additional body
resembling a small nucleolus, but it persists after the latter has Woken
down. This is probably the same body as is seen at the side of the
spindle in both 0. lata and 0. Lamarckiana, also in hybrids between
0. lata and 0. Lamarckiana and in 0. rubrinervis. These bodies may
be termed heterochromosomes provisionally, but their full history and
origin are unknown. The writer hopes to publish further results before
long.

* Bot, Gaz., xiix. (1910) pp. 65-6.

+ Advance print from Proc. 7th Internat. Zool. Congress, Boston, 1907 (1910)
pp. 1-4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 371

Structure and Development.
Veg-etative.

Anatomy and Morphology of Roots of Conifers.* — W. Nbelle
publishes the results of his investigations upon the anatomy and
morphology of the roots of the Coniferge. The present paper deals
with the primary and secondary cortex and centra] cylinder of various
species representing the important genera, while two sections are devoted
bo mycorhiza and heterorhizy.

The chief results are embodied in a comprehensive table of classifica-
tion in which the author divides the Coniferae into two main groups.
In the first group bands of thickening are absent in the primary cortex
and there is no hypodermis, but endotrichia (i.e. root-hairs formed from
cells lying in the second and third row below the surface) may develop.
In the secondary cortex suberized crystal-cells and sclerenchyma are
found ; layers of cork form the outer surface. Subdivision is based
upon the character of the roots, position and formation of resin-canals,
and upon the crystal-cells and tannin-sacs. This group includes all the
Abietineae.

In the second group there are bands of thickening in all except the
outermost layers of the primary cortex. Both root-hairs and resin-
canals are absent. Subdivision is based upon the character of the
thickened bands, the presence or absence of hypodermis and primary
resin-canals, etc. This group includes the Araueariaceaj, Taxodieas, and
Cupressinffi.

In conclusion, the author describes three kinds of roots (heterorhizia )
and points out that mycorhiza are found in connexion with the roots
of all the Coniferae, but that only in the Abietinea? are they typically
ectotropic : in the Araucariacea?, Taxodieae and Cupressinea? the myce-
lium is endotropic. The presence of an ectotropic mycelium appears to
influence not only the structure of the cortex but also that of the
central cylinder.

Origin and Development of Bulbs in the Genus Erytkonium. —
31. Blodgett draws the following conclusions from his study. The de-
layed development of the embryo is associated with a large store of
endosperm, which is drawn upon by the germinating embryo during the
season when vegetative activity is low ; the young seedling is established
in the soil early in the spring, the endosperm furnishing the needed
materials for its development. With the exhaustion of the reserve
material of the seed, the primary root is developed, and the cotyledon
is elevated into the air and light ; the cotyledon is the only leaf exposed
to the light by the seedling. The stem apex, located in a narrow cavity
in the base of the cotyledon, is carried forward by the elongation of the
embryo, and after elevation of the cotyledon, is carried farther into the
soil by the elongation of the walls of the cavity. The short period of
vegetative activity, and the prompt descent of the stem apex in the
dropper, would indicate adjustment to short growing seasons ; the brevity
-of the active season is a feature of the life-cycle. The tendency on the

* Bot. Zeit. lxviii. (1910) pp. 169-266 (50 figs.).

t Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 340-73 (3 pis. and figs, in text).

372 SUMMAEY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

part of the seedling to bury the stein apex deeply is continued by the
immature plants in the production of runners, which are more or less
comparable to the dropper of the seedling in structure.

The persistence of the original stem apex until the establishment of
i Ik flower axis allows for the repetition of an indefinite scries of imma-
ture bulbs, formed from runners or in situ, but introducing no new
structures during the whole period of immature development. With
the formation of the flowering shoot, the vegetative structures become
secondary in importance, and the renewal bulb is developed from an
axillary, bred at the base of the shoot. The continuation of the indivi-
dual is thereafter without vegetative multiplication normally, the
increase being secured by the seeds.

In the development of means of vegetative multiplication elongation
of the structure immediately about the stem apex (in seedlings the base
of the cotyledon, in the western forms the base of the petiole) was
followed by the elongation of the scales of axillary buds, thus forming
additional descending axes, each of which developed an additional bull)
from its terminal bud.

The general development in the genus would confirm the assumption
that it is related to Tulipa, especially through T. sylvestris.

Reproductive.

Embryology in Euphorbiacese.* — J. Modilewski has made further
investigations concerning the development of the embryo-sac in Euphorbia
procera Bieb., in order to show its relationship with other species of
Euphorbia. This investigator finds that during the early stages of seed-
formation archesporial cells arise, which divide into suspensor cells and
embryo-sac mother-cells. All the mother-cells give rise to four nuclei,
but there is no subsequent cell-division. Only one of these mother-cells
ripens into an embryo-sac containing sixteen nuclei ; the remaining
mother-cells degenerate.

In the other Euphorbiaceas there is only a single archesporial cell ;
the embryo-sac mother-cell divides into four daughter-cells, from the
lowest of which develops a typical embryo-sac containing eight nuclei.

Gnetales as Apetalous Angiosperms.j — As a result of anatomical
research, 0. Lignier and A. Tison come to the following conclusions as
to the value of the flowers of Gnetales, and the systematic position of
the family. The type of flower is similar in the three genera — Welwit-
schia, Ephedra, and Gnetum — and in both sexes, and consists of an axis
rising from the axil of a bract, and bearing four verticils, of which two
may represent the perianth. The third forms the androecium with ter-
minal sori 1-, 2-, or 3-locular ; and the fourth, a closed ovary, with style
and stigma, containing an ovule reduced to the nucellus. The ovary is
basilar, and seems to be a continuation of the floral axis, but is very
probably foliar. The male flower of W. mirabilis is the only one in
which the four verticils are represented ; in other cases one at least is

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxviii. (1910) pp. 413-18 (1 pi.).
t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 201-3.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. 373

absent. Each of the four verticils is served by a well-marked wood and
bast system.

The unisexuality of Clnetales arises from an original hermaphroditism
by abortion, and, as Hooker remarks, the male flower (pseudo-hermaphro-
dite) of W. mirabilis is an evidence of this. The verticils show two
divisions, except in the female flowers of Ephedra, which shows three.
This suggests that there has been a change in the floral symmetry of the
Gnetales.

The authors conclude that these flowers are Angiospermous, and in a
state of retrogressive development. By reason of the many gymno-
spermic characteristics which they retain, they are primitive Angiosperms.
They have nearly the same floral organization as is found in Amentales,
and so would form a side group parallel with this family, and belonging
to a lateral branch from the base of the Angiosperm trunk. Amentales
may possibly have arisen from the base of this branch.

Physiology.
Nutrition and Growth-

Removal of Starch through the Petiole.* — N. T. Deleano has
experimented with Vitis vmifera in order to discover the method of con-
duction in the petiole of the products of assimilation of the leaf. The
author applied the iodine-test under very varied conditions. In some
cases the leaves were left intact until the application of the test ; in
others they were placed in the dark with either the upper or lower
surface resting upon water. Sometimes the petioles were immersed in
water or portions of them cut away ; they were also treated with chloro-
form-water or plasmolyzed. The results show that leaves left on the
stem lose their starch most quickly ; but this loss is retarded when the
upper surface of the leaf, and still more when the lower surface is laid
on the surface of water. When the petiole is split longitudinally, the
starch disappears at the same rate from both halves of the leaf. If,
however, a transverse cut is made in the petiole so as to pass through
half of the vascular strands, the starch disappears more slowly in that
half of the leaf in which these strands are cut. Starch is apparently
removed from the leaf chiefly through the vascular tissues, but it is still
uncertain whether the wood or the bast is the more important factor.
In a scalded stem the starch was conducted more slowly than in an
uninjured one. Petioles placed in saltpetre solution were unaffected in
44 hours when the solution was of 5 to 10 p.c. concentration. In
52 hours, with a concentration of 10 p.c, plasmolysis occurred, but the
petioles died. Chloroform-water retards the passage of starch through
the petiole.

The author is of the opinion that no definite conclusion can be
formed as to the amount of conduction that takes place in the cortex.

Irri ability.

Effect of Longitudinal Compression upon the Production of Me-
chanical Tissue in Stems. f—L. H. Pennington reports that the woody

* Jahrb. wiss. Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 129-86 (7 figs.).
t Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 257-84.

:',7i SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

stems of Robinia Pseudo-Acacia, Rhus glabra, Populus tremuloides, and
Ricinus communis show no increase in mechanical Btrength, or in the
amount or kind of mechanical tissue under the influence of longitudinal
compression. In the young herbaceous Btems of Helianthus annuus,
Vicia Faba, and Phaseolus vulgaris, the development of mechanical
ngth in the tissues is somewhat retarded by a longitudinal compn 3-
sion caused by comparatively heavy weights. Neither light nor heavy
weights have any appreciable effect upon the growth and strength of
herbaceous stems which have already formed a cylinder of mechanical
or woody i issue. Continuous longitudinal compression causes no marked
differences in size or form of any part of the stem which is subjected to
the compression, excepting, of course, mechanical changes which might
lie cause! by excessive compression.

Mechanism of Movement in Graminese.* — Z. Woycicki has investi-
gated the movement-mechanism of the flowering branches of the
Gramineas. After reference to the swollen bases of the leaf-sheaths and
the swelling of the lodicules, the author gives special attention to the
masses of tissue found on one or both sides of the angle, made by the
flowering branch and axis, through which movement takes place, and
shows that these last structures must be regarded as differentiated por-
tions of the stem for a special function. The epidermis of these cushions
is sometimes thickly covered with hairs, and the epidermal cells differ
in form and arrangement from those of the ordinary epidermis. The
outer part of the cushions is composed either of thick or thin-walled
parenchyma, with more or less numerous intercellular spaces, while the
interior is of a collenchymatous character. Most frequently the sclereii-
chymatous ring of the stem is replaced in the neighbourhood of the
cushion by a patch (often horse-shoe shaped) of sclerenchymatous and
conducting tissue, upon which the movement-mechanism rests. In other
cases the supporting structure is a wedge-shaped mass of sclerenchyma
and collenchyma. The power of movement depends almost exclusively
upon the turgidity of the cells of the cushion, which is due to the
presence of nitrates or nitrites, although the swelling of the cell-walls
frequently plays an important part. At the time of movement the cells
of the cushions increase in size in the radio-horizontal direction. This
movement can take place even after growth of the tissues has ceased
owing to the turgor of the intracellular spaces, provided that the cell-
walls have not lost their elasticity.

General.

Pollination Experiments with Anonas in South Florida.f—
I'. <i. Wester draws attention to A. squamosa L. (sugar apple),
A. reticulata L. (custard apple), and A. Cherimolia Mill, (cherimoya),
and A. glabra, the last named being indigenous. The two first named
species have fruited fairly well, hut never abundantly. The failure of

* Bot. Centralbl., xxvi. 2 (1910) pp. 188-340 (151 figs.).

t Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xsacvii. (1910) pp. 529-39 (figs, in text)

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC. 375

cherimoya to set fruit after several years of bloom led the author to in-
vestigate the matter. The construction and fragrance of the flowers of
all three species shows that they are entomophilous, and the author
finds that they are proterogynous. The petals are almost vertical until
the shedding of the pollen, leaving a small opening for the entrance of
insects. As the flowers develop a viscid fluid is secreted, covering the
syncarpium and apparently most abundant about twenty -four hours
before the the pollen is shed. As the time approaches for the discharge
of pollen, the petals spread outward and upward very rapidly ; at the
same time a strong fragrance is exhaled. The stigma can now be
approached by large insects, and, were the flower synchronus, self-pollina-
tion might be effected. A small beetle. Colastus truncatas, has been
found acting as pollinating agent in sugar apple and cherimoya flowers-
Another small insect found in flowers of sugar apple was identified as
probably belonging to the Pharaxonothi. A small thrips also frequents
the flowers of these Anonas.

A series of pollination experiments was carried out on these three
species. Pollen was applied to the stigmas of twenty-seven cherimoya
flowers at the time of the discharge of the pollen in the flower ; all these
flowers dropped. Thirty-four flowers were pollinated twenty-four hours
or more before the shedding of the pollen, and all set. Experiments
with sugar apple and custard apple flowers gave similar results.

The flowers of the pond apple, which belong to a different section of
this genus, have similar arrangements of andrcecium and gyncecium.
The flowers open to admit small insects about twenty-four hours before
the pollen is shed, exhaling a strong odour. Practically all the flowers
shed their pollen before sunrise, and are probably pollinated by nocturnal
insects, though the agent has not been detected.

Since these investigations began, the cherimoya has. without artificial
pollination, set fruit sparingly in Florida, less than 20 ft. above sea level.
In Hawaii it fruits only at an elevation of many hundred feet. This
may be due to the presence there of certain insects not found at lower
altitudes. The sterility of cherimoya in Florida has doubtless been due
to the scarcity of blooms and to an insufficient number of insects to
assist in pollination.

It has been proved that sugar apple hybridizes readily with cherimoya.
custard apple, and pond apple ; cherimoya has also been successfully
crossed with pond apple : hut so far. attempts to cross sour-sop, A.
muricata L., with these species, have failed. The extraordinary pro-
ductivity of a few individual trees suggests a change in regard to the
pollination of the flowers of these trees, possibly due to synacmy and
self-pollination. Should this lie confirmed, such trees would be of in-
estimable value in the creation of varieties independent of outside
agencies for fructification.

Comes, 0. — Del Fagiuolo comvme (Phaseolus vulgaris L.)

[An account of the history, properties, and cultivated races and forms of
the scarlet runner.]

Atti R. Istit. Incoraggiamento Napoli, l'JO'J (1910) pp. 73-183.

376 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Cryptogams.

Pteridophyta.

(By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.)

Evolution of the Filicinean Leaf-trace.* — E. W. Sinnott writes
about the evolution of the filicinean leaf-truce, a question round which
cent re some of the most fundamental problems of plant morphology,
such as those concerning the retention of primitive characters by the
leaf, the inter-relations of the foliar vascular supply and that of the
axis, and the general questions of stelar theory and the origin and dif-
ferentiation of plant tissues. The conclusions reached by the author
after the examination of much material are summed up as follows :
1. The base of the leaf-trace in living ferns presents three main types
of structure : the primitively monarch, with one group of protoxylem ;
the primitively diarch, with two ; and the primitively triarch, with
three. 2. The first type is characteristic of the Osmundaceae and the
Ophioglossaceae, where the base of the leaf-trace is a single monarch
strand, which is often mesarch as well. It is more strikingly so in the
fossil ancestors of the former family. This single strand becomes in
the petiole a broad arch, which is continuous in the Osmundacea? and
broken up in the Ophioglossaceaj. The primitive condition of this type
of trace is an elliptical concentric strand with one mesarch protoxylem.
3. The second type is characteristic of the Marattiaceae. In all the
members of this family, save Angiopteris, and in young plants of this
genus, the base of the leaf-trace consists of two bundles, each of which
has a single protoxylem. This is endarch in all except Dansea, where it
is often mesarch. A complicated arch of bundles in the petiole develops
from these two early ones. The primitive condition of this type of
trace is two circular concentric bundles, each with one mesarch proto-
xylem. 4. The third type is characteristic of all remaining ferns, and
its primitive condition is a single, roughly triangular, concentric bundle,
with its base towards the stem-axis, and with three mesarch protoxylems,
one near each corner. In the Schizeacere, (lleicheniaceaj, and primitive
Matonineae among the Simplices, the strand is single throughout, and
at its base is always triarch and often mesarch. Lygodium alone among
the Filicales shows a petiolar structure which is neither endarch nor
arched, and which is doubtless very primitive. In the simpler Gradatae,
the trace becomes broadened into a tetrarch, flat-topped arch, which
becomes separated into many strands in the Dicksoniea? and Cyatheaceaj.
The Hymenophyllaceaa form a reduction series from the Simplices. In
the lower Mixtaj, the undivided tetrarch trace persists, but in the bulk
of the smaller and simpler forms it becomes divided into two equal
diarch bundles. The complicated petiolar system of the higher Poly-
podiacea3 is always referable to this simpler type. 5. The monarch
trace may be considered as the persistence of a very primitive condition.
The diarch type has perhaps been derived from the constriction and
separation into two of such a primitive diarch bundle as that of Clepsy-

* Annals of Botany, xxv. (1911) pp. 167-191 (1 pi. and figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 377

dropsis among the Zygopteride;c, while the triarch condition may have
arisen by the amplification of a similar bundle into a tetrarch strand, a
slight reduction of this, and the fusion of the two median protoxylern
groups. 6. The constant endarch and concentric structure of the leaf-
bundle, as opposed to the varying conditions in the stele, point to the
former as a conservative organ. 7. The petiole at its attachment is in
many cases very slender, and the base of the leaf-trace presents always
its smallest and most compact condition. Structures are often retained
here which are undoubtedly very primitive. The petiole is largest at
the point where it first becomes free, probably for mechanical reasons,
and the bundle here is in its most complex form. 8. Since the tran-
spiration current seems to be accommodated equally by the slender trace
and by the large petiolar bundle of the same leaf, it is improbable that
it has had much influence in producing the complications of the foliar
vascular system. The stele and the leaf -trace have developed almost
independently, and the latter has had little influence in moulding the
former. 9. The condition found in the base of the trace in any fern
was probably once present throughout the whole leaf-bundle. 10. The
simple condition in the upper part of the leaf may possibly be regarded
as primitive. 11. The histological influence of the stele is sometimes
carried up into the base of the petiole, especially in cases of reduction,
where the petiolar bundle, better than the lower part of the leaf-trace,
retains conditions which may be regarded as primitive. 12. In the
Filicales, as in all other vascular plants, the leaf -trace is the seat of
ancestral characters.

Anatomy of Marattia.* — G. M. Charles describes the anatomy of
the sporeling of Marattia alata. In brief her work is summarized as
follows : 1. The transition from protostele to solenostele is sudden, with-
out any definite medullated monostelic stage. 2. The medullary system
of Marattia differs from that of solenostelic ferns in origin, course of
bundles, and development into a cylinder. It resembles that of Psaronius
in its relation to leaf -traces. 3. Elongation of the stem causes the union
of the bundles into broad bands, and a reduction of the medullary
system. This emphasizes the close relation between the compact habit
and crowded leaves of Marattia, and the number of concentric cycles and
leaf -gaps in the dictyostele. 4. The occurrence and position of proto-
xylern varies. It may be inconspicuous or may consist of spiral or modified
reticulate tracheids. It may be in an exarch or mesarch position in the
cotyledonary node, mesarch in the protostele above the cotyledonary
node, and usually endarch in the strands of the older parts of the stem.
Similar variations occur in the leaf traces. 5. Apical meristems vary
from a triangular apical cell in young sporelings to meristematic groups
in older stems and roots. Such variation during the course of develop-
ment occurs in the gametophytes of Pteridophytes and in some liver-
worts, but is not recorded for the sporophyte of other ferns. 6. The
cotyledonary trace is collateral during most of its course. Later leaf-
traces start collateral and develop adaxial sieve-tubes in their course
through the cortex. 7. Secondary roots originate from vascular tissue

* Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 81-101 (4 pis. and figs.).

378 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

before differentiation into regions has begun. The cortex shares in
forming the cortex of the root. 8. Mucilage ducts originate both
achizogenouslj and lysigenously, generally the former.

Marattia is characterized by a marked instability. Such an insta-
bility is found in the root, structure of Ophioglossacese, the protoxylem
position of Dicksoni8es and in the variable apical meristem of tern game-
bophytes. < lombined with this instability in Marattia is the indefinitenesa
of the medullated monostelic stage. The Marattiacese have retained
many characters of the stock from which branched off the ( >phioglossaceae,
then the Psaronieae and Cyatheaceae.

Mechanism by which Fern Fronds roll up.*— W. Schmidt discusses
the question of the means by which certain ferns roll uj> their fronds ;
whether it be a hygroscopic phenomenon, due to changes in the hygro-
scopic condition of the cell-wad. or whether it lie a cohesion phenomenon,
due to changes in the quantity of the cell-sap. The cohesion theory was
invented by Kamerling, and the name refers to the strong cohesion of
the primordial utricle to the cell-wall. As the cell-sap is reduced by
evaporation, the cell-wall is dragged in owing to atmospheric pressure
and does not separate from the contracted primordial utricle. The author
adopts the second theory, and summarizes his conclusions as follows:—
1. The rolling up of the desiccated fronds of Geterach qfficinarum, Poly-
podium vulgare, Asplenium Trichomanes and A. ruta-muraria is due to
cohesion and not to hygroscopic mechanism. 2. Steinbrinck's methods
were very successful in proving the existence of cohesion-mechanism.

3. Very satisfactory results were obtained by a new method which per-
mitted the making of observations not only on sections but also on intact
fronds by such dehydrating agents as strong glycerin, etc. 4. The in-
fluence of turgor on curling fronds must not be overlooked. 5. The
curling movement of the fronds is in keeping with the anatomical
structure.

Pteropsida.f — E. C. Jeffrey replies to criticisms which have been
levelled at the great group of vascular plants defined as Pteropsida.
and gives the following summary of his views. 1. The Pteropsida
represent a great natural phylum of vascular plants characterized by dorsi-
sporangiate sporophylls and by palingenetically large leaves, as inferred
from their anatomical relations. 2. The pith of the Vasculares, in all
cases where definite evidence is available, is an inclusion of the funda-
mental tissue of the cortex on the part of the stele. 3. The concentric
type of tubular central cylinder is more ancient than the collateral and
antedates the latter, as is shown by the persistence of the concentric
condition in many leaf -traces, where it has become obsolete in the stem

4. So far as the primary bundle system of the Vasculares is concerned
they present a reduction series, in which the ferns and lower Gymno-
sperms (Archigymnospernife) represent the earlier and more complex
stages, and the higher G-ymnosperms (Metagymnospermre) and dicoty-
dons the phases which are more recent and more simplified.

* Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxvi., Abt. 1 (1910) pp. 476-508.
t Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 401-14 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AM> BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 379

Fossil Osmundacese.* — R. Kidston and I». T. Crwynne-Vaughan
publish the fourth and final instalment of their studies of the fossil
Osmundacese. They describe the anatomy of the stern of the new species,
Osmundites Kolbei, from the Wealden in Cape Colony. In summarizing
their studies they present a table of all the.Osmundacese investigated by
them, showing that the protostelic representatives are of more ancient
origin than those with a developed pith. Their hypothesis, that the
pith of the Osmundaceas is of stelar origin is, inter alia, criticised by
E. C. Jeffrey. t

Chemotaxis of Fern-spermatozoids.J — K. Shibata gives an account
of his researches on the chemotaxis of the spermatozoids of Pteridophytes.
His experiments are set forth in innumerable tables. There are at least
three categories of chemotactic sensibilities : 1. That for the anions of
malic acid and allied chemotactically active dicarbonic acids. 2. That
for OH-ions (only found in Isoetes). 3. That for the kations (metallic-
and H-ions) and alkaloids.

Mutations of Asplenium ruta-muraria.§ — F. von Tavel writes of
the mutations of Asplenium ruta-muraria. H. Christ, in 1903, || classified
them in four sections and seventeen varieties, according to the form of
the ultimate leaf-segments. Von Tavel discusses the causes of this
variability, namely, ecological conditions, such as light, shade, etc. ; re-
gular heterophylly on one and the same plant, perhaps due to seasonal
changes ; sports, where one or more leaves of a plant-rosette are quite of
an aberrant type. Local forms are apt to be constant ; for instance,
the form prevalent on the Lake of Geneva is quite different from that of
the Lake of Lucerne. There is usually a predominant form in a given
locality, accompanied by variants.

North American Ferns. % — W. N. Clute describes Pohjpodium pro-
longilobum and P. vulgare var. perpusillum, two novelties gathered by
J. H. Ferriss on Mount Lemmon in the Santa Catalina range, Arizona.

He discusses** Asplenium Glenn iei, one of the rarest ferns in the
United States, and recorded only from the Huachuca Mountains of
Arizona, but it is not uncommon in Mexico.

He cites ft J- H. Ferriss's record of Nephrodium mexicanum, and
considers the question whether the plant is not better kept distinct from
N. patulum.

He gives an account % X of Onoclea sensibilis f. obtusilata, and some
other rare forms.

He also describes §§ a difficult excursion through a dense mountain-
forest in Jamaica in search of the rare Lonchitis aurita.

0 E. Jennings mi publishes some notes on the distribution of certain
plants in Western Pennsylvania, treating especially of Woodwardia vir-
gin tea.

* Trans. Eoy. Soc. Edinburgh, xlvii. (1910) pp. 455-77 (4 pis.).

t Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 476-7.

t Pringsheim's Jahrb. wiss. Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 1-60.

§ Verb. Schweiz. Naturf. Ges. 93 Jahresversam. (1911) pp. 260-2.

1| Hedwigia, xlii. (1903) pp. 153-77 (4 pis.).

i Fern Bull., xviii. (1911) pp. 97-8 (1 pi.). ** Tom. cit., pp. 101-4 (figs.),
tt Tom. cit., pp. 104-5. JJ Tom. cit., pp. 106-11 (figs.).

§§ Tom. cit., pp. 111-15. Illl Tom. cit., pp. 99-101.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARI HES RELATING TO

E. S. Reynolds* publishes notes on species of Botrychium from
Tennessee, and includes a description of a peculiar teratologic^,] specimen
of B. obliquum, a species which is rare in Tennessee. B. riniixianum is
more common.

Bryophyta.
(By A. Gepp.)

Inter-relationships of the Bryophyta.f — F. Cavers continues his
studies of the inter-relationships of the Bryophyta. Chapter AT. treats
of the morphology, anatomy, reproduction, and development of the
Sphagnales. and is followed by a list of sixty-two papers which heal'
upon the subject. Chapter VII. gives a similar, but briefer, account of
the Andreaeales. In Chapter VIII. the Bryales are contrasted with the
.Sphagnales and the Andreseales on their sporophyte characters : and the
classification of the Bryales is discussed from the point of view of the
development of the peristome. There are four sharply-marked types of
peristome, which permit the Bryales to be separated into the four
following independent groups : Tetraphidales, Polytrichales, Buxbaumi-
ales, Eu-Bryales. The latter group is divided into Haplolepideee, Hetero-
lepidese, and Diplolepideaj ; and these again are sub-divided into cohorts.
In Chaper IX. are discussed the inter-relationships of the higher Bryo-
phyta enumerated above ; and the author's views as to their phylogeny
are expressed diagrammatically in a pedigree table. Also an ingenious
argument is developed that there probably is a definite correlation
between the form of the archesporium and the sterile apical portion of
the sporogonium. Where the archesporium is dome-shaped, the sterile
apical tissue is practically cut off from the stream of food-material
passing up through the seta and columella, the nutritive material
becoming almost entirely used up by the developing spores. In the
higher mosses the archesporium is almost cylindrical, and is open above
and below, allowing ready passage of nutritive material to the apex of
the capsule, and permitting of considerable growth in that region ; thus
arise annulus, operculum, and peristome. Chapter X. contains a classi-
fication of the Bryophyta in ten orders, with their families. It contains
also a discussion of the old-established primary division of the Bryophyta
into two classes, Hepatic^ and Musci, and of the question whether the
Anthocerotales ought not to be excluded from the Hepaticre, and the
Sphagnales to be excluded from the Musci.

In Chapter XI. the author points out that he has assumed, as a
working hypothesis, that the Bryophyta in the outlined scheme of classi-
fication form an ascending series, in which the sporogonium represents
an interpolated generation arising from the segmented oospore, and is
characterized by a gradually increasing sterilization of potentially sporo-
genous tissue. In Riccia is found the most primitive stage, the steriliza-
tion being confined to the formation of a unilamellate capsular wall.
Further, lie discusses} GoebeFs view as to the Marchantiales constituting
a descending series of reduction forms, and finds it but partially accept

* Rhodora, xiii. (1911) pp. 14-15.
t New Phytologist, x. (1911) pp. 1-46. J Tom. cit., pp. 84-6.

to

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 381

able. If the theory of the ascending development of the Bryophyta is
accepted, with Riccia presenting the mosl primitive form of sporogonram,
the conclusion is natural that the Bryophyte sporogonium had an anti-
thetic origin, and has never been anything but a sporogonium. As to
the vascular plants, and the suggestion that the starting-point of the
Pteridophyta may be sought in the sporogonium of Anthoceros, there are
very great difficulties in the way of an explanation of how roots and
leaves originated. It is much easier to infer that the Bryophyta and
Pteridophyta had a collateral origin.

Desiccation-phenonema in Mosses.* — C. Steinbrinck discusses the
cause of the crumpling of certain axile organs as a result of the loss of
water, principally in the case of the mosses Leptodon Smithii, Leucodon
sciuroides, and Orthotrichum Lyellii. As on previous occasions, he finds
himself in strong opposition to W. Lorch.

Illustrations of Exotic Mosses.| — G. Roth publishes the fourth and
concluding part of his Die aussereuropaischen Laubmoose, Band I. It
contains descriptions of 52 species of Trematodon, and 7 of Wilsoniella,
together with figures of each species, analytical keys, and the indexes,
title-pages, etc., to the volume.

European HepaticaB.J — K. Muller publishes a further instalment of
his monograph of the European hepatica? in Rabenhorst's Kryptogamen-
flora. He finishes the genus Plagiochila, the seven species of which are
all found in our islands ; and treats of Pedinophyllum (2 species),
Leptoscyphus (4), Lophocolea (5), Ghiloscyphus (4), and begins Harpan-
thus.

British Bryophyta. § — B. Kaalaas publishes a description of
Cephalozia macrantha Kaal. et Nicholson, a new species found in a Sussex
Sphagnum-hog by W. E. Nicholson, in June 1908. It differs from
Cephalozia media Lindb. in size, in the more frequent presence of under-
leaves, in the much larger leaf -cells, and especially in the large perianth.

H. N. Dixon || gives an account of Tortula canescens Mont., which
was first recorded for this country by Griffiths in 18G9. It was refonnd
last year in its original locality, Meadfoot Cliffs, Torquay, by Barter. In
February of this year C. E. Larter sent young specimens of it to H. N.
Dixon ; these were remarkable as often having the calyptra rough, as in
Pottia. Dixon explains the structure of the leaf-nerve as seen in trans-
verse section.

Moss-remains in Scottish Peat.lF — F. J. Lewis, in an appendix
to Part IV. of his report on the plant-remains in the Scottish peat
mosses, gives an account of the moss-fragments determined by H. N. Dixon,
some eighteen or twenty species. They were collected partly in West
Shetland, partly in Havnaf jord, near Reykjavik, in Iceland.

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxviii. (1911) pp. 549-62 (figs.).

t Dresden : Heinrich (1911) i. lief. 4, pp. 273-331 (pis. 25-33).

j Die Lebermoose. Leipzig : Kurnmer, 1911, lief. 13, pp. 769-832 (figs. 341-357).

§ Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 105-6 (1 pi.).

H Tom. cit., pp. 127-8.

t Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh, xlvii. (1911) pp. 793-833 (5 pis.).

June 21st, 1911 2 c

SUMMARY OF UUBRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Moss-flora of the Haute-Saone.* — A. Coppey publishes a further
instalmenl of his phyioi:1 < "graphic studies on the mosses of the Haute-
Sa6ne, and gives records of forty-four species of Tortulaceae and
Pottiacese.

Sphagnacese of the Rhbngebirge.t — J. Roll writes on the
Sphagnaceae of the Rbbngebirge, and gives a list of seventeen species
and several varieties, many of them being new records for the district.

Mosses of the Crimea.:}: — A. A. Sapehin gives an account of the
ecology and plant-geography of the Mosses of the Crimea mountains.
Ilr first discusses such external conditions as temperature, moisture,
light, substratum, wind, etc., in relation to various species ; and then
he treats of moss-associations in three classes, namely xerophytts,
hygrophytes, and hydrophytes, subdivided according to the nature of
the soil and forest.

Mosses of Ceylon. § — T. Herzog gives an ecological account of the
moss-flora of Ceylon, and endeavours to describe the way in which the
species fit into the landscape. The plains are almost bare of mosses,
but in the lower hills there is some richness of species, especially Calyni-
peraceae and LeucobryaceEe, endemic or of Malayan affinity. In the
upper hills there is a wonderful display of mosses, conspicuous by their
colours and abundant in their variety ; many of these also are endemic.
His enumeration contains 200 species, 15 of which are new.

Moss-flora of the Atlantic Islands. || — A. Geheeb at his death left
an unfinished account of the moss-flora of the Atlantic Islands, which
has been completed by T. Herzog and published in Luerssen's Bibliotheca
Botanica. It is divided into three parts : — 1. Lists of species (with
localities) of mosses of the Azores (108), Madeira (176), Canaries (212),
Cape de Verd (20), Ascension (20), St. Helena (32), Tristan d' Acunha (36).
2. Descriptions of 35 new and critical species, 6 of them being created
by Geheeb. 3. An account of the geographical conditions of the various
islands, with lists of their endemic species. The total enumeration amounts
to 476 species and 7 varieties. The 19 coloured plates are reproductions
of water-colour drawings by Frau Geheeb.

Teneriffe Mosses. If — H. N. Dixon gives an account of a collection of
mosses gathered by J. H. Salter in Teneriffe, mostly in the very dry
neighbourhood of Guimar on the southern side of the island, between
December 1908 and February 1910. About 53 species and varieties are
recorded ; 8 of these are additions to the fldra of the Canaries, 3 of them
being new to science. Critical notes are added to several of the species.

Moss-flora of Tunis.**— J. Pitard and L. Corbiere give a list of
additions to the moss-flora of Tunis. Previous records are to be found

* Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 45-8.
t Allgem. Bot. Zeitschr., xvii. (1911) pp. 18-21.
X Engl. Bot. Jahrb., xlv. (1911) pp. 62-83.
§ Hedwigia, 1. (1910) pp. 115-45.

|| Bibliotheca botanica, Heft 73, Stuttgart, 1910, 74 pp. (20 pis.). See also
Hedwigia, 1. (1910) Beibl., pp. 157-8.

If Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 1-8 (1 pi.).

** Bull. Soc. Bot. de France, lvi. Session extraord. 1910, pp. lv-lviii.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. 383

in papers published by Bescherelle, Corbiere, Theriot, Camus, and
amount to ninety-nine mosses and six hepatics. The additions bring
tlic totals up 137 mosses and forty-four hepatics. The new specimens
were gathered mostly in the neighbourhood of Ain-Draham (Khrou-
mirie). One species is new.

In a subsequent paper* they give a complete enumeration of the
moss-flora, indicating the distribution, attitudes, moss-associations, etc. ;
and they raise the totals to 152 mosses and forty-eight hepatics.

HepaticaB of New Caledonia.f — E. G. Paris publishes a list of 250
hepaticae collected in New Caledonia by Le Rat, and determined by
F. Stephani. Some 100 of these arc new, but their descriptions are
not likely to be published before the appearance of the Supplement of
Stephani's Species Hepaticarum.

Polytrichaceae of North America. + - -T. C. Frye publishes an
illustrated account of the Polytrichaceae of western North America.
Starting with a synoptical key of the world's genera of Polytrichaceae,
he adds a key to the genera native to western North America, and then
proceeds to give a systematic treatment of each genus, supplying de-
scriptions and figures of the species. The genera concerned are ( 'atharinea,
Oligotrichum, Psilopilum, Bartramiopsis, Polytrkhadelphus, Pogonatum,
Polgtrkh urn .

Mexican Mosses. §— J. Cardot publishes the eighth instalment of
his preliminary diagnoses of Mexican mosses, in which are described a
new genus, Anomobryopsis, fourteen new species, and a new variety.
Critical notes are appended. The specimens were collected by Pringle,
Purpus, Barnes and Land, and others.

In his ninth instalment || he treats of thirty-four species and
varieties.

Splachnobryum in Greenhouses.^" — E. G. Britton gives an account
of a Splachnobryum found in greenhouses near Philadelphia. She
states it to be identical with S. delicatulum Broth, described by H. N.
Dixon in 1907, and found in a Yorkshire hot-house. Both plants have
the preperistome described by Dixon. A similar preperistome or bind-
ing membrane is shown by Fleischer to be present in S. Geheebii ;
and E. G. Britton finds it also in 8. Wrightii, S. JJariei, S. Wullschlse-
gelii and S. B&rnouillii ; and traces of it in S.flaccidum and S. Boivini.

Fissidens tequendamensis Mitten.** — H. N. Dixon supplements
some remarks which he published about Fissidens tequendamensis ft
recently when describing the new Irish species, F. exsul. At his request
E. G. Britton examined the type of F. tequendamensis in Mitten's her-
barium and found it to be identical with F. Lindigii Hampe, both
plants having come from the same type-locality, the Falls of Tequen-

* "Brill, Soc. Bot. de France, hi. Session extraord. 1910, pp. ccxv-ccxlii.
t Rev. Bryolog., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 128-32.

\ Proc. Washington Acad. Sci., xii. (1910) pp. 271-328 (30 figs.).
§ Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 1-9.
|| Tom. cit., pp. 33-43.
\ Bryologist, xiii. (1910) pp. 116-119 (pi.).

** Journ. of Bot., xlviii. (1910) pp. 280-1. ft Tom. cit. p. 147.

2 C 2

:;,s-l SUMMARY OF CUBREOT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

.hiina m New Granada. Both plants have the same cristate internal
lamellse al the base of the peristome teeth. Such variations of structure
as occur are of less than varietal importance. Eampe's name antedates
Mitten's by Beven pears, [ncluded in the synonymy is Schistophyllum
Orrii, a Dublin alien described by S. 0. Lindberg twenty years ago.

Adalbert Geheeb.* — T. Herzog writes sonic reminiscences of the
bryologist A. Geheeb (b. L842; d. 1909), for many years a chemist al
C,'MS;l. |l,. made innumerable visits to the Rhongebirge, and devoted
much time to the investigation of its muss-flora. He also made his mark
as an authority on exotic mosses, working out Puiggari's Brazilian collec-
tion, as well as collections of Australian and Papuan mosses belonging to
Melbourne herbarium. One of his best known publications is his Xeue
Beitrage zur Mossflora von Neu-Guinea (1881) and 1898), illustrated
with fine plates. His Bryologia Atlantica, begun in 1891, has recently
been completed and published by T. Herzog.

Nils Conrad Kindberg.f— This bryologist is the subject of a brief
obituary notice. He died in August 1910, at Upsala, being 78 years of
age. By profession a lecturer at Linkoping, he devoted the last thirty
years of his life to North American bryology. His moss-herbarium,
'containing 4000 species, is offered for sale.

Thallophyta.

Algae.

(By Mes. E. S. Gepp.)

Locomotion in Surirella.J — T. C. Palmer writes an able account
of the apparatus of locomotion in Surirella, founded on bis own careful
observations. He criticizes the views and arguments of Lauterborn, and
goes minutely into the differences between that author's results and his
own. Palmer's material was taken from a pool of pure water, on the
bottom of which are patches of diatoms, including Navicula iridis Ehr.,
N. dactylus, N. socialis, and Surirella elegans. A layer of these diatoms
kept in good condition for weeks at a time in a bottle, and was available
for stmfy. A number of significant observations were made on all the
species, but the apparently conclusive facts have to do with Surirdla.
The results are summed up by the author as follows :— 1. Butsehli
granules, or bodies of the same deportment in life, circulate into the keel
and run along its base. 2. Staining the living diatom with Bismarck
brown and tannic acid fails to indicate coleoderm within the keel, though
revealing it in the same preparation upon Eunotia and Pinnularia.
?>. After rapid killing and fixing, both eosin and iron-alum-hasmatoxylin
show the keel-canal more or less full of a substance continuous with the
protoplasm of the rib-canals, and staining like it, and showing the same
granular constitution. The author considers it demonstrated, therefore,
that the protoplasm of Surirella extends through the ribs into the keels,
wherein it runs from end to end of the diatom and occupies most of the

* Verb.. Bot. Ver. Prov. Brandenburg, 51 Jahrg. (1910) pp. (150)-(152).

t Bryologist, xiv. (1910) p. 13.

X Proc. Delaware County Inst. Sci., v. (1910) pp. 11 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 385

tube-like canals. Altogether it is, he says, quite evident that this
hyaline protoplasm, and not any hypothetical "gallerte," flows hack and
forth in these keels, and operating upon the surroundings through the
minute clefts propels the diatom, rolls it over, and stands it upon its end.
This is a kind of apparatus for diatom locomotion easily understood ;
and besides being in comfortable agreement with the nature and pecu-
liarities of the phenomena to be explained, it has the not inconsiderable
advantage of being demonstrable.

Behaviour of Chlorella in White and Coloured Lights.* - - P. A.
Dangeard publishes a note on the photographic properties of Chlorella
vulgaris. A culture of this alga, in a cylindrical glass jar containing
Knop's liquid, developed itself on the sides of the jar in flue parallel
lines, recalling Frauenhofer's lines in the spectrum. Upon investigation
it appeared that these lines corresponded with the shadows of the
window-bars of the laboratory focused on the sides of the jar. The
Chlorella preferred a situation not strongly illuminated. This sensi-
tiveness of Chlorella may serve usefully in laboratory experiments.

In a subsequent paper f Dangeard describes further experiments,
and shows that it is not the case that Chlorella moves into the position
best suited for it, but that being distributed equally over all the wall-
surface of the jar it develops most abundantly at those spots where
the illumination is best suited to it. By the use of monochromatic
screens and of three-coloured screens as used in photography, he found
Chlorella to develop best in red and orange light, feebly in violet, and
not at all in green. If a quick result is required, the number of oxygen
bubbles evolved in the different zones of coloured light in a given time
may be compared. One interesting experiment was the placing of a
Chlorella culture behind three three-colour screens and a large screen of
thick black paper ; strangely enough, in bright sunshine the evolution of
oxygen-bubbles took place almost as freely under the black screen as
under the three-colour screens. Some non-luminous rays presumably
passed through the black screen.

Study of Diatoms in Sedimentary Deposits.} — A. Lauby, in de-
scribing a new technical method for a paleophytologic study of ancient
sedimentary deposits, has plenty to say about the Diatomaceae and the
important evidence which they yield. They have, however, in the past
led careless workers into error. The employment of impure water in
washing the material has made some modern diatoms appear to have
been in existence in the Coal-period. Again, a modern deposit may have
been derived by denudation from an older deposit, and the same diatoms
naturally appear in both. The author gives practical instructions as to
how the study should be pursued, what methods adopted, what precau-
tions observed.

Classification of Alg£e.§ — J. Gomere writes a short essay on the
classification of algae. He begins by a resume of the various treatments,

* Bull. Soc. Bot. de France, lvi. (1909) pp. 368-70 (1 pi.).

t Tom. cit., 503-8.

X Bull. Soc. Bot. France, lvi. Mem. 15 (1910) 110 pp.

§ Mem. Acad. Sci. Toulouse, ser. 10, ix. (1909) pp. 219-26.

386 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

from Ducharfcre, in L 877, up to bhe great work of Oltmanns, in L904.
EEe is of opinion that too much Btress has been laid by some botanists
on bhe coloration of algae, and points Out instances where this lias led
io the absurdity of placing certain genera sometimes among the Rho-
dophyceae and sometimes in Cyanophyceae. He shows the greater
value iii classification of such characters as are furnished by structure or
general methods of reproduction for the division into large systematic
groups ; and for the secondary groups the peculiarities offered by the
different modes of multiplication, the reproductive organs, or, if acces-
sary, certain details of the thallus in connexion with the biological con-
ditions of their existence. The Characea? are of course definitely excluded
from the algae, and their connexion with the Coleochaetaceae, asserted
by some authors, is declared to be illusory. The author groups the
a Igae as follows : — 1. Florideae. 2. 'Fucaceae. ■). Confervae, including
(Edogoniales, Chaetophorales, Chroolepoidales, Ulvales, Schizogoniales,
Cladophorales, and Protococcoideae. 4. Siphoneae, divided into Bryo-
psidae, Codieae, and Vaucherieae. 5. Conjugatae, including Zygnemeae,
Desmidieae, and Bacillarieae. 6. Myxophyceae. All these groups are of
equal value.

Epiphytes of the Laminarise.* — F. Tobler publishes studies on the
morphology and biology of the Laminarieae. He finds that the epiphyte-
flora is formed of small annuals, and that the number of these on plants
of Laminaria is a considerable factor in the enumeration of local species.
They disregard the ordinary zonal limits and other external conditions,
being dependent oidy on the main requirement of a suitable host, which
allows of points to which they can attach themselves. Wounds in the
host-plant provide suitable points for the starting of the epiphyte. Some
of these may be regarded as semi-parasites and even entire parasites.

Algological Notes.j — Gr. S. West begins a series of notes on fresh-
water algae, which will include critical remarks upon little-known species,
discussions upon the validity of certain species, and the systematic position
of others, as well as short reports on small collections from various parts
of the world. The first of these notes contaius a list of thirty-three
species of algae collected from running water near Rivadeo, in north-
west Spain, by W. Fawcett in 1909. Most of the species were diatoms.
In the second note the author describes a diatomaceous earth from Lewis.
Outer Hebrides. It is fairly pure and of fresh-water origin, consisting
of a number of species, two of which stand out conspicuously from the
rest. viz. Suri/rella robusta Ehr. and Navicula nobitis Ehr. var. Dactylus
V. Hcurck. A list of the species is given. The third note contains re-
marks on twelve new or rare British algae, among which is a new species,
Anlcistrodesmus spirotsenia. In the fourth note the author discusses the
genera Dvplochsete Collins and Polychaetophora W. and G. S. West. He
gives his reasons for separating his own species, P. simplex, from that
genus, and making it the type of a new genus, OJigocheetophora. The
differences between the genera are pointed out.

" Bot. Jahrl). f. System. Pflanzengesch. u. Pflanzengeogr., xliv. (1909) pp. 51-90.
See also Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk. u. Infekt., 2te Abt. xxix. (1911) p. 147.
t Journ. Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 82-9 (figs, in text).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 387

Vegetable Protistology.* — J. Pavillard gives a careful review of the
discoveries made in the field of protistology, and discusses work done on
Cyanophycese, Phyloinonadinse, Dinoflagellata, and Bacillariales, by
numerous authors.

Black Sea Algge.f — A. Henckel briefly describes the anatomical
structure of Gystoseira barbata, which undergoes considerable modifica-
tion when growing in the concentrated waters of the Gulf of Karkenit,
in the Black Sea. It loses its rigidity, becomes more cartilaginous,
the intercellular spaces become larger, and the parenchyma more lax.
On the other hand, the cavity (Hohlraum) is less differentiated. The
colour of such plants is light yellow to light brown ; and they might
easily be mistaken for a totally different species, were it not for the
complete series of intermediate forms. The author finds between the
typical assimilating tissue and the inner mechanical tissue a transitional
layer like that which is demonstrated in Ghordaria ft a. /r 1 1 if or mis, having
the same characteristic pores and many Fucosan-grains. These latter
stain deep black with osmic acid, and are usually congregated round the
nucleus. These fat-bodies have clearly been misunderstood by some
authors. Another peculiarity of the strongly saline waters of the Gulf
of Karkenit is the abundance of Chara tomentosa.

Stichococcus bacillaris.J — S. M. Wislouch describes his experi-
ments in the cultivation of 8. bacillaris under different conditions. He
submitted plants grown on four different nutritive media to the action
of intense cold, the temperature in one experiment sinking to - 75°C.
The following conclusions were arrived at : 1. The resisting power of
S. bacillaris towards cold depends on the age of the culture, very young
cultures, 5-8 days old, showed much less resistance than those which
were 34-148 days old. The reason for this is said to arise from the
number of cells which are in the act of dividing or are still young, and
are therefore very sensitive to cold. 2. Winter cultures, which had
been raised during the dark months, showed far more power of resistance
than spring cultures, which had been grown in the lighter months, since
in the latter the number of dividing and of young cells was larger, and
the cultures were therefore more sensitive. 3. On the assumption that
cells grown on the usual Beijerinck's agar may be regarded as normal,
the author comes to the conclusion that the further a cell diverges from
the normal type the more easily is it destroyed by cold. 4. Cells of the
same age and belonging to the same culture are not equally resistant to
cold : a few cells can resist a temperature of - 75° C, while about 50 p.c.
of the cells are destroyed by a temperature of - 24° C.

Effect of Coloured Light on Stichococcus bacillaris.§ — G. A.
Nadson cultivated this alga in H p.c. agar in Beijerinck's nutritive
solution, in a red-yellow light passing through a solution of potassium
bichromate, and in a blue light passing through cupric-ammonium

* Progressus Rei Botanic?e, iii. (1910) pp. 474-544.

t Forbandl. Nordisk. Naturf. och Lakarembt. Helsingfors (1903) Sect. vii. Bot.,
pp. 6-7. j Bull. Jard. Imp. Bot. St. Petersbourg, x. (1910) pp. 166-80.
§ Bull. Jard. Imp. Bot. St. Petersbourg, x. (1910) pp. 137-50.

^•SS SUMMAR1 OF CUKl.'KNT KKSKAKCHKS I.KI.ATI \<; TO

hydrate solution. As controls he employed cultures in white light. In
ili'1 dark they did Qot develop. The results of the experiments are
■lest Til ied in detail. The cultures in the red-yellow light showed most
unfavourable development and organization : the cells lose their form
and the chromatophores become disorganized and drop to pieces. In
blue light the cultures are at first considerably behind those grown in
white light in strength of development and mass of production. P>ut
the older cultures (3 to 6 months) are but little behind the control
cultures. Qualitatively, as regards the morphology of the cell, its form,
structure, the colour of the chromatophore, the cultures in blue and
in wln'ie lighl show a great similarity to one another, and differ entirely
from those grown in red-yellow light. Continued culture in a blue
light shows a progressive improvement in the succeeding generations,
while the succeeding generations in red-yellow light show progressive
degeneration.

Phytoplankton of the Zeller See.*— K. von Keissler reports on the
phytoplankton of the Zeller See in Salzburg, collected from June to
August 1909. After an introduction dealing with the shore-vegetation
he gives a list of the species observed in the plankton, which he designates
as of a general type. The phytoplankton plays a much greater part than
the zooplankton, and increases continuously "during the months named
in the number of individuals, while the zooplankton decreases. The
former contained twenty-two species. In August the number of species
became greatly reduced. Details of the composition are given. Com-
parison with the results of Brehm and Zederbauer show that the composi-
tion of the plankton of different years at the same time is not the same.
The amount of the plankton in the Zeller See seems to be larger in June
to August than that in other Alpine lakes, the maximum occurring in
June ; after which time the quantity declines slowly.

Plankton from the Julischen Alps.f— K. von Keissler has examined
plankton from several lakes in the Julischen Alps, and reports on it. The
phytoplankton of the Veldes See is comparatively rich, but qualitatively
plays no more important part than the zooplankton. It is very poor in
species, despite the relatively high temperature. The absence of Ceratium
and Dmobryon is remarkable, as well as the very scarce occurrence of
diatoms. The composition of the plankton in June and Julv 1907 was
different from that in the same months in 1908. The Wocheiner See
showed very little plankton, the zooplankton being qualitatively greater
than the phytoplankton. Ceratium hirundinella was found. In the Lower
Weissenf elder See the samples showed hardly any but phytoplankton,
winch is, however, not rich and consists almost" entirely of diatoms.
Dmobryon, Fragillaria, and Ceratium are almost wholly wanting. The
Upper Weissenf elder See is very cold, and has but a poor plankton.
JVostoc cceruhum was found, but is probably to be reckoned as a chance
escape from the bank flora.

wJ/rSl^'u101, UU,d Planktonkunde, v. (1910) pp. 339-50; see also Hea-
wigia, 1. (1910) Beibl., pp. (149)-(150).

• Tom. cit., pp. 351-64; see also Hedwigia, 1. (1910) Beibl., pp. (150)-(151).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 389

Oscillatoria rubescens.* — H. Bachman describes a water-bloom of
Oscillatoria rubescens in tbe Rotseo, in the neighbourhood of Lucerne.
It occurred in 11)09-10, reaching such intensity in May 1910 that the
lake was of a deep copper-red colour. The principal mass of the alga
was in the topmost 3 m., and at the banks it was caked into great
masses. Towards the middle of June the quantity had begun to decrease,
and continued to do so. A rising temperature did not drive the alga
into lower layers of water, as had beeo the case in the Ziirchersee and the
Baldeggersee, though it was also found plentifully in the water some
distance down. The vast quantity of Oscillatoria caused a diminution of
the other plankton-organisms, and at the same time a large development
of Rotatoria. The water was found to contain an enormous amount of
sulphuretted hydrogen, possibly from the decay of the Oscillatoria.

Polymorphism and Life-history in the DesmidiacesB.f — G. I. Play-
fair writes an interesting account of the real conditions of life and
development among the Desniidiaceas, the result of fifteen years con-
tinued observations of the same species from the same localities, at
different times and under a varietv of circumstances. He finds that in
Desrnidiaceas, as in other groups of the lower algte, something like 90p.c.
of the "species" are polymorphic forms of the other ten ; and it is only
by careful tracing out of their life-histories that the specific connexions
of their innumerable variations can be established. He refutes the
criticisms of West on some of his previous observations. The poly-
morphism of Docidium trabecula is dealt with, and notes on and descrip-
tions of various forms are given.

Spirogyra from the neighbourhood of Besancon4 — J. Virieux gives
a list of about fifteen species of Spirogyra gathered by him in the neigh-
bourhood of Besanyon. Among them is S. Spreeana Petit, which has as
yet only been recorded from three localities : Bokhorst (in Holland),
Bondy (near Paris), and Islava (in Roumania;. The author will publish
later a catalogue of the algaa of the Doubs.

Codiace3e.§ — A. and E. S. Gepp publish an account of the Codiacese
of the ' Siboga ' Expedition, including a monograph of Flabellariese and
Udotese. The paper is founded on the collection of Codiaceae made
by Weber van Bosse in the East Indian Archipelago in 181)9 and
1900, and supplemented by other collections in the British Museum and
elsewhere. Thirteen of the genera of Codiacea3 are monographed in
detail, and of these three are new, while another, Tydemania found by
Weber had heretofore been only briefly described by her. The genus
Flabellaria is revived for the reception of Udotea Desfontainii and U.
minima : and Rhipilia is not only revived, but receives two new species.
Other new species belong to Chlorodesmis, Avrainvillea, and Udotea.
The relationship of the various genera is treated in the introduction,
and the views of the authors are set forth in tabular form. Hitherto the
genera of Codiaceas have been divided into Codieas and Udotea? ; but the

* Verh. Schweiz. Naturf. Gesell., i. (1910) pp. 254-5.

t Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, xxxv. (1910) pp. 459-95 (4 pis.).

X Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. du Doubs, No. 16 (Mai-Decembre, 1908).

§ ' Siboga ' Expeditie, Monog. lxii. Leiden : Brill, 1911, 150 pp. (22 pis.).

390 M'MMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

authors of this paper introduce a third sub-genus, Flabellarieae, into
which fli'-;. gather all the tmcalcified genera which had formerly been
included in [Jdoteae, while in [Jdoteae tiny place calcined genera only.
These sub-families are regarded by them as fundamentally distinct. A
synopsiH of genera is followed by a full treatment of each genus, with
keys to the species, list of synonymy, geographical distribution, and
critical remarks. The species of Godium found by the 'Siboga' are
merely enumerated, together with a list of their localities, and two new
species are described. Original types of the species, both old and new,
are figured in twenty-two plates.

Fresh-water Algae of Greenland.* — H. Bachmann publishes some
information on the fresh-water algae of Greenland, the result of collec-
tions made by himself and others. He finds that the Flagellatae are
much commoner and more widely distributed than has been supposed,
and he adds new records. Of the Peridinieae, Geratium is entirely absent.
The typical plankton-diatoms (Aster ionella, Fragilaria, Cyclotella, Rhizo-
solenia) are absent, and other diatoms are sparsely represented. Nostoc
and Anabsena are common, and seven genera of the Schizophyceae are
recorded there for the first time. Desmids appear in every fresh-water
pool, and the author adds to the list of records. Chlorophyceae are not
large in quantity, but they are widely distributed. The predominant
developments are : November to January, Diatoms and Peridinieae : May
to July, Dinobryoii and second Diatom-development : July to September,
Desmids. A comparison with other regions shows a similarity to Scot-
land and Switzerland.

Algae of Andritz.f — F. Wonisch writes a short account of the flora
of the " Quellengebiet " of Andritz, which includes thirty-five species.
The commonest of these were Conferva bombycina and Closterium maci-
lentum, the latter being a new record for Styria.

Fresh-water Algae from Macedonia.} — S. Petkoff enumerates some
algae collected by him in the lakes, ponds, and marshes in different parts
of Macedonia. Twenty-five species and forms are recorded as new to
science. Information is also given with regard to the Thallophytes,
Muscineae, and Vascular Cryptogams.

M. A. Gomont.§ — E. Bornet writes an interesting account of the late
Maurice Augustin Gomont. He was born at Rouen on May 11, 1839,
the descendant of an ancient Norman family. He had a brilliant career
at the College Bonaparte, where he was a fellowT-student of Sully, Prud-
homme. Carnot, and other distinguished men. In 1858 Gomont entered
the school of forestry at Nancy, and was subsequently appointed to be
Garde-general of the forests round Rouen. However, the administrative
duties of his post becoming irksome to him, he gave up the appoint-
ment. He then gave himself to a serious study of painting, a taste he
bad inherited from his mother, and was successful enough to win several

* Verh. Schweiz. Naturf . Gesell, i. (1910) pp. 255-7.
t Mitt. Naturwiss. Ver. Steiermark, xlvii. (1910) pp. 3-10.
X La fiore aquatique et algologique de la Macedoine du S.-O., etc. Philippopoli :
Danofi, 1910.

§ Bull. Soc. Bot. Prance, hi. (1909) pp. 440-9 (portrait).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 391

medals. During this time, however, lie continued his botanical studies,
and began to mount slides for the Microscope. The desire to find a satis-
factory medium for the preservation of the form of microscopic algae
brought Gomont into contact with the botanists of the Paris Museum,
and the friendship began between Gomont. and Bornet which lasted till
Gomont's death. At Bornet's suggestion Gomont began his study of the
Nostocacees homocystees, which resulted in the very valuable monograph
on the subject published by him in 1893. During the years of the pre-
paration of that important work, and afterwards, he published several
other smaller papers on other members of the Cyanophycese, which
have been valuable additions to botanical literature. Besides these,
Gomont published a study of Actinococcus, and a contribution to the
algological flora of the Haute-Auvergne. His last paper was a pre-
liminary note of the marine alga3 of Lorraine, and he was engaged on a
larger work ou the subject when death overtook him, at the age of
seventy-one, at Rouen, in 1909. His old friend describes his work thus :
" A little slow, never hurrying himself, persevering in his researches,
Gomont was never satisfied until he had obtained from a specimen
everything that could be extracted from it." His work also gives the
impression of unfailing care and accuracy.

Mazza, A. — Saggio di Algologia oceanica. (Marine algulogy.)

[A continuation.] Nuov. Notar., xxii. (1911) pp. 7-25.

De Toni, G. B. — II R. Comitato talassografico e gli studi della Flora dei nostri
mari. (The Royal Thalassograpliic Committee and the study of the flora of
our seas.)

[On the work which will be undertaken by this new committee, formed
under the auspices of the Italian Government.] Tom. cit., pp. 26-30.

Fungi.
(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

Ergot on Oats.* — C. W. "Warburton records the finding of ergot
{Claviceps purpurea) on oats at Ames, in Iowa. The parasite is common
on oats in Algeria, but has not previously been reported in the United
States. The sclerotia were all formed near the base of the panicle and
were most common on the Burt oat, a variety which is entirely resistant
to smut.

New Host for Claviceps. f — Herbert Groh found the sclerotia of
Claviceps on spikes of Carex among hay from near Quebec, Canada.
The sedge was identified as G. stellulata var. angustata. The sclerotia
are similar in appearance to those found on grasses, but all attempts to
induce germination failed. There seems to be no previous record of
Claviceps on a sedge.

Study of Hypocrea rufa.| — It has been proved that the conidia of
this Pyrenomycete are sometimes green and sometimes yellow, according

* Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) p. 64 (1 fig.).

t Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 37-8 (1 fig.).

j Jahrb. Wiss. Bot., xlviii. (1910) pp. 591-631.

392 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

to the acidity or alkalinity of the substratum. Marc Medisch has
therefore conducted a scries of culture experiments to obtain physio-
logical ilata concerning the growth of fungi. In a solution of weak
glycose the solution itself became intensely yellow, owing to oxidation
which the addition of various salts to the solution tended to accelerate.
The colour could again be destroyed by reducing substances ; reducing
bacteria, however, had only a slight effect on the colour. An addition
of nitrogen compounds had also a more or less strong influence on the
coloration. Further details are given of the influence of ammonia
salts, nitrates, and nitrites.

North American Fungi.* — F. J. Seaver contributes an account of
the Nectriacese and Hypocreacese. He has drawn up synoptic tables of
the genera, and in some cases of the species also. He has resuscitated
some old genera such as Typhodium (Epichloe) and Spermoedia (Claviceps).
Helen Letitia Palliser deals with Chsetoruiaceaa, and D. Griffiths, along
with F. J. Seaver, describe Fimetariaceae, a new family to take the place
of Sordariacese, with a new genus Fimetaria instead of Sordaria.
Another old genus, Plenrage Fries, is also re-employed for species of
Podospora, etc.

Mildew of Gooseberry and Oak.| — Gustav Kock reports that the
American gooseberry mildew appeared, in Galicia in August 1906, and
that an appeal was at once made that all cases of the outbreak in
Austria should be notified. It was again observed in 1907, and spread
further the following years. The oak mildew appeared in 1907 on
Quercus pedunculate, especially on scrub-oak. The steady and rapid
progress of the disease is described by the author.

Copulation of Yeast-cells. $ — A. Guilliermond has already published
his observations on Debaryomyces ylobosus, in which he had noted fusion
of two isogamic cells before ascus formation. At the same time it was
noted that the ascus was frequently formed without such fusion .- so that
parthenogenesis is a frequent phenomenon, and copulation is not indis-
pensable. Guilliermond has continued the research on various forms,
and he finds a retrogression towards parthenogenesis, comparable to that
of Saprolegnise, as pointed out by De Bary.

Presence of Yeast on Tea.§ — The fermentation of tea is due to a
process of oxidation. Ch. Bernard thinks that possibly yeast-cells may
play a part in the development of the aroma. He has found yeast-cells
constantly present on tea-leaves, and they increase abundantly during
the stages of tea-collecting, etc. It seems to be constant in the different
plantations, and certainly is not deleterious. The presence of bacteria
is disadvantageous, as they give a bad odour and make the tea viscous.

Cicinnobolus sp. parasitic on Sphgerotheca mors-uvse.|| — Otto
Oberstein-Breslau records the appearance of the American gooseberry
mildew at Schonfeld. He also found the mildew parasite, Cicinnobolus,

* North American Flora, iii., 1 (1910) 88 pp.
t Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xx. (1910) pp. 452-5.
t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 448-50.

§ Bull. Dept. Agric. Ind. Neerl., No. 36 (1910). See also Bot. CentralbL, cxiv.
(1910) p. 617. || Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xx. (1910) pp. 449-52.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 393

very similar to G. Gesatii, though probably specifically distinct. The
parasite has not previously been noticed on this mildew. The author
gives a list of all the recorded species of Gicinnobolus, sixteen in all, and
the mildews on which they are parasitic. He does not think it will be
of great importance in the destruction of the mildew, as it does not
appear until the Oidium generation is well over.

Gicinnobolus sp. parasitic on Oak Mildew.* — Paul Vuillemin found
this parasite in the forests near Nancy. The oak mildew has spread
with alarming rapidity, but Vuillemin thinks that possibly this parasite
which lives on the mycelium of the mildew may act as a natural check ;
it appeared towards the end of a rainy season, but another year it is
hoped that it may develop earlier and be more destructive to the mildew.
The species has not been determined.

New Hyphomycetes.f — G. Bainier records the discovery of a new
genus, Radaisiella (E. elegans). It was found growing on dead Banana
leaves, and is allied to Botryosporium and Polyactis. The fungus
was cultivated easily on artificial media, but no other life-stage was
formed.^ Bainier also describes a new species of Gliocladium found
growing on damp straw, and, associated with it, numerous perithecia
very similar to those of Eurotium. The new species Gliocladium proli-
Uniiii is entirely white.

Parasitic Fungi. §— C. K. Bancroft records the results obtained by
artificial cultures of Gladosporium herbarum. He found that there were
two distinct forms, one parasitic, Hormodeiidron, and one saprophytic,
Gladosporium. The former is the summer form, and produces disease
on the leaves of various plants such as Brassica, Guc'umis, Ifalva, Phlox,
etc. Conidia of Gladosporium when placed on living leaves gave rise to
conidia of Hormodendron, and the latter infected the leaves. In winter
Cladosporiu7n exists in the form of microsclerotia, which germinate in
spring, and give rise to Gladosporium spores. The author has also
shown that G. epipkyllum is a form of G. herbarum.

Monograph of Fusarium.|| — 0. Appel and H. W. Wollenweber have
made a thorough study of this genus of Hyphomycetes, by means largely
of culture methods. They have thus been able to contrast the mor-
phology and biology of the different systematic species. They describe
those which they consider of special value, thirteen in all. As a diag-
nostic character, they found the form of the spores more constant and
more important than the septation. The conidiophores are more com-
plicated in the more highly-developed species of the genus. As a result
of their studies, the authors are able to reduce largely the number of
species. They include Fusoma and Pioanotes in Fusarium. Finally, they
discuss the relationship of Fusarium to higher fruiting forms, Neckia,
Neocosmospora, and Gibberella.

* Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi. (1910) pp. 390-3.

+ Tom. cit., pp. 382-4 (lpl.). J Tom. cit., pp. 385-9 (1 pi.).

S Ann. Bot., xxiv. (1910) pp. 359-71 (1 pi.)

l| Arb. k. Biol. Anat. Land-Forstw., viii. (1910) pp. 1-207 (3 pis. and 10 figs.).
See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxix. (1911) pp. 215-7.

BUMMARV OF CURRENT RESEARi HES RELATING TO

Research on Uredineae.* — E. Dittschlag lias conducted a research on
the various life-stages of Puccinia Falearise, an autcecious CJredine. The
mycelium with aninucleate cells passes the winter in the host-plant.
The time of teli utospore germination, and of new infection by the sporidia
is ii,, i known. The Bpefmogonia appear first in large numbers, Later the
aecidia are formed. These latter begin by the formation of a thick coil of
mycelium from which arise hyphse towards the epidermis, the end cells
becoming sexual or fertile cells. When two of these cells come into
contact their walls 'partly disappear and they fuse together; possibly
this takes the place of a previous fertilization by spermatia. The
presence of the so-called sterile cells cannot always be proved. After
the fusion 2-nucleate spore-mother-cells are cut off, and finally the
sports and the intercalary cells degenerate. At an early stage the pe-
ndiiini is formed, the walls of the cells composing it become thickened,
audit forms a protection for the aecidium. The spores reinfect the
same host or an individual of the same species. A bi -nucleate mycelium
is formed, and finally teleutospores. Probably the teleutospores pass the
winter on the decaying leaves and germinate in early spring. Dittschlag
discusses very fully the results arrived at by different workers in the
same held, and their views on the nature of the cell fusion. He rejects
the view that any sexual differentiation can be proved in the two cells
as they an- frequently alike in size, though occasionally the one is larger
than the other. It was not possible to prove the constant presence
of Bterile end-cells (the trichogyne-cells). When such were present they
were found on the ends of both the copulating cells. As regards
nuclear division the conjugate nuclei divide simultaneously, and the
different stages were followed, but the number of chromosomes could
not be accurately determined.

Conidial Fusion in Ustilago Tragopogi-pratensis.t — Harry Federley
finds that two types of conidia are formed on the germination of
the spores : (1) large conidia which join in pairs and never bud out ;
and (2) smaller conidia. which do not at first join in pairs, but which
increase by budding. So long as nourishment is provided the budding
process continues; when the medium becomes exhausted the conidia
unite. In the larger paired conidia there is no distinction of size; the
nucleus of the one passes over to the other and the two nuclei fuse.
The protoplasm follows later than the nucleus. A previous fusion of
nuclei bakes place in the Ustilago spore, but which of these fusions is
sexual has noi been determined by the author.

German Ag-aricaceae.J— A. Ricken has published a German Flora
"! i hoe larger fungi, in semi-popular language, so that it may be useful
to the laity as well as to professional mycologists. He has provided
German names for all the species in addition to" the Latin names. The
coloured plates represent about half of the species recorded.

lakt., xxviii. (1910) pp. 473-92 (3 pis. and 7 figs.).
I '"' k- Naturf.-och Lak., Helsingfors.xxi. 7 (1903) pp. 24-26.

I Die Blatterpilze (Agaricacese) Deutschlands und der angrenzender Lander.
Leipzig : Weigel (1910) lief. 1, 32 pp. (8 col. pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 395

Fungi from Greenland.* — C. Ferdinandsen gives a list of the larger
terrestrial fungi brought back by the Denmark Expedition from that
territory. There were twenty species ; one new Gasteromycete is de-
scribed, Galvatia arclica.

J. Lind f describes the Micromycetes from the same country,
chiefly parasites on the Phanerogams collected. He lists sixty-live
species, of which four are new to science. Notes are given on the
microscopic characters of many of the species.

Fungi from Venezuela and the West Indies.f — 0. Ferdinandsen
and 0. Winge describe the fungi collected on Warming's Expedition.
There are thirty-six species listed with critical notes. Two new genera
are described, Myxotheca of uncertain position, but evidently near to
Plectascinese, and Stilbochalara (Phasostilbeae). The authors describe
four new species.

Notes on Chilian Fungi. I.§ — Roland Thaxter spent six weeks at
Punta Arenas on the Straits of Magellan, and gives notes of the fungi
observed by him during the summer. A great forest of the antarctic
beech {Nothofagus) had been burned down in the district near the town,
but in the woods some distance away quite a large fungus-flora was
found, Agaricaceas, Hymenogastreas, Pezizas, and Myxomycetes all
flourishing and maturing in the valleys where the temperature seldom
rises above 60° F., while freezing temperatures are common at night all
through the short summer. The more resistant forms, such as the
Pyrenomycetes, were well represented, though Polyporei were scarce.

Two new species of parasitic microfungi are described, Taphrina
entomospora and Uncinula Nothofagi, both on leaves of Nothofagus.

German Fungus-flora. || — W. Herter is the author of the latest
fascicle of this work. It treats of the Autobasidiomycetes, in which are
included all Hymenomycetes and Gasteromycetes. Herter gives a
general account of the history of these groups since their earliest
mention by Greek writers up to the most recent works of systematists.
He gives also an account of their development and of the different
forms assumed by mycelial growth, fruit-bodies, etc. Notes are also
given on their habitat and economic uses. The separate orders and
families are then dealt with down to Trpex, one of the Hynieno-
mycetineee.

Physical Conditions of Resistance of the Vine against Mildew. %
Jules Laurent finds that the power of resistance in leaves and grapes
depends on the molecular concentration in the cells of the host-plant.
He explains his methods of work, and gives tables of the results obtained.
A series of experiments was also carried out on potatoes as to their
resistance to Phytophthora infestans, and the results obtained were
exactly parallel to those observed in the vine.

* Med. om Gr^nlaud, xliii. (1910) pp. 137-45.

t Tom. cit., pp. 149-62. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp. 121, 123.
I Bot. Tidsskr. xxx. (1910) pp. 208-22. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911)
pp. 121-2. § Bot. Gaz., 1. (1910) pp. 430-42 (2 pis. and 1 fig.).

|| Krypt.-Flora Mark Brandenburg, vi. 1 (1910) pp. 1-192 (figs.),
f Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 103-6.

SUMMARY "l CI RRENT RBSEARCHES RELATING TO

Micro-organisms and Fermentation.* — The fourth edition of this
k l>\ Alfred Jorgensen has recently been issued, and has now heen
aslated mi" English by S. II. Davies. It is concerned chiefly with
the micro-organisms of the fermentation industry. Descriptions are
given both of useful and injurious yeasts, moulds, bacteria, etc. Full
accounts are given of the methods found most useful in examination
and in- ion of these minute plants as they occur iu nature or in

artificial cultures. Attention is also paid to their use in various economic
proi in fermentation, etc. The book is illustrated by figures in

the text, and a very full bibliography of the subject is given.

Geotropism and Phototropism in Fungi.f — A. de Jaczewski cites
a case of geotropism in Polyporus foment arius following the cutting down
of the trunk on which it grew. The original hymenophore was covered
by a thick sterile layer, while two new plants, face downwards, were
formed on each side of the old one. He records several other instances
of unusual growth due to the influence of light.

Chemistry of the Higher Fungi.} — Julius Zellner constantly found
maltose in wood-inhabiting fungi belonging to the genera Polyporus,
Armillaria, Xypholoma, Dsedalea, and Trametes. In Trametes suaveolens
and Polyporm igniarius he found a ferment that split salicin. He
thought it might be similar to one that Sigmund had determined in
willows and poplars that acted on salicin, but not on any other glucosides.
A series of tests were made, and Zellner concluded that the two ferments
must be considered as distinct.

In a second paper § the author gives the results of his chemical
examination of maize smut. He confirmed previous work as to the
presence of trimethylamin and sclerotin acid. He gives a list of other
-11 list iinccs also found in that fungus.

In a third paper || devoted to the same subject, Zellner treats of the
Bymbiosia of host and parasite, and tests each to see if their cell-products
correspond. He found that very few cell-products pass unchanged from
host to parasite. The chemical composition of the parasite is determined
by its systematic position, and by the substratum, and there are also
sporadic substances formed. There are no principal differences proved
between the cell-products of saprophytic and parasitic fungi. The
parasite acts on the host by ferments ; possibly there may be other pro-
cesses. Parasitic fungi excrete substances that are harmless or poisonoug,
and in the latter case give rise to pathological phenomena. Synthetic
processes in parasites are almost totally unknown. An examination of
fungi parasitic on animals might do much to enlighten us as to the
chemistry of parasitism.

Ambrosia Fungus.lf— F. W. Neger has taken up again his work on
the fungi that are cultivated by Asphondylia beetles inside the galls, as

► London : Charles Griffin & Co., Ltd., Exeter Street, Strand (1911) xi. and
489 pp. (101 figs.). V '

\ Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvi. (1910) pp. 404-8 (6 figs.).

B. k. Akad. wiss. Wien, Math.-Nat. Kl., cxviii. (1909) pp. 439-46.
Anz. k. Akad. wiss. Wien, Math.-Nat. Kl., No. 10 (1910) p. 116.
II Tom. eit., pp. 116-17. See also Hedwigia, 1. (1910) Beibl., pp. 107-8.
1 Rev. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., xiv. (1910) pp. 455-80 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 391

food for the young larva-. In bhe galls on Sarothamnus and Coronilla
emeroides, the fungus has been determined as a species of Macrophoma
(Sphaeropsideae) ; it is probable that the same species of beetle forms
both the galls on these widely distributed plants, and the wide geo-
graphical range also testifies to the close connexion between the beetle
and riie species of fungus. In the newly-formed gall the beetle passes
the winter as a larva, the fungus is also present in the form of a ball of
hyphae. Occasionally there are impurities snch as yeast fungi and
Coniothyrium Uguminum, the latter with small pycnidiaand minute olive-
green spores. A note is added on the behaviour of invading insects
(inquilines). Some of them evidently avoid it, others graze on it after
having eaten the larva:. Full descriptions of the fungi Macrophoma
Coronillse and Coniothyrium Uguminum are given.

Termites and Fungi.* — Jumelle and Perrier de la Bathie write on
the fungus-eating ants in Madagascar. There are two kinds of ants:
one builds its nest in the open and does not cultivate nor eat fungi,
though a new species of Poalaxon has been found near the nests. Other
ants live on trees, and their nests also are without cultures of fungi, but
they contain broken up wood and galleries similar to those of the fungus-
eaters. There is only one species in that class, Terrms Perrieri, which
forms nests in woods. In the abandoned nests are found rhizomorphs
which produce finally conidia and stomatawith perithecia. Sclerotia are
also present, and a new fungus which has been determined as Xylaria
termttum.

Fungi in Clay Mines.f — Perley Spaulding gives notes of a visit he
paid to the mines near St. Louis to study the fungi on the timbers.
These mines are not deep, and the timbers are placed along the hori-
zontal galleries to prevent the soil from falling in. There is no light, a
cool rather unvarying temperature, and considerable moisture. Several
fungi were evidently unable to form sporophores in these conditions ;
others fruited more or less normally. Among those noted were : Meru-
lius rubellus, very abundant in one mine, not found in the vicinity.
Fomes annosus was found once growing abundantly on a cross-piece of
pine wood. Fames applanatus, Lenzites betulina, Polystictes versicolor,
and Stereum spadiceum were found sparingly. Hydnum erinaceus was
found hanging from the oak timbers. H. coralloides and H. artocreas
also grew, though rather rare. Merulius lacrymans var. verucifer was
abundant on oak. Gopririus atramentarus and the edible mushroom
were more or less abundant. Masses of mycelium were found, but they
did not produce sporophores even when transferred to the outer air.
except in one case, when a plant of Schizophyllum commune was de-
veloped.

Research on Diseases of Trees. + — Munch has studied the subject,
by making pure cultures and inoculation experiments with several of the
higher tree-fungi, and describes in detail the effect produced.

* Kev. Gen. Hot., xxii. (1910) pp. 30-64 (9 figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl.,
oxvi. (1911) p. L6.

t Kept. Missouri Bot. Garden, xxi. (1910) pp. 189-95 (1 fig.).

\ Naturw. Zeitschr. Land-Forstw., 1910, pp. 389-408, 425-47. See also Cen-
tralbl. Bakt.. xxix. (1911) pp. 250-9.

Junt list, 1911 2 i)

rMMAM OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Gollybia velutipes was inoculated od red chestnui and a species of
poplar. The tissues in the immediate vicinity were browned and killed,
i u, the Gollybia did nol establish itself on the trees.

sum purpureum. Proof was gained that in certain conditions
this fungus is a parasite of beech and poplar. It grows quickly and

requires little air.

Schkophyllum commune is not a wry active parasite, but in favour-
able conditions it may kill large portions of the tree. It often grows

iciated with Polyporus hirsutus.

Stereum rugosum is frequently found on hazel, more rarely on beech.
After infection, no damage ensued.

Polyporus igniarius, a well-recognized parasite. It attacks chiefly
the vital tissues of bark and cambium, and does much damage. The
experi tits were not very successful.

Polyporus fomentarius, one of the most deadly enemies of the beech.
Infection experiments were particularly successful ; the mycelium spread
in an upward and downward direction, and betrayed its presence by a
dark red discolouration surrounded by a still darker line.

Bbesadol a —Diagnoses novarum specierum Polyporacearum ex India occiden-
tali et orientali. (Diagnoses of new species of Polyporus from East and West
Indies.) Med. Bijks Herb., 1910 (1911) pp. 75-6.

Colin, H. — Hydrolyse de quelques Polysaccharides par le Botrytis cinerea.
(Hydrolysis of some Polysaccharids by Botrytis cinerea.)

[Culture experimentswith the fungus on various sugars : saccharose, maltose,
lactose, trehalose, etc.] Ann, Sci. Nat,, ser. 9, xiii. (1911) pp. 1-112.

Gueguen, Fernand — Mycose cladosporienne de l'Homme. (Cladosporien
mycosis in man.)

[Description of ulcer caused by Cladosporium sp.]

Gomptes Bendus, clii. (1911) pp. 412-13.

Matruchot, Louis — Un nouveau Champignon pathogene pour l'Homme. (A
new fungus pathogenic for man )

[The fungus proved to be a member of the Hypocreacese, and has been named
Mastigocladium Blochii,'] Tom.cit., pp. 325-7.

Murbill, \V. A.— The Agaricaceae of Tropical North America. II.
Many new species of Lepiota are included.]

Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 79-91.

Nor i no, J. — Die den Bauholzern und den Gebanden gefahrlichen Pilze. (Dan-
gerous fungi of timber and building wood.)

[Descriptions of various fungi, and advice as to treatment of timber.]

Kxmigsberg i Pr. : Griife & Unzer, 1910, pp. vii. 71.
See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxix. (1911) pp. 266-8.

I'ai.m, B.— Nye Bidrag till Stockholmstraktens Svampfiora. (New contribution
tot ra of the neighbourhood of Stockholm.)

[The author describes 140 parasitic species.]

Sv. hot. Tidskr., iv. (1910) pp. 1-8.
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) p. 257-8.

Hiiim, II. — Zum Studium der Pyrenomyceten Deutschlands, Deutsch-Oester-
reichs und der Schwe'z. (Study of the Pyrenomycetes of Germany, German
Ah i,nd.)

An account of Platystomaceae.] Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 94-111.

Bba\ i 1. I. Studies in Colorado Fungi. I. Discomycetes.
ioal notes on various species, several now to science.]

Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 57-66.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY. MICROSCOPY. ETC. 399

SteasiSBB, P. Pius — V. Nachtrag zur Pilzflora des Sonntagberg (Nied.-Oest.).
(Contribution to the fungus-flora of the Sonntagberg, Lower Austria).
[The list includes the Tuberacese and Pvrenomvcetes, Nos. 1653-1774.]

Arm. MycoL, ix. (1911) pp. 74-93.

Thbiszen, F. — Die Hypocreaceen von Rio Grande do Sul, Sudbrasilien. (The
Hypocreacese of Rio Grande do Sul, S. Brazil.)

[Description of the family, genera, and 103 species.] .

Tom. tit., pp. 40-73 (8 pis.).

Wehmeb, C. — Notiz iiber Khizopus-Arten. (Note on species of Rhizopus.)
[Bv culture experiments, the fungus was accurately determined.]

Ber. Deutsch, Bot. Ges., xxviii. (1911) pp. 547-9.

Westling, R. — En ny ascusbildende Penicillium-Art. (A new ascus-forming
Penicillium.

[The fruiting-form of a new species was found, and is described.]

Sv. bot. Tidskr., iv. (1910) pp. 139-45 (1 fig.)-
See also Bot Centralbl.. cxvi. (1911) p. 212

W held on, H. J. — Some Argyll and Perthshire Fungi.
[Fungi collected during a tour in North Scotlaud.]

Arm. Scot. Nat. Hist. (1911) pp. 34-8.

Wo bo xow, G. — Contributiones ad Mycofloram. Caucasi. (Contributions to the
fungus-flora of the Caucasus )

[A list of 368 species.] Truth a. d. Bot. Gart. Tiflis, xi. (1910) pp. 133-71.

See also Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) p. 128.

Lichens.

(By A. Lobrajn Smith.)

Lichen Gonidia.* — F. Elfving recounts the history of the contro-
versy as to the nature of the various elements of the lichen thallus.
Schvvendener, followed by Bornet, insisted that it was composed of two
sepante organisms— alga and fungus — living together in symbiotic
relationship and without genetic connexion. Their views gradually
prevailed, and are now universally accepted. Elfving considers that
there is room, however, for reconsideration, and describes his research
on several typical lichen thalli. In Peltigera canina the gonidia lie
below the cortical layer. They have been identified as a species of
Poli/coccus, considered by Kirchner as a form of Nostoc pwictiforme.
They are spherical or ovate blue-green cells, and occur iu groups sur-
rounded by hyphae. In the lower and middle parts of the gonidial zone
the cells give the impression of being algal, lying free amongst the
hyph;e. Towards the cortex they are embedded among the colourle-s
cellular tissue as if they filled up hollow places. Closer observation
shows that they differ from the colourless cells only by their colour, and
form with the others a continuous tissue ; lower in the zone they possess
a gelatinous wall.

Elfving holds that the formation of new cells takes place daring ;i
short period in spring. The cortex consists of an outer layer of thick-
walled cells that pa^s over into hair-like hyphas. Within this layer lies

* Forh. Nordisk. Naturf.-och Liik., xvi. 7 Helsingfors (1903) pp. 26-30.

2 D 2

. i- ■. 01 CUKKKN l IM skai.viiks l;l.l,ATl .

meristeuial nchyma, of vvliich the roundish cells are closely united,

almost without interspaces j the upper cells remain as cortical tissue, the
lower cells grow oul into hyphae. A mong the cells which are to form the
gonidia] zone newgonidia arise, and in single cells of this tissue the blue
mr appears. These oewly-formed blue-green gonidia are at
first surrounded by colourless cells, but by increase in numbers they
come to live in groups among the loose hyphal tissue. Blfving decides
thai these coloured cells have the same origin as the colourless, and are
nol differenl organisms.

He repeats these observations on Everina prunastri, the gonidia of
which belong to Gystococcus. In spring he found numerous colourless
cells or gonidia which had all been transformed by the end of May into

n cells ; intermediate stages can be traced. Originally they were
formed as the end cells of short hyphal branches, and can often be seen
in situ, but they separate easily. Blfving further states that he has
never seen hyphae penetrate the gonidia. He allows that there is a gap
in his observations ; he is not sure that he has seen the first begin-
nings of a gonidium, but probably they are formed as colourless cells
in late autumn or in winter. He has, however, demonstrated the
occurrence of colourless gonidia in Anaptychia ciliaris, Ramalina pur-
puracea, Usnea barbata, and Cladina rangiferina.

Culture of Lichen Gonidia.* — Ernest Hayren, a pupil of Blfving,

has also 1 n studying the lichen thallus. He rinds that the gonidia

{Gystococcus) are smaller in Ramalina than in Everina, and divide more
frequently. In E. furfuracw they form colonies, in E. prunastri they
are more scattered. Hayren cultivated small portions of the thallus as
well as soredia on various culture media in damp chambers. The greater
the illumination, the more cell-division occurred among the gonidia,
which finally became free from hyphte. The new cells were formed in
- or multiples of 8 within the mother-cell, and became free by the
breaking down of the enclosing cell-wall. Swarm spores were formed
when any change was made in the illumination from dark to light or on
any weakening of the culture solution. They are pear-shaped, with two
equal cilia at the foremost end.

The colourless cortical cells of the thallus grow very slowly in culture

solutions, and produce a mycelium. If grown in the dark the mycelium

finally predominates over' the gonidia. The hyphae of the medulla do

nol develop further. The dark brown lower cortex of E. furfuraem

developed in sugar solution a mycelium, which on being transferred to

bark decoction produced spore-balls formed by repeated cell-division

and interwoven growth of the hyphae. In 'these balls are formed

mmute round spores, the whole interior of the balls finally falling into

rtrich germinate readily in sugar solution. Growth in this case

soon, but if gonidia are added, mycelium revives quickly,

hen transferred to bark decoction forms again spore-balls.

Ih- mycelium cultivated from soredia of E. furfuraem also forms
ills in bark decoction. Mycelium from the soredia of Ramalina
fartnacea forms similar balls.

Porh. Nordisk. Naturf.-och Liik., xvi. 7 Helsingfors (1903) pp. 31-2.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 401

Apothecial Development in Anaptychia and Physcia.* — Arth.
Wahlberg publishes notes of his examination of the fruit-development
in these two genera. 1. The trichogynes have no mechanical purpose.
2. The ascogenous hyphae and the paraphyses are undoubtedly con-
nected in Anaptychia ciliaris, A. leucomekena, and in Physcia pulveru-
lenta var. deter sa ; probably also in other species, though the proof is
not so convincing in these. 3. The paraphyses are at first in connexion
with the upper cortical layer, becoming free later. 4. The principal
new formation of paraphyses is probably from the parathecium.

Hambleton, J. C. — A List of the Lichens of Ohio.

[Compiled chiefly from the collection in the State Herbarium at the Ohio
State University.] Ohio Naturalist, x. (1911) pp. 41-3.

Lynge, Bernt— De Norske busk- og bladlaver. (Norwegian leafy and shrubby
lichens.) Bcrgenc Museums Aarbog 1910 (No. 9), 122 pp. (7 pis.).

Mycetozoa.

(By A. Lorrain Smith.)

Distribution of Mycetozoa in the South Midlands.! — J- Saunders
has prepared lists of species with exact localities in Hertfordshire, Bedford-
shire, Buckinghamshire, Middlesex, and Essex. The records for Middle-
sex are fewest in number. Hampstead Heath and Highgate Woods are
now so open to the public that few species are to be found in them.
Most of those recorded are from Cannons Park, near Edgware. The
highest record is for Bedfordshire, 104 ; and only four species are absent
from the list for that county that have been recorded in the others
mentioned.

Spongospora subterranean — T. G. B. Osborn publishes a preliminary
note on the development of this organism, which causes powdery or corky
scab of potatoes. It is first apparent as a uninucleate amoeba, just below
the surface of the tuber, which increases in size, the nucleus dividing by a
method of amitosis. The amoeba itself divides by fusion, and occupies
new host-cells as these divide ; finally a plasmodium is formed. Nuclear
division was observed, and is described, as well as spore formation. The
writer concludes that his observations prove the relationship of Spongo-
spora with Sorosphsera and Plasmodiophora. He also Avas able to prove
that the nuclear fusion and subsequent divisions resemble in a striking
manner those described in Arcyria and Trichia.

A. S. Horne§ has also been working at Spongospora. He gives
further details about the formation of the plasmodium. The amoeboid
bodies become approximated and grouped about the nucleus of the host-
cell, so that the condition is somewhat similar to the pseudo-plasmodium
of the Acrasiere. The pseudo-plasmodium becomes converted into a
single spongy spore-ball — not hollow, as has been stated by a previous
observer. Encysted individuals or groups of individuals may be found,
which are similar to the microcysts of other Myxomycetes.

'• Fbrh. Nordisk. Naturf.-och Lak., xvi. 7 Helsingfors (1903) pp. 35-6.

"t Trans. Hertford Nat. Hist. Soc, xiv. (1911) pp. 179-88.]

J Ann. Bot., xxv. (1911) p. 271.

§ Tom. cit., p. 272.

402 m m \ l; V OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Schizophyta.
Schizomycetes.

Distribution of Paratyphoid Bacilli.*— Before the year 1907, there
were no differences of opinion as to the conditions under which para-
typhoid bacilli were found. It was considered that these organisms were
invariably pathogenic, incapable of existing as saprophytes. Since that
time, however, many authorities have abandoned this position, and
claim for these organisms a very wide distribution in nature. In this
present paper, Aumann has made a solid contribution to the settlement
of tlir problem. After a resume of the work that has been done in
Germany upon this class of organisms, he describes the researches
carried out by himself at Hamburg and elsewhere. The material avail-
able ((insisted of various foodstuffs, ice, specimens of urine and faeces
from men and animals ; in all, about nine thousand examinations were
made. He concludes from these investigations that paratyphoid bacilli
have no saprophytic phase of existence. These organisms are pathogenic
in animals as well as to man, and are not uncommonly found in
slaughtered animals. Paratyphoid carriers probably are of frequent
occurrence among these animals, and more particularly among such
indiscriminate feeders as swine. The isolation of these organisms from
Bausages and such articles of diet has therefore an importance which
musi lie interpreted in accordance with these results. |

Acetobacter melanogenum.j — M. W. Beijerinck gives an account of
this organism, one of the group of acetic bacteria, which has the property
of producing a pigment, by means of which light beer is made dark. If
a tiask of ibis darkening beer is kept undisturbed for some days, a
pellicle forms, from which cultivations upon beer-wort gelatin plates
show the presence of peculiar brown colonies, with a clear margin and a
deeply pigmented centre. This growth only takes place upon media
which contain glucose or maltose. The chromogen which causes this
pigmentation is an aromatic substance, which is burned black in the
presence of iron salts. It also reduces alkaline silver and mercurial
solutions and turns them black. It differs in some respects from true
oxydases and peroxydases. Cultivation and the reaction with iron salts
are best shown upon a culture medium containing agar, glucose, peptone,
potassium phosphate, iron citrate, and chalk. After twenty-four hours
incubation at 30°, the black pigment is clearly seen. It may also be
demonstrated by omitting the iron salt from the original medium and
adding ii whin growth has taken place.

Agglutination of Micrococcus melitensis by Normal Sera.}— L.
Negre | its out that, under certain conditions, normal sera will -agglu-
tinate the organism of Malta fever, and diagnostic errors may arise in
,llls way. In a dilution of 1 : 30, at :;7 Q., agglutination may be
produced ; ii can always he observed after 4 or 5^hours with a Micro-
Bcope, often even with the naked eye. At room-temperature agglutina-
te Lte Abt. Orig. lvii. (1911) pp. 310-46.
• + Op \!>t.. xxix. (191] ) pp. my-76.

C.R.. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (1910) pp. 564

ZOOLOGY A.ND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 403

tion also occurs, but more slowly. In dilutions of I : 50, normal sera
will still cause agglutination to take place, but more slowly. No agglu-
tination takes place if normal sera be diluted 1 : 100. Heating for
half an hour to a temperature of 56° will destroy all the agglutinating
power of a normal serum. Sera of goats, sheep, rabbits, and other
animals, possess the same property. In order to avoid diagnostic errors
the following conditions should be observed : dilutions of 1 : 30 should
uot be used ; dilutions of 1 : 50 should be observed only within the
first 5 hours ; all errors may be avoided by heating the serum to 56° for
half an hour.

Survival of Intestinal Organisms in Cooked Meats* — E. Maurel
has carried out some researches, with a view to finding the length of time
for which certain bacilli retain their powers of reproduction upon the I ood-
stuffs obtainable at a French cooked-meat shop. Only those meats which
were destined for eating without further cooking were used. Samples in
good condition were taken, and cultivations made in order to ascertain
what micro-organisms were already present. The meat was then steri-
lized in an autoclave. The effectiveness of the sterilization was tested
by cultivations. Then the surface of the meat was inoculated, in one
series with Bacillus coli, in another with B. typhosus. It was found
that the former retained its reproductive powers for twenty-four hours,
probably for several days. The latter was less resistant, but appeared to
retain power of reproduction for at least twenty -four hours.

Resistance of Micrococcus melitensis to Lactic Ferments.f — P.
i >arbois has made observations upon the length of time in which Micro-
coccus melitensis will survive in milk inoculated with a lactic ferment.
He finds that this organism may be recovered up till the eighteenth day
after inoculation. This is both of considerable theoretical interest, as
this organism is in many conditions fragile ; and of practical importance
as showing that butter, cheese, cream, etc., prepared from a contaminated
milk may continue to be infective for two or three weeks.

Thermobiosis.J — A. Ambroz gives a comprehensive review of the
literature of the subject. The first historical record of the phenomenon
was published in 1774 by Sonnerat, who stated that certain fish were
capable of living in water at f>9° C. In recent times there have accumu-
lated numerous records of micro-organisms, which are capable of increas-
ing and multiplying at a temperature higher than that at which albumin
coagulates. In 1837, algaa living in the hot springs at Carlsbad were
described. Other instances of the occurrence of various micro-organisms
in springs at high temperatures are recorded. Recently bacteria have
been isolated from wells at Vranje in Servia, of which the optimum
temperature was found to be 72° C. From soil, faeces, spring water, milk,
and other sources, organisms have been obtained, which grow best at
temperatures of 60 to 70° C. Some investigations have been carried out
and some hypotheses propounded, with a view to elucidating the abnorm-
alities of metabolism in these organisms. Full references are given.

-■

+

.. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxix. (i'JIU) pp. 574-7. t Op.cit., !xx. (1911) pp. 102-4
alt. I. Bakt., xlviii. (1910) pp. 258-70.

[04 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Bacterial Cytology.* II. IVnau, who lias previously carried out
earchea 1 1 } >• > 1 1 the minute structure of Endomyces albicans, here gives
an account iif liis application of similar methods to the study of Bacillus
megatherium. The organisms were grown upon agar media, ami ex-
aminations "i i lie cells were made at the end of 35 hours, 62 hours,
ami 5 days. For the demonstration of the three fundamental elements
metachromatic granules, nucleus, and basophile formation— different
methods of fixation were adopted. The two latter structures were shown
well in cells fixed by the method of Perenyi, while Lavdovsky's method
was found most suitable for the demonstration of the two former. In
young cells the cytoplasm takes up a uniform blue basophil colour with
Tuna's polychrome stain. .Metachromatic granules appear at the poles of
the bacillus. A small structureless nucleus may be shown by means of any
ordinary nuclear stain. A few bacilli are bin ucleate, fewer multinucleate.
The nucleus appears to divide by amitosis. No karyokinetic process has
been observed. The basophil formation may be seen in cells 36 hours
old, which have been stained with gentian-violet, in the form of a few
granules which grow into a network and then into an irregular banding,
al right angles to the long axis of the bacillus. Spores are the result of
exaggerated nuclear growth.

Sporotrichum beurmanni in Man.f— M. E. Pinoy gives an account
oi three cases of human infection with this parasite.' An examination
ol caseous material from a gumma showed abundant organisms, some
free, some ingested by leucocytes. Dominici's eosin-orange-toluid in-
blue is best suited for its demonstration. One of these cases studied
showed a most remarkable degree of generalized sporotrichosis. Speci- ■
mens prepared from this patient showed not only the presence of small
conidia undergoing phagocytosis, but also a large number of filaments in
the neighbourhood of the capillaries, which penetrated the walls of these
vessels and formed an interlacing network in the interior. Some of
these filaments were covered with spores. It appears, therefore, that
this species is capable of forming spores within human tissues.

Soured Milk.+— R. T. Hewlett, in a review of the subject of the

nature, preparation and uses of soured milk, considers, in the first place,

the natural flora ol the human alimentary tract. The preponderance in

cnjJdnood oi Gram-negative organisms of such types of Bacillus bifidus,

lactic-acid producing bacilli, yielding in later life to an ascendency of

putrefactive forms, suggested to Metchnikoff the hypothesis that (some

lange, incident to senility, might be due to auto-intoxication. The

>ui' to restore artificially the fermentation processes found in the

ntestines oi children constitutes the fundamental principle of all sour

11* treatment. In his search for an organism that would form lactic

;,.r|<1 when introduced into the intestines, Metchnikoff turned his atten-

;*'" o the milk ferments so widely used all over the East. From th<

.ul-anan Yoghurt he obtained a bacillus which has proved to be a

Powerful lactic-acid ferment. The bacteriology of the Oriental milk f

i

'•!■•

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 53-6.
it., pp. 286-8.
Nature, lxxxiii. (1910) pp. 159-61 : lxxsv. (1911) pp. 338-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 405

merits is a most complex subject, and it appears that in the majority of
cases, e.g. B. oulgaricus and Streptococcus lacticus, more satisfactory
results are obtained by the use of two organisms in symbiosis than with
pure cultures. Barillas Mlgaricus alone may have some effect upon the
fat of milk, producing a small quantity of a nauseous product.

The author gives a general account of the methods in use for pre-
paring sour milk, and refers to its therapeutic applications. The extent
to which the Bulgarian bacillus has developed can be readily observed
by bacterioscopic methods, as the morphological characters of this
organism are so distinctive. In conclusion, particulars are given of the
comparative efficacy of a variety of preparations supplied to the author
for investigation.

'.-■

Bacillary Disease among Fish.* — In the summer of 1910, fish of
tlie species Leuciscus rutilus, in the lake of Nantua, perished in large
numbers. The epizootic attained such proportions that not only did the
fishermen sustain serious loss, but it became necessary in the interests of
public health to collect and destroy the dead fish. The condition was
investigated by L. Mercier and R. de Drouin de Bouville. The diseased
fish came to the surface of the water, tried ineffectually to dive again,
struggled, lost their equilibrium, turned on one side, and remained
motionless until death. Lesions of the scales were found, which sug-
gested that the condition was one of Lepidorthosis contagiosa, due to the
Bacillus pestis astaci. From one of the diseased animals an organism
identical with this was recovered. The organism is flagellate, motile,
Gram-negative ; it produces a turbid growth in broth, liquefies gelatin,
and coagulates milk. Inoculations of small doses into crayfish caused
death in four days, with symptoms typical of Pestis astaci. The fish
disease was also reproduced artificially by inoculation. It appears, there-
fore, that this disease is maintained in this lake in an enzootic form by
the presence of these two hosts of the micro-organism.

Nitrifying Organisms in Soil.j — H. Pringsheim gives a concise
general account of the micro-organisms occurring in soil, which perform
a nitrogen-fixing function. The first group mentioned comprises those
organisms which form root-nodules on leguminous plants. The sub-
division of these into classes affords a problem which the systematist has
yet to solve. It appears, however, that different varieties affect different
species of plants, and it has been found difficult, in some cases, artificially
to infect a plant with an organism associated normally with another
species. The organisms living free in the soil fall into two classes.
One type, isolated first by Winogradsky, is a sporing bacterium, of
a Clostridium form. Azotobacter, a rounded form, was cultivated by
Beijerinck in a mannite-containing medium. The author deals further
with the distribution of these organisms, and with problems connected
with their metabolism. He considers the question of the decomposition
of cellulose ; and refers, in conclusion, to inoculation experiments per-
formed with different types of nitrifying organisms.

* Coniptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 289-92.
t Biol. Centralbl., xxxi. (1911) pp. 65-81.

[MARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING I"

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.*
(1) Stands.

Beck's London Microscope: Handle Model.f — This instrument
(fig. 48) was described at the April Meeting.} The illustration shows

Bpecial feature of the new model; it is so designed that the limb
forms a strong handle, by which the instrument can be conveniently
grasped without danger to the adjustments. In other respects the in-
strument possesses all the well-known characters of the original model.

Pig. 43.

Winkel's Stand No. ld.§— This instrument (fig. U) is of medium

size, and has similar focusing adjustments, stage and substage mechanism

Stand No. 1 ■. but is smaller, owing to the body-tube being of the

I nai-v diameter. Owing to the lesser weight and slightly different

position of the inclinable joint, a clamping lever is unnecessary.

I he maker produces a similar instrument with centring rotating
Jta • diaphragm, but without rectangular movements.

ubdrvision contains (1) Stands ; (2) pieces and Objectives; (3)

- : it) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical
Miscellaneous.
1 ;; ' 3 Special Catalogue (1911) 4 pp. (2 figs.),
rournal, p. 119.
§ R. Winkel, Gottingen ^ue, 1911. pp. 26-7 (1 fig.); pp. 28-9(1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

407

Winkers Demonstration Microscope with Detachable Toot.* —
This instrument is intended for use at lectures and demonstrations,
when it is desired to pass specimens illustrating the various points
dealt with from hand to hand. The sliding tube course-adjustment can

Fig. 44.

be clamped when desired. Fine-ad justmeni is effected by sliding the
eye-piece in or out of the tube, which is sprung for holding it in the

desired position.

Souza-Brandao, V. de— 0 novo Microscopio da Commissao do Servico Geologico.

Covim. . / tigal, v. (Lisbon, 1903)

pp. 118-250 (2 pis.).

* R. Winkel, Gottingen Catalogue, 1911, p. 44 (3 tigs.).

SUMMARY OF CUltltKN'J KESEAllCHES KELATING TO

3 Illuminating: and other Apparatus.

Efficiency of Metallic Filament Lamps.* — K. A. Boustoun lias made
Heme measurements on the radiant efficiency of carbon, osmium, tantalum
and tungsten glow-lamps. By calculating the radianl efficiencies of the
different filaments at their marked voltage and taking the mean he obtains
the following results : —

Itadiant Watts

Efficiency, per ('audi •

Carbon 29 3-5

Osmium 5-2 1*5

Tantalum 6-5 1-7

Tungsten 7-5 1-0

Reichert's New Breath Screen.f — This breath screen (fig 45) is
found to afford complete protection from the damage arising from the

Pig. 45.

warm breath of the observer, especially during the cold seasons. It
b not inconvenience the observer and is readily attached by means of
a clamping screw.

Improved Micrometer.}— The object of this improvement, which is

icnbed by M. Himoff, is to enable more accurate reading of themicro-

as i.) disclose at a glance how much above or below a given

Bize a piece may be after the micrometer has been set to a given size.

I he ],in A slides on a guide, as shown in fig. 46. It is connected to

pointer B which indicates on the dial C, a spring normally holding

P°.infcer :" the low point. When the piece to be measured is placed

i position the stem ls screwed down, pressing the piece against the pin A

' ll"' Pointer moves to zero. The reading is then taken, and when

''' x' J1' ' be measured to the same size it is placed between the

Pin a and the stem, and the pointer will move up or down according to

* J>.'- K°.v- Soc Edinburgh, xxx. (1910) pp. 555-02.
T « rt 8 Special Catalogue, 1910

American Machinist, through English Mechanic, xciii. (1911) p. 147 (1 fig)

Z00L0C4\ ANN BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

409

whether such piece is thicker or thinner than the standard. The scale
indicates in thousandths or ten-thousandths, or whatever is desired. I> is
an adjusting screw and slot whereby the scale may be adjusted to com-
pensate for the variation in the threads of the micrometer. In tig. 47
is shown the lever R connected by suitable gearing with the pin A and
with the lever IV and the pointer B. The operation will be the same,
only tin scale or dial in this case may be more conveniently made liner
than in the other case, as for ten-thousand ths or above. The button at
B" enables the lever B' to be operated. In either case, if the piece to be
inserted should be thicker that] the standard the part B' or B maybe

\KW

D-'tc

Fig. 40.

Fig. 47

used to draw down the pin to let the piece in readily, and then when the
pin is released it will move against the piece and indicate on the dial the
amount t! • piece may be over or under the standard size.

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Transmission of Light through Transparent Inactive Crystal
Plates, with special Reference to Observations in Convergent
Polarized Light.* — F. E. Wright, in his treatment of this subject,
divides his treatise into two parts, viz. : Part I., Theoretical ; Part II.,
Observations and .Measurements. In the first part he develops in terms
of the electromagnetic theory of light the general mathematical treat-
ment of the transmission of light waves through a transparent inactive
crystal plate, special attention being given to the rotatory effects of the
boundary surfaces of the crystal plate on the plane of polarization of a
transmitted wave. Both theory and the observations of Part II. show
that, as a general rule, a nniradial plane polarized light wave after trans-

* Amer. Journ. Sci., xxxi. (March, 1911) pp. 157-211 (18 figs.).

SUMMARY "I CURREN'J RESEARCHES RELATING \<

mission bhrougb a bare crystal plate is still plane polarized, but its plane
of polarization bas Buffered a Blight rotation depending on the direction
of transmission, and if examined under crossed Nicole does not appear
perfectly dark in consequence. In general it may be stated that from
an incident plane polarized wave two refracted waves are formed which
on emergen© from the plate arc each still plane polarized, but their
planes of polarization are not preciselj 90 apart.

Phenomena of Visual Inhibition which may accompany the
re-association of the two Retinal Images dissociated by the Prisms
of the Stereoscope. Conditions and determination of these Pheno-
mena.*- M. A. Chauveau describes and discusses a series of experiments
which tend to evaluate the function of each eye in stereoscopic vision,
lb- arranges bo that the two objects viewed differ in detail so as to pro-
duce a condition of asymmetry. When a person whose eyes are of
unequal visual acuity views such objects through any ordinary stereo-
scopic apparatus, the effect seen is dependent on the object presented
to the stronger, or dominating, eve. The phenomenon may be very
strikingly illustrated by a, suitable choice of asymmetrical objects. The
neccssarv condition of asymmetry may also be produced by such means
as breathing on one of the prisms.

11 Avi lock, T. H. — Optical Dispersion: an Analysis of its Actual Dependence
upon Physical Conditions. Proc, Roij. Soc, Series A, lxxxiv. p. 492-523.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Infinitely Small Chemical Magnitudes.f— P. A. Guye gives an
excellent resume of the modern views of molecular constitution. He
discusses granules, molecules, atoms and electrons. He pays justice to
the useful part played by the Microscope in this important field of
research. With the ultramicroscope and arc-lamp illumination Sieden-
topf has easily distinguished objects of diameter o*01 /* and, with summer
solar light, objects as small as 0-003/*. As the molecules of certain
albuminoids are ascertained by calculation to have a diameter of 6 /* ft,
it follows that, under certain conditions, molecules can not only be seen,
but their calculated magnitude be verified by experiment. While the
molecules of gases si em at pit sent to be beyond the reach of vision, yet
rerrin by means of an enormous number of microscopic observations on
emulsions has established that in an emulsion of uniform granules the
distribution of such granuks at various depths is subject tothesame
;iu a8 c^nect8 the density of the air with its pressure. In other words,
Laplace e atmospheric equation

2 , n

- "log- = <£(A- 8)g

8 made aPPlicable to certain solids, [w = mean granular energy • wand

h" numb rs « I granules at depths h and h„- <f>, the volume of one

its density; A. the density of the medium; and q the

due to giavity.] One of the results of the observations

* gc,,,P! lii. (1911) pp. 481-7 (3 figs.)

f ' Schweiz. Natur. Gesell., i. (1910) pp. 168-2CO (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY. MICROSCOPY, ETC 411

is the calculation of w, which is found to have the same numerical value
as for the mean kinetic energy of gaseous molecules. This leads up
to the calculation of Avogadro's constant, or the number of gaseous
molecules contained in a molecule-gram of any gas at 0° and under a
pressure of one atmosphere. This constant is found to have a probable
value of 7(f.r» x 10'22.

Stereoscopic Illusion.*—!1. Gr. Baily describes a stereoscopic obser-
vation which lends itself to quantitative expression and may possibly
prove to be capable of practical application. It is well known that, if
a finger be held vertically in front of the eyes and a distant object
be looked at, two images of the finger will be seen, quite transparent
if the two images do not overlap, and opaque only at overlapping
parts. In place of the finger use a thiu rod at a distance of some six
or more feet, and focus on another vertical rod at a distance of 30 feet
or more so that the second rod is seen between the two images of the
first. The apparent position of the second rod will be found to be
distinctly nearer than its real position. Thus, let Aa A2 (fig. 48) be
the observer's eyes, B the first rod, and C the second. Then each eye

Fig. 48.

sees C without hindrance, and the observer sees a transparent image of
B on each side. C then appears at C. To observe this, B is preferably
not strongly lighted, or the tendency to focus on B may be too great.
C must be well away from its background, so as to stand alone with the
background out of focus. The ground on which C stands must be
hidden so as to prevent any other knowledge of its position. For if the
actual situation on the ground is seen, the visible proof of its position
will mentally outweigh the indication given by the stereoscopic effects.
The apparent position of C may be determined by setting up a similar
rod D near to the line A C sufficiently on one side to be visible to both
eyes. D is then moved backwards and forwards until it is judged to be
the same distance from the observer as C appears to be. The diagram
has been drawn to correspond with the following actual figures, the
vertical scale being exaggerated to twenty times the horizontal : Ax A2,
2| inches ; B, 1 inch broad ; A C, 100 feet ; and C D, 1 foot. The
author gives a full account of a number of out-of-door experiments
tried by him. These experiments seemed to show that the displacement
C C bears a definite relation to B C. The observation of the phe-

* Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, xxx. (1909-10) pp. 551-5 (2 figs).

SUMMARY OK CUKKEN'I RESEARCHES RELATING W

Hi, bowever, appears to be more or less personal, and probably
8ome extenl upon the observer's power of stereoscopic pei

Quekett Microscopical Club. The 472nd Ordinary Meeting of the
Club was held on March 28, L911, the President, Professor E. A
Vlinchin, in the Chair. Mr. A. 0. Banfieid exhibited and described a
new form of mercury-vapour lamp made by the Brush Electrical < lompany.
sua! type of lamp takes the form of a luminous cylinder about
7 feet in length, giving a great total luminosity with a relatively low
specific intensity. In the new form, the use of fused quartz for the
manufacture of the tube enables the length to be reduced to about
I inches, although the candle-power, about 3000, remains the same, and
the gain in bhe specific intensity is so enormous as to render it eminently
suitable for microscopic use. The peculiarities of the mercury spectrum
were referred to, and the great advantages offered by this illuminant
were pointed out. A paper on "Dark-ground Illumination," by Mi1.
E. M. Nelson. F.E.M.S., was read by the Honorary Secretary. The
author referred to the increasing use of this method of illumination.
The form of lamp recommended — paraffin, with i-incb wick — was
refem d to, and the best means of obtaining dark-grounds described in
detail. Owing to the lateness of the hour, a paper on "Some New
Diatomic Structure Discovered with a New Zeiss Apochromat," commu-
nicated by Mr. A. A. C. Eliot Merlin, F.R.M.S., was taken as read.*
Mr. .lames Murray, F.R.S.E., F.Z.S., made some introductory remarks
to a paper on "Water-Bears, or Tardigrada," intended to supplement
bhe one contributed in 1907. As the name Tardigrada is already appro-
priated by Vertebrates, the new official name of the group is order
Arctiscoida, family Xenomorphidse. Four new genera were described,
and their relationships and those of the other genera discussed at some
length, and the paper concluded with a synopsis of the ten genera known
and the 120 at present admitted species. A bibliography is appended.

Tin 473rd Ordinary Meeting of the Club was held on April 25, 1911,
the President in the Chair. Mr. A. C. Coles, M.D., D.Sc.Edin., etc..
sent a note describing the use of Parolein as a mounting medium. It
is absolutely neutral, and, so far as is known, is entirely without action
on any dyes, lis refractive index is 1,471, as against 1-530 for balsam
in xylol. The President exhibited and described preparations of two
of cysticercoid of rat-tapeworms from the body-cavity of the
rat-flea, Ceratophyllus fasciatus. These were Hymenolepis diminuta and

obably) //. murina. He also showed dissections of the ventral

nervous system of the flea, Ceratophyllus fasciatus, and the salivarj

inde and duct of the same organism. Mr. N. E. Brown contributed

- Some Odd Note.- upon Seeds," describing some of the more beautiful

ms he had noticed. He recommended lighting the mounts with a
apot-lens and concave mirror from below, and also with a stand-condenser
from above, the combined lighting being very effective. The use of
coloured gelatin, say red, placed below the spot-lens, and a piece of green
placed over the stand-condenser, still further increased the beauty of

* Jouru, Quekett Micr. Club, April 1911, p. 181.

ZOOLOGY A.ND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 413

these objects. Mr. D. J. Scourfield, F.Z.S., F.R.M.S., made some
remarks on '"The Use of the Centrifuge in Pond Life Work." He used
a hand-driven form, running at about 70<hi r.p.m., with very small
tubes holding only about \\ c.cm. He had observed quite a number of
forms new to him, but could not yet say if they were really new ;
certainly some had never been named. He thought there was a cod
siderable held for work on what had been termed the " centrifuged
plankton."

Barus, C. & M.— On an Adjustment for the Plane Grating similar to Rowland's
Method for the Concave Grating.

[The authors give full particulars of a simple apparatus contrived and suc-
cessfully used by them.]

Amer. Journ. Set., xxxi. (Feb. 1911) pp. 85-95 (6 figs.).

B. Technique.*
(2) Preparing- Objects-

Studying the Compound Eyes of Water-mites.f — K. Bedau fixed
the material (e.g. Notonecta glaaca, ffydrometra palustris, etc.) in four
kinds of fluid, but found that a mixture of 15 parts of 9(3 p.c alcohol,
30 parts distilled water, 0 parts formalin, and 2 parts acetic acid gave
the best results. Perforations were made in thorax and abdomen to
allow the fixative to penetrate more easily. After from 6 to 12 hours,
the insects were removed to 70 p.c. alcohol for 6 hours, and then trans-
ferred to •' Seifenspiritus." in which they remained for 21 to 48 hours :
soap spirit is preferable to Eau de Javelle or Eau de Labarraque for
softening the chitin, and with the exception of fatty tissue has no dele-
terious action. The preparations were afterwards passed through up-
graded alcohols, and afterwards, using cedar-wood oil as intermediary,
embedded in paraffin. The sections were stained by Heidenhain's iron
method or with haemalum. For removing the pigment two fluids were
used. One consisted of 3 parts of nitric and 3 parts of muriatic acids to
150 of distilled water : the other was composed of 2 parts 96 p.c. of
alcohol and 1 part glycerin with some nitric acid.

(4) Staining- and Injecting-.

Studying the Cytology of Bacteria. J— C. C. DobeU obtained his
material from the intestinal contents of animals, mostly frogs, toads, and
lizards. He found that the usual methods of fixation may under suitable
conditions and with careful procedure be made to give excellent results.
Films should never be allowed to dry before fixation. When the medium
containing the bacteria is too watery, gelatin or albumen should be added
until a him of suitable consistence is obtained ; if the medium be too

* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses ; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes ;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservation fluids, etc. ;
(6) Miscellaneous.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1911) pp. 418-20.

% Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,lvi. (1911) pp. 395-506 (4 pis.).

June 21st, 1911 2 e

Ill \|M.\i;V OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

[hick ii should be diluted with isotonic Ball solutions. After trying nu-
roufl fixatives and stains the author confined himself to two methods :
• ii with osmic acid or formalin, followed by one of the modifi-
mi- of the Romanowski stains: (2) fixation with Schaudinn's Bubli-
mate alcohol, followed by fleidenhain's iron-alum hematoxylin. When
using the former method the author proceeds as follows. A drop of the
medium containing the bacteria is placed on a slide, and then by it- side
a drop of 1 p.c. osmic acid or of pure formalin. The two drops are
mixed together and a film made. When dry the slide or slip is placed
in absolute alcohol for 10 to 15 minutes. On removal, it is allowed to
dry ami then stained with Giemsa or Leishman. After staining, the film
is differentiated in 30 p.c. alcohol, washed in distilled water, dried with
cigarette paper and mounted in cedar-wood oil or in neutral Canada
balsam. Chromatin structures are coloured a bright red, the cytoplasm
being blue, lilac or pink, according to the degree of differentiation.

The author adds in a footnote that beautiful preparations of small
Flagellates and other protista may be obtained by the foregoing method.

Rapid Staining with Giemsa's Azur-eosin Solution.* — G. Giemsa
gives the following method of using his azur-eosin mixture. Equal
quantities of the stock solution and methyl-alcohol are mixed. The
slide is placed coverside up on a Petri dish aud then covered with the
solution : this is allowed to work for half -a-minute. Distilled water is
then poured in until the slide is quite covered. The dish is then tilted
to and fro in order to mix the water aud solution. After 3 to 5 minutes
or even longer the fluid is decanted off, the slide washed in running
water, dried and examined in cedar-wood oil.. The author states that he
has not made sufficient trials to venture an opinion as to permanence.

New Method of Chromatin Staining.!— Mentz von Krogh describes
the following easy method of staining chromatin ; it is specially adapted
for nervous tissue ; the only preparations for which it is distinctly un-
suitable are blood films. Paraffin sections are stained with Unna's'poly-
chrome methylen-blue for 5 minutes, aud after a short wash in tap-water
are mordanted from 1 to 15 minutes (according to the object dealt with)
m 2 p.c. chromic acid. After another wash the sections are differentiated
with 5 p.c. tannic acid solution until they assume a pale blue or a reddish-
violet hue. They are then washed anew, rapidly dehvdrated with abso-
lute alcohol, then .xylol and balsam. The chromatin of the cell-nucleus
should be dark blue, the protoplasm and its prolongations pale blue.
i bodies are blue, but not so dark as the nucleus; axis cylinders
wplel ; connective tissue is of a pale greenish hue. The stain is
suitable for showing up Negri's corpuscles.

Saffron in Histological Technique.!— P. Masson has found that

11 1 "ii has a remarkable affinity for collagen, staining it a brilliant

As some samples stain the cell-protoplasm to a certain

' isable to combine it with eosin and some nuclear stain,

Muench. med. Wochenschr., 1910, p. 2476
Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lviii. (1911) pp, 95-6.
I C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 573-1.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 415

by which means a triple staining is effected. The technique is as follows :
1 grm. of saffron is boiled in lOOc.cm. of water for half an hour and the
decoction filtered. In the course of a few days the solution becomes
turbid, but retains its staining properties for 2 to 3 weeks. Pieces of
tissue are best fixed in Bouin's fluid, but Zenker and sublimate give fair
results. The sections are first stained with Mayer's hsemalum. Should
the connective tissue be stained, the section must be decolorised in HC1-
alcohol. After washing in tap-water the sections are blued in lithium
carbonate 1 p.c. ; they are then washed freely to remove all traces of the
carbonate, and afterwards stained for 10 minutes in 5 p.c. water-soluble
eosin, or for '2 hours or more in 1 p.c. eosin. After a wash in water the
sections are treated with the saffron solution for from 5 to 10 minutes.
They are then rapidly washed with water, dehydrated, cleared up and
mounted in dammar or balsam. The nuclei are blue, protoplasm red to
orange red, connective tissue, bone, and cartilage yellow.

(5) Movmting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc

Fading1 of Anilin-stained Microscopical Preparations and a New
Medium.* — A. C. Coles, after remarking that the greatest cause of fading
in balsam-mounted preparations is acidity, whether present at the time
or developing subsequently from oxidation of the mounting medium,
expresses the opinion that practically all substances of the nature of
balsams, oleo-resins, or cedar-oil, will sooner or later oxidize and become
acid, and therefore are liable to cause fading of aniline stains. The
author was advised to try paraffinum liquidum, or a pure form thereof,
viz., parolein, as it was absolutely neutral and remains so. His method
of use is as follows : —

" A small drop of parolein is placed on a perfectly clean cover-glass,
which has been held over the flame of a spirit lamp to drive off any
moisture on the glass, and this is applied to the air-dried film, which is
also held for a second considerably above the flame, just long enough to
make the moisture fade off. If the amount of oil is just sufficient to
reach the margin of the cover-glass, so much the better. If there be too
much oil the preparation is placed under a piece of blotting paper, and
the excess of oil removed as much as possible. The margin of the cover-
glass is then rung round with Apathy's gum syrup made as follows :
picked gum arabic, cane sugar, ordinary, not candied, distilled water,
of each 50 grm. Dissolve over a water bath and add 0*05 grm.
thymol. I test the reaction with litmus paper, and if acid I add a tittle
sodii carbouas. If the cover-glass is round the cement can easily be
applied on a turn-table ; if square, which I prefer, one paints it round
with a very small brush. The gum syrup sets quickly in a warm room
in about 15 to 30 minutes. When dry 1 apply over it a coat of Bell's
cement, which also dries quickly (the latter is not acted upon by the
immersion oil), and I feel I have a preparation that will keep."

The writer points out that time alone will show whether the prepara-
tions will lie permanent or not. and then remarks that while the mounting
is a little more trouble, parolein is optically superior to cedar-oil or
balsam.

* Lancet (1911) i. pp. 878-8.

2 E 2

||(; MMAR1 ■'' CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Mounting' Arthropoda in Amann's Chloralphenol.* — M. Langeron
calls attention to chloralplienol, one of the media devised by J. Amann
for mounting vegetable preparations.! The writer finds that this medium
is very effective for preparing and mounting Arthropoda, as it not only
softens the chitinous investmeni but at the same time clears up and
dehydrates the specimen. The manipulation is extremely easy; the
in8( killed by immersion in hoi 7" alcohol ; theyarethen treated

with the chloralphenol, which may be renewed once, and when sufficiently
dehydrated are removed to xylol balsam. The only preparations which
failed were those of insects gorged with blood.

(6) Miscellaneous.

New Forceps. i — M. Morosoff describes a forceps which he uses for
picking up cover-glasses and slides. He has found them especially useful
when dealing with highly infective material, such as plague, glanders, etc.
The chief feature of the instrument is the grooved fangs.

Film Test for Crude Rubber.§ — C. P. Fox, after examining 33 com-
mercial brands of crude rubber belonging to ten distinct groups, failed
to find any indication pointing towards a definite film peculiar to any
particular brand of rubber. The experiments were undertaken in order
to confirm or refute the observations of J. Torrey, who found that when
.". min. of crude rubber were dissolved in 100 cam. of petroleum naphtha,
\ drops allowed to evaporate on a white surface gave characteristic
figures. If Torrey's view was correct then any crude rubber could !"■
identified : unfortunately his observations are not confirmed.

Metallography, etc.

Nickel-sulphur System. || — K. Bornemann has made a further ther-
mal and microscopical study of this system in the range 0-30 p.c.
sulphur, and finds that his earlier equilibrium diagram can be simplified
by the replacement of two series of nickel-rich mixed crystals by one
Errors in the earlier determinations appear to have been due to
supercooling of the melts.

Tellurides of Sodium and of Silver. f— G-. Pellini and E. Quercigh
have made a thermal study of the sodium-tellurium system and the
silver-tellurium system. The compounds found are Xa./Te, Na3Te.,.
X.i 'IV.. AgTe, and Ag,Te.

Tellurium Alloys.** -M. Kobayashi has determined the equilibrium
diagrams of the tellurium-cadmium and tellurium-tin systems. One
compound, having a high melting point, exists in each system. TeCd

* C.B Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 457-9.

this Journal, 1- L2, sections (1) and (4).

I Centralis. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., hi. (1910) pp. 191-2 (3 figs.).
1 Ihio Naturalist, x. ( 1910) pp. 146-8.
M< ballurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 667-74 (6 figs.).

* ii R. Accad. Lincei, xix. (1910) pp. 350-56, 415-21, through -Journ Chem.
x.-viii. (1910) pp. 1062-3.

hem., lxix. (1910) pp. 1-9 (9 figs.).

/.OOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 41/

melts at about 1041° C, but exists in the melts only in equilibrium with
an excess of tellurium. TeSn melts at 780° C. Mixed crystals do not
occur in either system.

Gold-tellurium System.* — M. Coste has made a microscopical ex-
amination of twenty gold-tellurium alloys, prepared in minute quantities
by melting together weighed portions of the two pure metals in sealed
vacuous glass or silica tubes. One compound, AuTe2, which forms eutec-
tics with each of the two metals, was found. The results were confirmed
by measurements of E.M.F. of solution.

Alloys of the Noble Metals.f — W. Geibel has determined the elec-
trical conductivity, temperature coefficient, and thermal E.M.F. against
platinum, of several series of binary alloys of metals of the platinum
group, gold, and silver. The tensile strength of wires was also deter-
mined. Complete results are given for the palladium-gold series.

Physico-chemical Studies of Lead. J — E. Cohen and K. Inouye claim
to have proved that the two apparently different kinds of lead crystals,
which may be obtained by electrolysis of solutions of lead salts, are not
allotropic modifications, but must be regarded as identical.

Zinc Amalgams.§ — E. Cohen and P. J. H. van Ginneken have
found in the 10 p.c. and other zinc amalgams transition points at 42 "9°
and 20° C. The equilibrium diagram of the zinc-mercury system, based
on these and previous observations, is applied to the explanation of the
peculiarities of the Clark standard cell.

Alloys of Cadmium, Bismuth and Lead.|| — W. E. Barlow has deter-
mined the equilibrium diagrams of two binary systems, lead-cadmium
and lead-bismuth, and the ternary system, by thermal methods. Super-
cooling was avoided by frequent inoculation of the cooling melt with
fragments of the solid alloy. The composition of the ternary eutectic
is given as 40 '2 p.c. lead, 51*65 p.c. bismuth, 8*15 p.c. cadmium; its
freezing-point is 91 "5° C.

Heat-treatment of Brass. f— G. D. Bengough and O. F. Hudson
have studied the effects of heat treatment on rolled and drawn brass con-
taining 70 p.c. copper, 30 p.c. zinc. The best combination of strength
and ductility was obtained by annealing at temperatures between 600°
and 700° C. Length of time of annealing has a marked effect ; a bar
of pure brass may be heated for half-an-hour at a temperature a few
degrees below the solidus without burning, while a sufficiently long an-
nealing at a temperature 100° C. lower may produce burning. Burning
is considered to occur if the elongation in the tensile test is lowered.
The atmosphere of the annealing furnace, whether oxidizing or reducing,
appears to have little effect on the brass. The growth of the crystals
upon annealing was studied microscopically.

* Comptes Reudus, clii. (1911) pp. 859-G2 (3 figs.).

t Zeitschr. Anorg. Cheni., lxix. (1910) pp. 38-46 (2 figs.).

X Zeitschr. Phys. Chern., lxxiv. (1910) pp. 202-6 (2 figs.).

§ Tom. cit., pp. 437-93 (8 figs.).

|| Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc, xxxii. (1910) pp. 1390-1412 (14 figs.).

If Journ. Inst. Metals, iv. (1910) pp. 92-127 (28 figs.).

418 ,i m \i:V 01 i URRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Metallography as an Aid to the Brassfounder.* — II. S. Primrose,
discussing the use of microscopical examination for controlling t he quality

brass and bronze castings, points oul the importance of casting tem-
perature in the case of gun-metal castings.

Shrinkage of the Antimony-lead Alloys.f — D. Ewen and T. Turner
have determined the changes in length taking place in east liars in cooling
from the solidification temperature, for antimony-lead and aluminium-
zinc alloys. Time and temperature observations were made simulta-
aeously with the length measurements. The microstructure and hardness
of the cold bars were investigated. In tin/ antimony-lead system, where
no solid solutions exist, the extensometer curves give results apparently
having no relation to the equilibrium diagram, except as indicating an
expansion due ti> the solidification of the eutectic. In the aluminium-
zinc system, which contains solid solutions, the expansion curve closely
follows t lie Iiquidus curve from <> to 50 p.c. aluminium. A general theory
relating expansion in alloys to range of temperature during solidification
cannol yet lie propounded.

Effect of Silver, Bismuth and Aluminium upon Copper.:!: — F. John-
son has determined the effect upon the properties of copper, containing
small quantities of oxygen and arsenic, of additions of silver, bismuth
and aluminium. The ingots were hot-rolled to bars ; tensile and bending
tests were made, and the microstructure was studied. Hydrofluoric acid
was used as an etching re-agent for some of the specimens containing
bismuth.

Occluded Gases in Copper Alloys.§ — G. Guillemin and B. Pelachanal
have heated twelve different specimens of brass, bronze and tin in a
vacuum at 1100 or 1000° C. The extracted gases were analysed, and
were found to consist chiefly of hydrogen in the sound specimens, while
in spongy castings notable amounts of carbon monoxide and dioxide were
found in addition to the hydrogen. Phosphor bronzes yielded little gas.

Influence of Sulphur on the Iron-carbon System. || — T. Liesching
lias taken cooling curves of fifty melts containing 0*08 to 4 '78 p.c.
carbon, 0 01 to I'll p.c. sulphur, and has microscopically examined
the Bolid alloys. The microsections were etched by successive immersion
in an amyl-alcohol solution of picric acid, an amyl-alcohol solution of
nit rie acid, and a hot solution of sodium hydrate. The sulphide was
coloured brown in preparations thus obtained. The temperatures of

mencing solidification and of eutectic solidification are lowered by
addition of sulphur; the temperature of pearlite formation (Arx) is
unaffected. Melts containing more than 2 p.c. sulphur and a high car-
bon contenl separate into two layers, the upper layer being rich in sulphur
and poor in carbon, the lower poor in sulphur and rich in carbon.

* Jouru. Inst, Metals, iv. (1910) pp. 248-64 (16 figs.).
t T.>m. cit., pp. 128-62 (29 figs.).
: Tom. cit., pp. 1G3-234 (24 figs.).
§ Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 1-6 (6 figs.),
tallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 565-71 (19 figs.).

419

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

MEETING

Held on the 19th April, 1911, at 20 Hanover Square, W.,
H. G-. Plbimer, Esq., F.R.S., etc., President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of March 15th were read and con-
firmed, and were signed bv the President.

The following Donations received since the last Meeting were an-
nounced, and the thanks of the Society voted to the donors : —

From

J. Arthur Thomson and J. J. Simpson, Alcyonarians of the 1 The Trustees of the

Indian Ocean. Part II. (4to, Calcutta, 1909) j Indian Museum.

\ 1 /V T T7 l\fo )'} n nil
Slide of AulacodAscus superbus in Styrax > * ' T] '

Mr. Conrad Beck exhibited a new Microscope, which he said was of
very much the same type as other instruments, except that it had a limb
of such a shape as to form a handle. The slow motion, worked by a
lever inside the body of the Microscope, was entirely in front of the
limb, so that in lifting the instrument no alteration in the adjustments
was likely to occur. The other adjustments were the same as were
usually found in that particular type of Microscope.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to Mr. Conrad Beck for his
communication.

Mr. Spitta gave a demonstration on "Low-Power Photomicrography,
with special relation to a colouring method for tinting lantern slides."
In his preliminary remarks, Mr. Spitta said that the subject of photo-
micrography might be divided into three different sections — namely,
high power, medium power, and low power work. With high power
photography, an objective having a focal length of, say a twelfth or
thereabouts, was employed ; in medium work one of, say a quarter or a
sixth was used ; but with low power, an inch, or one of still greater
focal length, was usually selected. In that branch of low power work
where the objective was of longer focal length than an inch, it was
customary not to employ a Microscope at all, the objective being at-
tached to an ordinary camera. In olden days the selection of objec-
tives for this particular branch of low power work was a source of no
little difficulty, for they were mostly of the ordinary photographic
variety that did not work at a greater aperture than J/8, and their
corrections were such that they did not produce very good images, the

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

principal reason being of a two-fold nature [nasmucfa as the N.A. of
a photographic combination is ascertainable by dividing 0*5 by the
ratio, and as the/ ratio of lenses of this time did not exceed //8, the
power of picking oui details was consequently poor and ineffectual.
Moreover, as the construction of objectives of this period was not of
the same high order as that available in the present day — the astigmat
not being then known the whole of an insect, for example, could not
be rendered in focus at one and the same time. If the body was sharp,
the leei weiv fuzzy, or vice versd. The roundness of the field was very
marked and annoying. All these troubles were swept away at one
moment by the introduction of Zeiss's "Planar," for it has an 'excellent
flat field, and seeing its aperture is in the region of//?,- 5, its powers of
definition are exceptionally fine and beautiful. Even this system seems
id have been improved by some of the firm's later productions, where
three and even two-lens systems are employed instead of four, which
reduces the internal reflections from 28 to 15 and 6 respectively, a great
gain being thereby effected in making the "blacks" of the object' still
more intensely black. Other manufacturers have risen to the occasion
of later years ; there is the Micro-Summar, a lens by Leitz that is much
sought alter.- the Beck-Steinheil, by R. and J. Beck, which is a very
excellent tool and a two-lens system ; and lastly, a still later combina-
tion by Herr Reichert, called the " Polar," that is one of very exceeding
merit, furnishing images of great perfection at almost full aperture.

In making slides for colouring purposes, it is imperative that the
background should be perfectly clear and clean, and that all the trans-
parent parts of the object should be absolutely transparent, free from
or veil of any kind. It is necessary also that the " blacks " should
really black, and that there should not be even a trace of brown in
lence, for if so, the truth of the colour rendering in the final result
would be imperilled almost for certain. An artist" friend of his and
hunseli had been for the past ten or more years engaged in trying to
conquer the many difficulties connected with this colouring of lantern
slides, and it would be well at once to state that she it was who had
originated and discovered the several means of producing the results
ibout to be shown. There were several difficulties, the principal being,
first, to get the painting clear and transparent, that there should be no
opaqueness m the slide, for if so, it would look dull and uninteresting
thrown on the screen, and would want such a powerful light to
rhen came the great difficulty of getting rid of the paint
anules, or " paini -rains " as they used to be called! Then the avoid-
e ol any running together, blending or overlapping of the colours at
'"i "f contact, which in some instances arose apparently from
?ular absorption of the colour by the gelatin of the emulsion. Lastly,
.""' ddlieuln oi the paint hiding or rendering too faint the limiting
Kings in the specimen— as for example, the cell-walls of a piece of
or similar structure. This may seem of little importance, but,
'"i"''":'L "ledide lose, a very large portion both of its effectiveness
as ueii as its truthfulness. These difficulties, he thought, had at length
been overcome. s

• fifty or more slides were shown. These comprised botanical

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 421

sections with both single as well as double staining, others exhibiting

the "fall of a leaf " and the formation of the "abscissa" layer; insects
whole or compressed, the Crustacean Astacus longicornis, or wood-boring

animal of the ocean; different ferns and plants, showing their varied
method of carrying pollen, seeds and spicules ; the membrane behind and
in front of the lens in the eye of the newly-born kitten : groups of
flowers formed by insects" scales ; and finally, examples of a moth and of
a butterfly, and two groups of daffodils.

At the conclusion, Mr. Spitta said he would be only too pleased to
explain to any Fellow of the Society his method of producing the slides,
the plates used, and so on — in fact, anything relating to the photo-
graphic side of the subject, and that he would give Mr. Parsons the
name and address of the artist, for he felt sure that some might like to
avail themselves of this method of rendering contrast by colour, which
gave such very superior differentiation to that obtainable by ordinary
photographic methods.

The President gathered that the method used was that of painting
over a specially taken photograph, and he presumed that the process em-
ployed by Mr. Spitta for colouring photographs was entirely new, and as
yet unpublished. He had seen very beautiful results obtained actually
with the stained specimen itself, though of course only up to a certain
degree of magnification. He returned the heartiest thanks of the Society
to Mr. Spitta for his demonstration.

In reply to the President's supposition that the process employed by
the artist for colouring the slides was entirely new and as yet unpublished,
Mr. Spitta replied that this was so, at least so far as he knew.

The vote of thanks accorded to Mr. Spitta for his demonstration was
carried with acclamation.

Mr. Spitta was then asked to communicate his " Report on the
Grayson's Ruling presented by Mr. Conrad Beck to the Royal Micro-
scopical Society."

Before reading the report,

Mr. Spitta said that Mr. Beck had been kind enough to give to the
Society two rulings, an inch divided into hundredths, and a millimetre
with divisions of 0*25. He did not propose to read the paper in its
entirety, for it was of a very dull nature, and not fit for the purpose.
There were several difficulties which became apparent after commence-
ment which did not strike him before. One was to make a suitable
arrangement, one that would not shift during the somewhat protracted
time occupied by making several thousand observations. The stand had
to be of the most rigid kind — indeed, he had to cast aside a very large
number of readings on this account, some 1500 or 1(500, if not more.
Then, again, owing to the size of the rulings many arrangements of
objectives and oculars had to be experimented with bo as to avoid errors
of curvature of field, and such like troubles. The details of the
examination were set forth in the paper, but he might say the rulings
were in themselves most remarkably fine and perfect over the halves of
the scales under observation, but that a peculiar error manifested itself

1,22 PRO< 1 I DINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

in the ulist, luir values, for from the mean of all the measures the ratio of

j-son's millimetre to Grayson's inch was Ion ml to be 25* 369 : ] instead
of being 25 • 400 : 1, which is the correcl ratio, Grayson's ratio being
wrong to the extent of 1 pan in 800.

It would Beem desirable, however, Mr. Spitta added, seeing so small a
pari of the ruling would be used at any time, and that the rulings were
otherwise so perfecl and regular, that a portion should be examined at
theNational Physical Laboratory, when they were prepared for the work,
as be felt suresuch rulings would lie of greal use for Fellows to have a- a
means of calibrating their own micrometers. He wished to acknowledge
the bind assistance of Mr. Conrady, who had reduced and treated the
observation mathematically, so as to obtain therefrom all the information
ble.

.Mr. Conrad Beck said that Mr. Grayson had. during the last year
or so, been occupied in making a new screw. The difficulty in making
the rulings absolutely correct lay in the fact that there was no existing
standard to which it was easy to refer. The Board of Trade were at
the present time conducting investigations in Westminster in regard to
the measurement of the standard yard, a bar of bronze kept in West-
minster, and looked at once in twenty years for the purpose of making
trite copies. It was extremely difficult to realize that the standard was
purely arbitrary, and so far there had been nothing to refer it to, and
that if that standard were by any chance destroyed, our standard yard
would be lost. The object of the Board of Trade at the present time
was to measure how many wave-lengths of a particular coloured light
there were in our standard yard, and for this purpose they had set up
an ap] aratus in Westminster to calibrate the standard. He thought
that when a standard was subdivided into small amounts it would be
extremely difficult to be certain no errors had arisen. He had himself
made up a somewhat simpler form of interferometer, and after some
experimenting he found that it would be quite possible for an ordinary
person to measure a stage micrometer in terms of the wave-length of
light. The interferometer depended upon the arrangement of two
minors reflecting a beam of light. A beam of light was split into two.
and one-half reflected from each mirror. The length of path of the
two beams of light could be made identically the same. When in the

ighbourhood of equality and the length of' the two paths were within
a few wave-lengths of light, and the light was recombined and brought
hack into the eve. the phenomenon of interference was produced. On
the shifting of one of the mirrors, the hands produced by interference
we,,, seen to travel across the field, and could be counted. For every
motion of one of these hands across the screen, the mirror had to he
moved a wave-length of light. If white light were employed, the
interference obtained lasted only a very short period, hut in the use of
monochromatic light the period over which the motion of the bands
could be counted was very considerable— sufficient to measure the whole
of Grayson's micrometer : if possible, cadmium light should be used. It
would qoj be so easyto measure such lone' micrometers as those reported
"ii by Dr. Spitta. He hoped at some future time to be able to show
principles of his apparatus, though the difficulties attendant upon

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 423

its exhibition as a working apparatus in the meeting hall would nol
show the actual calibration capacity.

Mr. Spitta said that they had just listened to a most interesting
series of remarks ; to him, however, the great difficulty seemed to be the
enormous amount of practice required in the use of such an apparatus.
It would, no doubt, appear easy enough to one who, like Mr. Beck, was
facile princ&ps in the work, but there were difficulties connected with its
use which to many seemed almost insurmountable ; his own chief
stumbling block, for instance, lay in the fact that there was no fixed
standard, a difficulty which had especially appealed to him in dealing
with the MacMahon micrometer. The main point, however, in all this
class of work was, of course, to gain experience in the instrument which
was being used, and at present they were not quite satisfied with their
own experience.

Mr. Beck said that the MacMahon class of interferometer presented
infinitely greater difficulties than an instrument capable of measuring
a Grayson's micrometer. It was quite easy to count the number of wave-
lengths in a distance of T^ in. or T£-lT mm., but it would obviously not
be possible to count the number of wave-lengths in a yard with any
success. The measurement had to be made by a step-by-step method,
counting only the differences at each step. He thought that so far as
calibrating a stage-micrometer went, the matter was comparatively simple
so long as a sufficient amount of time were given to it.

The President said that Mr. Beck's method certainly sounded more
tempting than that which entailed the enormous amount of labour spent
by Mr. "Spitta on this matter. He imagined that when Mr. Grayson
had made his new screw, however, there would be still more work for
Mr. Spitta. He considered that the very heartiest thanks of the Society
should be accorded to Mr. Spitta for the great trouble he had taken over
this important question.

The vote of thanks was carried with acclamation.

Mr. E. J. Sheppard read a communication on "The Re-appearance
of the Nucleolus in Mitosis."

The President regretted that there was no time that evening to discuss
many points of interest in Mr. Sheppard's paper, but wished to propose
a very hearty vote of thanks for his communication; this was carried
unanimously. '

Dr. Eyre, in announcing a paper by Senor Domingo de Orueta on
"Apparatus for Photomicrography with the Microscope standing in any
position, especially in the Inclined Position,'' said that he would merely
select for reading a few passages which appeared to him to present
the salient features of the communication, leaving out those portions
which dealt with the mechanism of the apparatus. The writer com-
menced by remarking on the inconvenience of having to carry the Micro-
scope away from the working bench to the optical bench, in order to take
a microphotograph, and discussed the difficulties of moving the apparatus ;
he then went on to describe a Microscope camera of his own design.

IL'.I PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOl 11 TV.

made by Zeiss, which would obviate these difficulties. The apparatus
med to be a simple modification of Zeiss's vertical camera, the most
importanl poinl apparently being the introduction of a reflection prism,
placed over the eye-piece of the Microscope, and connected l>v a cylin-
drical collar fixed bo the tube at the cud of the camera. The worker
apparently kept the camera on the work bench at the right-hand side of
his Microscope, and the illuminating apparatus on his left, the camera
nting directly in front. As soon as he had found the object to photo-
ph, the camera was swung round on its horizontal bar until the ra-
tion prism approximated to the eye-piece of his Microscope. The
length of the camera was small, 0*8 of a metre, so it was quite easy to
:h the fine-adjustment of the Microscope even when the head of the
investigator was round the corner looking at the ground-glass screen.
The apparatus seemed useful for rapid work, but he (Dr. Eyre) did not
think it likely to replace some of the larger pieces of apparatus, although
the author stated he had obtained good results with a TVin. immersion
lens. Tin- final point in favour of the apparatus seemed to be that the
price was exceedingly low, as compared with that of ordinary installa-
tio]

A vote of thanks, proposed by the President, for this communication
- carried unanimously.

Dr. Eyre said that the paper by Mr. James Murray on " Canadian
Rotifers collected by the Shackleton Antarctic Expedition, 1909," would

be taken as read, and would appear in the Journal in due course.

The nexi Meeting was announced for May 17, when there would be
an exhibition of Pond Life. Fellows were invited to assist, and to send
in their names to the Assistant-Secretary by May 10. A Meeting of
the Biological Section was announced for Wednesday, May 8, to take
place in the Laboratory of King's College, Strand.

With regard to the June Meeting, the President announced that as
this would fall in Coronation Week, it had been suggested that it should
be held either on the second or fourth Wednesday in June, instead of
the third. The final date would be announced at the next Meeting

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited :—
Conrad Beck : New pattern Microscope, "The Haudle Microscope."
Mr. E. J. Spitta : Microphotographs coloured by hand.
Mr. L .1 Sheppard : The following slides in illustration of his paper :-

Chromatin Loops. Telophase Stages, Triton ; Chromatin Loops,

Lelophase Stages, Hyacinth Root; Reappearance of Xucleol

< hromatin hoop, Byacinthus.

us in

New Fellows. -The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of the
jety:- Walter Mansfield Aders, Ernest A. Pinchin, Henrv Syner,
B. Wade \\ ilton. '

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 425

MEETING

Held ox the 17th of May, 1911, at 20 Hanover Square, W.
H. CI. Plimmer, Esq.. F.R.S., etc., President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of April 19th were read and confirmed,

and were signed by the President.

The following donations received since last Meeting were announced,
and the thanks of the Society voted to the donors : —

From

British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9. Vol. I. Biology.)

Part VI. Rhizopodes d'Eau Douce, by Eugene Penard. ISir E. H. Shackleton.

(4to, London, 1911) )

.1. E. Barnard, Practical Photomicrography. (8vo, London.} j,^ ^5/;s/„ ,.

xyiij . . .. ■ • -• .. •• •• •• •• •• • • )

The Micrologist. Parts II -IV. (Manchester, 1910-11), with

two slides of subjects illustrated in Part IV., viz. Amaiba\ 1/;. j Flatters

and Sphxrozoum pimctahim j

Mr. Hopkinson referred to the scheme now brought forward to
encroach upon the space allotted in 1899 to the Natural History Museum
at South Kensington for the purpose of erecting a Science Museum. It
was. he said, proposed to pull down the building containing specimens
preserved in spirits, called the Spirit Room, erected at a cost of £30,000,
to appropriate its site for part of the Science Museum, and to rebuild it
in the Museum grounds on space which had been reserved for an exten-
sion of the zoological galleries, or, he had heard it suggested, remove it
to Hendon. The Museum being already much cramped for room, the
reduction of the area considered twelve years ago to be necessary for its
expansion would be highly detrimental to biological science, and a
MemoriaJ against the proposal had been prepared, of which he read the
two concluding paragraphs, suggesting its approval by the Society.

The President said that the point was whether the Society should sign
the Memorial against this encroachment on the domain of the Natural
History Museum. He thought that such a scheme as the above-
mentioned would end in the probable destruction of the Natural History
Museum as a scientific centre, and interfere with any scheme of enlarge-
ment, which might come under consideration, to enable students to
carry on their studies there without difficulty. The relationship between
the Royal Microscopical Society and the Natural History Museum was a
close one ; as a scientific Society their need of such a Museum was great,
and he considered that any protest against a scheme likely to interfere
with that relatiouship would be justifiable. He understood that the
President and Honorary Secretaries of many other scientific societies
had signed this petition on behalf of their various societies, and he
desired Members of the Royal Microscopical Society to express their

|LV, PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOl MTV.

m on the subject, and iii say whether the; ; would give t]
0] 0ii iei signed on their behalf by the President ami Secre-

.Mr. Hopkinson then proposed the adoption of the Memorial by the
. and thai it In' formally signed by the President and Secretaries.
Ali'. Heron A 1 1< n seconded the proposal, and the motion was carried
by general consent.

Mr. T. J. Smith, on behalf of .Mr. F. W. Watson Baker, said he
had been desired to bring to the notice of the Society models of micro-
scopic fields <>!' bacteria, which had been carefully prepared by Dr. <'has.
Leo Birmingham, of Westport, Ireland. The models had been made
with a view io their value when microscopic specimens "f bacteria ■•
lid available.

Mr. E. Niemeyer said that, at the invitation of the Royal Microscopi-
cal Society, he wished to bring to their notice Mr, C. Reichert's " Dark
Ground Illuminator with Arrangement for Centring on a Plain Stage" ;
In' would not lake ii]> time by explaining all the advantages of this con-
denser, bin would limit himself to making a few remarks only. The
condenser is centred by means of a sliding clamp arrangement which
liis into holes in the stage, and can be taken away and laid on one side
oi' he replaced on the stage without having to be re-centred. It is pro-
vided with a circular diaphragm with several apertures and dark stops.
The advantage is that it can be used with any kind of lamp, and be
centred in a few minutes, and take no longer to exhibit a specimen
under dark ground illumination than an ordinary microscopic demon-
stration.

The President accorded the thanks of the Society to Mr. Watson
Baker and to Mr. Niemeyer for their communications.

Mr. Barnard described an apparatus for disintegrating bacteria and
other organic cells.

The President remarked that it was a most ingenious instrument,
hut he would like to ask what really was the advantage of such an
apparatus over the very old and simple method of grinding up one's
material with sand ? It seemed to him that so simple and efficacious a
method might be preferable to the use of what appeared to be a some-
what complicated instrument.

Mr. Barnard replied that in the full communication which would

appear in the Transactions of the Society he had attempted to explain

• of his disintegrating apparatus overanv method in which

sand.or any similar material is used. The chief advantages are that

' "} temperature is entirely obviated, as the process of disintegra-
tion is practically frictionless. Secondly, in his experience there was no
apparatus in which sand was used where it was possible to avoid serious
disintegration of the containing vessel itself, resulting in contamination
"I 'he cell-juice. Then, finally, the sand had to he removed, which

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOi IKTV. 427

bended greatly to lengthen the process, and this also he considered should
lie avoided as far as possible. In his method the material could be
inserted in the apparatus, ground without the addition of any extraneous
substance, and in 20 minutes complete disintegration had taken place.

The President considered that his would-be objections had been
effectually answered, and proposed that the thanks of the Society be
accorded to Mr. Barnard for his communication.

The vote of thanks to Mr. Barnard was unanimously carried.

In regard to Mr. Batcher's paper on " Structural Detail of Coscino-
discus asteromphalus," the President said that the subject opened up so
large a held for discussion from the microscopic and optical point of
view that Mr. Butcher nad kindly consented to postpone the paper until
the October Meeting, when other opinions would be obtainable on this
very important subject. He proposed that Mr. James Murray's paper
on " Rotatoria of some Pacific Islands " should be taken as read, as the
rest of the Meeting would be taken up in examining the exhibition of
pond-life before them. He wished to express the thanks of the Society
to Members who had assisted in bringing together so many beautiful and
interesting specimens.

As, in the ordinary course of events, the June Meeting would fall in
Coronation week, the next Meeting was announced for June 28th.

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited : —

Mr. J. E. Barnard : — Diagrams and photomicrographs in illustration of
his paper on an apparatus for disintegrating bacteria.

Mr. T. W. Butcher : — Photomicrographs in illustration of his paper on
" Structural Detail of Goscinodiscus asteromphalus " to be read at
the October Meeting.

Mr. F. W. Watson Baker. Models of Microscopic Fields of Bacteria
prepared by Dr. Chas. Leo Birmingham.

Mr. E. Niemeyer : — Reichert's Dark Ground Illuminator with 'arrange-
ment for centring on a plain stage.

Specimens of Pond-life, as follows : —

Mr. F. W. Watson Baker : — Volvox g locator.

Mr. Jas. Burton : — MyxoiWma tenue.

Mr. F. AY. Chipps : — Gorethra plumicornis, Larva ; Melicerta ringens,

Paludicella ehrenbergi.
Mr. E. J. E. Creese :— Floscules, etc.
Mr. Edgar Cuzner : — Lophopus crystallinus, and Photomicrograph of

mounted specimen.
Mr. 1). Davis : — Volvox globator ; Stephanoceros eichhorni.
Mr. A. Downs : — Euglena ; Volvox; Hydra ririrfis.
Mr. J. Drinkwater : — Quadrula symmetrica.
Mr. A. Hammond : — Micro drawings.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Mr. a. I-]. Hilton :— Active Swarm-spores of Reticularia lycoperdon

f illustrating the aquatic phase of the life-cycle of Mycetozon.

M • .1. Bopkinson -.—Arcella vulgaris and other fresh-water Rhizopods.
.Mr. .1. Milton OflFord : Daphnia ; Floscularia cornuta.
Mr. r. .1. \V. Plaskitl : FragUlaria capucina.
Mr. .1. I. Pigg :- Circulation of blood m tail of Tadpole.
Mr. T. II. Powell: Cyclosis in Vallisneria.
Mr. G. II. .1. Rogers :— Fredericella sultana : Volvox globator.
Mr. C. K. Rousselei : Melicerta ringens.

Mr. I>. J. Scourfield :- Various very minute Algae, Flagellata, etc., ob-
tained by means of centrifuging pond water.
Mr. C. J. II. Sidwell -.—Euglena viridis x 300.
Mr. T. J. Smith : — Fredericella sultana.
Mr. George Tilling : — Hydra vulgaris ■ H. viridis.
Mr. W. II. Traviss :— Water Mite.

New Fellows : — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of the
Society : — Rev. Hilderic Friend, Mr. A. W. F. Warrington.

JOURN. R.MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. XIV.

,• del. ad nat. West, Newman photo-lith.

ROT1FERA OF PACIFIC ISLANDS.

JOUENAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

AUGUST, 1911.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

XIII. — Rotifera of some Pacific Islands: Collected by the Shackieton

Antarctic Expedition, 1909.

By James Murray, F.R.S.E.

(Read May 17, 1911.)
Plates XIV., XV,

Historical Sketch.— I have been able to gather very little
information about the Eotifera of any Pacific islands. Ehrenberg,
1853 {!)*, notes two Bdelloids in the Galapagos Islands {Callidina
rediviva and C. triodon). Semper, 1872 (3), discovered the remark-
able Trochosphcera in the Philippines. Weber, 1906 (6), records
three loricated Ploima from Honolulu. Eichters, 1908 (5), among
the material collected on Prof. Schauinsland's journey, found two
Bdelloids, Callidina angusticollis and 0. perforata, both in Samoa
and in Oahu.

* The figures in brackets refer to the Bibliography at the end of paper.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

Fig. 1. — Pleuretra brycei (Weber), variety.

,, 2a. Ditto. Another variety.

,, 2b. Side view of ditto.

„ 2c. Ditto. Foot.

,, 3a. — Callidina pacifica sp. n.

„ 36. Ditto. Head.

,, 3c. Ditto. Spurs.

„ 4a. — Philodina plena (Bryce), variety.

„ 4b. Ditto. Jaw.

Aug. 16th, 1911 2 f

430 Transactions of the Society.

Fiji: Island of Viti-Levu.

We had only a few hours for collecting in Suva, and no
promising collecting ground was found in the neighbourhood of
the town. In the circumstances, it is surprising that as many as
twenty species of Bdelloids were distinguished, though several of
them could not be identified.

List of Species Collected.

Philodina brevipes Murray. Rotifer longirostris (Janson).

ureta brycei (Weber). Habrotrocha longiceps (Murray).

P. humerosa (Murray). H. angusticoUis (Murray).

Callidina habita Bryce. H. constricta (Duj.).

C. quadricomifera (Milne). H. nodosa sp.n.

C. pacifica sp.n. Adineta vaga (Davis).

C. papillosa (Thomp.). A. longicornis Murray.
C. muUispinosa (Thomp.)

Notes on the Species.

Pleuretra brycei (Weber).

No drawing was made of the Fijian form, but it is noted that
there was a second dorsal row of four spines. The number of
lateral spines is not recorded.

Callidina quadricomifera (Milne).

Variety. — Very large (700//, long), trunk thick-skinned,
strongly stippled; teeth very thick. I only find the variety
possessing all of these characters in warm climates.

Callidina papillosa (Thomp.) ?

Variety. — Small, warts few, second trunk segment laterally
prominent. It approaches C. canadensis, but is smaller.

Callidina muUispinosa (Thomp.). Plate XV. figs. Qa, 6b.

Variety. — Short-spined, spines few except on the foot. On
first trunk-segment one lateral spicule, and a broad process, den-
tate at the end ; on second trunk-segment three short spines at
each side ; on central trunk no spicules except at the posterior
angles ; spines numerous on foot ; teeth 2.

Resembling an Indian variety ; remarkable for the reduction of
spines on the central trunk, and the broad dentate processes on
the first trunk-segment.

Callidina pacified sp. n. Plate XIV. figs. 3a-3c.

Specific Characters. — Small, pale brown. Corona large, wider
than trunk, sulcus wide, antenna very short. Trunk normally

Hotifera of some Pacific Islands. By J. Murray. 431

wedge-shaped, tapering from first segment to anal. Teeth 2. Foot
short, 4-jointed ; spurs large, broad, with small interspace, dotted ;
toes large.

Length, when feeding, with the foot drawn in, 200 yu,; width of
corona 75 ll, trunk 65 ll, across spurs 30 ll. Sulcus about equal
to disk, collar prominent, lobes on upper lip reaching to level of
bridge, slightly separated by convex interspace. Rostrum short,
antenna less than half of neck width. Anterior trunk generally
wider than central trunk. Trunk regularly plicate. Pre-anal and
anal segments distinct, of equal length. Spur broad, blade-shaped,
slightly contracted midway and expanded again towards apex,
which is subacute.

Not closely related to any other species. The spurs suggest a
relationship to some of the Enibata (B. laticeps, etc.), but there are
distinctly only three toes, which are large, like those of Rotifer.

Hahrotrocha nodosa sp. n. Plate XV. figs. Sa-Sf.
Synonym Callidina cnnata var. nodosa Murray.*

Specific Characters. — Small, whitish ; trunk covered with large
tubercles, in regular transverse and longitudinal rows ; teeth
many, fine ; foot short, three-jointed, a boss on the first joint ;
spurs small, obtuse or subacute.

Length 220 fi-250 fx, width of neck 40 ll, trunk 65 fju, across
spurs 10 ll. Rostrum short, broad ; antenna three-quarters of neck
width ; jaw triangular, number of teeth uncertain, anterior thickest,
then diminishing rapidly to fine strise — seven or eight can be
counted. Disks, in creeping animal, small, not separated. Neck
smooth, rounded processes on each side of antenna. Tubercles
about 6-9 ll in diameter (largest in Indian examples), about three
rows in the length of each segment. Pre-anal segment tubercled ;
anal smooth, but with one pair of lateral tubercles (in Indian
examples all tubercled).

The large tubercles appear to be constant, and sufficiently dis-
tinguish the species from all others in the genus.

Habitat. — Fiji ; India ; Madagascar. First found in India, and
described as a variety of H. crenata (Murray).

Hahrotrocha sp. ? Plate XV. figs. 9a-9c.

Very small (140 ll in length), rostrum and antenna short. First
neck-segment the widest part of body ; neck and trunk behind
that of nearly uniform width. Jaw triangular, with many fine
teeth, diminishing. Spurs small, incurved. • An incomplete study,
but certainly distinct. It is a curious paradox that the " neck "
should be the widest part. I only know one smaller Bdelloid —
H. minata is much smaller, measuring only 77 ll in length.

* See this Journal, 190G, p. 641, pi. xix. figs. 6a-5c.

2 f 2

432 Transactions of the Society.

Hawaii : Island of Oahu.

A whole day was spent in Honolulu, and about half of that
time was available for collecting. There was time to get a few
miles out of the town and into some very dense but low bush.
Everything was extremely dry, but there was a good deal of moss
on the trees and rocks, and this proved fairly productive when
examined some time afterwards.

List of Species Collected.

Philodina brevipes Murray. M. russeola (Zel.).

P. rugosa Bryce. Rotifer longirostris (Janson).

P. plena (Bryce). Habrotrocha pusilla (Bryce).

P. vorax (Janson). H. angusticollis (Murray).

Pleuretra brycei (Weber). H. longiceps (Murray).

Callidina habita Bryce. H. perforata (Murray).

C. plicatd Bryce. H. caudata Murray.

C. punctata Murray. H. constricia (Duj.).

C. quadricornifera (Milne). H. leitgebii (Zel.).

C. ehrenbergii Janson. H. auricidata Murray.

C. multispinosa (Thomp.). Adineta vaga (Davis).

Mniolia symbiotica (Zel.). A. gracilis Janson.

Notes on the Species.

J'/iilodina plena (Bryce). Plate XIV. figs. 4a-4b.

Variety. — Differing from the type in having more numerous
teeth, 3 + 1 or 4 in each jaw.

Pleuretra brycei (Weber). Plate XIV. figs. 1 and 2a-2c.

Variety (fig. 1). — Spines on the anterior margin of the trunk,
forming the furca for the antenna, moderately large ; the others on
the anterior margin very small. Main dorsal series of ten spines ;

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.

Fig. 5. — Callidina multispitwsa (Thomp.), variety.

,, .6a. Ditto. Short-spined variety.

„ 66. Ditto. Jaw.

„ 7. — Rotifer longirostris (Janson), var. fimbriata Murray.

„ 8a. — Habrotrocha nodosa sp. n.

,, 86. Ditto. Jaw.

,, 8c. 1 >itto. Side view of foot.

,, 8d. Ditto. Spurs.

,, He. Ditto. Slightly different spurs.

,, 8/. Ditto. Contracted.

,, 9a.— Habrotrocha sp. (?).

96. Ditto. Jaw.

„ 'Jc Ditto. Spurs.

J0URN.R.MICR.S0C.1911.P1.XV.

8b

CsXC us
ClCc l l J)

lt

D^

6b

9b

(o)

9c

j

\

j

8d

8e

L
8f V^

)

j
j

8a

J.Murray del. ad nat. West, Newman photo-lith.

ROTIFERA OF PACIFIC ISLANDS.

Rotifera of some Pacific Islands. By J. Murray. 433

lateral spines three on each side ; second dorsal series of four
spines ; two spines on rump.

Variety (figs. 2a-2c). — Spines on anterior border of trunk all
small. Main dorsal series of ten spines; lateral spines four on
each side ; second dorsal series of two spines, widely separated ; two
spines on rump ; a transverse ridge on first foot -joint.

The Hawaiian varieties are chiefly remarkable for the increase
in the number of lateral spines — no other variety is known with
more than two on each side. There is a variety in Scotland which
has the second dorsal series of two spines widely separated, as in
the second Hawaiian variety.

Callidina punctata Murray.

A rare species, apparently confined to warm countries. Dis-
covered in Africa in 1910, and now known in Australia and
Hawaii.

Callidina multispinosa (Thomp.). Plate XV. fig. 5.

Variety. — Having long setse, short spicules, knobs, and pectinate
processes. On each side five long setse on the anterior trunk. In
the angle between the first and second trunk-segments a short
acuminate process. Transverse dorsal row, at widest part of
trunk, of small spicules, but the processes at the ends of the row
broad and pectinate or dentate. Processes at posterior angles of
trunk and on rump thick conical knobs. On the foot a pair of
lateral setae, with bulbose bases, and a transverse series of small
truncate or bifid processes.

The chief peculiarity is the pectinate processes on the central
trunk. A short-spined variety from Fiji has similar processes on
the anterior trunk.

Rotifer longirostris (Janson) var. fimbriate/, Murray.
Plate XV. fig. 7.

The Hawaiian form is remarkable for the great elongation of the
processes, which suggested the name fimbriata. They are longest
at the widest part of each segment, and there attain to a length of
10 or 12 fi.

Had this extreme form been first discovered, no doubt it would
have been regarded as a distinct species. The firm sharp processes
might not have been recognized as the product of secretion.

These rod-like projections appear to be of the same nature as
those secreted by Dissotrocha macrostyla and some other species, but
they show no tendency to cohere to form tubeicles. This is probably
because the secretion is of a kind which hardens more quickly.

The strongest arguments for this form being specifically distinct
from R. longirostris are found in the decidedly more nodose trunk,

Transactions of the Society.

the 6wt and Becond trunk-segments and the pre-anal being especially
prominent, and in certain hemispherical processes on the rump,
which have not been seen in the type.

Habrotrocha pusilla (Bryce).
The Hawaiian form is the one with very thick case of many
layers.

Habrotrocha caudata Murray, and H. auriculata Murray.
Both these species were only recently discovered in Africa, and
afterwards in Australia and Hawaii.

Habrotrocha perforata (Murray).

It is noted that in Hawaii the examples of this species were
considerably larger than the type, but the exact measurements are
not given.

List of all Bdelloids recorded for Pacific Islands.

Philodina brcvipcs Murray

P. rugosa Bryce

P. plena (Bryce)

P. vorax (Janson)
Plcuretra brycci (Weber) . .
P. humcrosa (Murray)
Callidina habita Bryce

C. plicata Bryce

C. punctata Murray . .
C. quadricornifera (Milne)
C. ehrenbergii Jauson . .

C. pacifica sp. n

C. papillosa (Thomp.) . .

C. multispinosa (Thomp.) . .

C. rediviva Ehr

C. triodon Ehr

obia symbiotica (Zel.) . .

M. russcola (Zel.)

"Rotifer longirostris (Janson)
Habrotrocha pusilla (Bryce)
11. angusticullis (Murray) . .
//. longiceps (Murray). .

rforata (Murray)
11. caudata Murray*
II. constricta (Duj.)

//. hitgebii (Zel.)

//. nodosa sp. n

//. auriculata Murray
Adunta vaga (Davis) ..
A. gracilis Janson
A. longicorms Murray

K

X
X
X

X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

o
E

a

X
X

X

X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

ft
£

o

X
X

X
X

Botifera of some Pacific Islands. By J. Murray. 435

Summary.

In Fiji, fifteen Bdelloids were identified ; in Hawaii, twenty-
four — ten were found in both groups of islands. There were very-
few peculiar species or varieties ; Fiji has most peculiar forms.
Two new species are described, but H. nodosa was previously
known elsewhere, and described as a variety. There were also in
Fiji several other undescribed species, but they were not suffi-
ciently studied. There was a slightly peculiar form of G. multi-
spinosa var. brevispinosa.

In Hawaii there were no peculiar species, but peculiar varieties
of P. brycei, G. mwltispinosa, and B. longirostris. There was one
species, evidently distinct, strongly coloured in yellow and red
but the study was not completed.

The Bdelloids, even of Fiji and Hawaii, are insufficiently
known to allow of their distribution in other lands being profitably
discussed. The species are nearly all common. Besides the
peculiar species and varieties, there are only three which are not
known to be widely distributed. They are G. punctata H. caudata,
and H. auriculata ; these three have the same distribution, being
only known in Africa, Australia, and Hawaii.

Bibliography.

1. Ehrenberg, C G. — Susswa?serleben der Galapagos-Inseln. Verb. k.

Akad. Wiss. Berl. (1853) p. 178.

2. „ „ Mikrogeologie. Leipzig (1854).

8. Semper, C. — Zoologische Aphorisnien. Zeit. f. wiss. Zool. xxii. (1872)
p. 311.

4. „ „ Trochosphmra xquatorialis. (A translation of the above

paper.) Month. Micr. Journ. (Nov. 1875) p. 237.

5. Richters, F. — Moosfauna Australiens, etc. Zool. Jahrb. Abt. fur. Syst.

xxvi. (1908) p. 196.

6. Weber, E. F. — Rotateurs. (Voyage du Dr. Walter Volz.) Zool. Jabrb.

Abt. fur Syst. xxiv. (1906) p. 207.

136

XIV, On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the Shore-sands

Selsey Bill, Sussex. — VIII. Tabular List of Species

ami Localities.

By Edward Heron- Allen, F.L.S., F.R.M.S,
and Arthur Earland, F.B.M.S.

(Read February 15, 1911.)

THE examination of the material gathered from the Selsey shore-
sands having occupied the whole of our available leisure for three
years, it is not extraordinary that many species have come to light
after we had dealt with their genera in the accepted zoological
sequence. The following list is therefore appended to our series
of papers by way of index to the series. The figures in the second
column refer to the numbers under which each species will be
found described in the pages of the Journal.

The letter e signifies that the species was recorded by Earland
in 1905 from the shore-sands of the neighbouring locality, Bognor.*
It will be observed that the species found on the east shore of
Selsey Bill are remarkably few. Several gatherings have been
made " above the Park Beds," but on examination they have
proved to contain little beyond molluscan fragments. Why this
should be the case we cannot attempt to explain at present. The
most exhaustive examinations have been made of the material
" Opposite Bungalows," where a monthly gathering has been made
for more than a year ; at " S.E. Medmerry Farm," where a remark-
able gathering was made in April, 1909, richer in rare forms
than any other gathering made on this coast; and "Above the
Housepond Beds " ; whilst the Chalk Foraminifera have received
especial attention. The " Blue Band," which was exposed for
two days in June, 1908, has never been seen again. Fortunately,
an ample supply of material was secured on this occasion ; and it
will be observed that though the Foraminifera were abundant,
they are all referable to less than fifty species. They are, however,
without exception, extraordinarily beautiful, being casts in pure
pyrites of a rich golden-bronze.

The Pleistocene Mud deposit opposite Medmerry Farm, the
contents of the Giant Pholas shells found among the Pleisto-
cene Flints between West Street and Medmerry, and the long
series of samples from the 100-ft. Artesian Well Boring at " Large
Acres," present geological features and problems which must be
left for discussion at a future date. We have preferred, for the
present, to leave these three deposits out of the scope of the series
of papers of which this is the terminal instalment.

* Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1905, p. 187.

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera.

437

33

CO

"3

00

E

■o

os

V

3

~

,.

03

H

u

a

a

2)

—

o

CO

o

OS

oS

u

9)

1

S3

is

X o

Wo

—
a

"5

V

a

a

a

"C

z

.-5

■u

a

03

s a
E 2

5 5

oS

>>

u

St.

a

V
OQ

3
O .

a *>

0

4d

c

a
*

pq

09

St3

'5

CO

s

s

"3

c

'3i

Catalogue of Species.

a*

a *8

Ss

— o

£'■3

—

>
o

O 3

1*9

o

<

u
<a

M

3

;
a

a

-
M
<a

*j

D9

O

a
a

o

JS a
O 3

a s

9

s

s

: oj
■d:

0> =

la

s

oi a

<0

3

5

= 1
2"

3^

01

-C

CM

<

53

z

o

z

«i

O

■A

a

■^

H

o

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

ii

12

13

14

Family GROMID^E.

1

299a

Gromia dujardinii Schulze . .

X

2

299

G. oviformis Dujardin

Family MILIOLID^E.
Sub-family Nubecularinae.

X

3

300

Nubecularia Bradyi Millett . .

X

4

1

N. lucifuga Defrance (e.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

5

301

AT. tibia Jones and Parker . .

X

6

302

N. elongata d'Orbigny
Sub-family Miliolininae.

X

X

X

X

7

2

Biloculina ringens Lamarck

sp. (e.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

8

3

B. sphcera d'Orbigny

X

9

303

Spirolocidina antillarum d'Or-
bigny (e.)

X

10

5

S. excavata d'Orbigny (e.) . .

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

11

10

X

X

12

9

X

X

X

X

13

6

S. incerta Terquem

X

X

X

X

X

14

4

S. limbaia d'Orbigny (e.) . .

X

X

X

15

304

S nitida d'Orbigny

X

X

X

X

X

X

16

11

S. pertusa Terquem

X

17

305

S. planulata Lamarck (e.) . .

X

X

X

X

X

18

7

S. tenuis Czjzek sp

X

X

X

X

19

8

S. tenuiseptata Brady

X

X

X

X

X

20

306

S. Terquemiana sp. n

X

X

X

21

28

Miliolina agglutinans d'Or-
bigny sp. . .

X

X

X

X

X

X

22

30

M. alveolinifonnis Brady . .

X

X

23

14

M. auberiana d'Orbigny (e.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

24

20

M. bicornis Walker and

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

25

307

M. boueana d'Orbigny . .

X

26

19

M. circularis Bornemann sp.

(E.)

X

X

x

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

27

27

M. contorta d'Orbigny sp. (e.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

28

24

M. ferussacii d'Orbigny sp.

(E.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

29

29

M. fitsca Brady (e.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

30

308

X

X

31

23-

M. linneana d'Orbigny sp. . .

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

32

13

M. oblonga Montagu sp. (e.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

33

25

M. parisiensis d'Orbigny

X

X

34

22

M. pulchella d'Orbigny sp.

(E.)

X

X

X

X

1

J

35

15

M. pygmxa Reuss sp

X

X

X

X

X

X

Transactions of the Society.

i

H

I

*

§

3

-

fe

r

£

c

it

5

.

•c

*

o

36

309

37

26

38

310

39

21

40

12

41

311

42

18

43

17

44

16

45

312

46

31

47

32

48

32

49

33

50

314

51

34

52

313

53

35

54

36

55

37

56

38

57

39

58

40

41

42
315

43
43
43
43

Catalogi i op Species.

Miliolina rotunda d'Orbigny
M. saxorum Lamarck sp. . .
M. sclerotica Karrer
.1/. scrobiculata Brady . .
M. seminulum Linne sp. (e.)
M. sub-orbicularis d'Or-
bigny sp

.1/. sub-rotunda Montagu sp.

(e.)

M. tricarinata d'Orbigny sp.

(E.)

AT. trigonula Lamarck sp. (e.)

M. undosa Karrer

M. secans d'Orbigny sp. (e.)
Af. secans var. tenuistriata

Earland (e.)

M. secans d'Orbigny sp. var.

denticulata Costa (e.)

Sub-family Hauerininae.

Articulina foveolata sp. n.
A. sagra d'Orbigny

A. sulcata Reuss

Ycrtcbralina striata d'Or-
bigny

Sub-family Peneroplidinae.

Cornuspira foliacea Philippi

SP

C. involvens Reuss (e.). .
C. selseyensis sp. n.(E.)
Peneroplis pertusus Forskal

SP- '

P. pertusus var. arietinus

Batscb ' . .

P. pertusus var. cylindraceus

Lamarck

P. pertusus var. carinatus

d'Orbigny

Orbitolites duplex Carpenter
O. coinplanata Lamarck

Sub-family Alveolininae.

A. boscii Def ranee sp

A. melo Ficbtel and Moll . .

A. quoii d'Orbigny

A. sabulosa Montfort .. ..

(

00

1

00

3

i

c .

-,-

<&

■»»

e

EC

Wo

f'S

03

bd

If
o

1-

-

Rocks, D
Mud.

c

C

<

a
«:

S

9

—

□
s

PC
a>

s °

<B

e

M
u

■

-

o
P.

C

S

<

a

:

o

c

l

2

3

4

5

6

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X
X
X

■

<

x
x

X
X
X
X

<

X

X
X

o
o
>,

oj •

c =
- o

£3

'■ —

as

o

8

■d

4)

a »

x

X
X

X

X

X
X

X

>:

is

3
O .

- 1*

Jo

la

9 10 11

X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X

CO *

12

—
c

ce

•c S
a a

r. =
(* , 5«CB

Eg
I o «>

Jd O

5

13

14

X
X

-'

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera.

439

a

e4

so

a

f

Sao

<o

fc

O

y,

316

44
45

317

70 318

71 j 319

72 46

73 226
47

48

227
228
320
321
49

50

51

52
53

54
322

55
229

85
86

87
88

Catalogue of Species.

Family ASTRORHIZIDyE.

Sub-family Astrorbizinae.
Pelosina variabilis Brady . .

Sub-family Saccammininae.

Psammosphasra fusca Scbulze
Saccamina sphmrica M. Sars

Sub-family Rhabdamminin®.
Hyperammina vagans Brady

(E-)

Family LITUOLIDiE.

Sub-family Lituolinee.

Reophax ampullacea Brady. .
R. fusiformis Williamson . .
R. moniliforme Siddall
R. scorpiurus Montfort
Haplophragmiiim agglutinins

d'Orbigny sp

H. canariense d'Orbigny sp.

(E-)

H. fontinense (Terquem)

H. inflatum Reuss

H. latidorsatum Bornemann

H. nanum Brady

H. neocomianum Cbapman . .

Sub-family Trochammininee,
Thurammina papillata Brady

(E.)

Ammodiscus gordialis Jones
and Parker sp. (e.) . .

A. incertus d'Orbigny sp. (e.)

Trochammina inflata Mon-
tagu sp. (e.)

T. squamata Jones and
Parker (e.)

T. rotaliformis J. Wright
(MS.)

Webbina hemisphxrica Jones,
Parker, and Brady . .

W. irregularis d'Orbigny

a a

X o
Wo

si

£"5
Sa

~ o

P.

x
X

-

X
X
X

XXX

05

11

X

X

X

X X
X

cl ft
© ©

5 6

X

X
X

X

x

x

X X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X

o
t>
>»

s 9
ox:

uM

!n b

o 2

a sc

o

8

:<

X

3
O .

- a>
«,«

la

10 11

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X

-I

B

is -3

12

c
<s

tn

a a
« s .

S Bg

«| * £■
M O

; 3S

H O

13 14

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X
X
X

X

X
X

440

Transactions of the Society.

122
123

Family TEXTULARIDiE.

Sub-family Textularinae.

Textularia agglutinans d'Or-
bigny

323 T. concava Karrer

58 T. globulosa Ehreuberg

57 T. gramen d'Orbigny (e.) . .

324 T. inconspicua Brady var.
jugosa Brady

325 T. rugosa Reuss sp

230 T. trochus d'Orbigny . .

231 T. turris d'Orbigny . .

59 Ycrneuilina elongata Ter-
quem

60 V. polytropha Reuss sp. (e.)

61 V. pygmeea Egger sp

62 V. spinulosa Reuss (e) . .

63 V. triquetra Miinster sp.

64 Tritaxia lepida Brady

65 T. tricarinata Reuss

232 T. foveolata Marsson . .

66 Bigencrina conica sp. n.

67 B. selseyensis sp. n

Spiroplecta biformis Parker

and Jones (e.)

69 S. fusca Earland (e.)

233 S. prselonga Reuss sp

68 S. sagittula Defrance sp. (e.)
Gaudryina filiformis Ber-

thelin (e.)

237 G.jonesiana d'Orbigny

234 G. pupoides d'Orbigny
236 G. rugosa d'Orbigny

235 (!. subrotimdata Schwager (e.)

70 Yalvulina atistriaca d'Or-

bigny

71 V. triangularis var. pupa

d'Orbigny

238 Clavulina angularis d'Or-

bigny

72 C. communis d'Orbigny
328 C. obscura Cbuster (k.) . .

73 C. parisiensis d'Orbigny

Sub-family Bulimininae.

74 Bulimina aculeata d'Orbigny

(E.)

75 B. affinis d'Orbigny . . . .

x
X

X
X
X
X
X

X

X

X

X
X

-

OT3

-

X

X X

X

X

X X

X
X

X

X
X

X

X

1

a

o

s

5

s-

>>

-

fa

££

>.

OS

s

~~

<u

<•

w

o

J/3

8

9

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

D

O .

s : s
•a ( <b«

13

J a

10 11

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

73

c

5 <K

12

~z

s
a
P5

«

?

'-
IS

X
X

X
X

X

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera.

441

e

76

77
244

329

78
330
331
245

79

242

240

241

332

80

243

333

81

334

335

336

239

82

246

83

84

90

85

337

338

86

87

247

88

89

339

340

341

91

162 248

163 248

CATALOGUE OF SPECIES.

Bulimina brevis d'Orbigny . .

B. elegans d'Orbigny (e.)

B. elegantissima d'Orbigny

(E.)

B. elegantissima d'Orbigny
var. seminuda Terquem . .

B. elongata d'Orbigny (e.) . .

B. fusiformis Williamson . .

B. marginata d'Orbigny (e.)

B. murchisoniana d'Or-
bigny

B. obtusa d'Orbigny

B. ovata d'Orbigny (e.) . .

B. ovulum Reuss

B. presli d'Orbigny

B. pupa Terquem

B. pupoides d'Orbigny (e.) . .

B. pyrula d'Orbigny

B. selseyensis sp. n

B. squamigera d'Orbigny (e.)

B. striato-punctata Terquem

B. subteres Brady

B. Terquemiana Terquem sp.

B. variabilis d'Orbigny

Virgulina subsqua?nosa Egger

V. schreibersiana Czjzek

Bolivina cenariensis Costa sp.

B. beyrichi Reuss

B. decorata Jones

B. dilatata Reuss (e.)

B. durandii Millett

B. eocenica Terquem

B. laevigata Williamson sp. (e.)

B. nobilis Hantken (e.)

B. obsoleta Eley (syn. Textu-
laria quadrilatera Brady)

B. plicata d'Orbigny (e.)

B. punctata d'Orbigny (e.) . .

B. robusta Brady

B. textilarioides Reuss

B. tortuosa Brady (e.) . .

B. variabilis Williamson sp.

Pleurostomella alternans Sch-
wager

Family
CHILOSTOMELLID.E.

Elipsoidella
loides sp. n.

pleurostomel-

C .

gS

X o

Wo

.5 O

Ec

X
X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X

H

X

a

m

it .

O 3

x

X
X

X

x

--.
X

X
X

X

X

X
X

a
O
t>
>»

c S

t- o
OS

i. ee

'— -■

*> —

._- -^

o 2

Cm =

X
X

X
X
X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X

V
Hi

s
o

• 0>

S«

la
<

u

X
X

X

X
X
X
X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

e

OS

M

4>W

12

X
X

—
c

-

3
5

O en

J<6

13

X
X

14

X
X

X

X
X

X
X
X

X

X
X

X
X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

442

Transactions of the Society.

164 97

165 249

166 342

167 94

168 350

169 92

170 250

171 343

172 102

173

174
175

185
186

187

188
189

190

191

193
194
195
196

344

103

95

176 ; 345

177 104

178 | 105

179 106

180

107

181

346

182

347

183 : 348

184 I 101

99
100
349

95
96

96

98

192 351

352
257
262
255

197 252

Catalogue of Species.

Family LAGENIDiE.

Sub-family Lageninae.

Lagena aeuticosta Reuss

L. aspera Reuss

L. bicarinata Terquem

L. clavata d'Orbigny sp. (e.)

L. costata Williamson

L. globosa Montagu sp. (e.)

L. gracilis Williamson

L. gracillima Seguenza

L. hexagona Williamson sp.

(E-)

L. hispida Reuss (e.)

L. laevigata Reuss sp

L. Ixvis Montagu sp. (e.)
L. lineata Williamson (e.) . .
L. lucida Williamson sp. (e.)
L. marginata Walker and

Boys (e.)

L. orbignyana Seguenza sp.

(■•).

L. orbignyana var. selseyensis

var. n

L. orbignyana Seguenza sp.

var. walleriana Wright . .
L. perlucida Williamson
L. quadrat a Williamson (e.)
L. reticulata Macgillivray sp.

(e.)

L. semistriata Williamson (e.)
L. squamosa Montagu sp. (e.)
L. squamosa Montagu var.

Montagui Wright (e.)
L. striata d'Orbigny sp. (e.)
L. sulcata Walker and Jacob

sp- (■•)

L. sulcata var. interrupta

Williamson (e.)

L. Williamsoni Alcock sp. (e.)

Sub-family Nodosarinae.

Nodosarin arundinea Schwa-

ger

N. calomorplia (Reuss) . .
N. communis d'Orbigny (e.)

N. conferta Reuss

N. consobri?ia d'Orbigny

N. farcimen Reuss

&

c .
= 2
?. °.

x a

Wo

J*

He

— o

X
X

X
X

X

X X

X
X
X

A

X
X

X

X

X

V I 3

M *2

«£

.2 3
-

3

X

X X

X
X

X

z r

o. ft

a a,

c c

X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X

o
o

£5
os

£■ <=>

S*S

o 2

O
8

X
X

x

X

X
X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

1 5

t ■-
a

9 10

3
o .

"■I 73

la

<
11

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X
X

X

X

X

X

—

I s

7-.

M

12

X
X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera.

443

S

6

■3

.O

i

0J
C .

Wo

GO

J

—
2-

CO

3
-43

°n

■43

o

'3.
r.

\

"3

•49

a

BO

s

OO

"3

■
00

=s
o

S§

OS

s

at

>>

c*

=

—

•-
0

IS
GO

3
O .

to i a

C ! OS

a

C9

0D

-49

a

St3

2
a

a

"3

Catalogue of Species.

^2

.= ■ =

s =
2 s

o

-4*

<D

■-
-
—

§1

z
i~

<

u
to

w

71

S

V.

Z
-

2,

3

pq

V

43
*OQ

Z

a
a,

o

3«

« is

o. 3

=

5

T

: v

CtfPP

la

P a

-

si

O oo

5«

'S

<

S

:

^

s

<

O

•/J

fc

o)

H O

^

w

1

•I

3
X

i

5

6

7

8

9

10

i:

12

13

14

198

109

Nodosaria filiformis d'Orbigny

X

"

X

X

X

X

X

199

259

N. hispida d'Orbigny . .

X

200

108

N. Ixvigata d'Orbigny (e.) . .

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

201

254

N. lomeiana d'Orbigny. .

X

202

258

N. mucronata Neugeboren . .

X

X

203

261

X

204

253

N. pauperata d'Orbigny

X

205

256

X

206

251

N. radicula Linne sp

X

207

260

N. raphanus Linne sp.

X

208

353

N. scalaris Batsch sp. (e.) . .

X

209

110

N. soluta Keuss (e.)

X

210

264

N. Steenstrupi Reuss

X

211

263

X

212

265

Lingulina carinata d'Or-

X

213

267

Frondicularia archiaciana

X

214

266

F. angulosa d'Orbigny . .

X

215

272

X

216

269

X

217

111

F. inxgualis Costa

X

218

270

X

219

271

F. marginata Reuss

X

220

268

F. verneuiliana d'Orbigny . .

X

221

112

Rhabdogonium tricarinatum

X

222

354

Marginulina glabra d'Or-

X

X

X

223

273

M. glabra var. elongata d'Orb.

X

224

274

M. hispida Neugeboren

X

225

275

M. trilobata d'Orbigny

X

226

276

Vaginulina legumen Linne
sp- (e.)

X

227

280

Cristellaria acutauricularis
Fichtel and Moll sp.

X

228

283

C. convergens Born

X

229

117

C. crassa d'Orbigny

X

230

114

C. crepidula Fichtel and

X

X

X

231

119

C. cultrata Montfort . .

X

X

X

X

X

232

115

C. italica Defrance sp

X

233

113

C. lata Cornuel sp

X

234

277

X

235

281

C. navicula d'Orbigny

X

236

118

C. nitida d'Orbigny

X

237

279

X

238

116

C. rotulata Lamarck sp.

X

X

X

X

X

239

278

C. scitula Berthelin

X

240

282

C. triangularis d'Orbigny . .

X

ill

Transactions of the Society.

-

=
=

o

26 1
286

288

285
287

355

125
130
128
127
122
129

253 123

254 137

255 120

256 356

257 126

258 132

259 121

260 133
357
135

131

124
136
358
134
359

139

360
138

289
140
290
141

I M U.0GCK OF Sl'ECIKS.

Cristellaria vortex Ficbtel and
Moll

Flabellina baudouiniana
d'Orbigny

F. interpunctata von der
Marck

F. pulchra d'Orbigny . .

F. rugosa d'Orbigny

Sub-family Polymorphininse.

Polymorphina acuminata
Williamson

P. angusta Egger

P. communis d'Orbigny

P. complanata d'Orbigny

P. compressa d'Orbigny (e.)

P. concava Williamson (e.) . .

P. elegantissima Parker and
Jones

P. gibba d'Orbigny

P. hirsuta Brady, Parker, and
Jones

P. lactea Walker and Jacob

SP-(E-) ,•;.;•

P. lactea var. amygdaloides

Reuss

P. lanceolata Reuss (e.)

P. myristiformis Williamson

P. oblonga Williamson (e.)

P. orymta Karrer

P. problema d'Orbigny

P. regina Brady, Parker, and

Jones (e)

P. rotundata Bornemann sp.

(E-)

P. sororia Reuss

P. spinosa d'Orbigny sp.
J', thouini d'Orbigny . .
/'. tubcrcukita d'Orbigny
Dimorphina lon-gicollis Brady

sp- • •.

Uvigerina angulosa William-
son (e )

U. asperula Czjzek (f..). .

17. asperula Czjzek var. am-
I'ltllacea Brady

U. rannriensis d'Orbigny (e.)

U. muralis Terquem ..

U. pygmse.a d'Orbigny . .

U. selseyensis sp. n

-

c ■

5 u
S«

w§

h

I!

U

Ph

X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X

X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

X

X

X

5 2
: O

x

X

tfj

o

r.

ee

B

9

eq

V

*a

r

&

—

b

en

"3

02
V

4J

w

«
o

o

OJ -
S =

.= eo

3*

c 2
c

«

J-

=

—

—

--
w

A

-
co

>.

fa
u
O

=

•a

a>

Above the "House-
j>ond " Beds.

o

43

to

_c

"u
CO

►■a

B

1

-

n

a

co-
ot
43

C

Sb

= OS
C oo

■— B
Si

5

6

7

8

!»

in

11

12

13 14

X

X

X
X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

■

X
. X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera.

445

BO

■6

in

eg

ist-

3

■3

u

CD

s

3

CD

J2

■a

3 .

is
a °.

•* o
Wo

<D

pq

"it
—

3

Ph

3

'-
P

'S

CO

*->

o

a

CD

09

ti

>>

en

CO

orneyCoa
tion.

rry Farm

1 k

t? § .

t- M en

CD ""3

o :.

*» "3
■ui -

•n pq

3

cs

CO
43

a
^"2

CO

a

3
S

Catalogue of Species.

.So

S3

8*

CD

—

>
3

it •

O 3

n

o

—
-

<

-IS

u

D

—

s

"en

C
S.
Si

5
PQ

i>

'en

:

CD

a

SP5

pposite Th
guard Stai

E. Medme

,\V. Medm

bove the "
pond " Be

West Witte:
Earnley.

The "Blue

it O

■3-S

eg

o

S

<

s

-

C

O

-«!

© CO

T, <

O

1

-1

3

4

5

6

7

8 9

10 11

12 1.

J 14

276

361

Sagrina asperula Chapman . .

X

277

291

S. cretacea sp. n

X

278

362

S. dimorpha Parker and Jones
Sub-family Ramulininae.

X

X

279

292

Eamulina aculeata d'Or-
bigny sp

Family GLOBIGERINID^E.

X

280

294

Globigerina mqtiilateralis
Brady

x

X

281

142

G. bulloides d'Orbigny (e.) . .

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

282

143

G. cretacea d'Orbigny . .

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

283

145

G. dutertrei d'Orbigny

>

<

284

144

G. linnxana d'Orbigny sp. . .

X

X

X

285

293

G. marginata Reuss

X

X

286

146

G. pachyderma Ebrenberg sp.

X

X

X

X

287

295

Orbulina universa d'Or-

X >

< X

288

296

Sphg&roidina bulloides d'Or-
bigny (e.)

Family ROTALIDiE.
Sub-family Spirillininae.

X

289

148

Spirillina inxqualis Brady. .

X

290

149

X

X

291

363

S. lucida Sidebottom

X

292

150

S. margaritifera Williamson

X

293

151

S. selseyensis sp. n.

X

294

147

S. vivipara Ehrenberg (e.) . .
Sub-family Rotalinae.

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

295

152

Patellina corrugata William-

X

X

X

296

170

Discorbina allomorphinoides

X

X

x :

<

297

364

D. araucana d'Orbigny

X

298

365

D. bertheloti d'Orbigny (e) . .

X

299

167

D. biconcava Parker and Jone3

X

300

171

X

X

301

166

D. dimidiata Jones and Parker

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

302

366

D. eximia Hantken

X

303

154
367

D. globularis d'Orbigny sp.
(e.)

X

X

X

X

X

304

D. inxquilateralis sp. n.

305

159

D. isabelleana d'Orbigny sp.

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

306

368

D. nitida Williamson . .

X

X

X

X X

X

Aug. 16th, 1911

2 o

446

Transactions of the Society.

u

r

•

55

£

1

5

KW

156

308

163

309

160

310

161

Ul

369

312

370

313

371

314

164

u,r.

157

316

372

'.17

168

318

373

319

169

320

153

321

155

322

374

323

165

324

158

325

162

126

172

327

173

328

174

329

175

330

375

331

181

332

297

333

184

334

180

335

176

336

376

337

377

338

183

339

178

340

182

341

177

-

179

343

185

344

378

345

186

Catalog i r 01 SPBCIHS.

Discorbina obtusa d'Orbigny

sp. (e.)

D. opercularis d'Orbigny sp.
D. orbicutorisTerquem sp. (k.)
D.parisie7isis d'Orbigny sp. (e.)
D. patelliformis Brady var.

corrugata var. n.
D. pileolus d'Orbigny sp.
D. polystomelloid.es Parker

and Jones

D. rarescens Brady

D. rosacea d'Orbigny sp. (e.)

D. rosacea d'Orbigny var.

selseyensis var. n

D. saulcii d'Orbigny
D. tabemacularis Brady
D. trochidiformis Lamarck sp.
D turbo d'Orbigny sp. (e.) . .
D. valvuJata d'Orbigny sp. . .
D. ventricosa Brady
D. vesicularis Lamarck sp. . .
D. vilardeboana d'Orbigny sp.
D. wrightii Brady (e.)
Cyclolocuhna annulata Heron-
Allen and Earland . .
C. polygyra Heron- Allen and

Earland

Planorbulina mediterranensis

d'Orbigny (e.)

P. larvata Parker and Jones
Linderina brugesii Scblum-

berger

Truncatulina aknerxana d'Or-
bigny sp

T. cordieriana d'Orbigny sp.
T. Lidter Parker and Jones sp.
T. haidingerii d'Orbigny sp. (e.)
T. lobatula Walker and Jacob

sp- (e.)

T. refulgens Montfort (e.) . .
T. reticulata Czjzek (e.)
T. robertsoniana Brady . .
T. tenu imargo Brady
T. ungcriana d'Orbigny sp. (e)
T. variabilis d'Orbigny (e.)
T. icueller storfi Schwager sp.
Anomaliyia ammonoides Reuss

A. ariminensis d'Orbigny . .
A. coronata Parker and Jones

c .

'iE
*°.

.5 o

X

X
X
X

X

><

X
X

X
X
X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X

X

—
--

-

u
u

<-.

Ph

4)

.C
•*a

r
<

n

3
43

'£

~>
o
fi

.* .

a -a

S 3

--

—
05

-
u

<

-
S

s

o

=

1

p.
c

OS

%
I

1

A

a

c

>>

o

CO

*«!
to

«

••3
<

1

*->

a

o

o
B|

!*

•■

o 2
c

5

u
in

tf

1

£

u
a

<-
a

5
■c
<»

»

6

00

3

o .

la

Wesi Wittering to
Earnley.

■c
c
1

i>

s

s

to

.=

H

■o-
a
*

m

43

a
E5

O oo

i: i
*S
Sen

•J.

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

ii

12

13

14

X

X

X

.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

-.

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X
X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

.-.

X
X

X

X
X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

:■

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X
X

X

X

•

X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X
X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

Recent and Fossil Foraminifera.

447

s

a
c

Catalogue of Species.

346 187

347 379

348 380

349 189

350 381

351 198

352 195

353 I 382
192
197
383
193
191
188
384
385

196
386
199
194

387
388
190

369 200

370 203
205
298
201
202

375 204

206
207

212

213
208

A. grosserugosa Giimbel sp.

(E-)

Pulvinulina auricula Fichtel

and Moll (e.)

P. brongniartii d'Orbigny . .
P. concentrica Parker and

Jones (e)

P. crassa d'Orbigny

P. elegans d'Orbigny sp.

P. exigua Brady

P. haliotidea sp. n

P. hauerii d'Orbigny (e.)
P. karsteni Reuss sp. (e.)
P. lateralis Terquem
P.menardii d'Orbigny sp. (e.)
P. oblonga Williamson sp. . .
P.punctulata d'Orbigny sp. . .
P. repanda Fichtel and Moll
P. repanda var. concamerata

Montagu

P. schreibersii d'Orbigny sp.
P. reticulata Reuss
P. semimarginata d'Orbigny
P. truncatulinoides (syn. mi-

cheliniana d'Orbigny)

P. tumida Brady

P. umbonata Reuss

P. vermiculata d'Orbigny sp.

Botalia beccarii Linne sp. (e.)

R. exsculpta Reuss

R. calcar d'Orbigny (e.)

R. clementiana d'Orbigny . .

R. orbicularis d'Orbigny

R. soldanii d'Orbigny

R. suessonensis d'Orbigny . .

Sub-family Tinorporinae.

Gypsina inhxrens Schultze

sp- (e.)

Polytrema miniaceum Linne

sp

Family NUMMULINIDJE.
Sub-family Polystomellinae.

Nonionina asterizans Fichtel

and Moll sp. (e.)
N. boueana d'Orbigny . .
N. depressula Walker and

Jacob sp. (e.)

Preliminary Examina-
tion of 1000 c.cm.

00

73

o

ce
Ph

G

s
>
o

<

00

a

43

'E

43

n

X .

j-g

Ii

'E.

c
u

»-

<

—

s

o

w

»

p

-

n

•a
7j

a
-
p.
©

X

s

:

~r.
U

c
9

n

00

o
e.

a

o

00

s

«

*- .

1
43

00

■
o

>>

c a

gS

j= ce

HS

Q) ™
^*°

o

i

>>

La
4)

5

H
«3

E

(-4

rt

H

u

1

-c
o

s

Above the " House-
pond " Beds.

West Wittering to
Earnley.

—
a
-
pa

a
3

9
H

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

A

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

<

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

'<

2 g 2

HX

Transactions of the Society.

£

■c

00

ft

382

383

384
385

386

387

388

389

390

B

3

391

392

393
394

395
396
397
398

211

:w!i

210

390
214

209

216

217
215
215

218

219

220
221

222
223
224
225

Cataj ogi i. of Species.

umina orbicularis Brady
N. pauperata Balkwill and

Wright (e.)

N. pompilioides Fichtel and

Moll sp

N. quadriloculata sp. n.

N. scapha Fichtel and Moll

sp

N. umbilicatula Montagu sp.

(E-)

Polystomella crispa Linne sp.

(E.)

P. macella Fichtel and Moll

SP- (e.)

/'. striatopunctata Fichtel and

Moll sp. (e.)

P. striatopunctata (Fichtel

and Moll) var. selseyensis

Heron-Allen and Earland

Sub-family Nummilitinae.

Amphistegina lessomi d'Or-
bigny

Operculina complanata De-
f ranee sp

0. ammonoides Gronovius sp.
Nummulites planulata La-
marck

N. laevigata Lamarck . .
N. variolaria Sowerby . .
N. elegans Sowerby
N. wemmelensis de la Harpe

i

a .

la

a".
X o

Wo

ft

as

He
s o

22 =

X
X
X
X

■

X
X
X

• I t-

OS M

Ph of

AS .

8"g

X
X
X

M

W

4 5

C3 — '

-

5»

x

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X

a
o

>,

Sd
E o

— «
03

o

8

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

o

- "=

- a>
a>B

5
-r

10

2 c
o 2

c
rs

-

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

~P<?

»w

12

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

13

- a

~ as

£ J
a: o
|S
O

14

X

X
X
X

449

XV. — A Report on the Grayson! s Rulings presented by Mr. C. Beck
to the Royal Microscopical Society.

By E. J. Spitta.

{Read April 19, 1911.)

Some months ago the Council requested me to examine and report
upon two sets of rulings by Grayson — an inch divided into hun-
dredths and a millimetre with divisions of 0 ■ 25 — gifts to the Society
by Mr. Conrad Beck.

The examination presented many difficulties not anticipated at
the commencement, one being the selection of a suitable arrange-
ment that could not possibly shift or change in any way whilst in
use from day to day during the necessarily protracted observations.
Several hundreds of experimental measures extending over a some-
what lengthy period were made before the arrangement finally
adopted was perfected and accepted as satisfactory in all respects.
Then, again, owing to the fact that no standard inch or millimetre
scales were in existence, no comparisons with such standards could
be made, and only observations of a differential nature therefore
could be carried out. To make these measures as effective as pos-
sible, before settling down to obtain the final results, several
preliminary experiments were tried with different objectives and
oculars to ascertain what optical combination lent itself as most
suitable to the subject in hand ; and many suggestions and ideas
were discussed with Mr. Conrady, who very kindly associated him-
self with the work, and who is responsible for the reductions of all
the measures, so that the best possible information could be obtained
therefrom.

It may be well to point out here that, owing to the actual size
of the spaces, it was impossible to span (at least with a satisfactory
definition at the edges of the field) more than two intervals of the
scales on either side of the fixed thread of the screw micrometer
used, hence in a mathematical point of view only approximate
determinations of the progressive errors (about to be mentioned)
in the scale could be hoped for.

It" may now be at once mentioned that the probable error of
one single setting was found to be + 0 • 124 fi 2fioVoq *n- m tne
millimetre scale, and + 0 • 2 /* X2 500J5. in- in tne case ol tiie iuch >
but as in the final observations each interval was really measured
six times, the results were correspondingly more accurate, having
errors of ± 0-05 ^ s^oWo in- and ± °'08 P 3T2l5oo.in- respect-
ively, which compare very favourably with other published obser-
vations on scales of this type.

4;,0 Transactions of the Society.

The general results of the examination of the half of each of
the scales show that they are remarkably free from accidental
errors in division, which probably do not reach 1 /* anywhere,
and that they are therefore eminently fitted to become standard
scales. There is, however, a very systematic and progressive error
in the divisions of both scales (i.e. in the halves examined) which
could not be overlooked. It consists in the graduations becoming
wider and wider apart from the beginning of the scale in each case ;
and this error seems quite unmistakable, being far in excess of
any conceivable error of observation, a millimetre in one instance
or ^jj in. in the other, in the centre of their respective scales, being
on an average about 1/* (or ^ p.c.) longer than a millimetre or ^ in.
at the beginning.

The absolute value of at least one of the scales must also be
considerably in error, for from the mean of all the measures the
ratio of Grayson's millimetre to Grayson's inch was found to be : —

25-369 : 1
instead of being

25-400 : 1

which is the correct ratio, Grayson's ratio being wrong to the extent
of one part in 800.

It would appear, however, highly desirable that at least one of
these scales be sent to the National Physical Laboratory, when
they are ready to carry out such determinations, to be accurately
standardized — anyhow over its first half of graduations, which seems
sufficient for all useful purposes — after which it would be of great
value and an excellent addition to the resources of the Society.

451

XVI. — On some New Objectives and Eye-pieces by R. Winkel,

of Gottingen.

By Edward M. Nelson.

(Read March 15, 1911.)

Lately, a packet of objectives and eye-pieces by "Winkel, of
Gottingen, was sent to me by Messrs. Angus and Co. for examina-
tion, and as some points that are new to " microscopy " were founfl,
a description may be of interest.

First, Winkel divides both his object-glasses and eye-pieces into
three groups ; thus his objectives are achromatic, fluorite, and
apochromatic, and his eye-pieces Huyghenian, complanatic, and
compensating.*

The achromatic and fluorite objectives are of much interest, as
they are not more or less copies of the productions of others, but
have an individuality distinctly their own. To explain this it will
be necessary to give a little history of the modern objective. Before
the introduction of Jena glass the outstanding secondary spectrum
of the old English achromat consisted of claret, or port-red, and
apple-green colours. This was always looked for by experts, and
its presence was thought to denote perfect correction. About 1870
(or a year or so later), Tolles, in America, altered the correction, and
produced some very fine object-glasses with a flaring bright red, or
crimson spectrum. I well remember seeing a Podura scale shown
with one of these glasses, a very brilliant lens, and a strong diatom
resolver; the exclamation marks shone out like rubies, whereas
if they had been viewed through an English objective of that date
(Lister formula) the exclamation marks would have been seen with
a more purple tint, something like an amethyst.

About 1886, when Jena glass was introduced, an entirely new
set of phenomena appeared, pale glasses, and those which gave
decidedly bluish tints — which any expert of those days would have
unhesitatingly condemned — were found to be not only strong
diatom resolvers, but also to give sharp and bright pictures. For
a time, experts, until they had learnt the effect of the reduction of
the secondary spectrum by these new corrections, were all at sea,
and did not know where they were.

To-day, there is in my cabinet one of these Jena glass semi-
apochromats, which has such a violent purple secondary spectrum
that it can be seen even when a peacock-green glass is used, a more

* Winkel's Catalogue (English edition).

452 Transactions of the Society.

monochromatic l! aid screen being required to shut the blue part
of the purple oui ' * Vet this lens gives particularly sharp images,
and is a very strong diatom resolver. Now, however, Herr Winkel
has revived the American red corrections with Jena glasses. The
resull is excellent, for brighter, sharper, or, for their apertures,
mger resolving object-glasses will not be found. This red
correction is peculiarly suitable, because a peacock-green glass
.11 turns red info black, and so makes a strongly contrasted
image. When the Podura was first examined with the } of 0*85
N.A., for the moment it was difficult to exclude the idea that one
of the American red objectives was not on the nose-piece.

Leaving the achromats, we come to the fluorites.t These form
a beautifully corrected series of object-glasses — indeed, they might
appropriately be termed -| apochromats, so small is the outstand-
ing secondary colour ; what there is, is of the same red tint. These
glasses give exceptionally brilliant and sharp images. The 1 ' 8 mm.
fluorite oil-immersion gave an image that was only surpassed by a
very superior apochromat ; the 8 ■ 5 mm. is also a beautiful objective.
All these glasses are, as they ought to be, extremely sensitive to
tube-length, a very little amount either one way or another is
sufficient to make or mar the image ; the tube-length, be it noted,
is 170 mm., an increase of 10 mm. in the right direction, for which
we ought to be thankful. All the object-glasses were tested both
by daylight as well as by lamp-light, in order that their chromatic
conditions should be thoroughly explored.

Now, as to the eye-pieces, those of the compensating series are
of the usual over-corrected type, and are carefully adjusted for the
corrections of the object-glasses, a condition which, it is to be feared,
is in >t always satisfied. As regards the next series, a new word,
" complanat," has been coined to denote this new eye-piece. It is
of the Huyghenian type, but differs from it in being strictly achro-
matic, and in having a perfectly flat field. The examination of a
microphotograph of printed matter under a low power will at once
demonstrate the superiority of this form of eye-piece. Complanat
N". 5. compensating X 18 for the long tube, and compensating
X 12 for the short tube, have about the same power.

In conclusion, Winkel's high finish is still preserved ; never has
such beautifully finished brass and glass work been put into a
Microscope objective ; it is not only a pleasure to look through
it, but, to any one taking an interest in this kind of work, it is also
a pleasure to look at it. It is finish, and not polish, which is
meant. It has been said that Wansehaff (alau ! now no more) and
W inkel hold a record against the world for their magnificent brass
work.

* A delicate test for colour is the raphse of a Cherrvfield Rhomboides, when
mounted in balsam, quinidine, or styrax.

t Y\ inkel claims priority for the introduction of this class of objective.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

KELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally invertebrata and cryptogamia),

MICEOSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.

a. Embryologry. t

Mendelism.J — P. C Punnett has revised and enlarged his well-
known exposition of Mendelism. It is, indeed, almost a new book, with
all the good qualities of the previous editions on a larger canvas. Within
the last six years there have been many discoveries (in which the author
has shared) in Mendelian investigation, and these are illustrated in this
admirable book, the lucidity of which is past praise. We may refer to
the parts dealing with the " interaction of factors," the new view of
reversion, the re-interpretation of man's achievements in the origin of
domesticated varieties, the Mendelian theory of sex. Very welcome, we
should think, to many will be the chapter on " Intermediates," where
the author deals with some cases that do not seem to follow the Mende-
lian rule. The economic and human aspects of Mendelism are discussed
in the two final chapters.

Heredity and Evolution.§ — L. Plate has made a large number of
breeding-experiments with mice, which lead him to complete confidence
in the Mendelian theory of the purity of gametes. He proposes to
modify Bateson's " presence and absence " theory into a " Grundfaktor-
Supplement-Theorie." He maintains that Mendelism does not lessen
the importance of selection theory, and that the conception of deter-
minants is quite consistent with the transmission of acquired characters.
He distinguishes seven different modes of germinal variation and five
kinds of atavism, and gives a very interesting analysis of correlation.

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they
do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers
noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of
this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub-
lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are
either new or have not been previously described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly 60
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects.

X Mendelism. London : 1911, 3rd ed. pp. xiv. and 176 (6 pis. and 35 figs.).

§ Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 535-610 (1 pi. and 3 figs).

154 MMAKV OF OUBBENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Experimentally Induced Parthenogenesis in Toad.* — E. Bataillon
has succeeded in indacing segmentation in toads' eggs. A string of
egga is placid in a vessel with as little mucus as possible ; it is bathed
with blood ; then the eggs are finely punctured; segmentation results.
The blood of the frog will serve instead of that of the toad. If the
spermatozoa of Ranafwca be used there is amphimixis, but the develop-
ment is abortive, and does not reach gastrulation. The blood of
R fusca gives better results than the spermatozoa. The blood stimulus
"respects the specific nuclear combination"; the inappropriate amphi-
mixis disturbs it.

Artificial Parthenogenesis of Toad's Egg. f — E. Bataillon has
induced segmentation by injecting into the eggs some Mammalian
1 1 )od, or sperms, or extract of spleen, or carp blood, or extract of testis.
The " accelerating principle " introduced need not be specific ; the

utial conditions are puncture and the introduction of some foreign
cellular elements.

Artificial Parthenogenesis in Toad.}. — E. Bataillon maintains that
in the parthenogenetic development that follows puncture there is more
than a reaction to the wTound. The stylet must introduce some foreign
body ; even a leucocyte will serve, and the best results are obtained by
introducing some blood or the like which acts as an " accelerative and
regulative agent." But it is not anything specific that requires to be
introduced ; the blood of a fish will do just as well as the blood of a frog.

Number of Chromosomes in Parthenogenetically produced Larvae
of the Frog.§— A. Dehorne has carefully studied eight days' old larvae,
and finds that the number of the chromosomes in the somatic cells is
si\, which corresponds to half the normal number.

Plasmic Reduction in Spermatogenesis.!— M. Romieu calls atten-
tion to what he calls plasmatic reduction in the spermatogenesis of
Ascaris megalocephala. Apart from the chromatin-reduction of the
nucleus, there is a reduction of cytoplasm. It is this which effects the
true maturation of the spermatozoa.

Effects of One-sided Ovariotomy on Sex of Offspring. f — L. I)on-
caster and P. EL A. Marshall find that in the rat it is not true that ova
determining one sex are produced from one ovary, and those determining
the opposite sex from the other, for each rat, with one ovary completely
removed, produced young of both sexes. The " right and left ovary
hypothesis " is not true for the rat at least.

Origin of Sex.**— Sydney J. Hickson directs attention to the evolu-
tion of sex as it is illustrated in Protozoa. In Actinophrys two similar
individuals conjugate; in Coccidium there are ovum -like and
spermatozoon-like individuals which conjugate : in Paramecium and

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1120-2. \ Tom. cit., pp. 1271-3.
\ C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 562-4.
§ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1123-4.
II C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 412-14.
1 Jouxn. Genetics, i. (1910) pp. 70-2.
* Trans. Manchester Micr. Soc, 1910, pp. 34-45.

*»

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 455

Vorticella the distinction between somatoplasm and germplasm has
begun. The advantage of this is in allowing the somatic functions to
continue during conjugation. The relatively large size of ova is inter-
preted, in part, in connection with the need for a period of incubation.
The introduction of a sedentary habit may have abetted the dimorphism.

Fertility of Hybrids of American and European Bison. * — E.
Iwanoff reports from experiments made at the Zoological Park of
M. Falz-Fein, that the hybrids between Bison amerkanus and Bison
europeens are fertile. In the case of a male (Bison amerkanus 9 x
Bison europseus $ ) the bull would not serve, but one of the testes,
which was removed, showed normal spermatozoa in abundance. The
hybrid females of the same origin have already borne calves. This is
an interesting case, for the species concerned are very distinct.

State of Ovary in Hybrids of Goldfinch and Canary.! — A. Chapel-
lier points out that a female bird may be infertile in various degrees.
The ovary may produce no ova ; the ovary may produce eggs which are
not laid ; the eggs may be fertilizable or non-fertilizable. He has ex-
amined twenty-five hybrids between male goldfinch and female canary,
and found various degrees. Some had a rudimentary ovary ; others laid
eggs like those of the canary, but smaller. Between these extremes there
were inter-grades, e.g. ovaries with very small eggs. Only in about a
fourth of the cases did it come to egg-laying.

Webfoot Character in Pigeons.J — J- Lewis Bonhote corroborates
previous breeders in regarding the webbed character as a Mendelian
recessive, but the results of mating birds of different webbed strains gave
results difficult to reconcile with the Mendelian theory. Each strain by
itself breeds true according to Mendel's laws : the disturbing factor is
due to the intermixture of the two strains. He is driven back to the
suggestion that a factor composed of two parts (cryptomeres), one of
which is contained in each strain, causes the web to be suppressed or
concealed.

Action of X-rays on Developing Chick.§— J. F. Gaskell finds that
the action of X-rays is to lower the mitotic activity of growing tissues.
If this diminution is not too great, complete recovery occurs. If the
diminution is above a certain degree, recovery does not take place. The
critical dose, which just prevents recovery, varies with the stage of
development of the embryo, decreasing as the mitotic index decreases.
No other macroscopic or microscopic changes have been observed to take
place under the action of X-rays, either in the proportions or structure
of the various tissues.

Lymph-hearts of Turtles. || — F. A. Stromsten has studied the de-
velopment of the posterior lymph-hearts in the loggerhead turtle. They
are a pair of elliptical pulsating organs situated immediately below the
carapace, just behind the upper ends of the ilia. They drain the lymph-

♦ C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 584-6. f Tom. cit., pp. 328-9 (8 figs.).

+ Proc. Zool. Soc, 1911, pp. 14-19 (2 figs.).

§ Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 305-10.

|| Anat. Record, v. (1911) pp. 173-8 (3 figs.).

BUMMABY OF CURBENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

<;tviti.s and lymph-channels of the posterior extremities and pelvic
regions, and open into tributaries of the posterior renal advehent veins.
author finds that the intercellular mesenchymal spaces have an
important function in initiating the development of the posterior lymph-
hearts.

Occipital Region of Urodela.*— E. 8. Goodrich has studied the de-
velopment of this region in the head of Amblystoma. There are three

ipital segments. The first forms no muscle and disappears early;
the second forms a myotome divided into dorsal and ventral portions, of
which the former alone persists, fusing with the myotome next behind.
The myotome of the third segment persists dorsal ly ; that of the first
trunk-segment combines- with it to form the temporal longitudinal muscle
supplied in the adult by the first spinal nerve. The glossopharyngeal
nerve belongs to the first metaotic segment, and has no ventral root.
To the second segment belongs the vagus root, with which seem to be
combined the ganglia of the next two nerves. No ventral root was
found in the second segment, but a ventral root occurs in the last meta-
otic segment in early stages of development. The first spinal issues from
between the skull and first neural arch as a ventral root only ; it joins
the second spinal to form the hypoglossal nerve supplying muscles derived
from ventral outgrowths of the second, third, and fourth myotomes.
The basilar plate of the skull is formed from a backward growth of the
trabecule meeting a forward growth of the base of the occipital arches.
It fuses with the auditory capsules and with the praeoccipital arches de-
veloped in the septum between the first and second myotomes. The
occipital arches arise in the septum between the second and third myo-
tomes. There is no evidence of the disappearance of segments behind
the vagus, and no valid objection to the view that the hind limit of the
skull may shift backwards or forwards in the course of phylogeny. At
the same time, there is no reason to suppose that the ancestors of the
Amphibia had more than three occipital segments, when the occipital
condyles became clearly defined.

Ovarian Ovum of Proteus.j — Max Jorgensen gives a detailed and
beautifully illustrated account of the growth of the ovarian ovum in
Proteus anguineus, describing all the changes in the nucleus and in the
cytoplasm. Among the points discussed at length the following may be
noticed : the share of the chromidium in the reconstruction of the
chromatin after it has been " pulverized " in the second stage of growth ;
the formation of the curious " lamp-brush " chromosomes ; the continuity
of the chromosomes ; the use of the nucleoli (probably reservoirs for
products of metabolism and furnishing ferments useful in plasm-growth
and yolk-formation) ; the conditions of growth in the ovum and of yolk-
formation.

Development of Gonads in Frog.}— Sergius Kuschakewitsch gives a
v. tv welcome detailed account of the development of ovary and testis in
Rana esculenta, contrasting the two at all stages. There appears to be a

* Proc. Zool. Soc, i. (1911) pp. 101-20 (23 figs.).

1 Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 439-634 (23 pis.).

; Op. cit., ii. (1910) pp. 61-224 (11 pis. and 13 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 457

very noteworthy plasticity in the details of development, which the author
correlates in part with the locality from which the material came, and in
part with the degree of ripeness of the fertilized ova. As Richard
Hertwig has shown, over-ripe eggs produce a large preponderance of
males, and the author was able to raise the percentage to one hundred.
The old difficulty of a possibly differential mortality seems to have been
overcome.

Development of Head in Hypogeophis.* — Harry Marcus describes
the development of the occipital region, of the eye-muscles and their
nerves, of the dorsal nerves and their ganglia, of the sympathetic and
the sinus cephalicus. In interpreting the architecture of the head, which
has a minimum of nine somites, he deals with the various sets of data
derived from a study of neuromeres, mesomeres, dennatoiiirivs, and
branchiomeres. He condenses his results, somewhat unwillingly, in a
provisional synoptic table of the various segments.

Development and Evolution of Lungs. f — M. Makusckok discusses
the various theories : (1) that the lungs of Tetrapoda are derivable from
the swim-bladder of fishes ; (2) that they are organs sui generis, quite
independent of swim-bladder ; and (3) that they are derivable from the
posterior gill-pouches.

He gives an account of what he has observed in the newt. The
primordia are from the first paired and bilaterally symmetrical ; they
appear somewhat late, and not before the fifth pair of oesophageal
pouches ; they present for a time a certain analogy to the fifth pair of
pouches. A number of details are recorded which may have a phylo-
genetic significance.

Evolution-centres. J — Th. Arldt discusses critically the difficult
question of deciding as to the original home and headquarters of a
group. Among the positive criteria of importance he notes the occur-
rence of the oldest fossil form, of the most primitive fossil form, of the
majority of fossil forms, of widely distributed forms as compared with
local occurrence elsewhere, of primitive living forms ; and so on.

b. Histology.

Trophospongia and Chromidia.§ — H. Erhard has studied the so-
called " trophospongia " in the cells of the "bile-duct" of the snail and
in the epididymis of the white mouse. He makes a point of showing
that what Holmgren described as " trophospongia " should be called
chromidia. In the case of the epididymis he brings forward strong
evidence that it is by the activity of the chromidia in the cytoplasm
that the secreted substances are formed.

Study of Chromosomes in Salamander. || — Karl Camillo Schneider
discusses the genesis of chromosomes in the larval salamander. Each

* Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 373-462 (2 pis. and 39 figs.),
t Anat. Anzeig., xxxix. (1911) pp. 1-13 (6 figs.).
J Arch. Natur., lxxvii. (1911) pp. 211-31.
§ Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 133-66 (2 pis.).
|| Tom. cit., pp. 213-32 (3 pis.).

-l.-.N MVMAJiV Of I 1 RRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

chromosdme of the prophase is bivalent, showing two spirally coiled
« elementary Btrncturea " or - mitea," each of which is the starting-point
of a daughter-chromosome. He follows their history, and offers a strong
corroboration of Boveri's theory of the individuality of the chromosomes.

Nuclear Budding in Tumour-cells.*— W. T. Howard finds that in
certain depressed cells, usually giant cells, of some tumours there occurs
a Bpecial type of amitosis— a process of nuclear budding. It represents
-ion on the part of these cells to a primitive type of nuclear and
.til-division common among certain Protozoa, e.g. Podophrya, It affords
a ready and simple means of cell regulation and of rapid division and
multiplication among such cells. The author suggests that the degener-
ation and extrusion of nuclear buds followed by mitosis of the mother-
nucleus in tumour-cells is, in principle, comparable to the maturation
division of egg-cells.

Physical Nature of Neuroplasm.! — N. A. Barbieri has come to the
conclusion that the neuroplasm in the nerve-cells and nerve-fibres is
mobile and fluid. It can be emptied out by compression. Even the
extravasated neuroplasm will take on a fibrillar structure if treated with
alcohol or formol and stained, but this is an artificial result. Indeed, all
the appearances produced by fixatives are artefacts, according to the
author.

Union of Muscle-fibre and Tendinous-fibre.^— E. Retterer and A.
Lelievre conclude that there is no special substance, neither sarcolemma
nor cement, uniting the muscular-fibre to the tendinous-fibre. At the
level of the junction of the two kinds of fibres the dark discs disappear,
and the clear bands are continued directly into the substance of the
tendon.

Involution of Bursa Fabricii.§— J. Jolly gives a precise account of
the involution or degeneration of this interesting transitory organ. The
essential point is the gradual disappearance of the lymphocytes and the
replacement of the lymphoid tissue by fibrous tissue. The organ becomes
hard, and there is sometimes an accidental necrosis.

Epidermic Fibrils in Chick. ||— Jean Firket describes the occurrence
of cells quite full of fibrils in certain parts of the epidermis of the chick,
namely, in the primordia of the beak and the feathers. Similar epidermic
fibres have been described before, but the author has studied their
development, and finds that they are formed at the expense of the
'•liondriosomes of the embryonic cells.

Innervation of Heart in Reptiles and Batrachians.H— M. Fedele
has Btudied this in Lacerta muralis, Elaphis quadrilineatus, Zamenis
viridiflavus, and in newts, frogs, and toads. He describes the nerve

* Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 1-18 (3 pis.).

f I omptes Rendu?, clii. (1911) pp. 1267-9 (lfig.).

; I .R Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 474-6. || Tom. cit., pp. 564-7.

§ Anat. Auzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 537-49 (3 figs.).

i Atti R. Accad. Sci. Fis. Napoli, 1910, pp. 1-34 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 459

branches and the fundamental plexuses, the ganglia and their position,
the innervation of the truncus arteriosus in Reptiles, the secondary
plexuses and networks, the networks surrounding the muscular elements,
and the intimate innervation of the myocardium.

C. General.

Morphology of the Vertebrates.* — L. Vialleton has produced an
interesting introduction to the study of the morphology of the Verte-
brata, which has some new features. It begins with the fundamental
embryological data as to the germinal layers, and the establishment of
the main Vertebrate characters. The second section deals with each
system of the body in turn, discussing it from the comparative and from
the embryological point of view. Then follows a systematic survey of
the Vertebrate phylum and a score of careful schemata summing up the
facts of distribution in time, and indicating probable affinities. The
concluding section deals with the evolution of Vertebrates analytically
in the light of palasontological and embryological data.

Pigmentation of the Nervous Lobe of the Hypophysis. ] — Ch.
Livon and Peyron find that neuroglial elements in the neuro-hypophysis
elaborate pigment-granules at the expense of the products of the
glandular lobe. The colloid substance made by the glandular lobe may
pass directly into the vessels of the glandular lobe or into those of the
nervous lobe. The pigment is distinct from ferric pigments and lipo-
chromes, but it is uncertain whether it should be regarded as a product
of assimilation or of dis-assimilation.

Pelvic Bones of some Cetacea.J — Einar Lonnberg describes and
figures a number of cases — Baleena austral is, Balsenoptera quoyi, B.
intermedia, Physeter catodon, and Globicephalus melas. The first of
these shows ilium, ischium, and pubis, a large femur, the remains of an
acetabular cavity, and a rudiment of a tibia. In connexion with the
Caa'ing whale, the author gives an interesting sketch showing how the
crura penis are attached to the pelvic rudiment by means of a capsule
with a network of connective tissue.

Natural Immunity of White Mice to Trypanosoma lewisi. § —
D. Roudsky finds that inoculations of white mice with this trypanosome
are ineffective. There is a vigorous leucocytosis and a very exceptional
transient presence of trypanosomes in the circulation.

Physiology of Sleep. || — R. Legendre and H. Pieron have made
experiments, extending over many years, on the results of prolonged
enforced insomnia in dogs. They conclude that after prolonged
insomnia, the cerebral plasma, the blood, and the cephalo-rachidian
fluid have a hypnotoxic property, which disappears on heating to 65°.
Injection into another animal provokes strong somnolence and cellular
changes in the brain.

* Elements de Morphologie des Vertebres. Paris (1911) xiv. and 790 pp.
(304 figs.). f C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 730-2.

X Archiv Zool., vii. (1911) No. 10, pp. 1-15 (12 figs.).
§ C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 693-4.
|| Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 45G-8.

It, 0 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Hamapoietic Function of Spleen in Embryo Bird. *— J. Jolly
finds in the embryo of the fowl convincing evidence of the formation
of both granular leucocytes and red blood corpuscles. In the embryos
of the duct the formation of granular leucocytes was also observed.

Function of Bursa Fabricii.t— J. Jolly finds in the embryo chick
distinct evidence of the hsemapoietic function of this organ. During
the second half of incubation, it gives rise to lymphocytes in its follicles,
and also in its connective tissue to granular leucocytes and white blood
corpuscles. Thus, like the spleen, it has to some extent and for some
time, the same function as the osseous medulla.

Notes on the Robber Frog.}— John K. Strecker, jun., discusses
LUhodyies latrans, a peculiar and little known Batrachian of Texas. It
is very terrestrial, and thoroughly nocturnal except at the breeding
season, which is very early in the year (February). It presents a rather
unusual appearance" for a frog, on account of its proportions and its
peculiar method of elevating the body. As a rule it retreats into holes
and fissures on the slightest alarm. Its voice is a short dog-like bark,
ending in a metallic ring.

Heart of Lungless Urodela.§ — E. G. Dehaut has studied the state
of the heart in the species of Euproctus, which inhabit the mountains
of Corsica and Sardinia, and are entirely lungless. In other cases it
has been reported that lungless Urodela have a rudimentary left auricle,
or have the two auricles united by the disappearance of the auricular
septum. But in E. rusconii, at least, Dehaut finds that the two auricles,
which are situated to the left of the ventricle, are very distinct.

Fossil Lepidosirenidae.|| — Ernst Stromer reports from the Lower
Oligocene of Egypt the occurrence of teeth belonging to Protopterus
off. sethiopicus Heckel, to Protopterus off. annectens Owen, to Lepidosiren
aff. paradom Natterer, and to Protopterus libycus sp. n., which helps to
link the two genera. He discusses the dentition of recent Lepido-
sirenidae, and the distribution and phylogeny of the Dipnoan stock.

Colour-change in Fishes.^f — Karl von Frisch has made experiments
with trout and minnow as to the relation of the pigment-cells to the
nervous system. As Pouchet showed long ago, the sympathetic nervous

tern is immediately concerned. The author has shown that the
nerve-fibres which control the pigment-cells pass out at a precise spot
from the spinal cord into the sympathetic, and pass with it forwards
and backwards. But he has gone further. He has succeeded in showing
that there is in the anterior end of the medulla a special centre whose
stimulus brings on a lighter colour — i.e. contraction of the chromato-
phores.

* C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 259-61. t Tom. cit., pp. 493-500.

\ Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, xix. (1910) pp. 73-82.
§ C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 271-2.
| Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 611-24 (1 p\).
f Op. cit., iii. (l'JIO) pp. 15-28 (2 pis. and 3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY', ETC. 461

Swim-bladder of Teleosts.* — II. C. Tracy finds that the Clupeoid
swim-bladder is like that of the carp : it consists of a posterior portion
which represents the primitive swim-bladder, and an anterior secondary
outgrowth. That of Fundidas and Menidia is like that in Esox, but
without pneumatic duct.

The epithelial lining is derived from the endoderm of the oesophagus ;
the splanchnic mesoderm contributes the inner and middle layers of the
Avail ; the outer connective tissue layers originate from the somatic;
mesenchyme of the neighbouring body region ; the longitudinal bands
of striated muscle in the swim-bladder of Opsanus arise from the myo-
tome of the first somite and are innervated by a branch of the first
spinal nerve.

In the more primitive swim-bladders the pneumatic duct opens into
the anterior end ; in the derived types the embryonic pneumatic duct
opens into the posterior end. The posterior chamber in Opsanus, Sipho-
stoma, Tautoglabrus and Tautoga develops directly from the embryonic
pneumatic duct.

The pneumatic duct in the eel, the posterior chamber in Opsanus,
etc., and the oval in the highest type of swim-bladder are probably to
be regarded as homologous structures, produced as the result of the
progressive reduction of the pneumatic duct and the development of a
rete mirabile.

In the primitive swim-bladders the epithelial lining is undifferen-
tiated ; in the eel, the epithelium has become columnar and is thrown
up into simple folds all over the internal surface. The red gland in the
higher types results from a progressive increase in the complexity of the
folding, accompanied by a concentration of the folds in a restricted area.

Tunicata.

Tenacity of Life in Ciona intestinalis.f — G. Daumezon has found
it possible to keep this hardy Ascidian in good condition in artificial
sea-water. His experiments led him to discover evidence of extraordi-
nary tenacity of life. They are vigorous for hours at 20-2:5° C, and
they survived cold till the medium froze. In a solution of saccharose
of the optimum density the animals showed the heart beating for several
hours. They can live out of water for hours, till they lose the water
they contain.

INVERTEBRATA.

Mollusca.

Marine Molluscs of Clare Island.! — Nathaniel Colgan deals with
21G species from this area, which has recently been the subject of a
detailed regional survey. He discusses the somewhat negative charac-
teristics of the Clare Island marine molluscan fauna and compares it
with that of Dublin Bay. The western area has 5 boreal species to
31 austral ; the eastern or Dublin area has 12 boreals to 37 australs.

* Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. G38-49 (10 figs.).

t C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 721-3.

% Proc. R. Irish Acad., xxvi. (1911) Clare Island Survey, pt. 22, pp. 1-36.

Aug. 16th, 1911 2 h

462 sr.MMAKY 01 I UBBENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

attention is directed to the abundance of two interesting Ascoglossans
or dose allies of the Nudibranchs, Hermm dendrtitca and Elysva vindts,
and of I 'erithium reticulatum and C.perversum.

y. Gastropoda.

Beating of the Heart in Hibernating Snail.*— Arnold Lang has
studied this in Helixpomatia, in most cases by making a window in the
.shell above the heart and putting in a little pane of glass or the like.
\s the temperature falls the number of beats decreases : the two curves
are almosl parallel. There was 1 beat per minute at -06° C. ; 2-36
at + 2 ■ 65° ; 5 • 7") at 5 ■ 3° ; 8 ■ 26 at 7 • 7° ; and so on. There is a greatly
reduced power of reaction as the winter sets in with severity. Yet after
persisted low temperature the heart was observed beating slowly at
even - 3 C.

Reduction in the Spermatogenesis of the Snail.t— A. Bolles Lee
confirms his previous conclusion that there is a conjugation of chromo-
somes in the course of spermatogenesis. It occurs in the auxocyte stage,
I nit it remains uncertain whether it is a phase of the process of numerical
reduction of chromosomes.

Abnormality in Snail.t — 6. Q u in taret describes a specimen of Helix
aspersa with a supplementary penis which contained spermatophores. A
double penis lias been described by Rouzaud in Bidimus detritus and
some other forms, but in these there was but oue aperture, whereas in
the monstrosity described there are two distinct apertures. There has
Wren a longitudinal splitting of the penial primordium.

8. Lamellibranchiata.

Influence of Radium on the Development of Pholas Candida. §— Jan
Tnr finds that fertilized ova, beginning to develop, were not affected by
the influence of radium-bromide as regards segmentation, gastrulation, or
the formation of the veliger larva. In the larval stage, however, there

an to be a degeneration and discharge of superficial epithelial cells.
On the other hand, ova exposed to the radio-active influence for 6 to
24 hours, before fertilization, showed, instead of the unequal, a perfectly
equal segmentation. The gastrulation was none the less by epibole, as
usual.

Notes on Fresh-water Mussels. || — W. Israel points out that two
rings are sometimes made in one year. In the Danube the young occur
in the gill-chamber in April to June, and also in October to December
in Anodonta piscinalis, in October to November in Pseudanodonta com-
planata, in May and June in Unio pictorum, in December and January
in U. tumidus, and in August in U. consentaneus.

* Festschrift Richard Hertwig, iii. (1910) pp. 1-14 (5 pis.).

t La ( lellule, xxvii. (1910) pp. 55-74 (1 pi.).

j C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 55-56. § Tom. cit., pp. 679-81.

i ichtsbl. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., xliii. (1911) pp. 10-17. See also Zool.
Zentralbl., xviii. (1911) p. 216.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 4<i3

Avicula and Gorgonid Association.* — T. Southwell reports finding,
off Ceylon, quantities of yellow-brown Leptogorgia ltd/cent with its
branches thickly encrusted with a yellow-brown Avicula. The bivalves
merge into the general habit and appearance of the Gorgonid, obtaining
in all probability a considerable measure of immunity from enemies
through this resemblance to a spicular indigestible organism.

Incubation of Cyclas Embryos.f — E. Poyarkoff has studied the
incubation of the embryos of Sphoerium corneum. They develop in sacs
between the two lamellae of the inner gill-plate, or between the lamella
and the mantle. The sacs are described in detail ; they seem to be for
the most part mesodermic in origin and due to leucocytes. Indeed, the
formation of the incubatory sac may be compared to an inflammatory
process. The ectodermic epithelium disintegrates, and its regeneration
is described.

Arthropoda.

«• Insecta.

Rhythms in Termite Communities.^ — E. A. Andrews and A. R.
Middleton have studied the common termite at Montego Bay, Jamaica,
counting the numbers running in and out of the nest hour after hour.
They show that the termites do actually work at all times of the day and
night, and that there are rhythms in the activities of the entire com-
munity. In one case the number of termites going into the nest each
hour varied from 1702 between 1 and 2 p.m. to 8100 between 2 and
3 a.m., while in the same case the numbers going out of the nest were
1194 between noon and 1 p.m., and 6820 between 1 and 2 a.m.

Insects as Disseminators of Ergot. § — L.Mercier has found evidence
that Sciara thomse distributes the conidia of the Claviceps that causes
" ergot " in rye-grass. The conidia do not seem to be affected in the
food-canal of the fly, and there are also some on the hairs of the body.

Dissemination of Disease by Stomoxys calcitrans.|| — A. Schuberg
and Ph. Kuhn have proved experimentally that this common fly can
infect animals with Trypanosomes and SpirochaBts. It is not, of course,
the normal host of the disease germs experimented with, but it may
share in the dissemination of these and of others.

Roumanian Mosquitos.^f — N. Leon gives an account of the swarms
of mosquitos which infest the marshes by the shores of the Danube, and
calls attention to the beneficial work of numerous spiders in checking
their increase a little. He reports Anopheles maculipennis,A. bif ureal i/s,
Myzorhynchus pseudopictus, Oulex pipiens, C.fusculus, Theobaldia nemor-
osa, and Tseniorhynchus richardii.

East Indian Chironomidae.** — J. J. Kieffer describes numerous new
species in the genera Ceratopogon, Cidicoides, Palpomyia, Bezzia, Calyplo-

* Ceylon Marine Biological Keports, v. (1911) p. 207.

t Arch. Zool. Exper., v. (1910) Notes ot Revue, No. 5, pp. exxv.-exxxviii. (7 figs.).
J Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ, No. 2 (1911) pp. 26-34 (2 figs.).
§ C.R. Soc. Biol. lxx. (1911) pp. 300-2.
|| Arbeit, k. Gesundheitsamte, xxxi. (1911) pp. 377-93.
\ Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lvii. (1910) pp. 148-54.
•* Mem. Indian Museum, ii. No. 4 (1910) pp. 181-242 (4 pis.).

2 H 2

404 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

pogon g.n., Macropeza, Isoplastus, Procladius, Tanypw, Chironomus,
Tanytarsus, and Gonocladius g.n.

Chromidia in Cells of Muscidse.* — M. Popoff has studied the for-
mation of chromidia by the nucleus in the cytoplasm of fat cells, oenocytes,
and pericardia] cells in Muscidae. They correspond to ergastoplasm, mito-
chondria, chondriomites, chondriokonts, pseudochromoses, and "neben-
kern *' in glandular cells and sex-cells. The distribution of the chromidia
in the cytoplasm has a definite relation to function, e.g. to diffusion-
currents. As regards chromidia, there is a close resemblance between
the processes of glandular secretion and those associated with the
accumulation of reserves in germ-cells.

Digestion in Wood-eating Caterpillars. f — P. Portier has studied
the curious larva of Nonagria typhse, \\hich bores in the stem of Typha
latifolia. The glandular area in the intestine is very restricted, and no
ferment capable of dissolving cellulose could be found. But there are
very abundant fusiform "pseudo-bacteria," probably minute moulds,
which work at the vegetable tissue, pass through the walls of the gut,
and are engulfed by leucocytes. In short, the micro-organisms which
break down the woody tissue form the main food of the caterpillar.

Acephalous Lepidoptera.J — A. Conte and 0. Vaney ligatured cater-
pillars (of Bonibyx mori, C'heloma caja, and Lymantria dispar) at the
junction of head and thorax, and after the head was dry cut it off. The
caterpillars did not seem much affected by the decapitation, but they
moved more slowly. Chrysalids were formed, but only in the case of
L. dispar was an imago developed. It was normal except in the absence
of a head. This shows that the cephalic ganglia are not necessary for
the normal development of the trunk.

Grape Moths. § — Schwangart gives an account of the two Tortricidas
(Conchylis arribiguella Hiibn., and Polychrosis butrana Schiff), whose
caterpillars do so much damage in the vineyards. In the Pfalz in 1906
the loss was estimated at six millions of marks. He discusses the life-
history and habits, the natural enemies, the various chemical, mechanical
and physical modes of dealing with attacks, and in particular the infection
with a pathogenic mould, a species of Cordyceps.

Photogenic Organs of Lampyridae.||— F. A. McDermott and 0. U-.
Crane have studied the structure of these organs in Phot in us pyralis,
P. consanguineus, and Photuris pennsylvankus, and find that it is practic-
ally the same in the three, and very similar to that previously described
in other Larnpyridae. There are two distinct layers, the inner one
white and opaque, and serving as a reflector (possibly also protective to
the insect itself), the outer one yellowish and translucent, and containing
the actual photogenic mechanism. The organs are penetrated by in-
numerable trachea ; these connect near the spiracle with the tracheae,
which supply other organs, and very closely resemble these ordinary

* Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 19-48 (3 pis. and 2 figs.).

t C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 702-4.

X Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 404-6.

§ Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 4G3-534 (3 pis.).

|| Amer. Nat., xlv. (1911) pp. 306-13 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 405

trachea?. The view that the photogenic process is an oxidation is borne
out by the structure of the photogenic organs.

Life-history of Schlechtendalia chinensis.*— C. Sasaki has cleared
up most of the life-history of this Aphis, which produces galls in Japan
and China on Rhus semi-alata. The galls are used for dyeing and
tanning, and the powder of the dried galls was formerly employed by
Japanese women for blackening the teeth. Sasaki has succeeded in find-
ing the wingless mother insect (the fundatrix), which produces numerous
young ones parthenogenetically and viviparously. These produce galls of
various shapes, and after more viviparous wingless females have come and
gone, there are winged females wdiich lay eggs containing well-advanced
embryos that soon hatch out. No males have been met with.

Degenerate Cockroach. f— F. II. Gravely describes Alluaiidella hima-
layensis sp. n., a new degenerate Umbia-like cockroach with very simple
venation. The only other species known is A. cavernicola from German
East Africa, and Gardax willeyi is a related form with similar simplicity
of venation. Only males of the three forms have been found.

Mallophaga from Southern Birds. J — L. G. Neumann records from
albatroses of the Southern Ocean — Lipeurus hyalinus sp. n. and two
other species, and Taschenbergius brevis (Dufour). From Maccormick's
Skua, Megahstris maccormicJci, there was obtained Lipeurus concinnus
Kellogg and Chapman, not previously recorded from this bird nor in the
Antarctic. It was the only representative of the bird-lice actually found
in the Antarctic region, wdiere they seem to be exceedingly rare, but
another was seen alive on the Emperor Penguin.

Larva of Mantispa.§ — R. T. Lewis contrasts the larva of Mantispa
(Neuroptera) with the young stages of Mantis (Orthoptera). The latter
are, in some cases at least, like miniatures of the adult except in the
absence of wings. But the larvae of Mantispa bear no resemblance to
the perfect insect and illustrate hyper-metamorphosis. The first larval
stage is described.

Monograph on Embidse.||— H. A. Krauss deals with these somewhat
earwig-like insects, with two-jointed cerci instead of forceps. They
represent an old stock among the more primitive insects. The author
attaches them to the Orthoptera, but they are as independent an order as
earwigs or as termites. Four families and eleven genera are now recog-
nized. An account is given of the structure, habits, and distribution.

Blattidae in Amber.H" — R. Shelford reports on R. Klebs's fine
collection of Blattidae in amber (Lower Oligocene). He deals with
twenty-four species in nine genera, but they present no details of
structure or form which can be regarded as peculiarly primitive and
archaic. A comparison of the amber-enclosed Blattidae with the paucity
of species occurring in Northern Europe at the present day is sufficiently

* Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 241-52 (2 pis.),
t Records Indian Museum, v. (1910) pp. 307-1 L (1 pi. and 1 fig.).
X Rep. British Antarctic Exped., 1907-9, ii. (1911) pt. 3, pp. 19-22 (1 pi.).
§ Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, xi. (1911) pp. 213-16.
|| Zoologica, xxiii. (1911) Heft 60, pp. 1-78 (5 pis. and 7 figs.).
«f Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxx. (1910) pp. 336-55 (2 pis.).

1:66 SUMMARY OF CUBRBNT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

indicative of the profound change of climate that has ensued within
geologically recent times. The exquisite preservation of the specimen
leads the author to suggest that some method should be devised by
enshrining in a similar way in balsam or other resin the type-specimens
of recent species of insects.

New Palaeozoic Insects.* — Anton Handlirsch describes numerous
new genera, chiefly Blattoid in character, and establishes a new order
Sypharopteroidea for Sypharoptera pneuma g. et sp. n. This fossil some-
what resembles certain Megasecoptera, and has also some resemblance to
Ephemeroidea. But it cannot be placed in any known order, and
evidently represents an offshoot of the Palaeodictyoptera without any
extant descendants.

Injurious Insects.f — E. P. Felt deals with a large number of injurious
insects — codling moth, juniper webworm, large aphid spruce ball, ash
psylla, and so on. He gives a description of one of the gall-midges,
Miastor americana Felt, and the remarkable pedogenesis that is exhibited.

7- Prototracheata.

Jamaica Peripatus. J — B. A. Andrews discusses the distribution of
Peripatus in Jamaica. There seem to be two species— Peripatus jamai-
censis Cockerell and Grobhamand P.juliformis var. su-ainsonse Cockerell.
" While apparently only some 120 specimens of Peripatus have ever been
seen in Jamaica, and all but eight or so of these from the region of
Bath, it may well be that Peripatus exists in relatively large numbers
throughout the entire length of Jamaica wherever the conditions are not
inimical, since its nocturnal habits and slow moving, concealed existence,
would make it difficult to observe, even if it did not prefer the chaos of
irregular stones underlying the dense growths of the forests."

5. Arachnida.

Development of Tetrapneumones.§ — Ludmila and Wladimir Schim-
kewitsch have studied the early stages in the development of Ischiiocolus,
one of the Tetrapneumones. Their results differ considerably from those
of Kautzsch. There is on the germinal disc a gastral depression which
recalls in its shape that of Pedipalpi rather than that of Dipneumones.
In the inner layer of cells in the blastoderm there is a very early differ-
entiation of endoderm cells. The yolk-cells are formed by an insinuation
of blastoderm cells, by contributions from the mesoderm cells of the
cumulus, and by contributions from the mesoderm of the germinal disc.
In the formation of segments, the head-lobe gives rise to that bearing
the chelicerse, and still earlier (according to Kautzsch) to that bearing
the pedipalps.

In a subsequent paper|| the formation of the body is discussed. In
general the development of Ischnocolus agrees with that of the older

* Amer. Journ. Sci., xxxi. (1911) pp. 353-77 (32 figs.).

t New York State Museum, Bull. 147 (1911) pp. 1-180 (35 pis.).

\ Johns Hopkins Univ. Circular, No. 2 (1911) pp. 51-5.

§ Bull. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersbourg, vi. (1911) pp. 637-54 (2 pis. and 22 figs.).

|| Op. cit., ix. (1911) pp. G85-706 (1 pi. and 24 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, KTC. 467

Dipneumoues such as Pholcus, e.g. in the bending of the caudal lobe
forwards. A tubercle on the internal surface of the pedipalps and limbs
recalls the masticating plates in Limning, (Jigantostraca, and Trilobites.
The complicated dorso-lateral plate, the origin of phagocytes, and other
subjects are discussed. The first cuticular envelope of the embryo differs
markedly from subsequent cuticles ; the chelicerae have chelre and the
other cephalothoracic limbs have distinct masticatory plates, whereas
the larva has no chehe and few setse. The ganglia in the cephalothorax,
which are described at length, show distinct internal cavities. The
development of the gut is described. The coxal gland opens behind the
first pair of appendages.

Carboniferous Arachnida.* — R. I. Pocock has made an important
contribution to the study of the Carboniferous Arachnida. He deals
with thirty-three forms, some of which are of much morphological inte-
rest. Thus, a new scorpion, named Eobuthus holti, has bilobed over-
lapping plates on the fourth, fifth, and sixth somites of the abdomen,
which have a general resemblance to the gill-bearing appendages in the
same segments in the king-crab.

Male Reproductive Organs of Chelifer and Chernss.t — J. P.
Schtschelkanowzew describes the internal male organs and the external
genitalia in the males of these two types, and discusses the systematic
position of the Ghelonethi in the system of Arachnids. His general
conclusion is that they are most nearly related to the sub-order Uro-
tricha (Holopeltidia). Among the many interesting facts brought out
in the memoir is the absence of a tail in the ripe spermatozoa.

Sudanese Pycnogonids.J — G. H. Carpenter describes Nymphon
maculatum sp.n., marked from other species by the very elongate neck
and body, together with the short abdomen, excessively long second
coxal segment, and well-developed auxiliary claws ; and Pallenopsis
crosslandi sp.n., a very interesting species of a remarkable genus. There
are curious finger-like processes on the first tibial segment. These,
and indeed the legs generally, are beset with the prominent openings
of numerous cuticular glands, provided at the edge of the orifice with
small sharp spines. The elongate spines on the thigh and the first
tibial segment are highly denticulate. Another noteworthy feature is
the great length of the accessory claws, nearly equalling the principal
claw. The variation of this character in the genus Pallenopsis is
remarkable and instructive.

New Decapod Pycnogonid.§— E. L. Bouvier describes Pentapyrnon
geayi sp.n. from off the coast of French Guiana. It has five pairs of
limbs — the first decapod Pycnogonid found outside the Antarctic region.
The new form is in several ways very interesting. Thus Bouvier points

* Monograph of the Terrestrial Carboniferous Arachnida of Great Britain.
Paloeontographical Soc. (1911) 84 pp. (3 pis. and 42 figs.).

t Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 1-38 (1 pi. and 5 figs.).
j Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxi. (1910) pp. 256-8 (1 pi.).
§ Coniptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 491-4.

468 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING. TO

oui that its Biirface has a reticulate pattern, while that of P. charcoti is
shagreen-like. Thus the two types of integumentary pattern which are
found in Pycnogonum occur also in the primitive Pentapycnon.

New Pentastomid.* — A. E. Shipley describes Porocephalus kachu-
gensis sp.n. from the liver of a tortoise (Kachuga lineata), and commu-
nicates some notes on three other species, and on Linguatula subtriqitetra
Diesing, of which a good figure is given showing the characteristic
lateral flaps or flanges, and the papillae about the mouth.

Notes on Tardigrada.f — James Murray has written a supplement
to a short introduction to Tardigrada, which he published in 1(.)<>7. He
d.als with additional gew^rA—Tetrakentron Cuenot, Halcchiniscus Rich-
ters, Batillipes Richters, and Orcella Murray. The relationships of the
ten known genera are discussed, and a key is given. At present the
genera cannot be put into series. Most of them have some degree of
resemblance to the well-known and extensive genus Echiniscus. Mil-
nesium and Macrobiotus, with its dependent Diphascon, are furthest
removed. All the marine genera, and Orcella, have the head-processes
traceable to modifications of the type of Echiniscus.

*• Crustacea.

Larval Stages of Decapods.} — H. C. Williamson describes the
zoere of three species of Portimus, of Hi/as araneus, Eupaguras bern-
hardus, Galathea dispersa, Crangon trispinosus, and Cancer pagurus.
He directs attention to the pigmentation which affords an important
aid to specific identification. " The Zoeas are usually well supplied with
pigment, and, when alive, may in some cases be separated into species
by the naked eye. The pigmentation is specific, and remains constant
through all the zoasa and megalops stages."

Californian Crabs.§ — F. W. Weymouth gives a synopsis with fine
photographs of the Brachyura of Montery Bay, California. He deals
with fifty-two species, including Dromidia segnipes sp.n.

New and Rare Cumacea.|] — W. T. Caiman describes twenty-nine
species of Nannastacidaj and Diastylidas from the Copenhagen Museum.
All except two are regarded as new, and three new genera — Schizotrema,
Gynodiastylis, and Colnrostylis—are established. The new genera do
not perceptibly extend the group towards any of the adjacent orders of
the Malacostraca. " The Cumacea still remain a sharply circumscribed
group, and although it is as certain as anything of the sort can well be
thai they have been derived from a Mysidacean-like ancestral form, and
that their line of descent travelled for some little way along with that
of the Tanaidacea and Isopoda (but not, probably, with that of the
Amphipoda), none of the intermediate links appear to have survived.

* Parasitology, iii. (1910) pp. 275-8 (1 pi.).

t Journ. Quekctt Micr. Club, xi. (1911) pp. 181-98 (1 pi.).

X Fisheries Scotland Sci. Invest., i. (1909, published 1911) pp. 1-20 (5 pis.).

§ Leland Stanford Junior Univ. Publications, No. 4 (1910) pp. 1-64 (14 pis.).

|| Trans. Zool. Soc, xviii. (1911) pp. 341-98 (G pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND 150TANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. ■H'.'.l

Woodlice of Ireland.*— Denis R. Pack Beresford and Kevin 11.
Foster record twenty-five species in twelve genera, and give an account
of what is known of their distribution in Ireland. They also give a
diagnostic key of the genera.

New Carboniferous Crustacean. f — W. T. Caiman describes Pleitro-
caris annulatus g. et sp.n. from the English Coal-Measures near Dudley.
The possession of a "tail-fan," consisting of a pair of biramous appen-
dages on either side of a median telson, shows at once that it belongs
to the Malacostracan Crustacea and to the series Eumalacostraca. The
absence of a carapace practically narrows the comparison, among the
existing groups of Eumalacostraca, to the Isopoda and the Syncarida.
Reasons are given for referring Pleurocaris provisionally to the division
Syncarida in the vicinity of the genus Acanthotelson Meek and Worthen.

Barnacles from Irish Seas.J — N. Annandale describes the external
characters of Scalpellum (Smiliuni) kempi sp. n., a peculiar species found
attached to Lopliolielia. It is apparently most nearly related to S. gemma
and S. grimdldi, but has two extra valves below the rostrum and a
narrower carina. The commonest species of the genus is S. vulgare, and
S. velutinum also occurs. In regard to the latter, the author notes that
it is closely related to S. fornix of the Italian Miocene, that it is common
on both sides of the Atlantic in northern latitudes, and has been taken
as far south as Tristan d'Acunha. It also occurs in the Indian Ocean. The
bathymetrical range is extraordinary — from 35 to over 1000 fathoms.

New Ascidicolous Copepod.§ — E. Chatton and E. Brement describe
Ophioseides abdominalis sp. n., a parasite of Amaroucium densum, nearly
related to O.joubini Ch. Only the female is known, a vermiform, sub-
cylindrical, greenish-yellow animal with a bright red eye.

Annulata.

Oligoehaet Commensals in Spongilla carteri.|| -J. Stephenson
reports the occurrence of numerous fresh-water worms in a fresh-water
sponge. He calls the association commensalism, but does not give clear
evidence of the appropriateness of this term. One specimen of Prist 'in a
longiseta was obtained ; the others were referred to Nais pectinata sp. n.,
N. communis Piguet var. punjabensis, and N. communis Piguet var. cseca
var. n. The last two are identical, except that the one has eyes and the
other has not.

Bothrioneurum iris. 11 — J- Stephenson re-describes this interesting
earthworm from Kurseong in the Eastern Himalayas. It was first de-
scribed by Beddard from the Malay Peninsula, and afterwards examined
by Michaelsen from Kurseong. The pear-shaped spcrmatophores are

* Proc. R. Irish Acad., xxix. No. 4, pp. 165-90 (1 pi.),
t Geol. Mag., viii. (1911) pp. 156-60 (1 fig.),
t Ann. Nat. Hist., vii. (1911) pp. 588-90 (1 fig.).
§ Bull. Soc. Zool., xxxvi. (1911) pp. 29-33 (1 fig.).
|| Records Indian Museum, v. (1910) pp. 232-40 (1 pi.).
i Tom. cit., pp. 241-6 (2 figs.).

470 SUMMARY OK CURRENT RESEARCHES BELATING TO

wry characteristic, and there may be as many as five on one specimen,
not round the male genital aperture, but on the dorsal and dorso-lateraJ
surfaces of the cliteUar segments.

New Leech from Egypt.*— W. A. Harding describes Placoldella
segyptiaca sp. n., ectpparasitic on tbe mud tortoise (Trionyx triunguis).

" The nearly terminal mouth, the seven pairs of crop caeca, and the fact
that its host is a tortoise place this leech beyond doubt in the Olosso-
siphonid genus Placoldella (R. Blanchard, 1893)." The size of the largest
specimen, in a medium state of contraction, was 14 "5 mm. long by
5 mm. wide.

Nematohelminthes.

Blood Filaria in Horse.t — H. Mandel gives a description of a micro-
filaria which he found abundantly in the blood of a Berlin horse. This
is apparently the first case of the kind in a European horse. It remains
to be seen whether it is a casual occurrence or whether filarial cause
some disease the aetiology of which is still unknown.

Oxyuris in the Appendix vermiformis.J — G-. Railliet reports that
out of 119 appendices he found fifty-eight with Oxyuris. In one case
there was a male Trichocephalus. Usually there were about ten, but not
uncommonly there was only one. In five cases the number exceeded
fifty, and one child had over a hundred. They usually rest on the
mucous membrane, but they may penetrate into it. No blood was
detected in any of them. Marked vitality is characteristic. Thus in
one case there was a living Oxyuris in an appendix thirty hours after
operation.

Nervous System of Ascaris.§ — R. Goldschmidt completes his study
of the nervous system of A. lumbricoides and A. megalocephala. He
describes the minute structure of the glia, the nerve-fibres, and the
ganglion-cells, and devotes particular attention to the neurofibrils, which
he strongly maintains are only of the nature of cellular skeleton. One
of the curious individual results of a most penetrating investigation is
that cell 2G of the Gangl. ceph. lat. int. is present only in males.

Platyhelminthes.

Pearl-inducing Parasite. || — T. Southwell has made a number of
feeding experiments in order to determine the adult of the worm whose
larva; form pearls in the oyster. He has not yet found Tetrarhynchtts
union if actor — the adult stage suspected — in any fish in the open sea, but
thirty-eight were found in specimens of Ginglymostoma concolor, which
had been fed on oysters in an enclosure. The experiments remain
inconclusive ; but the strong probability is that the adult of the worm is
T. unionifactor, that its life-history is direct from the oyster to the fish,
and that the adult may occur in all Elasmobranchs that feed on oysters.

* Ann. Nat. Hist., vii. (1911) pp. 388-9 (1 fig.).

t Centralhl. Bakt. Parasitenk., Mi. (1910) pp. 84-7 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).

X C.R Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 310-11.

§ Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 253-354 (7 pis. and 29 figs.).

|| Ceylon Marine Biological Reports, v. (1911) pp. 213-15.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 471

New Cestodes from Ceylonese Fishes.* — T. Southwell describes
nine new species, two of which require new genera, which are named
Phyllobothroides and Cyclobothrium. In the former the head has four
simple, undivided leaf-like bothridia which are slightly concave, and
overhanging the proximal part of each bothridium there is a pair of
hooks. In the other new genus, the head is shaped like a daisy, with a
central myzorhynchus bearing a pair of suckers, and surrounded extern-
ally by a frill of about fourteen long, hollow, unbranched, digitate sucker-
like tentacles, arising from the base of the myzorhynchus.

New Tapeworm from a Duck.f — T. B. Rosseter describes Hymeno-
Jepis upsilon sp. n. from a wild duck (Anas boschas). He compares it in
detail with Taenia microsoma Creplin, which it resembles in some respects.
In the penultimate and ultimate segments the ripe ova or hexacanth
embryos are contained in a U-shaped ovarian-uterine sac, like a Greek
upsilon. This form of uterine sac does not occur in any other tape-
worm from birds.

Cysticercoids from Rat-flea.:}: — W. Nicoll and E. A. Minchin have
found two cysticercoids in the. cavity of the rat-flea (Ceratophyllus fasci-
atus). One was the larval form of Hymenolepis diminuta Rud. ( = Taenia
leptocephala Creplin. The other was perhaps the larval form of Hymeno-
lepis marina, which may turn out to be the same as H. nana, a dangerous
tapeworm of man.

Gasterostomum tergestinum.§ — W. Nicoll gives a re-description of
this species, which has not been seen since Stossich described it in 1883.
The chief distinctive feature of the species is the position and arrange-
ment of the yolk glands, two symmetrically situated masses on the level
of the anterior border of the pharynx and close to it. In most Gastero-
stomata they are disposed along the margins of the body.

Horse Parasites in Cameroon. || — Berke describes the case of a horse
in Cameroon reduced to extreme emaciation by huge numbers of Trema-
todes (the remarkable Gastrodiscus aegyptiacus) and Nematodes (Spirop-
tera megastoma) in the stomach and intestine.

Non-parasitic Bdellourid.1T — Paul Hallez describes an interesting
Antarctic Planarian, Synsiphonium UouviUi g. et sp. n., one of the
Bdellouridre. These interesting forms (Bdelloura and Sync(didium) are
known as ectoparasites of the king-crab from the North American coast.
But the form now described was found free-living, and its peculiarities
make it necessary to erect a new genus.

Excretory System of Bothriomolus.** — Paul Hallez gives a careful
account of the excretory system of this Turbellarian, and compares it
with that of Bothrioplana, which it resembles closely in many points.

* Ceylon Marine Biological Reports, v. (1911) pp. 216-25 (4 pis.).

t Joum. Quekett Mior. Club, xi. (1911) pp. 147-60 (1 pi.).

% Proc. Zool. Soc, 1911, pp. 9-13 (2 figs.).

§ Ann. Mus. Zool. Univ. Napoli, iii. (1910) pp. 1-3 (1 fig.).

|j Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lviii. (1911) pp. 129-34 (1 fig.).

1 Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 461-3.

** Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1911) pp. 441 63 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).

\7- SUMMARY OF CUBRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

This furnishes an argument in favour of including Bothriomolus in the
family Bothrioplanidae. ilallez describes the two chief vessels or col-
lectors, the vessels of the second order, the capillaries and ciliated
funnels, and other details of the intricate system.

Dalyellidse and Umagillidae.* — Bruno Wahl gives revised diagnoses
and classification of these two families of Turbellarians, which include
a number of interesting, in part parasitic, forms, such as Graffilla, Ano-
plodium, Syndesmis, Dallyellia, and Umagilla. One of the remarkable
points referred to is the absence of male gonads in Graffilla parasitica.

Echinoderma.

Polarity of Primary Oocyte of Asterias forbesii.f — Naohide Yafsu
finds that in this starfish the point of attachment of the primary oocyte
coincides neither with the animal pole as in Strong ylocentrotus, nor with
the vegetal pole as in Oerebrahdus. In this case, therefore, the longi-
tudinal axis of the germ-epithelial cell does not correspond to the egg-
axis or to the embryonal axis.

North Pacific Ophiurans.J — H. L. Clark describes the collection in
the U.S. National Museum — a huge piece of work — dealing with 189
species, 129 new. There are 12 new genera. He calls attention to the
difficulty of classification, one of the reasons being our ignorance of the
growth changes. The number of arm spines and oral papillae often
increases with age. Jackson's law of " localised stages " finds many
illustrations, for the Ophiuran arm often reveals the characters of youth
at or near the tip of the arm. Another interesting matter is variation
in the extent of calcification, and in the extent of resorption of the
calcareous matter. An interesting account of the distribution is given.
One of the general results is that " Jordan's Law " of isolation does not
seem to have much application here.

Genera of Recent ClypeastroidsJ — H. L. Clark discusses these
" cake-urchins " or " sand:dollars," and recognizes five families (for
fifteen genera) — Clypeastridse, Arachnoididee, Lagauidre, Fibulariidas,
and Scutellidse. " The Clypeastridge are almost certainly the nearest
of the families to the original stock, and it is not hard to believe that
the Laganidee have had a common ancestry with them. The Fibu-
lariidre seem to have been derived from the Laganidas, or from a near
ancestor, by a process of simplification. The Arachnoididse are certainly
an old stock beginning on or near the Clypeastrid branch and with no
near relatives at the present clay. The Scutellidee are quite a distinct
branch, though their origin is probably very near that of the Laganidaa,
if not identical with it." Such simplicity as is shown by Echinocyamus
and Fibularia, which cannot be considered primitive, is probably asso-
ciated with their small size.

* Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 39-60 (2 pis. and 1 fig.).
t Annot. Zool. Japon., vii. (1910) pp. 217-21 (7 figs.).
J U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. lxxv. (1910) pp. 1-302 (144 figs.).
§ Anu. Nat. Hist., vii. (1911) pp. 593-605.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 473

New Unstalked Crinoid.* — A. H. Clark describes Commissia pecti-
nifer sp. n. from Christmas Island. In this genus there are never more
than ten arms, the cirri are numerous, and the distal cirrus segments
(smooth in Gomatula) always bear spines or tubercles. The new form
differs somewhat abruptly from the others in the great length of the
teeth of the comb on the earlier pinnules, and by the large proportion
of pinnulars occupied by the conib.

Ccelentera.

Oogenesis in Pelagia.f — Julius Schaxel describes the process of
oogenesis in this jellyfish. The germ-cells are not at first distinguish-
able from the surrounding endodermic epithelium. There is no phago-
cytosis in the nutrition of the ovum. The processes that go on in the
oocyte are minutely described, emphasis being laid on the emission of
chromatin from the nucleus into the cytoplasm to form physiologically
essential " kinetochromidia."

Fixation of Scyphistoma.J — F. Herouard finds that the pedal disc
of a polyp, once detached from its substratum, cannot be re-attached.
There is nothing of the nature of a sucker about the pedal disc. A
chitinous lamella is first formed by the ectoderm, and fits the substratum
exactly. Then very rapidly the ectoderm-cells also form numerous
" tonofibrils," and disappear as these are differentiated. Finally, only
tonotibrils are left between the chitinous lamella and the mesoglcea.

History of Study of Coral-formations.§ — Siegmund Giinther gives
an interesting account of pre-Darwinian studies of coral-reef s and corals ;
dealing with the views and observations of De Castro, Pyrard, Marsigli,
Peysonnel, Spallanzani, Chamisso, and many others.

New Genus of Antipatharia. — Kumao Kinoshita describes Hexa-
pathes heterosticha ' g. et sp. n. from Sagarni Bay. He refers it to the
Cladopathinge (= Schultze's Hexamerota), the third sub -family of
Antipathidge. The diagnosis reads : — Stem simple, with simple lateral
pinnules arranged in two longitudinal rows, and with simple branchlets
borne on the anterior surface of the stem ; spines of the axis short,
turned upwards, polyps elongated in the transverse axis ; mouth situated
on a high projection of the peristome ; stomodEeum long, reaching
nearly to the axis sheath ; sagittal tentacles given off from the level of
the lower end of the stoinodasum ; mesenteries six in number.

Law of Budding in " Portuguese Man-of-war." f — 0. Steche has
introduced some order into the rather perplexing " Wirrwar " of zooids
in Physalia, and shows how the very aberrant arrangement of parts is
due to the development of the huge pneumatophore. This has led to
a shortening of the stem and an abandonment of the usual budding
zone. Steche notices in passing that Physalia has what other Siphono-
phores do not seem to have— a power of regenerating lost appendages.

* Ann. Nat. Hist., vii (1911) pp. 644-5.

t Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) p. 167-212 (4 pis. and 2 figs.).

J Bull. Soc. Zool., xxxvi. (1911) pp. 15-19 (3 figs.).

§ SB. Bayer. Akad. wiss. Munchen, 1910, pp. 1-42.

|| Annot. Zool. Japon., vii. (1910) pp. 231-4 (3 figs.).

f Festschrift Richard Hertwig, ii. (1910) pp. 355-72 (10 figs.).

474 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Marginal Glands of Porpita.*— A. Issakowitsch describes the trans-
formation of the epithelium of the "collar" into glandular cells. These
show very distinct chromidia, and the author makes it clear that the
chromidia play an essential part in the production of mucus.

Mediterranean Species of Halecium.t — S. Motz-Kossowska, in her
survey of the Hydroids from the Western Mediterranean, deals with the
species of Halecium, describing two new forms — H. billardi and //. torreyi
— and giving some details in regards to others.

Hydractinia and Hermit-crab.:}: — Seitaro Goto describes two species
of Hydractinia (H. sodalis Stimpson, and H. spiralis sp. n.), very
different in external appearance, which have the same habit of liviug
always in symbiosis with a hermit-crab, Eupagurus constans Stimpson,
and of forming " shells " of their own entirely composed of a chitinous
framework, so that in most specimens there is apparently no basis of
Gastropod shell, as is the case in most other known species of Hydractinia.
The skeleton of one of the species is totally devoid of spines, and its
substance is very thin and papery, while that of the other is rich, armed
with large spines, which are conical when small, but irregular in shape
and branching when large.

Protozoa.

Studies on Amcebae.§— A. Alexeieff describes two new species of
Amceba {A. densa and A. circumyranosa), and discusses encystation and
mitosis. There is no sign of any sexual process in connexion with the
encystation in A. punctata or A. Umax. In A. punctata the chromatoid
bodies are so large that it is difficult to believe that they are formed
from nuclear substances. In discussing the nuclear spindle the author
points out that the fibres cannot be regarded as directive threads for the
chromosomes. They vary greatly in their differentiation, and their
significance is simply that for physical and mechanical reasons the
plastin of the karyosome becomes more or less fibrillar when it is
dividing.

Division in Amceba punctata. |1 — A. Alexeieff finds that the
equatorial plate is formed at the expense of the peripheral chromatin.
The formation of chromosomes is bound up with the presence of a
plastin substratum which is absent in the granules forming the equa-
torial plate. These should not, therefore, be called chromosomes.
There are no centrosomes, but their place is taken by polar bodies
which may be homologous.

Division and Encystation of Amoeba limax 1[ — A. Alexeieff has
studied one of the Umax group of Amoebae, Amwba limax Duj. (emend.
Vahlkampf), which he obtains from hay infusions. The encystation
has not to do with any conjugation-process. In the mitosis the

* Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 305-22 (1 pi. and 2 figs.).

t Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1911) pp. 325-52 (1 pi. and 16 figs.).

X Journ. Exper. Zool., ix. (1910) pp. 469-96 (23 figs.).

§ C.R. Soc. Biol , lxx. (1911) pp. 588-91 (40 figs.).

|| Torn, cit., pp. 455-7. f Tom. cit., pp. 534-5.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. I , 5

equatorial plate is formed chiefly at the expense of the peripheral
chromatin, to which is added a variable quantity of chromatin coming
from the karyosome.

Depression and Apogamy in Amoeba diploidea.* — Rh. Erdmann
has studied the degenerative nuclear changes and other signs of
" depression " in this Amoeba when the culture was kept at a tempera-
ture higher than the normal (25°-37° C). The most interesting feature
was the entire cessation of any sexual process. A facultative apogamy
obtains, and the culture cannot be kept alive except by artificial aids.
The sexual process which normally occurs has for part of its utility the
counteracting of depressions and disturbances of the cell-functions.

Rhizopods from Lake District.! — James M. Brown has identified
about fifty species from the English Lake District. Many are common
forms ; others, again, are less well known, while a few do not seem to
have been recorded from this country. Among these Paulinella chromato-
phora Lauterborn, is of interest, having been found in only a few places
on the Continent and in North America, and only as a single specimen
from Loch Ness.

Notes on Marine Heliozoon.f — Maurice Caullery has found at
Banyuls on the fronds of a seaweed {Peyssonelia) an interesting Helio-
zoon, Gymnosphssra alb Ida Sassaki. It was previously found in the
aquarium of the Zoological Institute at Munich, and probably came from
Rovigno. It is about half a millimetre in diameter and easily seen with
the naked eye. The nuclei are variable in number, up to twenty or
thirty. The pseudopodia sometimes anastomose. Another new point is
that individuals occur well-armoured with borrowed spicules of sponge
and Holothurian.

Vegetative and Reproductive Processes in Thalassicolla.§ — Th.
Moroff describes what goes on in this Radiolarian during the vegetative
and reproductive phases, with particular reference to the behaviour of
the unusually large nucleus (O'S-0'4 mm. in diameter). He describes
in detail, with very striking illustrations, the formation of isospores and
anisospores, and discusses such points as the significance of nucleoli
which are interpreted as forms of chromidia.

Hsemocystidium of the Gecko.|| — C. C. Dobell has investigated
Hsemocijstidium simondi Castellani et Willey, a blood parasite of a Ceylon
gecko {Hemidactylus leschenauUii). He describes the schizogony and
the formation of the gametocytes. The genus Hsemocystidium is related
to the malaria parasite Plasmodium, but the intracorpuscular phases are
not amoeboid ; the schizogony takes the form of a simple bipartition,
rarely a division into four ; and the occurrence, so far as is known, is
confined to cold-blooded animals.

* Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 325-48 (2 pis. and 5 figs.).

t Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxx. (1910) pp. 360-8 (1 pi.).

J Bull. Soc. Zool.,xxxvi. (1911) pp. 3-7.

§ Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 73-122 (65 figs.).

|| Tom. cit., pp. 123-32 (1 pi.).

476 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

New Parasite of Rat-flea.* — E. A. Minchin describes ;i new am<e-
boid parasite (Malpighiella refringens g.etsp.n.) which he found in the
Malpighian tubes of the rat-flea (Ueratophyllus fasciatus), in which
lie was studying the transmission of Trypanosoma lewisi. The new
parasite occurs principally in two forms, first an amoeboid form with a
single nucleus, and secondly an encysted form with four nuclei. The
author distinguishes Malpighiella from Entamoeba.

Inquiry into Sleeping Sickness.f — David Bruce, A. E. Hamerton
and H. II. Bateman have made experiments leading to the following
conclusions. Water-buck, bush-buck, and reed-buck can readily be in-
fected with a human strain of Trypanosoma gambiense by the bites of
infected Glossina palpalis. Yet careful and continued examination of
the blood may fail to reveal the parasite. The antelopes mentioned,
when infected as described, can transmit the infection to clean labora-
tory-bred flies, even eighty-one days after the last feed of the infected
flies on a buck. The flies can pass on the virus to susceptible animals.
It follows that antelope living in the fly-areas are "potential" reservoirs
of the virus of sleeping sickness, but up to the present no antelope bas
been found naturally infected. In another paper J it is shown that the
Uganda fowl cannot act as a reservoir of the virus of sleeping sickness.

Protozoan Parasites from Trichoptera.§ — Doris L. Mackinnon
describes an interesting new Flagellate Embadomonas agilis g. et sp. n.,
from caddis-worms. It is a slipper-shaped form with one flagellum ;
the posterior end is pointed, tbe anterior end is blunt and rounded, and
bent back at an angle with the long axis of the body. A large cytostome
occupies almost all tbe anterior half of the body. The slender flagellum
arises from a basal granule on the anterior margin of the cytostome.
The nucleus is a diffuse mass containing several chromatin clumps ;
it lies in tbe extreme anterior end, in front of the cytostome. Tbe
caddis-worms also yielded Grithidia campamdata Leger, a species of
Entamoeba, Gurleya legeri, Trichomasiix trichopterorum, etc.

Trypanosome Studies. || — F.K. Kleine and M. Taute have endeavoured
to discover whether there is a sexual development of Trypanosoma gam-
biense within Glossina palpalis. There is no congenital transmission of
the Trypanosome from fly to fly. Flies reared in the laboratory and once
infected were studied. What the authors regard as male and female
forms are carefully described. There is also a discussion of various
species of Trypanosome that occur in the Tse-tse, e.g. T. grayi ; of the
unimportance of Glossina morsitans as a host of T. gambiense ; of the
habits of G. palpalis ; and many other points of interest.

Trypanosoma rotatorium G-ruby.lf — W. Lebedeff re-describes this
Trypanosome of the frog, which is marked by striking polymorphism.
There are four principal forms: "indifferent," "ordinary," "sterile,"

* Festschrift 'Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 291-302 (1 pi.),
t Proc. Hoy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. pp. 311-27.
t Tom. cit., pp. 328-34.

§ Parasitology, iv. (1911) pp. 28-38 (1 pi. and 8 figs.).
|| Arbeit, k. Gesund., xxxi. (1911) p. 1-58 (5 pis.).
Tf Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 399-43G (2 pis. and 9 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. . 477

and " chromidia-containing." The last become Crithidium-forms, the
chromidia condensing into a nnclens. The Crithidia differentiate aa
males and females, conjugation occurs, and the result is a Trypan osome.

New Type of Suctoria on a Copepod.* — E. Chatton and B. Collin
describe Rhabdophrya trimorpha g. et. sp. n., a very interesting new type
of Acinetaria, which they found growing on a Harpacticid Copepod
(Cletodes longicaudatus) at Banyuls. The new genus must find its place
in the family of Trichophryidae, beside Dendrosoma and Dendrosomides,
but it is very distinctive. Tt is trimorphic, there being tentaculate,
vermiform, and reduced unciform individuals.

New Trichonympha.t— Max Hartmann gives a fine description of
Trichonympha hertwiyi sp. n. from the hind-gut of Termites. He gives
an account of the striking peculiarities of Trichonymphidse, such as the
unique " head-organ," which seems to be a complicated blepharoplast .
He describes young stages, the males and females, the division and the
formation of gametes. The nucleus is a " poly-energid " nucleus — that
is to say, it is made up of many individualized single nuclei, which have
arisen by repeated division of a primarily single element within the
original nuclear cavity. The author inquires whether the ordinary
Metazoan nucleus is not a " poly-energid " nucleus. The Trichonymphidre
are so peculiar, he says, that they may require a. class like Ciliata for
themselves.

Leucocytozoon in Fish-Eagle. J — A. Laveran and L. Nattan-Larrier
describe L. audieri sp. n. from the fish-eagle, Haliaetus vocifer. The
parasites occur mainly in elements which appear to be altered red blood-
corpuscles. The macrogametes and microgametes are described. Allied
species occur in Parus major, Syrnium aluco, and Meleayris yallopavo.

New Hssmogregarine from the Horned Asp.§ — A. Laveran and
A. Pettit once more illustrate the common experience that when you tap
a new host you find a new parasite. They describe Hsemoyregarina
seurati sp. n. from Cerastes cornutus.

Distribution of Myxosporidia.|| — M. Auerbach gives a list of the
known forms with their localities and hosts. Most of them are parasites
of fishes, but one has been reported from Nais, and another from a
butterfly (Tortrix). Amphibians and Chelonians are also infected. The
author discusses their occurrence in fresh-water and marine fishes, and
their geographical distribution in general. Further investigations are
urgently required.

Lankesteria.il — B. Swarczewsky gives an account of a species of this
Gregarine which he found in the gut of Turbellarians in Lake Baikal.
He describes the formation of gametes, their conjugation, the formation
of sporocysts, and the process of schizogony.

* Arch. Zool. Exper., v. (1910) Notes et Revue, No. 5, pp. cxxxviii-cxlv (3 figs.).
t Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 351-96 (1 pis. and 3 figs.).
J C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 6S6-8 (6 figs.).
§ C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 95-6).
|| Zool. Jahrb., xxx. (1911) pp. 471-94.
1 Festschrift Richard Hertwig, i. (1910) pp. 637-74 (4 pis. .

Aug. 16th, 1911 2 i

478 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,
Inchiding: Cell-contents.

Life-history and Physiology of Nuclei.* — J. Schiller publishes
the results of a year's study of the life-history and development of the
nuclei of Ant it h amnio n cruciatum f. tenuissima Hauck. and of A.plumula
(Ellis) Thur. In the former the young nuclei and those of the lower
cells are circular, the upper and full-grown ones elongate, bipolar or
multipolar. In the side-shoots only the lowest cells have nuclei capable
of division. Young nuclei have neither membrane nor network (which
both develop later), but they have a large nucleolus which is extruded
into the cytoplasm during nuclear division. Full-grown nuclei have no
chromatin-bodies but mauy nucleoli, which are continually fragmenting
and passing into the cjtoplasrn. This process ceases in the lower parts,
where there is only one small nucleolus, also in darkuess, where there
are but a few very dark nucleoli. The basal cells of the short branches
produce granules of an albuminous nature, which form building material
for new short branches. The nuclei of A. plumula are very varied in
form and of larger size, corresponding to the larger cells. As in the
previous instance, there is rapid production of nucleolar material (some-
times as many as thirty-five nucleoli being formed), and a continual
extrusion of it into the cytoplasm. As before, darkness causes cessation
of this process, but upon re-illumination activity begins again on the
second day.

All these nuclei behave in the same way as those of higher plants
towards 3 p.c. HC1, cone. Na2C03, etc. The size of the nuclei, their
extensive surface, and the rapid production of nucleolar substance seems
to point to some special physiological activity. This activity is most
marked in fertile plants at the time of fertilization.

Synapsis of the Nucleus.f — A. A. Lawson publishes the results of
investigations dealing with the synapsis phase of the nucleus. The
present work is mainly based upon a study of the microspore mother-
cells of Smilacina, but is fully confirmed by observations made upon
various types of Gymnosperms, Pteridophyta, Bryophyta, and Algse.
The chief conclusions are as follows. Spore-mother-cells, owing to
their difference in function, are strikingly different from ordinary
vegetative cells. Being stored with food materials for the benefit of
the four spores, they are practically devoid of cytoplasmic vacuoles, but
much sap accumulates in the nuclear cavity and causes a high osmotic
pressure, which distends the nuclear membrane. The cavity expands to

* Jahrb. wiss. Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 267-306 (2 pis. and 15 figs.),
t Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, xlvii. (1911) pp. 591-604 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 479

2-3 times its original size, and during this expansion the membrane is
gradually withdrawn from the chromatin, with the result that a large
clear area of nuclear sap is left, at the side of which is the mass of
chromatin. This gave the appearance of a contraction of the chromatin,
but actual measurements failed to show any diminution in area.
Definite changes take place in the nature of the chromatin during the
formation of the spireme. It appears that the number of threads
forming the reticulum corresponds to the diploid number of chromo-
somes. The chromatin threads appear to be double even in the
reticulum stage ; they gradually shorten and thicken until they form
definite chromosomes, but there is no evidence of their blending or
fusion. Actual reduction occurs much later than the synapsis stage.
The author regards synapsis as a growth-period of the nucleus during
which the increasing karyolymph produces great osmotic pressure from
within, resulting in an enlargement of the nuclear cavity towards the
point of least resistance ; the chromatin mass is left behind, and its
position is a perfectly natural one.

Mycoplasm Hypothesis and Metachromatic Corpuscles.* — J.
Beauverie contributes a brief note dealing with Eriksson's " mycoplasm
theory " in reference to the infection of cereals by blight. The author
has discovered numerous metachromatic corpuscles in the cells of the
hypha3 of the parasite (on wheat), and believes that these are the
so-called nuclei of former writers. Similar corpuscles are found in
the cells of the host in the infected regions, but never in normal tissues.
The author agrees with Marshall Ward and Klebahn in regarding
Eriksson's " special corpuscles " as exogenous suckers, i.e., as simple
suckers thrust by the mycelium filaments into the interior of the host-
cells. The discovery of the metachromatic bodies may be the means of
throwing new light upon the whole subject.

Movements of Plasmodia. f — V. Vouk publishes the results of his
investigations concerning the rhythmic streaming of the protoplasm of
Plasmodia. The author concludes that this streaming is a rhythmic
phenomenon consisting of two movements, viz., a progressive and a
retrogressive movement, and as a general rule the progressive streaming
is of longer duration than the retrogressive one. The duration of the
rhythmic movement has a certain constant value for each particular
Plasmodium, but this value is only constant for the main stream ; the
additional side streamings at the beginning and towards the end of the
phenomenon are subject to continual alterations. This fixed value
increases with the growth of the plasmodium. The rhythmic move-
ment may be disturbed by external mechanical means, e.g., shaking, the
disturbance being: made evident by the increase or decrease of the
duration of rhythmic movement.

Chondriosomes in Plant-cells. £ — <J. Lewitzky has found in the
cells of the root of Pisum sativum and in certain meristematic tissues of
Asparagus officinalis bodies which appear t<» correspond with thechondrio-

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) \>\>. (112-15.

t SB. Akad. Wiss., cxix. (1910) pp. 853-7C (1 pi. and 3 figs.).

X Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxviii. (1911) pp. 538-16.

2 I 2

480 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

somes of animal cells, and which appear to be an essentia] part of
embryonic cytoplasm. With cell-development the cbondriosomes are
gradually converted into simple nuclei, nuclear threads, etc., the most
remarkable change being their conversion into chloroplasts and leuco-
plasts. Pensa and others have independently made a similar discovery
in certain living plant-cells, but, contrary to the present writer, regard
the chondriosomes as of nuclear origin.

Heterogamic gemini in Impatiens.* — J. Granier and L. Boule
have studied the chromosomes of Impatiens glanduligera Royle, and find
that, in addition to the ordinary chromosomes, the somatic cells possess
two macrochromosomes, while the male and female cells possess only one.
The fertilized ovum contains two macrochromosomes, so that one must
be derived from the male cell and the other from the female. The
authors find that by association of two double chromosomes a macro-
chromosomic group (gemini) is formed during the first stages of reduction-
division, and in this group a chromosome of male origin always unites with
one of female origin. Finally each sexual cell possesses one macrochromo-
some derived from the macrochromosomic group.

Carbohydrates in Seeds. f — E. Schulze and M. Pfenninger have
made further experiments upon lupeose, but have been unsuccessful in
proving it to be a simple substance, although there is every probability
that this is the case. Numerous preparations of lupeose were made from
different seeds and by different methods, but they were all of the same
chemical nature, and the products resulting from hydrolysis were a
glucose, galactose, and fructose, thus proving it to be a polysaccharide,
probably a tetrasaccharid. All attempts to obtain crystals of it have
been unsuccessful, thus indicating a difference between this body and
stachyose, which it greatly resembles in many ways. Schulze and Godet
have described two carbohydrates prepared from Phaseolus vulgaris, and
experiments seem to show that they contain lupeose.

Structure and Development.

Vegetative.

Phloem of Juglandacese.J — A. F. Hemenway publishes his first paper
dealing with the phloem of Dicotyledons. The present work deals with
six species of Juglandacese, and the author finds that the lateral sieve-
plates have the same appearance and structure and seem to have the
same function as the sieve-plates on the end-walls. The callus also
appears to be identical. The large sieve-tubes have as large and numer-
ous lateral sieve-plates as terminal ones. This is contrary to ordinary
views, and it seems as though this is an ancestral character indicating
that such lower "Dicotyledons as the Juglandaceae are nearly related to
the Gymnosperms or Vascular Cryptogams. Possibly further study of
this feature may be of use in a systematic classification from an anatomi-
cal standpoint.

* Coinptes Reudus, clii. (1911) pp. 1020-22.

t Zeitschr. Phvs. Ciiem., lxix. (1910) p. 366. See also Bot. CentralbL, cxvi.
(1)11) p. 475. % Bot. Gaz, li. (1911) pp. 130-5 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 481

Reproductive.

Gametophytes and Embryogeny in Cunninghamia.*— K. Miyake
has studied the development of the gametophytes and the embryogeny
in Gunninghamia sinensis, and the results are briefly as follows : The
male cones begin to develop in the autumn preceding pollination ;
division of the pollen-mother-cell takes place in early spring and is quite
typical, the reduced number of chromosomes being twelve. The mature
pollen-grain contains a tube-cell and a smaller generative cell, and
subsequent to pollination in April, the latter divides into body and stalk-
cell. The pollen-cell reaches the female prothallium in June and enters
the depression above the archegonium. The enlarged, spherical body-
cell passes into the tip of the pollen-tube where it forms two equal
sperm-cells, each containing much starch. The female cones likewise
develop in the autumn and by the spring a single megaspore mother-
cell is formed in each ovule. Division of the megaspore-mother-cell
starts about the time of pollination with the synapsis stage when
reduction apparently takes place. Of the three potential megaspores
the lowest develops into the gametophyte. The female prothallium
follows the same course of development as in other Conifers, and when
young is surrounded by 2 to 4 layers of tapetal cells ; later on the
tapetum is reduced to a single layer, whicli is also more or less dis-
organized. The megaspore-membrane is double and well-developed.
The archegonial complex of 18 to 16 cells is at the micropylar end of
the prothallium, and is surrounded by a layer of sheath-cells : sterile
prothallial tissue is found in the centre of the complex. Fertilization
occurs early in July. The pro-embryo consists of three tiers of cells, the
lowest of which develops into the embryo. Gunninghamia shows thus a
close affinity with Taxodium and Gryptomeria, and the three genera are
typical Cupressineas, but the sterile prothallial tissue in the archegonial
complex seems to show that the first genus is the most primitive.

Significance of the Periplasmodium.t — E. Hannig continues his
work upon this subject, and shows that the tapetum is characteristic and
widely distributed. In the Bryophyta the Anthocerotaceas have a
primitive tapetum and supporting cells, the Liverworts have a tapetum
and elaters, while the Musci have a rudimentary tapetum-spore-sac.
All ferns have a true tapetum. The Gymnosperms usually have a tape-
turn in both the micro- and megaspore, but that of the latter is often
reduced. Among the Angiosperms both the Choripetalas and the
Monocotyledons have a typical tapetum in the microspore and a reduced
one in the megaspore ; in the Sympetalaj the male tapetum is typical,
but the female tapetum has disappeared, being replaced to some extent
by the " epithelium " of the integuments.

The periplasmodium is also a common feature. The tapetal cells
remain distinct in the Bryophyta, but the ferns and Equisetaceae have a
typical periplasmodium. In the Lycopodineaj the tapetum remains ; in
the Psilotacere the periplasmodium is doubtful, and in the Selaginaceae
and Isoetaceas absent. The macrospore of the Cycadacea? retains irs

* Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxvii. (1911) pp. 1-25 (4 pis. and 2 figs.),
t Flora, ii. (1911) pp. 335-82 (3 figs.).

482 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tapetum, the condition in the microspore is doubtful. In the Conifer*
the tapetum of the macrospore is reduced, but does not form a peri-
plasmodium, and in the microspore it is doubtful. In the Angiosperms
the tapetum, even when present, forms no periplasinodium in the macro-
spore, but there is usually a typical one in the microspore. The author
then proceeds to trace the relations between the tapetum or periplas-
inodium and the spore-membranes, and shows how the membrane con-
sisted at first of a typical exospore and epispore in the Bacteria, Fungi,
and Algae, gradually becoming modified, until in the Coniferge and
Angiosperms only the exospore remains. Finally he shows how the
membrane of the embryo-sac corresponds with the similar structure of
the male organ, but has gradually been modified to suit new conditions
of germination, and the partially cutinized membrane of the embryo-sac
of Gymnosperms finally disappears in the higher Angiosperms.

Physiology.
Nutrition and Growth.

Mineral Nutrition of Vascular Plants.* — J. de Bufz de Lavison
publishes a paper describing a new theory as to the absorption of salts by
vascular plants. Experiments were made with sections of stems, wounded
roots, and with entire uninjured plants, and it is shown that absorption
of salts in the first two cases gives no indication as to the amount
absorbed by the entire, uninjured plant. This is conclusively proved by
the action of such a salt as citrate of iron, which is freely diffused in
the first two cases, but completely arrested by the endodermis in the
last case. Further, while there is no fixed ratio between the amount
of an iron salt in contact with the root and the small amount which
diffuses into the aerial portion of the plant, there is a distinct ratio in
the case of nitrites and chlorides of the alkaline metals and alkaline
earths, probably due to some complex phenomenon of assimilation. The
most important experiments are those of this class which prove that the
root exercises a qualitative selection over the salts absorbed. There
seems to be no anatomic cause for this, and the author believes that
there is some inherent character in the protoplasm of the endodermis
which brings about this result ; the ordinary protoplasm does not appear
to possess this property. Two main general conclusions may be formed,
viz. : 1. Salts incapable of penetrating protoplasm are arrested by the
endodermis and undergo a species of assimilation before passing further
into the plant. 2. Salts capable of penetrating the protoplasm undergo
a sort of filtration in the endodermis depending upon (a) the nature of
the plant ; (b) the nature of the salt ; (c) the condition of the endo-
dermis at the time of the experiment.

Living Cells in Relation to Transpiration and Sap-flow. |— J. B.
Overton publishes the second paper dealing with his work on Cyperus,
the following being the chief results obtained. A stem 15-GO cm. high
will conduct sufficient water to preserve the turgidity of the leaves for
3 to 18 days, when a section of 5-30 cm. has been killed by steam. The

* R6v. G6n. Bot., xxiii. (1911) pp. 177-211 (2 figs.),
t Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 102-20 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 483

amount of water conducted diminishes from day to day, partly owing to
a blocking of the vessels with a resinous substance formed through the
disorganization of the contents of the sieve-tubes. The withering of the
leaves is probably due less to lack of water than to the action of injurious
substances passed iuto them from the dead cells. The withering leaves
show all the symptoms of dying, i.e. rapid loss of water, discoloration of
chloroplasts, and contraction of the mesophyll. The use of steam for
killing the stem-cells is not so satisfactory as the use of wax at 110 ° C. ;
the latter causes less disorganization of the cells, less injury to the leaves,
and does not cause marked decrease in transpiration. Stems, portions of
which have been killed by prolonged treatment with picric acid, 95 p.c.
alcohol, or CnS04, conduct water for a comparatively long period, and
allow new branches to develop. Picrid acid, chromic acid, and HgCl2
may increase the amount of water evaporated by poisoned plants, HgCl2
causing the greatest loss of water.

Reduction by Roots.* — 0. Schreiner and M. X. Sullivan have experi-
mented with wheat-seedlings to determine whether roots have reducing
powers, and may thus promote the fertility of the soil. It is found that
when seedlings are grown in solutions of methylen-blue, etc., the colour
is lightened, likewise in starch-iodide solution the colour is slowly dis-
charged. Experiments with neutral, acid, and alkaline solutions of sulphur
failed to show any hydrogenating action, and tests for the reducing
SH group also failed to give results. Seedlings grown in very dilute
solutions of KN03 reduce'd the nitrate to nitrite. Sodium selenite and
sodium tellurite were also reduced, but reduction was retarded by the
presence of free acids or alkalis or of toxic organic matters. The
authors find that seedling-roots possess a power of reduction from the
time of germination until the sixth or eighth dav, when it is at its
maximum ; a gradual decrease is then perceptible. Whilst power of
oxidation is retarded by acid reaction, the latter promotes reduction.
The reduction-power is most marked in the parenchymatous cells, and is
probably due to metabolic activity producing either an oxyorganic acid,
or a complex, unsaturated compound, or an unsaturated fatty acid.

Latex Diastases of Broussonetia.t— M. G-erber contributes a note
dealing with his work on the latex of Broussonetia papyri/era L. The
author finds that the latex possesses properties similar to those of the
pancreas of higher animals, since it contains three diastases capable of
dealing with the fats, carbohydrates, and albuminoids of reserve food-
materials, and rendering them fit for assimilation by young leaves and
inflorescences. The activity of these diastases diminishes in autumn
and more so in winter, but it never ceases entirely ; in this respect the
latex diastases differ from those of seeds which cease their activity while
the seeds are latent, but this difference is accounted for, since B. papy-
rifera continues to live throughout the winter.

All the three diastases are not equally strong in all kinds of latex ; in
some cases the lipolytic diastase is most active, in others the amylolytic,
and in others the proteolytic, the predominant diastase being in ac-
cordance with the nature of the food-reserve.

* Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 121-30.

t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1611-14.

484 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Liberation of Iron by Green Water-plants.* — IT. Molisch has si udied
the action of green water-plants towards compounds of iron dissolved in
water. Tin.' author finds that under the influence of light such plants
can bring about the dissociation of iron from its compounds. Many of
these plants give out an alkali, which, assisted by the oxygen liberated
during carbon-assimilation, favours the breaking down of such com-
pounds as iron acetate, iron citrate, etc. The liberation of iron from the
sulphate and malate appears to be retarded in some cases, but this may
be explained by the fact that some plants, e.g. Elodea, take up the iron
and store it beneath their epidermis, until no further iron remains out-
side the plant. Iron can be stored in the form of oxide both in light
and in darkness, but while the ordinary membrane of the epidermis is
unaffected by light, a second membrane is found in close connexion with
it on the upper surface, which is affected by light, and in this region the
iron is deposited in another form.

The results obtained seem to show that submerged green water-plants
(such as Potamogeton, Ceratophyllum, Chora, Myriophyllum, Vallisneria,
Elodea, Riccia, and Ranunculus) and iron bacteria play an important
part in nature in removing iron from water and in furnishing material
for the formation of meadow iron-ore.

Irritability.

Action of Uitra-vioiet Rays upon Green Vanilla-pods. t — J.
Pougnet has experimented with green vanilla-pods, which are odourless
before they are ripe. Pods of varying degrees of greenness were exposed
to the action of ultra-violet rays, and the author was able to induce the
odour of vanilla in all cases, although in no case could he obtain crystals.
Pods thus treated retained their softness and almost their original size
for three months. Finally, they dried up, and in five months were only
one-fourth of their original volume. In a second series of experiments
the pods were treated with a O'OOl p.c. solution of MnCl2 ; the effect of
the ultra-violet rays was thereby much accelerated and accentuated.

Osmotic Pressure, and the Form and Structure of Plants.^ — J.
Beauverie publishes a final paper in connexion with his recent work upon
the alteration brought about in the form and structure of plants by
variation in the osmotic pressure of the surrounding media. The in-
vestigator's first experiments were made with the lower fungi, e.g. Asper-
gillus, Penicillium, etc. ; increased osmotic pressure in the culture-
solution brought about a decrease in height of the aerial parts of the
plant, together with lateral expansion of the cells, while the submerged
portions became relatively of more importance. The experiments were
then extended to Phaseolus, Pisum, Lupinus, Zea, and other higher
plants. Seeds were grown in pure water, and in most cases hydrotropism
was most marked, being more powerful than geotropism in the effect
produced upon the roots. Seeds were then grown in a solution of
common salt, with other conditions as before. The strength of the solu-
tion was increased each day until a concentration of 1'5 p.c. was reached.

* SB. Akad. Wiss., cxix. (1910) pp. 959-84 (1 pi.).

+ Coniptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1184-6.

\ Rev. Gen. Bot., xxiii. (1911) pp. 212-19 (8 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 485

In the weaker solutions the roots endeavoured to rise out of the solution,
but as the solutions were made stronger the roots appeared to adapt
themselves and to plunge more deeply even than when in pure water.
Internal modifications in structure, e.g. absence of pith and abnormal
development of xylem, etc., correspond to external modifications.

General.

Traumatism in Relation to New Plant-forms.* — P. Becquerel

contributes a note dealing with his work on Zinnia eleyans. The author
found that under the action of traumatism the floral structures under-
went certain sudden modifications, e.g. in the structure of the capitula,
change in colour of individual florets, and grouping of the flowers around
the branches. In order to avoid errors due to insect-pollination, certain
flowers were artificially pollinated and kept in muslin bags, and seeds
thus produced were used for experiments. The only characters trans-
mitted were those affecting the colour of the ligulate florets and of the
bracts of hermaphrodite flowers ; the author believes that the characters
thus brought out in plants which, like Zinnia, are polyhybrids, are atavic
or teratologic ones, which these genera have exhibited sporadically for
thousands of years.

Remarks on Strephonema.f — M. Dubard has examined several
specimens of Strephonema Hook, fil., and is of the opinion that its cha-
racters are sufficiently distinct and marked to justify the formation of a
new family which would form a link with the Rosacea? (through the
Arnygdaleas) on the one hand, and the Combretaceas (through Ter-
jinnalia) on the other. The special characters of this family would be
the adherent base of the ovary, the semianatropic ovules, the peculiar
structure of the seed and embryo.

Premature Fall of the Perianth. J — H. Fitting describes a series of
experiments made with the object of discovering the cause of the pre-
mature fall of the calyx and corolla. Most of the work was done in
connexion with Geranium pyrenaicum, but other species of Geranium and
plants like Erodium, Linum, Verbascum, Veronica, etc., which behave in a
similar way, were also used. The causes of the phenomenon are many and
various, and often act in a very short time. Usually the older flowers
are more easily affected than the younger ones. Chemical compounds
exert a striking influence. Thus the presence of coal-gas, excess of CO,,
tobacco-smoke, hydrochloric-acid vapour, chloroform, or ether vapour
causes a more or less rapid fall of the sepals and petals. In Verbascum
thapsiforme the results are seen in 30 seconds. Thermal variations pro-
duce similar results. In Geranium pyrenaicum response occurs at 40° C. at
the end of 2h minutes in old flowers, and 6 to 10 minutes in young ones ;
Linum, Verbascum, Borayo, etc., respond in 25 to 60 seconds, while some
species of Erodium respond at 33o~40° C. Shock, pollination, and
wounding of the pistil produce similar results. That the premature fall
is a vital process is evident, since it does not occur when the living

* Comptes Rendus. clii. (1911) pp. 1319-22.

t Rev. Gen. Bot., xxiii. (1911) pp. 220-3.

\ Jahrb. wiss. Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 187-2G6 (3 figs.).

486 STTMMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tissues are rendered inactive by excess of heat or by deficiency of nitro-
gen. A well-defined separating tissue is found, however, at the base of
the petals, and here at the time of fall there is a sudden increase in
turgeseence accompanied by increase in volume in response to external
stimulus. This would appear to point to a phenomenon similar in
character to those of sleep-movements, response to light, etc.

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.

(By A. Gepf, M.A. F.L.S.)

Relation of Woodsiese to Cyatheacese and Polypodiacese.* — 0.
Schlnmberger gives an account of the characters of the families, Cya-
theaceee and Polypodiacefe, and of the relation of the Woodsiege to both
families. He takes into consideration all the known characters of the
gametophyte and sporophyte of the genus Woodsia. 1. The antheridia
of Woodsia normally open by means of an apical lid-cell. 2. Hence
the difference in this respect supposed to exist between the Cyatheacege
and Polypodiaceae falls through. ?>. The only important difference in
the antheridia of these two familes lies in the structure of the lid-cell.
4. In Diacalpe aspidioides and Woodsia obtusa the antheridia have a
divided lid-cell. 5. The antheridial wall-cells play an active part in the
opening of the antheridium. 6. In the Woodsia prothallium occur
transitions between the characteristic hairs of the Cyatheacege and the
glandular hairs of the Polypodiacege. 7. The appearance of the pro-
thallium when mature depends upon the conditions of nutrition during
youth. Thus, moist-grown plants become crisped, while dry-grown
plants form adventitious prothallia. 8. Under the influence of weak
light, filiform adventitious prothallia can be made to produce branched
filaments with antheridia. 9. By special conditions of culture, pro-
thallia, which would produce normal embryos, may be induced to put
out apogamous shoots. 10. In structure of sporangium and in posi-
tion of annulus, the Woodsiege examined agreed absolutely with the
Polypodiacege type, with the exception of Diacalpe, which approaches
Cyatheacege in the characters of its annulus. 11. In the Woodsiege
there is a reduction of the receptacle in the formation of the sorus.
In Peranema the receptacle is stalked : in Diacalpe it is much re-
duced ; in Woodsia obtusa the sporangia are formed on a slightly
prominent hump ; in W. ilvensis they are formed on the unchanged
epidermal surface. 12. The indusium in Hypoderris arises out of a
closed superficial ring ; in Woodsia obtusa the ring is open towards the
margin of the frond ; in JIr. ilvensis the indusium arises out of single
hairs, which later are raised upon a common base. 13. The indusium
of Gystopteris fragilis is developmentally not to be regarded as inferior.
14. An indusium can only be inferior when it arises below the sporangia
on the receptacle. 15. The Woodsiege examined are all dictyostelous.
16. The muciferous canals of the Cyatheacege and Dicksoniea? arise by
the mucous degeneration of the septa in a series of cells.

* Flora, cii. (1911) pp. 383-414 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 487

In conclusion, the Woodsieae-Woodsiinae of Diels (namely, Peranema,
Diacalpe, Hypoderris, Worn kin), with the exception of Ogstopteris, form
most probably a monophyletic series. In both gamophyte and sporo-
phyte there is a continuous reduction. The group is certainly most
nearly related to the Cyatheaceas, with closed inferior indusium, these
two groups having been separated off from one another in early times.
The Woodsieae, however, agree absolutely in sporangial structure with
the Polypodiaceaa, especially with certain species of Polypodium ; and
some of the Woodsiea3 with indusium open on the marginal side afford a
possible transition to certain forms of the Davallia series.

Genera of Vittarieas.* — R. C. Benedict gives an account of the
external morphology, venation, and relationships of the fern-tribe
Vittarieae, under the four headings : tribal characters, genera, onto-
genetic stages, general considerations. In summarizing his results he
states that : — -1. The Vittarieas represent a wTell-defined group probably
related to the Pterideae and to the Asplenieaj, and contain seven genera
— Monogramma, Hecistopteris, Vittaria, Polyteenium, Ananthacorus,
Anetium, Antrophyum. 2. Monogramma dareicarpa and M. graminea
seem to possess the simplest leaf and stem-structure known among vas-
cular plants. 3. The seven genera may be arranged according to their
venation in a phylogenetic series, ascending from Monogramma to
Anetium and Antrophyum. 4. The more advanced genera show in their
ontogeny successive venation stages similar to those noted in the phylo-
genetic series. 5. They differ from most other ferns in beginning with
a uninervate type, but usually they show secondarily the free dichotomous
venation found in other ferns. 6. The tribe illustrates clearly how one
type of areolate venation may have been derived from a free dichotomous
type. 7. In comparing the parallel adult and ontogenetic venation
series, affirmative evidence for the theory of recapitulation is found in
the inheritance in at least one primitive species of Vittaria of an unneces-
sary juvenile stage, which in another more advanced species of Vittaria
has been eliminated.

Hymenophyllaceas in relation to Moisture. f — F. Shreve publishes
some studies on Jamaican Hymenophyllaceae in relation to water-supply
and atmospheric humidity. He sums his conclusions as follows :— 1. The
Hymenophyllaceaj are most abundant at about 5070 ft. altitude. 2. The
Jamaican species show differences ranging from the most pronounced
hygrophily to a relative degree of drought resistance. 3. The differ-
ences of climate from floor to canopy in the rain-forest determine the
local distribution of the different types of Hyinenophyllaceas. 4. The
low water loss from surface- dry leaves in a very moist atmosphere can be
met by root-absorption in all but the most hygrophilous forms. 5. The
transpiration current moves when the leaves are wholly or partly surface-
dry, but is at a standstill when the leaves are thoroughly wet. 6. All
but the most drought-resistant epiphytic species of Hymenophyllaceae are
capable of living for considerable periods as submerged aquatics. 7. The
drought-resistant species are capable of absorbing atmospheric moisture

* Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxviii. (1911) pp. 153-90 (7 pis.).
t Bot. Gaz. li. (1911) pp. 184-209 (8 figs.).

L88 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

when surface-dried, if kept in very moist air. 8. Continued desiccation
results in the loss of the water of the sap-cavity of all mature leaf-cells,
recovery depending on the duration of the desiccation. 9. The rela-
tively xerophilous epiphytic Hymenophyllaceai owe their ability to resist
drought to the capacity of the protoplasmic utricle of the leaf -cells, both
to survive the replacing of the sap-cavity by air. and also to lose a
rapidly diminishing amount of water on continued desiccation. 10. The
Hymenophyllacese (structurally and physiologically a very distinct group
of' ferns) have developed forms capable of growing in relatively dry situa-
tions, through possession of an intercellular or functional xerophily, much
less pronounced than that possessed by many mosses and selaginellas, but
like it in kind.

Significance of the Periplasmodium.* — E. Hannig has studied the
origin and development of the periplasmodium in Equisetum Umosum
and in Azolla. In Equisetum the tapetal cells fuse into a multinucleate
mass of protoplasm, and the individual cell-walls are replaced by a single
new membranous sheath. The vacuolar substance towards the exterior
of the periplasmodium gives rise to the middle lamella of each spore-
membrane, and also to the elater sheath, which ultimately forms the
elaters. The latter, which are of complex structure, arise at a definite
part of the spore, and extend in a spiral manner towards both poles.
The independent origin of the middle lamella and the elater sheath is
definitely proved, and the periplasmodium must be regarded as a living
protoplast, having a special formative and regulating function.

In Azolla the present unisexual sporangia have been evolved from a
former bisexual condition. The origin of the periplasmodium is similar
to that in Equisetum, but the subsequent developments are more complex.
The periplasmodium undergoes a marked increase in volume owing to the
storage and assimilation of starch. The vacuolar substance gives rise to
the spores, of which each vacuole contains an equal number. In the
macrosporangium thirty-one macrospores degenerate, while one develops,
and under the influence of the periplasmodium the triradiate outgrowth
on its surface is turned towards the micropyle. Within the periplas-
modium, and derived from it, are the massula3, with honeycomb-like
walls, which eventually give rise to the swimming-body of the macro-
spore. The macrospore-sheath and the perispore are also derived from
the perisplasmodium. These results confirm those obtained with Equi-
setum as to the importance of the role played by the periplasmodium.

Lepidodendron Brownii.j — R. Chodat gives an account of the
anatomy of a fossil stem, which he identifies as Lepidodendron Brownii,
and which he finds to have essentially the structure of Lepidostrobus
Brownii Schimp., as described by F. 0. Bower.

Leaves of Calamites.J— H. H. Thomas gives an account of the
structure of the leaves of some species of the Calamocladus section of
Calamites. In one, which appears to be C. charseformis, the leaves are
very small, falcate, arranged in alternating whorls of four on slender,

* Flora, cii. (1911) pp. 209-78 (2 pis. and 24 figs.).

t Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve, iii. (1911) pp. 5-6, 8-13 (7 figs.).

X Proc, Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 490-1.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 489

probably pendulous twigs — found in the Halifax Hard Bed of the Lower
Coal Measures. The leaves have a concentric vascular bundle containing
four to five small tracheitis surrounded by thin-walled elongated cells,
and by an external black sheath of nielasmatic tissue. The palisade
tissue contains large intercellular spaces. The epidermis is thinner on
the concave side of the leaf, and here also are placed the stomata. In
G. grandis and G. equisetiformis the leaves are of a xeromorphic type,
having a conspicuous strand of sclerenchymatous fibres running up to
the apex on the adaxial side of the leaf.

Calamostachys Ludwigii.* — A. Renier gives a careful description
of some impressions of Calamostachys Ludwigii found in the Westphalian
near Liege, in Belgium, including not only a study of the morphology
of the spike, but also an idea of the habit of the spike-bearing branch.
G. Ludwigii, like G. Zeilleri, is distinguished from the other species of
the genus by having the sterile bracts free from the axis ; but differs
from C. Zeilleri in having but twelve to sixteen bracts in a verticil, as
against twenty-eight in G. Zeilleri. G. Ludwigii of Carruthers exhibits
certain variations, and is synonymous with G.typica of Schimper in con-
nexion with Asterophyllum lonyifolius of Sternberg, with which it is
constantly associated.

Calamites undulatus.f — W. Jongmans publishes his views about
Calamites undulatus Sternb. He criticizes the classification originated
by Weiss, and generally accepted, that the genus Calamites is divisible
into three groups according to the position of the branch-scars: —
1. Eucalamites, with branch-scars at every joint. 2. Calamitina, with
branch-scars not on every joint, but on joints at regular short intervals.
:>. Stylocalamites, branch-scars without order. He disagrees with this
division, and describes several instances which fail to conform to the
rule. These examples exactly correspond with Calamites undulatus in
form and arrangement of the ribs, but differ altogether in the dis-
tribution of their branch-scars. He finds some to be of the Calamitina,
some of the Eucalamites type, and some to have the characters of both
groups. He believes that Weiss's division into three groups is wrong
rather than that plants so similar in all their other characters should
have to be placed in different groups. It is necessary to revise the
genus Calamites on other grounds, such as the form and arrangement of
the ribs.

Schizaeopsis expansa, a Fossil Fern.! — E. W. Berry gives a descrip-
tion of Schizseopsis expansa, a Lower Cretaceous species of Schizaeaceaj
from Eastern Xorth America, which was formerly referred by Fontaine
to the Ginkgoales under the names Baieropsis expansa and B. macrophylla.
Berry shows that the genus Baieropsis belongs to the Filicales and not to
the Ginkgoales ; and that the name Baieropsis is not available for use.
Some of the forms heretofore referred to Baieropsis have a Schizasaceous
fructification ; others belong to Acrostichopteris. The frond characters
of the fossil S. expansa agree with those of certain modern species of
Schizsea.

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1067-9.

+ Meddel. van 's Rijks Herbarium, 1910. Leiden : 1911, pp. 43-59 (figs.).

X Annals of Botany, xxv. (1911) pp. 193-8 (1 pi.).

4'.>0 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Anatomical Study of Azolla filiculoides.* — C. Queva describee
the vascular anatomy of Azolla filiculoides. In the floating horizontal
stem the vascular elements of the dorsal region are narrow tracheids,

and those of the ventral region are wide vessels. The transverse section
of the xylem is circular, the circle being incomplete alternately on the
right and left sides in the dorsal region, corresponding to the alternating
leaf traces. The wide ventral vessels are connected exclusively with the
rootlets. The interpretation suggested is that the dorsal group of
vessels represents a reduced bipolar group, connected at the poles with
leaf traces ; and that the ventral group is merely an apolar mass related
to the rootlets. The amount of vascular tissue is remarkable for so
hydrophytic a plant.

Spore-development in Salvinia natans.t — A. Kundt describes the
development of the macrosporangia and microsporangia of Salvinia
natans. The branching of the stalks of the microsporangia takes its
origin in the outgrowth of any chance cell of the stem. The first
divisions in the capitate end-cell lead to the formation of the sporangial
wall — this wall remains one cell thick. The tapetum arises from divisions
of the central cell ; it remains always one cell thick ; and the cells mostly
contain two nuclei. The archesporium is divided up into spore-mother-
cells, sixteen in the microsporangium, eight in the macrosporangium.
Tetrad division is similar in both ; and stages of nuclear division occur
like those characteristic of the reduction in higher plants. The sporo-
phyte has sixteen, the gametophyte eight chromosomes. The disorganiza-
tion of the tapetum occurs at the time of the reduction-stage.
Immediately afterwards the spore-mother-cells become free in the
sporangium. In both kinds of sporangium the tetrads break up into
spores. In the microsporangium all sixty-four spores ripen ; in the
macrosporangium one only, rarely two. The macrospore and its nucleus
grow very strongly, the exospore and endospore being developed very
late ; and the epispore not until the spore is ripe and the tapetal nuclei
have disappeared.

Aqueous Cultures of Fern Prothallia.ij: — H. Fischer describes the
advantages to be obtained by cultivating fern-spores on nutrient solutions
rather than on sand or soil. For instance, the nutrition is under more
accurate control ; the results are clean from sand, etc., and do not injure
the microtome knife ; the cultures run no risk of drying up. Different
results may be obtained by the employment of different depths of solu-
tion. Fern spores vary much in their capacity for germination. Some
mature slowly after being shed, and then gradually lose the power of
germination. Some are capable of germination after many years, for
instance, Ceratopteris 20 years, Asplenium serra 48 years. Again,
Osmunda and Todea speedily lose a'l power of germination. The author
failed altogether to induce Nephrodium montanum, Blechnum spirant,
and AUosorus crispus to germinate by any modification of his solutions ;
and he speculates as to why this should be. For general purposes lie
found the best nutrient solution to be K.,HP04 0 ' 1 p.c, MgS04 0 • 03 p.c,
CaCl2 0-01 p.c, NaCl 0-01 p.c, Fe.,Cl0" 0-001 p.c, NH4N03 0'1 p.c.

* Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Autun., xxiii. (1910) 24 pp. (22 figs.).
t Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxvii. lte Abt. (1911) pp. 26-51 (2 pis.).
X Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxvii. lte Abt. (1911) pp. 54-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 491

Influence of Light and Darkness on Germination of Fern-spores.*
H. Fischer discusses the germination of fern-spores in light and darkness,
giving a brief resume of the conflicting results obtained by Bnrgestein,
Laage, and Schulze. Germination in the dark occurs in Ceratopteris and
in the Ophioglosseae. And now it is shown that the same thing can
occur in Polypodium vulgar e, but the resulting filament is etiolated.
Germination in light appears to be the normal process.

Corsican Ferns. f — J. Briquet gives a list of the Pteridophytes of
Corsica, amounting to forty-nine species and several varieties and forms.
The distribution in the island, the synonymy and citations, are duly set
forth ; and some descriptive and critical notes are interspersed.

Queensland Ferns. J — J. H. Maiden and E. Betche publish notes on
some ferns gathered by R. F. Waller in the Heberton district, Queens-
land. Polypodium Walleri and Hymenophyllum Walleri are described as
new, and Polypodium cucidlatum Nees and BL, Asplenium amamum
Presl and A. normals Don are recorded as new to Australia.

Malayan Ferns.§ — C. R. W. K. van Alderwerelt van Rosenburgh
has published a handbook to the determination of the ferns of the
Malayan Islands, including those of the Malay Peninsula, the Philip-
pines, and New Guinea. The work includes no less than 1587 species,
classified mainly on the lines of Christensen's Index Filicum, and is pro-
vided with keys to the families, tribes, genera, and species. It contains
about sixty new species, about half of which were published almost
simultaneously, and figured, in the Bull. Depart. Agric. aux Indes
Xeerlandaises. The book had its origin in the task of naming the un-
determined material in the Buitenzorg herbarium.

Subsequently he published || an enumeration of Malayan species of
Pleopeltis, which is intended as a correction of the above-mentioned
handbook. He accepts the view that it is better to regard Pleopeltis as
generically distinct from Polypodium. He therefore separates off under
Pleopeltis 113 species which appeared under Polypodium in the handbook.
And he places Selliguea as a section of Pleopeltis.

He also has provided a revised list 1 of Filices Horti Bogoriensis,
ferns cultivated in the Buitenzorg Botanical Gardens, Raciborski's deter-
minations having fallen out of date.

He gives the name Stenolepia to a new genus,** in which he places
Aspidium triste Blume, a fern referred by others to Alsophila, Gystopteris
and Davallia. He finds it to be allied to Cystopteris, and to have a
superficial resemblance to Diacalpe aspidioides.

Chinese Ferns. ft — H. Christ publishes a list of forty ferns collected
in the province of Hupeh, and forty-three collected in the province of
Szech'uan, by E. H. Wilson during the years 1907-1908. Descriptions

* Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxvii. lte Abt. (1911) pp. 60-2.

t Prodrome de la Flore Corse. I. Geneve : Georg, 1910, pp. 1-36.

J Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., xxxv. (1911) pp. 799-802.

§ Batavia : (1909) xl, 899, and 11 pp. See also Bull. Soc. Bot. France, lvi.
(1909) pp. 415-16.

|| Bull. Depart. Agric. Indes Neerlandaises, Buitenzorg, xxvii. (1909) pp. 1-12
(4 pis.). % Tom. cit., pp. 13-44 (2 pis.).

** Tom. cit., pp. 45-6 (1 pi.). tt Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 345-59 (figs.).

L92 SUMMARY OF OUKKKNT UKska HCH K.s IlKLATING TO

of the Qovelties are added — a new -Tims Sorolepidium (allied bo Poly-

stichum), eleven species and a variety. And a report by Prof. Senn on

the starch prepared from the rhizome of Pteridium at Echang on the
Yang-tze is included.

Bryophyta.

(By A. Gbpp.)

Variable Leaf-border in Fissidens.* — J. Roll writes on the leaf-
border of Fissidens Arnoldi Ruthe, which he states to be a variable
character. On the same stem he finds leaves with and without a border,
though as previously known the species was without any bordered leaves.
The plant may be included in Semilimbidium just as readily as in Aloma.
He discusses several other species which show a similar variability of
leaf-border. This has led to an unnecessary multiplication of species.
Limpricht regarded the leaf-border as so unstable a character that he
forebore to describe it at all in the case of some of the European specie-.

Hepaticse Infected by Fungi.f — A. J. M. Garjeanne gives an
account of some fungi which infest the rhizoids of hepatica?, and which
in his opinion are not necessary to the life of the hepatics, and which
do neither harm nor good to the host-plants. If there is a symbiosis, it
is of a very ill-developed nature, unless in the case of Galypogeia trkho-
manis and Jnngermannia barbata. He gives a list of thirty-two hepaticae
which he examined, indicating opposite each species the extent to which
it was observed to be invaded by fungi. All the species mentioned are
as often found free from fungi, as invaded by them. In Galypogeia
trkhomanis and Lophozia inflata the fungi are provided with haustoria
which penetrate into the green cells. Various fungi take part in this
infection ; and among them is the new species, Mucor rhizophilus,
described by the author.

Inflorescence of Funaria.J— J. M. Speer publishes some notes on
Funaria hygrometrica, in which it is shown that not only is the species
not "strictly dioecious," but when large quantities of it were examined,
cases were repeatedly found where two to three antheridia occurred
mixed with as many mature archegonia in the same inflorescence, ren-
dered conspicuous by its size. Usually eight to twelve neck canal cells
are found in the archegonium ; an instance with twenty-two such cells is
figured. Archegonia with two eggs and their proper rows of neck canal
cells are figured.

Lesquereuxia.§ — L. Loeske publishes critical remarks on Lesquerevrin
and other allied genera. He sums up his views as follows : 1. Lindberg's
Lesquereuxia, which can be maintained as a composite genus, includes
nearly allied forms which may be grouped round Lescursea saxicoJa,
Pseudoleslcea atrovirens, and Ptychddium plicatum. 2. The forms cannot
however be separated into genera on the ground of single characters,

* Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 261-2.

t Flora, cii. (1911) pp. 147-85 (2 pis. and figs.).

X Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 225-7 (fig-. I.

§ Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 311-28.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 493

such as the peristome, the central strand, etc., for then the result is apt
to be too artificial. 3. If, however, the sum total of the characters is
considered, then Pt. decipiens is at once seen to be a Lescursea, Ptychodium
affine is a form of Pt. plicatum, while Pt. Pfundtneri and Pt. oligocladurr.
are near allies of Pseudoleshea atrovirens. 4. The relations of Lescursea
saxicola and L. decipiens to one another, as well as of Pseudoleslcea oli</»-
cladum and Ps. Pfundtneri to one another and to Ps. atrovirens are not
yet explained. For this end they must be studied in their habitats.

Cratoneuron and Hygramblystegium.* — W. Monkemeyer publishes
his researches on Cratoneuron and Hygramblystegium. He recalls that
V. F. Brotherus in Engler's Planzenfamilien kept Cratoneuron distinct
from Hygramblystegium, on account of the numerous polymorphous
paraphyllia and the secund falcate leaves with long deep plicae of the
former species, as contrasted with the almost entire absence of para-
phyllia (except in H.filicinum) and smooth leaves of Hygramblystegium.
Monkemeyer disapproves of the inclusion of H.filicinum in Hygram-
blystegium, and very fully states his reasons for transferring it to Cra-
toneuron. Also as to Hygramblystegium commutatum, he places it for
similar reasons in Cratoneuron. He gives a full account of the varieties
and forms of both these species, and discusses various other species.

Hygrohypnum ochraceuin.f — M. Spindler discusses the great
variability of Hygrohypnum ochraceum, a widely distributed species.
Limpricht ascribed to it four varieties. Spindler adds another, var.
obtusifolium. He says that the species is extraordinarily capable of
adaptation to environment, and hence is very rich in forms. In it must
be included H. simpUcinerve (Lindb.), as has been indicated recently by
L. Loeske.

Buxbaumia viridis.J — I. Grorffy publishes a third article on bryo-
logical rarities, and describes some diseased specimens of Buxbaumia
viridis (B. indusiata), collected by him on rotting fir-trunks at certain
places in the Hohen Tatra. The specimens were conspicuous owing to
the fungal spots on the deformed capsules. He gives an account of the
fungus {Cdadosporium her bar inn) and of the manner in which it attacks
the moss. He enumerates twenty different localities at which the moss
has now been found in the Hohen Tatra, where previously it had been
regarded as exceedmsdv rare.

European HepaticasJ— K. Miiller publishes another instalment of
his monograph of Die Lebermoose in Rabeuhorst's Kryptogamen-flora,
and brings to a close the first volume of his work. He gives an account
of Harpanthus (2 species), Geocalyx (1), and Saccogyna (1), and adds a
chapter on the development of the fruit-sac (marsupium) in the Junger-
mannieae, using the following genera in illustration : — Schistochila, AH-
cularia geoscypha, Tylimanthus, Mesoptychia, Balantiopsis, Galypogeia,
Isotaehis. There are three types of fruit-sac: 1. Where the embryo
bores its way down into the nutrient tissue {Tylimanthus type). 2.

* Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 263-78.

t Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 181-1 (1 pi.).

+ Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 287-93.

§ Leipzig : Kummer, 1911, lief. 14, pp. vii. and 833-71 (figs. 358-63).

Aug. 16th, 1911 2 k

494 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Where iln archeironial inflorescence is carried down to the bottom of the
developing sac which is situated at right aDgles with the main axis of
the plant (Calypogeia type). 3. Where the archegonial inflorescence
I ii comes inclosed in a cylindric sac, a direct continuation of the axis of the
stem (Isotaxis type). These three types are connected by transitions.
Title-pages, preface, and index to the volume are supplied.

New and Rare European Mosses.* — G. Roth gives descriptions and
drawings of some mosses which, for lack of authentic material, lie had
been compelled to omit from his book, Europiiische Laubmoose (1904-5).
Twelve species and varieties belonging to various genera are fully treated.

British Bryophytes.t — W. Evans publishes a list of seventeen mosses
and two hepatics, collected by him on the Isle of May, and forming a
supplement to his previous list (1908). He found a curious Pottia,
which H. N. Dixon refers to P. asperula.

Philonotis seriata with Fruit-! — E. A. Richards records the find-
ing of a fruit-bearing tuft of Philonotis seriata near Glen Isla and <!len
Doll, Forfarshire, at the end of July 1909, at an altitude of 3000 ft.

Mosses of Spitzbergen.§ — H, N. Dixon gives a list of eight mosses
collected on Prince Charles Foreland, Spitzbergen, during W. S. Brace's
expedition in 1906-7. Their interest consists mainly in the fact that
three of them do not happen to occur in I. Hagen's account || of the
mosses gathered by the expedition.

Muscinese of Bornholm.^l — W. Monkemeyer gives a list of the mosses
and hepatics of Bornholm, with a resume of the work of previous col-
lectors, and notes on the physical geography of the island. He adds
forty-five species and several varieties to the previous records of Jensen
and others, and brings the totals up to fourteen Sphagnacese, 288 mosses,
and fifty-eight hepatics. He figures a plant of Pohlia nutans with a
double capsule, the columella having proliferated, so that it terminates
in a subsidiary capsule.

Moss-fiora of the Jura.**— L. Hillier has been studying the moss-
flora of the lower Jura on the French side, between the altitudes 800 ft.
and 2600 ft., his purpose being to do for the lower Jura what C. Meylan
is doing for the upper. His results are expressed in an enumeration of
mosses and hepatics, some of which have never previously been recorded
for the Jura ; some are new to, or rare in, the lower Jura, hut are known
or common in the upper Jura ; and some are common in the lower, but
rare or absent in the upper Jura.

German Bryophytes.tt — V. Torka gives a list of the hepatics of the
north-east of the province of Posen. He and H. Miller collected forty-
one species. A larger number could not be expected in such flat country.
The most interesting record is Riciella Hubeneriana var. nutans, a new

* Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 299-310.

t Trans. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh, xxiv. (1910) pp. 91-3.

X Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 69-70.

§ Trans. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh, xxiv. (1910) pp. 93-4.

|i Op. cit., xxiii. (1908) p. 326. f Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp 333-49 (fig.).

** Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 60-6.

tt Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 204-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC. 495

variety, which adopts a floating habit as soon as it becomes covered with
water. It is often associated with Ricciocarpus nutans.

L. Loeske * gives an account of the moss-flora of Fussen and Hohen-
schwangan, in the Algau Alps. He describes the geological formation,
mainly chalk, and groups the species according to their substrata, etc.
— humus, mountain-tarns, pine-forests, rocks, tree-trunks, spray of water-
falls, woodland-paths, etc. He then enumerates his results in systematic
order, namely, fifty-four hepatics and 202 mosses, with many critical
notes interspersed.

E. Prager t publishes some supplementary notes on the moss-flora of
tin' Riesengebirge, of Brandenburg, and of East Prussia. He treats of
varieties and forms of Dr&planocladus and Calliergon.

Bryophytes of Southern Europe.^ — C Warnstorf gives a list of the
bryophytes collected by Max Fleischer in the south of France and in
Spain in April-May, 1908. He records 153 mosses, seven hepatics, and
two Sphagnaceae. Three new species of Br yum are described, and
several new varieties. Critical notes are appended to some six of the
species.

Mosses of New Guinea.§ — M. Fleischer gives an account of the new
species of mosses collected in Dutch New Guinea by L. S. A. M. von
Romer during the second Lorentz expedition. There are seven new
species, and they were collected in the primeval forests on the snow-
mountains of the interior.

Mosses of Eastern Asia.|| — E. G. Paris publishes his twelfth article
on the mosses of eastern Asia, and treats of three collections — one made
by P. Courtois in Kang Sou and Ngan Hoei, in eastern China ; one by
M. Met near Lao-Kay, in Tonkin ; and the third by D. Eberhardt near
Hue, in Annam. Forty-seven species are enumerated, and fifteen of
these are described as new.

New Japanese Mosses. IF— S. Okamura publishes some new contri-
butions to the moss-flora of Japan. The following species are new to
science : — Buxbaumia Minakatse, Haplohymenium brachycladum, Isotachis
Makinoi, Dolichomitriopsis crmulata ; Dolichomitriopsis being a new
genus of the family Lembophyllaceae. A description is given of the
fruit of Scapania spinosa, previously unknown. Two European species,
Buxbaumia aphylla and Pleuridium subutatum, are reported as occuiring
iti Japan.

Moss-flora in Central Asia.** — V. F. Brotherus gives a brief sketch
of the bryogeography of Central Asia which he had an opportunity of
studying during an expedition, equipped by Helsingfors University in
1896, to Eastern Turkestan and the Tian-shan Mountains. On the steppes
mosses are very poorly represented, save for the endemic species Tortula
desertorum and Grimmia anodon and G. orbicularis. By the irrigation-

* Tom. cit., pp. 210-48. t Torn, cit., pp. 255-60.

% Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 189-203. § Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 279-86.

|| Rev. Brvolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 53-60.
\ Bot. Mag. Tokyo, xxv. (1911) pp. 30-4, 65-8 (figs.).

** Forhandl. Nordisk. Naturf. och Liikaremotet. Helsingfors, xxi. 7 (1903) Bot.,
pp. 39-41.

2 K 2

I- '.If. SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

canals a few species are found. There is no trace of moss or lichen on
tree-stems, save on old and shaded willows near water. The wooded
region of the mountains, especially the pine forests, provide a number of
species. The author gives lists of the species found on rotten trunks,
rocks, river banks, etc. The alpine region is fairly rich in species. The
total moss-flora is about 220 species, and includes no species of Andrcsea
and Sphagnum. Hepatiea? are rare. The moss-flora is akin to that of
Europe, only two genera — Drummondia and Tndusiella — being extra-
European. The number of endemic species, apart from several forms of
Bryum, is about ten.

Bryophyta of German Central Africa.* — F. Stephani gives an ac-
count of the hepatics collected by J. Mildbraed during the expedition of
Adolph Friederich von Mecklenburg in German Central Africa, princi-
pally between Victoria Nyauza and Ruwenzori. The number of species
is 56, and 48 of these are described and figured as new species.

< '. VTarnstorf t has determined the Sphagnales of the same expedition,
five species and a variety. Three of the species are new.

V. F. Brotherus $ treats of the mosses of the expedition. In 250 speci-
mens he found 137 species, 57 of which are new. Also 7 varieties and
the genus Leptodontiopsis are new. The plants were collected in the
following districts : — Bukoba-Bezirk, Ruanda, Rugega-Wald, Yulkan-
Gebiet, Ruwenzori, Beni, Gr. Kamerunberg.

Bryophyta of Tropical "West Africa.§ — E. G. Paris publishes his
twelfth article on the Bryophytes of French tropical Africa, the present
consignment having been collected in Fouta Djallou, in French Guinea,
by Pobeguin ; near Bammako, by the Lieut-Governor of Haut-
Senegal-Niger ; in middle Casamance, by Etesse ; and at Assikasso,
on the Ivory Coast, by de Gondillac. In all, forty-six species and
varieties are enumerated, and fifteen of these are described as new.
Also ten hepatics, one of which is new, are recorded.

Bryophyta of North America. — G. B. Kaiser || gives some field-notes
about sundry good collecting-grounds for Bryophytes and Lichens in the
Catskill Mountains.

R. S. Williams IT publishes a description of Trichodon borealis, a new
moss collected by him near Dawson, Yukon Territory, in July 1899. It
appears to be allied to the Scandinavian T. oblongus.

E. J.Winslow,** while collecting in a Sphagnum bog in Brownington,
Vermont, in July 1910, discovered the rare moss Paludella squarrosa,
which was previously unknown in New England, though recorded several
times for Canada.

E. B. Chamberlaintt describes a peculiar form of Hylocomium pyre-
naicum from Quebec, in which the leaves, instead of being acuminate,
have a fringed 2-3 lobed apex. The meaning of the fringing processes
is not apparent.

* Wiss. Ergebn. Deutsch. Zentral-Africa Exped., ii. (1911) pp. 111-34 (46 figs.).
t Tom. cit., pp. 134-6. % Tom. cit., pp. 136-76 (5 pis.).

§ Eev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 25-33.

|| Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 1-2. f Tom. cit., p. 5 (fig.).

** Tom. cit., pp. 5-6. tt Tom. cit., pp. 8-9 (fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 497

A. Lorenz * gives an illustrated account of the New England
species of Lophozia of the Muelleri-group, which is Midler's subgenus
Leioeoha. Two out of the seven species occur in New England, namely
L. Kanrini and L. badmsis. The author describes the habitats and
plant-associations of these species, and gives citations from various
authors concerning their habitats, etc., in other countries.

J. M. Holzinger f describes a new Grimmia of the section Schistidium,
namely Grimmia Kindbergii. It was collected near Catala, Alaska,
and it is identical with No. 80« of Macoun's Canadian mosses, but it is
not G. Agassizii Lesq. and James, to which Macoun's plant was
referred by Kindberg.

C. C. Kingman J publishes some notes on hepaticse of Southern
California, which is a very dry district except in the winter months.
On the foot-hills are found Fossombronia longiseta, Riccia frichocarpa,
and R. glauca. In the canyons are Porella Bolanderi, Cryptomitrium
temrum, and Targionia hgpophglla. On banks, etc., are Anthoceros
fmiformis and A. Pearsoni, Asterella calif ornica and A. Palmeri,
Cephaloziella Starkii and C. divaricata. On trees are Frullania catalinse
and F. Bolanderi. In the town of Pasadena is Marchantia polymorpha.

G. E. Nicholls § publishes a second series of notes on Connecticut
mosses, mainly devoting himself to a discussion of ten species which
have recently been found in the state, and which, through their
peculiarities or their distribution, are of interest.

Panama Mosses.|| — R. S. "Williams publishes a list of Panama
mosses gathered partly by himself and partly by M. A. Howe. They
come partly from the canal, and partly from districts to the east and
west. Thirty-nine species are enumerated, two of them being new to
science.

Brazilian Hepatics.1T — C. Massalongo publishes a list of hepaticae
collected by Y. Mazzucchelli in 1904, in the Brazilian province of
S. Paulo. Thirty-three species are enumerated.

Dryptodon Hartmani.** — N. Arnaoudoff gives a description of
Dryptodou Hartmani (Schimp.), a rare species of Europe and North
America, which had only been found in fruit four times, namely in
Corsica, east Switzerland, Upper Hungary, and Montenegro. The
species is not rare in the mountains of Bulgaria. And the author has
found it fruiting in the forest zone of Berkovska Planina in the north
of Bulgaria.

F. Renauld's Moss-herbarium.ft — T. Husnot announces that the
exotic mosses and the European mosses of the late F. Ptenauld*s
herbarium have been purchased by the Paris Museum ; and the North
American mosses by the Harvard University at Cambridge, U.S.A.

* Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 25-31 (2 pis.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 31-32. X Tom. cit.. pp. 33-34.

§ Rhodora, xiii. (1911) pp. 40-6.

It Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxviii. (1911) pp. 33-6.

f Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 9-12.

** Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 43-5.

ft Rev. Bryolog. xxxviii. (1911) p. 48.

I'.'S SUMMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

New Antarctic Genera.* — J. Cardot gives an account of two new
genera from the Magellan region, Nmroloma and Hygrodicranum,
found in a collection made by C. Skottsberg and F. Halle. Neuroloma
belongs to the Andreaeaceae, and resembles Ohasmocalyx, a sub-genus of

Andresea, except in the leaves, which are nerveless, but have on each
side a characteristic intramarginal limb, 2 to :! cells thick, composed of
narrow elongate thickened cells. The plant was found by P. Halle in
Tierra del Fuego. Hygrodicranum is also characterized by the peculiar
structure of its leaves, which are bistratose in the lamina, and which in
the lower half of the nerve show in transverse section an arc of 3 to 4
compressed eurycysts covered above and below7 by a stratum of stereids
or substereids and a distinct epidermal layer. One sterile tuft of it was
found by C. Skottsberg in the Falkland Islands.

Thallophyta.

Algee.

(By Mrs. E. S. Gepp.)

Phylogeny of Algae, f — J. Brunnthaler has made a careful study of
the phylogeny of the Algae, and points out that many illogical errors
have been arrived at by authors who have made the recent forms of
too much importance. He discusses the whole question, and reaches
the following conclusions. 1. The chromophylls of the Rhodophytae,
Phaeophytae, Zygophytae, and Chlorophyceae, are adaptations to the con-
ditions of light which obtained at the time of their origin (complementary
adaptation). 2. The recent Flagellatae are terminal members of one of
the oldest series or stock of the organisms ; a direct relationship with the
recent Algae is not proven. 3. The Rhodophytae must be regarded phylo-
genetically as the oldest group of Algae ; their origin is in the primitive
ancestors of the Flagellatae. 4. The Phaeophytae are the next youngest
group, partly a side-branch of the Rhodophytae, partly descendants of
Flagellate-like organisms. 5. The Zygophytae arise from ancestors of
the Flagellatae. The Peridiniales show comparatively the closest re-
lationship with the recent Flagellatae. 6. The Chlorophyceae are the
youngest stage of development, arising, like the Phaeophyceae, partly
from the Rhodophytae, and partly from the ancestors of the Flagellatae.
A table of descent explains the views of the author. He states that at
present it is not possible to say which of the Chlorophycere and Plneo-
phyceae are derived from the Rhodophytae or Flagellatae respectively,
and he thinks that possibly a study of the cells may throw light on this
point The foregoing conclusions are the outcome of an attempt to
delimit the different series of Algae as the results of external factors,
principally light, on the ancestors of the Flagellatae.

Nutriment of Algae. I — 0. Richter gives an account of the re-
sults arrived at by himself and others in the nutrition of Algae, so far as

* Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 49-52 (figs.),
t Biol. Centralbl., xxxi. (1911) pp. 225-36.

j Internat. Rev. gesarnt. Hydrobiol. u. Hydrogr., ii. (Leipzig, 1911). See also
Biol. Centralbl., xxxi. (1911) pp. 316-18.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 499

they rest on exact data. Only cultures arc described which deal with
pure material and are free of bacteria. Thus the results are biologically
exact. Chemical exactness was also obtained. It is seen that of
mineral constituents, K, Mg, 8, P, and perhaps Fe, are necessary. Occa-
sionally, as in higher plants, Ca is needed. Diatoms alone need Si and
Na. None of these elements can be entirely replaced by any other
similar one, though the quantities may be partially made up by the
addition of a nearly allied element. The meaning, of the excretion of
CaC03 by certain species is discussed.

Coccolithophoridas from the Adriatic.*— J. Brunnthaler has col-
lected and studied these organisms at Rovigno, and records seven species
new to the district, one of them being also new to science, Syracosphaera
Lohmanni. In August and September the commonest forms at Rovigno
were Rhabdospheera stylifer, Syracosphsera pulchra, S. robusta, S. medi-
terranea, S. spinosa, and Pontosphsera inermis. Noteworthy is the absence
of the genera Scyphosphsera and Goccolithophora. The shortness of the
time at the author's disposal for collecting mav, however, be the cause of
this.

Two Russian Chrysomonads.f — S. M. Wislouch records two species
of Chrysomonadeae new to Russia, Synwra reticulata Lemm. and Pala-
tinella cyrtophora Lauterb. He gives the dimensions of the latter
species. On account of the smaller size of the cells, the author designates
his find as a new form, P. cyrtophora f . minor. He gives a figure of it.

Euglena viridis.J — H. Wager has made some experiments on the
effect of gravity upon the movements and aggregation of Euglena
viridis and other micro-organisms. He finds that, when placed in the
dark in shallow vessels or narrow tubes, a peculiar aggregation of these
organisms takes place into net-like patterns or more or less well-defined
circular groups. The aggregation is only visible when the Euglena?
are abundant, and is more regular and pronounced in a shallow vessel
than in a deep one. Each group shows clearly two distinct regions, a
centra] denser one, consisting of cells moving downwards, and a lighter
peripheral area, consisting of cells moving more or less regularly up-
wards. This constant cyclic movement is kept up so long as the aggre-
gation persists, and this may be for several days. In a good light the
aggregation soon disappears, 1 tut reappears again in a few seconds when
placed in the dark. If it be disturbed by the shaking of the vessel, it is
re-formed immediately the disturbance has ceased. The aggregation does
not appear to be due to currents set up in the liqnid either by heat or
evaporation; nor upon the presence or absence of oxygen or carbon
dioxide, except in so far as these may be necessary to maintain the
motility of the organism. The downward movement appears to be a
purely mechauical one. Experiments were also made with Euglena deses,
Ghlamydomonas, Volvox, Spirillum, and one of the fresh-water Peridinieaa,
in all of which the phenomena were visible, but with considerable varia-
tion in the extent to which it was produced. The author finally points

* Internat. Rev. gesamt. Hvdrobiol. u. Hvdrogr., iii. (1910-11) pp. 545-7.
t Bull. Jarcl. Imp. Bot. St. Petersbourg, x. (1910) pp. 1S1-5.
X Proc. Roy. Soc, ser. B., lxxxiii. (1910) pp. 94-6.

500 SUMMARY OF CCJRRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

• >ui the advantage of these movements to species which, like Euglma,
are often found in a confined space in very large numbers. A constant
circulation of them in all parts of the liquid is thus kept up, and they are
prevented from accumulating in such dense masses as would be detri-
mental to them. He suggests that some of the peculiar phenomena of
plankton distribution may be explained in this way.

Mastigocoleus testarum.* — This alga, which hitherto has only been
known from salt water, is now recorded by G. A. Nadson from the river
Bug, not far from the town of Nikolajew in South Russia, where the
water is only sometimes brackish. Later he found it again in absolutely
fresh water in the rivers Msta (<louv. Nowgorod) and Narowa (Gouv.
St. Petersburg), not far from their cataracts, where the alga bores into
the limestone. This fresh-water form, which the author calls Mastigo-
coleus testarum Lagerh. var. aquse-dulcis, is of a blue-green colour and
its filaments are 6 ■ 5-7 • 5 /a in diameter. It is distinguished from the
typical salt-water form by the size and position of its heterocysts, which
barely or not at all exceed the diameter of the vegetative cells ; they have
an intercalary or terminal position and are very rarely lateral. Two other
chalk-boring species are often found with M. testarum, namely Hyella
fontana Hub. & Jad. and Plectonema terebrans Born. & Flahault.

Injury to Water-cress Beds by Algae. | — The Board of Agriculture
have received specimens of Oscillatoria irrigua Kiitz., which was causing
great loss in some Hampshire water-cress beds, the alga having the
appearance of a black cobweb at the base of the plants, which degenerated
and died off. The algas may be eradicated by the use of copper sulphate,
one part to fifty million parts of water. The Board recommends that an
estimate of the amount of water in the beds be made, and then the copper
sulphate, enclosed in a piece of sacking, be slowly dragged through the
water until dissolved.

Red-snow.}— J.Murray gives a short and interesting account of the
phenomenon known as red-snow, which, according to Schmarda, was
mentioned by Aristotle. Remarks are made on its geographical distri-
bution, which is world-wide in suitable localities— although the alga does
not appear to be of general occurrence in snowy regions. In the Ant-
arctic it is less common than in the North Polar region. The Shackleton
Expedition found no indubitable red-snow, but it found abundance of
red Rotifers, which increased with prodigious rapidity, and formed con-
spicuous blood-red stains on stones at the margins of lakes. It is now
admitted that while Sphserella nivalis may be the commonest cause of
red-snow, animals of various kinds may take part in producing the
phenomenon.

Cell-division in Lyngbya.§ — W. H. Brown describes cell-division in
a marine species of Lyngbya (probably L. mqjuscula) occurring at Cold
Spring Harbor, Long Island. In a cell of this alga there is a large

* Bull. Jard. Imp. Bot. St. Petersbourg, x. (1910) pp. 151-3.
t Journ. Board Agric, xvii. (1911) pp. 988-9.
% Knowledge, xxxiv. (1911) n.s. viii. pp. 109-10.
§ Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 390-1.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 501

central body or nucleus, which in the stages between divisions is. except
for the absence of a limiting membrane, much like the resting-nuclei of
the higher plants. The nucleus contains a mesh of fine fibres, along
which small granules are scattered. The mesh is embedded in a clear
substance resembling nuclear sap. The mesh stains like linin, and the
granules like chromatin with Haidenhain's hamiatoxylin or Flemming's
triple ; although wanting a membrane, the nucleus is quite distinct from
the surrounding cytoplasm. As a cell of the Lyngbya approaches di-
vision, fine fibres appear around the nucleus in a plane perpendicular to
the longitudinal axis of the filament. These fibres, which closely reseml >le
the spindle fibres of other plants, are very numerous, and run from the
nucleus to the outer limits of the cytoplasm. They are all in practically
the same plane, and thus form a plate across the centre of the cell in the
place where the cross-wall, between the daughter-cells, is to be produced.
At the end of each fibre there is laid down against the cell-wall a small
irranule, which stains black with Haidenhain's hrematoxvlin. These
granules increase in size until they coalesce to form a ring around the
centre of the cell. This ring marks the place where the cross-wall is
to be formed, and it can still be seen, around the edge of this wall, after
the wall has grown completely across the cell. The author points out
that these facts tend to show that the nuclei of the Cyanophycese may
have functions similar to those of the nuclei of other plants. The presence
of the fibres may indicate paths of conduction from the nucleus to the
cell-wall.

Two Epiphytic Algae.* — J. W. Snow describes two new genera of
minute epiphytic fresh-water algas, containing each one species. Pirulus
gemmata is recorded from Guatemala and also from Switzerland, grow-
ing on liverworts and mosses. In its early vegetative state it shows
nothing distinctive, and might be mistaken for a Chlorella ; but in the
shape of its adult cell and in its mode of reproduction it is unique among
all green algae. The mature cell is pyriform, symmetrical, or irregular ;
reproduction is by budding, in which the smaller end elongates and is
cut off by a membrane, after which a separation may occur or not. The
author compares the fragmentation of the filaments to the similar process
in Hormidium, and discusses the possible causes.

Aeronema polymorpha, the second alga described, also grows on mosses
and liverworts, and on flower-pots in greenhouses, and may assume the
characteristics of a typical unicellular alga, or may take on the nature of
a well-branched filament. The form assumed by the plant is greatly
influenced by the concentration of the culture medium. Details are
given. The alga reproduces by means of zoospores, which are described.
Their mode of germination seems to be the same as that in Stigeoclonium.
The genus Aeronema is placed by the author near to Conferva or
Bumilleria.

Gonium pectorale.f — B. SchussDig has been successful in observing
the formation of gametes in Gonium perforate. The material appeared
in a culture-glass, and was presumably developed from resting-spores.

* Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 360-8 (1 pi.).

t Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., lxi. (1911) pp. 121-6 (1 pi.).

502 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Formation and fusion of the gametes was induced by the addition of a
•_' p.c. sugar solution to the culture. The gametes arose in colonies of
sixteen, of small size, one from each mother-cell. When the gametes
are ripe, they become free from the enveloping gelatinous sheath. The
structure resembles in the main that of the ordinary cells. They are
small, bare, and pyriform. After the gametes have swarmed for about
an hour, they begin to copulate, sometimes showing marked disinclina-
tion or inclination towards a special gamete. The process is described
in detail. The zygote rounds itself off, and in the course of a few hours
develops a thick membrane, which is not, as Chodat states, wrinkled. The
author allowed these hypnospores to remain dry for about eight to ten
days and then moistened them, whereupon after a few days they began
to germinate. Cell-division takes place and four microspores are formed.
These when ejected are bare, at first without cilia, hanging together and
passively motile. The connexion is probably caused by gelatinous matter.
The ejection is caused by mechanical pressure. After a time the spores
develop two cilia, and begin to move about in the water. Their further
course is not known. This account of the formation of gametes differs
greatly from that given previously by Chodat. Finally, the author gives
details of the growth of the cilia, which have never been properly de-
scribed, and adds remarks on certain abnormal growths similar to those
already observed and described by Migula.

New Sp&cies of Debarya.* — S. R. Price describes and figures a new
species of Debarya, collected from stagnant ponds on Sheep's Green,
Cambridge. Specimens were transferred to algal culture tubs, where
conjugation was observed. The process is Very similar to that described
for D. desmidioides and D. Hardyi. The author points out that Debarya
may be regarded as a form from which two lines of evolution diverge,
the one leading to the Mesocarpacese, and the other to the Desmidiaceas.

Pleodorina californica.t — E. Chatton publishes an exhaustive ac-
count of Pleodorina californica Shaw, which he has found and studied at
Banyuls-sur-mer. Other authors describe the appearance of this alga
in June, but Chatton records it as occurring at the end of April at
Banyuls He has succeeded in cultivating the alga and watching the
process of reproduction, which he describes for the first time. A mor-
phological study then follows. The rest of the paper is devoted to some
cytological observations, remarks on the systematic position of P. cali-
fornica, and finally some general reflections.

Corroding Alga.J — W. Bialosuknia has made some interesting re-
searches on Diplosphsera Chodati Bial., a pleurococcus alga isolated from
a lichen from the limestone of Saleve, viz. Lecanora tartarea Ach. Ex-
periments on this alga have shown that it possesses a power of corroding
the limestone rocks, and that this action is not the result of an organic
acid, but of a carbonic acid. The experiments are described in detail,
and similar work of other authors on other plants is discussed.

* New Phytologist, x. (1911) pp. 87-9 (1 pi.).

t Bull. Sci. France et Belgique, ser. 7, xliv. (1911) pp. 309-34.

t Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve, ser. 2, iii. (1911) pp. 6, 13-18 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 503

Californian Green Algae.*— D. H. Campbell points out that two
species of green alga?, Spondylomorum quaternarium Ehren. and Pitho-
phora 'CEdogon in Wittr., are not recorded in Collins1 Green Alga3of North
America, and are therefore new finds for central California. The former
is also a new record for America.

Diatomic Structure^ — A. A. C. Eliot Merlin writes on some new
diatomic structures discovered with a new Zeiss Apochromat. In Gras-
pedodiscus coscinodiscus the presence of secondaries is confirmed. The
shape of the primaries in Epithemiaturgida and Gy mbella gastroides Kiitz.
is described. The secondaries of Gomphonema geminatum Ag. are found
to resemble those of G. gastroides ; details of other species are also given.
The observations were made with working apertures varying between
1*8 and 0 • 95 N.A. The author considers it probable that few, if any,
diatomic valves possessing medium-sized primary perforations have such
passages into the interior of the organism unobstructed or unprotected
by caps pierced by finer holes. The limit of this capping is at present
unknown, but probably species possessing very fine primaries, such as
Naviculaceae, do not require such protection.

Algological Notes.]: — P. E. Kaiser continues his notes on Algee. The
first of the present contribution describes the finding of Enteromorpha
percursa J. Ag. in ditches of the saline marshes at Bad Elmen near
Magdeburg. The author discusses the formation of the thallus, which
may consist of as many as four cells in transverse section, arranged in
the form of a square. E. percursa (a common marine alga) has previously
been found inland in saline swamps near Teuditz (between Leipzig and
Magdeburg), and from the " Salzigen See " near Halle. The second note
records the presence of ITomazocladia germanica Richter on stones in the
Elbe above Schonebeck. The diatoms were enclosed in long gelatinous
sheaths 17-28/t broad, unbranched and brownish green. Richter has
recorded this species from Kotschau near Leipzig, aud stated that in
cultures it escaped from the sheath and lived free, thus showing that the
sheath was merely a protection for the frustules against the flowing water.
The water, both of the Elbe and that at Kotschau, is not quite devoid of
salt. In the third note the author records Fragilaria amphiceros Schiitt
from the Waginger See near Traunstein in Upper Bavaria. The form
approaches var. rhombica Grunow. It has till now only been found in
salt or brackish water.

Deformation of Ascophyllum nodosum. § — L. Lutz describes a re-
markable deformation on the thallus of Ascophyllum nodosum, which
takes the form of an infundibuliform branch. The author explains this
growth on the theory that for some reason the normal development of
the terminal mother-cell has been arrested, and since this cell is always
at the base of a small depression in A. nodosum, a hollow has been formed
by the continued growth of the surrounding cells. The cause of the
arrested development in the mother-cell cannot so far be accounted for,

* Torreya, xi. (1911) p. 17.

t Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, xi. (1911) p. 199-202.

% Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 329-32.

§ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, lvi. (1900) p. 60G.

504 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

since no parasite, either animal or vegetable, was detected in another
small branch where similar growth was just beginning.

Medulla-cells of Lammariacese.* — M. G. Thoday describes and
figures a reticulate thickening which occurs in the walls of the cells of
the medulla in Laminariacese. It was well-developed in the walls of
both the primary pith-filaments and the hyphse, but was not present in
the much thinner walls of the secondary sieve-tubes. After various ex-
periments she found that the thickenings depended entirely on the
methods followed in preserving, staining, mounting, etc., and are due
to wrinkling consequent ou partial dehydration ; and since they begin
to appear after very slight drying, they afford a remarkable indication of
the very mucilaginous nature of the longitudinal walls of the medulla-
cells in their normal state. At the base of the stipes, where all the
cell-walls of both cortex and medulla become much thickened and car-
tilaginous, this wrinkling does not occur on drying.

Fructification of Macrocystis.f — E. J. Hoffmann discusses the geo-
graphical distribution of Macrocystis pyrifera, and describes the results
of her studies on the fructification. She gives a resume of the work of
previous authors, and shows that some of them have arrived at erroneous
conclusions evidently through studying wrongly named material. The
author states that the fructification is found, not only on newly-
formed unsplit bladderless basal leaves, but also on branched leaves, with
or without a bladder, such leaves occurring near the holdfast of the plant.
The sori are not in furrows, but in wide patches on both sides of the leaf,
and consist of paraphyses and zoosporangia.

Ahnfeldtia gigartinoides. +— A. S. McFadden discusses the nature
of the carpostomes in the cystocarp of Ahnfeldtia gigartinoides. The
cystocarp is the only form of fruit known in this species ; and in each
cystocarp are formed some forty carpostomes, or long narrow irregular
slits which pass through the anticlinal layers of the pericarp. The carpo-
stomes are filled with several-celled filaments, which are projections of
the cells of the anticlinal rows. The origin of the carpostomes is doubt-
ful, but there seem to be indications that these slits are formed by
decomposition. She also discusses the difference between A. gigartinoides
and A. concinna.

Erythrophyllum delesserioides.§ — W. C. Twiss writes on the struc-
ture and development of the papillas and cystocarps of Erythrophyllum
deles serio ides, and describes them in detail. As a result of his studies, he
comes to the conclusion that this alga, by virtue of the character of its
fruiting proliferations, its so-called compound cystocarp, with spore-
groups separated from each other by partitions of vegetative cells, and
by virtue of its vegetative structure, belongs among the Gigartinacere,
as Agardh at first stated. Furthermore, the character of the carpogenic
branch, and the method of spore-formation, only strengthens the belief,
which the vegetative structure at once suggests, that its place, according
to the present classification, is very near to the Callymeniere.

* New Phytologist. x. (1911) pp. 68-70 (figs, in text).

t Univ. California Publications (Bot.) iv. (1911) pp. 151-8 (lpl.).

j Univ. California Publications (Bot.) iv. (1911) pp. 137-42 (1 pi.).

§ Univ. California Publications (Bot.) iv. (1191) pp. 159-76 (-4 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 505

Colacodasya.*— M. E. McFadden describes a new species of Cola-
codasya, found in southern California by Farlow, and later by Gardner. It
is parasitic on Mychodea episcopates J. Ag., and appears as little whitish
nodules along the Mycodea thallus. The penetration and manner of
growth both inside and outside the host are described. From the wart
of tissue outside the Mycodea thallus arise branches which bear the
organs of fructification. Antheridia, cystocarps, and tetrasporangia are
found, each borne on a different plant. The structure of the branches
is of the Polysiphonias type. The reproductive organs are described, and
the reasons are given in detail for placing this plant in Colacodasya. The
only other species of that genus is recorded from South Georgia.

Melobesise.f— Mine. P. Lemoine has made an important and ex-
haustive study of the anatomical structure of the Melobesire, and finds
that it serves as a sure guide to the classification of both genera and
species. The genera examined by her are Lithothamnium, Lithophyllum,
Archaeolithothamnium Rothpletz, Phymatolithon Foslie, Glathromorphum
Foslie, and Goniolithon Foslie. All the many species of these genera
have not been examined, but a certain number of species of each group
have been examined, including in each case those from various regions
warm and cold, those which form a crust, and those which branch. In
those species which branch, the basal encrusting portion has also been
taken into account. As a result of all this careful work, the author finds
that the anatomical differences of the genera and species correspond,
with but few exceptions, with the already recognized definitions of the
reproductive organs. All the species examined are described in the fullest
detail, and their synonymy and geographical distribution are given.
Several species are found to be but forms of one another, and the im-
portance of the presence of bispores or tetraspores respectively as a specific
character is shown to be over-rated. The author regards this variation
as arising rather from differences of climate, age of the spore, etc. The
fossil forms are taken into consideration, and the fundamental difference
of structure which exists between Lithothamnium and Lithophyllum is
shown to have existed since Silurian times. A synopsis of the characters
of all the species examined is given in the form of tables. The work is
well illustrated, and forms a most valuable addition to algal literature.

■'to*-

Classification of Melobesiese.J — Mme. Lemoine writes an important
paper on the classification of the Melobesiere, based on anatomical struc-
ture. The Corallineas have already been classified on similar lines by Weber
van Bosse, but till now the Melobesiese have been untouched from this
side. The author of the present paper, however, places the classification
of this group on a clear footing purely on anatomical characters She
divides Melobesieas into groups according to whether the species are
crust-forming or branched, the presence or absence of a hypothallus.
and the respective characters of hypothallus and perithallus. She de-
scribes five types of structure, represented by (1) Lithothamnium ; (2)
Lithophyllum ; (3) Archaeolithothamnium ; (i) Tenarea tortuosa ; and

* Univ. California Publications (Bot.) iv. (1911) pp. 143-50 (1 pi.).

t Ann. de l'lnstit. Oceanogr., ii. (1911) 213 pp. (5 pis. and figs, in text.).

X Bull. Soc. Bot. de France, cvii. (1910) pp. 323-31, 367-72.

506 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(5) Porolithon orikodes. Finally, the author divides up the genera
Lithothamnium and Lithophyllum into sections according to anatomical

characters, giving the species which fall into each section. A few words
arc given to the genera Meloiesia and Mastophora. This paper is of
great value to systematists, since it shows how the genera of the Melo-
liesiere can be distinguished in the absence of reproductive organs,
hitherto deemed indispensable; indeed, by means of anatomical cha-
racters, genera which have with difficulty been distinguished even with
the help of anatomical characters, can now be recognized with ease.

Lithophyllum fasciculatum.*— A. I). Cotton points out an omission
in the valuable Catalogue of British Marine Alga, published in 1902 by
Batters. That author there omits all mention of Lithophyllum fascicu-
latum Fosl. ( = Melobesia fasciculata in Harvey's Phycologia Britannica),
including instead its varieties under L. Racemus. Certain evidence shows
clearly that the omission was an oversight, and in the present paper
the distribution of the two species is given. L. Racemus Fosl. : North
Atlantic, Mediterranean, Adriatic, English Channel (Falmouth, only
dead specimens known), Bahamas, Red Sea, Indian Ocean (Mauritius.
Rodriguez). L. fasciculatum Fosl. : Co. Galway, Co. Cork, Co. Waterford.

Algae of the West Coast of Norway.f — H. Kylin writes on the
marine algfe of the west coast of Norway, which he studied during a
visit to a village near Bergen in 11)08. He remarks on the different
formations of the open and of the protected coast, dividing the former
into the Porphyra, CaUithamniou, Corattina, Giyartina, Himanthalia,
Alalia, and Laminaria formations. In the latter the formations are
Pelvetia,Fucus Areschougii, Ascophyllum Fucus, Fucus serratus, HaUdrys,
and Chord: i. These formations he discusses shortly. Then follows a list
of species found by him, to which he appends in many instances critical
notes and figures. He adds thirty-five new records to the alga; of that
coast, of which three are new to science, Pseudoprinysheimia penetrans,
Streblonema inclusum, and Asperococcus norvegicus.

Edward Perceval Wright (1834-1911)4— E. P.Wright is the subject
of an anonymous obituary notice. While a student at Trinity College,
Dublin, he became for twelve years editor of the Natural History Review ;
and while reading for his medical degree was lecturer in zoology and
botany. He qualified himself to specialize as an oculist, but, becoming
appointed locum tenens for W. H. Harvey, he determined to abandon
ophthalmological work in 1S66, and to take up science as his profession.
After his expedition to the Seychelles Islands in 1S67, the success of
which was injured by a shipwreck, he published a number of papers on
his results. In 1869 he was appointed Professor of Botany in succession
to Harvey, and published some important papers on the structure and
development of Alga?. He spent much time in putting the College
Herbarium into proper order. In the bibliography appended to the
notice sixty of Wright's papers are cited.

* Journ. Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 115-17.

t Arkiv Botanik, x. (1910) pp. 1-37.

% Notes Bot. School Inn. Coll. Dublin, ii. (1910) pp. 91-7 (portrait).]

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 507

Fungi.
(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

Homothallic Conjugation in Rhizopus nigricans.* — Florence A.
McCormick records an undoubted case of conjugation between two
closely approximate parts of the same hypha. The material was grown
from spores on bread moistened with a solution of grape-sugar. Blakeslee
had already admitted the possibility that a homothallic race may occur
in a normally heterothallic species, such as Rhizopus nigricans.

Norwegian Mucorini. II. f — 0. Hagem published his first paper on
the Mncors of the soil in 1907. He now gives the results of culture
experiments to test nutrition and growth conditions. The behaviour of
these moulds in these respects differs in the various species. About
thirty species in all have been isolated from the soil ; the differences
found to exist among them, as to the substances on which they can live,
are described, but, in general, the author found that fungi are obliged
to reduce all nitrogen compounds into ammonia before they can utilize
them as nutriment.

These soil fungi are harmful, so far as they withdraw ammoniacal
salts from the soil, changing them into fungal albumen ; they are
beneficial in decomposing the nitrogen compounds of decaying vegetation
and in transforming them into ammoniacal compounds.

Infection of the Vine by Plasmopara viticola.^: — II. Muller-Thiirgau
has carried out a series of infection experiments on vine-leaves to study
the methods by which the fake mildew fungus spreads so rapidly. The
longer the time given, the more infections were found on the leaves,
which were kept in a damp chamber. Very rarely were any spores found
to have pierced the upper epidermis ; usually infection took place by the
stomata of the under surface ; if, however, the epidermis was scratched
or wounded, the spores germinated and entered the leaf at the injured
spot. The best results were obtained with young leaves. Even when
older leaves were infected, the fungus failed to grow with vigour, and
only a few conidiophores were formed.

Experiments with Phytophthora.§ — G. H. Pethybridge has made
a series of experiments to test the theory that potato-blight is kept alive
and spread by means of dormant mycelium in the tuber. Among other
experiments, he planted thirty-two diseased tubers, and though many of
them rotted in the ground fifty-three plants developed, not quite so robust
as those grown from healthy tubers, but perfectly free from the fungus.
Later they were attacked by the disease in the ordinary fashion from
wind-borne spores, the outstanding leaflets being first infected, the stalks
meanwhile remaining free from the fungus. He concludes that there is
no evidence at present to show that the disease is caused otherwise than
by aerial spores. Diseased tubers left exposed might very well produce a
crop of spores which would easily give rise to an epidemic of Phytophthora.

* Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 229-30 (1 fig.).

t Vid.-Selsk. Skr. I. Math. -Nat. Kl., iv. (1910) 152 pp. See also Bot. Cen-
tralis., cxvi. (1911) pp. 256-7.

% Centralbl. Bakt.,xxix. (1911) pp. 683-95 (fig.).
§ Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc, xiii. (1911) pp. 12-27.

508 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Nuclear Evolution in Ascomycetes.* — A. Gruilliermond reviews the
whole history of nuclear discovery in the Ascomycetes, giving special
attention to work done on Humaria rutilans, Peziza catinus, Pustularia
vesiculosa, and Qalactinia succosa, with an account of his own observations
and work on these forms. He concludes that the number of chromosomes
is constant in the three divisions of the spore nucleus of the ascus, and
he therefore dismisses the theory of a second reduction during spore-
formation.

Mildew of the Vine in Poland.f — J. Brzezinski states that the
vine is not frequently cultivated in Poland on a large scale, though
there are vines in most private gardens. Oidium Tuckeri has occurred
only occasionally up to the present, and generally on plants recently im-
ported. The author, however, records an outbreak of the mildew which
re- appeared three successive years. He found also the perithecia of
Uncinula americana, the perfect fruit form, but only in more sheltered
positions. In the autumn of 1910, which was exceptionally cold, no
specimen of Uncinula could be found. The parasite, however, had been
so far acclimatized as to persist during three successive seasons.

Oak-mildew.} — Paul Magnus discusses the question as to the
affinities of this mildew. He decides that the Oidium belongs to the
genus Mkrosphsera. The Pyrennsean oak Quercus Tozza was the first
and the most severely attacked from western France down to Morocco,
and he argues that a Mkrosphsera allied to M. Alni has attacked the
oak as a new host, and so far has only formed oidia. Other cases of
such transference from host to host are quoted. The American tree
Quercus rubra remained untouched by the fungus side by side with
European oaks that were attacked.

Pythium de Baryanum.§ — L. Peters found this fungus attacking
seedlings of Pelargonium, both before and after the roots were formed.
The plants are most liable to be attacked in heavy damp soil. Spinach
plants were also attacked by the same fungus, and the stems blackened
at the base. The fungus was either Pythium de Baryanum or one nearly
allied.

Monochytrium, a New Genus of the Chytridiales.|| — R. F. Griggs
found the new fungus on the ragweed, Ambrosia artemisifolia. It
inhabits the cells of the host, usually epidermal or hypodermal, but
causes very little hypertrophy. It is difficult to find and is not abundant.
Monochytrium is distinguished by the binucleate sexual resting-spores
and the solitary zoosporangia. A detailed account of the development
and cytology of the fungus is given so far as has been observed.

Helvella crispa.lf — D. Carruthers has followed the development of
ascus and spores in Helvellee, and gives an account of her observations.

* Rev. Gen. Bot , xxiii. (1911) pp. 89-120 (2 pis.).

t Bull. Int. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1911, pp. 1-6.

% Ver. Ges. Luxemburg Naturfr., 1910, pp. 108-111. See also Centralbl. Bakt.,
xxx. (1911) p. 114.

§ Gartenflora, lix. (1910) p. 209. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxix. (1911) pp.
115-6. || Obio Naturalist, x. (1911) pp. 44-54 (2 pis.).

^ Ann. Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 244-52 (2 pis ).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 509

There is a loose tangle of hyphae in the hypothecium, each cell contain-
ing one, two, or several nuclei. Certain of these nuclei fuse in pairs,
and the cells in which they occur produce the ascogenous hyphae. The
characteristic crozier is formed with a terminal uninucleate cell and a
penultimate binucleate cell, from which the ascus arises. Occasionally
the end cell fuses with the stalk and forms another ascus. Evidence
was obtained that mitosis shows two chromosomes in the vegetative
hyphae and four in the ascogenous hyphae. On the formation of the
ascus a second fusion takes place, the chromatin of the nuclei remain-
ing distinct until the spireme stage. Division of the ascus nucleus for
spore formation takes place, and the writer holds these two constitute a
meiotic phase. Extrusion of chromatin bodies was observed ; the spireme
thread showed longitudinal duplication. A certain amount of contrac-
tion then takes place ; afterwards the thread loosens out again, and finally
breaks up into four gemini. A final contraction takes place when the
chromosomes pass on to the spindle. In the first two divisions there are
four chromosomes on the spindle ; the third division is brachymeiotic ;
there are four chromosomes in the prophore, only two passing to each
pole.

Mushroom Poisoning.* — J. Dearness writes on the personal factor in
poisoning due to eating fungi, and calls attention to the fact that many
people find that certain articles of diet, wholesome usually, are more
or less poisonous for them. There are these dietetic idiosyncrasies
that apply to fungi as to other articles of food. Again, he states that
imagination may have a good deal to do with severe poisoning, a slight
indigestion being magnified to a serious illness. Besides these cases,
the fungi may be too old, or too long gathered. He gives instances
of poisoning to support these statements, and concludes that it is risky
to recommend fungi as a diet to the uninitiated.

Yeast-cells and Fermentation. f — Harold Wager read a paper on
the yeast-cell before the Institute of Brewing ; he described the struc-
ture of the cell and the form of the nucleus, with its large vacuole,
and explained the methods used to examine the cells under high powers
of the Microscope. The yeast-cell contains glycogen, which increases
as fermentation proceeds ; and as a result of the great quantity of
glycogen produced, fermentative activity ceases and the cell sinks to the
bottom of the liquid. After a time the glycogen decreases, the cells rise
to the surface, and fermentation begins again.

Study of Fungi imperfecti.J — H. Leininger selected for culture-
experiment a species of Pestalozzia which grew on dead branches of
Mesembryanthemum and Echeveria, and which agreed with the descrip-
tion of Pestalozzia palmarum Cooke. As a result of his cultures he
finds : — 1. P. pcdmarum produces similar spores in pycnidia, in pseudo-
pycnidia, in layers and singly on hyphse. 2. The surest method of
producing pycnidia is to withdraw nourishment from the mycelium
developing in culture solution. 3. Pseudopycnidia are produced in the

* Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 75-8.

t Journ. Inst. Brewing, xvii. (1911) pp. 2-15.

J Centralbl. Bakt., xxix. (1911) pp. 3-35 (14 figs.).

An//. 16th, 1911 2 L

5 Ll I SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

open on solid substrata, as well as in solutions where there is lack of
nutrition. 4. Mycelium, taken from a culture solution and placed in a
damp chamber, forms pycnidia. 5. Layer and single spores are formed
in culture solutions of maltose, cane-sugar, etc. 6. The fungus will
grow in 10 p.c. citric and tartaric acid solutions, but the development is
abnormal. The author calls for a revision of the fungi imperfecti on
physiological lines.

Genus Phomopsis.* — H. Diedicke has studied V. Hohnel's genus
Phomopsis, under which were grouped certain well-marked forms of the
genus Phoma. He finds a large number of species with the same
characteristics : perithecia with a sclerotic wall seated on a broad basis,
colourless below and dark above, with thread-like or awl-shaped sporo-
phores and narrow fusiform spores. He lists 107 species for Germany,
previously included under Phoma, and probably all of them pyenidial
forms of Diaporthe.

Gloeosporium Ribis.f — Ed. Janczewski and B. Xamyslowski found
a species of Gloeosporium on the leaves of Ribes luteum in the Botanic
Gardens at Cracovia. The fungus was also found on another species
of Ribes in the sub-genus Parilla. The pustules formed ou the leaves
produced either macroconidia or microconidia, the latter extremely
minute. Germination of the macroconidia took place easily in nutrient
solutions, and secondary macroconidia or microconidia were formed.
Inoculation experiments were tried without success.

Studies in North American Hyphomycetes.t — D. R. Sumstine has
made a study of numerous species of Rhinotrichum, a colourless Hypho-
mycete closely related to Botrytis and to Sporotrichum, but differentiated
from the latter by the upright habit of the fertile branches. The author
re-describes the species from the different American collections, and gives
diagnoses of two new forms. He also gives an account of Olpitrichum,
a genus with, so far, two species in America.

Tilletia horrida in Rice-meal. § — P. Filter states that for many
years the large echinulate spores of some smut had been recognized
in rice-meal ; he has been able finally to determine it as Tilletia horrida,
first discovered as a parasite of rice-plants in Japan, and described by
Takahashi. It was at a later date discovered in the United States. It
has now been found in India over a large territory. Germination of the
spores was attempted and failed.

Uredinese. — V. Tubeuf || discusses the question of the absence of
uredospores on pine-needles. He suggests that it is because the needles
are infected by the sporidia of the teleutospores, which produce the
JEcidial or Cseoma generation. Infection does not take place through
the stomata, but on the young and tender needles through the cuticle,

* Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 1-35 (3 pis.).
t Bull. Int. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1910 (19H) pp. 791-5 (3 figs.)
% Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 45-56 (2 pis.).
§ Centralbl. Bakt., xxix. (1911) pp. 342-6 (4 figs.).

|| Nat. Zeitschr. Forst.-Landwirtsch, vii. (1910). See also Centralbl. Bakt.,
xxix. (1911) pp 88-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 511

usually between two cells. In Chrysomyxa Abietis the mycelium winters
in the needles, and forms new teleutospore sori early in the year ; these
spores reinfect other newly-formed needles.

W. Tranzschel* has recorded the results of his infection experiments
with Uivedineas. Among other interesting facts, he states that Puccini"
Eriophori forms aecidia on Ligularia sibirica and Senecio paluster ; Puc-
cinia lif oralis on Juncus Gerardi forms fecidia on various species of
Sonchus, and Puccinia Maydis develops pycnidia and aecidia on Oxalis.

A. D. Selby f reports the appearance of the blister-rust of white pine,
Peridermium Strobi, in the United States. It is a stage of the blister-
rust of currants and gooseberries, and has been well known for some
time in Europe, particularly on American white pine. The occurrence
has been traced to plants imported from Germany via France. Efforts
are being made to check the disease from spreading.

W. P. Fraser % records the results of a series of cultures of hetercecious
rusts on plants in Nova Scotia. He succeeded in connecting Melampsor-
opsis Gassandrse Arthur on Picea with the teleutospore stage on the
bog -plant Chamsedaphne. Melampsoropsis Abietina, also on Picea, pro-
duced uredospores and teleutospcres on Ledum grcenlctndicam. Several
other species were more or less experimented with, and the different
stages in the life-history almost certainly proved.

P. Dietel§ contributes a study as to the geographical distribution of
the genera Uromyces and P actinia, based on Sydow's Monographia Ure-
dinearum. He finds in the two hemispheres 16 p.c. of Paccinise common
to both ; for Uromyces only 10 p.c. He considers that the number of
species introduced by man is so small as to be negligible in such an
enumeration. In Australia he finds that about 70 p.c. of the Paccinise
are endemic, and 30 p.c. of Uromyces species.

Mikio Kasai|| has published an account of the genus Phragmidium
in Japan, forming the third part of the " Contributions to the Myco-
logical Flora" of that country. He lists 17 species: 1 on Potmtilla,
6 on Rosa, 9 on Rubus, and 1 on Sanguisorba. Three species are new.

Th. Lindfors^T records two new species of Uredines, Geeoma Violas
and G. cernuse (on Saxifraga cemua), in Sweden, also Puccinia albulensis
(on Veronica alpind), new to that country. He further states that the
spores of P. dovrensis are seen to be warted under a very high magnifi-
cation.

Germination of Ustilago Spores.** — H. Zimmerman employed for
experiment ears of barley infected with Ustilago H'ordei grown in 1907.
He inoculated different kinds of barley during the following years, and
publishes the names of the resisting varieties. The spores were capable
of germination and of infecting fresh crops for a period of three years.

* Trav. Musee Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersbourg, vii. (1910) pp. 1-19. See also
Pot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp. 152-3.

t Ohio Naturalist, xi. (1911) pp. 285-6.

j Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 67-74. § Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 160-5.

|| Trans. Supporo Nat. Hist. Soc, iii. (1910) pp. 27-51 (1 pi.). See also Ann.
Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 194-5.

% Srensk. Bot. Tidskr., iv. (1910) pp. 197-202. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi.
(1911) p. 569. ** Zeitscbr. Prlanzenkr., xxi. (1911) pp. 131-3.

2 I, 2

512 SUMMARY OF CURUENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Phosphorescence of Pleurotus japonicus.* — S. Kawamura states
that this fungus is a poisonous species, found on dead beech-trunks
throughout Japan. Neither the mycelium nor the stalks give out the
light, which is strictly confined to the gills of the pileus. When re-
duced to 0° temperature the light ceased ; it was strongest from 12°
to 15° C. Experiments were made with poisons, etc., and results are
given.

Boletus impolitus.f — Rene Maire gives a history of this species,
which was found by Fries in Sweden and described by him. It is very
rare, but has been found several times throughout western Europe.
Maire has decided that the Mediterranean species, Boletus corsicus,
B. sardons, and B. tlemcensis, belong to B. impolitus as varieties differing
in the form of the stalk. It is a good esculent species ; var. corsicus
is sold in large quantities in the towns of Corsica under the name
mucchiaiolo. The var. tlemcensis should be very abundant in the
cork woods of Algeria, and might be easily marketable.

Hypochnus Form of Fistulina Hepatica.J — Marin Molliard suc-
ceeded in growing the fungus on gelatin of carrot. A small portion
of the tissue was transplanted to the culture, and formed at first a
floccose mass of mycelium ; later, small bodies were formed with tubes
and basidiospores quite normally developed. In addition, Molliard noted
that on the hyphae spreading over the culture there were here and there
basidia formed at the ends of the hyphae, exactly like a form of
Hypochnus.

Study of Ithyphallus impudicus and Mutinus caninus.§ — Ch.
van Bambeke has examined very early stages of these fungi, especially
the basal cup or volva. He cut microtome sections of the eggs when they
were about 1 mm. in diameter. He finds two distinct periods of growth
— one of continued expansion till the stalk is formed, and a further
rest-period while the fruit-body is ripening. He describes the ap-
pearance of the hyphae and their function in regard to the rest of the
plant.

Assimilation of Nitrogen by Fungi.|| — L. H. Pennington has
carried out a series of culture experiments with Fusarium, Penicillin)/!,
and Aspergillus in carefully controlled solutions. The results did not
support the generally accepted notion that fungi assimilate atmospheric
nitrogen. Further experiments are to be carried out in order to gain
more accurate data.

German Fungus-flora.^ — W. Migula has issued two more fascicles
of his Flora. They deal with the genera Phlebia, Radulum, Hijdnum,

* Bot. Mag. Tokyo, xxiv. (1910) pp. 281-4. (Japanese.) See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxiv. (1911) p. 440.

t Bull. Soc. Bot. France, ix. (1909) pp. lix-lxiii.

J Bull. Soc. Bot. France, ix. (1909) pp. 553-6 (1 pi.).

§ Mem. Acad. Roy. Belg. Sci., ser. 2, ii. (1910) 26 pp. (4 pis. and 3 figs.). See
also Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) p. 19.

|| Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxviii. (1911) pp. 135-9.

«[ Flora von Deutscbland, v. lief. 107-8 (1911) pp. 145-76 (10 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 513

and with the allied genera Phseodon, A maurodon, and Hericium, followed
by Irpex and Sistotrema. A beginning is made with Polyporacea), and the
first genus, Merulius, is partly described.

Fungi in the Rhizoids of Leafy Hepatics.* — A. J. M. Garjeanne
has examined a large number of these hepatics, and gives in tabular
form the results of his observations. He also made cultures of the
fungi and culture experiments, all of which are explained in detail. He
sums up the general results thus : — 1. The appearance of fungi in the
roots of foliose hepatics is of common occurrence though not constant, as
the same species may have hyphre in the rhizoids, or may be free from
hyphas, and the fungi may belong to various species. 2. In some
hepatics (Calypogeia trichomanis, Lophozia inflata, etc.) the fungus forms
haustoria, which pierce the neighbouring green cells, in others {Cepha-
lozia bicuspidata and G. connivens) the hyphas form compact clumps on
the tips of the rhizoids (fungus-galls). 3. In Lophozia inflata the fungus
forms thickenings of cellulose and glycogen when it enters the rhizoids,
and these thickenings tend to retard the progress of the fungus.

The author could not find that any benefit resulted from the presence
of the fungus, and harm is certainly done to the host-plant. The
infection takes place by way of the soil ; the chlorophyll cells are not
easily invaded, and one will be packed with hyphas before the neighbour-
ing cell is entered. Garjeanne isolated and determined a Mucor which
occurs very frequently, nearly allied to M. racemosus, which he names
M. rhizophilus. It forms large chlamydospores.

British Mycology. f — The spring and summer fungus forays of the
British Mycological Society were held in the neighbourhood of Wrexham,
and descriptions of the day's proceedings and more important collections
of fungi are given, together with lists of all the fungi and mycetozoa
observed during the forays. Harold Wager, the President of the Society
for the year, gave an address on the problems which arise in connexion
with the morphology and physiology of fungi.

A new fungus was sent by W. L. W. Eyre to G. Bresadola, who
determined it as new, and describes it as Poria Eyrei.

A. D. Cotton publishes a correction, Glavaria straminia having been
figured in a previous number of the Transactions as C. persimilis. A
description and detailed account of C. straminia is given, with notes on
some other Glavarise.

W. N. Cheesman observed and collected fungi and mycetozoa in the
Rocky Mountains, on the occasion of his visit there along with members
of the British Association. He describes the localities and conditions
of growth, and gives lists of the plants observed.

A. D. Cotton publishes notes on recent work done on Goprinus, being
a summary of Buller's work on that genus published in researches on
fungi. The function and importance of cystidia in connexion with spore
dispersal are chiefly dealt with.

E. M.Wakefield gives some interesting and useful notes on the ana-
tomical structure of Grandinia, a little-known genus. In G. mucida she

* Flora, cii. (1911) pp. 147-85 (2 pis. and 9 figs.).

t Trans. Brit. Mycol. Soc, iii. pt. 4 (1911) pp. 233-89.

514 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

found the tissue studded with large spherical vesicles of a yellowish colour,
filled with oily contents. These vesicles form a more or less regular
series parallel with the substratum. No vesicles were found in G. granu-
losa.

Lists of fungi, new or rare in Britain, are contributed by A. Lorrain
Smith and Carleton Eea. They sum up the systematic discoveries of
the year, and keep their readers in touch with British work. Each list
contains one species new to science. The rare species of the larger
fungi are illustrated in three coloured plates drawn by E. A. Rea.

Plant Diseases in the Tropics.* — G. Delacroix has published a
volume dealing with the maladies to which cultivated plants are subject
in warm countries. He treats these under two headings, non-parasitic
and parasitic. Under the first of these are described various abnormali-
ties, and especially gummosis, which is due to different causes. The
parasitic diseases are discussed under four groups : Bacteria, Fungi, Alga?,
and Phanerogams. Descriptions of parasitic fungi occupy most of the
book, especially the parasites of coffee, tea, cocoa, and sugar-cane. The
latter plant suffers also from Nematodes, of which an account is given.
The work was interrupted by tha death of the author ; it has been taken
up and finished by Andre Maublanc.

Diseases of Plants. — Fr. Bubakf describes a new fungus, Thyro-
coccum SiraTcoffi, which he found infesting and damaging the branches
of the mulberry; when seedling trees are attacked they are completely
destroyed. The fungus, one of the Tubercularieas, forms at first small
pustules under the bark, which produce muriform brown spores when the
fungus has spread to the surface. The mycelium penetrates the cortex
and the host.

Stephanie Herzfeld \ has discovered a new species of Taphrina on
Polystichum Lonchitis. It is noteworthy that the new species has no
stalk-cell to the ascus, and forms hyphse which penetrate the tissue of the
host.

C. W. Edgerton § describes the more frequent diseases of sugar-cane ;
the most widely-spread is a red decay caused by the fungus Colletotrichum
falcatum. It fructifies very rarely. The nodes are the chief point of
attack, and in the later stages the leaves wither and decay. Plants
attacked lose in sugar-content. Certain varieties of sugar-cane are
immune to the disease, and the cultivation of these is recommended.
Another disease of the cane — which has an odour of pine-apple, and is
called pine-apple disease — is due to the fungus Thielaviopsis ethaceticus,
the mycelium of which grows through the entire stem. Treatment with
Bordeaux mixture hinders the disease. A root disease due to Marasmius
plicatus is also described.

* Maladies des Plantes cultivees dans les pays chauds. Paris : 1911, ix. and
595 pp. (70 text-pis.).

t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxviii. (1911) pp. 533-7 (1 pi.).

t Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., Ix. (1910) pp. 249-54 (8 figs.). See also Centralbl.
Bakt., xxix. (1911) p. 88.

§ Agric. Exp. Stat. Louisiana State Univ. Bull. No. 120 (1910). See also
Centralbl. Bakt., xxix. (1911) pp. 94-5.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 515

T. H. Johnston * records a severe attack by Monilia fructigena on
peaches, plums, apricots, cherries, apples and pears. The outbreak was
favoured by moist warm weather.

P. Magnus f found canker-like swellings on the stems or leaf -stalks
of a species of Zizyphus in the Transvaal caused by a fungus. The
mycelium is intercellular and forms haustoria, which pierce the cells
and forms on the surface many-celled conidia. The fungus is one of
the Mucedinea3 Dictyo3poreae and has been named by Magnus Hyalo-
dema Evansii g. etsp. n.

I. Miyatre J has examined the rice plants of Japan, and has discovered
a large number of fungi causing more or less serious diseases. Many or
most of them are new species belonging to the Pyrenomycetes, or to the
Fungi imperfecti.

E. J. Butler § describes Taphrina maculans sp. n., common on tur-
meric {Curcuma longa) in the Bombay Presidency. The fungus forms
spots on both sides of the leaf, though these are generally more nu-
merous on the upper surface ; they do not cause any distortion. It is
remarkable for the large haustoria, which are found chiefly in the cells
of the epidermis and hypodermis of the host ; they are formed of densely
intertwisted hyphae, which arise from a common stem and ultimately
form a solid body. The fungus does not destroy, but seriously injures
the leaves and weakens the vitality of the whole plant.

In a leaflet || issued under the auspices of the Board of Agriculture
and Fisheries, an account is given of scab diseases of potato, more
especially of the one caused by Oospora. This fungus attacks the tubers
while young, forming scattered rough scabs or patches on the surface.
The injury is confined to the surface of the tuber. Various remedies for
scab are suggested.

R. Lambert If describes cases of disease due to Glceosporium, He
found this fungus forming dark spots on bananas. The species
differed from G. musarum, previously recorded. He also describes a
disease of ivy caused by Phyllosticta hedericola and Gloeosporium para-
doxum.

C.Leslie Coleman** describes a disease of areca nuts called "koleroga,"
which is caused by a Phytophthora similar to the species P. omnivora ;
and the view that it is a form of the species was strengthened by a success-
ful series of inoculation cultures on a large series of plants. He does
not think it is the same Phytophthora as the one found on cacao plants.

Insects as Fungus-carriers.ff — L. Mercifer considers that insects are
active agents in the dissemination of ergot spores, and cites the case of

* Agric. Gaz. N.S. Wales, xxi. (1910) p. 194. See also Bot. Centralbl., xxix.
(1911) p. 101.

t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxviii. (1910) pp. 377-80 (1 pi.).

\ Journ. Coll. Agric. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, ii. 4 (1910) pp. 237-76 (2 pis.). See
also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) p. 170-1.

§ Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 36-8 (1 pi.).

|| Leaflet No. 137, 4 pp. (4 figs.)

1 Gartenflora, lix. (1910) p. 409. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxix. (1911) p. 248.
** Dep. Agric. Mysore State, Mycol. Ser., Bull. ii. (1910). See also Centralbl.
Bakt., xxix. (1911) pp. 248-9.

tt C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911), pp. 300-2

516 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

one of the Diptera3, Sciara Thomse, which frequented LoUum permne, a
grass that is subject to attacks of the ergot fungus. He found conidia
of the sphacelia stage of the ergot attached to the hairs of the insect and
also in the digestive tube. The natural inference is that these conidia
are transported to other Lolium plants.

Notes on Mycology.* — F. von Hohnel continues his descriptions of
fungi collected in Java. He describes a great many new species, and
establishes the following new genera : Koordersiella and Loranthomyces
(Sphaeriaceaa) ; Coccoidella (Coccoideaceas) ; Discodothis (Dothideaceaj) ;
Trichopeltopsis (near to Dunerosporium) ; Schiffnerula (Englerulaceae) ;
Myxasterina and Microporella (Excipulacere) ; Araneomyces (Mucedinese).

Notes on Fungi. f — G. Massee gave an address to the mycologists
of the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union, in which he advised special
study of a group or even of a single genus, not only the systematic
side of the question but the ecology of fungi, and the study of the
irregular occurrence of so many species.

Harold Wager \ in his address described the development of an
Agaric from mycelium to spore-formation. There are two nuclei in
the basidium at an early stage, which fuse together, and the nucleus
thus formed divides twice to form the four nuclei of the spores. The
origin of the binucleate mycelium has not been traced, though some
spores have been found to have two nuclei before they leave the sterig-
mata.

Fungus Foray at Sandsend.§ — C. Crossland describes the foray of
the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union to Sandsend, in September last. The
woods in the neighbourhood are stocked with well-grown native timber-
trees and shrubs, while quantities of exotic shrubs grow freely. A
number of Agarics (six) new to Britain were found ; a considerable
variety of species of microfungi were also collected and examined. The
list of species reaches the large total of 563 species, 145 of which are new
to the Mulgrave district.

Mycological Flora of Oak-tree Slime-flux. — Ludwig Rose has
isolated a number of organisms from the slime that issues from wounds
in the oak-tree. He made cultures from six different trees in the
neighbourhood of Berlin, and in all cases he found the fungus Endo-
myces Magnusii, with which he made a series of experiments as to its
physiological and fermentative properties. He found also the oak-yeast
Saccharomy codes Ludwigii, and a bacterial fungus, Leuconostse (Acteo-
bactcriurn) Lagerheimii sp.n.

* SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, (1910) p. 813. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911)
pp. 207-9.

t Naturalist, 1911, pp. 26-27.

+ Tom. cit., pp. 27-8.

§ Naturalist, 1911, pp. 21-6.

|] Wochenschr. Brauerei, xxvii. (1910) Nos. 42-7 (5 pis. and 31 figs). See also
Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 131-3.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 517

Broil i, J. — Versuche mit Brand-infektion zur Erzielang brandfreier Gersten-
stainme. [Research by infection with smut-spores to arrive at immune va-
rieties of barley.)

[So far the experiments have had very doubtful results.l

Nat. Zeitschr. Forst.-Landw., viii. (1910) "pp. 335-44 (7 figs.).
See also Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 200-1.
Diedicke, H. — Die gattung Plenodomus Preusz.

[An account of the genus Plenodomus, with its affinities, and of the species
included in it.] Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 137-41 (1 pi.).

Eriksson, Jak ob — Mycoplasmatheorie.

[A discussion of Zach's researches on the rusts of cereals, and on the myco-
plasma theory.]

SB. Ahad. Wiss. Math.-Nat. Kl., cxix. (1910) pp. 1043-50.

Engelke, C. — Eine seltem Pyrenomyceten Art. (A rare species of Pyrenomycetes.)

[A specimen of Nummularia lutea found on Alnus glutinosa near Hanover.]

Nat. Ges. Hannover Bot. Abt., 1910, pp. 39-46.
See also Bot. Centralbl, cxiv. (1911) p. 439.

Fair man, Charles E. — Fungi Lyndonvillenses novi vel minus cogniti. (Fungi
new or rare from Lyndonville.)

[Eight microfungi are described, all but one new to science.]

Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 145-52 (7 figs.).

Fries, R. E. — Gasteromyceter, discomyceter, och myvomyceter insamlade under

Svenska Botaniska Foreningens excursion till Aelfkarleo, Sept. 1910. (3aste-

romycetes, Discomycetes, and Myxomycetes collected during the excursion of

the Svenska Botaniska Foreningen to Alfkarleo.)

Svensk. bot. Tidskr., iv. (1910) pp. 98-99.
See also Bot. Centralbl, cxvi. (1911) p. 5G9.

Hohnel, Fr. v. — Resultate der Revision von Paul Henning's Pilzgattungen.
(Results of the revision of Paul Henning's new genera of fungi.)

[A very large number are condemned as redundant, or imperfectly described.]

Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 166-75.

Kaufman n, F. — Die westpreuszischen Pilze der Gattungen Phlegmacium und
Inoloma. (The West Prussian fungi of the genera Phlegmacium and Inoloma.)
[There are fifty-eight species described, with synoptic tables.]

Ber. Westpreusz. Bot. Zool. Yer. (1910) 10 pp.
See also Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) p. 195.

Ma ire, Rene — Contribution a l'etude de la flore mycologique de la Tunisie.
(Contribution to the mycological flora of Tunis.)

[Collections made during the session of the Botanical Society in Tunis in
1909.] Bull Soc. Bot. France, ix. (1909) pp. cclxv-lxxxi (1 pi. and 5 figs.).

Massee, G. — Fungi exotici. XI.

[Descriptions are given of eleven new species, one, Eutypa caulivora, a
serious parasite on Para rubber.]

Bull B. Bot. Gard. Kew, vii. (1910) pp. 249-53 (1 pi.).

Migcla, W. — Kryptogamen Flora. (Cryptogamic Flora : Fungi.)
[Descriptions of Polyporus Fomes, etc.]

Flora von Deutschland, Oesterreich und der Schweiz, v. Lief. 109-10,

pp. 177-208 (10 pis.).
Rick — Fungi Austro-Americani, xi.-xviii.

[As Rick's manuscript was lost in transmission, the species have been
named by Theissen, with the assistance of Bresadola and Rehm.]

Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 175-84.
Sydow, H. & P.— Fungi.

[Tbe fungi of the German Central Africa Expedition,
1907-8, under the leadership of the Duke of Mecklen-
burg.] Scientific Results, ii. (1910) pp. 94-101.
See also Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 193-9.

,, ,, Novae Fungorum Species, vi. (New species of fungi.)

[Species of microfungi from various localities.]

Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 142-6 (1 pi.)

518 SUMMARY OF CUREENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Sulc, Karel — " Pseudovitellus " und ahnliche gewebe der Homopteren sind
Wohnstatten symbiotischer Saccharomycetex (" Pseudovitellus " and similar
tissues of the Homoptera as enclosures for symbiotic Saccharomyces.)

[The fungus is determined as Cycadomyces g. n. ; several new species of
Saccharomyces are also isolated.]

SB. k. Bdhm. Gcs. Wiss. Math.-Nat. CI. (1910) 3, 39 pp. (18 figs.).

Theiszen, F.— Fungi aliquot Bombayensis a Rev. Ed. Blatter collecti. (Fungi
from Bombay, collected by Rev. Ed. Blatter.)

[A number of rare exotic species are described, several of them new.]

Ann. MycoL, ix. (1911) pp. 153-9 (1 fig.).

Lichens.
(By A. Lorrain Smith.)

Nutrition of Lichens.* — F. Tobler points out that certain products
in the mutabilisni of lichens are peculiar to them alone, and only pro-
duced by fungus and alga combined. It has been held that the fungus
received most benefit in the. symbiotic relationship, being dependent on
the alga for carbohydrates. Tobler points out that the fungus is often
saprophytic on plant remains, scraps of soil, humus, etc., and in some
epiphytic lichens even parasitic on the host leaf. Modern writers, who
regard the fungus as parasitic on the alga, point out the dead algal cells
as proof of their views. Tobler repeats that the fungus takes water and
inorganic substances from the soil, and is able as a saprophyte to procure
also carbohydrates without the aid of the alga.

As to the dead algal cells, he points out that assimilation is difficult
in the conditions under which they live, badly lighted and deprived
largely of carbonic acid gas ; it has, however, been proved that algte can
form carbohydrates from organic acids in the absence of light. In
homoiomerous lichens the algas are in contact with the substratum, and
though oxalic acid may be poisonous for the fungus, there are other
sources from which it can derive carbohydrates. It is probable that the
fungus often forms an abundance of calcium oxalate, which may be
utilized by the alga. Tobler proves from his culture experiments that
gonidia grew in certain solutions along with the fungus, but were colour-
less, showing that their carbohydrates were procured from some acid
formed by the fungus, and proving a physiological symbiosis between
the two. He proves step by step : (1) that Xanthoria parietina fungus
constituent grown on artificial substratum (poplar bark-gelatin) forms
abundant calcium oxalate crystals on the hypha3 ; (2) a piece of thallus
grown in the same conditions produces none ; (3) Xanthoria thallus on
poplar bark is also without crystals ; (4) finally, in culture solutions in
which the Xanthoria fungus had grown, gonidia thrive, but have no colour.

Lichen Flora of Santa Cruz Peninsula, California/]- — A.W. C. T.
Herre has made a special study of the lichen flora of a district measuring
90 miles in length and 6 to 35 miles in breadth, rising at one point to a
height of 3793 feet, the whole district presenting a great variety of rock,
soil, and wood favourable to lichen growth. He found the district

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 3-12.
t Proc. Washington Acad. Sci., xii. (1910) pp. 27-269.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 519

peculiarly rich in endemic species. Herre records 64 genera, one Zahl-
brucknera new to science (Ephebaceie), and many new species.

Desert Lichens.* — A. W. C. T. Herre has made a list of the lichens
from Reno, a desert locality at the eastern foot of the Sierra Nevada
mountains. The average rainfall is about 8 in., which falls largely as
snow during the winter months. He notes the small number of genera
and species with the large number of individuals. In all he collected
59 different species in the locality. Few of them could be called foliose,
as they closely hug the rocks. Certain species have a well-developed
thallus, but are always sterile. Herre considers that these lichens derive
their moisture entirely from the atmosphere, but that they thrive best in
winter, and barely keep alive during the summer month's.

American Lichen Notes. — Lincoln W. Riddle f reports the re-
discovery of Parmelia lophyrea, originally collected by Archibald Menzies
on the Vancouver Expedition to the Pacific and determined by Acharius.
It has recently been collected again on Point Peterson (Washington).
L. W. Riddle remarks that " the restricted distribution, with the small
size and inconspicuousness of the species, undoubtedly accounts for its
having been overlooked for a century."

G. K. Merril $ publishes notes on various species and one new,
Leptogium pilosellum, from the State of Washington. He suggests that
Lecanora frustulosa may be a form of Leptogium argopholis ; he estab-
lishes Parmelia cetrata Ach. for North America ; the plant has been con-
fused by Nylander and others with P. perforata. Lecanora subtartarea
is recorded for the first time in America (eastern States).

Crocynia, a Genus of Lichens. § — Abbe Hue has revised this genus,
of which there is only one European species, Crocynia Ian uginosa, named
by Nylander Leproloma lanuginosa, a sterile species placed in Crocynia on
anatomical grounds. The gonidia of the genus may be chroolepoid
or protococcoid, and may be scattered through the thallus or form a
definite layer. Among the species revised and included in the genus is
Chrysothrix nolitangere Mont., a curious lichen that grows among cactus
spines in Peru. It was placed by Nylander in Arthonia.

Systematic Position of Stereocaulon.|| — This genus has commonly
been associated with Cladonia, but Birger Kajanus points out the dif-
ference in origin between the podetia of the two genera ; those of
Stereocaulon being developed by the direct elongation of basal warts,
while in Cladonia they rise from a group of hypha3 of the primary thallus,
and are true podetia or stalks of apothecia ; those of Stereocaulon might
be named pseudopodetia, as was suggested by Wainio. Kajanus is of
opinion that the allies of Stereocaulon are to be found in Toninia, and to

* Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 286-97.
t Bryologist, xiv. (1911) p. 35.
X Tom. cit., pp. 36-8.

§ Mem. Soc. Nat. Sci. Nat. Math. Cherbourg, xxxvii. (1909) 32 pp. (3 figs.).
See also Bull. Soc. Bot. France, ix. (1909) pp. 641-2.
|| Bot. Not., ii. (1911) pp. 83-90.

520 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

a remoter degree in Cat ill aria, the latter crustaceous, the former warted,
squamulose, or somewhat shrubby.

Hue, Abbe— Lichens.

[Notes on lichens collected at Tangiers.]

Arch. Soc. Linn. Bord., lxiii. (1900) 4 pp.
See also Bull. Soc. Bot. France, ix. (1909) p. 641.

Hulting, T. — Lichenes nonnulli Scandinavise. (Some lichens found in Scandi-
navia.) Bot. Not., 1910, pp. 303-6.

See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) p. 570.

Malme, G. 0. — Parmelia pertusa funnen in Stidermanland.

[Parmelia, pertusa found in Sodermanland on Almis glutinosa, hitherto
only found there on rocks.]

Svensk. Bot. Tidskr., iv. (1910) pp. 92-6.
See also Bot. Centralbl, cxvi. (1911) p. 570.

Maheu, J. — Notes relatives a la cryptogamie de l'Espagne. Les Lichens de
Montserrat. (Notes on the Cryptogams of Spain. Lichens of Montserrat.)

[Descriptions of seventy-seven species collected by the writer, some of them
new species.]

Bull. Soc. Bot. France, ix. (1909) pp. 334-43 and 389-97 (3 figs.).

Navas, L. — Sinopsis de los liquenos de las islas de Madeira. (Synopsis of
lichens of the Island of Madeira.)

[A beginning is made of a synopsis of the lichens found at Madeira.]

Brot. ser. Bot., ix. 2 (1910).
See also Bot. Centralbl. cxvi. (1911) p. 112

Mycetozoa.

(By A. Lorbain Smith.)

Streaming of Plasmodia.* — V. Vouk publishes observations on the
rhythmic movements of protoplasm in the plasmodia of Myxomycetes.
There is a regular progression and retrogression, the former of longer
duration than the latter ; also the rhythm is constant for a given species,
though only in the head streams ; the side streams are subject to constant
change. Should there be mechanical disturbance of the plasmodium,
the effect is at once felt in the lowering or raising of the rate of
movement.

Notes on Myxomycetes.f — C. Engelke records an unusual form of
Fuligo varians which he found on mosses and dried leaves ; it was
divided up into minute separate plasmodia and tethalia which were dark
green in colour.

Engelke also gives a list of species found near Hanover. He records
6G species, some of them of great interest. He gives careful notes of
locality and time of year.

Sorosphaera.J — E. J. Schwartz has discovered another species of this
genus parasitic on the roots of Poa annua and other grasses. The

* Anz. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xx. (1910) pp. 363-4. See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxvi. (1911) p. 292.

t Natur. Ges. Hannover, Bot. Abt. (1910) pp. 14-18. See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxiv. (1911) pp. 441-2. % Ann. Bot., xxv. (1911) p. 270.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 521

organism forms tubercles or swellings on the roots ; the amoebae, he
finds, send out protoplasmic threads, which penetrate through the cell-
wall from one cell into another. The means by which infection takes
place is by the entrance of air amoeba into a root hair.

He d born, K. — Nagra nyare fynd af svenska myxomyceter. (New records of
Myxomycetes.) Svensk. Bot. Tidskr., iv. (1910) pp. 94-5.

See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) p. 593.

Schizophy ta.
Schizomycetes.

Absorption Phenomenon in Microbes.* — M.W. Beijerinck has shown
that when Oidium lactis is sown on an agar plate containing glucose and
mono-potassium phosphate, no growth occurs. If a crystal of urea be
then placed on the surface of the medium, a growth of Oulium appears
all round it. The urea supplies the element necessary for the growth of
the organism. The auxanogram obtained does not show an ordinary
diffusion picture with gradual tailing off at the margins, but is almost
sharply cut, a slight thinning at the edge being only with difficulty
perceptible. A similar- result is obtained by interchanging the glucose
and the urea. There are three phases in this phenomenon : a period of
diffusion of the urea through the medium, a period of absorption by the
micro-organisms, and a period of growth during which the urea rapidly
disappears.

Fermentation of Sugars by Bacteria.f — Y. Mendel has carried out
researches upon the conditions under which bacteria cause fermentation
of sugars, and gives in tabular form the results of an extensive series of
estimations, for various sugars and various organisms, of the amount of
gas produced, the proportion of carbon dioxide to hydrogen in this gas,
the amount of acid, and the ratio of fixed to volatile acid. The sugars
selected for investigation were glucose, maltose, and lactose. Most of the
experiments were performed with Bacillus coli and allied organisms. The
author found that fermentation was most active in solutions containing
6-10 p.c. of sugar, a rather higher degree of concentration than that in
favour with previous workers.

Methods of Agricultural Bacteriology. :f — Th. Rerny and G. Rosing
have investigated a number of important matters in connexion with the
bacteriological examination of soil. They set themselves to determine
the degree to which a soil is capable of destroying peptone, and the
power which it possesses of splitting up complex nitrogenous substances.
They found that peptone was more readily broken up than blood-albumin
or gelatin. They then investigated the effect which the chemical compo-
sition of the soil had upon the course of peptone disintegration, and
their experiments showed that the addition to the soil of salts containing
potassium, magnesium, phosphoric and sulphuric acids, greatly increases
the peptone-disintegrating power of the bacteria. A similar, though less

* Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xxix. (1911) pp. 161-6.
t Centralbl. Bakt., 2'e Abt., xxix. (1911) pp. 290-330.
\ Centralbl. Bakt.,2te Abt., xxix. (1911) pp. 36-77.

522 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

well-marked effect was obtained by adding sterile soil or a watery extract
of sterile soil to the experimental sample. A variety of other experiments
were performed, which led the authors to the conclusions that the influ-
ence of the soil in peptone destruction is unmistakable, and that this
influence is aided not only by ordinary plant foods, but by other substances,
such as silicates and acid derivatives of humus. There appear, however, to
be certain soluble compounds in the soil, which have an inhibiting effect,
but this point requires further investigation. The influences of aeration,
temperature, and moisture were also studied in some detail.

Change of Biological Characters in Bacteria.* — H. Stromberg,
using the agglutination reaction, was able to distinguish sharply between
the Gaertner and Paratyphoid B groups. Some enteritis strains giving
the usual cultural characteristics were difficult or impossible to identify
by agglutination, and these probably represent degenerated strains which
were originally typical. This affords indirect evidence of the possibility
of alteration in biological characters, but no direct evidence of this could
be obtained, as, for instance, alteration in the typical strains, or further
alteration in the atypical ones. No connexion could be determined
between the form of the colonies on agar and the biological characters,
and there appears to be no characteristic type of colony formation either
in the Gaertner group or in the Paratyphoid B. The occurrence of
different colony formations in the same culture seems to indicate the
beginning of a change, as is evidenced by the fact that some of these
colonies show slight change in the agglutination reaction.

Strict Anaerobic Bacillus causing Purulent Pleurisy. f — F. Niosi
has discovered and described a strict anaerobe causing pleurisy with
putrefaction, and considers that the pathogenic anaerobes are probably
much more numerous than has hitherto been believed. The organism
is a short, plump, non-motile bacillus, frequently in pairs and chains,
without capsule, and non-sporing. It is Gram-positive in fresh pre-
parations, but almost negative from cultures.

Verruga peruana. J — B. Galli-Valerio has found, in a case of Verruga
peruana or Maladie de Carrion, an acid-fast bacillus. In the blood of a
second case he found bodies in the erythrocytes like those observed by
Biffi, Basset Smith, and others, while in a third he met with bodies, sur-
rounded by a clear halo, resembling Piroplasma marginals of cattle.

Trypanotoxin of Bacillus subtilis.§— C. Levaditi and C. Twort
state in a preliminary note that the toxin of B. subtilis is lethal to the
Trypanosomes of Nagana, and also to the spirilla of tick fever and to
Leishmania, while it is inactive to Spirillum gallinarum.

Presence of Streptotricheae in Tuberculous sputum. ||— L. Darwacki
isolated a streptothrix thrice out of twenty examinations. The medium
was potato with -4 p.c. glycerin. One is identified as OosporapulmonaUs

* Centralbl. Bakt., l»e Abt., lviii. pp. 401-45.
t Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt., lviii. (1911) pp. 193-228 (4 figs.).
% Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt., lviii. (1911).
§ C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 645-7.
C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (19H)pp. 180-1.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 523

Roger ; another is designated Streptothrix/usea ; the third is identified
as the 8. Candida gedanensis II Petrnschsky. The author expresses the
opinion that Streptotricheae are an important feature of tuberculous
sputum.

Cytology of the Bacteria.* — C. C. Dobell in a contribution to the
cytology of the bacteria, draws the following conclusions : All bacteria
which have been adequately investigated are — like other Protista —
nucleate cells. The form of the nucleus is variable not only in different
bacteria but also at different periods in the life-cycle of the same species.
The nucleus may be in the form of a discrete system of granules
(chromidia) ; in the form of a filament of variable configuration ; in the
form of one or more relatively large aggregated masses of nuclear sub-
stance ; in the form of a system of irregularly branched or bent short
strauds, rods, or networks ; and probably also in the vesicular form
characteristic of the nuclei of many animals, plants, and protists. There
is no evidence that enucleate bacteria exist. The bacteria are in no way
a group of simple organisms, but rather a group displaying a high degree
of morphological differentiation coupled in many cases with a life-cycle
of considerable complexity.

Bacterium Briosii.f — G- L. Pavarino gives a preliminary account of
a new species of bacterium which attacks the tomato. B. Briosii differs
in many respects from B. solanacearum Smith, which also causes tomato
rot. The rodlets are short and stumpy. The optimum temperature is
15-16° C. A yellow pigment is formed. Pure cultures reproduce the
disease in healthy plants.

Action of Wax-solvents and the Presence of Thermolabile Bacterio-
toxins on Soil.J — R- Greig-Smith thus summarizes his experiences :
"Water extracts from soil a substance which is filtrable through porcelain
and which is toxic to bacteria. The toxicity is made evident by the
retardation of growth or by the destruction of the bacteria. The toxin
is destroyed by heat, by sunlight, and by storage. It slowly disappears
from air-dried soil and rapidly decays in aqueous solution. It is not
destroyed by salts, such as sodium chloride, potassium or magnesium
sulphate. Soils vary in the amount of toxin they contain ; good soils
contain less, poor soils more. The particles of soil are covered or
" waterproofed " with soil-wax or " agricere," which consists of a mixture
of saponifiable and unsaponifiable bodies. The wax-solvents (volatile
disinfectants) alter the distribution of the agricere by carrying it to the
surface of the soil and causing it to be segregated on the points of the
soil particles. "With the removal of the " waterproofing " the soil-
nutrients are more easily dissolved by soil-water and attacked by bacteria.

Tuberculosis. — "W. Bulloch, in the Horace Dobell Lecture, delivered
before the Royal College of Physicians in November 1910, draws the
following conclusions : Pulmonary tuberculosis is produced almost, if
not exclusively, by bacilli of the tijpus humanus ; it is essentially an

* Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci , lvi. (1911) pp. 395-506 (4 pis.).

f Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xx. (1911) pp. 355-8.

j Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxv. (1910) pp. 808-22.

524 SUMMARY OF CUBRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

inhalation disease : bovine tubercle bacilli play a relatively unimportant
role in the production of tuberculosis in man.

Bacteriology of Baltimore City Water.* — W. W. Ford enumerates
six types of organisms met with in this water. (!) Bacillus coli \ (2)
B. proteus vulgaris ; (3) /!. cloacse ; (4) Paratyphoid or Paracolon ;
(5) liquefying organisms resembling B. coli ; (G) B.ftecalis alkaligmes.
The author expresses the opinion that the presence of non-pigmented,
non-spore-bearing, sugar-splitting bacteria indicates a serious and per-
manent pollution of the supply.

Minute Structure of Bacillus anthracis.j — The methods employed
by H. Penau for the investigation of the cytology of bacteria have been
described in a previous paper.- In the present communication he deals
with the bacillus of anthrax. In the development of this micro-organism
the author recognized five stages. In the earliest stage there is little
differentiation of structure, the cell being occupied with dense basophil
cytoplasm. In the second stnge, found after 12 to 20 hours' growth,
the nucleus is seen usually at one of the poles. It is a well defined
structure, staining well with any of the nuclear dyes. This nucleus, in
the succeeding phase of development, becomes replaced by a basophil
reticulum, which gives the organism a vacuolated appearance. After
60 hours the basophil tracts break up and give way to moniliform struc-
tures, which collect together to form a morula. The margins of this
morula become well defined, and the body assumes an ovoid or circular
form. This structure develops into the adult spore. It appears that
the spore is developed from the nucleus, which, however, passes through
an intermediate reticular phase.

Experimental Typhoid Fever 4 — The experimental infection of labo-
ratory animals with typhoid fever has alw'ays presented a problem diffi-
cult of solution to the bacteriologist. It is possible, by inoculations of
typhoid cultures, to produce peritonitis in a guinea-pig ; but the animal
shows none of the lesions characteristic of the disease. Grunbaum tried
to produce the disease in the chimpanzee, with moderate success. In
consequence of this difficulty, an idea has arisen that the causal organism
of the disease is not Eberth's bacillus, but a filter-passer. The recent
history of the bacillus of hog cholera has stimulated the supporters of
this view.

In the present paper E. Metchnikoff and A. Besredka, after a resume
of the foregoing considerations, give a preliminary account of their
researches. By the oral administration to chimpanzees of typhoid cul-
tures which had passed through a chimpanzee, and in other cases of
typhoid cultures mixed with typhoid stools, they produced a disease
which presented all the typical lesions of typhoid fever. Only in excep-
tional cases, however, could they produce the disease in the lower apes.
Their experiments all showed that the typhoid bacillus is the causal
organism, and all the evidence was against the existence of a filter-

-

* Johns Hopkins Hosp. Bull., xxii. (1911) pp. 53-6.
+ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 617-19.
| Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxv. (1911) pp. 193-221.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 525

passer. They found that the administration of vaccines did not protect
against experimental typhoid.

Variability of Intestinal Bacteria.* — W. J. Penfold describes his
investigations upon the influence of monochloracetic acid upon the gas-
producing power of certain intestinal organisms. This research was
suggested by the observation of the effect of certain constituents enter-
ing into the production of glycocoll upon these organisms. The gas-
producing power of Bacillus coli, B. enteritidis (Gsertner), and B. Griinthal
on certain sugars was found to be reduced or completely removed by
growth on monochloracetic-acid agar. This was true in the case of nearly
all sugar media, but did not hold for the alcohols, such as mannite and
dulcite. When these organisms were grown upon monochloracetic-acid
agar, a marked variability in the size of the colonies was observed, and
secondary colonies or papilla? were formed. The new varieties retained
their power of producing gas from formates. The identity of these
variant strains with the typical strains from which they were derived was
established by the application of complement-fixation methods.

Capsule-formation of Typhoid Bacilli. — In the course of his in-
vestigations of the agglutination of typhoid bacilli by certain sera, G.
Kiihnemann found that, under certain conditions, the organisms, after
being in contact with serum, became capsulated. This was demon-
strated by staining films of centrifugalized bacteria by means of a modi-
fication of Loeffler's flagella stain. The phenomenon was observed when
the serum employed was derived from young animals. In one case it was
observed with a serum obtained from a child eighteen months old. The
dilution of 1 in five or 1 in ten of serum appeared to be the most favour-
able for capsule formation. The presence or absence of agglutination
appeared to possess no influence in this respect. The author considers
that capsule-formation forms part of the protective mechanism of the
bacillus, and that its occurrence affords an index of its virulence and the
ratio between the protective powers of the organism and of the host.

Etiology of Rhinoscleroma.J — B. Galli-Yalerio, after a short review
of the clinical features of this condition, mentions the earlier hypotheses
that the disease was due to tubercle or syphilis. The bacillus discovered
by v. Frisch in 1882, and named by him Bacillus rhinoscleromatis, is
now generally considered to be the causal organism. Babes, however,
described cases of the disease in which this organism could not be found.
The bacillus is a non-motile, Gram-negative rod, which does not liquefy
gelatin. Culturally and morphologically, it is indistinguishable from
B. pneumoniae and B. ozaense. The author has performed experiments
using the method of complement binding, and concludes that the three
organisms are identical. He considers that the disease is undoubtedly
due to this bacillus, developing probably where there is an hereditary
predisposition, or in the presence of such a condition as atrophic rhinitis.

* Proc. Roy. Soc. Med. (Pathol, section) iv. (1911) pp. 97-109.
t Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lvii. (1911) pp. 497-8.
j Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt., Orig., lvii. (1911) pp. 481-90.

Aug. 16th, 1911 2 M

526 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Nitrite- formation by various Bacteria.* -E. I'elz has investigated
the amounl of nitrites which is formed by various organisms, particularly
intestinal organisms, in the presence of nitrates. This research was
suggested by Emmerich's theory that the toxic symptoms of cholera are
due to extensive formation of nitrites in the intestinal canal. The author
has used the method of Griess, finding it more satisfactory than other
complicated gravimetric methods. According to the amount of nitrite
produced, the organisms investigated were assigned to three groups.
Very small quantities were produced by Shiga's bacillus and the strepto-
coccus. In the intermediate class are placed typhoid, paratyphoid A,
B. coli, and some allied organisms. The class of good nitrite-forms com-
prises all the vibrios, Flexner's dysentery bacillus, and paratyphoid B.
Vibrio cholera? does not stand out from the rest of this group, either in
respect of the total quantity of nitrites produced or of the rate at which
they are formed.

Action of Bacillus Lactis Aerogenes upon Glucose. f — G. S. Walpole
has investigated the ''crude glycol" formed by tins action, and finds
that it is largely composed of two optically inactive 2 : 3 butanediols.
Small quantities of the phenylarethanes of other glycols were also ob-
tained. In the presence of oxygen, acetylmethylcarbinol is also produced
from 2 : 3 butanediol by this organism. Fructose is decomposed in a
similar manner.

Variations of Typhoid and Dysentery Bacilli.:}: — Reiner Midler
discusses the mutations exhibited by these organisms when grown upon
media containing isodulcite. Under these conditions, the growth shows
the formation of papilla? and of daughter-colonies. The phenomenon is
very constant, and may be produced when only a small trace of the sugar
is present. Isodulcite is structurally a methyl-pentose, but the author
has been unable to obtain the other methyl-pentoses. fukose and rhodeose,
for investigation. This mutation, which appears to possess a diagnostic
value, is explained by the author upon the side-chain theory. Mutations
have also been observed in old cultures of typhoid upon gelatin.

Cultivation of Leprosy Bacillus. § — E. Bertarelli gives a review of
recent advances in the knowledge of this organism. Two problems
have of late years been solved. The organism has been successfully
cultivated. The disease has been communicated to animals. The cul-
tivation of the leprosy bacillus has occupied the attention of many, whose
names are recorded in this paper. The first undoubted culture of the
bacillus was obtained in 1905 by E. Weil, who made use of a medium
containing yolk of egg. Cley, more recently, has obtained cultures by
growing the organism upon agar in symbiosis with amcebas. The most
important work upon this subject has been done by Kedrowski, who
succeeded in cultivating the bacillus upon ordinary media, and in trans-
mitting the disease to rabbits bv means of cultures so obtained. This

* Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lvii. (1910) pp. 1-16.

t Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 272-86.

X Centralbl. Bakt., lie Abt. Orig., lviii. (1911) pp. 97-106.

§ Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Ret., xlix. (1911) pp. 65-73.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 527

observer found that the organism showed considerable pleomorphism
when artificially cultivated. Sugai and other Japanese workers have
performed successful inoculation experiments.

Dachnowski, A. — The Bacterial Flora as a Factor in the Unproductiveness of
Soils. Ohio Naturalist, x. (1910) pp. 137-45 (2 figs.).

Greig-Smith, R. — Permanency of the Characters of Bacillus coli group.

I Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxv. (1910) pp. 806-7.

Guillemard, A. — Nouvelle conception de l'Anaerobiose. Culture des Bacteries
anaerobies a l'air libre en presence du fer.

C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) p. 685.

Magnan & de la RiboisiSre — Sur la presence const ante d'un bacille par-
ticulier dans les vesicles de la varicelle. Tom. cit., pp. 309-10.

Mercier, L., & P. Lasseur — Variation experimentale du pouvoir chroma-
gene d'une Bacterie (Bacillus chlororaphis).

Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1415-18.

Rappin & A. Vanney — Sur l'ldentite des Diphteries aviaires et humaines.

[The authors record observations which lead them to believe that avian and
hiunan diphtheria are one and the same disease.)

C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 162-3.

Rem linger, P. — Sur un Bacille liquefiant rapidement le serum coagule. !

Tom. cit., pp. 168-9.

2 m 2

.".28

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments. Accessories, etc.*
(1) Stands.

Old Microscope by J. Simons : presented by Members of the
Council. — The name of J. Simons (Invent, et fecit), engraved on the

Fig. 49.

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands ; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives : (3)
llluniinating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation; (6) Miscellaneous.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

529

stage of this old Microscope, does not appear to have been known, so far,
as an optician of the latter part of the eighteenth century. The Micro-
scope which bears this name has a close resemblance to instruments made
by George Adams about 1780, though it possesses some features and
variations of interest.

The body is very large, tapering towards both ends, and fastened to

Fig. 50.

the limb by means of a dovetailed slot. The limb is a triangular bar
with the rack cut inside, after Benjamin Martin's plan ; it is joined
by means of a compass joint to a tall pillar raised on a folding tripod
base. The whole Microscope is made of brass, and very massive.

The object-glasses, six in number, and consisting of single lenses, art-
mounted on a sliding bar, which is a feature of earlier Microscopes.
The stasre is triangular, and carries below a lens mounted in a tube,

CD O

530

SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

which acts as a substagc condenser. A bullseye on separate folding
tripod-stand is provided, and another much thicker bullseye is fitted
to the stage. The date of this old Microscope may approximately be
given as L790 to 1800.

Fig. 49 shows the stand with the body set at an angle. To the ex-
treme left is a bullseye condenser on a stand having a tripod base ;
a stage bullseye condenser is also shown in the foreground to the
right ; it is excessively heavy, so heavy that its hinged joint fails to hold

Fig. 51.

it in any required position. A lieberkiihn with its holder are seen
in the foreground, and in the centre lies a spring stage for carrying
" sliders " containing objects mounted between discs of talc : attached
to this is a tube containing a substage condenser which slides in it for
focusing ; the tube is dropped through the opening in the stage-plate,
the spring-stage resting thereon. The use of the piece of apparatus
lying in the background is unknown, but it may have been intended to
hold a candle.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MK.'IioSCOI'Y. ETC.

531

Rejtds Metal-Microscope.* — This instrument is made by Messrs.
Reichert from Professor Rejto's designs. It is represented in fig. •")(>
as a Laboratory Microscope. Fig. 51 shows it, however, in a simplified
form, the middle parts, including the stage, having been removed to
facilitate application of the instrument to the direct examination of
large-sized objects. For the weaker magnifications, daylight or lamp-
light incident on the metal surface will suffice. But for stronger
powers illumination of the object must be performed with the special
apparatus inserted in the drawn-out tube. This apparatus can be in-
serted, or removed, as an ordinary ocular. It consists of a cylindrical

Fig. 52.

sleeve carrying a plane-parallel glass plate, inclined at 45° to the tube
axis, and an illuminating lens. The focal distance of this lens equals
the sum of the distances from the lens to the glass plate, and from the
glass plate to the objective. The light is set, preferably, at a distance
of 1 m. from the apparatus. An incandescent gas-mantle or a triple
burner will be found the most suitable, and must be placed on a special
stand adjustable as to height. It is desirable to enclose the light-
source in an iron or asbestos cylinder, with a lateral aperture of suit-
able size. This aperture must' be fitted with an illuminating lens of
parallelized light as required. In making the adjustments the light-
source must be first brought to the level of the illuminating apparatus B.
* Special Catalogue, Em 3, " Metall-Mikroskope," C. Reichert, Vienna, pp. 1-7.

532

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The observer, having removed the ocular, then looks down the tube,
aud veil] probably find that the interior of the tube is not uniformly
illuminated : small adjustments, in elevation, of the light-source will
correct this defect. The function of the lens b is to make the light-
rays convergent, so that after incidence on the inclined glass plate
(not shown in figure) they may focus on the objective-focus and thence
reach the object. Thence they are reflected upwards through the ob-
jective to the ocular. The object to be examined (fig. 50) should be
provided with two plane-parallel surfaces so that it may lie horizontally
on the stage, small differences of level being compensated by the screws
S S. The object-stage is provided with two slides, so that the stage
may be moved north-south, east-west, by means of the milled-heads
T'" T'". The stage is raised and lowered by means of T". If the object
is too thick for the stage, the stage can be removed, and either the object
be placed on the horse-shoe foot, or the instrument, by relaxation of the
screws r r', be swung round and brought (fig. 51, dotted lines) directly
over the object. If photomicrographs be desired, the vertical arrange-
ment shown in fig. 52 is adopted, a picric-acid filter having been placed
in front of the light-source.

Reichert's New Metal-Microscope.* — This instrument (figs. 53-59)
is distinguished from Rejto's Metal-Microscope chiefly in the following

^^^^gg

^yyyy^yA

Fig. 53.

respects : — 1. By a different mode of light application and by a more
complete illumination of the object. 2. By the necessity of preparing
only one plane-surface ; this plane-surface being set in contact with the
stage. 3. By a specially convenient arrangement for photomicrography.
4. By a new fine-adjustment and a lateral screw for oblique inclination.
In fig. 53 a schematic representation of the ray-path is shown. The
light issuing from the source is brought to the object by means of
the prism Px and the objective — this objective thus acting as a con-
denser. The light reflected from the object reaches the prism P.2, and
thence it is deviated through the horizontal tube to the observer's eye.
To change over from subjective observation to the photographic fixation
of the image, the last-named prism P2 is rotated 90° about an axis
perpendicular to the stage-plane. It will be seen from fig. 56 that the
photographic camera is perpendicular to the optical bench carrying the
axis of illumination. For convenient observation of the image, an

* Special Catalogue, Em3, "Metall-Mikroskope,"C. Reichert, Vienna, pp. 1-14.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

533

ocular of approximately right-angled shape can be applied to the in-
strument ; it is placed in the sleeve of the horizontal tube (fig. 54, b).
A prism suitably placed deflects the rays to the ocular, and the operator

F=Q>H^l4QM^l=^qDEEj

Weg 1-2 =1-2'

Fig. 54.

can therefore make his observations in the ordinary microscopical atti-
tude. For the light-source either the incandescent gas-mantle, the
Nernst lamp, the limelight, or the electric arc-light may be used ; but for
photomicrography only the three last can be recommended. The arrange-

Fig. 55.

ment of the parts of the illuminating apparatus will lie understood from
figs. 5-4 and T>6. At a slight distance from the light-source L a re-
volver diaphragm Jx limits the illuminating area. If the filter-screen K
is used it will be placed between Jj and the illuminating lens B. The

.:;i

SUMMARY OF i URRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

external appearance of the Metal-Microscope is shown in fig. 55. A
strong handle-shaped pillar for convenieni transport of the instrument
rises out of the stout c-jist-iron base-plate. This pillar carries the rack-
and-pinion coarse-adjustment of the stage; it also carries the universal
mirror. The fine-adjustment is similar to that adopted in Reickert's
stands A i. and A ii. The Microscope-stage can he centred and is rotatory.

Fig. 56.

It has two lateral position-screws, which permit a movement of several
millimetres ; larger movements must be done free-hand, or with the
Bliding-stage (fig. 56). The camera (fig. 56) is on heavy metal feet,
and moves on an optical bench. The tube of the Microscope is applied
to the camera with light-tight connexion. Movement of the eye-lens of
the projection ocular throws a sharp image on the matt-glass screen of
the camera without requiring any alteration in the instrument as ar-

^

«***

V

M

Fig. 57.

ranged for visual observation. It may, however, be necessary, especially
in the use of filters, to perfect the image by the camera fine-adjustment
— this is done by a Hook key.

New Mirror Reflex-camera. — In order to enable the operator to
control the photographic image without rising from his seat, this
camera (fig. 57) has been contrived. It has the matt-glass M parallel
to the camera-axis, the shutter-box K in the usual place. Between them
is a vertical mirror Sp, worked from outside by a knob, and rotatory

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

535

about a vertical axis. The mirror is rotated in the direction of the
arrow, and at an angle less than 45° throws the image on to M. Another
view of it is seen in fig. 58. Fig. 59 gives a general view of the whole
instrument.

y . , ' ; '/•*

Fig. 58.

I

Fig. 59.

:,::( ;

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives.

Winkel's Eye-piece with Screw Micrometer and Graduated Glass
Diaphragm.* — Fig. (iO gives a general view of this eye-piece, which can
lie used for approximate measurements as well as for readings of great
precision. It is provided with a clamping screw to fix it firmly to the
tube of the Microscope, and an adjustable eye-lens for focusing the scale.
The scale itself is mounted on a plate (fig. 61), which is movable in a
lateral direction by a screw, the spring serving to keep the plate always
in contact with the screw, which has five threads to the millimetre and

Fig. 60.

Fig. 61.

is fitted with a drum divided into 100 parts ; each interval of the drum
is equal, therefore, to a lateral displacement of the scale of -j^ mm.

This combination of scale and screw micrometer has been chosen (at
the suggestion of the late A. Kochf) in preference to screw and web
usually employed, as it gives a ready means of obtaining the exact
measurement of objects subtending a number of divisions of the eye-
pieces scale, the fractional part only of an interval having to be deter-
mined by means of the screw.

* R. Winkel, Gottingen Catalogue, 1911, p. li (2 figs.).
t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., vi. pp. 33-35.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 537

The Society's Standard Thread.* — E, M. Nelson makes the follow-
ing communication : —

"Mr. Watson Baker, in the Journal of the Royal Microscopical
Society, 1911, p. 175, has called attention to 'the great diversity which
exists in the objective screw-threads made by the various makers, and
described as of the Royal Microscopical Society's standard size.' Possibly
a few remarks from one of the members of the sub-committee ap-
pointed by the Council of the Royal Microscopical Society to report upon
this very question may not be out of place, the more so as Mr. Watson
Baker's paper deals only with the facts which, apart from the history of
the subject, may cause very erroneous ideas to be formed.

The Society's Screw. — Fifty-four years ago this screw was adopted by
the Microscopical Society of London, upon a report from a sub-committee
composed of George Jackson, Charles Brooke, and H. Perigal, jun. The
multiplicity of adapters had even then become such a nuisance that the
Society standardized a screw with a view to stopping it, and the thanks
of everyone using a Microscope is due to them for so doing. This
standard screw was at once adopted by the three leading London Micro-
scope makers — viz. Messrs. Powell, Ross, and Smith and Beck. (The
size of the screw was that used by Messrs. Smith and Beck, Mr. Smith
having brought it with him from Messrs. Tulley, of Islington ; he had
previously used it in making the celebrated Lister-Tulley Microscope.
The Tulleys had taken this screw from the "Pipe" of Benjamin
Martin's Microscope! (1760-70). When it was standardized it was
altered to a Whitworth thread ; but, notwithstanding, a Benjamin
Martin's " pipe," or a Tulley-Lister objective, will screw readily into any
R.M.S. standard nose-piece ; but an objective with a standard thread
is the merest trifle too large to enter either a Benjamin Martin or Tulley
nose-piece).

Six months after the adoption of the report Mr. Richard Beck pub-
lished an account, with six figures, of the screw-gauges and tools. Two
plug and ring-gauges for the tops of the threads of the inside and outside
screws, and pairs of sizing-tools, were made by Whitworth, the sizing-
tools being supplied to the trade at cost price. At first there was, it
seems, a little grumbling and fault-finding, as was inevitable upon a
reform of this kind ; but soon things shook down and settled them-
selves, with the result that, in my own experience, I have never seen an
objective by Powell, Ross, or Beck, that was not interchangeable in
either of their nose-pieces, and I very much doubt if anyone else has.

In the eighties, German object-glasses, by Messrs. Zeiss, Leitz, and
others, were largely imported, and at the end of that decade there
was a demand for sizing-gauges. One of the secretaries of the Royal
Microscopical Society, not finding any in stock, took an old tap he
happened to see in a drawer, and, without comparing it with the
standard gauges, and at a considerable expense, had it precisely re-
produced, and distributed the facsimile copies on the Continent. All
this was clone quietly, and no one knew anything about it.

Some objectives I had purchased from Messrs. Zeiss had been sized

* English Mechanic, xciii. (1911) p. 290.
t See this Journal, 1898, p. 474, fig. 81.

538 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

under the conditions specified: (l) Those showing absorption bands,

by these new tools, and when I received them I found, to rny astonish-
ment, that they would enter none of the eight Microscopes I had. The
experience of others w7as similar, and as representations were frequently
made to the Royal Microscopical Society upon the subject, the Council,
in 1*90, appointed another sub-committee to report upon the whole
question. This sub-committee, of which I had the honour of being a
member, found that the tap which had been copied was a very badly-
cut screw, which, when tested by the Society's standard gauges, was not
of the Society's standard size. We ordered that it and its copies should
be destroyed. We recommended that new sizing-tools should be made
in accordance with our standard gauges, and we suggested that limiting
gauges should be added to our standards. Our recommendations * were
adopted by the Council, and the new gauges and sizing tools were
ordered from Messrs. Whitworth. These were supplied, and, so far as
these sizing-gauges are concerned, I personally tested every one, and I
am quite sure that all objectives and nose-pieces sized by any one of
those will be interchangeable. I purchased a set (now on the table as
I write). The legend on it is " R.Mic.So., London, 1897. Whitworth,
Manchester, .8015 36ths," and on the die is .7967.

Mr. T. Powell, also a member of the sub-committee, exhibited the
original sizing-tool his father had bought. He said it was the one he had
always used. After all these years it was in as good a condition as it was
when new ; it was made and hardened in one piece, and was without the
three adjustable blocks which are fitted to the new dies.

The Continental manufacturers to whom the Society had supplied the
wrong screw were very indignant, and rightly, too. At first they re-
fused to accept the new tools, but after Mr. C. Beck had pointed out to them
the confusion that must inevitably arise, they chivalrously waived the
matter, and adopted the true standard screw. Mr. C. Beck deserves the
warmest thanks of all microscopists for his good offices in this matter.

So far as my own experience goes, I have not seen a single objective
that has been sized by these new tools that is not interchangeable. If
a new standard, or any alteration in the Society's present standard, is pro-
posed to the Continental manufacturers, I think, after what has already
occurred, there will be some difficulty in persuading them to accept the
change.

Personally, I prefer an objective that screws very loosely into a nose-
piece, and fixes into position by facing up on its flanges ; so, looking at
the question from every point of view, my counsel would be to leave
things as they are. "

(3) Illuminating- and other Apparatus.

Directions for using Glass Micrometers. — Messrs. Carl Zeiss have
published, under the above title, a very clear and complete pamphlet of
8 pages, dealing with microscopic magnifications. Eye-piece micrometers,
Plagge projection micrometer eye-pieces, stage-micrometers, and methods
of determining magnifying powers, are all dealt with.

* See this Journal, 1896, p. 389.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICBOSCOPY, ETC.

539

Interferometer.— This instrument (fig. G2) was shown at] the June
Meeting and was described fully by C. Beck (see Proceedings, p. 565, of
the present number).

Fig. 62.

Micro-spectroscopic Observation.* — F. J. Keeley points out that
while rnicro-spectroscopy has been largely used with transmitted light,
very little application of it has been made with reflected light. Yet
with reflected light it is not only suitable for use with small quantities,
but has a number of additional advantages. Thus he finds that absorp-
tion bands are usually more distinct ; a small crystal on a mineral
specimen or a gem embedded in an opaque setting may be examined
without disturbing or damaging it ; and phenomena such as iridescence
on opaque substances may be studied.

The Microscope used for this purpose should always be a binocular,
which permits the object to be examined through one tube, while the
spectroscopic ocular is applied to the other. The illumination should
preferably be rather brighter and whiter than is generally necessary for
the examination of opaque objects, and is best concentrated by means of
a parabolic silvered reflector attached to the objective. For preliminary
examination, the older form of micro-spectroscope, as made by Browning
or Beck, is preferable, as very faint bands are more readily noted in its
short, bright spectrum ; but for further study and for recording the
spectra, the Zeiss model with photographed scale is more desirable.

There are two classes of spectra which can be advantageously studied

* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia (Feb. l'Jll) pp. 106-16.

540 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

thus permitting the identification of certain minerals and gems; (2)
interference spectra, thus assisting in determining the cause of lustre
and iridescence. In the first class the method is very effective in
dealing with minerals of the didymium and zircon groups, garnets,
rubies, spinels, emeralds. The spectra are frequently so characteristic
as to give infallible means of identification. For reference all spectra
should be recorded diagrammatically on paper ruled with lines corre-
sponding to the scale showing width of band : it should also be noted
whether edges are sharp or misty, and whether the darkest part of band
is central or eccentric.

In dealing with the second class it should be remembered that lustre
and iridescence include such causes as simple reflection, refraction, and
dispersion, scattering of light from microscopic particles, polarization,
and diffraction. The most potent cause, and that to which practically
all iridescence is due, is the interference produced by reflection from
thin films, and this can be advantageously studied with the micro-
spectroscope. Such interference colours generally show dark bands in
the spectrum, one in the lower order colours produced by thin films,
and two or more as the films become thicker so that additional wave- .
lengths interfere. For comparison, records should be made of the
spectra of all the brighter colours, which can be done by observing them
in the " Newton's rings " produced between two surfaces of glass or by
blowing a bubble of melted glass until it bursts, when the thin edges
will answer the same purpose. The author has examined the natural
iridescent surfaces of many minerals, butterfly scales, beetle scales,
iridescent birds1 feathers, opals, the chatoyance of cat's-eye germs, and
the lustre of pearls. His experiments seem to show that the explana-
tions usually given of certain phenomena, e.g. of butterfly scales, stand
in need of revision. Thus the particularly brilliant blue spots on the
wings of Papilio paris are apparently due to a film of air of about 0 ' 58 /a
in thickness. Again, the lustre of pearls is not due to minute corruga-
tions, but to repeated parallel laminas separated by extremely thin films.

t4) Photomicrography.

Leitz' Small Photomicrographic Apparatus.* — This apparatus,
numbered IV. in the maker's catalogue, is shown in fig. 63. It has a
camera extension of 25 cm., and is designed for use in the vertical
position only. It consists essentially of a rectangular base-plate of iron,
covered with cloth, on one side of which a vertical steel rod is mounted
in a massive socket. This rod carries the camera, which by means of
the two clamping fittings (shown in the illustration) can be fixed at any
required height. When so fixed the camera can be rotated for the
final adjustment of the specimen on the stage by direct observation ;
the return of the camera to exact alignment with the optic axis of the
.Microscope is ensured by the provision of a spring-catch on the camera
fitting, the catch engaging with a groove in the steel rod. The length
of the camera is adjusted by sliding the rod, carrying the front up or
down in the grooved fitting in which it is monnted. A light-tight

• Leitz' Catalogue, 43 G, Photomicrographic Apparatus, p. 18.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC

541

connexion is fitted to the front of the camera for use with the Micro-
scope and for receiving the photographic objectives •(microsummars)
by means of sliding adapters when the Microscope is dispensed with.

Fig. 63.

Leitz' New Large Photomicrographic Apparatus.* — This appa-
ratus, Ia in the maker's catalogue, is shown in fig. 6-4 (vertical position).
It is characterized by its long camera sliding upon an optical bench.
The essential advantage of such a camera consists in obtaining a large
variety of magnifications with a single objective ; but, in addition to
this, greater depth or focns is obtained by using an objective of rela-
tively low magnifying power with an extended bellows. The optical
bench, which is in two parts, consists of steel tubes mounted at either
end and also midway upon cast-iron feet, the two halves being con-
nected by a hinge arrangement. Upon these tubes can be fitted the
various carriers, the curved feet of which fit the tubes exactly, any required
position being maintained by means of clamping-screws. The camera
occupies one half of the optical bench and rests upon two carriers, one
of which holds the focusing screw, while the other carries the camera
front with a portion of the light-tight connexion. By means of the
hinge provided the camera can be brought into a vertical position : the
apparatus may therefore be used either vertically or horizontally, as
required.

* Leitz' Catalogue, 43 G, Photomicrographic Apparatus, p. 6.
Aug. 16th, 1911 . 2 N

542

SUMMARY OF CUKRKNT KKSEARCHES RELATING To

The camera can be extended to any required distance up to its
full length of 100 cm., as each carrier can be moved independently of
the other. The bellows, besides being very substantially made, has
additional wire supports, two in number, to prevent sagging when fully

50

l-l

extended ; the lower portion of the bellows is hinged to the focusing
screen, so that upon the withdrawal of two bolts which keep the upper
portion in position, it can be retracted in order to observe the image
from the front whilst the necessary adjustments are being made. Two

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 543

focusing screens, one of ground glass and the other of clear plate glass,
are supplied with the apparatus, together with two single dark-slides
taking plates 24 cm. square, with carriers for smaller sizes, either English
or Continental. The front of the camera is fitted with a pneumatic
shutter for time and instantaneous exposures, and for the light-tight
connexion referred to above, into which the objective-adapters can be
pushed.

The other half of the optical bench is occupied by (1) the Micro-
scope mounted upon a sliding base-plate ; (2) an illuminating lens or con-
denser ; (8) a large iris-diaphragm ; and (4) a Liliput arc-lamp. Each
of these accessories is adjustable for height ; that for the sliding base-
plate being controlled by a hand-wheel below the level of the steel rods,
this adjustment being necessary to compensate for the variation in the
heights of the optic axis of horizontal Microscopes. A special me-
chanism is fitted to the base-plate, and this, in conjunction with a
lengthening rod, permits of the fine-adjustment being effected during
observation of the image on the screen.

For taking photographs of large objects with the microsummars
without the Microscope, a special vertical stage is provided, mounted on
a sliding carrier, and fitted with a micrometer-screw fine-adjustment, to
which the lengthening rod referred to above can also be connected should
the length of the camera necessitate its use. A series of interchangeable
diaphragms is supplied with the stage, and the diameter of each dia-
phragm corresponds approximately to the focal distance of the lens with
which it is to be used, each diaphragm being provided with an illuminat-
ing lens which will illuminate uniformly and without colour the given
aperture. Objectives and diaphragms are marked, so that the correct
pair can be rapidly selected.

Leitz' Photomicrographic Apparatus for Photographing Insects.*
This apparatus (fig. 65) has been suggested by Hermann, and is num-
bered III. in Messrs. Leitz' Catalogue. It is constructed for use in the
horizontal position only, and is mounted on a stand consisting of two
steel tubes resting upon two pairs of cast-iron feet. The camera,
which can be extended to 70 cm., is mounted upon steel tubes ; it
has wire supports to prevent sagging, and the bellows-frame can be
retracted in the same manner. The front carrying the objectives is
fitted with a time and instantaneous shutter. Two lamps (Liliput arc,
or incandescent gas) with condensing lenses serve to illuminate the ob-
ject. These lamps are mounted on slotted arms attached to the pillars
carrying the camera front in such a manner that not only the distance
of the illuminant, but also the angle of incidence of the light can be
varied within wide limits ; it thus becomes an easy matter to illuminate
an object brightly and uniformly, or to control the density and position
of the shadow required to give the necessary contrast.

The object-holder consists of a base-plate sliding upon the tubular
base, to which it can be clamped in any desired position by means of
a thumb-screw. It has two micrometer-screw adjustments for moving
the object in a horizontal plane in two directions, at right angles to one

* Leitz' Catalogue, 43 G, Photomicrographic Apparatus, pp. 16-18.

2 N 2

5 II

SUMMARY OF CUKKENT UKSKA IM'H KS RELATING TO

another, one of which Berves for lateral displacement and the other for
focusing the image on the screen. The former movement is especially
useful when taking stereoscopic pictures, and both are provided with
lengthening rods, so that the adjustments are easily effected when the
operator is sitting in front of the focusing plate. For the vertical ad-
justment of the object a rack-and-pinion adjustment is provided, upon
which is mounted a universal arm carrying a glass rod, the possible
movements of which are well shown in the illustration, the object being
fixed to the point of the rod by an adhesive, or by first mounting upon
cork.

In order to render the apparatus suitable for taking pictures by trans-
mitted light, the universal arm figured and described must be removed

Fig. 65.

from the pillar actuated by the rack-and-pinion and replaced by a vertical
stage. The illuminant (Liliput arc or incandescent gas) and condenser
are then mounted on a special removable optical bench behind the stage.
Leitz' microsummars will be found particularly useful with this appa-
ratus ; but, if higher magnifications, such as can only be obtained with a
compound Microscope, be required, a tube carrying objective and eye-
piece can he screwed into the front of the shutter, thus dispensing with
I he ordinary Microscope stand.

Barnard's Practical Photomicrography.*— In this work the subject
is treated by the author, J. E. Barnard, in a simple and straightforward
manner, and from first-hand knowledge. He remarks in the preface
thai it is one thing to he conversant with the practical side of the subject.

'• London : Edwin Arnold (1911) xii. and 322 pp. (10 pis. and 79 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AN]) BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 545

but quite another to write such a description of the procedure as will
enable another person to carry it out. From a perusal of the work it
is obvious that his descriptive power is quite equal to his practical know-
ledge. After a short description of such Microscope stands as are most
suitable for the work, the author enters in fuller detail into the optical
equipment — objectives, oculars, condensers, and collecting-lenses. The
various types of illuminant and illumination are fully described — a sub-
ject as to the paramount importance of which no photomicrographer
needs to be reminded. Upon the illumination success primarily depends,
and the seventh and eighth chapters, by their insistence on the great
advantage to the amateur or beginner of a good deal of preliminary
experimenting, are intended to give him a firm grounding in the art
of illuminating an object. For such preliminary work nothing can be
more instructive than the observation of the image projected on an
opaque screen. Colour-filters for securing contrast, or for more perfectly
rendering colour differences in monochrome, are next considered, and are
followed by plates and their development. Chapter XL deals with photo-
micrography by ultra-violet light — a method with great possibilities, but
at present only suitable for practised experts — with stereoscopic micro-
photographs, and with the production of coloured lantern-slides. Lastly,
a series of progressive examples, ranging from botanical, bacteriological,
and pathological subjects, to diatoms, foraminifera and metallic sections,
and each chosen to show some special point in the structure or lighting,
are illustrated by ten collotype plates.

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Ultramicroscopical Study of Solutions of Iodine.* — The fact that
iodine gives, according to the nature of the solvent, solutions either
violet or brownish, has attracted much attention from chemists. J. Amann
has, in addition to chemical investigations, now attacked the subject by
ultramicroscopical methods. He finds that there is a marked ultra-
microscopic difference between the violet and the brown solutions.
Although the former only rarely contain ultramicroscopic micellte, yet
the brown solutions furnish an ultramicroscopic micellar-phase, more or
less abundant. The author fullv discusses the significance of his observa-
tions, which seem to confirm the theories of polymerization of iodine.

Elliptic Interference with Reflecting 6rating.| — C. Barus de-
scribes a method for obtaining elliptic interference. In a previous
experiment (fig. 66) L was a source of light, M a glass-plate grating,
GmGn plane-mirrors, each reflecting a spectrum from M. It was found
that elliptical interference was produced whenever the rays returned
after passing M by transmission and reflection were made to overlap in
the spectrum. The author's present method is the converse of this, since
the gratings and the opaque mirrors now change places. Parallel rays
from L strike the plate of glass M, and the component rays reach identical
reflecting gratings Gm and G„ placed symmetrically with respect to M
at an angle i to the E and L directions. The undivided rays pass off

* Bull, de la Soc. Vaudoise des Sci. Naturelles. xlvii. (1911) pp. 1-50.
t Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. Philadelphia, i. (1911) pp. 125-39 (5 figs.).

546 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

eccentrically at It and are not seen in the telescope at E. They may,
however, he seen in an auxiliary telescope pointed in the line R, and they
then facilitate the adjustments. Rays diffracted at the angle Li, how-
ever, are respectively transmitted and reflected hy M and interfere in

Fig. 66.

the telescope in the line E. Similarly, rays diffracted at an angle 0' > i
interfere in the line D.

The author describes the adjustments necessary, and several modifi-
cations of the experiment.

Hartik g, H. — Uber erne Grenzbedingung bis der Konstruktion gewissen optischer
Systeme.

[The author has worked out the numerical values of the co-efficients for
certain two-lens optical systems.]

Zeit. f. Instrumentenk., xxx. (1910) pp. 359-63.

Heinrich, K.— Verwendung der Savartschen Platte bei der Beobachtung der
relativen Phasendifferenz zur Bestimmung der optiscben Konstanten von
Metallen.

Berichte fiber die Verli. d. KSnig. Sachsischen Gcsell. d. Wissenscliaften
zu Leipzig, Math.-Phys. Klasse, v. (1910) pp. 253-5.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Quekett Microscopical Club.— The 474th Ordinary Meeting was
held on May 28, Dr. E. J. Spitta, F.R.A.S., Vice-President, in the Chair.
Mr. 0. 1). Soar, F.L.S. F.R.M.S., read a paper on "The Work of the
late Saville Kent on British Hydrachnids." Together with Mr. William-
son, of Edinburgh, the author is preparing a monograph of British
Hydrachnids, and having, by courtesy of the British Museum authori-
ties, had access to Saville Kent's collection of slides, notes, and draw-
ings, it was thought a brief account would be of interest to the Club.
Saville Kent's work on these organisms was begun in 1867 and continued
till 1883, and from the material available Mr. Soar had identified fifty

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 547

species, of which forty were adult forms. Saville Kent's method of
preparing and mounting his specimens was described in Science Gossip,
1882. The specimens, adult, larvae, or ova, were killed by momentary
immersion in boiling water. They were mounted in a cell of suitable
depth in either camphor-water, or a solution of 1 of spirit to 4 or 5 of .
water. Specimens fourteen years old so preserved retained their pristine
form and brilliance of colour. The Hon. Sec. read a paper communi-
cated by Mr. E. M. Nelson, F.R.M S., on " Methods of Illumination."
The paper dealt first with mirror illumination, and the right and wrong
ways of getting centred illumination with concave mirrors only. The
use of ground glass was referred to, and, generally, its use deprecated.
The least harmful position for it is below the substage condenser. The
very cheapest form of substage condenser will give a better image than
is obtainable with ground glass. In dealing with the use of screens for
visual work, it was stated that the normal eye is most sensitive to fine
detail when the light is peacock-green in colour.

The 475th Ordinary Meeting of the Society was held on June 27.
Mr. C. F. Rousselet, F.R.M.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. A paper
by Dr. E. Penard, on " Some Rhizopods from Sierra Leone," was read
by Mr. A. Earland, F.R.M. S. The material examined was supplied by
Mr. G. H.Wailes, and yielded fourteen species of fresh-water Rhizopods,
of which three were new, and four at least might be considered as
special forms and varieties. The genera represented were Centrop>/.ri$
(2 species), Difflugia (5 species, 2 new), Euglgpha (2 species), Lesqaer-
entia (3 species, 1 new), and Pontigulatia (2 species). The new species
will be fully described and figured in the next issue of the Club's
Journal. Mr. T. A. O'Donohoe read a note on " Dimorphism in the
Spermatozoa of the Flea and the Blow-fly." In the common flea two
forms were found, both of which are very large compared with those of
man, whose spermatozoa have an average length of 0*06 mm. In the
flea the larger form is 0- 7 to 0*45 mm. long, and the smaller form about
half these lengths. Carbol-fuchsin or gentian-violet are suitable stains.
The spermatozoa of the blow-fly are much smaller than those of the flea.
The two forms observed do not differ much in length, but one is very
much thicker than the other. (For other cases of dimorphic spermatozoa
see this Journal, 1905, p. 34.) A paper on " Normal and Abnormal
Vision in Microscope Work," by E. M. Nelson, F.R.M.S., was read by the
Assist. Hon. Sec. The experiments described showed that differences
from normal sight produced the greatest effect with low powers, such as
those obtained with a " loup."

B. Technique.*
(1) Collecting- Objects, including Culture Processes.

Examination of Water for Typhoid Bacilli by the Complement-
fixation Method.f — G. Volpino and E. Cler employ the complement-

* This division contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses ; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes ;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including Slides, preservative fluids, etc. ;
(6) Miscellaneous.

t Centrabl. Bakt., lte Abt., lviii. (1911) pp. 392-9.

548 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

fixation reaction in determining the presence of typhoid bacilli in water.
The water is filtered through a Chamberland filter: the deposit is
scraped off ami mixed with normal .saline. To a measured quantity of
this are added 2 drops of a strong anti-typhoid serum, 1 drop of comple-
ment, and 1 c.cm. of sensitized Hood-corpuscles. The absence of
hemolysis indicates the presence of typhoid bacilli. By actual trial the
authors have determined that the method is much more delicate and
reliable than the culture methods at present in use, and it is just as easy
of application.

Collodion Filters.*— J. Duclanx and A. Hamelin make some obser-
vations on the use of collodion filters, based on an experience of several
years. The usual difficulty in their use is that they cannot be dried
or sterilized by heat. The authors have succeeded in preparing cellu-
lose filters which obviate these difficulties, but the results are not
constant enough to be satisfactory. These were prepared by mixing a
solution of cellulose with Schweitzer's fluid, but much better results
have been obtained by denitrifying nitrocellulose, the best agent for
the purpose being ammonium sulphohydrate. These filters can be dried
any number of times, or placed in boiling water without being affected.
They also resist the action of alcohol, ether, and acetone. In filtering
liquids containing very fine particles the process is very slow. It is im-
possible to use air-pressure lest the filter be ruptured, and the device is
recommended of using osmotic pressure as an accelerating agent. To
this end the authors employ a solution of Congo red, which does not
penetrate the cellulose filter, but exerts a considerable osmotic pressure
upon it. By this means they were able to increase the rapidity of filtra-
tion by as much as seven times without endangering the filter.

Resistance to Passage of Microbes through Collodion Filters.f
Grenet and Salimbeni have succeeded in preparing a collodion filter for
general use. Their method is to dip an ordinary Chamberland candle
into a solution of collodion containing 10 p.c. of glycerin. The glycerin
prevents the filter drying and so becoming useless. Before doing so it
is necessary to remove all the air from the candle by plunging it in water,
or, better, in alcohol. Such a filter prevents the passage of ultramicro-
scopic organisms, and it retains its efficiency for at least a year. It does
not become clogged like an ordinary Chamberland. To prevent the
growth of moulds upon it, it is advisable to add a trace of formalin to the
collodion solution.

Rapid Method for Isolating Oospora lingualis.J — F. Gueguen
states that carrot is the least unfavourable medium for isolating Oospora
lingualis, a parasite found in cases of black tongue. The carrot is inocu-
lated by stroking the surface with an affected papilla. In about five
days the growth will be evident above the general surface. A trace of
the growth is removed and sown in liquefied gelatin ; a second tube is
inoculated with a drop of the first, and from the second a third tube is
similarly inoculated. Sometimes it is necessary to make a fourth and

* Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxv. (1911) pp. 1-15-9.
t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 916-19.
% C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 752-3.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 549

even a fifth dilation. These different dilations are then made into plates.
In 48 hoars at 22° colonies of yeast will appear, while Oospora only be-
comes evident about the sixth day as minute white points. These colonies
grow extremely slowly.

Cultivation Medium for the Influenza Bacillus and Ducrey's
Bacillus.* — Elizabeth T. Fraser recommends Staphylococcus agar for
cultivating the influenza bacillus ; this is made by melting a tube of
ordinary agar and adding to it h-\ c.cm. of a sterilized emulsion of
Staphylococcus in saline solution. It is immaterial whether the emulsion
be sterilized at 60° or 100° C. It is asserted that the organism grew
better on this than on blood media ; it is also suitable for Ducrey's
bacillus.

Culture of Leishmania tropica on Solid Media.f — C. Nicolle and
L. Manceaux have cultivated Leishmania tropica on blood-agar com-
posed according to the formula of Novy and MacNeal. Two precautions
are necessary : the surface must not be dry (therefore old tubes are not
employed), and the condensation water must be pipetted off before the
medium is inoculated. At 20-22c a film appears on the surface 4 or 5
days after inoculation. Much better preparations are obtained by this
procedure than by the condensation-water method.

Lucet, A. — De l'influence de l'agitation sur le developpement du Bacillus anthracis
cultive en milieu liquide. Comptes Rendits, clii. (1911) p. 1512.

(2) Preparing- Objects.

New Methods of Histological Technique.! — 0. Schultze makes
some general remarks on the use of osmic acid as a fixative, and main-
tains that it is one of the best. He indicates a method for staining with
hematoxylin after osmic fixation. He makes further remarks on the
clearing of large objects, such as frog embryos, in bulk, and recommends
for the purpose a mixture containing SO c.cm. of 1 p.c. chromic acid,
5 c.cm. eau de Javelle, and 10 drops of potash. This fixes, removes the
pigment, and clears, so that the internal anatomy can be distinctly seen.

(3) Cutting, including- Embedding- and Microtomes.

Modification of the Freiburg Method of putting on a Directing-
plane (Richtungs-Ebene) for Reconstruction^— N. C. Rutherford's
device consists in the use of lamp-black obtained by burning camphor.
This is made into a thin film by means of a mixture of absolute alcohol
and collodium, and applied by means of a camel-hair brush. After
drying, melted soft paraffin is run over the surface in the usual way, and
when this has solidified the squaring of the block is completed.

(4 Staining- and Injecting-.

Staining of Fats.|| — J. Lorrain Smith and W. Mair review their
previous work on the methods of staining fats and lipoids. Fats can

* Lancet (1911) i. pp. 1573-4.

t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 712-13.

X Verh. d. Phvsikal.-Med. Gesell. z. Wurzburg, xl. (1910) pp. 157-68 (pi. xvi.).

§ Anat. Anzeii., xxxix. (1911) pp. 22-4 (1 rig.)

|| Skand. Arckiv Pbysiolog., xxv. (1911) pp. 247-55.

550

summary of c('i;i:i:nt researches relating TO

be stained by anilin dyes, such as sudan iii. sharlach R ; by basic anilin
dyes which depend for their action on hydrolysis of the fat, but not by
acid dyes. Certain lipoid substances, however, can be stained with acid
fuchsin. These substances must possess basic properties, and the stain-
ing is a result of the chemical reaction between the base and the acid
Nile blue sulphate A was found to stain fat red, the peculiar result
being due to an oxazine base in the dye, which in watery solutions
slowly changes into an oxazone, red in colour and soluble in liquid fat.
Weigert's and Altmann's methods of mordanting with potassium
bichromate are discussed, and an investigation of the bichromate hema-
toxylin method has yielded an interpretation of Marchi's method.

Apparatus for Romanowsky Staining.*— C. Schilling describes a
simple apparatus (fig. 67) for facilitating staining. It consists of two

graduated tubes of equal bore, joined by a
cross-piece. From the bottom of each tube
leads a narrower tube to a stop-cock, by
which both can be opened simultaneously.
A small funnel receives the drop from each
tube and conducts the mixed stain to the
preparation. One tube contains methylen-
blue (med. Hochst) 2 grm., borax 5 grm.,
water 1)3 grm., diluted 1 in 50 with water ;
the other contains eosin B (A. extra Hochst)
0*2 grm. in 1000 grm. of water. The
advantage of this method is that the mixing
takes place uniformly and the staining is
more rapid.

Methods of Staining Tubercle Bacilli.f
S. Rosenblat, after a comparison of the
staining methods of Gasis, Ziehl, and Much,
has come to the conclusion that the first-
named method is of little value. It throws
no light upon the minute structure of the
tubercle bacillus, nor is it of any practical
value in routine diagnostic work. The
method is very complicated. Much's modi-
fication of Gram's method may elucidate mor-
phological points of importance, particularly in the case of young forms.
It is of no use as an aid to the search for tubercle bacilli in sputum or
in smears from animal tissues. There are also troublesome complica-
tions in this method. For the demonstration of the organisms, the best
method is that of Ziehl, which gives a clear and distinct picture. The
author considers that the granules shown in preparations according to
the method of Much are not developmental forms, but degeneration
products in bacilli which have lost their acid-fast membrane. A Ziehl-
Gram combination throws some light upon the minute structure of the

Fig. 07.

organism.

* Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lviii. (1911) pp, 264-5.
t Centralbl. Bakt., 1« Abt. Orig., lviii. (1911) pp. 173-92.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 551

Improved Method of Iodine Staining.* — F. Tobler finds that by
the use of lactic acid better results arc obtained with histological botanical
preparations stained with iodine. The original method had certain draw-
backs, such as the rapidity with which preparations deteriorated, and the
tendency of the iodine to crystallize irregularly. The application of lactic
acid solutions obviates these troubles to a large extent. Iodine is only
slightly soluble in lactic acid. If this latter reagent be allowed to diffuse
in from the edge of a coverslip, displacing alcohol, and act upon a fresh
iodine preparation, it will determine a crystallization of iodine in situ,
and so fix the stain. Bine as well as brown staining preparations may be
so tested, but greater care is required with the preparations.

Method for Studying Osseous Tissue. t — E. Rettererand A. Lelievre
first make paraffin sections of material previously fixed and decalcified.
Two methods of staining are given. In the first the sections are im-
mersed in alum-carmin for 12 to 24 hours, and then in potash-alum-
hsematoxylin ; they are then decolorized in dilute picro-hydrochloric acid,
and, after washing in running water, are dehydrated and mounted in
balsam. In the second method, the sections, with or without previous
mordanting in picro-hydrochloric acid, are treated for 24 hours with
potash-alum-hsernatoxylin, and then differentiated with the acid solution.
After a thorough washing in running water, they are overstained with
saturated aqueous solution of picric acid ; after a rapid wash in water
they are passed through alcohol, then xylol, and mounted in balsam.

By these procedures it is found that the intercellular substance of
osseous tissue is composed of morphotic elements and an amorphous
mass. From a morphological and structural point of view, the authors
compare the fundamental substance of bone to reinforced concrete :
the iron framework corresponds to the capsules and to the trabecular
system of tnc bone, the cement or mortar to the amorphous and calcified
mass of the osseous tissue.

(5) Mounting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc.

Fluid Mounting.} — C. E. Heath remarks that for fluid mounting
there is required a cement sufficiently hard to be adhesive, rigid enough
to bear handling, yet elastic, to stand the trifling differences of volume
due to temperature variation. Such a cement can be made as follows :
a penny tube of cycle-rubber solution, which is rubber in naphtha, is
emptied into a four-ounce bottle and double its volume of old gold-
size ardded, shaking till thoroughly mixed. This must now be placed on
a water- bath, or anywhere to be heated not beyond 150°, in order to
drive off the naphtha and any volatile constituent of the gold-size.
AVhilst this is being done, prepare a thick solution of shellac in abso-
lute alcohol (not methylated spirit) and add, when the other solution is
naphtha-free, twice its volume of shellac solution as thick as treacle.
Stir whilst hot and filter through line muslin before cooling It can be
thinned as desired with absolute alcohol. The reason why methylated
spirit cannot be used is that the denaturant which evaporates with the

* Zeitscb. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 366-8.
t C.R. Soc Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 630-3.
% Knowledge, xxxiv. (1911) p. 235.

552 SUMMARY UK CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

spirit may evaporate inwards and be condensed in the fluid mountant,
and many slides may be spoiled by a milky fog caused by the con-
densed denaturant, which is not transparent when mixed with water
any more than methylated spirit is. The quantity required is not large,
so absolute alcohol is not prohibitive.

Use the mountant as thickly as it can be worked to flow, and make a
heavy ring on the slide. Of course, it is preferable to do a fair quantity
at one time. This sets in about 15 minutes, and dries reasonably hard
in a day. This ensures perfect contact of the cement to glass slip. To
cement the rings, take a scraping of soap from the piece in use, and
spread it on the turntable centre. A ring, flatted on coarse emery
cloth if metal, or coarse sandpaper if vulcanite, can be pressed on to
the soap and adjusted centrally with sufficient firmness to be cemented
all round, leaving a more level ring than can be otherwise obtained.
The next day, or later, a thin ring of cement can be put on the slip
and the ring adjusted in place. When hardened, there will be perfect
contact of cement and glass, with perfect contact of cement and ring,
with an elastic layer of cement in between, which is capable of absorb-
ing any small variation under the exercise of pressure. A ring fixed in
this manner is likely to remain permanent if the further mounting
operations are properly performed.

Direct Enumeration of Bacteria in Water.* — In the bacterio-
logical examination of water samples, Y. Amann counts the number of
micro-organisms by direct observation of a known volume of the water
with dark-ground illumination. For this procedure are required the
ordinary accessories for oblique illumination, and a ruled slide of the
type used for the enumeration of blood-cells. The author finds that
by this method much higher figures are obtained than with methods of
plate cultivation. For example, a sample of water which, when plated,
gave growth of 584 organisms, was found, by the method of direct
enumeration, to contain 86,000 organisms per cubic centimetre. This
method permits of the enumeration of organisms which are incapable of
growth upon ordinary media, and of the differential counting of motile
and non-motile bacteria.

Method of Preserving Brain Sections.! — R- E. Liesegang describes
a simple and inexpensive method of preserving large sections of brain
by means of embedding in gelatin. The section is placed carefully
in a freshly prepared 5 p.c. solution of gelatin, which is gently warmed
in order to prevent it from solidifying too rapidly. A further quantity
of gelatin is then poured over the surface of the section, and the pre-
paration is then removed to a cool place and allowed to solidify. Great
care must lie taken to remove all air-bubbles. The best quality of
gelatin, that used for the preparation of photographic emulsions, should
be used. Attention must be directed to obtaining an even surface on the
embedded section. On no account should the preparation be placed in
an incubator to hasten the solidifying process.

* Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xxix. (1911) pp. 381-4.
t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 369-74.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, KTC.

553

(6) Miscellaneous.

Improved Form of Graduated Pipette.* — C. Permin has devised
a form of pipette for bacteriological purposes, which possesses the ad-
vantage that its use does not involve those departures from hygienic

Fig. 68.

principles which are associated with the ordinary pattern. The pecu-
liarities of construction and method of use are clearly illustrated in
fig. 68. A side opening near the top end communicates with a chaniher,
walled with a rubber collar. When the top-end of the pipette is closed

* Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lvii. (1911) pp. 575-6.

554 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

by the anger, pressure upon this collar controls the column of liquid.
If it We desired, on the other hand, to alter the size of the cm ity within
the collar, independently of the column of liquid, the top opening of the
pipette is left free.

Method of Examining' Faeces for Evidences of Parasitism.* — M. C.
Hall, after describing methods of other observers, states that the besl
results in routine examination of faeces of all kinds are obtained as
follows. Briefly, the method consists in breaking up the faeces very
thoroughly by shaking in water, adding a quantity of small shot if ne-
cessary or desirable ; sieving through a set of brass sieves and then
through a silk bolting-cloth sieve, or a sieve made with a jeweller's fine-
meshed brass screen ; examining the material left on sieve for parasites ;
sedimenting (and washing) ; centrifuging (and washing) — one tube being
filled with calcium chloride solution of 1250 sp. gr., centrifuged and, if
desired, the top cubic centimetre removed with a pipette, shaken up in a
tube with 14 c.cm. of water and centrifuged — and then making a micro-
scopic examination of a drop of the sediment from the bottom of the
tube centrifuged with water, and one from the top when the calcium
chloride solution alone was used, or from the bottom in case water was
added to the top cubic centimetre. The material is washed at either or
both of the points indicated.

R. and J. Beck's Grinding and Polishing Machine for making
Microscopical Specimens for Metallurgical Work.f — This machine,
the details of which have been worked out- in conjunction with some of
the leading metallurgists, gives in a compact and convenient form all
that is required for preparing metal specimens for examination.

Fig. 69 gives a general view of the machine, which consists of a
vertical spindle carrying a grinding or polishing disc driven by a small
electric motor. The spindle A is made of steel, and is bored out at the
upper end to receive the disc upon which the polishing or grinding
material is to be placed. The lower end is hardened to prevent undue
wear. This spindle is furnished with a speed cone F with pulleys of vary-
ing diameters, and is driven by means of a belt from the driving cone G,
which in its turn is driven from the motor. By shifting the belt on the
speed cone a range of speeds varying from about 300 to 1,000 revolutions
per minute can be obtained. The disc B is made of brass, and fits by
means of a tapered fitting into the spindle A, which allows of its easy
removal, and at the same time ensures accuracy in the running. A lip
E projects downwards and prevents any grinding or polishing material
reaching the bearing.

The cloth for polishing, or emery-paper for grinding, is secured to the
disc by a simple but very effective device. A groove K is made in the
edge of the disc, and the paper or cloth is stretched over the surface of
i In' disc, ami is held in position by means of a garter made of a stiff brass
spiral spring, which presses the material into the groove. In this way the
cloth or paper is held in close contact with the disc, no matter what its
thickness may be.

* U.S. Depart. Agric, Bull. No 135 (1911) 36 pp. (figs.).
t R. and J. Beck's Special Catalogue (1911) (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

555

In order to collect the spent polishing materials, the disc is surrounded
by a catcher C, which can be easily removed for cleaning. Into the top
of the catcher is fitted a guard ring 1), which being wide forms a rest for
the hand, and by being continued downwards below the surface of the
disc and nearly touching the edge, prevents any specimens that are being
polished from falling into the catcher should they be let slip from the
fingers.

The standard machine is supplied with a switch H and flexible con-
necting wire, with a plug adapter attached, so that it can be connected

Fig. 69.

with any ordinary electric lamp fitting. The motor can be supplied suit-
able for any direct current circuit between 100-220 volts, or can be
specially made to run on an alternating circuit if desired.

Metallography, etc.

Spontaneous Disintegration of Aluminium.* — H. le Chatelier de-
scribes the microstructure of aluminium utensils in different stages of
disintegration. The metal in which the change had made progress
showed, after etching, a continuous cellular network. At the surface,
where the decay had proceeded the furthest, the network had developed
into actual spaces, separating the grains, which could easily be detached.
The disintegration appeared to be the result of the parting of the grains
at their boundaries.

The same author! further discusses the subject. Investigations by
Heyn and Bauer have shown that the decay takes place only in severely
cold-worked metal. The instability of cold-worked metals appears to be
a general phenomenon, and should not be overlooked when additional
strength is sought by cold-working. While chemical influences may
play a part in the decay of such material, they probably act merely as
exciting agencies, setting in operation the latent tendency to disintegrate.

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 650-2 (4 figs.),
t Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 373-6 (4 figs.).

556 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Metallographie Notes.* --H. le Chatelier describes the micro-
structure of a variety of specimens. Titanium of different degrees of
purity, carbide of titanium, carbide of aluminium, cast iron quenched in
the experiments on the artificial production of diamond — all these being
specimens prepared by Moissan in the electric furnace — were examined.
The effect of cold-work in promoting the growth of crystalline grain in
mild steel upon subsequent annealing between Goo and 700° C, was
clearly shown by a specimen furnished by Charpy. This had been im-
pressed by a Brinell ball, then annealed, and machined level with the
bottom of the impression. The polished and etched specimen showed a
ring of exceedingly large crystals, corresponding to the region which had
undergone the greatest distortion in the test. The structure inside and
outside this ring was much less coarse. The author's remarks on the
disintegration of aluminium are dealt with in the preceding abstract.

Alloys of Sodium "with Silver and Gold.f — C. H. Mathewson has
worked out the equilibrium diagrams of the sodium-silver and sodium-
gold systems by thermal, microscopical, and chemical methods. Sodium
and silver form no compounds, and each is soluble in the other in the
solid state only to a minute extent, if at all. Sodium and gold form
one compound, Au2Na. The concentration of any solid solutions is
extremely small.

Ternary System, Silver-tin-lead.J — X. Parravano has investigated
this ternary system by determining, by thermal methods, the equilibrium
diagrams of a number of sections, parallel to the silver-tin side, of the
triangular ternary diagram. Cooling curves were taken of 102 alloys,
falling into 13 series, each series containing a constant percentage of
lead. Confirmation of the thermal results was obtained microscopically ;
a 10 p.c. solution of acetic acid in alcohol was used for etching. Four
solid phases exist : mixed crystals of silver and tin, mixed crystals of
lead and tin, the compound Ag3Sn, and pure tin. A ternary eutectic
melting at 175° C. was found.

'&

Ternary Alloys of Lead, Tin and Antimony.§ — R. Loebe has deter-
mined the equilibrium diagram of this ternary system by thermal
methods, confirming his conclusions by microscopical examination of
the alloys. Cooling curves were taken of some 200 alloys, falling into
12 series ; each series formed a section across the triangular diagram.
In the binary systems, lead-antimony and lead-tin, the components are
insoluble in each other in the solid state, while iu the tin-antimony
system three series of solid solutions occur. The position and form of
i lie four surfaces of primary crystallization of the ternary system were
established, but owing to the slow rate of diffusion in the solid state,
and also to the segregation caused by differences in specific gravity
between some of the phases, the position of the solidus surfaces could
not be fixed with certainty. Xo ternary eutectic point was found, the
binary eutectic tin-lead having the lowest melting-point. The ternary

* Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 367-76 (14 figs.).
t Internat. Zeitschr. Metallographie, i. (1911) pp. 51-63, 81-8 (14 figs.).
I Iutemat. Zeitschr. Metallographie, i. (1911) pp. 89-108 (32 figs.).
§ Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 7-15, 33-49 (79 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 557

alloys contain the same constituents that occur in the tin-antimony
system, with the addition of lead ; lead acts merely as a solvent. The
microstructnre of some of the alloys showed that complete equilibrium
had not been obtained in the cooling.

Gold Tellurides* — G. Pellini and E. Quercigh have determined the
equilibrium diagram of the gold-tellurium system by thermal methods.
A single maximum in the curve, at 404° C, corresponds with the com-
pound AuTe2. This compound occurs in nature as calaverite.

Amalgams containing Silver and Tin.f — R. A. Joyner has investi-
gated the ternary system tin-silver-mercury, studying more especially the
peculiarities of the alloys used as dental amalgams. Fresh tilings of
silver-tin alloys require more mercury for amalgamation than filings
which have been kept for some months, or heated to 100° C. This
property of " ageing " is shown to be a characteristic of the compound
Ag3Sn ; possibly " ageing " is the result of the polymerization of this
compound. The reaction, to which is due the hardening of amalgam
prepared by mixing filings of silver-tin alloy with mercury, is the breaking
up of Ag3Sn with the formation of Ag3Hg4 and free tin. The ternary
equilibrium was studied chiefly by the method of chemical analysis of
the liquid phase, separated from the alloy by mechanical means.

Occlusion of Hydrogen by Palladium-gold Alloys.! — A. J. Berry
has determined the amount of hydrogen occluded by a number of
palladium-gold alloys. Two similar voltameters containing dilute sul-
phuric acid were connected together in series. Both anodes and one
cathode were of platinum ; the other cathode was of the alloy under
investigation. The difference between the volumes of hydrogen col-
lected from the two cathodes is the amount occluded by the palladium-
gold cathode. Alloys containing less than 25 p.c. palladium do not
occlude hydrogen, while the occluding power of alloys containing more
than 25 p.c. is a simple function of the concentration of palladium.

Properties of Cast and Rolled Gold Plate.§ — H. J. Morris and
A. McWilliam have investigated the relative strengths of cast and of
swaged dental gold plate. Static bending tests indicated that cast plate
had a much lower elastic limit than rolled or soldered plate, and in
repeated alternating bending tests the endurance of the cast plate was
very low. Some notes on the microstrncture and the fractures of the
different plates are given.

Flow-pressure of Tin.|] — The pressure at which a plastic metal will
Mow steadily through an aperture appears to be an important physical
constant of the metal. E. Janecke has measured the flow-pressure of
tin at different temperatures up to 217° C. The curves showing the
relation between temperature and flow-pressure do not indicate by any
inflection the temperature at which the allotropic change in tin takes
place.

* Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xix. (1910) pp. 445-9, through Journ. Chein. Soc,
c. (1911) p. 45.

t Journ. Chem. Soc, xcix. (1911) pp. 195-208 (2 figs.).
X Journ. Chem. Soc, xcix. (1911) pp. 463-6 (1 fig.).

§ Proc Roy. Soc Medicine (Odontological Section) iv. (1911) pp. 57-6S (9 figs.).
Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 68-72 (12 figs.).

Aug. 16th, 1911 2 o

558 SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Influence of Nitrogen on Cementation of Steel.* — J. Kirner has
investigated the efficiency of two nitrogenous case-hardening* materials,

and a third containing alkali carbonates but very little nitrogen. From
600° to Nf)0° C. cementation proceeded actively with the nitrogenous
materials. At 900° C. their action was uncertain, while above 1)50° C.
the rate of cementation again increased. With the nitrogen-free material
the rate of cementation steadily rose with the temperature. When the
nitrogenous materials were used at temperatures between 600° and
■850° C. the nitrogen content of the outer layer of the steel rose to
0*6 p.c, diminishing, however, at higher temperatures. A new con-
stituent, named " Flavite," was detected in the slowly cooled steel of
high nitrogen content. Flavite goes into solution above the critical
temperature, and is not observed in quenched specimens.

Influence of Manganese on Mild Steel. f — G. Lang has examined
eleven mild steels containing 0'3 to 2*5 p.c. manganese, the carbon
content being 0*09 to 0*12 p.c. Mechanical tests were made on rod,
in three states, as rolled, quenched from 900° C. and slowly cooled from
900° C. Magnetic and electrical tests were also made. Tensile strength
and hardness were raised by increase of manganese, and in general the
addition of manganese up to 1'5 p.c. appeared to improve the properties
of the alloys.

Iron-carbon System."}: — A. Baykoff considers as untenable the view
that in the iron-carbon diagram there are two distinct branches, corre-
sponding to the separation of cementite and of graphite from the melt.
Cementite and graphite must therefore separate along the same line of
the diagram, and from this it follows that cementite is a solid solution
and not a compound. Determinations of heat of combustion of pure iron
and of cementite, by burning in oxygen in a Berthelot bomb, have con-
firmed the author's view of the constitution of cementite, since that body
is shown to have a negligible heat of formation. An interpretation of
the iron-carbon diagram, involving the separation from the melt, at the
carbon-rich end, of mixed crystals of iron and carbon, is advanced. The
name " moissanite " is given to these mixed crystals, the carbon-content
of which may vary through the range 100 to 6 ■ 66 p.c. (pure carbon to
cementite).

In a footnote, H. le Chatelier points out that BaykofFs conclusion is
in disagreement with the experimental results obtained by Moissan, who
found graphite and cementite, but no intermediate sobd solutions, in
high-carbon alloys.

Iron-antimony Alloys. §— A. Portevin has determined the critical
points of five alloys containing 1*19 to 9 '20 p.c. antimony, with little
carbon. The results indicate a tendency of antimony to raise the critical
points of iron slightly. For microscopical examination, the alloys were
etched with copper-potassium chloride solution acidified with hydro-
chloric acid. A white constituent first appeared in the alloy containing
6 - 5 p.c. antimony.

* Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 72-7 (15 figs.),
t Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 15-21, 49-53 (25 figs.).
t Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 315-19 (2 figs.).
§ Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 312-14 (3 figs).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 559

" Graphitic " Cast-iron.*— 0. Krohnke has studied the peculiar decay
of cast-iron pipes resulting in the so called graphitic condition, in which
the material is sufficiently soft to be cut with a knife or even to be crumbled
in the fingers. Microscopical examination of numerous specimens has
indicated that the change involves the dissolving of the ferrite out of
the pearlite and the transformation of the graphite into a grey or white
substance designated " graphitite." Cementite and the phosphide eutectic
are unaffected, and only grey iron is subject to corrosion of this kind,
white iron resisting the corrosive agencies.

Malleable Cast-iron.f— F. Giolitti, F. Carnevali and G. Tavanti
have heated various samples of white cast-iron, grey cast-iron, and steel
in different mixtures of carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide, at tempera-
turps ranging from 800° to 1050° C, to ascertain the effect on carbon
content and carbon condition. It was found that carbon was more
readily oxidized when existing as cementite than when in the free state,
as graphite or temper carbon. The conditions for effective decarburiza-
tion were determined.

Precipitation of Free Carbon in the Iron-carbon System.:}: — "W. H.
Hatfield has submitted a number of alloys of iron and carbon, containing
also different percentages of common impurities, to various heat treat-
ments. The main conclusion reached is that free carbon is only produced
by the decomposition of structurally free carbide of iron. AVhen silicon
is the only other element present in the alloy, the carbide contains some
silicon. Manganese is largely found in the carbide to the exclusion of
silicon. Sulphur also appears to cause the exclusion of silicon from the
carbide. The tendency of the carbide to decompose is influenced by the
presence in it of other elements. The mechanism of the separation of
annealing carbon in high-carbon steel is described.

Synthesis of Meteoric Iron.§ — C. Benedicks has prepared an artifi-
cial plessite (the eutectoid aggregate, kamacite + taenite, of meteoric
iron) by cooling an iron-nickel alloy containing 12 p.c. nickel very slowly
from the molten state. The results are regarded as confirming the
Osmond equilibrium diagram for the iron-nickel system.

Effect of Galvanizing on Strength of Steel Wire.||— H. Winter has
made a microscopical study of galvanized wire. The wire was coated
electrolytically with copper and embedded in Rose's alloy ; transverse
sections were polish-etched with rouge and a solution of ammonium
nitrate. The injurious effect of pickling, the formation of a brittle
layer of zinc-iron alloy, the thermal action of too long immersion or too
high temperature in the zinc bath, are causes of the reduction of strength
which occurs to a very variable extent upon galvanizing.

Annealing of Steel. ^ — W. Campbell has determined the temperature
at which, in a rolled steel containing 0 ' 30 p.c. carbon and having a

* Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 674-9 (29 figs.).

t Rass. Min. Met. e Chim., xxxiii. (1910) pp. 1-51, through Journ. Soc. Chem.
Ind., xxix. (1910) p. 1456.

t Proc. Roy. Soc, Series A, lxxxv. (1911) pp. 1-13 (36 figs.).

§ Rev. Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 1084-6 (4 figs.) and viii. (1911) pp. 85-170
(15 figs.). || Rev. Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 1064-74 (15 figs.).

t Proc. Amer. Soc. Testing Materials, x. (1910) pp. 193-200 (12 figs.).

2 o 2

560 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

coarse structure, the coarse laminae of ferrite disappeared. Small pieces
were heated to temperatures ranging from 715° to 900° C, cooled in air,
and microscopically examined. Complete refining, involving the dis-
appearance of all ferrite lamination except that caused by re-precipitation
on lines of slag or manganese sulphide, took place on the completion of
the Ac 2-3 change, at 8*2 5°C.

Thermo-electric Forces of Solid Solutions.*— A. L. Bernoulli has
made thermo-electric measurements for solutions of thallium and tin in
silver, of mercury in cadmium, and of tin, zinc, and nickel in copper.
Schenck's law was found to hold for sufficiently dilute solutions, but not
so well with higher concentrations. For the copper-zinc alloys the
potential differences are much greater than those calculated by Schenck's
formula ; this is ascribed to the formation of the compound Cu2Zn3.

Defects in Alloys.f — 0. H. Desch discusses the character and origin
of defects commonly found in non-ferrous alloys. Sponginess is caused
by gases, dissolved in the molten alloy, being released during solidification.
The solubility of gases in molten metals appears to increase with rising
temperature. Brittleness may be due to the presence of oxide or inter-
crystalline eutectic. It is suggested that the " burning " temperature, in
brass, is that at which the zinc has a certain appreciable vapour pressure.
Of the numerous other defects described, many may be detected micro-
scopically.

Solid Colloid Systems in Metallography.^ — 0. Benedicks develops
the view that troostite is a solid colloidal solution of cementite in iron.
Troostite, formed by reheating martensite, may by further reheating be
coagulated into pearlite. Sorbite is regarded as an intermediate stage in
which this coagulation is incomplete. Colloidal solutions probably exist
in the iron-nickel, iron-manganese, and other alloys.

A. Lottermoser § compares iron-carbon alloys with gold glasses in
their capacity for forming solid colloidal solutions.

Electrical Conductivity of Molten Alloys. — P. Muller describes in
detail the apparatus and method he has used for the determination of
electrical conductivity of alloys in the liquid state. Numerous results
are given for the systems potassium-sodium, lead-tin, potassium-mercury,
sodium-mercury, lead-cadmium, lead-antimony, lead-bismuth and lead-
zinc. The relation of the electrical conductivity and the temperature
coefficient to the constitution of the alloy is discussed.

Equilibrium Diagrams. If — K. Bornemann enters upon a theoretical
discussion of some general properties of binary equilibrium diagrams,
these properties being illustrated by the complex transformations occur-
ring in the nickel-sulphur system.

* Ann. Physik., xxxiii. (1910) pp. G90-706, through Journ. Chem. Soc. xcvir.
(1910) p. 1030.

t Journ. Inst. Metals, iv. (1910) pp. 235-47, 257-64.

% Zeitschr. Lhera. Ind. Kolloide, vii. (1910) pp. 290-9 (5 figs.).

§ Op. tit., viii. (1911) pp. 95-6.

Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 730-40, 755-71 (35 fig<0.
1 Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 740-7 (13 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 501

Ternary Systems.* — E. Janecke discusses the constitution of various
types of ternary systems, classifying them according to the constitution
of the binary systems of which they may be considered to be composed.
As examples of the different types, systems are selected containing three
of the following metals : copper, silver, gold, chromium, manganese, iron,
cobalt, nickel, palladium, platinum.

Pseudo-binary Alloys. f — If in a metallic binary system the two
components A B form a compound C, it is usually assumed that the
complete equilibrium-diagram may be regarded as being composed of the
diagrams of the systems AC and C B, merely juxtaposed. This involves
the assumption that A and B cannot co-exist in equilibrium, one or the
other of the two metals being completely combined in the compound C.

A. Portevin draws attention to the possibility of a partial dissociation of
the compound resulting in the co-existence of A, B, and C. In such a
case the system must be regarded as ternary, the components being A,

B, and C. The theory of equilibrium of such systems is worked out at
some length, on the lines indicated by Roozeboom and Aten. Among
the systems to which the theory is applied are aluminium-antimony,
iron-molybdenum, and iron-chromium.

Apparatus for Microscopical Examination of Metals.} — A. Sauveur
describes the appliances he has found most satisfactory. Specimens of
steel and other magnetic substances may be held on the microscope stage
by a magnetic holder. This device is a thin V-shaped permanent magnet,
1 inch wide, 2h inches long. It is placed on the Microscope stage like a
glass slip, the specimen is held magnetically with its polished surface
against the lower surface of the holder. Small sections are suspended
near the small end of the Y-opening, large ones being placed near the
wider end. The plain glass illuminator is preferred to the prism type.
A simple form of inverted Microscope with horizontal photomicrographic
camera is described, though for photomicrography a vertical Microscope
and camera are recommended. The stand, objectives, eye-pieces, illumi-
nators, sources of light, condensers, and cameras, are all of well-known
types.

Colour-etching of Steel. § — F. Robin and P. Gartner recommend the
following method of etching for austenitic and martensitic steels. The
polished surface is immersed in a saturated solution of picric acid in
alcohol for 30 to 60 seconds, is then washed in water and allowed to dry
slowly in air. From the colours observed on a surface etched in this
manner much information as to the nature of the austenite or martensite
may be obtained. Differences in speed of etching also serve to distinguish
different natures of steel. The authors describe in detail the micro-
scopical characteristics of a number of steels of different compositions
treated to give austenite or martensite in large quantity.

* Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 510-23 (46 figs.).

t Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 7-37 (39 figs.).

j Proc. Amer. Soc. Testing Materials, x. (1910) pp. 518-50 (32 figs.).

§ Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 224-40 (34 figs.).

562 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Limits of Elasticity, and the Hardening of Metals.* — 0. Faust
and (J. Tammann have submitted test pieces of various metals to tensile
or compressive stress. One side of the specimen, previously polished,
was observed microscopically during the loading ; the stress at which
dulling of this surface was noted, corresponding with the beginning of
permanent deformation, is termed the lower elastic limit, and has the
same value in both tension and compression. By successive compres-
sions with increasing loads, between which the stress was removed and
the face re-polished, the elastic limit was raised to a point beyond which
no further increase took place ; this is the upper elastic limit. The
hardening of metals by strain is ascribed to a diminution in the size of
the crystals, brought about by the formation of surfaces of slip. No
evidence of the existence of an amorphous phase was obtained.

Reheating of Cold-worked Metals.f— L. Guillet has made tensile
tests of cold-drawn wires of hard steel, mild steel, and nickel, which had
been heated for 3 minutes to 100°, 250°, 300°, 400°, and other tempera-
tures differing by steps of 50° up to 900° C. The results showed that
complete annealing took place in each case between 750° and 800° C.

Stresses in Cold-worked Metals. $ — E. Heyn and O. Bauer have
devised a method for the measurement of stresses existing in cold-worked
metals. A cold-drawn bar of nickel steel (25 p.c. Ni) was found to be
stressed in tension in the outer layers, and in compression in the inner
portion, the value of the stresses exceeding one-half of the elastic limit.
Such stresses disappear upon annealing. An explanation of the manner
in which internal stresses come into existence upon cold working is given,
and is illustrated with numerous examples. The specific gravity of most
metals is diminished by cold work, and restored to its higher value by
annealing. The causes of the cracking of cold-worked metals are
discussed.

Simplification in Technique of Metallography^ — The preparation
of hard or brittle substances for microscopical examination, by the usual
methods, is a tedious and difficult process. Le Gris describes a method
of embedding minute fragments in gum lac, for polishing, etching, and
examination. A hole of suitable diameter (3, 6 or 10 mm.) and equal
depth, is bored in a small piece of brass, which is then heated and the
hole filled with gum lac. After cooling, the gum lac is filed level with
the surface of the brass ; the metal fragment is placed on the gum lac
and pressed into it with a heated flat metal surface to a depth of rather
more than half the thickness of the fragment. When cold, the prepara-
tion is polished by the usual methods, but as the surface of the fragment
is so small, the operation takes little time. In 2 or 3 minutes an em-
bedded fragment may be ground, polished, and etched. Filings, drillings
or powder may be examined in this way. Typical photomicrographs of
such preparations are given.

• Zeitschr. Phys. Chem., lxxv. (1910) pp. 108-26.

t Comptes Rendus, cli. (1910) pp. 1127-8.

% Internat. Zeitschr. Metallographie, i. (1911) pp. 16-50 (22 fig?.).

§ Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 335-9 (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, E'J C. 563

Composition of Eutectics.*— K. Losew has studied microscopically
the alloys of cobalt and antimony, and of nickel and antimony, as
examples of systems stated to contain eutectics differing but slightly
from one of the pure metals. The uniformity in the composition of such
eutectics has been questioned. The results' indicate the improbability
of the existence of eutectics approximating to pure antimony in the two
systems.

Electrical Conductivity of Alloys. t—W. Broniewski reviews the
work which has been carried out upon the relation of constitution of
alloys^ to their electrical conductivity and temperature coefficient of
electrical resistance, and summarizes the general conclusions established.
A comprehensive bibliography (1S27-1910) is appended.

Electrical Conductivity of Molten Metals.}— E. Wagner finds that
in many cases the conductivity of a solid metal at the melting-point is a
simple multiple of the conductivity of the liquid metal at the same
temperature. An explanation based on the electron theory is advanced.

Influence of Pressure on the Melting-points of Metals. §— J. John-
ston and L. H. Adams have constructed an apparatus suitable for studying
chemical and physical reactions at temperatures up to 400° C. and under
pressures up to 2000 atmospheres. Both temperature and pressure in the
reaction zone could be accurately measured. The change with pressure
of the melting-point of tin, bismuth, lead and cadmium was found to be
a linear function of the pressure. The melting-point of tin, cadmium
and lead rises with increase of pressure ; that of bismuth falls. The
difference between melting-point at 1 and 2000 atmospheres is 6*57° C.
for tin, 12'61° for cadmium, 16 "OS0 for lead, and 7*15° for bismuth.

Bornemann, K. — Binary Metal Alloys.

[Further instalments of the author's summarized account of the binary
systems. See this Journal, 1909, p. 787 ; and 1910.]

Metallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 572-9, 603-7 (39 figs.).
Burgess, C.F., & J. Aston — Some Alloys for Permanent Magnets.

Met. and Client. Engineering, viii. (1910) pp. 673-6.

Campbell, W., & F. C. Elder — Notes on Lead-tin-antimony Alloys.

[The compositions of numerous bearing metals and other alloys are given,
with some account of the equilibrium diagram of the ternary systems
and the structure of the alloys.]

School of Mines Quart., xxxii. (1911) pp. 244-55.

Grard — Hardness and Brittleness of Steels.

Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 241-74 (14 figs.).

Go pel, F.— Blueing of Steel. Deutsche Mech. Zeit., 1911, pp. 121-3 (11 figs.).

Guillet, L., & L. Re villon — New Shock Tests at Variable Temperatures.

Rev. Metallurgie, vii. (191i ) pp. 837-44 (1 fig.).

Hadfield, R. A. — Experiments on Segregation in Steel Ingots.

Tom. cit., pp. 1133-6 (6 figs.).

*

J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc, xliii. (19il) pp. 375-92, through Journ. Soc.
Chem. Ind., xxx. (1911) p. 694.

t Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 320-34.

t Ann. Physik., xxxiii. (1910) pp. 1484-92, through Journ. Chem. Soc, c. (1911)
p. 177.

§ Amer. Journ. Sci., xxxi. (1911) pp. 501-17 (4 figs.).

5G4 SUMMARY OF OURUENT RESEARCHES.

Hall, E. H , & L. L. Campbell — Electromagnetic and Thermomagnetic Trans-
verse and Longitudinal Effects in Soft Iron.

I 'roc. Amcr. Acad. Arts and Sci., xlvi. (1911) pp. 625-68 (14 figs.).

Howe, H. M. — Welding of Blow-holes in Steel.

[Evidence is given tending to show that, in rolling, the welding of blow-
holes may be complete, under favouring conditions.]

Proc. Amer. Soc. Testing Materials, x. (1910) pp. 169 92 (12 figs.).

Hughes, T. V.— Failure in Practice of Non-ferrous Metals and Alloys.

Journ. Inst. Metals, iii. (1910) pp. 187-203.

Lantsberry, F. C. A. H. — Some Alloys of Aluminium.

Foundry Trade Journal, xiii. (1911) pp. 202-6, 262-5 (6 figs.).

Parravano, N., & E. Viviani — Ternary System Copper-antimony-bismuth.
[Continuation and completion of the investigation of this system. (See this
Journal, 1911, p. 124.) The complete equilibrium diagram is obtained
by uniting the diagrams of Cu3 Sb-Sb-Bi and Cu3 Sb-Cu-Bi.]

Atti. R. Accad. Lincei, xix. (1910) pp. 197-201, 243-7, 343-449.

Portevik, A. — Application of the Method of Thermal Analysis to Ternary
Alloys.

[A theoretical treatment.] Rev. Mitallurgie, vii. (1910) pp. 1149-57 (9 figs.).

Portevik, A., & P. Gartner — Use of Oblique Illumination in Photomicro-
graphy. Tom. cit., pp. 921-3 (6 figs).

Ross, A. D. — Magnetic Alloys formed from Non-magnetic Materials.

Journ. Inst. Metals, iv. (1910) pp. 68-91 (3 figs.).

Ross, A. D., & R. C. Gray — Magnetism of Copper-manganese-tin alloys under
varying Thermal Treatment. Proc. Roy. Soc. Eclin., xxxi. (1910) pp. 85-99.

Rein both, F. — Chemical Colouring of Metals.

English Mechanic, xciii. (1911) pp. 446-8.
T as sin, W. — Copper-clad Steel.

[Photomicrographs are given to show the fine structure of steel coated with
copper.]

Proc. Amer. Soc. Testing Materials, x. (1910) pp. 280-94 (16 figs.).

Waterhouse, G. B. — Influence of Titanium on Segregation in Bessemer Bail-
steel. Tom. cit., pp. 201-11 (8 figs.)

Wickhorst, M. H. — Low-carbon Streaks in open-hearth Rails.

[Some details of the method of macro-examination employed are given.]

Tom. cit., pp. 212-22(14 figs.).

565

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

— r<l^\9i

MEETING

Held on the 28th June, 1911, at 20 Hanover Square, W.,
H. G. Plimmer, Esq., F.R.S., etc., President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of May 17th were read and con-
firmed, and were signed bv the President.

The following Donations received since the last Meeting were an-
nounced, and the thanks of the Society voted to the donors : —

From
Edward A Birge and Chancey Juday, The Inland Lakesj

of Wisconsin. The Dissolved Gases of the Water. \ The Authors.

(8vo, Madison, Wisconsin, 1911) )

The Secretary of

the Committee

of the Projiosed Optical

Convention of 1912.

Diatomaceous material for distribution Mr. C. F. S. Bilbrough

The Proceedings of the Optical Convention of 1905
(8vo, London, 1905)

Mr. Conrad Beck gave the following demonstration of the method
of determining in wave-lengths the measurement of a stage-micrometer.

Of late years several papers have been read before the Society setting
forth the results of a series of extremely careful and laborious measure-
ments of different specimens of stage-micrometers. Such measurements
have all been comparative, showing the differences that exist in various
ruled micrometers, but have in no case been measurements of the
absolute value of the rulings. Where ruled micrometers are found
which are uniform, and where a number of micrometers made by
entirely different methods agree, there is a probability that such micro-
meters may be approximately accurate, but it does not follow that such
is the case.

Since Professor Micbaelson by means of an interferometer measured
in wave-lengths the French metre, a great deal of attention had been
paid to this method of determining and recording measurements of
length, and Major MacMahon and Dr. Tatton are applying a similar
method to the measurement of the British standard yard.

A wave-length of light being a very small quantity of about
3Fouo in-j a number in the neighbourhood of two millions of these small
units are contained in the metre, and the determination of the exact
number requires very elaborate apparatus and an indirect method of
procedure.

A stage-micrometer, however, ruled to ^^ in. or T^o mm. contains
a comparatively small number of these units, and being ruled on a
transparent glass plate, is peculiarly well adapted for being measured in
this way.

By means of an interferometer which my firm has made to the

566 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

suggestions of Dr. Clay, the process can be carried out, although the
conditions for taking accurate measurements require a more stable
support than an ordinary table. The whole apparatus is here shown in
use sufficiently rigid to demonstrate the procedure.

It will be realized that if an instrument can be devised in which the
motion of some part of it can be made to show some optical change
every time it has moved through a distance of one or one-half wave-
length, then by counting how many times this optical change takes
place as it moves along, the distance that it has travelled is determined.
An interferometer is an apparatus which by means of the interference of
light causes a change from brightness to darkness to take place every
time one of its mirrors is moved along a distance of half a wave-length.

If this mirror be fixed to a carriage which also holds the micro-
meter to be measured, and the micrometer is' so held that it can at the
same time be viewed by a high-power Microscope with a cross line in
the eye-piece, then the number of optical changes that take place while
two consecutive ruled lines pass the cross-line in the Microscope eye-
piece may be counted, and the distance apart of these two lines is
obtained as a direct measurement in wave-lengths. Apart from other
limitations as to the distance within which the interferometer will show
the optical change, the number of units to be counted in measuring as
great a length as a metre or a yard is so great that it is not a possible
achievement, and a step-by-step indirect method of great complexity has
to be employed ; but for the determination of the small distances
represented by the rulings of a micrometer this difficulty does not arise,
and a direct count can be made with ease. The apparatus being set up,
one observer counts the optical changes, while the other, looking
through the Microscope, indicates the time when the lines which are
being measured cross the cross-wires in the Microscope.

The interferometer consists of a series of mirrors which receive a
beam of light from a radiant source, and divide it into two beams of
light, which are afterwards re-combined and viewed by a telescope. All
the portions of the instrument are fixed, except one reflecting mirror,
which reflects one-half of the divided beam of light. This can be set in
such a position that the two half-beams of light, during their period of
division and before they re-combine into one, have travelled exactly the
same distance. A movement of the reflecting mirror can then be made,
so that one half-beam of light has travelled half a wave-length farther
than the other ; and when that is the case, interference will take place,
and the light will be extinguished. As the mirror is moved farther, the
light will again appear, until the path is 1| wave-lengths different,
when a second interference is produced ; this goes on at each successive
motion of the mirror though the same distance, and the wave-lengths
are counted (fig. <!2, p. 539).

As a matter of practice, it will be seen, on looking through the tele-
scope, that the effect is not a complete change from brightness to dark-
ness, because this only takes place in the exact centre of the field, and a
series of bright and dark bands are seen in the field, which travel from
right to left, and are counted as they cross the centre of the field against
a line in the telescope.

I am here showing the apparatus with a Bunsen burner and a sodium
flame as being a sufficiently monochromatic light for demonstration ; but

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIE'lY. 507

as the sodium light is not a purely monochromatic light, but consists of
two lines which are not in themselves quite monochromatic, sodium does
not form a very good source for the illumination. Either cadmium,
mercury or hydrogen, used in connexion with a prism which shall direct
one only of the chief lines into the instrument, is what is best for the
purpose.

The micrometer is held on a bracket which projects out from the
carriage, on which the moving mirror is fixed in such a manner that,
although it is viewed by the Microscope, it is not in contact with it, and
no friction is caused which could interfere with its motion.

The President, in inviting comments, informed the Meeting that on
the following day, at the Eoyal Society, a paper would be given on the
use of silica as a standard for measurement. That fact would show that
the standard of measurement was not yet settled.

Mr. Conrady said he thought the chief interest in comparing
standards of length with the wave-length of light lay in comparing
standards themselves, the mixed standards, because when it came to small
things like stage-micrometers, it was of no use to those who wanted to
measure ten-millionths, and he doubted whether any method could de-
termine them. What was wanted was constancy of materials for the
standard length, for one part in a million and less. Xo one would want,
for practical purposes, to know nearer than one part in a million ; one
part in ten thousand was what most people would be interested in. He
thought that if, at the present day, one were to send a stage-micrometer to
the National Physical Laboratory at Teddington, they would, in a very
short time and for a very few shillings, state what was the value of the
millimetre, or whatever measurement it might be on that micrometer, to
a far greater degree of accuracy than one was likely to want for measur-
ing bacteria or infusoria, because all these forms of life were grow-
ing things, and so there was no constancy about them. It was a
different matter with standards of length, because very few materials
were even fairly constant now, and probably the platino-iridium which
was used in the international metres was not quite reliable. He reminded
the Meeting that there was no such thing as the French metre now,
there was only the international metre, because the Institute at Paris
was now the International Bureau of Weights and Measures, and the
metre which they issued was internationally accepted by Great Britain,
as one of the signatory nations ; so that England was bound to the
Paris metre, and anything which might be done or said at this Society
could not alter the international standard of weights and measures.
There was doubt about that constancy, and after very lengthy experi-
ments, the International Commission adopted a 10 p.c. platino-iridium
as the most unchangeable material which they could find, and in that
material the international metres were made. In the choice of material,
quartz was considered, but being a crystalline substance there was some
doubt about it. It was important to remember that Michaelson and his
successors had adopted another standard, which was fairly above sus-
picion as regards constancy. It had been pertinently pointed out that
the whole solar system was travelling through space at the rate of, he
believed, something like 20 miles a second, and was therefore encounter-
ing a different supply or area of ether every second, and very sensibly
so. Therefore in the course of a few days there must be possibility of

568 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY".

a great change in this respect. It was a moot point whether the ether
was of the same density throughout the universe. If not, cadmium
would be as little permanent as a standard as would platino-iridium, which
was now being used. Therefore the measuring of those standards in
wave-lengths only possessed the value of giving us another independent
and supposed-to-be constant standard. There was evidence that standards
were much the same now as they used to be. With regard to the
standard yard, he doubted very much whether the work carried out by
the Board of Trade to measure the standard yard was worth the money
spent on it, especially on a basis of wave-length. It was already known
that the yard was either growing or getting less — he did not remember
which — all the time. In the different measurements which had been
made it was found to have changed considerably, and no doubt it was
changing now, and probably would go on changing for ever, or as long
as it escaped another fire like that in the House of Parliament 100 years
ago. He did not see what was the real interest of such minute measure-
ments as those just demonstrated. It seemed to him very much like
measuring a puppy dog to the T^ in. one day, and finding the next day
it had grown.

Mr. Beck, in reply, said it would be interesting to hear what would
be said at the Royal Society meeting on the following evening, because
he believed that the standard which was to be discussed there was one
made of fused quartz. The Board of Trade had tried making various
measurements with crystalline quartz, but had found that it was not stable.
It was supposed that fused quartz was more likely to be stable than
anything else. He was told that even platino-iridium was not above
suspicion, and it was hoped that fused quartz would constitute a less
variable standard than anything which had hitherto been suggested.
What Mr. Conrady said about micrometers was true, provided we knew
they were correct, but he thought actual measurement of a certain
number was important, so that one might know whether they were any-
where near correct ; because when it came to subdividing anything as
large as a metre or a yard down to t-Jq mm., so many errors might
creep in that microscopists would be more satisfied if they could be
assured that one or two specimens were approximately accurate. If
they were found to be accurate, one might well leave the question of
accuracy to one part in a million to those who were sufficiently interested
to make careful experiments. But he thought it important that some
stage-micrometers should be measured on the method which he had set
out, which was certainly the most delicate method of measurement
known, in order to satisfy ourselves that the measurements were within
the ordinary range of accuracy which was required. He believed it was
true that the original standard yard was changing very slightly, though
one might almost derive the impression from Mr. Conrady's remarks
that it was changing at a rapid rate and by a considerable amount. He
(Mr. Beck) believed that the change was extraordinarily minute. The
standard, which, he believed, was only taken out of its hiding-place once
in twenty years, was compared with platino-iridium and other standards
from time to time ; and he believed the Standards Office had in their
possession standards made of different materials, which were periodically
compared in order to ascertain what was, at all events, the relative vari-
ation in the metals. In discussing the question of the influence of the

riiOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 5«>9

ether, one was approaching a subject which was altogether too large for
discussion, because it was a problem whether ether existed at all. If it
should be discovered that light had nothing to do with ether, but was
merely the manifestation of electrical stress, it would alter their views ;
but he thought there were some measurements of a thousand or two
years back, astronomical measurements, which led to the belief that the
wave-length was not likely to have changed during that, perhaps, com-
paratively short period. He thought it was of great importance to be
able to get a standard which could easily be reproduced, by physical
means instead of by mechanical methods, in case some earthquake should
come and destroy the standards, even apart from the question whether
the ether might, in the course of a few hundred thousand years, vary in
its physical properties. He thought it was now generally recognized that
measurements based on wave-lengths were likely to be of great service.

Mr. Conrad Beck exhibited a New Portable Microscope suggested by
Mr. Murray. He said that this instrument had been designed to the
suggestions of Mr. James Murray, the well-known explorer, who was
anxious to have a Microscope extremely small and portable, and which
could be used in the field. Being away from the comforts of civiliza-
tion, in tropical forests, he would be debarred from the luxury of chairs
and tables, and the Microscope was therefore so designed that it had
one leg, which could be strapped to a walking-stick, which is then
driven into the ground, and the observer could sit with the stick pro-
jecting from the ground between his legs, and the Microscope could be
inclined by means of the usual joint to a convenient position. The in-
strument was on the model of the Star Microscope, with an aluminium
stage, and all the superfluous metal removed everywhere to make it
extra light. It had a sliding coarse-adjustment, a micrometer-screw
fine-adjustment, and a small substage condenser, with iris-diaphragm.
It was provided with two loose legs, which screwed into the single
leg-base, making it into a tripod for use on a table in the usual way,
when such a support was available on the return from an expedition.
For the study of pond-life on the spot this instrument was specially
desirable, as the naturalist on the walking-stick-stand principle might
spend many profitable hours in pleasant weather in conducting his
microscopical examination at the side of the pond, or on the country-
side in the open air.

Mr. Murray remarked that as the journey he was about to undertake
had to be made without the assistance of carriers, it became important to
reduce the weight to the utmost, because every ounce put into instruments
to be carried must be deducted from the amount of food which could be
carried. Therefore, remembering his previous experience with the Star
Microscope on his journeys, he asked Mr. Beck if he could improve upon
that instrument in the matter of weight. The present Microscope was
the result. It was true that the necessity for unscrewing the legs of the
tripod introduced a structural weakness, but the instrument was intended
to be primarily used on a walking stick. Its use in the ordinary way. on
a table, was a secondary matter. It was not anticipated that one would
be able, as Mr. Beck had said, to sit comfortably and work with the
Microscope ; that was usually impossible in the Amazonian forest. It was

570 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

proposed fco Lave the walking-stick sufficiently long to enable the observer
to work standing. Quite possibly the conditions would prevent work.
but it was hoped sometimes to rig up a net to keep out insects and allow
a little work to be done. Mr. Beck did not state what the weight of
the Microscope was. Complete in its case, as fitted for use on the table,
it weighed two pounds. But even that was far too much to take on
such a journey, for, as he had said, only so much could be taken, and
the heavier the instruments, the less the quantity of food which could
be carried. Therefore, when the difficult journey began, the case of the
Microscope would be left behind, the two supplementary legs would be
unscrewed, and the Microscope folded up and wrapped in a spare shirt.
The weight, without the case, was only one pound.

Mr. Scales exhibited a variable eye-piece, designed by Mr. M. J.
Allan, of Geelong, and a slide of diatoms from the same gentleman.

Mr. Beck remarked that, unfortunately, he had not had a very long
time in which to examine the eye-piece, as he had been very busy.
He had made a casual examination of it. It was, as one would
expect, a compromise. It was not a first-class eye-piece in any of its
conditions. For instance, its best condition was when both lenses
were screwed on and it was closed up. It then had a magnifying
power of 12| ; it had a slight distortion and fairly good definition at the
edge, and moderately good central definition. When one lens was
removed and it was drawn out to its fullest extent it was still a
moderately good eye-piece, though there was a slight colouring on the
fringes at the edge of the field. In that condition it had a magnifying
power of about 7^. But in the other cases in which it was used, either
with both lenses on and the tube extended, or with one lens on and the
tube closed, the marginal definition was extremely bad. There was a
considerable colour, and a good deal of pin-cushion distortion. There-
fore it was, as one would expect, a compromise between two different
powers, between 1\ and 12, with the corrections a good deal marred
from the fact that it was a combination. One could not expect the same
lenses at different distances to give the same corrections. At any rate
that method, although it might be convenient under certain occasional
circumstances, did not, he thought, recommend itself, because eye-pieces
were very cheap, and he considered that it would be very much more
satisfactory to use a couple of really well corrected eye-pieces than one
which had not the finest possible corrections in any condition, and was
thoroughly bad in some.

Mr. Scales remarked, with regard to the eye-piece which was sub-
mitted to him, that while he agreed with what Mr. Beck said as to it
being a compromise, and that it was not, and could not by its construc-
tion be properly corrected, he was rather surprised, knowing the imperfect
construction of the eye-piece, to find that its definition was as good as it
turned out to be. He was also surprised to find that there was not
more colour, and that the definition, except at the margin of the field,
was fairly good. The maker seemed to have committed the error of
trying to get a large field, so that marginal imperfections were not cut
off. If he had been content with a smaller field, there would have been
a more successful instrument ; but, considering that he had endeavoured
to get three eye-pieces into one, he would have anticipated a worse result.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 571

He quite agreed with Mr. Beck that it was not worth making, because
eve-pieces were now so extraordinarily cheap.

A New Microscopical Lamp, designed by Professor Emrys-Roberts,
was exhibited by the Secretary, who read the following description pre-
pared by Professor Emrys-Roberts : — This lamp has been designed to
combine simplicity with efficiency. Incidentally, by using standard
fittings, the cost of production has been reduced to a minimum. The
base is brass, heavily weighted, and covered beneath with baize to pre-
vent damage to desk or bench. The upright is brass tubing bent to a
convenient curve so as to accommodate the light. At the angle is a
universal joint, which can be tightened so as to fix the light in any re-
quired position. The parabolic shade or reflector is made of plated metal.
The Osram light is frosted below, and so no points of light from the
filaments are visible. For general microscopical work it has been found
to be both useful and convenient.

Mr. Scales said that the author enclosed an extract from the British
Medical Journal of April 15, in which he described it. As far as he
(Mr. Scales) could see, it was an ordinary Osram lamp with parabolic
reflector. It was compact, and could be switched on to any circuit.
There, in his opinion, its virtues ended. Ordinary frosted lamps were
in common use in laboratories, but they were unsuitable for decent
work ; and when he saw this lamp mentioned in the British Medical
Journal he felt sorry that it had been put forward as the type of lamp
suitable for work of good quality in an ordinary laboratory. The lamp
is manufactured by The General Electric Company, Limited.

In regard to the diatom slides which Mr. Allan had sent, that
gentleman said he would be very grateful if any members or Fellows
would name some of the specimens.

Referring to the two slides of Aulacodiscus superbus presented by
Mr. Norman Thomas in October 1909, and April 1911,

Mr. Spitta said it was well-known that the Aulacodiscus was a genus
of great beauty ; he said this with all diffidence, as he was not a certified
diatomaniac, but still he was very fond of the subject. The peculiarity
about the Aulacodiscus was, that a large number of the varieties were
so difficult to obtain. Van Heurck mentioned but a few. He believed
that the only treatise extant on the subject was one by Mr. Rattray, in
the Proceedings of the Society for 1888 — the October Proceedings,
published in December. He thought that in this work 127 varieties
were given ; but on looking through the catalogues of those who sold
diatoms it would be found that rarely were there more than a dozen men-
tioned, though in one or two instances as many as fifty might be given.
The remaining ones were very rare. Very few specimens of A. superbus
had been seen since it was originally described by Kitton in 1857. His
description did not exactly correspond with the specimens that Mr.
Norman Thomas had sent. Many opinions had been advanced as to
what was the cause of the rarity of these forms, and one was that those
varieties needed a certain environment, and that otherwise they would
not grow. A certain element of probability was lent to that view by

572 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

the fact that Mr. Bens, in his celebrated excursion to the Congo, when
he was passing the shores of Banana, saw a large quantity of a greenish
mass, of which he obtained three bottles full, and, to his surprise, it con-
sisted of what bacteriologists would call a pure culture of the Aulacodiscus
africanus. If only a few were washed away, and if that peculiar tribe
required a certain environment, those which were washed away would
easily die, and consequently specimens would rarely be met with. But a
strong objection to that was contained in the question, was' it likely that
100 varieties would each require a separate growing ground ? Thus the
point was a very difficult one, but perhaps some Fellows present might
be able to throw light upon it. The real point for which he rose was
to express thanks to Mr. Norman Thomas for presenting to the Society
the specimens of the A. superb us, which were so very rare, for of course
it was of great academic interest to possess them. The reason that the
specimens did not correspond to the drawings might be due to the fact
that the latter were made as far back as 1857, the objectives in use at that
time being very different in defining power to those of the present day.
The thanks of the Society were tendered, by acclamation, to Mr.
Beck, Mr. Allan, Professor Emrys- Roberts, and Mr. Norman-Thomas, for
their exhibits.

Papers by Mr. James Strachan : (1) "On the Structure of Scales
from Tkermobia domestical and (2) " A Description of a Model pro-
ducing an Optical Effect similar to the Ouneate Markings on Insects'
Scales," were read by Mr. F. Shillington Scales.

The President remarked that to those who, like himself, knew but
little of this kind of work, the worst of such papers was that they
tended to destroy one's faith in the Microscope ; apparently one could
produce any appearance one wished, if only one knew how to do it. No
doubt it was really only the little knowledge that was dangerous.

The Paper by Mr. James Murray, " Rotifera of New Zealand and
South Africa, collected by the Shackleton Antarctic Expedition," being
the concluding paper of the series, was taken as read.

The Meeting concluded with the carrying of thanks to Messrs.
Watson and Sons for the loan of Microscopes.

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited : —
Mr. Conrad Beck : An Interferometer ; a New Portable Microscope,

suggested by Mr. James Murray.
.Mr. F. Shillington Scales: A New Microscopical Lamp, designed by
Prof. E. Emrys Roberts ; a Variable Eye-piece designed by Mi-.
M. J. Allan : a Slide of Navicular, sent by Mr. Allan for identifica-
tion ; a Model, Micro-slides and Lantern-slides, in illustration of
Mr. St radian's papers.
The Society : Two Slides of Aulacodiscus superbus.

New Fellows :— The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of the
Society :— Prof. S. I). Chalmers, Mr. Charles Panzetta Chatwin, and the
following was nominated as an Ordinary Fellow : W. E. Garforth.

JOURN.R.MICR.SOC. 1911.P] XVI.

J.Murraydel.adnat. West.Newman photo -lith.

ROTIFERA OF NEW ZEALAND AND S.AFRICA.

JOUBNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

OCTOBER, 1911.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

XVII. — Motif era of New Zealand: Collected by the Shackleton
Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9.

By James Murray, F.R.S.E.

(.Bead June 28, 1911.)
Plates XVI., XVII.

As the ' Nimrod ' remained in New Zealand for a month on the
outward voyage in 1907, and for about the same time on the return
from the Antarctic in 1909, there were better opportunities for
collecting there than in any other country visited. We did, in
fact, examine representative districts in all parts of the islands,

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI.

Fig. la. — Microdina paradoxa Murray, variety. Head.
lb. Ditto. Foot.
2a. — Pleuretra brycei (Weber), variety.
2b. Ditto. Side view.
2c. Ditto. Jaw.
3. — Dissotrocha pectinata sp. n.
4a. — Callidina microcornis sp. n.
4Z>. Ditto. Foot.
4c. Ditto. Jaw.

5a. — Callidina multispinosa (Thomp.) variety.
56. Ditto. Jaw.

Oct. 18th, 1911

2 p

574 Transactions of the Society.

from Stewart Island in the extreme south to Auckland in the
north.

Very little work was done on ponds or other waters, as the
main object was the study of moss-faunas. From the extent of
the work done, we should be able to form some estimate of the
general characters of the moss-fauna of New Zealand, especially
of the Bdelloid Eotifera.

Although I was only looking for the Bdelloids among the
Rotifera, it seems a pity not to record the species of the other
orders casually observed, as many of them were not previously
noted for New Zealand. Many Ploima and Ehizota were observed,
but I could only venture to name a few.

For descriptions of the unfamiliar genera of Bdelloids men-
tioned in this paper, Bryce's recent work on A New Classification
of the Bdelloid Eotifera, 1910 (#),* should be consulted.

Historical Sketch. — Very little appears to have been done at
New Zealand Eotifera before Hilgendorf. The following notes
contain all I have been able to find on the subject. Unfor-
tunately Hutton (5), while giving in 1904 a list of forty-two
Eotifera (compiled, I understand, by Hilgendorf), gives no biblio-
graphy of the sources of the records, so we have not the advantage
this would have given in tracing the previous history.

Schmarda, in 1859 (10), notes three species in New Zealand,
one of them a Bdelloid, Philodina megalotrocha.

Stock, in 1893 (11), records a Ehizotan.

Hilgendorf, in 1898 (3), notes sixteen species, two of them
Bdelloids, one a new species, Callidina quadridens.

Hilgendorf, in 1903 (If), gives an extended list of four Bdel-
loids, one of them a new species, Philodina cloacata.

Hutton, 1904 (o), gives nine Bdelloids.

Eichters, 1908, mentions Callidinw in various localities
in the North Island, but he does not identify any of the
species (8).

Hilgendorf mentions another record of a Ehizotan, in Trans.
New Zealand Inst., xii. p. 301, which I have not seen.

In these various papers there are recorded ten Bdelloids, nine
of which we did not see. They are : Philodina erythrophthalma,
roseola, megalotrocha, microps, cloacata; Callidina bihamata, quadri-
dens, venusta ; Rotifer macrourus.

R. vulgaris is the only previously recorded species which we
observed.

The figures in brackets refer to the Bibliography at the end of paper.

Rotifer a of New Zealand. By J. Murray.

575

List of Species Collected.

Bdelloida.

North Is.

South Is.

GQ

a

S3

M

o

.&

43

CO

j5

3

u

o

^3

C8

w

S

u
o

+3

o

o

o

8S

<

+3

o

a
a

4S

3

^

CO

00

Microdina paradoxa Murray

X

X

Philodina citrina Ehr

X

X

P. flaviceps Bryce

X

X

X

X

P. nemoralis Bryce

X

P. brevipcs Murray

X

X

x

x

Pleuretra alpium (Ehr.)

X

P. humerosa (Murray)

X

X

Dissotroeha macrostyla (Ehr.)

X

X

Callidina habita Bryce

X

X

X

X

X

C. ehrenbergii Janson

X

X

C. quadricornifera (Milne) . .

X

C. musculosa (Milue) . .

X

X

C. papillosa (Thornp.) .

X

X

X

X

X

C. multispinosa (Thomp.) . .

X

X

Mniobia magna (Plate) . .

X

M. symbiotica (Zel.)

X

X

M. tctraodon (Ehr.) . . . .

X

X

X

X

X

M. scabrosa Murray

X

Rotifer vulgaris Schrank

X

X

R. longirostris (Janson)

X

X

X

X

X

X

R. montanus sp. n

X

Habrotrocha pusilla (Bryce) . .

X

X

H. angusticollis (Murray)

X

X

X

X

H. perforata (Murray) . .

y.

X

X

X

X

H. lata (Bryce)

X

X

H. pulchra (Murray)

X

X

X

X

H. constricta (Duj .)

X

Scephanotrocha rubra Bryce

X

X

Adineta vaga (Davis)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

A. tuberculosa Janson

X

A. longicornis Murray

X

X

X

2 p 2

576

Transactions of the Society.

Non-Bdelloid Rotifera.

CEcistes velatus Gosse . .
Synchceta obkmga Ehr. . .
Polyarthra platyptera Ehr.
Triarthra kmgiseta Ehr.
Notommata aurita Ehr. . .
Lindia torulosa Duj.
Furcularia forficula Ehr.
Elosa worrallii Lord
Diurella porcella Gosse . .
Rattulus longiseta Schrank.
Dinocharis inornatus Hilg.
Stephanops tenellus Bryce
Diaschiga gibba (Ehr.) . .
Euchlanis dilatata Ehr.
E. deflexa Gosse
E. oropha Gosse
Monostyla lunar is Ehr.
Distyla flexilis Gosse
Metopidia lepadella Ehr.
M. solidus Gosse
M. latusinus Hilgendorf . .
M. triptera Gosse
Pterodina reflexa Gosse . .
Anurcca cochlearis Gosse

A. valga Ehr

Pedalion sp

North Is.

xl

X
X

X

X

o

South Is.

b

s

XL

—

a

u

o

o

o

X

X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

=
p.

C3
XL

■s.

X

Notes on the Species.

Bdelloida.
Microdina paradoxa Murray. Plate XVI. figs, la, lb.

The new New Zealand form has a very short antenna, scarcely
longer than broad, and almost spherical. The spurs are slender,
and are separated by a broad interspace.

Philodina citrina Ehr.

The common stout form occurred in Mount Cook district. At
the Nihotupo Waterfall, near Auckland, there was a distinct form,
smaller than the other, slender, pale yellow, and stippled.

Rotifera of New Zealand. By J. Murray. 577

Pleuretra brycei (Weber). Plate XVI. figs. 2a-2c.

Variety. — Spines on anterior margin of trunk small, median
furca short. Lateral spines (in front of first dorsal row) one at
each side ; first dorsal row ten ; second, third, and fourth dorsal
rows of four spines each. The fourth row is on the rump. Skin
papillose, papillae with central dots. Spurs not seen.

This variety, which is only known in New Zealand, has more
transverse dorsal rows of spines than any other variety. It is
also peculiar in having four spines in the last row (on the rump).
Most forms have only two. Only a Canadian form, and a distinct
species (P. africana), have four spines on the rump. It is curious
that with the great development of the dorsal spines^ the lateral
spines are reduced in number, and the anterior ones in size.

Callidina microcornis sp. n. Plate XVI.
figs. 4a-4c.

Specific Characters. — Of moderate size, stout ; corona less than
trunk ; rostrum short ; antenna f of neck width ; teeth 2 ; stomach
with wide lumen ; foot short, 3-jointed ; spurs minute points, with
wide convex space.

Length, feeding, 300/a, width of corona 85 /a, trunk 100 fi, across
spurs 24 /x. Sulcus less than disk ; collar slightly prominent. Jaw
triangular, with thick border.

The very minute spurs are like those of C. armillata and C.
lepida, which also have the wide lumen. It has not the hyaline
collar of armillata, nor the knobbed anal segment of lepida.

Habitat. — West Coast, S. Island ; Australia.

^Callidina papillosa (Thomp.).

The New Zealand form is like the smaller Canadian form (figured
in another number of this Journal), which is near the type, but has
more numerous warts on the trunk.

Callidina multispinosa (Thomp.). Plate XVI.
figs. 5a, 5b.

Variety. — Long-spined ; teeth 3 + 2 or 4 + 1 ; five stout spines
on each side of anterior trunk ; a dorsal series of spicules across
widest part of central trunk ; a spicule in the angle of junction of
first and second anterior segments of trunk ; several lateral spicules
on central trunk and on rump.

The only form of the species observed in New Zealand ; it is
also present in Australia, and is confined to Australasia.

578 Transactions of the Society.

Rotifer vulgaris Sohrank.

The common Potifer seemed to be rare in New Zealand. We
found it only in one district (Mount Cook). It was not typical,—
t he eyes were minute dots, and the antenna was very short.

Rotifer curtipes sp.n. Plate XVII. figs 8a-8c.

Specific Characters. — Of moderate size ; trunk strongly stippled
with pellucid dots. Extended foot and rump of equal size ; first
three foot-joints very short, broader than long ; spurs short, diver-
gent, obtuse, without interspace. Movements very sluggish.

Length 350 /x, width of corona 60 /x, neck 36 /a, trunk 60/*,
length of rump 55 fx, foot 55 ll, spur 14/*. Trunk narrow, of nearly
uniform thickness, strongly plicate ; stippling extending over trunk
and foot to spurs ; head and neck not dotted. Kostrum short, eyes
near the end ; antenna 25 to 30 /z, clavate. Disks widely separated ;
sulcus a flat v ; collar prominent.

Even more tardy in its movements than R. tardigradus, it
extends itself with the same apparent extreme deliberation which
we see in those lizards which are trying to pass themselves off for
twigs.

R. curtipes is near enough to R. vulgaris to require care in its
discrimination. It is distinguished by the dotted skin, very short
foot (which has, however, the number of joints usual in the genus),
short spurs, and slow movements.

Habitat. — Among bog mosses (Sphagna and Hypna), Mount
Cook district. Previously known in Scotland, where it was abun-
dant at Fort Augustus, but not described.

Rotifer longirostris (Janson). Plate XVII. figs. 6a-6c.

The type occurred, the variety fimbriata Murray, and a short
stout variety, with short spurs, which is here figured.

Rotifer montanus sp. n. Plate XVII. figs. la-Id.

Specific Characters. — Small, stout ; trunk viscous and sordid ;
rostrum narrow ; antenna stout, as long as width of neck ; mouth
with small rosette ; teeth 2 in each jaw ; rump, foot, and spurs
short ; spurs obtuse, divergent, without interspace ; no eyes ; vivi-
parous ; toes 3.

Length about 260/*, diameter of neck 36 /x, trunk 70 /x, rump
40 fx, length of spur 12/t. Trunk closely plicate, usually black with
adherent matter ; foot, head, and neck clear.

Rotifra of New Zealand. Bg J. Murray. 579

The rosette round the mouth is like that of R. longirostris and
H. rceperi Milne. The jaw has a thin border, and the teeth are
nearly central. The number of segments in the foot was not
ascertained.

Though this animal has not been seen to feed, I describe it for
the following reasons : it is clearly a Rotifer, being 3-toed and vivi-
parous. The corona rarely has anything distinctive in this genus.
The lack of eyes, the rosette, and the sordid trunk show the species
to be very near R. longirostris. From that it is distinguished by the
smaller size, and relatively shorter rostrum, rump, foot, and spurs.
The spurs are not 2-jointed (as in R. tarcligradus and R. longirostris).

Habitat. — Nun's Veil, Mount Cook district ; elevation 5000 to
6000 ft. (coll. Dr. Mackay). Also in the Australian Alps, about the
same elevation ; spurs slightly different.

Habrotrocha perforata (Murray).

One of the commonest species in tropical and sub-tropical
countries, it has rarely been found in temperate regions, though
Heinis recently found it in Switzerland. In New Zealand it only
occurred sparingly in the moist bush of the west coast, in both
islands.

Habrotrocha lata (Bryce).

Rarely obtained in this country except among Sphagnum, in
New Zealand it occurred among tree mosses on the West Coast.

'o

Habrotrocha pulchra (Murray).

With the last, among tree mosses on the west coast. No doubt
in that dripping climate the tree mosses are about as constantly
moist as Sphagnum is in Britain.

Habrotrocha sp. (?). Plate XVII. figs. lOa-lOc.

Specific characters. — Of moderate size, reddish, narrow ; teeth
5/4; antenna short; trunk deeply plicate; foot 3-jointed; spurs
narrow, acute, divergent, with wide, straight interspace.

Length 350 ll, width of trunk 75 ll, neck 50 ll, length of spur
12 ll, jaw 24 ll. Neck with lateral prominences. Top border of
jaw continued beyond lateral border as a sort of incomplete loop.
Not seen feeding.

By the number of teeth this might be Hilgendorp's quadrideus.
That species is not seen so described that its genus can be known.
It is said to have a long foot, but it is figured short. Our animal
has a short foot.

580

Transactions of the Society.

Scephanotrocha rubra Bryce (2).

I have never seen this species feed. The generic characters
cannot be seen unless when it is feeding — nevertheless, it can be
distinguished from all known species of Habrotrocha by its specific
characters, the red stomach, short blunt spurs, and the teeth.

Only found in the South Island, as usual among Sphagnum.
Known in Britain, North America, and Australia.

Bdelloid egg sp. (?). Plate XVII. fig. 9.

This very large egg was found in the Mount Cook district. It is
drawn to the same scale as the adult animals on the same plate.
It is knobbed like the egg of Adineta barbata. The well-developed
jaw proves it to be a Bdelloid, but as neither corona nor foot was
seen, the family to which it belongs cannot be ascertained. The
2 teeth in each jaw are very thick, like those of some forms of
C. auadricomifera and B. trisecatus.

Bhizota.

Many Bhizota were seen, but they were unfamiliar, and I had
no books, so I could not identify them.

(Ecistes velatus Gosse was recognized from its resemblance to
Pseudoidstes rotifer Stenroos, but it has differently placed eyes.

Ploima.

Polyarthra platyptera and Triarthra longiseta. These plankton
species were obtained from the water taps in the city of Auckland.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII.

Fig. 6a. — Rotifer longirostris (Janson) variety.

66. Ditto. Jaw.

6c. Ditto. Spurs and toes.

la. — Rotifer montanus sp. n.

76. Ditto. Head (rostrum and mouth).

7c. Ditto. Side view of head.

Id. Ditto. Jaw.

8a. — Rotifer curtijyes sp. n.

86. Ditto. Side view of head.

8c. Ditto. Head.

9. — Bdelloid egg.
10a. — Habrotrocha sp.
106. Ditto. Side view of foot.
10c. Ditto. Jaw.

Ha. — Mctopidia latusinus Hilgendorf. Extreme form.
116. Ditto. Form with narrower sinus.

JOURN R.MICR. SOC. 1311.P1. XVII.

11a \\

J.Murray del. ad nat. West, Newman photo litfc

ROTIEERA OF NEW ZEALAND.

Rotifera of Neic Zealand. By J. Murray. 581

Elosa worrallii Lord (7).

This curious animal, with its hizarre optic arrangements — one
eye on the side of its nose, and the other in the back of its neck, so
to speak — appears to be rare. I have usually found it among
Sphagnum, but in New Zealand it was obtained from a pond in
the Mount Cook district.

Dinocharis inornatus Hilgendorf {3).

In both islands : ponds at the Hermitage, Mount Cook, and on
Mount Wakefield, 6000 feet ; pond at Rotorua. Hitherto only
known in New Zealand, but we afterwards obtained it in Sydney.

Stephanops tcncllus Bryce (1).

This energetic little atom may not be rare, but it is so very
small and so very lively, that it is little likely to be recognized for
the Rotifer it is. In my experience it has occurred pretty fre-
quently among moss, chiefly from warm countries.

Metopidia latusinus Hilgendorf (3). Plate XVII. figs. 11a, 11 J.
Synonym : M. solidus var. latusinus Hilgendorf.

This interesting species was only obtained in one place, in an
ice-cold stream issuing from a glacier in the Mount Cook district.
It was abundant on Myriophyllum.

I was able to convey some specimens to Mr. Rousselet, and it
is supported by his authority that I decide to recognize it as of
specific rank. There is considerable variation in the width of the
sinus, as our two figures show, which no doubt led Mr. Hilgendorf
to subordinate it to M. solidus.

Pcdalion sp.

In the pure cold water of Lake Wakatipu, South Island. Peda-
lion has been so often reported from ponds and shallow waters,
that I was rather surprised to find it as a plankton species in a
great lake.

Unfortunately I had never seen it before, and did not know the
specific differences. My rough sketch does not show the short pro-
cesses near the posterior end, which distinguish P. mirvm, nor the
cuspidate point of a more recently discovered species, so the pro-
bability is that it is P. fennicum.

I succeeded in preserving many, but the bottle was one of several
which have not arrived home.

582 Transactions of the Society.

SUMMAKY OF RESULTS.

Bdelloida : forty-one species were identified, fifteen in the North
Island, forty in the South Island, and four in Stewart Island.
Three new species are described. The South Island was very much
more productive than the others. Only one form, a peculiar variety
of P. brycei, occurred in the North Island and not in the South.
This is the only form of Bdelloid observed by us which is not
known elsewhere. Two of the new species here described were
afterwards obtained in Australia ; one was previously known in
Scotland. Two of Hilgendorfs species (P. cloacata and C. quadri-
dens) are the only species of Bdelloida recorded for New Zealand
alone.

There were ten Bdelloids previously known in New Zealand,
only one of which (R. vulgaris) occurred in our collections, so that
forty species are new records for New Zealand, making the list of
known Bdelloida up to fifty.

The most noticeable features of the Bdelloid fauna of New
Zealand are its close resemblance to that of temperate Europe and
the great scarcity of peculiar forms. In such an extensive, remote
and varied country these facts are very remarkable.

But for five names, our collection might have been made in
Britain ; there are only four species not recorded for Europe. And,
moreover, there are few rare species among the thirty-six which are
common to Britain and New Zealand. These facts strongly sup-
port Mr. Rousselet's contention (9) that each species of rotiferon
is cosmopolitan, wherever suitable conditions prevail. Jennings
earlier (6) stated the same thing in general terms. It might be
better to express the fact by saying that the limits of distribution
are determined by conditions, since, if climatic conditions exclude
some species from great zones of the earth, they cannot be called
cosmopolitan.

I believe, however, that the case of New Zealand, so strongly
supporting the theory that similar climates have similar Rotifer
faunas, is exceptional, and that other factors must be considered.
All the continents, so far as they have been examined, show greater
peculiarity than New Zealand. Canada, with a climate so like
that of Northern Europe, has many Bdelloids not known in Europe.
Temperate South Africa, with a climate sufficiently like that of
New Zealand, lias many peculiar Rotifera.

The apparent poverty of the Rotifer fauna of New Zealand
must be regarded along with its resemblance to that of Europe.
The poverty in peculiar forms is especially marked. North America
and Australia, though only partly worked, have longer lists of
Bdelloids, and more peculiar species. Even Britain has many
Bdelloids not known elsewhere.

Botifera of Nav Zealand. By J. Murray. 583

It appears as though insular faunas of Bdelloids were poor
compared with those of continental masses of land. Great Britain
seems to be an exception to the rule, but that may be because it
is not isolated like New Zealand. The poverty of New Zealand
may be partly due to the difficulty of migration.

There are thirty-three Bdelloids recorded as common to New
Zealand and Australia, but nearly all of these are cosmopolitan
species. There is besides a small Australasian element in New
Zealand, some three species and one variety occurring in both
Australia and New Zealand, and not elsewhere.

There are only some half-dozen other species in New Zealand
whose range is so limited that it is worth while indicating it.
Microdina paradoxa and Botifcr curtipes are only known in New
Zealand and Europe — Mniobia scabrosa is also in Australasia and
Africa — Scephanotrocha rubra in Europe, North America, and
Australasia. Habrotrocha perforata and Adineta longicornis are
characteristic of tropical and sub-tropical countries, but the former
has been found in Switzerland, and the latter in the Antarctic and
Canada.

Bhizota and Bloima. — General questions of distribution of
Piotifera. other than the Bdelloida, will not be discussed, as they
were not systematically collected, and the material available is
insufficient. Twenty-six forms were recognized, but many others
were seen. Seven of these are in Hutton's list (-5), so that nine-
teen appear to be new records for New Zealand.

Bibliography.

1. Bryce, D. — Non-marine Fauna of Spitsbergen : Eotifera. Proc. Zool. Soc.

Lond. (1897).

2. , A New Classification of the Bdelloid Itotifera. Journ. Quekett

Micr. Club (1910) p. 61.

3. Hilgendorf, F. AY.— Eotifera of New Zealand. Trans. New Zeal. Inst.,

xxxi. (1898) p. 107.
4 Rotifera of New Zealand a revised and expanded

list. Op. cit., xxxv. (1902) p. 267.

5. Hutton, F. W— Index Faunae Nova? Zealandise London, 1904.

6. Jennings, H. S-— Rotatoria of the United States. U.S. Fish. Comm.

Bull. (1900, for 1899).
7 Lord, J. E.--A New Rotifer ( Klosa WurralUi). Inter. Journ. Micr. and
Nat. Sci., ser. 3 i. p. 323.

8. Richters, F.— Moosfauna Australiens, etc. Zool. Jahrb., Abt. f. Syst.,

xxvi. (1S08) p. 196.

9. Roussklet, C F.— On the Geographical Distribution of the Eotifera.

Journ. Quekett Micr. Club (1909) p. 465.

10. Schmarda, L.— Neue wirbellose Thiere (Leipzig, 1859).

11. Stock. — A New Zealand variety of Floscularia corom tta. Trans, and Proc.

New Zeal. Inst., xxv. (1893) p. 193.

584 Transactions of the Society.

XVIII. — South African Rotifera : Collected by the Shackleton
Antarctic Expedition, 1907.

By James Murray, F.E.S.E.

Plate XVI.

While the ' Nimrocl ' lay at Cape Town for two days on the out-
ward voyage in 1907, Drs. Mackay and Michell gathered a small
quantity of moss on Table Mountain. When this was washed
a few days afterwards, eleven species of Bdelloid Eotifers were
found.

Eight of them are known species ; two are species not yet
described, but known to Mr. Bryce ; one new species (Dissotrocha
pectinata) is here described.

Little has been written about the Bdelloida of South Africa.
Ehrenberg (#)* records Callidina rediviva and C. hexaodon for Cape
Colony : Thorpe (9) found Philodina citrina at the Cape ; Kirk-
man (3) gives a list of seven species for Natal, but he is doubtful
about several of them. Eousselet, in 1907 (7), summed up all
that was known about South African Eotifera, including a list
compiled by Mr. Milne, and the species collected by himself. In
a list of 156 species only thirteen are Bdelloids.

The R. tardus, given by Eousselet on Kirkman's authority, is
doubtless R. longirostris ( Janson). Adding Ehrenberg's two species,
the identity of which is doubtful, and C. yinnigera, mentioned by
myself in 1908 (5), we have a total of seventeen species recorded
for South Africa.

Mr. Milne is known to have observed a great many others,
including some very peculiar species, and some of these I have
seen among moss which he sent to me, but they are not yet
published.

Lastly, in 1911 (6), I compiled from material collected by the
curators of the Transvaal Museum a list of forty species, twenty-
eight for the Transvaal and nineteen for Cape Colony. Six new
species are described. That paper has gone to press earlier than
this one, but is likely to appear later, so it cannot be referred to
accurately.

Combining all these records, we find that fifty-four Bdelloids
are known in South Africa. For all Africa the number is seventy-
one, of which, however, several are doubtful.

* The figures in brackets refer to the Bibliography at the end of paper.

South African Rotifer a. By J. Murray. 585

Of our nine species, eight are new records for South Africa ;
only Adineta vaga was previously recorded.

With Mr. Eousselet's remarks, in his paper on Geographical
Distribution (S), on the cosmopolitan character of the Eotifera, I
am in the main agreed, although I see some evidence for approxi-
mate tropical and temperate zones for Bdelloid Eotifera. These
zones, if they were demonstrated, would be determined by climate,
so that they would still depend on " suitable conditions " for each
species. The cosmopolitan character is doubtless more marked
among the aquatic Ploima, with which Mr. Rousselet has chiefly
concerned himself, as the conditions in water are very uniform
over the earth's surface. We get very nearly the same maximum
summer temperature for ponds in the polar regions as in Britain,
and in the tropics it is not so very much higher. Water is the
great equalizer of temperature. Moss-dwelling animals are directly
exposed to the extremes of temperature of different climates ; and
if some are more susceptible to cold and heat than the others, they
may readily become segregated in zones.

In the present paucity of records for many countries the fact is
that there are eighteen Bdelloids which are only recorded for Africa,
six only for South Africa.

Philodina flaviceps and Adineta gracilis are additions to the
African fauna.

In view of the suggestion made above that tropical and tem-
perate zones for Bdelloid Eotifers may be distinguished, it is
noticeable that our short list contains only temperate species.
There is a total absence of those species characteristic of the whole
of tropical and sub-tropical Africa. Even in Cape Colony ordinary
collections of Bdelloids are characterized by the tropical element.
No doubt the absence of these species from our collection is due to
the high elevation at which they were gathered. They were not
from the summit, but from a considerable elevation, probably
between 2000 and 3000 ft.

Species Collected on Table Mountain.

Philodina rugosa Bryce.

P. flaviceps Bryce.

Dissotrocha pectinata sp.n.

Callidina habita Bryce.

C. plicata Bryce.

Habrotrocha angusticollis (Murray).

H. constricta (Duj.).

Adineta vaga (Davis).

A. gracilis Janson.

586 Transactions of the Society.

Dissotrocha pectinata sp.n. Plate XVI. fig. :'>.

Specific characters. — Trunk bearing numerous small spines
arranged in comb-like groups. On the central trunk there are
two "combs" on each of the dorsal longitudinal ridges — on the
anterior margin of the trunk and on the anal and pre-anal segments,
the ridges are transversely placed ; 2 or 3 teeth in each " comb " ;
no long single spines.

Closely related to D. spinosa (Bryce) {1), it is distinguished by
the following characters : D. spinosa has several stout single spines
on the anterior margin of the trunk, here replaced by " combs " of
short spines ; it has some pairs of single spines on the central trunk,
absent from pectinata — it has only small single spicules on the
rump, where pectinata has transverse rows of " combs."

In size, general form, spurs, etc., D. pectinata resembles the
rest of the genus.

Habitat. — Table Mountain, Cape Town. D. spinosa is itself
rare, and is only known in Britain, where it has been found in
England, Scotland, and Ireland. The above comparison had to be
made with my Scotch examples (4-), as Bryce did not figure the
dorsal aspect.

Bibliography.

1. Bryce, D.— On the Macrotrachelous Callidinas. Journ. Quekett Micr.

Club (1892) p. 15.

2. Ehrfnberg — Mikroge ilogie (Leipzig, 1854).

3. Kirkman, T.— Rotitera of Natal. Journ. R. Micr. Soc. (1901) p. 229.

4. Murray, J. — Philodina macrostyla and its Allies. Journ. Quekett Micr.

Club (1908) p. 207.

5. „ „ Some African Botifers. Journ. R. Micr. Soc (1908) p. 665.

6. „ „ Bdelloid Rotitera of South Africa. Annals of the Transvaal

Museum (1911).

7. Bousselet, C. P.— Rotifera of South Africa. Journ. R. Micr. Soc. (1907)

p. 395.

8. „■ „ Geographical Distribution of the Botifera. Journ.

Quekett Micr. Club (1909) p. 465.

9. Thorpe, V. G.— Recorded Localities for Rotifers. Op. cit.. 1893, p. 312.

Rotifera: General Summary. By J. Murray. 587

GENERAL SUMMARY.

The four short papers which have appeared in this Journal
during 1911 deal with all the Rotifera collected by the Shackleton
Antarctic Expedition of 1907-1909, except those collected actually
in the Antarctic. The report on the Antarctic Rotifera had ap-
peared at an earlier date.

In the four papers 72 species of Bdelloida are enumerated : of
which there were 4b' in Australia, 42 in Canada, 15 in Fiji, 24 in
Hawaii, 41 in New Zealand, and 9 in South Africa.

There are 18 new species described: 7 from Australia, 5 from
Canada, 2 from Fiji, 3 from New Zealand, and 1 from South Africa.
In addition to these, there is a large series of very distinct varieties
of several of the spiny Bdelloids — Pleuretra brycei, Gallidina multi-
spinosa, C. jmpillosa, etc. The series of varieties of P. brycei and
0. m-ultispinosa are of great interest in the study of the distribution
and development of the species of Bdelloida.

Adding the Antarctic Bdelloida, in order to complete the account
of the Rotifera collected by the Expedition, we have a total of
77 species. In the Antarctic 11 species were obtained, 5 of them
new to science.

The Rotifera other than Bdelloids were only casually collected
in one or two countries, and present little of interest. In these
papers 33 species are noted : 26 for New Zealand and 8 for
Australia.

588 Transactions of the Society.

XIX. — Apparatus for Photomicrography with the Microscope
standing in any Position, especially in Inclined Position.

By Domingo de Orueta, F.R.M.S.

(Read April 19, 1911.)

It will be agreed that the inclined position is the most comfortable
one, and that the advantage of working in this position increases
when large Microscopes are used. When, however, working with
the inclined Microscope, it is desired to photograph the object
under study, the position of the Microscope must be changed to
the horizontal or vertical, and sometimes the instrument must be
taken to the special table that holds the optic bench, with its
illuminating apparatus : once there it must be centred again, and
adapted to the photographic camera. All this is inconvenient and
takes some time. There is also the greater inconvenience, that
the good illumination obtained in direct observation is lost when
the position of the Microscope is altered, and all the preliminary
operations must be re-undertaken.

The apparatus described in this note has been constructed to
avoid these inconveniences, and with the following aims. 1. To
enable photomicrographs to be taken with the Microscope in any
position, especially in the inclined one, without either moving the
instrument or modifying or changing the illumination. 2. To
secure that the apparatus shall always be ready for use, yet
without incommoding the operator when not needed. 3. That the
resulting photomicrographs may be of the most convenient size ;
that the camera may be lengthened or shortened in order to vary
the magnification ; and that the image may be focused on the
ground glass or transparent screen as easily as it can be done with
the ordinary horizontal camera.

The camera when fully extended has an optical length of
0-8 m. (31^ in.), taking plates of 13 by 18 cm., or smaller sizes.

A short explanation of the figures will be sufficient.

The camera (constructed by the firm of Carl Zeiss, of Jena), is
mounted on a cylindrical bar B, along which either the front of
the focusing screen can be moved at will, and when adjusted, fixed
in any desired position by means of screws, the ends of which
enter a V-shaped groove running the whole length of the bar (so
that both front and back are always vertical).

The bar B slides forwards and backwards in a collar C, and can
be fixed in the position desired. This enables the whole camera

Apparatus for Photomicrography. By D. de Orueta. 589

to be moved nearer or farther from the Microscope without moving
the camera base.

The collar C is supported on a vertical bar, by means of which
the bar B and the photographic camera can be raised or lowered
together.

_ The nut T is used to turn the other nut T', and to prevent the
height of the apparatus changing when it turns round the column
C. Both screws are moved by a key A.

The amplitude of this vertical movement is 75 mm. (3 in.), and
serves to adapt the camera to the Microscope, at the inclination
given to the latter.

The camera, the bar B, and the nuts T and T' are carried on a

Fig. 70.

vertical column G rising from a cast-iron base M. The base M is
provided with two levelling screws S and a pivot S'. The ends of
these screws project into a groove made in the base -piece p, and
they can run inside it moving the column and the camera parallel
to the axis of the Microscope. The amplitude of this movement is
37 mm. (1£ in.), and by the combination of this movement and the
vertical movement already mentioned, the camera can be rapidly
adjusted to differences in the tube-length of the Microscope.

The important feature of the apparatus is a reflection prism P,
which fits over or replaces the eye-piece and can be easily changed.
This prism reflects the light rays at right angles to the axis of the
Microscope, and is provided with a cylindrical cover which enters
a tubular collar of similar diameter on the front of the camera,
forming a liwht-ticdrt connexion.

Oct. 18th, 1911

2 Q

590

Transactions of the Society.

Fig. 70 shows the apparatus in the position corresponding to
direct observation with the Microscope in an inclined position.
The movements of the camera above detailed allow compensation
for any change in inclination.

The camera stands some 15 in. to the right of the Microscope,
leaving a space sufficient for the worker to move his hands and
manage the Microscope.

When the object has been found and is well illuminated, all
that is necessary is to take off the eye-piece and put on the prism
eye-piece (or to put the prism over the eye-piece used for the
direct observation) and turn the camera through 90° to the position
of fig. 71, and adjust the cap of the prism to the collar on the

Fig. 71.

camera front. The image is then projected on the ground-glass
screen and any necessary alterations in focusing, etc., carried out.

When focusing it will be found that the right hand easilv
reaches the screw of the Microscope, the maximum length of the
camera being 0 • 8 m.

The shutter 0 controls the exposure. The same illuminating
apparatus is employed for direct observation and for photomicro-
graphy. Perhaps the best illuminant for the purpose is the Nernst
lamp, modified by Greil (three filaments crossed star-like, instead
of one only), because the light is very intense, very steady, and
gives a uniformly lighted field. It can be placed either to the left
of the operator, as it is shown in these figures, or facing the
Microscope.

Apparatus for Photomicrography. By I), de Orueta. 591

The illuminating apparatus is mounted on a triangular optical
bench F, of 0*5 m. (19^ in.) length, permitting exact centring
and focus. This bench stands on a wooden desk, which can be
inclined in all positions between the vertical and 50°

The illuminating system used by the author is composed of a
Nernst lamp, N, a support, T, for coloured glasses, or liquid filters
of different classes, and a collector, L (" bullseye ") with an iris
diaphragm. In order to reduce the intensity of the light for direct
observation, one or more white ground glasses are put on the
support T. These must be removed when the photograph is about
to be taken.

With this apparatus photographs can also be taken when the
Microscope is in the horizontal or vertical position.

In the former case the camera axis must be placed in continua-
tion of the axis of the Microscope. In the latter, the situation of
the bar B must be changed, sliding it directly inside the column
C* The apparatus then becomes the vertical camera, figured in
Zeiss's catalogues.

The author has made many photomicrographs with this ap-
paratus, among them several of very difficult diatoms at 1200
diameters (with an apochromatic objective of 1-4KA.), and the
results have always been very satisfactory. The price of the
apparatus is very low compared with the price of the large photo-
micrography installations.

* It is better, however, to haye an additional B bar.

2 q 2

592 Transactions of the Society.

XX. — A Method of Disintegrating Bacteria and other

Organic Cells.

By J. Edwin Barnard, F.B.M.S.

(Bead May 17, 1911.)
Plate XVIII.

The pathogenic effect of disease-producing micro-organisms is
almost entirely due to the poisons or toxins which they secrete.
These toxins are of two kinds. A few organisms, of which the
diphtheria and tetanus bacilli are examples, form toxins which are
excreted into the medium, e.g. broth, in which they are growing, so
that by filtration through a porous porcelain filter such as the
Pasteur-Chamberland, the organisms can be removed and the toxin
is obtained in the filtrate. But the majority of pathogenic micro-
organisms do not excrete their toxins, at least to any extent, and
the toxins are retained within, or form integral parts of, the cells
of the organisms. This is the case with such organisms as typhoid,
cholera, plague, glanders, B. coli, streptococci, staphylococci, etc.,
and considerable difficulty has been experienced in obtaining their
toxins for immunization, for the preparation of anti-sera, and for
other purposes.

If the toxin is thus contained in the protoplasmic contents of
the living cell, clearly a method of disintegration in which the cell
wall is ruptured and the fluid contents are expressed, might meet
the necessity of the case.

Another purpose for which disintegration of the bacterial cells
seems eminently desirable, is the investigation of the chemical
composition and properties of the bacterial proteins and other cell
constituents.

Experiments were initiated by Macfadyen and Kowland some
years since for obtaining the protoplasmic contents of the living
cell by mechanical means, and the apparatus here described has
been evolved partly as the result of those experiments and more
recently in connexion with those which have been carried out at
the Bacteriological Laboratory, King's College.

The chief conditions to be fulfilled in a machine for effi-
ciently accomplishing the disintegration of micro-organisms are
as follows : —

1. The grinding should be effected in a manner which is as far
as possible frictionless, so that the risk of rise of temperature and

Method of Disintegrating Bacteria. By J. E. Barnard. 593

consequent chemical change is avoided, even apart from any
extraneous cooling arrangement.

CM

t-

d

t-H
fa

2. Every micro-organism or cell should r sooner or later be
brought under the influence of the grinding action, so that either

594 Transactions of the Society.

no whole cells remain or that their number is reduced to a
minimum.

3. The containing vessel in which the grinding action takes
place must be so effectually sealed that, during the process of dis-
integration, no cells have any opportunity of escaping. This
applies particularly when pathogenic organisms are being dealt
with.

•4. The appliance must be such that an efficient cooling arrange-
ment may be adopted, and, if necessary, a temperature of — 15° to
— 20° C. maintained at the actual point at which the grinding
action takes place.

5. The action presumably requiring to go on in metallic con-
taining vessels, it should be provided that the actual mechanical
disintegration of metal between the grinding surfaces should be as
little as possible.

6. No material such as sand or kieselguhr, which were utilized
in some of the earlier forms of machine, should be added to the
material to be disintegrated, as it is necessary at a later stage to
remove these abrasive materials, a process which is not without
difficulty. They further have the effect in any case of tending to
raise the temperature during the grinding operations.

The apparatus as designed is made in two forms ; in one
(fig. 72) it is mounted between horizontal centres, and in the other
(fig. 73) between vertical centres. In the former the grinding
action is controlled by gravity, and in the latter by electro-
magnetic means.

The appliance consists essentially of a metal pot or vessel A,
in which a number of steel balls B are allowed to revolve. The
containing vessel may be made of phosphor-bronze, steel, or any
similar metal, but phosphor-bronze has been found the most
suitable ; it is the easier to work in the course of manufacture, and
owing to its toughness the surface does not disintegrate rapidly.
The steel balls accurately fit the inside of the containing vessel, so
that as the machine rotates they are in contact over nearly one
half their circumference with the inside of the vessel. A metal
cage C is made of such a shape that its prongs lie between the
balls, so that the latter cannot collide one with another when the
machine is rotating. Mounted at the centre of the metal vessel is
a steel cone D, which is of such a size that it keeps the balls in
their proper position in close contact with the periphery of the
containing vessel. This cone is an important part of the apparatus,
as upon it depends the pressure that may be exerted on the balls ;
and further as the result of its use the balls themselves have
freedom to slip if any additional strain is thrown on them or any
undue amount of material comes under their action. The con-
taining vessel is closed by a metal cap E, which screws down
hermetically sealing the vessel. A groove is made in the top of

Method of Disintegrating Bacteria. By J. E. Barnard. 595

the containing vessel into which a lip on this screw-cap loosely
fits. Sufficient space remains between the two, as shown in the
figure, to allow of some bactericidal agent being placed therein,

Fig. 73.

thus effectually preventing the escape of whole bacteria or ground
material from the containing vessel. Over the whole of this a
cylindrical cap F is placed, and in the top of this cap a metal cone
G is fitted, which presses by means of a spring on to the top of the

r.'.M'i Transactions of the Society.

steel cone D. The steel cone is itself hollow, and is closed by a
-mall metal cap L. A lead or steel weight K is fitted on to the
steel cone D, and is clamped in any desired position along it. The
apparatus is mounted on a cone H, and runs between this cone and
the centre I. It may conveniently be connected directly up to a
motor, as shown in the illustration, or may be driven by a belt
from any suitable source of power by putting a groove pulley on
the left hand end of the spindle.

The grinding action takes place between the steel balls con-
tained in the metal vessel and the interior surface of the same. It
is evident that if the weight K were not on the central cone as
shown, or unless some similar method were adopted to control
the cone to prevent it from rotating, no grinding action would
result ; the central steel cone, in fact, must either remain still or
be allowed to rotate at a slower speed than the containing vessel.
The metal weight K is of such size that on the whole machine
being driven at a suitable speed the action of gravity results in the
steel cone remaining still and so a grinding action takes place
between the steel balls and the inside surface of the containing
vessel.

To ensure that all the bacterial or other cells are as quickly as
possible brought under the grinding action of the balls, the speed
of rotation should be high. In practice it has been found that
from 1000 to 1500 revolutions per minute is a convenient speed,
and that centrifugal action is then sufficient to ensure that the
whole of the material does actually come between the balls and the
metal vessel.

The method of using the machine is briefly as follows : The
bacteria after being removed from the culture tubes or plates on
which they are grown, are centrifugalized ; the semi-fluid mass is
then emulsified with saline solution, so that it is of a creamy con-
sistence. This material is then introduced into the container by
means of a pipette through the hollow centre of the steel cone.
This ensures that no parts of the machine are disturbed more than
is absolutely necessary either before or after grinding. The
machine is then run for a longer or shorter period depending on
the amount of material to be dealt with, and the ground material
is then pipetted off through the steel cone. As the balls are
themselves free to rotate, the amount of friction is negligible, but
any rise of temperature may be prevented by allowing a small
stream of carbonic acid gas from a cylinder of liquid carbonic acid
to impinge on to the side of the vessel ; alternatively an ether
spray, such as is used for section-cutting purposes, may be used,
and will be found quite efficient.

The vertical type of machine (fig. 73) is exactly similar in all
essential details except that the central steel cone is controlled by
means of electro-magnets. On the top of the cone a mass of

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. XV11I.

/'

.V

t • » \

■

Fig. 1.

■O

/

•

> -♦

■

Fig. 2.

Fig. 4.

If

%

I *

'■ >

Fig. 5.

Fig. 6.

Fact p. 597.1

Method of Disintegrating Bacteria. By J. E. Barnard, 597

soft iron is fixed, and this is kept from rotating by means of the
electro-magnets J. The only constructional difference is that the
containing cylinder F is made of vulcanite so that it is perfectly
diamagnetic. The chief advantage of this design over the one
previously described is that it can be completely covered by a
glass bell-jar while in action. A bactericidal agent may be placed
in the groove 0, and the bottom edge of a bell-jar allowed to dip
into it.

The actual effect of the process may be seen in the illustrations
(Plate XVIII. figs. 1 to 6).

Fig. 1 is a photograph of some bacterial cells before grinding ;
figs. 2 and 3 being the same cells after grinding for fifteen and
thirty minutes respectively.

Fig. 4 is a photograph of unground yeast ; figs. 5 and 6 show-
show the result of grinding for fifteen and thirty minutes re-
spectively.

It will be seen in the case of the yeast preparation that after
the thirty minutes' grinding the cell contents have been completely
expressed. This shows itself clearly, as the cell bodies are un-
stained, and show up lighter on the stained cell contents, while in
the unground yeast the contrary is the case.

598 Transactions of the Society.

XXI. — The lie-appearance of the Nucleolus in Mitosis.
By E. J. Sheppard.

(Read April 19, 1911.)

Plate XIX.

Some time back I had the honour of reading before the Society a
paper upon " The Disappearance of the Nucleolus " in Mitosis.

The subject of the present paper is upon its Re-appearance, and
it is my desire to bring before your notice some observations I have
made with regard to this equally interesting subject.

The processes of staining, fixing, and other treatment of sections
and tissues adopted in the study of the above subject have been,
with the exception of two slight modifications, the same as men-
tioned in my previous paper upon "The Disappearance of the
Nucleolus."

The two modifications mentioned are as follows : —

First, the abandonment of the use of picric-formol for fixing.

Second, a much longer time occupied in the mordanting and
hematoxylin staining baths.

The fast was adopted because after repeated trials I came to
the conclusion that for work upon the subject of mitosis, preferable
results are obtained by the use of Flemming's, Lindsay Johnson's,
and Hermann's solutions.

With regard to the second, that of mordanting and staining, I
have prolonged the immersion of sections in these baths for as
much as 36 hours in the former and 72 hours in the latter. This
seems to me to give the maximum degree of perfection with
regard to staining, and the highest resisting power obtainable to
the finest nuclear structures for their second iron or differentia-
tion bath.

This applies to such Amphibia as the frog, triton and sala-

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX.

Fig. 1. — Loops in chromatin of daughter-nuclei before disappearance of inter-
zonal fibres. Hyacinthus.

„ 2. — Loops in chromatin of daughter-nuclei. Hyacinthus.

,, 3. — Re-appearing nuclei. Top daughter-nucleus with nucleolus well developed ;
chromatin not quite severed from nucleolus. Bottom daughter-
nucleolus not so fully developed, its lower left portion still fused with
chromatin.

.. 4.— Loops in chromatin (telophase). Triton.

„ 5. — Loops in chromatin (telophase). Salamander.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC, 1911. PI. XIX.

<&*

***•

/

I

tfi

Fig. 1.

\

Fig. 2.

Fig. 3.

* . **■

Fig. 4.

f Face p. 598.

Re-appearance of the Nucleolus. By E. J. Sheppard. 599

mander that I have worked upon. I do not think that sections of
plants, rootlets, etc., require nearly such long baths ; 12 to 24 hours
in my opinion is plenty. These periods of immersion can and
should be modified if fixatives other than those mentioned or their
like be used.

A point with regard to the differentiation process which should
not be forgotten, is that the strength of the iron solution for this
purpose should be weak ; i.e., whatever be the strength of the
mordanting solution used (a 3 p.c. I find about the best), it should
be diluted five to ten times its volume with water, according to
the rapidity it has for extracting the hematoxylin ; this can be
easily ascertained by working a test section.

The extraction should not be too slow nor too quick : roughly
from 15 to 20 minutes should be occupied in differentiating a sec-
tion or series fixed to the slide. Vegetable sections will take
slightly less time than this.

Not too much importance, however, must be put upon timing
results in this all-important part of the process, as the only really
reliable way is to repeatedly stop the process by washing for about
half a minute and very carefully examine under the Microscope
with the aid of a £-in. lens until you are satisfied the best point
has been reached.

All other treatment remains the same, as previously described
in my other paper.

Now regarding my observations made with a view to ascer-
taining how and when the nucleolus makes its re-appearance ; the
Master stage is the one which calls for most careful study and
observation.

The first thing to be noticed is, that soon after the formation of
the diaster and the arrival of daughter-chromosomes at or near the
poles, the chromosomes begin to link up to form the dispirem.

At or about this time, and before the diasters have lost very
much of their characteristic shape, a looping in the chromatin may
be observed as shown (Plate XIX. figs. E and B.). The loops
may be one or more in number in each half of the diaster, i.e.
in each future daughter-nucleus.

It is in these loops that the nucleoli are at some time going to
make their appearance.

It does not always follow that these loops are apparent at one
and the same time in each half of the diaster, and I am not pre-
pared to say that the number of loops that may be seen is indicative
of the number of nucleoli that are going to be present in each
daughter -nucleus, for there often appear more loops than there are
likely to be nucleoli present.

From the first appearance of the loops the whole area of
inclusion is stained, but with varying degrees of density ; this may
be influenced to some extent by the compactness of the chro-

GOO Transactions of the Society.

mosomes. Sometimes when the depth of stain is not too dense to
make out any detail, it will be observed that that part lying close
to the chromatin shows a slightly deeper shade than that farther
towards the centre. The exact manner in which the nucleolus is
injected is at present rather uncertain for me to state definitely;
and perhaps for a while too much weight should not be put upon
the following remarks until more work and observation have been
carried out.

At or about the time when the line of division of the cell into
two is well marked, and what remains of the interzonal fibres has
nearly always disappeared, and in some instances when the
daughter nuclei have made an attempt at regaining a spherical or
oval shape, the nucleoli make their appearance in the loops.

It is difficult to say whether this occurs gradually by streaming
in, or takes place with a sudden inrush, bursting, or pouring.
Personally I give preference to the former mode, and in support of
this view a careful observation of fig. D should be made. Here
it will be seen that the upper nucleolus is well developed and
occupies a good portion of the area of the loop, whilst the lower,
from the centre downwards, is wasted off until at its lowest ex-
tremity, which is somewhat broadened, appears fused to the chro-
matin. At the completion of the formation of the nucleolus nothing
is left but one, occasionally two or more, very fine drawn-out
processes marking its attachment or association to the chromatin.
These exist for varying lengths of time, and eventually disappear
entirely. During the time they are to be seen they should not
be taken for linin thread — a mistake which can very easily happen.

For a fuller account of these processes a reference should be
made to my previous paper and photographic reproductions.

When the nucleolus has made itself manifest, it is in many
instances of a size somewhat proportionate to that of its loop, and
again it may be very small.

In the latter case the nucleolus is more often than not very
close to or apparently in contact with the chromatin.

The position in the loop at which it may appear is not constant,
and may vary in such a manner that I am inclined to think the
shape of the loop may have some influence in this respect.

This latter remark is at present only an assumption on my
part, and may be purely imaginary.

However, if the loops be round, or nearly so, the nucleolus may
start to form at any position. On the other hand, if their outline
be at all irregular or distorted, it appears to choose for its
developing point one of the irregular situations.

This brings me to the part of my subject in which I wish to
put before your notice my views as to what I believe to be the
actual manner in which the nucleolus makes its re-appearance or
disappearance.

Re-appearance of the Nucleolus. By E. J. SJiejypard. 601

No doubt many of you who are interested in the subject of
mitosis, and have read my paper upon " The Disappearance of the
Nucleolus," will remember the photographs that I presented to
your notice illustrating the fine processes extending from pro-
jections of the nucleolus to the chromatin.

These become apparent soon after the loops give up their power
of holding the stain so deeply that nothing can be made out.

When this period of densely staining has passed off sufficiently,
and the nucleolus is occupying its final position, the processes just
mentioned can be distinctly seen, and I am of opinion that it is by
these processes that the nucleolus is thrown out from or drawn
into the chromatin.

Hence conies, as above mentioned, my reason fur giving
preference to the method by which the nucleolus may make its
re-appearance by a streaming-in process.

Up to this part the above remarks apply particularly to
observations made upon vegetable tissues : Hi/acinthus, Allium,
Fritillaria, etc.

Observations made upon animal tissues, such as frog, triton,
salamander, have been somewhat disappointing, and I have only
here been able to prove the process of re-appearance identical
with that of vegetable tissue up to a certain point : that of the
loop formations in the chromatin. These in the above-mentioned
Amphibia are especially well formed and beautifully distinct, as
reference to figs. A and C will show.

In not a single instance up to the present — and I have
examined many hundreds of cells — have I been able to see a
nucleolus in a state of developing, or in a fully developed con-
dition.

Further, I have never been able to discover in any one of these
loops a trace of anything resembling a nucleolus.

What this fact points to I am unable to say ; possibly some
marked deviation in the process takes place here from that
exhibited in vegetable tissue, and remains to be worked out before
anything can be said upon this apparently startling difference.

One curious point, perhaps well worthy of mention, is that I
have not yet succeeded in staining the included loop areas in the
slightest degree, this alone being a marked difference when con-
trasted with the results obtained in vegetable tissue.

It might reasonably be asked what is the part played by the
nucleolus in mitosis.

To such a question I would reply that in my opinion the nucle-
olus is an inciting or stimulating factor to the starting of the process
of mitosis.

It will be frequently seen upon examining vegetable sections
exhibiting mitosis, that some cells have had their nucleolus wholly
pushed out of its socket or position in its nucleus ; and if careful

002 Transactions of the Society.

observation is made, in certain instances the exact course the dis-
placed nucleolus has taken can easily be seen by the path it has
apparently swept over the protoplasm of the cell.

This feature having been observed by me on repeated occasions,
and its occurrence taking place almost without exception at a time
when the nucleus is in a resting condition, or only very slightly re-
moved from same, aroused my interest, and consequently I tried to
find a reason.

The conclusion I came to after duly considering different pos-
sibilities was, that this can only occur for the reason that the
nucleolus at the time of the resting-stage of the nucleus must be in
a more compact and denser state than it is in later phases of mitosis :
hence offering at this time some greater resistance to the impact of
the microtome-knife, and is not cut clean through like the other
surrounding and apparently softer tissues. This failure to cut
through the nucleolus and instead push it out of position, is not,
or only rarely, seen in later phases of mitosis ; proving that at such
time when disappearance, or, as I should prefer to call it, imbibition
of the nucleolus is about to take place, the nucleolus is in a far
greater state of relaxity for this process; and again its varying
shapes and actions towards staining reagents goes towards proving
this latter condition.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally invertebrata and cryptogamia),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBEATA.

a. Embryology, t

Post-natal Remains of the Notochord in Mammals.} — J. Schaffer
discusses the view that the gelatinous nucleus pulposus in the inter-
vertebral disc represents the residue of the notochord. He has especi-
ally studied the " intervertebral chorda-segments " in mouse, rat, mole,
guinea-pig, pig, and man. The chorda-tissue has markedly vesicular
cells, and because of the resulting elasticity it retains some mechanical
functional importance. In other cases it is of use in forming a mucous
mass, penetrated by chorda-reticulum and cell-remains, like a synovia.
Many details are given in regard to the remains of the notochord in
various Mammalian types.

Maturation of the Mammalian Ovum. — M. Athias describes the
maturation-divisions in various rodents (Mus musculus, Gavia porcellus,
Eliomys quercinus, and Microtus incertus), and bats ( Vesperugo noctula,
V. serotinus, and Kfiinolophus hippos icier os), and compares these with
what occurs in Insectivores, Carnivores, etc. The main general questions
connected with maturation are discussed, e.g. as regards the number
of chromosomes, their individuality, the reduction-process, the role of
the centrosomes, the polar bodies, and so on. The memoir is beautifully
illustrated.

Early Development of White Mouse. || — J. Sobotta describes (1) the
blastocyst before there is any trace of mesoderm ; (2) the first appear-

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they
do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers
noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of
this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually
jmblished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which
are either new or have not been previously described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects.

t SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien., cxix. (1910), pp. 409-65 (5 pis. and 2 figs.).

§ Sobre as Divisoes de Maturacao do Ovulo dos Mammiferos (Lisbon, 1910)
pp. 1-192 (4 pis.).

|| Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, pp. 271-352 (3 pis.).

604 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ance of the mesoderm and the formation of the amniotic folds; and
(3) the process of gastrulation and the origin of the allantois. He dis-
cusses in particular the so-called inversion of the germinal layers (or
" entypy of the germinal area " by a process of delamination), and main-
tains its entire distinctness from the belated gastrulation.

Teeth of Two Dentitions in a Dermoid Cyst.* — H. Bluntschli
describes a dermoid cyst from the human ovary which was remarkable
in showing a number of typical milk-teeth (incisors and canine of the
lower jaw), and, along with these a number of teeth (premolars) of the
permanent set. The remarkable feature is the simultaneous occurrence
of the two kinds of teeth, for normally the permanent premolars do not
appear until the milk-incisors have been replaced.

Ovary in Hybrid Birds.t — Heinrich Poll has studied the state of the
ovary in crosses between Anas boscas var. doin. and Cairina moschata,
Fuligula fuligula and Mareca penelope, and eighteen other cases. Some
female hybrids lay eggs which develop ; others are quite incapable of
reproduction, though they may sometimes lay eggs.

In all the quite sterile hybrid females there is a constant peculiarity,
namely the absence of small reserve follicles in the adult. This is seen
in hybrids of Anas and Cairina, Lampronessa and Metopiana, Netta and
Polionetta, etc. In other cases even the just mature bird may show no
trace of follicular apparatus, as in Mareca and Dafila, Fuligula and
Mareca. The degeneration may go even farther, as in M. penelope and
Lampronessa sponsa.

There are reserve ova in the female and trimitosis in the spermato-
genesis of the male in cases like Mareca penelope and Chaulelasmus
streperus, Alopochen segyptiacus and Tadorna tadorna, Streptopelia risoria
and Turtur tnrtur, Garcluelis carduelis and Serin us canarius. Associated
with the absence of reserve ova and the further degeneration of the
ovary in the sterile hybrid females, there is a corresponding reduction
(dimitosis, monomitosis, and apomitosis) in the spermatogenesis of the
hybrid males.

Fluctuations in Growth of Fowl's Comb.J — Geoffrey Smith finds
that the correspondence of the comb-increase in hens with periods of
egg-laying is invariable, both in young and adult hens. The increase
of the comb in the hen is due to a fatty infiltration of the central
connective-tissue core of the comb ; the decrease in the comb is due to
the abstraction of the fat. The cock's comb contains only comparatively
small quantities of fat in the central core, the substance of the comb
consisting principally of fibrous connective-tissue. The cock's comb
does not exhibit marked fluctuations as the hen's does.

The increase in the comb is not accompanied by a rise in general
body-weight, though such a rise usually occurs some time before the
increase and fat deposition occur. The explanation of the fatty infiltra-
tion of the comb is found in the fact that at the egg-laying periods the

* Morphol. Jahrb., xliii. (1911) pp. 345-57 (3 figs.).

t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, 2te Abt., pp. 63-127
(4 pis. and 1 fig.).

X Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,lvii. (1911) pp. 45-51 (4 pis. and 5 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 605

blood becomes charged with fatty material which is conveyed to the
ovary for the formation of yolk, and that the excess of this fatty material
is deposited in the comb, and probably in other situations as well.

The author calls attention to the close parallel between. the fat
metabolism of the laying hen and that in spider-crabs parasitized by
Sacculina.

Development of Turtle Skull.*— B. W. Kunkel gives an account of
the development of the skull in Emys lutaria. The most general result,
is to show its far-reaching resemblance with that of Lacerta, in spite of
the great differences in the adult result.

Sympathetic Nervous System in Turtles. f — A. Kuntz has made a
series of observations on the development of the sympathetic nervous
system in turtles, in continuation of his investigation into the develop-
ment of the sympathetic nervous system of Vertebrates. In embryos of
turtles the " Anlagen " of the sympathetic trunks arise as cell aggregates
lying along the lateral surface of the aorta and along the dorsal surface
•of the carotid arteries. The cells which give rise to the rudiments of
the sympathetic trunks have their origin in («) the spinal ganglia, or in
the neural crest, and (b) in the neural tube. Before the spinal nerves
can be traced peripherally, cells advance from the distal ends of the
spinal ganglia directly through the mesenchyme into the rudiments of
the sympathetic trunks. After the spinal nerves have grown peripherally,
cells migrate from the spinal ganglia, and from the ventral part of the
neural tube along the paths of the spinal nerves and of the communi-
cating rami into the rudiments of the sympathetic trunks. About the
eleventh day of incubation the cell-aggregates begin to break up and
become scattered for a considerable time, after which the cell-groups
again become aggregated into compact ganglia. About the thirteenth
day of incubation cell-strands push out from the spinal nerves proximal
to the origin of the communicating rami, and advance towards the aorta.
These cell-strands increase in size and advance mesially until, at the
close of the sixteenth day, they appear as irregular cellular tracts extend-
ing from the spinal nerves into the rudiments of the sympathetic trunks.
A comparative study of the development of the sympathetic trunks in
embryos of the turtle and of the chick strongly suggests a more or less
direct phylogenetic relationship between the sympathetic nervous system
in Birds and in the ancestral type of Reptiles. The prevertebral plexuses
arise as cell-aggregates lying along the ventro-lateral aspects of the aorta.
They are derived from cells which migrate ventrally from the rudiments
of the sympathetic trunks. In the sacral region cells may be traced
ventrally from the rudiments of the pre-vertebral plexuses into the
sentery, where they become aggregated into small cell-groups associated
with the rectum. These sympathetic cell-groups probably represent the
meprototype of the ganglion of Remak in birds. In the region of the
genital ridges cells migrate ventrally from the •"Anlagen" of the pre-
vertebral plexuses and become aggregated into small cell-groups asso-
ciated with the rectum. The vagal sympathetic plexuses in the walls of

* Auat. Anzeig., xxsix. (1911) pp. 354-64 (3 figs.),
t Amer. Journ. Anat., ii. (1911) pp. 297-312.

Oct. ISth, 1911 -2 i;

60G SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the visceral organs arise from cells which have their origin in the hind-
brain and in the vagus ganglia, and migrate peripherally along the paths
of the vagi. The phenomena observed in the embryos of turtle give
evidence in favour of the observer's view that the peripheral displacement
of cells taking part in the development of the sympathetic system is pro-
bably determined by the influence of hormones. In turtles as in higher
Vertebrates the cells which migrate peripherally from the cerebrospinal
nervous system into the sympathetic " Anlagen " have the same genetic
relationships as the cells which give rise to the neurones and to the neu-
roglia cells in the central nervous system. The sympathetic nervous
system is therefore homologous with the other functional divisions of
the peripheral nervous system, and the sympathetic neurones are homo-
logous with their afferent and efferent components.

Sympathetic Nervous System in Fishes.*— A. Kuntz has made a

study of the development of the sympathetic nervous system in Fishes.

His researches are based on the embryos of three widely separated types,

Acanthias vulgaris, Amia calva, and Opsanus tau. In all three the

" Anlagen " of the sympathetic trunks arise as cell -aggregates at the

median side of the spinal nerves. The cells which give rise to these

" Anlagen " have their origin (a) in the spinal ganglia or the neural

crest and (b) in the neural tube. These cells migrate peripherally along

the paths of the sensory and motor roots of the spinal nerves. This

agrees with the writer's findings in regard to the histogenesis of the

sympathetic trunks in Mammals and Birds, but not with those of earlier

investigators of the development of the nervous system of Fishes, except

with those of Froriep. In embryos of Acanthias a large proportion of

the cells which wander out from the neural crest and from the ventral

part of the neural tube migrate peripherally before the spinal nerves

have become distinctly fibrous. These cells become scattered in the

mesenchyme, where they remain until they become aggregated to form

the " Anlagen " of the sympathetic trunks. In embryos of Amia and

Opsanus such precocious peripheral migration of nervous elements does

not take place, but the cells which give rise to the rudiments of the

sympathetic trunks migrate from the spinal ganglia and from the ventral

part of the neural tube along the fibres of the dorsal and the ventral

roots of the spinal nerves. This difference in the details in the course

of the early development of the sympathetic trunks in these three

widely separated types of Fishes is probably correlated with their habits

of reproduction. It has probably arisen in response to the external

conditions surrounding the embryos during the early stages of their

development. The "Anlagen" of the sympathetic trunks gradually

advance mesially from the spinal nerves until they lie at the dorsal

surfaces of the cardinal veins. In the posterior region of the trunk in

embryos of Amia and Opsanus the sympathetic "Anlagen" advance

still farther mesially until they lie along the ventro-lateral aspects of

the aorta. In this region the sympathetic ganglia send out cellular

processes mesially, until the corresponding ganglia of the right and left

sympathetic trunks are connected by bands of sympathetic cells encirling

* Journ. Comp. Neur., xxi. (1911) pp. 177-214.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 601

the aorta ventrally. The sympathetic plexuses in the walls of the
digestive tubes arise, not from the cells which migrate ventrally from
the sympathetic trunks, as earlier workers supposed, but from cells
which have their origin in the hind-brain and in the vagus ganglia.
These cells migrate peripherally along the vagi to their new location in
the walls of the digestive tube. The observations on Selachian embryos
cited by Held are shown to be inconclusive. They are based on
embryos in which the rudiments of the sympathetic trunks already
appear as distinct cell-aggregates. Embryos of Acanthias in this stage
of development are too old to reveal the exact sources of the cells
giving rise to the sympathetic rudiment. A large proportion of these
cells wander out precociously in embryos of Acanthias, and remain
scattered in the mesenchyme until they become aggregated to form the
" Anlagen " of the sympathetic trunks. The peripheral displacement of
the cells giving rise to the sympathetic nervous system cannot be
accounted for by the mechanical processes involved in growth or by
osmotic influences. Evidence is presented to show that the peripheral
displacement of sympathetic elements is probably determined by the
influence of hormones.

The sympathetic nervous system in Fishes, like that in the higher
Vertebrates, is homologous with the other functional divisions of the
peripheral nervous system ; and the sympathetic neurones are homo-
logous with their afferent and efferent components.

Early Development of Trout.* — Fr. Kopsch finds that the blasto-
meres of the egg of Salmo fario form at the middle of the fifth cleavage
a syncytium with one another and with the protoplasm which covers the
yolk. From this syncytial union segmentation-cells begin to separate off
from the end of the fifth cleavage onwards. This process of segmenting
off reaches, for the most part, its end at the close of the eleventh cleavage.
The nuclei that have arisen in the syncytium remain almost wholly
within it. The boundaries still present between the various territories
afterwards disappear entirely, so that the syncytium becomes a Plasmo-
dium. This is the time and the mode of origin of the yolk-sac entoblast.

The segmenting off affects particular areas of the syncytium in
different ways. Thus there arise a marginal area and an eccentric area
(both with nuclei), and an intermediate area of the yolk-sac entoblast.
which has at first no nuclei or only a few. The place of the origin of
the yolk-sac entoblast is the margin and an eccentric area of the under
surface of the blastoderm.

Development of Pectoral Fin in Amia.f — Ch. Heronimus finds that
the first primordium of the skeleton in the pectoral fin in Amia (as also
in Salmo) is an undivided plate. This stage lasts for a considerable
time. In the middle of the skeletal plate in Amia about seven clefts
appear at the same time. Later on another is added. At first the distal
and proximal margins of the plate are not divided. In Salmo the clefts
do not all appear at once. The elements in Amia increase to ten, but
there seem to be only nine in the adult. The facts lend no support to
the theory that the fin evolved by the transformation of any other organ.

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschr. Waldeyer, 2te Abt., pp. 618-59
(16 figs.). t Anat. Anzeig., xxxix. (1911) pp. 193-203 (8 figs.).

2 E 2

608 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Spermatogenesis of Lepidosiren.* — W. E. Agar went to the swamps
of i In' Paraguayan Chaco to obtain material for studying the spermato-
genesis of Lppidosiren paradoxa — a form in which the nuclei attain a very
large size and the chromosomes are beautifully clear. He has paid par-
ticular attention to the processes of reduction. The somatic number of
chromosomes is thirty-eight, one pair conspicuously larger than the rest.
In the spermatogonial and also in the somatic nuclei the chromosomes
are arranged in a definite plan, the smaller and larger ones being grouped
together. Within the main group there is also evidence of a tendency
for chromosomes of equal size to be next each other.

The reduced number of chromosomes in the bouquet stage appears
to be arrived at by a parallel conjugation in the early prophase according
to Von Winiwarter's scheme. The first maturation division separates
entire " homologous " chromosomes. There is no resting stage between
the two divisions. In the second division the chromosomes divide longi-
tudinally, forming " tetrads," etc., very like those of the first metaphase.
We cannot, however, do more than direct attention to this important, but
necessarily very technical paper.

Nature of Seminal Fluid in Man.f — CI. Broesike finds that there
is first of all, in erection, a secretion into the urethra of the products of
Cowper's glands, and perhaps of urethral glands. There are, then, three
acts in ejaculation — first of the prostate secretion, then of the sperm-
containing testicular secretion, and, lastly, the seminal vesicle secretion.

The mucous, slightly alkaline secretion of Cowper's glands serves
mainly to lubricate the mucous membrane of the urethra, facilitating
ejaculation. To a slight extent it may neutralize the acidity of the
urethral mucous membrane.

The alkaline proteid secretion of the prostate serves to protect the
spermatozoa from acidity in the urethra and in the vagina. It is not
essential to successful insemination, but it promotes, as Fiirbringer and
AValker have shown, the mobility and vitality of the spermatozoa.

The seminal fluid with actively mobile spermatozoa comes from the
epididymis and vas deferens, and perhaps from the mediastinum testis,
but not from the testis as such. The spermatozoa do not attain full
mobility till 24-48 hours after they leave the testis. They probably re-
tain their maximum mobility for four or five days, but this is uncertain.

The seminal vesicles are not receptacula seminis, though they some-
times contain ripe spermatozoa. Their importance is glandular. They
produce an alkaline gelatinous secretion, which mechanically helps to
force out the spermatozoa, and in some cases helps to retain the sperma-
tozoa in the vagina. They should be called, as Kolliker suggested,
glandulas vesiculares.

b. Histolog-y.

Minute Structure of Femoral Bones. $— J. S. Foot has made a
comparative histological study of the femur in the frog, the alligator,
the snapping turtle, numerous birds, and numerous mammals. He

* Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lvii. (1911) pp. 1-44 (4 pis. and 1 fig.).

t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, 2te Abt., pp. 12S-50,

X Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, xxx. (1911) pp. 87-140 (9 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 609

distinguishes three main types of bone structure — the lamellar, laminar,
and Haversian system types, which may occur pure or mixed. The
frog shows only lamellae ; the reptile shows laminae, formed by the
grouping and separating of the lamella by canals ; the highest grade —
the Haversian system — appears in outline in reptiles, but in its com-
plete form in birds and mammals. Many birds and mammals have
femurs predominatingly lamellar or predominatingly laminar, or mixed
lamellar and laminar. Many mammals show a complete mixed type,
lamellar, laminar, and Haversian. The author thinks that the structure
in any type is partly specific and partly due to the functional require-
ments of the bone.

Red Blood Corpuscles of Mammals.* — E. Eetterer and Aug.
Lelievre find that the young stages are spherical or hemispherical, but
are deformed with extreme readiness. In the circulating blood the
corpuscles lose their spherical and hemispherical shapes, and become
bell-like or lens-like. The spherical and hemispherical stages may be
compared to the moon in its first quarter on a clear night ; the
haemoglobin-containing portion is like the luminous crescent, but there
is another portion without haemoglobin occupying the concavity of the
crescent. What happens is that the portion without haemoglobin is
lost as the corpuscles become older.

Epithelial Cells of Mammalian Kidney .f — K. W. Zimmermann
describes the different kinds of elements — those at the beginning of the
" main portion " of the tubuli, with well-developed lateral ridges which
fit into indentations of adjacent cells ; those in the pars radiata, which
resemble truncated pyramids and have smooth sides ; the branched flat
cells of the isthmus ; and so on.

Tendons of Wing and Leg in Bats, j — E. Retterer and Aug.
Lelievre have previously shown that in the muscles of the hind legs of
bats the framework of the muscle-fibre is much more developed than
the contractile myosarc, while in the muscles of the wings the myosarc
is abundant and remains fluid.

They have gone on to study the differences in the tendons, using
embryos and adults of Vesperugo pipistrellus and Miniopteris schreibersii.
In the flexor muscles and tendons of the hind limbs there is no hint of
reduction — they are in fact better developed than in the wing ; this
shows that the winter-suspension implies energetic muscular contraction.
The tendons of the toes and of the thumb, and their fibrous sheaths,
are hypertrophied, and are transformed, partially at least, into vesiculo-
fibrous tissue. The tendons of the flexors of the wing are, as usual,
fibrous cords.

Cytoplasm, Chondriosomes, and Chromidia.§ — Julius Schaxel
has studied in young ova of various Echinoderms the structure of the
cytoplasm, which appears so different with different modes of treatment.

* C.H. Soc. Biol., lxxi. (1911) pp. 150-3.

t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (l'Jll) Festschrift Waldeyer, pp. 199-231 (3 pis.
aud 1 fig.). J C.R. Soc. Biol., lxxi. (1911) pp. 67-70.

§ Anat. Anzeig., xxxix. (1911) pp. 337-53 (1G figs.).

610 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

It is not something hard and fast, but depends on the presence of two
physically different substances in the cytoplasm.

Chondriosomes are present in all conditions of the cell, and they
share in differentiating the derivatives of the cytoplasm. They are to
be regarded as a characteristic component of the cytoplasm, and pro-
bably of a fatty nature. They are not to be identified with extra-nuclear
chromatin nor regarded as structural elements of the cell. They are
effective substances which share in differentiation when the chromatin
induces formative processes.

Path of Hypophysis-secretion.* — L. Edinger has shown that the
secretion of the hypophysis passes from the gland-cells into pericellular
spaces, and thence by perivascular lymph-channels into the mass of the
brain. This explains why compression of the stalk has the same effect
as removing the whole organ. It may be that the secretion operates
especially through the sympathetic system, whose cerebral beginnings lie
near the region where the hypophysis enters the brain.

Conjunctival Epithelium in Man. — Hans Yirchow has made a
thorough histological study of the conjunctival epithelium in man, dis-
tinguishing for instance the varying proportions of mucus-cells and
epithelial-cells. He describes no fewer than eleven figures of different
areas, all showing something distinctive in the structure of the con-
junctiva.

Nuclear Budding in Corneous Epithelium.^ — Christian Ditlevsen
describes a peculiar process of nuclear budding which occurs in the strati-
fied corneous epithelium of the oesophagus and tongue in the guinea-pig.

Retina of Birds. § — Gustav Fritsch has made a comparative study of
the retina of various birds, discussing in particular the area of clear
vision. The high degree of visual acuteness in the bird's eye is essen-
tially due to the delicacy and dense arrangement of the elements in the
restricted centre of the fovea.

Grouping of Nerve-cells in Spinal Cord of Tench. || — L. Jacobsohn
makes a contribution to the topography of the nerve-cells in the spinal
cord of Tinea vulgaris, comparing it with that observed in man. He is
a strong upholder of heterogeneity of the nerve-elements, whether con-
sidered physiologically or histologically.

The tench's spinal cord agrees with man's in showing (1) the same
large polygonal cells, rich in chromatin, in the ventral region of the
grey substance ; (2) the minute cells in the dorsal portion of the grey
substance ; and (3) the reticularis or " Strang "-cells.

Peculiar to the tench's spinal cord are (1) the giant-cells in the most
posterior part of the cord ; (2) the rather large cells which occur some-

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, pp. 496-505 (1 pi.
and 3 figs.).

t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, pp. 565-617 (2 pis.
and 2 figs.).

% Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 208-17 (10 figs.).

§ Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldever, pp, 245-70 (4 pis. ).

|| Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, pp. 506-28 (9 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. 611

what dorsally to the central canal at a few parts of the median area of
the cord ; and (3) some isolated cells, which are described.

Awanting in the fish, but present in man, are (1) the sympathetic
cell-groups ; (2) the so-called Clarke's pillar ; and (3) the other large
cells of the dorsal cornu of the grey substance.

Muscles of Lamprey.* — P. Schiefferdecker has made an elaborate
study of the trunk-muscles of Petromyzon fluviatilis as regards the
structure of the fibres, the nuclear relations, and the sarcolemma. There
are various degrees of differentiation, at least three different kinds : the
" parietal " fibres of the trunk, the " central " fibres of the trunk, and the
muscles of the head. The " parietal " fibres of the trunk correspond
essentially to those of higher animals, diverging only in shape, most of
them being four-sided prisms. The " central " fibres are large muscle-
plates, very far from the usual type, and fenestrated. The " central "
fibres have a sarcolemma, but no perimysium ; the " parietal " fibres
have both. The latter are poor in sarcoplasm, the former very rich.

The author enters into the subject in minute detail — his summary
alone occupying over six pages — and draws from his study a number of
conclusions as to muscle-fibres in general. One may regard a differ-
entiated cross-striped muscle-fibre of a Vertebrate as a syncytium of
muscle-cells, surrounded by a sarcolemma, which is of the nature of a
" cell-membrane."

Survival of Isolated Leucocytes. f— J. Jolly has been able to keep
leucocytes from the frog's blood living and mobile in vitro for a year.
They were kept in sealed glass tubes at about zero until May, June, and
July, 1911, when the temperature rose to +5°.

c. General.

Action of Radium Radiations on Blood.} — Helen Chambers and
S. Russ have studied the action of radium radiations upon some of the
main constituents of normal blood. Red blood-corpuscles are hremolyzed
by the action of the a-rays, and oxy-hgemoglobin is converted into met-
hamioglobin. Leucocytes undergo marked degenerative changes when
subjected to a-rays. During the process of clotting, leucocytes appear
to move away from an a-radiated region. This movement has been
attributed to changes found to occur in the surface tension of blood
serum when radiated. The specific properties of opsonin and hemolytic
complement are lost when serum is exposed to a-rays. The progressive
changes caused by these rays indicate the separate identity of opsonin
and complement. The /3-rays and y-rays have yielded negative results in
analogous experiments.

Sleeping and Waking.§ — Ch. Bouchard re-states his theory that a
narcotic substance produced during the activity of waking hours, and
experimentally demonstrable in the urine, leads to sleep. During sleep,
on the other hand, there is formed an excitatory ("convnlsivaiite")

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, pp. 422-95 (2 pis.
and 3 figs.). t C.B. Soc. Zool., lxxi. (1911) pp. 147-S.

X Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiv. pp. 121 36 (8 figs.).
§ Comptes'liendus, clii. (1911) pp. 504-5.

G12 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

substance whose accumulation leads to the muscular movements which
precede awakening. He refers to the similarity between his theory,
stated in 1886, and that of Lcgendre and Pieron (1911), who find
evidence that when sleep is prevented there accumulates in the blood a
narcotic substance inducing sleep when injected into other animals.

Sense of Direction in Blind.* — Truschcl has made a large number
of experiments in regard to the sense that blind people have of a near
object, or of an object which they approach. The result of his experi-
ments is to suggest that the perception is auditory, the near object
reflecting and altering surrounding sounds. To the objection that a
deaf-mute is said to have exhibited the sense, the author answers that
those quite deaf to music and speech are sometimes sensitive to very
feeble noises.

Plica semilunaris in Hereros and Hottentots. f — Paul Bartels has
followed up the discovery of Giacomini, who showed that the plica semi-
lunaris conjunctivae in coloured races has often a minute piece of carti-
lage, the occurrence of which is one of the greatest rarities among white
folk. The plica is a representative of the so-called third eyelid (in whole
or in part) of mammals, birds and reptiles. The presence of the cartilage
shows that the Hottentots are pro tanto more theromorphic than whites,
for it is present in all monkeys.

Bartels studied 8 Herreros and 17 Hottentots, and found the little
piece of cartilage in 12 ; Giacomini found it in 12 out of 16 ; Adachi
found it in 5 Japanese out of 25 ; Giacomini found it 4 times in 548
whites ( = 0 • 73 p.c.)

Vertebrate Lower Jaw.J — E. Gaupp discusses the " gonial," a mem-
brane bone of the lower jaw, which is usually penetrated by the chorda
tympani. It is the " angular " of some amphibians ; it fuses with the
articular in lizards and some amphibians ; it is the processus anterior
mallei in mammals. The malleus is indeed a gonio-articular.

Mammals of West Indies.§ — Glover M. Allan has studied these in
relation to the problems of geographical distribution. It appears that
the present evidence afforded by the distribution of West Indian mammals
in the main corroborates the current hypothesis that the fauna is derived
in part from northern South America, and in part, by means of probably
at least two land bridges, from North and Central America.

Digestive System of Hornbill.|| — H. C. Curl has made sections of
the various parts of the gastro-intestinal tract of Hydrocorax hydrocorax.
He has particularly studied the deciduous membrane lining the stomach,
which is periodically ejected with undigested refuse. The deciduous
membrane is a tough homogeneous secretion from the glands of the
stomach. About the position where one would expect caeca, the mucous

* Cornptes Reudus, clii. (1911) pp. 1022-4.

t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, pp. 529-64 (1 pi. and
1 fig.). % Anat. Anzeig., xxxix. (1911) pp. 97-135 (16 figs.).

§ Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, liv. (1911) pp. 175-263.
j Philippine Journ. Sci., vi. (1911) pp. 31-6 (2 pis. and 1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND ROT ANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 613

membrane of the gut is much altered, perhaps taking on the functions
of the absent casca.

The assertion often made that fat is absent is disproved. Similarly,
the statement that the circular layer of muscle in the intestine is found
external to the longitudinal, requires correction. There is an outer longi-
tudinal layer, a circular layer, and a thinner longitudinal layer, with some
oblique fibres.

New Species of Odontopteryx.* — B. Spulski describes Odontopteryx
longirostris sp. n. from Tertiary deposits in Brazil. The specimen is
larger than Owen's 0. toliapicus from the London Clay, and in better
preservation. The skull is over \ in. in length ; the bill by itself being
0*4 m., and the rest of the skull 0" 13 m. The bird was probably rapid
in flight, catching fishes as it flew. The peg-like growths of bone on
the jaws are contrasted with the teeth in sockets which Archseopteryx
possessed. Some affinities with albatross, pelican, and ducks are re-
cognized.

Air-sacs in Birds.f — A. Juillet has examined seventeen species,
and distinguishes several types. The anterior diaphragmatic sac may
communicate with the interclavicular sac. The latter may arise from the
third entobronchus by a canal common to the anterior diaphragmatic.
There may be seven openings (fowl, partridge, water-hen, etc.) or six
(pigeon and parrot), or more than seven (sparrow, gull, etc.). In
the second main type (confined to Anseriformes) the interclavicular
arises by a canal of its own from the first entobronchus, and does not
communicate with the first diaphragmatic.

Snake-poison and Yolk of Egg.J — C. Delezenne and S. Ledebt
have shown that the venom of cobra and daboia, added to yolk of egg,
liberates, at the expense of the yolk, haemolytic and toxic substances
which are extremely potent in their effects.

Effects of Starvation on Necturus maculatus.§ — W. M. Small-
wood and C. Gr. Rogers have studied two specimens which were kept
in a large tank, with running water, but without food, for 4 months
and 16 months respectively. The effect of the prolonged fast showed
itself in a distinct shrinkage of the whole body in the case of the one
starved for 16 months, while the other showed in its general appearance
little if any change. An account is given of some of the cytologic;! 1
peculiarities observed.

Corpora Adiposa of Amphibians. || — Pierre Kennel has studied these
structures in frog, toad, and newt. They are really differentiations of
the serous membrane of the peritoneum, and should be called " adipo-
lymphoid " bodies. They have two functions, (1) storing fat during the
summer for utilization during the hibernating period, and (2) giving

* Zeitschr. Deutsch. Geol. Ges., lxii. (L910) pp. 507-21. See also Zool. Zen-
tralbl., xvii. (1911) pp. 805-6.

t Cornptes Rendus, clii. (1911) ]>]>. 1330-2.
t C.R.Soc. Biol., lxxi. (1911) pp. L21-4.
§ Anat. Anzeig., xxxix. (1911 1 pp. L36 42 (11 figs.).
Cornptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1352-4.

C14 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

origin in spring and summer to numerous elements of the hyaline leu-
cocyte series (a lympho-poietic role).

Lateral Line System in Tadpoles of Alytes and Rana.* — P. Win-
trebert lias made a number of experiments which show that excitation
of the latei'al nerve is not followed by any motor reaction. The terminal
apparatus and caudal nerves of the lateral line system do not include any
fibre of general irritability. According to the author, the system has
not to do with taste or smell or the like, but is " a system of external
defence, allied to the auditory system, whose integrity is necessary for
equilibration."

Regeneration in Newts.f— Gustav Wolff brings forward evidence
to show that the regeneration of the hind limb of Triton cristatus is
dependent on the nervous system. He dwells especially on the remark-
able fact that if an abnormal limb, say with two toes, be cut off, the
same kind of monstrosity is regenerated. His conclusion applies only to
the case with which he has experimented, for Wolff is careful to point out
that the regeneration of the lens, for instance, takes place without nervous
stimulus.

Function of Cerebellum in Fishes.} — V. Franz brings forward
evidence in support of the view that the cerebellum plays a very im-
portant role in connexion with locomotion in water, for the precise
regulation of the voluntary muscles. It is more than an equilibrating
organ : it is a "precision-organ." It appears to be a universal centre
for all sorts of sensory stimuli. Just as in terrestrial animals the
pallium (of the cerebral cortex) is a new central organ in addition to the
olfactory centre, so the cerebellum in aquatic animals has been added on
to the auditory centre.

Reduction and Oxidation in Animal Tissues.§— P. G. Unna dis-
cusses at length the problem of the localization of these two processes,
his general thesis being that the reduction-areas are those tissue-elements
which contain catalase, but no peroxydases, and that oxidation-areas are
those (notably the nuclei) which contain peroxydases, but no catalase.

Equilibration in Aquatic Animals. |] — Albrecht Bethe discusses this
problem with reference to a variety of types, both with and without
statocysts, and distinguishes those which are by construction stable in a
given position from those " labile " forms which keep themselves in the
normal position by a co-ordination of many movements. He notes, in
reference to young fishes, that in some cases the newly-hatched forms are
automatically stable, and that they thus get a start in the acquirement
of equilibrating co-ordination.

Summer Plankton of West of Scotland and Irish Sea.1"— W. A.
Eerdman shows that the abundant vernal phyto-plankton dies away in

* C.R. Soc. Biol., lxxi. (1911) pp. 100-2.

t Festschrift R. Hertwig, iii. (1910) pp. 67-80 (1 fig.),

t Biol. Centralbl., xxxi. (1911) pp. 434-45.

§ Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldever, pp. 1-73.

| Festschrift R. Hertwig, iii. (1910) pp. 81-92 (10 figs.).

«j Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxii. (1911) pp. 23-38 (8 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 615

the Irish Sea in early summer, while a similar micro-flora is present in
quantity in some parts of the sea on the west of Scotland (e.g. the Sound
of Mull and the sea around Canna, Eigg, etc.) until July, and possibly
later. It can scarcely be doubted that the phyto-plankton maximum is
found in spring in the Hebrides as in the Irish Sea. But have the July
Diatoms remained, or have they reappeared ?

A survey of numerous gatherings of zoo-plankton shows (1) that
localities, in some cases not very far apart, differ very considerably in the
nature of their plankton at the same time of year ; and (2) that there is
constancy year after year in the nature of the plankton in some localities.

Moss-fauna of Central America.* — Fr. Heinis reports from dry
moss and lichens thirty-eight Rhizopods (including Corycia spinosa sp. n.),
eleven Rotifers, and three Tardigrades (including Erkiaiscus siegrisfi
sp.n.).

INVERTEBRATA.

Mollusca.

a- Cephalopoda.

Japanese Cephalopods.t — G. Wulker deals with a collection made
by Doflein in Japanese waters. It includes twenty-five species (four
new) in eleven genera. The Japanese Cephalopods show most resem-
blance to the Indo-Malayan forms, but there is a close similarity also to
those of the Mediterranean. The author devotes much attention to the
" salivary " glands of the different types.

7- Gastropoda.

New Fossil Chiton from Girvan.f — F. R. Cowper Reed describes
Helminthochiton thraivensis sp. n., from Starfish Bed (Upper Bala), Gir-
van. It has a narrow elongated body, with eight imbricating plates and
marginal girdle (?) of spicules. The surface of all the plates is covered
with closely set pores, which, as in living forms, probably served for the
passage of nerves to superficial sensory structures. The nearest affinities
of the Girvan form are with H. (jriffithi Salter.

5. Lamellibranchiata.

Artificial Parthenogenesis in Mactra.§ — K. Kostanecki has studied
the development induced in the eggs of Mactra by the addition of some
potassium chloride solution to the sea-water. The ordinary cleavage
does not occur, but the nuclei multiply by multipolar mitosis and ciliated
larvas are formed.

The eggs may give off two polar bodies, or only one, or none. In
every case a bipolar segmentation spindle is formed, in the first case from
a single ovum-nucleus, in the second case from two ovum-nuclei, in the

* Rev. Suisse Zool., xix. (1911) pp. 253-66 (1 pi. and 3 figs.).

f Abh. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss.. iii. (1910) Supp. Band. i. pp. 1-70 15 pis.). See
also Zool. Zentralbl., xvii. (1911) pp. 792-5.

: Geol. Mag., viii. (1911) pp. 337-9 (1 pi.).

§ Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, 2"- Ant., pp. 1 62
(4 pis.).

616 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

third case from four ovum-nuclei. If cleavage occurred, the cells would
probably have half the normal number of chromosomes in the first case,
the normal number in the second, twice the normal number in the third.
What occurred, however, was nuclear division without cell division,
then a simultaneous division of the egg into small cells, and finally,
much the same result whether the egg had given off two polar bodies,
or one polar body, or none. The autlior gives a detailed account of the
interesting abundance of abnormal mitoses.

Contraction of Adductors in Fresh-water Mussels.* — W. F. Ewald
has made an exact study of the electrical changes associated with the
contraction of the adductors in Anodonta and Unio, and distinguishes a
" Tonustrom " in addition to the " Ziickungstrom." The tonic muscle-
contraction is defined. It is not oscillatory nor discontinuous, but a
persistent process, both in its mechanical and electrical aspects.

Arthropoda.
a. Insecta.

Blood of Insects.f — A. Ch. Hollande has made a comparative study
of the blood of insects, partly to see whether there is any marked
cytological difference in cases where " auto-hseniorrhage " is usual. He
finds that there is no marked peculiarity. But aphides with " cornicles "
have free " wax-cells " (cellules cirieres) in the blood which are absent
in those without "cornicles." The author describes a variety of leuco-
cytes. In most insects there are proleucocytes, phagocytes, granular
leucocytes, and cenocytoids.

Symbiosis of Yeasts and Insects.! — Karel Sulc has studied the
so-called " pseudovitellus " and similar tissues in Homoptera, e.g. in the
larva of Ptyelus lineatus, and comes to the interesting conclusion that
there is symbiosis with various kinds of Saccharomycetes, e.g. Gicado-
myces ptyeli lineati g. et sp. n. In another paper§ he deals with the
yeasts of Cicadas, e.g. Saccharomyces cicadarum sp. n.

Migration of Iris-pigment in Compound Eye.|| — R. Demoll has
worked specially with Lepidoptera (Agrotis pronuba). A constant
tonus from the brain keeps the pigment in its darkness-position. If
the tonus be interrupted by narcotics or sleep, the pigment in the
proximal part of the iris-pigment-cells takes the light-position. If the
tonus is interrupted peripherally by illuminating the proximal part of
the iris-pigment-cells between the crystalline cones and the rhabdom,
the pigment assumes the light-position.

Bee Disease.^ — The Board of Agriculture and Fisheries has issued
a leaflet dealing with an epidemic disease which has been prevalent for
some years past among bees in the Isle of Wight and is now spreading

* Festschrift R. Hertwig, iii. (1910) pp. 55-66 (5 figs.),
t Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1911) pp. 283-323 (2 pis. and 12 figs.).
: SB. Bohm. Ges. Wiss. (1910) No. 3, pp. 1-39 (18 figs.).
§ SB. Bohm. Ges. Wiss. (1910) No. 14, pp. 1-6 (4 figs.).
| Zool. Jahrb., xxx. (1911) pp. 169-80 (2 figs.).
U Board Agric. and Fisheries, Leaflet No. 253 (1911).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 617

to the mainland. The cause remains unknown. The bees become
disinclined to work, they lose their power of flight, they crawl about the
ground. The abdomen swells, wings and legs are affected. The
foragers are always the first affected. Finally the whole colony of
workers is found massed together in front of the hive or on the ground,
except a few which are found crowded round the queen. The mysterious
disease may be distinguished from Bee Paralysis, "May Pest," and
Dysentery.

Spermatogenesis of Stenobothrus viridulus.* — C. F. U. Meek
finds that the chromosomes of the spermatogonial complex can be
arranged in a graduated series of pairs, and are divisible into three
groups, viz., large, small, and medium-sized chromosomes. The number
is constant and is seventeen, the fourth largest being unpaired and
corresponding with the " monosome " and " accessory " chromosome of
other writers. All the members of the spermatogonial complex divide
in mitosis ; but the odd or heterotopic chromosome often " lags," and
can be seen on the spindle when the ordinary chromosomes are
assembling at the poles.

The ordinary chromosomes divide in the primary spermatocyte
metaphase, and their halves pass to opposite poles of the spindle ; the
heterotopic chromosome shows no sign of division, and passes entire to
one daughter-cell, while the ordinary chromosomes are still on the
equatorial plate. In this manner dimorphism of the subsequent
spermatozoa is effected.

The author has been unable to discover whether reduction — the
separation of conjugant members — occurs at the first maturation division
or the next ; possibly both divisions are equational, and only a numerical
reduction takes place as a result of lateral association of chromatin
granules or masses on the reticulum threads prior to the primary
spermatocyte prophase of mitosis.

The secondary spermatocytes show seven or eight chromosomes,
and this difference is due to the presence or absence of the heterotropic
chromosome. In the spermatids the heterotropic chromosome undergoes
resolution into particles, whose identity is indistinguishable in the
common chromatin mass.

Though the individuality of the chromosomes is quite lost in the
resting-stages, there is strong reason for supposing that the same
elements appear on the successive mitotic spindles throughout de-
velopment. It must not be assumed, however, that corresponding
chromosomes of two successive metaphases contain the same individual
chromomeres.

New Flea from South Africa.j — J. Waterston describes Xenopsylla
trispinis sp. n., evidently close to X. cheopis Rothsch. and A', nubieus
Rothsch., taken from nests of the cliff swallow (Petrochelidon spilodera),
also from the birds themselves, and on the walls of the building (in
Cape Colony) where the birds nested.

* Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxii. (1911) pp. 1-21 (3 pis.).

t Proc. R. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, xviii. (19 LI) pp. 192-5 (6 figs.).

618 sr.M.MARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fatty Body during Metamorphosis.* — A. Hufnagel describes the
changes exhibited by the fatty body in Hijponomeuta padclla, e.g., that
some cells arc destroyed by phagocytes, while the majority persist and
exhibit :t remarkable expulsion of chromatin from the nucleus into the
cytoplasm — an " epuration chromatique."

Flying Apparatus of Blow-fly .f — Wolfgang Ritter gives a thorough
account of the structural arrangements involved in the flight of Calli-
phora vomitoria, and describes their manner of working. The constituents
of the wing-joint are three, the processus pterales thoracis, the pteralia,
and the processus pterales alae. The flexibility of the material permits
some relative movement of different parts of the same piece of chitin.
It is all very different from a Vertebrate's joint.

The indirect muscles produce the elevation and depression of the
wings ; the direct muscles change the shape and position of the wings
and the course they travel in a beat ; the direct muscles are probably
also steerers ; the downstroke of the wing is forward relative to the
insect, and directed, in ordinary forward flight, downward and forward
also relative to the surrounding air ; it produces an elevation of the
insect's body, which overcomes gravity but retards the forward move-
ment. During the horizontal movement of the wings, when depressed
forward and also during the upstroke, the wings act as gliders, counteract
gravity and retard horizontal advance, or vice versa. The fly descending
glides forward, or ascending loses its horizontal velocity. The torsion of
the wing attains its maximum at the end of the downstroke, because its
anal portion lags behind the anterior part during the downstroke in con-
sequence of its flexibility and the resistance of the air. Toward the end
of the upstroke the torsion is at its minimum. The folds of the surface
and the hairiness of the wing affect its mechanical effect on the air. The
numerous small folds of the anal portion of the wing, which is poor in
veins, serve to strengthen it.

Oriental Species of Stomoxys.J — Sophia L. M. Summers finds that
the characters most to be relied on are the width of the frons in relation
to the width of the head, the width of the median line on the thorax, and
the colour of the legs. The abdominal markings can be relied on to a
certain extent only. Ten species are dealt with, including Stomoxys
pratti sp. n.

] Cave Diptera. § — M. Bezzi has found in grottos representatives of
twenty-six families of Diptera, but the majority of these are only occa-
sional visitors. The family of Heleonryzidae is most characteristic. No
form without wings has been found ; no blind form has been found,
though some Heleomyzidee show a reduction of eyes. Some forms show
an elongation of antennas ; some show an expansion of the abdomen.
N( > clear case of reduction of pigment has been found ; but the author
is strongly of opinion there are genuine cavernicolous Diptera.

* C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 635-7.

t Smithsonian Misc. Coll., lvi. (1911) No. 12, pp. 1-76 (19 pis.).

X Ann. Nat. Hist., viii. (1911) pp. 235-40 (5 figs.).

§ Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1911) pp. 1-87 (23 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 619

Occurrence of Ox-warbles.* — X. Lehmann and 0. Vaney report on
the percentage of hides with warbles, observed at Lyons throughout three
successive years. They occurred in the bides in every month, but from
September to March inclusive the warbles were either retarded larvae
beginning to degenerate or only larval remains. From March to June,
when there are no living adults, there is a growing percentage of larva?
in the skin. This points to a migration from the viscera.

The penetration of the larvae from the alimentary tract is supported
by the following facts : (1) the winter restriction of the very young
larvae to the sub-mucosa of the anterior portion of the alimentary canal ;
(2) the growth of the larvae in the oesophageal region ; (3) the occurrence
in February and March of more developed larva? in the membranes of
the spinal cord and in the sub-cutaneous tissue of imperforated skin ;
(4) the increasing abundance of sedentary larva? in the skin from May
to July. It may be noted that while bullocks with thin skins show a
greater percentage-occurrence of warbles, it is the opposite with cows ;
which shows the skin-thickness is of no importance.

Classification of Culicidae.t — A. Alcock maintains the propriety of
the old group of the family Culicida? into two sub-families, Corethrina?
(with short and soft proboscis and with hairs on the veins of the wings)
and Culicina? (with long and stiff proboscis and the mouth-parts of the
females specialized for piercing) and with scales on the veins of the
wings. He proposes to divide the Culicina? into four sections, which
are defined : Megalorhini, Epialurgi, Culicales, and Metanototricha. The
Epialurgi or "Ague-producers" include the single genus Anopheles, with
about 100 species, distributed in all the great zoogeographical regions.
The constitution of the genus is discussed.

Parasites of Olive-fly. J — Paul Marchal discusses the importance of
Dacus olese, which works such havoc among the olives. Fortunately it
is often parasitized, e.g. by two Chalcidid Hymenoptera, Eidophus pectin i-
cornis L. and Eupelmus urazonus Dalm. Marchal has found a new
parasite, a Braconid Opius concolor, at home in North Africa. It is an
internal parasite, as larva and pupa in the corresponding stages of the
olive-fly, and seems to be an effective check. Marchal recommends its
importation into Europe.

Digestive Ferments of Beetles. — L. Bounoure has found in beetle8
four ferments, a proteolytic diastase, a lipase, an amylase, and an invei"
tine. Comparing various types he shows that the nature of digestive
juice is adapted to the alimentary regime. Thus, as regards proteolytic
diastase, the carnivorous Dytiscus marginalis has much, while the vege-
tarian cockchafer has little.

Buccal Parts of a Ceylonese Staphylinid.|| — E. Bugnion gives a
careful description and beautiful figures of the mouth-parts of Creophihis

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1343-5.

t Ann. Nat. Hist., viii. (1911) pp. 240-50.

J Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 215-18 (3 figs.).

§ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 228-31.

|j Rev. Suisse Zool., xix. (1911) No. 5, pp. 135-52 (2 pis.).

620 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

villwmnis Kraatz. The labium forms in front of the pharynx a kind of
gutter (atrium) hidden under the labrum. On each side is a brush and
a comb with forty teeth. These " paralabial " parts are probably atomo-

doeal differentiations, secondarily fused to the labium. The food, which
consists of decomposing animal matter, is pressed by the mandibles into
the space between labrum and atrium, and the combs act as a strainer,
letting fluid pass out.

Revision of Bathysciinse.* — R. Jeannel has made a detailed study
of these cavernicolous Silphid beetles. He deals with their external
features, making a special point of distinguishing paleogenetic characters
from those that are adaptive to life in caves. The larval forms, the
geographical distribution, and the classification are carefully dealt with.

Nutritive Habits of BostrychidiB.f — Pierre Lesne discusses the
diversity of diet in Bostrychidaa and its parallelism with that observed
in Scolytidse. There is no doubt that Bostrychid beetles are primarily
xylophagous (eating the hard woody tissue of Mimosa, Bambusa, Yine,
Ficus carica, etc.). But to this normal diet, to which they are mar-
vellously adapted, they have added two others : (1) as adults they have
taken to eating growing shoots of trees ; (2) sometimes as adults and
sometimes as larvae they have taken to exploiting the stores accumulated
by plants, either on the plants directly or when garnered by man.

Position and Classification of Protodermaptera. J— Fr. Zacher dis-
cusses this sub-order of earwigs, phylogenetically older than the Euder-
maptera (Labiidaa, Cheliduridse, and ForficulidaB). Along with the
Protodermaptera may be included the Paradermaptera with the family
Apachyidse. The Protodermaptera include two sets of families, the
Pygidicraniales and the Labiduriales. The author deals with the
detailed classification and the geographical distribution.

New Collembola in England. § — J. W. Shoebotham describes Onco-
podura crassicornis sp. n. from Hertfordshire, and records twelve species
new to England — all new to the British Isles except Sphyrotheca lubbocld
(Tullb.), which has been recorded by Bagnall (1909) from the Kyles
of Bute.

Insect Remains from South Wales Coalfield. ||—H. Bolton deals
with a large series of Blattoid remains, including new species of Hemi-
mylacris, Arcliimylacris, etc. They occurred in marked association with
vegetable remains ; the deposits were apparently near to a land surface ;
the presence of Archimylacrid and Orthomylacrid forms, no less than the
presence of La?nproptilia, is indicative of a considerable advance in insect
development in Britain beyond the more primitive palaaodictyopteran
types.

* Arch. Zool. Exper., vii. (1911) pp. 1-641 (24 pis.).

t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 625-8.

J Zool. Jahrb., xxx. (1911) pp. 303-400 (80 figs.).

§ Ann. Nat. Hist., viii. (1911) pp. 32-9 (1 pi.).

|| Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, lxvii. (1911) pp. 149-74 (4 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 621

13. Myriopoda.

New Termitophilous Millipede.* — S. Hirst describes Termitodesmus
hfroyi sp. n., found by Maxwell Lefroy in the mounds of Termes obesus
Rawl. at Cuttack, Bengal. It belongs to a new genus recently estab-
lished by Silvestri for two new Millipedes found by Escherich in the
nests of T. obscuriceps Wasm. in Ceylon.

Doubling of Segments in Myriopods.f — Jules Chalande points out
that while one may theoretically regard the double ring of the Millipede
as due to the fusion of two somites originally separate, this view is not
supported by the facts. In the post-embryonic development of Centi-
pedes there is a complete doubling of segments, and in Glomeris (a
Millipede) there is a partial doubling of the ventral plates. At each
stage of the post-embryonic development of a Chilopod a new ring arises
between the penultimate ring and the anal ring ; soon afterwards two
pairs of appendages appear ; and then the ring divides into two segments.
In Millipedes all the rings except the thoracic show their duality, but
remain undivided. A series of stages may be worked out — Sympliyla.
G-eophilidas, Lithobiidre, and Scolopendridse — showing the evolution of
the double segments of Centipedes.

8. Arachnida-

Development of Ischnocolus.i — Ludmilla and W. Schimkewitsch
continue their study of this representative of the Tetrapneumones. The
young spiders have at first untoothed claws on the pedipalps and limbs,
and the basal joint of the cheliceras has no teeth. The arrangement of
the eyes is not the same as in the adult. The invaginations of the
body-wall, which form insertions for muscles, are described.

In a later stage the claws of the limbs and pedipalps become
pectinate, and teeth appear on the basal joint in the cheliceraB. After a
moult, a piece of endoskeleton appears between the basis of the cheliceraj
and the basis of the pedipalps. The limits of the ganglia can be detected
in the cephalothoracic mass. The development of the gut and the
vascular system is also discussed.

Fresh-water Mites of Clare Island. § — J. N. Halbert records eighty
species of Hydracarina from two collecting expeditions in Clare Island.
Twelve species are recorded for the first time from the British area.
Both cosmopolitan and northern forms are well represented in Clare
Island. Thus Lebertia fimbriata Sig. Thor and Oxi/s plan fan's Sig. Thor
have hitherto been found only in Norway. Four new species are de-
scribed : Eylais relicta, Front ipoda carpenteri, Atractides (Torrenticola)
brevirostris, and Unionicola (Atax) rivularis.

Pseudoscorpiones of Clare Island. || — H. Wallis Kew found that
false-scorpions were unusually scarce in Clare Island, probably because

* Ann. Nat. Hist., viii. (1911) pp. 256-7 (1 fig.).
t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1345-7.

X Bull. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersbourg (1911) No. 10, pp. 775-90 (1 pi. and
20 figs.).

§ Proc. R. Irish Acad., xxxi., pt. 39 (1) 1911, pp. 1-44 (3 pis.).

|| Proc. R. Irish Acad., xxxi. (1911) Clare Island Survey, pt. 38, pp. 1-2.

Oct. 18th, 1911 2 S

622 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

most of the surface is peat-covered and boggy. He records Obisvnn
maritimum Leach from between tide-marks, 0. muscorum Leach among
dead leaves, and Ghthonius tetrachslatus Leach among stones.

Transmission of Amakebe by Brown Tick.* — A. Theiler finds that
the disease of calves in Uganda called Amakebe is identical with East
( 'oust fever (due to Theileria parva), and that it is transmitted by the
brown tick, Rhipicephalus appendiculatus, which has been proved in
South Africa to be the principal transmitter of East Coast fever.

Alleged Importance of Demodex in Spreading Leprosy.t — E.
Bertarelli and V. Paranhos bring forward a number of facts which are
not in favour of the view that Demodex is important in the dissemination
of the bacillus of leprosy.

Structure and Habits of Macrobiotus macronyx.J — J. Henneke
has studied the male of this fresh-water Tardigrade. In spring the
males are as numerous as the females, but later on they disappear.
Perhaps there is an alternation of generations as in Rotifers. The male
bears peculiar hooks on the first rudimentary appendage, which are used
in the sexual union. A moult occurs in the female at that time and the
old husk hangs on posteriorly so that the cloaca opens into it. The
males bore into this envelope and empty the seminal material into it.
Within it the spermatozoa may be seen moving about, and some may
enter the cloaca. When ejaculation is completed the female lays e^gs,
it may be fifteen in five minutes, which accumulate in the old envelope.
The latter is usually carried about until the young hatch out, but some-
times the female gets free from it before that.

The author goes on to describe the integument, the food canal, the
blood, and the gonads, devoting particular attention to the testis.

Clare Island Water-bears.§ — James Murray reports on the Tardigrada
collected at Clare Island, for which he adopts Schultze's name Arctiscoida.
He deals with no fewer than thirty-three species, all new for Ireland,
indeed, no water-bears have been previously recorded from Ireland.
Eleven are new to Britain, and five new to science. Twenty-two species
are common to Scotland and Clare Island, sixteen are Arctic, three
Canadian species occur, and Echiniscoides sigismundi is the first marine
water-bear recorded for the British Isles. About half of the Clare
Island forms are cosmopolitan or widely distributed. The Britannic
list now stands at sixty-one species.

Middle Cambrian Merostomata.|| — Charles D. Walcott establishes
a new sub-order of Eurypterids which he calls Limulava with Sidney ia
inexpectans g. et sp. n., as its type. Along with Sidneyia he describes
Amiella ornata g. et sp. n., the oldest Merostome now known (from the
upper Lower Cambrian). The sub-order Limulava differs from the
Eurypterida in having a large epistoma similar to that of Trilobites ; in

* Proc. Royal Soc, Series B, lxxxiv. pp. 112-15.

t Centralbl Bakt. Parasitenk., lvii. (1911) pp. 490-3.

X Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1911) pp. 721-52 (1 pi. and 20 figs.).

§ Proc. Irish Acad., xxxi. (1911) Clare Island Survey, pt. 37, pp. 1-16 (3 pis.).

j Smithsonian Misc. Coll., lvii. (1911) No. 2, pp. 17-40 (6 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 623

not having a metastoma, chelate antennae, and swimming cephalic
appendages ; and in having a broad fan-shaped caudal fin, and branchial
appendages more or less unlike the lamellar branches of the Eurypterida
and Xiphosura,

Pentastomes in Australian Cattle.*— T. Harvey Johnston and
J. Burton Cleland found in the mesenteric glands of cattle suffering
from endemic haematuria a few small parasites, which they recognized as
larval Pentastomes (Pmtastomum denticulatum Rud.), the adults being
known as Linguatula serrata Frol. The larvae have been recorded from
many Mammals, mostly herbivores ; the adults infest the nasal cavities
and frontal sinuses of other Mammals, mostly carnivores.

f- Crustacea.

Behaviour of Prawns. t — F. Doflein has studied Leander xiphias and
L. treiUanus, two common prawns on the Riviera coast. He deals first
of all with the various kinds of chromatophores and pigments, and with
the post-mortem change into red, which is rather more complicated than
is usually supposed. There is a solution of the blue pigment which
changes into red, and there is also a change in the yellow and the red
pigments. The red pigment is, however, the primary one, and the others
are derivatives of it. A careful account is given of the colour-changes
that may be observed during life. The author gives an interesting account
of the various attitudes assumed by the prawns when resting, wlien ex-
cited, when eating, when cleaning themselves, and so on, and of their
reactions to various kinds of stimuli.

Olfactory Structures in Gralatheids.J— Kurt Marcus has studied these
in various types, e.g. Uroptychus, Muni/In, and Petrolisthes, and shows
the various arrangements for protection, and the like. He finds evidence
that in abyssal forms, where the eyes are degenerate, there is a com-
pensatory high development of olfactory seta?. In other cases the high
development is shown to be probably adaptive, and where the conditions
of life mechanically endanger the smelling organ, there is a more or less
complex protective apparatus.

Classification of Rock Lobsters. § — A. Gravel has tried to introduce
greater order into the classification of Palinuridse, which include six
genera — Puerulus Ort., Pallinurellus v. Mart., Jasus Parker. Pali minis
Fabric, Linuparus Gray, and Panulirus White.

Anatomical and Experimental Study of Asellus aquaticus. ||
W. Wege has made a minute study of the joints of the second antenna,
the innervation, the indirect insertion of the muscle by an epithelial
tendon, the ecdysis, the autotoniv. and the regeneration. Theautotomy
may be either reflex or voluntary. It is adaptive, and there is a definite
breakage-line between the fourth and fifth joint. The ecdyses do not
end with sexual maturity, but probably continue throughout life, though

* Journ. R. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliv. ( L910) pp. S^-IS.*^

t Festschrift R. Hertwig, iii. (1910) pp. 215-92 (4 pis. and 16 figs.).

X Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1911) pp. 511-45 (2 pis. and 18 figs.).

§ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1350-2.

|| Zool. Jahrb., xxx. (1911) pp. 21G-320 (2 pis. and 33 figs.).

2 s ■_'

624 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

at longer intervals in older animals. A regeneration is not apparent

until alter a moult. The first antenna, which shows no autotomy, can
he regenerated just as well as the second, which does show autotomy.
Many interesting facts are related in regard to the regenerative process.

Cirripede and other Commensals of Madrepores.* - -Ch. (J ravier
has studied in the Gulf of Aden the various commensals (or parasites,
perhaps, in some cases) which are found associated with Oallaxea ellisi,
a Madrepore coral with large calices. He directs attention, in particular,
to species of the Cirripede genus Pyrgoma, which are common on the
calices and produce deformities. He describes also the occurrence of
a Chama, and the coral's response to the bivalve's destructive action.

Annulata.

Adipose Cells of Pontobdella muricata.j -— J. A. Scriban has
studied the adipose cells in this leech. They are confined to the con-
nective layer between the gastric epithelium and the longitudinal
muscles of the body-wall. He describes the mitochondria in the
cytoplasm and the occurrence of numerous parasomes, ergastoplasmic
bodies, surrounded by concentric lamella?. The presence of these
parasomes indicates the glandular character of the cells in question.

Studies on Australian Earthworms.— Gwynneth Buchanan:}: con-
tinues a study of the blood-vessels in species of Cryptodrihis, Diporo-
chseta, Megascolex, etc.

An account is also given in another paper§ of the accessory glands,
close to the male and female genital openings, in Cryptodrihis saccarius
(Fletcher). They probably secrete mucus which facilitates the passage
of the reproductive elements. Similar glands have been recently de-
scribed by Sweet in other Oligochaets.

Freda Bage|| deals with the nephridia in a dozen species, and
Janet W. Raff f has made a corresponding study of the alimentary canal.
with interesting notes on "calciferous glands" and the so-called
pepto-nephridia.

Nerve-cells of Leech and Earthworms.** — Wanda Bialkowska and
Zofia Kulikowska have made a study of the minute structure of the
nerve-cells in various Hirudinea and in Lumbricus, in order to de-
termine whether the " Golgi-Kopfsch " apparatus characteristic of
Vertebrate nerve-cells is also to be found in these Annelids. Their
conclusion is a decided affirmative.

Nephthyidae and Lycoridse of the North Sea and the Baltic. ft —
Adolph Heinen deals with a collection of species of Nephthys, N&reis,

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 210-12.

t C.R. Soc. Biol. ,lxx. (1911) pp. 674-6 (2 figs.).

t Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxii. (1910) pp. 209-20 (3 pis.).

§ Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxii. (1910) pp. 221-3 (1 pi.).

j| Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxii. (1910) pp. 224-43 (4 pis.).

•jf Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, xxii. (1910) pp. 244-54 (4 pis.).
** Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 193-207 (1 pi. and 4 figs.),
tt Inaug. Dissertat. (Kiel 1911) pp. 1-86 (1 pi. and 4 maps). See also Zool.
Zentralbl., xviii. (1911) pp. 345-7.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANV, BIN ROSCOPY, ETC. 625

etc., made by the 'Poseidon' (1902-10). Particular attention is
devoted to the sexual conditions in Nereis diversieolor, one of the
interesting facts noted being the occurrence of a Palolo-like swarm of
headless worms in Kiel Harbour.

Papillomatous Neo-formation in an Annelid.*— P. Mesnil and
M. Caullery describe in Potamilla torelli Mlmg. what seems to be the
first recorded occurrence of a tumour in an Invertebrate. There are
papilloma-like proliferations of the mesoderm, forming bud-like growths
on the wall of certain segments and extending inwards, somewhat like
false septa. In most of the modified segments there is a parasite,
Haplosporidium potamillse, and this may start the new growth. If it
does, it disappears in some cases, for some of the growths showed no
trace of parasite.

New Species of Ctenodrilus.t— I wan Sokolow describes a new
Ctenodrilid from the lancelet sand at Naples. It occurred in five
different forms. In its shape, bristles, number of segments, and mode
of division it is nearer to Vaillant's genus Zeppelin/a than to Criodrilns,
and the author calls it Zeppelinia branchiata sp. n. There are 25 to 30
segments ; the bristles are long and thread-like (2 to 3 in a bundle) ;
the heart-body is intense scarlet or olive-green ; the supra-< esophageal
ganglion projects strongly into the cavity of the head-lobe ; the atokous
form has two eyes, a ciliated wreath on every trunk segment, and pairs
of gills on many. New individuals are usually formed from several
maternal segments. The new formation of the anterior and posterior
ends usually occurs after the separation off of the new individual.

Nematohelminthes.

Potency of Blastomeres in Ascaris.J — Th. Boveri enquires into the
potency of the blastomeres when the cleavage has been modified from
the normal, e.g. when dispermy has occurred, or when the ova have been
rotated in a centrifugal machine. In the latter case some of the eggs
divide into two similar blastomeres by a cleavage plane at right angles
to the stratification induced by the rotation. These two blastomeres
develop in a precisely similar way. Each of them corresponds to the
first " Stamm-Zelle " in the segmentation of a normal ovum. The
companion of this first " Stamm-Zelle," known as the first primitive
somatic cell, has quite disappeared as such.

Microfilaria from a Fowl.§ — Berke gives a description of a " micro-
filaria," very abundant in the blood of the liver of a domestic fowl in
Cameroon. Associated with it in the peripheral blood, but not in the
liver, were numerous straight or curved rod-like bodies, the significance
of which is discussed.

Plasmic Reduction in Spermatogenesis of Ascaris megalocephala.||
Marc Romieu finds that the spermatid undergoes two successive cyto-

* Comptes Rendus, clii. 1911) pp. 628-31.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1911) pp. 546-603 (3 pis.).

; Festschrift R. Hertwig, iii. (1910) pp. 215-92 (4 pis. and 16 tigs.).

§ Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., Lviii. (1911) pp. 326-30 (1 pi.).

| Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 223-5.

626 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

plasmic reductions. The first is represented by the expulsion of the
cytophore which forms the " intermediate corpuscles." The second is
represented by the protoplasmic lobes which are detached to form residual
bodies. According to the author, cytoplasmic reduction is a general
phenonemon in spermatogenesis.

Worm-nests in Australian Cattle.* — J. B. Cleland and T. H. John-
ston describe projections or nodules in the skin of Australian cattle,
known as " worm-nests " or " stone-bruises." They contain Filaria
{Onchocerca) gibsoni Cleland and Johnston, but do not seem to be of
much practical importance.

In another paper,f the authors describe the structure of the parasite,
which also occurs in camels, and discuss the possible modes of trans-
mission. They discuss the possibility that some mosquito, biting fly, or
tick is the intermediate host, but favour another theory, that the life-
history is similar to that of the guinea-worm in man, the intermediate
host being some species of Cyclops or other fresh-water Crustacean.

New Species of Echinorhynchus.J — Gr. Blanc and L. Cauchemez
describe Echinorhync/ms brumpti sp. n. from the hedgehog, from which
already three species, unsatisfactorily known, have been recorded, namely,
E. major Bremser, E. amphipachus Westruml), and E. erinacei Rudolphi.

Platyhe lminth.es.

Alleged Toxicity of Tapeworms.§ — Guido Gruerrini has made a large
number of inoculations of nucleo-proteid extracted from Taenia solium,
T. serrata, and Dipylidiwn caninum, into various parts of dogs, guinea-
pigs, and rabbits, and has found no evidence of toxic action, nor any
specific deleterious influence.

Structure of Monopylidium passerinum.|| — T. Harvey Johnston
gives an account of this small tapeworm, which Fuhrmann described
from the common sparrow and Fringilla rvficeps. He deals with the
musculature, the excretory system, and the reproductive organs.

Regeneration in Planarians.1T — P. Steinmann has made numerous
experiments, with Planar ia go/wcephala in particular. The size of a
regenerate is determined neither by the amount of injury, nor by the
organs cut off, nor by the parts directly adjoining the wound, but by
the whole of the regenerating organism.

A cut down to the middle of the pharynx results in a two-headed
Planarian. In place of one of the heads excised a tail grows. The
nature of the regenerate, whether head or tail, depends neither on the
nature of the section-margin, nor on the nature of the adjacent tissues,
but on the regenerating organism as a whole. Distant parts of the
regenerating organism have an organizing influence on the regenerate.

* Journ. R. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliv. (1910) pp. 161-71.

+ Journ. R. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliv. (1910) pp. 171-89 (1 pi.).

I C.R. Soc. Biol., lxxi. (1911) p. 120 (1 fig.).

§ Oentralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk,, lvii. (1911) pp. 548-66.

! Journ. and Proc. R. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliii. (1910) pp. 405-11 (1 pi.).

H Festschrift R. Hertvvig, iii. (1910) pp. 29-54 (15 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 627

Effects of Starvation on Planarians.* — J. Berninger has made a
study of the effects of starvation on several species of Planarians. During
the course of the starvation period the Planarians lose about one-twelfth
of their normal size and length, the loss amounting to about one-twelfth
of the total volume. . No degeneration could be observed in the nervous
system or musculature as a result of starvation, and very little in the
intestine or parenchyma. In the absence of food and light the eyes were
totally re-absorbed in the course of 7 to 8 months ; the whole eye-orbit
divides into two, three, or more parts, the pigment breaks up, and finally
the optic nerves and cells disappear. In pigmented Planarians the body
pigment is also re-absorbed to a certain extent. The sexual organs are
without exception reduced and finally disappear. The yolks degenerate
first and are followed by the copulatory organs. With these the oviducts
and vasa deferentia disappear ; the ovaries then follow, and the testes
are re-absorbed shortly before death takes place. The cocoons are
reduced to about half their normal diameter, and the embryo rarely lives
till emergence. The embryos which do survive show in their reduced
size the effects of starvation. Planarians endure 3 to 4 months' starva-
tion fairly well. If they are well fed at the end of this period the
sexual organs may be restored, even though they have almost entirely
disappeared.

Revision of Swiss Triclads.j — Paul Steinmann distinguishes rheo-
philous forms from flowing water, and limnadophilous forms usually
in stagnant water. A number live in darkness, Planaria alpina var.
bathyeola, and Dendroccelum lacteum var. bathycola from deep lakes,
Planaria vita from wells, Dmdromlum infernale and Planaria cavaUca
from caves. With the aid of very clear diagrammatic figures he gives
an account of the general structure of Triclads. A diagnostic key
to the genera and species of Swiss Triclads is then given. There are of
course no marine forms for Switzerland, and there is only one terrestrial
form — Rhynchodemus terrestris (Mull.)— so that the key is practically
to " paludicolous " forms.

Malacobdella grossa.J — G. Gering has made a study of this Nemer-
tine. All his specimens were obtained from Cyprina islandica, usually
in large individuals. In one case four young ones were found in one
bivalve. Gering observed that although there is no stilet apparatus, the
proboscis is used as a weapon. The oogenesis and the spermatozoa, the
maturation, fertilization, and first cleavage are described.

Rotatoria.

Clare Island Rotifers.§ — James Murray reports on the Bdelloid
Rotifers collected at Clare Island, fifty-seven species, of which forty-eight
are additions to the Irish list. There is not a single species which is
confined to Ireland, and there is only one (excluding six doubtful ones)
which does not also occur in Scotland. One of the most interesting

* Zool. Jahrb., xxx. (1911) pp. 179-216 (29 figs.).

+ Rev. Suisse Zool., xix. (1911) No. 7, pp. 175-231 (3 figs.).

X Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1911) pp. 673-720 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).

§ Proc. K. Irish Acad., xxxi (1911) Clare Island Survey.pt. 52, pp. 1-20 (1 pi.).

628 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

finds on Clare Island was Gallidina asperula, a species only recently
discovered in Canada. The most important peculiarity of the Irish
Bdelloid fauna is to be found in certain varieties of common species.
These occur among the spiny Bdelloids, which are found in the genera
Dissotrocha, Pleuretra, and Gallidina.

Echinoderma.

Structure of Solaster endeca.*— James F. Gemmill contributes
some notes on the structure of this starfish. 1. The central set of pore
canals of the madreporite open into collecting trunks leading into the
ampullary part of the axial sinus which leads directly into the stone
canal. 2. The marginal set of pore canals form collecting trunks which
lead into the upper end of the axial sinus, and also communicate freely
with the ampullary chamber. 3. In the strict sense none of the pore
canals of the madreporite can be said to open into the stone canal.
There is an interesting blind diverticulum from one of the spaces con-
nected with the central chamber, which invaginates the wall of the dorsal
sac and expands within its cavity. It may serve as a channel for the
escape of wandering cells from the dorsal sac. The anus in Solaster
occupies the same relative position as in other starfish, i.e. it comes after
ray V. In four gonads of a large specimen carefully studied, three had
two external openings, while the remaining one had three. The external
openings formed slit-like pits, and each received the ends of two or three
main ducts. Traced inwards, these ducts, after passing through the body-
wall, divided into branches each of which came into relation with one of
the small ultimate clusters of egg-tubes. The author also discusses the
aboral perihamial sinus and an interbrachial branch of the external oral
circular sinus.

Middle Cambrian Holothurians.f — C. D. Walcott has discovered
some entire Holothurians in fine-grained silico-argillaceous rock from
British Columbia. Their occurrence records for the first time, apart
from some scattered calcareous spicules and plates, the presence of this
class of organisms in any geological formation. He establishes a new
family, Eldoniidse, for a free-swimming form, Eldonia ludwigi g. et sp. n.
The body was disc-like, the mouth and anus ventral, the water-vascular
system radial from the aboral pole. There was a broad band of con-
centric muscle-fibres on the outer half of the subumbrella surface. There
was no calcareous skeleton. It was found associated with Trilobites,
Phyllopods, and Sponges, and was first regarded as a Medusa.

Another form is Laggania cambria g. etsp. n., with an elongate, pear-
shaped body. The ventral mouth, situated near the anterior end, was
probably surrounded by calcareous plates. In Louisella pedunculate
Lr. et sp. n. the ventral sole is beautifully outlined by the marginal row
of podia on each side. A new Synaptid, Mackenzia costalis g. et sp. n.,
has an elongated cylindrical body, and the plates around the anterior
end are preserved as casts on the rock. In none of the forms was there
any trace of calcareous matter.

* Proc. R.Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, xviii. (1911) pp. 174-91 (8 figs.).

+ Smithsonian Misc. Coll., Ivii. (1911) No. 3, pp. 41-66 (6 pis. and 6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 029

Comparative Age of Recent Crinoid Faunas.* — A. H. Clark con-
siders recent Crinoid faunas in their "physiological phylogenetic aspect."
Faunas, like individuals, specieB, and genera, pass through a period of
youth, of adolescence, of maturity, and of senescence. The Bering Sea
Crinoid fauna is the nearest approach to a young fauna that can be
found. The Antarctic Crinoid fauna is also very young. The Crinoid
fauna of southern Japan is adolescent ; the West Indian Crinoid fauna
is approximately mature ; the Australian Crinoid fauna is a perfect
example of a senescent fauna, including about fifty species, nearly all
of which are remarkable for the grotesque exaggeration of their specific
characters. A pathological fauna may resemble a senescent fauna in its
general facies ; but in a pathological fauna all the species, beside being
aberrant, are excessively variable, which is never the case in a senescent
fauna. Pathological faunas occur usually on the limits of faunal areas,
e.g., in the southern part of Massachusetts Bay.

Ccelentera.

Hexactinise from New South Wales.f — Leonora J. Wilsmore describes
Peachia hilli, Phellia browni, and Ph. capitata, three new species. The
structure of the new Peachia is described in some detail. Two points
may be referred to. There are numerous pores through the body-wall
in longitudinal rows in the region of the physa ; there is a powerful en-
dodermal muscle-system, and a sphincter. The two Australian species of
Phellia are characterized by the unusual strength of the sphincter and
its peculiar contraction into two parts. The size and prominence of the
acontia are also unusual characteristics.

Middle Cambrian Medusa.}— C. D. Walcott describes from British
Columbia Peytoia nathorsti g. et sp. n., a highly organized Medusa, whose
relation to the order Rhizostomas is shown by its discoidal bell without
known annular furrow or pedalia, by the lappets on the margin of the
bell, by the absence of tentacles, and by the probable presence of adradial
arm-like processes at the mouth.

Development of Lucernarians.§ — W. Wietrzykowski has continued
his study, starting with a polyp with four perradial tentacles, and four
interradial septa showing primordia of the taeniolar muscles. He follows
the appearance of the successive tentacles.

Notes on Structure and Budding of Limnocnida.|| — C. L. B<»u-
lenger has studied some points in the structure of Limnocnida tanganicee,
the fresh-water medusoid of Lake Tanganyika. The stinging-cells mi
the tentacles are not developed in situ, but in the ectoderm of the
"nettle-ring" (a thickened band at the edge of the umbrella). They
migrate thence to the tentacular batteries. The "nettle-ring" is to
be regarded as the factory and storage-place of these stinging-cells,

* Amer. Journ. Sci , xxxii. (1911) pp. 127-32.

t Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxii. (1911) pp. 39-57 (3 pis. and 1 fig.).

j Smithsonian Misc. Coll., lvii. (1911) No. 3, pp. 55-8 (1 pi.).

^ Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1911) Notes ct Revue, No. 2, pp. xlix-lii (2 figs.).

|| Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lvii. (1911) pp. 83-106 . 1 pi. and 3 figs.).

630 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and is not in itself a functional nematocyst battery. There is a well-
developed double nerve-ring at the base of the velum, similar in most
respects to that of Limnocodium and of other medusoids.

The manubrium is undoubtedly functional as a digestive organ.
The gland-cells and digestive cells are restricted to the more proximal
regions, the oral endoderm being characterized by the presence of an
unusually large number of mucus-secreting goblet-cells. The develop-
ment of the medusa-buds presents several interesting features, some of
which are undoubtedly primitive.

Structure and Affinities of Thyroscyphus.* — A. Kiihn gives for
the first time an account of the minute structure of this Hydrozoon. He
discusses its affinities and establishes a new species, Thyroscyphus gracilis.
By the nature of the periderm-sheath and of the hydranth body it is
separated from the Campanularids and Campanulinids. It should
probably be ranked near the base of the Sertularid stock.

Porifera.

Degenerative Changes in Sponges.f — 0. Maas has experimented
with Sycandra raphanus, Leucosolenia Heberkiihnii and Chondrosia reni-
formis, observing the results of lack of lime salts, lack of food, and so
on. Processes of involution set in, comparable to gemmule-formation,
and these are followed after a pause by revivification. The sponge-body
becomes simplified and shows its essentially diploblastic (not triploblastic)
constitution. In the resting stage there are internal granular cells and
external covering cells. The internal cells are due to the activity of
phagocytes which absorb the gastral cells and other elements. In the
Calcarea these phagocytes are modified porocytes ; in the Dernospongia?
they are migratory " cellules spheruleuses " of the middle stratum. One
of the interesting general results is the indirect confirmation of the view
that sponges are fundamentally diploblastic.

Merlia.J — R. Kirkpatrick gives an account of the remarkable sponge
known as Merlia normani, found by Canon Norman and afterwards by
the author in 60 to 90 fathoms off Porto Santo and Madeira. It is a
vermilion-coloured encrusting monaxonellid sponge belonging to a new
sub-family — Merlinge — of the Haploscleridre. Large granular amcebo-
cytes (calcocytes) have constructed a basal calcareous skeleton, formed
of vertical tubes divided up by horizontal tabulae. The tubes are built
up of columns, each with three vertical wings which unite with wings of
neighbouring columns to form tubes. This mode of construction was
probably primarily determined by the disposition of the branches of the
rhoanosome, which led to the deposition of amcebocytes at the points of
bifurcation of the lines of flagellated chambers.

Apparently the calcocytes become wholly transformed into lumps,
connles, or flakes. The calcareous skeleton shows certain resemblances,
especially at the surface, to certain Palreozoic fossils, classed among

* Zool. Jahrb., xxxi. (1911) pp. 25-38 (1 pi. and 3 figs.).

t Festschrift R. Hertwig, iii. (1910) pp. 93-130 (3 pla. and 2 figs.).

X Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,M. (1911) pp. 657-702 (7 pis. and 5 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1)31

"tabulate corals" or Polyzoa (some of the • Monticuliporas). There is
no dermal epithelium, and the canal system is hymenopylous.

The author replies to objections (of an a priori character) that have
been brought against the sponge nature of Merlin.. He has examined
over 500 specimens, and his conviction is that it is a sponge that forms
both a siliceous and a calcareous skeleton.

New Lithonine Sponge from Christmas Island.* — R. Kirkpatrick
describes Plectroninia deansii sp. n., found as a thin vitreous-white crust
on some pieces of rock dredged off Christmas Island. The skeleton is
constructed of fused four-rayed spicules, as in other Lithonine ; the
distinguishing feature of P. deansii lies in the character of the loose
spicules. These are mostly monaxons, curved at one extremity, running
to a sharp point at one end and rounded at the other. One spicule
appears to be bifurcated at one end, and may be regarded as a three-
rayed form. Kirkpatrick suggests a revised classification of the Phare-
tronidae, which he divides into four sub-families : Dialytina3,Pharetroninae,
Lithoninas, and Murrayoninse.

Pharetronid Sponges of Essen Greensand.j — 0. A. Welter gives an
account of a collection of the fossil Calcarea from the Essen Greensand.
The family Lithonina is represented by eleven species of Porosphserella ;
the family Pharetronina is represented by a score of species belonging to
the genera Corynella, Peronidella, Steinmannella, etc. The Pharetronids
mostly disappeared at the end of the Cretaceous period, and it is uncertain
whether they have left any extant descendants. The author indicates his
belief that Astroclera willeyana Lister is one of these.

Protozoa.

Studies on Pelomyxa.J — Antonin Stole enquires into the membrane
around the refractive bodies in the cytoplasm of this giant amoeba. It
consists of a carbohydrate more difficult to dissolve than glycogen. He
believes that the agglutinin of the refractive bodies forms this protective
membrane out of glycogen. When the animal has to fast, a lysin from
the refractive bodies dissolves the membrane. Then there is a rnass-
agglntination of exhausted refractive bodies ; but, in point of fact, the
membrane, is continually being dissolved and replaced. In the same way
a nuclear agglutinin makes a nuclear membrane. The symbiotic bacteria
of Pelomyxa are agglutinated on the surface of the nucleus and on the
surface of the refractive bodies, and sometimes in the cytoplasm in general.
There is a bacterio-agglutinin and a bacterio-lysin in continual operation,
according to the author, and the capacity that higher animals have of
producing immunizing substances (agglutinin, lysin, etc.) has its phy ln-
genetic beginning in cases like Pelomyxa.

Encystation in Pelomyxa. § — A. Stole has studied the encysted stage
in this giant amoeba, and finds that it is closely comparable to that in

* Ann. Nat. Hist., viii. (1911) pp. 177 9 (10 figs.).

t Yerh. Nat. Yer. preuss. Rheinl., Ixvii. ( 1911) pp. 1-82 (3 pis. and 10 figs.).

X SB. Bohm. Ges. Wiss. (1910) No. 9. pp. 1-8

§ SB. Bohm. Ges. Wiss. (1910) No. 1G, pp. 1-7 (1 pi.).

1132 SUMMARY OK CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Myxomycete plasmodia. The body divides into several unequal parts
comparable to the formation of macrocysts in Myxomycetes, according to
Zopf s description.

"Trichites" in Didinium.* — E. Faure-Fremiet describes in this
large ciliated Infusorian what he calls "trichites." These are intra-
protoplasmic filaments of great tenuity, forming a sort of armature for
the pharynx. They are straight or gently curved, quite smooth, and
pointed at the ends. They are elastic and albuminoid ; but the author
finds that altogether similar filaments may be induced artificially by
using a concentrated solution of sulphate of magnesium, which brings
about a partial precipitation of the cytoplasm.

Notes on Flagellates.f — A. Alexeieff deals with Octomitus intestinalis
Prowazek from rat, newt, and axolotl ; JJohjinasti.r iatrachorum sp. n.
from Triton tseniatus ; Monocercomonas bufonis Dobell from newts,
axolotl, and frogs ; Heteromita lacertse Grassi in newts, axolotl, and
salamander ; Rhizomastix gracilis g. et sp. n., a rare form from the
axolotl, which approaches Orcomonas and Gercomonas ; Ghilomonas
parametrium Ehrbg. ; and a number of other forms.

Classification of Trypanosomes in Mammals. J — A. Laveran directs
attention to the large number of Trypanosomes which have been re-
corded, and the lack of precise description in the majority of cases. The
identification of species should rest (1) on structural characters, such
as the disposition of the flagellum ; (2) on the vital properties, such
as whether the form is pathogenic or not ; and (3) on special characters
discovered by serum-diagnosis and the like.

The non-pathogenic Trypanosomes of Mammals may be divided into
those of small Mammals and those of Bovidee. The pathogenic Trypano-
somes of Mammals may be divided into those in which the flagellum
has always a free portion ; those in which the flagellum has no free
portion ; and those wdiich occur in both states. Besides these there are
many doubtful species.

Frog Trypanosomes in Japan.§ — M. Koidzumi has studied the
Trypanosomes found in Rana temporaria, R. esculenta, and R. rugosa,
distinguishing various types, but coming to the conclusion that there is,
after all, but one species, Trypanosoma rotatorium.

Trypanosomes in Fresh-water Fishes. || — C. Mathis and M. Leger
describe Trypanosomes in a number of well-known fishes from Tonkin,
such as Anabas scandms, Garassius auratus, and Afacropodi/s riridi-
auratus.

Ca3cal PaVasites of Fowls.lf— C. H. Martin and Muriel Robertson
deal with Ghilomastix gallinarum, Trichomonas gallinarum, T. eberthi,
Trichomastix gallinarum, all of them new species from the caeca of

* C.R. Soc. Biol., lxxi. (1911) pp. 146-7.

t Arch. Zool. Exper., vi. (1911) pp. 491-527 (15 figs.).

I Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxv. (1911) pp 497-517 (1 fig.).

§ Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lviii. (1911) pp. 454-60 (1 pi.).

,| C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxxi. (1911) pp. 185-7.

\ (Juart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lvii. (1911) pp. 53-81 (5 pis. and 4 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 633

fowls. They point out that until the whole life-cycles are known, the
breaking- up of the complex series of forms inhabiting the caeca of fowls
into good species is a matter of great difficulty, but they indicate the
characteristic features of the four forms which they have distinguished,
as above stated.

Cilium of Treponema pallidum.* — C. Levaditi records his observa-
tions of a terminal cilium in this parasite of syphilis. It is visible on
the living organism ; it has a filiform free end; its thickness is about
one-third that of the rest of the organism ; it has eight to ten deep un-
dulations : it is actively mobile, and it seems as if the organism moves
with the cilium behind.

Leptomonad of the House-fly. — J. S. Dunkerly describes some
stages in the life-history of Leptomonas muscse domesticse, distinguishing
(1) a typical Leptomonad form which actively divides in the intestine or
in the Malpighian tubules of the fly, and (2) very actively slender forms,
often with an undulating membrane. These are produced by the others.
They probably encyst while attached in large numbers to the rectal wall,
and the cysts may be passed out with the faaces to give rise to flagellate
forms in another fly.

Haematozoa of Australian Batrachians.J — J. Burton Cleland and
T. Harvey Johnston describe a Trypanosome (perhaps Trypanosoma
rotatorium (Mayer) from Queensland frogs (Lymnodynastes), and Hsemo-
gregarina {Lankesterella) hylse sp. n. from the common " Green-tree-
frog." Hyla cserulea.

Studies on Haematozoa. — C. Franca § reports on some Hasmatozoa
of Portuguese Guinea : Trypanosoma lewisi Kent, very common in Mus
raft as •. a Haemogregarine from a tortoise (Sternotltserus derbianus) ; an-
other from Varanus niloticus.

In another paper || Franca describes Hsemogregarina pestanse sp. n.
(from Bufo regularis) ; Trypanosoma bocagei sp. n. (reported by others
as T. rotator turn), from the same ; Toddi/i bufonis g. et sp. n., from the
same ; and some other forms, all from Guinea.

In a third paperlf he deals with Haemogregarines from Portuguese
fresh -water tortoises.

Parasites of Leucocytes in Brown Rat.**— C. Franca and M. Pinto
discuss the various parasites which have been found in leucocytes since
Bentley's discovery in 1905. In the family Haamogregarinidae they
recognize two genera, Hsemogrcgaritia Danilewsky (= Drepanidium,
Kariolysus, and Danilewslcga) and Leucocytogregarina Porter ( = Leuco-
cytozoon Danilewsky pro parte, and Hepatozoori). They go on to de-
scribe stages in the life-history of Leucocytogregarina maris (Balfour).

* C.R. Soc. Biol., lxxi. (1911) pp. L56 8 1 1 fig.).
t Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lvi. (1911) pp. (345-55 (1 pi.).
X Journ. R. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliv. (1910) pp. 252-60 (1 pi.).
§ Arch. Inst. Bacter. Caniara Pestana Lisbon, iii. (1911) pp. 201-5 (3 figs.).
Arch. Inst. Bacter. Camara Pestana Lisbon, iii. (1911) pp. 229-38 (1 pi.).
•jf Arch. Inst. Bacter. Camara Pestana Lisbon, iii. (1911) pp. 239-44 (2 figs.).
** Arch. Inst. Bacter. Camara Pestana Lisbon, iii. (1911) pp. 207-17 (2 pis.).

I'.34 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Glugea lophii.* — R. Weissenberg discusses the remarkable tumour-
like cysts wliicli are produced in the nervous system of tlie angler
(Lophias) by the Microsporidian Glugea lophii. The hypertrophy of the
ganglion-cells, the retrogressive changes in the cysts, the spreading of
the infection within the body, are among the subjects discussed.

Studies on Flagellates. f— Gr. Senn deals with Oxyrrhis, Nephroselmis,
and other Flagellates. He shows that Oxyrrhis belongs to the Peridinidae,
and must be placed near Hemidinium. This change is based on the
asymmetry of the cell, the possession of a longitudinal and transverse
groove, two flagella, the structure of the nucleus, and the mode of
division. This removes from the Euflagellata their most divergent
member ; and the author seeks to define the Euflagellata more precisely.
Longitudinal division is dominant, and there is no form with clearly-
defined transverse division. In the symmetry of cell, the nature of the
flagella, the structure and division of the nucleus, the Euflagellata are
clearly marked off from other Protists.

Protozoa in the Alimentary Canal of House-fly.:}: — P. C. Flu has
found that the gut of Musca domestica in Surinam (Paramaribo) contains
two species of Flagellates — Herpetomonas muscse domesticse and Lepto-
monas muscse domesticse, and a new Schizogregarine, Octosporea muscse
domesticse sp. n. He describes their various stages, and discusses their
transmission from fly to fly.

Cnidosporidian without Cnidoblasts.§ — Edouard Chatton describes
Paramyxa paradoxa g. et sp. n., found within a pelagic Annelid larva.
Its spore is remarkable in showing a single parietal cell and no cnido-
blast— a unique exception in the class of Cnidosporidia, It seems to
require a new Cnidosporidian family for itself, and its inclusion within
the Cnidosporidia opens that class to forms like Peltomyces from cock-
roaches, where the spore is without a stinging apparatus, but protected
by a cellular envelope.

Conjugation in Paramoeciiun.H — H. S. Jennings publishes the results
of an experimental study of the conditions which induce conjugation in
Paramcecium. He finds that they differ greatly in the different races
{P. aurelia or P. caudata). Some races conjugate freely and under con-
ditions readily supplied in experimenting. Others under the same condi-
tions do not conjugate at all. The interval between conjugation may
be very short — in one race epidemics of conjugation occurred at intervals
of two weeks to a month, while in a single case there were successive
conjugations at intervals of five days. In other races conjugation
occurred only at intervals of a year or more. Tn one race, carefully
watched, conjugation was not observed during a period of three years.
Frequent re-conjugation may be observed among the progeny of a single
individual. Conjugation occurred in the races favourable for experi-

* Arch. Mikr. Auat., lxxviii. (1911) Festschrift Waldeyer, pp. 383-421 (2 pis.),
t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1911) pp. 605-72 (2 pis. and 8 figs.).
t i ontralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lvii. (1911) pp. 522-35 (2 pis.).
§ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 631-3 (10 figs.).
|| Journ. Exper. Zool., ix. (1910) pp. 279-99 (4 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 635

mentation, not as a result of starvation, but at the beginning of a
decline in the nutritive conditions, after a period of exceptional richness
that bad induced rapid multiplication. At the time of conjugation the
animals are often in good condition, and multiplication may still be in
progress. In the races conjugating less readily the external conditions
favouring conjugation are probably somewhat different yet of a similar
general character. The differences in different races in the matter of
conjugation do not bear a simple relation to the relative size of other
morphological characteristics of the race. The two largest and the two
smallest races observed conjugated only rarely ; the race that conjugates
most frequently is intermediate in size. Among the races that conjugate
rarely are some with two micro-nuclei and some with one. The fact
that, in a given race, conjugation may be repeated (in the same line of
descent) at intervals of five days to a month, and the fact that races
derived from a single individual may live without degeneration for three
years without admixture from outside, tend, along with the results of
Woodruff, Enriques, and others, to weaken the theory that conjugation
is to be considered as a result of senile degeneration at the end of the
life-cycle.

Nuclear Changes in Conjugation of Colpidium.* — A. Dehorne finds
that in Colpidium colpoda the process of conjugation is similar to that
which he has described in Paramecium caudatum. When the migratory
micro-nucleus is about to cross over, the stationary nucleus moves farther
back and becomes appressed to the macron ucleus, within a vacuole in
which it degenerates. The micronucleus which has passed over elongates
and forms a spindle, but the stationary nucleus disappears. The long
spindle, extending posteriorly, completes its mitosis and forms two micro-
nuclei, which immediately prepare for another mitosis.

New Species of Mesnilella.f — E. Andre describes from the alimentary
canal of the Oligochget Lumbriculus variegatus a new species of this
genus of astomatous Ciliata. He names it Mesnilella cepedei sp. n., and
distinguishes it from other species mainly by the shape of the supporting
" spiculum," which runs out into a thread posteriorly and by the number
(1-4) of contractile vacuoles.

Internal Euglenid Parasite. $— P. de Beauchamp describes Astasia
captiva sp. n., which he found very active and in large numbers inside
the chain-forming Turbellarian Gatenula lemnse. It has no chlorophyll
nor stigma, but its position is indubitable. A case of parasitism among
Euglenids may possibly have some interest, the author suggests, in con-
nexion with the much-debated question of the origin of Gregarines.

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1354-7 (9 figs.).
+ Rev. Suisse Zool., xix. (1911) pp. 2G7-70 (1 fig.).
% Arch. Zool. Exper., v. (1910) Notes et Revue, No. 5, pp. lii-lviii (2 figs.).

636 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

GENERAL,
Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,
Including- Cell-Contents.

Structure of Protoplasm.* — W. W. Lepeschkin contributes a pre-
liminary paper dealing with work on the structure of protoplasm. The
author believes that living protoplasm is to be regarded as a colloidal
solution of the nature of an emulsion, which under certain conditions is
visible under the Microscope, and may be transformed into a gelatinous
foam with fluid, honeycomb-like walls. The writer is of the opinion
that such a structure is the only one which would account for the
physical and physiological characters of protoplasm. The colloidal
parts, which show " Brownian " movement in the plasma of the proto-
plasm, probably consist of various and heterogeneous chemical compounds.
Since the distribution of colloidal parts takes place very slowly, molecules
of chemical compounds arising in any particular part of the protoplasm
cause alterations in the protoplasm at that point, and bring about such
phenomena as prolongations of the cell, separation of special substances,
changes in the protoplasm, etc., which in their turn cause movements in
the plasma. Such a structure would explain the organization of the
protoplasm whereby reactions or conditions occurring in one part are
conducted to all other parts. If by the action of electricity, poisons,
etc., this colloidal structure is destroyed and coagulation ensues, then
life is destroyed. The contents of the protoplasm, i.e. nucleus,
chromatophores, etc., all appear to partake of this colloidal nature. The
author believes that all phenomena exhibited by protoplasm may be
explained by this " living plasma " theory.

Chemical Composition of the Plasma-membrane. f — W. W.
Lepeschkin has studied the chemical composition of the plasma-
membrane, i.e. the plasma-layers which form on the surface of proto-
plasm and possess selective osmotic properties. Numerous experiments
lead the author to believe that the power of diffusion is due to the same
causes which render possible the diffusion of salts, acids, and other
readily soluble substances, i.e. to dissolved molecular water in the
dispersion-medium. Albuminoids or closely allied compounds also play
an important part in dispersion, likewise lipoids and oily substances,
although it is still doubtful whether the latter are simple or combined
with a mixture of lecithin and cholesterin. At present it appears as
though all the above substances exist in the dispersion-medium either in
a molecular solution or as a loosely combined chemical compound ; the

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 181-90.
t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 247-61.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. f»37

latter is the most probable, since substances like lecithin can only be
detected after coagulation of the albumin. The composition of this
compound appears to be so unstable that dissociation occurs at the
slightest disturbance of the protoplasts.

Function of Nucleoproteid.* — W. Zaleski has made numerous
experiments as to the function of nucleoproteids in plants. The
investigator finds that these proteids are built un during the growth of
the somatic cells, and that they contain very stable formative materials
which usually go to build up the protoplasts ; under normal conditions
of growth the nucleoproteids show no appreciable decrease in quantity,
but under abnormal conditions, i.e. when in danger of death, they may
serve as a food reserve. Nucleoproteids undoubtedly break down during
the growth of seedlings and the differentiation of somatic tissues, but
the amount formed exceeds the amount used, except at the time of
death, when conditions are reversed. It appears that nucleoproteid is a
characteristic system of different compounds, not a single complex
substance, and it cannot be regarded either as a bearer of life or as
transmitting hereditary characters. The proteids of the nucleus and of
the protoplasm appear to be different. The chemical structure of the
protoplasts is unknown, but albuminoids, proteids, lipoids, and especially
phosphides, appear to be necessary, while stearine also is present.
Enzymes are combined more or less firmly with the lipoids, but upon
death these enzymes are set free, thus explaining the difference between
the ferments of living and of dead plants.

Chondriosomes in Plant-cells.f — A. Meyer contributes some re-
marks upon a paper lately published by Lewitsky, in which it is stated
that chromatophores are developed from chondriosomes. The writer
points out that while Lewitsky claims that the chromatophores originate
independently of the nucleus and cytoplasm, the chondriosomes of
animal-cells give rise to such substances as yolk, pigment, fat, etc.,
which correspond to those substances formed in the plant-cell as a
result of the modification of cytoplasm, and this appears to contradict
the view put forward. It is further maintained that difference in
coloration in response to certain reagents is insufficient basis for such a
theory, and its author is asked to state how chondriosomes may be dis-
tinguished, and to give stronger reasons for his opinion.

Heterotypic Division of Pollen-mother-cells.:}: — L. v. Bonicke has
investigated the presynaptic and synaptic stages in the heterotype division
of pollen-niother-celfs, in order to form some definite opinion as to the
relative distribution of chromatin and linin. The plants used were
Equisetum, Polygonatum, Marantha, Ohelidonium, Delphinium, Sam bun's.
Datura, Bryonia, and HeHanthus. Some types, e.g. Equisetum and
Polygonatum, show a distinct net-work of linin with granules of
chromatin ; Datura, Helianthus, etc., have a finer net-work of linin with
chromatin in the form of prochromosomes, while others, e.g. Sunburns,
show only nodules and threads of chromatin, but no linin at all. Thus

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 14G-55.
t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 158-60.
\ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 59-G5 (1 pi.).

Oct. 18th, 1911 2 T

638 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the author concludes thai nuclei vary in richness of chromatin, and that
it is only possible to distinguish chromatin from linin where the nucleus
is relatively poor in chromatin. Moreover, in all cases investigated during
the present work, the author finds that the spirem stage is clearly tin-
result of fusion of paired threads.

Starch-grains and Oil-drops in Conifer- wood.* — G. Lakon con-
fcributes a paper upon his discovery of starch-grains and drops of oil in
the pitted tracheites of young secondary wood of Conifers. The author
lias tested his results in various experiments, and is led to the conclusion
that both the starch and the oil are the products of the mutual reaction
of the glycose and of certain plasmatic remains present in the tracheides.
It is pointed out that only two other such instances are recorded, i.e. in
Milium and Plantaf/o major • the first is a moss and scarcely forms a
parallel case ; in Plantago protoplasmic remains wrere found, but this is
less remarkable since this genus is herbaceous. Without venturing any
opinion as to the reason of such a condition, the author draws attention
to the fact that the plasmatic contents of the tracheides are the last to
disappear, and remarks that in these sheltered cavities the tenacious
protoplasm can live and carry on its functions for a longer time than
elsewhere.

Peroxydase and Respiratory Pigments.! — W. Palladine and P.
Iraklionoff have made numerous experiments dealing with the nature of
peroxydase and its relation to the respiratory pigments. The results
show that the quantitative distribution of peroxydase is in proportion to
that of the chromogenic respiratory pigments ; peroxydase occurs as a
free or fixed diastase in different plants, and the quantity present varies
very much. It is probable that yeast can cause alcoholic fermentation
even in the presence of air, owing to its entire or partial freedom from
oxidizing diastases. Albuminoids prevent the liberation and purification
of peroxydase. The methods of proving the presence of respiratory
pigments vary with the specific peculiarities of each plant, the same
reagent acting differently in this respect in different plants ; thus, a
reagent which accelerates the formation of pigment in wheat-embryos,
prevents it in etiolated stems of Vicia Faba. Heating to boiling-point
aqueous extracts containing respiratory chromogenes, causes chemical
changes which render the formation of the pigments impossible, and it
probably destroys the substances required by the peroxydase for the
formation of the respiratory pigments.

Structure and Development.
Vegetative.

Evolution of Conducting-tissues of Vascular Plants.t.— G. Chau-
veaud pul dishes the results of twenty years' work in connexion with the
conducting tissues of vascular plants. This publication comprises three
parts, viz. : 1. An historic review dealing with the vascular system and

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 175-8 (1 fig.).

t Rev. Gen. Bot., xxiii. (1911) pp. 225-47.

t Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.) ser. 9, xiii. (1911) pp. 113-439 (218 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 639

theories relative to its different constituents. 2. A discussion of the
theories held at the beginning of the twentieth century, relating to the
evolution of the different parts of the vascular tissues and special sections
dealing with the stele, bundles, etc. 3. New observations as to the
ontogenic development of vascular tissues in the Cryptogams, Gymno-
sperms, Dicotyledons, and Monocotyledons. The following are the chief
conclusions based upon the results obtained : — In the course of evolution
the vascular tissues show successive phases, each characterized by a
special arrangement of vessels and sieve-tubes. All the phases can be
grouped under two cycles, the first of which starts with the centric phase
and ends with the opposite phase ; the second cycle starts with the
alternate phase and ends with the superposed or peripheral phase. Each
phase must be regarded as a successive stage of the same general type.
Root-structure differs from stem-structure not because of difference in
organ, but because the two structures correspond to two different phases
of evolution. Ancestral characters are better preserved in the root than
in the stem. In the majority of Cryptogams the stem only reaches the
first cycle of evolution ; in fossil plants the stem and branches have
reached the first phases of the second cycle, while in recent plants there
has been a more or less rapid advance in evolution. Many living
Phanerogams show the first phases at the base of the stem, but these are
suppressed or only transitory above the hypocotyl. The root shows
only a slow advance, chiefly seen in the gradual absorption of primitive
conducting elements. Among the Ferns the stem has made relatively
slow advance, and hence the stem tends to resemble the root ; the reverse
is the case with the Palms. When the stem has just reached the alternate
phase, we get the most perfect case of vascular continuity. The vascular
structure is more complicated in proportion to the development of the
plant ; if the groups remain separate the structure is polystelic ; if they
fuse it is solenostelic. Further complications arise owing to the partial
or complete fusion of different groups in different phases of develop-
ment. The author regards it as more logical to start from the leaf in
order to correctly interpret the organization of the stem, since the leaf
preserves primitive structures for a longer time, e.g. the cotyledons.
Failure to estimate the true course of evolution may be traced to want
of due regard to the vascular structure of the leaf.

Leaf-symmetry and Exotrophy.* — K. Boshart has studied the
causes of variation in leaf-form in Phanerogams, Ferns, Lycopods, and
Mosses. The author finds that while the relative size of the different
parts of the leaf is dependent upon the area assigned to them at the
growing-point, the subsequent development is proportional to the
amount of food-material supplied to them. Another important factor
is the direction of the flow of food-material, a larger supply on one side
causing asymmetry in the leaf-form. Neither gravity nor light appear
to cause any modification of leaf-form. In pinnate leaves the form
corresponds to the system of venation, and in dorsiventral forms
asymmetry and anisophylly are expressions of general symmetry. In
plants like Goldfussia and Klugia the anisophylly is due to the dorsi-

* Flora, ciii. (1911) pp. 91-124 (14 figs.).

2 T 2

f)40 SUMMARY OF CIMUtKNT RFSFAKCHFS RELATING TO

ventrality of the branch, and the asymmetry of the leaves is a correlation
of the same condition. The dorsiventrality of the branches appears bo
be due bo unequal distribution of food-material at the growing-point :
when the food-supply is equally distributed the dorsiventrality gives
place to a radial arrangement. Similar statements hold good for
flowers Axillary buds cause asymmetry of the inner halves of the
subtending leaves.

'S

Monocotyledonous Characters in the Polycarpeae.* — R. E. Fries
has examined many plants belonging to the Polycarpeae, and while
finding no instances of fused cotyledons in the Ranunculaceae, Lardiza-
balacea?, Berberidaceas, Menispermaceas. Magnoliaceae, Calycanthaceae,
Myristicaceaa, Moniniiacese and Lauraceae, has found numerous instances
of fused first leaves in vegetative-buds, flower-buds, and in the in-
florescences of the Nymphasacefe. The author points out that this
monocotyledonous character is also commonly found in the Anonaceae
and Aristolochiacea?, and that there are many reasons for classifying
these two families in the same group as the Nymphaaacea?. Many
writers regard the Aristolochiaceaa as descendants of extinct Anonaceas,
and such a widely spread (though hitherto little noticed) common
character cannot be a coincidence, but seems to point to a relationship
between the three families, and also to a connexion with the Mono-
cotyledons. The present paper is to be followed by another dealing
with this point in special reference to the Anonaceae.

Reproductive.

Morphology of Diospyros.j — S. M. Hague has studied the morphology
of the flowers of Diospyros virginiana, and the following are the chief
results of her work. The flowers are formed on young shoots, the
order being — a pair of bracts, calyx, corolla, stamens, and pistil. The
anatropous ovule has two integuments and contains four megaspores,
the ehalazal one becoming the embryo-sac. The latter is small at the
eight-ceded stage, and rests upon a stalk-like portion of the nucellus ;
it is surrounded by a tapetal layer formed from the inner integument.
There is little evidence of pollination and none of fertilization, which
probably accounts for the seedless fruit. After the flowers fall the
ovule enlarges and endosperm rapidly forms until the embryo-sac is
full ; the embryo is late in appearing, and a tendency to variation is
seen in freak embryos and polyembryony. Pollen-mother-cells are
found a week before the older flowers are open ; they are large and
show difference in size, while frequently only one nucleus can be
distinguished.

" Hypanth " of the Rosacea?.:}: — A. Hillmann has investigated the
floral structure in the Rosacea? in order to discover the nature of the
"hypanth." With this object the author has given special attention to

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 292-301 (6 figs.).

t Bot. Gaz., lii. (1911) pp. 34-45 (3 pis.).

\ Bot. Centralbl., xxvi. 3 (1910) pp. 377-421 (7 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 641

the course and structure of the vascular strands. The vascular tissues
of the "hypanth" are derived from those of the calyx, corolla, and
stamens ; in most of the genera the strands coming from the calyx and
corolla run parallel to each other and are near the surface, while those
from the stamens run towards the base of the " hypanth," where they
unite with the vascular tissues of the stem or of the " gynophores "
(outgrowth of axis on which each carpel is borne). In Rosa the con-
dition is different, for the vascular strands derived from the stamens
never anastomose with the other strands of the " hypanth." This
condition, together with other differences in the form and arrangement
of the vascular bundles, induces the author to disagree with those
writers who put the fruits of Rosa and Geum in one class. He regards
the fruit of Rosa as being indisputably an axis, that of the Pomaceas as
a combination of calyx and axis, and that of Potentilla, Primus, etc., as
a product of foliar origin. He concludes that in all the Rosacea?, with
the exception of the Pomacere and the genus Rosa, the fruit is the
product of congenital foliar accrescence.

Embryo-sac of Euphorbia.* — N. Dessiatoff has studied the develop-
ment of the embryo-sac of Euphorbia virgata, and finds certain anomalies
similar to those found by J. Modilewski in E. procera. The present
paper is a preliminary one, and is to be followed by others dealing with
the same subject. The author finds that polarity begins after the first
division, and that in subsequent divisions a six-nuclear stage precedes
the eight-nuclear stage and a twelve-nuclear stage precedes the sixteen-
nuclear stage, owing to delay in division of some of the daughter-nuclei.
Not only is this another example of a Euphorbia embryo-sac having
sixteen nuclei, but the two lateral tetrads of nuclei form cells resembling
those of the normal egg-apparatus.

Fruit of Geraniaceae.t — W. Sorensen has studied the fruits of
Geranium, Erodium, and Pelargonium, and is of the opinion that no
ordinary botanical term correctly describes them. In Geranium dis-
section, G.pusillum, G. molle, and G. cicutarium the ovaries are distinct
and no septum exists ; during maturation the carpels divide vertically
to the plan of symmetry into two parts, the ventral part remaining in
its place and the dorsal part becoming detached like a valve ; nerves or
hairs are constricted at the valve. In Erodium the valves do not open
at the lower end, but dehiscence takes place through the walls them-
selves. In Pelargonium the fruits resemble those of Geranium, and
there is evidence to show that the central column is formed from the
receptacle. It is thus incorrect to describe these fruits as schizocarps
having septifragal or septicidal dehiscence. All the above species which
shoot out their seeds are provided with a characteristically formed basal
spring. Where the seed is not shot out, the opening of the valve may
enlarge and allow the loose seed to be shaken out, or it may contract
and retain the seed, and the whole thing be distributed by the wind.

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 33-9 (17 figs.).

+ Oversigt. k. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandl., ii. (1911) pp. 99-137.

642 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING 10

Physiology.
Nutrition and Growth-

Permeability of the Sheath in Wheat-grains.* — II. Schroeder has
investigated the conditions of the permeability of the sheath of wheat-
drains, and now publishes an account of his experiments, which arc similar
to those of A. J. Brown with barley. The chief results are as follows :
Solutions of non-permeable substances like sodium chloride retard the
absorption of water in proportion to their concentration, but this retarda-
tion has no connexion with the cell-contents of the grain, since injured
grains do not show the retardation, the results being obtained only where
tin' sheath is uninjured. Peas, which have no selective, permeable mem-
brane, give the same results whether the sheath is injured or uninjured,
and are unaffected by change in the concentration of the solution.
Aqueous solutions of such substances as Na, NaCl, KG1, KN03, MgS< f4,
etc., were unable to penetrate the sheath, while solutions of iodine, chloro-
form, acetone, and other organic compounds were readily absorbed.
Similar results were obtained with dead wheat-grains so long as the
sheath remained uninjured. The results appear to favour a physico-
chemical explanation, and the permeability is apparently connected with
a certain damp condition of the membrane which water alone can produce,
although in some cases alcohol was found to render non-permeable sub-
stances permeable. Under normal conditions of germination the perme-
ability is observed exclusively in the neighbourhood of the embryo, and
is in a longitudinal direction parallel to the surface of the grain.

Action of Proteolytic Diastases.! — A. Fernbach and M. Schoen
publish a few observations upon the mechanism of the action of proteo-
lytic diastases based upon experiments made with papayotine, pancreatine,
and the proteolytic diastase of Tyrothrix tenuis, upon such albuminoids
as fibrin, casein, " lactocolle " (commercial casein), egg-albumin, and
gelatin. The experiments were made in simple acpieous solutions and in
solutions containing phosphates, e.g. phosphate of potassium, and it is
found that in all cases the activity of the diastase was considerably in-
fluenced and accelerated by the presence of the phosphates. The results
obtained are entirely in agreement with those previously obtained in
connexion with the diastases of malt.

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.
(By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.)

Morphology of Ophioglossum palmatum.J — F. 0. Bower publishes
some notes on the morphology of Ophioglossum (Cheiroglossct) palmatum,
the most outstanding type in a remarkable family. It grows on rotting
trunks. Fresh material having been obtained on the Blue Mountains of

* Flora, cii. (1911) pp. 186-208 (4 figs.).

t Comptes Rendus Acad. Sci. Paris, cliii. (1911) pp. 133-36.

t Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 277-98 (3 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 643

Jamaica the morphology was investigated. . It was found that : — 1. The
tuberous stock is traversed by a stele showing a bulky central pith and
transversely widened leaf -gaps. It is of the same type as Eu-Ophioglos-
sum. 2. The leaf-trace originates as two distinct strands inserted widely
apart, right and left of the leaf-gap. 8. The spikes, which vary in
number, originate like that of Eu-Ophioglossum • the lowest usually
median, the rest usually intramarginal. The spikes branch frequently
and irregularly. 4. The single spike of Eu-Ophioglossum appears to be
the morphological unit ; and the numerous spikes of Ophioglossum pal-
matum&ie due to " pleiogeny " (a new term invented to denote an increase
of organs from a given unit, an increase by branching, interpolation,
etc.), and are not directly referable to normal pinnae any more than are
the irregular lobes of its sterile lamina. 5. Phyletically 0. pendulum,
0. intermedium, and 0. simplex form a derivative series from Eu-Ophio-
glossum. Ophioglossum palmatum represents a parallel, but probably a
distinct line, which has carried amplification of the leaf further. The
divided leaf -trace which they all show confirms the derivative character
of both lines. 6. There is increasing evidence of the alliance of the
Ophioglossacere with the Filicales — namely in the direction of the Cceno-
pteridaa and of the Osmundaceaa. 7. The normal spike of Ophioglossum
on anatomical and other grounds may be held to be ultimately of pinna-
nature ; perhaps in most cases a result of pinna-fusion, according to the
theory of Roeper. But this unit is subject to repetition in 0. palmatum.
8. The vascular supply to the Ophioglossaceous spike being normally
marginal, or from an abaxial pinna-gap, it differs from that to the spore-
producing organ in the Psilotacese and Sphenophyllaceaa, where it conies
off from the adaxial face of the foliar strand, or in the middle region of
it. This difference, if it be found to be constant, may provide a real and
valid anatomical distinction.

Forms of Ophioglossum.* — W. Freiberg publishes notes on some
plurispicate forms of Ophioglossum vulgatum. He gives new names to
three of them and adds some figures. He also cites other examples which
have been previously described. He can put forward no reason for the
production of these monstrosities.

Origin of Medulla in Ophioglossacese.f — F. 0. Bower writes on the
primary xylem and the origin of medullation in the Ophioglossaceie. He
sums up his observations at some length and draws the general conclusion
that the pith in the Ophioglossacese is primarily, though not always
wholly, of intrastelar origin, and that the pith is, in part at least, intra-
xylic in origin.

Medullation in the Pteridophyta.J — F. 0. Bower replies to the
views expressed by Jeffrey on the origin of vascular structures. Jeffrey
says that " the pith must in all cases be regarded as a derivation of the
cortex which has become more or less completely sequestered within the
stele." Bower maintains " that there is no rigid law of medullation " ;

* Allgem. Bot. Zeitschr., xvii. (1911) pp. 81-3 (1 pi.).
+ Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 537 58 (2 pis.).
% Ann. of Bot,, xxv. (1911) pp. 555 -74 (1 pi.).

i.ll SUMMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

thai plants, in accommodating themselves to their surroundings, change
their habit and the proportions and attitude of the parts of the shoot.
Thus the pith in correspondence with this change may arise from more
deeply seated or more superficial sources.

Embedded Antheridia in Pteris.* — M. C. Ferguson describes some
instances of embedded antheridia in cultivated prothallia of Pteris. A
similar abnormality has been observed in Dryopteris and Nephrodium by
('. A. Black.f Ferguson points out a few details in which her examples
differ from those of Black. The embedded antheridia may attain a
size quite six times that of the normal exserted antheridia. Ferguson
describes also some abnormal archegonia containing two egg-cells and
two ventral canal-cells lying in the plane of the longer axis of the arche-
gonium. She also calls attention to an instance which she figures of a
small archegonium in which the central cell has become developed into
what appears to be a sperm-cell.

Xylem Elements of the Pteridophyta.J — N. Bancroft writes on the
xylem elements of the Pteridophyta. She gives the following summary
of her work : — 1. The xylem elements of Pteridophyta are typically
pointed tracheides, the pits on both end and side walls being closed by a
membrane formed by the persistent middle lamella. 2. The middle
lamella is believed to be exposed in the pit areas by the disintegration
of the rest of the primary wall. 3. The varying amounts of disintegra-
tion give rise to the prevalence of the "split" or "non-split" appearance
between the secondary lignified layers, as seen in transverse section.
4. The width of the split depends largely upon the degree of separation
of the secondary layers in the areas surrounding the pit openings.

Development of Stele in Dipteris.§ — H. de Bruyn describes the onto-
genetic development of the stele in two species of Dipteris. Her summary
of her work is too long and detailed for quotation. In brief, she finds
that : — 1. The evolution of the stele is similar in Dipteris conjugata and
D. Lobbiana. 2. The central tissue in middle of xylem at first consists
of parenchyma ; later sieve-tubes appear and a typical Lindsaya stage is
reached. 3. Cells with dark contents appear here and there irregularly
in the central tissue. They probably represent the beginning of an
internal endodermis, but make no connexion with the external endo-
dermis till after the departure of several leaf -traces. 4. Higher up the
dark cell-strand is regularly connected with the outer endodermis at the
leaf-gaps. Eventually pith-cells appear in the centre of the group of
dark cells, and a normal solenostele is formed. 5. The thickening of the
xylem on the edges of the leaf-gap occurs in quite young as well as
mature plants. 6. A feature in the young plants is the irregularity of
development in several of the stelar "tissues. 7. The structure of the
leaf-traces differs in detail in the two species and indeed in different
petioles of the same species.

* Bot. Gaz.. li. (1911) pp. 443-8 (2 pis.).

t Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxvi. (1909) p. 557.

X Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 745-59 (1 pi. and figs.).

§ Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 761-72 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 645

Anatomy of the Osmundacese.* — D. T. Gwynne-Yaughan publishes
some remarks on the anatomy of the Osmundacea?. His summary is as
follows. 1. The early appearance of axillary pockets of xylem-sheath
parenchyma in the xylem of the sporeling stele of Osmunda is confirmed.

2. The intrastelar origin of the pith in the Osinundacere is adhered to.

3. The medullary rays are due to the breaking through of the xyleni-
ring by the xylem-sheath pockets, and are in consequence also intrastelar
in origin. 4. The mesarchy found in the basal region of the leaf-trace
in Thamnopteris and Zalesskya is still occasionally retained in the early
leaves of Osmunda regalis.^

Prothallia of Equisetum. f — (i. Perrin discusses the prothallia of
Equisetum. In the Polypodiaceas the prothallia are much more frequently
unisexual and apogamous than is generally indicated. In Equisetum, on
the other hand, unisexual prothallia are not so general as is commonly
supposed ; hermaphroditism is frequent enough. The author experi-
mented with E. silvaticum, E. arvense, E.palustre. The spores do not
necessarily lose their germinative faculty within ten days ; if kept in a
slightly moist atmosphere they are still good after a month. But in dry
air they perish quickly. This is due to the thinness of their cell-wall.
If they can be kept without unrolling their elaters they retain their
power of germination for over a fortnight, even in dry air. After
germination the prothallia are mostly unisexual ; when male they are
digitate, with the antheridia on the ends of their branches. When they
are female they are more compact and cordate cushion-like, with the
archegonia buried. Frequently these female prothallia show fully
developed antheridia on their periphery — rarely in E. arvense, frequently
in E. sylvaticum and E palustre. There is much in common between
the spores and prothallia of Equisetum and the Polypodiacese ; in both
when the prothalba are unisexual, they are very digitate ; and when
they are female, or hermaphrodite, they are cordiform. In both cases
adventive prothallia can be obtained. External factors have a strong
influence over the sex in the two categories.

Life-history of Salvinia natans.J — K. Yasui gives an account of
the life-history of Salvinia nutans, with the following conclusions :
1. The primary tapetum-cells of both sporangia are formed by division
of the archesporial cell, and they again divide into one layer of many
cells. 2. The spore-mother-cells are eight in the macrosporangium and
sixteen in microsporangium. 3. The number of chromosomes of the
spore-mother-cell is sixteen and the reduced number in the spore is
eight. 4. During the reduction-division the tapetum-cells begin to
degenerate and nourish the spores. 5. Sixty-four mature spores are
formed in a microsporangium, but in a macrosporangium only one spore
becomes mature. 6. The male prothallium consists of a large pro-
thallium-cell, a small root-cell, two sterile cells, and two antheridia,
which consists of a wall-cell and a central cell. The central cell divides
twice, and in each of the four cells a spermatozoid is formed. 7. The

* Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 525-36 (1 pi. and figs.).

t Comptes Rendus Acad. Sci. Paris, cliii. (1911) pp. 197-99..

t Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 469-83 (3 pis,).

646 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Btatemenl of Campbell, who denies the presence of ;i sterile cell between
the two antheridia and the root-cell, was not confirmed, in agreement
with the investigation of Belajeff. BelajcfT was not clear aboui the
time of the appearance of the root-cell. It has been determined by the
present study that the root-cell is formed as a result of the second
division of the germinating microspore. 8. The spermatozoid is a
spirally coiled body having numerous cilia at the anterior end, aud a
large vesicle at the posterior end. 9. A blepharoplast, which first
appears in the cytoplasm, and later elongates towards the nucleus, was
observed in each sperm-cell. 10. Three to fiye archegonia are usually
formed in each female prothallium, and each archegonium consists of
one egg-cell, a ventral canal-cell, a neck canal-cell with two nuclei, and
the neck-cells. 11. Only one spermatozoid enters into the egg-cell. After
the penetration of the spermatozoid into the egg-nucleus there appears
in the cavity of the latter a nucleolus-like body, derived very likely from
the spermatozoid, and somewhat smaller than the nucleolus. 12. The
four quadrants are clearly distinguishable in the young embryo. The
development of the root-quadrant ceases at an early stage, and later its
tissue cannot be distinguished from that of the foot.

Spore-distribution in Selaginella.* — F. W. Neger discusses the
question of spore-distribution in Selaginella helvetica and S. spinulosa, its
meaning, mechanism, etc. He confirms all that Ooebel had discovered
as to the macrospores being liberated spontaneously by the dehiscence of
the sporangial wall, and as to their dissemination preceding that of the
microspores ; also as to the more rapid germination of the microspores.
Neger finds, however, that in some cases the microsporangia of the apex
of the spike open first, then follow the macrosporangia below, and finally
the microsporangia at the base. Thus there are always microspores
ready to germinate when the macrospores are ready for them ; and cross-
fertilization is favoured. He notices in the dorsiventral fertile spikes
of S. helvetica that the macrosporangia are principally on the ventral
side and the microsporangia on the dorsal. He attributes this to the
better nutrition of the ventral side.

Lyginodendron (Crossotheca) in Irish Coal Measures.f — T. John-
son gives a resume of the literature on Lyginodendron. oldhamium,
Rachiopteris aspera, Sphenopteris Hdninghansi, and Kaloxglon Hookeri, all
vegetative parts of one fossil type, the reproductive organs of which are
represented by Crossotheca Hdninghausi, Lagenostoma Lomaxi, and
Calymmatotheca. Johnson found specimens in the Dublin Museum
which add confirmatory evidence, and he describes and figures them.
His conclusions are as follows : 1. The Pteridosperineas flourished in
Ireland. 2. The Museum specimens confirm the view that Sphenopteris
Hdninghausi is really the foliage of the Pteridosperm Lyginodendron old-
hamium Will. {Crossotheca Honinghausi Kidst.). 3. Calymmatotheca
Stangeri Stur. occurs in continuity with Sphenopteris Honinghausi, and
is simply the de-seminated fertile frond of this type. 4. In the Grlen-
goole Coal Measures, Co. Tipperary, a seed impression attached to the

* Flora, ciii. (1911) pp. 74-7 (1 fig.).

+ Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc, xiii. (1911) pp. 1-11 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 647

parent plant and surrounded by radiating capillar lobes has been found.
5. This seed has the characters of a Lagmostoma seed, is 6 by 2 mm.,
radiospermic, elliptic, and apparently ridged. 6. The Sphmopteris
spinosa condition shows that the cupular lobes are modified foliar seg-
ments, as is apparently the o villiferous body. 7. The male (Grossotheca)
and female {Galymmatotheca) conditions are foliar in nature, and present
many features in common.

American Lepidostrobus.* — J. M. Coulter and W. J. G. Land
describe and figure a Lepidostrobus from Coal Measures in Iowa, the first
example yet found in America. The specimen is not a complete cone,
but a fragment from near the upper end. It had evidently soaked in
water before becoming fossilized ; rootlets had penetrated between the
sporophylls, and had become attacked by a fungus. The sporangia are
empty, but loose spores abound. The authors give a detailed account of
the structure of the specimen.

Some Mesozoic Ferns and their Leaf-scars.j — -F. Pelourde pub-
lishes some remarks upon the structure of certain mesozoic ferns. From
a comparison of living and extinct forms he arrives at conclusions which
he summarizes as follows. In the families of the Osmundaceaa and
Dipteridinere, which were both very important during the secondary
epoch, the roots and petioles show in their anatomy a certain number of
characters which are concordant and more or less aberrant. The struc-
ture of the conducting tissue of the fronds is particularly interesting in
Dipteris conjugata. As shown in the body of the paper, this tissue ex-
hibits in a transverse section at the base of the petioles and in a section
made a little way above, two very different aspects. In fossil types of a
similar kind the vessels of the leaf-scars could consequently exhibit
variations of form according to the level at which the fronds may have
been detached from the stem. And a proper appreciation of this varia-
tion might perhaps serve to prevent erroneous confusions and illusory
distinctions.

Spores of Spencerites.J — B. Kubart is investigating the fossil flora
of the Ostrau-Karwin Coal Measures, and gives a description of the
spores of Spencerites membranaceus, a new species of a Lepidophyte
genus. He obtained 200 spores from the Lower Carboniferous. In
England the genus was found in the Upper Carboniferous.

Archgeopteris.§ — T. Johnson discusses the question " Is Archseopteris

a Pteridosperm ? " He sums up the characteristics of the plant as
follows: 1. The " fern-like " bipinnate type of frond occurs commonly
in Pteridosperms and in ferns. 2. The same may be said of dichotomy
of fronds and pinnae. 3. And also of aphlebioid pinnules. 4. The
stipules are like those of Angiopteris, but become detached with the
frond ; in the Marattiaceae on the other hand the stipules remain

* Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 449-53 (2 pis. and figs.).
t Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.) ser. 9, xiv. (1911) pp. 80-95 (figs.).

% Denkschr. Math. Nat. Kl. Kaiserl. Akad. Wien, lxxxv. (1909) pp. 83-99 (1 pi.
and figs.).

§ Sci Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc, xiii. (1911) pp. 114-36 (2 pis.).

648 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

attached bo the leaf-base on the parent plant. Stipules are known in the
Cycadeae. 5. The dichotomy of the veins and the absence of a midrib
in the pinnules indicate a primitive type. The vegetative organs thus
do nor afford much help. G. The fertile frond, partly vegetative, partly
reproductive, is comparable to that of Osmundacese, Ophioglossacere, and
Aneimia. Nothing like Archseopteris is at present known in the Pterido-
sperms. 7. The lobed sporophyllule of Archseopteris suggests affinity
rather with Sphenophyllum and Ophioglossum than with a Pteridosperm.
The sporangium of the great majority of living Pteridophyta is evascular.
In the Ophioglossacese and in the extinct Botryopterideas (e.g.Zggopteris)
the sporangium is vascular. In this respect Archseopteris is comparable
with Ophioglossacere. The microsporangia of a Pteridosperm are also
in a sense vascular. 8. The sporangium of Archseopteris is apparently
divided by transverse septa into a series of superposed loculi comparable
to one half of a small " sporangiferous spike " of an Ophioglossum. No
such shape of microsporangium is known in any Pteridosperm : but in
living Angiosperms many genera possess pollen-sacs made multilocular
by horizontal partitions. 9. Archseopteris is known from several localities
in Europe, Asia, North America, and the Arctic regions. In no locality
have seed-like bodies been found connected directly or indirectly with
the plant. These localities have not, however, been exhaustively searched
for Archseopteris, nor since the Pteridospermea? were founded. 10.
Archseopteris occurs in the upper Devonian and Culm rocks ; the Pterido-
sperms are known well-developed forms from the Culm or Lower Car-
boniferous. The ferns are represented in the Carboniferous by the
Botryopterideae. The author is inclined to regard Archseopteris as an
ancestral form of the Ophioglossaceaj, until further evidence is forth-
coming.

The same author* gives an account of Archseopteris Tschermaki and
other species of the genus found in Ireland.

Distribution of Equisetum maximum. f — A. Verhulst gives an
account of the distribution of Equisetum maximum on slopes along the
upper margin of the Marl (Marne de Grancourt) just where it is covered
by a thin layer of Jurassic Limestone (Calcaire de Longwy), along the
Franco-Belgian frontier. It is along this zone that the plant finds
exactly that underground store of moisture which it requires ; and there
ii grows in abundance, sometimes associated with Sedum purpureum and
Sambucus ebulus. And it is useless to search for it in other situations.

Asplenium Guichardii.j — R. de Litardiere gives a description of a
new hybrid, Asplenium Guichardii, the parents of which are A. foresiacum
and A. trichomanis, the former being the preponderant element. It is
found in the department of Herault, where also grows A. Pagesii, a
hybrid of the same parents but with a preponderance of A. trichomanis.
This latter hybrid was described by Litardiere last year. He adds some
critical notes on the variability of A. foresiacum.

* Sci. I'roc. Roy. Dublin Soc, xiii. (1911) pp. 137-41 (2 pis.).
+ Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg., xlvii. (1911) pp. 285-90 (map).
X Bull. Gcogr. Bot., xxi. (1911) pp. 75-7.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 649

Woodwardia radicans in Italy.*— R. Pampanini gives an account of
the distribution of Woodirardia radicans and some other ferns in Italy.
It is recorded that P. A. Micheli found this species at Ferrara in 17K>.
That is an error. Micheli found it at Ferriera, in the Valle di Amain" ;
he also found it at Ischia, and at Casamicciola in the Vallone dei Bagni.
It was refound at the first station in 18(58 by Nevile Reid and Lacaita,
at the second iu 1831 by Gussone. Micheli has the credit of being the
first to find also Pteris hmgifolia in Italy, namely with Woodwardi
radicalism the Valle di Amalfi. Other records by Micheli, namely
Pteris cretica near Sorrento, Scolopendrium Hemionitis in the Tuscan
Archipelago, etc., have been confirmed. But his Asplmium fontanum
near Sorrento is doubtful, and may be one of three other ferns. His
A. obovatvm in the island of G-orgona is correct.

Ferns of Schleswig-Holstein.f — P. Junge publishes a detailed
account of the Pteridophytes of Schleswig-Holstein, of which there are
but 40 species, whereas there are 500 hybrids and monstrosities. He
also discusses the migrant groups, distribution groups, etc.

Pteridophytes of Libya. J — E. Durand and G. Barratte give a list of
five ferns and an Equisetum recorded for Tripoli and Cyrenaica, with the
distribution and synonymy of the species.

North American Pteridophytes. — E. J. Hill § publishes some notes
on Lycopodium porophilum and its habitats in the dells of Wisconsin.
He shows that it is undoubtedly distinct from L. lucidulum.

W. N. Clute |] gives a figure and description of Asplenium Andrewsii
Xels., a Colorado fern, which may perhaps prove to be conspecific with
A. Bradleyi.

A. B. Klugh 1T publishes notes on the Pteridophyta of southern New
Brunswick, where the special feature is the abundance of Lycopodium.
He enumerates eighteen ferns and fourteen fern-allies.

W. N. Clute** describes and figures Dicksonia pilosiuscula f . Poyseri,
a beautiful fern found in Maine in 1907 by H. W. Merrill.

A. Prescottft writes about the oak and beech ferns and their habits.

W. N. Clute Xt discusses the perplexing forms of Botryc/iium, and
especially the question of B. simplex, the rarity of which has caused
much misunderstanding. Some authors have mistaken it for young-
plants of B. matricarisefolium. He cites some remarks by H. TVoynar,
and figures some Tyrolese forms of B. simplex.

F. C. Greene §§ publishes notes on the ferns of north-western Missouri,
a disappointing district which hitherto has yielded but eight species.

* Nov. Giorn. Bot. ItaL, xviii. (1911) pp. 225-42.

t Jahrb. Hamburg. Wiss. Anstalt, xxxii. (1910) pp. 47-245 (21 figs.).

% Florse Libycse Prodromus. Geneve: Romet, 1910, pp. 281-2.

§ Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 1-3.

Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 3-4 (1 pi.).

f Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 4-7.
** Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 7-8 (fig.).
tt Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 9-11.
%\ Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 11-14 (fig.).
§§ Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 14-15.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

W. X. Clute* has collected under the title Pteridographia a variety
of Dotes on New York ferns, Classification-systems for Nephrodium, The
Virtues of Polypody, Bybrid ferns, NephroXepu Dreyerii, N. Marshalli.

S. F. Blakef publishes notes on some Pteridophytes from eastern
.Massachusetts. Winter occurrences of Woodsia obtusa were noted in
March 1909 ; they are rare in the region. Many winter specimens of
Dicksonia punctilobula were also found in sheltered situations. The
fresh green appearance of small fronds suggested that growth had
occurred on favourable days during winter. It is probable that Botry-
chium obliquum var. oneidmse is fairly well distributed in eastern
Massachusetts, but is often mistaken for B. ternatum var. intermedin m,
with which it seems to intergrade. Lycopodium clavatum var. mega-
stachyon, a recently described variety, occurs in east as well as in west
Massachusetts and in New Hampshire.

W. H. Blanchard J gives a description of Lycopodium ffabelliforme, a
new species raised from varietal rank ; and he adduces a number of
reasons as to why it is a good species. It can no longer be regarded as
a variety of L. complanatum, being more distinct from that species than
is L. tristachyum. It differs in habit, method of growth, and other
characters. The specimens described came from Caribou, Maine.

Ferns of the Falkland Islands. § — 0. H. Wright, in giving an
account of the flora of the Falkland Islands, includes a list of thirteen
ferns gathered by Yallentin and others.

Chinese Ferns. || — C. G. Matthew gives an alphabetical enumeration
of Chinese ferns, containing nearly 1100 entries with citations, distribu-
tion, and, where necessary, some synonyms. The system of nomenclature
is that of Dieis and of Christensen.

E. Panipanini,^" in a supplementary enumeration of the vascular
plants collected by the Rev. P. C. Silvestre in Hu-peh during the years
1904-7, gives a list of forty-two Pteridophytes, with their localities,
altitudes, etc.

Ferns of Corea and Quelpaert.** — C. Christensen gives a list of
thirty-eight ferns collected in Quelpaert Island by P. Taquet in 1910,
and adds a few descriptions and critical notes. In a supplement eight
ferns new to Corea are recorded.

„ ^ Ferns of Annam.ft — H. Christ describes Drymoglossum cordatum, a
new fern collected in Annam by Cadiere, and preserved in the Paris
Museum.

* Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 15-19.

t Rhodora, xiii. (1911) pp. 101-3.

X Rhodora, xiii. (1911) pp. 168-71.

§ Journ. Linn. Soc, xxxix. (1911) pp. 313-39.

|| Journ. Linn. Soc, xxxix. (1911) pp. 339-93.

f Nuov. Giorn. Bot. Ital., xviii. (1911) pp. 161-5.

** Bull. Geogr. Bot., xxi. (1911) pp. 69-72.

tt Notulse Systematic®. Paris : i. (1911) pp. 375-6.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 651

Bryophyta.

(By A. Gepp.)

Branch-formation in Mosses.* — K. von Schoenau has studied the
ramification of mosses. He finds that: 1. The resting branch-rndiments
can produce shoots which are biologically equivalent to the main axis ;
they give rise to innovations. 2. Their development is suppressed until
the main axis is prevented from further growth. 3. In regeneration
development takes place preferably in the apical rudiments, which there-
fore replace the lost apex and produce a false dichotomy. Otherwise
the rudiments which develop are those in the best nourished condition.

4. The most potent factor in the development of lateral axes is light.

5. Another necessity is damp. G. The form is mostly determined by
external influences. 7. The direction of growth is mainly determined
by light and damp. Geotropism plays a very small part. 8. Dorsi-
ventrality is caused by light, but to some degree is inherited. 9. The
position of the lateral axis in relation to the main axis is due to two
causes : (a) the position of the rudiment in the basal portion of the
leaf-forming segment ; (b) the torsion, either arising during normal
growth of the shoot (Fontinalis), or originating in the growing point
(Mnium, Sphagnum). 10. There is no sheath, such as Servit has described,
at base of the lateral branches. The position of the primary leaves at
the base of the branch is due to the mode of growth of the side bud.
11. There is no leaf -trace bundle, such as described for all mosses by
Bastit, passing from the central cylinder into the branch, except in the
branched Polytrichaceffi.

Sexuality among the Mosses.y — Em. Marchal gives a resume of
two sets of new facts ascertained by his father (El. Marchal) and him-
self since 1904 during a course of research in the sexuality of the
mosses. 1. First, as to the sexualization of the spores. In a dioicous
moss, such as Bryum csesjnticium, the spores are, as they have previously
shown, half of them male, half of them female — two being male and
two female in each tetrad. Each male spore, for instance, produces a
protonema which bears only male plants ; and each female spore, female
plants only. This is a fact which systematists have not yet grasped.
In the dioicous moss the spores and gametophytes are polarized sexually,
and only the sporophyte is bisexual. In the monoicous moss, for
example Amblystegium serpens, the sexual polarization appears only
during the formation of antheridia and archegonia. Incidentally the
author notes that Funaria hygrometrica is not dioicous, despite assertions
to the contrary. 2. The second question raised is that of the possible
intervention of apospory. In the case of the dioicous Bryum csespiticium
it is possible to obtain by very careful cultivation from the cell-walls of
the unripe capsule a protonema which produces synoicous gametophyte
plants. They are, however, sterile — incapable of fertilization. On the
other hand, the monoicous Amblystegium serpens readily yields re-
generations from its capsule, and the aposporic protonema thus obtained
is vigorous and produces normal fertile plants, from which arise

* Hedwigia, li. (1911) pp. 1-56 (29 figs.).

t Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg., xlvii. (1911) pp. 277-85.

• 52 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

numerous sporophytes. These sporophytes arc noteworthy in that they
are the product of the union of two diploidic elements. They are io
fad tetraploidic plants. The aumber of chromosomes in the nuclei of
the archesporial tissue is four times that of the sexif erous phase in the
Qonnal plant. And in the resulting spores this number is reduced
to 'In. Further, by regeneration the tetraploid capsules yield a proto-
iiema which produces weak flowering shoots, hitherto incapable of
fertilization, so far as experimentation has gone. Thus there is an
essential difference between dioicous and monoicous mosses. The
diploidic races obtained from the former have abnormal flowers, which
are bisexual but sterile, and can only be reproduced vegetatively. On
the other hand, the diploidic races obtained from monoicous mosses
have normal sexuality and can be reproduced by sporogenesis. The
reproduction of aposporic forms is of great interest to systematic
bryologists. For if, as the result of wounds, such forms are frequent in
nature, it may become possible to explain the polygamy found in some
species of Bryum, and sterility in some dioicous species. The diploidic
state reveals itself in a notable increase in the size of the cells, the
nuclei, and the reproductive organs.

Spermatogenesis in certain Hepaticae.* — W. L. Woodburn gives
the results of his investigations of spermatogenesis in certain hepatics.
He finds no evidence of the occurrence of centrosomes in the spermo-
genous tissue of Porella and Asterella, or of Marchantia and Fegatella.
In his preparations he could find nothing such as Van Hook observed
in the dividing vegetative cells of Marchantia, Mottier in Dktyota,
Farmer in the germinating spores of Fegatella and Pellia, and Farmer
and Reeves in Pellia. Further, there is no evidence that the centro-
some persists in the resulting sperm-cell. The occurrence of such a
body sometimes at the pole of the spindle does not necessarily imply
more than a probable concentration of cytoplasmic or kinoplasmic
materials. The development of the blepharoplast in all these plants
proceeds from a dense granular mass of cytoplasm located in the most
distant angle of the sperm-cell. The blepharoplast becomes a cord,
growing in close contact with the plasma membrane and entirely past
the nucleus. The latter then draws out along the posterior portion of
the blepharoplast and may extend beyond it, while from near the
forward and slightly enlarged end two cilia develop. Ikeno's " cyto-
plasmatischer Fortsatz" is probably merely a part of the blepharoplast.
No body corresponding in size and appearance to the " Nebenkorper "
of Ikeno was found. Whereas some authors regard the mature sperm
as representing three metamorphosed elements of the cell (nucleus,
cytoplasm, and blepharoplast or centrosome), the author prefers to hold
the view that the blepharoplast in Porella, Marchantia, and Fegatella,
where no centrosome exists, arises de novo in the cell in which it is to
function as the cilia-bearer. This is in keeping with the views of
Escoyer and Mottier. The mature sperm represents in its head the
nucleus, in its blepharoplast and cilia the specialized parts of the
cytoplasm, the remainder of the latter being found in the cytoplasmic
vesicle.

* Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 299-313 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 653

Spermatogenesis in the Bryophyta.*— M. Wilson gives an account
of spermatogenesis in the Bryophyta, with the following conclusions.
1. In Minium /ionium and Atrichum u ml u latum the divisions of the
spermatogenic cells are normal, and no centrosomes are present. The
final division is not of the diagonal type which is found in several of
the hepaticaj. No reduction in the number of the chromosomes takes
place at the final mitosis. 2. In Pellia epiphylla centrospheres and
probably centrosomes are present during the later divisions in the
antheridium. The blepharoplast is probably derived directly from the
centrosome. 3. In the spermatid of Milium hornum a number of
bodies become separated from the nucleolus. These pass into the
cytoplasm and there give rise to a number of rod-like structures, which
by coalescence finally form a hollow spherical body, for which the name
" limosphere " is suggested. The nucleolus then divides into two
masses, which both pass into the cytoplasm ; one of these functions as
the blepharoplast, while the other gives rise to the accessory body.

4. In the spermatid of Atrichum undulatum three bodies are separated
from the nucleolus and pass into the cytoplasm. The body first pro-
duced functions as the blepharoplast. The limosphere arises from one of
the remaining bodies, while the other gives rise to the accessory body.

5. In Pellia epiphylla a limosphere and accessory body are present in
the cytoplasm of the spermatid. Their origin was not determined.

6. In all of the three plants under consideration the blepharoplast
passes to the periphery of the spermatid. A thread-like structure is
produced in connexion with the blepharoplast, which passes along the
inner contour of the cell membrane. The nucleus passes to the
periphery and lies in contact with the thread. Elongation takes place
in the nucleus, and the latter, together with the thread, produces the
entire body of the spermatozoid. The limosphere and accessory body
persist in the almost mature spermatozoid, and in all probability are
found ultimately in the vesicle.

Mosses attacked by Cladosporium.— I. Gyorffyf gives an account
of some Hungarian specimens of Buxbaumia viridis which were attacked
by a fungus, identified as Cladosporium herbarum by L. Hollos. The
fungus densely permeates the interior of the capsule and forms stellate
spots on the outside. The measurements do not appear to correspond
with those of C. epibryum Cooke and Massee.

E. Gr. Britton,! m reference to the above, gives a list of the eight
mosses upon which Cooke and Massee found C. epibryum, all American
species sent by her to those authors for examination.

Nomenclature of Sphagnacea3.§— C. Warnstorf publishes a detailed
reply to the suggestions advanced by J. Roll in favour of alterations of
and additions to the Vienna code as regards the nomenclature of Sphag-
naceae. Warnstorf, holding orthodox views, protests energetically
against the views expressed by Roll as to the limitation of species and
the grouping of forms.

* Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 415-57 (2 pis.).

t Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 41-3 (1 pi.).

t Mycologia, iii. (1911) p. 206.

§ Verh. Bot. Ver. Prov. Brandenburg, Hi. (1910) pp. 22-38.

Oct. 18th, 1911 2 D

654 SUMMARY OF < URBBNT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Philonotis revised by Dismier.* — E. Gt. Britton makes some critical
remarks on ('. Dismier'sf revision of the American species of Philonotis,
and riles sonic eleven American species which lie lias not included in his
work. <>ut of seventy-four species recorded for America, Dismier has
reduced forty to synonyms. Authors in the past have been too free in
the creation of species.

E. B. Chamberlain % gives a translated resume of Dismier 's revision,
giving the key to the twenty-five species in full, and a synoptic account
of the twelve North American species, with the addition of synonyms
and descriptive notes.

Hyophilopsis, a New Indian Moss-genus.§ — H. X. Dixon gives an
account of some thirty Indian mosses from the districts of Poona,
Mysore, the eastern Himalayas, and Assam. Among them is Hyo-
philapsis, a new genus of Pottiaceae, with fruiting characters very near
to those of Hyopliila, but with the leaf-areolation of a Pottia. The leaf-
cells, moreover, are seriately papillate. It contains one new species.
Critical notes are appended to several of the plants recorded ; and in all.
five new species are described and figured.

Wollnya, a Genus of Bryacea3.|| — T. Herzog gives an account of
Wollnya, a recently published genus of mosses related to Leptobryum.
He enlarges the genus by including in it Bryum Wilsoni Mitt., an
Andine species. The type of the genus is W. stellata Herz. The author
figures both species, and now fixes definitely the position of Wollnya
among the Bryese. It differs from Leptobryum principally in leaf-
structure.

Swartzia inclinata in Lancashire, f — J. A. Wheldon notes the
similarity of the Lancashire sand-dunes to those of Tent's Muir and
Barrie on the east coast of Scotland, and states that chance alone is
insufficient to account for the presence, in areas so widely separated, of
such rarities as Bryum Marrattii, B. calophyllum, B. Warneum, B. neo-
damense, Catoscopium nigritum, Hypnum Wilsoni, H. lycopodioides. To
these may now be added Sivartzia inclinata, recently found well estab-
lished near Freshfield. It had previously been recorded for an inland
situation in south Lancashire, and caused some speculation as to its
origin.

Notes on Grimmia.** — P. Culmann publishes notes on some species
of Grimmia. He gives a description and figure of 67. teryestinoides, a
novelty which, if not a sub-species of G. teryestina, is a remarkable
variety, found in the Swiss Jura. The allied species 67. poecilostoma
Cardot, must, it is found, assume the prior name of 67. Cardoti Heribaud.
Culmann agrees with Breidler and Hagen that G. sessitana and 67. sub-
sulcata belong to one and the same species, but does not accept Hagen's

* Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 43-4.

t Bull. Soc. Bot. France, x. (1910), Mem. 17, pp. 17-37.

X Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 44-52.

§ Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 137-50 (1 pi.).

! Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxviii. 2te Abt. (1911) pp. 268-71 (1 pi.).

II Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 274-5.

*• Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 75-8 (fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC (".."if)

view that G. alpestris belongs to the same species. He records with
interest the occurrence of G. atrata in the Western Alps— namely, in
the Graian Alps, thus linking up the stations of the Eastern Alps with
those of the Pyrenees.

Tomenthypnum, a new genus.* — L. Loeske creates a new genus
for the reception of Camptothecium nitens Schimp., a species which has
never been happily placed. He gives its history, and compares it with
G. lutescens and Homalothecium Philippeanum. It is partly on ecological
grounds that he establishes the new genus Tomenthypnum.

Drepanocladus.f — J. Zodda gives a description of a new variety of
Drepanocladus Kneijfii from Sardinia. It is called var. sardous, and
differs from var. laxus Schimp. in having a much more robust habit,
larger leaves, etc. It may prove indeed, when known in the fertile state,
to be a new species.

Goebeliella, a new genus. J — F. Stephani gives a description and
figures of Goebeliella, a new genus of hepaticas, including two species
from New Zealand and New Caledonia respectively. It has the vegeta-
tive habit of Frullania, save that the lobulus of the leaf is bisected to
base into two equal divergent long narrow hooked obtuse segments, and
is accompanied by no stylus. The perianth also is peculiar, being
cylindric triplicate with a squarely truncate entire mouth. G. cornigera,
gathered in New Zealand fifty years ago, was referred to Frullania by
Mitten. Fertile material is described now for the first time.

New Variety of Lophozia Schultzii.§-- W. H. Burrell gives an
account of Lophozia S'chultzii var. laxa, a new variety of hepatic found
by him at Flordon, Norfolk, in July 1900. It belongs to K. Midler's
subgenus Leiocolea, and was at first assumed to be Lophozia Miilleri
Dum. But V. Schiffner found it to be paroicous, placed it in L. Scliultzii,
and suggested the varietal name laxa. Kaalaas also examined it, and
came to much the same conclusion. Burrell describes the plant and
carefully contrasts it with the type, and adds some ecological and distri-
butional notes.

Dichiton calyculatum in Croatia. || — A. von Degen records the
discovery of Dichiton calyculatum in Croatia. Originally gathered in
Africa half a century ago, it has in recent years been detected in the
south of France, then in the Austrian coast-lands, and in Elba and
Sicily. It has now been found in tufts of Plagiochila asplenioides at an
altitude of about 2000 ft. on the Sinjal Mountain in Croatia. The plant
is extremely minute, and for this reason has probably eluded observation.

Fossombronia echinata.f — S. M. Macvicar publishes a description
of a new species of Fossombronia found in Algeria, Dalmatia, and Italy,

* Deutsch. Bot. Monatschr., xxii. (1911) pp. 82-3.
t Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 39-90.
X Hedwigia, li. (1911) pp. 61-4 (figs. I.
§ Journ.of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 217-19.
| Magyar Bot. Lapok, x. (1911) up 244-5.
1 Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 73-5 (1 pi.).

■2 V 2

056 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and distinguished from /•'. csespiiiformis by having smaller spores covered
by shorter, more abundant, acute papillae. Another species, /•'. Mittenii,
is closely allied, but lias larger spores covered by broader, more com-
pressed, truncate papillae. The author holds that F. verrucosa Lindb.
i> nut a true species, but an undeveloped state of F. csespitiformis, in
company with which it always occurs.

Critical European Mosses.* — E. Bauer publishes some importanl
criticisms of Seligeria brevifolia, Anoectangium Hornschuchianwn, Di-
cranum fuscescens, birrawxiontium subfalcatum, Ditrichum julifiliforme,
recently issued in exsiccati.

British Muscinese. — W. H. Burrellt and W. G. Clark publish some
notes on the moss-flora and rarer flowering plants of West Norfolk.
Fourteen species of Sphagnum were found ; the genus is, however, but
scantily distributed. Some interesting mosses are noted, and the rare
hepatic Sphserocarpus terrestris has been found in more than fifty parishes.
MorcTcia also is a Norfolk hepatic. It would seem that not Sphagnum
but Hypnum stdlatum and H. ncorpioides afford the association upon
which Malaxis is epiphytic ; and the same may apply to Liparis.

R. Jackett % gives a list of 88 hepatics and 145 mosses gathered by
him on the banks of the Rheidol, the Mynach, and the Turn in August
1907. He states that 10 hepatics and 17 mosses are new records for
the county of Cardigan.

E. A. Richards § publishes some short notes upon mosses collected by
him in South Aberdeen during July 1910. The mosses are nineteen in
number and were found on hills and in glens near Ballater and Braemar ;
they are additions to the county flora. Among them is Philonotis tomen-
tella, recently split off from P.fontana by Loeske.

Moss-flora of Haute-Saone.|| — A. Coppey publishes a further instal-
ment of his phytogeographic studies on the mosses of the Haute-Saone,
and gives records of fifty-six species, mostly Grimmiea? and Orthotrichea?.

Belgian Bryophytes.^T — A. Cornet gives a list of habitats of rare
bryophytes in Belgium, comprising thirty-six mosses and nineteen hepa-
tics, interspersed with some critical notes.

Moss-flora of Rhine-land.** — H. Brockhausen gives a sketch of the
moss-flora of Rhine-land, and records as new to the district Ditrichum
juliiforme. The limits of Eurhynchium atrovirens (= Swartzii) and
E. hians in relation to E.praelonyum have still to be worked out critically.

Mosses of the Erzgebirge.ff — J. Roll publishes a second contribution
to the moss-flora of the Erzgebirge, mainly devoted to the Sphagnaceaj.
In five short lists he indicates the moss-floras characteristic of certain

* Deutsch. Bot. Monatschr., xxii. (1911) pp. 97-102.

t Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 267-70.

\ Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 230-2.

§ Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 232-3.

I Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 90-3.

f Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg., xlvii. (1911) pp. 291-6.

** 38 Jahresber. Westfal. Prov.-Verein. Miinster (1910; pp. 93-101.

tf Hedwigia, ii. (1911) pp. 65-112.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 657

districts, followed by a general synopsis of the mosses other than Sphag-
num. He sets forth his views on the nomenclature of the Sphagnacese
and on the proper classification of the innumerable forms and interme-
diates. He follows Schliephacke in dividing the species into six groups ;
and under these groups he details the species, varieties and forms, inter-
spersed with notes.

Moss-flora of Bernina.* — T. Herzog contributes a chapter on moss-
formations to E. Rubel's monograph on the plant-geography of the
Bernina Alps. He discusses the different types of habitat and the mosses
found thereon. One remarkable fact is the entire absence of mosses on
the tree-trunks, which, however, are covered with lichens. He describes
some half a dozen new varieties or forms and a new species.

Mosses of Tirol. — C. Trautmann publishes a contribution to the
moss-flora of Tirol, comprising a list of fifty six species gathered chiefly
in the region of the Ortler during the month of July in 1909 and 1910.
The most interesting species is Orthotrichum perforatum, of which he
found two forms markedly different in the degree of development of the
peristome.

Hungarian Mosses.} — I. Gyorffy gives an enumeration of the Sphag-
naceae gathered by him in the Hohen-Tatra in 1910 and determined by
0. Warnstorf . The list includes eleven species and twenty-eight varieties
and forms, with their stations, altitudes, etc. 8. imbricatum is a new
record for Hungary.

The same author § publishes notes on the localities where fruiting
specimens of Plagiobryum demissum and Amphidium lapponicum have
been found on the Hohen-Tatra.

Moss-flora of Bulgaria. || — J. Podpera, in giving an account of the
cryptogamic flora of the Bulgarian Alps, discusses the distribution and
ecology of the Bryophytes, and gives an enumeration of all the species
found. Some G000 specimens were examined and yielded 258 species of
mosses and thirty-eight of hepatics, and numerous, varieties and forms,
interspersed with critical notes. The interest of this moss-flora is that it
forms a link between the alpine floras of Europe and Asia.

Crimean Mosses. — A. A. SapehinU" gives a resume in German of the
first part of his Russian paper** on the ecological, geographical, and floristic
aspect of the mosses of the Crimean mountains. He discusses the influence
of the climatic and edaphic factors upon the occurrence and adaptability
of the mosses of the district. He holds that the principal function of
the hairs and papilla? of the mosses is to scatter the radiant energy of
the sun. He divides the species into xerophytes and hygrophytes, not
according to their structure, but according to the nature of their habit.

* Engler's Bot. Jahrb., xlvii. (1911) pp. 235-50.
t Hedwigia, li. (1911) pp. 57-60.
j Magyar Bot. Lapok, x. (1911) pp. 204-14.
§ Magyar Bot. Lapok, x. (1911) pp. 24G-8.

Beih. Bot. Central bl.. xxviii. 2<* Abt. (1911) pp. 173-224.
ST Engl. Bot. Jabrb., xlv. (1911) Beibl. pp. 02-83.
** Sapiski Novoross. Obsc. Estestv., 1910.

658 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

L. Loeske,* in commenting upon the above, points out that the
meaning of xerophyte and hygrophyte is unsatisfactory when applied to
mosses, and he proposes the use of combined terms, such as seiophil
xerophyte and hygropliil xerophyte, where the adjective refers to the
habitat, and the substantive refers to the structure of the moss. For
instance, M mum spinosum is a seiophil xerophyte.

A. A. Sapehinf publishes the second part of his paper cited above,
and gives therein an account of the floristic bryogeography of the Crimean
mountains ; first some general remarks on the district, and then an
enumeration of all the 195 species with notes on their distribution and
ecological characteristics. Four species and several varieties and forms
are new. He adds a chapter on the origin of the Crimean moss-flora.
He finds that 170 of the species are middle European, eight are Alpine,
and seventeen are Mediterranean.

The same writer J also publishes, in Russian, some keys to the Crimean
mosses, founded almost exclusively upon the anatomical and morphologi-
cal characters of the gametophyte, since more than half the species are
sterile and dwarfed. Short descriptions of the species are added.

Mosses of Libya. § — E. Durand and G. Barratte give a list of twelve
mosses recorded for Tripoli and Cyrenaica, with the distribution and
synonymy of the species. They were determined by C. Mueller about
thirty years ago. The occurrence of an hepatic, perhaps Lunularia, has
been indicated by Pacho, but its identity has not been verified.

North American Bryophytes. — A. J. Grout |j gives a list of fifteen
mosses and nine hepatics which are new records for Vermont state, and
of nine which are rare or otherwise interesting.

M. E. Jones 1T gives in his Montana Botany Notes a list of 223
mosses and twenty -four hepaticai collected by J. M. Holzinger, by him-
self, and others. The local distribution of the species is indicated.

Mexican Mosses.** — J. Cardot, who, in the past two years, has de-
scribed many new mosses for Mexico — 10 genera, 160 species, 30
varieties — now gives a list of 62 species unrecorded previously for
Mexico. These additions are all the more interesting as proving the
mixed character of the Mexican flora, partly temperate, partly tropical.
When analysed these species are shown to be 24 belonging to the United
States flora, 23 to South America (especially the Andes), 17 to
Guatemala and Costa Rica, and 14 to the Antilles. It is surprising to
find among them the European Gampylopus flexuosus, otherwise un-
known in America; and also Fissidens pallidicaulis, known only from
the Atlantic Isles and Italy.

* Hedwigia, li. (1911) Beibl. pp. 32-3.

t Engler's Hot, Jahrb., xlvi.(19U) Beibl. pp. 1-34 (3 pis.),

t Mem. Club Alpin Caucase et Crimee (Odessa, 1910) 80 pp. (2 pis.).

§ Floris Libycse Prodromus. Geneve : Romet, 1910, pp. 283-5.

|| Bryologist", xiv. (1911) pp. 52-4.

•jf Bull, tniv Montana (Biol, ser.) No. 15 (1910) pp. 50-8.

** Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 79-84.

ZOOLOGY A.ND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 659

Nomina nuda.* — E. G. Paris, in a note published after his death,
raises a protest against the procedure of certain bryologists in substituting
for the earlier suitable names of undescribed mosses new names of their
own invention. In illustration he cites instances of which Bescherelle
and Mitten were respectively guilty.

E. G. Paris : Obituary. — T. Husnot publishes an obituary notice
of the late E. G. Paris, author of the Index Bryologicus. Born in 1827
in Calvados, Jean Gabriel Edouard Narcisse Paris (such was his full
name) died at Dinard on April 30, 1911, in his 84th year. He attained
the rank of General in the French Army, and retired in 1889. In the
sixties he was in close bryological correspondence with W. P. Schimper,
and with him prepared a monograph of Cryphaeaceas, with forty plates,
which was never published. After leaving the army he settled at Dinard,
and published his Index Bryologicus in two editions, and numerous
papers on the mosses of the French Colonies in China, West Africa,
Madagascar, etc.

Thallophyta.
Algae.

(By Mrs. E. S. Gepp.)

Nutrition of Algae. I — 0. Richter writes a book on this subject,
which brings together all the latest information and views concerning
the nutrition of algas. He divides his book into two parts : I. On the
physiological meaning of chemical elements and of certain chemical
compounds, as regards nutrition. II. On the influence of certain
chemical and physical factors, in the nutritive substratum, on the form
and development of algae. Part I. deals with (1) metals, calcium,
potassium, magnesium, iron, sodium, manganese, and aluminium, and
shows the necessity that they are to certain algae ; (2) non-metals, in-
cluding carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulphur,
silica, chlorine, iodine, bromine, fluorine. The second part is divided
into (1) poisonous effects of necessary and unnecessary chemical
elements and of certain chemical compounds. Under this heading the
author treats of Oligodynamic ; Beijerinck's auxanogram-methods for
the recognition of poisonous effects ; hastening the growth by chemical
irritation ; poisonous effect of arsenic ; etc. etc. Under " The reaction
of nutritive solution " the author describes experiments with Knops and
other solutions having an acid reaction, and discusses the advantage of
a weakly alkaline reaction of the nutritive substratum in algal cultures.
Experiments on concentration of nutritive solutions are then described,
and the subject discussed very fully : and then a section is devoted to
physical conditions in the nutritive substratum. In an appendix of some
length, the author treats of the influence of temperature and light on
algae, with regard to their culture. A full bibliography and various
indices complete this important work.

* Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 84-6.
t Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 93-5.

t Monogr. und Abhandl. zur Intermit. Rev. Hydrobiol. u. Hydrograph., ii.
(Leipzig, 1911) vii. and 192 pp. (figs, in text).

I • 0 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Algaa of Tripoli.* — R. Muschler gives an enumeration of algae,
marine and fresh-water, recorded for Tripoli, Gyrenaica, Fizzan, etc., in
Dnrand and Barratfce's Libyan Flora. The number of species is eighty-
four. Distribution and synonymy are appended in each case.

Algas of North Carolina. f — In a paper entitled " The Plant Life of
Ellis, Great, Little, and Long Lakes in North Carolina," W. 11. Brown
deals shortly with their algal flora. That of Lake Ellis is rich in both
species and individuals. The green algae are abundant, but not in good
condition in the summer season, while the blue-green algae are more
abundant and more vigorous. The blue-green seem to endure the high
and changeable temperature better than the green algae. The algal
flora of Great Lake is very scanty, and this is associated with an absence
of supporting plants, the darkness of the water, and the presence of
great quantities of bacteria. The phanerogams in Lake Ellis compete
with the algas for C02 and possibly also for mineral matter, and thus
probably tend to decrease the amount of phytoplankton, although the
mechanical support which they afford the algae may counterbalance the
effect of the competition to some extent.

Diatoms and Flagellatse from East Greenland.^ — C. H. Ostenfeld

gives a list of the Diatoms and Flagellates in the surface plankton col-
lected during the Danish Expedition to the North-east Coast of Greenland
in 1906-8. Forty-three species of diatoms are recorded and five Flagel-
lates. Novelties are Coscinodiscas Joergensii and a Coccolith, Pontosphsera
borealis.

Periodicity of Phytoplankton of the Leopoldstein Lake.§ — K. v.
Keissler reports on the investigations concerning the periodicity of the
phytoplankton of the Leopoldsteiner See in Styria. From March to
September, 1910, Peridiniiim, Asterionella, Cyclotella, and Staurastrum
were the most important constituents. Geratium and Dinobryon were
wanting, as also Fragilaria, Synedra, and Botryococcus. The rarest
record is Asterionella formosa Hsskn. var. acaroides Lenim. Asterionella
and Peridiniiim cinctum were noticed in many different stages of division.
Hydrurus fretidus disappeared in warmer weather, and the gelatinous
1 tails of Ophrydium were taken possession of by diatoms.

Halosphsera and Flagellatae. || — C. H. Ostenfeld publishes an
important report on the geographical distribution and biology of
Halosphsera viridis, Phseocystis Pouchetii Lagerh., P. globosa Scherf.,
Dinobryon, divergens Imhof, D. pellucidum Levand., Coccolithophora pela-
gica Lohm., Distephanus speculum Haek., and Dictyocha fibula Ehrenb.
He deals also with their special distribution in the regions examined by
the Danish Expedition Some of the results are demonstrated by means
of maps. It is found that Halosphsera has its home in the warm Atlantic,
and is only carried north by the Gulf Stream.

* Durand et Barratte, Flora? Libycse Prodromus. Geneve : Romet, 1910, pp-
203 L3. t Contrib. U.S. Nat. Herb., xiii. pt. 10 (1911) pp. 323-41.

I Mcddel. om Greenland, xliii. (1910) pp. 259-85 (11 figs.).

§ Anzeig. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xlvii. (1910) pp. 371-3.

I Conseil Perm. Intermit Explor. de la Mer : Bull, trimest. Resume Plau-
tonkpie, i. (Copeubague, 1910) pp. 20-38 (pi. 3-5).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. <"»61

Two Brown Flagellatae.* — A. Pescher describes two new brown
species of Flagellatae, the first of which, Gryptochrysis commutata, some-
what resembles Gryptomonas erosa, and was found in backwaters of the
Olsch in southern Bohemia. The second is Protochrysis phseophycearum
from stagnant ponds near Franzensbad. Both are typical Cryptomonads.
Stein's Nephrosrlmis seems to represent a later development of Proto-
chrysis-hke monads.

Cryptomonadeae.t — A. Pascher publishes a preliminary note of the
relationship of the Cryptomonaderc to the Algae. He finds that the
existing views on the subject are not wholly accurate, and he points
out where they should be amended. First he defines the limits of the
Cryptomonadese, a point on which authors are not in agreement ; and
then he declares his view that the group is a relatively far advanced
developmental series of the Chrysomonads, which either spring from the
Ochronionadeae or with them have been developed from a common root.
The Cryptomonadeaa are therefore not the ancestors of the many groups
which have been by authors derived from them, but form merely a side-
branch from the Chrysomonadege. From the Cryptoinonadeaj spring
only the Phaaocapsaceas, Phreophyceae, and Dinoflagellataa. The various
lines of descent are indicated in a table.

Cyathomonas. J — V. Ulehla discusses the systematic position of the
genus Cyathomonas among the Flagellatas. the only species, G. trun-
cate, was placed by Biitschli in the Cryptomonadeae, but has later been
shifted to the Amphimonadace*. The author of the present paper finds
Biitschli correct. He makes a detailed comparison of the various points
common to Cyathomonas and the other genera of Cryptomonadese. He
considers the genus as a welcome completion of a natural developmental
series of the Cryptomonadeic, but standing aside on a line of its own and
not forming the final outcome of the series.

Chrysomonadeae from the Hirschberger Grossteich.§— A. Pascher
publishes the first part of the investigations on the flora of the Hirsch-
berger Grossteich, in which he deals with the Chrysomonadeae. He gives
a systematic synopsis of the group. I. Chromulinales (terminal cilia).
1. Chrysapsidaceae ; 2. Euchromulinacere ; 8. Mallomonadaceaa ; 4.
Pedinellaceae. II. Isochrysidales (two equally long terminal cilia).
1. Isochrysidaceae ; 2. Euhymenomonadacea3. III. Ochromonadales
(two terminal, unequally long cilia). 1. Euochromonadacete. IV.
Phsochrysidales (two laterally~inserted cilia). New genera and species
are described. Fuller details of this paper may be found in Hedwigia.

Chrysomonads. ||— 0. Reinisch describes and figures a new species of
Phseococcus, which was found in a salt-water tank at the Physiological
Institute at Prague. She describes the various stages of the life-history

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 190-2 (figs.).

f Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 193-203.

j Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell... xxix. (1911) pp. 281-92.

§ Monogr. u. Ahhandl. Internat. Rev. Hydrobiol. u. Hydrograph, i. (Leipzig,
1910) 66 pp. (3 pis.). See also Hedwigia, li. (1911) Beibl. pp. (10), (11).

|| Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 77-83 (1 pi). ; xxix. (1911) pp.
112-25 (1 pi.).

662 SUMMAR? OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of the alga, and compares it with P. < lementi, its nearest ally. P. dementi
is however a terrestrial form, while I', marinus is a marine species.

A. Paacher describes a new genus of Chrysornonadinae, which he
found growing in masses of Microspora and (Edogonium in a park at
Pranzensbad. It is very closely allied to the somewhat mysterious Pedi-
nella of Wyssotzky, both possessing remarkable tentacles. The author
describes the structure and life-history of this new alga, which he calls
{ 'yrtophora pedicellate. He proposes to form a new family of the Chro-
mulinales, Cyrtophoraceae, to include Pedinella, GyrtopJwra, and Palati-
nella Lauterborn, all of which genera are characterized by the possession
of tentacles.

Chlamydomonas Steinii * — P. Desroche describes in detail some
experiments he has made on the phototropism of the zoospores of Chla-
mydomonas Steinii Goros. He finds that light has no effect either in
hastening or retarding the movement of the zoospores. They have a
constant speed, which does not depend on the quantity of luminous
energy which they receive, but represents solely their own energy. Light
has no other action than to direct their movement.

Coccogenous Cyanophycea.f — R. Chodat describes a new and re-
markable genus of Myxophyceaa from the park of Mon-Repos at Geneva.
It unites the characters of several genera of Cyanophyceas, being in fact
a mixture of Chamaasiphoneae, Oscillatoriaa, and Lyngbyaceaa. It develops
on a stone into a plate of chroococcoid cells of varying size, 1-3 /*. On
this plate arise short filaments of the type of Ghamsesiphon. Sometimes
the filaments reach a great length by stretching out in a regular manner
in their narrow sheath, but sometimes the cells twist spirally. The most
interesting stage is the detachment of conidia in chains. The isolated
cells become free by the rupture of the sheath or by escape from its
apex. The name given is Erustiella rufa.

Oscillatoria rubescens.+ — H. Bachmann describes a remarkable
growth of this alga in the Rothsee near Lucerne. In the autumn of
1909 the lake was covered with a greenish powder composed of Gompho-
sphseria Naegeliana. Later on the ice formed, and that had a red tinge
from the Oscillatoria ; while in April 1910 Oscillatoria was growing in
such masses that it formed large flat cakes on the water. The smell
from the decaying alga was most unpleasant, and the fish suffered
considerably. On the other hand, Infusoria and Rotatoria flourished.
It is supposed that either the alga suddenly attained this extraordinary
multiplication, or that it was carried from the neighbouring Balder-
gersee by water-birds. The author compares the alga morphologically
with similar algaa from neighbouring Swiss lakes.

Red Euglena.§ — A. D. Hardy writes an account of a red species
oi Euglena which he has found at Doncaster, Victoria, about eight miles
from Melbourne. He gives a full account of its habitat, form and
structure, as well as of the various experiments he made with it. As

* Comptes Renclus Acad. Sci. Paris, clii. (1911) pp. 890-3.
t Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve, iii. ser. 2 (1911) pp. 125-6.
J Naturwiss. Wochenschr., n.f. ix. (1910) pp. 602-4 (fig.).
§ Victorian Naturalist, xxvii. (1911) pp. 215-20 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 663

regards the statement by Saville Kent that E. viridis was capable of
producing a red colour by ingesting particles of carmine in solution, the
author cannot make it apply to the species here described. He gives in
detail all the points of difference between this new species, E. rubra,
and E. viridis, which was also found in the neighbourhood in great
quantity.

Myxonema in Salmon Disease.* — A. D. Hardy publishes a short
account of the association of alga and fungus in salmon disease. He
had previously recorded the presence of Myxonema tenue on fish at
Melbourne, and now he finds the same alga associated with a member of
the Saprolegniaceaj growing on diseased young salmon in the ponds at
Kew, Melbourne. The presence of Myxonema appears to depend on the
preceding growth of the fungus, in the mycelium of which zoospores of
the alga may be enmeshed. In the Yarra River M. tenue occurs as long
streamers in the current, attached to willow, etc. The plants on the
fish in the ponds were small but vigorous, and rich in colour, some of
them actively producing zoospores. The note ends with a list of thirty-
three algte either new for Victoria or interesting in connexion with the
fish question.

Life-history of Anabaina Cycadeae.t — E. R. Spratt has made a
study of the life-history of Anabsena Cycadese, which lives in the
modified roots of Cycas. The region occupied by the alga is an inter-
cellular space, in the form of a zone between the cortical cells, just
below the epidermis. Bottomley has shown that this space always
contains living in it two kinds of nitrogen-fixing bacteria, Pseudomonas
radicicola and Azotobacter, in addition to the Anabsena. The life-history
of the alga is therefore of special interest. The author summarizes her
results as follows. 1. Anabsena Cycadese is a typical Anabsena. 2. Each
mature cell has two investments, an inner and outer, in addition to the
external mucilaginous sheath. 3. The chlorophyll and phycocyanin are
lodged in the peripheral cytoplasm, no definitely organized chromato-
phore being present. 4. The ventral body is a simple structure only
capable of direct division. 5. The chief product of assimilation is
glycogen. 6. Cyanophycin granules are very abundant. 7. In the
vegetative division the ingrowth of the lateral walls is accompanied by
direct division. 8. Terminal and intercalary heterocysts are formed
from vegetative cells. They may become detached, and appear to have
three functions : (a) to limit the filaments— vegetative reproduction ;
(b) for storage of reserve food material ; (c) reproduction by formation
of gonidia. 9. Spores are formed. The exospore and endospore are
the fully developed cell-sheath and inner investment respectively.
10. There are four types of spore germination : (a) the contents are
protruded through a pore in the spore membrane ; (b) the spore mem-
brane is ruptured ; (c) the spore membrane becomes mucilaginous ;
(d) the contents divide before escaping from the spore wall. 1 1 . Gonidia
are formed by the rejuvenescence and subsequent division of the con-
tents of the heterocysts. A distinct membrane appears inside the walls

* Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 27-32.
t Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 309-80 (1 pi.).

664 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of the heterocyst. A number of spherical gonidia an- formed, each
of which is capable of dividing to form a new Anabmna filament.
L2. Anabsena Gycadese maintains iis existence in the soil in the form of
heterocysts and spines, which develop into gonidia, and these enter the
Cycas tubercles through the lenticels. Twenty-six figures illustrate
this paper.

New Species of Nostoc* — L. (iain describes two new species of
Nostoc collected on the French Antarctic Expedition (l!)08-lo). The
author mentions that he has been aide to identify about twenty different
species of algas, mainly Cyanophyceae and Desmidieae, among mosses
and in damp places. The first of the two new species is Nostoc Borneti,
from Jenny Island, within the polar circle, and is allied to N. ceeruleum
Lyngbye, which it resembles in its globular firm habit, its transparent
mucilage, its sharp polished outline, dense sinuous trichomes, and
indistinct sheaths. But it differs from N. cseruhum in its smaller size.
The course of development is described for N. Borneti. The second
species is K. pachydermaticum. also found among mosses and other algie
at Jenny Island. This belongs to the section Communia Born, and
Flah.j in the neighbourhood of N. commune Vauch.

Ulva latissima.f — A. D. Cotton writes a report on the growth of
Ulva latissima in excessive quantity, with special reference to the Ulva-
nuisance in Belfast Lough. The report deals with the botanical aspect
only, and it is divided into three parts, namely : (1) a description of the
growth of Ulva on the Belfast sloblands ; (2) an account of various
other localities investigated with a view to explaining the conditions
which bring about excessive Ulva-gvowih ; and (3) a general summary
of the ecology of Ulva, a discussion on the question of its growth in
excessive quantity, and the conclusion as to Belfast. One of the most
interesting results obtained by the investigation is the discovery of the
important part played by mussels in connexion with an excessive growth
of Ulva. He says that these molluscs, like Zostera, can cover ground
on which Ulva could find no anchorage, but, unlike Zostera, they afford
an excellent mooring for the Ulva. The presence of mussels and an
excessive growth of Ulva in estuaries will probably be found to be very
intimately connected. Mussels are capable of covering many acres on
flat shores which would otherwise be bare mud or fields of Zostera. and
the result of the mussel-covering is a growth of Ulva. The principal
conclusions are summed up shortly : Of the conditions necessary for the
growth of Ulva in the littoral region, two may be singled out as of the
very greatest importance : (1) the absence of rough water; and (2) the
presence of a substratum which affords a suitable anchorage for the
plants. The latter is supplied by the molluscs, as mentioned above.
I Ira is proved to be an alga that thrives in pure sea-water, and in
polluted brackish water. Being a marine and not a fresh-water organism,
its grow tli in polluted estuaries is probably to be regarded as an adapta-
tion. In sewage-contaminated water it' absorbs large quantities of
ammonia, and its tissues are found to contain a much larger proportion

* Coraptes Iiendus Acad. Sci. Paris, clii. (1911) pp. 1691-4.

t Royal Commission of Sewage Disposal, rep. 7, app. iv. (1911) 23 pp. (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 665

of nitrogen than fronds from pure sea-water in the corresponding season.
The result of this excessive nourishment is seen in an increased rate of
growth, the fronds being at the same time of a different texture and of
a darker colour. But, as in other cases of over-fed plants, there is a
tendency for spore-formation to remain in abeyance, ami increase to take
place by vegetative methods; the growth, therefore, may be considered
as rank rather than healthy. With regard to the Belfast nuisance, the
author considers that since Ulva is not dependent on sewage, it will not
be suppressed until the mussels are exterminated.

Spirogyra.* — F. M. Andrews records an instance of conjugation
taking place between Spirogyra crassa and S. communis. A large
quantity of the two species was found in a pond and all stages in the
process of conjugation could be seen. In most cases the same species
conjugated together, but in many cases the two species cross-conjugated.
As a rule the contents of S. communis passed over to S. crassa, but
instances of the opposite mode were also found. Both cases are figured.
Apart from a difference in size and form, the zygospores seemed perfectly
normal. The author writes from Indiana University, Bloomington, U.S.A.

Desmids of the Burgaschimoos.t — F. Miihlethaler writes on the
I )es in id-flora of the Burgaschimoos, a locality already well worked for
flowering plants. He records ninety-five species and varieties, collected
during March and April in last year. Although no new species are
formally described, the author gives details of certain species and forms
which he finds vary greatly from those already known, and he believes
that they will prove to be novelties. A section of the paper is devoted
to a short discussion of the ecological conditions, and remarks on the
other components of the cryptogamic flora found there. The list of
Desmids is finally given in tabulated form, showing the occurrence of
each species.

Cell and Nuclear Division in Closterium.J — B. F. Lutnian has
made a study of the cell and nuclear division in Glosterium, and describes
the results at length. The summary given is as follows : 1. Closterium
divides from 10 p.m. to 5 a.m., and the new half has become practically
symmetrical with the old one by 9 a.m. 2. Division is dependent upon
the storage of a considerable quantity of starch in the chromatophore
and around the pyrenoids. 3. The chromatophore divides by a con-
striction located about a third of the distance out from the middle.
This constriction is due to the enlargement of a ring-shaped vacuole
under the plasma membrane. 4. The resting nucleus of G. Ehrenbergii
is made up of a very fine reticulum carrying little if any chromatin in the
form of granules. At the centre of this reticulum is a large compound
nucleolus made up of a number of partially fused nucleoli. The resting
nucleus of C. moniliferum has essentially the same structure, but the
nucleoli at the centre are more completely fused. 5. The spireme is
formed outside the nucleolus and apparently separate from it. During

* Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxviii. (1911) p. 299 (1 fig.).

t Mitteil. Naturf. Gesell. Bern (1911) pp. 101-22 (figs, in text).

X Bot. Gazette, li. (1911) pp. 401-30.

666 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

us formation that body breaks down, but it is impossible to decide
whether its material goes to the spireme or is used up for some other
purpose. No chromosomes come bodily out of the nucleolus as lias been
described for Spirogyra. (>. The spindle is cylindrical, with broad poles,
much resembling that of Spirogyra. 7. In the telophase a dispireme is
formed, and in this the nucleoli reappear as small spheres, which
partially fuse to form larger masses. 8. The two daughter-nuclei move
amund'thechromatophore, between its ridges, apparently in an amoeboid
manner, to their new positions. 9. The new end wall is put across in
essentially the same manner as in Spirogyra, that is, by a growth inward
from the periphery. 10. Division in these species of Glosterium is at
least a two-night process : the chromatophore divides the first night :
the nucleus the second night. 11. The position of the young transverse
wall would seem to indicate that the pointed ends are secondarily formed,
and that Glosterium was originally a filamentous alga, which has
developed the habit of breaking up into single cells.

Botrydium granulatum.* — J. Burton describes a plentiful growth
ill Botrydium granulatum which he found at the Welsh Harp Reservoir
last October. After a few remarks on its systematic position, he dis-
cusses the various modes in which it reproduces itself, and finally points
out that our knowledge of the alga is not yet complete.

Vaucheria terrestris.f — E. Paque writes a short account of
Desroche's work on this species. % Desroche placed some authentic
specimens of Vaucheria terrestris in sterilized tubes containing Knops'
nutritive solution. The specimens in question were about 2 mm. in
length, and each bore the characteristic sexual apparatus. Thus all
possibility of error was avoided. These fragments germinated, aud at
the end of a year six of them had grown to a length of several centi-
metres and bore numerous sexual organs. These organs were all of the
type characteristic of V. r/eminata, and therefore the author finds him-
self compelled to reduce V. terrestris Lyngb., to a form of V. gemmata,
under the name of forma terrestris.

Codium tomentosum.§ — F. Tobler writes on the organization of the
thallus of Codium tomentosum. His observations were carried out with a
view to determine three different points : 1. Normal conditions of growth,
especially the development of the germinating plants. 2. Experiments
in restitution and observations on polarity. 3. Influence of external
factors, especially that of light on the thalli, or on the differentiated
portions of it. The author's observations with regard to the first of
these points coincide with the information given by Oltmanns in his
.Moiph. Biol. d. Algen, 1904. He finds the thallus in the highest
degree capable of restitution, new plants being grown from isolated
palisade-cells. These show from the very beginning a marked polarity
with the base as the centre of development. Restitutions of injuries to

* Joura. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2, xi. (1911) pp. 209-12.

+ Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg., xlvii. (1910) pp. 360-3.

J C.K. Soc. Biol. (1910) p. 969.

§ Flora, ciii. (1911) pp. 78-87 (3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 667

portions of the thalhis also show a polarity of the organism. Want of
light causes irregularities in growth of the thallus. Adverse influences
cause disintegration and formation of bud-like bodies, which develop in
a similar manner to the isolated portions. Germination of the zygotes
(as also that of the vegetative organs of multiplication) results in a
protonema-like growth, which precedes the beginning of the Cod i inn
thallus.

New Chlorophycese from New Zealand and Tahiti.* — F. Brand
describes four alga? collected by Tilden which he found among a
number of other species sent to him. The first of these, from Tahiti,
represents, in the author's opinion, the type of a new genus of Udoteae,
Rhytisiphon tahitense, to other members of which group he compares it,
omitting, however, to point out the remarkable likeness it bears to
Chlorodesmis comosa. The other algas described are Cladophora stewart-
ensis from Stewart Island, Xew Zealand, Rhizoclonium Jissum from
fresh-water in New Zealand, and Boodlea composite f. irregularis n.f.
from Tahiti. The new species are figured.

West Indian Chlorophyceae.f — F. Borgesen writes on some Chloro-
phyceaa from the Danish West Indies. He adds two species of Caulerpa
to the list previously published, of which one species, C. Vickersii, is new.
It represents the C. ambigua recorded from Barbados by A. Vickers
and, in part, the C. ambigua of Okamura. It is here fully described and
figured. The author then deals with the specimens of Halimeda found
by him, and discusses the views of Howe as to the species limits and
characters. He agrees with that author in keeping separate H. tuna
and H. discoidea Decaisne, and gives his reasons. He divides the latter
species into two varieties, var. typica and var. platyloba, comparing var.
platyloba with the corresponding deep-water variety of H. tuna, i.e. var.
platydisca. The two species, with their varieties, are distinguished by
the size and form of the utricles of the subcortical layer, and by certain
characters of the peripheral utricles. The author next discusses the
vexed question of nomenclature of H. incrassata and H. tridens, and
gives his reasons for accepting H. incrassata as the true name for
the species. He disagrees with Howe in regarding f. monilis as a
species, and reduces it again to a variety, as also the H. simulans of
Howe. On the other hand he describes and figures a form gracilis of
var. typica, and two new forms of var. monilis. A new variety, ojnni-
tioides, is described for H. gracilis, which well defines the marked West
Indian variety of that species. In dealing with Bryopsis, the author
regards the species of the B. plumosa group as being mere varieties of
that species, and records his finds accordingly. Vaucheriadichotoma Ag.
is recorded, and a new species of EnUromorplia, E. chsetomorphoides.
Notes are given on Blastophysa rJtizopus Rke. and Endoderma viride
Lagerh.

Development of Costaria, Undaria, and Laminaria.J — K. Yendu
has had opportunities for years of collecting and examining the early

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 138-45.
t Bot. Tidsskr., xxxi. (1911) pp. 127-52 (figs, in text).
1 Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 691-715.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

stages of development of various species of Laminariaceae on the coasts
of Japan. The present paper is prepared to elucidate the development
of Gostaria Turneri in particular, as well as of Undaria pinnatifida and
some species of Laminaria, comparing them with previously published
accounts of other genera. Three forms of Undaria pinnatifida are
recognized. The author gives the following summary of his work.
1. The earliest stage of development of the sporelings of the Lamina-
riaceae investigated is a confervoid body growing by a single apical cell.
The con I'ervi >id body becomes monostromatic in the next stage, with a
monosiphonous stipes. The growth of the monostromatic blade is in-
itiated by the two cells situated side by side at the same level beneath
the apical cell, the axis of the blade passing between the two cells. 2.
The monostromatic blade becomes distromatic at its base ; the mono-
siphonous stipes becomes polysiphonous at the same time. A new meri-
stematic tissue begins to appear at the transitional region between the
blade and the stipes. 3. The growth in length as well as in breadth is
due, at a certain period, to both the apical and the stipo-frondal growth.
The apical growth is gradually retarded, and finally ceases. Erosion of
the apex of the blade follows next. 4.. A single precortical layer of large
parenchymatous cells is generated at the transitional region between
the already existing two layers. The former soon becomes two-layered,
and adds to the number of its layers later on. Additions of layers of
cells are, as a rule, limited to, and begin at, the transitional region. 5.
The hyphal cells are generated as the precortical layer becomes doubled,
and the expansion of their distal ends into a trumpet shape takes place
at the intercellular spaces. 6. The rib and the meridional region are
formed by special thickening of the cortical layers. The dorsiventrality
of the lamina, if it exists, is indicated simultaneously with the formation
of such parts. 7. In Undaria the mucilage-glands are developed at an
early stage, but in Laminaria the appearance of the lacume does not
take place before the blade has attained to a considerable length. 8. The
cryptostomata in the Laminariacese are not generated from a single
initial cell. Each hair has its origin in an epidermal cell of equal value,
except that those in the middle develop earlier than the peripheral cells.
The paper is illustrated by three plates.

Rhodophycese.* — N. Svedelius publishes the appendix volume
Khodophycese to Engler and Prantl's Die Natiirlichen Pflanzenfarnilien,
thus bringing that group up to the present time. It includes Bangiales
and Florideae.

Gonimophyllum Buffhami.f — This alga is recorded by J. Chalon
from Astan and the He de Bas in the neighbourhood of Roscoff. The
specimens were found on Nitophyllum laceratum in Herb. Tickers. G.
Buffhami had previously only been recorded from Jersey and Deal. The
author wonders whether the alga is really so rare as has been supposed,
or whether it has merely escaped notice from its extreme minuteness.

* Engler u. Prantl, Die Natiirlichen Pflanzenfam. Nachtriige z. 1 Teil, 2** Abt.
(1911) pp. 191-284.

t Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg., xlvii. (1910) pp. 261-2.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, KTC. 669

Ceramium.* — H. E. Petersen publishes some studies on Geramium,
The first consists of remarks on Danish species of Ceramium, viz.,
C. tenuissimum, G. strictum, G. Areschougii, ('. fruticiilosum, and C.
r ubru m. Points of a systematic character are discussed with regard to
G. strictum, G. diaphanum, and < '. fruticulosum, the first two of which
are not easily distinguished. Information is also given on the refringent
cortical cells containing proteid matter which are common in some
species, and on the development of main axes in G. rubrum, C. fruti-
culosum, and C. diaphanum. The second study is devoted to researches
on Geramium species from the Faeroes, Iceland and Greenland. The
distribution of the species in the three areas and Denmark is shown in
tabular form. Three new species are described. Six types are recognized
for the many forms of G. rubrum.

Lithothamnia from Roscoff in Brittany. f — F. Heydrich writes on
certain species of Lithothamnia collected in the neighbourhood of Roscoff
by Chalon. Among these are specimens of Foslie's L. Battersii (?),
sunk by the author into Phymatolithon polymorphum Fosl. Lithotham-
nion rubrum Phil, is given a new diagnosis and divided into five new
forms. A new form is described for L. calcareum Aresch., and a new
genus is created to contain Melobesia Lenormandi Aresch. under the
name of Squamolithon.

Tolypella intricata Leonh.J — Gr. C. Druce writes a note recording
the reappearance of Tolypella intricata in the ditches at Marston, Oxford,
for the fourth time. The ditches in question had been cleared in each
case the previous autumn.

Fungi.
(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

Aphanomyces lsevis.§ — By careful research V. Kasanowsky has
proved fertilization in this genus of Saprolegniaceas. The species ex-
amined was collected, along with other fungi, on a dead fly in a pool
near to Kiews ; it was isolated and successfully cultivated. A detailed
account is given of the methods employed in fixing, staining, etc.

Aphanomyces Isevis is monoecious, and from a mycelium produced
from a zoospore developed oogonia and antheridia, the former full of
plasma, and with a large number of nuclei and a large vacuole. As the
vacuole enlarges it pushes the contents towards the periphery and many
of the nuclei degenerate ; those that remain divide once, but all
degenerate except one, which becomes the egg-nucleus. The egg is
formed by protoplasm gathering towards the centre with a ccenocentrum
in the middle, of which the function is to form a centre of nutrition.
The nucleus lies near to the ccenocentrum and increases in size.

The antheridia are at first multinucleate, but they all degenerate

* Bot. Tidsskr., xxxi. (1911) pp. 97-120 (5 pis.).

t Ber. Deutsch.Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 26-33 (lpl.).

§ Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 235-6.

§ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 210-28 (1 pi.).

Oct. 18th, 1911 2 x

670 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

except one, after having undergone mitosis. The single nucleus passes
with plasma through the elastic fertilizing tube into the ooplasma, and
fuses with the female nucleus. When the oospore is mature, granules,
which :ire evidently fat-centres, are scattered through the plasma.

The oospore is uninucleate, and contains as nutriment a fat-globule
which has a membrane and evidently also a stroma. After six months
resting period the oospore germinates with a tube which immediately
branches.

Parasitic Root-diseases of the Juncacese.* — P. Magnus criticizes
a paper by E. J. Schwartz on this subject, in which the latter had stated
that Magnus had placed a fungus causing the tubercles on the roots of
Juncus articulatus in the genus Schinzia, and that Weber had named it
Enorhiza cypericola, which Schwartz endorses. Magnus denies these
statements, and gives his reasons for doing so.

Sclerotinia as a Plant-disease. f — Joh. Westerdijk records the
appearance in Holland of Sclerotinia Libertiana on Lactuca sativa and
other cultivated plants. Continued saprophytic life does not impair its
capacity to turn parasite. Infection takes place through wounds, and
in moist weather ; Botrytis cinerea is not the conidial form. The
sclerotia often develop mycelium and not ascospore fruits, and the
Peziza form does not develop in artificial cultures.

Studies in Ascomycetes.J — Ed. Fischer has made a resume of work
done recently on Tuberineae and Helvellineas, tracing the relationships
between members of these groups and between the groups themselves.
It has been found as a result of researches that there is no great differ-
ence between Balsamiacere and Eutuberinere, nor between Pezizacea?
and Helvellacese. The reasons for these decisions are given, and the
different research-workers referred to.

Plicaria Planchonis Boud.§ — J. Lagarde found, in November 1910,
a number of specimens of a dark violet-coloured Peziza on the soil at
Montpellier, measuring across from 2 mm. to 3 c. He found it to be
identical with authentic drawings of Aleuria atro-violacea, and also
synonymous with Ascobolus Persoonii. The spores are spherical : the
hymenium is coloured blue-violet. A coloured plate of the fungus is
given.

Hypocrea rufa.|| — M. Medisch isolated from the soil the fungus
Trichoderma viride, the conidial stage of H/jpocrea rufa, and with it he
made a series of culture experiments. In a weak medium of glucose
there is a continual oxidation shown by the colour changes. An addi-
tion of various salts to the culture quickened the formation of colouring
matter. It began with yellowish green or screen, and changed to yellow
or orange, and Medisch considered these changes as stages of oxidation.

* Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 249-52.

+ Med. Phytopath. Lab. " Willie Commelin Schoiten," ii. (1911) 28 pp. (2 pis.).
See also Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 309-10.

% Zeitschr. Bot., ii. (1910) pp. 718-22.

§ Bull. Soc. Mycol. Prance, xxvii. (1911) pp. 39-43 (1 pi.).

|| Jahrb. Wiss. Bot., xlviii. (1910) pp. 591-631. See also Bot. Centralbl.. cxvii.
U911) pp. 91-2.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 671

The coloured culture medium could be bleached by reducing substances
(hydrosulpkite of sodium, etc.). Reducing bacteria acted very weakly.
An account is also given of the effect produced by the addition of
nitrogen on the development of the fungus.

Research on Aspergillus.*— P. Baccarini has made culture experi-
ments with a species, A.flavus, that grew on decaying flowers of Capparis
sicula. He obtained a plentiful crop of conidiophores and conidia, and,
when these died down, sclerotia were formed. He found these two sub-
races constantly appearing, one forming conidiophores, the other sclerotia.
He obtained still another species, of which he gives cultural details.

B. Sauton | has made experiments with the spores of Aspergillus
niger inoculated on pigeons. They germinate in and destroy the tissues
of the animal after they have been treated with extract of A.fumigatus.
This substance protects them from the phagocytes until they germinate,
and then the mycelium kills the animal.

G. Bertrand and M. Javillier % have tested the influence of zinc and
manganese on cultures of Aspergillus niger. They secured finer growths
with an addition of small quantities of both substances to the culture
medium. Better results were obtained with the two together than with
each separately.

A. Sartory and G-. Bainier § have secured a yellow pigment from the
perithecia of species of Aspergillus, notably from A. scheelii. It is
fluorescent in the different solutions they made, but they did not succeed
in getting crystals. After evaporation the residue was resinous.

Notes on Erysiphe8e.[|— Yittorio Peglion has made a series of obser-
vations on different oidia. The Oidium of the oak has been very pre-
valent of late years, and he concludes that the fungus winters in the
buds of the host, and is therefore independent of any Ascomycetous
form. He compares with it the Oidium of the apple, 0. farinosum, of
which the perfect fruiting-form has only recently been discovered, and
the mildew of the rose, which winters by its mycelium in the buds. The
summer form is thus all the more important, if it is independent of any
winter fruiting-stage.

Physalosporina, a New Genus of Pyrenomycetes.f — X. "Woronichin
found the new fungus on leaves of Caragana frutex from Gouv. Samara.
It forms a broad flat rose-coloured or white stroma on the leaves, some-
thing like a Polgstigma, but is judged by the writer to be nearly akin to
Physalospora, and placed by him in the Pleosporacese. He has trans-
ferred several other species to the same genus, all of them characterized
by a stroma.

Development of the Spores in Pleurage zygospora.** — M. Lewis
reports that this species, formerly reported only from Italy, is found

* Bull.Soc. Bot Ital., 1911, pp. 47-55.
t Comptes Rendus Acad. Sci. Paris, clii. (l'Jll) pp. 1697-S.
X Comptes Rendus Acad. Sci. Paris, clii. (l'Jll) pp. 900-2.
§ C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 776-7.
| Atti R. Accad. Lincei, cccviii. (1911) pp. 687-91.
«j[ Ann. Mycol., ix.(19i 1 ) pp. 217-25.
** Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 369-73 (1 pi.).

2 X '1

672 MMARY OF I QRRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

growing extensively in the United Stales. The mature ascospores have
the form of a long filament, with two swollen ends. There are eight of
these in the ascus, and Lewis has studied this development to arrive at a
righl understanding of the systematic position of the species. He comes
to the conclusion that each one of these represents but one spore made
up of three cells, those at each end being swollen, and each one function-
ing as a spore, the connecting cell heing sterile. The species, therefore,
belongs to the genus Pleurage and not to the 10-spored Philocopra, to
which it wras transferred by Saccardo.

Alcoholic Ferment of Yeast-juice.* — A. Harden and W. J. Young
have tested the influence of arsenates and arsenites on the fermentation
of sugars by yeast-juice to see if these acted similarly to phosphates.
The action they found was very marked, causing acceleration in the rate
of production of carbon-dioxide and alcohol. Arsenites act in the same
way but not so vigorously ; both substances cause total inhibition of
the fermentation when they are present in a highly concentrated form.
Other results were tabulated and are discussed in the paper.

Sphseropsideae. — H. and P. Sydow| describe a fungus ScUropyrnis
abietina g. etsp.n., collected by F. W. Neger on pine-branches. It has
a stromatoid base to the pyenidia, and the one-celled spores are given
off from cells all round the interior of the pyenidium. No definite
sporophores are formed.

II. Diedicke | publishes notes on several genera of the series:
Dothiopsis, a genus with a pyenidium immersed simply in a stroma ;
Sclerophoma, in which the inner cell-layers become converted into spores,
and Sclerotiopsis, which has a somewhat soft stroma ; the pyenidium is
chambered, and there is no ostiole. The species of each genus are listed.

Parasitic Lichen-fungi. § — K. von Keiszler describes two new fungi
that he found parasitic on lichens. The first, Phoma physciicola, in-
fested the apothecia of Physcia aipolia. Another species of Phoma has
been described on the thallus of Phyma, but the new species differs in
the broadly ovate spores.

He further found on the thallus of Hsematomma elatinum a fungal
perithecium, similar to Phoma in producing small colourless spores, but
differing in the formation of sterile hyphse on paraphyses among the
fertile sporophores. He names it Lichenophoma ffsematommatis g. etsp. n.

Gum-inducing Diplodia of Peach and Orange.||— H. S. Fawcett and
0. F. Burger first obtained the species from peach- and orange-trees
in Florida, where it induced copious gumming. A series of inocula-
tions were made on healthy trees in order to test various modes of
inducing gummosis. The peach-trees began to gum in 4 to 7 days,
but in no case was any tree killed, though the tissues round the inocula-
tion area were destroyed. The fungus was also isolated from rotting
fruit of orange and from grape-fruit, in which it causes softening and
decay.

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 451-75.
t Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 277-8 (4 figs.),
t Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 279-85 (1 pi.),
§ Hedwigia, 1. (1911) pp. 294-8 (2 figs.).
!1 Myeologia, iii. (1911) pp. 151-3.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. G73

New Fungi from the Tyrol.* — P. Magnus describes two new
parasitic species : Gercospora Funiculi on Fosniculum officinale differs
from other species of Gercospora in the spores remaining non-septate,
but the other characters all agree with Gercospora. He also found a
parasitic Goniosporium on the leaves of Onobrychis sativa, with large
brown conidia measuring 31 fx x 1G— 19/x. Most of the species of this
genus are saprophytes, but Magnus thinks there may be many more
parasitic species than is generally supposed.

Hyphomycetes.t — R. E. Buchanan gives an account of the genus
Gephalosporium. Species of the genus are common in the humus-rich
prairie soils of Iowa. Buchanan isolated and cultivated a new species,
G. PammeJii. It produced the usual heads of conidia, but these, when
they fed on the culture medium, became much elongated, somewhat
crescent-shaped, and 6-8 septate. They then bud and develop similar
conidia. The author considers that the genus Hyalopus is the same as
Cephalosporium, and that Allantospora is also probably only a growth
form.

Classification of the Hyphomycetes.t — P. Vuillemin publishes a con
tinuation of previous work on this subject. Instead of the old divisions
Mucedinese, Dematiee, etc., he proposes Thallosporae, Hemisporae, and
Conidiosporae. The latter group is the one dealt with. It includes
forms in which the spore is sharply differentiated from the vegetative
structure. The author lays more stress on the sterigma on which the
conidium is directly borne than on the general sporophore. The sterigma
he calls the " Phialide." The first order Sporotrichacea; has no sporophore,
typified by Rhinotrichum ; the second order Sporophoreae, with a
simple sporophore, is represented by Acremonium. The other two are
characterized by the branching of the sporophore : they are the
Phialideae, of which the type is Botrytis, and Urophialiderc, which
includes genera like Coemamiella.

Green Muscardine of Frog-hoppers.§ — In Trinidad the sugar-
cane is damaged bv a fungus Marasmius Sacchari, and also by an insect

i ill

Tomaspis postka, called the frog-hopper. The latter is attacked by a
fungus determined by Thaxter as Metarrhizium anisoplise. G. B.
Rorrer gives an account of this fungus and of his cultures of it on
artificial media and on frog-hoppers. The infected insects were killed
in five days, and it is believed that the fungus may prove of economic
service to the planters in getting rid of the frog-hoppers.

Thermophilous Moulds. || — Griffon and Maublanc describe two
moulds that grew at high temperatures. One, already reported by
Miehe as Thermomyces lanuginosus, grew on heated oats, they consider

* Hedwigia, 1. 1911) pp. 185-8 (1 pi.).
t Mvcologia, iii. (1911) pp. 170-4 (2 pis.).
J Bull. Seanc. Sci. Nancy (1910) 44 pp. (5 pis.).

§ Proc. Agric. Soc. Trinidad and Tobago, x. (1910) pp. 467-S2 (1 pi.). See also
Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 311-12.

•Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. GS-74 (8 figs. |.

674 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

!o be a Sepedonium ; like other species of that genus, it has minutely
echinulate spores. The other grew on fresh manure, and has been
diagnosed as a new species of Penicillium.

Uredinese. — Ellsworth Bethel * publishes an account of sonic species
of Gymnosporangium, notably of two species that cause witches'-brooms
or fasciation of the branches : Gymnosporangium N'eUoni on Juniperus
scopulorum, and a new species Gymnosporangium Kernianum on
Juniperus Utahensis, which produces a compact spherical fasciation;
there, are no clues as to the aecidial form.

J. W. Ellisf reports the finding of a rare Uredine, JEcidium leuco-
spermum, on Anemone nemorosa in N. Wales. No trace of Puccinia
fusca, the alternate form, was found.

Jakob Eriksson | gives results of two years' work on the rust of
mallows, Puccinia Malvacearum. The propagation of the disease is
secured chiefly by the dissemination of infected seeds or of shoots grown
from such seeds. In the latter case the shoots remain healthy about
three months, then suddenly show disease with numerous pustules on
the leaves. A secondary eruption, which affects all the green parts of
the host-plant, arises from external infection.

The fungus winters under natural conditions in stalks of Althaea
rosea as a mycoplasm in symbiosis wdth the protoplasm of the cells.
In pustules formed in autumn there are two kinds of spores morpho-
logically similar but differing in the mode of germination, some of them
forming a bent promycelium with sporidia, the others producing a long
straight filament which breaks up at the end into short cells or conidia.
Inoculation by promycelial sporidia results in the formation of a
filament which penetrates the palisade cells and then passes to the
intercellular spaces ; pustules of spores follow in 10 to 20 days.

In the case of inoculation by conidia, the whole contents of the
conidium passes into the epidermal cell as a plasmic mass, spreads along
the cell-wall, and forms plasmic bands across the interior. It passes to
neighbouring cells until the whole leaf is occupied. Eor weeks there
may.be no trace of disease. The fungus passes from the plasmic to the
mycelial stage shortly before spore-formation. At that stage a free
nucleolus is constituted in the plasma of the cell round which the
mycoplasm collects. It then approaches the cell-wall, forms a pear-
shaped body, and passes into the intercellular space : there it forms a
filament. The same process takes place in a large number of cells ; the
newly formed mycelium grows and takes possession of the whole leaf,
and in 10 to 20 days forms spore sori.

E. Baudys § records the many attacks of rusts in north-east Bohemia
during the year 1910. Great harm was done by Uromyces Fabae, U. Pisi,
and U. Trifoliirepentes, on various Leguminosse. Uromyces Betae attacked
beet plants, destroying all the leaves ; U. Pose appeared on several
species of Poa. On other grasses were noted Puccinia dispersa, P. bromina,
P. triticina, P. glumarum, P. graminis, etc. P. Pruni spinosx was so

* Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 156-60 (1 fig. and 1 pi.).

t Journ. Bot., xlix. (1911) p. 235.

X Comptcs Rendus Acad. Sci. Paris, clii. (1911) pp. 1776-9.

§ Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xxi. (1911) pp. 287-S.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 675

abundant on Prunus domestica that the leaves were covered with the
spores, and fell mostly before the fruit was ripe. Oymnosporangium
Sabinse made its appearance on the leaves of Pyrus communis. Species
of Phragmidium, Gronartiirm, and Melampsora were also recorded. The
abundance of the rusts during the year is explained by the persistent
damp weather.

Y. Orishimo * has established by culture experiments the connexion
between Peridermium Pini-densiflorse P. Henn. and a Coleosporium on
Aster scaber, the latter to be called G. Pmi-Asteris. The writer also
gives a list of Japanese Goleosporium species, with their host-plants.

Ed. Fischer f gives a critical review of Uredinese experiments carried
on during the year 1909. He refers to the immense scope for work in
North America, and gives a list of successful culture experiments carried
out by Arthur on Puccinia and on Gymnosporangium. In Europe work
was done by W. Tranzschel in clearing up the relationships of various
hetercecious species. He established the existence of hemi-forms (with-
out pycnidia). Tranzschel also worked at pleophagous species such as
Puccinia Isiacse, which attack different hosts. The opposite tendency is
found among the physiologically specialized species such as P. Hieracii,
examined by R. Probst. The results of other workers on these lines are
also given.

o*

Nuclear Phenomena in Puccinia Podophylla.J — Lester W. Sharp
has published a preliminary note on this subject. He finds that in the
mycelium, from which arise the ascidia and spermogonia, a binucleate
condition prevails, the nuclei being associated in pairs, even before there
is any indication of ascidium formation. The aecidium arises in a dense
tangle of hyphas beneath the epidermis of the host. Certain cells
enlarge and become the " basal cells " of the secidiospore chain. Cells
may have fused — there is no clear evidence — but there is no migration
of nuclei. Observations on the formation of spermatia are also given.

Smut Fungi. — D. McAlpine§ gives an account of the smuts of
Australia in a volume similar to the one he published on the rusts some
years ago. He begins with general characters of the families, their
life-histories and distribution, and then treats more particularly the
cereal smuts and grass smuts. Other genera occurring on herbaceous
plants are more shortly dealt with. McAlpine gives a host-index, a
general index, and a fungus index. From the latter we learn that there
are twelve genera of smuts in Australia. The volume is copiously illus-
trated by photographs.

H. C. Schellenberg || has more recently published the smuts of
Switzerland. He also gives a general account of the fungi. He divides
them into two great families, Ustilaginacea3 and Tilletiaceas, and gives
keys to the genera, seventeen in all. In his descriptions of species he

* Bot..Mag. Tokyo, xxiv. (1910) pp. 1-5. See also Ann. MvcoL, ix. (1911) p. 301.

t Zeitschr. Bot., ii. (1910) pp. 332-6.

I Bot. Gaz., Ii. (1911) pp. 463-4.

§ The Smuts of Australia. Melbourne (1910) vi. and 288 pp. (56 pis.).

Beitrage zur Kryptogamenrlora des Schweiz, iii. Heft 2 (Bern, 1911) xlv. and
180 pp. (79 figs.).

676 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

includes the germinations of the spores, the inoculation experiments that
have been carried out, and the time and manner of infection. Both
McAlpine and Schellenberg give complete bibliographies.

I. Pole Evans * gives notes on maize-smut or " brand " caused by
Sorosporium reilianum. It breaks out on the surface of the infected
parts as a black dusty mass. The spores germinate readily in fresh
stabk-manure, and a heavily manured crop thus runs considerable risk
of being smutted. All young and tender parts of the maize-plant can
be infected.

Smut-infection Experiments. f — As a result of a long series of culture
experiments, O.Munerate comes to the following conclusions. 1. With-
out taking other factors into account, the condition of the temperature
at the time of sowing by retarding or accelerating growth-changes
exercises considerable influence on the susceptibility of the plant to in-
fection. 2. The presence of fungus-spores on the seed does not always
cause the development of the fungus. 3. Early sowing of autumn corn
and late sowing of spring corn generally procure healthy plants, whether
the seeds are infected or not. 4. Late sowing in autumn and early sow-
ing in spring nearly always result in a diseased crop — unless weather
conditions are exceptionally favourable. 5. Soaking the seed in some
fungicide will, as a rule, preserve the young seedling from the disease.

Note on the Biology of Septobasidium.l — The species of this genus
are confined to tropical countries, and encrust stems or leaves of living
plants. From an examination of a long series of specimens, T. Petch has
determined that they are parasites on scale-insects. One purple-black
species, fairly common on tea, grows over the insect Chionaspis hiclavis.
Petch found that a North American, fungus, known as TheUphora licheni-
cola, also showed a colony of scale-insects beneath the subiculum. He
compares the genus with Hypocrella, a Pyrenomycete.

Notes on Larger Fungi. — N. Patouillard§ has found among the
fungi of New Caledonia a species of Gallacm, a Gasteromycete, of which
only one species was previously known. It has the appearance of a tuber,
but it was found on the surface of the soil. The new genus is near to
Hysterangium.

A. de Jaczewski || writes on two forms of TthypMllus that he has lately
come across. One, I. imperialis, was first found in Hungary. It is
frequent in America though rare in Europe, and grows on sandy soil.
It differs in several particulars from /. impudicus, in the colour and form
of the egg, size of the spores, etc. The other, /. amuremis, is a new
species from Russia in Asia ; it is a small form.

L. Lutz^f gives some notes on Ozonium. His observations confirm
those of Saccardo and of Plowright, who had discovered its connexion

* Agric. Journ. Union S. Africa, 1. (1911) p. 697 (1 pi.),
t Atti Reale Accad. Lincei, cccviii. (1911) pp. 835-40.
J Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) p. 843.

§ Bull. Soc. Myeol. Prance, xxviii. (1911) pp. 34-8 (2 figs.).
1 Bull. Soc, Mvcol. France, xxviii. (1911) pp. 81-9 (1 pi.).
«|f Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxviii. (1911) pp. 110-13 (4 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 677

with species of Coprinus. Lutz found again the connexion between
Ozonium stuposum and Coprinus radian*.

Fresco-painting of Fungi.* — Leon Marchand has discovered an old
Fresco in a chapel near Tours representing the temptation of Eve, in
which the serpent is twisted round the tree that is, in reality, a branched
sporophore of Amanita. A photograph of the picture was sent to
Boudier, who gives a description of it and finds that the artist had
evidently A. muscaria in his mind when he made the drawing of the
"tree of good and evil."

Myeological Notes.f— C. G. Lloyd has published a new number of
" Notes " relating to matters of interest to mycologists. He remarks on
the successful completion by E. Boudier of Icones mycologies?, and gives
an account of their publication. He gives also a portrait and note on
Paul Klincksieck, the publisher, who has spared neither expense, labour,
nor care in producing the plates.

A note is also published on C. Torrend, the Portuguese mycologist.
During the recent revolution in Portugal, the Jesuit College, where
Torrend lived, was attacked by the mob and all the collections, micro-
scopes, etc., were destroyed.

A paper follows on Hexagona ; several interesting specimens having
been sent by Edouard Luga from the Congo Beige. Lmzites ochroleuca,
sent from Bombay, India, proves to be a very variable fungus, rarely
two collections being the same as to the hymenium. A photograph is
published of Mutinus Bambusinus with a note on other Phalloids.

Poisoning by Fungi. — E. D. Clarke and J. L. Kantor J have in-
vestigated Itiocybe infida, as cases of poisoning were reported as due to
eating this fungus. They separated a substance which had toxic effects
on frogs, but it was not similar to muscarin. It is rather of the narcotic
type, and produces lethargy.

Louis C. C. Krieger § discusses a case of poisoning, said to have been
caused by eating Coprinus comatus, and he suggests that the specimens
of Panaeolus campanulatus had been gathered instead of Coprinus. The
symptoms were the same as those produced by Panseolus.

Fat-destroying Fungi. || — Rohstri Ohta supports the statement of
Kumagawa, that moulds destroy the fat of beef (organpulver). Of
the species examined, Cladosporium herbarum, Penicillium glaucum,
Aspergillus glaucus, A. nidulans, and Actinomucor repens, the latter was
the most powerful agent ; in three weeks it had destroyed 60 p.c. of fat
in the sample tested. Other results of the experiments are noted.

Research on Diseases of Trees. If — E. Naunch has attempted by
means of infection experiments to determine the causes that induce

* Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 31-3 (1 pi.).

t Cincinnati, Ohio, No. 37 (1911) pp. 493-508 (4 portraits and 9 figs.).

; Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 175-88 (1 pi.).

§ Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 200-2.

|| Biochem. Zeitschr., xxxi. (1911) p. 177. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxx. (1911)
p. 493.

^ Naturw. Zeitschr. Land.-Forstw., viii. (1910) pp. 389-408 and 425-47. See
also Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) p. 308.

678 \1MARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

disease in trees. He used pure cultures of a number of wood-destroying
fungi — Schizophyllum commune, Stereum purpureum, Polyporus igniariics,
etc. Sensitiveness to disease is connected first of all with the growth-
coiidition of the trees ; where they are overshadowed by other trees they
are much more liable to infection than are trees in the open. The chief
remedy, or rather preventive, against disease is the free entrance of air
into the forest. Pruning and attention to wounds are also of importance.
Certain fungi also excite to increased growth.

Plant-diseases in South Africa. — I. B. Pole Evans * records the
wide prevalence of potato-scab due to Oospora scabies. He describes
the appearance of the disease, which may be introduced into a crop in
two ways : by means of contaminated tubers for seed purposes, or by
using contaminated manure. He advises growers how to sterilize the
seed-potatoes.

Ethel M. Doidgef contributes an account of a leaf-blight of pear and
quince very prevalent in South Africa caused by Entomosporium macv-
latum. It destroys the leaves, the young branches, and also the fruits.
In the latter it hardens and cracks the skin. The disease can be held in
check by spraying with Bordeaux mixture.

I. Pole Evans % also describes the harm done to peaches by Clado-
sporium carpophilum. It causes dark-coloured patches on the fruit, which
become hardened and tough. Winter spraying with Bordeaux mixture
is recommended.

Plant-diseases.§ — Jakob Eriksson remarks, on a paper published by
E. Voges, that he cannot agree with his statement that red-coloured
apples escape infection from Fusicladium, a statement not borne out by
experience in Sweden. Eriksson agrees with Voges as to the means for
combating the disease : collecting and burning all diseased leaves and
fruit and spraying with fungicides.

A. von Jaczewski|| gives a number of cases in which good results
followed the use of fungicides, especially with Bordeaux mixture. He
also describes and recommends other solutions, giving the cases in which
they would prove of service, especially in cases of hop disease, potato
disease, vine mildew, apple blotch, etc.

Paul SorauerlT describes a case of bitter plums, which was found to
be due to the growth of a Ghcosporium, probably a wound fungus, and
induced doubtless by a wet season, which caused so many fruits to crack.

Shot-hole fungus, Cercospora circumscissa, attacks the leaves of peach,
almond, cherry, etc., and the part infested by the fungus drops out. The
Board of Agriculture have issued a leaflet** describing the disease, and
explaining how very serious it is. It is stated that when nursery stock
is attacked to the extent of causing defoliation three seasons in succession,

* Agric. Journ. Union S. Africa, i. (1911) pp. 692-3 (1 pi.),

t Agric. Journ. Union S. Africa, i. (1911) pp. 694-5 (1 pi.).

: Agric. Journ. Union S. Africa, i. (1911) p. 696 (1 pi.).

§ Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xxi. (1911) pp. 129-31 (2 figs.).

i Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xxi. (1911) pp. 135-45 (3 figs.).

f Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xxi. (1911) pp. 145-6.

" Leaflet No. 247 (1911) 4 pp. (3 figs.).

#*

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 67^

the trees never completely recover. Spraying with a fungicide is recom-
mended to growers.

Notes have been published on the silver leaf disease, found by J.
Percival to be due to Stereum purpureum. Experiments carried out at
Woburn under the direction of Pickering* have proved the truth of
the theory. The disease was induced in healthy trees by inserting a
small piece of the fungus in a cut made in the bark. The disease is not
always fatal : about one-third of the trees attacked eventually recover.
Infected trees should be burnt.

F. Eulefield f chronicles cases of the death of five-year old pines
caused by Rhizina undulata, which grew on the roots and spread from
one tree to another through the soil.

In discussing % the parasitism of fungi, G. Arcangeli records the
finding of Fomes lucidus on Gedrus Deodara and on Abies cilicica, both
about thirty years old and in a decaying condition. He was doubtful if
the fungus were the cause of disease. Another case is given of a tree
on which grew Fomes rubriporus, but it had grown there many years
without damaging the tree. He cites also the occurrence of Armil-
laria mettea growing for years near to some trees which remained un-
injured.

W. 0. Grlover§ records the occurrence in Ohio of apple blotch, a
disease caused by the fungus Phyllosticta solitaria. At the time the
apples are about to be harvested the blotches are most prevalent, and
the pycnidia begin to appear in the diseased spots below the epidermis
of the apples. The fungus also attacks the leaves and twigs. Spraying
and pruning are both essential for the control of this disease.

In a leaflet issued by the Board of Agriculture || a description is
given of strawberry leaf-spot (SpltsereUa fragarise), a disease of the
leaves very common in all parts of the country, and when the injury is
severe the yield of fruit may be seriously affected. The writer recom-
mends spraying, or, after the fruit is gathered, mowing down the leaves
and burning them over the strawberry beds.

A summary! of the diseases of garden plants is given by J. Lind.
In Jutland, where there is much rain and a short summer, many trees
are killed by cancer. In Seeland and other isles better conditions prevail,
and cancer attacks the fruit-trees only in damp situations. Notes on
other diseases are also given.

R. Laubert ** writes on the most important diseases of the rose, one
of which, Coniothyrium wemsdorjise, appears as brown spots on the
branches in the early season of the year. The shoots above the parts
attacked become enfeebled or die. A Ilotrytis disease attacks the flower-
buds, especially in damp hot weather. Peronospora sparsa causes brown

* Journ. Board. Agric, xviii. (1011) pp. 38-9.

+ Nat. Zeitschr. Forst.-Landw., viii. (1910) pp. 527-9. See also Ann. Mvcol.,
is. (1911) p. 202.

I Atti Soc. Tosc. Sci. Nat., xx. (1911) pp. 13-16.

§ Ohio Naturalist, xi. (1911) pp. 334-6 (4 figs.).

I Leaflet No. 243, 2 pp. (1 fig.).

«[ Gartner Tideride, 1910, pp. 219-:!:.'. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) pp.
569-70.
** Gartenilora, 1910, Heft 5. See also Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xxi. (1911) pp. 233-4.

680 MMAl;V OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

spots on tlif leaves, which soon fall off. Various remedies are suggested
to combat these fungi.

The attention of potato -growers * is directed to the importance of
spraying their fields with Bordeaux mixture as a preventive against
potato disease. In wet seasons, when the disease is prevalent, spraying
is of great value, and, even in dry seasons, the treatment is beneficial to
the crop. It is recommended that the plants be sprayed as soon as there
is a good development of haulm in June or July, and again three weeks
later. Full directions are given in Leaflet No. 23 (Potato Disease),
published by the Board of Agriculture and Fisheries.

G. Landau f comments on the rapid spread of epidemic diseases of
plants, such as potato disease, mildew, etc. He is of opinion that there
must be various meteorological factors concerned of which we know
almost nothing.

G. Fron f found the fungus Lophodermium brachysporum causing a
malady of seedling pines by destroying the leaves on which it grew. The
fungus has not previously been recorded in France. Good results were
obtained in treating a similar fungus with Bordeaux mixture.

Ed. Griffon and A. Maublanc § publish a series of notes on plant
diseases that had come under their observation. Leaves of Helleboris
niger, the Christmas rose, showed large brown spots caused by a fungus
that had already been identified as Ooniothyrium Hellebori. The writers
describe the appearance of the mycelium in the tissues of the leaf, and of
the pycnidia which are scattered over the spots. They made successful
artificial cultures, reproducing the entire development of the Ooniothyrium.

The same authors || report the occurrence of the disease of the egg-
plant caused by Ascochyta hortorum, already reported from the United
States. It attacks the stalks, forming on them large brown spots covered
with minute pycnidia. It also attacks the leaves and the fruits.

Further diseases were noted by them If on cereals (Helmintho-
sporium) ; on Beetroot (Phoma tabifica) ; on Potatoes (ScUrotinia
Libert iaiui). Tomato plants, along with the potato, suffered in a
specially wet season from the ravages of Pkytophthora infestans. Notes
are given on the treatment of vine mildew by Bordeaux mixture, and of
the loss sustained where the vines have been neglected. There is a
record of the progress of oak mildew, which threatens to destroy the
young oaks. Gooseberry mildewr has not been noted in France, but the
writers do not see how it can eventually lie kept out, as it has spread
almost over the whole continent. They warn agriculturalists against
warted-scab of potatoes caused by Ghrysophlyctis mdobiotica. They de-
scribe the appearance of the disease and the methods adopted for stamp-
ing it out.

Doroguine ** reports a disease of Pine-needles caused by Gytosporina
septospora sp. n. The fungus causes yellow spots on the needles, cover-

* Journ. Board Agric, xviii. (1911) pp. 229-30.

t Nat. Wochenschr., n.f., ix. (1910) pp. 625-9. See also Bot. CentralM., cxvii.
( 191 1 ) p. 46. 1 Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 44-6 (3 figs.).

§ Bull. Soc. Mycol. Prance, xxvii. (1911) pp. 47-50 (2 figs.).
I Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 50-3 (1 fig.).
f B Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 53-67.

** Bull. Soc Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 105-6 (3 figs.).

/OOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 081

ing often a quarter to half the whole surface. This is the only species
of the genus with septate spores.

(i. Pethybridge * has published a second report on the diseases that
affect potatoes in West Ireland. He gives the results of experiments in
spraying the plants with Bordeaux mixture to destroy the blight caused
by Phytophthora infestans. He recommends early spraying. The ques-
tion of infection is discussed and the theory of dormant mycelium in the
tubers is not considered tenable, as in no case was it found that hyphae
passed up the stalks to the leaves. Sclerotinia sclerotiorum, a stalk
disease, works great havoc among the potatoes. It is probably a wound
fungus and infection takes place from aerial spores and not from the
soilT Fungicides were not found to be very effective. Besides Sclerotinia
the plants are often attacked by Botryti* : the black sclerotia of this
fungus arise on the surface of the stalk. Careful weeding and the
securing of dry conditions are recommended. A bacterial disease is
next described ; it causes rot in potatoes and also in swedes, carrots, and
parsnips. Infection probably takes place from the soil. Diseases due
to Spongospora suhterranea and to Hypochnus Solani are also described ;
results of experiments are given, and remedies dealt with. The paper is
well illustrated by figures reproduced from photographs.

A species of Nummular ia {N. discreta) f was found on the fallen
branch of an apple-tree at Sandsend, near Whitby, Yorkshire. It is
usually saprophytic, but may be a wound parasite, and has been destruc-
tive to apple-trees in the United States. It is now recorded for the first
time in this country. The first indication of disease is a brown and
more or less sunken appearance of the bark, in patches which are usually
scattered over a considerable area. Eventually the patches become dry
and cracked, and the fruits of the fungus appear on the wood.

Mycorhiza of Gastrodia.J — S. Kusano publishes a preliminary note
on this subject. Gastrodia has a much reduced vegetative organ, being
represented simply by a tuberous rhizome. It forms mycorhiza with
the rhizomorph of Armillaria mellea, the fungus penetrating by a
sucker-like branch of the rhizomorph strand. The tuber is so far
dependent on the mycorhiza that unless it is present the offsets pro-
duced tend to become small. In some cases, however, the fungus
penetrates deeper into the tuber and injures it.

Bainier, G., & A. Sartory — Etude d'une espece nouvelle de Sterigmatocystis

(Study of Sterigmatocystis flavipes.)
[Cultural studies were made.]

Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii.
(1911) pp. 90-7 (1 pi.).

,, ,, Etude de Aspergillus cinerescens sp.n. (Study

of Aspergillus cinerescens.)

[Cultures were made and results noted.]
Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii.
(1911) pp. 98-104 (1 pi.).

Bergamesco, G. — Specie dei generi Amanita Pers. ed Amanitopsis Roz. cue
crescono nel Bosco dei Camaldoli, presso Napoli. (Species of the genera Ama-
nita and Amanitopsis that grow in the forest of the Camaldoli, near Naples.)
[List of species observed.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital., 1911, pp. 13-16.

* Journ. Dept. Agric. Tech. Instr. Ireland, xi. 3, 34 pp. (14 figs.).
t Journ. Board Agric, xviii. (1911) pp. 314-15 (1 pi.).
X Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 521-2.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Bbesadola, J.— Fungi Congoenses.

[A large number of species from the Congo are listed, some of them new to
science.] Arm. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 26G 76.

Bbitton, E. G. — Fungi on Mosses.

[List of mosses supplied by G. Massee on which Cladosporium epibri/um
was found.] Mycologia, iii. (1911) p. 206.

CviiRPFY, Istvam — Novitas Bryologica \ enore Cryologica].

[Fungi parasitic on mosses, translated by Kd. Chamberlain.]

Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 41-3 (1 pi.).
Haeter, P. L. — A New Species of Alternaria.

[The fungus causes spots on Forsythia.'] Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 154-5.

Hohnel, F. von — Zur Systematik der Sphseropsideen mid Melanconieen.

[A scheme of classification for these difficult groups of
fungi.] Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 258-65.

„ ,, Ueber Coniodictyum Har. et Pat. und Hyalodema P. Magn.

[The writer insists that Coniodictyum Chevalieri is
identical with Hyalodema Evansii, and that the
fungus belongs to the Melanconiese.]

Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 213-16.

Hollrung.M. — Jahresbericht iiber das Gebiet der Pfianzenkrankheiten. (Annual
report on plant diseases.)

[Resume of all work done during the year on diseases caused by animals,

fungi, etc.] Berlin : Paul Pary, xii. 1909 (1911) viii. and 356 pp.

Jaczewski, A. von — Bemerkungen zu der Mitteilung von P. Magnus iiber

Bresadolia caucasica. (Remarks on the communications of P. Magnus on

Bresadolia caucasica.)

[The writer sees reason to agree with P. Magnus that the plant is a mon-
strous form of Polyporus squamostis.~\

Hedivigia, 1. (1911) pp. 253-4 (1 fig.)
Kolkwitz, Jahn & Minden — Pilze.

[The part issued deals with Myxobacterieae and with Chytridinese.]

Kryptogamenflora der Mark Brandenburg, v. 2 (1911)

pp. 193-352 (figs.).
Krieger, W. — Eine neue mycosphaerella aus Sachsen. (A new Mycosphserella.)
[Found on leaves of Solidago Virga aurea in Saxony.]

Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) p. 216.
Migula, W a lteh — Kryptogamen-Flora.

[Three fascicles have been recently issued, dealing with various genera of
Polyporei.]

Flora von Deutschland, v. lief. 111-14 (1911) pp. 209-72 (15 pis.).

Molz, E. — TJntersuchungen iiber die Wirkung des Karbolineums als Pnanzen-
schutzmittel. (Action of carbolineum as a fungicide and insecticide.)

Centralbl. Bakl, xxx. (1911) pp. 181-232 (8 pis. and 1 fig.).

Mu brill, W. A. — Illustrations of Fungi. VIII.

[Sixteen of the smaller forms, mostly of Agarics, are
printed in colour.] Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 97-105.

,, ,, Illustrations of Fungi. IX.

[Illustrations in colour and descriptions of seven species.]
Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 165-9 (1 pi.).

,, ,, The Agaricacese of Tropical North America. III.

[Descriptions of species from Jamaica, Mexico, etc., mostly
new.] Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 189-99.

Palm, B. — Nye bidrag till Stockholmstraktens Svampftora. (New contributions
to the fungus-flora of the Stockholm district.)

[A list of microfungi.] Svenskr. Bot. Tidsskr., iv. (1910) pp. 1-8.

See also Ann. Mycol. , ix. (1911) p. 301.

Podpera, Josef — Ein Beitrag zu der Kryptogamenflora der bulgarischen Hoch-
gebirge. (Contribution to the Crvptogamic flora of the Bulgarian highlands —
Ascolichens.) Beih. Bot. Centralbl, xxviii. (1911) pp. 195-9.

ZOOLOGY AND HOT ANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 683

Rehm — Ascomycetes exs. Fasc. 48.

[Specimens 1926-50 are listed, with notes and references.]

Arm. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 286-90.
Ricken, Adalbert — Die Blatterpilze.

[The Agaricaceae of Germany and neighbouring countries, especially Switzer-
land and Austria.]

Leipzig: Oswald Weigel, 1911, lief. 3-4, pp. 65-128 (15 col. pis.).

Sytz, Walthek — Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Pilzfiora des Kientales. (Contri-
bution to a knowledge of the fungus-flora of the Kien valley.)

[A considerable number of species are listed ; two are new to science —
Uromyces Poasalpinse and Coprimes giganteus.

Mitt. Nattirf. Ges. Bern, 1910 (1911) pp. G4-81 (1 pi.).

Saccardo, P. A. — Nota? Mycologicae.

[Notes on microfungi from many localities.]

Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 249-57.

Sydow, H. & P. — Fungi Africani novi. (New African fungi.)

[A list of twenty new parasitic species, with a special discussion of Hemileia.~\

Engler's Bot. Jahrb., xlv. (1910) pp. 259-65.
See also Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 302-3.
Vuillemin, Paul — Les Isaria de la famille de Verticilliacees (Spicaria et
Gibellula).

[Notes on various apecies of Gibellula, etc.]

Bull Soc. Mycol France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 75-82 (figs.).

Lichens.

(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

Relation of Siliceous Lichens to the Substratum.* — E. Bachmann
studied this subject on granite rocks. He found : 1. That granite is
reduced by the lichens comparatively quickly to a clay-like finely
granular yellow mass. 2. The lichen particles push from the edge of
the granite to the bottom of the small depression in which they are grow-
ing and seize with avidity on the mica. More rarely the lichen spreads
over the surface of the granite. 3. The spread of the lichen over the
rock is directed by the chances of humidity and of gripping the stone.

Northern Species of Alectoria in America.f — R. Heber Howe
has determined ten distinct species of Alectoria that occur in the tran-
sitional and Boreal zones. He finds that the genus presents a difficult
and complex problem, due to the enormous variations that occur in
filamentous lichens, but he insists on taking the broadest view of species,
and on allowing the two extremes of variation to stand far apart. Most
of the species are European as well as American. Careful descriptions
and notes are given of the different species.

Herre, \V. C. T. — The Gyrophoracese of California.

[An account of Gyrophora and Umbilicaria, with keys to the species, and
descriptions.]

Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb., xiii. 10 (1911) pp. 313-21 (6 pis.).

Hesse, 0. — Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Flechten und ihrer charakteristischen
Bestandteile. (Contribution to a knowledge of lichens and their characteristic
constituents.)

[Account of acids extracted from various lichens.]

Journ. praktische Chemie, n.f. lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 22-96.
See also Bot. Centralbl, cxvii. (1911) pp. 93-4.

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 261-73.
t Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 106-50 (7 pis.).

684 SUMMART OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Howe, 11. Hebbb — The Genus Evernia as represented in North and Middle

America.

[The genus is divided into the sections Lethcuria,
Archeverrtia, and Euevemia; the latter with
one species, E. trulla.]

Bot. Gaz., li. (1911) pp. 431-42 (2 pis.).
,, ,, List of Lichens collected in the Yukon Region by R. S.

Williams.

[Eighty-two species are listed.]

Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxviii. (1911)

pp. 287-93.
L ksdain, Bouly de — Lichens Beiges rares ou nouveaux. (List of crustaceous
lichens new to Belgium or rare.)

Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg., xlvii. (1910) pp. 39-45.
Olivier, H. — Lichens d'Europe. II.

[305 species are recorded in this fascicle ; synonymy, locality, and habitat
are given, with keys to genera and species, and with index.]

M&m. Soc. Nat. Sci. Nat. Math. Cherbourg, xxxvii.

(1908-10) pp. 29-200.
Steinee, Julius — Adnotationes lichenographicae.

[New species and new varieties of lichens are described
from various localities.]

Oesterr. bot. Zeitschr., 1911, Nos. 5, 6 (8 pp.).
,, ,, Flechten aus dem italienische-franzbsischen Grenz' gebiete

and aus Mittelitalien. (Lichens from the borderland be-
tween France and Italy and from Central Italy.)

[A large number of species are listed, including many
new species ]

Verh. k.k. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien, 1911,

pp. 29-64.
Zahlbbucknee, Alexander — Transbaikalische Lichenen. (Lichens from
beyond L. Baikal.)

Trav. Sous. Sect. Troitzk.-Eiakhta, Section du pays d'amour
Soc. Imp. Russe de Geogr., xii. Liv. 1-2 (1909) pp. 73-95.

Mycetozoa.

(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

Studies in Myxomycetes.* — E. Jahn has made many spore cultures
and studies of plasniodium to determine the occurrence of sexuality in
the Myxomycetes. He states that in many species plasmodium forma-
tion can be observed. As soon as ciliated spores are formed he advises
drying, when these become encysted, and with renewed wetting they
divide ; this can be repeated several times. The species most easily
dealt with were Stemonitis fusca, Trichia varia, Oligonema ?iitensf
Physarum nutans, P. compressum, and P. didermokles. Jahn sums up
his results thus : 1. Plasmodium formation begins among numerous
amoeba? at certain points with small amoebfe-like stages. 2. These
young plasmodia exercise no attractive influence on surrounding arnoebse ;
they devour them when they encounter them. 3. Nuclear increase
follows also from the earliest stages in normal development of karyo-
kinesis. 4. In young plasmodia with normal development the numbers
of nuclei are always even ; uneven numbers are very rare. 5. Plasmodia
nuclei have the double chromosome number of the amoeba? nuclei. 6.
An amoeboid and nuclear copulation could be seen. 7. Nuclear division
before spore-formation is a reduction division.

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 231-47 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY VXD l'.OTAXV, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. 685

Alternation of Generations in Myxomycetes.* — V. Vouk has con-
sidered the Myxomycetes from a biological and cytological standpoint.
He concludes that the zoospores are the vegetative stage or progameto-
phyte ; the nryxauioebae, also a vegetative stage, and the plasmodium or
generative stage, belong to the gametophyte generation. The fruiting
body with spores, the fructiricative stage, corresponds to the sporophyte.
He calls the first generation a water-form, the second a land-form, of
life.

New Research on Plasmodiophoracese.t — Rene Maire and Adrien
Tison have made further studies of Sorosphaera Veronicse, and of Tetra-
myxa parasitica, which they also include among the Plasmodiophoracete.
It forms tumours on Ruppia rostellata. A series of forms that do not
form tumours have been described by them under the genus Ligniera.
The parasite of TrigJochin, Tetramyxa triglochinis, is constantly asporo-
genous, and has been placed in a new genus Molliardia. Schizogonic
mitosis is remarkably similar in all the known Plasmodiophoraceae, and
the absence of multiple karyogamy before spore-formation thus separates
the family from the Myxomycetes. The affinity of Ligniera with Rhizo-
myxa and Woronina suggests the origin of Plasmodiophoraceae as near
to the Chytridiales.

Spongospora subterranea.^ — T. G. B. Osborn has written an account
of the life-history and cytology of this parasite of the potato. It
lives in the cells of the tuber in an amoeboid condition, and invades the
new cells as they are formed in the tissue. The nuclei of the amoebse
divide amitotically, and then fuse to form a plasmodium. This is fol-
lowed by degeneration, and the vegetative nuclei are replaced by chro-
midia — the akaryote stage. Following this, the nuclei are formed on
different sites from the previous ones, some chromidia being used in the
process while the remainder degenerate. Karyogamy takes place between
pairs of nuclei, after which the enlarged nuclei show contraction of the
chromatin, possibly a condition of synapsis. Two karyokinetic divisions
of the nucleus follow, the second having eight chromosomes. The spores
are uninucleate, and are massed into spore-balls. Spongospora is a
member of the Plasmodiophoraceae.

Life-history of Sorosphaera graminis.§ — E. J. Schwartz found this
new species on tubercles on the roots of grasses. The swellings were
caused by eel-worms ; the second parasite was an amoeboid organism,
which proved to be a Sorosphaera. The grasses were partially affected
by the presence of the tubercles : they were less healthy and less frequently
in flower. Schwartz describes carefully cytology and development of
the species. It is closely allied to S. Junci and S. Veronicas, and does
not materially differ from them in its life-history.

* Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., lxi. (1911) pp. 131-9. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvii.
{1911) p. 33.

t Ann. Mvcol., ix. (1911) pp. 226-46 (5 pis.).
I Ann. of "Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 327-41 (1 pi.).
§ Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 791-7 (1 pi. ).

Oct. 18th, 1911 -2 v

686 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Schizophyta.
Schizomycetes.

Bacillus Cellulosse Desagregans sp. n.* — From the intestinal con-
tents of fowls A. Distaso lias isolated an organism which possesses the
power of breaking up cellulose. For the purpose of his experiments
the author made use of Berzelius' paper. A short straight bacillus, with
Bquare ends, forming oval subterminal spores, this organism is with
difficulty stained by Gram's method, and does not resist prolonged de-
colorizing. It is a facultative anaerobe, incapable of growth at 22°('.%
but growing well in glucose-agar at :!7° C, not producing gas. It
attacks glucose freely, and is without action on maltose, lactose, or
saccharose. It changes starch rapidly into sugar. It decomposes the
cellulose in filter-paper, potato, salads, and peas, forming sugar.

Spirophyllum ferrugineum.t — In this paper D. Ellis replies to the
criticisms made by Molisch upon the authenticity of this species. This
new species of iron-bacterium was first described in a paperj com-
municated to the Royal Society of Edinburgh. In his book upon the
iron-bacteria Molisch expresses the view that this organism is identical
with Gallionella ferruginea. In the present paper D. Ellis emphasizes
the points of distinction between the two species. Spirophyllum appears
as a spiral band, Gallionella has the form of a thread twisted spirally
round itself. The former has been watched through the complete
course of its life-history, and no evidence of transition between this and
Gallionella has been observed. In its young stages Spirophyllum is
motile ; no motile phase has been observed in Gallionella. The author
further defends his observations, which also were attacked by Molisch,
that conidia-formation takes place in Spirophyllum, Gallionella, and
Leptolhrix. The paper is illustrated by microphotographs.

Pigment of Azotobacter Chroococcum.§ — W. L. Omeliansky and
O. P. Ssewerowa, after a review of the literature upon this subject, give
an account of their own observations. Various strains of this organism
isolated from the soil show differences in their powers of producing
pigment. Between good pigment-producers and strains which do not
show any pigment there are intermediate strains. The age of the
culture has some influence upon this, an old brown culture, when
replanted, giving rise to a growth which rapidly produces pigment.
Free access of air is necessary, and the optimum temperature is 30° 0.
The most suitable medium for stimulating pigment-formation is chalk-
dextrin-agar containing 2-3 p.c. of dextrin. The pigment is insoluble
in most reagents, but dissolves in alkalis, probably undergoing a
chemical change. It is possible that this brown pigment may be a
factor in determining the prevalent brown colour of the soil.

Human and Bovine Tubercle. || — A. Eber records experiments which
give additional support to the hypothesis that tubercle bacilli of the

* C.R. Sue. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 995-6.

t Proc. lluy. Soc. Edinburgh, xxxi. (1911) pp. 499-504.

% Proc. Hoy. Soc. Edinburgh, xxvii. 1 (1907).

§ Centra 11.1. Jiakt., 2'e Abt., xxix. (1911) pp. 643-50.

i| Centralbl. Bakt., 1«- Abt. Orig., lix. (1911) pp. 193-364.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 687

human and bovine types are identical. Material from a number of
eases of phthisis were inoculated into guinea-pigB. Simultaneous sub-
cutaneous and intraperitoneal inoculations of material from these guinea-
pigs into cattle produced lesions from which were obtained bacilli, which
were shown both by inoculations and culture to belong to the bovine
type, although the bacilli obtained from the patients showed all the
characters of human tubercle. In one case inoculation into cattle of a
pure culture of tubercle bacilli of the human type, obtained from a
patient suffering from tubercle of the knee-joint, produced lesions from
which bovine bacilli were isolated.

Alopecia areata of Bacterial Origin.* — F. Guegueu has found that
certain cases of recurrent alopecia are due to the invasion of the hairs
by a micro-organism, to which he has given the name Bacillus endothrix.
Microscopical examination of the diseased hairs shows the presence of
striations, which are resolved, under a high power, into chains of short
bacilli. In a cross section of the hair these appear as cocci. A small
number of these organisms are found in the follicles. In order to obtain
a growth of B. endothrix short sections of hair are planted on end upon
the surface of a peptone-gelatin slope, the outside of the hair having been
freed previously from adherent contaminating organisms. Small chrome-
yellow colonies appear in 48 hours. Morphologically the organisms are
short, capsulated, Gram -positive organisms, which possess neither spores
nor flagella. In older cultures there is a marked tendency to pleomor-
phism. Gelatin is not liquefied, sugars are not fermented. A number of
inoculation experiments have been performed with negative results.

Studies of the Intestinal Flora.f — A. Distaso has made a study of
certain bacteria, components of the intestinal flora, which can survive in
an acid medium and decompose carbohydrates, producing simple acids,
such as acetic acid. The principal members of this group are Bacillus
bifidus and Coccus banani. The types here described are Bacillus acrto-
genus a and (3, B. acetogenus proteiformis sp. n., B. butyricus pseudobul-
garis sp. n., B. dimorpltus sp. n., and B. paraexilis sp. n. A full account
of the morphological character of these new forms is given. In a con-
sideration of the part played by these bacteria in the intestine it is
pointed out that they can inhibit the growth of putrefactive organisms,
and moreover that the acids produced stimulate peristalsis. The more
complex substances produced by bacteria of the B. coli group will also
stimulate peristalsis, it is true, but the movements so produced are violent,
leading possibly to diarrhoea, whereas those due to the acetogenic group
are gentle, not exceeding normal physiological movements, while sufficient
to prevent stasis. These organisms all have certain characteristics in
common. They are Gram-positive and decompose sugars with great
activity. They grow well upon sugar media, producing acetic or lactic
acid, and with difficulty upon alkaline media. They are very poly-
morphic.

In a second contribution % the author considers the intestinal an-

* Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lix. (1911) pp. 1-20.
+ Centralbl. Bakt., 1. Abt. Orig., lix. (1911) pp. 48-63.
X Centralbl. Bakt., l,e Abt. Orig., lix. (1911) pp. 97-103.

2 y 2

688 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

aerobes, which have proteolytic functions. The morphological characters
of ten new species are described in full. These organisms have a very
wide distribution in nature.

Sarcina Citrea conjunctivae.* - From the conjunctival sac of a
patient suffering from conjunctivitis Ph. Verderanie has isolated a
Gram-negative organism, to which he has given the above name. It
grows well upon the ordinary media, both at room temperature and at
37 C, and is a facultative anaerobe. Blood-serum is liquefied, but not
gelatin. Milk is not clotted. Neither flagella nor spores can be
demonstrated, and the organism is non-motile. Colonies upon most
media develop a lemon tint, which gives the Sarcina its specific name.
It must be distinguished from S. citrina, a Gram-positive organism,
which liquefies gelatin and clots milk.

New Anaerobe in Typhoid Stools, f — By inoculating this material
into a fluid medium composed of a mixture of bile and broth, containing
a small cube of cooked white of egg, and after two or three days
planting some of the deposit from this medium in glucose-agar, J. Loris-
Melikov has obtained colonies of an anaerobic bacillus which has, in his
opinion, an important influence upon the course of the disease. The
colonies are small and transparent. The bacilli are non-motile, forming
ovoid spores, and retain the colour upon the application of Gram's
method. They are strict anaerobes, and grow well only at 37° C.
Inoculation experiments show that they have a specific effect upon the
lymphoid tissue of the intestines, causing swelling and ulceration of
the follicles and of Peyer's patches. They have not been found in the
stools of persons not suffering from typhoid. They are agglutinated
by typhoid serum in a dilution of 1 : 100. The author considers that
this organism has a necrosing action in typhoid fever, supplementing
the septicaemia caused by Eberth's bacillus.

Pathogenicity of Bacillus chlororaphis.J — This organism, isolated
from certain spring-waters, has the property of producing a green
crystalline pigment upon cultures under special conditions. L. Mercier
and Ph. Lasseur have injected cultures of this bacillus into crayfish,
frogs, bream, and other fresh-water fishes, with fatal results iu the
majority of cases. Further experiments are still in progress, particularly
feeding experiments, and the evidence as to the pathogenicity of this
organism is not yet complete.

Rat Plague in East Anglia.§ — In the autumn of 1910 it became
known that an extensive epizootic of plague was affecting the rodents in
a certain portion of Suffolk. The occurrence of a few human cases in
October called attention to the dangers of such an epizootic, and in the
beginning of 1911 systematic investigations were carried out with a
view to ascertaining the boundaries of the infected area. G. F. Petrie
and G. H. Macalister examined more than 6000 rats collected from a

* Centralbl. Bakt., l»e Abt. Orig., lix. (1911) pp. 377-85.

t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 865-6.

I C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 889-91.

§ Rep. Local Gov. Board, n.s. No. 52 (1911) viii. and 87 pp. (2 maps).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 689

wide marginal zone bounding the known infected area. The great
majority of these rats were perfectly healthy. Seventy-three rats, set
aside for further enquiry, either because the possibility of plague infection
was suspected or because some pathological feature of interest was
present, were found to be infected with the Gaertner bacillus or some
other irrelevant organism. From three rats an organism wTas isolated
which resembled the Bacillus pestis morphologically and culturally.
Further investigation, however, of the sugar reactions of these organisms
and of their virulence to rats showed that they must be regarded as
identical with B. pseudotuberculosis rodentium rather than B. pestis.
So that no plague-infected rats were found in the marginal zone
investigated.

Bacteriological Studies of Danish Butter.* — 0. Jensen remarks
upon the use of lactic ferments in the preparation of butter, and states
that his investigations show that such soured butter remains freer from
contamination by harmful organisms than simple butters. Pasteurization,
salting, and lactic ferments are three factors which cause a simplification
in the flora of butter. The lactic acid organisms principally used in
Denmark are two species of streptococci, a finer form, Diplococcus acidi
lactici, and a coarser form, occurring in long chains. It has been found
that the two organisms working together have a greater lactic fer-
mentation power than have either of them when working in pure
culture. Discussing the disorders of butter, the author mentions
" cheesiness," which is due to the invasion of Streptococcus casei amari.
He has also found in some samples a butter-fat-splitting form, Bacillus
fluorescens liquefaciens. The author further discusses moulds and yeasts
met with upon butter under various conditions.

Variation and Adaptation in Bacteria. f — E. W. A. Walker, who
has made observations upon streptococci with special reference to the
value of fermentation tests as applied to these organisms, arrived at the
following conclusions. The reactions of any given strain of strepto-
coccus in Gordon's mediaj vary considerably under the conditions of
ordinary laboratory cultivation, and by suitable manipulation of the
culture-media they can readily be made to vary very greatly. The
results obtained entirely oppose the view that these reactions afford a
means of distinguishing fixed and definite varieties among streptococci
isolated from the human subject. Such differences as are observed are
of a temporary and accidental character, and are not in any sense
specific, though they may perhaps afford some evidence of the natural
habitat or previous environment of the organisms concerned.

Schroeter& Gutjahb — Vergleichende Studien der Typhus-coli-Dysenteriebak-
terien in Auschlass an eine kleine Ruhr, epidemie in Mitteldeutschland.

Centralbl. Bakt., It" Abt. Orig., lviii. (1911) pp. 577-624.

Stevenson, W. — The Distribution of the '"Long Lactic Bacteria" — Lactobacilli.

Centralbl. Bakt., 2«* Abt., xxx. (1911) pp. 345-8.

* Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xxix. (1911) pp. 610-16.
t Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 541-58.
X See this Journal, TJOt;, p. 87.

61*0

SUMMARY OF (TKKKXT IfKSKAHCUKS RELATING TO

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments. Accessories, etc.*
(1) Stands.

Garjeanne's Simple Excursion Microscope.f — A.J. M.Garjeanne

describes this instrument, which has been made to his designs by Messrs.
W. Watson and Sons, London. The weight of this Microscope, when
made of the ordinary brass and iron, does not exceed 1250 grm. ; but

Fig. 74.

this might be considerably reduced by the use of lighter metal. The in-
strument can be packed in a mahogany box 15-5xllxll cm., weigh-
ing 500 grm. ; the box provides room for two objectives, two oculars,
and some small utensils. Fig. 74 shows the stand shut up, the height to
the lower rim of the ocular being only 12 • 8 cm. The dimensions of
the foot confer great stability, and are, AB = 9'8 cm., OD = 7'8 cm.
The object-stage is rectangular, <s-6x7'<s cm., and is made with the
Nelson cut-out. A simple diaphragm-disc is below the stage. The

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands ; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives ; (3)
Illuminating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 5G-8 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICliOSCOPY, ETC.

691

total length of the tube is 16 cm. open, 10 ■ 3 cm. closed. The pecu-
liarity of the stand is the absence of ;i pillar between the foot and the
hinge for oblique position (fig. 75). The mirror works in a clamping-
ring between the toes of the horse-shoe foot ; it can be shifted forwards
and backwards. "When the stand is inclined at about 30° the distance

Fig. 75.

between the mirror centre and the diaphragm centre is about 4 cm., and
the sliding adjustability of the mirror renders it possible to bring the
mirror centre into the optical axis. As will be noticed from the illus-
trations, there is only one adjustment, a rack-and-pinion. But in all
modern instruments the rack-and-pinion is so well made that it suffices
for this Microscope.

692

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES KKLATING TO

Winkel's Demonstration Microscope with Detachable Foot. — A
short description of this instrument (figs. 76, 77) will be found omp. 407.

Fig. 76.

Fig. 77.

ZOOLOGY AN1> BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

693

Recent Progress in the Construction of Mineralogical and Metal-
lurgical Microscopes.* — E. Sommerfeldt treats of this subject with
especial reference to the last decade. The following are the titles of his
sections and sub-sections : —

1. The Petrographic Microsco/>e.—Widti-SLng\e& types ; improvements
in the condenser ; microscopes with simultaneous rotatory nicols.

•1. The Grystallographic Microscope. — Stands for observations at high
temperatures ; stands for universal (rotatory) methods.

8. The Metallo graphic Microscope.

4. Microscopical Auxiliaries. — Condenser and ^nr=
ocular ; heating apparatus ; hardness measure- JP ,
ments ; accessories for metallographic microscopy.

(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives.

Fig. 78.

Allan's Variable Eye-piece. — This eye-piece
(fig. 78) was fully described by Mr. Conrad Beck
at "the June Meeting (see Proceedings, ante,
p. 570).

(3) Illuminating' and other Apparatus.

History of the Cardioid Condenser : Memo-
randum on the Leitz Mirror Condenser.f — In
order to correct a somewhat ambiguous refer-
ence in A. Gdeichen's Die Theorien der modernen optischen Instru-
mente,| W. v. Ignatowsky supplies the following information about the
cardioid condenser. He states that Siedentopf's cardioid was first de-
scribed in September, 1900, but that his (Ignatowsky's) had been actually
placed on the market by Leitz in October, 1907, and its theory had been
published in 1908. It has, in fact, been shown by Sckwarzschild,§ as
Siedentopf admits, that the cardioid condenser is a special case of a more
general construction. The author gives an outline of Schwarzschild's
investigation.

Apparatus for Microscopical Observation of Frozen Objects. ||
E. Schaffnit's cold-chamber is constructed out of a rectangular metal
box, 9 by 2 cm. and 2 '5 cm. deep. The glass lid slides in a groove, and
is perforated for reception of the Microscope objective ; the metal floor
is similarly perforated for receiving the condenser (fig. 79). The object-
carrier d, about 15 cm. long, slides through a slit in the side wall c, and
is steadied by two clips. The side walls are perforated for the escape of
the carbonic acid vapours. A suitably graduated thermometer g passes
through the front wall. Two watch-glasses for ether are placed on the
chamber-floor, and are filled with a pipette. There is a suitable
tube-attachment to a carbonic acid steel cylinder ; it is desirable to

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk.. xxviii. (1911) pp. 70-82.
t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. ( l'Jll) pp. 50-55 (2 figs.).
J Stuttgart : F. Enke, p. 248.

§ Abhandl. d. Kgl. Gesell. d. Wiss. z. Gofctingen, Math. Physik. Klasse : IV.
" Untersuchungen zur geometrischen Optik ii."

|| Zeitschr, wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (l'Jll) pp. 45-8 (2 figs.).

694

SUMMABY OK ( UKKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

place the cylinder on the observer's left, so that he can with his left
hand regulate the outflow of gas. The whole chamber is clamped to the
Microscope. With a continuous stream of gas a temperature of —30 0.
is quickly and easily attained. The author has not found any injurious
results happen to his lenses.

Fig. 79.

Leiss' Universal Spectral Apparatus.* — This apparatus has been
constructed by the firm of Fuess, and many of its novelties have
been suggested by J. Koenigsberger. The instrument is intended to
be available for observations upon emission spectra, absorption spectra,
Zeeman effects, wave motions, and measurements of layer thicknesses.
Fig. 80 gives a general view of the apparatus, and fig. 81, which is a
horizontal section through the collimator and the telescope, represents
the optical arrangements. The bearer A of the observation-telescope is
rotatory about a conical vertical axis carried on a strong tripod fitted
with levelling screws. The bellows also, as far as possible, take part
in this rotatory movement. The lever screws a clamp A, while the
micrometer-screw a^ operates the fine-adjustment. Connected with this
is a drum graduated into 150 equal parts, each part corresponding to an
angular distance of 10". A large loup L facilitates the reading of the
drum divisions, an electric glow-lamp e for 2 or 4 volts serving as an
illuminator. The load of the bearer A is counterpoised by the weight g.
In the above-mentioned conical axis a conical plug is inserted, rotatory
by means of the milled head K for adjusting the prism-table, which is
clamped on to the plug by the screwy. The screw k1 clamps the axis of

/.(it. f. tnst rumen tenk., xxx. (1910) pp. 353-7 (2Jfigs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

695

the prism-table. The collimator is supported by a very strong pillar
situated on one of the legs of the tripod. The slit opens symmetrically ;
its cheeks are of hard steel ; it is first accurately adjusted for infinity

o

GO

and then firmly secured to the collimator. A drum interval of the
micrometer-screw corresponds to O'Ol mm. A rotatory disc s is in front
of the slit, and is useful in connexion with the camera, It can be easily
exchanged for two discs for photometric measurements in the case of very

r.'.u;

sr.M.MAUV OF CUKRKNT RKSKARCHES RELATING TO

high dispersion. One of these discs carries a totally reflecting prism,
through which light passes from the comparison light-source; it also
carries a holder, in which gauged smoke-glass wedges with scale and

QO

6

platinized glass plates can be inserted for weakening the light-source to
a measurable quantity. A second disc is provided for photometric com-
parisons with the smoke-glass wedges in the direction of the collimator-
tube : this arrangement is for measuring the selective absorption of

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 697

emitted flames. Behind the slit is a nicol N, movable in and out, and a
plane parallel glass plate <J. inclined at 45°, and also movable in and out.
The nicol is used for observing Zeeman effect, electrical and magnetic
double refraction, normal and abnormal magnetic rotations. For observ-
ing the Zeeman effect parallel to the lines of force, a mica J-A double plate,
right and left circularly polarized, is placed in front of the slit ; the nicol
is then pushed in. For observing the same phenomenon perpendicular
to the lines of force there are two methods : one is to place in front of
half of the slit a plate of quartz cut perpendicularly to the axis ; the other
is to place a |-A double plate of mica. A Rowland's grating is then
applied in order to avoid the overlapping of the spectra. The nicol is
also so placed that its direction of displacement (electric or Fresnel's
victor) is vertical. For measuring electric or magnetic double refrac-
tion, the mica plate is brought on to the slit of the collimator (after
Koenigsberger) ; then comes the compensator, next the substance in the
electric field, and then a second nicol.

If the nicol, as is the case here, is applied to the collimator, then
the adjustment of the collimator-lens must be altered, and this adjust-
ment is facilitated by the provision of a notch. The inner nicol affords,
in contrast with other arrangements, the advantage of greater brightness
with moderately small dimensions ; it is also very easily adjustable.
Anyone who has once worked with it will scarcely ever abandon it.

The glass plate also serves for measuring layer-thicknesses and
phase-origins by Wernicke and Wiener's methods. Near the collimator-
objective Ox is a shutter M, which can be regulated up to 0*02 seconds
for time and instantaneous exposures.

The observation tube F and the camera K are easily interchange-
able. A glass micrometer divided into hundredths is inserted at the
image-plane / of the telescope ; it is illuminated from' a lateral slit.
Two diaphragms can also be inserted at / for shutting out desired
parts of the spectrum. A Young's prism arrangement produces the
dispersion, which can be increased, if desired, by a Cornu double prism.

The camera K is entirely of metal, and for coincidence photographs
a rotatory disc s, with four apertures, is placed in front of the slit.

Glass Polarizing Prisms.* — Of late years calcite has become not
only scarce but difficult to obtain sufficiently large and free from defects.
The expense of calcite polarizing prisms is consecpiently considerable.
Among other substitutes glass prisms of suitable angle have been sug-
gested. H. Schulz quotes a form due to Stotze (fig. 82) in which the
angle tv of the prism A B C D E F is so chosen that the ray passing per-
pendicularly through A B and D E is totally polarized at incidence on
BC, the plane EF being silvered to diminish the weakening of light-
intensity due to reflection at its surface. The lateral displacement of
the polarized beam is, however, a great disadvantage, and has been an
obstacle to the adoption of the method. H. Schulz now proposes a
prism of the form shown in fig. 83, by which the path of the emergent

* Zeit. f. Iustruuieuteuk., xxxi. (l'Jll) pp. 180-2 (2 figs.).

698

siMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ray is a continuation of that of the incident ray. The author also dis-
cu^srs some otjier forms of prisms suitable for the same purpose.

E Go

a I
I

I /

A i iff, B

: i

xT?L _ _

Fig. 82.

Fig. 83.

Aids to Crystalloptic Projection.* — In discussing the above subject
J. Beckenkanip recommends the use of a lantern-screen prepared with
aluminium bronze. Photometric tests of such a screen in comparison
with screens of other kinds are very much in its favour. The most
advantageous position is to arrange so that the incident beam of light
falls horizontally on the vertical screen ; moreover, the light-beam should
be central with regard to the auditorium, the screen being about 3-4 m.
from the lantern. The spectators should be ranked on each side of the
optic axis of the lantern, and, if possible, the rows should rise in tiers
one behind another.

Emrys-Roberts Microscope Lamp. — This apparatus (fig. 84) was
exhibited and described at the June Meeting (see Proceedings, ante,
p. 571).

Fig. 84.

Model of the Vibration-planes of Light in the Polarizing Appa-
ratus, t — In order to assist the realization of the path of a ray of light

* SB. Pliys. Med. Gesell. zu Wiirzburg, 1911, pp. 13-16.
t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 42-5 (1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

699

through ;i polariscope, H. Triepel has designed the model shown in
fig. 85. It consists of a rod about 4o cm. high, on a firm foot. Four
pairs of cardboard sheets fitting into tubes are slipped over the rod, and
are thus easily adjustable in any required vertical positions. In each of
the two central pairs the cards arc at right angles. The whole arrange-

Arralysator.

Hauptschnltt.

Sinachsigr negahv doppeUbrichentl.
Ausserordentticher Strahl

Fig. 85.

ment illustrates the ray as it passes successively through polarizator,
selenite, object, and analyzer. The optical axis is supposed to be vertical,
and the axis of the nicol prism inclined to it at 22°. Suitable informa-
tion is recorded on the sheets.

Leitz Liliput Arc-lamp.* — This auxiliary is intended for photo-
micrograph^ use, and is illustrated above in fig. 63, p. 541. It pro-

Leitz, Catalogue 43 G, Photomicrographic Apparatus, p. 9.

,00 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

vides a current of 4 amperes, and 1ms rack feed and centring adjust-
ment. It lias also extension gear for adjusting the carbons while the
image on the screen is being observed.

I (4) Photomicrography.

Wychgram, E. — Aus Optischen und mechanischen Werkstatten iii.

[The author gives a very interesting sketch of the progress and develop-
ment of instruments connected with projection and photomicrography
during the last two years.]

Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 59-69 (6 figs.).

(5) Microscopical Optics andiManipulation.

Observations on the Technical Execution and Biological Real-
ization of Microscopical Measurements.*— R. von Lenderfeld reminds
his readers of the great variability in the magnitudes both of crystals of
the same chemical composition and of organisms of the same species.
The difficulty of appropriately measuring them is therefore so great that
the only sound method must be biometric. Thus, for example, the
magnitudes of spicules and such like should be stated in relation to the
magnitudes of the parent body. This would obviously require a great
many measurements ; but the measurements could, however, be plotted
out on a curve and so afford a realization of their biological value. He
has, therefore, contrived a measuring apparatus susceptible of great accu-
racy, and so arranged that a skilled worker can make a large number of
successive observations and dictate them to an assistant. He projects
the microscopic image on to a large plane mirror which reflects the
image back on to a fixed matt glass screen of about 4 sq. m. in size.
The mirror has universal adjustment, so that the image, which is of course
a much enlarged one, is brought to a convenient spot on the screen in
front of the observer's seat. The Microscope is so placed that the ob-
server is able, without leaving his seat, to regulate the movements of the
object on the Microscope stage. The dimensions of the image on the
matt screen are ascertained by the use of scales specially drawn on tracing
linen. An objective micrometer is used in the Microscope, and thus the
proportion of image to object is known. A large number of measure-
ments on one object, or on a group of similar objects, can be quickly
and easily made, the results being dictated to an assistant who sits at a
table behind the observer. The author has found his method give very
satisfactory results.

Opacity of Certain Glasses for the Ultra-violet.f — L. Bell has
examined the spectra yielded by ultra-violet rays after transmission
through specimens of various kinds of glasses. Photographs are given of
the results, which vary very much in opacity. The light-source used was
a quartz mercury lamp.

16) Miscellaneous.

Some New Diatomic Structures discovered with a New Zeiss
Apochromat4— A. A. C. E. Merlin describes the results of his use of a

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 27-34 (3 figs.).

t Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., xlvi. (1911) pp. 671-80 (2 pis.).

J Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1911, pp. 199-202.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 701

new Zeiss ^ apocliromat made in 1910. He tested it upon diatomic
structures, although the lens had not been specially constructed for such
work. In several cases doubtful features were completely established ;
in others new features were revealed. Among the instances he <nves are
the following : —

Craspedodiscus coscinodiscus. — Secondaries previously doubtful, now
clearly exhibited.

Epithemia turgida. — Primaries prove to be irregularly cruciform in
shape, somewhat of the arachnodiscas type. High magnification (3000)
required.

Cymbella gastroides Kiitz. — Primaries rectangular in shape, divided
and broken up into secondaries.

Gomphonema geminatum Ag. — Secondaries closely resembling the
foregoing.

Stictodiscus areolatus Grun (Oamaru). — Exhibits a delicate but not
particularly difficult network on the lower surface of the valve. A fine
dotted structure can be seen on the under edge of the rim.

Aulacodiscus Janischii Gr. and St. (Oamaru). — Exhibits a very dis-
tinct and obvious veil. Should prove to be within the grasp of most
good cheap oil-immersion lenses.

Eudktia oceanica Ehr. (fossil, from Peru guano). — Possesses easy
secondary perforations plainly seen in balsam.

All the foregoing observations were made with working apertures
varying between 1*3 and 0-95 N.A. In no instance was oblique light
or a smaller illuminating cone employed.

The Micrologist.*— This quarterly journal, edited by A. Flatters,
made its first appearance in July 1910. Its aims are to instruct the
amateur microscopist in the methods of preparing and mounting natural
history specimens for microscopical examination. It is illustrated by
photomicrographs and also by ordinary line or half-tone blocks. The first
volume contains manipulative methods necessary for microscopical work,
and in the future special types will be taken, selections being made from
those not generally dealt with in ordinary text-books. The first five
numbers more than bear out the intention of the editor : they are full
of practical information and are most excellently illustrated. The price
is very moderate.

Principal Starches used as Food.f — This work by Waldron Griffiths
has passed into a second edition. Its general characters are unaltered,
but the number of illustrations has been considerably increased and the
short descriptions have been as far as possible brought up to date. The
object of the work is to facilitate the identification of starch, especially
when used either for purposes of adulteration or substitution ; it cer-
tainly fulfils the intention of the author.

Gleichen, A. — Die Theorien der modernen optischen Instrumente.

Stuttgart : P. Enke (1911) 332 pp.

* Manchester: Flatters, Milborne, and M'Kechnie, Ltd., 1910-11, pts. i.-v.
t Cirencester : Baily and Woods (1911) 2nd ed. 70 pp. (38 figs.).

Oct. 18th, 1911 -1 Z

702

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

B. Technique.*

2) Preparing- Objects.

Effects of Pyridin Fixation upon Nervous Tissues.! — A. Montanari
has made observations upon the effect of this fixative upon the cells of
the medulla. Following Donaggio's method, he put portions of the tissue
into the fixing reagent for varying periods of two to seven days, treated
them with the mordant, ammonium chlor-molybdate, and stained with
thionin. He found that there was a marked difference between the
appearance of the cellular structure in those portions
that had been in pyridin for two days, and in those that
had been exposed to the action of the fixative for longer
periods. He describes the appearances successively of cells
which had been fixed for two, three, four, and so on up to
seven or more davs, and traces the changes from a first
period of spongy vacuolation through an intermediate
stage, showing a false network to a final form in which a
true network with monilif orni septa is seen. Concurrently
with these reticular changes, an alteration in the be-
haviour of the nuclei towards the stain is observed.
The author considers that this work may have a bearing
upon the question whether the fibrillation of nervous
cells is to be regarded as an artefact.

Simple Washing Apparatus. J — E. Schaffnit has
devised the simple piece of apparatus shown in fig. 86.
To a water-tap is attached by means of rubber tubing a
filter funnel or flask, from which the bottom has been
removed. The open end of this vessel is covered with
fine silk, fixed round the edge. Portions of tissue to be
washed are introduced either through the neck or
through the open end before fixing the silk membrane.
Before turning on the water the flask is placed in a
horizontal axis and half filled with water ; then it is

Fig. 86. restored to its normal position, and as the water

continues to flow, the air pressure maintains it at a

constant level. To remove the smaller portions of tissue, when washing

is complete, the rubber tube is removed, and the flask immersed in water,

so that the material floats through the neck.

Simultaneous Fixing and Staining.§ — F. Strecker comments upon
the advantages, for histological purposes, of using solutions in which
the fixing and staining agents are mixed. After a concise resume of the
methods and formulas recommended by various workers, he points out

* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses ; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes ;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservation fluids, etc. ;
(6) Miscellaneous.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1911) pp. 22-25.

X Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 49-50.

§ Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. pp. 17-21.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 703

that fixing and staining reagents cannot be mixed indiscriminately. In
the first place the optimum reaction of the various substances must not
be disturbed, and, further, there are differences in activity, time of action
and so on, which have to be considered. Some stains and fixing reagents
are not miscible. For fixing and staining 1 train-tissues, the author re-
commends a mixture of 10 p.c formalin and Ehrlich's tri-acid stain.
This solution is also applicable to liver, kidney, spleen, and other tissues.
Good results have also followed the use of a formalin-toluidin-blue
mixture — 10 p.c. formalin 100 parts, toluidin blue (solid) 3 parts.

Preparation of Kaiserling Material for Microscopical Purposes.* —
B. Rawitz has devised the following method. Portions of tissue prepared
by Kaiserling's method are put into 95 p.c. alcohol containing 10 p.c.
tincture of iodine for fourteen days. The fluid is changed every day for
the first three days, as it becomes turbid ; after this time it will remain
clear. From the iodine solution the material is transferred to a saturated
potassium bichromate solution for fourteen days, the fluid being changed
twice. The material is lightly blotted with filter-paper and put into
95 p.c. alcohol for two days, absolute alcohol for two days, and chloro-
form for a like period. From this it is transferred to chloroform-paraffin,
and finally embedded in paraffin.

The author also describes the application of certain stains, formol-
f uchsin and azofuchsin, to the staining of nervous tissues.

(3) Cutting-, including Embedding and Microtomes.

Microtome Knives. — The firm of E. Leitz has recently completed
arrangements for the manufacture of microtome knives in Sheffield, and
are also prepared to undertake the re-sharpening of microtome knives.
The sizes of the knives are from 4f to H in. in length.

Improvements in Rock-section Cutting Apparatus.! — H. J. Gray-
son thus describes the structural features of his new machine for cutting
rock-sections.

" Dealing with the several portions of the machine in order, Plate
XX., which may be regarded as equivalent to a sectional or front
view, shows all the principal features of the apparatus, which is built
into a corner of the workroom ; the lathe in the foreground has no con-
nexion with the rock sheer, beyond being driven by the same motor.
The three guard-trays have been removed from the top of the rock
machine table, in order to show the position and relation of the slicing
and grinding-lap spindles, and of the several supports for rock-holder-
and clamps.

Plate XXI. may be regarded as a photograph in plan, i.e. looking
down upon the machine. It shows to better advantage the relation of
the working parts in running order, other than the driving mechanism,
which is situated at some height above the machine, and is shown in
detail in Plate XXII.

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 1-11.

t Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 65-81 (4 pis.).

2 X 2

704 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Plate XXIII. ( Figs, l and 2) serves to show thespecial appliances for
serial section cutting, parallel grinding, and work with the goniometer.

Reverting to Plate XX., it will l>e seen that the base of the ma-
chine is a strongly built wooden bench or table, with dimensions as
follows : length'? feet, width 2 ft. 4 in., height 3 ft. 2 in. The table-
top, which is If in. thick, is supported on a strong, well-braced frame-
work, which is screwed to the wall of the building so as to ensure com-
plete freedom from vibration. The details of the construction of the
table may he readily made out from an inspection of Plates XX. and
X XII., except that a supporting beam for the three spindles, which runs
from end to end of the table, '.) in. below its surface, cannot of course
be seen.

Details of the Principal Mechanical Parts. — These are described in
order, from right to left, as they appear in Plate XXI. First comes the
vertical revolving spindle of the slicer. This is made of mild steel —
as indeed are all the spindles — 15 in. long, by 1^ in. in diameter. It
passes through an accurately bored, flanged collar 8 in. long, screwed to
the surface of the table. The lower end of this spindle, as also those
of the grinding lap, is coned, and fits into a corresponding metal socket,
provided with an oil recess and protecting collar, which is screwed to the
longitudinal beam of the table-frame. The top of the spindle is threaded,
and carries carefully fitted collars and flanges for clamping the slitting
discs.

Somewhat to the right of and behind the spindle of the slicer, is a
rod of steel, 1 in. in diameter and 18 in. iong. The lower part of this
rod, which is of somewhat greater diameter than the upper part, is
coarsely threaded for 6 in. of its length, and screws into a long nut or
socket fitted to the table, thus forming an adjustable support for the
various specimen clamps. The rod has 3 in. or more of motion by
means of a screw, and a further range is obtained with the aid of lock-
nuts sliding on the spindle itself.

The larger specimen-holder is of the usual parallel screw-clamp
type, and will hold specimens up to 5 in. in diameter. Several inter-
changeable clamps are used ; one of these, to be seen in the photograph
(Plate XXL), is adapted to hold thick pieces of plate glass 3| by 1|- inches
(length and breadth), to which the ordinary microslips are attached. In
addition to its radial motion, this carrier revolves axially, so that speci-
mens to be sliced may be tilted at any convenient angle in relation to
the slitting disc. This clamp also carries the goniometric crystal-holder
(shown in the front right corner of the tray), which permits of slicing
or grinding in any desired direction. The device for maintaining a
steady pressure or pull against the slicer comprises the usual cord, weights,
and pulleys, so placed as to be readily controlled.

Lubrication of the slicer is provided for by means of a drip-can and
two pieces of sponge, one above and one below the disc, held in position
by a spring clamp.

Passing now to the grinding laps, of which there are two, seen in
the centre of the table, it will be noted that they are screwed to the top
of the spindles by means of a threaded boss below each plate. This
mode of mounting allows the whole surface of the lap to be utilized,' and

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC., 1911. PL XX.

Grayson Rock-section Cutting Apparatus.

I Follow />. 704

JOURN. R, MICH. SOC, 1911. PI. XXI,

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC, 1911. PI. XXII.

CC
P

<
<

ft

<

H
P
O

iz;
o

O

H

I
«

o
o

«

o

02

«

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC, 1911. PI. XXI

Grayson Rock-section Cutting Apparatus.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 705

is a convenience which has only to be once, used to be appreciated. It
not only allows the utmost freedom of movement, but also aids in the
maintenance of a true surface on the lap for a long time. The spindles
of the laps are somewhat shorter than that of the sheer, their length
being 12 in., so that the lap surface is about 3h in. above the table,
which is a convenient height for most operators. The mounting of the
spindles is the same throughout, and has already been described. Dust
and grit are excluded from the bearings by means of a special close-
fitting collar in each case.

It will be seen that each grinding spindle is accompanied by a pillar
which supports a clamping device, in which specimens or blocks of glass
are held so as to swing radially across the laps. This permits of parallel
grinding to a precise thickness or definite form, and though not neces-
sary for ordinary rock slicing, it has, as already explained, a variety of
uses where precision is required.

The lower portion of each rod is threaded, and screws into a long
socket let into the surface of the table. It can thus be accurately raised
and lowered during use, so as to maintain a steady and even pressure
upon the lap. It is also adapted to carry the goniometer, which fits the
special holder shown in the centre tray, and, as already indicated, as
every part of the machine is interchangeable if so required, a rapid
transfer from one lap to another can be made. This correspondence be-
tween the several parts of the machine, and the facility of interchange
which is thereby effected, results in the long run in a considerable saving
of time.

The most effective laps, so far as my experience goes, are those of
bronze containing a high percentage of copper, the aim being to secure
a tough but not unduly hard lap. Pure copper laps would no doubt
be better, but they are difficult to cast and turn. Discs of lead and
tin, and also of wood with felted surfaces, are used in special cases and
for polishing. A diameter of 10 in. is found to be convenient for most
of these laps.

Tray-like shields, or mud-guards, are provided for each of the
grinding laps, as well as for the sheer. As will be seen, they are of
square outline and conveniently large, the distance between the several
spindles, 22 in., permitting of this. The trays are made of stout gal-
vanized iron, 5 in. deep, and the upper edges are rounded and brass-
bound, forming clean and comfortable supports for the hands and
arms of the operator. It should also be noticed that a space around
each pillar or spindle is raised and carefully capped, so as to exclude
dust and grit ; this, in addition to the brass collars already noticed.
The bearings of a machine running at a high speed, and upon which car-
borundum and other abrasives are to be freely used, cannot be too care-
fully protected from their intrusion : the life of the bearings is, in fact,
directly proportional to the effective exclusion of the abrasives.

As already stated, the machine is motor driven, and as the method of
connecting-up is in some respects novel, I refer to it in some detail.
An electrically driven 1 -horsepower motor serves to run the rock-slicer,
lathe, emery wheel, and polisher, and has proved fully adequate for all
requirements. As the motor runs at 1400 revolutions per minute, the

706 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

main shafting, shown in Plate XXII., is speeded down to about 300, a
convenient speed for the driving-wheels of both lathe and rock-slicer.
The usual method of gearing to a secondary shaft by means of belts
and loose pulleys has been dispensed with, and a system of connecting
directly to the main shaft adopted. This permits of any single portion
of the section apparatus being run separately ; the remaining cords and
pulleys being stationary. This effects a saving of power, and reduces
the wear and tear upon the machine and belts or cords. The sheer, and
each grinder and the polisher, are hence directly connected to the
principal shafting, which runs loosely through each driving-pulley, when
the latter are not engaged. These pulleys are thrown into action, each
by its own clutch, which is operated by a loose coned sliding collar on
the main shaft. The sliding cone is moved directly from the work-
table by means of a rod, to the lower end of which a lever handle-bar is
rigidly screwed in a convenient position. At the top of the rod is a
forked lever with adjusting screws fitting a groove in the sliding cone.
By a twist of the handle-bar below, the cone is forced under the lever of
the clutch, which tightly engages the hub of the driving-wheel, and the
lap or sheer, as the case may be, is brought into immediate action ; the
reverse movement, of course, instantly disengages the clutch, and the lap
or sheer becomes stationary. The photograph (Plate XXII. ), which
shows a portion of the main shaft, driving-wheels, and clutches, will
serve to make this portion of the mechanism sufficiently clear.

Connexion between the driving-wheel and each spindle, by means of
a leather cord, is easily effected, the latter passing directly from wheel to
spindle with the aid of guide pulleys only, these being secured to the
under-surface of the table.

Provision was originally made for two speeds, the change being effected
by means of split pulleys on the spindle, which can easily be removed
if required — but this is seldom necessary. A uniform speed of about
980 revolutions per minute has been found in every way satisfactory.

An extremely useful adjunct to the rock-slicer is to be found in the
small emery grinder attached to the same bench (seen to the left of
Plate XXL), and driven in the same manner. It is speeded up to 2000
(or more) revolutions per minute, and has been found most convenient
for a variety of work for which the larger machine is not so well adapted.
It may be provided with various grinding and cutting wheels, as well as
polishers and brushes, which fit it for use upon fossils, and the grinding
and polishing of small mineral and other specimens. This is an addition
to its varied usefulness in the workroom generally."

Method of Slicing, Grinding and Mounting Rock-sections.* — The
following is a summary of the salient points adopted by H. J. Grayson
when working at rock-sections : —

" A. Charging the Slicers, etc. — This is invariably done with diamond
powder, which it pays to crush, and sift from time to time during the
operation. The sifting is easily done with the aid of several bits of glass
tube about 1 in. long and £ in. wide, to one end of which, after grinding
level, a bit of very fine bolting silk has been cemented. A sheer charged
with properly graded diamond powder cuts faster and cuts longer than

* Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, xxiii. (1910) pp. 65-81 (4 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 707

would be the case if the diamond were only ground to an almost impalp-
able powder in oil, as is frequently done ; the former method is more
effective as well as more economical.

Every sheer should be made to run 'dead' true, and should be main-
tained in that condition. The greater the speed at which it is run, the
more important it becomes that it should run truly. A slicer is always
ineffective in proportion to its eccentricity. Too often the slicer is made
to cut as long as it will cut ; this is unsound, both in theory and practice.

With regard to charging a slicer, I find a chilled steel roller by far
the most effective instrument for this purpose. It is better than any
glass or agate implement, and, if properly made, is almost everlasting.

I have tried notching the slicers and charging the notches ; it takes
a long time to do this well — and it must be well done, or not at all. I
was certainly rewarded with a slicer which cut well for a long time.
Usually, however, I find a slicer charged in the ordinary way, that is by
pressure of the diamond powder into the smoothly turned edge of the
soft iron slicer, gives a very satisfactory return for the small amount of
time and trouble it requires to prepare. A hundred sections, each of
which involves two cuts, at a cost of little more than a shilling, leaves
nothing to complain of in the matter of expense. In slicing I use kero-
sene for lubrication, that is, if the rocks are compact and hard ; for such
rocks it is more effective than a soap emulsion, which of course must be
used for soft and porous rocks. Any good soap makes an effective lubri-
cant if properly dissolved. It need not be Castile soap, which, like many
other things, is not always what it is claimed to be.

B. Grinding Powders. — For this purpose only the finest graded car-
borundum is used. I also re-grade what is ordinarily sold as graded
material by the manufacturer. For example, FFF grade of the Niagara
Falls Company can well be further separated into two or three grades.
The coarsest of these is used upon the finest of the two machine laps ;
the remaining finer grades are used for finishing purposes by hand.

For the coarse lap, I find a fine but well graded powder is more
effective than one that is coarse ; indeed, the latter is simply thrown off
a rapidly revolving lap. Two hundred and twenty grade carborundum
is the coarsest I use for rough work. Ordinarily the series of laps
comprises one coarse, one fine, and one finishing lap of slate for hand
use only.

C. Canada Balsam and Mounting Methods. — Many people fail in
their first attempts to cut and prepare sections satisfactorily, not through
lack of perseverance or skill, but because they do not carefully prepare
their balsamed slips beforehand. Good clean natural Canada balsam
alone, if carefully prepared, will hold almost any rock securely to the
end of the process of its preparation. The tenacity and range of hard-
ness of the balsam may, however, be extended if a small quantity, not
more than 1 to 3 p.c, of some clear and colourless organic oil is added
to it. Poppy oil, castor oil, clove oil — even linseed oil— are all suitable
if used in the right proportions, and here experience alone is the best
guide. Those who have not tried the addition of one of these oils, or
something similar, will appreciate the improvement effected by them, if
the addition is judiciously made.

708 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

On*' should not prepare too many balsamed slips at once, as they
continue to dry slowly if not used, and eventually become too brittle. A-
to mounting, the specimen should be attached, in the first instance, to
the slip upon which it is to remain. Transference to another slip is
obsolete and unnecessary. It did well for thick sections, which were
formerly much more common than they are, or should be, to-day. Again.
the section and slip should not be flooded with balsam when about to
attach the cover, for, besides making a sticky and unsightly mess, it is
both wasteful and unnecessary. Prolonged heating of slip and section
is not advisable, when one is mounting, with the object of driving out
all the solvent from the balsam. The chances are, when this is attempted,
that the section will be disturbed or float, and will tend to break up when
putting down the cover, besides raising a crop of bubbles, which are very
difficult to remove. It is a wiser and safer course to use no more balsam,
and to apply no more heat than is necessary to bring the cover into close
and uniform relationship with the whole of the section. An oven with
a water-jacket, maintained at about 40° C, will, in from three to five
days, complete the drying with perfect safety.

So much for what is general and more or less applicable to almost any
successful process for the preparation and mounting of rock sections.

I will now briefly outline the process adopted with a collection of,
say. twenty numbered rock specimens which are ready for slicing. It is
to be noted that I seldom prepare sections from detached slices, as these
involve two parallel cuts and much subsequent grinding. It is twice as
economical, both as to time and material, to slice off the rock close to
the mounting slip, as by this method the smallest possible amount of
material remains to be ground away. Two dozen 3 by 1 in. slips are
cleaned and placed, the whole upon white blotting paper, spread on a
sheet of asbestos, or a metal plate ; this is laid upon a well filled sand
bath, supported on a tripod over a Bunsen flame. The heat from the
latter is so regulated as not to discolour or char the paper below the slips.
Each slip is now balsamed, using no more than experience has shown to
be necessary for sections about 1 in. in diameter. While the balsam is
" cooking " the specimens are successively clamped in the large specimen
holder of the slicing machine, and a piece, large enough for a section, is
sliced away ; the whole twenty being thus treated. Meantime, the bal-
samed slips will have become sufficiently hardened. Each slip should be
separately tested, when cool, with forceps or knife ; the hardened balsam
should indent with moderate pressure without splintering.

The sliced face of each specimen is now, for a few seconds, held upon
the finest revolving lap. which is fed with F F carborundum, and moist-
ened with water containing about one-fifth of its volume of glycerin,
which maintains a rapidly revolving disc sufficiently moist, without ex-
cess, for a long time. Each specimen requires only a brief treatment,
and if the lap is in first-class order no further preparation should be
required. Usually, however, it is safer to give each specimen a few
sweeps by hand, upon a slate or glass lap, the surface of which should be
accurately true or 'flat. After washing and drying, the specimens are
ready for attachment to the balsamed slips. This is done by heating
them sufficiently to occasion discomfort when held against the hand for

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 709

a few seconds ; the slip being correspondingly heated, the specimen is
pressed home on the slip, taking care to exclude all air-bubbles. As
each slide is dealt with it is placed on a second plate of glass (3£ by
1\ in. by f\ in. thick, the blocks being strictly uniform) and heated to
melt the beeswax, which is used to hold the slip in position during its
subsequent treatment. After the entire series has thus been treated and
allowed to cool, each glass plate or block in turn is clamped in the special
holder, and the slicer passed through the rock close to the glass of the
mounting slip. With everything in good order this may be done to
within 0*5 mm. ; the thickness being regulated by means of two strips
of thin sheet iron, held in position on the slip while the cut is being
started.

The series having been sliced, each section is ground to within
O'l mm. on the coarse grinding lap, using F carborundum, or certainly
not a coarser grade than 220. After washing, the grinding is completed
on the finest revolving lap, and if the latter is true and the operator
experienced scarcely any further grinding will be required. With a
sufficiently finely-graded powder, there should be no scoring or scratches ;
the latter, if present, being due to fragments of too coarse a powder, or
to its use in too limited a quantity, thus allowing the specimen to come
in contact with the metal of the lap. As a rule, and for safety, it is
wiser to give the last touches by hand upon a suitable lap of slate or
glass, using only the finest washed powder.

The whole process is not so long or so complicated as any description
must necessarily seem to imply. With the aid of the machine described,
and given balsamed slides in readiness, I find it possible to complete
single slides in 10 to 15 minutes ; the finished section, in area, uni-
formity, and thinness, leaving little to be desired. Furthermore, with
a series of rocks — and it is usual to treat a number together — there
is a corresponding gain in time, throughout the several operations.
Naturally, too, and perhaps more particularly with the type of machine
just described, individual experience, dexterity of manipulation, and judg-
ment, are material factors affecting the final result, both as to time and
quality of work. Compared with the older type of machine, both hand
and treadle, there can be no question as to the net gain in time and
labour, both of which are important. There is, too, I think, an equi-
valent improvement in the average quality of the finished product. On
these grounds I hope the publication of this brief description will prove
useful to all who are interested in the preparation of rock-sections."

(4) Staining- and Injecting-.

Staining Bordered Pits.* — G. Kowallik used three solutions :

(1) 1 grm. acid-fuchsin dissolved in 100 grin. 95 p.c. alcohol and filtered ;

(2) 1 grm. anilin-green (brillant-griin ?), obtained from Wolff of Posen,
dissolved in 100 grm. of distilled water and filtered ; (3) 1 grm. chryso-
idin dissolved in 100 grm. 95 p.c. alcohol and filtered. Sections of
Pinus hardened in alcohol are covered with solution (2) and the slide is
heated to vaporization. After a minute the slide is washed in water and
then treated with solution (3) diluted one-half with water. After allowing

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1911) pp. 26-7.

710 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

this to act for one or two minutes the slide is rapidly washed in 95 p.c
alcohol and then transferred to solution (1) for not more than one minute.
It is then treated for 2-5 seconds with 95 p.c. alcohol and afterwards
with absolute alcohol for about one minute. The sections are treated
with xylol for about five minues and afterwards embedded in balsam.
The tracheids are yellow, the areola green, and the torus red.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Enumeration of Bacteria in Milk.* — R. S. Breed determines the
number of bacteria in milk by direct microscopical examination. The
sample of milk to be examined is shaken thoroughly and 0*01 c.cm. is
withdrawn by means of a specially constructed pipette. The milk so
obtained is spread evenly over an area of 1 sq. cm. on an ordinary glass
slide. These areas may be easily determined by placing the glass slide
over paper or glass on which areas of this size have been accurately ruled
out. The milk is then dried with gentle heat, the fat dissolved out with
xylol or other fat solvent, the smear again dried, then fixed with alcohol,
again dried and stained with some anilin dye. Alkaline or other solu-
tions which attack casein and loosen the smear must be avoided. The
counting of the bacteria is done with a Microscope and an oil-immersion
objective. If the diameter of the field be so adjusted by means of the
draw-tube that it equals 0*16 mm., then each field of the Microscope
covers approximately one five-thousandth (0*0002) of a square centi-
metre. On this basis each bacterium seen in a field taken at random
represents 500,000 per c.cm. if they are evenly distributed. But as it is
impossible to distribute them evenly, at least 100 fields should be counted.
The total number of bacteria seen in 10 fields multiplied by 50,000, or
the total number in 100 fields multiplied by 5,000, gives the total
number of bacteria per c.cm. Though certain objections may be raised
against this method, the author claims that it is more accurate than
the plate method.

Metallography, etc.

New Critical Point in Copper-zinc Alloys, f — H. C. H. Car-
penter and C. A. Edwards have confirmed the existence of a thermal
change at about 470° C. in copper-zinc alloys containing 40 to Q'S p.c.
copper ; this is the range in which the ft constituent is present. It is
suggested that this critical point corresponds to the decomposition, on
cooling, of /3 into a + y. In alloys which above 470° C. consisted
wholly of /3, the presence of a and y has been detected microscopically,
at high magnifications only. The equilibrium diagram, modified in
accordance with the authors' conclusions, is given. As y is a brittle
substance, the decomposition of /3 into u -j- y causes embrittling of
the alloy.

C. A. Edwards discusses the nature of solid solutions, in an appendix
to the above paper, and concludes that (1) so-called metallic sofid solu-

* Centralbl. Bakt., 2'e Abt., xxx. (1911) pp. 337-40 (1 fig.).
+ Journ. lust. Metals, v. (1911) pp. 127-93 (26 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 711

tions are intimate crystalline mixtures ; whilst the primary crystals are
too small to be detected microscopically, they are large enough to retain
their identity ; (2) the term "solid solution" is strictly not applicable
to crystalline bodies such as metallic alloys, and should be restricted to
supercooled liquids, such as glass.

Alloys of Aluminium and Zinc* — W. Rosenhainand S. L. Archbutt
have re-determined the equilibrium diagram of the aluminium-zinc
system. Cooling curves and some heating curves were taken ; 300 grm.
of alloy were used for each experiment, and the rate of cooling was slow.
Microscopic examination was applied to specimens which had been (1)
slowly cooled from fusion, (2) annealed at certain definite temperatures,
and either slowly cooled, or quenched. The diagram differs in impor-
tant features from that given by Shepherd. The existence of the
compound Al2Zn3 (corresponding to the J3 phase) has been demonstrated.
In alloys containing this phase, dendritic crystals frequently assuming
six-rayed forms were observed. A horizontal line in the diagram at
about 440° C. is held to represent the formation of Al2Zn3, while a hori-
zontal at about 255° C. represents the decomposition of that compound.

Aluminium Alloys containing Magnesium. f — A. Wilm finds that
certain aluminium alloys containing a small amount of magnesium are
capable of being hardened by heat-treatment. Immediately after
quenching, the alloy is soft, but after a few days at atmospheric tempera-
ture its hardness rises considerably. An increase in ductility accompanies
this increase in hardness. The hardness attained upon storage increases
with rise of quenching temperature, up to 470° C. An alloy containing
8 ' 5 p.c. copper, 0 ■ 5 p.c. magnesium, after being hardened by storage
following quenching, was considerably further hardened by cold-rolling.
The addition of a small quantity of manganese to such alloys renders
them capable of resisting the destructive action of mercury, as the surface
is not wetted by mercury.

Lead-tin Alloys. J — D. Mazzotto has made a careful study of the
heat-evolution in the solid state which occurs at about 150° C. in lead-
tin alloys on cooling. In an alloy containing 33 • 3 p.c. tin and 66 ' 7 p.c.
lead, it was found that the intensity and the temperature of the recales-
cence phenomenon were considerably affected by previous annealing, the
maximum values of both temperature and intensity being obtained by
annealing at 188° C, the eutectic temperature. The temperature of
maximum intensity, and the heat of transformation, rise with increase
of tin content up to 18 p.c. tin, which is the concentration of the solid
solution saturated at the eutectic temperature. The author shows that
the thermal phenomenon in question may be fully explained by the rapid
diminution of the solid solubility of tin in lead as the temperature falls
below the eutectic temperature. The evolution of heat on cooling is
caused by the falling of tin out of solution in lead. Annealing tends to
increase the quantity of solid solution which is saturated at the annealing

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series A, lxxxv. (1911) pp. 389-92 (1 fig.).

t Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 225-7 (9 figs.).

t Int. Zeitschr. Metallographie, i. (1911) pp. 289-352 (8 figs.).

712 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

temperature, and therefore tends to concentrate the transformation. The
ordinary temperature of transformation, 150° C, is that at which the
solid solution saturated at the eutectic temperature, containing about
18 p.c. tin, begins to deposit tin.

Formation of Solid Metallic Solutions by Diffusion in the Solid
State.* — Gr. Brum' and D. Meneghini have heated a nickel wire, electro-
l\ tically coated with copper, at 1000° C. in hydrogen, measuring the
electrical resistance from time to time during the heating. The resist-
ance, originally 0-026 ohm, ultimately rose to 0*21 ohm. The wire
showed no signs of fusion, and the authors conclude that a solid solution
of nickel and copper was formed by diffusion in the solid state.

Alloys of Silicon with Metals.f— R. Frilley has prepared, in an
electric arc furnace, numerous binary alloys of silicon with manganese,
chromium, nickel, iron, tungsten, copper, aluminium, calcium, barium,
and strontium. The density of each alloy was accurately determined,
and the curves, showing the relation for each system between density and
composition, are held to indicate by inflexions or other peculiarities the
presence and composition of the definite compounds occurring in the
system. A list of the compounds found is too lengthy for reproduction.
The author points out the simplicity and accuracy of the density method
of investigating alloys. A comparison of the results obtained by apply-
ing the method to the copper-aluminium and cadmium-mercury systems,
with the equilibrium diagrams obtained by the better-known thermal
and microscopical methods, demonstrates the reliability of the density
method for indicating the compounds. For each silicon-metal system
the density results are given in the form of a specific gravity curve, a
specific volume curve, and a molecular volume curve, abscissas repre-
senting in each case the percentage composition. Some information
about the properties of the alloys is given.

Extraction of Gases from Copper.f — M. Guichard has made measure-
ments and analyses of the gases extracted from copper by heating in a
vacuum. The gas is quickly evolved from the superficial layer of the
specimen, but the gas contained by the deeper layers diffuses very slowly
to the outer layer, where it is evolved. By chemical methods, involving
the conversion of the copper into iodide or oxide, much greater quantities
of occluded gases were extracted. The extraction of the total gas content
of copper by heating in a vacuum accordingly presents great difficulties.

Crystallization of White Cast Iron.§ — C. Benedicks has examined
microscopically a hyper-eutectic cast iron containing 4-36 p.c. carbon
and 1 p.c. manganese. Three faces of the specimen, approximately at
right angles to each other, were polished and etched. The eutectic was
found -to exist as "colonies," resembling homogeneous crystals. In
some cases the eutectic exhibited spherical surfaces. The solidification
of white iron appears to proceed in a discontinuous or oscillatory manner.

* Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xx. (1911) pp. 671-4, through Journ. Oheni. Soc, c.
(1911) p. 703.

t Rev. M6tallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 457-559 (39 figs.).

t Comptea Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 104-7, 272-5.

§ Int. Zeitschr. Metallographie, i. (1911) pp. 184-91 (14 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ETC. 713

Changes occurring in Nickel Steel.*: — C. E. Guillaume has inves-
tigated the length changes taking place in course of time in high-nickel

steels. Steels containing 28—42 p.c. nickel expand slightly on keeping,
while those with higher nickel content, up to 70 p.c, contract. Previous
heating, by accelerating the transformations corresponding to these
volume changes, reduces the amount of the subsequent alterations. The
advantages offered by the 42 p.c. and 56 p.c. alloys for the construction
of length standards are discussed.

Ovifak Iron.f — C. Benedicks has microscopically examined speci-
mens of the mass of iron, weighing 25,000 kilograms, found at Ovifak,
in order to determine if it is of meteoric origin. The iron was found to
contain 1*6 p.c. carbon and some sulphur. The chief constituents are
free cementite and pearlite, which by its fine structure would indicate
that the iron cannot have been cooled slowly below 700" C. A structure
formed of alternate lamellae of cementite and iron oxide is termed
" oxide-pearlite." This mass of natural steel has probably been formed
by the reduction of iron compounds in molten basalt by carbonaceous
matter.

Cementation of Alloy Steels.} — F. Giolitti and F. Carnevali have
carbonized nickel steels containing 2-30 p.c. nickel, and a chromium
steel containing 2 '3 p.c. chromium, with ethylene and with carbon
monoxide, at 950° and at 1050° C. The phenomena of cementation
were in general the same as those observed with carbon steels, but in the
nickel steels the maximum content of carbon in the cementation zone
diminished with increase of nickel content, while the presence of chromium
raised the maximum carbon content. The eutectoid composition of steels
containing 2-5 p.c. nickel appears to be 0* 6-0 "65 p.c. carbon.

F. Giolitti and G. Tavanti have studied the cementation of nickel
steels containing 20-50 p.c. nickel.

Structure of Galvanized Iron.§ — W, Guertler has investigated the
microstructure of galvanized iron manufactured by the three usual
methods : the dipping process, sherardization, and the electrolytic pro-
cess. In all cases, a layer of crystals of the compound FeZn3 is present
between the iron and the zinc coating, but in material zinc-coated elec-
trolytically, this layer of FeZn3 is much thinner than in dipped or
sherardized specimens. The FeZn3 layer is electro-negative to both iron
and zinc, and accordingly accelerates corrosion when exposed. The zinc
coating obtained by dipping always contains crystals of about the com-
position FeZn7, also electro-negative to zinc. Various other structural
features of galvanized iron characterizing the different processes of
manufacture are described.

Welding up of Blowholes and Cavities in Steel Ingots. || — J. E.
Stead defines welding as the crystallizing into union of two solid metallic

* Gomptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 156-60 (1 fig.).
t Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 65-8 (8 figs.).

J Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino, xlvi. (1911) pp. 409-32, 558-68. Rass. Min. Met.
e Chim., xxxiv. (1911) through Journ. Soc. Chem. Ind., xxx. (1911) p. 1017.
§ Int. Zeitschr. Metallographie, i. (1911) pp. 353-76 (18 figs.).
li ;journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 54-102 (10 figs.).

714 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

surfaces when they are brought together under suitable conditions. In
a microsectiou of a weld, the crystals along the junction are found to be
common to each of the original pieces of metal. The higher the tem-
perature at which clean metallic surfaces are in actual contact, the more
rapidly do they crystallize together. Upon heating in contact, in hydro-
gen, duplicate pieces of steel, welding resulted at as Iowa temperature as
800° C. Axial holes were drilled in three steel bars, and closed with
steel plugs ; the bars were heated to 800° C. and flattened, then re-heated
respectively to 750°, 950°, and 1150° C, and forged into liars of smaller
section. The piece forged at 750° C. showed no signs of welding of the
artificial cavity, while the bar forged at 950° was partially, and that
forged at 1150° C. completely welded. The author discusses the forma-
tion of blowholes, of blowhole segregations, and of pipe in steel ingots.
It seems certain that blowholes will weld up completely when an ingot
is rolled or forged at a temperature of 1000° C. or higher. It is doubt-
ful if pipe cavities can be so readily welded, as the surfaces of such
cavities are frequently coated with oxide.

Some Studies of Welds.*— E. F. Law, W. H. Merrett, and W. P.
Digby have investigated the strength and the microstructure of steel
welded by various processes. A true weld is regarded as involving
fusion together of similar or allied metals. Whatever the process used,
a more or less sharply defined region of altered structure is produced.
Each process develops its own characteristic structural features in this
region, so that a microscopical examination of an unannealed weld in-
dicates by what process it has been made. Resistance welds and acetylene
welds appear to be least, and arc welds most, prone to oxidation.

Resistance of Steels to Abrasion and to Crushing.j — F. Robin
has tested a large number of different steels and cast irons by submitting
them to abrasion by emery paper. The test piece, having a surface of
given area, was pressed with a given load upon a disc of emery paper
rotating at a known speed on a turntable. Usually the loss of weight
of the test piece was determined after 1, 2, and 3 minutes' abrasion.
Carbon steels show a minimum of resistance to abrasion at about 0 ' 4 p.c.
carbon. Steels containing nickel and manganese in high percentages
are exceedingly resistant. Another method of testing investigated
consists in the determination of the relation between energy of blow
and amount of compression in a metal cylinder deformed by the blow of
a falling weight. The shock work is the energy of a single blow pro-
ducing at a given temperature a crush equal to one-fifth of their depth
in normal cylinders at a constant velocity, and is held to characterize
the metal tested. The tests were carried out upon a large number of
carbon and alloy steels, at temperatures from - 180° to over 1100° C.
In connexion with this test, " interstrain," or the hardening resulting
from mechanical distortion, was studied. The original paper should be
consulted for an account of the great quantity of experimental work
performed and the conclusions yielded by it, and for the author's views
on the numerous theoretical points raised.

* Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 103-24 (33 figs.),
t Iron and Steel Inst., Carnegie Scholarship Memoirs, ii. (1910) pp. 1-270
(94 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 715

"Filiations" of Metallic Alloys.* — The heterogeneous mass
obtained by the superposition of two molten metals, in such a manner
that mixing is incomplete, is termed by Le Gris a " filiation " of a
metallic alloy. A successful preparation contains one metal in a pure
state at the bottom, the other pure metal at the top, while the inter-
mediate layers represent, in order, every possible composition of binary
alloy. Le Gris has so improved the method, originally introduced by
Le Chatelier, that a complete " filiation " can be obtained not exceeding
1 mm. in height. These small preparations are made by bringing into
contact fragments of the two metals, melted and in the globular state,
and cooling rapidly the single globule formed. Larger "filiations"
are made in crucibles. The preparations are useful for a rapid study of
the metallography of the complete system, and by successive re-polishings
and etchings with different reagents it is a simple matter to ascertain
which reagent is the most suitable for the identification of any one con-
stituent. Similar in principle is a method described for the study of
the effect of speed of cooling upon grain-size and other structural
features. A small ingot is cast in a non-conducting mould, which has
a large cold block of metal as its base. The bottom of the ingot is thus
rapidly chilled and solidified, while the rate of cooling becomes slower
as the top of the ingot is approached.

The author determines the hardness of the various constituents found
in a " filiation " by a modification of the Brinell method. The end of a
drawn thread of glass is melted, so that a ball having a diameter of a
fraction of a millimetre is formed. A series of impressions is made,
proceeding from one end of the preparation to the other, with a load of
a few hundred grams ; the impressions are conveniently measured on a
photomicrograph. The presence of impurities in one of the metals
usually has a marked effect upon the microstructure of a " filiation " ;
this observation may be utilized for the detection of impurities and an
approximate determination of the amount present. A " filiation " may
be prepared and microscopically examined in a quarter of an hour.

Jointed Arm for Workshop Microscope. f—S. Prauss describes a
useful modification of the Stead Workshop Microscope. The Micro-
scope is carried by a jointed arm, the other end of which is attached to
the specimen by a vice or an electro-magnet. Any surface of a large
mass of metal may thus be examined.

Corrosion of Metals. J — G. D. Bengough reviews generally the present
knowledge of the corrosion of non-ferrous metals. The literature of the
subject is summarized, and the electrolytic theory of corrosion, to which
the author attaches much importance, is clearly explained. The problems
awaiting solution are stated, and a scheme for the investigation of the
corrosion of 70 :30 brass, in the form of condenser tubes, is put forward.

J. T. Corner § describes some cases of corrosion of metals and alloys.

* Rev. Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 613-25 (21 figs.).
t Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 121-6 (6 figs.).

I Journ. Inst. Metals, v. (1911) pp. 28-114 (4 figs.). Report to the Corrosion
Committee of the Institute of Metals.

§ Journ. Inst. Metals, v. (1911) pp. 115-26.

716 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Nucleus Action and Grain-growth.* — H. M. Howe discusses
Cohen's inoculation experiments, in which bright tin surfaces (usually
cold worked) were dulled when pressed against specimens of tin which
had previously been rendered dull. Most cases of this infection may
be explained on the assumption that the cold-worked metal is in a
metastable state, and that contact with normally crystalline metal
induces the change to the stable condition, a change which is accelerated
by raising the temperature. It is difficult, however, to apply this
explanation to the case of the dulling, by contact with dulled tin, of the
bright surface of a quietly frozen ingot of tin. The author indicates
the bearing on this question, of Charpy's discovery that overstrained
iron shows a much more rapid grain-growth between 650° and 800° C.
than iron which has not been overstrained.

National Physical Laboratory.! — The existence of the compound
Al9Zn3 has been fully established, but it is stable only within the tem-
perature range 254°-443° C. The microscopical effects of tensile
strain upon strips of various binary alloys of eutectic composition have
been investigated ; the differences observed in modes of deformation
appeared to indicate that the crystalline arrangement is fundamental Ly
different in different eutectics. A remarkably coarse crystallization was
observed in some electrolytic iron which had been prepared for experiments
on effects of strain at high temperatures. The iron had been annealed
after rolling into thin strips. It was possible to detach single crystals
from these strips ; the individual crystals were found to be perfectly
tough and ductile.

\-'

* Met. and Chem. Eng., ix. (1911) pp. 79-80.
f Nat. Phys. Lab. Ann. Eeport for 1910.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC 1911. PI. XXIV.

Fact p. ;vlT

JOURNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

DECEMBER, 1911.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

XXII. — I. On the Structure of Scales from Thermobia domestica

(Packard).

By James Strachan.

(Read June 28, 1911.)
Plate XXIV.

Thermobia domestica. — This " bristle-tail " is one of Lepismatidse —
closely allied to, but distinct from, the common " silver-fish " insect
(Lepisma saccharina). It is probably an introduced species in the
British Islands, and is found chiefly in the interior of buildings,
close to warm places such as stoves and hot-water pipes. During
the past few years the present writer obtained a large number of

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV.

Fig. 1.— Normal scale from Thermobia domestica x 400 ; showing longitudinal

tubes and latter " broken " up at margin.
„ 2.— Scale from T. domestica partially immersed in gummy residue from oil of

turpentine ; showing upper half of scale with longitudinal tubes and

lower half with radial tubes, x 400.
„ 3.— Scales from T. domestica x 400; showing effect produced by crossing two

scales.
„ 4. — Reduced photograph of cuneate markings produced by illuminating the

model obliquely.
Figs. 5, 6, 7 and 8. — Diagrams showing the evolution of cuneate markings from

beaded markings as observed by slowly focusing through the scale of

T. domestica at margin. Fig. 5, Beaded markings. Fig. 6, Twisted

beads. Fig. 7, "Clubbed" or "exclamation" markings. Fig. 8

Cuneate markings.

Dec. 20th, 1011 3 a

, is Transactions of the Society.

specimens of this insect in Co. Antrim,* and this circumstance
presented a favourable opportunity for the study of its scales.

(!> neral Appearance of the Scales. — Under the Microscope the

general appearance of the scales is very similar to that of the more

common Lepisma saccharina. In shape they are for the most part

ovate and circular, with a regular indentation at the pedicle. In

some scales there is also a slight indentation at the free end. Under

low powers they present the familiar " watered-silk " appearance

and iridescence. Under medium and high powers they show a

shell-like structure, due to longitudinal stria?, which latter at the

marginal portion of most of the scales are broken up into bead-like

and cuneate markings resembling the " exclamation markings " of

Podura scales. The area covered by these markings varies in size,

being as a rule greater in the more circular scales. The striae in

the central or median portion of the scales are almost invariably

unbroken. Towards the pedicle the longitudinal stria? frequently

stop short, revealing by their apparent absence another set of striae,

crossing the scale obliquely in two directions and radiating from

the pedicle and the median line of the scale. The oblique stria?

appear to be slightly narrower than the longitudinal ones. A close

examination of the scale with high powers (^ and y1^ in.) clearly

reveals, by varying the focus up and down, that the beaded and

cuneate markings are produced, as first pointed out by R. Beck,

by the intersection of the radial and the longitudinal stria?. The

beaded markings occur at the margin towards the pedicle, where

the radial stria? cross the others at an angle approaching a right

angle, but where the angle of crossing is more acute, towards the free

end of the scale, the beaded markings change into the cuneate forms.

Minute Structure of the Scales. — According to R. Beckf the
longitudinal stria? appear to project at the free margin of the scale,
thus suggesting a series of longitudinal ribs with corrugations
between the latter. This is quite true, but a careful examination
of the so-called ribs, towards the pedicle end of the scale, shows
that they are really the walls of a set of longitudinal tubes. When
pressure is applied to the scales these tubes may be made to collapse
and disappear to a certain extent, and in some cases when heat is
applied both liquid substances and air-bubbles are observed to
traverse the tubes. According to the observations of J. Beck the
longitudinal stria? are on the side of the scale next the insect, but
I hnd the reverse to be the case, thus supporting the later finding
of G. H. Bryan on this point.! The scales appear to be slightly
concavo-convex in shape, the longitudinal tubes being on the convex
side of the scale. On the concave side of the scale the pedicle has

* New Irish Apterygota, by Prof. G. H. Carpenter, Irish Naturalist, May 1911,
p. 81.

t Appendix to Sir J. Lubbock's Monograph on the Collembola and Thysanura,
Ray Soc, 1872. % Science Gossip, vii. N.S., pp. 152-4.

Scales from Thermobia domcstica {Packard). 719

a projection, which is evidently the point of attachment. Between
the two sets of striae there is a thin central membrane. The scales
appear to contain some highly refractive substance, and the radial
stria? start from the pedicle in such a manner as to suggest a sys-
tem of capillary tubes supplied with fluid through the point of
attachment.

On the longitudinal tubes and between the broken markings a
minute secondary structure may be observed in the form of little
oblique streaks and minute circles. These are due to an effect
produced by the light passing through the points of contact of the
two sets of crossing striae. The same structure may be observed,
on a larger scale, by crossing two scales at right angles to each other,
in which case it is produced by the crossing of the longitudinal
tubes. A similar structure of minute circular markings was pro-
duced on a much larger scale by crossing two sets of fine glass
capillary tubes, filled with water and moistened at their points of
contact. The form of the secondary structure of the scales is modi-
fied by the method of illumination.

Cause of the Beaded and Cuneate Markings. — That the broken
markings are due to the crossing of the two sets of tubes or striae
is quite evident under a high power (yL in.). Towards the margin
of the free end of the scale by careful and very slow focusing
through the former the evolution of the cuneate markings may be
observed. First, there is a bead on the longitudinal tube- walls
where the radial capillaries cross. This bead lengthens out and
becomes twisted obliquely. Then one end of the twisted bead
widens out, thus producing an " exclamation " marking. Finally,
the wide end of the latter opens out, leaving a cuneate shape.
That the radial striae really pass all over the scale is proved by
obliterating the longitudinal striae. This was done by Bryan (loc.
tit.) by placing a grease-spot on the scale. Where the grease-spot
was applied the longitudinal striae disappeared, leaving the radial
striae alone visible. A much better method of accomplishing this
end was discovered by the writer after some experimenting. A slip
is ringed with shellac cement and the ring filled with turpentine.
Commercial turpentine, which leaves an oily or resinous residue
when evaporated, must be used. The turpentine is allowed to
evaporate in a warm room and the scales are placed on the oily or
gummy residue. The radial striae then become very clear, while
the longitudinal ones to a great extent disappear. It is probable
that the application of this method will shed light on the structure
of other scales, such as Podura. In the case of T. domestica, in my
opinion, two factors are at work in producing the optical effect of
the cuneate markings. These are (1) light passing through the
two sets of striae ; (2) the slightly concavo-convex shape of the
scale, which causes the light to pass through obliquely at the mar-
ginal area of the scales.

3 a -2

r20 Transactions of the Society.

ii. Description of a Model Producing an Optical Effect similar to
the Cuneate Markings on Insect Scales.

In order to test the theory of the production of these markings
by the crossing of tubes at various angles, many experiments were
made with glass rods, ribbed glass, and tubes filled with various fluids.
As a result of these experiments a model was prepared [exhibited],
consisting of two sets of parallel thin glass tubes in contact with
each other. The tubes were filled with liquids and sealed at both
ends. One set of tubes was fixed stationary in a cell and the other
set placed in contact with them, but free to revolve over a consider-
able angle. The best results were obtained by using oil of turpen-
tine in one set of tubes and ethyl-alcohol in the other. It was
found that, by illuminating this model obliquely and varying the
angles at which the tubes crossed, all the appearances of beaded,
" exclamation " and cuneate markings could be produced. By modi-
fying the source of illumination and interposing various objects
between the light and the model, numerous images resembling the
secondary structure could be produced. The crossing of the tubes
creates a series of lenses, like a compound eye, each one capable of
forming a separate image.

721

XXIII. — Instantaneous Exposure in Photomicrography.
By Walter Bagshaw, F.K.M.S.

(Read October 18, 1911.)

Although flash-light has been in common use for purposes of
ordinary photography, it has not been tried within the writer's
knowledge for photographing through the Microscope, but in the
absence of a powerful illuminant, such as the electric light, a ready
and simple substitute can be provided whenever the exposure of a
fractional part of a second is needed.

In preparing illustrations of pond life, for example, preference
is given to dead specimens mounted without pressure, for the
simple reason that a time exposure is impossible with anything
not absolutely at rest ; hence, many amateurs will welcome a
method that places in their hands a convenient process of photo-
graphing objects in motion.

My first experiment was with fresh-water Polyzoa (Lophopus
crystallinus) expanding its tentacles, a movement not too rapid for
good definition at ^ second. The Microscope was horizontal, with
object in vertical cell on the stage, which was focused by properly
adjusted transmitted light from oil lamp in the ordinary way, and
provision was made for replacing the lamp by a tin dish containing
" Agfa " "Flash Light Powder on a retort-stand arranged to bring
the powder in the position previously occupied by centre of lamp-
flame, the top of powder being at the level of bottom of flame.
Ignition can then be made at a suitable moment by means of a
long taper, or red-hot wire.

To ascertain the most advantageous time for exposure, a dim
light should be thrown on the subject obliquely either from behind
or in front, sufficient to reveal the outlines when looked at through
a hand magnifying glass. The other lights in the room should then
be lowered, and the shutter of dark slide withdrawn. Standing in
readiness for any desired display of outline, it is easy to fire the
powder very quickly.

Some well-defined negatives were secured when using 2-inch
objective and x 5 eyepiece. It is advisable to take precaution
against any scattered red-hot particles reaching the Microscope by
interposing a sheet of plain glass between the powder and the
instrument. The quantity of powder is immaterial, as its com-
plete combustion is always gl0 second, whilst the maximum light
develops in less than TiT) second. Only a very little smoke is
evolved, which is quickly dispersed.

In this way I have photographed the larva of caddis fly pro-
truding from its case, water shrimps, etc., but I have not yet
succeeded in obtaining good definition with darting or rapidly
moving objects. I have found no trouble from uneven lighting.

722 Transactions of the Society.

XXIV. — The Structural Detail of Coscinodiscus aster omphalus.
By T. W. Butcher, M.B. CM. F.ll.M.S.

(Read October 18, 1911.)
Plates XXV. to XXVII.

The note read by Mr. Nelson at the Meeting cf the Boyal Micro-
scopical Society on October 19, 1910,* announced the completion of
over twenty years' labour on this diatom, and contained the sug-
gestion that an enlarged model of it could now be made. I take
this opportunity, therefore, of submitting photomicrographs of
various specimens in my possession.

Series I. — This displays views in series of a single field, taken
at different consecutive foci of the various well-known features —
the grouping of the primary areolations, the coarse secondaries
(with their finer tertiaries), and the delicate siliceous meshwork
woven like a net over the outer surface of the valve in the mature
state.

Series II. — Under Series II. are classed fractures — either a
single one of special interest, where the outer perforated cap is dis-
lodged from the rest of the valve almost in its entirety, with its
structure obvious, as it comes into focus in an otherwise clear space ;
or a fracture-margin displaying its edges in varied form ; or a field
where one portion is in focus, whilst other portions, lying somewhat
lower down in the mount, give one the appearance of the " eye-spot
layer" out of focus.

Series III. A and B. — This series demonstrates the tertiaries
described by Mr. Nelson,f and, without re-opening the point as to
whether they could be " ghosts " or phenomena of interference, it
is self-evident that their irregular number and position in the
secondary markings destroys any doubt as to their structural
reality, and there is no necessity to enter into any elaborate exercise
in geometrical design with Mr. Nelson in elucidating the pattern on

* See this Journal, 1910, p. 698.

f Joum. Quekett Micr. Club, Series 2, vii. p. 81.

EXPLANATION OP PLATE XXV.

Fig. 1. — Primary areolations ; the central perforated membrane surrounded by
a ring of coarse " secondaries," within which are the fine tertiaries.
X 2700.

,, 2.— Fracture displaying a single perforated cap. x 1000.

„ 3. — Fracture displaying group of perforated caps lying on the upper surface
of another larger fragment. At three consecutive foci, x 1000.

„ 4. Ditto. Ditto.

„ 5. Ditto. Ditto.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. XXV

[Face p. 722

Coscinodiscus astcromphalus. By T. W. Butcher. 723

this valve. It is sufficient to indicate that in the areolations neares
to its centre, divisions occur within the secondaries into two or more
tertiary spaces, caused apparently by the deposition of minute
particles of a siliceous nature, and small circlets are formed. From
these, smaller branches are pushed out in all directions to join other
circlets forming at irregular intervals in other secondaries in these
perforated caps. In this way a fine veil is woven over the outer
surface of the mature valve, constituting an outer strainer to engage
the coarser particles suspended in the water in which the diatom
lives. This sediment, as it is deposited, will be easily removed
by the movements of the water itself.

The function of the perforated caps is suggested as being that of
a fine filter, the water passing through the polygonal cells, of which
they are the outer protection, on to the openings in the basal
membrane, which, distinguished by the name of the "eye-spot
layer," forms the floor of the cells, and is the inner surface of the
valve. But Mr. Nelson suggests that a new lens, referred to later,
has enabled him to see that these openings are fitted with a still
more finely perforated membrane. The perforations here are so
fine that Mr. Nelson for once does not give an exact measurement,
though he does say that if one assumes that the length of the
tubule is four times its diameter, one might occupy one's time
counting a hundred a minute, for ten hours a day, for the space of
1381 years, allow 10 p.c. deduction for packing cylinders in a cube,
and then one would have the correct number for filling a box 1 c.mm.
in size. This can be conceived as an interesting and useful exercise
for the mathematician who might be with Mr. Nelson when he
says that " we are apt to talk volubly about 1000 and 2000 diameters
without in the least realizing what we are talking about," and, I
suggest, neglect the fact that it is only by assuming that these
tubules are passing through the silex at the rate of 60,000 per
inch, and that their diameters are equal to the interspaces between
them, that one can give the measurement of the diameter of each
tubule as jooWo" m-> or 0'2116 micron. As an example showing
what figures can be made to do, it is excellent, but as scientific
micrometry it is of as little value as the diagram supplied would
be to the artist engaged on the suggested model, unless he had
previously read a note in small type on another page,* which says,
" The next inner circle of black dots should be represented about
the same size as those at present in the peripheral circles, and, like
them, of irregular shape." A better illustration of the advantage
as a scientific record of a print made from a " straight," unmanipu-
lated negative, over the sketch of an imaginative draughtsman, as
skilled with his pencil as with his figures, need not be sought.

To the biologist, however, a more pertinent question arises.

• See this Journal, 1910, p. 698.

72 I Transactions of the Society.

II' this valve, formed of a siliceous frame-work arranged in the
fashion of a honeycomb, with its intricate system of perforations
serving the purpose of a filter, has to be conceived as a congeries
of polygonal cells, each with a very finely divided cap on the top,
and a still more finely perforated membrane at the bottom of the
cell, what is the ultimate fate of the bacterial foes imagined by
Mr. Nelson as attacking the diatom ? When strained off, are they
detained within the cell ? Are they removed sooner or later by
some system of scientific backwash not yet outlined, or are they
imprisoned for life to act as a deposit of microscopic sludge on
the floor of the cell, thus preventing the access of the very medium
necessary to the life of the diatomic organism under consideration ?
Such an example of scientific Hari-Kari, of methodically deliberate
race suicide, is out of the question.

Series IV. A. and B. — Though one is in doubt as to what the
new lens has shown Mr. Nelson in the already well-observed slide
that has been in his test box since 187G,* the photographs in
Series IV. show quite convincingly that naturally the opening in
the "eye-spot layer" is clear and unobstructed, so that it may
perform its unmistakable duty of allowing the filtered water free
access through the filter cell to the organism within the frustule.

In each group of the series separate fractures are dealt with.
In Group A finally the broken edges are seen to be sharp and clean
cut, without a trace of crenation comparable to that seen at the
edge of the perforated cap (Photo 2, Series II.), and the appearance
is exactly what one would accept it as being — a broken edge of the
short tube-like cell, described by Mr. H. Morland as giving " a ringed
appearance to the perforations when the valve is examined direct
on the inner surface."

In Group B the mounter's bristle has, I believe, pierced the
surface of the valve, lifted off a portion of the crust covering several
of the polygonal cells, leaving fortunately the bottom of the cells
exposed and intact as an " eye-spot layer." The photographs of the
last resolutions of this floor show corroboratively that the openings
are clear and unobstructed, and the series is offered as proof from
the optical point of view that the probability of the presence of
even a " diaphanous " membrane, first " glimpsed " years ago, and
now, on the advent of the new lens, resolved into perforations by

* See this Journal, 1910, p. 147.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVI.

Pig- 1.— Outer veil of siliceous meshwork. x 2700.
„ 2. Ditto, x 1000.
)> 3. — Fragment of the polygonal cell-layer, with the " ringed " openings

of Morland. x 1000.
„ 4. Ditto. Ditto.
„ 5. Ditto. Ditto.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. XXVI.

I Face p. 724

Coscinodiscus asteromjjhalus. By T. W. Butcher. 725

Mr. Nelson, is not to be conceded. One cannot forget that in his
paper on " Diatom Structure " he has already said : — " These ter-
tiaries are exceedingly minute." " This is a difficult image, not
only on account of its minuteness, but because of its liability to be
merely an interference image " ; and " In the case now before us.
however, its very minuteness prevents this [fracture-margin test]
being applied, for it would be quite impossible to see at the frac-
tured edge such a structure, even though it were several degrees
coarser." Yet now he says, " A membrane closing the pipe has
been seen by me upwards of twenty years ago ; it is so diaphanous
that its presence was only perceived from an edge in a broken
specimen." And, behold ! it is dotted with perforations. It is
for Mr. Nelson to supply the arguments against the suspicion that
he has been recording yet another interference image.

Whilst in London last May, I had several days' study of the
slides under almost exactly similar conditions to those set forth by
Mr. Nelson in the notes just quoted.

The stand was the Powell and Lealand, No. 1, tube-length
250 mm., oil-immersion, sub-stage condenser, N.A. 1-40, objective
(Zeiss) 3 mm. apochromatic, N.A. 1*40, oculars (compensating)
Zeiss, screens (a) Gifford " F " line and (b) Wratten and Wain-
wright's (D -f- H) of the " M " series.

The owner, the late Lord Edward Spencer Churchill, believed
that the outfit was the one used by the late Dr. Henri van Heurck
for his last work on the Diatomaceae. No further guarantee of the
working quality of the apparatus could be desired. That the
judgment of this great observer had not been at fault was proved
forthwith. The quality of the images presented to the eye was
beyond criticism. Employing critical lamp-illumination through-
out, the various resolutions alreadv described were obtained with
ease, and came out magnificently clear. The fractures were all
carefully worked through, but in not one single field was there the
slightest trace of the sought-for membrane.

I deal at this moment with another point. Whilst my photo-
micrographs were being examined at the May Meeting of the
Society, one of the senior Fellows passed the criticism " that the
absence of the membrane in my specimens was probably due to the
valves having been over-cleaned, and that it had been washed
away in the process of preparation for mounting."

On hearing this strikingly novel suggestion of an almost in-
credible dexterity of manipulation by Mr. Firth — admittedly one
of the finest of living mounters — I at once replied, " that it was
much more likely that Mr. Nelson's ancient slide, upon which the
observations had been based, might be an imperfectly cleaned one
by a dead and gone mounter, who had not the accurate methods of
a modern worker, but that I would at once communicate with
Mr. Firth on the matter." There was no necessity to argue the

, I'll Transactions of the Society.

point, for the washing-out process could hardly have been accom-
plished without leaving some trace of crenation or irregularity on
the inner rim of one of the many ringed openings of Morland that
I had photographed, both in the complete and fractured state. This
is Mr. Firth's reply : —

" As to my specimens being over-cleaned, I can. only say that
anyone with this opinion can gladly have a slide for examination.
Over-cleaned specimens cannot be handled nor mounted properly,
so you can contradict this. I have long experience in cleaning
diatoms, and am always striving to improve my slides, and I can
say that ray present slides are better than those of ten or fifteen
years ago. The cement used for fastening the diatoms to the
cover-glass is different and better, and the styrax of much better
quality. I have requests for slides from Fellows of the Royal
Microscopical Society, but none have any special reference to Cos-
cinodiscus astcromphalus, though all have been well pleased with
those I have sent — generally, diatoms of beauty in marking, etc. —
and I feel that they appreciate my work, and would not agree that
they are in any way deficient, either through over-cleaning or im-
perfect mounting."

Later I asked Mr. Firth to prepare additional mounts of speci-
mens taken from different portions of the Maryland deposit, and
in particular to provide me with some of fragments only, mounted
as flat as possible in different media of high-refracting index. At
various stages of this study I have had the advantage of the
counsel and advice of Mr. E. Leonard, who, after examining the
slides with the lenses and oculars I was using, was of the opinion
that they were first-class mounts of typical examples of Coscino-
discus asteromphalus. Most of these slides, prepared by Mr. Firth,
are on the stands exhibited here to-night, and as far as possible I
have tried to show you the diatom and the conditions under which
I was working. One point, however, militating against an abso-
lutely perfect rendering of the tertiary markings, is that, in some
cases, oil -immersion condensers have not been obtainable, thus
preventing the full display of the value and beauty of this
particular diatom. The clearest results have been obtained from
two slides mounted in a medium of monobromide of naphthaline
and styrax, these being closely followed by two mounted in
styrax and one excellent slide in liquidambar styraciflua.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVII.

Fig. 1. — Fragment of the polygonal cell-layer, with the " ringed " openings of
Morland. Taken at six consecutive foci, x 1000.

2.

Ditto.

Ditto.

3.

Ditto.

Ditto.

4.

Ditto.

Ditto.

5.

Ditto.

Ditto.

6.

Ditto.

Ditto.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. XXVII.

[Face p. 726

Coscinodiscus asteromphalus. By T. W. Butcher. 727

Mr. Firth has mounted them so well that many dozens of photo-
graphs have been taken from them without disturbing them in the
slightest degree.

There is here material in every way fitted to display the new
structure described by Mr. Nelson, for surely, if present, it would
be apparent and demonstrable under critical light ; and if a
structure, and constant, it should not be able to defy detection.
Every effort has been made to discover the presence of this
membrane, for it was felt that if once seen, a photomicrograph of
it could be secured, and that would be all the evidence required in
confirmation of Mr. Nelson's announcement. The failure to pro-
duce this print arises from the circumstance that I have not been
able to get a "glimpse " even of this problematical membrane.

Series V., VI, and VII., showing Tertiary Markings. —
Arising out of the resolution of these tertiary markings is a
question of considerable importance to all microscopical students.

In the Eoyal Microscopical Society's Journal, 1910, p. 147,
Mr. Nelson states " a definite case." The words are : " The speci-
men, the Microscope, the sub-stage condenser, the lamp, the method
of work, and the eye at the eye-end (hardly improved for being
twelve years older), were all the same," and " this apochromatic
|- is more sensitive to tube-length, stands a larger axial cone,
bears a deeper eye-piece, and has sharper definition than any
Microscope lens I have yet seen." In short — the lens is the
finest Mr. Nelson has, as yet, seen, and " a step forward in the
perfecting of the apochromatic has been accomplished." It is " a
new lens," in our sense of the word, and, in fact, the note on
page 698 commences thus : " Additional work with the new lens
mentioned in my last note." Therefore one need not dwell on the
absurdity of supposing that Mr. Nelson has written and the
Society has published his critique on a lens that he had just
recently happened to buy.

At the 472nd Meeting of the Quekett Club (March 28th, 1911),
reported in the English Mechanic, the official organ of the fort-
nightly Meetings of that Society (No. 2402, p. 215), a paper* was
taken as read, in which Mr. Merlin says, " that in 1899 he obtained
a Zeiss \ apochromatic of measured N.A. 1 '42, and initial magnify-
ing power 87. He had reason to know that this objective was then
probably second to none in existence. However, early in 1910, he
was informed that a further advance had been made in the con-
struction of these lenses, and he obtained an example of the com-
bination in June of last year. This objective, exactly similar in
aperture and power to the older one, has been found to afford
decidedly superior defining power and contrast on delicate objects.
Subsequently he re-examined many objects familiar to him with

* Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, Series 2, ix. p. 199.

728 Transactions of the Society.

the older objective, particular attention being given to such as
possessed extremely elusive features just within the grasp of the
lens. In every case without exception the observations previously
recorded were confirmed by the new objective, features previously
extremely difficult being found comparatively easy. It should be
clearly understood that the new Zeiss apochromatic was manu-
factured with no intention of being employed solely on the Dia-
tomacese." Mr. A. M. Jones spoke next, and said "that at a
recent Meeting of the Koyal Photographic Society, Mr. Max Poser,
of Messrs. Carl Zeiss's London house, had stated that the objective
referred to by Mr. Merlin was not constructed to a new formula, but
was a picked one of the old series."

Now, what is one to understand from all this ? For here is the
position : that Mr. Nelson makes the statement that he has ex-
amined hundreds of objectives upon this particular slide, and
presumably passed an opinion, which may have been adverse, upon
them ; hence the eulogy of this particular " new " lens in its mark-
ing of the step forward of the apochromatic, by reason of its power
to pierce the mysteries of the old balsam mount when all its rivals
had failed. If so, what is the actual scientific and commercial value
of this test ? In any case, before full acceptance, it would have to
overcome the controversial point of its being a marked instance of
the undue importance attached to a " pet slide " test, even though
in distinguished hands.

Further, is Mr. Merlin the unfortunate possessor of a twelve-
year-old Zeiss \ apochromatic that has not " weathered " time and
constant use ? If so, his one-time second-to-none-in-existence
lens is verifying a prediction quoted by Mr. Nelson, as follows:
" That owing to the instability of these new fancy glasses there
would be a falling off in the performance of the finest kinds of
object-glasses." * Mr. Nelson, however, says that this has been
disproved over and over again, and is a fallacy only mentioned to
be destroyed forthwith by his own observations. But there is a
way out of the dilemma. To these questionings I can supply the
answer. The possessors of high-power apochromatics need not look
suspiciously upon their lenses, for all that are in use are by makers of
repute, and the plain fact is that if these tertiaries are present, in
a properly mounted specimen of mature valves of Concinodiscus
asterornphalus, they are resolved with comparative ease, and are
not so " extremely " elusive as to be only just within the grasp of
that lens, to quote Mr. Merlin's reference to his old Zeiss combina-
tion. And when present, now that their appearance has become
better known, they can be resolved and photographed by a
supposedly inferior lens. The photos (Series I., Z.), were taken by
me with an old Zeiss 2 mm. apochromatic, N.A. 1*30, projection

* See this Journal, 1910, p. 147.

Coscinodiscus asteromphalus. By T. W. Butcher. 729

ocular 4. Similarly, the upper network or veil lying on the outer
surface of the valve is not difficult to display when present, and
the photomicrographs shown in October last, taken with a still
older 2 mm. apochromatic, though with N. A. 1 * 40, make this
quite clear. Indirectly also it is a confirmation of Mr. Merlin's
observation in June 1910,* that a similar veil is seen in N. Smithii,
and we have already seen lantern slides in which it is present in
the two specimens I have photographed.

I again say, finally, that I believe that this newly described
perforated membrane in the place indicated would be an absurdity
from a biological point of view. In this case the error of obser-
vation minimises considerably the value of the eulogy from an
optical point of view that has been passed upon this particular
instance of an advance in the manufacture of the apochromatic lens.

I wish to take this opportunity of thanking Messrs. Watson
and Angus very sincerely for the loan of the various stands and lenses
through which I have been enabled to exhibit some of the slides
mentioned. There are two lenses in use here to-night with which
I have photographed these very minute tertiaries, one of them a
-| Zeiss apochromat N.A. 1*40, and the other of the same focal
length with N. A. 1 ■ 30. There is also a very beautiful lens (3 mm.
apochromat N.A. 1*40) set up for me specially by Mr. Powell,
with a very perfect specimen under it for examination.

Conditions.

Slides mounted by Wm. A. Firth.

Objective 2 mm. Homogeneous oil-immersion, apochromatic

N.A. I- 40. Ocular compensating, X 6. Leitz.
Tube-length 170 mm. Initial magnification, x 764.
Sub-stage condenser : Oil-immersion, N.A. 1 ■ 40.
Screen (D + H) : Wratten and Wainwright, M series.
Illuminant : Liliput arc lamp. 8 amps.
Carbons, cored 8 mm.
Auxiliary condenser with iris.
Backed plate : ordinary. Speed 225 (H. and D.).
Developer : Metol hydrokinone.
Average exposure : 12 sees.

See this Journal, 1909, p. 399 ; and Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1908, pp. 247-50

,:;n Transactions of the Society.

XXV. — New British Enehytrsrids.
By The Rev. Hilderic Friend, F.L.S, F.R.M.S.

(Read October 18, 1911.)
Plate XXVIII.

I. — Enchytr&us minimi's Bret.

Aided by a Government Grant towards Researches among our
British Annelids, I have recently been able to make much progress
in the preparation of a Monograph on the subject for the Ray Society.
Among the worms to which I have been giving special attention
i luring the present year is a group of microscopic forms which
have so far been but very imperfectly studied in this country, and
it seems appropriate that I should inaugurate my introduction to
this Society by giving, first of all, an account of the smallest of the
Enehytrreids at present known, and the latest to be added to our
Annelid fauna.

Towards the end of May I paid a visit to Buxton and the
adjoining district in the hope of finding something new, and it
was here that the worm now to be described was discovered. As
I was going along the Serpentine Walk I saw some rubbish and
leaf-mould near the banks of the Wye, where the road crosses on
the way to Burbage. Among this material I found the common
earthworm (Lumbricus terrcstris Linn.), the red worm {L. rubellus
Hoff.), the brandling (Eisenia foetida Sav.), and other Annelids. I
brought away some of the leaf-mould for examination at home, and
had the good fortune to find that I had alighted on the haunts of
the midget white worm (Enchytrtmis minimus Bret.).

This tiny creature was first described by Bretscher in 1899 under
the foregoing title.* As I have not the original memoir at hand, I
am unable to quote the author's definition directly, but I take the
following abstract from the careful work of Michaelsen : —

" E. minimus Bretscher. Im Leben weiss, hinten gelblich.
Borsten zu 3 in den ventralen, zu 2 in den dorsalen Biindeln,
ziemlich gross, von halber Segnient-Lange. Gehirn 1^-2 mal so lang
wie im Maximum breit, nach vorn verschmalert, hinten abgerundet
oder schwach ausgeschnitten, vorn konkav. Bauchmark mit
spindelformigen Verbreiterungen (Kopulationsdriisen ?) im 5 und 6
Segm. Lymphkorper gross, wenig zahlreich, fast kreisrund, grob
granuliert und mit kern versehen. Das Riickengefass entspringt
im 12-14 Segm., 3 Paar Septaldriisen vorhanden. Peptonephridien

* Rev. Suisse Zool., vi. p. 402.

New British Enchytnrids. By Rev. H. Friend. 731

breit, unverzweigt, vielfach verschlungen schlauchformig, durch
2 Segm. sicli erstreckend. Samentrichter klein, doppelt so lang
wie breit. Samentaschen mit dem Darm kommunizierend,
einfacb schlauchformig mit spindelformiger Ampulle, am distalen
Ende von einigen Driisen umscellt. — L. 3-4 mm., Segmz. 30.
Vielleicht mit E. argcnteus zu vereineri In nasser Erde. Schweiz
(Hittnau)." *

This description is so clear and exact that a tyro in the study
of Enchytroeids would find it ample for the purposes of identifica-
tion. Michaelsen was familiar with Enchytrseus argcnteus, for it
was his own discovery. I myself described the worm in 1897 in
the Zoologist as E. 'parvulus. Michaelsen, however, had not seen
E. minimus Bret, when he wrote out the foregoing diagnosis, or he
would have recognized at once that they were distinct species. But
to distinguish them with absolute certainty one must have the living
forms under examination.

I have made a full and careful study of both species, and as my
results confirm and extend Bretscher's description, I propose now to
transcribe my notes as they were made while the living creature
was under the Microscope. It is fortunate that I discovered the
species just at the right moment for observing the organs in their
mature condition. The study of immature forms may result in
difficulty, but when the creature is fully developed one has no
hesitation as to the interpretation.

Enchytnvus minimus Bret, lives among decaying leaves and
vegetable matter. It is so small that one might easily pass it by,
but if damp material containing Enchytneids is kept for a time, so
that the surface becomes dry, the animals seek the moister parts
and gradually work downwards. Here they may be detected,
when present, by means of a pocket lens or the naked eye. The
present species is less than a quarter of an inch in length when
fully extended, and in alcohol is not more than one-eighth, or from
3-5 mm., while it is hardly 0*5 mm. in diameter. The number of
segments averages twenty-four, and they are of almost equal dimen-
sions throughout. The head is only slightly glandular, and the
head pore is situated between the prostomium and the peristomium,
being dorsal in position.

The colour, as Bretscher remarks, is white, with a tendency to

* Terreich, Oligochseta, pp. 92-3. Bretcher remarks (Rev. Suisse Zool., x.
(1902) p. 17 : — " Enchytrams argenteus Mich, gehort als neue Art ebenfalls der
Fauna der Schweiz an ; ich fand sie in den Erdproben von Zurich, Basel, Morges,
Trimmis, Riemenstalden. Michaelsen halt dafiir, dass mit dieser Spezies meine
E. minimus vielleicht vereinigt werden sollen. Nach dem ich nun unzweifelhafte
argenteus zu Gesicht bekommen habe, halte ich eine solche Vereinigung fiir un-
statthaft. Die Lymphkorper von minimus sind durchaus hell gefarbt ; die Driisen
an der Oeffnung der Samentaschen, die Verheiterungen des Bauchmerkes, der viel
schlankere Leib bilden fernere Unterscheidungsmale." See Southern Contribu-
tions towards a Monograph of the British and Irish Oligochseta, Proc. R. Irish
Acad., xxvii. sect. B, No. 8, p. 157.

732 Transactions of the Society.

a dull yellow behind the girdle; but these colour distinctions are
not of importance seeing that they vary greatly with food, habitat,
season, and other conditions. The worm is active, and but for the
opaque white spot near the middle, revealing the presence of eggs,
it might easily be mistaken at first sight for a large Nematode. The
setae, however, are soon discovered when it is placed under the
Microscope, and the presence of setae immediately enables one to
differentiate it alike from Nematodes and from minute larvae of
Diptera and other creatures.

As the setae are an important feature I may add that I gave
them special attention, since it was this character which enabled
me at once to distinguish it from another form (Enchytrsms hya-
linus Eisen), which it somewhat resembles in other respects.
Michaelsen's diagnosis gives the setae as equal, but the term must
be interpreted in relation to the setae of Fridericia. In the latter
cjenus the setae are often of different lengths in each bundle, but in
Enchytrmus they are equal. I find, however, a difference in the
length of the setae of E. minimus Bret, in different parts of the
body, and the number of setae also varies. Thus, the dorsal setae
are two in number in front of the girdle, and three in the hinder
segments, while the ventral setae number three throughout. The
first segment (peristomium) has no setae, the girdle segment lacks
the ventral setae, while the extreme posterior may also be destitute
of them. Now the two pairs of dorsal setae on the girdle segment
are small, and if their length is represented by 4, that of the front
segments will be 8, and that of the hinder 9. In other words the
posterior setae are slightly longer and more slender (as 9 : 8) than
the anterior, while the latter are double the length of those on the
girdle. It is possible that these details are liable to slight varia-
tion, but these are my results. (Plate XXVIII. fig. 1.)

Next to the setae, perhaps the peptonephridia or salivary glands
are the most striking object. In no worm which I have ever
examined has the similarity between salivary glands and nephridia

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVIII.

Pig. 1. — Diagrammatic representation of: — 1. Girdle segment with two pairs of
short dorsal setse and male pores (mp.). 2. Segment v. with two pairs
of dorsal setae and triplets in ventral bundles. 3. Posterior segment
with four bundles of triplets. Ratios 4, 8, 9.

,, 2. — Showing branching of blood-vessel in anterior segments of Enchytrxus
minimus Bret, (the blood is white).

„ 3. — Segments iii.-vi., to show peptonephridia (p) and spermatbecae (sp.) open-
ing into intestine (int.). These organs are paired.

,, 4. — Sketch of Fridericia peruviana. The hatched lines indicate such portions
of the vascular system as were made out. br. brain ; ph. pbarynx :
gl. perhaps copulation gland (unpaired) on segment 5 ; sept. gl. septal
gland in segments 5-7 ; s.g. salivary glands, uubranched and seeming to
be attached behind in segment 7 ; dil. enlarged vessels in segments
7, 8, 9 ; pr. prostomium. No setrc shown.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1911. PI. XXVIII.

mp.

III.

IV.

I Face p. 732

New British Enchytrmds. By Rev. H. Friend. '■'>'■'<

appeared so marked. Bretscher's description as given above is
exceedingly accurate for the British species. These organs
branch out immediately behind the pharynx and extend back
to the beginning of segment v., filling up almost all the
coelomic cavity of segment iv., and presenting a very striking
appearance (Plate XXVIII. fig. 3). There are three pairs of septal
glands in segments v -vii., the hindmost pair being, as is frequently
the case, the longest ; and by the side of this pair lies the first
pair of nephridia.

The dorsal vessel I found in one instance to begin in seg-
ment xiii. There is no other allusion in the diagnosis given above
to the vascular system. I may therefore add that I have found
an enlarged blood-vessel in segment viii., which reminds one of
what occurs in certain species of water-worm, such, e.g., as
Limnodrilus. Further, there is a double commissure in the 3rd
segment (Plate XXVIII. fig. 2), but I have not worked out all the
details of the system. The ccelomic corpuscles are oval, blunt,
cigar-shaped, or circular. It often happens that these bodies
assume a globular or circular shape immediately on being set free,
though they may appear pointed when they are flowing about in
the ccelom. The intestine is covered with cells which have under
certain conditions a very oily appearance. The girdle extends
over segment xii. to the seta? of segment xiii., and is slightly more
cellular or glandular in structure than the other parts of the body.

When one is examining the region around the girdle, eggs in
all stages of development may perhaps be in the field. Though
these look white to the naked eye they are opaque under the lens,
and may make it difficult for the observer at first to study the
details of the sexual organs. Large male pores are found on the
girdle segment where the ventral setas are wanting, connected with
which is a long and very narrow duct leading to the ampulla,
which is somewhat pear-shaped, about twice as long as broad, and
possessed of a brownish orifice. These organs are paired.

I have not detected in our native species the thickenings or
copulation-glands of the nerve-chord in segments v. and vi. But
my experience teaches me that these are very variable, and their
meaning, permanence, and other details are not yet sufficiently
understood. The brain is well developed and somewhat rounded
behind. Only when extremely tense does it show any signs of
concavity, this being due to the lateral attachments.

The nephridia are chiefly post-septal, but I have not observed
the duct. The only other point of importance relates to the
spermathecse (Plate XXVIII. fig. 3). These are such characteristic
organs that it is always necessary to give them careful study.
The presence or absence of diverticula may enable one instantly to
decide the species. In the Enchytrreids they are (with one or two
exceptions) always found in segment v., with their opening in the

Dec. 20th, 1911 3 b

73 i Transactions of the Society.

intersegment 4 5. Sometimes well marked glands are to be found
at the orifice or along the duct, but in the present instance I
found no such glands, nor were any diverticula present. The
organ appears somewhat bottle-shaped, with the narrow neck
towards the intestine into which it opens.

As it is proposed to follow this study with descriptions of other
new species, it has been thought advisable to go somewhat mote
into detail than will be necessary in later papers. A few figures
are added to make some of the points intelligible to those readers
who have not heretofore given the Enchytrseids any attention.

II. — Fridcricia Peruviana sp. n.

On May 13 I received from Kew Gardens a small quantity
of earth, containing two young Annelids, from Peru. The mould
had come with some plants in Wardian cases, and I kept it for
some days to see what other specimens of interest might reveal
themselves. On Whit Monday, while I was subjecting the material
to more careful examination, I found a small Enchytiadd which.
presents so many interesting features, and is so different from any
other species yet known to me, that I have ventured to regard it as
a new species. As there seems no reason to suppose that it got
into the mould after reaching this country, and as it is a well-
marked Fridericia, I have not hesitated to name it after the country
whence it seems to have reached England. While there are one or
two Fridericias which approach.it in certain characters, there are,
on the other hand, various points of association with Henlea and
Buchholzia, as will be seen when the diagnosis is complete. In
size, average number of setae, and one or two other particulars, it
approaches Fridericia parva Bretscher ( = F. Bretseheri Southern),
a species which has already been found in Switzerland, Scotland,
and Ireland. But the differences are at the same time great and
important.

The new species is 5-6 mm. in length. The intestine from the
8th or 9th segment backward is covered with brownish cells, which
render the animal somewhat opaque. The ccelomic corpuscles are
large and numerous, so that it is very difficult to see the nephridia.
These corpuscles instantly break up upon being forced out of the
body, indicating that they are surrounded by an unusually delicate
membrane. The nephridia are lobed, and the main portion is post-
septal. The anus is terminal, very glandular and sensitive, with a
large aperture of striking structure. It appears to be composed of
four large ilaps, or valvular flanges, closely resembling those of
Dero obtvsa, which seem to indicate that the worm may live in a
habitat where a specially constructed posterior is of value, perhaps,
for purposes of aeration. Consequently there are no setee on the
two hind-most segments. The setse range from two to five in

New British Enchytrs&ids. By Rev. H. Friend. 7 -'5 5

number, four being predominant. In the hinder portion of the
body the setae are of almost equal length — two, three, or four in a
bundle. In the middle of the body the setae are four, the inner-
most pair being somewhat shorter than the others. In the front
of the body the setae are shorter than behind, and are often irregular.
There may be two, three, four, or even five (rarely) in a bundle,
and it frequently happens that they are of different lengths, re-
calling, in some degree, the appearance of the setae in Buchholzia
fallax. But the reason is different, the irregularity in Fridericia
being due to the falling away of the outer setae on one side of the
bundle while they remain on the other.

The number of segments is about 35, and they are nearly all of
equal dimensions. The head is only slightly glandular. There
are three pairs of septal glands in segments 5, 6 and 7, and on the
integument of segment 5 a large unpaired gland, brownish in
colour, and made up of many very small cells. It may be a
copulation gland,* but differs from all others I have ever seen,
and is not connected with any modification of the nerve centres.
The brain is slightly indented or concave behind but not in front.
The pharynx extends through the whole of segment 2 and the half
of segments 1 and 3, and could be everted with ease.

As is the case with Henlea, the oesophagus is sharply marked
off from the intestine. Tiie intestine of the 8th segment assumes
a unique appearance, and the 9th is the first which is normally
like all those which follow. The dorsal vessel springs from seg-
ment 13 or 15, and in segments 7, 8, 9 there are large pulsating
dilatations, which seem to resemble those found in Fridericia
pcrrieri Vejd., and in that case are of peculiar interest, as they
show that such enlargements are not necessarily (as Beddard
suggests) connected with the anticlitellian origin of the dorsal
vessel.

There is a very small commissural vessel in segment 3, but the
blood-vessels are extremely delicate, and are made out with diffi-
culty. This is due in part to the fact that the blood is colourless,
and it is therefore often very hard to say where the various organs
begin, end, or overlap. This is especially the case also in reference
to the salivary glands, which spring from the oesophagus close to
the pharynx, and extend backwards without branching, forming
long sacs, as in Fridericia parva Bret. Indeed, after the most care-
ful examination, I could not discover a free posterior extremity,
and I have come to the conclusion that these glands are attached to
the oesophagus at both ends in or near segments 3 and 7. But as
all my observations had to be made upon a single specimen, it may
be that when further material is obtained this view will have to
undergo modification. (Plate XXVIII. fig. 4.)

* Later study leads me to think it is not a point of importance.

3 B 2

736 Transactions of the Society.

As the worm was immature, there are no observations to record
respecting the nature or position of the clitellum, or the shape of
the sperm-ducts and funnels. The spermathecae also were un-
developed. This is greatly to be regretted, as it would have been
possible, were these important organs matured, to form a better
opinion as to the possible relation with Fridericia parva and other
allied species. We may summarize the foregoing account as
follows : —

Fridericia peruviana Friend. Length 5-6 mm., setae 2-5,
somewhat longer behind than before. Brain slightly concave pos-
teriorly. (Esophagus sharply marked off from intestine. Dorsal
vessel post-clitellian in origin, with dilatations in segments 7-9.
Three pairs of septal glands ; salivary glands not branched ; ne-
phridia lobed, chiefly postseptal.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally invertebrata and cryptogamia),

MICEOSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.
a. Embryology. +

Gestation in White Mice.J — J- Frank Daniel notes that the general
estimate of the period of gestation in white mice as twenty-one days,
requires considerable modification. The period in non-suckling mothers
is practically twenty days ; in suckling mothers the period seems to be
very variable. Not only does one mother differ from another in period
of gestation, but the same mother at different times shows considerable
variability. The minimum is twenty-two, the maximum thirty. It
seems that the period of gestation, in lactating mothers, varies directly
with the number of young suckled. The delay due to lactation may
operate by retarding ovulation, but the author thinks that it operates by
retarding the development of the young before birth.

Factors of Traumatic Parthenogenesis.§ — E. Bataillon discusses
the occurrence of artificially induced parthenogenetic development in
Amphibians. Electrical stimulation may induce more or less pronounced
cleavage, but it never goes as far as gastrulation. Puncturing with a
thermic cautery leads to cleavage, but in the puncturing something gets
in — a leucocyte or some serum — something not specific. Bataillon dis-
tinguishes this traumatic parthenogenesis from that induced, for instance,
in Loeb's experiments, but we have not been able to get a clear view of
his position.

Alleged Lactation of Male Lepus bairdii.|| — A. Berger discusses
E. Hart Merriam's (1872) description of adult males of Lepus bairdii.

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they
do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers
noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object, of
this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually
published, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which
are either new or have not been previously described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects. t Journ. Exper. Zool., ix. (1911) No. 4, pp. 865-70.

§ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 920-2.

I! SB. Ges. Natur. Freunde Berlin (1910) No. 7, pp. 305-6.

738 SUMMARY OF CUKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

which had mammary glands full of milk, and the hair moist round the
mammae. Be expresses the hope thai sonic American zoologist will

corroborate or contradict Merriam's account. Isolated cases are known
in which a man has been able to produce milk, and Stengel induced
lactation by artificial manipulation of the milk glands in a male calf.

Colour Inheritance in Pigeons.*— J. Lewis Bonhote and P. W.

Srnalley state some of the results of a series of experiments in which they
are engaged. They have reached the following Mendelian conclusions :
1. Silver is dilute blue. 2. Blue is dominant to silver. 3. Chequering
is dominant to its absence (i.e. a self -colour). 4. Grizzling is dominant
to its absence (i.e. a self-colour). 5. Grizzling is dominant to chequering ;
the impure dominants may, however, sometimes be easily distinguished.
6. A mealy is a grizzled bird with the white wholly or partially replaced
by red. 7. Red in a mealy is apparently dominant to white, and hence
a mealy is dominant to a grizzle. 8. White and grizzling when they have
met combine together and have a common inheritance. 9. Red com-
bines with grizzling in the same way as does white.

Many details, howTever, do not entirely accord with the Mendelian
theory. Some law or series of laws over-rides and modifies (externally
at all events) the expected Mendelian results. A consistent deviation
from expected proportions occurs. It would seem that some factor
exists which has the power to influence but not to alter the gametic
inheritance.

Interchange of Limbs of Chick by Transplantation.! — Florence
Peebles finds that it is possible for chick embryos to develop in porcelain
cups in a moist chamber at the proper temperature up to the ninth day,
although the development is delayed. The leg bud when removed may
be grafted on the proximal part of the wing, and the wung bud may be
grafted on the proximal portion of the leg without permanently injuring
the embryo. The results indicate that when the tip of a young bud is
grafted on the proximal portion of another limb it becomes a part of the
appendage to which it is attached instead of retaining the character of the
part it is destined to become. No regeneration of the limbs takes place
after the removal of the buds.

Influence of Environment on Reproductive Pericd.} — The late
Salvatore Lo Bianco left an interesting paper in which he discussed the
movements of the sea, the chemical and physical conditions, the horizontal
and vertical distribution, the nutritive conditions, and the like, in their
influence on the period of reproduction.

Involution of Tail in Alytes obstetr:cans.§ — P. Wintrebert finds
that neither the lateral line system nor any part of the spinal cord or
brain has any directive role in the metamorphosis.

Physiology of Fish-eggs and Larvae. || — W. J. Dakin has continued
his enquiry into the physico-chemical relations existing between the body-

* Proc. Zool. Soc, 1911, pp. 601-19 (4 pis.).

t Biol. Bull., xx. (1910) pp. 14-18 (2 figs.).

X MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, xx. (1911) pp. 129-56.

§ C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 3-5.

|| Internat. Rev. Hydrobiol., iii. (1910-11) pp. 487-95.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 73§

fluids of marine animals and the sea- water. He has experimented on
the eggs and larvae of Teleosts and Elasmobranchs.

The freezing-point of the contents of plaice-eggs is very different
from that of the sea-water in which they are fonnd floating, and the
osmotic pressure is only about two-fifths that of the latter. The freezing-
point of the contents of dog-fish eggs is about the same as that of the
sea-water.

Immersion of dog-fish eggs in a fluid of less salinity than normal
sea-water, results in a gain in weight due to absorption. The contents
of the purse are therefore not independent of the external medium, and
a change in salinity of the latter brings about an alteration in the
salinity and osmotic pressure of the egg-contents.

The osmotic pressure of the egg-contents in plaice and dog-fish re-
sembles very closely that of the blood of the adults. In the case of the
pelagic eggs of the plaice, death results in a disturbance of the conditions
under which the equilibrium existing between the egg-contents and the
sea-water is maintained, and an increase in the salinity of the egg-
contents accompanied by an increase in density takes place, with the
result that the eggs can no longer float.

Retarding Development of Herring's Eggs.* — H. Chas. Williamson
has been able, by lowering the temperature of the water, to prolong the period
of embryonic development to fifty days. This is with a view to facilitating
importation to New Zealand. Further experiments in extending the
period have proved unsuccessful, and the author recommends that the
eggs should be put as soon as possible after spawning into running
water, or water kept in motion, and that effective mechanical aeration be
secured.

Colouring of Trout.f — K. Wagner has made a study of the develop-
ment of the coloration in the young trout {Sahno fario). The original
pigment is the lipochrome of the yolk-sac. The first melanoblasts
appear, at a temperature of 7-10° C, some fourteen days before hatching.
In other Teleosteans that have been described the time noted is about
the time of hatching.

The first melanoblasts separate off from the uppermost portion of
the muscle-segments. There is progressive pigmentation in situ and
also active migration. The epidermis remains quite unpigmented.

The bands of colour differ from other parts not in having more
chromatophores, but in having them in different state of expansion.
They function independently of the rest of the body.

The first orange-red colouring is found associated with ramified cells
of the connective-tissue. These cells appear about a week later than the
melanoblasts. The plasma of the orange-red cells is filled with an oil-
like mass, in which a variable quantity of lipochrome has been dissolved.
The cells form in their interior the subsequently extra-cellular lipochrome
drops, which unite in the red spots of the older trout. There are also
carmine-red drops and an iridescent granula.

* Fishery Board Scotland, 28th Rep. (1911) pp. 16-23 (1 pi.).
t Internal Rev. Hydrohiol., iv. (1911) pp. 1-33 (1 pi.).

,J(i \i.\l.\l;Y OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Origin of Notochord Epithelium.* — W. Georgi found in embryos
of Necturus that the primitive notochord-cells (Urchordazellen) produce

the elastica externa. Thereafter, but while it, is still very fine, sen-

i-liy cells pass through it into the notochord and form the epithelium.

From the epithelium, and therefore of mesodermic origin, there are
formed two other sheaths, the fibrous sheath and the elastica interna.
Alter the latter is formed there is no further immigration of mesenchyme
cells possible. The notochord cartilage, which takes the place of the
primitive notochord, is also due to the chorda-epithelium.

Development of Myotomes.! — A. L. J. Sunier has studied the firsl
stages in the internal differentiation of myotomes and the formation of
sclerotomatic elements in Acrania, Selachians, and Teleosts. The un-
differentiated elements of the wall of the myotomes become partly
muscular, partly mesenchymatous (connective in Acrania). The prim-
ordial elements of the musculature are cells in the form of plates, which
afterwards become split up longitudinally into fibres. The formation of
sclerotomatic elements in Craniata is simply the dissolution of a portion
of the median wall of the myotome. The scleroccel of Selachians is the
space which remains between the median wall and the rounded ventral
end of the muscular mass. It has no connexion with the formation of
sclerotomatic elements, and it is quite different from the altogether
special scleroccel of Amphioxus. It seems very doubtful if the " external
layer " of the mesoderm has the same significance in different Vertebrates.

Role of Interstitial Testicular Cells 4 — L. Mazzetti has studied
these elements in a variety of types, such as frog, bird, dog, and man.
He finds that the interstitial cells are unquestionably of connective-
tissue origin, being transformations of connective cells which proliferate
between the tubules. They may also arise, and perhaps in greater part,
from lymphatic lacuna1. They have either no importance or only a
minimal importance in connexion with secondary sex-characters. These
are determined by re-absorption of seminal fluid, including both sperm-
cells and their secreted products.

b. Histology.

Spindle-cells of Amphibian Blood.§ — E. Neumann maintains that
the erythrocytes arise in part from the colourless spindle cells, and that
there is a continuous series of transition types between spindle-cells and
lymphocytes.

Eye ofPteropus.|| — Gustav Fritsch describes a remarkable peculiarity
of the eve of Pteropus condorensis, similar to that also discovered by
Kohner in P. medius, namely, that the choroid sends long finger-like or
spindle-shaped (not conical) processes into the middle layers of the
retina. His description differs considerably from Kolmer's.

* Auat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 176-87 (4 figs.).

+ Onderzoekingen Zool. Lab. Rijksuniversiteit Groningen, ii. (1911) pp. 1-99
(6 pis.). % Anat. Anzeig., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 361-87 (14 figs.).

§ Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxvi. (1911) pp. 725-44.
II Zeitschr. wias. Zool., xcviii. (1911) pp. 288-96 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 741

Eye of Protopterus.*— E. Grynfeltt gives an account of the minute
structure of the eye of Protopterus annectens, which he finds on the
whole to be nearest that of other fishes, especially as regards the external
and the middle tunic. On the other hand, as regards the retina, there
is an approximation to the Urodelous Amphibian type, perhaps by con-
vergence, especially as regards the details of the rods and cones.

Distribution of the Muscle-fibres in Heart of Fishes. | — Luigi
Sala has examined the heart in ten Selachians, two Ganoids, and fifty-six
Teleosteans in reference to the arrangement of the muscle-fibres. He
describes various dispositions, e.g. the occurrence of longitudinal bundles
to the inside, transverse bundles to the outside, and radial bundles
between.

Cutaneous Papillae in Gobius.J — L. Sanzo has made a study of the
cutaneous papillae, or cyathiform organs, which occur in various series —
about the orbit, the jaws, the operculum, the back, the sides, etc. — of
the various species of Gobius, seventeen of which are dealt with. He
describes the distribution of the papilla? characteristic of the different
species.

c. General.

Animal Life of Sea-bottom.§ — C. Gr. Joh. Petersen and P. Boysen
Jensen have studied the quantity, composition and nutrition of the
bottom-fauna in Danish fjords. The stomachs of bottom-animals
chiefly contain a " dust-fine mass." This is partly inorganic, partly
organic, but with few living organisms. It is largely due to the
benthos vegetation, especially in the thin brown layer which is upper-
most. In several enclosed fjords with rich bottom-vegetation, large
quantities of dissolved organic matter have been found in the sea-water.
Most of the bottom-animals feed on detritus, partly obtained from the
water, partly from the brown layer. The authors emphasize the import-
ance of quantitative studies.

Validity of some forms of Mimicry.|| — N. Manders has devoted
much attention to the insectivorous birds and reptiles in Bourbon,
Mauritius, and Ceylon in their relation to alleged cases of mimicry. He
has reached the following conclusions :

In Bourbon and Mauritius there are no butterfly-eating birds or
reptiles, so that cases of mimicry occurring there cannot be due to their
influence. In Ceylon it has been shown that the butterfly-eating reptiles
are impartial feeders.

A trained observer can distinguish the majority of these mimetic
butterflies at a distance of twenty or thirty feet, and frequently at the
same number of yards. This being so, it is certain that a bird, which
depends on its powers of observation, could soon learn to discriminate

Drongos feed largely on Euplceas, and this being so, a Papilio

* Bull. Mens. Acad. Sci. Montpellier (1911) pp. 210-32 (1 fig.).

t Rend. R. 1st. Lombardo, xliii. (1910) pp. 825-9.

X MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, xx. (1911) pp. 251-328 (4 pis. and 15 figs.).

§ Report Danish Biol. Station, xx. (1911) pp. 1-78 (6 pis., 3 charts, and 6 tables) .

H Proc. Zool. Soc. (1911) pt. 3, pp. 696-749.

742 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

mimicking them obtains no protection in the vicinity of these birds
There is qo bird in Ceylon known to eat butterflies that distinctly dis-
criminates as an adult between one species of butterfly and another.

1 1 has been shown that there is a gnat, destruction of butterfly life
in the dry zone, and that here, if anywhere, Mullerian or Batesian
mimicry might be induced, but the destroyers are largely migratory, and
their attacks are not selective.

The number of broods of butterflies which occur between the ter-
mination of tasting experiments in one year and the commencement of
them in the next, is so great that any influence which could be wrought
by such is almost inappreciable.

The little evidence available shows that young Ceylon birds imitate
their parents in their choice of food ; but as regards butterflies, the fact
that there is no discrimination shown by adults leads one to conclude
either that few or no tasting experiments are undertaken in youth, or,
what is more probable, that their taste with regard to them is indifferent.

So far as an accurate knowledge of one species goes it is definitely
shown, that that form of mimicry represented by wet and dry season
forms (cryptic defence) is not produced for the protection of the species,
inasmuch as many (four) succeeding broods of the wet weather form
maybe found under dry season conditions without detriment to the species.

Different kinds of Hair.* — K. Toldt has given a useful account of
the different kinds of hairs, distinguishing three main types, bristles
(Grannenhaare), wool, and " Leithaare." The " Leithaare " are longer
and stronger than the bristles ; they are stiff, sparse, and isolated.
According to the author, the most primitive kind of hair is the " Leit-
haar," then the bristle, then wool-type. Special forms of hair, such as
those in some bats, in the tail of some porcupines, etc., are described.
The disposition of the hairs on the body of representative mammals is
also discussed.

Composition of the Lower Jaw.f — E. Gaupp finds that the "gonial,"
a membrane bone of the primordial lower jaw, is the so-called " angular "
of amphibians, the processus anterior mallei of mammals, and has a varied
history in reptiles.

In amphibians, the primordial lower jaw may show a posterior and
anterior ossification (articular and mento-mandibular), and the following
membrane bones : dentary, opercular ( = splenial), gonial, and excep-
tionally an element called " angular."

In Sauropsida the articulating end of the primordial lower jaw ossifies
as the articular, and there may be as many as six membrane bones —
dentary, opercular (= splenial), gonial, angular, supra-angular, and
complementary.

In mammals there arise on the primordial lower jaw three membrane
bones— the definitive mandible (corresponding to the dentary), the
tympanic (probably = angular), and the processus anterior mallei
(== gonial). From the articulating end of the primordial lower jaw the

* Ann. Natur. Mus. Wien, xxiv. (1910) pp. 195-268 (4 pis. and 1 fig.). See also
Zool. Zentralbl., xviii. (1911) p. 416.

t Anat. Anzeig., xxxix. (1911) pp. 609-66 (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY A.ND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 743

chief part of the malleus arises. The malleus as a whole is a gonio-
articular.

One of the general characteristics of the gonial is its close topo-
graphical relation to the chorda tympani, which often penetrates into
the canalis primordialis of the embryonic lower jaw. This is retained in
some mammals in the perforation of the processus anterior mallei.

In mammals, as contrasted with reptiles, the posterior toothless por-
tion of the jaw gets separated off and goes into the service of the ear
(articular + gonial = malleus ; angular = tympanic, and quadrate
= incus). The anterior part acquires a new connexion with the
squamosal, forming the " secondary " articulation of mammals. This is
exclusively a squamoso-dentary articulation (formed between two bones
not previously in association) and is not shared in by components of the
old quadrato-articular joint.

The " ramus " of the mammalian lower jaw is probably referable to
the processus ascendens of the reptile dentary, which differentiates into
a condyloid and a coronoid portion. The probable history of the
establishment of the characteristic mammalian squamoso-dentary articu-
lation in front of the old quadrato-articular joint is discussed in detail.

Origin of Domestic Dog.* — E. L. Trouessart revives and corrobor-
ates a view suggested in 1877 by Jeitteles that the ancestor of domestic
dogs is to be found in the small Indian wolf, Ganis pallipes Sykes, which
has a well-marked supra-orbital crest. The only exception he will admit
is that of the dogs of Ancient Egypt, recently discovered by Hilzheimer
and by Gaillard and Lortet, which seem to have been derived from
several species of jackal. The author cannot agree with Studer's con-
clusion that the domestic dog is descended from a European species
which became extinct in Quaternary times.

Reproductive Organs of Domestic Animals.f — E. Schmaltz has
given a monographic account — both anatomical and histological — of the
reproductive organs of horse, ox, sheep, pig, dog, and cat.

Mobility of Penguin's Vertebral Column.J — Hans Virchow has
made a study of the freedom of movement in the vertebral column of
the penguin (Spheniscus) — a mobility familiar enough to those who
have watched the birds in zoological gardens, but emphasized in recent
years by the photographs of various Antarctic explorers. The author
analyses the different possibilities, but shows that, as far as structure
goes, there is not much difference as one would expect beween the
penguins and other birds. The difference is not so much in the
apparatus as in the way in which it is used.

Migration of Birds. § — A. Landsborough Thomson discusses the
possibilities and actual results of bird-marking (by means of aluminium
rings bearing a number and address), with a view to discovering
additional facts in regard to migration. He gives an historical note on

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 909-13 (2 figs.).

t Die Struktur der Geschlechtsorgane der Haussaugetiere. Berlin : (1911)
xii. and 388 pp. (168 figs.).

t SB Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1910) pp. 4-10 (6 figs.).
§ Proc. R Phys. Soc., xviii. (1911) pp. 204-18.

744 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the method, which is now being pursued at various centres. As an
instance of results he sums up the data in regard to the movements of
the white stork, 'rinse data have been mainly due to the work of
Thienemann, at Rossitten ; Mortensen, of Viborg, in Denmark, and
the workers at the Hungarian Ornithological Bureau have also con-
tributed largely. The Natural History Department of Aberdeen Uni-
versity started in 1009 an enquiry on the lines of that at Rossitten,
and observers, willing to co-operate and desirous of further information
on the subject, are invited to communicate with Professor J. Arthur
Thomson. A few of the interesting results are the following : a widgeon,
marked in June 1900, at Loch Brora, Sutherlandshire, was taken in
Groningen, Holland, on September 3, 1909 ; a swallow, marked at a
farm near Tunbridge Wells in June 1909, was re-taken at the same
farm in June 1910 ; a song-thrush, marked in Aberdeenshire in June
1910, was shot in Portugal in September.

Weighing Parts of Eggs.* — Maynie R. Curtis refers to the
necessity of very accurate measurements in studying biometrically the
size, relations, and proportion of the parts of successive eggs of the same
hen. To prevent loss from evaporation the egg should be sealed, as
soon as possible after it is laid, in a half-pint Lightning fruit jar con-
taining a cushion of absorbent cotton. An accurate method of
separating the parts of the egg is as follows : Break the egg near the
centre and allow the albumen to run into a receiving dish. Keep the
yolk in one half of the shell. Then turn it into the empty half. The
yolk is then dried on filter paper. The shell is also dried on a filter.
The yolk and shell are then weighed. The difference between the sum
of their weights and the original weight of the unbroken egg gives the
weight of albumen.

Bite of Heloderma.t — Marie Phisalix was bitten by Heloderma
suspectum, the poisonous lizard of Arizona, and she describes all the
results, such as the violent pain, the swelling, the profuse perspiration,
the pallor, the vertigo, and so on. Even after a week there was fatigue,
giddiness, and local pain.

Toxins and Antitoxins. J — M. Arthus and B. Stawska have experi-
mented with the poison of cobra, rattlesnake, and fer-de-lance (Lachesis
lanceolatus), and the corresponding anti-venom serums, and they call
attention to the instantaneous character of the neutralization. The
rapidity suggests not a ferment-action, but the neutralization of an acid
by a base.

Corpora Adiposa of Frog.§ — P. Kennel continues his study of these
bodies, which he proposes to call adipo-lymphoid, since they are lympho-
poietic as well as reserves of fat. He finds that the adipose reserves are
used in all conditions of malnutrition, and particularly during the
hibernation. Moreover, the reserves help towards the development of
the germ-cells, particularly as regards the deutoplasm of the ovum.

* Rep. Maine Agric. Exper. Stat. (1911) pp. 93-112.
t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1790-2.
t Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 355-7.
§ Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 505-7.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 745

Tadpoles with Strongly Developed Lips.* — 0. du Bois Reymond
describes tadpoles of Megalophrys from China, which protruded a yel-
lowish, triangular warty membrane in front of the mouth, and hung
from the surface with this expanded.

Theodor Vogt t describes a tadpole from the region of Ruwenzori
with enlarged lips, with villus-like warts on the lower one. But the lips
are after the type of Rana temporary/, and not like those of Megalophrys.

Luminous Organs in Fishes.:}: — Hiroshi Oshima has studied these
in Mmopterus (a Selachian), in Maurolicus (one of the Sternoptychidas),
and in various species of Myctophum (Myctophidas).

In Etmopterus no numerical definiteness exists, the organs being
diffusely scattered, minute, epidermal swellings partly sunk in the cutis.
The photogenic body consists of a small number of conical photogenic
cells arranged radially into a hemispherical or semicylindrical mass. The
lens is unicellular. No unequivocal innervation has been proved ; the
blood-supply is carried on by a sinus underlying the organ. The light
produced from the organ is tranquil and faint, probably controlled by
special activity of pigment-cells.

In the Sternoptychidsethe organs are definite in number and arrange-
ment according to species. They are complicated in structure, and
there is in some cases a system of intercommunication between the
internal parts of the neighbouring organs. The photogenic body is
formed by numerous polyhedral gland-cells filling the interior of the
organ in either regular or irregular arrangement.

The lens is multicellular, and lenticular or flat in shape. The blood
capillaries form a network between the photogenic cells. The presence
of nerves has been proved in a few cases. The luminescence is not
momentary, but continuous. The light is not very intense. The photo-
genic body gives out light in air even when taken out of the organ.

The organs of the Myctophidse are the most highly differentiated
forms of luminous organs. Some species present sexual differences as
regards their position on the body. The photogenic body consists of a
number of small lamellar gland-cells. The lens, if present, is formed
by a local thickening of the superposed scale. The photogenic body is-
richly supplied with nerves, and the blood-vessels form a plexus around
it. The spark -like light is rather bright, and is undoubtedly controlled
by nerves.

In all the different forms of organ there is an abundant blood
supply, uniformity of structure in the species, glandular photogenic cells,
and a secretion product stainable with plasma-stains and never set free.
No spontaneous luminescence has been observed. In Myctophum where
the photophores, especially the large antorbital organs, have a spark-
like gleam when stimulated, the light may be quite useful for frightening
purposes. In Anomalops and Photoblepharon, the organs may be useful
for illuminating purposes, as they are placed inferiorly to the eyes and
emit quite intense and continuous light. There are no other instances
of this.

* SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1910) No. 7, pp. 285-7 (3 figs.),
t SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1910) No. 7, pp. 287-9 (2 figs.).
X Journ. Coll. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, xxvii. (1911) art. 15, pp. 1-25 (1 pi. and 4 figs.)

746

SUMMARY OF CUKKKNT l;KSK \ I ; < I L Ks IM'.l.ATlXG TO

Ichthyological Notes.* — II. Chas. Williamson communicates notes
on young stages of the angler {LopMus piscatorvus) ; on eggs of halibut,
conger, tusk; on post-larval Arnoglossus ; on a rare angler (Himan-
tolophus remhardtii) landed at Aberdeen ; on the occurrence of a
pilchard off Aberdeen ; on an angler with one eye; on three cases of
hermaphroditism in the cod ; on tumours from the cod, etc. ; on sand-
eels and a hermit-crab encysted in the abdominal cavity of haddock,
cod, and saithe ; and on the partial separation of the pectoral fin from
the snout in Raia circularis and R. clavata.

Ambi-coloured Flatfish.f — Richard Elmhirst describes a number
of ambi-coloured flatfish from the Clyde — plaice, witch (Pleuronectes
cynoglossus), dab (P. limanda), flounder (P. ftesus) and turbot.

INVERTEBRATA.

Jffollusca.

Layers of the Molluscan Shell.J — A. R. Horwood gives the fol-
lowing summary of the nature of the shell layer in Molluscs, omitting
cases which do not conform to the usual type — e.g. Patella, Fusus,
Littorina, Purpura, Ostrea, Peclen, Ghama, Spondylus, and Mytilus.

Group.

Gastropoda

Lamellibranchiata

Cephalopoda

Living.

C Only layer. Aragonite with
chitinous substance (con-
chiolin), rarely sulphate
of lime.

1. Outermost layer dark,

horny conchiolin.

2. Outer prismatic calca-

reous layer of calcite.

3. Inner layer, lamellar

porcellanous arago-
i nite.

1. " Black layer."

2. Porcellanous laminar

aragonite.

3. Nacreous calcite.

Fossil.

Only layer. Aragonite usu-
ally found as casts, but
sometimes as aragonite,
sometimes as granular
calcite.

1. Absent.

2. Calcite.

3. Aragonite, usually pseudo-

calcite.

1. " Black layer," rare.

2. Aragonite.

3. Aragonite.

Out of 101 species examined, 24 have a shell-layer of aragonite —
10 Gastropods (the inner and only layer), 10 Lamellibranchs (the inner
of two layers), 4 Cephalopods (the outer of two layers).

a. Cephalopoda.

New Cephalopods from Hawaiian Islands. § — S. Stillman Berry
describes Stephanoteuthis hawaiiensis g. et sp. n., with short saccular body,
large broad head, short stout arms, very large semicircular fins placed
somewhat posteriorly, and no gladius. He also describes Polypus hoylei

* Fishery Board for Scotland, 28th Rep. (1911) pp. 24-67 (5 pis.).

t Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist. (1911) pp. 77-9.

j Geol. Mag. viii. (1911) pp. 406-18.

§ Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xsxvii. (1910) pp. 407-19 (9 figs.).

ZOOLOGY VXD BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 747

sp. 11., Stoloteuthis iris sp. n., with relatively enormous sub-circular tins.
Cranchia (Liocranchia) globula sp. n., with a very rotund body, and three
other new species.

y. Gastropoda.

Mantle-cavity and Pallial Organs of 3ulleidse.* — Remy Perrier
and Henri Fischer have made a study of the general and minute struc-
ture of the mantle and its associated organs in various Tecti branch
Gastropods — Acteon tomatilis, Aplustrum amplusfre, Scaphander lig-
narius, S. puncto-striatus, Acera bullata, and A. soluta. They discuss
also the affinities of Aplustrum and of Acera, and the adaptive characters
in the latter.

Alimentary Canal of Helix pomatia.t — J. Spiro has studied the
minute structure of the epithelium in particular. It consists of cylin-
drical and calyciform cells. The granulations and fat-globules found
in the cylindrical cells in summer are absent in winter. During hiber-
nation the nuclei of the cylindrical cells become poorer in chromatin.
All the cylindrical cells bear cilia, but these are lost during hibernation.
The calyciform cells secrete an inactive mucus during digestion ; it
ce.ises when hibernation sets in. The calyciform cells and the rest of
the epithelial lining degenerate in spring, and are re-formed from newly
regenerated cylindrical cells.

Damage to Plaice-fishing by Whelks.:): — C. G. Joh. Petersen dis-
cusses the damage done to the plaice fishing in the Limf jord by the large
numbers of Buccinum undatum and Nassa reticulata, which devour the
plaice when these are caught in the gill nets and sunk to the bottom.
It does not seem possible to suggest any remedy that would pay, but it
might be well to try more frequent lifting of the nets.

Arthropoda.
a. Insecta.

Studies on Injurious Insects. — Antonio Berlese gives an account
of the measures taken to cope with the olive-fly.

Minute Structure of Cuticle in Insects. || — Serge Kapzov has studied
this in larvae of Dytiscus and other beetles, in silkworms and mealworms,
in may-fly larva?, and so on. However complex the cuticle may be, it
consists of a coherent meshwork of looser and denser portions. The
structure of this meshwork is partly determined by pressures and strains
operative during the formatiou of the cuticle, and partly by variability
in the secretory activity of the epidermic cells, which again may be per-
haps affected by mechanical conditions. The diverse disposition of the
framework is correlated with the varied direction of strains and pressures.
Chitiu is never a plasmic differentiation ; it is rather to be compared to
coagulating substances and to cellulose.

* Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.) xiv. (1911) pp. 1-189 (9 pis. and 26 figs.).

f Rev. Suisse Zool., xix. (1911) pp. 275-302 (1 pi.).

X Rep. Danish Biol. Stat., xix. (1911) pp. 1-20 (9 figs.).

§ Redia, vii. (1911) pp. 111-55.

|| Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcviii. (1911) pp. 297-337 (3 pis. and 3 figs.).

748 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Moulting in Silkworms.* — E. Verson returns to a study of the
exuvial glands of the silkworm, which he described in 1889, and adds in
detail to his previous account. He devotes much attention to the
nucleus which seems to play a chief part in the secretory process. Very
remarkable and interesting is what Verson calls the "flow" and ,-ebb"
of the glands (especially in the posterior segments) before and after each
moult.

New Stag-beetles. f — Arthur M. Lea discusses the genus Lissotes,
stag-beetles almost confined to Tasmania, and describes a number of new
species. His collection included an hermaphrodite, L. punctatus, having
the left side male and the right female, and a specimen of L. curvicornis
with seven legs, the extra one jutting out from the left front coxa.

Alimentary Canal of Dytiscus.J — H. Rungius has made an elaborate
study of the alimentary tract both in the larval and adult water-beetle.
He describes the macroscopic features of the various parts, the minute
structure of the wall, e.g. the intima, epithelium, basal membrane, and
muscularis of the fore-gut, the epithelium, crypts, supporting lamella, and
muscularis of the mid-gut, and so on.

Large Egg Laid by a Beetle.§ — F. H. Gravely reports that a
Buprestid beetle, Sternocera dasypleura Koll., laid an egg 8 ■ 5 mm. long
by 5" 5 mm. broad, the beetle itself being 43 mm. by 16 '5 mm. The
superficial covering of this large egg was somewhat leathery and whitish.

Fluorescence in Luminous Insects. |j — R. Dubois points out that he
discovered animal fluorescence in 1909, having demonstrated it not
only in Lampyrids and luminous Elaterids, but in some animals which
are not luminescent. In luminous insects the fluorescence is accessory
and an embellishment. The author refers to recent reports on animal
fluorescence by McDermott % and by Ives and Coblentz.**

Gametogenesis of Gall-fly. ft — L. Doncaster continues his study of
the gametogenesis of Neuroterus lenticularis. There are two kinds of
parthenogenetic females in the spring generation, which lay eggs
differing in their behaviour as regards maturation. In the eggs laid by
the one class there is no maturation division, and the early segmentation
divisions show the diploid number (20) of chromosomes. No polar
chromosomes are ever found. In the eggs laid by the second class
of female, the nucleus divides at the surface of the egg, forming an
irregular outer group of chromosomes (first polar nucleus) and an inner
group of parallel rod-like chromosomes. The latter divide immediately,
apparently transversely, into an inner group which forms the egg-nucleus,
and an outer or second polar group. The first polar group may divide

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvi. (1911) pp. 457-80 (2 pis.).

t Proc. R. Soc. Tasmania (1910) pp. 346-66 (2 pis.).

X Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcviii. (1911) pp. 179-287 (74 figs.).

§ Records Indian Mus., vi. (1911) pp. 45-6.
|| Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 208-10.

^ Journ. Amer. Cherh. Soc, xxxiii. (March, 1911).
** Bull. Bureau of Standards, Washington, vi. (1910) pp. 321-36.
ft Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. pp. 476-89 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 749

into two. In the early segmentation mitoses, the haploid number (10)
of chromosomes is found.

Since it is known that some parthenogenetic individuals lay eggs
which all develop into females, and others lay only male-producing eggs,
and since the female shows the diploid chromosome number in all its
cells, while the male has the haploid number in the spermatogonia and
nerve-cells, it is suggested that the eggs which undergo no maturation-
division become female, those which undergo reduction males.

Tabanids and Trypanosomes.* — Sir David Bruce and Captains
A. E. Hamerton and H. R. Bateman find that Tabanus secedens,
T. thoracinus, and T.fuscomartj hiatus do not seem to be able to trans-
mit Trypanosoma pecorum from infected to healthy cattle by the
mechanical method of transmission. Owing to the short life of these
Tabanids in captivity it is impossible from the experiments made to
state whether they can convey the disease after a period of development
of the Trypanosomes in the fly. The investigators believe that the three
types of Flagellates found in Tabanus secedens and T. thoracinus are
various stages in the development of a harmless Crithidium in these flies.

Revision of Oriental Species of Tabanus.f — Gertrude Ricardo
has done a useful piece of work in revising the species of Tabanus from
the Oriental Region. The 119 described species are reduced to 7:5, but
the addition of 40 new species raises the total again to 117.

Influence of Weather Conditions on Frequency of Warbles. $
X. Lehmann and C. Vaney have made careful computations of the fre-
quency of warbles in different seasons. Their general result is that in
the region of Lyous, warm weather during July and August favours the
oviposition of Hypoderma bovis, and is followed by a high percentage of
warbled hides the following year.

Respiration and Circulation in Tipula maximaj — J. M. Brown
describes the respiratory and circulatory systems in this larva, a form of
" leather jacket," which occurs beneath stones, eitber close to or in the
bed of streams. There is an extensive system of fine air-tubes taking
origin from the stigmatic chambers and radiating to the body-wall.
Amongst these tubules the blood circulates. This may be an adapta-
tion for bringing the blood into relation with the air near the spiracles
themselves. There are " blood-gills " for respiration when submerged.

The author gives a careful description of the "heart," or dorsal
vessel, the intersegmental and ostial valves, the pericardial cells, which
seem to be in great part excretory, the pulsations, which occupy about
2*5 seconds each (about 24 per minute, the resting phase occupying
about half the whole period), and the action of the ostial valves.

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 349-58 (1 pi.).
t Records Indian Museum, iv. (1911) pp. 111-258 (2 pis.).
% Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1508-10.
§ Trans. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xi. (1910) pp. 125-35 (3 pis.).

Dec . 20th, 1911 3 c

750 SUMMARY OF CUBRBNT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Mosquito sucked by Midge.*- I". II. Gravely reports finding in the
Sunderbunds a small < Jhironomid (Gulicoides), with its proboscis embedded
in the abdomen of a mosquito (Myzomyia rossii). Probably the Gulicoides
sucks mammalian blood and was taking it second-hand from the mosquito.

Experiments with Dragon-fly Larvae. f — R. J. Tillyard concludes
from experiments on a Libellulid larva (undetermined) that the larvae
may live more than a year, and under adverse circumstances over two
years ; that they can resist starvation for eight months, and considerable
drought for nine weeks. He also worked with larvae of Synthemis
eustalacta Burm., which lived in three inches of dry sand for ten weeks.

Histological Study of the Innervation of the Heart of Larval
Dragon-fly.! — A. Zawarzin points out that, in spite of all the thousands
of entomological researches, we do not know much in regard to the
minute structure of the nervous system. Modern neurological methods
have been but little applied. He has made a thorough study of the
nerves of the heart of jEschnaA&vvgd. There are no nerve-cells on the
heart or near it ; the innervation is due to peripheral nerve-fibres and
their terminations. The nerves spring from paired (cardiac) ganglia
of the visceral system and from the ganglia of the ventral chain. The
nerves from the latter are probably motor ; they enter segmentally into
the cardiac nerve which comes from cardiac ganglia. Some endings,
probably motor, are disposed on the wall of the heart, in the valves, on
the septum, and on the alary muscles. Their terminal threads have a
characteristic necklace-like varicosity and no anastomosis. Other nerve-
endings form a plexus at the ostia.

Buccal Apparatus of Hemiptera.§ — E. Bugnion and N. Popoff
give an account of the mouth-parts in Graphosoma, Pijrrhocoris, Raphi-
gaster, and other Hemiptera. They discuss the rostrum, the labrum, the
stylets, the supporting tentorium, the pharynx, the taste-organs, the
salivary pump, the labial and maxillary glands, and the general structure
of the head.

Study of a Thrips.jj — Pietro Buffa has made a study of Heliothrips

hsemorrhoidalis, especially in its parthenogenetic phase All the forms
are parasitic and of similar habitat ; there is no larval moult ; there
is a close structural similarity between larvae and adults, e.g. in mouth-
parts ; there is a pro-nymph stage and a free nymph stage like the adult,
neither feeding ; there is a simple form of parthenogenesis.

Study of Phryganea grandis.^f — C. Wesenberg-Lund has made a
study of the life of this caddis-fly. The female often goes down about
f m. below the surface to deposit her eggs. Till about September 1 the
larvae live on the bottom, principally feeding on Ghara, and making

* Records Indian Museum, vi. (1911) p. 45.

t Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxv. (1910) pp. 666-76.

X Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xcvii. (1911) pp. 481-510 (2 pis. and 9 figs.).

^ Arch. Zool. Exper., vii. (1911) pp. 643-74 (2 pis. and 8 figs.).

11 Redia, vii. (1911) pp. 70-109 (3 pis.).

1 Internat. Rev. Hydrobiol., iv. (1911) pp. 65-90 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 75]

their cases of Char a material. In summer they ascend to the Potamo-
geton region and creep about among these, making their cases of small
pieces of the leaves. In January they return to the bottom, now using
bits of leaves that fall from surrounding trees.

The material used in case-making is always arranged as a spiral band.
The band of the young larva slowly increases in width ; when older, after
the last moult, the width remains nearly constant, about 8-10 mm. In
building its house the young larva weaves only small fragments of each
of the "2-40 mm. long pieces on the case ; later on, when all are of the
same length, the whole of each piece is fastened on to the case. The
case itself consists of a silken tube, upon which the above-mentioned
pieces are fixed. When a fresh piece has to be inserted on the tube,
the animal spins a membrane across the angles between the last inserted
piece and the former spiral, upon which the new piece is placed. It is
then spun together with the preceding one. The contrast of the conical
tube of the young larva and the cylindrical tube of the full-grown larva
is discussed in detail.

It seems that the larva makes use of a fixed measure, partly, while
the larva is still young, for determining the length of the pieces that have
to be inserted on the tube, and partly, in the older stages, for measuring
the length of the piece that has to be cut off from the growing plant.
The bending-angle of the head probably constitutes this measure, the
width of the angle being limited by a peculiar process or horn, project-
ing from the under-side of the prothorax — an organ the significance of
which has not hitherto been ascertained. It is probably a unit among
insects.

Before pupation the larva fastens itself to the roots of a Garex or
creeps into holes in logs lying at the foot of the pond. It rests as pupa
from May 15 till June 1. The imago is common on the reeds and rushes
in June.

As to the advantage of the cases described, which are not met with
outside the family Phryganidae and the unrelated genus Triseiwdes, the
small pieces of leaf arranged in a spiral band encircling the whole case
from one end to the other, give the otherwise frail structure the necessary
solidity and rigidity. Furthermore, as the material always consists of
air-filled pieces of plant, the weight is but slightly increased. And again,
owing to their thin and smooth casements, the tubes offer only a slight
resistance to the movements of the animals in the water.

Of all Trichoptera with cruciform larvae, the Phryganidae are the
most carnivorous, and at the same time possess greater powers of locomo-
tion than the other larvae, which are mainly plant-eaters. The larva? of
species of Trisenodes are the only Trichopterous larvae whose tubes are
enclosed in material not made by the animal itself, and that, nevertheless,
are able to move about and even swim. It thus appears that the spiral
construction of the tubes is met with in those Trichopterous larvae which
most require light and movable cases.

Studies on Mallophaga and Anoplura.* — Eric Mjoberg is to be
congratulated on this fine piece of work on a difficult subject. In the
systematic portion he describes numerous new forms. He then gives

* Arkiv Zool., vi. (1910) pp. 1-297 (5 pis. and 156 figs.).

3 c 2

752 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

an anatomical account of the various systems of the body. The eggs
are also described. They are very closely alike in the two groups — e.g.
in showing the same sort of peculiar " ovum-stigma," which is restricted
bo MEallophaga and Anoplura. Then follow lists of hosts and the asso-
ciated species.

£. Myriopoda.

Studies on Millipedes.* — Karl W. Verhoeff discusses in particular
the family Craspedosornidas and its German representatives. He contrasts
the genera Craspedosoma and Macheiriophoron, establishes a new genus,
Tatrasoma, based on Atraetosoma carpathicum Latzel, defines the sub-
genera of Craspedosoma and Pyrgocyphosoma, and describes a number of
larval forms.

Habits of Scutigera coleoptrata. f — J. Kiinckel d'Herculais has
some interesting notes on this long-legged centipede, which frequents
houses. It hides in crevices during the day ; it pursues flies (especially
Fannia scalaris) at night. It throws itself on the fly, enswathing it with
its long limbs ; it injects poison from its forceps ; it chews the dead
body, ingesting only the soft parts ; it may kill three or four at once
without stopping to eat. As a fly-catcher it does good service.

7. Onychophora.

New Species of Peripatus from Grenada. J — Charles T. Brues
describes Peripatus barbouri sp. n., which he and G. M. Allen found
close to the Grand Etang Lake in the Island of Grenada. It belongs to
the section of P. edwardsi. The body is entirely without dorsal colour
markings. There are 30-31, usually 31, pairs of legs in the female.
Its closest affinities are with P. trinidadensis from Trinidad, which lies
about ninety miles to the south-west of Grenada. It has also close
affinities with P. imthurmi, P. sedgwicki and certain forms of P. dominicae.
The author also discusses P. juliformis Guild, var. swainsonse Cockerell ;
P.jamaicensis Grabham and Cockerell, and an unidentifiable specimen
from British Honduras.

5. Arachnida.

Cavernicolous Gamasids.§ — A. Bonnet describes four new species
of Gamasus and one of Pergamasus collected from caves and the like
by M. Yire.

Studies on Injurious Mites. || — Giacomo del Guercio has made a
zoological and practical study of the Eriophyida? which attack buds,
e.g. Eriophyes corylii/allarum and E. pyri.

Monograph on Tarsonemidas.lf — Guido Paoli deals with the family
Disparipedidte, which have " a more or less subdiscoidal body, and the
cephalothorax protected by a more or less expanded clypeus which some-
times covers the rostrum and the first and second pairs of limbs."

* SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1910) pp. 19-62 (2 pis.).

t Comptes Bendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 399-401.

X Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., liv. (1911) pp. 305-18 (2 pis. and 4 figs.).

$ Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1911) pp. 381-98 (3 pis.).

Redia, vii. (1911) pp. 1-64 (7 figs.).
Tf Redia, vii. (1911) pp. 215-81 (5 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 753

e. Crustacea.

Sperm Transfer in Certain Decapods.* — E. A. Andrews points out
that the sperm-masses may be applied to the surface of the shell (as in
Astacus), or directly introduced into the oviducts, or placed in a special
receptacle, like the pit in Gambarus. A peculiar receptacle known as the
" thelycum," is found in certain prawns, the Peneidoe, as also in
Anaspidacea. The paper describes the " thelycum " of Peneidre, in
Peneus and Parapeneus, where it is a cavity enclosed more or less by
outgrowths from the shell, and is found full of spermatozoa. In the
deep-sea prawns of the group Eryonidea, Geoffrey Smith has described
a similar receptacle, but the author shows that this interpretation is very
doubtful. In the species of Polycheles which he has studied he finds no
spermatheca.

Development of Maia squinado.f — C. Schlegel has succeeded in
rearing the eggs and larvse of this crab. Its life-history is much con-
densed, when compared with that of Carcinus msenas, for instance.
From the egg there is hatched a minute Protozoaea— a transitional
phase which contains the first zorea. After three-quarters of an hour,
the first zogea is liberated. During the night of the 4th to 5th day the
first moult occurs and the second zoaea. Both these zoaeae live at the
surface and show an intense positive phototropism. During the night
of the 8th to 9th day, the megalopa-stage is reached, which lasts for
about a week. It leaves the surface and goes deeper and deeper. The
subsequent post-larval form has all the adult characters, and is negatively
phototropic.

Palsemon niloticus in Lake Tchad. $— Sollaud and Tilho report that
Gaillard has discovered colonies of Palsemon niloticus Roux, in Lake
Tchad. They discuss the explanation of this interesting fact, and suggest
that the Tchad basin formerly extended (probably in Quaternary times),
to the south of the Libyan desert, to the Bahr-el-Grhazal, and thus into
communication with the Nile. There is considerable resemblance also
in the fishes and fresh-water molluscs of the Tchad and the Nile.

Crustacea of Kermadec Islands. § — Charles Chilton reports on a
collection (83 species) from these islands, which He about half-way
between New Zealand and the Tonga Islands. Most of the specimens
belong to species already known, nearly all the marine and littoral species
being Australian or Indo-Pacific forms. Of especial interest is the
occurrence of the large Amphipod Eurythenes gryllus, whose distribu-
tion has attracted much attention. The author also comments on the
occurrence and habits of Actxomorpha erosa, Cryptochirus coralliodytes,
and Porcellanopayurus tridentatus.

Crayfish Plague. || — L. Mercier and R. de Drouin de Bouville cor-
roborate the conclusion that the crayfish plague in the lake of Nantua
is due to Hofer's Bacillus pestis astaci, which also causes " lepidorthosis "
in fresh-water fishes.

* Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxix. (1911) pp. 419-34 (15 figs.).

f Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 480-2.

t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1868-71.

§ Trans. New Zealand Inst., xliii. (1910) pp. 544-73 (4 figs.).

|| Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 210-11.

754 SUMMARY OK CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Dispersal of Marine Crustacea by Ships.* — Charles Chilton
obtained from a partially split plank of the British Antarctic ship 'Terra
Nova' when she arrived at Lyttelton in October l!>lo, four specimens of
a large Sphaeroinid, Cymodoce tuberculata Haswell, both male and female,
and two of them alive. " This species is quite unknown in New Zealand
waters, but is an Australian one, and there seems little doubt that it had
attached itself to the ship all the way to New Zealand, i.e. about twelve
hundred miles." Some similar instances are recorded. Thus T. F. Cheese-
man reported a King-crab (Carcinoscorpius rotundicauda (Latr.), from
Auckland, and Ray Lankester has called attention to a record of
another (Limulus polyphemus), found in the harbour of Copenhagen,
clinging to a ship from North America.

Studies on New Zealand Crustaceans.f — Charles Chilton submits
a revision of the four species of New Zealand Squillidae — Squilla armata
Milne-Edwards, S. affinis Berthold, Lysiosquilla spinosa (Wood-Mason)
and L. brazieri Miers.

The author also reports % on the Crustacea collected by the New
Zealand Government Trawling Expedition (1907). The collection
includes 28 Decapods, 2 Stomatopods, 4 Amphipods, 5 Isopods, 2 Cirri--
peds, and 2 parasitic Copepods. Though there are no new species, the
collection is interesting in containing a number of species not reported
since the ' Challenger ' Expedition. There are some interesting cases
of commensalism, or epizoic association, e.g. Paramithrax longipes with
specimens of Balanus decorus on its back, which are in some cases so
large and numerous that they exceed in size the body of the crab itself,
and Eupagurus stewarti, which has a straight abdomen, and inhabits
tubes formed by a Millepore or a massive calcareous Polyzoon, which is
very much larger than the crab.

Primitive Fresh-water Prawn.§ — E. Sollaud refers PaJsemonetes
irispinosus Aurivillius, a fresh-water prawn apparently widespread in
Equatorial Africa, to a new genus Desmocaris, on account of its numerous
ancestral characters. It is much more primitive than any of the other
Palaenionids ; it links the Palsemonids to the lower Eucyphota of the
Hoplophorid group.

Genus Leptocheirus. || — E. W. Sexton has revised the species of
this Amphipod genus, and has re-examined Zaddack's type species
L. pilosus, of which L. cornaaurei Sowinski and L. subsalsus Norman
are synonyms, the former being the full-grown male and the other the
full-grown female. The other six species are : L. pinguis Stimpson ;
L. hirsutimanus Bate = Backia typica Malm. ; L. gvttatus Grube =
Ptilocheirus tricristatus Chevreux ; L. pectinatus Norman = Protomedeia
fasciata Costa and L. dellavallei ; L. aberrans Ohlin ; and L. bispinosus
Norman = Protomedeia hirsutimanus Heller, and L. gvttatus Delia
Valle. The paper is a good type of careful revision.

* Trans. New Zealand Inst., xliii. (1910) pp. 131-3.

t Trans. New Zealand Inst., xliii. (1910) pp. 134-9 (4 figs.).

J Records Canterbury Museum, i. (1911) pp. 285-312 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).

§ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 913-16.

i! Proc. Zool. Soc, 1911, pp. 561-94 (3 pis. and 1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 755

New Parasitic Isopod.* — Harriet Richardson describes Scyraeepon

hawaiiensis sp. n., one of those extraordinary Isopods, modified in rela-
tion to parasitism, and exhibiting striking sex-dimorphism. A male
and a female were found in the branchial cavity of Pilumnoplax cooki
in Globigcrina ooze in the Hawaiian region. Only one species of the
genus has been previously described, the type, Scyraeepon tuberculosa
Tattersall, parasitic on Scyramathia carpenteri Norman, found off County
Kerry, Ireland.

Spiny Terrestrial Isopod. f — Harriet Richardson describes Globar-
madillo armatus g. et sp.n., from Guatemala. Its body is covered with
long spines, and both in its armature and general appearance it resem-
bles Acanthoniscus spiniger, described by Kinahan from Jamaica.
Notwithstanding the striking superficial resemblance of the two forms,
thev cannot be referred to the same genus.

&v

Development and Minute Structure of Scalpellum and Ibla.J —
F. H. Stewart gives an account of the post-larval development of the
hermaphrodite and of the male of Scalpellum squamuliferum. He has
notes on the structure of the male, the minute structure of the peduncle
in the hermaphrodite and male. He found no trace of the rudimentary
ovaries described by Gruvel in the male of S. peronii. Nor did he find
any trace of rudimentary testes in the female of Ibla cummingii. He also
describes the structure of the male of S. bengalense Annandale, the
post-larval development of the male of S. gruvelii Annandale, the
structure of the male of Ibla cummingii Darwin, and the sensory hairs in
various species.

Rhizocephalous Crustacean from Fresh-water. § — Nelson Annan-
dale describes Sesarmaxenos monticola g. et sp. n., a Rhizocephalous
Crustacean from a crab, Sesarma thelxinoe, in a jungle stream 700 feet
above sea-level, in the Andamans. It is somewhat like Sacculina, slug-
like or sausage-shaped, and occurred between the ventral surface of the
carapace and the retroverted abdomen. It is attached by a chitinous
ring apparently without roots ; there are two slit-like orifices in the
mantle, surrounded and separated by a stout muscle ; the visceral mass
is apparently attached to the mantle by a mesentery that surrounds the
ring of attachment, being surrounded at all other points by a capacious
brood-pouch, which contains larva? of the Cyprid type. The mantle is
thin and smooth, but is well provided with slender circular muscle-fibres.
The two ovaries are distinct ; a testes has not been detected. This is
the first fresh-water Rhizocephalon.

New Parasitic Copepods.|| — C. B. "Wilson describes and establishes
two new genera — Midias (intermediate between Caligus and Eurgphorus),
and Paralebion, in the family Euryphorinag, closely allied to Alebion. He
describes Achtheinus dentatus sp. n. and Lernseopoda inermis sp. n.

* Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 645-7 (6 figs.),
t Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxvii. (1910) pp. 494-7 (1 fig.).
% Mem. Indian Mus., iii. (1911) pp. 33-51 (4 pis.).
§ Records Indian Museum, vi. (1911) pp. 1-4 (2 figs.).
« Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxix. (1911) pp. 625-34 (4 pis.).

756 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

North American Ergasilidae.* — C.B.Wilson gives an account of the
Bfcructure of Ergasilus, BomolocJius,iTtetuacanthu8,z,n^. other members of
this family of parasitic Copepods. He makes a very important contribu-
tion to the morphology and embryology of the family, and establishes
three new genera. As regards systematic position, the author suggests
thai the Iachomolgidas must be kept separate from the Ergasilidaa ;
that the Ergasilidse are closely related to the Corycaeidge and Licho-
molgidse on the one side, and to the Chondracanthidaa on the other, the
four families forming a series ; that the Ergasilinae, Bomolochime, and
Tseniacanthinae form a natural series of sub-families.

Development of Achtheres.f — C. B. Wilson gives a detailed account
of the development of Achtheres ambloplitis Kellicott, the American re-
presentative of the European A. percarum. The American species is
very common on the gill-arches of the rock-bass or red-eye, Ambloplitis
rupestris. It is taken as a type of the Lernaeopodidas.

Long filaments of ovarian cells loosen themselves from the epithelium
of the ovary, and pass down into the uterine processes of the oviduct,
where the terminal cells of each filament develop into oocytes one after
another. The yolk-globules of the egg are evenly distributed through
a cytoplasmic matrix. The eggs are fertilized at the mouth of the
sperm receptacle as they pass out of the oviduct. There is a migration
of nuclei and cytoplasm to the periphery to form blastoderm cells, and
these also segment at the surface. The portion of the blastoderm which
is to form the ventral surface of the embryo thickens and shows a series
of lobes, the future appendages.

The author describes the nauplius and metanauplius stages which are
passed inside the egg, the larva hatching in the first copepodid stage.
It is interesting to notice that the nauplius eye is so rudimentary that
it is seen only in serial sections. It has neither pigment nor lens. But
the most interesting nauplius structure is the attachment filament, begun
in the nauplius and completed in the metanauplius stage. It is secreted
by a large frontal gland which occupies the whole of the anterior dorsal
portion of the cephalon. It is a long, coiled, hollow filament ; the distal
end is like a mushroom and attached to the host ; the proximal end is
peg-shaped and attached to the gland. The larva emerges in the first
copepodid stage (24 to 48 hours) and fastens itself to its host. The
filament is transferred from the frontal margin to the claws at the tips
of the second maxillaa. In the male the claws are withdrawn from attach-
ment to the filament at the time of sexual union, after which the male
clings to the female. Sex-distinction appears in the second copepodid
stage, which shows all the adult organs.

The author has made a fine study of this markedly concentrated de-
velopment. The nauplius and metanauplius stages are within the egg
and fused ; the only free-swimming stage lasts 24 to 48 hours, just long
enough to find a host ; the second copepodid stage moults directly into
the adult form.

* Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxix. (1911) pp. 263-400 (20 pis. and 41 figs.),
t Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxix. (1911) pp. 189-226 (8 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 757

Diurnal Migrations of Calanus finmarchicus.* — 0. 0. Esterly finds
that this Copepod is most abundant at the surface about 7 or 8 p.m.
during June and July. It has begun to leave the surface at midnight,
and is then most abundant at a depth of 5 or 10 fathoms. During the
day (6 a.m.-6 p.m.) it is most abundant at about 200 fathoms. To-
wards evening there is an upward movement of a large part of the
population.

The cause of the migration is probably the effect of light upon the
organism, though it does not seem that a definite movement towards a
dim light or away from a stronger one can be at the basis of this
behaviour. The effect of light upon the geotropism of the animals is
probably the main factor involved.

Ostracods from Madeira. f — G. Stewardson Brady describes a number
of new species of Bairdia, Cythere, Cythereis, Cytherura, Paradoxostoma,
etc., from Madeira. The collection is also interesting as extending the
known range of several species from the European and North Atlantic
areas much further southward, though not quite into the tropical zone.

Sex-determination in Daphnids.J — R. "Woltereck has experimented
with Hyalodaphnia, and has reached the following conclusions. External
conditions (temperature, food, chemical reagents), may sometimes exert
a distinct influence on the sex of the developed ovarian ova (' induction ')
as well as on the ova to be subsequently formed (pre-induction). Such
influences act on an internal nexus of causes, and it is noteworthy that
they sometimes have no effect at all. Susceptible and non-susceptible
periods may alternate. Thus there may be pure parthenogenesis, sus-
ceptibility or lability, well defined bisexuality, susceptibility or lability,
pure parthenogenesis, and so on.

The internal causes do not depend simply on the degree in which the
ova are equipped with plasma-substances or with heterochromosomes
(assimilation-chromatin). Nor does it appear that the " Kern-plasma
relation," resulting from continuous parthenogenesis or from external
conditions, effects the determination of sex.

The author's experiments lead him to the view that there are in each
ovum competing sex-substances, one of which becomes active as the egg
matures, while the other remains latent. The latency is due to some-
thing preventing the substance from becoming active. This inhibition
may occur at two different periods. It may occur shortly before the
ovum leaves the ovary. The definitive determination of sex then takes
place (" induction of sex by hindrance of activation"). Secondly, it may
take place much earlier (a) in the undifferentiated germ-layer of the
ovary ; (b) in the gonad-primordium of vhe winter-egg (embryo) ;
(c) in the ripening female egg. During these periods a change seems
to take place or to begin to take place in the sex-substances, which may
be called their " maturation." This change tends to bring about in the
sex-substances the faculty of afterwards being activated. If this process
during one of the critical periods is hindered in its realization in one of

*

Internat. Rev. Hydrobiol., iv. (1911) pp. 140-51.
t Proc. Zool. Soc. (1911) pp. 595-601 (3 pis.).
% Internat. Rev. Hvdrobiol., iv. (1911) pp. 91-128 (6 figs.).

758 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the sex-substances, then the Inter determination of the other sex is pre-
pared for (" pre-indnction by ' hindrance of maturation ' ").

Induction and pre-induction of sex can be brought about by external
influences, but only if the internal conditions of maturation and activa-
tion are approximately the same for the two sex-substances. These
conditions, however, are subject to autonomous fluctuations. The male
and female substances may vary periodically in being equivalent, pre-
valent, or recessive as regards one another. If we adopt the author's
suggestion of applying the ideas of the ferment and antigen theory to
these substances and processes, we can suppose that the alternating
appearance and suppression of inhibiting substances (" paralysators "),
or of activating substances ("activators"), are the real causes of the
periodicity of sex-determination, The sex-substances themselves may
be considered as somewhat like pro-ferments (if latent), and ferments
(if activated).

Annulata.

Structure of Tomopteris.* — Jakob Nanni gives an histological ac-
count of the nervous system, the food canal, the vascular system, the
musculature, and the eyes of various species of this interesting genus.

Incubation in Polychaets.t — Ch. Gravier describes from the collec-
tion of the second French Antarctic Expedition two interesting forms of
incubatory Polychaets. The first is Parautolytus fasciatus, which secretes
a veil on the dorsal surface, forming a pouch for the eggs and larvae.
The second is a new species of Eteone, which occurred rolled round its
spawn. The relatively large ova form a compact block fixed to the sides
and ventral surface of the Annelid, and enveloped by a brown membrane.

Irish Maldanidae.J — Ivar Arwidsson describes from the Irish coasts,
Nicomache maculata sp.n., and establishes a new genus, Csesicirrus, for
G. neglectus nom n. (= Axiothea catenata (Malmgren) Cunningham and
Ramage). The most distinctive characters of the genus are the appear-
ance of the eighth setigerous segment, the division of the anal cirri into
long undivided ones and short ones lobate at the point, and the pro-
longed anal papilla. The nephridial pore is somewhat under the rows
of uncini, and in a line with or slightly in front of these. The neck of
the developed uncini is a little striated in an oblique fashion.

Littoral Oligochaeta of the Clyde.§ — J. Stephenson makes a con-
tribution to our knowledge of the littoral Oligochaata. He collected in
the vicinity of Millport Marine Biological Station and at Wemyss Bay.
Ten species are dealt with, all Enchytrasids except Tubifex costatus.
Two new species of Lumbricillus and two of Enchytrmis are described.
The author points out that these two genera are closely allied, and that
a number of intermediate forms exist which serve to bridge over the
interval between them.

* Jen. Zeitschr. Natur., xlvii. (1911) pp. 343-66 (2 pis. and 2 figs.),
t Comptes Hendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1418-20.

; Vroc. li. Irish Acad., xxix. (1911) Section B, No. 6, pp. 209-28 (3 pis.).
§ Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh, xlviii. (1911) pp. 31-65 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 759

Nematohelminth.es.

New Nematode.* — J. Xoordhoek Hegt describes Chi amy don emu
t'elineinn g. et sp. n. from the stomach of cats in Batavia. It appears to
occupy a somewhat isolated position, as H. F. Nierstrasz f indicates.
The onter layers of the cuticular form in the posterior half of the body
a sort of mantle within which the female can retract itself. In the
male this " mantle " ends at the base of a broad caudal portion with four
paired ridges, seventeen sensory papillae, and numerous cuticular promin-
ences. The head has three unstalked sensory papilUe and two lips, each
with three teeth. The posterior end in the female is pointed. In the
male there are two unequal spines and three large pear-shaped glandular
organs opening into the cloaca. The lateral areas are strongly folded.
The pharynx has a bulb. The colour is whitish-red. The animal is
ccelomyarian and polymyarian.

Structure of Filaria bancrofti.J— S. Hida has made a fresh study of
this Nematode. The adult female is 80-100 mm. long, by 1 ■ 8-2 ■ 5 mm.
broad, and is whitish in colour. In both sexes the head-end is thickened
in a club-like manner, and the oral aperture is terminal. The genital
aperture is funnel-shaped ; between it and the uterine sac there is a
spiral canal with three coils. In the uterine sac there are embryos
towards the efferent portion, and ova at the other end. The sac is
simple to begin with, but it becomes divided into two by a partition.
The anus is lateral near the end of the tail.

The male is 30-45 mm. in length, and thinner than the female. Its
genital canal is a simple sac, containing spermatozoa and other cellular
elements. It opens with the gut into a cloaca just above the end of the
tail. From the cloaca two spicules are protruded, which serve to grip
the female in the sexual union.

Compression Experiments with the Fertilized Ovum of Ascaris
megalocephala.§ — S. S. Girgolaff finds that the abnormal arrangement
of blastomeres produced by compression may induce abnormalities in the
embryo. This must result when the developing egg cannot re-arrange
the cells after the compression is removed. The arrangement of the
blastomeres in one plane results in a thickening of this or that portion
of the embryo. There is an observable struggle between the regulative
tendency and the direct influence of the pressure. The results of the
compression vary considerably according to its degree ; it may prevent
the egg from dividing at all. It inhibits the development and lowers
vitality. The author gives an account of the various results which he
has observed, and notes that the division under compression and the
division under centrifuging influence have some features in common.

Role of Plastochondria in Fertilization of Ascaris megalo-
cephala.|| — Fr. Meves finds that formed elements — plastosomes or plasto-
chondria—pass from the spermatozoon into the ovum, where they meet

* Tijdschrift Nederland. Dierk. Ver., xii. (1910) pp. 5-44 (1 pi.).

t Tijdschrift Nederland. Dierk. Ver., xii. (1910) pp. 45-59.

X Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk., lte Abt., lx. (1911) pp. 133-41 (9 figs.).

§ Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxvi. (1911) pp. 770-96 (30 figs.).

U Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxxvi. (1911) pp. 683-713 (3 pis.).

7l',(l SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

wiili elements like themselves. These plastosomes, of which the author
gives a detailed account, represent an elementary structure in the cyto-
plasm, and may be regarded as the primordia of ontogenetic differentia-
tions. In his remarkable paper, Meves suggests that the plastosomes
form the hereditary substance of the protoplasm, just as the chromosomes
form the hereditary substance of the nucleus.

Nematodes in Deer.* — E. Brumpt has examined some of the deer
from the forest of Chantilly, which have been subject for four or five
years past to a mysterious malady, fatal to large numbers. He has found
very abundant occurrence of Nematode parasites — Dictyocaulus ncrneri,
D. filaria, GEsophagostomam venulosum, Nematodirus roscidus, Tricho-
cephalus affinis, and a new species of Capillaria. It seems, indeed, that
the decimating malady is in great part a pulmonary " strongylosis."

Platyhelminthes.

Entozoa in Australian Birds.f — T. Harvey Johnston has brought
together under their hosts, ninety-eight in all, a list of the endoparasites
recorded, including Protozoa, Trematoda, Cestoda, Nematoda, and
Acanthocephala.

Tapeworms of Birds.J — Paul Solowiow deals with Monopylidium

infundibulum Bloch from a fowl which he fed largely on house-flies
(Masca domestica). This corroborates Grasse's view that the fly is the
intermediate host of the tapeworm. From Fuligula cristata the author
describes Hymenohpis villosides sp. n. and H. megarostellis sp. n., another
(unnamed) species of the same genus, and fourthly AploparaJcsis fidigulosa
sp. n. From Podiceps nigricollis the author describes Schistocephalus
dimorphus Creplin.

Gid Parasite.§ — C. M. Hall discusses the gid parasite, which is
usually called Ccenitrus cerebralis. It seems that it should be called
3fidticeps. The larval form occurs not only in the sheep, but in ox,
goat, horse, chamois, moufflon, gazelle, and various antelopes. The
geographical distribution is discussed at length. Other species of the
genus, such as M. serialis from hares and rabbits, are dealt with. The
life-history is the subject of another paper. ||

Tapeworms from Mammals.^" — F. E. Beddard describes a species of
Oochoristica from the Lesser Anteater (Tamandua tetradactyla), Bertiolla
xrcopetheci sp. n. from the green Cercopitheque, and Thymnosoma gam-
bianum sp. n. from a Pouched Rat (Cricetomys gambianus).

Parasites of Fishes.** — Jas. Johnstone describes a new Trematode,
Paracotyle caniculse g. et sp. n., from the head of the common dogfish,
particularly in the region of the gill-slits. The diagnosis reads : " One

* Coniptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 906-9.

t Journ. and Proc. R. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliv. (1910) cp. 84-122.

% Centralbl. Bakt. Parasitenk. lte Abt., lx. (1911) pp". 93-132 (26 figs.).

§ U.S. Dep. Agric, Bull. 125 (1910) pp. 1-68.

|| U.S. Dep. Agric., Circ. 159 (1910) pp. 1-7.

1 Proc. Zool. Soc. (1911) pp, 626-60 (10 figs.).

** Report Lancashire Sea Fisheries Laboratory, xix. (1911) pp. 16-50 (5 pis. and
figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 761

anterior sucker, terminal or sub-terminal, leading into a vestibule or
pre-pharynx, into -which opens the pharynx. Posterior sucker relatively
small, and without radial thickenings or chitinous hooks. Intestine
with two branches, and without lateral diverticula. Genital opening
common, in the middle line immediately behind the pharynx. Vagina
single and unpaired, opening on the ventral surface to the left of the
common genital aperture. Testis single. One to two millimetres in
length."

The author also records KoeUilceria filicolle (Rudolphi) from the
branchial arches of a Ray's Bream from the Menai Straits. The two
sexes occur together in one cyst, the males filiform, the females with a
filiform anterior portion and a kidney-shaped posterior portion. From
a very large Ray the leech Pontobdella Isevis (Blainville) is reported.

Two-fold Function of Ovaries in some Polyclads.* — Paul Hallez
finds that many Antarctic Polyclads have no accessory glands on the
oviducts and a relatively small number of ovaries which are, however,
very large. Each ovary includes two portions, a ventral germinative
zone and a dorsal region which is secretory. The product of secretion
recalls that of the accessory glands of the oviducts and uterus in other
Polyclads.

Regeneration in Short Head-pieces of Planaria.f — V. H. Keiller
has experimented with Planaria simplicissma. It seems impossible to
determine to what extent heteromorphic head-regeneration may occur. In
general, however, about 80 p.c. of the heads formed new heteromorphic
eyes and about as many new brains.

The regenerating head-pieces often showed scattered pigment spots,
especially when no true eyes are regenerated. A pharynx may be re-
generated if the brain is cut near its posterior limit, and always if the
cut is made behind the brain. Unless the brain is cut no heteromorphic
brain nor eyes are found ; but head-pieces in which the brain is cut do
not necessarily form brain or eyes.

The heteromorphic brain may be formed (1) by regeneration in close
connexion with the cut ends of the old brain, and probably under their
influence ; (2) by regeneration of a new brain separated from the old,
and connected with it by short cords ; and (3) by thickening of the
commissure nearest the cut ends.

Heteromorphic eyes are usually paired if they develop at all. They
are rarely in the normal position. Heteromorphic brains of any of the
three types may occur in the absence of one or both eyes ; heteromorphic
eyes may occur in the absence of any trace of brain regeneration. Hetero-
morphic heads differ from normal heads in the extent and shape of the
digestive tract, which occupies almost the entire new region.

Nemertines of Millport. J — J. Stephenson reports on these, de-
scribing Amphiporus elongatus sp.n., and Micrura scotica sp. n., and
adding useful notes on ten others, with particular reference to their

* Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 142-3.

t Arch. Entwickl., xxxi. (1910) pp. 131-44 (23 figs.).

% Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh, xlviii. (1911) pp. 1-29 (1 pi.).

762 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

variations. In connexion with Cephalothrix linearis he contributes
welcome information in regard to the circulation. There is a definite
circulation in the lateral vessels, occasioned by a series of contractile
waves alternately postero-anterior and antero-posterior ; this is not due
to contractions of the body-wall, nor to movements of the body as a
whole; it would seem necessary, therefore, to assume the presence of
muscular tissue in the walls of the vessels.

The species Cephalothrix rufifrons and C. bioadata are only colour
varieties of G. linearis, and the unification of Lineus gesserensis and
L. sanguineus is confirmed.

Experiments on Ova of Cerebratulus.* — Max Withrow Morse finds
that reagents, such as saponin, oxalic, hydrochloric, and tartaric acids,
which were used successfully to induce maturation, would not cause
segmentation to proceed.

It was found, however, that if all trace of these reagents was washed
off, and the eggs placed in a C02 sea-water solution, with a concentra-
tion of about o"l9 grm. to 100 grm. sea-water, segmentation proceeded,
though development did not continue beyond the later segmentation
stages.

Loeb and others have observed, in other cases, this antagonistic
action of reagents which induce maturation and those which induce
segmentation. " In such cases, as in the present one, the reactions are
not reversible ; C02 will not cause maturation."

Incertae Sedis.

New Mediterranean Bryozoa.j — Louis Calvet describes Idmonea
arborea sp.n., a vigorously growing form, ramifying dichotomously ;
and Amathia pruvoti sp.n., which is intermediate between A. lendigera
and A. semi-convoluta.

Barentsia benedeni in British Waters. J — James Ritchie describes
specimens of this endoproctan Polyzoon which was found at Hull
growing on the surface of Membranipora on the dock timbers. The
Hull specimens seem to take a place intermediate between Barentsia
benedeni (Foettinger), known only from Ostend, and B. gracilis (Sars),
which occurs on Belgian and English coasts. The salient characters of
the specimens are : Stem composed of up to 8 well-defined, robust
internodes (3 or 4 being most common), from which buds may arise ;
no pores in chitinous portions of internodes ; no granular masses in
internodes ; calyx relatively small, with transparent, colourless walls ;
tentacles 10 to 14, colourless ; brain trapezoid in transverse sections.

Consideration of the variations of this and of related species leads
the author to the following conclusions : —

1. Arthropodaria Ehlers is synonymous with Gonypodaria Ehlers,
and both are included in Barentsia.

2. Gonypodaria nodosa (Lomas) is synonymous with Barentsia
gracilis.

* Science, xxxiii. (1911) p. 388.

f Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1911) Notes et Revue, No. 3, pp. lvii.-lxi. (2 figs.).

% Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh, xlvii. (1911) pp. 835-48 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 763

3. PedicelUna belgica van Beneden is synonymous with Barents ia
gracilis.

•4. Barentsia benedeni (Foettinger), and B. gracilis (Sars), are
distinct.

Pectinatella magnifica near Berlin.* — W. Kokler reports the
occurrence of large masses of this remarkable North American Bryozoon
in the " Tegeler-See," near Berlin. It has been previously found near
Spandau and in the Oder at Breslau. The statoblasts adhere very
readily with their minute thorns, and may be transported by birds.
Probably the transport from America was effected by ship.

Rotifera.

New Rotifera. f — Three new species from different parts of the
world are figured and described by C. F. Rousselet : Anurseopsis navicida,
from Lake Gregory in Ceylon ; Brackionus havanaensis, found in Plankton
collected in the Illinois River near Havana ; and Brackionus satanicus,
a remarkably shaped species found living in the Devil's Lake, North
Dakota.

Claro Island Rotifera.j — In connection with the biological investi-
gation of this small island on the west coast of Ireland, C. F. Rousselet
has collected 109 species of Rotifera on the island and adjoining main-
land, of which 37 are new to Ireland. Some rather rare species are
noted, but no forms new to science were discovered. The author
remarks on the two distinct species : Proales parasita Ehrenberg (not
Gosse), and Hertwigia volvocicola Plate, usually found parasitic in the
spheres of Volvox globator.

Echinoderma

New European Crinoid.§ — Austin Howard Clark defines Antedon
adriatica sp. n. He finds that there are four perfectly distinct and
readily recognizable European species, two inhabiting the Atlantic
coasts of Europe, and two the southern shores east of the Straits of
Gibraltar. The first two are Antedon petasus (Diiben and Koren),
A. bifida (Pennant) ; one of the last two is A. mediterranea (Lamarck) ;
the fourth is A. .adriatica. The occurrence of four distinct species
throws light on the discrepant results of embryologists who worked
with what they accepted as one species, A. rosacea. According to the
author, Antedon is primarily an Indian Ocean genus, an intrusion into
the Atlantic area, like Leptometra. The area inhabited by it is marked
by a series of species, each phylogenetically more developed than its pre-
decessor, and the least specialized more advanced than the species of
Mastigometra, its modern representative in the Indian Ocean.

Recent Crinoids of Australia.! — Austin Hobart Clark reports on the
Crinoid collections of the Australian Museum. There are 46 species known

* Internat. Rev. Hvdrobiol., iv. (1911) Biol. Supp., pp. 6-7 (1 pi.).
+ Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, xi. No. 68 (1911) pp. 161-4 (1 pi.).
% Proc. Roy. Irisb Acad., xxxi. pt. 51 (1911).
§ Proc. U.S.Nat. Museum, xxxviii. (1911) pp. 329-33.

|| Mem. Australian Museum, iv. (1911) Scientific Results ' Thetis' Expedition,
pt. 15, pp. 705-804.

764 SUMMARY OF CUKKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

from littoral and sub-littoral zones around Australia. These are included
in i;i genera and 9 families. Eight of these families, including 18 of
the L9 genera, belong to the sub-order Oligophreata. Twenty of the
spirits and one of the genera are only known from Australia, but the
latter is closely allied to two other genera characteristic of the East
Indian region. The proportionate frequency of the genera and species
in the several families is entirely different from what is found in other
parts of the world. The great majority of the Australian Orinoids are
tropical species, which have extended their range southward from the
East Indian region, and they are therefore limited to the coast of
Queensland on the east, and the coast north of Dirk Hartog Island on
the west. The southern coasts are tenanted by seven species peculiar to
Australia, but belonging to one endemic and four tropical genera, which
lend to that region an aspect very characteristic, and yet without any
special zoogeographical significance.

Ccelentera.

Development of Cunina parasitica.* — P. Hanitsch discusses this
extraordinary life-history. He takes up a median position between
those who call the Cunina a parasite in the Geryonia and those who
regard the association as symbiotic. He deals with the development of
the constricted-off Cunina proboscidea Metsch., its production of a second
generation of C. proboscidea, their production of C. parasitica ( = a third
generation of C. proboscidea), their production of the so-called budding
polyp in the stomach of Geryonia, which buds off what we started with.
But the alternation of generations is so intricate that we cannot do more
than indicate the general nature of this new contribution to a much-
investigated subject.

New Type of Alcyonarian. f—S. J. Hickson describes Ceratopora
nicholsonii g. et sp. n., a remarkable new type of Alcyonarian. A single
specimen was obtained by the ' Blake,' off Cuba, 100 fathoms. It was
referred to by Agassiz as probably a Bryozoon, and by Alleyne Nicholson
(in letters to Sir John Murray) as probably allied to Helioporidas.

It has remarkable, indeed unique, calcareous spicules, minute, very
slender, and tuberculate, which are embedded vertically in the walls of
very narrow tubes. The definition of the proposed new family Cerato-
poridse is as follows : " Ccenothecalia forming a massive skeleton of
crystalline calcium carbonate, in which a few slender spicules are em-
bedded. No tabulge, the tubes closing below by the continuous growth
of the thecal walls. Pores monoinorphic and small (in the type species
0*2 mm. in diameter).

The genus Ceratopora differs from Heliopora in the presence of
spicules, in the monoinorphic condition of the pore, in the absence of
tabuhe, and the complete closure of the tubes below. The small size
of the tubes is verv striking. Indeed, the small size of the zooids is
one of the principal difficulties in accepting the view that the new type
is an Alcyonarian.

* MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel., xx. (1911) pp. 204-50 (2 pis. and 9 figs.).
t Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiv. pp. 95-200 (1 pi. and 5 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 765

Pennatulacea.* — W. Kiikentha] and JIj. Broch have produced a
magnificent report on the ' Valdivia' Pennatulids, which is also a great
contribution to our knowledge of the order. For the authors have com-
pared the ' Valdivia ' material with that from other sources, and deal
with 84 species in 25 genera. There are 15 new species in the ' Valdivia '
collection.

The system established by the authors is as follows : —
I. Pennatulacea radiata : —

Lituaria, Cavernulina, Policella, Veretillum, Cavernularia,
Actinoptilum, Eehinoptilum.
II. Pennatulacea foliata : —
lien ill a.

III. Pennatulacea bilateralia : —

Mesobelemnon, Sderobelem/wn, Kophoielemnon, Anthoptilum,
Funkulina, Protoptilum, Distichoptilum, Stachyptilum.

IV. Pennatulacea verticillata : —

Galibelemnon, ScleropUlum, Amphiacme, Chunella, Umbellula.
V. Pennatulacea penniformia : —

Pavonaria, Acanthoptilum, Scytalium, Scytaliopsis, StyJatula,
Virgulanu, Pennatula, Leioptilum, Pteroeides, Struthiopteron,
Sarcophyllum, Gyrophyllum .

Epizoic Hydroid on Crab.f — W. T. Caiman found a gymnoblastic
hydroid, allied to Stylactis, attached like a tassel to the " knee " of each
of the legs of a crab, Xanthias haswelli (Miers) (= Medseus hasivelli
Miers) from Christmas Island. The hydroid is disposed symmetrically
with regard to the crab, and the type-specimens of the species to which
the crab belongs, although coming from a distant locality, are found to
carry colonies of a closely similar, perhaps identical species of hydroid.
The polyps occur as follows — two on the carpus and one on the propodus
of the cheliped, and one on the carpus of each walking leg. Two other
small polyps are unsymmetrical. The hydrorhiza follows the inter-
regional grooves of the dorsal surface of the carapace.

Siboga Plumularids.J — A. Billard gives a preliminary account of
new species of Plumularia (15) and Cladocarpus (2) collected by the
' Siboga ' expedition.

Polarity in Tubularia.§— Max A V. Morse cutoff pieces of Tubular in
crocea and rotated them in a centrifuge at the rate of 240-600 rotations
per minute, for periods varying from a minute to half an hour.

When the pieces regenerated, lying horizontally in finger-bowls, the
hydranth appeared at the original distal end, regardless as to whether
the distal or proximal end of the stem had been directed centrifugally or
centripetallv in the experiment, and regardless of the fact that, as in the
higher speeds, the contents of the perisarc tube were compressed into

* Wissensch. Ergebnisse deutsch. Tieffsee Exped., xiii. Heft 2 (1911) pp. 113-
576(17 pis., 17 maps, and 295 figs.).

t Ann. Nat. Hist., viii. (1911) pp. 54G-50 (2 figs.).

X Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1911) Notes et Revue, No. 3, pp. Ixii.-lxxii. (16 figs.).

§ Proc. Zool. Exper. Biol, and Medicine, viii. (1910) pp. 29-30.

Dec. 20th, 1911 :; D

766 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the end of this tube which was directed centrifugally in rotation. When
regeneration took place, the red pigment which marks the fnt are hydranth
pole could be seen collecting in the compressed protoplasm, and it
gradually migrated np the tnbe of perisarc until it reached the end of
this tube, whereupon the tentacles and other parts of the normal
hydranth appeared. The generalization may be made that polarity in
Tubularia erocea cannot be altered by the action of centrifugal force, in
shifting "organ-forming areas" from one end of the piece of stem to
the other.

Porifera.

Development of Sponges from Dissociated Cells.* — H. V. Wilson
squeezed out cells, e.g. of Microciona prolifera, and put a drop of the
" sediment " on a slide. The cells fuse into syncytial masses or plasmodia,
these may fuse into incrustations, and these may form sponges. The
details of the interesting process are described. Experiments were also
made with Lissodendoryx carolinensis sp. n. and Stylotella heliophila sp. n.
in both of which the dissociated cells formed plasmodia. When dis-
sociated cells of Microciona and Lissodendoryx are mingled, they do
not fuse. The same is true of Microciona and Stylotella ; the cells of
one species fuse, the plasmodial masses of one species fuse, but there is
no fusion between the tissues of two separate species. The author thinks
that when the cells are violently dissociated in his very interesting ex-
periments they pass into an indifferent generalized state. In this state
they re-combine to form a mass of undifferentiated tissue comparable to
a heap of blastomeres, in which differentiation and growth occur.

Classification of Halichondrina.f — E. Topsent has studied the
larvae in this sub-order of sponges, and re-adjusts the classification a little
in the light of his observations. There are four families. 1. The Hali-
ehondridfe have larvae completely ciliated and of uniform colour : —
Halichondria, Tedanione, Ephydatia, etc. 2. The Haplosclerida? have
the larvae naked posteriorly, with a crown of long cilia and a ring or cap
of pigment : — Reniera, Chalina, C/ial inula, Gellius, Desmacidon, etc.
3. The Poeciloscleridaj have the larvae naked posteriorly, without a crown
of long cilia, and with the posterior hernia paler than the rest : — Mycale,
Tedania, Myxilla, BatzeUa, Clathria, Echinodictyum, etc. 4. The Axi-
nellidae, with larval characters a little like those of the preceding family,
but with different spiculation.

Sponges associated with Vermetida34 — X. Annandale describes
rocky masses dredged from the Bay of Bengal which consist of the shells
of /Sil/quaria muricata (Born.), S. cochlear is Morch, and Spiroglyphus
cvmmingi (.Morch), closely associated with sponges, namely two new
varieties of the Lithistid Racodiscula sceptrellifera (Carter), and the
Monaxonid Spongosorites topsenti Dendy. Neither of the two species of
sponges found associated with the three species of Vermetidae is peculiar
to these shells, nor, indeed, to a habitat or manner of life similar to that

* Bull. Bureau Fisheries, xxx. (1910, published 1911) pp. 1-30 (5 pis.),
t Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1911) Notes et Bevue, No. 1 pp. i.-xv. (4 figs.).
X Becords Indian Museum, vii. (1911) pp. 47-55 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 767

implied by the mollusc's peculiar method of growth. In two cases out of
three, however, the sponge appears to be modified to some extent by its
association. " It is probable that the masses, with which this paper
deals, will be of considerable interest to the geologists of some future
epoch, when the bottom of the Bay of Bengal has become dry land, if there

be geologists then

Protozoa

Protozoa of the Soil.*— T. Goodey reports about thirty Protozoa
which he has been able to identify in cultures of soil. Of these eighteen
are Ciliata, such as species of Colpoda, Balantiophorw, Plearotricha, and
Vortkella. It is shown, however, that these exist in the soil in an
encysted, not in an active condition. Therefore they cannot function as
a factor limiting bacterial activity in the soil. But the experiments
on which this conclusion is based were confined to Ciliata. The Amoebae
and Flagellates were not dealt with.

Studies on Amoebse.t— Maynard N. Metcalf discusses in the first
place the localization of the contractile vacuole. More than one portion,
probably any portion, of the outer layer of the endosarc may form a con-
tractile vacuole. When it is formed it soon associates itself with a mass
of granules — " just the beginning of specialization of cytomicrosomes in
connexion with excretion." No portion of the protoplasm will ordinarily,
if ever, form a new contractile vacuole so long as the already collected
mass of granules associated with the old vacuole persists.

The author describes a new species of Amoeba {A. current) parasitic
in the rectum of tadpoles, which is marked by very rapid locomotion.
In connexion with the life-cycle of a Baltimore Amceba, which may be
A. proteus,, the author describes the formation of biflagellate spores of
a Cercomonad-like type. There is a fragmentation of the nucleus in the
parent Amoeba. He also refers to an Amceba he found at Wurzburg,
which produced amoebospores with fine reticulate pseudopodia.

Effect of Excretion-products on Rate of Reproduction in Para-
mecium.:!:— Lorande Loss "Woodruff has begun an investigation of the
complex factors at work in a " hay infusion " or the like, such as
those which determine the interdependence of the organisms, their
sequence, time of appearance and disappearance. He has tested the
effect of different volumes of culture medium on the rate of reproduction
of Paramecium ; the effect of changing the culture medium daily and
every second day on the rate of reproduction of Paramecium ; and the
effect of culture medium, in which large numbers of Paramecium have
been living, on the rate of reproduction of Paramecium.

He has come to the following conclusions. 1. The rate of reproduc-
tion of P. aurelia and P. cawiatum is influenced by the volume of the
culture medium, within the limits tested, and the greater the volume the
more rapid is the rate of division. 2. There is evidence that Para-

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiv. (1911) pp. 165-80 (1 pi.).
t Journ. Exp. Zool., ix. (1910) pp. 301-31 (45 figs.).
X Journ. Exp. Zool., x. (1911) pp. 557-81 (11 figs.).

:) D 2

768 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

mcecium excretes substances which are toxic to itself when present in its
environment, and these substances are more effective when the organisms
are confined in limited volumes of culture fluid. 3. The excretion-
products play an appreciable part in determining the period of maximum
numbers, the rate of decline, and the like, of Parammcium in hay
infusions.

Fertilization in Ciliata.*--P. A. Dangeard discusses Dehorne's
position that there is no real fertilization in Ciliata, and points out
sources of error. The author upholds the conclusions of Maupas — the
occurrence of fertilization in Ciliata is solidly established. The problem
of chromatin-reduction is in process of solution.

Polymorphism in Flagellates.f — Ch. Gineste has observed that in-
dividuals of Trichomastix, and the like, may lose their flagella and
move with pseudopodia. Sometimes one flagellum is replaced by a
pseudopodium. Sometimes the margin shows sinusoid undulatoiy
movement. He suggests that these different forms are related to di-
versity of environmental conditions.

Cuirass of Peridinidas.J — L. Mangin contrasts the resistance that the
cuirass offers to digestive fluids, with its rapid dissolution inside micro-
scopic animals in the water. He also shows that the cuirass undergoes
changes of structure during the individual life, particularly as regards
the disposition of the ornaments and the constitution of the sutures. In
some species the appearance of the sutures changes very markedly. The
variations of the sculpturing in Peridinium oceauicum. P. depressum.
P. divergens, P. crassipes, and P. punctulatum, are recorded. In short,
the author shows that the cuirass is in several respects very plastic, and
that it is necessary to know the limits of change in each species.

Genus Ceratium.§ — E. Jorgensen gives a monographic account of
this polymorphic genus, in which he distinguishes four sub-genera —
Poroceratium (Vanhoffen), Biceratium (Vanhoffen) Gran, Amphiceratium
(Vanhoffen) Gran, and Euctratium Gran. After describing all the species,
the author discusses their affinities, tracing back the other three sub-
genera to the Biceratium stock. The variability of species of Ceratiinn
is dealt with and the geographical distribution.

Pleodorina californica at Banyuls.||— Edouard Chatton found this
Volvocinid, previously reported from California, Indiana, Illinois, in an
irrigation pond at Banyuls-sur-Mer. It appeared at the end of April and
disappeared at the beginning of July. It was observed in three succes-
sive years, but no sexual reproduction was detected in the pond. This
was studied, however, in the laboratory. Vegetative colonies, parthe-
nogenetic colonies, male colonies, female colonies, and " involution "

* Comptes Kendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1703-5.

t O.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 1014-16.

X Intemat. Rev. Ges. Hydrobiol., iv. (1911) pp. 44-54 (2 pis.).

§ Internat. Rev. Hydrobiol., iv. (1911) Biol. Supp., pp. 1-124 (10 pis.).

|| Bull. Sci. France Belg., xliv. (1911) pp. 309-31 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 769

colonies, are described. The contrast between somatocytes and germino-
cytes is described. They are grouped in two hemispheres, the somatic
hemisphere being always anterior.

It seems that Pleodorina californica is connected to Eudorina by
Pleodorina illinoisensis ; and Eudorina, Pleodorina, and Volvos form a
series illustrating an increasing differentiation between somatic cells and
germ-cells. The author makes an interesting comparison between Pleo-
dorina californica and the amphiblastula of Sycandra, which it exactly
resembles, the ectodermic hemisphere corresponding to the somatic and
the endodermic to the germinative. The phylogenetic interest of the
Yolvocinids — " Protozoaires somatides " — is discussed.

New Dinoflagellates. * — Charles A. Kofoid and Josephine R.
Micliener give preliminary descriptions of a large number of new species
collected by the 'Albatross' (1904-5), and establish two new genera,
Peridiniella, related to Peridinium, and Berghiella, of undeterminable
relationships. The puzzling form Berghiella is like a spheroidal Gony-
aiilax, with very abruptly differentiated low cylindrical apical horn with
truncate apex. " Girdle with hyaline lists, descending, displaced less than
a girdle width, not impressed. Ventral area not delimited posteriorly.
Absolutely no trace of subdivision of theca into plates or regions."

Studies on Trypanosomes.f — Sir David Bruce and Captains A. E.
Hamerton, N. R. Bateman and F. P. Mackie report from a Uganda ox
a Trypanosome which seems to be identical with T. brucei, the cause of
Nagana. They also report J T. vivax (Ziemann), an easily recognizable
species, which gives rise to a fatal disease of cattle in Uganda. Its
carrier is probably Glossina pa/pal is, which is found naturally infected
on the lake-shore. The reservoir of the virus is possibly the antelope
which frequents the G. palpal is area.

Bee Disease due to Nosema apis.§ — H. B. Fantham and Annie
Porter have found bees and combs from Cambridgeshire and Hertford-
shire infected with the microsporidian Nosema apis (found by Zander in
Bavaria), which is closely allied to the parasite of silkworm disease
(pebrine), N. bombycis. The trophozoite and pansporoblast stages of
N. apis have been observed in the gut-epithelium of the bee. The
result is a dry dysentery, and the spores are the infective stages. Infec-
tion is probably spread by diseased bees attempting to enter healthy
hives. Experimental infection was brought about. The only certain
destructive ao-ent is fire. The authors think that Nosema has been

o

responsible for much of the recent " bee-disease ; but they recognize
" foul brood "as a quite separate disease. They also call attention to
Dr. Maiden's investigation of a bacillary infection in bees, the parasite
being called Bacillus pestiformis apis. The authors found, besides
Nosema, various Gregarines, a Flagellate apparently belonging to the
genus Crithitiia, a new Amoeba (Entamoeba apis), a spirochgete, and
various Fungi.

* Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., liv. (1911) pp. 269-302.

t Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1910) pp. 1-14 (2 pis.).

% Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1910) pp. 15-27 (3 pis.).

§ Proc. Zool. Soc, 1911, pt. iii. pp. 625-6.

77H SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Parasite of Coast Fever.* — R. Gonder describes the asexual and
Bexual phases (" agamonts " and "gamonts") of Theileria parva, cor-
roborating Koch's conclusion that it is the parasite of coast fever in
African cattle.

Developmental Forms of Trypanosoma brucei.t— George Buchanan
gives an account of developmental stages of Trypanosoma brucei (pecaudi)
in the internal organs of the gerbil {Gerbillus pygargus). He deals in
particular with intra-corpuscular and extra-corpuscular forms in the spleen,
and with stages seen in lung smears, e.g. the possible formation of the
so-called "latent body" of Moore and Breinl, and its metamorphosis
into the trypanosome.

New Trypanosome. } — David Bruce and A. E. Hamerton, H. R.
Bateman, and F. P. Mackie describe Trypanosoma uniforms sp. n. from
oxen, goats, and sheep in Uganda. It resembles T. vivax in shape and
general appearance, but differs markedly in size. It also resembles
T. vivax in not being pathogenic to the smaller laboratory animals.
There is no evidence available as to what the carrier is.

Trypanosoma nanum (Laveran).§ — David Bruce and A. E. Hamer-
ton, H. R. Bateman, and F. P. Mackie discuss this species which was
found to occur in cattle in Uganda. It is indistinguishable from
T. pecorum either in the living condition or when fixed and stained.
It differs from T. pecorum in not being pathogenic to the smaller labora-
tory mammals. Its carrier is unknown.

Life-history of Trypanosoma gambiense and T. rhodesiense.|| —
H. B. Fantham describes non-flagellate stages, the " latent bodies " of
Moore and Breinl. They are especially found in the lungs, spleen, and
bone-marrow during periods of decrease of Trypanosomes in the
peripheral blood. They are in process of formation at or near the time
when the Trvpanosomes are most numerous in the peripheral blood.
The non-flagellate body contains the nucleus and blepharoplast. In its
formation some of the cytoplasm and the flagelluin are disintegrated.
They develop flagella when placed in fresh warm uninfected blood.
There is a life-cycle of Trypanosomes (of the above species) in Vertebrate
hosts (rats and guinea-pigs in Fantham's experiments), comparable to
those of Crithidia and Herpetomonas in the alimentary canal of various
Invertebrates.

Transmission of Sleeping Sickness.f— David Bruce and A. E.
Hamerton and H. R. Bateman, and R. van Someren, have found
that Trypanosoma gambiense may retain their virulence for a period
of two days aft?r they are ingested by Glossina palpalis. But after the
Trypanosomes have been within the gut of the fly for two days, the
power of infecting animals with sleeping sickness, when inoculated sub-
cutaneously, is lost for twenty-two days. The Trypanosome in question

* Arch. Protistenk., xxi. (1910) pp. 142-64.

t Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiv. (1211) pp. 161-4 (1 pi.).

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 176-9 (1 pi.).
§ Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 180-6 (2 pis.).
|t Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 212-17 (1 pi.).

* I'roc Row Soc, Series B, lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 345-8.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 771

regains the power of infecting by direct inoculation after it has been
twenty-four days within the intestine of the fly. The number of days,
during which the virulence of the Trypanosome contained in the fly is
lost, roughly coincides with the time that the infected fly is incapable
of transmitting sleeping sickness by biting susceptible animals. There is
some evidence that the salivary glands of the fly are invaded by virulent
forms of the parasite thirty-sis days after the fly has fed upon infected
blood.

Trypanosoma evansi.* — David Bruce gives a precise account of
the dimensions, shape, and structure of T. evansi (Steel) which causes
Surra in elephants, camels, horses, cattle, and dogs. He compares it in
detail with T. brucei, bringing out the differences between the two.

New Coccidian from a Whelk's Kidney. f — W. J. Dak in describes
Merocystis Tcathse g. et sp. n., a Coccidian parasite very abundant, in the
form of white spherules, in the renal organ of Buccinum undatum (in all
the specimens examined at Port Erin). The genus is characterized by
the division of the zygote by septa into secondary cysts, in each of which
numerous spores are found. In the later stages these all lie loosely in
the larger cyst. The genus is referable to Leger's family Polysporo-
cystidaa.

The spores are monozoic, somewhat flattened and slightly angular,
and the sporocyst is smooth and not bivalve. The sporogonic life-cycle
is the only one to be observed in the whelk. Schizogony may take place
in another host, or it may be absent altogether.

Development of Sarcocystis muris.| — Rh. Erdmann discusses this
representative of the Sarcosporidia. The first period of the life-history
extends from the time of ingestion by the host to the first stage in the
musculature. It lasts for 28 to 30 days, and its seat is in the walls of
the alimentary canal, in the lymph-vessels, and in the fatty tissue. The
second period comprises the transition from the unicellular stage to the
completed sac within the muscle. In this second period there is a stage
of multiplication of cells, a stage in which the cells become very rich in
chromatin, a stage of rapid division into sporoblasts, and a stage in
which sickle-shaped spores are differentiated.

Haematozoa of Australian Reptiles. § — T. Harvey Johnston and
J. Burton Cleland record a number of forms and describe Hsemogregarina
(Karyolysus) dendrophilus sp. n. from the green tree-snake, H. (K.)
varanicola sp. n. from the monitor lizard, H. (K.) hinulise from a skink,
and other un-named species from a spinifex snake.

Life-history of Hsemogregarina stepanowi.|| — E. Reichenow has
studied the life-history of this parasite, and is unable to agree with
Siegel's account. He emphasizes its resemblance to a Coccidium. and
describes the asexual phases in the marsh turtle (Emys orbicularis) and
the sexual phases in the leech (Placobdella catenigera).

* Proc. Eoy. Soc, Series B, lxxxiv. (1911) pp. 181-7 (1 pi.).

f Arch. Protistenk., xxiii. (1911) pp. 145-53 (14 figs.).

j SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde (1910) No. 9, pp. 377-87 (1 pi. and 5 figs.).

S Proc. Linn. Soc, xxxv. (1910) pp. 677-85 (1 pi.).

[j SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1910) pp. 1-4 (1 pi.).

772 SUMMARY OK CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Free-living Spironemacese.* — .1. Gross describes Saprospira g. 11.,
with two species S. grandis and 8. nana. In Saprospira there is a
spirally coiled body and the multiplication is by fragmentation. He
regards Saprospira as a free-living genus of Spironemacese, and refers
the whole family to the Bacteria.

Large Gregarine in Atyephyra.f — L. Mercier reports Cephaloidophora
cuenoti sp. n., a large Polycystid Gregarine, from the intestine of the
freshwater crustacean Atyephyra desmar<>sti Millet. It seems different
from Didymophyes longissima, which infests Gammarus and Orchestia.
Farther investigation is necessary, however, especially in the light of the
suggestion made by Leger and Duboscq that Cephaloidophora and
Porospora may represent respectively the gamogonous and schizogonous
phases of the same cycle.

Haplosporidian Parasite in Donax.f — Casimir Cepede discusses the
life-history and affinities of the Haplosporidian which Caullery and
Chapellier described from the Trematode sporocysts of Donax and name
Anurosporidium pelseneeri. Its developmental cycle presents close
affinities with that of Cnidosporidians on the one hand and that of
Chytridiopsis on the other. It is nearly allied to Haplosporidium and
Urosporidium.

* MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, xx. (1911) pp. 188-204 (1 pi.),
t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxx. (1911) pp. 51-3.
% Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 507-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 773

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including- the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,
Including: Cell-contents.

Permeability of Protoplasm.*— J. Sziics has investigated the per-
meability of protoplasm as shown in the absorption of anilin dyes by
the living cells and the retardation of snob absorption by electrolysis.
The present investigations show that the rapidity of absorption of many
basic colouring matters is directly proportional to the concentration, but
the permeability of the plasma-membrane is not constant. Certain
electrolytes retard the absorption of basic colouring matters, the retarda-
tion being directly proportional to the valency of the kations. Dilute
solutions are proportionally more powerful than strong ones ; one and
the same amount of the electrolyte always produces the same retardation
with similarly concentrated solutions of the colouring matter. Calcium
salts and other electrolytes likewise retard the absorption of ferrous sul-
phate. The absorption of basic colouring matters is retarded by the
presence of acid colouring matters in accordance with well-defined laws.
The retardation caused by electrolytes is due to their effect upon the
plasma, while that produced by acid colouring matters is due to the
formation of a salt to which the plasma-membrane is impermeable.

Formation of Chloroleucites.f — A. Guilliermond, in studying the
germination of barley, has found all stages of transition between chon-
driocontes and chloroleucites, and is of opinion that the latter owe their
origin to the former. In the basal, more rudimentary parts of the
seedling, the chondriocontes occur in vacuoles in the neighbourhood of
nuclei, and when cell-division occurs they are equally distributed among
the daughter-cells. Higher up they are changed in form, and are con-
fined almost exclusively to the neighbourhood of the nuclei ; as they
pass higher they become ovoid, and increase in size. From this point on-
wards the chondriocontes disappear, and only chloroleucites are found,
which occupy the same places, have the form of disks of spheres, and
are uniformly coloured or with light centres. Later on the chloroleucites
acquire their normal shape, size, and colour. If this discovery proves
to be correct, it is important, because it explains the origin of the
chloroleucites and the function of the chondriocontes.

Mitochondries of Plant-cells.:}: — The same author contributes a short

note dealing with his investigations concerning the presence and function

* SB. Akad. Wiss. Wien, cxix. 7 (1910) pp. 737-73 (4 figs.).
t Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 290-2 (12 figs.).
j Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 199-201 (4 figs.).

774 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of the mitochondries. Investigations of the lower plants, e.g. Fungi,
Alira1. etc. were not very successful, but mitochondries were found in
the asci of Pustularia vesiculosa. Seeds of the higher plants were
especially rich in mitochondries from the commencement of germina-
tion, both in the endosperm and in the tissues of the embryo. They
varied in form, being rod-like in Rieinus, and spherical in haricot beans ;
they were specially abundant in barley, wheat, and maize. In barley
they were present in the cotyledons until the latter began to wither, and
in other organs of the embryo they persisted in the meristem until the
tissues were differentiated. In parenchymatous cells their disappearance
coincides with the appearance of the chloroleucites, and in the pro-
cam Itial strands with the differentiation of the fibro-vascular bundles.

Structure and Development.
"Vegetative.

Splitting of Rhizome and Root of Delphinium.* — M. A. Kingsley
has examined several specimens of Delphinium scaposum, and rinds
that the most apparent characteristic common to all is the manner of
splitting of the rhizome and root. The following are the chief points
of interest : — The primary root-structure is regular. The cambium
produces an annual ring of xylem and phloem, but both elements are
frequently replaced by parenchyma. There is an endodermis between
the outermost spongy cortex and the regular outer parenchyma. In
the third year an inner endodermis cuts off the primary xylem, paren-
chyma and necrotic pith from the rest of the tissues. The outer
endodermis pushes between the xylem, joins the inner endodermis, and
makes a continuous ring about each of the segments thus formed. The
tissues thus cut off become necrotic. Columns arise, surrounded by
active cork-forming periderm ; these have an independent existence, and
never exceed the number of the original bundles.

Epidermal Characters of Frenelopsis ramosissima.f — Edward
Wilber Berry notes that the genus was founded by Schenck in 1869
upon abundant material from the Lower Cretaceous, and named from its
resemblance to the modern genus Frenela. The species has since been
recognized in Greenland, Texas, New Jersey, and France. In 1880
Hosius and Van der Marck described Frenelopsis Kdnif/ii, from West-
phalia, and in 1881 Heer described F. occidentalis, from Portugal.
The latter also described F. leptoclada, which is confined to the Lower
< 'retaceous of Portugal. In 1889 Yelenovskv described F. bohemica
from the Cenomanian of Bohemia, and in 1890 Fontaine described
/•'. ramosissima and F. parceramosa, from the Potomac group of Virginia,
the same author in 1893 founding a third species, F. varians, upon
material from the Trinity group. Newberry (1896) described a ninth
species, F. gracilis, an abundant Upper Cretaceous type, which has been
recently shown by Hollick and Jeffrey to be unrelated to Frenelopsis.

* Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxviii. (1911) pp. 307-17 ( 2 pis. and 1 fig.),
t Bot. Gazette, 1. (1910) pp. 305-9 (2 figs).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 775

Although fruiting specimens have not been found, the position of the
genus in Cupressinese is not disputed. The genus is thus defined : —
Shrubs or trees with cylindrical, jointed, monopodial stems and branches,
the latter alternate, or whorled, often large. Leaves much reduced, gener-
ally triangular with a broad base and acute apex ; squamiform, appressed,
decussate. Internodes, variable in length, but longer in the apparently
annual shoots, which were more or less deciduous and functioned as
leaves.

F. ramosissima ranges from bottom to top of the Lower Cretaceous
in the Maryland -Virginia region, to which it is thus far confined. The
cuticle of the type of the genus F. Hoheneggeri was described by Zeiller
in 1882, and in 1888 Velenovsky described the epidermal features of
F. bohemica. The stomata in these species consisted usually of four
cells, symmetrically arranged, the opening being in the form of a star.
According to Zeiller they indicate an affinity with Gallitris and Libocedrus,
and disprove Heer's contention that this genus is allied to Ephedra.

In F. ramosissima the arrangement is similar to that of the two
species just mentioned. The epidermal cells are very small, roughly
rectangular, and with very thick walls. Their most curious feature is
the presence of minute, usually curved, spine-like outgrowths. The
curious stomatal openings which apparently characterize Frenelopsis, are
circular and about 0 • 03 mm. in diameter. They are very numerous,
but whether they are localized on certain portions of branches which
perform the functions of leaves, or whether they are uniformly distributed
on the annual shoots, could not be determined. They consist of five or
six guard-cells arranged around the central stomatal opening. In their
more essential characters they agree with the stomata of F. Hoheneggeri
and F. bohemica. These features suggest strong isolation and lack of
humidity ; but such conditions are not suggested by other members of
the associated flora. These peculiar features may have been inherited
from triassic ancestors which acquired them when the climate was
extremely arid, as we know it was from physical as well as paleonto-
logical criteria.

Eeproductive.

Ovule and Embryo-sac of the Platanaceae.* — Th. Nicoloff con-
tributes a brief account of the development of the ovule and embryo-sac
of Platanus. The ovule is pendent, almost orthotropous, and the manner
of insertion varies. The nucellus-tissues are homogeneous at first, but
as the integuments are formed, differentiation takes place. The forma-
tion and development of the embryo-sac strongly resembles that of Spiraea
especially in the formation of a sort of epidermal cavity in the neigh-
bourhood of the micropyle and in the peculiarities of the structure of the
chalazal portion of the nucellus. Resemblances to Hamamdis are found
in the slow disappearance of the antipodal-cells, in the retardation of
fertilization, etc. The author considers that these facts support the
views of those who place the Platanaceae among the Rosiflores, on
account of the similarity in floral structure.

* Comples Kendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 287-290.

776 SUMMAKV OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Physiology.
Nutrition and Growth.

Opinions upon Physiology of Leaf-fall.* — R. Combes publishes a
paper dealing with the opinion, held by Sachs and others, that substance-
contained in falling leaves are useless to the plant. The writer refers to
the influence which this opinion has had upon deductions made from
microchemical researches, and then discusses the variations produced in
autumn, in the mineral substances, nitrogenous compounds and hydro-
carbons contained in leaves. Finally he concludes that there is no proof
that the substances useful to living plants are transferred from the
leaves to the stem during the period of leaf -fall. It appears necessary
to make more exact experiments at very frequent intervals upon leaves
before, during, and after fall ; these experiments should be made with
leaves exposed to ordinary atmospheric conditions and upon those pro-
tected from rain, etc., while simultaneous experiments should be made
upon living parts of the plant. The chemical composition of leaf -con-
tents should also be analysed at different stages. The loss or accumula-
tion of substances in falling leaves varies according to species, atmospheric
conditions, first frosts, etc. Chemical composition is modified in a
similar way ; thus frost causes increase in oxidation and hence an accu-
mulation of substances rich in oxygen ; likewise starch is transformed
into sugar under the influence of frost. Since it has been proved that
such substances as sugar and amides can accumulate in falling leaves,
the author regards Sachs' opinion as quite inadmissible, and contends
that chemical change, persistence, accumulation, or diminution of sub-
stances contained in falling leaves, can no longer be regarded as explaining
the physiological role of these substances.

Complementary Chromatic Adaptation in Plants.f — P. A. Dangeard
has investigated this phenomenon in the Cyanophycea? by means of a
special spectrograph, and finds that the normal colours of the alga? are
preserved when exposed to that part of the spectrum which has no effect
upon the growth, i.e. from the violet to the yellow7 rays. They become
green under the rays extending from the yellow to the infra-red. The
rays which are the most active in chlorophyll-synthesis are those which
determine the change in coloration.

Irritability.

Effect of Etherization on Metabolism. } — J. Hempel has studied
the effects of anaesthetics such as ether upon the seeds and seedlings of
Pisum and Lupimis, and also upon the buds of Acer Psmdoplatanus, and
potato-tubers. The writer finds that small doses of ether accelerate the
production of CO.,, especially at low temperatures, while large doses
retard it in proportion to the size of the doses. During the after-effect
there is no acceleration, but the respiratory process is retarded both by

* Rev. Gen. Bot., xxiii. (1911) pp. 129-64.
t Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 293-4.

X Mem. Acad. Rov. Sc. and Lett. Danemark, Copenhagen, ser. 7, vi. (1911)
pp. 215-78.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 777

small and large doses. Similar results were obtained in the case of
sugar-formation, but when very large doses were given there was an in-
crease in the amount of sugar, probably because of the complete cessation
of the transformation of sugar into polysaccharides. The inversion of non-
reducing to reducing sugars was retarded by both small and large doses.
Destruction of proteids and formation of amides was accelerated by small
and retarded by large doses, but very large doses caused increase in the
amount of amides. The ripening process of seeds and its accompanying
synthesis of proteids is accelerated by small and retarded by large doses.
The results seem to show that in all the above-mentioned cases an
exciting phase is produced by small doses of short duration ; this is fol-
lowed by the narcotic-phase proper, which is produced by small doses of
long duration and large doses of short duration, and is characterized by
retardation of the normal processes. Large doses and average doses of
long duration cause the toxic phase, characterized by death phenomena.

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.
(By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.)

Ophioglossum palmatum.* — M. A. Chrysler discusses the question
of whether Ophioglossum palmatum is anomalous, namely whether the
several to many fertile spikes are derived by duplication or branching of
the single spike found in 0. vulgatum, or whether the spikes represent
fertile lobes of the leaf. The former is the view lately advocated by
F. 0. Bower ; and the latter represents the usual view. Chrysler dis-
cusses the respective arguments for and against. Further investigation
is required to settle the question.

Hemigramma latifolia.f — W. N. Clute gives a description and
figure of Hemigramma latifolia, an anomalous fern which has been
referred to various sections of Acrostichum, Hemionitis, etc. It is the
type of the genus Hemigramma Christ. Specifically it has been known
as Zollingeri. It occurs in the Philippines aud other East Indian
islands.

Asplenium alternans in America. — W. A. PoyserJ indicates the
identity of Asplenium Ferrissi Clute with the Himalayan A. alternans
Wallich. The former was found in Arizona in 1908. The latter is
known from Abyssinia also. Both descriptions and specimens of the
two species agree.

J. H. Ferriss§ collected A. Ferrissi in Arizona at an altitude of
7 O00 ft. in the Huachuca mountains, Cochise county. Most of the
specimens collected have died under cultivation.

"W. N. Clute || discusses the distribution of the above fern. Of its

* Bot. Gaz.. lii. (1911) pp. 151-3.

t Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 46-8 (1 pi.).

J Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 33-G.

§ Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 36-8.

|| Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 38-42.

778 - SIM MARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

identity with A. alternans there seems to be no douht. But how an

Indian fern should start a colony in Arizona is a dec]) mystery. Clute
seeks for an explanation of the matter, and cites other instances and the
theories of multiple origin and of wind-distribution.

Pteridophytes of Schleswig-Holstein.* — P. Junge gives a detailed
account of the Pteridophytes of Schleswig-Holstein. These comprise
thirty-nine endemic species, which tbe author has investigated in the
most elaborate way, recording and describing every variety, form, sport,
and hybrid known in the province, and giving the full distribution.
Where necessary he has inserted text figures. He also devotes a chapter
to distribution, and another to critical notes.

American Ferns. f — L. F. Kimball gives an account of about two
dozen Pteridophytes gathered in San Diego county, California, with
some notes on their habitats and characters. Adiantum capillus-veneris,
found in 1902 under the flume that brings water from the mountains to
San Diego across an arid, sandy country, has already advanced eight
miles along the flume, and grows wherever there is sufficient shade.
Ophioglossum californicum and Gymnogramme triangularis are the rarest
species. Pell sea ornithopus varies much in the wild state and under
cultivation ; it requires investigation.

A. Prescott % describes the walking fern (Camptosorus rhizophyllus),
and one of its habitats.

W. N. Clute § publishes some notes on variations of form sometimes
met with in Nephrodium marginale.

Under the title Pteridographia he gives || notes on the following sub-
jects : Forked Liquorice Fern, Sex in the Ostrich Fern, Death of
J. H. Hart, Cambium in Ferns, Fragrant Bracken, Abnormal Lyco-
podiums.

Bornean Ferns. IT — E. B. Copeland publishes descriptions and figures
of twenty new ferns collected in Borneo, mostly by C. J. Brooks ; and
has issued two previous papers on the same subject in the same journal.
The specimens were gathered in Sarawak. Copeland calls attention to
Poli/podium Tieracleum, and discusses its relationship with Drynaria.
He draws up a key to illustrate in brief the characters of the minor groups
in which he prefers to arrange the allied species without taking them
out of the genus Polypodium.

Ferns of Perak.** — H. N. Ridley gives a list of sixty-six ferns and
eight Lycopodiacea? collected during an expedition to Temengoh, in
Upper Perak. One variety is new.

Philippine Ferns.ft — E. B. Copeland gives an account of some new
or interesting Philippine ferns received from various collectors. Five of

* Beih. Jahrb. Hamburg Wiss. Anstalt., xxvii. (1910) pp. 49-245 (figs.).'

+ Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 42-6.

X Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 48-9.

§ Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 50-2 (figs.).

I1 Fern Bull., xix. (1911) pp. 53-9.

1 Philippine Journ. Sci., vi. (1911) pp. 133-41 (14 pis.).

** Journ. Straits Branch R. Asiat. Soc, 1910, pp. 118-22.

+ + Philippine Journ. Sci., vi. (1911) pp. 145-8.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 779

the species are new to science. For Lastrsea exigua J. Smith, which,
through uncertainty and misunderstanding of authors, finds itself with-
out a name, Copeland supplies the designation Dryopteris confusa.

Papuan Ferns.* — E. B. Copeland gives an account of the ferns col-
lected in eastern Xew Guinea by C. King. The series is of a completely
Malavan character, and affords a strong argument against the natural-
ness of Wallace's line between Malaya and New Guinea. It contains
171 species and varieties, 87 of which occur both east and west of
Xew Guinea ; while 16 were already known as endemic in New Guinea,
and -12 are described as new by Copeland.

E. Rosenstock* publishes descriptions of nine new species found in a
collection of about one hundred ferns collected by C. King in British
New Guinea, and sent to the Buitenzorg Botanic Garden.

African Ferns.:}: — G. Hieronymus publishes descriptions of a number
of African species of Polypodiaceas, most of which are new to science —
namelv, thirty-seven species and numerous varieties. The specimens
cited were collected in German East Africa, Kamerun, Congo, Nigeria,
Angola, Bechuanaland, St. Thome, Fernando Po, Abyssinia, etc.

A. Gepp § publishes a list of sixty-nine pteridophytes collected by
C. F. M. Swynnerton in Gazaland, a district lying partly in Eastern
Pthodesia, partly in Portuguese territory to the east.

Bryophyta.
(By A. Gepp.)

Inflorescence of Muscineae.|| — I. Douin defines some of the laws of
the inflorescence of the Muscineae. Apart from the synoicous inflores-
cence which is very rare among the hepatics, the first two laws are as
follows: — (1) Every paroicous species can become autoicous and even
dioicous by abortion of one or other sexual organ. (2) Every autoicous
species can become dioicous in the same way. But the converse of these
laws is not true. And hence (3) when two species differ only by their
inflorescence, they ought to form only one and the same species. It
may possibly be the case that a synoicous species may become paroicous,
autoicous, dioicous ; but there is at present no evidence of this. There
are but four kinds of inflorescence — synoicous, paroicous, autoicous,
dioicous ; and such other expressions as heteroicous and polyoicous have
no value and do but serve to confuse the meaning. It is probable that
these laws apply to the mosses also as well as to the whole group of the
hepatics.

Social Groups and Adaptive Characters in the Bryophyta. f —
J. A. Wheldon publishes notes on some social mosses and on adaptive

* Philippine Journ. Sci., vi. (1911) pp. G5-92.
t Fedde's Repertorium, ix. (1911) pp. 422 7.
X Engler's Bot. Jahrb., xlvi. (1911) pp. 345-404.
§ Journ. Linn. Soc, xl. (1911) pp. 237-44.
|| Rev. Brvolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 107-8.

1 Lancashire Nat., iii. (1911) pp. 377-81, 405-8 ; also iv. (1911) pp. 1-8, 41-3,
75-S2, 129-32, 155-63 (2 pis.).

780 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

characters in the Bryophyta. The gregarious mosses are able to cover
large tracts of ground to the exclusion of almost all other plants, for
i sample, Rhacomitrium lanuginosum, species of Sphagnum, forms of
ffarpidium, Bryum associations on sand-dunes, Marsupella associations
on high mountains. In the chapter on the adaptive characters in the
gametophyte, Wheldon discusses the prctonema, the non-sexual methods
of propagation, the gametophore ; and then he treats of the sporophyte,
'The paper is of a very discursive character, teeming with field-notes and
observations.

Allionella, a new genus.* — V. F. Brotherus describes and figures
Allionella, a new genus of mosses discovered in Ecuador by M. Allioni.
It is allied to Meiothecium, and is distinguished by its numerous shortly-
stalked sporogonia arranged along the upper part of the stem, with
theca erect and peristome of regular structure. The one species bears
the name AUioneUa cryphseoides.

Austinella, a new genus.f — R. S. Williams gives a description and
figures of Austimlla, a new genus allied to Trichostomiim, but differing
in having leaves with a broad clasping base, and with the upper cells
angular and not papillose. It was originally found in Pennsylvania,
and named Syrrhopodon ? Rami by Austin in 1876.

Leucobryum glaucum.J — E. M. Williams gives an account of the
unattached cushions of Leucobryum glaucum, which are sometimes found
under fir-trees and beech-trees, for example, in Fawley Woods, Hants.
They lie loosely on the dead- leaves, and are 1^ to 4 inches wide. He
agrees with W. H. Bun-ell's explanation of their existence, that they are
due to repeated disturbance by game-birds and other animals, whereby
alternating growth takes place on the two flattened sides; and the water
stored in the spongy tissue renders the tufts self-sustaining. But he
wonders why the cushions are not more common.

Plagiothecium.§ — C. Meylan publishes some researches on the
monoicous forms of the sylvatico-dmticulatum group of the genus Plagio-
thecium. The published opinions of leading bryologists being much at
variance about the group, the author has collected material for yeais and
is now able to give an exact opinion about the value of each of the forms
in the group. The forms are divided into two series absolutely parallel,
but differing in the width of the leaf -cells. Series i. : cells wide, 10-20 /x.
Series ii. : cells narrow, 5-10 /x. To series i. belong the forms with
long capsules contracted below the mouth and having a long neck ;
while to series ii. belong the forms with short capsules having a short
conical or obtuse operculum. There is a correspondence between the
form of the leaves (acuminata and obtusifolia) and that of the cells. The
form obtusifolia always has the cells wider and shorter than those of
f. acutifolia. The number of male flowers is more variable in series i.
than in series ii. For the sake of clearness the forms in the group may

* Oefv. Finsk. Vet. Soc. Foerh., liii. (1910) 4 pp. (1 pi.).

t Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 70-1 (figs.).

I Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 318-19.

§ Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 67-9, 86-9, 109-12.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 181

be arranged under two species, each with a sub-species, namely, Series i.
P. denticulatum, with a sub-species, P. laeturn \ and Scries ii. P. Ruthei,
with a new sub-species, P. pseudolaetum. Under each of these the author
gives a parallelism of varieties and forms. He then supplies an analytical
key showing the distinctive characters of all the principal varieties." In
the narrow-celled group are P. Roeseanum, P. denticulatum, some varieties
P. laeturn, and some forms. In the wider-celled group are P. sylvaticum,
P. succulentum, P. Ruthei, some varieties, P. pseudo-laetum, and some
forms.

Polytrichum.*— E. M. Dunham publishes notes by J. F.Collins and
others on a peculiar Polytrichum which agrees with P. Smithise Grunt in
its sporophytic characters, but is a depauperate P. ohioense sin its gameto-
phytic characters.

Lophocolea minor not a Species. f— I. Douin returns to the question
whether Lophocolea minor is a good species, and shows various reasons for
combating K. Midler's view that L. minor is distinct from L. heterophylla
in having a dioicous and not a paroicous inflorescence, and in being
propaguliferous. The inflorescence is not constant, but varies ; and the
presence of gernnue is not a specific character but may occur in any
species. The evidence all points to the conclusion that L. minor is but
a propaguliferous form of L. heterophylla.

Metzgeria.J — V. Schiffner publishes notes on certain neotropic
species of Metzgeria, and gives valuable characters for distinguishing
them from one another, namely, the inflorescence, branching, number of
cortical cell-rows on the upper and lower sides of the midrib, structure
of central strand of midrib, arrangement and length of hairs on midrib
and wings, size and width of alar cells. On the other hand, such
characters as fruit-branches, male branches, calyptra, sporogonial valves,
spores and elaters, are of interest but of far less importance systematically.
As to M. diehotoma (Sw.) Nees, it has been much confused. In Herb.
Lindenberg at Vienna, eight out of eleven specimens referred to it
belong to other species. He gives descriptions of M. eiliata Raddi,
M. Herminieri, 31. bahiensis, and critical notes on M. leptomitra, and on
M. leptoneura Spruce. The iatter he considers to be a variety of
M. hamata.

British Bryophytes.§ — 0. A. Cheetham publishes notes upon about a
dozen rare mosses gathered by F. Haxby and himself on the less fre-
quented parts of the north-west side of Inglebro'. The species concerned
are of the type met with on the Lake I )istrict mountains. One is a new
record for England, one for Yorkshire, and others for West Yorkshire.

W. Ingham || gives notes on some mosses and hepatics observed at
(Jastleton, N. Yorks., during the dry weather of last Whitsuntide. Some
are characteristic of the Swiddens and some of the Slacks.

* Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 90-1.

t Rev. Bryolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 105-7.

X Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., lxi. (1911) pp. 183-7, 261-4.

§ Naturalist, No. 653 (1911) pp. 231-2.

II Naturalist, No. 654 (1911) p. 248.

Dec. 20th, 1911 3 B

782 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

J. J. Marshall* records r he occurrence of Toriula Vahlii at Clee-

thorpes, in .North Lincolnshire. It occurs on mud dredged from ;i lock.

It is a Mediterranean moss with a scanty distribution in the south of
England.

Mosses of Haute-Saone.f — A. Coppey continues his phytogeo-
graphic studies of the mosses of the Haute-Saone, and treats of the
Physcomitrieae, Bryeae, Bartramieas, and Polytricheae. He gives de-
scriptions of anew species of Fontinalis and a new variety of Mniobryum.
He calls attention to the occasional association of Leptobryum pyriforme
with Sphagnum, and suggests that this may explain the frequent intro-
duction of the former plant into greenhouses where much Sphagnum is
used.

Hepatics of the Atlantic Islands. J — G. Gola gives a list of forty-
two species of hepatics collected by G. Xegri in the Canary Islands in
1905. He adds one species (Aneura pinguis) to the recent records
published by Bornmuller, Pitard and Corbiere, and Bryhn, and increases
the distribution-records of the various islands of the group.

E. Armitage§ publishes a note upon the presence in Madeira of
Frullania germana, a species hitherto known only from the British Isles
and Faroes. The Madeira specimens had previously been referred to
F. teneriffse.

North American Sphagnum. II — A. Le Eoy Andrews begins a series
of notes on North American Sphagnaceaa. He discusses the grouping
of the species within the genus Sphagnum, and adopts Russow's two
divisions : (1) Inophhea for the fibrillose-celled group, commonly known
as Cymbifolia • and (2) Litophlaa for the rest of the genus. The two
groups are distinguished by sundry other characters. For instance, in
Inophlcea the cortical cells of the branches are homogeneous, the branch
leaves are cucullate, and rough dorsally, and not toothed at apes. He
rejects the ten sub-groups adopted by Warnstorf and others for the
European species, since he finds them to be not applicable to the exotic
species. The sub-groups shade into one another. Yet he would sub-
divide Litophhea into Malaco sphagnum for the Rigida sub-group, and
Acisphagnum for the Cuspidata.

North American Hepatics.1T — A. W. Evans publishes a second
decade of notes on North American hepaticas. The species concerned
are Riccia califomica Aust.s Neesiella pilosa Schiffn., N. rupestris Schiffn..
Metzgeria dichotoma Nees, M.fruticulosa Evans, Scapania spitzbergensis
C. Mull., Lopholejeunea atroviridis (Spruce), Ceratolcjeunca integrifolia
Evans, Bracltiolejeunea bahamensis Evans, Caudal 'ejeunea Lehmanniana
Evans. The most important of these is Neesiella pilosa, the relationships
of which are still incompletely understood.

* Naturalist, No. 653 (1911) p. 238.
t Rev. Brvolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 112-19.
: Atti. R. Accad. Sci. Torino, xlvi. (1911) pp. 1004-8.
§ Journ. of Bot., xlix. (1911) pp. 303.
|| Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 72-5.
1 Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 84-8.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 783

Mexican Moss-flora.* — J. Cardofc, in finishing his survey of the
moss-flora of Mexico, points out that the actual number of Mexican
mosses known is about 650, and may easily be doubled as time goes on,
The moss-flora is closely related to that of the West Indies and Andes,
and less intimately with that of the United States. It has but little in
common with that of westerly regions in the same latitude — Hawaii,
Formosa, Philippines. But curiously enough Mexico has some 20 species
iu common with India, and 14 others which are very closely allied with
Indian species. The author adds critical notes on more than 50 species,
which he is compelled to reduce to synonyms or to transfer to other
genera.

Hepaticae of the Bahama Islands.! — A. W. Evans gives an account
of the hepaticae of the Bahamas based on material collected for the New
York Botanical Garden. Of the thirty-four species recorded, it is
curious that thirty belong to the Jubuleae, namely to Lejeunea and
Frullania. The other genera represented are Riccia, Marchantia,
Plagiochila, Radula, with one species each. Three new species are
described and figured. The flora has but little in common with that of
Bermuda — five species only.

Hepaticae of Puerto Rico4 — A. W. Evans publishes his tenth
article on the hepaticae of Puerto Pico, and devotes it to a careful account
of Cololejeunea, Leptocolea, and Aphanolejeunea. Besides discussing each
genus critically, and describing the species in detail, he gives a chapter
to a description of the gemma? in the three genera — a character very
little studied, but showing great constancy. Cololejeunea contains about
twenty species, two of which are treated here ; Leptocolea includes about
fifty known species, four of which occur in Puerto Rico ; Aphanolejeunea,
a new genus, with the Irish A. microscopica Tayl., as its type, contains
about six species. In all the author describes three new species, re-
describes several others, and makes critical allusions to numerous others.

New Zealand Hepaticae.! — L. S. Gibbs publishes a list of forty-one
hepaticae collected by her near Auckland, in the northern island of New
Zealand, in the spring season in 1007. The specimens were determined
by F. Stephani, and include four new species — Marchantia laceriloba,
Aneura papulolimbata, Calobryum Gibbsise, Lepidozia Gibbsiana. Some
notes on habitat are appended.

Japanese Bryophytes.|j — S. Okamura gives descriptions in German
of the following seven new species of Japanese mosses : Dolichomitra
robusta, Cryphsea obovatocarpa, Dichelyma hatakeyamse, Calliergon
nakamurse, Astomum kiiense, Dicranella salsnyinosa, Meteor ium cuspi-
datum, and gives figures of most of them.

He also describes If Trichocoleopsis sacculata, a new genus of hepatics,

* Rev. Brvolog., xxxviii. (1911) pp. 97-105.
t Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxv. (1911) pp. 205-22 (2 pis).
X Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxviii. (1911) pp. 251-86 (2 pis.).
§ Journ. of Bot., xliv. (1911) pp. 261-6.

Tokvo Bot. Mag., xxv. (1911) pp. 134-44.
«f Tokvo Bot. Mag., xxv. (1911) pp. 159-61 (1 pi.).

3 e 2

784 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of which he has studied fertile material. The original material collected
si. Tile by J. Bisset, was referred to Blepharozia by Mitten in 1891. It
is distinguished from Mastigophora and PtiluMum by the lack of a
perianth, from Lepidolsena by the form of the calyptra, aniphigastria,
and undertones of the leaves, and from Trichocolea by the presence of
rootlets, and by the form of the leaves and aniphigastria.

Mosses of New Caledonia.* — V. F. Brotherns publishes a third
contribution to the moss-flora of Xew Caledonia, including descriptions
of fifty-one new species.

Antarctic Mosses.f — J. Cardot gives a preliminary account of the
mosses collected by M. Gain in the Antarctic during the French second
Charcot Expedition. It is the richest bryological collection yet made in
the Antarctic region proper, and comprises 34 species. It adds 3 genera
(Pottia, Rhacomitriiun, and Philonotis), 11 species (7 new to science)
and 2 varieties (1 new) to the Antarctic flora, which now possesses 58
moss-species, divided among 24 genera and 13 families. The Antarctic
flora is a poor one as compared with the Arctic, because the climatic
conditions are so unfavourable to all vegetation. Nothing is known to
occur south of 60° S. lat., whereas Peary collected 57 species between
81° and 82° in the Arctic regions. The present French Antarctic col-
lection came from fourteen localities extending from the South Shetlands
to Marguerite Bay, south of Loubet Land. Short descriptions of the
7 new species are appended to the list.

Thallophyta.

Algae.

(By Mrs. E. S. Gepp.)

Physiology of Diatoms. J — T. Meinhold discusses the physiology of
the Diatoms, and especially their cultivation in coloured light. He
finds that there are for Diatoms two maxima of assimilation, just as
there are for green algas ; and the first maximum lies in the red light of
the spectrum, and the second lies in the blue-green for Diatoms, and in
the blue for green algas. The heights of the assimilation in the red
and blue light the author is unable to compare. In the blue-violet
region of the spectrum, with a given supply of energy, both these groups
of alga? exhibit a sinking of the assimilation curve from the maximum
out towards the violet end. In addition to the strength of the incident
light-rays, the wave-length of the rays has a determining influence on
the amount of assimilation.

Phycoerythrin and Phycocyanin. § — H. Kylin gives a detailed

account of the phycoerythrin and phycocyanin found in Geramium

rubrum. The names of these pigments wrere proposed by Kutzing in

1843, and the pigments have been studied by many authors. Kylin

* Oefv. Finsk. Vet. Soc. Poerh., liii. (1910) 42 pp.
t Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 599-603.
t Cohn's Beitrage z. Biol. Pflanz., x. (1911) pp. 353-78 (1 pi.).
§ Hoppe-Seyler's Zeitschr. f. Physiol. Chemie, lxis. (1910) pp. 169-239 (1 pi.
and 2 charts). See also IStuov. Notar., xxii. (1910) pp. 97-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 785

describes his method for obtaining pure solutions of the pigments, and
then discusses their various physical and chemical characters. The two
bodies are of a proteid nature, and Kylin suggests the name phyco-
chromoproteids for them. Both are insoluble in pure water, but dissolve
after the addition of a minute quantity of alkali or neutral salt ; by
boiling or by the addition of an adequate proportion of acid or alkali
the albuminoid components are separated off from the coloured com-
ponents.

Effect of Light on Algae.* — P. A. Dangeard gives the results of
his investigations of phototactism, assimilation, and phenomena of
growth, by means of special apparatus. As to phototactism, he distin-
guishes two quite different types : — (1) that of the EugleneaB, which
seek the most refrangible rays of right ; (2) that of the Oscillariaa,
which range themselves under the less refrangible rays. He finds that
it is only under the action of certain rays determined by the coloured
screens that the oxygen bubbles are formed on the filaments of algae ;
under other rays Mesocarpus, for instance, turns black. As to growth,
he states that in the case of Ghlorella vulgaris it is the chlorophyll
absorption-band situated at B and C which is effective in growth as well
as in assimilation. Finally, he says that the spectrogram of a culture of
a sulphur-bacterium, probably Thiocystis violacea, shows the same cha-
racters of development as does Ghlorella, and behaves like a green alga.

Nuclear Autochromatism in Algae.j — P. A. Dangeard publishes a
note on an instance of nuclear autochromatism in a Desmidean genus
Penium. In some cultures injured by excessive solar energy certain
cells had been killed, and had the appearance of having been subjected
to a fixing reagent, showing all the details of their nuclear structure.
After death the pigment had played the role of a staining reagent.
The researches are to be pursued further, in order to determine whether
other algae can stain their protoplasm.

Algal Figures on Culture Flasks. f — M. Molliard gives an ex-
planation of the vertical lines designed by various aquatic algas on the
sides of glass culture-flasks standing near windows. Dangeard had
experimented with Ghlorella, and explained the vertical strias of the
plant deposit as being due to local intensity of light. Molliard admits
this factor, but shows that gravity also intervenes as an explanation of
the solely vertical vegetation of the algae. Dangeard, in reply, finds it
natural enough that gravitation should have some influence in the
matter ; but, as luminous intensity and the nature of the radiations
play a very active part, he holds that each of the three factors should be
studied in each particular case.

Anatomy of Polyides and Furcellaria.§ — G. Denys gives an account
of his investigations of the anatomy of Polyides rotundas and Furcellaria
fastigiata, two algas which, in the absence of reproductive organs and

* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, lvii. (1910) 17, pp. 315-19.

t Bull. Soc. Bot. France, lvii. (1910) pp. 453-5.

: Bull. Soc. Bot. France, lvii. (1910) p. 519.

§ Beih. Jahrb. Hamburg Wiss. Anstalt, xxvii. (1910) pp. 1-31 (figs.)

] SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

holdfast, are not easy to distinguish. R. Caspary* showed how the
Bterile plants may he separated by their microscopic structure. The

pr< sent author has studied and compared the tissues and cells of both
plants in all pans of the thallus, and treats his subject under the
following headings :— morphology, anatomy of tissue, and anatomy of
cells (including cell-wall, chromatophores, starch, nucleus, crystals,
v.iruolc-liodies, special nature of cell-contents). He states that the
distinctions pointed out by Caspary are complete enough, but can be
somewhat supplemented. Pohjides has a regular structure, and shows a
gradual transition in its tissues ; its smaller cortical cells are in two
to four layers (not four or five) ; and transverse hyplue, which traverse
medulla and cortex, occur but solitary-wise. Furcellaria, on the other
hand, has a less regular structure, its tissues presenting almost an abrupt
transition ; its smaller cortical cells constitute one layer, rarely two
layers (not two or three, rarely more, as Caspary stated) ; and transverse
hyphaj pass in considerable number through the medulla and large-celled
cortex. In cell-structure there is much in common between the two
genera. But a distinction is found in the cell-walls : in Polyides the
middle lamella is strongly coloured by methylen-blue and ruthenium-
red, whereas in Furcellaria the middle lamella remains absolutely
colourless. Denys adds a chapter on cicatrization in the two genera,
and a final one on endophytes. In Furcellaria he found a brown
filamentous endophyte which he refers to Microsyphar, and describes
under the name M. Furcellariae, a new species.

Floridese.f — C. J. Connolly has made a detailed examination of six
species of Florideae, collected by Goebel in New Zealand and south-west
Australia. His interesting and important results are given in a summary
under the headings of the different species. It runs as follows :—
Polysiphonia decipiens. 1. Lateral branches arise from the base of the
monosiphonous leaves without precise divergence. 2. The female organs
arise at the second segment of the leaves. 3. The procarp consists of
the following component parts : {a) a 4-celled carpogonial branch ; (b) a
1-celled inferior accessory branch ; (c) a 2-celled lateral accessory branch,
which all arise out of the pericentral cell. 4. As the result of fertiliza-
tion the pericentral cell cuts off a special auxiliary cell above, and the
accessory branches divide further. 5. The carpogonium cuts off a cell
at its base, which is to be regarded as the conductor of the fused nucleus
to the auxiliary cell. Asparayopsis armata. 6. Primary branches arise
with a ! -divergence. They all grow out to short branches (Kurztriebe).
Secondary branches arise obliquely opposite the primary branches, and
grow out to long branches (Langtrieben) or branched Kurztrieben. 7.
The arrangement of the lateral branches cannot be explained by
Schwendener's contact theory, but must be referred to internal causes.
8. An indirect, but no direct plasma connexion exists between the
neighbouring cells of the central axis. 9. As regards the laterally
situated pores of the central axis, which usually occur on the upper
portion of the segment, the nearer they are to the apex the deeper they

* Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., vi. (1850; chap. ix.
t Flora, ciii. (1911) pp. 125-70 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICR0SC0P7, ETC. 787

lie in the segments, so far as the cystocarpic branches are concerned.

10. The auxiliary cell, which before fertilization is not specially marked,
is the cell next the Tragzelle, i.e. the second cell from the axil-cell. It
is probably identical with the third cell of the branch, reckoning from
the carpogonium, which makes the carpogonial branch only 2 -celled.

11. The auxiliary cell fuses with the Tragzelle ; the process of fusion is
so lengthy, that the surrounding tissue is absorbed and reaches as far as
the third cell of the central axis. 12. The organs of attachment are
short thickened shoots. The Langtriebe, which normally stand opposite
the Kurztriebe, wither. Euzoniella incisa. 13. The cystocarps arise
generally on the lowest side-shoot of a Kurztrieb ; they may also arise
on the penultimate side-shoot. 14. The procarpia arise on the second
segment of the side-shoot of the Kurztrieb. Rhabdonia verticillata.
15. R. verticillata grows by means of a three-sided apical cell. 1G. The
cystocarp has been found, and its position is embedded in the thallus.
17. One-celled colourless hairs occur. They must be regarded only
as a secondary transitory character. Ergthroclonium Mueller i. 18. The
branches which grow out from the central axis, are not in two rows as
Harvey states, but in four rows. 19. There is a secondary growth in
thickness at the base of the principal shoot and the place of egress of
the larger branches. The layers are not to be regarded as annual rings,
but as'elements of solidity. Rhabdonia globifera. 20. The growth of
R. globifera, unlike that of R. verticillata, which has a single apical
cell, belongs to the " Springbrunnen-type." Its position in the genus
Rhabdonia is therefore hardly to be maintained. 21. Although, in
general, attempts to prove a direct plasma connexion have only given
negative results, the fact has been established in certain cases.

Erythrocladia.* — N. Svedelius gives an account of Erythrocladia
irregularis Rosenv., which he found growing epiphytically on Furcellaria
fasiigiata. It was first described in 1909 as a Danish alga ; its distribu-
tion now includes Sweden.

Batrachospermum growing on Molluscs.f — G. Bignotti publishes
a note on the occurrence of two forms of Batrachospermum found grow-
ing on shells of Planorbis in freshwater pools near Modena in the spring
of 1908, and cites similar records made by Teodoresco and Lemmermann.

Colpomenia sinuosa.J — A. D. Cotton gives an account of the in-
crease of Colpomenia sinuosa in England. It is a brown alga of the
Indian Ocean and the warm Atlantic, and in recent years has migrated
up the west coast of Europe. On our coasts it was first noticed in the
Scilly Islands in August 1905, in Cornwall in the following year, spread-
ing later to Devon and Dorset. It does not appear to have travelled
east of Poole harbour. In the counties mentioned it occurs in consider-
able abundance in suitable stations. It is an inhabitant of sheltered
waters, and it reaches its maximum development in the winter months.
It grows epiphytically upon quite a number of algaB or attached to rocks

* Svensk. Bot. Tidsskr., v. (1911) pp. 217-18.

t Atti Soc. Nat. Modena, ser. 4, xii. (1910) 2 pp. See also Nuov. Notar., xxii.
(1911) p. 90. % Kew Bulletin, 1911, pp. 153-7.

788 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

or shells. Balloon-like in shape it sometimes contains air. ami breaking
away floats on the surface of the sea. It lias heen accused of thus lifting
ami transporting young oysters from their culture beds.

Dichotomosiphon and Mischococcus.* — J. Virieux publishes a note
on Dichotomosiphon tuberosus (A. Br.) Ernst and Mischococcus confervicola
Naeg. The former plant, new to France, he found in good fruiting con-
dition near Besancon. He also treats of Mischococcus, which had nor
heen recorded for France except once in the north.

Freshwater Algae of the Clyde Area.f — R. Garry publishes some
recent additions to the freshwater algas of the Clyde area. New to the
region are the following : — Bulboclisete mirabilis, Microthamaium Kuetz-
ingianum, Microspora floccosa, Spirogyra belUs,S.nitida, Ghoaspis stictica,
Spirotsenia condensata, Desmidium swartzii.

Pleurococcus sulphurarius.i — E. Clerici writes on some specimens
(fathered in the Valle del Bove on Mount Etna. On one of the pieces of
lava found near a f umarole was a patch of green alga, possibly the un-
described Protococcus vulcanicus recorded by Cesati from the Solfatara
of Pozzuoli in 1869, and described by Galdieri in 1899 under the name
Pleurococcus sulphur arius.

Clathrocystis.§ — G. B. De Toni writes about an extraordinary
development in Lago di Como of an alga harmful to fishing. This
occurred in October 1909, and was due to Glathrocystis serur/inosa.
Similar developments have been recorded by Besaua for 1898 and 1908.

Breaking of the Meres. || — J. Burton publishes a note on two in-
stances of the "breaking of the. meres," one in a pond at Totteridge on
July 10, 1909, the other in the Welsh Harp reservoir. The algae con-
cerned were Oscillator ia decolor ata West in the former case, and 0. Agardhii
Gom. in the second.

Fossil Diatoms in Italy. % — E. Clerici gives an account of the species
found in the diatomaceous earth occurring near Lago di Avigliana — some
fifty species chiefly belonging to the genera Gymbella, JYavicida, Gom-
phonema, Epithemia.

He also ** points out the importance which diatoms present in the
study of geology. He indicates, for instance, three types of diatomif erous
strata in the environs of Rome (1) with brackish species ; (2) with
Cyclotellea?, especially Stephanodiscus Astrsea ; (3) with species of
Epithciii ia prevalent.

He also ft gives a microscopic analysis of the calcareous deposit at

* Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Doubs, No. 19 (Jan. 1910) (1 pi.),
t ( Glasgow Nat., ii. (1909) pp. 13-14.
X Boll. Soc. Geol. Ital., xxviii: (1910) pp. ccvi-vii (1 pi.),
ij Kevista Mensile di Pesca e Idrobiologia, v. (1910).
Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, xi. (1910) pp. 115-20. See also Nuov. Notar.,
xxii. (1911) p. 90.

^1 Boll. Soc. Geol. Ital., xxvi. pp. cxliii-iv (1 pi.).
** Boll. Soc. Geol. Ital., xxviii. (1910) pp. 649-76.
ft Boll. Soc. GeoL.Ital., xxvi. pp. 557-66 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. i 89

S. Demetrio nei Vestini (Prov. Aquila). It is rich in diatoms and
sponge-spicules ; and the diatoms are of the Cyclotella type and of the
Goscinodiscus type.

Ceratium.* — E. Joergensen publishes a monograph of the genus
Ceratium, in which he maintains four sub-genera — Poroceratiiim, Bicera-
tium, Amphiceratiurn, Euceratium, and gives descriptions of the species
and varieties with their respective distributions. A detailed bibliography
is appended.

Kammerplankton.f — R. Kolkwitz writes on the Kammerplankton
of fresh-water and of the sea. Taking the cubic centimetre as his unit
of measurement, he employs a plankton-chamber-slide of that capacity
for the quantitative estimation of the plankton in a given water," or at a
given depth in that water. He is able to determine directly and quickly
under the Microscope the actual condition of the water in relation to
organisms, organic and mineral detritus.

Arctic Plankton.} — C. H. Ostenfeld gives an account of the marine
plankton from the east Greenland sea (west of 6° W. Long, and north of
73° 30' N. Lat.), collected during the ' Danmark ' Expedition of 1906-8.
He enumerates forty-two diatoms and six Flagellatae, one of which is
new, Pontosphsera borealis.

Plankton of Prester See, near Magdeburg. — H. Honigmann§
gives an account of the plankton of the Prester See, by Magdeburg, a
subject of which he has treated previously. || The plankton contains
Ohsetoceras, Acanthoceras, Oscillatoria, Genicularia, Tetraspora, Cltseto-
jieltis, Amphiprora, BaciUaria, etc. A bibliography of 264 papers is
appended.

Vegetation of Upper Rhine.T — R. Lauterborn gives an account of
the vegetation of the Upper Rhine, the biological conditions of the
Rhine stream, the plankton, the so-called Altrheine, which accompanies
the river from Basel to Oppenheim, the biological characteristics of the
Upper Rhine. He also makes observations on several species of the
region of the Upper Rhine and Lake Constance.

Plankton of Lago Maggiore.** — M. de Marchi publishes an intro-
duction to the biological study of the Yerbano or north end of Lago
Maggiore, in which he shows how much preparatory work has been
already done, and what lacunae remain in the study of Lago Maggiore.
He gives a systematic enumeration of the species, with the names of the
authorities for their existence in the Yerbano.

* Die Ceratien. Leipzig : Klinkhardt (1911) 124 pp. (10 pis.).

t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 386-402.

J Danrnark-Exped. til Groenlands Nordostkyst., 1906-8, iii. n. 11 (Kobenbavn,
1910).

§ Abh. Ber. Mus. Natur. Magdeburg, ii. (1910) pp. 1-39 (1 pi.). See also Nuov.
Notar., xxii. (1911) pp. 95-96.

|| Arcb. Hydrobiol. u. Planktonk., v. (1908) pp. 71-8 (2 pis. and figs.).

! Verb. Nat. Med. Verein Heidelberg, x. (1910) pp. 450-502 (figs.).
** Rendiconti R. 1st. Lombard., xliii. (1910) pp. 698-719. See also Nuov. Notar.,
xxii. (1911) p. 99.

790 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Marine Algology.* — A. Mazza continues his studies of marine
algology, and treats of the following genera : — Callithamnion, Seirospora,
Cmnptothamnion, Spongoclonium, Haloplegma, Euptilota, Ptilota, Plu-
maria, Dasyphila, Muellerena, Psilotkallia, Ballia, Antithamnion.

Marine Algae of Kamerun.t — R. Pilger gives an account of the
marine algae of Kamerun collected by C. Ledermann. The Localities
searched were Victoria, Kl. and Gr. Batanga, Elabi-Ilende, Kribi, Bodje,
Campo. The number of species recorded is forty-five, ten of which
are new. The author discusses the morphology of the species and their
distribution. The Cladophoraceae were determined by F. Brain I.

Fungi.

(By A. Lorbain Smith, F.L.S.)

Notes on Mucorini. i — Fernand Moreau gives an account of the
histology of some Mucorini, with special reference to the nucleus. The
latter he has studied under various aspects : in the resting stage it
consists of a nuclear membrane, nucleoplasm, a chromatic mass, and
a nucleolus which may be either central in position, excentric, or lying
against the internal wall of the nucleus. Karyokinesis in this group
was also studied by Moreau ; it is characterized by the presence of a
spindle, two centrosomes, two chromosomes, and by the absence of the
nucleolus and the nuclear membrane. The disappearing of the nucleolus
is peculiar to the Mucorini among fungi. The absence of the nuclear
membrane distinguishes them from the Ascomycetes and Siphomycetes.
Amitosis or direct division was also noted.

Notes on Hypocreaceae.§ — Rene Maire divides this family into the
genera Pyxidiophora, Peckiella, Hypomyces, and Nectriopsis g. n., the
latter intermediate between Hypomyces and Nectria. Maire insists on
attention being paid, in this group, to the form, septation, and orna-
mentation of the ascospore. In some genera an apiculus is always
present, in Nectriopsis it is always absent. It should also be stated, in
any description, whether the spores have been studied in water, in some
special medium, or dry. Figures are given of the spores.

Study of Laboulbeniales.|| — J. H. Faull describes the structure of
thallus and fructification in several species of Laboulbeniales. The
spores are uninucleate at first, then become bi-nucleate before maturity.
The entire plant-body is enclosed by a thin chitinous membrane ; the
walls of the cells are thick and laminated.

Antheridia are exogenous as in Zodiomyces, or endogenous as in
Lain id bmin ; usually they are borne on the same plant as the female
organs. Spermatia are formed as short lateral branches of the antheridia,
probably several in succession. The one nucleus almost fills the entire
cell. The procarp begins as a single uninucleate cell, an outgrowth

• Nuov. Notar., xxii. (1911) pp. 53-80, 109-39.

t Engler's Bot. Jahrb., xlvi. (1911) pp. 294-323 (26 figs.).

I Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 204-10.

§ Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 315-25 (1 pi.).

|| Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 650-4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 791

from the receptacle ; it develops into a structure consisting of carpo-
gonic cell, trichophoric cell, and trichogyne. The latter is mostly
unicellular, though in some cases branched and septate. The carpo-
gonium becomes binucleate, though the process was not seen, and the
trichogyne degenerates. Stages of ascus and spore-formation are also
described, with the relation to the host, etc.

Infection by Ergot Spores.* — R. Falck gives the results of his
studies on the subject of spore dispersal, especially in Glaviceps purpurea,
by the agency of air currents. Spore-ejaculation from the asci is aided
both by the form of the ascus and the uniform size of the spores. The
spores of Glaviceps are carried by the wind to the developing flower.
As the wind blows in a parallel plane to the earth, the spores are carried
along great distances at the same level.

Mildew of Cherries.f — Fr. Muth states that owing to the cold
summer of 1910, the fungus Sphserotheca pannosa spread widely on
cherry trees. The mildew, which is also found on apples, is described,
and remedial measures are suggested, such as pruning back the twigs
attacked in the early part of the year, burning all fallen wood, and
spraying with Bordeaux mixture. Sprinkling with sulphur as soon as
the disease appears is also recommended.

Sphaerotheca Castagnei Lev.f — 0. Winge has studied this fungus
about which there has been much controversy in regard to the occurrence
in it of fertilization. According to the results obtained by him, the
organs which are formed before the perithecium are sexual organs, which
are, however, entirely f unctionless. The antheridium has a great affinity
for the oogonium, and frequently the two organs are closely united, but
no fusion has ever been observed between them. He holds that the
male nucleus does not pass into the female cell, the latter developing
parthenogenetically. It is desirable to study further the behaviour of
the chromosomes.

Experimental Researches with Uredineae.§ — E. Mayor records the
results of various experimental cultures with teleutospores taken from
several species of Garex and infected on Ribes alptnum, R Grossularise,
etc. He was not quite decided whether he was dealing with one or
several species of Puccinia, nor whether the Uredine was the same as
those described by Klebahn. Mayor also made experiments with the
ascidiospores of Puccinia longissima on Endophyllum Sedi, and with those
of Grepis biennis, which he proved to be associated with the teleutospores
of Garex muricata. He describes very carefully the different spores
of the life-cycle of Puccinia Actseae-agropyri, and the experiments under-
taken to test the different stages of growth.

Jakob Eriksson || publishes a preliminary note on his investigations

* Zeitschr. Forst.-Jagdw., 1911, pp. 202-27 (4 figs.). See also Bot. Oentralbl.,
cxvii. (1911) pp. 195-6.

t Zeitschr. Wein-Obst-Gartenbau, vii. (1910) pp. 165-9 (3 figs.). See also Bot.
Oentralbl., cxvii. (1911) p. 224.

t Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 211-19 (2 pis.).

§ Ann.Mvcol., ix. (1911) pp. 311-62 (tigs.).

U Centralbl. Bakt., xxxi. (1911) pp. 93 5.

792 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of i lie rust Puccinia malvacearum, of which the principal host is Althea
rosea, and after that Malva sylvestris. It has been found also on a large
scries of malvaceous plants. Eriksson considers that the disease is Bpread
liy means of diseased seeds, or by seedlings grown upon such seeds. He
refers the disease to the existence, in the first place, of a mycoplasm in
t he seed, and he describes the process of growth from the plasma condition
to the mycelium. He describes also the further infection of other plants.
P. Dietel * publishes the results of infection experiments with three
Uredineae, of which the Cseoma generation is found on Larix europsea,
and of which the spores all germinate at low temperatures. They differ
iy other respects very widely : in the time required from germination
until the production of the promycelium, and also in the influence
exerted on the spores by a long drying process. The species studied
were Melampsora Larici-caprearum, M. Tremulse, and Melampsoridium
Betulinum.

Dissemination of Puccinia graminis.f — Experimental investigations
have been made by F. J. Pritchard to explain the dissemination of
Puccinia graminis. He gives an historical sketch of the subject, and
explains the methods adopted for the purpose of studying this question.
He then sums up as follows : — 1. P. graminis passed readily from wheat,
Agropyron tenerum, A. repens, Hordeum jubatum, andElgmus triticoitlr*
to the barberry. 2. Observed facts seem to oppose the theory that
ascidiospores and uredospores are carried considerable distances by wind.
3. Uredo pustules of Puccinia graminis appeared on winter wheat at the
same time as on grasses near the barberry bushes, and earlier (with one
exception) than on grasses remote from the barberry. 4. P. graminis
did not appear to spread to wheat by aid of the grasses. There are three
distinct biological forms. 5. Uredospores of P. graminis failed to sur-
vive the winter 1904-5 at Fargo, North Dakota. G. The wintering of
P. graminis as mycelium in plant tissues in North Dakota is very doubt-
ful. 7. The pericarp of rusted wheat is frequently filled with rust
mycelium and numerous pustules of teleutospores. 8. Teleutospores in
some of the germinating grains appeared to be germinating in a Palmella-
like stage. 9. Pieces of mycelium resembling rust were found in the
cells of the scutellum close to the growing plant.

Sexuality of Uredineae.f — L. Kurssanow reviews this question in the
light of the work done on the subject by Blackman, Christman, and
Olive, and he then proceeds to give his own observations. The material
of Puccinia Peckiana Howe, with which he worked, was collected near
Moscow, and he describes carefully the sections cut through all the dif-
ferent stages of development, and gives the results of his research. He
finds in this species a conjugation of two entirely similar gametes. Olive
had described the conjugating cells in the species examined by him as
being always a large cell with a small one. Kurssanow thinks that the
difference of the species may account for the variations recorded, and he
also suggests that the passing over of the nucleus may be a pathological

* Centralbl. Bakt., xxxi. (1911) pp. 95-106.
t Bot. Gaz., lii. (1911) pp. 169-92 (1 pi.).
X Zeitschr. Bot., ii. (1910) pp. 81-93 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 793

phenomenon. He found, also, that sterile cells were formed by each row
in the secidium, and there could be no consideration of a trichogyne
formation. He does not think there is any comparison here with fer-
tilization in the Floridese. Occasionally there are no sterile cells formed,
and in any case they could only be looked on as " buffer " cells.

New Smut in a New Genus of Grass.* — The new grass is Sarga
stipoidea Ewart and White, one of the group of Agrostidere ; the
fundus Ustilago Etvartii McAlp. 1). McAlpine recalls the statement
made recently by himself that — '•' In West Australia only those species (of
smut) are known which attack cultivated crops, and those occurring on
the native flora have yet to be discovered." The present new species is
therefore the first of its kind ; it approaches U. Tepperi Ludw., but differs
from that species in several characters.

Bunt-spores in Meal, Bran, and Grain.t, — G. Bredeman has esti-
mated the percentage of Tilletia spores in these substances. He gives an
account of the manner in which the counting is done and the results
obtained.

Studies of Hyphomycetes.J — P. Vuillemin defines more exactly the
genus Monilia. The chains of spores in this genus are formed by the
transformation of the cells of the hypha into globular spores. Some
species included in this genus by various authors have been placed in
Scopulariopsis owing to the different manner of conidial formation.
Descriptions are given of Acmosporium and Gatenularia, which are com-
pared with Monilia.

A. Sartory and G. Bainier § publish a note on a species oiPenicilliiim
which grows as a yellow form on potato, carrot, etc., but when trans-
ferred to pepton media, such as soup or gelatin, becomes emerald-
green. They compare this change of colour with that noted in certain
bacteria that take a blue coloration in pepton cultures.

The same authors || have published a note on the differential cha-
racters of PeniciUium, Aspergillus, and Citromyces, with special re-
ference to the last-named, which possesses the property of transforming
glucose into citric acid. They consider Citromyces morphologically con-
nected with both genera, resembling PeniciUium when young and
Aspergillus when mature.

J. Boselllf made cultures of Aspergillus niger mould on artificial
solutions in order to test various growth-phenomena. He found that
the secretion of inulase was remarkably constant in all the solutions, and
that it diffused easily in the cultures. The optimum of acidity varies
with the temperature, being more feeble with a rise of temperature.
Other results were obtained and are recorded.

* Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxvi. (1911) pp. 45-6 (1 pi.).
t Landw. Versucb., lxxv. (1911) p. 135. See also Bot. Ceutralbl., cxvii. (1911)
pp. 142-3.

% Bull Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 137-52 (figs.).

§ C.R. Soc. Biol., lxxi. (1911) p. 229-30.

|| C.R. Soc. Biol., lxx. (1911) pp. 873-5.

% Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxv. (1911) pp. G94-701.

794 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Contribution to the Study of Fumagines.* — G. Arnaud has just
published the second part of his study on these leaf-fungi. He considers
that the Capnodiaceae should be broken up and the species assigned to the
Sphasriaceae. He gives descriptions of species and the reason for their
transference.

Cultures of Mixed Fungi.f — R. Harder has studied the effect on
pure cultures of fungi of adding other fungi to the substratum on which
they were growing. The influence was in many cases very marked : in
some cases it hastened the growth of both organisms, in others it checked
development (PenicilUum glaucum and Botrytis cinerea). When one or
the other gained the upper hand, the growth was more vigorous than
that of the pure cultures. It was found that the fungi differed greatly
in their sensitiveness to chemical and physical attraction, and also that
Hyphomycetes originated more active products of metabolism than the
Basidiornycetes. Other results were obtained and duly recorded.

Notes on the Larger Fungi.J — P. Baccarini records the growth of
Dsedaha unkolor on Acer rubrum. The fungus is usually regarded as
a parasite, but in this instance it grew on a living tree and gradually
destroyed it. Baccarini describes the effect of the fungoid growth on
the woody tissues, and suggests that it may have gained entrance by a
wound, and then lived on and so destroyed the wood of the tree.

Bresadola § publishes a series of notes on species of Gorticium,
Odontia, Peniophora, etc. He insists that Boletus fulvus Scop, is the
same fungus as Polyporus pomaceus Pers , and that the former specific
name should be retained. He describes a new genus, Jaapia, a member
of the Corticeas, with straw-coloured appendiculate spores.

Development of Basidia.|] — HansKnief made cultures of A rmillaria
mellea and found that basidia arose from uninucleate hyphte, either ter-
minally or as side branches without any formation of pileus or gills.
These basidia can be recognized by their clavate form, rich contents, and
larger nucleus. The nucleus divides twice mitotically, and the different
division stages are described in detail. The resulting four nuclei each
have a small nucleolus. From the basidium, the sterigmata bud out to
form spores at the top into which a nucleus passes. The spore-* are
absolutely normal and similar to spores formed on the gills of the pileus.
Knief has compared the nuclear divisions throughout with those of the
pileus basidia, the nucleus of the latter differing in having arisen from
the copulation of two spores. He finds that the process is the same in
lioth cases. He discusses fully the significance of this.

Spore-formation in Nidularia. If — Rob. Fries has followed the
various stages of nuclear division and finally of spore-formation in

* Ann. Ecole Nat. Agric. Montpelier, ser. 2, x. (1911) pp. 211-30 (29 figs.). See
also Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) p. 435.

t Nat. Zeitschr. Land.-Forstw., ix. (1911) 34 pp. (2 pis.). See also Ami. Mycol.,
ix. (1911) p. 443.

X Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital., 1911, pp. 100-4.

§ Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 425-8.

II Zeitschr. Bot., iii. (1911) pp. 529-33 (2 pis.).

1 Zeitschr. Bot., iii. (1911) pp. 145-65 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 795

Nidularia piriformis. He describes the developments of the fruiting
body with its peridiola. He found two nuclei in all tbe cells of the
hypnse, fusion taking place in the young basidium, the fused nucleus
being very much larger. He describes the subsequent nuclear divisions
resulting in the formation of four daughter-nuclei which pass up into
the newly formed spores, and there each one divides again so that the
spore is always bi-nucleate. It is noteworthy that the nucleus had
already begun to divide before it passed through the narrow sterignia
into the spore. Comparison is made with nuclear divisions and spore-
formation in other fungi.

Mycological Notes.* — In a series of letters, C. G. Lloyd has pub-
lished lists of specimens sent to him from many localities. He also gives
an account of his work on the Polyporoid types of Leveille at Leiden,
and of the Junghuhn types in the same museum. He found there
coloured drawings of many tropical Javanese fungi, which were meant
for publication but never made use of.

Fungus parasitic on Citrus White Fly.f -The fungus, as described
by H. S. Fawcett, forms on the under side of an orange leaf in larvae of
the white fly a chocolate-brown stroma, and was originally called by
Webber the "brown fungus." It has been recently indentified as a
form of sEgerita, the sporodochia developing on the brown stromata.
Larva? were successfully infected by the fungus.

Leaf-spots of Currant.! — Ernst Voges has made inoculation
cultures of a Mycosphserella sp., the fungus of currant leaves, and has
obtained the pyenidial form Phyllosticta. The latter was identical with
P. Grossularise on gooseberry leaves, and with P. ruborum and P. rubicola
on raspberry leaves. The leaf-spots formed varied considerably in
appearance and their diagnostic value was very small. It was also
observed that several parasitic species attacked the same leaf, the weak-
ness induced by one parasite having encouraged the development of others.

Physiology and Pathology of Hevea brasiliensis.§ — T. Petch has
published a handbook for the use of planters on the management of
Hevea, the principal rubber tree. The latter part of the book deals with
the diseases to which it is subject. In Chapter IX. are described the
leaf-diseases due to the fungi Helminthosporium Hevese and Glceosporium
Hevese, both of them discovered and described by the author. Root
diseases are discussed in Chapter X., Hymenorhsetse noxia being the
commonest, though Forties senitostus is the most deadly. The fruit and
stem suffer from Phytophthora Faberi. Pink disease of stem is due to
CorUcium salmonicolor and die back to Botryodiplodiu Theobromse.
Moulds grow on prepared rubber, but as they do Dot attack the caout-
chouc they are harmless. Other fungi are recorded and described that
are probably saprophytic.

* Letters, 27-29 (1910) ; 30-7 (1911).

t Science, n.s. xxxi. (1910) pp. 912-13.

% Centralbl. Bakt., xxx. (1911) pp. 573-9 (5 figs.).

§ London : Dulau and Co., Sobo Square (1911) 2G8 pp. (16 pis., 1 col.).

796 SUMMAEY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Diseases of Plants. — 0, W. Edgerton * notes two new diseases of
Ficus Garica. One which induces canker of the branches is due to
Tubercularia Fin sp.n. The other is caused by Corticium Isetum ; it
attacks the ends of the branches, and spreads backwards.

Edw. C, .Tohnsonj examined the wheat crop of the south-west States
of North America to find the reason of the reduced yield. He found
that two fungi had attacked the cereal, Stemphylium Tritici and Puccinia
gram in is.

W '. McEae + has published a report on the blister blight of tea caused
bv the fungus Exobasidium vexans. The leaves attacked are often
covered with the white blisters, and are rendered valueless ; often the
whole bush suffers. Only young leaves are attacked; these should be
plucked and destroyed.

Flora Patterson, W. Charles, K. Vera, and F. J. Veihmeyer,§ pub-
lish an account of some fungous diseases of economic importance.
Kawakamia Gyperi Miyake, a near ally of Phytophthora, was introduced
from Japan. It grew on Gyperus tegetiformis. A case of witches'-
brooms on Phyllostachys was due to an ascomycetous fungus, with
perithecia on a sclerotium and Cladosporium-like conidia. The authors
consider they are dealing with a new genus, Loculistroma. A species of
Gloinerella was found on Cyclamens, and on pine-apples Thielaviopsis
paradoxa. They treated the fruit with formaldehyde to protect it
against infection.

A leaflet || has been issued dealing with Sclerotinia disease of the
Gooseberry. The bush may be attacked on the stem, branches, leaf, or
berry ; death follows a severe attack. The disease shows itself by
minute tufts of grey-looking Bolrytis fructifications, or by the presence
of sclerotia. All dead or dying bushes should be burnt. Spraying has
also been proved to be effective.

Fr. Bubak 1f describes a new disease of Mulberry. Dead branches of
the tree had been found to be the substratum of a number of microscopic
fungi, among others of a species of Thyrococcum, and, associated with the
latter, perithecial bodies, which he has placed in a new genus, Dothiorelliini.

G. Kock** publishes observations made on the growth of Monilia
and of Sphserella senfina (white-spot) on fruit-trees. In the case of both
fungi certain varieties of pear were susceptible to the fungi, others were
entirely free. The author thinks it possible that the results obtained
may be true for one locality only.

R. Laubertft discusses the nomenclature and life-history of a
parasite of apple-trees. There is a Phoma-Wke perithecium, but the

* Phytopathology, i. (1911) pp. 12-17 (1 fig. and 1 pi.). See also Ann. Mycol.,
ix. (1911) p. 306.

t Phytopathology, i. (1911) pp. 18-27. See also Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) p. 307.

% Agric. Research Inst. Pusa, Bull. No. 18 (1910). See also Ann. Mycol., ix.
(1911) p 307.

§ U.S. Dep. Agric. Bur. Plant Ind., Bull. No. 171(1910). See also Ann. Mycol.,
ix. (1011) pp. 308-9.

Board Agric. Fish., Leaflet No. 318 (8 pis. and 5 figs.).

i Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxix. (1911) pp. 70-4 (3 figs.).

** Zeitschr. Landw. Ver. Oesterr., xiv. (1911) p. 209. See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxvi. (1911) pp. G22-3.

tt Gartenflora, lx. (1911) pp. 76-8. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvi. (1911) p. 623.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 797

spores are borne directly on a plectenchyina lining the walls, and not on
sporopbores. It belongs to the genus Sclerophoma v. Holm.

Ed. Essed* gives a long account of the Panama Disease which
broke out in banana plantations about five years ago. The trees were
•attacked when about five or six years old ; at ten years they were quite
worthless. He traces the disease to a fungus, which he has described
as it occurs on the trees and in cultures. He finds that it is a new
plant, Ustilaginoidella musseperda g. etsp. n. He found, produced on
the hyphae, structures which he calls pegmatia, which break up into
chlamydos pores.

He also describes f the " Surinam Disease," a condition of
elephantiasis of the banana caused by a species of the same genus,
U. mdipigera. It manifests itself by an enormous distension of the base
of the stem. Both forms produced hypha? and conidiophores with
Fusarium-Yike spores.

A. v. Jaczewski J has written an account of the plant-diseases in
Russia during 1909. In that year disease was rife in North and Central
Russia, while the south was practically free. Much damage was done to
cereals by Puccinia triticina, by Erysiphe graminis (recorded for the
first time in Russia in 1904), by ergot, and other minute fungi. Phy-
tophthora infestans and Gercospora concors did most damage to potatoes ;
Uromyces Pisi was found on peas, and Gercospora beticola, Phoma Betse,
and Uromyces Betse on beet. Hops were attacked not only by the
mildew, but by a new disease due to Septoria humulina, which damages
the leaves. Fruit trees suffered from Fusicladium (apples and pears).
It was found that Monilia fructigena had been almost entirely cleared
out by spraying, but Sphmrotheca M ali on apples was abundant. Exoascus
bullatus appeared on leaves of the pear, and stone fruits suffered badly
from Glasterosporium Amygdalinum and Monilia cinerea. Exoascus defor-
mans was unfortunately very prevalent in some districts. The American
mildew of gooseberries was recorded from many districts in previous
years, but during 1909 the epidemic had somewhat abated ; advice is
given how to deal with it. On strawberry leaves Sphxrella Fragarise
made its usual appearance, and in addition a new spot disease, Marssonia
Potentillse. Vines suffered from Sclerotinia Fuckeliana and Septoria
ampelina, the latter known as Melanose in America. Other fungi are
recorded on forest trees and on garden shrubs and other plants, two
fungi being recorded on tea plants, Colletotrichum Gamelise and Discosia
These. Palms were often attacked by Graphiola Phamicis.

D. Hegyi§ finds that the black stalk of beetroot is due to the
presence in the tissues of Phoma tabifica, Pythium de Baryanum, and
different bacteria, which may have been present in the seed before sow-
ing, or which may have attacked the plant from the soil. He found that
the best method of combating the evil was to drv the seed thoroughly.
The seeds then germinated more quickly, and produced stronger and more
resistant seedlings.

-■

* Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 313-61 (2 pis.).
t Ann. of Bot., xxv. (1911) pp. 363-5 (1 pi.).

% Jahrb. Bur. Myk. Phyt., 1909. See also Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr , xxi. (1911)
pp. 231-7. § Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 153-9.

Bee. 20th, 1911 3 I?

7«.»8 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

A. Stift* has made an exhaustive study of the literature connected
with the various diseases of beet and potato, both insect, and fungoid,
with special reference to the best means of combating these diseases.

('. E. Lewis t has made a study of apple-tree diseases by means of
cultural experiments. He finds that Coryneum foliicolum and Phoma
Mali cause disease of the wood of young apple-trees and of the branches
of older trees. These fungi are more actively parasitic than Coniothyrium
pirina. As wound-parasites, they attack young trees, where they do as
much damage as Sphseropsis malorum. Coryneum causes trouble only in
ripe apples • Phoma is more virulent, and can also attack green fruit.
Neither of the fungi attack uninjured leaves, but they may occur on the
dead spots of apple-leaves. The spread of the organisms can be checked
by burning the dead wood on which they occur.

W. J. Morse and C. E. Lewis % have also investigated the diseases of
the apple in Maine : diseases of foliage, fruit, and wood, due to various
fungi, have been examined microscopically and by cultural methods.
The best methods of treating them are recommended and carefully
explained.

At the Florida Agricultural Experiment Station § H. S. Fawcett has
specially studied diseases of peach trees. He records a stem rot of Citrus
trees due to a fungus not yet determined, and describes the condition of
Citrus trees afflicted with scaly bark. A silvered scurf on Citrus fruit
is also due to a fungus not yet identified. The fungi of scale insects
are also discussed.

In a later communication Fawcett || takes up again the question of
scaly bark, which he finds to be due to Cladosporium herbarum var.
citricolum. He made many experiments, cultural and others, especially
for the purpose of checking the disease. He finds that the disease will
yield to Bordeaux mixture, and that pruning out the dead wood lessens
subsequent infection. A bibliography of papers on the subject of
Cladosporium herbarum is appended to the paper.

R. Scbanderf has published an account of plant and animal
diseases in Posen and West Prussia. The potatoes suffered badly from
leaf-roll and from diseases due to bacteria. Advice is given to fruit
growers how to deal with Fusicladium, a fungus which attacks apples
and pears.

Pathogenic Fungi.** — A. Sartory has demonstrated in several in-
stances the occurrence of Oospora causing more or less of disease in the
human organism. One species, 0. buccaJis, was found in the mouth of
the patient. The fungus was cultivated and details are given. In other
cases not only Oospora but also Endomyces was discovered ; the two
parasites being intimately associated.

* Centralbl. Bakt.,xxx. (1911) pp. 579-613.

t Marine Agric. Exper. Stat., Bull. No. 170 (1909) pp. 185-200 (13 pis.).
I Marine Agric. Exper. Stat., Bull. No. 185 (1910) pp. 337-92 (15 pis.).
§ Rep. Florida Exper. Stat. (1910) lxv. pp. (20 figs.).

|| Univ. Florida Agric. Exper. Stat., Bull. No. 106 (1911) 41 pp. (31 figs.).
i Mitt. k. Wilhelms Inst. Landw. Bromberg, ii. (1910) pp. 1-141 (1 pi. and figs.).
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvii. (1911) pp. 224-5.

•* Bull. Soc.Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 160-71 (11 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 799

Fish Disease.* — M. Plehn and K. Mulson have studied a disease
that is fatal to trout, etc. It was previously known and was considered
to be a sporozoon. The authors made cultures of the organism, which
they have named Ichthyophonus Hoferi, and they are inclined to classify
it as a fungus and as a genus of Chytridiueae. Descriptions of the
cultures and figures of the fungus are published.

Obituary Notice. f — Maurice Barbier has published a short sketch of
Dr. F. H. Gillot. He was a devoted physician, and, in addition, a keen
naturalist. He was especially interested in the toxic qualities of the
larger fungi, and constantly published notes on cases of poisoning due to
eating fungi, with researches on the harmful species. A long list of his
publications is given.

Arthur, J. C. — New Species of Uredineae. VIII.

[Six new species of Puccinia and five of Uromyces are described.]

Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxviii. (] 911) pp. 369-78.

Barbier, Maurice — Observations taxonomiques et especes rares ou nouvelle-
ment reconnues en Bourgogne. (Taxonomic observations and rare or newly
discovered species in Burgundy.)

[A large number of species have been found and commented on.]

Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 172-91.
Boudier & Torrend — Discomycetes nouveaux de Portugal. (New Discomy-
cetes from Portugal.)

[A number of new species described and figured ; one new genus, Torren-
diella.'] Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 127-36 (3 col. pis.).
Bourdot, H., & A. Galzin — Hymenomycetes de France. III. Corticies : Cor-
ticium, Epithele, Asterostromella.

[Synoptic tables of genera and species, with diagnoses.]

Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 223-66.

Buchholtz, Feodor— Ueber die Befruchtung von Endogone lactiflua. (Ferti-
lization in Endogone.)

[A short preliminary note on the subject.]

Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 329-30.

Castellarnau, Joaquin M., L. Navarro, & L. H. Robredo — La
enfermedad del Castano. (Disease of chestnut-trees.)

Memoria. Madrid : (1909) 51 pp. (10 pis.).

Dangeard, P. A.— Un nouveau genre de Chytridiacees. (A new genus of Chy-
tridiacese.)

[The new fungus Mitochytridium ramosum inhabits the cells of the Desmid
Docidium Ehrenbergii.~]

Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 200-3 (1 fig.).

Grove, W. B.— Four little-known British Fungi.

[The author proposes a new genus. Bhopalocystis, for the dark-coloured

species of Aspergillus.'] Journ. Econ. Biol, vi. 2 (1911) pp. 38-49 (2 pis.).

Gueguen, Fern and — Au sujet d'une publication recente de Linford Freeman

sur le Xylaria Hyphoxylon. (Concerning Freeman's publication ou Xylaria

Hypoxylon.)

[Gueguen claims that most of the work had been previouslv published by
him]. Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 326-8.

Hohnel, F. von, & Josef Wef.se— Zur Synonymie der Nectriaceen. (On
the synonymy of the Nectriacese.)

[A large number of species are found to be synonymous with others pre-
viously described. {Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 422-4.

* Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt., lix. (1911) pp. 63-8 (1 pi, and 6 figs.),
t Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 192-9.

3 f 2

800 SUMMARY or CURRENT KESEARCHES KELATING To

Jaap. Otto— Fungi selecti exsiccate. Nos. 301-400.

I.i^ts of the plants, with notes and descriptions.

Verh. Bot. Ver. Bramdenb., 1910(1911) pp. 3-21.

Verzeichniz der bei Triglitz in der Prignitz beobachteten Ascomy-
ceten. (List of Ascomycetes observed at Treglitz, in Pregnitz.)
\ large number of species are listed, with various notes.]

Verh. Bot. Ver. Bramdenb., 1910 (1911) pp. 109-50.

„ Ein kleiner Beitrag zur Pilzflora der Vogesen. (A small contribu-
tion to the fungus-Hora of the Vogesen.)

[A large number of species, mostly of micro-fungi, are listed.)

Ann. Mycol., ix. (1911) pp. 330-40.

Magnus, P. — Ein neues Melanotoenium aus Thiiringen. (A new Melanotxnium
from Thuringia.)

[The parasite occurred on Tcucrium montanum.]

Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., xxix. (1911) pp. 456-8.

Migtjla, W.— Krypt.-Flora, Pilze.

[Several important genera of gilled fungi (Cantharellus, Coprinus, etc.) are
described.]

Flora von Deutschland (Gera, 1911) Lief. 115-22, pp. 273-400 (40 pis.).

Rehm, H.— Ascomycetes Novi. IV. (New Ascomycetes.)

[Fungi collected in North America, in South America, and in Asia.]

Ann. Mycol, , ix. (1911) pp. 363-71

Seavee, F. J.— The Hypocreales of North America. IV. Cordycepiteae.
["Three genera are dealt with, Cordyceps, Spermoedia, Balansia.]

Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 207-30.

Sureya, M. Mehmed— Sur quelques Champignons inferieurs nouveaux ou pen
connus. (On some new or little known fungi.).
[Two new species of rnicrofungi are described.]

Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 220-2 (3 figs.).

Sydow, H. &. P., & E. J. Butler- Fungi Indiae Orientalis. (Fungi of East
India.)

[A large number of species, mostly of rnicrofungi, are described, many of

them new to science : there is one new genus, Metachora, near to

Phyllachora.] Ann. Mycol, ix. (1911) pp. 272-421 (9 figs.).

Trotter, A. — Aggiunte alia Micrologia italica. (Additions to Italian mycology

[Several species of rnicrofungi are recorded, with notes.]

Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital, 1911, pp. 134-7.

Wheldok, H. J. — Key to the British Agaricaceae.

[Continuation of this key arranged for field workers.]

Lane. Naturalist, iv. (1911) pp. 63-5.

Lichens.

(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

West of Ireland Lichens.* — The Clare Island Survey Committee are
reporting on the Flora and Fauna of Clare Island and of the mainland
df West Ireland from Achill in the north to Killary Harbour in the
smith. The Lichens of the district have been worked out by A. Lorrain
Smith. A sketch of the districts from the lichenological standpoint is
given, with notes on collectors previous to the present survey. A general
view of the lichens to be found in the district, with the habitat of the
chief forms, is followed by a list of genera and species with locality and
habitat.

* Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., xxxi. (1911) 14 pp.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 801

Lichens of Italy.* — J. Steiner publishes the lists of lichens collected
by J. Brunnthaler and 0. Porsch in Italy. He adds notes on the de-
velopment of the limestone Verrucariae and of the value of the oil-hyplne
as aids to diagnosis. He gives also a suggested grouping of Lecanora
subfusca.

Morphology of Lichens.f — B. Kajanus publishes a series of observa-
tions on lichen vegetation as affected by the substratum, the proximity
to towns, etc. On decaying wood several species were found with
irregular thalli. Species are recorded from pebbles on the beach and
from glaciers. Variation of the thallus is noted in several genera and
species, notably in Ramalina calicaris. Notes are given on soredial
formation, etc., and on the dwarfing of species.

Nature and Classification of Lichens.^: — Bruce Fink has canvassed
a considerable number of botanists as to their views on the classification
of lichens, and he now publishes tabulated results of the replies he has
received. Quotations are given from a number of the letters.

Hebee, W. C. T. — The Gyrophoraceae of California.

[Descriptions of species of Gyrophora and Umbilicaria]

Gontr. U.S. Nat. Herb., xiii. (1911) pp. 313-21 (6 pis.).

Howe, R. Heber — A Correction.

[Pointing out a wrong record, with a description of Ephebc solida from
Mount Monadnock.]

Bryologist, xiv. (1911) pp. 91-2.

Olivier, H. — ]£tude synoptique et geographique des Lecides de la Flore d'Europe.

(Synoptic and geographical study of European Lecideae.)

Bull. Geogr. Bot., xxi. (1911) pp. 157-209.

Savicz, V. P. — Interessante und neue Arten und Formen der Flechten im Gouv.
Novgorod 1910 gesammelt.

[New and interesting species and forms of lichens collected in Novgorod.]

Bull. Jard. Bot. St. Petersbourg, xi. (1911) 2, pp. 50-5 (fig.).
See also Bot. Centralbl., cxvii. (1911) p. 247.

Mycetozoa.

(By A. Lorrain Smith.)

Myxomycetes from the Neighbourhood of Paris. § — R. Ledoux-
Lebard states that the study of Myxomycetes has been somewhat
neglected in France. He gives an historical account of the species noted
from Bulliard onwards. He remarks on the number of species known
and their geographical distribution. He then discusses their poly-
morphism and the questions of nomenclature, and proceeds to a full
description of the species found by him, sixteen of which are enumerated
belonging to the genera Geratiomyxa, Badhanua, and Physarum. The
list is to be continued.

* Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien, lxi. (1911) pp. 29-64. See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxvii. (1911) pp. 169-70.

t Ark. Bot., x. n. 4, 47 pp. (2 pis.). See also Hedwigia, li. (1911) pp. 27-28.

j Mycologia, iii. (1911) pp. 231-69.

§ Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxvii. (1911) pp. 275-302.

802 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Notes on Myxomycetes.*— ('. J. Lloyd reports an instance of a fly
forming a nest in Enteridium rozeanum Lister. He also publishes ;i list
of Myxomycetes collected by him in Samoa, and determined by Macbride.
Be remarks on the wide distribution of species as exemplified in this
collection. Though the island is so far distant not one of the species is
new.

Schizophyta.
Schizomycetes.

Bacterial Diseases of Orchids.f — G. L. Pavarino describes a bac-
terium which he found in the leaves of Cattleya warneri and C. fiarri-
sonise. This organism, Bacterium cattleyse, varies in size and shape
according to the age of the culture. It is aerobic, Gram-negative,
but stains well, especially with gentian-violet. It forms spores. It was
cultivated in broth and on agar and gelatin. Healthy plants when in-
oculated with pure cultures showed appearances similar to those in the
naturally acquired disease.

From Odontoglossum citrosomum was isolated Bacillus pollacii, which
was the cause of black spots. It is from 8-10 fx long and 1 /j. broad. It
forms spores ; is easily stained, but is decolorized by Gram's method. It
is aerobic, and grows well in broth and on gelatin and agar. Experi-
ments with pure cultures seemed to show that the organism gains
entrance through a damaged cuticle.

Bacterium krameriani produces disease of the leaves and pseudo-
bulbs of Oncidium Tcramerianum. The organism is a rodlet 2-3 //. long
and 0 ' 6-0*8 fi broad. It has no special disposition, but is found
mostly singly or in pairs. It forms spores ; is easily stained, but is Gram-
negative. It is cultivable on agar and gelatin and in broth ; some of
the media present a greenish-yellow hue. Appearances similar to the
natural disease were produced by hypodermic inoculation of healthy
leaves.

Bacillus farnetianus was obtained from diseased specimens of On-
cidium ornithorincum and Cattleya crispa. This organism may attain a
length of 15 /a and is from 0 ■ 8-1 /a broad : it may form quite long fila-
ments. It is an imperfect Gram-stainer. It was cultivated on agar and
gelatin and in broth. Inoculations of healthy plants were successful.

.-

Bacillus Cypripedii.J — S. Hori describes a new species of bacterium
which causes "brown rot," a disease chiefly affecting the leaves of
tropical orchids. Bacillus Gyprvpedii is a slender bacillus with rounded
ends, occurring singly or in short chains. It is 1*5-2 p. long and
0-5-0-7 fi broad. It is motile, having four peritrichous flagella 10/x
long. It stains by Gram's method. It does not form spores. On agar
the colonies are white, and on potato of a dirty cream colour; forms a
scum on broth ; liquefies gelatin ; coagulates milk ; forms much gas on
glucose media. It rapidly decolorizes methylen-blue broth. It is a

* Cincinnati, Ohio, No. 37 (1911) p. 506 (2 figs.).

t Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xx. (1911) pp. 233-7.

I Centralbl. Bakt. 2^ Abt., xxxi. (1911) pp. 85-92 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 803

potential anaerobe. Is pathogenic to tropical orchids, entering chiefly
through wounds. Careful washing with 1 : 1000 sublimate effects a cure.
The author discusses its relations to other bacteria, and concludes that it
is a new species.

Bacterium tumefaciens.* — E. F. Smith directs attention to the
resemblances between " crown-gall," an affection of plants, and ma-
lignant animal tumors, especially sarcoma. It is inoculable on healthy
plants, reproducing the disease. In the tumors, both primary and those
obtained by artificial inoculation, a bacterial organism, Bacterium tume-
faciens, is present. This can be isolated and cultivated, and the pure
cultures reproduce the disease on inoculation.

Bacterium briosianum.f — G. L. Pavarino describes a new organism,
which attacks Vanilla planifolia. Morphologically it is a very small
rodlet ; it stains well, but not by Gram's method. It grows well on the
usual media ; it liquefies gelatin, and forms a scum on broth ; a deposit
is formed later, the liquid turning green.

Anaerobic Streptothrix.J — Kurt Meyer isolated from empyema pus
a Gram-positive Streptotltrix. It was very selective as to diet and en-
vironment, being cultivable only under anaerobic conditions, and on
media which contained grape-sugar and ascitic fluid.

Penetration of the Normal Skin by Tubercle Bacilli. § — H.
Koenigsfeld records observations and experiments which seem to show
that tubercle bacilli can enter the body through the cutaneous surface by
way of the hair follicles and lymph spaces. The infection became more
or less generalized, though the site of inoculation (effected by rubbing
after shaving, epilation, or cutting off the hairs) showed no local change.
Previous experiments by other observers are freely recorded, and a
copious bibliography is appended.

Artificial Production of a permanently atypical Bacillus coli.||
C. Revis found a strain of Bacillus coli which, when cultivated in the
presence of malachite-green, grew quite strongly. After fifteen sub-
cultivations this strain was found to have undergone marked change in
its physiological properties : its power to produce gas being almost com-
pletely lost, while acid only was produced in identically the same media
as originally. As shown by other tests, this organism had suffered no
loss of vitality.

Parasite of Rabies and Plasmodiophora brassicse.^f — G. Polacci
records some observations which indicate the morphological and bio-
logical affinity of Plasmodiophora brassicse and Negri's bodies. There
are, however, no allusions to experiments made on animals with the
Plasmodiophora.

* Bureau Plant Industry U.S.A.. Dept. Agric, Circ. No. 85 (1911). See also
Nature, lxxxvii. (1911) p. 371.

t Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xx. (1911) pp. 161-2.

\ Centralbl. Bakt., 1^ Abt. Ori^., lx. (1911) pp. 75-8 (2 figs.).

§ Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lx. (1911) pp. 28-68 (3 figs.).

il Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xxxi. (1911) pp. 1-4.

1 Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xx. (1911) pp. 218-22.

Sill SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Foot-and-mouth Disease.* — L. v. Betegh describes very minute
corpuscles which he has obtained from vesicles, uncontaminated by
bacteria, of foot-and-mouth disease. They are found in the serum and

in the nuclei of the neutrophil leucocytes. They vary from 0-^5-1 /*,
and consist of a central stainable portion and a non-staining peripheral
investment. He considers these corpuscles to be the specific cause of the

disease.

Diplococcus gadidarum, the cause of the Reddening of Cod and
other allied Fish.f — T. D. Beckwith describes an organism which
he thinks causes the pinking of cod and allied fish, during the
various stages of preparation for market purposes. This bacterium,
named Diplococcus gadidarum, is from 0 ■ 4>0 • 5 //. in diameter, but after
prolonged cultivation may attain to 1 fx. Somewhat like Gonococcus in
shape, it is easily distinguished therefrom by its easy cultivabiiity, and
by being Gram-positive. It forms a salmon-coloured pigment, and is
strictly aerobic. It is remarkably halophilic, growing luxuriantly when
5 to 10 p.c. of salt is added to the medium. Sterilized fish inoculated
with pure cultures of D. gadidarum turned pink.

Bacillus coli and Plant-diseases. $ — In an article entitled, "Is
Bacillus coli a Plant Parasite ? " J. R. Johnston records observations and
experiments which tend to show that B. coli gives rise to disease in
plants. An organism morphologically and culturally identical with B. coli
was isolated from cocoa-nut trees affected with bud-rot. B. coli of
animal origin, when inoculated on healthy plants, produced similar
results. Hence this organism would appear to have greater pathological
importance than has hitherto been suspected.

Bacillus pappulus. — F. de Gaspari isolated this anaerobic organism
from decomposing sausages. In young cultures the organism is about
the same size as B. perfringens, 4-9 /x, but after a week or more it
becomes longer and thinner. It is easily stained, but not by Gram's
method nor by iodine. It is an essential anaerobe, forms spores, produce i
"gas and acid, the cultures exhaling an odour like that of rancid butter.
On solid media the cultures have some resemblance to those of anthrax.
It attacks albumen freely, ferments sugars, ccagulates milk, forms indol,
but is not pathogenic to laboratory animals. The place of this organism
lies between the bacillus of Ghon and Sachs and B. radiiformis of Risl
and Guillemot.

Scarlet-fever Virus. § — Bernhardt gives an account of his experi-
ments on the transmission of scarlet fever to monkeys. Scrapings from
the tongue of a patient suffering from this disease were rubbed into an
abraded area of mucous membrane in the mouth of a monkey. Four
days later, when the animal was dying of general septicemia, the
inguinal glands were excised and a second monkey inoculated. At the
third inoculation — that is, after passage through two monkeys — a

* Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lx. (1911) pp. 86-90 (2 pis.).

t Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., 1X. (1911) pp. 351-4.

X Depart. Agric, U.S.A., Pbytopatbology, i. No. 3(1911). j

§ Centrabl. Bakt., lte Abt. Ref., 1. (1911) Beib., pp. 27-30.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 805

scarlatinal disease was produced, the septic contaminations having been

eliminated. This monkey showed all the classical signs of scarlet fever.
Further experiments with gland material filtered by means of aBerkefeld
filter, showed that the filtrate would give rise to the disease. From
which it would appear that the causal agent of scarlet fever is a filter
passer.

Growth of Bacterium zopfii.*— H. Kufferath discusses the physical
conditions which determine the mode of growth of this organism in
gelatin. If planted upon a thick layer of gelatin, maintained vertically,
it will develop a filamentous, arborescent growth, consisting of more or
less vertical threads growing in a direction contrary to gravity. The
author first of all gives an account of the contributions of other workers
to the solution of the problem, giving prominence to the views of
Jacobsen, with which he is largely in accord. He considers that under
the influence of gravity, the medium might fall into layers of greater or
less density, the latter holding, moreover, a larger proportion of water.
The bacterium inoculated into such a medium would follow the lines of
less resistance and higher proportion of water, thus marking out graphic-
ally the lines of force of gravity acting through the medium. This
implies that the organism possesses the qualities of haptotropism (re-
sponse to variations in pressure) and hydrotropism (response to variations
in moisture). Superficial colonies consist of radiating filaments. One of
these penetrating the surface of the medium forms a deep branching
growth. In a scanty quantity of medium, where variations in tension
are not perceptible, the growth is more irregular. There is a correlation
between the shape of the individual and that of the colony, a cocco-
bacillary type occurring at times in small round colonies. Growth in a
comparatively inelastic medium, such as agar, does not show any of these
appearances.

Beijerinck, M. W. — Pigments as Products of Oxidation by Bacterial Action.
Konink. Akacl. Wetcyisch. tc Amsterdam, xiii. (1910) pp. 1066-77.

Romanowitch, M.— Contribution a l'etude de la Flore intestinale de rhomme.

C.B. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxxi. (1911) pp. 237-9.

Springer— Ein Fund von Bacillus paratyphi Typus A in der Gallenblase, neber
Einwirkung der Bakterien der Typhus-Coli-Gruppe auf verschiedene Zucker-
arten. Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lx. (1911) pp. 2-14.

Wolff, A. — Bacterium fuchsinum und Bacterium violaceum.

[Descriptions of two chromogenous organisms isolated from water.]

Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xxx. (1911) pp 639-44.

Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxv. (1911) pp. 601-17.

806

SUMMARY OF CIKKENT IJESEAHCHES RELATING TO

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.*
(1) Stands.

The Binocular Microscope, f — J. Amann points out that the im-
portant developments of late years in Microscope construction leave little
hope that much further optical improvement is likely to be made. He
thinks, however, that practical and especially hygienic considerations
still require attention. He would much like to see the Continental
Microscope adapted to normal binocular vision. He contrasts monocular
with binocular vision, to the disadvantage of the former, but fully admits
the difficulties of the undertaking to which he invites the attention of

Fig. 87.

Microscope makers. The latest and most complete binocular is Green-
hough's Stereoscopic Microscope, but it is only adapted for comparatively
weak objectives, which are quite insufficient for modern biological in-
vestigations. He considers that the constructional requirements to be
met in designing a binocular arrangement are : — 1. That the arrange-
ment should not sensibly alter the correction of the optical system ; it
should permit the use of compound objectives— weak, medium, high,
including homogeneous immersions. 2. That it should likewise be avail-
able for oculars of various types — Huyghens, Ramsden, Compensator.
3. That there should be no sensible loss of light ; the light-strength of
both fields should be approximately the same. 4. That the arrangement
should be easily inserted and removed, in order to use the Microscope
monocularly or binocularly as desired. The binocular should be suitable

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives: (3)
Illuminating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1911) pp. 488-93.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

807

foruse with all kinds of illumination — polarized light, dark-ground, ultra-
microscopy.

Among instruments which have to some extent anticipated his re-
quirements, the author mentions the Wenham-Schroeden objective-
prism, made some fifteen years ago by Ross of London, under the title of
" Improved Binocular Prism for High Powers." The excellent qualities
of this prism — which he fully enumerates — are counterbalanced by the
ponderous stand, which makes a rather unwieldy and costly instrument.
In conclusion, while admitting that for certain special purposes, e.g.
resolution of more difficult structures, test-objects, and so forth, the
monocular instrument is the more suit-
able, yet for most systematic purposes,
and especially for prolonged observa-
tions, he thinks that the binocular is
so much to be preferred that he hopes
his suggestions will not be unattain-
able.

Comparator or Reading Micro-
scope.*— This instrument (figs. 87, 88),
made by the Cambridge Scientific
Instrument Company, can be used
with the axis of the Microscope
vertical, horizontal, or inclined. The
illustration (fig. 87) shows it with
the axis vertical ; in fig. 88 it is seen
as a cathetometer, with the Microscope
horizontal. The tube B, to which
the Microscope is clamped, can be
traversed slowly by the screw and
milled-head S through 40 mm. read-
ing, being taken on the divided
micrometer-head to 0*01 mm. For
supporting the object under examina-
tion a small sliding table I, resting
on geometric fittings, is provided.
This is supported with centring adjustments controlled by the screws F, F.
Lucas's patent slow motion is used for this focusing mechanism of the
Microscope. The Microscope M, which is fitted with cross lines and can
be clamped at any point on the tube B, has a Zeiss achromatic objec-
tive a.2 and No. 2 ocular. The working distance between the nose of the
objective and the object is 30 mm. The instrument, which weighs
17 lbs., is used as seen in fig. 87 for the examination of screws ; it is
also employed for measuring the hardness of steel. This is done by
pressing a small steel ball into the steel to be examined, by the pressure of
a known weight. The indentation thus produced is a measure of the
hardness, the diameter of the indentation being measured by the Micro-
scope.

* Cambridge Scientific Instrument Co., List No. 88, p. 9 (2 figs.).

Fig.

SI IS

SUMMARY OF < TKKKNT RESEARCHES I {ELATING TO

13) Illuminating- and other Apparatus.

New Nernst Lamp for Microprojection.* — A. Kdhler, in discussing
some of the difficulties attendant upon the Nernst lamp, points out thai
ilic besl results are attained when the collector-lens is so shaped that its
image of a luminous bar completely covers the actual aperture of the
iris-diaphragm : in other words, if the breadth of the image of aluminous
bar is at least equal to the diameter of the diaphragm aperture Thus.
if (fig. 89) 2L1 be the breadth of the image of a bar, or, generally, the
least diameter of the image of the light-source, 2?* the diameter of_ the
condenser-diaphragm, then this condition will be satisfied when L1^/-.

If, further, 2L be the breadth of a bar, or, generally, the least
diameter of the light-source, f\ the focal distance of the collector-lens.

Fig. 89.

and xl the distance of the condenser stop from the rear focal point F1 of
the collector, then

L1 = .rl

From the foregoing results it follows that, by taking only the equality

sign in the first equation,

r ;.i

L ' A

and this derived equation gives approximately the distance at which a
collector of focal distance fx belonging to a Microscope of assigned optical
structure should be set up. If the image of the light-source is also to be
sharp, when the collector has a greater angular aperture, there must be
aplanatism ; this requires that,

L sin ux = L1 sin u{

The author proceeds similarly to investigate other conditions, with
especial reference to Zeiss' apochromats and compensation oculars. His
principles have been carried into practice by Messrs. Carl Zeiss, and a
view of their apparatus is shown in fig. 90. It has the advantage, in the
case of small light-sources, of combining the collector-lens with the
Nernst. The collector, provided with an iris-diaphragm 1, is clamped

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1911) pp. 477-88.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC

809

firmly in a sleeve 2, which surrounds a slit adjustable by means of a
micrometer-screw 3. In this manner the image of the bright bar can be
made to fall sharp and clear upon the diaphragm of the Microscope-
condenser. The screw 4 is for centring the light-source with regard
to the axis of the collector. This screw raises and lowers the bright
bar, and thereby effects a corresponding perpendicular movement of its
image. A lateral movement is not necessary, for the image of the long
thread always covers in this direction the condenser-diaphragm, provided
that the height-adjustment is rightly attained. The bright bar lies in a
pillbox-shaped receptacle, whose under portion is shown in fig. 90 sepa-
rated from the upper part. In this lower part are seen the two electrodes,

Fig. 90.

connected by a platinum wire and secured by the small screws 5. The
front wall 6 of the receptacle is approximately square, and is provided
with a small opening opposite to the collector. A so-called parallelogram-
movement connects the opening with the pillar carrying the slit and
collector, and controls the above-mentioned vertical adjustment of the
light-source. The front and rear walls of the receptacle are provided
with ventilation openings, and the front wall has also wing-shaped
projections for assisting cooling-down. Between the receptacle and the
collector is a covering 8 for guarding the collector against radiation from
light-source and from receptacle. A rider 9 serves to cany the whole
on Zeiss' optical bench. The author also describes many of the details
connected with the current and with the management of the light.

810 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Sliding-objective Changers and Revolvers.* — Among devices for
saving time when an operator has to work with more than one objective,
revolving nose-pieces are the best and most successful. P. K. Studnicka
points out, however, that objectives used in this way are liable to errors
of centring, and that in high-class work such errors may become im-
portant. Another, and perhaps more serious difficulty, is the limitation
to the possible number of objectives on a revolver. More than four
cannot be applied, and they are apt to interfere with the manipulation of
the ]irep;u-ation-slide. The number on one revolver seldom, therefore,
extends beyond three. With an objective-slide some of the above dis-
advantages disappear ; there is no restriction as to number, and everyone
can adjust the centring without tedium. On the other hand, exchange
of objectives is a longer operation than with a revolver. The author
expresses his surprise that no attempt has yet been made to combine the
ml vantages of both systems; and that the revolvers themselves might
be interchangeable, and be attached to the Microscope-tube by some
sliding movement. In this way an operator might work with, say, two
revolvers : one with his weak, and the other with his strong objectives.

Methods for the Identification of Sub-microscopic Structures.! —
J. Koenigsberger has made use of Lippmann's layers in colour photo-

Fig. 91.

c = 2") u

022 a

graphy for obtaining a natural grating. If the film obtained by blue-
violet light be sectionized obliquely by a microtome (fig. 91) and mounted
in damara in the usual way, then a grating is obtained in which the
layers of silver granules are separated by intervals varying from one-
third to four times the wave-length of yellow-red light (A = 0 • 6 /a), see
fig. 92. Resolution through the end at which the layers are distant from
each other less than a wave-length is of course impossible, but the polari-
zation effects obtained give a clue to the structure. The author describes
fully the nature of the auxiliary polarizing apparatus required.

New Zeiss Nernst Lamp. —This lamp (fig. 93) consists of a single
filament in globular metal casing, nickel plated, and so arranged that the
upper half readily removes, leaving free access to the filament which is to
be started with a spirit flame or wax match after the current is switched
on to render it incandescent. A small chimney to draw off the heat of

* Zeitsch. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1911) pp. 501-3.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikr., xxviii. (1911) pp. 34-41 (2 figs.).

X Pamphlet on Ultra Microscopy, pt. 4, figs. 1 and 4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

811

the lamp is provided for on top of the spherical casing, and the whole is
mounted on a china pillar with liase.

In the cylindrical mount attached to the spherical metal casing an
aplanatic condenser of short focus is mounted with a slot arrangement
in front to receive ground glass or colour screens. The lamp is fitted
to the base in an inclined position, and the aplanatic condenser, which
is a fixture, is so arranged that at a comparatively short distance from
the lamp an enlarged image of the rod is projected, filling the entire
aperture of an average Microscope mirror. The small glass tube

Fig. 93.

mounted to base is a wire resistance for the lamp. The lamp burns at
1 ampere, and can be supplied suitable for either continuous or alter-

nating current.

For high voltage an auxiliary resistance is supplied.

Winkel's Drawing Microscope.* — This excellent Microscope, says
E. M. Nelson, although described nine years ago, is still so little known
that a second and more particular account of it is necessary. Until it
had been in use, the writer had no idea what a valuable instrument it
was. Several naturalists and science masters who have seen it were very
much struck with it, and expressed astonishment that it had not come
into more general use.

Fig. 94 shows the instrument by itself — a non-inclinable Microscope
upon a horseshoe foot. It is a stage focuser, and the stage, 2*9 in.
square, carries on the same bracket a concave mirror 1 "8in. in diameter.

* English Mechanic, xciv. (1911) pp. 257-8 (3 figs.).

812

SI'MMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The aperture in the stage is 1 •'.) in. in diameter, and a reducing ring is
supplied. Half an inch below the bottom of this stage is a " turn out
ring with an aperture the same size as that in the stage, so that the disks
which fit one will fit the other. The construction of the arm at the top
of. and at right angles to, the limb is peculiar, and unlike that in any

Fig. 94.

other Microscope. It is very short, and it is capable of being rotated
and clamped in any position by a screw. This arm has a broad V-groove,
to which a second arm, carrying the optical part, can be attached
ami clamped by another screw. This is a novel and excellent mode of
attachment : half a turn of the screw firmly fixes it in position, and half
a turn releases the body from the limb. It would be difficult to devise

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

813

a better mode of attachment for a body to a limb, for it is simple, rapid
in use, and perfectly firm.

Eaving described the mechanical, we will now pass on to the optical
part. (1) To the horizontal arm a short tube, holding a wheel of six
"loups," can be attached by the method first described. These "loups''

Fig. 95.

vary in power from 2 to 9 diameters. (2) A compound body with a
fixed eyepiece, and another wheel of six lenses, giving powers from 12 to
38 diameters, can be attached in place of the "loups."

The drawing apparatus is an Abbe camera. The top of the special
table measures 2ft. by lift., and is of pitch-pine lMn. thick. Its height
above the floor is 2ft., and it has three legs of oak l|in. square. The
two back legs are braced by an iron bar, and a second bar joins this to
the front leg. Beneath the table-top, and attached to it, is a cupboard,
which holds the Microscope cabinet. When the Microscope is used for
drawing, as in fig. 95, a box without a lid is laid upon its side, and its

Dec. :JOth, 1911 3 Q

8] I

sr.MMAIiY OF CTRIiKNT liKSKARCHES RELATING TO

C

r*

lower side is clamped to the table-top by an ordinary brass bench-clamp.
The bottom of this box measures <siin. by 7in., by Tin. deep. There-
fore, its side, which forms the drawing-board, measures 8Mn. by Tin. in
area, and is Tin. above the top of the table. When so placed, the path

of the rays from the prism
of the camera to the drawing-
board is 10 in.

The instrument (fig. 95)
is shown as arranged for
drawing with the compound
body ; but when the "loups"
are used, the Microscope is
placed upon a box 8 in. by
6 in., and oi in. deep. The
Microscope is thus raised
3h in., and the camera prism
kept the same height as with
the compound body, and the
drawing-board is 10 in. from
it as before. The cupboard
has four chocks of wood, 2^- in.
by If in. at each angle (fig. 96). These serve two purposes : — First, they
greatly strengthen the cupboard, and enable it to be attached to the
table-top by large screws ; further, the whole table is made very rigid,
because the iron brace is firmly screwed to the lower chocks in the
cupboard. Secondly, the chocks form a packing for the Microscope
cabinet, and allow it to be put into the cupboard with the key in the lock.
The main use of this Microscope is for the examination of un-
mounted objects, botanical, entomological, geological, etc. If the field-
lens is removed from the body, and a similar brass adapter, without any
lens, screwed into its place, the body is made similar to that of an ordi-
nary Microscope, and ordinary eye-pieces of the Continental gauge can be

3B

Fig. 96.

Fig. 97.

used. When the body is charged with a No. 4 complanat eye-piece, the
powers given by the wheel of six object-glasses varies from 30 to 100
diameters. So by this addition of a screw adapter we have at our disposal
a range of eighteen powers from 2 to 100 diameters, and the instrument
has a considerable range of usefulness for general biological work.

Reichert's Dark-ground Illuminator with Arrangement for
Centring on a Plain Stage. — This apparatus was fully described by

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MK.'liOSCOPY, ETC.

815

Mr. Niemeyer at the May Meeting (see p. 126). The blocks for the
illustrations were not obtained in time for insertion in a previous
number.

Fig. 98.

\£J

Pig. 99.

3 G 2

816 SUMMARY "OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

C4) Photomicrography.

Stereoscopic Photomicrography.* — A special Microscope has been
devised tor the purpose of taking stereoscopic photomicrographs, the body
of which moves laterally in the arc of a circle, with the specimen as the
axis. After the first exposure the body-tube is slightly moved to one
side, the optical system keeping in a line with the object, and the second
plate exposed. This ingenious and successful instrument is, however,
says J. I. Pigg, rendered superfluous by a much simpler plan.

Some years ago a comparatively easy and effective method was
introduced for taking stereoscopic photographs with the Microscope.
Instead of altering the position of either the specimen or the Microscope-
tube, the first exposure is made with one-half of the back-combination
of the objective, covered with some opaque material. The back lens-
coveriug is then moved to the other side of the objective, and the second
plate exposed. The two negatives are thus taken through different
halves of the back-lens, and the consequent separation of the two points
of view produces the stereoscopic effect.

An improved variation of this mode of making a stationary lens
take two pictures from different standpoints, has since been adopted by
photomicrographers. Instead of using the two halves of the back-
combination of the objective, a diaphragm with a circular aperture cut
near the edge of the stop is fitted behind the lens. After the first ex-
posure the diaphragm is turned round, so that the aperture is at the
opposite side of the objective ; the second negative is then taken. The
use of a small aperture, in place of half the area of the lens, effects a con-
siderable improvement in the stereoscopic effect, owing to the increased
separation of the two points of view, but the exposure is proportionately
increased. The worker must exercise his own discretion as to the exact
size and position of the aperture. If the diameter of the lens will allow
of the aperture being placed at a fair distance from the centre, the
stereoscopic relief will be considerably improved.

This method of stereoscopic photomicrography is obviously most
suitable for low-power work, and the beginner should confine his atten-
tion to low magnifications. The best results are obtained from objects
illuminated by reflected light, and really beautiful effects can be secured
from common microscopic objects. Unless an arc lamp is available,
specimens to be photographed as opaque objects should be of a light
colour, or the exposure will be abnormally prolonged, as a considerable
amount of light is cut off by the diaphragm. Diaphragms for stereo-
micro work may be purchased, but the amateur can easily make his own
by punching out a hole of the requii'ed size near the edge of a circular
piece of black paper. This diaphragm can then be fixed in position
at the back of the objective, by being pressed into the mount. When the
diaphragm is moved round for the second exposure, the aperture must
be exactly opposite the position it occupied for the first negative.

Insects' eggs, foraminifera, small insects, and seeds of plants, make
excellent subjects as opaque objects for reflected light ; crystals, botanical
sections, filamentous alga3, and foraminifera mounted in liquid cells, are

* Photographic Scraps, vi. (1911) pp. 279-80.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. <S17

all sufficiently transparent to be taken by transmitted light without any
previous preparation. One of the chief obstacles to success in stereo
work with the Microscope, is the small depth of focus given by micro-
scopic objectives. If the specimen has considerable depth of structure,
the lowest power possible must be used, and the necessary magnification
obtained by the eye-piece. WTien I ransparent objects are photographed, a
narrow angle of illumination should be adopted. This will decrease re-
solution, but increase depth of focus. When a specimen has strong con-
trasts in light and shade, it is sometimes advisable to give a normal
exposure for the first negative, and then over-expose the second plate, in
order to get detail in the darker portions of the subject. A much 1 tetter
effect is given by this plan, when the two prints are viewed through the
stereoscope. In the same manner, if a double-stained specimen is being
photographed, the first negative should be exposed for the deeper colour,
and the second for the lighter shade. Generally speaking, for stereo-
scopic work, soft negatives give the best effects, and no pure whites should
appear in the finished print. The negatives should be printed on smooth
paper, such as Ilford Glossy Gaslight.

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Pupil of an Optical System with regard to Perspective.* — C.
Beck has found that the so-called " entrance and exit pupils " of an
optical system may be used, in connexion with the Gauss planes, for ex-
plaining the action of optical instruments as regards the perspective of
the images formed. It will be remembered that the Gauss planes enable
us to refer the action of a complicated optical system to an equivalent
single lens placed successively in two positions — the entrance equivalent-
plane and the exit equivalent-plane. By this means, assuming that the
optical system is corrected in such a manner that the oblique rays and
those far from the axis act in the same manner as the direct axial rays,
the position and size of images can be determined with accuracy ; but
the perspective of the image cannot be correctly explained by aid of the
Gauss planes alone. Th°. " pupils," however, account for this apparent
discrepancy, and, by assigning the correct position to these two apertures,
or pupils, we can investigate the perspective of an image without taking
further consideration of the system itself : just as, by assigning the correct
position to the two Gauss planes, we can investigate the size and position
of the images, irrespective of the system itself. The pupils, in fact,
determine what rays form the image, and they further determine the
perspective without invalidating the results given by the Gauss system as
to the positions and sizes of the focused images. The author discusses
in detail several typical cases, and, in particular, clears up a very interest-
ing point in the practical use of telephotographic lenses. Such lenses
have usually very small apertures, and possess a large degree of so-called
depth of focus, and are consequently capable of depicting a great range
of depth in the object. For distant views the perspective will, on the
whole, give the effect produced by photographing with an ordinary Lens.
of about the same focal length as the equivalent focal length of the tele-
photo system. But if a telephoto lens be used for near objects, as, for

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series A, lxxxv. (1911) pp. 462-70 (8 figs.).

818

SIM MARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING 10

instance, for full-sized portraits, the perspective of a 9-in. telephoto lens,
with exit pupils arranged so as to come between the constituent lenses,
will give the perspective effect produced by an ordinary lens of 17|-in.
focus: or, if half-size, of a lens 14', in. This accounts for the very

Fig. 100.

pleasing portraits obtained by the use of the telephoto lens. For all
purposes, except extreme distance, the perspective foreshortening in a
photograph taken with a telephoto lens is less pronounced than would be
expected from a lens of that focal length.

Fig. 101.

Figs. LOO and 101 show two photographs taken, the one (fig. 100) with
with an ordinary photographic lens, the other (fig. 101) with the above
telephoto lens. Both lenses had the same equivalent focal length. The
object photographed was a parallel tube about 5 ft. long, built up of
laths covered with tissue paper. The photograph was taken

looking

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 819

down the tube, and the nearest end was in both cases placed at such a
distance as to give the same sized image of the object. It will be noticed
that the telephoto lens gives a totally different and less steep perspective
effect than the ordinary lens.

C6) Miscellaneous.

Quekett Microscopical Club. — The I76th Ordinary Meeting of the

Club was held on Tuesday. October 24, the President, Professor E. A.
Minchin, M.A., F.Z.S., in 'the Chair. A paper by Mr. E. M. Nelson,
F.R.M.S., on "An Improved Compound Microscope by James Mann,
1751," was read by the Hon. Sec. It is, in the main, a copy of J. Cuff's
(1744), with various improvements. It is less heavily built, however,
and is probably the second Portable Compound Microscope. The instru-
ment originally belonged to the celebrated Dr. Johnson. "A General
Account of the Spring-tails (Collembola) " was given by Mr. J. W.
Shoebotham, N.D.A. Together with the orders Protura and Thysanura,
they belong to the sub-class Apterygota, class Insecta. The various parts
of the Collembola were fully described, especial attention being given to
the very typical organs, the ventral tube and the spring. Previously
considered to be scavengers only, it is now thought that they may do
considerable damage to growing crops. In Ireland they have been found
feeding on the leaves of tobacco plants. Nearly 500 species have up
to the present been recorded, of which 107 are British.

B. Technique.*
(1) Collecting- Objects, including- Culture Processes.

Cultivation of Spirochsetes.f — G-. Arnheim gives an account of his
microscopical and cultural investigations of spirochetes associated with
gangrene of the lung and ulcerating carcinoma. He finds in these
lesions a definite species of spirochete, of which, however, the colonies
cannot be distinguished from those of other species. These spirochetes
are found in carcinomata both of men and of animals, and have been
found in the blood of normal rats and mice. They cannot be demon-
strated in growths that have not ulcerated.

For his cultivation experiments the author uses a modification of
Schereschewsky's method. Material containing spirochetes is introduced
into horse-serum, which has been heated for a short time to 75° C. For
the isolation of spirochaetes from a mixed culture, it is necessary to
examine various portions of the mixed growth for the presence of these
organisms, and replant it in successive attenuations.

Pure Cultures from a Single CelLf — S. L. Schouten has improved
his method § for isolating single cells under the Microscope. In the

* This division contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes ;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including Slides, preservative fluids, etc.
(6) Miscellaneous.

t Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lix. (1911) pp. 20-34.

J Konink. Akad. Wetenschap. te Amsterdam, xiii. (1911) pp. 840-50 (1 pi.).

§ See this Journal, 1901, p. 331.

820 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

simplified apparatus there is only one needle-holder, placed to the left of
the Microscope. The plate on which the Microscope formerly stood is
now omitted, and the instrument adjusted by hand.

A. \V. Nieuwenhuis* describes an apparatus for the cultivation of
rnicro-organisms from one cell. The description of the apparatus and
the procedure is lengthy, and refers to a stand placed by the side of the
Microscope. To the top of the stand is attached a needle specially con-
structed for the purpose of fishing out the desired cell from a culture
placed on the stage of the Microscope.

Cultivation of Spirochaeta pallida.j — H. Noguchi inoculated his
media not directly from human lesions, but from the artificially in-
fected testicular tissue of the rabbit. The only medium which proved
suitable was serum-water, to which a piece of sterile rabbit-tissue was
added, preferably kidney or testicle. The serum-water in test-tubes is
rendered suitable for anaerobic cultivation by a layer of paraffin oil
poured on its surface. After the first cultivation strict anaerobiosis is not
essential, and the organism can be subcultured to solid media. The first
cultures are usually contaminated by bacteria, but these are separated by
means of two procedures. In the first the spirochetes are grown through
filters which retard the passage of other organisms, while the second method
depends on the fact that in stab-cultures the spirochastes grow away from
the line of puncture into the surrounding medium, while other organisms
fail to do so. The spirochastes cultivated by this method, when inocu-
lated into the rabbit's testicle, produce characteristic histological changes,
and are found growing freely in the infected tissue.

New Method for making Blood-agar for Cultivating Bacillus
influenzae.! — W. Thalheimer recommends the following modification of
Pfeiffer's method. Its chief advantage over that of Pfeiffer is that the
hiking agent is one which does not interfere with bacterial growth and
does not have to be removed. Freshly-drawn beef-blood obtained
from an abattoir was collected in a wide-mouthed jar, and defibrinated
by shaking with a number of medium-sized marbles. This was laked by
adding an equal part of distilled water, and rendered free from bacteria
by passing through a sterile Reichel filter. This yielded a clear red fluid,
and 20-30 c.cm. of this were added to a litre of melted agar at 45° C.
and poured into sterile tubes. The medium thus obtained was perfectly
clear, bright-red, and of the same density of colour as ordinary blood-
agar. On this medium Bacillus influenzae, Streptococcus mucosus, and
Gonococcus grew luxuriantly.

(2) Preparing1 Objects.

Celloidin Decalcification Method. § — C. F. Bodecker describes a
simplified procedure for decalcification. It consists in mixing 10 c.cm.
nitric acid (sp. gr. 1 ■ 15) with 30 c.cm. of a methyl-alcohol solution of
celloidin. The fluid must be well stirred with a glass rod ; the thick

* Konink. Akad. Wetenschap. te Amsterdam, xiii. (1911) pp. 566-76 (2 pis.).
t Journ. Amer. Med. Assoc, July 8, 1911, through Lancet (1911) ii. p. 536.
% Johns Hopkins Hosp. Bull., xxii. (1911) pp. 293-6.
§ Zeitschr. -wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 158-60 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 821

jelly is then squeezed under a pressure of about 80 kilos, between thick
layers of bibulous paper, in order to remove as much water as possible.
The acid-celloidin is next mixed with twice its bulk of methyl-alcohol,
whereby it is quickly dissolved. A piece of enamel, 0*5 mm. thick,
takes about six days to decalcify. If gas bubbles be given off the pro-
cess is going on too rapidly. The author alludes to previous communica-
tions, for which see this Journal, 1908, pp. 775, and 1905, p. 764.

Fixation and Staining of Glycogen.* — F. Zieglwallner describes
fixation and staining methods for the simultaneous demonstration of
glycogen and fat, and gives the following formulas : — 1. One p.c. chromic
acid solution in 84 p.c. alcohol, 15 ; 2 p.c. osmic acid, 4 ; acetic acid, 1.
The solution should be prepared immediately before use.

2. Saturated sublimate solution, 20; 2|p.c. osmic acid, 20; acetic
acid, 10 ; absolute alcohol, 50. This fixes small pieces in from 8 to 12
hours. On removal the pieces are washed for 24 hours in 50 p.c.
alcohol, to which a few drops of tincture of iodine have been added.
In order to retain the blackening it is advisable to convert the osmium
into sulphide by treating the sections or pieces with 70 p.c. alcohol, to
which a small piece of Na2S has been added.

3. By saturating a solution with formula very similar to No. 2 with
dextrose, another fixative which gives fair results is obtained.

4. 10 p.c. trichlor-lactic acid for 3 to 4 hours, followed by 50 p.c.
alcohol.

5. Trichlor-lactic acid, 9 ; 2 p.c. osmic acid, 24 ; acetic acid, 9 ; dis-
tilled water, 58. In this small pieces remain for 10 to 12 hours, after
which they are thoroughly washed in 50 p.c. alcohol.

Various methods of staining glycogen are then alluded to, the best-
being Bleu-de-Lyon, as it gives considerable contrast.

Studying Amoeba, f — B. Puschkarew pipettes off from a " zoological
culture " the amcebas, in company with algte and bacteria, on to an agar-
plate. After 6 or 7 hours, a piece, which should not exceed 1 c.cm., is
cut out. The piece is placed on a Hansen's slide and a clean cover-
glass imposed. After \ hour, during which time the amcebas will have
crawled on to the cover-glass, the space between the ring of the slide
and the agar slip is filled with fixative, the cover-glass not being re-
moved. The fixative used was either sublimate-alcohol or 2 p.c. osmic
acid ; the former being allowed to act for 20 to 30 minutes, the latter
for 10 to 20. The fixative is then removed with a pipette and re-
placed with iodin-alcohol or 50 p.c. alcohol : the former after sublimate,
the latter after osmic fixation. After allowing these reagents to act for
30 to 60 minutes, the cover-glass may be removed. The cover-glass is
then washed in water. It should be mentioned that no procedure will
get rid of all the bacteria, and these are sometimes very frequent. The
preparations may then be stained by the Romanowrsky-Giemsa method,
or with Heidenhain's iron-lnematoxylin.

The author's illustrations are extremely effective.

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911).

t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 145-50 (2 figs.).

822

si'mmauv OF ci-i;i;r.XT researches relating to

Washing and Dehydrating Apparatus.* — By means of the appa-
ratus devised by B. Romeis (fig. 102) such processes as the washing, dehy-
dration, or decalcifying of fixed preparations may be carried out without
trouble and without undue manipulation. The supply tube A, connected
with a water-supply, leads to the cylinder C. This cylinder is drawn out
al its lower end, and contains a perforated porcelain disc which rests upon
the narrowing part. This cylinder has a twofold purpose : it may be used
for washing tissues which can stand rough treatment, or, by the obstruc-
tion of perforations in the porcelain disc, it may serve to regulate the
flow in the distal portions of the apparatus. By means of the tube E
the cylinder communicates with the funnel-shaped vessel F, which con-
tains a series of perforated trays. This vessel is closed at the top with a
stopper, pierced by the outflow tube G. A perforated porcelain disc is

B

faH

A

E

G

-\

w

=c:,

Fig. 102.

placed below this stopper. Objects to be treated are placed in these
trays. When washing is complete, and dehydration is to begin, the
tube B is disconnected from the water supply and linked up successively
with flasks of mounting alcohols. Decalcifying is carried out in an
analogous manner.

(4) Staining- and Injecting.

Injection of Fusible Alloys in Microscopical Anatomy. f — L.
Vialleton and A. Juillet find that Wood's alloy gives excellent results
when injected into respiratory tubes or blood-vessels. It is fusible at
70°, and is composed of : bismuth 7, lead in sticks 2, tin in sticks 2,
cadmium 2. The bismuth is pounded up and then melted in an iron
crucible ; a stick of lead held with iron tongs is heated by means of a
blow-pipe, and the molten metal allowed to drop into the bismuth. The
tin is treated in a similar manner, and then the cadmium is thrown in.
The alloy is vigorously stirred with an iron rod, and the mixture kept at
a temperature of 120°, for if over-heated the cadmium becomes too much
oxidized. To inject the alloy, say into a bronchial tree or pulmonary
artery, a copper funnel with a capacity of about GO c.cm., the tube being
2 • 5 mm. in diameter, is used. To the end of the tube metal cannulas

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 12-17.
t CR. Soc. Biol. Paris, lsxi. (1911) pp. 249-51.

ZOOLOGY A.ND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 823

of varying size may be fitted as required. The funnel is placed some
20 cm. above the specimen to be injected ;' this height gives sufficient
pressure. The funnel and cannula are kept warm by means of a ring-
burner and gas flame during the injection ; the alloy is then poured
into the funnel. When the specimen is sufficiently injected it isallowed
to cool, and after the lapse of \ hour it may be cut off from the cannula.
It is then placed in cold running water for 2 hours, and on removal all
superfluous parts are removed. In order to obtain the casts of the
lumina of the tubes or vessels, the organic material is digested away in
artificial gastric juice at 50°. After 24 hours the preparation is washed
in running water and then, if necessary, further cleaned with a brush.

New Method for the Detection of Tubercle bacilli in Sputum.*
E. W. Eurich recommends the following procedure. A quantity of the
sputum is shaken up with "antiformin " in a glass-stoppered vessel,
such as a measure cylinder ("antiformin" = 15 p.c. liq. sod. hydrat.
-fliq. sodae. chlorinat. aa), the proportion of "antiformin" depending
upon the consistence of the sputum ; if the latter is very viscid or dense
an equal proportion may be required ; if thin, then half the amount
may suffice. The mixture is occasionally shaken during five minutes ; it
is then diluted with a volume of distilled water approximately ten times
as great as that of the " antiformin " used, and again shaken for a few
minutes. Finally, there is added a mixture of equal parts of ether
(methylated ether will do) and acetone equal in volume to that of the
water. It is shaken once more for a few seconds and the whole allowed
to stand. In a few minutes the contents of the bottle will be found to
separate into three layers. The middle layer, appearing as a more or less
dense white ring, will contain nearly all the tubercle bacilli that may be
present in the sputum, and can be drawn off with ease by means of a
pipette fitted with a teat. The density of this middle layer can be in-
creased after it has been pipetted off, if desired, with the help of a
centrifuge (an ordinary hand centrifuge will answer the purpose), but
it is not necessary. A film is made, dried, and fixed in the usual way, by
passing it through a flame. Before staining the film it is immersed for
a few seconds in 5 p.c. sulphuric acid to neutralize any adhering alkali,
and washed to remove the acid. If the examiner is interrupted, or other-
wise pressed for time, the whole mixture may be allowed to stand till
the next day or even longer ; the acid-fast property of the bacilli is
not affected by the delay. The sputum-antiformin mixture should be
diluted with distilled not with tap-water, as the latter may contain acid-
fast bacilli.

Negative Staining of Bacteria,f — H. Fischer, after alluding to
Burri's indian-ink method, describes his experience with anihn dyes,
such as Con^o-red and nigrosin. A drop of the fluid containing bacteria
is mixed with a drop of similar bulk of a saturated solution of Congo-red
or nigrosin, and a film made in the usual way. When dry the film may
be mounted in balsam. The solution maybe heated previous to use.

* Brit. Med. Journ. (1911) ii. p. 596.

t Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxvii. (1910) pp. 475-G.

824 SUMMARY OK CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(6) Miscellaneous.

Preserving Brains.* — A. Starcke suspends brains in 15 p.c. forma lit,
for 8 to 1 I days. On removal the surface is carefully dried ; it is then
immersed, vertex downwards, in a vessel filled with hard paraffin, heated
to at least 15° above its melting-point ; a quick turn covers the surfa<<
with a mantle of paraffin. Should any gaps be found, the places im-
plicated must be treated anew. Brains treated in this manner will,
even after five years, give satisfactory preparations by Xissl's or Weigert's
methods of staining.

Turbidometer for Counting Vaccines. f—C. F. Pawson and H. P.
Bassett have devised an apparatus for estimating the number of bacteria
contained in a certain volume of an autogenous vaccine. To the
sliding bar of the mechanical stage of a Microscope is fixed a vertical
rod — a hypodermic needle will serve — which dips into a rectangular
glass box, fixed to the table. At one end of the box is a transparent
circle which admits light ; the other end is attached to a cylindrical
metal tube, leading to a semicircular eye-shield, at the edge of the
table. This shield screens the observer. If the box be filled with
a turbid liquid, and the vertical rod be observed through the tube,
as it is moved from the proximal towards the distal end of the box, a
point is reached where, owing to the opacity of the intervening
fluid, it disappears from view. The point at which this takes place
depends upon the degree of turbidity. As this only gives a relative
observation, it is necessary to have a standard. McFarland has devised
a series of test-tubes containing different amounts of freshly precipitated
barium sulphate. Tube No. 5 of his series contains sufficient precipi-
tate to produce turbidity equal to that of a suspension of fifty million
bacteria per cubic centimetre. This is taken as the standard. The
vertical rod is moved to the proximal end of the box, and a reading
taken from the scale on the mechanical stage. The box is filled with
standard suspension, and the rod is made to move until it can no longer
be seen. A second reading is taken. The difference between these
readings gives the amount of translation of the rod. Similar observa-
tions are taken with the vaccine which is under investigation. The
excursions of the vertical rod are inversely proportional to the turbidity
of the samples ; and so from these data, an estimate may be formed of
the strength of the bacterial emulsion.

Agglutination of Trypanosomes.J — Lange describes a method by
which a macroscopic agglutination test for trypanosomiasis may be carried
out. For this purpose the author makes use of a suspension of trypano-
somes obtained from the blood of a highly-infected animal. The blood
is lightly centrifugalized, so that the organisms settle into a definite layer,
which is then removed by means of a pipette. This emulsion is then
washed in salt solution, centrifugalized and suspended in a fresh quantity
of salt solution. A small quantity of formalin is added, and the suspen-

* Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxviii. (1911) pp. 150-1.

+ Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., lviii. (1911) pp. 638-40.

: Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Ref., i. (1911) Beib. pp. 171-7.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 825

sion will retain its efficiency for the purpose of these tests for a period
of from four to eight weeks. When shaken up, the suspension should
be homogeneous and of a greyish-white colour. It should not agglutinate
in the presence of a normal serum in a dilution of 1 in 50. Spontaneous
agglutination may take place if the washing process is too thorough.

The test is carried out in a similar manner to that used with bacterial
emulsions. The serum under observation, in suitable dilutions, is put
in tubes with equal quantities of the suspension. Controls are also put
up. The tubes are incubated for (5 to 12 hours, and, if necessary, allowed
to stand at room temperature for 20 hours after incubation. When
examining the tubes, it is necessary to shake them up and examine the
floating particles. It is not easy to distinguish degrees of agglutination.

SojniERPELDT, E. — Ueber die Fortschritte der mikroskopischen untersuchungs-
methoden fur mineralogie und analytische chemie wahrend der letzten Jahre.

Zeitschr. wiss. Mikroskr. xxviii. (1911) pp. 183-206 (2 figs.).

Metallography, etc.

Aluminium-magnesium Alloys.*— W. Broniewski has made deter-
minations of the various electrical properties of alloys of aluminium
and magnesium ; the results indicate the existence of two compounds,
AlMg and Al2Mg3. Alloys corresponding to the formula? Al4Mg and
AlMg2 were found to be heterogeneous in microstructure.

Bismuthides.f — A. G. Vournasos has prepared sodium bismuthide
Na3Bi, the existence of which is indicated by thermal analysis of the
system, by adding bismuth to sodium melted under paraffin. Potassium
bismuthide K3Bi is obtained in a similar manner.

Arsenides of Tin.:}: — P. Jolibois and E. L. Dupuy have prepared
alloys by heating known weights of arsenic and tin together in sealed
tubes, at 650° C. Sections for microscopical examination were etched
with ferric chloride solution. The presence of the compounds Sn4As3
and SnAs was indicated.

A thermal investigation of the arsenic-tin system by N. Parravano
and P. de Cesaris § indicates the existence of the compounds Sn3As2 and
SnAs.

Alloys of Silver with Cadmium. || — G. J. Petrenko and A. S.
Fedorow have made a thermal and microscopical investigation of the
silver-cadmium system. Six series of solid solutions, with intervening
gaps, are formed. The compound AgCd results from a reaction oc-
curring in the solid state. The compounds AgCd3 and Ag2Cd3 are
probable. The existence of AgCd4 was disproved by quenching experi-
ments.

* Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 85-7 (6 figs.).
t Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 714-15.
$ Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1312-14.

§ Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xx. (1911) 1, pp. 593-G, through Journ. Chem. Soc, c.
(1911) p. 613.

|| Zeitschr. Anorg.Chem.,lxx.(1911) pp. 157-69; lxxi. (1911) pp. 215-18 (15 figs.).

826 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Selenium-antimony System.* — H. IV-hhon has examined micro-
scopically numerous selenium-antimony alloys, and concludes that the
only compound obtainable by direct fusion of the elements is Sb.,Se3.
Within certain limits of composition, the alloys, in the molten state, con-
sist of two phases, of nearly the same density. Measurements of electrical
resistance of the alloys were consistent with the existence of Sb2Se3.

Alloys of Noble Metals. \—W. Geibel has determined the electrical
resistance and its temperature co-efficient, the thermoelectric power
against platinum, and the tensile strength, of palladium-silver, palladium-
platinum, platinum-indium, platinum-gold, and platinum-silver alloy.-.
Palladium and platinum appear to form a continuous series of solid
solutions, as also do palladium and silver.

Iron-carbon System.; — R. Ruer and N. Iljin prepared a pure cast-
iron containing 4 to 4 • 5 p.c. carbon, nearly all in the graphitic state.
Small specimens were heated for 6 hours at different temperatures in the
range G00°-1120° C. and quenched. The percentage of combined carbon
then found in the specimen is held to indicate the lower limit of solu-
bility of elementary carbon in iron at the temperature to which the
specimen had been heated. The solubility curve is parallel to that of
cementite, reaching a maximum of 1*25 p.c. at 1120°. By allowing
specimens to cool from 1100" C. and quenching at different tempera-
tures, it was shown that temper-carbon does not separate above 800c C,
but that the length of time of heating above 800° C. influences the
amount of temper-carbon separating below 800° C. It is suggested that
" centres of crystallization " form at temperatures above 800° C.

Growth of Cast-irons after Repeated Heatings.§ — H. C. H. Car-
penter has continued his investigation of this phenomenon. Phos-
phorus, sulphur, and manganese tend to diminish growth. Dissolved
gases have no influence when more than 3 p.c. silicon is present : their
influence is most potent when silicon does not exceed 1 p.c. : they may
then cause a growth of 10 p.c. A table is given showing how growth
increases with increase of silicon content. An alloy containing 2 " 6 p.c.
carbon, 0-6p.c. silicon, and 1*6 p.c. manganese, showed no signs of
growth after 150 heats ; it appears to be a suitable material for anneal-
ing ovens and other objects in which growth on repeated heating is
objectionable.

Iron-silicon-carbon Alloys. || — W. Gontermann explains the equili-
brium diagram for the range Fe-Fe3C-FeSi of this ternary system.
The diagram has been derived from the thermal analysis of numerous
alloys. The two chief types of crystal separating from the melt are —

(1) mixed crystals of iron, silicon, and carbon, termed silico-austenite ;

(2) mixed crystals of the compounds FesC and FeSi, termed silico-
cementite. ViewTs of the three-dimensional model of the ternary system

are given.

* Coniptes Kendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1302-5 ; cliii. (1911) pp. 343-6.

t Zeitschr. Anorg. Chern., lxx. (1911) pp. 240-54 (9 figs.).

[ Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 97-101 (3 figs.).

§ Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 196-248 (17 figs.).

j Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 421-75 (20 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 827

Malleable Castings.* — I). M. Levy explains the changes occurring
during the annealing of white cast-iron in the production of malleable
castings, by the ore-annealing process and by the black-heart process, in
the light of the equilibrium diagram of the iroti-carbon system. The
influence of silicon, manganese5 and sulphur is considered.

Magnetic Properties of Nickel Steels.j — E. Colver-Glauert and
S. Hilpert have determined the magnetic properties of three steels
containing respectively 5 • 9, 24-3, and 32*9 p.c. nickel, (V37, 0*24, and
0"30 p.c. carbon. The measurements were made at room temperature,
after the specimens had been quencbed, or slowly cooled, from various
temperatures, or had been cooled to temperatures ranging down to
— 180°C. The authors conclude that there is no connexion between
magnetic properties and microstructure. The microstructures of com-
mercial nickel steels are stated to be practically the same as those of
meteoric iron. No evidence of the non-magnetic character of y-iron —
if y-iron exists — was obtained.

Chromium Steels.J — A. Portevin has cooled two steels containing
0'12 p.c. carbon, and 13 and 17 p.c. chromium respectively, extremely
slowly from 1300° C. The steels were then found to consist of ferrite
with interspersed carbide. The martensitic structure obtained by
moderately slow cooling from 1100° C. is accordingly regarded as charac-
terizing a metastable state.

Nickel Steels. § — A. McWilliam and E. J. Barnes have studied a
series of eight steels containing 3 p.c. nickel, manganese less than 0 ' 2 p c,
the carbon increasing from 0"06 to 0'91 p.c. Tensile and alternating
stress tests were made after various heat-treatments, as in former investi-
gations by the same authors. Heating and cooling curves were taken,
and the heat-treated specimens were microscopically examined. The
pearlite composition lies between 0*74 and 0"91 p.c. carbon.

Influence of Vanadium on Iron and Steel. ||— A. McWilliam and
E. J. Barnes have made tensile and alternating stress tests of seven
steels containing about 0 ■ 2 p.c. vanadium, carbon varying from 0 ■ 09
to 1*32 p.c, after different heat-treatments. The microstructure was
studied and heating and cooling curves were taken.

W. H. Hatfieldll has prepared five cast irons containing 0 to 0 ■ 65 p.c.
vanadium. A chemical and microscopical investigation indicated that
vanadium tended to maintain the carbon in the combined state.

Troostite.** — An investigation of the properties of tempered steel
has led A. McCance to conclude that (1) troostite consists essentially of
a-iron which is in the amorphous condition, or which has not yet attained
its crystalline state of ferrite ; (2) troostite contains carbon in suspension,
and not in solution, as carbide of iron.

* Foundry Trade Journal, xiii. (1911) pp. 321-5 (1 fig.).

+ Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 375-411 (35 figs.).

j Comptes Rendus, cliii. (1911) pp. 6-1-6 (2 figs.).

§ Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 269-93 (18 figs.).

|| Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 294-317 (16 figs.).

H Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 318-31 (20 figs.).

** Proc. Inst. Mech. Eng., 1910, pp. 1661-98 (21 figs.).

828 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Internal Structure of Pearlitic Steel.* — M. Oknoff has applied
the histological method of cutting serial sections to the investigation
of the structure of steel in space. Pearlitic specimens containing 0* 1,
0*7, and 1*7 p.c carhon, were examined by successively grinding thin
layers off the surface, a marked field being photographed at each stage.
The continuity of the pearlite grains was thus established, and their solid
form determined.

Crystallization of Steel. f — E. F. Lange describes some masses of
perfectly developed " pine-tree " crystals found in the cavity of the
sinking-head of a large steel casting. Some of the masses of the crystals
pendent from the upper portion of the cavity were as much as 15 in. in
length.

Influence of Impurities on the Corrosion of Iron.} — J. W. Cobb
finds that pure iron is electro-positive to most of its impurities, such
as phosphide, sulphide, carbide, oxide, and silicate of iron, and carbon
(graphite). Sulphide and silicate of manganese are electrically non-
conducting. Microscopic examination of iron in contact with particles
of impurities, in a corroding solution, showed that the iron went into
solution around the particles, though certain rapidly appearing corrosion
centres were not visibly related to impurities. Manganese silicate on
iron was found to be inactive.

Changes in Properties of Metals upon Working § — G. Tammann
further develops the view that the strengthening of metals by cold-
working results from the splitting up of the crystals into smaller
elementary crystals. Alloys of two metals of about the same strength
are considerably stronger than either of the pure metals, since the
crystallites of which the alloys are composed are smaller than those of
which the pure metals are constituted.

Metallic Fog in Fused Salts.|| — B,. Lorenz, G. v. Hevesy, and
E. Wolff, show that when lead is heated under fused lead chloride to
600° C, the darkening of the lead chloride is due to solution of lead in
it. The lead settles out as a black " fog " on cooling. The authors de-
scribe a titration method for the estimation of the lead dissolved in the
molten chloride, and have determined the solubility between 500° and
700° C.

Crystallization of Cast Metals.^f — C. H. Desch describes the pro-
cess of solidification of a molten metal by the formation of crystallites.

Andstrom, V. — Rusting of Iron.

Zeitschr. Anorg. Chem., lxix. (1910) pp. 10-21 (3 figs.).

Baak, N. — Alloys of Molybdenum with Nickel, of Manganese with Thallium,
and of Calcium with Magnesium, Thallium, Lead, Copper, and Silver.

[The equilibrium diagrams of the binary systems have been determined by
thermal and microscopical methods.]

Zeitschr. Anorg. Chem., lxx. (1911) pp. 352-94 (13 figs.).

* Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 138-9 (35 figs.).
t Engineering, xci. (1911) p. 706.

X Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxxiii. (1911) pp. 170-95 (14 figs.).
§ Nachrichten Kgl. Ges. Wiss. Gottingen, 1911, pp. 181-96 (2 figs.).
|| Zeitschr. Phys. Chem., lxxvi. (1911) pp. 732-42 (5 figs.).
« Foundry Trade Journal, xiii. (1911) pp. 530-1.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 829

Berg, C. P. — Heat-treatment of High-speed Tools.

Journ. West. Soc. Eng., xv. (1910) pp. 738-54.

Bernoulli, A. L. — The Law of Babo and the Electron Theory of Metallic
Mixed Crystals. Ber. Deutsch. Phys. Ges., xiii. (1911) pp. 213-18.

Borne mann, K.— Binary Metallic AlloyB.

[Further instalments of this summary of published researches.]

Metallurgie, viii. (1911) pp. 270-80, 289-95, 358-65 (47 figs.).

Boudouard, 0. — Testing of Metals by Observation of the Damping of Vibra-
tions. ' Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 45-7.

Brooks, K. P. — Besistance of Metallic Mixtures and Alloys.

[It is shown that the high resistance of alloys cannot be explained by the
presence of opposing E.M.F.'s at the junctions of neighbouring particles
of the two components.] Phys.Zeitschr., xi. (1910) pp. 471-3.

Campion, A. — Notes on the Treatment of Steel Castings.

Foundry Trade Journal, xiii. (1911) pp. 531-2.

Calvo, A. R. — Electrical Conductivity of Silver Amalgams and of Cadmium
Amalgams. Ion, ii. (1910) pp. 408-10.

Charpy, G., & S. Bonnerot— Gases contained in Steel.

[The gases were extracted by heating the steel at 950° C. in a vacuum ; they
were measured and analysed. The removal of the gases had no effect
upon the thermal critical points.]

Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1247-50.

Desch, C. H. — Composition of Eutectic Mixtures.

Trans. Faraday Soc, vi. (1911) pp. 160-6.

Pay, IT. — Some Causes of Failure in Metals.

[Metallographical investigations of some defects in steel are described.]

Mech. Eng., xxvii. (1911) pp. 690-1.

Greenwood, H. C. — Vapour-pressure Curves and Heat of Evaporation of Metals
of High Boiling-point. Zeitschr. Phys. Chem., lxxvi. (1911) pp. 484-90.

Guertler, W. — Electric Conductivity and Temperature Coefficients of Alloys.

Phys. Zeitschr., xi. (1910) pp. 476-9.

Guillaume, C.E. — Anomalous Dilatation of Nickel Steels.

Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 189-91 (2 figs.).

Hart mann, L. — Meohanism of Permanent Deformation in Metals Strained in
Tension.

[A study of the surface-changes observed during the loading of tensile test-
piecea, and of the effect of previous cold- working, annealing, etc., upon
these changes.]

Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1005-7, 1034-6, 1233-7.

Heyn, E. — Formation of Graphite in Iron Alloys.

Zeitschr. Elektrochem., xvii. (1911) p. 182.

Is hew sky, W. — Production of Granular Pearlite by Annealing Steel in an
Electrically-heated Vacuum Furnace.

Journ. Russ. Met. Ges., 1910, pp. 196-202.

Jeriomin, K. A. — Formation of Graphite in Iron Alloys.

[The view that graphite results from the decomposition of cementite is dis-
cussed and supported.] Zeitschr. Elektrocliem., xvii. (1911) pp. 93-8.

Johnson, F. — Annealing of Copper and Diseases of Copper.

Met. and Chem. Eng., ix. (1911) pp. 87-90 (4 figs.).

,, ,, Notes on the Metallurgy of Wrought Copper.

Met. and Chem. Eng., ix. (1911) pp. 396-401 (9 figs.).

Jolibois, P. — Allotropic Varieties aud Melting-point of Arsenic.

Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 1767-9,

Dec. 20th, mil 3 H

830 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES.

Lebedew, P. — Melting-point Studies of some Bisilicates.

[The author has applied metallographical methods to the investigation of
the equilibrium of some binary systems of silicates ; some excellent
photomicrographs are given.]

Zeitschr. Anorg. Chem., lxx. (1911) pp. 301-24 (15 figs.).

Mc Willi am, A., & \V. R. Barclay — The Adhesion of Electro-deposited Silver
in relation to the nature of the German Silver Basis-metal.

Journ. Inst. Metals v. (1911) pp. 212-27 (5 figs.).

Mason, W. — Liiders Lines on Mild Steel. Engineering, xcii. (1911) p. 81-

Mat we jew, M. — Reagents employed in the Metallography of Iron.

Joum. Euss. Met. Ges., 1911, pp. 301-2,

Parravano, N. — Ternary System Silver-tin-lead.

[The equilibrium diagram, determined by thermal and microscopical me-
thods, belongs to the same type as that of the copper-antimony-bismuth
system.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xx. (1911) 1, pp. 170-2.

Primrose, J. S. G.— Metallography as an Aid to the Ironfounder.

[The metallographical investigation of defects and of causes of failure is dis-
cussed ; numerous examples are given.]

Foundry Trade Journal, xiii. (1911) pp. 525-30 (16 figs.).

Putnam, W. P. — Malleable Annealing Temperatures.

Foundry, xxxviii. (1911) pp. 283-5 (8 figs.).

Sauveor, A. — Metallography and its Industrial Importance.

Met. and Chem. Eng., ix. (1911) pp. 239-41.

Sie verts, A. — Solubility of Hydrogen in Copper, Iron, and Nickel.

[The solubility has been determined at pressures up to 1*5 atmospheres
and in the temperature range 400°-1600° C]

Zeitschr. Phys. Chem. lxxvii. (1911) pp. 591-613 (2 figs.).

Smith, C. A. M., & H. J. Humphries — Some Tests on White Anti-friction Bear-
ing Metals. Joum. Inst. Metals, v. (1911) pp. 194-211 (9 figs.).

Stoughton, B. — Annealing and Manufacture of Converter Steel Castings.

[The effect of annealing upon the coarse structure of steel castings is dis-
cussed.] Foundry Trade Journal, xiii. (1911) pp. 467-9 (7 figs.).
Wahl, W. A. — Chemistry of Meteorites.

[A description of the microscopic structure of some meteorites is included.]
Zeitschr. Anorg. Chem., Ixix. (1910) pp. 52-96 (13 figs.).

Weiss, P. — Magneton in Solid paramagnetic Substances.

Comptes Rendus, clii. (1911) pp. 688-91.

Winogradow, A.— Characteristics of Carbide of Iron.

Journ. Russ. Met. Ges., 1911, pp. 296-8.

881

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

MEETING

Held on the 18th of October, 1911, at 20 Hanover Square, W.,
H. Gr. Plhdier, Esq., F.R.S., etc., President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of June 28th were read and confirmed,
and were signed by the President.

Nuttall.

The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received
since the last Meeting, was read, as follows, and the thanks of the Society
were voted to the donors : —

Ernest Edwin Austen : A Handbook on the Tsetse-Flies \ Trustees of the

(8vo, London, 1911) / British Museum.

Annie Lorrain Smith : A Monograph of the British Lichens, i r)-,.

Part II. (8vo, London, 1910) j nUt0-

Geo. H. P. Nuttall and Cecil Warburton : Ticks. A Mono- 1 p , r jt rn

graph of the Ixodoidea, Part II. (8vo, Cambridge, 1911) . . | ±T0/- Creo" a' ^
Ditto. Bibliography (8vo, Cambridge, 1911) . . . . (
Waldron Griffiths : The Principal Starches Used as Food,! The Autho

2nd edit. (4to, Cirencester, 1911) /

Richard Strachan : Basis of Evaporation. Notes on the'l „,, ..,

Climate of Ireland (8vo, London, 1910) j

Recueil de lTnstitut Botanique Leo Errera, Tome Supple-}

mentaire VII bis (8vo, Bruxelles, 1910) \ M Jean Massart

Ditto. Annexe au Tome VII bis (8vo, BruxeUes, 1910) [ m' Jean massan-
Ditto. Tome VIII (8vo, Bruxelles, 1911) j

M. Athias, Sobre as Divisoes de Maturacao do Ovulo dosl mh a fj ■
Mammiferos (8vo, Lisboa, 1910) J

Old Microscope by Pritchard Capt. A. F. G. Warrington.

Twelve Slides of Rock Sections Mr. H. J. Grayson.

Mr. Barnard showed a new Microscope, designed particularly for
photomicrography, the main point in which was its great stability. The
Microscope was built on the well-known Wales model, and had been made
to his specification by Messrs. Swift and Son. The body-tube, stage,
and snb-stage were all carried on one substantial casting, ensuring the
utmost rigidity of all the movements. The mechanical stage had
considerable range in each direction, allowing very large objects to be
examined, and could be removed. The draw-tube was racked, and had
more than sufficient range for use with long or short tube objectives.
Altogether it seemed to him to be an extremely useful type of stand,
suitable for high-power work of the most critical nature, and so well
balanced as to be equally stable either in a vertical, inclined, or horizontal

3 h 2

832 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

position. It embodied every feature likely to be required in an instru-
ment of such a type, and was not open to the objections that might be
urged against some well known stands supplied for the work in view.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to Mr. Barnard for liis
exhibit.

Dr. T. W. Butcher then read a paper on " The Structural Details of
Cose inodisc us aster -omphalus" which was illustrated with lantern slides.

At the conclusion of his paper Dr. Butcher said that he wished very
particularly to express his thanks to Messrs. Watson and Sons, Messrs.
Angus and Co., and Messrs. Baker for the loan of Microscopes, various
lenses, etc., and to Mr. Powell who set up a beautiful lens with a very
perfect specimen under it.

Dr. Spitta apologized for the brevity of his remarks, but he had to
leave in a few moments. He would show four slides. The first displayed
what was Mr. Nelson's focus of the diatom. The second, the " rosette
focus," as it has been called — the one in fact that appeared in most, if
not all, of Dr. Butcher's excellent photographs. As regards the mem-
brane which Mr. Nelson reported as having seen, Dr. Spitta approached
the subject in rather a different manner. First, if oblique light is used
with Mr. Nelson's focus, the image will almost (but not quite) form
itself into the same appearance as that obtained when using that illumina-
tion with the rosette focus. But the perfect image was only obtained
when this form of illumination was used with the latter (rosette) focus.
This, to his mind, proved that Mr. Nelson's focus was incorrect, and
that Dr. Butcher's was really the true layer of the diatom to focus.
This was shown in slide 3. To make sure that the effect obtained by
the use of oblique illumination was correct, it was a good plan to use
annular light, for if that showed anything approaching the same images,
it might be confidently believed no false images had been obtained by
the use of the previous method. This was shown in slide 4. Dr. Spitta
added that of course optical reasons forbade obtaining of so good an
image in detail with annular light as with oblique illumination, but of
that he had no time now to speak. The real point was — whichever focus
was tried, no membrane could be seen. He had visually tried several
apochromatic TV and the same type of lens (\ apochromatic) as Mr.
Nelson had used, in fact, all his photographs shown had been taken with
this very combination — yet nothing like a membrane could be seen.
With such a skilled observer as Mr. Nelson, the only explanation he
could offer was that the specimen used must have been of a different
kind from that ordinarily met with, for it was a mistake to think Mr.
Nelson's ^ apochromatic was of new design : Mr. Poser, of Carl Zeiss's,
had distinctly denied such to be the case — being only one out of the
ordinary stock.

Mr. A. E. Brown said that, in corroboration of the correctness of the
photograph made by Mr. Nelson and exhibited by Dr. Spitta, it was
exactly that appearance of the structure of the diatom as found in a
Maryland deposit, which he always obtained with a Leitz TV oil-immer-
sion, when accurately in focus.

Mr. Plaskitt suggested the intermediary structure as being the true

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 833

structure, and the bright points in the rosette patterns as due to the
illumination. From his own observations he had found that fine
undulating continuous lines traversed the whole upper circuit of the
disk, and that beneath these radiated others from centre to periphery.

Dr. Butcher, in reply, remarked that he had nothing further to add.
There would be full scope for discussion on the subject, he thought,
later, when the diatom had been studied by other observers under the
same conditions as those in which he himself had worked.

The President said that there appeared to have been some difficulty
about Mr. Nelson's description of the objective which he used on this
particular object. He would like to suggest that, perhaps, the mistake
might have arisen, as in other cases, by the use of the word " series,"
which the Germans used for a batch of lenses ; thus it was quite likely
that the words " new series," meaning a new batch of lenses, might
have been misinterpreted as referring to a new formula. No new batch
of lenses, however carefully made, and however much of the machine
was used in their construction, could ever be exactly of the same
quality. Thus, in his possession he had a Zeiss apochromatic stated to
have a numerical aperture of 1 ■ 40, which was, however, one of 1 ' 44,
as measured, and as the Zeiss firm only engrave a minimum value on
their lenses, some such error, in the right direction, might be attributed
to Mr. Nelson's lens. The Society was always grateful for any work
on diatoms, as this work had, more than any other, led to the perfecting
of our Microscope lenses. He was sure that all present were very deeply
obliged to Dr. Butcher for his interesting paper, and proposed a cordial
vote of thanks to him, which was carried with acclamation.

In the absence of the authors, Mr. Shillington Scales read a paper
by the Rev. Hilderic Friend, on "New British Enchytraeids," and also
one by Mr. Walter Bagshaw, on " Instantaneous Exposure in Photo-
micrography."

Mr. Barnard remarked that he thought that the method described
was not entirely novel, as magnesium had been used as an illuminant
from the early days of photomicrography. In his experience, the crux
of the whole operation in instantaneous work of this character lay in
having some arrangement for observing the image. There appeared to
be no suggestion of such in the method described. The actual appear-
ance of the object, therefore, whether in focus at the moment of
exposure, or indeed, whether in the field of view at all, was left to
chance. Further, the area of the illuminant is very large in flash-light
work, and this is a fatal objection to its use for anything but the
lowest powers.

The thanks of the Society were returned to Mr. Friend and to
Mr. Bagshaw for their communications.

The President said that before they separated there was a matter
about which he particularly wished to speak. When the Royal Micro-
scopical Society was inaugurated many years ago, a book — the " Roll "
of the Society — was commenced. This book contained the Charter of
the Society, but also contained several double-column pages of very dis-
tinguished names of earlier Fellows of the Society, beginning with dames

834 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Glaisher, President. For some reason or other this Roll of Fellows
ceased ;i bout 1*66, with no indication why it came to an end. The
Council has unanimously decided that it would be a very good thing if
the custom of Signing the Roll were now renewed. Fellows on admission
to the Society would sign this Roll, as they do on admission to many
other Societies ; whereby not only would a book of considerable interest
to our successors be formed, but also a personal record of the Fellows
would be kept. In order to carry out this plan, it bad been decided
that the President and Council of the Society should forthwith enter
their names in the book, and that they should request all Fellows
present to do the same, hoping that at successive Meetings of the Society
other Members, not present that evening, would also sign the book, so
that in course of time a real Roll of the Fellows of the Society would
be obtained. He hoped that this decision of the Council would com-
mend itself to the Fellows, and he was sure that when they saw how
well and with what notable names the Roll had been started, they would
be sorry that the custom had not been continued. 1866 was the date of
the last signature. It was the wish of the Council that it should now
be kept going as a register of the Fellows of the Society from this time
— he supported that wish by signing the Roll, and it would be a great
satisfaction to himself and the other officers of the Society if all present
to-night would follow7 his example.

Mr. Shillington Scales said he would like to supplement the Presi-
dent's words with a little further explanation. The President, Secretaries
and Council, were very anxious, if possible, to draw the bonds of friend-
ship of the Society closer together. New Fellows were elected who,
sooner or later, attended the Meetings of the Society, who were absolutely
unknown to anyone, and who, feeling the aloofness of their position,
tended to lose interest in the Society. The object of the Royal
Microscopical Society was that it should be helpful to all its Fellows,
as well as advance the interests of Microscopy in its dealings with that
subject. The plan, therefore, to be followed henceforth was that each
Fellow on being elected would receive a letter announcing his election,
and asking him to make himself known to the officers of the Society.
At the close of the Meetings, new Fellows would come forward and
sign the Fellows' Roll, and make themselves known to the Secretaries,
who would introduce them to the President and other Members of
Council. This would be done, not with a view of imposing a task upon
any new Fellow, but merely with the view of making the Society more
helpful to him. There was a kindred Society which, for many years
past, had held its meetings in this same building — renowned for the
spirit of friendship and camaraderie among its members — and he thought
it would be well if the Royal Microscopical Society would emulate the
Quekett Club in this respect, and by extending the hand of friendship
and welcome to each new Fellow, thus help him to the attainment of
those objects for which he joined their Society.

The President then signed the Roll, his signature being followed bv
the Secretaries and Council of the Society.

The next Meeting was announced for November 15.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 835

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited : —

The Society : —Rock Section, Graphic Granite from Cara Pook, Western

Australia, prepared by Mr. H. J. Grayson.
Mr. T. W. Butcher : — -Slides of Ooscinodiscus asteromphalus ; Lantern

Slides and Photographs in illustration of his paper.
Mr. E. J. Spitta : — Three Lantern Slides illustrating his remarks on

Mr. Butcher's paper.
Mr. J. E. Barnard : — New Photographic Microscope by Messrs. Swift.

New Fellows. — The following was elected an Ordinary Fellow of
the Society : W. E. Garforth ; and the following were nominated as
Ordinary Fellows : Hamilton Hartridge, Charles Henry Huish, Malcolm
Evan MacGregor, Lewis Noad, Henry Blatch Wells.

MEETING

Held on the 15th November, 1911, at 20 Hanover Square, W.,
H. G. Plimmer, Esq., F.R.S., etc., President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the last Meeting, on October 18th, were read and
confirmed, and were signed by the President.

Mr. Rousselet exhibited an old Microscope by Andrew Pritchard,
presented to the Society by Captain Warrington.

At the conclusion of his description of the Microscope, Mr. Rousselet
said the Society was very glad to have this old Microscope, as they had
no representative of its type in their collection. It was made between
1834 and 18:38, at a time important in the history of the Microscope,
namely, when lenses first became achromatized. Achromatization of
microscopic objectives had been accomplished before 1824, but it was
so imperfect that the lenses were no better than those used in the old
single-lensed Microscopes. Chevalier, of Paris, was the first to produce
an achromatic lens which was serviceable. He did so apparently at the
instance of a Mr. Selligue, in 1824, who was the first to place two, three
or more of these achromatized doublets, one above the other, to obtain
increased magnification ; his plan was to place the convex lens towards
the object, but Charles Chevalier soon found that a much better result
was obtained by reversing this arrangement and placing the flat surface
of the combination towards the object. Between 1830 and 1850 all
kinds of combinations of achromatic lenses were tried and made, princi-
pally by Tulley, Andrew Ross, James Smith, and Hugh Powell, in this
country, eventually resulting in the highly perfected achromatic lenses
as we knew them.

Mr. Rousselet also showed another type of apparatus lent by Mr. A. H.

836 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Lethbridge, combining Telescope and Microscope, which could be used
alternately by unscrewing the eyepiece of the telescope and screwing it
on to a drum Microscope stand. The name inscribed on the apparatus
was that of Charles Nephew & Co., of Calcutta.

Dr. Spitta, in returning thanks to Mr. Rousselet for his interesting
exhibition, asked whether he might suggest that the Society should, if
possible, try to induce Mr. Rousselet to commit his valuable knowledge
in regard to the history of Microscopes to paper. Such a history was,
he believed, nowhere to be found, and he would venture to say that
none possessed so intimate an acquaintance with the subject as Mr.
Rousselet. It seemed a pity, he thought, that they as a Society
supposed to represent Microscopy should not possess some such a
history to which reference could be made when necessary.

The President replied that he thought it would be an excellent thing
if Mr. Rousselet would fall in with Dr. Spitta's suggestion, and he was
sure that all present were of the same opinion. Moreover, the fact that
the collection of Microscopes in their possession was about to be put into
better keeping and condition would, he thought, afford an excellent
excuse for the compilation of a book such as that suggested, and would
at the same time furnish a description of the instruments, which such
rearrangement would make necessary. He hoped Mr. Rousselet would
be persuaded to undertake this work.

Dr. Spitta remarked that after such an invitation Mr. Rousselet
could hardly refuse !

Mr. Rousselet replied that he was afraid it was too big an order.

Mr. Barnard read a paper on "A Geometric Slide Photomicrographs
Apparatus," the principles of which he illustrated by a diagram and by
drawings on the blackboard. The apparatus itself was exhibited.

In the course of his explanation, Mr. Barnard said that the apparatus
was designed on the principle of the geometric slide throughout, as
enunciated by Lord Kelvin and Tate. The geometric clamp was intro-
duced in a modified form only, but was of such interest that a short de-
scription would not, he thought, be out of place. In the photomicro-
graphic apparatus shown, an attempt had been made to embody the
principles of a geometric slide throughout. Apart from that the design
was such that extreme rigidity was obtained, and there was little or no
liability of alteration of any of the components as the result of
climatic influences. Owing to this rigidity the whole apparatus would
move together if subjected to any shock or vibration. The base of the
apparatus was made from two castings which were designed on the girder
principle. Each of these might be resolved into a triangle so that the
utmost stiffness was obtained. The two castings were braced together at
each end and in the middle by a small cast piece.

The portion to carry the Microscope was also on a pair of castings,
these being triangular iu shape, and braced together in the same way as
bhe main castings. The former pair of castings was supported at the end
away from the camera on a metal cone, which allowed them to be swung
out from the central position. The female part of the cone was on the

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 837

swinging tail piece, whereas the male portion was on the end of the main
casting. Rods were fastened down firmly on the top of the castings
supporting the whole apparatus, ;md the camera slid along these on two
V-grooves on one side and on a plane surface on the other side. Both
the front and back of the camera were identically supported.

The same method was adopted in that portion of the apparatus
carrying the illuminant and subsidiary lenses.

In all cases the clamps were of simple character and consisted of a
metal bar which engaged on each side of the casting on winch it rested,
and which was tightened up by means of a quick-acting screw. On
manipulating the screw the bar was drawn against the side of the casting.
The camera itself was supported on vertical rods, firmly fixed on the geo-
metric slides. There Avas nothing peculiar about the camera portion as
such, except that on one side of it a small white screen was supported,
so that when the Microscope was thrown out of alignment an image might
be observed on the subsidiary screen. The final focusing, of course, had
to be done on a ground or clear glass screen in the usual manner. The
apparatus shown could be used equally well as an horizontal or vertical
camera, or it might, if required, be inclined at an angle of 45°. It
might be used for photographic specimens which required to be in a
horizontal or vertical position.

Mr. Barnard said that he had wished also to refer to the method of
supporting the whole apparatus, but the Secretary would admit that he
had been a little hurried in bringing the apparatus forward, for it had
only been finished during the day. It was proposed that it should be
carried on two castings, one at each end. The one at the camera end
would, in fact, be of the character of a cradle. He was of opinion that
this method of supporting the apparatus might be carried even further,
as he had experimented with a somewhat larger arrangement in which
the camera was swung by short springs, so that in the case of anyone
working under trying conditions, the apparatus would be free from
extraneous vibrations.

Mr. Shillinirton Scales said that it seemed to him that the most in-
teresting and ingenious point about this apparatus was, that so far as he
knew there was no other photomicrographic apparatus on which the
Microscope itself was made to move in the same optic axis as the optical
and camera adjustments, whether the camera were used in a vertical, hori-
zontal, or inclined position. He had listened carefully, and he did not
see that the optical adjustments themselves offered any advantage over
the optical bench. He presumed that the various optical fittings had to
be centred by screws. He thought the adjustments of the camera were
exceedingly clever ; the camera was not supported on any base, and could
be adjusted up and down. It had struck him on looking at the apparatus
that there might be a little lack of rigidity, but Mr. Barnard had ex-
plained that he had been hurried, which would adequately account for
this. The only other criticism he had to offer was in regard to the cost,
which he thought might perhaps be excessive.

Dr. Spitta said it was, of course, a mere matter of detail, but was not
the distance between the illuminator and the Microscope somewhat short ?

Mr. Barnard answered that, as it then stood, it might perhaps

838 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

be somewhat short, but it must be remembered that the apparatus
wasmerely a model. If, however, any difficulty were experienced, there
was in it the slightest reason why the illuminant should not be carried
over the back, or that longer supporting castings should be used.

Dr. Spitta objected that he thought it might strain the apparatus.

Mr. Barnard said that it could be supported so that its weight came
over the centre of gravity of the swinging tail-piece. Mr. Scales thought
that the apparatus would not be so easy to use from the point of view of
centering in comparison with the triangular bar. So far as his (Mr.
Barnard's) experience went, the triangular bar was not entirely satis-
factory. One had to rely so entirely on the setting-up of the fittings on
the triangular bar, and also on the extent to which the olamping-screw
was tightened. He ventured to suggest that triangular bars were even
open to improvement. By altering the shape of the groove in the bar
it would be possible to change the direction of the strain from a lateral
to nearly a vertical pull.

Dr. Spitta said there was no need to screw up.

Mr. Barnard replied, that even if reliance were placed on the fitting,
there was still the question of the lateral adjustment of the lens to the
optical axis. He thought the main point, however, was that of cost which
had been raised by Mr. Scales, and which he ought to have dwelt on. He
thought really it should be the cheapest apparatus yet built considering its
efficiency, because there was no fitting to be done. A pattern was made in
each case, from which two castings were taken. So far as the geometric
solids went they were rough castings. All bolting together was done by
means of holes provided in the castings, and the whole could be braced
up together. It would be difficult to imagine an apparatus in which
there was less work, and in all such appliances it was the labour, and not
the material, that cost money.

The President said he was very glad indeed to hear this account of
the cost. He thought that anyone who, like himself, had taken so many
photomicrographs for many years with an inferior instrument, would be
full of envy of such a machine. There was one point about the appa-
ratus on which he had to congratulate Mr. Barnard, and that was its
compactness as compared with Sir. Barnard's earlier models, one of which
he remembered somewhat resembled a suspension bridge in shape
and size. He thought from what he could see of the model that this
instrument would be extremely rigid. The thanks of the Society would,
he was sure, be cordially accorded to Mr. Barnard for the very interesting
aud important illustration of an apparatus which would prove to be of
the greatest value, especially if the cost was what Mr. Barnard had led
them to hope.

The vote of thanks proposed by the President to Mr. Barnard was
carried with acclamation.

A paper by the Rev. Hilderic Friend on " British Enchytraeids II. ;
the Genus Fridericia," was read by Mr. Shillington Scales in the absence
of the author. Mr. Scales said that as the paper proved to be of a very
technical character, he would merely deal with those points of salient
interest. In conclusion he said that there followed a I0112; classification

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 839

of Enchytneids which he would omit ; he was sure, however, that when
the paper appeared in print all would agree that it was an important
contribution to a neglected group, and that the Society would con-
gratulate themselves on possessing among their Transactions a paper of
this kind from a comparatively new Fellow of the Society.

A cordial vote of thanks was returned to Mr. Friend for his
contribution.

The President said that before they separated he desired to accord
a very hearty vote of thanks to Messrs. C. Baker and Co. for the loan of
Microscopes in which the rock-sections presented to the Society by
Mr. Grayson were being exhibited. The vote of thanks was cordially
carried.

With regard to the next meeting of the Biological Section, the
President said he had been asked to state that a visit would be paid to
the London School of Tropical Medicine, Royal Albert Docks, on the
29th inst., by kind permission of Sir Patrick Manson. Mr. Scourfield
would supply any information in regard to this meeting which might be
desired.

He also wished to remind the Fellows that the Roll Book was there,
and that he desired that any Fellow present who had not yet signed
would be kind enough to do so now.

The next Meeting was announced for December 20, when a lecture
would be given by Mr. F. Shillington Scales on "The Photomicrography
of the Electrical Reactions of the Heart," and a paper would be read
by the Rev. Hilderic Friend.

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited : —

The Society : An Old Microscope by Pritchard, presented by Captain
A. F. G. Warrington ; a Telescope combined with a Microscope, lent
for exhibition by Mr. A. H. Lethbridge ; the following Slides of
Rock-sections, presented by Mr. H. J. Grayson : Anorthoclase
trachyte, Diorite, Flint, Beach boulder, Grano-diorite, Olivine
basalt, Sandstone, Serpentine, Tourmaline pegmatite, Trachytoid
phonolite.

Mr. J. E. Barnard : A Geometric Slide Photomicrographic Apparatus
and Diagram, in illustration of his paper.

New Fellows : — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of the
Society : — Hamilton Hartridge, Charles Henry Hnish, Malcolm E.
MacGregor, Lewis Noad, Henry Blatch Wells.

Corrigenda.

' Page 410, line 2 from bottom—" 5 " sJwuld read " g."

Page 538 — the first line should be deleted. It has been " lifted " from between
last line of page 539 and first line of page 540, where it should be read in.

Pages 599, 600, 601, Figs. Plate XIX.— E and B refer to figs. 1 and 2 ; D to
fig. 3 ; A and C to figs. 4 and 5.

841

INDEX.

Abderhalden, E., Enzymes iD different

Bacteria, 94
Abrasion and Crushing, Resistance of

Steels, 714
Acetobacter melanogenum, 402
Achard, C, Distinguishing Dead from

Living Leucocytes, 117
Achatina, Abnormal Shells, 196
Acne, Bacillus, 262
Achtheres, Development, 756
Actinians, Studies, 211
Actinomycosis of Plants, 92
Adams, L. H., Influence of Pressure on

the Melting-points of Metals, 563
Adams's " Variable " and the Evolution

ot the Modern Microscope, 178
Adductors, Contraction in Fresh-water

Mussels, 616
Adipose Cells of Pontobdella muricala, 624
iEolMidae and Tritoniadae, Blood-vessels

and Nerves, 196
Aerator suitable for Laboratory Aquaria,

24
Agar, W. E., Spermatogenesis of Lepido-

siren, 608
Agaricaceae, German, 394
Agglutination of Tryjianosomes, 824
Almfeldtia gigartinoides, 504
Air-sacs in Birds, 613
Alcock, A., Classification of Culicidae, 619
Alcyonarian, New Type, 764
Alcyonarians, Australian, 364

— West Australian, 54
Alcyoniiiium, New Species, 51
Alectoria, Northern Species in America,

683
Alexeieff, A., Division and Encystation of
Amoeba Umax, 474

— Division in Amoeba punctata, 474

— Intestinal Flagellates of Marine

Fishes, 369

— Notes on Flagellates, 632

— Studies on Amoebae, 474
Alga, Corroding, 502

— Symbiotic, 233

Algae and their Study, 230

— Black Sea, 387

Algae. Classification, 385

— Effect of Light, 785

— Epiphytic, Two, 501

— Fresh-water, African, 230

from Greenland, 390

from Macedonia, 390

— from the Laboratory at Roscoff, 70

— Green and Conjugates, Metachromatic

Bodies, 72
— - — Californian, 503

— Injury to Water-cress Beds, 500

— Marine, from the Kermadecs. 230
Japanese, 229

— Nuclear Autochromatism, 785

— Nutriment, 498

— Nutrition, 659

— of Andritz, 390

— of Kamerun, Marine, 790

— of North Carolina, 660

— of the Clyde Area, Fresh-water, 788

— of the Elf Loch, 230

— of the Sheffield District, 230

— of the Upper Pruth, 72

— of the West Coast of Norway, 506

— of Tripoli, 660

— Phylogeny, 498

— See Contents

Algal Coals, Supposed, Investigating
Nature of, 262

— Figures on Culture Flasks, 785

— Flora of the Missouri Botanical

Garden, 230
Algological Notes, 73, 386, 503
Algology, Marine, 790
Alimentary Canal of Dytiscus, 748

of Helix pomatia, 747

Allan, G. M., Mammals of West Iudies,

612
Allan, M. J., An Easy Method of Treating

Printing-out Paper for all Kinds of

Photography, 129

— Variable Eye-piece, 570, 693
Alligator, American, Development of

Enteron, 187

Alloys, Aluminium,

nesiuni, 711

— Aluminium-calcium, 123

— Aluminium-magnesium, 825

— Aluminium-silver, 268

containing Mag-

842

INDKX.

Alloys, Antimony-lead, Shrinkage, 418

— Copper, Occluded Gases, 418

— Copper-zinc, New Critical Point, 710

— Defects. 560

— Electrical Conductivity, 563

— Gold-magnesium, 123

— in Microscopical Anatomy. Injection of

Fusible, 822

— Iron -antimony. 558

— Iron-carbon, 125

— Iron-nickel-copper. 127

— Iron-silicon-carbon, S26

— Lead-tin, 711

— Metallic, •' Filiations." 7 IT)

.Molten, Electrical Conductivity, 274,

;.6(i

- of Aluminium and Zinc, 711

— of Cadmium, Bismuth and Lead, 417

— of Copper, Antimony and Bismuth, 124

— of Lithium, 123

— of Silicon with Metals, 712

— of Silver with Cadmium, 825

— of Sodium witli Silver and Gold, 556

- of the Noble Metals, 417, 826

— Palladium-gold, Occlusion of Hydro-

gen. 557

— Pseudo-binary, 561

— Silver -cadmium, 123

— Silver-copper, 124

— Silver-sodium, 124

— ■ Steels, Cementation, 713

— Tellurium. 416

— Ternary, of Lead, Tin and Antimony,

556

- of Magnesium, Zinc and Cadmium,

124
Alopecia areata of Bacterial Origin, 687*
Aluminium A llovs containing Magnesium.

711

— and Zinc Alloys, 711

— Silver and Bismuth, Effect of upon

Copper, 418

— Spontaneous Disintegration, 555
Aluminium-calcium Alloys, 123
Aluminium-magnesium Alloys, 825
Aluminium-silver Alloys, 26S

Alytu* obstetrirans. Involution of Tail. 738
Amakebe, Transmission by Brown Tick,

622
Amalgams containing Silver and Tin, 557

— Zinc, 4 1 7

Amann, J., BinocularMicroscope, 806

— Ultramicroscopical Study of Solutions

of Iodine, 545
Amann, Y., Direct Enumeration of

Bacteria in Water, 552
Amber, Blattidse in. 465
Ambi -coloured Flatfish, 746
Ambrosia Fungus, 396
Ambroz, A., Thermobiosis, 403
Amia, Development of Pectoral Fin, 607
Amoeba diploidea, Depression and Apog-

amy, 475

Amoeba Umax, Division and Encystation,
171

— punctata. Division, 474

— Reactions to Light, 366
- Studies, 174. 767, 821

Amphibia, Blastopore Closure, 347
Amphibians, Corpora Adiposa, 613

— Production of Supernumerary Limbs.

187
Anabiena rycadete, Life-history, 663
Anaerobe, New, in Typhoid Stools, 688
Anaptychia and Physcia, Apothecial

Development, 401
Anatomy of Seed Plants. See Contents
Andrade, E. N. da O, Viscous Flow in

Metals. 274
Andre', E , New Species of Mesnilella, 635
Andreseaceae. 65
Andrejew, P.. Comparative Study of Coli-

form Organisms, 91
Andrews, A. le R., North American

Sphagnum, 782
Andrews, E. A., Jamaica Peripatus. 466

— Rhythms in Termite Communities. 463

— Sperm Transfer in Certain Decapods.

753
Andrews. F. M.. Embryo-sac Development
in Hybanthu* concolor. 21 S

— Spirogyra, 665

Angiosperms, Apetalous, Gnetales, 372

Anguillulid;e of the White Slime of Oaks,
361

Aniline-stained Microscopical Prepara-
tions, Fading, and a New Medium.
415

Animal Life of Sea-bottom, 741

— Tissues, Reduction and Oxidation, 614
Animals, Aquatic, Kquilibration, 614

— Domestic, Reproductive Organs, 743

— Sense of Light, 355

Annandale. N., Barnacles from Irish
Seas. 469

— New Burmese Frog. 353

— Rliizocephalous Crustacean from Fresh-

water, 755

— Spjnges Associated with Yermetidse,

766
Annealing of Steel. 559
Annelid. Papillomatous Neo-formation,

625
Annulata. See Contexts
Annulus of Cynndotitium alpe*ire. <'>•'>
Anonas, Pollination Experiments in South

Florida, 374
Anoplura, Studies on Mallophaga. 751
Ant, Mimicry by Larval Mantis, 356
Antarcti- Genera, New, 498
Antheridia, Amphigastrial, in some

Ptilidioid Hepaticaj, 224

— Embedded in Pteris, 644
Anthomastus, Genus. 54

Anthrax, Relative Immunity of Birds.
37

INDEX.

843

Anthrax, Sterilization Process applied to

Hides in Dry State, 266
Antimony, Copper and Bismuth. Alloys, 124

— Lend and Tin. Ternary Alloys, 556
Antimony-lead Alloys, Shrinkage, 418
Antipatharia, New (ienus, 473
Antitoxins and Toxins, 744

Ants' Nests. Beetles in, 42

Aphanomyces Imvis, 669

Aplozia, Critical Forms. 225

Apogainy and Depression in Amoeba dip-

loiilea. 475
Appel, O., Monograph of Fusarium, 393

— Stii'ly of Hypliomycete8, 79
Appendicitis. Bacteriology, 91
Appendix verniiformis, Oxyuris in, 470
Aquaria, Laboratory, Aerator suitable for,

24
Arachnids, Carboniferous. 467

— See Contents
Arc-lamp. Leitz Liliput, 699
Archaeocyathinae, 56
Archaeopteris, 647
Arenicola loveni, 203
Arenicolidae, Studies, 202
Argas, New Species, 45

Arldt, T., Evolution-centres, 457
Arnnoudoff, N., Dryptodon hartmani, 497
Arnaud, G., Contribution to the Study of

Fumagines, 794
Arnell, H. W., and others, Northern

Mosses. 229
Arnheim, G., Cultivation of Spirochaetes,

819
Arsenides of Tin, 825
Arthropoda, Mounting in Amann's

Chloral phenol, 416

— See Contents

Arthur, J. C. and others, Uredineae. 79
Arthus, M., Toxins and Antitoxins. 714
Arwidsson, I., Irish Maldanidae, 758
Arzbereer, E. G., Fungus Eoot-tubercles,

237
Ascarids of Carnivores. 361
Ascariscanis and A felis, Comparison, 205

— felis and A. canis. Comparison, 205

— Idiochromosomes, 204

Ascaris megalocephala, Compression Ex-
periments with the Fertilized Ovum,
759

Plasmic Reduction in Spermato-
genesis, 625

Role of Plastochondria in Fertiliza-
tion, 759

— Nervous System, 470

— Potency of Blastomeres, 625
Aseocarp of Leotia, 234
Ascomvcetes, Nuclear Evolution, 508

— Studies, 670

Ascophyllum nodosum, Deformation, 503
Asellus aquaticus, Anatomical and Experi-
mental Study. 623
Ashton, J., Iron-nickel-copper Alloys, 127

Ashworth, J. H., Arenicola loveni. 203
- Studies on Arenicolidae, 202
Asp, Horned, New Haemogregarine, 477
Aspergillus niger. Influence of Iron on the
Formation of Spores, 79

— Research, 671

Asplenium alternans in America, 777

— Guichardii, 648

— New Hybrid, 63

— ruta-muraria. Mutations, 379
Asterias forbesii, Polarity of Primary

Oocyte, 472

Asterochlaena, Fossil, Stipes, 61

Atavism, 191

Athias, M., Maturation of the Mammalian
Ovum, 603

Atkins, W. R. G., Cryoscopic Determina-
tion of Osmotic Pressure in certain
Plant Organs, 219

Atkinson. G. F., Dictyophora and Ithy-
phallus, 237

Atyephyra, Large Gregarine, 772

Auerbach, M., Onidosporidia, 213

— Distribution of Myxosporidia, 477
Aidacodisrus superbus, Slides presented by

Mr. Norman Thomas, 571
Aumanu, — , Distribution of Paratyphoid

Bacilli. 402
Avicula and Gorgonia Association, 463
Axis of Corallium. Formation. 55
Azolla filiculoides, Anatomical Study, 490
Azotobactir chroococcum, Pigment, 686
Azur-eosin Solution, Giemsa's, Rapid

Staining. 414

Baccarini, P., Notes on the Larger Fungi,
794

— and others. Research on Aspergillus,

671
Bachmann, E., Relation of Siliceous

Lichens to the Substratum, 683
Bachmann, H., Fresh-water Algae of

Greenland, 390

— Oscillaioria rubescens, 389, 662
Bacillary Disease among Fish, 405
Bacilli, Dysentery, Action on Nitrites and

Nitrates, 94

— Penetration <>f the Normal Skin by

Tubercle, 803

— Tubercle, Methods of Staining, 550
Bacillus anthracis, Minute Structure,

524

— Cellulosse desagregans si), n.. 686

— chlororaphis. Pathogenicity, 688

— coli and Plant-diseases, 804

Artificial Production of a Perma-
nently Atypical, 803
Rapid M'ethod of Identifying, 109

— Coli-form, Mouse Epizootic due to. 240

— rypripedii, 802

84 I

INDEX.

Barittwinfluenzm, New Method for making
111 L-agar tor Cultivating, 820

— Johne's, 94

— Lactis aerogenea, Action upon Glucose,

526

— Nenekii : New Agar - liquefying

( irganism. 245

— of Aon.-. 21 2

— pappulu8, 804

— strict Anaerobic, causing Purulent

Pleurisy, 522

— aubtilis, Trypanotoxin, 522

Bacteriii and other Organic Cells, Method
of Disintegrating, 426, 592

— Cytology, 523

— Different, Enzymes in, 94

— Fermentation of Sugars, 521

— in Frozen Soil, 92

— in Milk, Enumeration, 710

— in Water, Direct Enumeration, 552

— Intestinal, Variability, 525

— Models of Microscopic V ields, 426

— Movements, New Method of Studying,

260

— Negative Staining, 823

— New Method for Differentiation, 109

— Nitrite-formation. 526

— Oxidizing and Reducing Properties,

244

— Studying the Cytology, 413

— Variation and Adaptation, 689
Bacterial Cytology, 404

— Disease of Potato-plant, 247

— Diseases of Orchids, 802
Bacteriological Studies of Danish Butter,

689
Bacteriology, Agricultural, Methods, 521

— of Baltimore City "Water, 524

— of Chorea, 245

— of Landry's Paralysis, 244
Bacterium briosianum, 803

— Briosii, 523

— tumefaciens, 803

— zopfii, Growth, 805

Bagshaw. W., Instantaneous Exposure in

Photomicrography, 721
Baily, F. G., A Stereoscopic Illusion, 411
Bainier, G., New Hyphomycetes, 393
Baker, F. W. W., Anomalies in Objective

Screw Threads, 175, 283
Baldwin, W., British Carboniferous Myrio

pods, 200
Balint, S.. New Methods of Demonstrating

I'lasmodes, 119

— New Mounting Medium for Botanical

Preparations, 265
Bambeke, * '.. Study of Ithyphallus impu-

dicui and Mutinus caninu*, 512
Bancroft, 0. K., Parasitic Fungi, 393
Bancroft, N., Xylem Elements of the

Pteridophyta, 644
Banfield, H. O, Sliding Nose-piece for

Use in Stereo-photomicrography, 95

I'.araduc-Muller, L.. Metallic Silicides. 125
Barbier, M., Obituary, V. A. Gillot, 799
Barbieri, N. A., Physical Nature of

Neuroplasm, 458
Bardeleben, K. v., Right- and Left-

handedness, 192
BarenUia benedeni in British Waters, 762
Barlow, W. E., Alloys of Cadmium, Bis-
muth and Lead, 417
Barlow, W. H., Analysis of Seaweeds, 231
Barnacles from Irish Seas, 469
Barnard, J. E.. A Geometric Slide Photo-
micrographic Apparatus, 836

— A Method of Disintegrating Bacteria

and other Organic Cells. 426, 592

— A Simple Method of Obtaining Instant-

aneous Photomicrographs, 19

— New Microscope, 831

— On the Use of a Metallic Electric Arc

in Photomicrography, 2 1

— Practical Photomicrography, 545
Barnes, E. J., Influence of Vanadium on

Iron and Steel, 827

— Nickel Steels, 827
Barratte, G., Mosses of Libya, 058

— Pteridophytes of Libya, 649

Banett, W. F., Historical Note on Re-

calescence. 270
Bartels, P., Plica semilunaris in Hereros

and Hottentots. 612
Barus, O, Elliptic Interference with

Reflecting Grating, 545
Bassal, — , Staining in Bulk with Hsema-

toxylin, 118
Basidia, I >evelopment, 794
Bassett, H. P., Turbidometer for Counting

Vaccines, 824
Bataille, F., Monograph of Hygrophorus,

81
Butaillon, E., Artificial Parthenogenesis

in Toad, 454
of Toad's Egg. 454

— Experimentally "induced Partheno-

genesis in Toad, 454

— Factors of Traumatic Parthenogenesis,

737
Bateman, H. R., Enquiry into Sleeping-
sickness, 476

— Tabanids and Trypanosomes, 749
Bathie, J. and P. de la, Termites and

Fungi, 397
Bathysciinae, Revision, 620
Batrachians and Reptiles, Innervation of

Heart, 458

— Australian, Hsematozoa, 633
Batrachospermum growing on Molluscs,

7*7
Bats, Tendons of Wing and Leg, 609
Bauer, E., Critical European Mosses, 656

— and others, Rare Species of Bryum, 226
Bauer. O., Heat-treatment ot Bronze, 124

— Stresses in Cold-worked Metals, 562
Baume, G., Measurement of Hardness, 271

INDEX.

845

Baykoff, A., Iron -carbon System, 558
Bdelloida of Tropical Africa, Some African

Rotifers, 1, 129
Bdellourid, Non-parasitic, 471
Bearing Metals, 268
Beauchamp, P. de, Dipleuchlanis, a new

Sub-genus for Euchlanis (Diploic)

propatula Gosse, 363

— Internal Euglenid Parasite, 635
Beauverie, J., Myeoplasm Hypothesis and

Metachromatic Corpuscles, 479

— Osmotic Pressure, and the Form and

Structure of Plants, 484
Becher, S., Studies on Holothurians, 209
Beck, C, 422, 423, 568, 570
■ A New Microscope, 419

— Interferometer, 539, 565

— New Portable Microscope, 569

— Pupil of an Optical System with regard

to Perspective, 817

— Report on the Grayson's Rulings Pre-

sented to the Royal Microscopical
Society by, 449
Beck's London Microscope, Handle Model,
406, 419

— R. and J., Grinding and Polishing

Machine for making Microscopical

Specimens for Metallurgical Work,

554
Beckenkamp, J., Aids to Crystalloptic

Projection, 698
Beckwith, T. D., Diplococcus gadidarum,

the cause of the reddening of the Cod

and other allied Fish, 804
Becquerel, P., Traumatism in Relation to

New Plant-forms, 485
Bedau, K., Studying the Compound Eyes

of Water-mites, 413
Beddard, F. E., Tapeworms from Mammals,

760
Bedot, M., History of the Study of

Hydrozoa, 210
Bee Disease, 616

due to Ao.«ema apis, 769

Beebe, C. W., Account ot the Hoatzin, 193

Bees, Studies, 197

Beetle, Large Egg Laid, 748

Beetles, Digestive Ferments, 619

— in Ants' Nests, 42

— Luminous, Fluorescence, 74S
Beijerinck, M. W., Absorption Pheno-
menon in Microbes, 521

— Acetobacter melanogenum, 402

Bell, L., Opacity of Certain Glasses for

the Ultra-violet, 700
Benedicks, C, Crystallization of White

Cast Iron, 712'

— Ovifak Iron, 713

— Polymorphism of Zinc, 123

— Sulid Colloid Systems in Metallo-

graphy, 560

— Synthesis of Meteoric Iron, 559
Benedict, R. C, Genera of Vittariese, 487

Dec. 20th, 1911

Bengiugh, G. D., Corrosion of Metals, 715

— Heat-treatment of Brass, 417
Bennett, A., Chard xlelligera, 70
Bentley-Taylor Method of Mounting Mos-

quitos, 120
Beresford, D. R. P., Woodlice of Ireland,

Berger, A., Alleged Lactation of Male

Lepus bairdii, 737
Bergh, R., Opisthobranchs of South

Atrica, 39
Berke', — , Horse Parasites in Cameroon,

471

— Microfilaria from a Fowl, 623
Berlese, A., Studies on Injurious Insects,

747
Bernard, C, Presence of Yeast on Tea.

392
Berner, O., Apparatus for Rolling Wax

Plates, 112
Pernhardt, Scarlet-fever Virus, 804
Beminger, J., Effects of Starvation on

Planarians, 627
Bernoulli, A. L., Thermo-electric Forces

of Solid Solutions, 560
Berry, A. J., Occlusion of Hydrogen by

Palladium-gold Alloys, 557
Berry, E. W., Epidermal Characters of

Frenelopsis ramosissirna, 774

— Fossil Lycopodium, 62

— Schizxopsis expcmsa, a Fossil Fern, 489
Berry, S. S., New Cephalopods from

Hawaiian Islands, 746
Bertarelli, E., Alleged Importance of
Demodex in Spreading Leprosy, 622

— Cultivation of Leprosy Bacillus, 526
Bertrand, P., Stipes of the Fossil Astero-

chlaena, 61
Bertrand, T.. Zygopteridese, 61
Besredka, A., Experimental Typhoid

Fever, 524
Betche, E., Queensland Ferns, 491
Betegh, L. v., Foot-and-mouth Disease, 804
Bethe, A., Equilibration in Aquatic

Animals, 614
Bethel, E., and others, Uredineae, 674
Bevacqua, A., Bacteriology of Landry's

Paralysis, 244
Bezzi, M., Cave Diptera, 618
Bialkowska, W., Nerve-cells of Leech and

Earthworms, 624
Bialosuknia, W., Corroding Alga, 502
Bianco, S. lo, Influence of knvironnient on

Reproductive Period, 738
Biernacki, W., Bacillus nenckii: New

Agar-liquefying Organism, 245
Bignotti, G., Batrachospermum growing on

Molluscs, 787
Billard, A., New Plumularid Genus, 365

— Siboga Plumarids, 765

Billard, G., and another, Immunity to

Viper Venom, 193
Binocular Microscope, 806

3 I

846

INDEX.

Biological Stations, 38
Biporse, < ! rowth and Habits, 51
Bir<ls. Air-sacs, 613

— and Deinosaurs, 192

— and Reptiles, Development of Vertebral

Column, 186

— Australian, HaBinatozoa, 369

— Cnccidiosis in Sparrows and other

Wild, 369
- Development of Extremities. 345
of Sympathetic Nervous System, 32

— Echinostomidse, 205

— Entozoa in Australian, 760

— Hybrid, Ovary, 604

— Migration, 74*3

— Ileal Caecum, 192

— Passerine, Directive Markings, 352

— Relative Immunity to Anthrax, 37

— Retina, 610

— Size of Spleen, 352

— Southern, Mallophaga, 465

— Tapeworms, 760

— Tonkin, Microfilarias, 361
Birge, E. A., Notes on Cladocera, 47
Bismuth, Cadmium and Lead Alloys, 417

— Copper and Antimony Alloys, 124

— Silver and Aluminium, Effect of upon

Copper, 418
Bismuthides, 825
Bison, American and European, Fertility

of Hybrids, 4.").")
Blanc, G., New Species of Echinorbynchus,

1 126
Blastonieres, Potency in Ascaris, 625
Blastopore Closure in Amphibia, 347
Blattidse in Amber, 465
Blind, Sense of Direction, 612
Blodgett, M., Origin and Development of

Bulbs in the Genus Erythonium, 371
Blood, Action of Radium Radiations, 611

— Amphibian, Spindle-cells, 740

— Corpuscles, Red, Direct Division in

Scorpsena, 35

of Mammals, 609

White, and Spleen in Bvfo vulgaris,

Origin, 346

— Films, Staining, 264

— Formation in Grass Snake, 18S

— of Insects, 616

— of Varanus varius, Hsemogregarine, 57

— Parasites, 57

Blood -agar for Cultivating Bacillus in-
fluenzx,1$ew Method for making, 820

Blood-vessels and Nerves of iEolididse and
Tritoniadse, 196

Blow-fly, Flying Apparatus, 618

— Metamorphosis, 198

Bluntschli, H, Teeth of Two Dentitions

in a Dermoid Cyst, 604
Bodecker, C. P.. Celloidin Decalcification

Method, 820
Bonicke, L. v.. Heterotypic Division of

Pollen-mother-cells, 637

Borgesen, !•'., West Indian ChlorophyceaB,

667
Bottger. <)., Brain of l.episina, 199
Boletus impolitic, 512
Bolk. L., Development of Pigment-cells in

Teleostean Embryos, 1S7
Bolton, II., Insect Remains from South

Wales Coalfield, 620
Bone-growtli, Abnormal, in Absence of

Functioning Testes, 186
Bones, Femoral, Minute Structure, 608
Bonhote, J. L., Colour Inheritance in

Pigeons, 738

— Webfoot Character in Tigeons, 4.">T>
Bonnet, A., Cavernicolous Gamasids, 752
Born, E.. Minute Structure of Phyllirhoe

bucephala, 196
Bornemann, K... Electrical Conductivity of
Molten Alloys, 274

— Equilibrium Diagrams, 560

— Nickel-sulphur System, 416
Bornet, E„ M. A. Gomont, 390
Boshart, K., Leaf-symmetry and Exo-

trophy, 639
Bosso, A. W. v., Caulerpa, 74

— New Genera from the Malay Archi-

pelago, 75
Bostrychidse, Nutritive Habits, 620
Botanical Preparations, New Mounting

Medium, 265
Bothriomolus. Excretory System, 471
Bothrioneurum iris, 469
Botrydium granulatnm, 666
Bouchard, C., Sleeping and Waking, 611
Bouet, G., Leptomonad in Euphorbias, 367
Boule, L., Heterogamic Gemini in Im-

patiens, 480
Boulenger, C. L., Notes on Structure and

Budding of Limnocnida. 629
Bounoure, L., Digestive Ferments of

Beetles, 619
Bouvier, E. L., New Decapod Pycnogonid,

467
Bouville, R. de Drouin, Bacillary Disease

among Fish, 405

— Crayfish Plague, 753

Boveri, T., Potency of Blastomeres in

Ascaris, 625
Bower, F. O.. Medullation in the Pterido-

phyta. 643

— Morphology of Ophioglossum palmatum,

642

— Origin of Medulla in Ophioglossacea?,

643

Boye'. G., Anti-coagulant Action of Nema-
tode Extract, 205

Boyer.J., New Photographic Apparatus of
the Paris School of Mines. 103

Brady, G. S., Ostracods from Madeira. 757

Brain of Lepisma, 199

Brain-sections, Method of Preserving. 552

— Staining the Medullary Sheath, 120
Brains, Preserving, 824

INDEX.

847

Branch-formation in Mosses. 651

Brand. F , New Chlorophycea? from New

Zealand and Tahiti, 607
Brass, Heat-treatment. 417
Brassfounder, Metallography as an Aid to,

41S
Brau.se. G., Ferns of German Central

Africa, 223
Brayshaw.S. N.. Hardening of Carlion and

Low-tungsten Tool-steels. 271
Breckenridge, J. M., Aluminium-calcium

Alloys. 123
Bredeman.G., Bunt-spores in Meal, Bran.

and Grain, 793
Breed, R. S., Enumeration of Bacteria in

Milk. 710
Bre'ment, E., New Ascidicolous Copepod,

469
Bresadola, G.. and others, British Myco-
logy, 513
Bresadolia, New Species. 236
Bridgman, P. W., Action of Mercury on

Steel at High Pressures, 272
Brindley, H. H., Habits of Procession

Caterpillar, 42
Briquet, J., Corsican Ferns, 491
Britton, E. G.. Philonotia revised by Dis-

mier, 654

— Splachnobryum in Greenhouses, 383
Broch. H., Australian Pennatulids, 365

— Hydroids of Drobak, 365

— New Genus of Hydroids, 52

— Pennatulacea, 765

■ — Peridinium 1'lankton at Rovigno, 57

— Plankton of Spitzbergen. 39
Brackhausen, H, Moss-flora of Rhine-
land, 656

Brolemann, H. W., Cavernicolous Myrio-

poda, 44
Broesike. G.. Nature of Seminal Fluid in

Man. 60S
Broniewski, W., Aluminium-magnesium

Alloys, 825

— Aluminium-silver Alloys. 268

— Electrical Conductivity of Alloys, 563
Bronze, Heat-treatment. 124

lironzes. Quenching, 268

Broquet, C, Method of Preserving Plague

Material. 120
Brotherus, V. F., Allionella, a New Genus,

780

— Moss- flora in Central Asia, 4!»5

— Mosses of New Caledonia, 784
Broussonetia, Latex Diastases, 483
Brown, H. B., Crataegus : Some Theories

concerning the Origin of its Species,
220
Brown, J. M., Respiration and Circulal
in Tipuln maxima, 74'. >

— Rhizopods from Lake District, 475
Brown, W. H., Altjae of North Carolina,

660

— Ascoearp of Leotia, 234

Brown, W. H., Cell-division in Lynirbva,
500

Brownlee. J., Inheritance of Complex
(irowth -forms, 347

Bruce. 1).. Enquiry into Sleeping Sick-
ness. 476

— Tabanids and Trypanosomes, 749

— Trypanosoma evansi, 771

— and others, New Trypanosome, 770

Studies on Trypanosomes, 769

Transmission of Sleeping Sick-
ness, 770

Trypanosoma namum (Laveran),

770
Brues, C. T-, New Species of Peiipatus

from Grenada, 752
Brumpt, E., Nematodes in Deer. 760
Bruni, A. C., Development of Vertebral

Column in Reptiles ami Birds. 186
Bruni, G., Formation of Solid Metallic

Solutions by Diffusion in the Solid

State, 712

— Silver-cadmium Alloys, 123

Bruni, G., and others, Ternary Alloys of

Magnesium Zinc and Cadmium, 124
Brunner's Glands, New kind of Cell, 349
Brunnthaler, J., Coccolithophoriihe from
the Adriatic, 499

— Phylogeny of Algae, 498

Bruntz, L., Elimination by Leucocytes,

195
Bruyn, H. de. Development of Stele in

Dipteris. 644
Bryacese, Wollnya a Genus of, 654
Bryce, D., Bdelloid Rotifera : A New

Classification, 207
Bryologieal Index, 227

— Notes, 65
Bryophyta, British, 381

— Inter-relationship3, 224, 380

— North American, 68

— of German Central Africa, 496

— of North America, 496

— of the Philippine Islands. 68
- of Tropical West Africa. 495

— Social Groups and Adaptive Characters,

779

— - Spermatogenesis, 653

— See Contents
Bryophvtes. Belgian, 656

— British, 494,781

— German, 494

— Hungarian, 229

— Japanese, 783

— New Zealand, 69

— Norfolk, 67

— North American, 658

— of Southern Europe, 495

Bryozoa, Development of Statoblasts, 207

— New Mediterranean, 762
Bryum, Rare Species. 226

Brzezinski. J., Mildew of the Vine in
Poland, 5118

I 2

848

INDEX.

Bubak, F., and others, I n'seases of Plants.

51 1
Buchanan, G., Develo])incntal Forms of

Trypanosoma brucei, 770

— Studies on Australian Earthworms, 024

— Supposed Nematode in Circular Muscle

<>f an Earthworm, 48
Buchanan, Et. E., Hyphomycetes, 673
Buccal Apparatus of Hemiptera, 7.10
Buddenbrock, W., Development of the

Statoblusts of Bryozoa, 207
Budding, Law, in ''Portuguese Man-of-
war,'' 473
Buffa, P., Study of a Thrips, 750
Bufo vulgaris. Origin of White Blood-
corpuscles and Spleen, 340
Bug, Ghost, Secretion, 358
Buguion, E., Buccal Apparatus of Hemi-
ptera, 750
Parte of a Ceylonese Staphylinid, 619

— Pentastomum of Python, 200

— Scelionid Parasite of Spider's Eggs, 41
Bugs, Red, Apple, 358

Bulbs in the Genus Erythonium, Origin

and Development, 371
Bulleidse, Mantle-cavity and Pallial

Organs, 747
Buller, A. H. R., Cystidia of Coprinus

atramentarius, 82
Bulloch, YV., Tuberculosis, 523
Bunt-spores in Meal, Bran, and Grain, 793
Burger, O. F., Gum-inducing Diplodia of

Peach and Orange, 672
Burgess, C. F., Iron-nickel-copper Alloys,

127
Burling, L. D., Photographing Fossils by

Reflected Light, 257
Burrell, W. H., New Variety of Lopliozia

Schultzii, 655

— Norfolk Bryophytes, 67

— and others, British Muscinese, 650
Burri, R., Comparative Study of Coli-form

Organisms, 91
Burrows, M. T., Artificial Cultivation of
Animal Tissues, li)7

— Culture of Tissues outside the

Organism, 188
Bursa Fabricii, Function, 460

Involution, 4o8

Burton, J., Butrydium granulatum, 660

— Breaking of the Meres, 788
Butcher, T. W., The Structural Detail of

Coschwdiseus asteromphalu*, 722
Butter, Dauish, Bacteriological Studies,

689
Buxbaumia viridit, 49.5

C

Caddis-worms, Head-glands, 44
< 'ad nium, Alloys of Silver with, 825
- Bismuth and Lead Alloys, 417

Cadmium, Magnesium and Zinc Ternary

Alloys, 121
I tecum. Ileal, of Birds, 192
Calamites compared with Equisetum, 62

— Leaves, 488

— umhdatus, 4S9
Calamostachys Ludwigii, 489

Calaniis finmarchirus. Diurnal Migrations,

757'
Calculi, Method of obtaining Sections, 263

— Uric Acid, Microscopic Structure, 258
Caiman, W. T., Epizoic Hydroid on Crab,

765

— Heterocuma, 46

— New and Rare Cumacea, 468
Carboniferous Crustacean, 469

— Parasitic ( 'opepod from Cephalodiscus,

47
Calvet, L., New Mediterranean Bryozoa,

702
Cambridge Scientific Instrument Company

Comparator or Reading Microscope,

807
Camisa, G., Bacteriology of Chorea, 245
Campbell, D. H., Californian Green Algae.

503
Campbell, W., Annealing of Steel. 559
Camponotus, North American Species, 357
Capillaries, Spleen, Structure, 349
Capitaine, L., Seeds of European Papa-

veraceae, 218
Capsule-formation of Typhoid Bacilli,

525
Carbide of Iron, Influence of Silicon on

the (Maximum Solubility in 7-Iron,

126
Carbohydrates in Seeds, 480
Carbon and Low -tungsten Tool -steels,

Hardening, 271
Cardioid Condenser, History : Memoran-
dum on the Leitz Mirror Condenser.

693
Cardot, J., Antarctic Mosses, 784

— Mexican Moss-floia, 783
Mosses, 68, 383, 658

— New Antarctic Genera, 498
Carnevali, F., Cementation of Allov Steels,

713
of Steel, 209

— Malleable Cast Iron, 559
Carnivores, Ascarids, 361

Carpenter, F. W., Feeding Reactions of the
Rose-Coral, 53

Carpenter, G. H., Injurious Insects in Ire-
land, 44

— Sudanese Pycnogonids, 467
Carpenter. H. C. H, Growth of Cast-irons

after Repeated Heatings, 826

— New Critical Point in Copper-zinc

Alloys, 710
Carrel, A., Artificial Cultivation of Animal

Tissues, 107
I arruthers, D., Eelvella crispa, SOS

INDEX.

849

Carruthers, R. G., Evolution of Zaphrentis

delanouei, 54
Cartilage Cells, Demonstrating Presence

of Mitochondria, 264

— in Thymus of Eat, 35

Cases, Glass, for Collection of Instruments,

131
Cassidulina, New Species, 212
Cast-iron, " Graphitic," 559

— Malleable, 559

Cast-irons after Repeated Heatings,

Growth, 826
Castings, Malleable, 827
Castration and Malnutrition, Influence on

Development of Sheep's Skeleton, 18b'

— by X-Rays, 347

— Parasitic, of Earthworms, 360
Catalogue, Illustrated, Proposed, 138
Caterpillar, Procession, Habits, 42
Caterpillars, Wood-eating, Digestion, 464
Cattle, Australian, Worm-nests, 626

— Descent, 351

— Ear Mite, 359

Cauchemez, L., New Species of Echino-

rhynchus, 626
Caulerpa, 74
Caullery, M., Notes on Marine Heliozoon,

475
Cauwenberghe, A. v., Giant-cells of Mole's

Placenta, 188
Cavers, F., Inter- relationships of the Bryo-

phyta, 224, 380

of the HepaticsB, 64

Cell and Nuclear Division in Closterium,

665

— Contents. See Contents

Cell, Pure Cultures from a Single, 819
Cell-division in Lyngbya, 500
Celloidin Decalcification Method, 820

— in Microscopical Technique, 121

— Sections of Nervous Tissue, Staining

by Iron-ha3inatoxylin Method, 1 19

— Serial Sections, New Method of

making, 116
Cells, Interstitial Testicular, Role, 740

— Organic, Bacteria and other, Method

of Disintegrating, 592
Cementation by Gases, 269

— in a Vacuum, 269

— of Steel, 269

Centrifuge, Filtering by Aid of, 267
Cepede, C, Astomatous Infusorians, 213

— Haplosporidian Parasite in Donax,

772

— Improvement in the Illumination of

Objects observed with the Binocular

Microscope, 96
Cephalodiscus, Parasitic Copepod, 47
Cephalopoda, Dibranchiate, Genera, 196

— See Contents
Cephalopoda, Japanese, 615

— New, from Hawaiian Islands, 746
Ceramium, 669

Ceratium, Genus, 768, 789

Ceratonornys, 72

Cereals, Rusts, 80

( lerebellum in Fishes, Function, 614

Cerebratulus. Experiments on Ova, 762

Cerithiidffi, Phylogeny, 356

Cestodes, New, from Ceylonese Fishes, 471

Cetacea, Fossil, 37

— Musculature of Pectoral Girdle and

Flipper, 192

— Pelvic Bones, 459
Cbsetognatha from Ireland, 20.5

— West Indian, 204

Chaine, J., Variations in Ureters of

Weever, 38
Chairman (E. J. Spitta), 128, 130, 131
Chalande, J., Doubling of Segments in

Myriopods, 621
Chalon, J., Gonimophyllum Buffliami, 668
Chambers, H, Action of Radium Radia-
tions on Blood, 611
Chapellier, A., State of Ovary in Hybrids

of Goldfinch and Canary, 455
Chapman, F., ForaminilVra from Funafuti,

56

— Ostracods from Funafuti, 47
Chara contraria and C. dissoluta, 69

— dissoluta and C. contraria, 69

— stelligera, 70

Charles, G. M., Anatomy of Marattia, 377
Chatelier, H. le, Metallographic Notes,
556

— Spontaneous Disintegration of Alum-

inium, 555
Chatton, E., Cnidosporidian without
Cnidoblasts, 634

— New Ascidicolous Copepod, 469

Flagellate in Pelagic Copepod, 212

Type of Suctoria on a Copepod, 477

— Parasitic Dinoflagellate, 57

— Pleodorina califoriiica, 502
at Banyuls, 768

— Trypanosome and Leptomonad in

Drosophila, 368

Chauveau, M. A., Phenomena of Visual
Inhibition which may accompany the
re-association of the two Retinal
Images dissociated by the Prisms
of the Stereoscope. Conditions and
Determination of these Phenomena,
410

Chauveaud, G., Evolution of Conducting-
tissues of Vascular Plants, 638

— Transitory Tissues in Vascular Plants,

216
Cheetham, C. A., British Bryophytes, 781
Chelifer ami Chernes, Reproductive Male

Organs, 467
( theliped, Abnormal, of Lobster, 46
Chemical Changes in Seed Plants. See

('(INTENTS

— Magnitudes, Infinitely Small, 410
Chemotaxis of Fern Spermatozoids, 379

850

INDKX.

Chermea i>ini. Notes, 44

Chermezoii. II., Anatomical Researches on

Si a-Mde Plants, 216
Chernes and Chelifer, Reproductive Male

Organs, 467
Cherries. Mildew, 791
Chick, Action of X-rays on Developing,

15 5

— Epidermic Fibrils, 458

— Interchange of Limbs by Transplanta-

tion, 738
Chicken, New Tapeworm, 49
Chilton, C, Crustacea of Kermadec

Islands, 753

— Dispersal of Marine Crustacea by

Ships, 754

— Studies on New Zealand Crustaceans,

754
Chironomidse, East Indian, 463
Chiton, New Fossil from Girvan, 615
Chladochytriaceae, Kesearch, 233
Chlamydomonas Steinii, 662
Chloralphenol, Amann's, Mounting

Arthropoda, 416
Chlorella, Behaviour in White and

Coloured Lights, 385
Chloroleucites, Formation, 773
Chlorophycese from New Zealand and

Tahiti, 667

— West Indian, 667

Chodat, R., Coccogenous Cvanophycea,
662

— Lepidodendron Broicnii, 488 •

— Studies on the Conjugatse, 73
Cholera and Cholera-like Organisms,

Characters, 246
Chondriosomes, Cytoplasm and Chromidia,
609

— in Plant-cells, 479, 637
Chondrosia reniformis, Regeneration, 56
Chordoid Tissue, 188

Chorea. Bacteriology. 245
Christ, H., Chinese Ferns, 491

— Ferns of Annam, 650

— Mexican Ferns, 63

Christensen, C, Ferns of Corea and
Quelpaert, 650

— Ferns of Temperate South America.

223
Chromatic Adaptation in Plants, Com-
plementary, 776
( hromatin Staining, New Method, 414
I ihromidia and Trophospongia, 457

— Cytoplasm and Chondriosomes, 609

— in Cells of Muscidse, 464
Chromium Steels. 827

< liromosomc-reduction in CEnothera, 370

< hromosomes, Accessory in Man, 29

— in Salamander, Studies, 457

— Number, in Parthenogeneticaljy Pro-

duced Larvae of Frog, 454

— of CEnothera Mutants and Hybrids,

370

Chrysler, M. A., Ophioglo*sum palmatum,

777
Chrysomonadeae from Hirschberger Gros-

steich, 661
( 'hrysomi inads, 661

— Russian, Two, 499
Chytridiacese, New Genus of, 799
Chytridiales, Monochvtrium, a New Genus,

508

Cicinnobolus sp. Parasitic on Oak Mildew,
393

on Sphserothei'a mors-uvse, 392

Ciliary and Neuro-muscular Movements,
Converse Relation. 350

Ciliata, Fertilization, 76s

Cilimbaiis, P. A., Pigment-cells in Sheep's
Cornea, 190

Cilium of Treponema pallidum, (>'■'<■'•

Cionia inte&tinalis. Tenacity of Life, 461

Circulation in Tipula maxima, Respira-
tion and, 749

Circulatory System of Lycosa carolinenns,
200

Cirripede and other Commensals of Madre-
pores, 624

Cirripedes, Maxillary Glands, 201

Cladocera, Notes, 47

Cladochytrium cse?piti$, 76

Cladoniae, 89

Cladosporium, Mosses attacked by, 653

Clark, A. H., Comparative Age of Recent
Crinoid Faunas, 629

— New Unstalked Crinoid, 473

Clark, A. Hobart, Recent Crinoids of
Australia, 763

— Interesting Structural Analogy, 191
Clark, A. Howard, New European Crinoid,

76S
Clark, H. L., Echinoderms of Peru, 51

— Genera of Recent Clypeastroids, 472

— North Pacific Ophiuriins, 472
Clarke, E. D., Poisoning by Fungi, 677
Clathroeystis, 788

Claviceps, New Host, 391

Cleland, J. B., Haeniatozoa of Australian

Batrachians, 633
of Australian Birds. 3ti9

— Worm Nests in Australian Cattle, 626
Cler.E., Examination of Water for Typhoid

Bacilli by the Complement-fixation
Method, 547
Clerici, E., Fossil Diatoms in Italy, 788

— Pleurococcus mlphurarius, 78S
Closterium, Cell and Nuclear Division,

665
Clusiacese of North-west Madagascar, 59
Clute, W. N., Eemigramma latifolia, 111

— Nomenclature of Nephrodium, 221

— and others, North American Ferns, 379
Clypeastroids, Recent, Genera of, 472
Cnidosporidia, 213

Cnidosporidian without Cnidoblasts,
634

INDEX.

851

( o-efficients, Temperature, of Electrical

Resistance, 274
Coals, Algal, so -culled, Pteridophytal

Origin. 221

— supposed Algal, Investigating Nature,

262
Cobb, J. W., Influence of Impurities on

the Corrosion of Iron, 828
Coccidian, New, from a Whelk's Kidnev,

771
Coccidiosis in Sparrows and other Wild

Birds, 369
Coccogenous Cyanophycea, 662
Coccolithophoridse from the Adriatic,

499
Cockayne, L., New Zealand Bryophytes, 69
Cockerell, T. D. A , Scales ot Fishes, 38
Cockroach, Degenerate, 465
Codiaceae, 389
Codium tementomm, 666
Coe, H. I., Manganese in Cast Iron, 272
Coelentera. See Contents
Cohen, E., Physico-chemical Studies of

Lead, 417

— Zinc Amalgams, 417
Colacodasya, 505

Cole, L. J., Abnormal Cheliped of Lobster,
46

— Notes on Endeis spinosus, 45

— Pacific Pycnogonids, 45

Coles, A. C, Fading of Anilin-stained
Microscopical Preparations, and a
New Medium. 415

Colgan, N., Marine Molluscs of Clare
Island. 461

Coli-form Organisms, Comparative Study,
91

Colin. H., Absorption bv Plants of Alka-
line Earth Salts. 218

Collembola, New, in England, 620

Collecting Objects. See Contents

Collin, B., New Type of Suctoria on a
Copepod, 477

Collin, R., Staining the Internal Network
in Nerve-cells, 119

Colloderma, a New Genus of Mycetozoa,
90

Collodion Filters. 548

Resistance to passage of Microbes,

548

Colomina, A. de. Large Sun-fish, 195

Colour-change in Fishes. 460

Colour-etching of Steel, 561

Colour-pattern in Hybrid Poultry, Inherit-
ance, 34

Colour-inheritance in Pigeons, 73S

« 'olour-sense of Hive-bee, 40

Coloured Plates of Microscopical Prepara-
tions, 258

Colouring of Trout, 739

Colpidium. Nuclear Changes in Conjuga-
tion, 635

Colpomenia sinuosa, 787

Colver-Glauert, £., Magnetic Properties of
Nickel Steels, 827

— Sulphurous Acid as an Etching Medium,

273
Comb, Fowl's, Fluctuation in Growth, 604
Combes, R., Opinions upon Physiology of

Leaf-fall, 776
Comere, J., Classification of Algae, 385
Comparator or Reading Microscope, 807
Comstock, J. H, Palpi of Male Spiders, 44
Condenser, Cardioid, History : Memoran-
dum on the Leitz Mirror ( 'oudenser,
693

— Jentsch's Concentric, 9S

Conidial Fusion in Ust.ilago Tragopogi-
pratensis, 394

Conifer-wood, Starch-grains and Oil-drops,
638

Conifers, Auatomy and Morphology of
Roots, 371

Conjugate and certain Green Algaa, Meta-
chromatic Bodies, 72

— Studies, 73

Conjugation. Homothallic, in lihizopus
nigricans, 507

— in Paramcecium, 634

— of Colpidium, Nuclear Changes, 635
Conn, H. J., Bacteria in Frozen Soil, 92
Connolly, C. J., Florideae, 786
Conrady, E., 567

Conte, A., Acephalous Lepidoptera, 464
Conulus, Teeth and Buccal Structures, 208
Cook, M. H, Spermatogenesis in Lepidop-
tera, 43
Copeland, E. B., Bornean Ferns, 778

— Papuan Ferns, 779

— Philippine Ferns, 778

— Protolindsaya and other Bornean Ferns,

65
Copepod, New Ascidicolous, 469
Type of Suctoria on, 477

— Parasitic, from Cephalodiscus, 47

— Pelagic. New Flagellate in, 212
Copepods, New Parasitic, 755

— Parasitic on Alcyonarians, 202
Copper Alloys, Occluded Gases, 418

— Antimony, and Bismuth Alloys, 124

— Behaviour towards Gases, 268

— Effect of Silver, Bismuth and Alum-

inium, 418

— Extraction of Gases, 712

— Impurities, 125

Copper-zinc Alloys, New Critical Point,

710
Coppey. A., Moss-flora of Haute-Saone,

382, 656

— Mosses of the Haute-Saone, 229, 782
Coprinus atramentarius, Cystidia, 82
Copulation of Yeast-cells, 392

Coral, New Octoradiate, 210
Coral-formations, History of Study, 473
( orullium, Formation of Axis, 55
Corbiere, L., Moss-flora of Tunis, 382

852

INDEX.

Cordeuroy, II. J. de, Clusiaceoa of North-
wist Madagascar, 59
Coremium-formation in Penicillium, 79
Corixa, Study. 199
Cornea, Excised, Survival, 350

— Sheep's, Pigment-cells, L90
Cornet, A, Belgian Bryophytes, 056
( orpora Adiposa of Amphibians, 613
of Frog, 744

Corpus Luteum, Reticular Apparatus in

Cells, 190
( orrosion of Iron, Iufluence of Impurities,

828

— of Metals, 715
Cortinarii, German, 81

( 'orymorpha, Geotropism, 211

— Regeneration, 210, 365
Coscinodiscus asteromphalus, Structural

Detail, 722
Coste, M., Gold-tellurium System, 417
Cotton, A. D., Colpomenia sinuosa, 787

— Lithopyllum fagcisulatum, 506

— TJlva latissima, 664

Cotyledons, Effect of Injury to upon Seed-
ling Development, 60

Coulter, J. M., American Lepidostrobus,
647

Council, Annual Report for 1910, 134

— New, 137

( oventry, A. F., Theory of Dwarf Males in

Myzostoma, 204
Crab, Epizoic Hydroid on, 765
Crabs, Californian, 468
Crane, C. G., Photogenic Organs of Lam-

pyridse, 464
Crataegus: Some Theories concerning the

Origin of its Species, 220
( ratoneuron and Hygramblystegium, 493
Crayfish Plague, 753
Crinoid Faunas, Recent, Comparative Age,

629

— New European, 763

— New Unstalked, 473
Criuoids, Recent, of Australia, 763
Criodrilus lacuum. Development, 202

— Neurochords, 202
Cristispira and Spirochteta, 58
Crocynia, a Genus of Lichens, 510

I rosby, C. R., Apple Red Bugs, 358
Crossland, C, Fungus Foray at Sandsend,

516
Crushing and Abrasion, Resistance of

Steels, 714
< Jrustacea, Decapod, Pbotophores, 45

- Marine, Dispersal of, by Ships, 754

— of Kermadec Islands, 753

— See Contents

Crustacean. Rhizocephalous, from Fresh-
Water, 755
New Carboniferous, 460
taci aus, New Zealand, Studies, 754

( ryoseopic Determination of Osmotic Pres-
sure in certain Plant Organs. 219

Cryptogams. See C< intents

t 'ryptuinoiiadeaj. 661

< Irystal Plates, Transparent Inactive,
Transmission of Light, with Special
Reference to Observations in Con-
vergent Polarized Light, 409

Crystallization of Cast Metals, 828

— of Steel, S28

— of White Cast Iron. 712
Crvstallograpby of the Iron-carbon Svstem,

125
Crystallojitic Projection, Aids, 698
Ctenodrilus, New Species, 625
Cucumaria. Species. 52
Cuirass of Peridinidae, 768
CulicidsB, Classification, 619
Culmann, P., Notes on Grimmia, 654
Cultivating Bacillus hifluenzse, New

Method for making Blood-agar, 820
Cultivation of Spirochetes, 819
Culture, Mushroom, 82

— Processes. See Contents

Cultures, Aqueous, of Fern Prothallia, 490
Cultures, from a Single Cell, Pure, 819
Cumacea, New and Rare, 468
Cumanotus, Genus, 39
Cunina parasitica, Development, 764
Cunninghamia, Gametophytes and Em-

bryogeny, 481
Curl, H. C, Digestive System of Hornbill,

612
Currant, Leaf-spots, 795
Currant-moth, Spermatogenesis, 357
Curties, C. L., New dark-ground Illumin-
ator designed by E. M. Nelson, 276
Curtis, M., Ligaments of Oviduct of

Domestic Fowl, 35
Curtis, M. R., Weighing Parts of Eggs. 744
Curve, Transformation-point, 126
Cuticle in Insects, Minute Structure, 747
Cutting Apparatus, Rock-section, Improve-
ments, 703

— Objects. See Contents
Cyanophycea, Coccogenous, 662
Cyathaeaeeae and Polypodiacese, Relation

to Woodsiese, 486
Cyathomonas, 6t>J
Cycads, Occurrence of Phagocytosis in

Root-nodules, 80
Cyclas Embryos, Incubation, 463
Cyclops, Revision of North American

Species, 201
Cyst, Dermoid, Teeth of Two Dentitions,

604
Cysticercoids from Rat-flea, 471
Cystidia of Coprinn* atramentarius, 82
Cystotaeniae of South American Felidae, 206
Cytology of Bacteria. 523
Studying, 413

— See Contents

Cytoplasm, Chondriosomes, and Chromidia,
609

— Threads and Granules, 189

INDKX.

853

D

Daday, E. v., Fresh-water Microfauna of
German East Africa, 39. 195

— Micro-fauna of the Nile, 355

Dakin. W. J., New Coooidian from a
Whelk's Kidney. 771

— Physiology of Fish-eggs and Larvae, 738

— Visceral Ganglion of Pecten, 40
Dalyellidae and Umagillidae, 472
Dainniermann, K. W., Structure and

Function of the Saccus vasculosus in
Fishes. 194
Dampf, A., New Flea from Jerboa, 43
Dan forth. C. H., Periodicity in Spirogyra,

231
Dangearil, P. A.. Alga; from the Labora-
tory at Roseoff, 7<)

— Behaviour of Chlorella in White and

Coloured Lights, 385

— Complementary Chromatic Adaptation

in Plants, 776

— Effect of Light on Algae, 785

— Fertilization in Ciliata, 768

— New Genus of Polyblepharidae, 71

— Nuclear Autochromatism in Algae. 785
Daniel, J. F., Gestation in White Mice,

737
Dantschakoff. W., Blood-formation in

Grass Snake, 188
Danvis, E., Head of Kogia hreviceps, 351

— Spermaceti-organ of Kogia breviceps,

37
Daphnids, Sex-determination, 757
Darbois, P., Resistance of Micrococcus

melitensis to Lactic Ferments, 403
Dark-ground Illuminator, with Arrange-
ment for Centring ou a Plain Stage,

Reichert's, 814
Darwacki, L., Presence of Streptotricheae

in Tuberculous Sputum, 522
Daume'zon, G., Tenacity of Life in Ciona

inte&tinalis, 461
Dauphin, J., Study of Mortierellae, 77
Davenport, G. C, a::d C. B., Inheritance

of Skin-pigmentation in Man, 30
Dearness, J., Mushroom Poisoning, 509
Debarva, New Species, 502
Decalcification Method, Celloidin, 820
Decapods Larval Stages, 468

— Sperm Transfer, 751!

Deegener, — , Intestinal Secretion in

Dytiscus. 41
Deer, Nematodes, 760
De'es, E. D. de, Monograph of Phyllopoda

Anostraca, 46

— New Antarctic Phyllopod, 47
Defner, A., Maxillary U lands of ('im-
pedes, 201

Degen, A. von, Dichiton calyculatum in

Croatia. 655
Dehaut, E. G., Heart of Lungless Urodela,

4Ui l

Dehorne, A., Nuclear Changes in Con-
jugation of Colpidium, 635

— Number of Chromosomes in Partheno-

genetically produced Larvae of the

Frog, 454
Dehydrating Apparatus, Washing, 822
Deibel, J., Respiration in Donacia and

Macroplea, 198
Deinosaurs and Birds, 192
Delachanal, B., Occluded Gases in Copper

Alloys, 418
Delacroix, G., Plant Diseases in the

Tropics, 514
Delcourt, A., Immobilising Flies for

Microscopic Investigation, 266
Deleano, N. T., Removal of Starch through

the Petiole, 373
Delezenne, C, Snake-poison and Yolk of

Egg, 613
Delphinium, Splitting of Rhizome and

Root, 774
Demodex, Alleged Importance in Spread-
ing Leprosy, 622
Demoll, R., Migration of Iris-pigment in

Compound Eye, 616
Denys, G., Anatomy of Polyides and Fur-

celloria, 785
Derjugin, K., Pectoral Girdle and Fins of

Teleosteans, 195
Dermestes. Eye, 41

Dershawin, A., Poly podium hydriforme, 365
Descent of Cattle, 351
Desch, C. H., Crystallization of Cast

Metals, 828

— Defects in Alloys, 560
Desiccation-phenomena in Mosses, 381
Desmidiaceae of Bohemia, 232

— Polymorphism and Life-history, 389
Desmids of Burgaschimoos, 665

— Swiss, 74

Desroche, P , Chlamydomonas Steinii, 662

Dessiatoff,- N., Embryo-sac of Euphorbia,
641

Development of Seed Plants. See Con-
tents

Diakonoff, H. v.. Plant-diseases in Russia.
238

Diaptomidae, Geographical Distribution,
201

Diastases, Latex, of Broussonetia, 4S3

— Proteolytic, Action, 642
Diatomic Structure, 503
New, discovered with a New Zeiss

Apochromat, 700
Diatoms, 73
— '■ and Flagellatae from East Greenland,

660

— Fossil. 78S

— from Dahomey, 74

— in Sedimentary Deposits, Study, 385

— Physiology, 784
Dichiton calyculatum in Croatia, 655
Dichotomosiphon and Mischococcus, 788

854

INDEX.

I licranoloma, 66

Dicrocoelium Umceatum, Life-cycle, 361

Dictyophora and Ithypballus, 237

Didinium, "Tricbites," 632

Diedicke, 11.. Genus PhomopsiB, 510

Dietz, E., Echinostomidie of Birds, 205

Dieudoiine's Medium, Selective Action,

260
Digestive System of Hornbill, 612
Dinoflagellate, Parasitic, 57
Dinoflagellates, 769
Diospyros, Morphology, 640
Dipleucblanis, a new Sub-genus for Euch-

lanis (Diplois) propatula Gosse. 863
Diplococcus gadidarum, tbe cause of tbe

reddening of Cod and otber Allied

Fisb, 804
Diplodia, Gum-inducing, of Peacb and

Orange, 672
Diptera, Cave, 618
Dipteris, Development of Stele, 644
Dipylidium caninum in a Cbild, 40
Disease, Bee, 616

— Dissemination by Stomoxys calcitrans,

463

— Fisb, 799
Disease-carriers, 93

Diseases of Economic Plants, 84

— of Plants. 84, 238, 514, 796

— of Trees, Research, 397, 677

— Plant, in tbe Tropics, 514
Disintegrating Bacteria and otber Organic

Cells, Method. 592
Disk of Confusion, Diameter, 282
Disks, Suctorial, of Male Ditiscids. 198
Disney, A. N.. 139
Distaso, A., Bacillus cellulosie desagregans

sp. n.. 686

— Studies of the Intestinal Flora, 687
Ditlevsen, C, Nuclear Budding in Corneous

Epithelium. 610
Dittschlag, E., Research on Uredineas, 394
Dixon, H. H., Edward Perceval Wright,

61
Dixon, H. N., Fissidens tequendamensis,

3t>3

— Hyophilopsis, a New Indian Moss-

genus, 654

— Merceyopsis g.n., and other Indian

Mosses, 66

— Mosses i if Spitzbergen, 494

— Teneriffe Mosses, 382

Dobell, C. C, Affinities of Spirochete, 369

— Cytology of the Bacteria, 523

— Hcemncystidium of the Gecko, 475

— Studying the Cytology of Bacteria, 413
Dodd, S., Blood Parasites, 57

— Microfilaria in .Magpies. 48
Doflein, F., Behaviour of Prawns, 623
Dog, Domestic. Origin, 743
Domerguc. K., liapid Method of Identify-
ing Bacillus coli, 109

Donacia and Macroplea, Respiration, 198

Donax, Haplospoiidian Parasite, 772
Doncaster, L., Effects of One-sided Ovari-
otomy on Sex of Offspring. \~>\
- Gainetogeiiesis of Gall Fly, 748

— Spermatogenesis in Currant-moth, :i57
Donnan, F. G., Solubility of Oxygen in

Molten Silver, 125
Doposcheg-IJhlar, J., Regeneration .and

Polarity of Plant-organs, 219
Douin, I., Inflorescence of Museinese, 779

— Lophocolea minor, not a species, 781
Dragon-fly, Histological Study of the

Innervation of the Heart of Larval,
750

— - Larvse, Experiments, 750

Douville, H., Evolution of Man. 36

Drake and Gander, Penis, 353

Drawings for Projection Purposes, Simple
Method of Making, 100

Drepanocladus. 655

Drew, G. H., Reaction of Tissues of Pecten
to Implantation of Foreign Bodies,
356

Dreyer, T. F., Blood-vessels and Nerves of
iEolididan and Tritoniadse, 196

Drop-bottle for Preventing the Action of
Air on Copper-oxide-ammonia Solu-
tion, 121

Druce, G. C„ Tolypella intricate!, 669

Druery, C. T.. British Fern-varieties, 63

Drugs and Food, Microscopical Examin-
ation, 121

Dryptodon Hartmani, 497

Dubard, M., Remarks on Strephonema. 485

Dubois, R., Fluorescence in Luminous
Insects, 748

Duboscq, O., Selenococidium and the Re-
lationships of the Spoiozoa. 21:;

Dubreuil, G., Mitochondria of Adipose
Cells, 349

Duck, New Tapeworm, 471

Duclaux, J., Collodion Filters, 548

Ducrey's Bacillus and Influenza Bacillus,
Cultivation Medium, 549

Dudgeon, L. S., New Method for Differ-
entiation of Bacteria, 109

Dufour, L., Observations on Primary
Leaves, 215

Dufourt, A.. New Types of Urobacteria, 93

Dung-flies, Herpetomonads, 57

— Oviparity and Viviparity, 198
Dunham. E. M.. Polytrichum, 781
Dunkei ly. J. S., Leptomonad of the House-
fly, 633

Duplicity in Chick Embryos, 33
Dupuy, E. L., Arsenides of Tin, 825
Durand, E., Mosses of Libya. 658

— Pteridophytes of Libya, 649
Dysentery and Typhoid Bacilli, Variations,

526

— Bacilli, Action on Nitrites and Nitrates,

94
Dytiscidse, Oogenesis, 198

INDEX.

855

Dytiscids, Male. Suctorial Disks, 198

Dytiscus, Alimentary Canal, 748

— Intestinal Secretion, 41

Dytiscus marginalia, Nervous System, 41

Dwarf Males in Myzostoma, Theory, 204

E

Ear of Urodela, 193
Earland, A., 139

— Methods employed in the Cruisers of

the International North Sea Commis-
sion, 130

— On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera

of the- Sliore-sands of Selsey Bill,
Sussex — VII, Supplement (Addenda
et Corrigeuda), 298; VIII, Tabular
list of Species and Localities, 436

— Studies on British Foraminifera, 366
Earthworm, Supposed Nematode in Circu-
lar Muscle, 48

Earthworms and Leech, Nerve-cells, 624

— Australian, Studies, 624

— Caucasian, 4S

— Parasitic Castration, 360

— Reaction to Acids, 48

Eber, A., Human and Bovine Tubercle,

686
Echinoderm, Hybridization, 363

— Permian, Remarkable, 210
Echinoderma. See Contents
Echinoderms, Early Stages of Develop-
ment, 363

— of Peru, 51

Echiuoids, West Indian, 20S
Echinorhyncus, New Species, 626
Echinostomidse of Birds, 205
Edgerton, C. W., and others, Diseases of

Plants, 796
Edible Fungus, Culture, 236
Edinger, L., Path of Hvpophysis-secre-

tion, 610

— Pointer-Double-Ocular, 252
Edwards, C. A., Theory of Hardening

Carbon Steels, 271
Edwards, C. L., Idiochromosomes in
Ascaris, 204

— Species of Cucumaria, 52
Eels, Electric, 354

Egg, Large, Laid by a Beetle, 748

— Yolk of, and Snake-poison, 613

Eggs, Herring's, Retarding Development,
739

— Weighing Parts, 744

Electric Arc, Metallic, Use in Photomicro-
graphy, 21

— Eels, 354

Electrical Conductivity of Molten Alloys,
274, 560

— Resistance, Temperature Co-efficients,

274
Elfving, F., Lichen Gouidia, 399

Ellis, IX, Spirophyllum ferrugineum, ('86
Elmassian, M., Examining the Salivary
Glands of Ticks, 109

— Salivary Glands of Ticks, 45
Elmhirst, R„ Ambi-coloured Flatfish, 746

— Pycnogonids of Clyde Area, 200

— Yawning in Fishes, 194

Elwes, E. V., Littoral Polychaeta of
Torquay, 48

Embedding and Fixation of Embryo-
logical Material, 111

— Vacuum, Adaptation of Ordinary

Paraffin Baths for, 26
Embidse, Monograph, 465
Enibryo-sac Development in Hybanthus

concolor, 218

— of Euphorbia, 641

— of the Platanaceae and Ovule, 775
Embryo, Human, Islands of Langerhans,

31
Embryogeny and Gametophytes in

Cuuninghamia, 481
Embryology in Euphorbiaeese, 372
— ■ of Vertebrata. See Contents
Embryos, Chick, Duplicity, 33

— Cyclas, Incubation, 463
Emile-Weil, E , Anti-coagulant Action of

Nematode Extract, 205
Emrys-Roberts Microscope Lamp, 571, 698
Enchytrseids II., British, the Genus

Fridericia, S38

— New British, 730
Encystation in Pelomyxa, 631
Endeis spinosus, Notes, 45

Engelke, C, Notes on Myxomycetes, 520
Enteromorpha, Saprophytism, 231
Enteron, Development in American

Alligator, 187
Entozoa in Australian Birds, 760

— from Clyde Fishes, 49
Enumeration, Direct, of Bacteria in Water,

552

— of Bacteria in Milk. 710
Enzymes in Different Bacteria. 94
Ephemerum and Nanomitrium in North

America, 66
Epidermal Characters of Frenelopsis

ramosissimn, 774
Epidermic Cells of Tadpoles, Thread-like

Structures, 189
Protoplasmic Fibres, 189

— Fibrils in Chick, 458
Epiphytes of the Laminarue, 386
Epithelial Cells of Mammalian Kidnev,

609
Epithelium, Conjunctival, in Man. 610

— Corneous. Nuclear Budding. 610

— Sensory, Supporting Elements, 189

— Tracheal, in Domestic Mammals. 319
Epizootic, Mouse, due toColiform Bacillus,

246
Equilibration in Aquatic Animals, 614
Equilibrium Diagrams, 560

856

INDEX.

Equisetum, compared with Calamites, 62
iximum, Distribution, 048

— Prothallia, 645

Erdmann, It . Depression and Apogaray iu
Amoeba diploidea, 475

— Development of Sarcocy&tis muris, 111
Ergasilidse, North American, 756
Ergot, Insects as Disseminators, 463

— on Oats. 39 1

— Spores, Infection by, 791

Erhard, H., Trophospongia and Chrom-
idia, 457

Eriksson, J., and others, Plant-diseases,
678

Erysipheae, Notes, 671

Erythonium, Origin and Development of
Bulbs in the Genus, 371

Erythrocladia, 7s7

Erythrocytes, Method of Studying Phago-
cytosis by Endothelial Cells, 110

Erythrophyllum delexgerioides, 504

Esterly, 0. O., Diurnal Migrations of
Calanm finmarchious, 757

Etching Medium, Sulphurous Acid, 273

Etherization, Effect of, on Metabolism, 776

Euglena, Red, 662

— viridis, 499

Euglenid Parasite, Internal, 635
Euonymus, Japanese, Oidium, 78
Euphorbia, Embryo-sac, 641
Euphorbiacese, Embryology, 372
Euphorbias, Leptomonad in, 367
Euplotes, Structure, 368

— worcesteri, Division, 368

Eurich, F. W., New Method for the De-
tection of Tubercle Bacilli in Sputum,
823

Eutectics, Composition, 563

Evans, A. W., Hepaticse of the Puerto Rico,
783

of the Bahama Islands. 783

— New England Hepaticse. 67

— North American Hepatics, 782
Evans, I. B. P., and another, Plant-
diseases in South Africa, 678

Evans W., British Bryophytes, 494
Evolution and Heredity, 453

— of Man, 36
Evolution-centres, 457

Ewald, W. F., Contraction of Adductors

in Fresh-water Mussels, 616
Ewart, J. C, Descent of Cattle, 351
Ewen. D., Shrinkage of the Antimony-lead

Alloys. US
Excretory System of Bothriomolus, 471
Exhibition of Pond Life. 427
Exotrophy and Leaf-symmetry. 639
Extra-enteric Aperture iu a Leech, 361
K\tremities in Birds, Development, 345
Eye, Compound, Migration of Iris-pigment,
610

— of Dermestes, 41

— of Protopterus, 741

Eye of Pteropua, 189, 740

— Sensibility to Variations of Wave-length

in Yellow Region of Spectrum, 106
Eye-piece, Allan's Variable, 693

— Variable, 570

— Winkfl's, with Screw Micrometer and

Graduated Glass Diaphragm, 536
Eye-pieces and Objectives. New, by R.
Winkel of Gbttingen, 284, 451

— See Contents

Eves, Compound, of Water-mites, Study-
ing, 413
Eyre. J, 423, 424

F

Fabre-Domergue, — , Cleansing Oysters, 40

— Feeding Habits of Oysters, 40
Fading of Anilin stained Microscopical

Preparations and a New Medium, 415
Fasces, Method of Examining for Evidences

of Parasitism, 554
Fage, L., Study of Species of Gadus, 354
Falck, R., Infection by Ergot Spores, 791
Fantham, H. 15., Bee Disease due to

Nazema apis, 769

— Life-history of Trypanosoma gambiense

and T. rhodesiense, 770

Fat in Ciliated Infusorians. 212

Fat-destroying Fungi, 677

Fatigue of Metals, 274

Fats, Staining, 549

Faull, J. H., Study of Laboulbeniales,
790

Faunas, Recent Crinoid, Comparative Age,
629

Faure'-Fremiet. M. E.. Continuity of Mito-
chondria through many Generations
of Cells, 190

— "Trichites" in Didinium. 632

Faust, O., Limits of Elasticity, and the

Hardening of Metals, 562
Fawcett, H. S., Fungus parasitic on Citrus

White Fly, 795"

— Gum-inducing Diplodia of Peach and

Orange, 672
Fedele, M., Innervation of Heart in Rep-
tiles and Batrachians, 45^
Federley, H., Conidial Fusion in Uttilago

Tragopogi-pratentis, 394
Fedorow, A. S., Alloys of Silver with

Cadmium, 825
Feeding Reactions of the Rose-coral, 53
Felidte, South American, Tapeworms, 49
Felser, H. L., Influence of Segregation on

the Strength of Mill Steel. 270
Felt, E. P., Injurious Insects, 466
Femoral Bones, Minute Structure, 608
Ferdinandsen, C., Fungi from Greenland,

395
from Venezuela and the West Indies,

395

INDEX.

857

Ferguson, M. ('., Embedded Anthcridia in

Pteris, 644
Fermentation and Micro-organisms, 396
Fern, Fossil. Schizasopsis expanea, 489

— Fronds, Mechanism bv which they roll

up, 378

— Prothallia, Aqueous Cultures, 490
Fern-flora of Spain and Portugal, 222
Fern-spermatozoids, Chemotaxis, :;7'.t
Fern-spores, Influence of Light and Dark-
ness on Germination, 401

Fern-varieties, British, 6:>
Fernbach, A., Action of Proteolytic Dia-
stases, (542
Ferns, African. 779

— American, 778

— Bornean. 77s

Protolindsava. and other. 65

— Chinese, 491, 650

— Corsican, 401

— Fossil, Studies, 61

— Japanese, New, 223

— Malayan, 491

— Mexican, 63

— North American, 379

— of Annam, 650

— of Argentina, 223

— of Borneo, 64

— of Corea and Quelpaert, 650

— of German Central Africa, 223

— of Kermadec Islands, 64

— of North America, 222

— of Perak, 77S

— of Schleswig-Holstein, 649

— of South Croatia, 222

— of South Mexico. 63

— of Temperate South America, 223

— of the Falkland Islands, 650

— of the Philippine Islands, 66

— Papuan, 779

— Philippine, 778

— Queensland, 491

— some Mesozoic, and their Leaf-scars, 647
Fertilization in Ciliata, 768

Fever, Parasite of Coast, 770
Filaria bancrofti. Structure, 759

— Blood, in Horse, 470

" Filiations" of Metallic Alloys, 715
Filiciuean Leaf-trace, Evolution, 376
Filter, P., TiUetia horrida in Rice-meal,

510
Filtering by Aid of Centrifuge, 267
Filters, Collodion, 548
Resistance to passage of Microbes,

548
Fin. Pectoral, Development in Amia, 607
F'ink, B., Carolyn Wilson Harris. 90

— Nature and Classification of Lichens,

801
Firket, J., Epidermic Fibrils in Chick, 458
Firs, Witches-brooms, 83
Fish, Bacillary Disease, 405
Fish-Eagle, Leucocytozoou, 477

Fischer, E , Studies in Ascomycetes, 670
Fischer, H., Aqueous Cultures of Fern
Prothallia, 490

— Influence of Light and Darkness on

Germination of Feru-spores, 491

— Negative Staining of Bacteria, S23

— Total Closure of Gut in Healthy Frog,

193
Fish Disease, 799

— Eggs and Larvae, Physiology. 738
Fisheries of New South Wales, 195
Fishes, Ceylonese, New Cestodes, 471

— Clyde, Entozoa, 49

— Colour-change, 460

— Fresh-water, Muddy Taste, 37
Trypanosomes, 632

— Function of Cerebellum, 614

— Irish Sea, Parasites, 49

— Luminous Organs, 745

— Marine, Intestinal Flagellates, 369

— Parasites, 760

— Scales, 38

— Structure and Function of Ihe Saccus

vasculosus, 194

— Sympathetic Nervous System, 606

— Ventral Musculature, 194

— Yawning, 194
Fissidens tequendamen+is, 383

— Variable Leaf-border, 492
Fistulina Eepatica, Hypochnus Form, 512
Fitting, H., Premature Fall of the Perianth.

485
Fixation and Embedding of Embryologica
Material, 111

— and Staining of Glycogen, 821
Fixing and Staining, Simultaneous, 702

— Objects to Stage, 273

Flagellatse and Diatoms from East Green-
land, 660

— and Halosphaera, 660

— Brown, Two, 661

Flagellate, New, in Pelagic Copepod, 212
Flagellates, Intestinal, of Marine Fishes,
369

— Notes, 632

— Polymorphism, 768

— Studies, 634

Flatfish, Ambi-coloured, 746
Flatters, A., The Micrologist, 7<>1
Flea, New, from Jerboa. 43
from South Africa. 617

— Eat, Development of Trypanosoma

lewisi, 5S
Fleischer, M., Mosses of New Guinea, 495
Flesh-parasites of Food-fishes, 206
Flies, Immobilising, for Microscopic

Investigation, 266

— Sterile, Rearing, 261
Flora, Intestinal, 94
Floridese, 786

Flu, P. C, Protozoa in the Alimentary

Canal of House-fly, 634
Fluid Mounting, 551

858

INDEX.

Fluorescence in Luminous Beetles, 748
Ply, Citrus White, Fungus Parasitic on,

795
Food of Shrew-mole, 352

F l-fishes, Flesh-parasites, 206

Fr.ods and Drugs, Microscopical Examina-
tion, 121
Foot, J. S., Minute Structure of Femoral

Bones. 608
Foot-and-mouth Disease, 804
Foraminifera, liritish. Studies, 366

— from Funafuti, 56

- Eecent ami Fossil, of the Shore-sands
of Selsey Bill, Sussex — VII.. Supple-
ment (Addenda et Corrigenda), 277,
298; VIII., Tabular List of Species
and Localities, 436

Forceps, New, 416

Ford. W. W., Bacteriology of Baltimore
City Water, 524

Fore-gut and Mid-gut, Junction in Hive-
bee, 197

Forti, A., Diatoms, 73

Fossombronia echinata, 655

Foster, N. H., Woodlice of Ireland, 469

Fowl, Domestic. Ligaments of Oviduct, 35

— Microfilaria, 625

— Queensland, New Nematode in Eye, 48
Fowl's Comb, Fluctuation in Growth, 604
Fowler, H. W., Variation of Species of

Notropis, 38
Fowls, Csecal Parasites, 632
Fox. 0. P., Film Test for Crude Rubber.

416
F'ranca, C, Parasites of Leucocytes in

Brown Rat, 633

— Studies on Haematozoa, 633

Franz, V., Function of Cerebellum in

Fishes, 614
Fraser, E. T., Cultivation Medium for

the Influenza Bacillus and Ducrey's

Bacillus, 549
Freiberg, W., Forms of Ophioglossum. 643
Frenelopsis ramosissima, Epidermal Cha-
racters, 774
Freund, L., Ear Mite of Cattle, 359
Friedrich, K., Iron Sulphide-iron System,

126
Friend, H., British Enchytrseids II, the

genus Fridericia, 838
- New British Enchytneids, 730
Fries. II., Spore formation in Nidularia,

794
Fries, K.E.,Monccotyledonous Characters

in the Polyearpea3, 640
Friese, H., Species and Varieties of

Humble-bees, l'.»7
Frilley, R., Alloys of Silicon with Metals,

712
Frisch, K. v., Colour-chsinge in Fishes,

460
Fritsch, <;.. Eye of Pteropus, 740

— Retina of Birds. 610

Frohlich, A., Use of Picramic Acid fur

Staining, 1 1 8
Frog, Burmese New, 353

— Corpora Adiposa, 744

— Development of Gonads, 456

— Healthy, Total Closure of Gut, 193

— Numb r of Chromosomes in Partbeno-

genetieally produced Larvre, 454

— Robber, Notes, 460

— Trypanosomes in Japan, 632
Frog-hoppers, Green Muscardine, 673
Fronds, Fern, Mechanism by which they

roll up, 378

Fructificati'>n of Macrocyslis, f;04

Fruit of (ieianiacese, 641

Fry, A., Introduction to British Liverworts,
228

Fry, Sir E., Introduction to British Liver-
worts, 228

Frye. T. ( '., Polytrichaceas of North
America, 383

Fucus, Hybrid Form, 75

Fiilleborn, F., Rotifera of German East
Africa, 208

Funmgines, Contribution to the Study of,
794

Funaria, Inflorescence. 492

Fungi and Termites, 397

— Assimilation of Nitrogen, 512

— Chilian, Notes. 395

— Cultures of Mixed. 794

— Fat-destroying, 677

— Fresco-painting of, 677

— from Greenland, 395

Venezuela and the West Indies,

395

— Hepaticse Infected, 492

— Higher, Chemistry, 396
Do they require Lime? 82

— imperfect/'. Study, 509

— in Clay Mines, 397

— in the Rhizoids of Leafy Hepalics. 513

— Larger, Notes, 81, 83. 236, 676 , 794

— New, from the Tyrol, 673

— North American, 392

— Notes, 516

— Origin of Parasitism, 238

— Parasitic, 393

— Pathogenic, 798

- Phototropism and Geotropisrn, 396

— Poisoning, 677

— Smut, 675

— Wood-destroying, 237

— See Contexts
Fungicides, 84
Fungus, Ambrosia, 396

— Edible, Culture. 2:56

— Foray at Saudsend. 516

— of House-fly, 234

— parasitic on Citrus White Fly, 795

— Root-tubercles, 237
Fungus-carriers. Insects as, 515
Fungus-flora, German. 395, 512

INDEX.

859

Furcellaria. Anatomy of Polyidea and, 785

Fusarium, Monograph, 393

— nivale and Nectria graminicola, 78

G

Gadus. Study of Species, 351
Gage, H. P., Arc Lamps for Projection, 96
Gain. L., New Species of Nostoc, 664
Galatheids, Olfactory Structures, 623
Gall-fly, Gametogenois, 74s
Galli-Valerio, B., Etiology of Rhinos-
fleroma, 525

— Verruga peruana, 522
Galvanizing, Effect on Strength of Steel

Wire. 559
Gamasids, Cavernicolous, 752
Gametogenesis of Gall-fly, 74s
Gametophytes and Embryogeny in

Cunninghamia, 481
Gander and Drake, Penis. 353
Ganglion, Visceral of Pecten, 40
Ganf, M., Hybrid form of Fucus, 75
Garjeanne, A. J. M., Fungi in the

Bliizoids of Leafy Hepatics. 513

— Hepaticse Infected by Fungi, 492

— Simple Excursion Microscope, 690
Garry, R., Fresh-water Algas of the Clyde

Area, 788
Gartner, P., Colour-etching of Steel, 561
Gases, Behaviour of Copper towards, 268

— Cementation by, 269

— Extraction from Copper, 712

— in Commercial Steel and Iron, 270
Gaskell, J. F., Action of X-raya on

Developing Chick, 455
Gaspari, F. de, Barillas pappulus, S04
Gasteroxtomum tergestinum, 471
Gastrodia, Mycorhiza, 681
Gastropoda. See Contents
Gastropods, Cavernicolous, 356
Gates. R. R., Chromosome-reduction in

Oenothera, 370

— Chromosomes of Oenothera Mutants and

Hybrids. 370
Ganpp, E., Composition of the Lower Jaw,
742

— Homology of Mammalian Lachrymal

Bone, 192

— Vertebrate Lower Jaw, 612
Geaster. Notes, 2!J7

Gecko, Hsemocystidium, 475

— Kidney, 190

Geddes, A. C, Abnormal Bone-growth in

Absence of Functioning Testes. 186
Geheeb, Adalbert, 69, 384

— Moss-flora of the Atlantic Islands, 3S2
Geibel. W., Alloys of the Noble Metals,

417.826
Gemmill, J. F., Adaptation of Ordinary
Paraffin Baths for Vacuum Embed-
ding, 26

Gemmill, J. F., Aerator suitable fur

Laboratory Aquaria, 24
— Structure of Solaster endeca, 628
Genera, Antarctic, New, 498
Genera, New —
Botany :

Acanthochondria, 75

Aeronema. 501

Alina, 242

Allionella, 780

Aneuria, 75

Apiosporina, 82

Araneomyces, 516

Austinella, 780

Barnesia, 68

1 iryobesia, 75

Calathelasma, 88

Chalicostroma, 75'

Coccochorella, 82

Coccoidella, 516

Colloderma, 90

ClypeolelK 82 '

Creosphseria, 242

Cyrtophora, 662

Discodothis, 516

Dothiorellina, 796

Encoeliella, 241

Erustiella, 662

Exophyllum, 75

Farysia, 242

Fimetaria, 392

Goebeliella. 655

Goplana, 242

Harliella, 88. 241

Helotiopsis, 241

Hyalodeina, 515

Hygrodicranum, 198

Hyophilopsis, 654

Koordersiella, 516

Lichenophoma, 672

Ligniera, 248

Loculistroma, 796

Loranthomyces, 516

Merceyopsis, G6

Mesospora, 75

Metachora, 800

Microporella, 516

Mohortia, 242

Mouochytrium, 508

Morinia, 68

Myxasterina, 516

Myxotheca, 395

Neuroloma, 4'. is

Oligochaetophora. -!S6

Oligocladus, 75

Ordonia, 242

Parenglerula. 82

Perinema, 75

Physalosporina, 671

I'irulus. 501

Protolindsaya, 66
' Psidania, 242

Rehiniellopsis, 86

860

INDEX.

Genera, New (Botany) cont. —
Ethnpalocyatis, 799
Ethytisiphon, 667
Solienella, 243
Schiffnerula, 516
Scleropycnis, 672
Siroscyphella, 24 1
Sirothryiella, 82
Solanella, 239
Sorolepidium, 492
Sqnamolithon, 669
Stenolepia, 4;»1
Stephanoptera, 71
Stilbochalara, 305
Tomentbypnum, 655
Torreudiella, 799
Trichocoleopsis, 783
Trichopellella, 82
Trichopeltopsis, 516
Zoology :

Abrochtha, 207

Aglaiella, 355

Ainiella, 622

Anoplophrya, 213

Avitellina, 362

Batl yinysis, 359

Bonneviella, 52

Bradyscela, 208

Buddenbrockia, 51

Ctesicirrus, 75S

Calyptopogon, 463

Ceratopora, 764

Ceratotrocha, 207

Chlainydonema, 759

Cicadomyces, 616

Colurostylis, 468

Conocladius, 463

Cristispira, 58

Cyclobothrium, 471

Deontacylix, 205

Deradena, 205

Desmocaris, 754

Dipleuchlanis (sub-g. n.), 363

Dissotrocha, 207 Midias, 755

Duboscquia, 58 Mniobia, 208

Embadomoniis, 476 Murrayona, 365

Embata, 207 Nephthyigorgia,

Eudontomyzon, 354 54

Glubarmadillo, 755 Nevaya, 360

Gyinnodiastylis, 468 Odontalona, 47

Habrotrocha, 207 Orcella, 359

Hexapathes, 473 Paracotyle, 760

Hicksonella, 55 Paradinium. 212

Intoshellina, 213 Paramyxa, 634

Isidoides, 55 Paratcbion, 755

[sselina, 213 Peltastisis, 55

Kofoidella, 213 Perezella, 213

Laggania, 628 Peytoia, 629

Malpighiella, 476 Phoronopsis, 50

Maupasella, 213 Pbyllobothroides

Merocystis, 771 471

Mesopsylla, 43 l'leuretra, 207

Metamblyops, 359 Pleurocaris, 460

Genera, New (Zoology) — cont.

Pluruijjorgia, 55

Proidotea, 201

Pyropliyllia, 210

Eliizomastix, 632

Saprospira, 772

Scepanotrocha, 207, 208

Schizotrema, 4ii.s

Scliultzellina, 213

Sesarmaxenos, 755

Sibogella, 365

Sidneyia, 622

Stepbanoteuthis. 746

Syndiniuni, 57

Synsiphonium, 471

Sypharoptera, 466

Tatrasoma, 752

Termitoptochus, 41

T imorechinus, 210

Toddia, 633

Toxocystis, 213

Ustilaginiodella, 797

"Withius (sub-g.n.), 359

Zanclopus, 47
Genera, New, from Malay Archipelago, 75

— of Kecent Clypeastroids, 472
Generations, Alternation in Myxomycetes,

685
Genital Organs, Male, in Insectivora and
Lemuridsa, 191

— Pores in Norway Lobster, 201
Genus Anthomastus, 54

— Ceiatium, 768

— New, of Antipatliaria, 473

of Cbytridiacese, 709

of Grass, 793

of Hydroids, 52

of Plasmodiophoraceaj, 24:;

of Polyblepdaridje, 71

of the Chytridiales, 508

Georgi, W., Origin of Notocbord Epithe-
lium, 740
Geotropism and rbototropism in Fungi, 396

— in Corymorpha, 211

Gepp, A. and E. S., Codiaceae, 3S9

— Marine Al^se from the Kermadecs, 230
Geraniaceae, Fruit, 641

Gerber, M., Latex Diastases of Brous-

sonetia, 483
Gerber P., Spirocbaets of tbe Mouth, 369
Gering, G., Malacobdella gros*a, 627
Gertnain, L.,Cavernicolous Gastropods, 356
Germination of Fern-spores, Influence of

Ligbt and Darkness, 491
Gestation in White Mice, 737
Ghoreyeb, A. A. W„ New and Quick
Method for Staining Spirochetes in
Smear Preparations, 265
Giacomo, A. de, Microchemical Demon-
stration of Guanin, 258
Giant-cells of Mole's Placenta, 188
Gibbs, L. S., New Zealand Hepaticre, 783
Gid Parasite, 760

INDEX.

861

Giemsa, G., Rapid Staining with Giemsa's

Azur-eosin Solution, 414
Gilchrist. J. D. F., New Ilemichorda from

South Africa, 50
Gilruth, J. A., Blood Parasites, 57

— Hajmogretrarine in Blood of Varanus

variu*, ."i7

— Microfilaria in Magpies, 48

— Frotozoon Parasite from Mucous Mem-

brane of Sheep's Abomasum, 57
Gineste, C, Polymorphism in Flagellates,

768
Ginneken, P. J. H. v., Zinc Amalgams,

417
Giolitti, F., Cementation of Alloy Steels,

713
of Steel, 269

— Malleable Cast Iron. 559

Girgolaff, S. S., Compression Experiments
with the Fertilized Ovum of Ascaris
megalocephala, 759

Glands and Luminescence of Phvllirhoe,
196

— Brunner*s, New kind of Cell, 349

— Marginal, of Porpita. 474

— Salivary, of Ticks, 45

Glaser, E , Selective Action of Dieu-
doneVs Medium, 260

Glasses, Opacity of Certain, for the Ultra-
violet, 700

Glaue, H., Comparison of Ascaris fells and
A. canis, 205

Glceosporlum Rlbls, 510

Glugea lophii, (534

Glycogen, Fixation and Staining, 821

Gnetales as Apetalous Angiosperms, 372

Gobius, Cutaneous PapilLe, 741

Goebeliella, a New Genus, 655

Goerens, P., Gases in Commercial Steel
and Iron, 270

— Transformation-point Curve, 126
Gola, G., Hepatics of the Atlantic Islands,

782
Gold and Silver, Alloys of Sodium, 556

— Plate, Cast and Rolled, Properties,

55 7

— Tellurides, 557
Oold-maguesium Alloys, 123
Gold-tellurium System, 417
Goldschmidt, R., Nervous System of

Ascaris, 470
Gomont, Maurice Augustin. 390
Gonads, Development in Frog, 456
Gonder, R., Parasite of Coast Fever, 770
Gonidia, Lichen, 399

Culture, 400

Gonitnophyllum Buffhami. 668

Gonlum pectorale. 501

Gontermann, W., Iron-silicon-carbon

Alloys. 826
Goodale, H. W., Blastopore Closure in

Amphibia, 347
Goodey, T., Protozoa of the Soil, 7G7

Dec. 20th, 1911

Goodrich, E. S., Occipital Region of

Urodela, 456
Gooseberry and Oak Mildew, 392
Gordon, F. \\\, Letter in re Show-cases,

etc., 284
Gordon, W. T., Lepldophloios Scottii,

62
Gorgonellids of ' Siboga ' Expedition, 55
Gorgonid and Avicula Association, 463
Gorgonidse of ' Siboga ' Expedition, 55
Goto, S., Hydractinia and Hermit-crab,

474
Gough, L. H., Stilesia and its Relatives

362
Grain-growth, Nucleus Action, 716
Grain-size in Iron, 27'>
Graminea1, Mechanism of Movement in,

374
Granier, J., Heterogamic Gemini in

Impatiens, 480
Granules in Gland Cells, Origin, 349
'• Graphitic " Cast-iron. 559
Grass, New Genus, 793

— Snake in the Sea, 37

Grating, Reflecting, Elliptic Interference,

545
Gravely, F. H., Degenerate Cockroach,

465

— Large Egg laid by a Beetle, 748

— Moaquito sucked by Midge, 750
Gravier, C, Cirripede and other Com-
mensals of Madrepores, 624

— Incubation in Polychsets, 758
Grayson, H. J., Improvements in Rock-
section Cutting Apparatus, 703

— Method of Slicing, Grinding, and

Mounting Rock-sections, 706
Grayson's New Ten-Band Plate, Measure-
ment, 129, 160

— Ruling presented by Mr. Conrad Beck

to the Royal Microscopical Societv,

Report on, 421, 449
Grebes, Development of Limbs, 345
Greenish, H. G., Microscopical Examina-
tion of Foods and Drugs, 121
Gregarine, Large, in Atyephyra, 772
Gregoire, V., Unity of Meiotic Process in

Plants and Animals, 1S6
Greig-Smith, R., Action of Wax-solvents

and the Presence of Thermolabile

Bacteriotoxins on Soil. 523
Grenet, L., Quenching of Bronzes, 268
Grenet, — , Resistance to Passage of

Microbes through Collodion Filters,

54S
Griffin, L. E., Division of Euplotes loor-

eesteri, 368
- Structure of Euplotes. 368
Griffiths, \Y., Principal Starches used as

Food, 701
Griffon, — , Cladochytrium cmspitis, 76

— Thermophilous Moulds, 673

— and others, Discuses of Plants, 238

:; K

8G2

INDEX.

Griggs, R. F., Monochytrium,aNewGenu8

uf the Cliytridiales, 508
Grimmia, Notes, 054

— pilosinsima, 226

Grinding. Slicing, and Mounting Rock-
sections, Method, 706

Grinnell, J., Linnet of Hawaiian Islands,
353

Groh, H., New Host for Claviceps, 391

Gross?, J., Cristispira and Spirochseta, 58

— Free-living Spironemaeese, 772
Grouse, Red, Changes of Plumage, 353
Grout, A. J., North American Bryophytes,

658
Growth of Seed Plants. See Contents
Growth-forms, Complex, Inheritance, 347
Gruvel, A., Classifications of Rock Lol>sters,

623
Grynfeltt, E., Eye of Protopterus, 741 _
Guanin, Microchemical Demonstration,

258
Gue'guen, F., Alopecia areata of Bacterial

Origin, 687

— Rapid Method for Isolating Oospora

lingualis, 548

Guercio, G. del, Studies on Injurious
Mites, 752

Gue'rin-Ganivet, J., Grass Snake in the Sea,
37

Guerrini, G., Alleged Toxicity of Tape-
worms, 626

Guertler, W., Iron-Nickel Meteorite, 270

— Structure of Galvanized Iron, 713
Guichard, M., Extraction of Gases from

Copper, 712
Guillaume, C. E., Changes occurring in

Nickel Steel, 713
Guillemiu, G., Occluded Gases in Copper

Alloys, 418
Guillet, L., Reheating of Cold-worked

Metals, 562
Guilliermond, A., Copulation of Yeast-cells,

392

- Formation of Chloroleucitcs, 773

— Mitoehondries of Plant-cells, 773

— Nuclear Evolution in Ascomycetes,

5118
Giinther, S., History of Study of Coral-
formations, 473
Giiuthert, T., Oogenesis in Dytiscidae,

198
Gut in Healthy Frog, Total Closure, 193
Guttenberg, A., Study of Synchytiium-

galls, 76
Guttural Puuches of Horte, 37
Guye, P. A., Infinitely Small Chemical

Magnitudes, 410
Guyer, M. F., Accessory Chromosomes in

Man, 29
Gwynne-Vaughan, D. T., Anatomy of the

Osmundaceaj, 045

— Fossil Osmundaceaj, 379
Gyorffy, I., Buxbaumia viridi*, \'.*'.'>

Gyorffy, I., Distribution of Molendoa
Sendtneriana in Hungary, 66

— Hungarian Mo-ses, 657

— Mosses attacked by Cladosporium, 653

H

Habits of Shrew-mole. 352

Hachla, Y., Selective Action of Dieudonne"s
Medium, 260

Hncklov, L., Sensilli and Eyes of Medicinal
Leech, 203

Hadhv, P. B., Coccidiosis in Sparrows and
other Wild Birds, 369

Hsemapoietic Function of Spleen in Em-
bryo Bird, 460

HaMimtoxylin, Staining in Bulk, 118

Hsematozoa from the Congo, 214

— of Australian Batriichians, 6:;:;
Birds, 369

Reptiles, 771

— Studies, 633

Hasmocystidium of the Gecko. 475
Hxmogregarina stepanoioi. Life-history,

771
Hsemogregarine in Blood of Varanus
varius, 57

— New, from Horned Asp, 477
Haemogregarines, 214

Haempel, O.. Growth of Sahno hucho, 38
Hagem, O., Norwegian Mucorini, II, 507
Llagemann, J., Study of Corixa, 199
Hageu, J., Annulus of Cynodoiitium air
pegtre, 66

— Dicranoloma, 66

Hague, A., Bearing Metals, 268

— Influence of Silicon on Cast Iron. 272
Hague, S. M., Morphology of Diospyros,

640
Hair, Different kinds, 742
Halbert. J. N., Fresh- water Mites of Clare

Island, 621
Halecium, Mediterranean Specie-, 474
HHiichondrina, Classification. 766
Hall, C. M,. Gid Parasite, 760
Hall, J. G., Diseases of Economic Plants,

84
Hall. M. G, Method of Examining Fajces

for Evidences of Parasitism, 554
Hallez, P., Excretory System of Bothrio-

molus, 471

— Non-parasitic Bdellourid, 471

— Two-fold Function of Ovaries in some

Polyclads, 761
Halosphsera and Flagellatse, 660
Hamelin, A.. Collodion Filters, 548
Hamerton, A. E., Inquiry into Sleeping

Sickness, 476

— Tabanids and Trypanosomes, 749
Handlirsch, A., New Palseozoic Insects, 466
Hanitsch, P., Development of Cunina

parasitica, 764

INDEX.

863

Hannig, E., Significance of the Feriplas-
modium, 481, 488

Haplosporidian Piinisite in Donax, 772

Harden, A.. Alcoholic Ferment of Yeast-
juice, 672

Hardening Carbon Steels, Theory, 271

— of Carbon and Low-tungsten Tool-

steels, 271
Harder, R., Cultures of Mixed Fungi, 794
Harding, W. A., New Leech from Egypt,

470
Hardness, Measurement, 274
Hardy, A. D., lUyxonema in Salmon

Disease, 663

— Red Euglena, G62
Harris, Carolyn Wilson, 90
Hartmann, M., New Trichonympha, 477
Hartwell. H. F., Bacillus of Acne, 262
Hatano, S., Combined Staining Methods

for Tubercle bacilli, 118
Hatfield, W. H , Cast-iron and Vanadium,
827

— Precipitation of Free Carbon in the

Iron-carbon System, 559

Hauswaldt, H., Interference Phenomena
in Polarized Light, 105

Hawkins, H. L., Teeth and Buccal Struc-
tures in Conulus. 209

Hayden, A., Algal Flora of the Missouri
Botanical Garden, 280

Hayre'n, E., Culture of Lichen Gonidia, 400

— Saprophytism of Enteromorpha, 231
Head in Hvpogeophis, Development, 457
Head-glands <>f Caddis-worms, 44
Head-pieces, Shoi t, of Planaria, Regenera-
tion, 363

Heart, Beating of, in Hibernating Snail,
462

— Innervation, in Reptiles and Batra-

chians, 458

— of Fishes, Distribution of Muscle-fibres,

741

— of Larval Dragon-fly, Histological Study

of tlie Innervation, 750

— of Lungless Urodela, 460
Heat-treatment of Bronze, 124
Heath, C. E., Fluid Mounting, 551

— Microscope Lamp, 128, 255

Heating Apparatus, Electric, for Micro-
scopical Observations, loo
Hebb, R G., Resignation, 131
Heffnrd, A. E., Teleostean Ova and Larva;.

35
Hegt, J. N., New Nematode, 759
Heile, — , Bacteriology of Appendicitis, 91
Heinen, A,, Nephthyidse and Lycorida? of

North Sea and the Baltic, 624
Heinis, F., Moss-fauna of Central America,

615
Heliozoon, Marine, Notes, 175
Helix pomatia, Alimentary Canal, 747
Hellemans, J., Strongylus pingnicola, 205
Ht loderma, Bite, 744

TIelcella crispa, 508

Hemenway, A. F., 1'hlocm of Juglandacese,

480
Hemichorda, New, from South Africa, 50
Hemigramma latifolia, 111
Hemiptera, Buccal Apparatus, 750
Hempel, J., Effect of Etherization on

Metabolism, 776
Henckel, A., Black Sea Alga), 387

— Phytoplankton of the Caspian Sea, 71
Henneke, J., Structure and Habits of

Macrobiotus macronyx, 622
Henry, A., Ascarids of Carnivores, 361
Hens, Injection of Testis-extract, 348
Hepatic Genera, Figures, 220
Hepaticse, European, 381, 493

— Infected by Fungi, 492

— Inter-relationships, 64

— New England, 67
Zealand, 783

— of New Caledonia, 3S3

— of Puerto Rico, 783

— of the Bahama Islands, 783

— Ptilidioid, Amphigastrial Antheridia,

224

— Spermatogenesis, 652
Hepaticarum, Species, 227
Hepatics, Brazilian, 497

— Leafy, Fungi in the Rhizoids, 513

— North American, 782

— of the Atlantic Islands, 782
Herdman, W. A., Scotch and Irish Plank-
ton, 355

— Summer Plankton of West of Scotland

and Irish Sea, 614
Heredity and Evolution, 453
Hereros and Hottentots, Plica semilunaris,

612
Hermaphroditism in Nemerteans, 206
Hermit-crab and Hydractinia, 474
Heron-Allen, E„ 426

— The Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of

the Shore-sands of Selsey Bill, Sussex ;
VII. Supplement (Addenda et Corri-
genda), 277, 298 ; VIII. Tabular list
of Species and Localities, 436

— Studies on British Foraminifera, 366-
Heronimus, C, Development of Pectoral

Fin in Amia, 607
He'rouard, E., Fixation of Scyphistoma,

473
Herpetomonads from Dung-flies, 57
Herre, A. \V. C. T., Desert Lichens, 51!)

— Lichen Flora of Santa Cruz Peninsula,

California, 518

Herring's El^s, Retarding Development,
739

Herter, \V„ German Fungus-flora, 395

Hertwig, O., Influence of Radium Rays on
Ova and Sperms, 185

Herzog, G., Drop-bottle for Preventing,
the Action of Air on Copper-oxide-
ammonia Solution, 121

3

K 2

8G4

INDEX.

Herzog, T., Adalbert Geheeb, 3S4

— Grimmia pilosissima, 226

— Moss flora of Bernina, 657
of Bolivia, 68

— Mosses of Ceylon, 382

— Parallelism and Convergence of Moss-

pedigrees, 65

— Wollnya, a Genus of Bryacese, 654
Hess, ( '., Sense of Light in Animals, 355
Heterocuma, 46

Heterogiimic Gemini in Impatiens, 480
llevea brasiliensis, Physiology and Path-
ology, 795
Hevesv, G. v., Metallic Fog in Fused Salts,

828
Hewitt, G. G., Fungus of House-fly, 234
Hewlett, K. T., Soured Milk, 404
Hexactinellid Spicules, 212
Hexactiuise from New South Wales, 629
Heydrich, F., Lithothamnia from Roscoff

in Brittany, 669
Heyu, E., Heat-treatment of Bronze, 124

— Stresses in Cold-worked Metals, 562
Hicken, C. M., Ferns of Argentina, 223
Hickson, S. J., New Octoradiate Coral, 210

— New Type of Alcyonarian, 764

— Origin of Sex, 454

Hida, S., Structure of Filar ia bancrofti, 759
Hieronymus, G., African Ferns, 779

— Ferns of German Central Africa, 223
Higgins, — , A New System of Filing

Slides, 129
Hilger, A., Microspectroscope, 256
Hill, E. J., and others, Ferns of North

America, 222
North American Pteridophytes,

649
Hillier, L., Moss-flora of the Jura, 494
Hillmann, A., "Hypanth" of the Rosacese,

640
Hilpert, S., Magnetic Properties of Nickel

Steels, S27
of the Modifications of Iron, 270

— Sulphurous Acid as an Etching

Medium, 273
Hilzheimer, M., Atavism, 191
Hinioff, M., Improved Micrometer, 408
Hippie, H., Plug Micrometer, 256
Hirschfelder, G., Histology of Rotifera, 362

— Methods of Studying Rotifera, 110
Hirschler, J., Insterstitial Tissue of Striped

Muscle, 35
Hirst, S., New Termitophilous Millipede,

621
Histological Technique, New Methods, 549
Histology of Vertebrata. See Contents
Hive-bee, Colour-sense, 40

— Junction of Fore-gut and Mid-gut, 197
Hohnel, F. v., Myeological Notes, 82

- Notes on Mycology, 516
Honig, J.. Neurochords of Criodrilus, 202
Hoffmann, E. J., Fructification of Macro-
cystis, 504

Hofherr, O., Relative Immunity of Birds

to Anthrax, 37
Hollaude, A. ('., Blood of Insects, 616
Holloway, J. E., Anatomy of New Zealand

Lycopodiaceje, 62
Holothnrians, Middle Cambrian, 628

— Studies, 209

Holothuroids from the Indian Ocean, 209

— West Indian, 209

Holste, G., Nervous System of Dytiscus
marginalis, 41

Honcamp, F., and another, Study of Smut-
infection, 235

Honigmann, H., Plankton of Prester See.
789

Hooper, D., Secretion of Ghost Bug, 358

Hopkinson, J., Scheme to encroach upon
the space allotted in 1899 to the
Natural History Museum at South
Kensington, 425, 426

Horejsi, J., Symbiotic Alga, 233

Hori, S., Bacillus cypripedii, 802

— Ho the Higher Fungi require Lime ?

82
Hornbill, Digestive System, 612
Home, A. S., Spongospora subterranea,

401
Horse, Blood Filaria, 470

— Guttural Pouches, 37

Horses, Parasites of Biliary Fever, 369
Horwood, A. R., Calamites compared with
Equisetum, 62

— Layers of the Molluscan Shell, 746
Hottentots and Hereros, Plica semilunaris,

612
House-fly, Fungus, 234

— Leptomonad. 633

— Protozoa in Alimentary Canal, 634
Houston, A. C, and others, Disease-
carriers, 93

Houstoun, R. A., Efficiency of Metallic
Filament Lamps, 408

Howard, W. T., Nuclear Budding in
Tumour-cells, 458

Howe, H. M., Nucleus Action and Grain-
growth, 716

Howe, R. H., Northern Species of Alec-
toria in America, 683

— Usnea r«nd its Linnaean Nomenclature,

242

Hoyle, W. E., Genera of Dibranchiate
Cephalopoda, 196

Hudson, O. F., Heat-treatment of Brass,
417

Hue, A., Crocvnia, a Genus of Lichens,
519

Hufnagel, A., Fatty Body during Meta-
morphosis, 618

Humble-bees, Species and Varieties, 197

Hurwitz, S. H, Reactions of Earthworms
to Acids, 48

Husnot, T., E. G. Paris : Obituary. 659

— F. Renauld's Moss-herbarium, 197

INDEX.

865

Hustedt, V., Diatoms from Dahomey, 74
Hybanihus <«ncolor, Embryo-sac Develop-
ment. 218
Hybridization, Echinoderm, 363
Hybrids of American and European Bison,
Fertility, 455

— of Goldfinch and Canary, State of

Ovary, 455
Hydrachnids of East African Lakes, 200
Hydractinia and Hermit-crab, 474
Hydrogen, Occlusion by Palladium-gold

Alloys, 557
Hydroid on Crab, Epizoic, 765
Hydroides, Development of Trochophore,

360
Hydroids, Deep-sea, of Indian Museum, 52

— New Genus, 52

— of Drobak, 365

— Senescence, 2i 1

Hydrozoa, History of the Study, 210
Hygramblystegium and Cratoneuron, 493
Hygrohypnum ochraceum, 493
Hygrophorus, Monograph, 81
Hyrnenophyllaceae in Relation to Moisture,

487
H\ophilopsis, a New Indian Moss-genus,

654
" Hypanth " of the Rosaceae, 640
Hyphomycetes, 673

— Classification, 673

— New. 393

— North American, Studies, 510

— Studies, 79, 793
Hypocrea rufa, 39 1 , 670
Hypocreaceae, Notes, 790
Hypogeophis, Development of Head, 457
Hypophysis, Pigmentation of Nervous

Lobe, 459
Hypophysis-secretion, Path, 610

Ibla. Development and Minute Structure

of Scalpellum, 755
Ichthyological Notes, 746
Idiocliromosomes in Ascaris, 204
Idoteid, Fossil, 201
Ignatowsky, W. v.. History of the Cardioid

Condenser : Memorandum on the

Leitz Mirror Condenser, 693
Ihssen, G., Fusarium nivale and Necfria

graminicola, 78
Iljin,' N., Iron-carbon System, 826
Illuminating and other Apparatus. See

Contents
Illumination of Objects observed with the

Binocular Microscope, Improvement

in, 96
Illuminator, Dark-Ground, designed by

E. M. Nelson. 276
with Arrangement for Centring on

a Plain Stage, Reichert's, 426, S14

Imbedding Objects. See Contents
Immunity, Natural, of White Mice to

Trypanosoma lewixi, 459
Impatiens, Heterogamic Gemini, 480
Incertae Sedis. See Contents
Incubation in Polychsets, 758
Inflorescence of Funaria, 492

— of Muscineas, 799

Influence of Light and Darkness on Ger-
mination of Fern-spores, 491

Influenza Bacillus and Ducrey's Bacillus,
Cultivation Medium, 549

Infusorians, Astomatous, 213

— Ciliated, Fat, 212

Ingham, W., and others, British Mosses,

228
Inheritance in Hybrid Poultry, 34

— of Colour-pattern in Hybrid Poultry,

34

— of Complex Growth-forms, 347

— of Skin-pigmentation in Man, 30
Injecting Objects. See Contents
Injection of Fusible Alloys in Microscopical

Anatomy, 822

— Preparations of Petromyzon, 263
Injury to the Cotyledons, Effect on Seed-
ling Development, 60

Innervation of the Heart of Larval Dragon-
fly, Histological Study, 750

Inouye, K., Physico-chemical Studies of
Lead, 417

Insect Remains from South Wales Coal-
field, 620

Insecta. See Contents

Iusectivora and Lernuridae, Male Genital
Organs, 191

Insects and Yeasts, Symbiosis, 616

— as Disseminators of Ergot, 463

— as Fungus-carriers, 515

— Blood, 616

— in Nepenthes Pitchers, 42

— Injurious, 466

Studies, 747

in Ireland, 44

— Leitz's Photomicrographic Apparatus

for Photographing, 543

— Minute Structure of Cuticle, 747

— New Palaeozoic, 466

— of the Rhine, 197

Instruments, Accessories, etc. See Con-
tents

Interference Phenomena in Polarized
Light, 105

Interferometer, 539, 565

Intestinal Flora, 94

Studies, 087

Intestine of Trichoptera, Protist Parasites,
57

Invertebrata. See Contents

Iodine Staining, Improved Method, 551

Iraklionoff, P., Peroxydase and Respiratory
Pigments, 638

Iris, Objective Mount with, 283

Slili

INDKX.

LriB-piginent, .Migration in Compound Eye,

616
Iron and Steel, Commercial, Gases iu, 270
Influence of Vanadium on, 827

— Cast, Influence of Silicon, 272, 826
Manganese in, 272

— Galvanized. Structure, 713

— Grain-size, 270

— Influence of Impurities on the Corrosion,

828

— Liberation by Green, Water-plants, 484
Magnetic Properties of Modifications,

270

— Meteoric, Synthesis, 559

— Ovifak, 713

— Sulphide-iron System,T26

— White Cast, Crystallization, 712
Iron-antimony alloys, 558
Iron-carbon Alloys, 125

— System, 558, 826

Crystallography, 125

Influence of Sulphur, 418

Precipitation of Free Carbon, 559

Iron-kaematoxylin Method, Staining Cel-
loidin Sections of Nervous Tissue, 119
Iron-nickel Meteorite, 270

— System, 126

Iron-nickel-copper Alloys, 127
Iron-silicon-carbon Alloys, 826
Irritability of Seed Plants. See Contents
Ischnocolus, Development, 621

Isidae of ' Siboga ' Expedition, 55
Isopod, New Parasitic, 755

— Spiny Terrestrial, 755

Israel, W., Notes on Fresh-water Mussels,

462
Issakowitsch, A., Marginal Glands of

Porpita, 474
Ithyphallus and Dictyophora, 237

— impudicuK and Mutinus canimis, Study,

512
Iwanoff, E., Fertility of Hybrids of

American and European Bison, 455
Ixodida?, New, 44

Jacobi, H., Effect of Injury to the Coty-
ledons upon Seedling development, 60

Jacobsohn, L., Grouping of Nerve-cells in
Spinal Cord of Tench, 610

Jacubowa, L., New South African Poly-
clad, 50

Jaczewski, A. de., Geotropism and Photo-
tropism in Fungi, 396

Jahn, E., Studies in Myxomycetes, 684

Janczewski, E., Glceosporium Bibis, 5111

J'anecke, E., Flow-pressure of Tin, 557
- Ternary Systems, 269, 561

Jaw, Lower, Composition, 742

— Vertebrate Lower, 612

■ I iizen, P., Moss-flora of Eisenach, 67

Jeannel, R., Revision of Batkysciinse, 620

Jeffrey, E. G, Investigating Nature of
Supposed Algal Coals, 262

— Pteridophytal Origin of so-called Algal

Coals, 221

— Pteropsida, 378

Jennings, H. S., Conjugation in Para-
mecium, 634

Jennings, O. E., and others, North
American Bryophyta, 68

Jensen, H., Insects in Nepenthes Pitchers,
42

Jensen, O., Bacteriological Studies of
Danish Butter, 689

Jensen, P. B., Animal Life of Sea-bottom,
741

Jentsch, F., Electric Heating Apparatus
for Microscopical Observations, 100

Jentsch's Concentric Condenser, 98

— Ultra-Condenser, 97
Jerboa, New Flea, 43
Johne's Bacillus, 94

Jorgenseu, E., Genus Ceratium, 768, 789
Johannson, L., Extra-enteric Aperture in

a Leech, 361
Johnson. F., Effect of Silver. Bismuth and

Aluminium on Copper, 418

— Impurities in Copper, 125
Johnson, T., Archaeopteris, 647

— Lyginodendron (Crossotheca) in Irish

Coal Measures, 646

Johnston, E. A., New Species of Lingua-
tula, 359

Johnston, J., Influence of Pressure on the
Melting-points of Metals, 563

Johnston, J. R., Bacillus coli and Plant-
diseases, 804

Johnston, T. H., Entozoa in Australian
Birds, 760

— Haeinatozoa of Australian Birds, 369
Reptiles, 771

— Pentastomes in Australian Cattle, 623

— Structure of Monopylidium passerinum,

626

— Worm-uests in Australian Cattle. 626
Johnstone, J., Parasites from Irish Sea

Fishes, 49

of Fishes, 760

Joisten, A., Grain-size in Iron, 270
Jolibois, P., Arsenides of Tin, 825
Jolly, J., Function of Bursa Fabricii, 460

— Hcemapoietic Function of Spleen in

Embryo Bird, 460

— Involution of Bursa Fabricii, 458

— Mitotic Figures in Isolated Tissues,

349

— Survival of Isolated Leucocytes. 61 1
Jong, D. A. de, Relation between Avian

and Mammalian Tuberculosis, 93
Jongmans, W., Calamite* undulatus, 489
Jonnesco, V.. Histological Changes in

Infantile Paralysis, 25S
Jorgensen, A., Micro-organisms and Fer-
mentation, 396

INDEX.

867

Jorgensen, M., Ovarian Ovum of Proteus.

456
Joyner, R. A., Amalgams containing

Silver and Tin, 557
Juday, O, Biological Stations, 38
Juel. O., Structure of Riccia Bischoffii, 225
Juglandaceae. Phloem, 480
Juillet, A., Air-sacs in Birds, 613

— Injection of Fusible Alloys in Micro-

scopical Anatomy, 822
Juncaceae, Parasites on Roots, 90

— Parasitic Root-diseases, 670

Junge, P., Ferns of Schleswig-Holstein,
649

— Pteridophytes of Schleswig-Holstein,

778
Jusbaschjanz, S., Post-embryonic Develop-
ment of Stratiomydae, 199

K

Kaalaas, B., and another, British Bryo-

phyta, 3S1
Kaiser, G. B., and others, Bryophyta of

North America, 496
Kaiser, P. E., Algological Notes, 503
Kaiserling Material, Preparation for

Microscopical Purposes, 703
Kajanus, B., Morphology of Lichens, 801

— Systematic Position of Stereocaulon, 519
Kaninierplankton. 789

Kantor, J. L., and another, Poisoning by

Fungi, 677
Kapzov, S., Minute Structure of Cuticle in

Insects. 747
Kasanowsky, V.. Aphanomyces lasvis, 669
Kaudern, W., Male Genital Organs in

Insectivora and Lemuridae, 191
Kaufmann, F., German Cortinarii, 81
Kawamura, S., Phosphorescence of Pleu-

rotus japonicus, 512
Keiller, V. H., Regeneration in Short

Head-pieces of Planaria, 761

— Structure of Penfaceros reticulatiis, 364
Keissler, H. v., Periodicity of Phytoplank-

ton of the Leopoldstein Lake, 660

— Phytoplankton of the Zeller See, 388

— Plankton from the Julisclien Alps, 3SS
Keiszler, K. v., Parasitic Lichen-fungi,

672

Kemp, S., Photophores of Decapod
Crustacea, 45

Kennel. P., Corpora Aliposa of Am-
phibians, 613

— of Frog, 744

Keroeididaa, 364

Kew, H. W., False Scorpions of British
Isles, 359

— Pseudoscorpiones of Clare Island, 621
Kidney, Mammalian, Epithelial Cells, 609

— of Gecko, 190

Kidstou, R., Fossil Osinundaceae, 379

Kieffer, J. J., East Indian Chironomidae,

463
Kimball, L. F., American Ferns, 778
Kindberg, Nils Conrad, 3S4
Kingsley, M. A., Splitting of Rhizome

and Root of Delphinium, 774
Kinoshita, K, Keroeididae, 364

— New Genus of Antipatharia. 473
Kirchoffer. O., Eye of Dermestes, 41
Kirkpatrick, R., Hexactinellid Spicules,

212

— Merlia, 630

— New Lithonine Sponge from Christmas

Island, 631

— Remarkable Pharetronid Sponge, 365
Kirner, J., Influence of Nitrogen on

Cementation of Steel, 558
Kleine, F. K, Trypanosome Studies, 476
Knauer, K., Ventral Musculature of Fishes,

194
Knief, Hans, Development of Basidia, 794
Knives, Microtome, 703
Kobayashi, M., Tellurium Alloys, 416
Kock, G., Mildew of Gooseberry and Oak,

392
Kohler, A., Application of Mercury Light

to Microscopical Works, 2.53
— ■ New Nernst Lamp for Microprojection,

SOS
Koehler, R., New Starfishes, 210
Kohler, W., Pectinatella magnified near

Berlin, 763
Koeuigsberger, J., Loiss' Universal Spec-
tral Apparatus, 094

— Methods for the Identification of Sub-

microscopic Structures, 810
Koenigsfeld, H., Penetration of the

Normal Skin by Tubercle Bacilli, 803
Kofoid, C. A., Ceratocornys, 72

— New Dinoflagellates. 769
Kogia breviceps, Head, 351
Spermaceti-organ, 37

Kohn, A., Pigment in the Human Neuro-
hypophysis, 190

Koidzumi, M., Frog Trypanosomes in
Japan, 632

Kolkwitz, R., Kammerplankton, 7S9

Kolmer, W., Eye of Pteropus, 189

— Supporting Elements in Sensory Epi-

thelium, 1S9
Kopsch, F., Early Development of Trout,

607
Kostanecki, K, Artificial Parthenogenesis

in Mactra, 615
Koumiss, Micro-organisms, 92
Kowallik, (t., Staining Bordered Pits, 709
Krahmer, B., Moss-flora of South Thurin-

gia, 67
Krauss, H. A., Monograph on Embidaa,

465
Krohnke, O., '•Graphitic" Cast-iron, 559
Krogh, M. v.. New Method of Chromatin

Staining, 414

868

INDEX.

Kroll, A., Crystallography of the Iron-
carbon System, l-.i

Krumbhaar, W., Behaviour of Copper
towards Gases, 268

Krumwiede, C, Cultivation of Human and
Bovine Tubercle Bacilli, Ki7

Kuliait, 11. , Spores of Spencerites, 017

Kiihn, A., Structure and Affinities of
Thyroscyphus, 630

Kiibnemann, G., Capsule - formation of
Typhoid Bacilli, 525

Kiikenthal, W., Genus Anthomastus, 54

— Penuatulacea, 765

— West Australian Alcyonarians, 54
Kiiuckel d'Herculais, J., Habits of

Scutigera coleoptrata, 752
Kufferatli, H., Growth of Bacterium

Zopfii, 805
Kuhn. Ph., Dissemination of Disease by

Stomoxys calcitrant, 463
Kumakow, N., and others-, Silver-copper

Alloys, 124
Kundt, A., Spore-development in Salvinia

nutans, 490
Kujikel, B. W., Development of Turtle

Skull, 605
Kuntz, A., Development of Sympathetic

Nervous System in Birds, 32
in Mammals, 31

— Sympathetic Nervous System in Fishes,

606

in Turtles, 605

Kurssanow, L., Sexuality of Urediueae,

792
Kusano, S., Myeorhiza of Gastrodia, 681
Kuschakevvitsch. S., Development of

Gonads in Frog, 456
Kylin, H., Algae of the West Coast of

Norway. 506

— Phycoerythrin and Phycocyanin, 784

Laboulbeniales, Study, 790

Lachrymal Bone, Mammalian, Homology,

192
Lacouture, G. Figures of Hepatic Genera,

226
Lactation, Alleged, of Male Lepus bairdii,

7:;7
Lactic Ferments, Resistance of Micrococcus

melitensis, 403
Lafar, P., Technical Mycology, 83
Lagarde, J., Plicaria Planckonis Boud., 670
Lakon, G., Starch-grains and Oil-drops in

Conifer-wood, 638
Lamellibranchiata. See Contents
Laminaria hyperborea, 74
Laminariaceae, Medulla-cells, 504
Laminariae, Epijihytes, 386
Lamp, .Microscope, 128
— Microscopic, Emrys-Boberts, 098

Lamp, Microscopical New. 571

— New Microscope, 255

— New Nernst, for Micioprojection, 808
Zeiss Nernst, 810

Lamprey, Muscles, 61 1
Lampreys, Synopsis, 354
Lamps, Arc, for Projection. 96

— Metallic Filament, Efficiency, 408
Lampyridae, Photogenic Organs, 404
Land, W. J. G., American Lepidostrobus,

647
Lang, A. B., Beating of the Heart in

Hibernating Snail. 402
Lang. G., Influence of Manganese on Mild

Steel, 558
Lange, — , Agglutination of Trypanosomes,

824
Lange, E. F., Crystallization of Steel, 828
Langerhans, Islands of, in Human Embryo,

31
Langeron, M., Mounting Arthropoda in

Amann's Chloralphenol, 410
Lankesteria, 477
Larva of Mantispa, 465
Larvae and Fish-eggs, Physiology, 738

— Blow-fly, and Gravity, 198

— Experiments with Dragon-fly, 750

— Mosquito, Carnivorous, 358

— Muscid, Metamorphosis of Intestinal

Musculature, 42

Larval Stages of Decapods, 468

Latter, O. H., Demonstrating Presence of
Starch in a Leaf, 263

Lauby, A., Study of Diatoms in Sedi-
mentary Deposits, 385

Laurent, J., Physical Conditions of Resist-
ance of the Vine against Mildew, 395

Lauterborn, R., Vegetation of Upper Rhine,
789

Laveran, A., Classification of Trypano-
somes in Mammals, 632

— Haemogregarines, 214

— Leucocytozoon in Fish-Eagle, 477

— New Haemogregarine from the Horned

Asp, 477
Lavison, I. de R., Absorption by Plants
of Alkaline Earth Salts, 218

— Mineral Nutrition of Vascular Plants,

4S2
Law, E. F., Some Studies of Welds, 714
Lawson, A. A., Svnapsis of the Nucleus.

478
Lea, A. M., Beetles in Ants' Nests, 42

— New Stag-Beetles, 74S

Lead, Cadmium and Bismuth Alloys, 417

— Physico-chemical Studies, 417

— Tin and Antimony, Ternary Alloys,

556
Lead-tin Alloys, 711
Leaf, Demonstrating Presence of Starch,

263
Leaf-border, Variable, in Fissidens, 492
Leaf -fall, Opinions upon Physiology, 776

INDEX.

869

Leaf-scars, Some Mesozoic Fern* and their.

647
Leaf-spots of Currant, 795
Leaf-symmetry and Exotrophy, 639
Leaf-trace, Filicinean, Evolution, 376
Leaves of Calamites, 488

— Primary, Observations, 215
Lebedeff, W., Trypanosoma rotatorium, 47<i
Leboeuf, A., Hseinatoz >a from the Congo,

21-1

Lechmere, A. E., Notes on Saprolegnia,
234

Ledebt, S., Snake-poison and Yolk of Egg,
G13

Ledoux-Lebard. K., Myxomycetes from the
Neighbourhood of Paris, 801

Leduc, S., Osmotic Growths. 191

Lee. A. B., Reduction in the Spermato-
genesis of the Snail, 4H-!

Leech and Earthworms, Nerve-cells, 624

— Extra-enteric Aperture, 361

— Medicinal, Sensilli and Eyes. 203

— New, from Egypt, 470

Left- and Right-handedness, 192
Legendre, R., Physiology of Sleep, 459
Legeudres, R., Rapid Method of Identify-
ing Bacillus coli, 109
Leger, A., Trypanosome and Leptomonad

in Drosopbila, 368
Leger, L., Muddy Taste in Fresh-water

Fishes, 37
Leger, M., Microfilariae in Tonkin Birds,
361

— Selenococidiurn and the Relationships

of the Sporozoa, 213

— Species of Leucocytozoon, 368

— Spirochffit from the Rabbit, 369

— Studies on Trypanosomes, 213

— Trvpanosomes in Fresh-water Fishes,

632
Le Gris, — , "Filiations" of Metallic
Alloys, 715

— Simplification in Technique of Metal-

lography. 562
Lehmann, N., Influence of Weather Con-
ditions on Frequency of Warbles, 74!)

— Occurrence of Ox-warbles, 619
Leininger, H., Study of Fungi imperfecti,

509

Leuhmania tropica, Culture on Solid Me-
dia. 549

Leiss' Universal Spectral Apparatus, 694

Leitz' Liliput Arc-lamp, 699

— Xew Large Photomicrographic Appara-

tus, 541

— Photomicrographic Apparatus for Pho-

tographing Insects, 513

— Small Photomicrographic Apparatus,

540
Leitz, E., Microtome Knives, 703
Lelierre, A., Ileal Caecum of Birds. 192

— Method for Studying Osseous Tissue,

551

Lelierre, A., Red Blood Corpuscles of
Mammals. 609

— Tendons of Wing and Leg in Bate, 609

— Union of Muscle-fibre and Tendinous

fibre, 458
Lemmermiinn, E., African Fresh-water
Algae, 230

— Plankton-algse, 71

Lemoine, — , Classification of Melobesieae,
505

— Melobesiae. 505

Lemuridaj and Insectivora, Male Genital
Organs, 191

Lenartowicz, J. T , Xew Method of De-
monstrating Spirochmta pallida, 118

Lenderfeld, R. v., Observations on the
Technical Execution and Biological
Realization of Microscopical Measure-
ments, 700

Leon, N, Roumanian Mosquitos, 463

Leotia, Ascocarp. 234

Lepeschkin, W. W., Chemical Composition
of the Plasma-menibrane, 636

— Structure of Protoplasm, 636
LepidodendroH brownii. 488
Lepidophloioi Scotii, 62
Lepidoptera, Acephalous, 464

— Spermatogenesis, 43
Lepidosiren, Spermatogenesis, 608
Lepidosirenidae, Fossil, 460
Lepidostrobus, American, 647

— Bertramli, 62
Lepisma, Brain, 199

Lepra Bacillus of Man, Method of Isolat-
ing and Growing, 107
Leprosy Bacillus. Cultivation. 526
Leptocheirus, Genus, 754
Leptomonad and Trypanosome in Droso-
phila, 368

— in Euphorbias. :!07

— of the House-fiy, 633

Lesne, P., Nutritive Habits of Bostrychidae,

620
Lesquereuxiu, 492
Leucobryum glaucum, 7S0
Leucocytes, Distinguishing Dead from

Living, 117

— Elimination by, 195

— Endothelial Genesis. 188

— in Brown Rat, Parasites, 63:!

— Isolated, Survival. 611
Leucocytozoon in Fish-Eagle, 477

— Species, 368

Levaditi. C. (ilium of Treponema pal-
lidum, 633

— Trypanotoxin of Bacillus siibtilis, 522
Levy, D. M., Malleable Castings, 827
Lewin. K. R., Experiments on Para-

mcecium, 36(!
Lewis, F. J., Moss-remains in Scottish

Peat, 381
Lewis, M., Development of the Spores in

Pleurage zygotpora, (>71

870

INDEX.

Lewis. It. T., Larva of Mantispa, -105
Lewitzky, G., Chondriosomes in Plant-
cells, 479
Lichen, American, Notes, 519

— Flora of Santa Cruz Peninsula, Cali-

fornia. 518

— Gonidia, 399

Culture, 400

Lichen-fungi, Parasitic, 672
Lichens, Desert, .i!9

— in Italy, 801

— Lancashire, New, 243

— Morphology, 801

— Nature and' Classification, 801

— Nutrition, 518

— Siliceous, Relation to the Substratum,

683

— West of Ireland, 800

— See Contents

Liesching, T., Influence of Sulphur on the

Iron carbon System, 418
Liesegang, E. E., Method of Preserving

Brain Sections, 552
Light, Coloured, Effect on Stichococcuu

bacillaris, 387

- Mercury, Application to Microscopical

Works, 253

— Model of the Vibration-planes in

Polarizing Apparatus, 698

- on Alga?. Effect, 785

— Polarized, Interference Phenomena, 105

— Reactions of Amceba, 366

— Sense of, in Animals, 355

— Transmission through Transparent

Inactive Crystal Plates, with Special
Reference to Observations in Con-
vergent Polarized Light, 409

Lights, White and Coloured, Behaviour
of Chlorella in, 3S5

Lignier, O., Gnetales as Apetalous Angio-
sperms, 372

Limbs, Development in Salamandrella
Kayserlingi i , 35

— in Grebes, Development, 345

— of Chick, Interchange by Transplant-

ation, 738

— Supernumerary, Production in Am-

phibians, 187
Lininocnida, Notes on Structure and

Budding, 629
Lingelsheim, A., Notes on the Larger

Fungi, 236
Linguatula, New Species, 359
Linnet of Hawaiian Islands. 353
Linossier, G., Influence of Iron on the

Formation of Spores in Aspergillus

niger, 79
Linton, E., Flesh-parasites of F'ood-fishes,

206

— New Commeusal Turbellarian, 206

— Trematodes from Tortugas, 205
Lipska, I., Effect of Inanition on Para-

mcecium, 366

Lissitzky, E., Production of Super-
numerary Limbs in Amphibians, 187

Lister, G., Colloderma a New Genus of
Mycetozoa, 90

Litardiere, R. de, Asplenium guichardii,
618

— Fern-flora of Spain and Portugal, 222

— New Hybrid Asplenium. 63
Lithium Alloys, 123
Lythophyllum fasciculatum, 506
Lithothamnia from Roseoff in Brittany,

669
Liverworts and Mosses, British, 227

— British, Introduction, 228

Livon, G, Pigmentation of the Nervous

Lobe of the Hypophysis, 459
Lloyd, C. G„ Mycological Notes, 677. 795

— Notes on Myxomycetes, 802

on the Larger Fungi, 83

Lobster, Abnormal Cheliped, 46

— Norway, Genital Pores. 201
Lobsters, Rock, Classification, 623
Locomotion in Surirella, 384

— in Surirella elegans, 133

Loebe, R., Ternary Alloys of Lead, Tin

and Antimony, 556
Lonnberg, E., Pelvic Bones of some

Cetacea, 459
Loeske, L., Lesquereuxia, 492

— Tomenthypnuni, a new genus, 655
Lcewenthal,*N„ Thread-like Structures in

Epidermic Cells of Tadpoles, 1 89
Logie, W. J., Action of Dysentery Bacilli

on Nitrites and Nitrates, 94
Loginoff, W. J., Tracheal Epithelium in

Domestic Mammals, 349
Lophocolea minor not a Species, 781
Lophozia schultzii. New Variety, 655
Lorenz, R„ Metallic Fog in Fused Salts,

828
Loris-Melikov, J., New Anaerobe in

Typhoid Stools, 688
Losew, K., Composition of Eutectics, 563
Lovell, J. H., Colour-sense of Hive-bee, 40
Loyez, M., Staining -Celloidin Sections of

Nervous Tissue by the Iron-hsema-

toxyliu Method, 119
Lucernariaus, Development, 629
Lucien, M., Staining the Internal Network

in Nerve-cells, 119
Ludmilla, — , Development of Ischnocolus,

621
Liihe, M., Cystotamise of South American

Felidse, 206

— Tapeworms of South American Felidae,

49
Liitke, H., Iron -carbon Alloys, 125
Liitkemiiller, J., Desmidiacese of Bohemia,

232
Luminous Organs of Fishes, 745
Lungs, Development and Evolution, 457
Lutman, B. F., Cell and Nuclear Division

in Closterium, 665

INDEX.

871

Lutz, L„ Deformation of Ascoplujllum
nodosum. 503

Lycopodiacese, New Zealand, Anatomy,
62

Lycopodium Fossil, 62

Lyeorida? and Xephthyidse of the North
Sea and Baltic, 624

Lycom carolinensis, Circulatory System,
200

Lyginudeudron(Crossotheca) in Irish Coal
Measures, 646

Lymph-hearts of Turtles. 455

— Posterior, of Turtles, Structure and De-
velopment. 1546

Lyngbya, Cell-division, 500

M

Maas, O., Degenerative Changes in Spon-
ges, 630

— Regeneration in Chondroma reni/ormis,

56
Macalister, G. H., Rat Plague in East

Anglia, 688
McAlpine, D., New Smut in a New
Genus of Grass, 793

— Smuts of Australia, 81

— and others, Smut Fungi. 675
McCance, A., Troostite, 827
McCormick, F. A., Homothallic Conjuga-
tion in Bhizopus nigricans, 507

McDermott, F. A., Photogenic Function
in Marine Organisms, 355

— Photogenic Organs of Lampyridfe, 464
McFadden, A. S., AhnfeWia gigartinoides,

504
McFadden, M. E., Colacodasya, 505
Machine, Grinding and Polishing for

making Microscopical Specimens for

Metallurgical Work, R. and J. Beck's,

554
Mcllroy, A. L.. Oogenesis in Mammals, 344
Mcintosh, D. C, Genital Pores in Norwav

Lobster. 201
Mcintosh, W. C, Notes on Polychfets, 360
M'Keever, F. L., Algas and their Study,

230
of the Elf Loch, 230

— Phseothamnion confer vicolum, 233
Mackinnon, D. L., Australian Alcyon-

arians, 364

— Herpetomonails from Dung-flies, 57

— Protist Parasites from Intestine of

Trichoptera, 57

— Protozoan Parasites from Trichoptera,

476
McLaughlin, A. J., Characters of Cholera

aud Cholera-like Organisms, 246
Macrobiotic macronyx, Structure and

Habits, 622
Macrocystis, Fructification, 504
Macroplea aud Donacia, Respiration, 1 9S

Mactra, Artificial Parthenogenesis, 615
Macvioar, S. M., Fossombronia echinata,

655
McWilliam, A., Influence of Vanadium on

Iron and Steel, 827

— Nickel Steels, 827

— Properties of Cast and Rolled Gold

Plate, 557

Madrepores, Cirripede and other Com-
mensals, 624

Magitat. A., Survival of Excised Cornea,
350

Magnan, — , Size of Spleen in Birds, 352

Magnesium, Aluminium Alloys, contain-
ing, 711

— Zinc and Cadmium, Ternary Alloys,

124
Magnetic Properties of the Modifications

of Iron, 270
Magnus, P., New Fungi from the Tyrol,

673
Species of Bresadolio, 236

— Oak-mildew, 508

— Parasitic Root-diseases of the Juncacese,

670

— and another, Oak Mildew, 78
Magpies. Microfilaria, 48

Maia squinado, Development, 753
Maiden, J. H., Queensland Ferns, 491
Maier, F., New Method of Making Cel-

loidin Serial Sections, 116
Mair, W., Staining of Fats, 549
Maire, R., Boletus impolitic, 512

— New Genus of Plasmodiophoraceae,

243
Research onPlasmodiophoraceae, 6S5

— Notes on Hypocreaceaj. 790

— Research on Cladochytriacese, 233

— and another, Notes on the Larger Fungi,

81

Makuschok, M., Development and Evo-
lution of Lungs, 457

Malacobdella grossa, 627

Maldanidse, Irish, 758

Malleable Castings, 827

Mallopliaga and Anoplura, Studies, 761

— from Southern Birds, 465
Mammalian Spermatozoon, 30
Mammals. Development of Sympathetic

Nervous System, 31

— Domestic, Tracheal Epithelium, 349

— European, 36
Six New, 36

— of West Indies, 612

— ( )ogenesis, 344

— Post-natal Remains of Notochord. 603
— ■ Red Blood Corpuscles, 609

— Tapeworms, 760

— Trypanosomes, Classification, 632
Man, Accessory Chromosomes. 29

— Conjunctival Epithelium, 610

— Evolution. 36

— Inheritance of Skin-pigment ition, 30

872

INDEX.

Man, •'. <;. de, Anguillulidse of the White

slime of Oaks, 361
Manceaux, I-., Culture of Leishmania

tropica on Solid Media, 54'.i

— .Methods of Investigating Oriental Sore,

261
Mandel, H.. Blood Filaria in Horse. 470
Slanders, X., Validity of some forms of

Mimicry, 741
Manganese in Cast Iron, 272

— Influence on Mild Steel, 55S
Mangin, L., Cuirass of Peridinidse, 768
Manipulation, Microscopical. See Con-
tents

Mantis, Larval, Mimicry of Ant, 356

Mantispa, Larva, 465

Mantle-cavity and Fallial Organs of

Bulleidse, 747
Maplestone, C. M., Growth and Habits of

Biporse, 51
Marattia, Anatomy, 377
Marchal, E , Sexuality amone the Mosses,

651
Marchal, P., Notes on Chermes pint, 44
- Parasites of Olive-fly, 619
Marchand, L., Frisco-painting of Fungi,

677
Marchi, M. de, Plankton of Lago

Maggiore, 789
Marcus, H., Development of Head in

Hypogeophis, 457
Marcus, K., Olfactory Structures in

Galatlieids, 623
Markings, Directive, of Passerine Birds,

352
Marsch, C. D., Revision of North American

Species of Cyclops, 201
Marshall, F. H. A., Effects of One-sided

Ovariotomy on Sex of Offspring. 454
Martiis, L. C. de. Internal Fertilization in

Pareudrilus, 202
Martin, A. L., Effect of Light on Obelia.

212

— Senescence in Hydroids, 211

Martin, ( '. H., Caacal Parasites of Fowls,

632
Masinu-, G., Alloys of Lithium, 123
Massalongo, O, Brazilian Hepatics, 497
Massee, G., Notes on Fungi, 516

— Origin of Parasitism in Fungi, 238
Masson, P., Saffron in Histological Tech-
nique, 414

Must, S. O., Blow-fly Larvae and Gravity,
198

— Reactions of Amoeba to Light, 366
Mastigocoleus testatum, 500

Mast in. J., Polishing Metallic Prepara-
tions for Microscopical Examination,
267

Mathewson, C. H., Alloys of Sodium with
Silver and Gold, 556

Mathis, C, Microfilarias in Tonkin Birds,
361

Mathis. C, Species of Leucocvtozoon,
368

— Spirochsot from the Rabbit, 369

— Studies cm Trypanosomas, 21:;

— Trvpanosomes in Fresh-water Fishes,

632
Matruchot, L.. Culture of an Edible

Fundus. 236
Matsumura, J.. New Japanese Ferns, 223
Matthew, C. G., Chinese Ferns. 650
Matweieff. — , Slag in Steel, 271
Maublanc, — , Chuinchytrium exspitis, 76

— Thermophilous Moulds, 673

Maurel, E., Survival of Intestinal Organ-
isms in Cooked Meats, 403
Maxillary Glands of Cirripedes, 201
Mayer, A. G., Converse Relation between
Ciliary and Neuro-muscular Move-
ments, 350
Mayer, O., Modified Method of Isolating
Typhoid and Paratyphoid Bacilli, 108
Mayer, P., Tetrander Microtome, 113
Mayor. E., and others. Experimental

Researches with Uredinese, 791
Mazza. A., Marine Algolopjy, 790
Mazzetti, L., Interstitial Testicular Cells
and Secondary Sex Characters, 348

— Role of Interstitial Testiculular Cells,

740

Mazzotto, D., Lead-tin Alloys. 711

Measurement of Hardness, 274

Measurements Microscopical, Observations
on the Technical Execution and Bio-
logical Realization, 700

Meats, Cooked, Survival of Intestinal
Organisms, 403

Medisch, M., Hypocrea rufa, 670

— Study of Hypocrea rufa, 391, 392
Medium, Cultivation, for the Influenza

Bacillus and Ducrey's Bacillus, 549

— Dieudonne's, Selective Action, 260

— New, and Fading of Aniline-stained

Microscopical Preparations, 415
Mounting, for Botanical Prepara-
tions, 265
Medulla, Origin in Ophioglossacese, 643
Medulla-cells of Laminariacese, 504
Medullation in the Pteridophyta, 643
Medusa, Middle Cambrian, 629
Meek, C. F. U., Spermatogenesis of Steno-

bothrus viridulus. 617
Meek, W. O., Method of Studying Phago-
cytosis of Erythrocytes by Endothelial
Cells, no
Meijere, J. C. H. de, Insects in Nepenthes

Pitchers, 42
Meinhold, T., Physiology of Diatoms, 784
Meiotic Process, Unity in Plants and

Animals, 186
Melobesise, 505

— Classification, 505

Mencl, E., Direct Division of Red Blood
Corpuscles in Scorpsena, 35

INDEX.

873

Mendel, Y., Fermentation of Sugars by

Bacteria, 521
Mendelism, 453
Meneghiui, D., Formation of Solid Metallic,

Solutions by Diffusion in the Solid

State, 712
Merceyopsis g.n. and other Indian Mosses,

66
Mercier, L., Bacilhuv Disease among Fish,

405

— Crayfish Plague, 753

— Insects as Disseminators of Ergot, 4G3
as Fungus-carriers, 515

— Large Gregarine in Atyephyra, 772

— Pathogenicity of Bacillus chlororaphis,

68S
Mercury, Action on Steel at High Pres-
sures, 272

— Light, Application to Microscopical

Works. 253
Meres, Breaking of the, 7S8
Merlia, 630
Merlin, A. A. C. E., Diatomic Structure,

503

— Mr. Nelson's suggested Examination

Questions upon Microscopy, 133

— On the Measurement of Grayson's New

Ten-Band Plate, 160

— Some New Diatomic Structure dis-

covered with a New Zeiss Apochromat,
700

— The Measurement of Grayson's New

Ten-Band Plate, 129
Merostomata, Middle Cambrian, 622
Merrill, E. D., Bryophyta of the Philip-
pine Islands, 68

— Ferns of the Philippine Islands, 66
Merritt, M. L., Bryophyta of the Philip-
pine Islands, 68

— Ferns of the Philippine Islands, 66
Merton, F., Pleodorina illinoisensis Kofoid,

70
Mesnil, F., Papillomatous Neo-formation

in an Annelid, 625
Mesnilella, New Species, 635
Mesozoon, New, 51

Metabolism, Effect of Etherization, 776
Metachromatic Corpuscles and Mycoplasni

Hypothesis, 479
Metallic Fog in Fused Salts, 828

— Preparations, Polishing, for Micro-

scopical Examination, 267

— Solutions, Solid, Formation by Diffusion

in the Solid State, 712
Metallographic Notes, 55b'
Metallography, Microscopical, New

Method, 253

— Simplification in Technique. 562

— Solid Colloid Systems, 560

— See Contents

Metallurgical Work, K. and J. Beck's
Grinding and Polishing Machine for
making Microscopical Specimens, 554

Metals, Apparatus for Microscopical Ex-
amination, 561

— Bearing, 268

— Changes in ProDerties upon Working,

828

— Cold-worked, Reheating, 562
Stresses. 562

— Corrosion, 715

— Crystallization of Cast, 828

— Fatigue, 274

— Influence of Pressure on Melting-points

563

— Limits of Elasticity and Hardening,

r>62

— Molten, Electrical Conductivity, 563

— Noble, Alloys, 417, 826

— Viscous Flow, 274
Metamorphosis, Fatty Body during, 618

— of Blow-fly, 198

Metcalf, M. N., Studies on Amoebae. 767
Metchnikoff, E., Experimental Typhoid
Fever, 524

— Intestinal Flora, 94
Meteoric Iron, Synthesis. 559
Meteorite, Iron-Nickel, 270

Metzer, C, Junction of Fore-gut and Mid-
gut in Hive-bee, 197
Metzgeria, 781
Meves, F., Role of Plastocliondria in

Fertilization of Ascaris megalocephala,

759
Meyer, A., Chondriosomes in Plant-cells,

637
Meyer, H., Transformation-point Curve,

126
Meyer, K., Anaerobic Streptothrix, 803
Meylan, C, Plagiothecium, 780
Mice, White, Gestation, 737
Natural Immunity to Trypanosoma

lewisi, 459
Michael, A. D., 138

Michaelsen, W., Caucasian Earthworms, 48
Michel, A., Precision of Regeneration in

Polynoids, 203
Michener, J. R., New Dinoflagellates, 769
Micro-organisms and Fermentation, 396

— in Koumiss. 92

Microbes, Absorption Phenomena, 521

— Resistance to Passage through Collo-

dion Filters, 548
Michrocbemical Demonstration of Guanin,

258
Micrococcus melitensis, Agglutination by

Normal Sera, 402

Resistance to Lactic Ferments, 403

Microfaunu, Fresh-water, from German

East Africa, 39, 195

— of the Nile, 355
Microfilaria from a Fowl, 625

— m Magpies, 48
Microfilariae in Tonkin Birds, 361
Micrologist, The, 701
Micrometer, Improved, 408

XT I

INDEX.

Micrometer, Plug, 256

Micrometers, Glass, Directions for using,

538
Vlicroprojection, New Nernst Lamp for,

MIS '

Microscope, Beck's London ; Handle Model,
406, 419

— Binocular. 806

Improvement in Illumination of

Objects observed with, 96
Comparator, or Heading, 807

- Demonstration with Detachable Foot,

Winkel'a, 407, 692

— Grarjeanne's Simple Excursion, 600

— Lamp, 128

Emrys-Roberts, 698

New. 255

— Metal-, Reichert's New, 532
Rejto's, 531

— Modern, Adams's " Variable" and the

Evolution of, 178

— New, by J. E. Barnard, 831
Handle Model, 419

Portable, 569

— Old, by A. Pritchard, 835
by J. Simons, 276, 528

— The ""Variable." 284

— Winkel's Dissecting, 251
Drawing, 811

Stand No. 1, 248

Stand No. Id, 406

Travelling, 248

— Workshop, Jointed Arm for, 715
Microscopes, Mineralogical and Metal-
lurgical, Recent Progress in the
Construction, 693

Microscopic Investigation, Immobilizing
Flies for, 266

— Structure of Uric Acid Calculi, 258
Microscopical Examination of Blast-
furnace Slag, 275

of Metals, Apparatus, 561

- Polishing Metallic Preparations for,
267

— Manipulation. See Contents

— Measurements, Observations on the

Technical Execution and Biological
Realization, 700

- Metallography, New Method, 253

- Observation of Frozen Objects,

Apparatus, 693

— Observations, Electric Heating Ap-

paratus. 100

— Optics. See Contents

— Preparations, Coloured Plates, 258

- Purposes, Preparation of Kaiserling

Material. 703

- Technique, Celloidin in, 121
See Contents

— Works, Application of Mercurv Light,

253
Microscopy. See Contents
Microspectroscope, 256

Microspectroscopic Observation, 539
Microsporidian, New, from Termite, 58
Microtome Knives, 703

— Tetrauder, 113
Microtomes. See Contents

Mid-gut and Fore-gut, Junction in Hive-
bee, 197

Middleton, A. R., Rhythms in Termite
( 'omnmnities, 463

Midge, Mosquito sucked by, 750

Mietens, H., Origin of White Blood-cor-
puscles and Spleen in Bufo vulgaris,
346

Migula, W., German Fungus-flora, 512

Migration of Birds. 743

Migrations, Diurnal, of Calanus finmarchi-
cxis, 757

Mildew, Oak, 78

— of Cherries, 791

— of Gooseberry and Oak, 392

— of the Vine in Poland, 508

— Physical Conditions of Resistance of

the Vine, 395
Milk, Bacteria in. Enumeration, 710

— Soured, 404

Miller, G. S., Six New European
Mammals, 36

Millipede, Termitophilous, New, 621

Millipedes, Studies, 752

Mimicry, Validity of some forms, 741

Minchin, E. A., ( 'ysticercoids from Rat-
flea, 471

— New Parasite of Rat-flea, 476
Mironescu, T., Islands of Langerhans in

the Human Embryo, 31
Mischococcus, Dichotomosiphon and, 78S
Mite, Ear, of Cattle, 359
Mites and Tumours, 200

— Fresh- water, of Clare Island, 621

— Injurious, Studies, 752
Mitochondria, Continuity through many

Generations of Cells, 190

— Demonstrating the Presence in

Cartilage Cells. 264

— of Adipose Cells, 349
Mitochoudries of Plant-cells, 773
Mitosis in Grafted Tissue, 350

— Reappearance of the Nucleolus, 423,

598
Mitotic Figures in Isolated Tissues, 349
Miyake, K., Gametophytes and Embryo-

geny in Cunniughamia, 481
Mjoberg, E., Studies on Mallophnga and

Anoplura, 751
Modilevvski, J., Embryology in Euphor-

biacese, 372
Monkemeyer, W., Cratoneuron aud

Hygramblystegium, 493

— Muscinese of Bornholm. 494
Moisture, HymenophyllacesB in Relation

to, 487
Molendoa Sendtneriana, Distribution in
Hungary, 66

INDEX.

875

Molisch, H., Liberation of Iron by Green
Water-plants, 484

Molle', J, v., Mammalian Spermatozoon,

30
Molliard, M., Algal Figures on Culture

Flasks, 785

— Hvpochnus Form of Fistiiiiim hepatica,

512
Mollier, S., Structure of Spleen Capillaries,

349
Mollusca. See Contexts
Mollusoan Sliell, Layers, 746
Molluscs, Batrachospermum growing on,

787

— Marine, of Clare Island, 461

— of Ireland, 356

— of Portuguese East Africa, 355
Monascus, Development, 77
Monocbytrium, a New Genus of tbe

Cbytridiales, 50S
Monocotyledonous Characters in Poly-

carpea?, 640
Monopylidium pas*erinum, Structure, 626
Montanari, A., Effects of Pyridin Fixa-
tion upon Nervous Tissues, 702
Moreau, F., Notes on Mucorini, 790
Morel, C, Staining in Bulk with H.tma-

toxylin, 118
Morgan, W. De. Reaction of Tissues of

Pecten to Implantation of Foreign

Bodies, 356
Moroff, T., Vegetative and Reproductive

Processes in Tbalassicolla, 475
Morosofl", M., New Forceps, 416
Morphology of Organisms concerned in

the Production of Acute Intestinal

Toxaemia in Infants, 280
Morris, H. J., Properties of Cast and

Boiled Gold Plate, 557
Morse, M., Sterility, 30
Morse, M. W., Experiments on Ova of

Cerebratulus, 762
— ■ Polarity in Tubularia, 765
Mortensen, T., West Indian Echinoids, 208
Mortierellae, Study, 77
Mosquito Larva?. Carnivorous, 35S

— sucked by Midge, 753

Mosquitos, Bentley-Taylor Method of
Mounting, 120

— Roumanian, 40;;

Moss-fauna of Central America, 615
Moss-flora in Central Asia, 495

— Mexican, 783

— of Bernina, 657

— of Bolivia, 68

— of Bulgaria, 657

— of Eisenach, 67

— of Haute-Saone, 382, 656

— of Rhine-land, 656

— of South Tburingia. 67

— of the Atlantic Islands, 382

— of the Jura, 494

— of Tunis, 382

Moss-genus, Indian, New, Hyophilopsis,

654
Moss-herbarium, F. Renauld's, 497
Moss-pedigrees, Parallelism and Con-
vergence^ 65
Moss-remains in Scottish Peat, 381
Mosses and Liverworts, British, 227

— Antarctic, 784

— attacked by Cladosporium, 653

— Branch-formation, 651

— British, 228

— Crimean, 057

— Desiccation-phenomena, 381

— European, Critical, 656
New or Rare, 67, 227, 494

— Exotic, Illustrations, 227, 381

— Hungarian, 657

— Indian. Merceyopsis g.n. and other, 66

— Japanese, New, 495

— Mexican, 68, 383, 658

— of Ceylon, 382

— of Eastern Asia, 495

— of Hamburg, New Records, 67

— of Libya, 658

— of New Guinea, 495
Caledonia, 784

— of Spitzbergen, 494

— of the Crimea, 382

— of the Erzgebirge, 656

— of the Haute-Saone, 229, 782

— of Tirol, 657

— Panama, 497

— Northern, 229

— Scottish, New, 228

— Sexuality, 651

— South Russian, 229

— Teneriffe, 382
Moths, Grape, 464

Motz-Kossowska, S., Mediterranean Spe-
cies of Halecium, 474

Moulds, Metabolism, 79

— Thermophilous, 673
Moulting in Silkworms, 748
Mounting, Fluid, 551

— Mosquitos, Bentley-Taylor Method. 120

— Slicing, and Grinding Rock-Sections,

Method, 706

— Objects. See Contents

Mouse, White, Early Development, 603
Movement in Graruinea?, Mechanism, :!74
Movements of Bacteria, New Method for

Studying, 260
Mozejko, B., Injection Preparations of

Petromyzon. 263
Mucorini, Norwegian II., 507

— Notes, 790

— Study, 76

Mvihlethalcr, F.. Desmids of the Burg'as-

cinmoos, 665
Midler, K., European Hepatica?, 381,

49:;
Midler, P., Electrii-al Conductivity of

Molten Alloys, 274, 560

876

INDEX.

Miiller, It., Formation of Axis of
Corallium, 55

— Rhizoxenia and Saroodiotyon, 5 1

Simple Object-holder for Photomicro-
graphy: Tables of Magnifications, 103

— Variations of Typhoid and Dysentery

Bacilli. 526

Muller-Thiirgau, H., Infection of the Vine
by Plasmopara viticola, 507

Mulson, K., Fish Disease, 799

Munch, — , Research on Diseases of Trees,
397

Munerate, O., Smut- infection Experi-
ments. 670

Murray, J., 569

— Antarctic and other Tardigrada, 359

— Australian Rotifera : Collected by the

Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,
1909. 164, 284

— Canadian Rotifera Collected by the

Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,
1909, 285, 424

— Clare Island Rotifers, 627
Water-bears, 422

— Notes on Tardigrada, 468

— Red Snow, 500

— Rotifera of New Zealand : Collected by

the Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,
572, 573

— Rotifera of some Pacific Islands: Col-

lected by the Shackleton Antarctic
Expedition, 1909, 427, 429

— Some African Rotifers : Bdelloids of

Tropical Africa, 1, 129

— South African Rotifera : Collected by

the Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,
572, 5S4
Murrill, W. A., and others, Poisonous

Mushrooms, 236
Muscardine, Green, of Frog-hoppers, 673
Muschler, R., Algse of Tripoli, 660
Muscid Larvae, Metamorphosis of Intes-
tinal Musculature, 42
Muscidse, Cells, Cliromidia in, 464
Muscids, Larval, Beginning of Muscular

Phagocytosis, 42
Muscinea), British, 656

— Inflorescence, 779

— of Bornholm, 494

Muscle, Striped, Interstitial Tissue, 35

Muscle-fibre and Tendinous-fibre, Union,
45S

Muscle-fibres in Heart of Fishes, Distribu-
tion, 741

Muscle-fibrils and Tendon-fibrils, Direct
( onnexion, 348

Muscles of Lamprey, 611

.Musculature of Pectoral Girdle and
Flipper in Cetacea, 192
- Ventral, of Fishes, 194

-Museum, Natural History, at S. Kensing-
ton, Scheme to encroach upon the
space allotted in 1899, 4'2.">

Mushroom Culture, 82

— Poisoning, 599
Mushrooms, Poisonous, 236

Mussels, Fresh-water, Contraction of
Adductors, 6 1 (J

— — Notes. 462

Muth, F., Mildew of Cherries, 791
Mutinus caninui and Ithy phallus im-

pudlcus, Study, 512
Mycetozoa, Colloderma, a New Genus. 90

— Distribution in South Midlands, 401

— See Contents
Myco-geography, 237

Mycological Flora of Oak-tree, Slime-flux,
516

— Notes, 82, 677, 795
Mycology, British, 513

— Notes, 516, 795

— Technical, 83

Mycoplasm Hypothesis and Meta-
chromatic Corpuscles, 479
Mycorhiza of Gastrodia, 6S1
Myotomes, Development, 740
Myriopoda, Cavernicolous, 44

— See Contents

Myriopods, Carboniferous, British, 200

— Doubling of Segments, 621
Myxomycetes, Alternation of Generations,

685

— from the Neighbourhood of Paris, 801

— Notes, 520. 552

— Studies, 684

Myxonema in Salmon Disease, 663
Myxophyceae, 233
Myxosporidia, Distribution, 477
Myzostoma, Theory of Dwarf Males, 204

N

Nadson, G. A., Effect of Coloured Light
on Stichococcus bacillaris, 387

— - Mastigocoleus testatum, 500

Nageotte, J., Staining Celloidin Sections
of Nervous Tissue by the Irou-hsema-
toxyliu Method, 120

Namyslowslri, B., Glcespurium ribis, 510

— Study of Mucorini, 76

Nauni, J., Structure of Tornopteris, 75S

Nanomitrium and Ephemerum in North
America, 66

National Physical Laboratory, 716

Nattan-Larrier. L., Leucocytozoon in Fish-
Eagle, 477

Naunch, E„ Research on Diseases of
Trees, 677

Navicula rhomboides, 232

Nectria graminicola and Fusarium nivale,
78

Necturus marulatus, Effects of Starvation
613

Neeracher, F., Insects of the Rhine, 197

Neger, F. W., Ambrosia Fungus, 396

INDEX.

877

Neger. F. W., Spore-distribution ia Sela-
ginella, 646

Negre, L., Agglutination of Micrococcus
melitensis by Normal Sera, 402

Nelson, E. M., Adams's " Variable " and
the Evolution of the Modern Micro-
scope. 178, 284

— An Objective Mount with an Iris, 283

— Navicida rhomboides, 232

— New Dark-ground Illuminator, 276

— On some New Objectives and Eye-pieces

by R. Winkel, of Gottiugen, 284, 451

— The Society's Standard Thread, 537

— Winkel's Drawing Microscope, 811
Nematode Extract, Anti-coagulant Action,

205

— New, 759

in Eye of Queensland Fowl, 48

— Supposed, in Circular Muscle of Earth-

worm, 48
Nematodes in Deer, 760
Nematohelmintlies. See Contents
Nemerteans, Hermaphroditism, 206

— Regeneration, 206
Nemertines of Millport, 761
Nepenthes Pitchers, Insects, 42
Nephrodium, Nomenclature, 221
Nephthyidse and Lycoridae of the North

Sea and Baltic, 624
Nernst Lamp for Microprojection, New,

808
— ■ — New Zeiss, 810
Nerve-cells, Grouping in Spinal Cord of

Tench, 610

— of Leech and Earthworms, 624

— Staining Internal Network, 119
Neives and Blood-vessels of ^Eolididae

and Tritoniadse, 196

Nervous System of Ascaris, 470

of Dytiscus marginalis, 41

Sympathetic, Development in Mam-
mals, 31

in Birds, 32

in Fishes, 606

— in Turtles, 605

— Tissues, Effects of Pyridin Fixation, 702
Neumann, E., Spindle-cells of Amphibian

Blood, 740
Neumann, L. G., Mallophaga from Southern
Birds, 465

— New Ixodidse, 44

Neumayer, L., Celloidin in Microscopical

Technique, 121
Neuro-rauscular and Ciliary Movements,

Converse Relation, 350
Neurochords of Criorlrilus, 202
Neurohypophysis, Human, Pigment, 190
Neuroplasm, Physical Nature, 458
Newts, Regeneration, 614
Nichols, A. R., Irish Polyzoa, 362
Nichols, G. E., Ephemerum and Nano-

mitrium in North America, 66
Nickel Steel, Changes occurring in, 713

Nickel Steels, 827

Magnetic Properties, 827

Nickel-sulphur System, 416
Nicoll, W., Cysticercoids from Rat-flea,
471

— Entozoa from Clyde Fishes, 49

— Gadero&tomum tergedinum, 471
Nicolle, C, Culture of Leishmania tropica

on Solid Media, 549

— Methods of Investigating Oriental Sore,

261

Nicoloff, T.. Ovule and Embryo-sac of the
Platauacese, 775

Nidularia, Spore-formation, 794

Niemeyer, E., Reichert's Dark Ground
Illuminator with Arrangement for
Centring on a Plain Stage, 426

Nieuwenhuis, A. VV„ Pure Cultures from
a Single Cell, 820

Niosi, F., Strict Anaerobic Bacillus caus-
ing Purulent Pleurisy, 522

Nitrifying Organisms in Soil, 405

Nitrite-formation by Various Bacilli. 526

Nitrogen, Assimilation by Fungi, 512

— Influence on Cementation of Steel,

558
Nobre, A., Molluscs of Portuguese East

Africa, 355
Noelle, W., Anatomy and Morphology of

Roots of Conifers, 371
Nogier, T., Castration by X-Rays, 347

— Sterilization by X-Rays, 347
Noguchi, H., Cultivation of Spirochueta

pallida, 820

Nomina nuda, 659

Nose-piece, Sliding, for use in Stereo-
photomicrography, 95

Nosema apis, Bee Disease due to, 769

Nostoc, New Species, 661

Notochord Epithelium, Origin, 740

— in Mammals, Post-natal Remains, 603
Notropis, Variations of Species, 38
Nuclear Autochromatism in AlgaB, 785

— Evolution in Ascomycetes, 508
Nuclei, Life-history and Physiology, 478
Nucleolus, Reappearance in Mitosis, 598
Nucleoproteid, Function, 637
Nucleus Action and Grain -growth, 716

— Synapsis, 478

Nusbaum, J., and another, Regeneration

in Nemerteans, 206
Nutrition and Growth of Seed Plants.

See Contents

— Mineral, of Vascular Plants, 482

— of Lichens, 518

Nuttall, G. H. F., Parasites of Biliary

Fever in Horses, 369
Nutting, C. C, Gorgonellids of ' Siboga '

Expedition, 55

— Gorgonidaj of ' Siboga ' Expedition, 55
- Isidao of ' Siboga' Expedition, 55.

— Plexaurids of ' Siboga ' Expedition,

55

Dec. 20th, 1911

3 L

878

INDEX.

O

Oai and Gooseberry Mildew, 392

— Mildew, 78. 508

— (ieinnobolus sp. Parasitic, 393
Oak-tree Slime-flux, Mvculogical Flora,

516

Oaks. Anguillulidae of the White Slime,
361

Oats, Ergot, 391

Obelia, Effect of Light. 212

Oberstein-Breslau, O., Cicinnobolus sp.
Parasitic on Sphserotheca mors-uvee,
392

Obituary, F. H. Gillot, 799
- Carolyn Wilson Harris, 90

Object-holder, Simple, for Photomicro-
graphy: Tables of Magnifications,
103

Objective Mount with an Iris, 283

— Screw Threads. Anomalies, 175, 283
Objectives and Eye-pieces, New, by R.

Winkel of Gottingen, 284, 451
Objectives. See Contents
Ocular, Edinger's Pointer- Double, 252
Odhner, N., Genus Cumanotus, 39
O'Donoghue, C. H., Duplicity in Cluck

Embryos, 33
Odontopteryx, New Species, 613
Oenothera, Chromosome-reduction, 370

— Mutants and Hybrids, Chromosomes,370
Offord, J. M., 137

Ohta, R., Fat-destroying Fungi, 677
Oidium of Japanese Euonymus, 78
Okajima, K., Ear of Urodela, 193
Okamura, K., Japanese Marine Algae, 229
Okamura, S., Japanese Bryophytes, 783

— New Japanese Mosses, 495
Okapi, Atlas, 36

Oknoff, M., Internal Structure of Pearlitic
Steel, 828

Olfactory Structures in Galatheid3, 623

Oligochaet Commensals in Spongilla car-
teri, 469

Oligochaeta, Littoral, of the Clyde, 758

Olive-fly, Parasites, 619

Oliver, R. B , Ferns of the Kermadec
Islands, 64

Omeliansky, W. L., Pigment of Azotobacter
Chroococcum, 686

Oocyte, Primary, of Asterias forbesii, Po-
larity, 472

Oogenesis, in Dytiscidae, 198

— in Mammals, 344

— in Pelagia, 473

Oospora Ihigualis, Rapid Method for Iso-
lating, 548
Ophioglossaceae, Origin of Medulla, 643
Ophioglossum, Forms, 643

— palmutum. 111

Morphology, 642

Ophiurans, North Pacific, 472
Opisthobranchs of South Africa, 39

Oppel, A., New Kind of Cell in Brunntr's

Glands. 349
Optical System with regard to Perspec-
tive, Pupil, 817
Optics, Microscopical. See Contents
Orange and Peach, Gum-inducing Diplo-

dia, 672
Orchids, Bacterial Diseases, 802
( »rganisms, Intestinal, Survival in Cooked
Meats, 403

— Marine, Photogenic Function, 355
Oriental Sore, Methods of Investigating,

261

Orueta, D. de, Apparatus for Photo-
micrography with the Microscope
standing in any Position, especially
in Inclined position, 423, 588

Osborn. T. G. B., Spongospora subterranea,
401, 685

OsciUatoria rubescens, 389, 662

Oshima, H., Luminous Organs in Fishes,
745

Osmotic Growths, 191

— Pressure, and the Form and Structure

of Plants, 484
Osruundaceae, Anatomy, 645

— Fossil, 379

Osseous Tissue, Method for Studying. 551
Ostenfeld, C. H, Arctic Plankton, 789

— Diatoms and Flagellatae from East

Greenland, 660

— Halosphaera and Flagellatae, 660

— Thorosphaera, 71
Ostracods from Funafati, 47

— from Madeira, 757

Ova and Larvae, Teleostean, 35

— and Sperms, Influence of Radium Kays,

185

— of Cerebratulus. Experiments, 762

— Sea-urchin, Extra-ovate Experiments,

363
Ovaries in some Polyclads, Two-fold
Function, 761

— in Starfish. Seasonal Retrogression, 52
Ovariotomy, One-sided, Effects on Sex of

Offspring, 454
Ovary in Hybrid Birds, 604

— State of, in Hybrids of Goldfinch and

Canary, 455
Overton. J. B., Living Cells in Relation to

Transpiration and Sap-flow, 482
Oviduct of Domestic Fowl, Ligaments,

35
Ovifak Iron, 713
Oviparity and Viviparity in Dung-fly,

198
Ovule and Embryo-sac of the Platanaceae,

775
Ovum, Mammalian, Maturation, 603

— of Ascaris megalcxephala. Fertilized,

Compression Experiments with, 759
Ovarian, of Proteus, 456
Ox- warbles, Occurrence, 619

INDEX.

879

Oxygen, Solubility in Molten Silver, 125
Oxyuris in Appendix vcrniiformis, 470
Oysters, cleansing, 40
— Feeding Habits, 40

Paiva, C. A., Carnivorous Mosquito Larva),
358

Palsemon niloticus in Lake Tchad, 753

Palaeozoic Insects, New, 466

Palladine, W., Peroxydase and Respiratory
Pigments, 038

Palladium-gold Alloys, Occlusion of Hy-
drogen, 557

Palmer, T. C, 133

— Locomotion in Surirella, 384

— Surirella elegans, Method of Locomo-

tion, 132

Palpi of Male Spiders, 44

Pampanini, P., Woodwanlia radicans in
Italy. 649

Panton, D. N., New Method for Differen-
tiation of Bacteria, 109

Paoli, Guido, Monograph on Tarsonemidse,
752

Papaveraceae, European. Seeds, 218

Papillae, Cutaneous, in Gobius, 741

Papillomatous Neo-formation in an Anne-
lid, 625

Paque, E., Vaucheria terrestris, 666

Paraffin Baths, Ordinary, Adaptation for
Vacuum Embedding, 26

Paralysis, Infantile, Histological Changes,
258

— Landry's, Bacteriology, 244
Paramcecium, Conjugation, 634

— Effect of Excretion-products on Rate of

Reproduction, 767
of Inanition, 366

— Experiments, 366

— Two Thousand Generations, 367
Paranhos, V., Alleged Importance of

Demodex in Spreading Leprosy, 622
Parasite, Gid, 760

— New, of Rat-flea, 47(5

— of Coast Fever, 770

— Pearl-inducing, 470

— Protozoon, from Mucous Membrane of

Sheep's Abomasum, 57
Parasites, Blood, 57

— CaBcal of Fowls, 632

— from Irish Sea Fishes, 49

— Horse, in Cameroon, 471

— of Biliary Fever in Horses, 369

— of Fishes, 760

— of Leucocytes in Brown Rat, 633

— of Olive-fly, 619

— on the Roots of Juncacese, 90

— Protist, from Intestine of Trichoptera,

57

— Protozoan, from Trichoptera, 476

Parasitism in Fungi, Origin, 238
- Method of Examining Fasces for

Evidences, 554
Paratyphoid and Typhoid Bacilli, Modified

Method of Isolating, 108

— Bacilli, Distribution, 402
Pareudrilus, Internal Fertilization, 202
Paris, E. G., Bryological Index, 227

— Bryophyta of Tropical West Africa

496

— Hepaticse of New Caledonia, 383

— Mosses of Eastern Asia, 495

— Nomina nuda, 659

— Obituary, 659

Park, W. R., Cultivation of Human and
Bovine Tubercle Bacilli, 107

Parravano, N , Alloys of Copper, Antimony
and Bismuth, 124

— Ternary System, Silver-tin-lead, 556
Parthenogenesis, Artificial in Mactra, 615
in Toad, 454

of Toad's Egg, 454

— Experimentally Induced in Toad, 454

— Traumatic, Factors, 737

Pascher, A., Chrysomonadeaa from the

Hirschberger Grossteich, 661
Passow, H., Microscopical Examination of

Blast Furnace Sla£, 275
Patella, V., Endothelial Genesis of

Leucocytes, 188
Patouillard, N., Notes on Larger Fungi,

676
Pavarino, G. L., Bacterial Diseases of

Orchids, 802
— ■ Bacterium briosianum, 803

brioxii, 523

Pavillard, J., Vegetable Protistology, 387
Pawson, C. F., Turbidometer for Counting

Vaccines, 824
Pax, F., Studies of Actinians, 21 1
Peach and Orange, Gum - inducing

Diplodia, 672
Pearl, R., Inheritance in Hybrid Poultry,

34
of Colour-pattern in Hybrid Poultry,

34
Pearl-inducing Parasite, 470
Pearlitic Steel, Internal Structure, 828
Pearson, J., Holothuroids from the Indian

Ocean, 209
Pecten, Reaction of Tissues to Implanta-
tion of Foreign Bodies, 356

— Visceral Ganglion, 40
Pectinatella magnifica near Berlin, 763
Pectoral Girdle and Fins of Teleosteans,

195

and Flipper in Cetacea, Muscula-
ture, 192

Peebles, P., Interchange of Limbs of Chick
by Transplantation, 738

Peglion, V., Biology of Sclerospora, 234

— Notes on Erisipheaa, 671

Peklo, Y., Actinomycosis of Plants, 92

3 l 2

880

INDEX.

Pelabon, H.. Selenium-antimony System,

826
Pelagia, < togenesis, 47:;
Pellihi, i... Gold Telluridos, 557

- Tellurites of Sodium and of Silver, 416
Pclomvxii, Encystation, 631

— Studies. 631

Pelvic Bones of some Oetacea, 459
Pelourde, F„ Some Mesozoic Ferns and

their Leaf-scars, 647
Pelz. E., Nitrite-formation by Various

Bacteria, f>2<;
Penard, E., Antarctic Rhizopods, 366
Pe'nau, H., Bacterial Cytology, 404

— Minute Structure of Bacillus anthracis,

524

Penfold, W. J., Variability of Intestinal
Bacteria, 525

Penguin's Vertebral Column, Mobility, 743

Penicillium, Coremium-formation, 79

Penis of Drake and Gander, 353

Pennatulacea, 765

Pennatulids, Australian, 365

Pennington, L. H., Assimilation of Nitro-
gen by Fungi, 512

— Effect of Longitudinal ( ompression

upon the Production of Mechanical

Tissue in Stems, 373
Pentaceros reticulatus, Structure, 304
Pentastomes in Australian Cattle, 62:!
Pentastomid, New, 468
Pentastomum of Python, 200
Peres8leginn, B., Laminaria hyperborea,

74
Perez, C, Beginning of Muscular Plagocy-

tosis in Larval Muscids, 42

— Cuticular Warts of Pilargis verrucosa,

\1

— Metamorphosis of Blow-Fly, 198
of Intestinal Musculature in Muscid

Larvae, 42

— New Microsporidian from Termite, 58

— Seasonal Retrogression of Ovaries in

Starfish, 52
Perianth, Premature Fall, 485
Peridinium Plankton at Rovigno, 57
Peridinidaa, Cuirass, 768
Periodicity in Spirogyra, 231
Peripatua from Grenada, New Species,

752

— Jamaica, 466

Periplasmodium. Significance, 481, 488
Perkins, G. H., Fossil Cetacea, 37
Permin, ( -., Improved Form of Graduated

Pipette, 553
Peroxydase and Respiratory Pigments, 638
Perrier, R., Mantle-cavity and Pallial

Organs of Bulleidae, 747
Perrin, G., Prothallia of Equisetum, 645
Peseher, A., Cryptromonadese, 661

— Two Brown Flagellatse, 661

Petch, T., Note on the Biology of Septo-
basidium, 676

Damage

Petch. T., Pliysiology and Pathology of

1 1 uvea brasiliensis, 7'.)5
Peters, L., Pythium de Jiaryanum, 508
Petersen, ('. d. J., Animal Life of Sea-

bottom, 741

to Plaice-fishing by Whelks,

717
Petersen, H. E., Oeramium, 669

— Danish Phycomycetes, 77
Pethybridge, G. H., Experiments with

Phytophthora, 507

— and another, Bacterial Disease of

Potato-plant, 247
Petiole, Removal of Starch through, 373
Petkoff, S., Fresh-water Algae from Mace-
donia, 390
Petrenko, G. J., Alloys of Silver with

Cadmium, 825
Petromyzou, Injection Preparations, 263
Petrunkevitck, A., Circulatory System of

Lyrosa carolinensis, 200
Pettit, A., Haemogregarines, 214

— Mitosis in Grafted Tissue, 350

— New Haemogregarine from the Horned

Asp, 477
Peyron, — , Pigmentation of the Nervous

Lobe of the Hypophysis, 459
Pfenninger, M., Carbohydrates in Seeds,

480
Phseothamnion confervicolum, 233
Phagocytosis, Muscular, Beginning iu

Larval Muscids. 42

— Occurrence in Root-nodules of Cycads,

60

— of Erythrocytes by Endothelial Cells,

Method of Studying, 110
Pharetronid Sponge, Remarkable, 365

— Sponges of Essen Greensand, 631
Philichthydao, Affinities, 47
Philonotis revised by Disnier, 654

— striata with Fruit, 494
Phisalix, M., Bite of Heloderma, 741
Phloem of Juglandaceae, 480

Pholas Candida, Influence of Radium on

the Development. 462
Phomopsis, Genus, 510
Phosphorescence of Pleurotus japonicus,

512
Photogenic Function in Marine Organisms.

355

— Organs of Lampyridae. 464
Photographic Apparatus, New, of the Paris

School of Mines. 103
Photographing Fossils by Reflected Light,

257
Photography, Easy Method of Treating

Printing-out Paper for all Kinds of,

129
Photomicrographic Apparatus, 273
— - — for Photographing Insects, Leitz's,

543

Geometric Slide, 836

Leitz's New Large, 541

INDEX.

881

rhotomicrographic Apparatus, Leitz's
Small, 540

Photomicrographs, Instantaneous, Simple
Method of Obtaining, 19

Photomicrography, Instantaneous Expo-
sure, 7-1

— Low-Power, with Special Relation to a

Colouring Method for Tinting Lantern
Slides, 419

— Practical, Barnard's, 545

— Simple Object-holder : Tables of Mag-

nifications, 103

— Stereoscopic, 816

— Use of Metallic Electric Arc, 21

— with the Microscope standing iu any

Position, especially in Inclined
Position, Apparatus, 423, 588
— W ratten and Wainwright's, 103

— See Contents

Photophores of Decapod Crustacea, 45
Phototropism and Geotropism, in Fungi,

396
Phryganea grandis, Study, 750
Phycocyanin, Phycoerytherin and, 7S4
Phycoerytherin and Pnycocyanin, 784
Phycomycetes, Danish, 77
Phylliroe bucephala, 39
Minute Structure, 196

— Glands and Luminescence, 196
Phyllopod, New Antarctic, 47
Phyllopoda Anostraca, Monograph, 46
Phylogeny of Algae, 498

— of Cerithiidae, 356
Physalosporiua, a New Genus of Pyreno-

mycetes, 671
Physcia and Anaptychia, Apothecial De-
velopment, 401
Physiology of Seed Plants. See Contents
Phytophthora, Experiments, 507
Phytoplankton of the Caspian Sea, 71

— of the Zeller See, 388

— Periodicity, of Leopoldstein Lake, 660
Picramic Acid, Use for Staining, 118
Pieron, H., Physiology of Sleep, 459
Pigeons, Colour-inheritance, 738

— Webibot Character in, 455

Pigg, J. I., Stereoscopic Photomicro-
graphy, 816

Pighini, G., Metabolism of Moulds, 79

Pigment iu the Human Neurohypophysis,
190

Pigment-cells, Development in Teleostean
Embryos, 187

— in Sheep's Cornea, 19<>
Pigmentation of the Nervous Lobe of the

Hypophysis, 459
Pigments, Respiratory, and Peroxydase,

638
Pilargis verrucosa, Cutieular Warts, 47
Pilger, R., Marine Algae of Kamerun,

790
Pincussohn, L., Enzymes in Different

Bacteria, 94

Pinov. M. E., Sporotrichum beurmanni in

Man, 404
Pinto, M., Parasites of Leucocytes in

Brown Rat, 633
Pipette, Graduated, Improved Form,

553
Pitard, J., Moss-flora of Tunis, 382
Pits, Bordered, Staining, 709
Placenta, Mole's, Giant-cells, 188
I'la^iothecium, 780
Plague, Crayfish, 753

— Material, Method of Preserving, 120

— Rat, in East Anglia, 688
Plaice-fishing, Damage by Whelks, 747
Planaria, Regeneration in Short Head-
pieces, 761

Planarians, Effect of Starvation, 627

— Regeneration, 626
Plankton, Arctic, 789

— from the Julischen Alps, 388

— of Lago Maggiore, 789

— of Prester See, 789

— of Spitzbergen, 39

— Organisms, Simple Arrangement for

Determining Sinking-velocity, 122

— Peridinium, at Revigno, 57

— Scottish and Irish, 355

— Summer, of West of Scotland and Irish

Sea, 614
Plankton-algae, 71
Plant-cells, Chondriosomes, 479, 637

— Mitochondries, 773
Plant- disease, Sclerotinia, 670
Plant-diseases, 84, 238, 678

— Bacillus colt, 804

— in South Africa, 678

— in the Tropics, 514

Plant-forms, New, Traumatism in Relation

to, 485
Plant-organs, Cryoscopic Determination of

Osmotic Pressure, 219

— Regeneration and Polarity, '219
Plant-parasites, Wintering, 83

Plants, Absorption of Alkaline Earth Salts,
218

— Actinomycosis, 92

— Complementary Chromatic Adaptation,

776

— Diseases, 238, 514, 796

— Economic, Diseases, 84

— Osmotic Pressure, and the Form and

Structure of, 484

— Sea-side, Anatomical Researches, 216

— Vascular, Evolution of Conducting-

tissues, 638

Mineral Nutrition, 482

Transitory Tissues, 216

Plasma-membrane. Chemical Composition,

636
Plasmodes, New Methodsof Demonstrating,

119
Plasmodia, Movements, 479

— Streaming, 520

8Si>

INDEX.

Plaemodiophora hrassicx, Parasite of Rabies
ami, 803

Plasmodiophoraceae, New Genus, 243

Research, 685

Plasmopara viticola. Infection of the Vine,
507

Plastochondria, Role of, in Fertilization of
Ascaris megaloccphala, 759

Platanacese, Ovule and Einbryo-sac, 775

Plate, L., Heredity and Evolution, 453

Plates, Wax, Apparatus for Rolling, 112

Platyhelminthes. See Contents

Playfair, G. I., Polymorphism and Life-
history in the Desmidiaceae, 389

Plehn, M., Fish Disease, 799

Pleodorina californica, 502

at Banyuls, 768

— illinoisensis, 70

Plessis, G. du, Hermaphroditism in
Nemerteans, 206

Pleurage zygospora, Development of the
Spores, 671

Pleurococcus sidphurarius, 788

Pleurotus japonirus, Phosphorescence, 512

Plexaurids of ' Siboga ' Expedition, 55

Plica semilunaris in Hereros and Hotten-
tots, 612

Plicaria planchonis, 670

Plumage Changes in Red Grouse, 353

Plumarids, Siboga, 765

Plumularid Genus, New, 365

Pneumococcus and Streptococcus, Viru-
lence, 245

Pocock, R. I., Carboniferous Arachnida,
467

— Cutaneous Scent-glands of Ruminants,

351

— Mimicry of Ant by Larval Mantis, 356
Podpera, J., Moss-flora of Bulgaria, 657
Potter, E., Staining the Medullary Sheath

in Brain-sections, 120
Poisoning by Fungi, 677

— Mushroom, 509
Poisonous Mushrooms, 236

Polacci, G„ Parasite of Rabies and
Plasmodiophora bransicx, 803

Polarity in Tubularia, 765

Polarized Light, Interference Phenomena,
105

Polarizing Apparatus, Moilel of the Vibra-
tion-planes of Light, 698

— Prisms, Glass, 697

Polishing Metallic Preparations for Micro-
scopical Examination, 267

Poll, H., Ovary in Hybrid Birds, 604

Pollen-mother-cells, Heterotypic Division,
637

Pollination Experiments with Anonas in
South Florida, 374

Polyblepharidae, New Genus, 71

Polycarpea3, Monocotyledonous Characters,
640

Polyclu-et from the Delta of the Volga, 360

Polyclueta, Littoral, of Torquay, 48
Polvchaets. Incubation, 758

— Notes, 360

— Pelagic, of Irish Seas, 360
Polyclad, South African, New, 50
Polyclads, Two-fold Functiou of Ovaries,

761
Polyides and Furcellaria, Anatomy, 785
Polymorphism and Life-history in the

Desmidiaceaj, 389

— in Flagellates, 768

— of Zinc, 123

Polynoids, Precision of Regeneration, 203
Polypodiaceae and Cyatheaceae, Relation

to Woodsieae, 486
Poly podium hydri/orme, 365
Polyspermy, 185

Polytrichaceae of North America, 383
Polytrirhum, 781
Polyxenus, Study, 199
Polyzoa, Irish, 362
Pond Life, Exhibition, 427
Ponroy, M., Mushroom Culture, 82
Pontobdella muricata. Adipose Cells, 624
Ponzo, M., Simple Method of Making

Drawings for Projection Purposes, 100
Popoff, M.,Chromidia in Cells of Muscidae,

464
Popoff, N., Buccal Apparatus of Hemip-

tera, 750

— Scelionid Parasite of Spider's Eggs, 41
Popovici-Baznosanu, A., Study of Sphe-

gidac, 357
Poppe, K., Simple Shaker, 111
Popta, C. M. L., Function of Swin-bladder,

194
Porifera. See Contents
Porpita, Marginal Glands, 474
Porter, A., Bee Disease due to Nosema

apis, 769
Portevin, A., Cementation by Gases, 269

— Chromium Steels, 827

— Iron-antimony Alloys, 558

— Pseudo-binary Alloys, 561

Portier. P., Digestion in Wood-eating
Caterpillars, 464

" Portuguese Man-of-war/' Law of Bud-
ding, 473

Potato-plant. Bacterial Disease, 247

Potrzobowski, K., New Method of Demon-
strating Spirochseta pallida, 118

Pougnet, J., Action of Ultra-violet Rays
upon Green Vanilla-pods, 484

Poultry, Hybrid, Inheritance in, 34

of Colour-pattern, 34

Poyarkoff, E., Incubation of Cyclas Em-
bryos, 463

Poyser, W. A., and others, Asplenium
alternans in America, 777

Prauss, S., Jointed Arm for Workshop
Microscope, 715

Prawn, Fresh-water, Primitive, 754

Prawns, Behaviour, 623

INDEX.

883

Preparing Objects. See Contents
Preservative Fluids. See Contents
Preserving Brain Sections, Method, 552
President, The, 132, 137, 138, 277, 283,

421,423,425,427, S36-9
President's Address : The Determination

of Sex, 138, 141
Pressure, Influence on Melting-points of

Metals, 563
Price, S. R., New Species of Debarya, 502
Primrose, H. S., Metallography as an Aid

to the Biassfounder, 418
Pringsheim, H., Nitrifying Organisms in

Soil, 405
Printing-out Paper, Easy Method of Treat-
ing for all kinds of Photography, 129
Prisms, Polarising, Glass. 697
Pritchard, F. J., Dissemination of

Puccinia graminis, 792
Projection, Arc Lamps for, 96

— Crystalloptic, Aids, G98

— Purposes, Drawings for. Simple Method

of Making, 100

Proteus, Ovarian Ovum, 456

Prothallia of Equisetum, 645

Protist Parasites from Intestine of Trick-
optera, 57

Protistology, Vegetable, 387

Piotodermaptera, Position and Classifica-
tion, 620

Protolindsaya and other Bornean Ferns,
65

Protoplasm, Permeability, 773

— Structure, 636
Protopterus, Eye, 741
Prototracheata. See Contents
Protozoa in the Alimeutarv Canal of House-
fly, 634

— of the Soil, 767

— See Contents

Protozoan Parasites from Trichoptera, 476
Protozoon Parasite from Mucous Mem-
brane of Sheep's Abomasum, 57
Pseudoscorpiones of Clare Island, 621
Pteridophyta, Medullation, 643

— Xylem Elements, 644

— See Contents

Pteridophvtal Origin of so-called Aliral

Coals! 221
Pteripophvtes, North American, 649

— of Libya, 649

— of Schleswig-Holslein, 778
Pteris, Embedded Antheridia, 644
Pteropsida. 378

Pteropus, Eye. 1S9, 740

Puccinia graminis. Dissemination, 792

— podopliylla. Nuclear Phenomena, 675
Punctularia tuberculosa, 81
Punnett, E. O, Mendelism, 453

Pupil of an Optical System with regard to

Perspective, 817
Puschkarew. B., Studying Amoeba, S21
Pycnogonid, New Decapod, 467

Pycnogonids of Clyde Area, 200

— Pacific, 45

— Sudanese, 467

Pyrenomycetes, Physalosporina, a New

Genus, 671
Pyridin Fixation, Effects upon Nervous

Tissues, 702
Pythium ih baryanum, 508
Python, Pentastomum, 200

Q

Quekett Microscopical Club, 106, 259, 412,

546, 819
Quenching of Bronzes, 26S
Quercigh, E., Gold Tellurides, 557

— Silver-cadmium Alloys, 123

— Silver-sodium Alloys, 124

— Tellurides of Sodium and of Silver, 416
Queva, O, Anatomical Study of Azolla

filieuloides, 490
Quidor, A., Affinities of Philichthydas, 17
Quintaret, G., Abnormality in Snail, 462

R

Eabbit, Spirochset. 'Mj'.i
Rabbit's Teeth, Development, 186
Rabies and Plasmodiophora brassicse, Para-
site. 803
Racovitza, E. G., Fossil Idoteid, 201
Radium, Influence on the Development of
Pholas Candida, 462

— Radiations, Action on Blood, 611

— Rays, Influence on Ova and Sperms,

185
Railliet, A., Ascarids of Carnivores, 361
Railliet, G., Oxyuris in the Appendix

vermiformis, 470
Raphidonema. 70
Rat, Brown, Parasites of Leucocytes, 633

— Cartilage in Thymus, 35

— Plague in East Anglia, 6S8
Rat- flea, Cysticercoids, 471

— New Parasite, 476

Ravenna, O, Metabolism of Moulds, 79
Rawitz, B., Preparation of Kaiserling

Material for Microscopical Purposes,

703
Rayleigh, — , Sensibility of the Eye to

Variations of Wave-length in the

Yellow Region of the Spectrum, 106
Rays, Ultra-violet, Action upon Green

Vanilla-pods, 484
Rearing Sterile Flies, 261
Recalescence, Historical Note, 270
Reconstruction, Modification of Freiburg

Method of putting on a Directing-

plane, 549

— Plastic, Utilising Organized Structures

as Directing Marks, 116

884

INDEX.

Red-snow, 50n

Reed. F. R. ( '.. N< w Fossil Chiton from

Girvan, 61 T>
Reese. A. M., Development of Enteron in

American Alligator, 187
Keflected Light, Photographing Fossils,

257
Reflex-camera, Mirror, New, 534
Regan, I '. 'P., Synopsis of Lampreys, 354
Regaud. C, Castration by X-Rays, 347

— Sterilization by X-Rays, 347
Regeneration and Polarity of I'lant-

orgaus, 219

— in Chondrosia reniformis, 56

— in Corymorpha, 2 10

— in Nemerteans, 206

— in Newts, 614

— in Planarians, 626

— Precision of in Polynoids, 203
Reichenow, E., Life-history of Hcemogre-

garina stepanowi. 771
Reichert, C, Dark Ground Illuminator
with Arrangement for Centring on a
Plain Stage, 426

— New Mirror Reflex-camera, 534

- Rejto's Metal-Microscope, 531
Reichert's Dark-ground Illuminator, with

Arrangement for Centring on a Plain
Stage, 814

— New Breath Screen, 408

Metal-Microscope, 532

Reinecke, G., Study of Polyxenus, 199
Reinisch, O., Chrysomonads 661
Reis, C, Development of Teleosts, 187
Rejti.'s Metal-Microscope, 531

Remy, 'P., Methods of Agricultural Bac-
teriology, 521

Renaut, J., Demonstrating the Presence of
Mitochondria in Cartilage-cells. 264

Renier, A., Calamostachys hidwigii, 489

Reproduction in Paramcecium, Effect of
Excretion-products on Rate of, 767

Reproductive Male Organs of Chelifer and
Chernes, 467

— Organs of Domestic Animals, 743

— Period, Influence of Environment, 738
Reptiles and Batrachians, Innervation of

Heart, 45S

- and Birds, Development of Vertebral

Column, 186

— Hcematozoa of Australian. 771
Reptilian Scales, Involution, 193
Respiration and Circulation in Tipula

maxima, 749

— in Donaeia and Macroplea, 198
Retina of Birds, 610

Retterer, E., Ileal Caecum of Birds, 192

— Method for Studying Osseous Tissue,

551

— Red Blood Corpuscles of Mammals. 609

— Tendons of Wing and Leg in Bats, 609

— Union of Muscle-fibre and Tendinous-

fibre, 458

Reuter, E., Mites and Tumours, 200

Revis, C, Artificial Production of a per-
manently atypical Jlnrillw coli, 803

Reymond,C. duB., Tadpoles with Strongly
developed Lips, 745

Rhinoscleroma, Etiology, 525

Rhizocephalous Crustacean from Fresh
Water, 755

Rhizome and Root of Delphinium. Split-
ting, 774

Rliizopods, Antarctic, 366

— from Lake District. 475

Rhizopus nigricans, Homothallic Conjuga-
tion, 507

Rhizoxeuia and Sarcodictyon, 54

Rhodophyceae, 668

Rhopalocystis, New Genus, 799

Riboisiere, De la, Size of Spleen in Birds,
352

Ricardo, G.. Revision of Oriental Species
of Tabanus, 749

Riccia Bischopi, Structure, 225

Richards, E. A., Philonotis seriata with
Fruit, 494

Richardson. H., New Parasitic Isopod, 755

— Spiny Terrestrial Isopod, 755
Richter, O., Nutriment of Algae, 498, 659
Rick. J., Notts on Geaster, 237
Ricken, A., German Agaricaceae. 3'.»4
Riddle, L. W., American Lichen Notes,

519
Species of Stereocaulon, 89

— Cladoniae, 89

Ridley, H. N.. Ferns of Perak, 778
Right- and Left-handedness, 192
Riley, W. A.. Dipylidium caninum in a
Child, 49

Ringenbach,

Haematozoa from the

Congo, 214
Riquier, J. K., Reticular Apparatus in

Cells of Corpus Luteum, 190
Ritchie, J., Barentsia benedeni in British

Waters, 762
- Deep-sea Hydroids of Indian Museum,

52
Ritter, W., Flving Apparatus of Blow-fly,

618
Ritter-Zahony, R. v., Chaetognatha from

Ireland, 203

— West Indian Chaetognatha, 204
Robertson, M., Caecal Parasites in Fowls,

632
Robin, F., Colour Etching of Steel. 561

— Photo-micrograph ic Apparatus, 273

— Resistance of Steels to Abrasion and to

Crushing, 714

Rochaix, A., New Types of Urobacteria, 93

Rock-section Cutting Apparatus, Improve-
ments, 703

Rock-sections, Method of Slicing, Grinding
and Mounting, 706

Roehrich, O., New Species of Alcyonidium,
51

INDEX.

885

Rogers, C. G., Effects of Starvation on
Necturus maoulatus, 613

Roll. J.. Adalbert Geheeb, 69

— Moss-flora of South Thuringia, 67

— Mosses of tbe Erzgebirge, 656

— Sphagnacese of tbe Rhongebirge, 382

— Variable Leaf-border in Kissidens, 492
Rolle, H., Abnormal Shells of Achatina,

196

Romanowsky Staining, Apparatus, 550

Romeis, B., Washing and Dehydrating
Apparatus, 822

Romieu, M., Plasmic Reduction in Sperina-
togenesis, 454

of Ascaris megalocephala,

625

Root-diseases, Parasitic of Juncaceoe, 670

Root-nodules of Cycads, Occurrence of
Phagocytosis, 60

Root-tubercles, Fungus, 237

Roots of Conifers, Anatomy and Mor-
phology, 371

— Reduction, 483

Rorrer, G. B., Green Muscardine of Frog-
hoppers. 673

Rosacea, " Hypanth," 640

Rose, L., Mycological Flora of Oak-tree
Slime-flux, 516

Rose-coral, Feeding Reactions, 53

Rosenberg, F. T.. Development of the
Limbs in Grebes, 345

Rosenblat, S., Methods of Staining Tu-
bercle Bacilli, 550

Rosenburgh, O. R. W. K. v. A. v., Malayan
Ferns, 491

Rosenhain. W., Alloys of Aluminium and
Zinc, 711

Rosenstadt, B., Protoplasmic Fibres in
Epidermic Cells. 189

Rosing, G., Methods of Agricultural Bac-
teriology, 521

Rosseter, T. B., New Tapeworm from a
Duck, 47 1

Rossi, L., Ferns of South Croatia, 222

Roth, G., Andreaeacese, 65

— Illustrations of Exotic Mosses, 227.

381

— New and Rare European Mosses, 67,

227, 494
Rotifera, Australian : Collected by the
Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,
1909, 164, 284

— Bdelloid : a New Classification, 207

— Canadian : Collected by the Shackleton

Antarctic Expedition, 1909, 285, 424

— Clare Island, 763

— Histology, 362

— Methods of Studying, 110

— New, 763

— of German East Africa, 208

— of New Zealand and South Africa. 572
Collected by the Shackleton

Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9, 573

Rotifera, of some Pacific Islands : Collected
by the Shackleton Antarctic Expedi-
tion, 1909, 427. 4V.9

— South African : Collected by the

Shackleton Antarctic Expedition,
1907- , 584

— See Contents

Rotifers, African ; Bdelloids of Tropical
Africa, 1

— Clare Island, 627

— Some African, Bdelloida of Tropical

Africa, 129
Roubaud, E, Leptomonad in Euphorbias,
367

— Oviparity and Viviparity in Dung-fly,

198
Roudsky, D., Natural Immunity of White

Mice to Trypanosoma lewisi, 459
Rousselet, C. F., 130, 835

— Clare Island Rotifera, 763

— Microscope, Old, by A. Pritchard, 835

— New Rotifera, 763

■ — Old Microscope by J. Simons, 276
Rovirosa, J. N., Ferns of South Mexico, 63
Rubber, Crude, Film Test, 416
Rubinsky, B., Micro-organisms in Koumiss,

92
Riickert, J., Polyspermy, 185
Ruer, R., Iron-carbon System, 826

— Iron-nickel System, 126

Rulings, Grayson's presented by Mr. C.
Beck to the Royal Microscopical
Society, Report, 421, 449

Ruminants, Cutaneous Scent-glands, 351

Rungius, H., Alimentary Canal of
Dytiscus, 748

Russ, E. L., Head-glands of Caddis- worms,
44

Russ, S., Action of Radium Radiations on
Blood, 611

Russell, T. H., British Mosses and Liver-
worts, 227

Rusts of Cereals, 80

Rutherford, N. C, Modification of the
Freiberg Method of putting on a
Directing -plane (Richtungs-Ebene)
for Reconstruction, 549

Sabouraud, R., Filtering by Aid of the

Centiifuge, 267
Sabrazes, J., Staining Blood-films, 264
Saccus vasculosus in Fishes, Structure and

Function, 194
Saffron in Histological Technique, 414
Sala, L., Distribution of the Muscle-fibres

in Heart of Fishes, 741
Salamander, Alpine, Development, 187
— Study of Chromosomes, 457
Salumandrella kayserlingii, Development

of Limbs, 35

886

INDEX.

Salimbeni, — , Resistance to passage of
Microbes through Collodion Filters,
548
Salivary Glands of Ticks, Examining, 109
Salmo hucho, Growth, 38
Salmon Disease, Myxonema in, 663
Salts, Alkaline Earth, Absorption by
Plants, 218

— Metallic Fog in Fused Salts, 828
Salvinia nutans, Life-history, 645
— I — Spore-development, 490
Samssonow, N. and auother, Threads and

Granules in the Cytoplasm, 189
Sangiorgi, G., Mouse Epizootic due to a

Coliform Bacillus, 246
Sanzo, L., Cutaneous Papilla? in Gobius,

741
Sap-How and Transpiration, Living Cells

in Relation to, 482
Sapehin, A. A., Crimean Mosses, 657

— Mosses of the Crimea, 382

— South Russian Mosses, 229
Saprolegnia, Notes, 234
Sapropbytism of Enteromorpha, 231
Sarci)ia Citrea conjunctiva, 688
Sarcocystis muris, Development, 771
Sarcodictyon and Rhizoxeuia, 54
Sartory, A., Pathogenic Fungi, 798
Sasaki, C, Life-history of Schlechtendalia

chinensis, 465
Saunders, J., Distribution of Mycetozoa in

the South Midlands, 401
Sauveur, A., Apparatus for Microscopical

Examination of Metals, 561
Scales. F. S., 140, 282, 283, 284, 571, 834,

837

— Variable Eye-piece by M. J. Allan, 570
Scales from Thermobia domestica, Struc-
ture, 717

— of Fishes, 38

— Reptilian, Evolution, ]!»:;

— Structure, from Tliermobia domestica,

572
Scalpellum and Ihla, Development and

Minute Structure, 755
Scarlet-fever Virus, 804
Scelionid Parasite of Spider's Eggs, 41
Scent-glands, Cutaneous, of Ruminants,

351
Schaffer, J., Chordoid Tissue, 188

— Post-Natal Remains of the Notochord

in Mammals, 603
Schaffuit, E., Apparatus for Microscopical
Observation of Frozen Objects, 693

— Simple Washing Apparatus, 702
Schaxel, J., Cytoplasm, Chondriosomes,

and Chromidia, 609

— Early Stages of Development in Echino-

derms, 36:;

— Oogenesis in Pelagia, 473
Scherffel, A., Raphidonema, 70
Schiefferdecker, P., Muscles of Lamprev,

611

Schifl'ner, V., Amphi^astrial Antheridia in
some 1'tilidioid HepaticaB, 224

— Bryological Notes, 65

— Critical Forms of Aplozia, 225

— Melzgeria, 781

— and others, Hungarian Iiryophytes, 229
Schikorra, W., Development of Monascus,

77
Schiller, J., Life-history and Physiology

of Nuclei, 478
Schilling, C, Apparatus for Romanowsky

Staining, 550
Schimkewitsch, L., and W., Development

of Ischnocolus, 621

— Development of Tetrapneumones, 466
Schizseopsis ezpansa, a Fossil Fern, 489
Schizomycetes. See Contents
Schizophyta. See Contents
Schizopods from North-east Atlantic Slope,

359
Schlechtendalia chinensis, Life-history, 465
Schlegel, O, Development of Maia

squinado. 753
Schlesinger. G., Electric Eels. 354
Schlumberger. O., Relation of WoodsiesB to

Cyatheacese and Polypodiacese, 486
Schmalhausen, J.J., Development of Limbs

in Salamandrella layserlingii, 35
Schmaltz, R., Reproductive Organs of

Domestic Animals. 743
Schmidt, J., New Records of Hamburg

Mosses, 67
Schmidt, W., Mechanism by which Fern

Fronds roll up, 378
Schneider, K. C, Study of Chromosomes

in Salamander, 457
Schoen, M., Action of Proteolytic Diastases,

642
Schoenau. K. v., Branch-formation in

Mosses, 651
Schols, C, Influence of Silicon on the

Maximum Solubility of Carbide of

Iron in 7-iron, 126
Schorstein, J., Wood-destroying Fungi, 237
Schounten, S. L., Pure Cultures from a

Single Cell, 819
Schreiner, O., Reduction by Roots, 483
Schridde, H., Fixation and Embedding of

Embryological Material, 111
Schroder, O., New Mesozoon, 51
Schroeder, H., Permeability of the Sheath

in VVbeat-grains, 642
Schtschelkanowzew, J. P., Male Repro-
ductive Organs of Chelifer and

Chernes, 467
Schuberg, A., Dissemination of Disease by

Stomoxy* calcitrans, 463
Schulz, H., Glass Polarizing Prisms, 697
Schulze. E., Carbohydrates in Seeds. 480
Schultze, O., Direct Connexion between

Muscle-fibrils and Tendon-fibrils, 348
— New Methods of Histological Tech-
nique, 549

INDEX.

887

Schultze, O., Origin of Granules in Gland

Cells, 349
Schultze, W. H., Oxidizing and Reducing

Properties of Bacteria, 244
Schussnig, B., Gonium pectorale, 501
Schiiz, E., Iron-nickel System, 126
Schwangart, — , Grape Moths, 164
Schwartz, E.J. , Life-history of Sorosphxra

grarninis, 685

— Parasites on the Roots of Juncacese, 90

— Sorosphasra, 520
Sclerospora, Biology, 23 1
Sclerotinia as a Plant-disease, 670
Scorpaena, Direct Division of Red Blood

Corpuscles, 35
Scorpions, False, of British Isles, 359
Scott, D. H., Studies in Fossil Ferns, 61
Scourfield, D. J., 133
Screen, Breath, Reichert's New, 408
Screw Threads, Objective, Anomalies, 1 7.">,

283
Scriban, J. A., Adipose Cells of Ponto-

bJella muricata, 624
Scutigera coleoptrata, Habits, 7.V2
Scyphistoma, Fixation, 473
Sea-bottom, Animal Life, 741
Sea-side Plants, Anatomical Besearches,

216
Sea-urchin Ova, Extra-ovate Experiments,

ooa
Seaver, F. J., North American Fungi, 392
Seaweeds, Analysis, 231
Sections, Celloidin Serial, New Method of

making, 116

— of Urinary Calculi, Method of Obtain-

ing, 263

— Paraffin, Manipulation, 113
Seedling Development, Effect of Injury to

Cotyledons, 60
Seeds, Carbohydrates, 480

— of European Papaveraceae, 218
Segregation, Influence on the Strength of

Mild Steel, 270
Selaginella, Spore-distribution. 646
Selenium-antimony System, 826
Selenococcidium and the Relationships of

the Sporozoa, 213
Seminal Fluid in Man, Nature, 608
Senescence in Hydroids, 211
Senn, G., Studies on Flagellates, 634
Sense of Direction in Blind, 612
Sensilli and Eyes of Medicinal Leech, 203
Septobasidium, Note on the Biology. 676
Sevastos, R., Fossil Idoteid, 201
Sex Characters, Secondary and Interstitial

Testicular ( 'ells, 348

— Determination of. President's Annual

Address, 138, 141

— of Offspring, Effects of One-sided Ovari-

otomy, 454

— Origin, 454

Sex-determination in Daphnids, 757
Sexton, E. W., Genus Leptocheirus, 754

Sexuality among the Mosses, 651

Sexuality of Uredineae, 792

Seymour-Jones, A., Anthrax Sterilization
Process applied to Hides in Dry State,
266

Shackleton Antarctic Expedition, 1907,
South African Itotifera Collected by,
58 1

1 907-9, Rotifera of New Zealand,

Collected by, 573

1909, Australian Rotifera, Col-
lected by, 164

Canadian Rotifera, Collected

by, 285

Rotifera of some Pacific

Islands, Collected by, 429

Shaker, Simple, 111

Sharp, L. W., Nuclear Phenomena in
Pitccinia podophylla, 675

Shattock, S. G., Method of Obtaining Sec-
tions of Urinary Calculi, 263

— Microscopic Structure of Uric Acid

Calculi, 25S
Shaw, T. W. A., Solubility of Oxvgen in

Molten Silver, 125
Shearer, C, Development of Trochophore

of Hydroides, 360
Sheep's Abomasum, Protozoon Parasite

from Mucous Membrane, 57
Shelford. R., Blattidce in Amber, 465
Shell, Molluscan, Layers, 746
Shells, Abnormal, of Achatina, 196
Sheppard, E. J., The Re-appearance of

the Nucleolus in Mitosis, 423, 598
Shibata, K., Cheniotaxis of Fern-sperma-

tozoids, 379
Shipley, A. E., New Pentastomid, 468
Shoebotham, J. W., New Collembola in

England, 620
Show-cases for Instruments, 2*4
Shreve, F„ Hymenophyllaceae in Relation

to Moisture, 487
Shrew-mole, Food, 352

— Habits, 352

Sidebottom, H., New Species of Cassidu-
lina. 212

Sieglbauur, F., Development of the Ex-
tremities of Birds, 345

Si' verts, A., Behaviour of Copper towards
Gases, 268

Silicides, Metallic. 125

Silicon Alloys with Metals, 712

— Influence on Cast Iron, 272

on the Maximum Solubility of Car-
bide of Iron in 7-Iron, 126
Silkworms, Moulting, 748
Silver and Gold, Alloys of Sodium, 556

— and Sodium Tellurides, 416

— and Tin, Amalgams containing, 557

— Bismuth and Aluminium, Effect of

upon Copper, 418

— Molten, Solubility of Oxygen, 125

— with Cadmium, Alloys, 825

888

INDEX.

Silver-cadmium Alloys, 123

Silver-copper Alloys, 124

Silver-sodium Alloys, 124

Silver-tin-lead. Ternary System, 55G

Silvestri, F., New Terinitophilous Staphy-
linid, 41

Simons, J., Old Microscope made by, 276,
528

Sinking-velocity of Plankton Organisms,
Simple Arrangement for Determining,
122

Sinnott, B. W., Involution of the Filicinean
Leaf-trace, 376

Siphon, Self-regulating, 267

Skeleton, Sheep's, Influence of Malnutri-
tion and Castration on Development,
186

Skin-pigmentation, Inheritance in Man, 30

Skull of Turtle. Development, 605

Slag, Blast-furnace, Microscopical Exami-
nation, 275

— in Steel, 271
Sleep, Physiology, 459
Sleeping and Waking, 61 1

— Sickness, Inquiry, 476
Transmission, 770

Slicing, Grinding and Mounting Rock-
sections, Method, 706
Slides, New System of Filing, 129

- Typical, proposed Collection, 138

— See Contents,

Sluiter, C. P., Chara contraria and C. dis-
soluta, 69

— West Indian Holothuroids, 209
Smalley, F. W., Colour Inheritance in

Pigeons, 738
Smallwood, W. M.. Effects of Starvation

on Necturus maculatus, 613
Smith, A. L., West of Ireland Lichens, S00
Smith, E. F., Bacterium tumefaciens, 803
Smith, G., Fluctuations in Growth of

Fowl's comb, 604

— Injection of Testis-extract into Hens. 348
Smith, J. H., Fatigue of Metals, 274
Smith, J. L., Staining of Fats, 549
Smith, T. J., Models of Microscopic Fields

of Bacteria, prepared by Dr. Chas.
Leo, Birmingham, 426
Smut Fungi, 675

— New, in a New Genus of Grass, 793
Smut-infection Experiments, 676

— Study, 235
Smuts of Australia, 81
Snail, Abnormality, 462

— Hibernating, Beating of the Heart, 462

— Reduction in the Spermatogenesis, 462
Snake, Grass, Blood-formation, 188
Snake-poison and Yolk of Egg, 613
Snow, J. W.. Two Epiphytic Algse, 501
Soar, C. D., Hydrachnids of East African

Lakes, 200
Sobotta, J., Early Development of White
Mouse, 603

Sobotta, Y. Coloured Plates of Micro-
scopical Preparations, 25s
Sodium, Alloys with Silver and Gold. 556

— and Silver Tellurides, 416
Soil, Frozen, Bacteria, 92

Sokolow, I., New Species of Ctenodrilus,

625
Solaster endeea, 268
Sollas, LB. J , Parasitic Castration of

Earthworms, 360
Sollaud, E., Palasmon niloticus in Lake

Tchad, 753

— Primitive Fresh-water Prawn, 754
Solowiow, 1'., Tapeworms of Birds, 760
Somerville, A. A., Temperature Co-
efficients of Electrical Resistance, 274

Sommerfeldt, E., New Method for Micro-
scopical Metallography, 253

— Recent Progress in the Construction of

Mineralogical and Metallurgical

Microscopes, 693
Sorensen, W., Fruit of Geraniacese, 641
Sorosphasra, 520

— graminis, Life-history, 685
Southern, R., Pelagic Polychsets of Irish

Seas, 360
Southwell, T., Avicula and Gorgonid
Association, 463

— New Cestodes from Ceylonese Fishes,

471

— Pearl-inducing Parasite, 470
Spaulding, P., Fungi in Clay Mines, 397
Spectral Apparatus, Leiss' LJniversal, 694
Speer, J. M., Inflorescence of Funaria, 492
Spencerites, Spores, 647

Sperm Transfer in Certain Decapods. 753
Spermaceti-organ of Kogia breviceps, 37
Spermatogenesis in certain Hepaticae, 652

— in Currant-moth, 357

— in Lepidoptera. 43

— in the Bryophyta, 653

— of Ascaris megalocephala , Plasmic Re-

duction, 625

— of Lepidosiren, 608

— of Stenobrothu* viridulm. 617

— of the Snail, Reduction, 462

— Plasmic Reduction, 454
Spermatozoon, Mammalian, 30

Sperms and Ova, Influence of Radium

Rays, 185
Sphaeropsideae, 672
Sphaerotheca castagnei, 791

— mors-uese, Cicinnobolus sp. Parasitic,

392
Sphagnacese. Nomenclature, 653

— of the Rhongebirge. 382
Sphagnum, North American, 782
Sphegidre, Study, 357
Spicules, Hexactinellia, 212
Spider's Eggs, Scelionid Parasite, 41

— Male, Palpi, 44

Spillman, L., Elimination by Leucocytes,
195

INDEX.

889

Spindle-cells of Amphibian Blood, 710
Spindler, M., Hygrohypnum ochrareum. 493
Spiro, J., Alimentary Canal of Helix

pomatia, 747
Spirochjet from Rabbit, 369
Spiroehseta and Cristospira, 53

— pallida, Cultivation, 820

New Method of Demonstrating, 118

Spirochetes, Cultivation, 819

— New and Quick Method of Staining in

Smear Preparations, 265
Spirochsets, Affinities, 369

— of the Mouth, 369
Spirogyra, 665

— from the neighbourhood of Besancon,

389

— Periodicity, 231
Spironemacese, Free-living, 772
Spirophyllum ferrugineum, 686

Spitta. E. J., 281, 282, 421, 423, 571, 837,
8.37

— A Report on the Grayson's Rulings

presented by Mr. C. Beck to the
Royal Microscopical Society, 421. 449

— Diameter of the Disk of Confusion, 282

— Low-Power Photomicrography, with

special Relation to a Colouring
Method for Tinting Lantern Slides,
419

Splachnobryum in Greenhouses, 383

Spleen in Birds, Size, 352

— in Embryo Bird, Haemapoietic Function,

460
Sponge, New Lithonine, from Christmas
Island, 631

— Phanetronid, Remarkable, 365
Sponges associated with Vermetidse, 766

— Degenerative Changes, 630

— from Dissociated Cells, Development,

766

— Pharetronid, of Essen Greensand, 631
Spongilla carteri, Oligochset Commensals,

469
Spongospora subterranea, 401, 685
Spore-development in Salvinia natans, 490
Spore-distribution in Selaginella, 646
Spore-formation in Nidularia, 794
Spores, Development in Pleurage zygospora,

671

— Ergot, Infection by, 791

— in Aspergillus niger, Influence of Irou

on the Formation, 79

— of Spencerites, 617
Sporotrichum beunnanni in Man, 404
Sporozoa, Relationships, and Selenococci-

dium, 213
Sports, Mammalian. 348
Spratt, E. R., Life-history of Anabsena

cycadex, »>»;:;
Spulski, B., New Species of Odontopteryx,

613
Sputum, New Method for the Detection of

Tubercle bacilli, 823

Stach. J., Development of Rabbit's Teeth,

L86
Staff. F., Development of Criodrilm lacuum,

202
Stag-beetles, New, 748
Staining and Fixing, Simultaneous, 702

— Blood-films, 26 1

— Bordered Pits, 709

— Celloidin Sections of Nervous Tissue by

the Iron-haemotoxylin Method, 119

— Chromatin, New Method, 414

— in bulk with Hematoxylin, 118

— Iodine, Improve i Method, 551

— Methods, Combined, for Tubercle bacilli ,

118

— of Bacteria, Negative, 823

— of Fats, 549

— of Glycogen, Fixation, 821

— Rapid, with Giemsa's Azur-eosin Solu-

tion, 414

— Romanowsky, Apparatus, 550

— Spirochetes in Smear Preparations,

New and Quick Method, 265

— the Internal Network in Nerve-cells,

119

— the Medullary Sheath in Brain-sections,

120

— Tubercle Bacilli, Methods, 550

— Use of Picramic Acid, 1 1 8

— Objects. See Contents
Standard Thread, The Society's, 537
Stands, Microscope. See Contents
Staniewicz,W.; Fat in Ciliated Infusorians,

212
Stapely, W., Guttural Pouches of Horse,

37
Staphylinid, Ceylonese, Buccal Parts, 619

— New, Termitophiloua, 41

Starch in a Leaf, Demonstrating Presence,
263

— Removal through the Petiole, 373
Starch-grains and Oil-drops in Conifer-
wood, 638

Starches, Principal, used as Food, 701
Starcke, A., Preserving Brains, 824
Starfish, Seasonal Retrogression of Ovaries,

52
Starfishes, New, 209

Starvation, Effects on Necturus maculatus
613

on Planarians, 627

Statoblasts of Bryozoa, Development, 210
Stawska, B., Toxins and Antitoxins. 744
Stead, D. G., Fisheries of New South

Wales, 195
Stead, J. E., Welding up of Blowholes

and Cavities in Steel Ingots, 713
Steche, O., Law of Budding in "Portu-
guese Man-of-War," 473
Steel, Action of Mercury at High Pres-
sures, 272

— and Iron, Commercial, Cases in, 270

— Annealing, 559

Slid

INDEX.

Steel, Cementation, 2H9

— ( Solour-etching, 561

— Crystallization, S'2S

— Influence of Nitrogen on Cementation,

558

of Vanadium on Iron and, 827

- Ingots, Welding up of Blowholes and
Cavities, 713

— Internal Structure of Pearlitic, 828

— Mild, Influence of Manganese, 558
Influence of Segregation on the

Strength, 270

— Nickel, Changes occurring in, 713

— Slag, 271

— W"ire,Effect of Galvanizing on Strength,

559
Steels, Alloys, Cementation, 713

— Carbon, Theory of Hardening, 271

— Chromium, 827

— Magnetic Properties of Nickel, 827

— Nickel, 827

— Resistance to Abrasion and to Crushing,

714
Stehli, G., Evolution of Reptilian Scales,

193
Steinbrinck, C, Desiccation-phenomena in

Mosses, 381
Steiner, J., Lichens in Italy, 801
Steinmann,P., Regeneration in Planarians,

626

— Revision of Swiss Triclads, 627
Stele, Development in Dipteris, 644
Stelfox, A. W., Molluscs of Ireland, 356
Stems, Effect of Longitudinal Compression

upon the Production of Mechanical

Tissue, 373
Stenobrothus viridulus. Spermatogenesis,

617
Stephani, F., Goebeliella, a New Genus,

655

— Species Hepaticarum, 227

— and others, Bryophyta of German Cen-

tral Africa, 496
Stephenson, J., Bothrioneurum iris, 469

— Littoral Oligochseta of the Clyde,

758

— Nemertines of Millport, 761

— Oligochset Commensals in Spongilla

carteri, 469

Stereo-photomicrography, Sliding Nose-
piece for use in, 95

Stereocaulon, American Species, 89

— Systematic Position, 519

Stereoscope, Phenomena of Visual In-
hibition which may accompany the
re-association of the two Retinal
Images dissociated by the Prisms.
Conditions and Determination of these
Phenomena, 410

Stereoscopic Illusion, 411

— Photomicrography, 816
Sterility, 30
Sterilization by X-Rays, M17

sterilization Process, Anthrax, applied to

Hides in Dry State. 266
Sterling, 8., Musculature of Pectoral Girdle

and Flipper in ( 'etacea, 192
Stevens, F. L., Diseases of Economic Plants,

84
Stewart, F. II., Development and Minute
Structure of Scalpellum and Ibla, 755
Stichococcus bacillarie, 387

Effect of Coloured Light, 387

Stiles, M. II., Algse of the Sheffield Dis-
trict, 230
Stilesia and its Relatives, 362
Stipes of Fossil Asteroeldaena, 61
Stirton, J., New Scottish Mosses, 228
Stole, A., Encystation in Pelomyxa, 631

— Studies on Pelomyxa. 631

Stomoxys calcitrant, Dissemination of
Disease by, 463

— Oriental Species, 618

Strachan, J., On the Structure of Scales
from Thermobia domestica (Packard),
572, 717

Stratiomydae, Post-embryonic Develop-
ment, 199

Strecker, F., Simultaneous Fixing and
Staining, 702

Strecker, J. K., Notes on the Robber Frog,
460

Streeter, E. C, Bacillus of Acne, 262

Strephonema, Remarks, 485

Streptococcus and Pneumococcus, Viru-
lence, 245

Streptothrix, Anaerobic, 803

Streptotricheae, Presence in Tuberculous
Sputum, 522

Stresses in Cold-worked Metals, 562

Strickland, C, Development of Trypano-
soma lewisi in Rat-flea, 58

— Parasites of Biliary Fever in Horses,

369
Stromberg, H., Change of Biulogical

Characters in Bacteria, 522
Stromer, E., Fossil Lepidosirenida?, 460
Stromsten, F. A., Lymph-hearts of Turtles,

455

— Structure and Development of Posterior

Lymph-hearts of Turtles, 346
Strongylus pinguicola, 205
Structural Analogy, Interesting, 191
Structure of Seed Plants, Reproduction.

See Contents
■ Vegetative. See Contents

— of Yeast-Cell, Demonstrating, 262
Sub-microscopic Structures, Methods for

the Identification, 810
Suctoria, New Type, on a Copepod, 477
Suctorial Disks of Male Dytiscids, 198
Sulc, K., Symbiosis of Yeasts and Insects,

616
Sullivan. M. X., Reduction by Roots, 483
Sulphur, Influence on the Iron-carbon

System, 418

INDEX.

891

Sulphurous Acid as an Etching Medium,

273
Summers, S. L. M., Oriental Species of

Stomoxys, 618
Sumstine, D. R., Studies in North American

Hyphomycetes, 510
Sun-fish, Large, 195

Sunier, A. L. J., Development of Myo-
tonies, 710
Surface, F. M., Inheritance in Hybrid

Poultry, 34
of Colour Pattern in Hybrid Poultry,

34
Surirella elegans. Method of Locomotion,

132

— Locomotion. 384
Svedelius, N., Erythrocladia, 787

— Rhodophyceaa, 668
Swarczewsky, B., Lankesteria, 477
Swartzia inclinata in Lancashire, 654
Sweet, G., Blood Parasites, 57

— Microfilaria in Magpies, 48

— New Nematode in Eye of Queensland

Fowl, 48

Species of Argas, 45

Tapeworm in Chicken, 49

Swellengrebel, N. H., Development of

Trypanosoma lewisi in Rat Flea, 58
Swim-bladder, Function, 194

— of Teleosts, 461

Sydow, H. and P., and others, Sphanop-
sidere, 672

Uredinea?, 235

Symbiosis of Yeasts and Insects, 616
Synapsis of the Nucleus, 478
Synchytiium-galls, Study, 76
Sziices, J., Permeability of Protoplasm, 773

T

Tabanids and Trypanosomes, 749
Tabanus, Revision of Oriental Species, 749
Tadpoles of Alytes and Rana. Lateral
Line System, 614

— Thread-like Structures in Epidermic

Cells, 189

— with Strongly-developed Lips, 745
Tait, W. H., Self-regulating Siphon, 267
Tammann, G., Alloys of Lithium, 123

— Changes in Properties of Metals upon

Working. 828

— Limits of Elasticity and the Hardening

of Metals, 562
Tapeworm, New, from a Duck, 471

in Chicken, 49

Tapeworms, Alleged Toxicity, 626

— from Mammals, 760

— of Birds, 760

— of South American FelMae, 49
Tardigrada, Antarctic and other, 359

— Notes, 468

Tarsonemidse, Monograph, 752
Taste, Muddy, in Fresh-water Fishes, 37
Tattersall, W. M., Schizopods from North-
east Atlantic Slope, 359
Taute, M., Trypanosoma Studies, 47<i
Tavanti. G., Malleable Cast-iron, 559
Tavel, F. v.. Mutations of Asplenium ruta-

muraria, 379
Taylor, T. G., Archaeocyathinse, 56
Tea, Presence of Yeast, 392
Technique. See Contents
Teeth and Buccal Structures in Conulus,
209

— of Two Dentitions in a Dermoid Cyst,

604

— Rabbit's, Development, 186
Teleostean Embryos, Development of

Pigment-cells, 187

— Ova and Larvae, 35

Teleosteans, Pectoral Girdle and Fins, 195
Teleosts, Development, 187

— Swim-bladder, 461
Tellurides, Gold, 557

— of Sodium and of Silver, 416
Tellurium Alloys, 416

Tend-Band Plate, Grayson's New, Measure-
ment, 160

Tench, Grouping of Nerve-cells in Spinal
Cord, 610

Tendon-fibrils and Muscle-fibrils, Con-
nexion, 348

Tendons of Wing and Leg in Bats. 609

Tennent, D. H., Echinoderm Hybridiza-
tion, 363

— Structure of Pentaeeros retirulatus, 364
Termite Communities, Rhythms, 463

— New Microsporidian, 58
Termites and Fungi, :;97
Ternary Systems, 269, 561

Testes, Functioning, Abnormal Bone-
growth in Absence of, 186
Testicular Cells, Interstitial, and Secondary

Sex Characters, 348

Role, 74(1

Testis-extract, Injection into Hens, 348
Tetrapneumones, Development, 466
Thalassicoll a, Vegetative and Reproductive

Processes, 475
Thalheimer, W., New Method for Making

Blood-agar for Cultivating Bacillus

influenzae, 820
Thallophyta. See Contents
Thaxter, R., Notes on Chilian Fungi, 395
Theiler, A., Transmission of Amakebe by

Brown Tick, 622
Theissen, F., Myco-geography, 237
Thermo-electric Forces of Solid Solutions,

560
Thermobia domestica, On the Structure of

Scales, 572, 717
Thermobiosis, 403
Thoday, M. G.. Medulla-cells of Lamin-

ariacese, 504

892

INDEX.

Thomas, H. H., Leaves of Calamites, 488
Thomas, J. T. N., Aulacodiscus superbu*,

571
TLomsou, A. L., Migration of Birds, 74:!
Thomson, J. A., Australian Alcyonarians,

364

— Outlines of Zoology, 39

— The President's Address : The Deter-

mination of Sex, 141
Thorosphaera, 71
Thread, Society's Standard, 537
Thrips, Study, 750
Thymus of Rat, Cartilage, 35
Thyroscyphus, Structure and Affinities,

630
Tick, Brown, Transmission of Amakebe,

622
Ticks, Examining Salivary Glands, 109

— Salivary Glands, 45
Tilden, J.E., Myxophyceae, 233

Tilho, — , Palxmon niloticus in Lake
Tchad, 753

Tilletia horrida in Rice-meal, 510

Tillyard, R. J., Experiments with Dragon-
fly Larvae, 750

Tin and Silver, Amalgams containing, 557

— Arsenides, 825

— Flow-pressure, 557

— Lead, and Antimony, Ternary Alloys,

556

Tipula maxima, Respiration and Circula-
tion, 749

Tison, A., Guetales as Apetalous Angio-
sperms, 372

— New Genus of Plasmodiophoraceae, 243
Research on Plasmodiophoraceae, 685

— Research on Oladoehytriaceae, 233
Tissues, Animal, Artificial Cultivation, 107
Reduction and Oxidation, 614

— Culture outside the Organism, 188
Toad, Artificial Parthenogenesis, 454

— Experimentally Induced Partheno-

genesis, 454
Toad's Esrg, Artificial Parthenogenesis,

454
Tobler, F., Codium tomentosum, 666

— Epiphytes of the Larninaiiae, 386

— Improved Method of Iodine Staining,

551

— Nutrition of Lichens, 518

Torne, ()., Suctorial Disks of Male Dytis-

cids, L98
Toldt, K., Different kinds of Hair, 742
Tollinger, A., Geographical Distribution of

Diaptomidae, 201
Tolypella intricate, 069
Tomenthypnum, a new genus, 655
Tomopteris, Structure, 758
Toni, G. B. De, Clathrocystis, 788
Tool-steels, Carbon and Low-tungsten,

Hardening, 271
Topsent, E., Classification of Halichon-

drina, 766

Torka, V., and others, German Bryo-

phytes, 494
Torrend. I'., Punctularia tuberculosa, 81
Torrev, H. B., Effect of Light on Obelia,

•J 12

— Geotropism in Corymorpha, 211

— Regeneration in Corymorpha, 210, 365
- Senescence in Hydroids, 211

Toxaemia, Acute Intestinal, iti Infants,

Morphology of Organisms concerned

in the Production, 280
Toxins and Antitoxins, 744
Tovofuku, T., Cartilage in Thymus of

Rat, 35
Tracy, H. O, Directive Markings of

Passerine Birds, 352

— Swim-bladder of Teleosts, 461
Transpiration and Sap-flow, Living Cells

in Relation to, 482
Traumatism in Relation to New Plant-
forms, 485
Trautman, O, Mosses of Tirol, 657
Traviss, \V., Microscope Lamp, 128
Trawinski, A., Penis of Drake and

Gander, 353
Treasurer, Cash Statement, 137
Trees, Research on Diseases, 397, 677
Trematodes from Tortugas, 205
Treponema pallidum, Cilium, 633
" Trichites" in Didinium, 632
Trichonympha, New, 477
Trichoptera, Protist Parasites from Intes-
tine, 57

— Protozoan Parasites, 476
Triclads, Swiss, Revision, 627

Triepel, H., Model of the Vibration-planes

of Light in the Polarizing Apparatus,

69S
Tritouiadae and iEolididae, Blood-vessels,

and Nerves, 196
Trochophore of Hydroides, Development,

360
Trojan, E., Glands and Luminescence of

Phyllirhoe, 196
Troostite, 827

Trophospongia and Chromidia, 457
Trouessart, E. L., Europeau Mammals, 36

— Oiigin of Domestic Dog, 743
Trout, Colouring, 739

— Early Development, 607
True, F. W., Beaked Whales, 192
Truschel, — , Sense of Direction in Blind

612
Trypanosoma brucei, Developmental Forms,
770

— evansi, 771

— gambunse. Life-history, 770

— lewisi in Rat-flea, Development, 58
Natural Immunity of White Mice,

459

— nanum (Laveran), 770

T. rhodesiense, Life-history, 770

— rotatorium, 476

INDEX.

893

Trypauosome and Leptomonad in Dro-
sophila, 368

— New, 770

— Studies, 476
Trypanosomes, Agglutination, 824

— Frog, in Japan, 632

— in Fresh-water Fishes, 632

— in Mammals, Classification, 632

— Studies, 213, 769

— Tabanids and, 749
Trypanotoxin of Bacillus subtilis, 522
Tschirwinsky, N., Influence of Malnutri-
tion and Castration on Development
of Sheep's Skeleton, 186

Tubercle Bacilli, Combined' Staining

Methods, 118

Human and Bovine, Cultivation, 107

in Sputum, New Method for the

Detection, 823

Methods of Staining, 550

Penetration of the Normal Skin by,

803

— Human and Bovine, 686
Tuberculosis, 523

— Mammali m and Avian, Relation be-

tween, 93
Tubeuf, — v., and others, Uredinese, 510
Tubeuf, C. v., Wintering of Plant-parasites,

S3

— Witches-brooms on Firs, 83
Tubularia, Polarity, 765
Tumour-cells, Nuclear Liudding, 458
Tumours and Mites, 200
Tunicata. See Contents

Tur, J., Influence of Radium on the De-
velopment of Pholas Candida, 462
Turbellarian, New Commensal, 206
Turbidometer for Counting Vaccines, 824
Turner, T., Influence of Silicon on Cast
Iron, 272

— Shrinkage of the Antimony-lead Alloys,

418
Turtle Skull, Development, 605
Turtles, Lymph-hearts, 455

— Structure and Development of Posterior

Lymph-hearts, 346

— Sympathetic Nervous System, 605
Twiss, W. C, Erythrophylhim delesserioidc*,

504
Twort, C, Trypanotoxin of Bacillus sub'

tilts, 522
Twort F. W., Johne's Bacillus, 94

— Method of Isolating and Growing the

Lepra Bacillus of Man, 107
Typhoid and Dysentery Bacilli, Vari-
ations, 526

— and Paratyphoid Bacilli, Modified

Method of Isolating, 108

— Bacilli, Capsule-formation, 525

Examination of Water by the Com-
plement-fixation Method, 517

— Fever, Experimental, .">2 1

— Stools, New Anaerobe, 688

Dec. 20th, 1911

u

Ulelila, V., Cyathomonas, 661
Ultra-condenser, Jentsch's, 97
Ultra-violet, Opacity of Certain Glasses,

700
Ultramicroscopical Study of Solutions of

Iodine, 545
Viva latissima, 664
Umagillidse and Dalyellidse, 472
Unna, P. G., Reduction and Oxidation in

Animal Tissues, 614
Urasow, G. G., Gold-magnesium Alloys,

123
Uredineae, 79, 235, 510, 674

— Experimental Researches with, 791

— Research, 394

— Sexuality, 792

Ureters of Weever, Variations, 38
Urobacteria, New Types, 93
Urodela, Ear. 193

— Lungless, Heart, 460

— Occipital Region, 456

Usnea and its Linnsean Nomenclature, 242
Ustilago Spores, Germination, 511

— Tragopogi-pratensis, Conidial Fusion,

Vaccines, Turbidometer for Counting, 824

Vacuum, Cementation, 269

Vanadium on Iron and Steel, Influence,

827
Vaney, C, Acephalous Lepidoptera, 464

— Influence of Weather Conditions on

Frequency of Warbles, 749

— Occurrence of Ox-warbles, 619
Vanilla-pods, Green, Action of Ultra-violet

Rays, 484
Varanus varius, Haemogregarine in Blood,

57
" Variable " Microscope, The, 284
Vascular Plants, Evolution of Conducting-
tissues, 638

Transitory Tissues, 216

Vaucheria terrestri*, 666
Vegetation of Upper Rhine, 789
Verderame, Ph., Sarcina Citrea conjunc-
tivae, 688
Verhuist, A., Distribution of Equisetum

maximum, 648
Vermetidae, Sponges associated with, 766
Vernes, A., Filtering by Aid of the

Centrifuge, 267
Vernoeff, K. W., Studies oa Millipedes, 752
Verruga peruana, 522
Verson, E., Moulting in Silkworms, 748
Versluys, J., Birds and Deinosaurs, 192
Vertebral Column, Development in Rep-
tiles and Birds, 186

3 M

894

IN I) FA".

Vertebral I olumn, Penguin's. Mobility, 743
Vertebrate. See Contents

brates, Morphology, 459
Vessichelli, N., Structure of PhyllirSe

bucephala, 39
Vialleton, L., Injection of Fusible Alloys

in Microscopical Anatomy, 822

— Morphology of the Vertebrates, 459
Vincent, R., 2S2

— The Morphology of the Organisms con-

cerned in the Production of Acute
Intestinal Toxaemia in Infants, 280
Vine, Infection hy Plasmopara viticola,
507

— Mildew, in Poland, 508

— Physical Conditions of Resistance

against Mildew, 395
Viper Venom, Immunity, 193
Virchow, H., Conjunctival Epithelium in

Man, 610

— Mobility of Penguin's Vertebral

Column, 743
Viret, L., Swiss Desmids, 74
Yirieux, J., Dichotomosiphon and Mis-

chococcus, 788

— Spirogyra from the neighbourhood of

Besancon, 389
Viscous Flow in Metals, 274
Vittariese, Genera, 487
Viviani, E., Alloys of Copper, Antimony,

and Bismuth, 124
Viviparity and Oviparity in Dung-fly. 198
Vogel, R., Gold-magnesium Alloys, 123
Voges, E., Leaf-spots of Currant, 795

— and others, Plant Diseases, 84
Volpino, G., Examination of Water for

Typhoid Bacilli by the Complement-
fixation Method, 547
Volvox, New African Species, 232
Vouk, V., Alternation of Generations in
Myxomycetes, 685

— Movements of Plasmodia, 479

— Streaming of Plasmodia, 520
Vournasos, A. G., Bismuthides, 825
Vuillemin, P., Cicinnobolus sp. parasitic

on Oak Mildew, 393

— Classification of Hyphomycetes, 673
- Studies in Hyphomycetes, 793

W

Wachter, W., Coremium - formation in

Penicillium, 79
Wager, H„ Demonstrating the Structure

of the Yeast-cell, 262

— Euglena viridis, 499

— Yeast Cells and Fermentation, 509
Wagner, E.. Electrical Conductivity of

Molten Metals, 563
Wagner, F. v., Species and Varieties of
Humble-bees, 197

Wagner. K., Colouring of Trout. 739
Wahl, B., Dalyellidaj and Umagillidae, 472
Wahlberg, A.^ Apotbecial Development in
Anaptycbia and Physcia, 401

Waking and Sleeping, 61 1

Walcott, C. D., Middle Cambrian Holo-
tburians, 628

Medusa, 629

Merostomata, 622

Walker, E. W. A., Variation and Adapta-
tion in Bacteria, 689

Walker, L. C. Chlorine Method of Water-
purification, 244

Walpole, G. S., Action of Bacillus lacli*
aerogenes upon Glucose, 526

Walther," A., ICnzymes in Different
Bacteria, 94

Walton, C. L., Kodioides, 53

Warbles, Influence of Weather Conditions
on Frequency. 749

Warburton, 0. W., Ergot on Oats, 391

Warnstorf, C. Bryophytes of Southern
Europe, 495

— Nomenclature of Sphagnacese, 653
Warren, E., Mammalian Sports, 348
Warrington, Captain, 835

Warts, Cuticular, of Pilargis verrucosa, 47
Washing and Dehydrating Apparatus, 822

— Apparatus, Simple, 702
Water-bears, Clare Island, 622
Water-cress Beds, Injury by Algaj, 500
Water-mites, Studying the Compound

Eyes, 413
Water-plants, Green, Liberation of Iron,

484
Water-purification, Chlorine Method, 244
Waterston, J., New Flea from South Africa.

617
Watson, W., and Sons, Garjeanne's Simple

Excursion Microscope, 690
Wave-length, Sensibility of the Eye to

Variations in the Yellow Region of

the Spectrum, 106
Wawrziniok, O., Fixing Objects to Stage,

273
Wax Plates, Apparatus for Rolling, 112
Wax-solvents, Action of. and the Presence

of Thermolabile Bacteriotoxina on

Soil, 523
Weather Conditions, Influence on Fre-
quency of Warbles, 749
Weever, Variations in Ureters, 38
Wege, W., Anatomical and Experimental

Study of Asellu* aquatkus. 623
Weissenberg, R., Ghigea lophii, 634
Welding up of Blowholes and Cavities in

Steel Ingots. 713
Welds, Some Studies, 714
Welter, O. A., Pharetronid Sponges of

Essen Greensand, 631
Wesenberg-Lund, C, Study of Phryganea

gran ilk, 750
West, G. S., Algological Notes, 386

INDEX.

895

West, G. S., New African Species of
Volvos, 232

West, J. A., Food of Shrew-mole, 352

Wester, P. G., Pollination Experiments
with Anonas in South Florida, 374

Westerdijk, J.. Sclerotinia as a Plant-
disease, 670

Weyl, F., Cementation in a Vacuum. 269

Weymouth, F. W., Californian Crabs, 4t>S

Whales, Beaked, 192

Wheat-grains. Permeability of the Sheath,
642

Wheeler, W. M.. North American Species
of Camponotus, 357

Wheldon, J. A., New Lancashire Lichens,
243

— Social Groups and Adaptive Characters

in the Bryophyta, 779
Whelk's Kidney, New Coccidiah from,

771
Whelks, Damage to Plaice-fishing, / 47

— Swartzia inclinata in Lancashire, 654
Whetzel, H. H., Fungicides, 84
Whitmore. E. R., Characters of Cholera

and Cholera-like Organisms, 246
Wietrzykowski, \V\, Development of Lu-

cernarians, 629
Wille, N., Algological Notes, 73
Williams, E. M., Leucobryum glaucum,

780
Williams, R. S., Austinella, a New Genus,

780

— Panama Mosses, 497

Williamson, H. C, Ichthyological Notes,
746

— Larval Stages of Decapods, 468

— Retarding Development of Herring's

Eggs, 739
Wiim, A., Aluminium Alloys containing

Magnesium, 711
Wilsmore, L. J., Hesactininiae from New

South Wales, 629
Wilson, C. B., Development of Achtheres,

756

— New Parasitic Copepods, 755

- North American Ergasilidse, 756

Wilson, E. A., Changes of Plumage in Red
Grouse, 353

Wilson, H. A. F., New Method for Differ-
entiation of Bacteria, 109

Wilson, H. V., Development of Sponges
from Dissociated Cells, 766

Wilson, J., 139

Wilson, J. T., Manipulation of Paraffin
Sections, 113

Organized Structures as
Directing Marks for Plastic Recon-
struction. 116

Wilson, M., Spermatogenesis in the Bryo-
phyta, 653

Wiuge, O., Fungi from Venezuela and the
West Indies, 395

— Sphserotheca castagnei, 791

- Utilizing

Winkel. R., of Gdttingon, New Objectives

aud Eye-pieces, 284, 151
Winkel's Demonstration Microscope with

Detachable Foot, 407. 692

— Dissecting Microscope, 251

— Drawing Microscope, 811

— Eye-piece with Screw Micrometer and

Graduated Glass Diaphragm, 536

— Stand No. 1, 24s
No. Id, 406

— Travelling Microscope, 248
Winkler, H., Ferns of Borneo, 64
Winter, H., Effect of Galvanizing on

Strength of Steel Wire, 559
Wiutrebert, P., Involution of Tail in
Alytes obstetricans, 738

— Lateral Line System in Tadpoles of

Alytes and Rana. 614
Wislouch, S. M., Stichoccus bacillaris,
387

— Two Russian Chrysomonads, 499
Witches-brooms on Firs, 83

Wolff, E., Metallic Fog in Fused Salts,

828
Wolff, G., Regeneration in Newts, 614
Wollenweber, H. W., Monograph of

Fusarium, 393

— Study of Hyphomycetes, 79
Wollman, E., Rearing Sterile Flies, 261
Wollnya, a Genus of Bryacese, 654
Woloszynska, J., Algae of the Upper Pruth,

72
Woltereck, R., Sex-determination in

Daphnids, 757
Wonisch, F., Algae of Andritz, 390
Wood, E., Phylogeny of Cerithiidae, 356
Wood, F. E., Habits of Shrew-mole, 352
Wood-destroyiug Fungi, 237
Wood-eating Caterpillars, Digestion, 464
Woodburn, W. L., Spermatogenesis in

certain Hepaticae, 652
Woodlice of Ireland. 469
Woodruff, L. L., Effect of Excretion-pro-
ducts on Rate of Reproduction in
Paramcecium, 767

— Two Thousand Generations of Para-

mcecium, 367
Woodsiea?, Relation to Cyatheaceae and

Polypodiaceae, 486
WooiJwardia radicans in Italy, 649
Worm-nests in Australian Cattle, 626
Woronichin, N., Metachromatic Bodies in

certain Green Algae and Conjugatae,

72

— Physalosporina, a New Genus of

Pyreuornycet.es, 671

Woycicki, Z., Mechanism of Movement in
Gramineae, 374

Wratten and Wainwright's Photomicro-
graphy, 103

Wright, C. H., Ferns of the Falkland
Islands, 650

Wright, Edward Perceval, 61, 506

S'.lf,

INDEX.

Wright, F. E., Transmission of Light
through Transparent Inactive Crystal
Piatt s. with Special Reference to
Observations in Convergent Polarized
Light, 109

Wiilker, G., Japanese Cephalopoda, 015

Wanderer, EL, Development of Alpine
Salamander, 187

"Wiist, P., Influence of Segregation on the
' of Mild Steel, 270

Strength

X

X-iays. Action on Developing Chick, 455

— Castration, 347

— Sterilization. 347

Xylem Elements of the Pteridophyta, 644

Yasui. K., Life-history of Salvinia natans,
645

Yatsu, N., Extra-ovate Experiments on Sea-
urchin Ova. 363

— Polarity of Primary Oocyte of Asterias

forbesii, 472
Yawning in Fishes, 194
Yeast, Presence on Tea, 392
Yeast-cell, Demonstrating the Structure,262
Yeast-cells and Fermentation, 509

— Copulation, 392

Yeast-juice, Alcoholic Ferment, 672
Yeasts and Insects, Symbiosis, 616
Young, W. J., Alcoholic Ferment of Yeast-
juice, 672

Z

Zach, F.. Occurrence of Phagocytosis in
the Root-nodules of Cycads, 60

— Rusts of Cereals. 80

Zacher, F., Position and Classification of

I'rotodermaptera, 620
Zaleski, W., Function of Nucleoproteid,

637
Zalesski, M., Lepidostrobux bertrandi,

62
Zander, E., and another, Studies on Bees,

197
Zaphrcnfi8 delanonei, Evolution, ."> 1
Zarnik, B., Kidney of Gecko, 190

— Life-cycle of Dicrorop.lium lanceatum,

361
Zawarzin. A., Histological Study of the

Innervation of the Heart of Larval

Dragon-fly, 750
Zeiss Apochromat, New, Some New

Diatomic Structure discovered with,

700
Zeiss, C, Directions for using Glass

Micrometers, 538
Zeiss Nernst Lanip, New, 810
Zellner, J., Chemistry of the Higher

Fungi, 396
Zieglwallner, F., Fixation aud Staining of

Glycogen, 821
Zinc Amalgams, 417

— and Aluminium Alloys, 711

— Mae^iesiuin and Cadmium, Ternary

Alloys, 124

— Polymorphism, 123

Zimmerman, H., Germination of Ustilago

Spores, 511
Zimmerman, K. W., Epithelial Cells of

Mammalian Kidney, 609
Zodda, J., Drepanocladus, 655
Zoology, Outlines, 39
Zulueta, A. de, Copepods Parasitic on

Alcyonarians, 202
Zygopttridese, 61

LONDON: PRIMED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED,
f.KEAT WINDMILL STREET, W., AND DUKE STREET, STAMFORD STREET, S.E.

MBL WHOI LIBRARY

III H IflW

G K

s\

& \T* .:V I

. $>:

V*V

^#&*\

*'•-*

W

ws;

\^*i?

." w. > r ■ ^

V" * o

&^&*t -